R&S FSW User Manual
File info: application/pdf · 1532 pages · 39.30MB
R&S FSW User Manual
R&S FSW User Manual - Rohde & Schwarz
This manual applies to the following R&S FSW models with firmware version 4.90 and ... Throughout this manual, products from Rohde & Schwarz are indicated ...
Full PDF Document
If the inline viewer fails, it will open the original document in compatibility mode automatically. You can also open the file directly.
Extracted Text
R&S�FSW Signal and Spectrum Analyzer User Manual
(;��;2)
1173941102 Version 47
This manual applies to the following R&S�FSW models with firmware version 4.90 and later: R&S�FSW8 (1331.5003K08 / 1312.8000K08) R&S�FSW13 (1331.5003K13 / 1312.8000K13) R&S�FSW26 (1331.5003K26 / 1312.8000K26) R&S�FSW43 (1331.5003K43 / 1312.8000K43) R&S�FSW50 (1331.5003K50 / 1312.8000K50) R&S�FSW67 (1331.5003K67 / 1312.8000K67) R&S�FSW85 (1331.5003K85 / 1312.8000K85) In addition to the base unit, the following options are described: R&S�FSW-B4, OCXO (1313.0703.02) R&S�FSW-B10, external generator control (1313.1622.02) R&S�FSW-B13, high-pass filter (1313.0761.02) R&S�FSW-B21, external mixer (1313.1100.XX) R&S�FSW-B24, preamplifier (1313.0832.XX / 1350.7960.XX) R&S�FSW-B25, electronic attenuator (1313.0990.02) R&S�FSW-B90G, frequency extension 90 GHz (1331.7693.02) R&S�FSW-K19 Noise Power Ratio measurement (1331.8283.02) R&S�FSW-K54 EMI measurements (1313.1400.02) R&S�FSW-K544 frequency response correction (1338.2716.02) R&S�FSW-K980 HUMS (1350.6718.xx)
� 2021 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG M�hldorfstr. 15, 81671 M�nchen, Germany Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0 Email: info@rohde-schwarz.com Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com Subject to change � data without tolerance limits is not binding. R&S� is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG. Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
1173.9411.02 | Version 47 | R&S�FSW
Throughout this manual, products from Rohde & Schwarz are indicated without the � symbol, e.g. R&S�FSW is indicated as R&S FSW. R&S MultiView is indicated as MultiView. Products of the R&S�SMW family, e.g. R&S�SMW200A, are indicated as R&S SMW.
R&S�FSW
Contents
Contents
1 Safety and Regulatory Information.................................................... 17
1.1 Safety Instructions......................................................................................................17 1.2 Warning Messages in the Documentation................................................................ 20 1.3 Korea Certification Class B........................................................................................20
2 Documentation Overview.................................................................... 21
2.1 Getting Started Manual...............................................................................................21 2.2 User Manuals and Help...............................................................................................21 2.3 Service Manual............................................................................................................ 21 2.4 Instrument Security Procedures................................................................................22 2.5 Printed Safety Instructions........................................................................................ 22 2.6 Data Sheets and Brochures....................................................................................... 22 2.7 Release Notes and Open-Source Acknowledgment (OSA).....................................22 2.8 Application Notes, Application Cards, White Papers, etc....................................... 22
3 Welcome to the R&S FSW................................................................... 23
4 Getting Started..................................................................................... 24
4.1 Key Features................................................................................................................24 4.2 Preparing for Use........................................................................................................ 25 4.2.1 Lifting and Carrying....................................................................................................... 25 4.2.2 Unpacking and Checking.............................................................................................. 25 4.2.3 Choosing the Operating Site......................................................................................... 25 4.2.4 Setting Up the Product.................................................................................................. 26 4.2.5 Connecting the AC Power.............................................................................................28 4.2.6 Switching the Instrument On and Off............................................................................ 28 4.2.7 Connecting to LAN........................................................................................................ 29 4.2.8 Connecting a Keyboard.................................................................................................30 4.2.9 Connecting an External Monitor....................................................................................31 4.2.10 Windows Operating System..........................................................................................32 4.2.11 Logging On....................................................................................................................34 4.2.12 Checking the Supplied Options.....................................................................................36 4.2.13 Performing a Self-Alignment......................................................................................... 36
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
3
R&S�FSW
Contents
4.2.14 Considerations for Test Setup....................................................................................... 37 4.2.15 Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode.............................................................. 37
4.3 Instrument Tour........................................................................................................... 39 4.3.1 Front Panel View........................................................................................................... 39 4.3.2 Rear Panel View............................................................................................................49
4.4 Trying Out the Instrument.......................................................................................... 58 4.4.1 Measuring a Basic Signal..............................................................................................59 4.4.2 Displaying a Spectrogram............................................................................................. 61 4.4.3 Activating Additional Measurement Channels...............................................................63 4.4.4 Performing Sequential Measurements..........................................................................66 4.4.5 Setting and Moving a Marker........................................................................................ 67 4.4.6 Displaying a Marker Peak List.......................................................................................68 4.4.7 Zooming into the Display...............................................................................................69 4.4.8 Zooming into the Display Permanently......................................................................... 72 4.4.9 Saving Settings............................................................................................................. 75 4.4.10 Printing and Saving Results.......................................................................................... 76
4.5 Operating the Instrument........................................................................................... 77 4.5.1 Understanding the Display Information......................................................................... 78 4.5.2 Accessing the Functionality...........................................................................................86 4.5.3 Changing the Focus...................................................................................................... 91 4.5.4 Entering Data................................................................................................................ 92 4.5.5 Touchscreen Gestures.................................................................................................. 95 4.5.6 Displaying Results.........................................................................................................98 4.5.7 Getting Help................................................................................................................ 105
5 Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes...... 107
5.1 Available Applications.............................................................................................. 108 5.2 R&S MultiView........................................................................................................... 116 5.3 Selecting the Operating Mode and Applications....................................................117 5.4 Running a Sequence of Measurements.................................................................. 119 5.4.1 The Sequencer Concept..............................................................................................119 5.4.2 Sequencer Settings.....................................................................................................121 5.4.3 How to Set Up the Sequencer.....................................................................................122
6 Measurements and Results...............................................................124
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
4
R&S�FSW
Contents
6.1 Basic Measurements................................................................................................ 125 6.1.1 Basic Measurement Types..........................................................................................126 6.1.2 How to Perform a Basic Sweep Measurement........................................................... 126 6.1.3 Measurement Examples - Measuring a Sinusoidal Signal..........................................127 6.1.4 Measurement Example � Measuring Levels at Low S/N Ratios................................. 130 6.1.5 Measurement Examples - Measuring Signal Spectra with Multiple Signals............... 133 6.1.6 Measurement Examples in Zero Span........................................................................140
6.2 Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement.................. 145 6.2.1 About Channel Power Measurements........................................................................ 146 6.2.2 Channel Power Results...............................................................................................146 6.2.3 Channel Power Basics................................................................................................ 149 6.2.4 Channel Power Configuration..................................................................................... 162 6.2.5 MSR ACLR Configuration........................................................................................... 171 6.2.6 How to Perform Channel Power Measurements.........................................................188 6.2.7 Measurement Examples............................................................................................. 193 6.2.8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement.....................................................199 6.2.9 Reference: Predefined CP/ACLR Standards.............................................................. 200 6.2.10 Reference: Predefined ACLR User Standard XML Files............................................ 201
6.3 Carrier-to-Noise Measurements...............................................................................202 6.3.1 About the Measurement..............................................................................................202 6.3.2 Carrier-to-Noise Results..............................................................................................203 6.3.3 Carrier-to-Noise Configuration.................................................................................... 204 6.3.4 How to Determine the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio............................................................. 206
6.4 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW)............................................................ 206 6.4.1 About the Measurement..............................................................................................206 6.4.2 OBW Results...............................................................................................................208 6.4.3 OBW Configuration..................................................................................................... 209 6.4.4 How to Determine the Occupied Bandwidth................................................................211 6.4.5 Measurement Example............................................................................................... 212
6.5 Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement................................................................. 212 6.5.1 About Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurements........................................................ 213 6.5.2 NPR Basics................................................................................................................. 213 6.5.3 NPR Results................................................................................................................215
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
5
R&S�FSW
Contents
6.5.4 NPR Configuration...................................................................................................... 216 6.5.5 Generator Setup..........................................................................................................221 6.5.6 Generator Frequency Coupling...................................................................................225 6.5.7 How to Perform NPR Measurements..........................................................................227 6.5.8 Measurement Example............................................................................................... 228
6.6 Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement..................................................... 229 6.6.1 About the Measurement..............................................................................................230 6.6.2 Typical Applications.....................................................................................................230 6.6.3 SEM Results............................................................................................................... 230 6.6.4 SEM Basics.................................................................................................................233 6.6.5 SEM Configuration...................................................................................................... 244 6.6.6 How to Perform a Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement........................................261 6.6.7 Measurement Example: Multi-SEM Measurement......................................................266 6.6.8 Reference: SEM File Descriptions.............................................................................. 267
6.7 Spurious Emissions Measurement......................................................................... 274 6.7.1 About the Measurement..............................................................................................274 6.7.2 Spurious Emissions Measurement Results.................................................................275 6.7.3 Spurious Emissions Basics......................................................................................... 276 6.7.4 Spurious Emissions Measurement Configuration....................................................... 278 6.7.5 How to Perform a Spurious Emissions Measurement.................................................284 6.7.6 Reference: ASCII Export File Format (Spurious)........................................................ 286
6.8 Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF).................................................................. 287 6.8.1 About the Measurements............................................................................................ 287 6.8.2 Typical Applications.....................................................................................................288 6.8.3 APD and CCDF Results..............................................................................................288 6.8.4 APD and CCDF Basics - Gated Triggering................................................................. 290 6.8.5 APD and CCDF Configuration.................................................................................... 291 6.8.6 How to Perform an APD or CCDF Measurement........................................................297 6.8.7 Examples.................................................................................................................... 298 6.8.8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement.....................................................301
6.9 Time Domain Power Measurement..........................................................................301 6.9.1 About the Measurement..............................................................................................301 6.9.2 Time Domain Power Results.......................................................................................301
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
6
R&S�FSW
Contents
6.9.3 Time Domain Power Basics - Range Definition Using Limit Lines.............................. 302 6.9.4 Time Domain Power Configuration............................................................................. 303 6.9.5 How to Measure Powers in the Time Domain............................................................. 304 6.9.6 Measurement Example............................................................................................... 305 6.10 Harmonic Distortion Measurement......................................................................... 306 6.10.1 About the Measurement..............................................................................................306 6.10.2 Harmonic Distortion Basics......................................................................................... 307 6.10.3 Harmonic Distortion Results........................................................................................309 6.10.4 Harmonic Distortion Configuration.............................................................................. 310 6.10.5 How to Determine the Harmonic Distortion.................................................................312 6.11 Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement...............................................................312 6.11.1 About the TOI Measurement....................................................................................... 313 6.11.2 TOI Basics...................................................................................................................313 6.11.3 TOI Results................................................................................................................. 317 6.11.4 TOI Configuration........................................................................................................ 318 6.11.5 How to Determine the Third Order Intercept............................................................... 319 6.11.6 Measurement Example � Measuring the R&S FSW's Intrinsic Intermodulation......... 320 6.12 AM Modulation Depth Measurement....................................................................... 322 6.12.1 About the Measurement..............................................................................................322 6.12.2 AM Modulation Depth Results.....................................................................................323 6.12.3 AM Modulation Depth Configuration........................................................................... 323 6.12.4 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement.....................................................324 6.12.5 How to Determine the AM Modulation Depth..............................................................325 6.13 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement.................................................325 6.13.1 About the EMI Measurement...................................................................................... 326 6.13.2 EMI Measurement Results..........................................................................................326 6.13.3 EMI Measurement Basics........................................................................................... 328 6.13.4 EMI Measurement Configuration................................................................................ 336 6.13.5 EMI Result Analysis.................................................................................................... 345 6.13.6 How to Perform EMI Measurements........................................................................... 346 6.13.7 Measurement Example: Measuring Radio Frequency Interference............................348 6.13.8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting EMI Measurements................................................. 350
7 Common Measurement Settings...................................................... 351
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
7
R&S�FSW
Contents
7.1 Configuration Overview............................................................................................351 7.2 Data Input and Output.............................................................................................. 353 7.2.1 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output....................................................... 353 7.2.2 Input Source Settings..................................................................................................361 7.2.3 Power Sensors............................................................................................................368 7.2.4 Optional External Generator Control...........................................................................377 7.2.5 Optional External Mixers............................................................................................. 405 7.2.6 Output Settings........................................................................................................... 434 7.2.7 Trigger Input/Output Settings...................................................................................... 436 7.2.8 How to Output a Trigger Signal................................................................................... 438 7.3 Frequency and Span Configuration........................................................................ 439 7.3.1 Impact of the Frequency and Span Settings............................................................... 439 7.3.2 Frequency and Span Settings.....................................................................................441 7.3.3 Keeping the Center Frequency Stable - Signal Tracking............................................ 445 7.3.4 How To Define the Frequency Range......................................................................... 446 7.3.5 How to Move the Center Frequency through the Frequency Range...........................447 7.4 Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration............................................................ 447 7.4.1 Impact of the Vertical Axis Settings.............................................................................448 7.4.2 Amplitude Settings...................................................................................................... 450 7.4.3 Scaling the Y-Axis....................................................................................................... 456 7.4.4 How to Optimize the Amplitude Display...................................................................... 457 7.5 Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration...........................................................458 7.5.1 Impact of the Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Settings...................................................458 7.5.2 Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Settings........................................................................ 464 7.5.3 Reference: List of Available RRC and Channel Filters................................................473 7.6 Trigger and Gate Configuration............................................................................... 475 7.6.1 Triggering.................................................................................................................... 476 7.6.2 Gating..........................................................................................................................487 7.7 Adjusting Settings Automatically............................................................................497
8 Common Analysis and Display Functions...................................... 501
8.1 Result Display Configuration...................................................................................501 8.1.1 Basic Evaluation Methods...........................................................................................501 8.1.2 Laying out the Result Display with the SmartGrid.......................................................504
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
8
R&S�FSW
Contents
8.2 Zoomed Displays...................................................................................................... 508 8.2.1 Single Zoom Versus Multiple Zoom............................................................................ 508 8.2.2 Zoom Functions.......................................................................................................... 510 8.2.3 How to Zoom Into a Diagram...................................................................................... 512
8.3 Marker Usage.............................................................................................................515 8.3.1 Basics on Markers.......................................................................................................515 8.3.2 Marker Settings........................................................................................................... 518 8.3.3 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions.................................................... 524 8.3.4 Marker (Measurement) Functions............................................................................... 532 8.3.5 How to Work With Markers..........................................................................................553 8.3.6 Measurement Example: Measuring Harmonics Using Marker Functions................... 556
8.4 Display and Limit Lines............................................................................................ 557 8.4.1 Display Lines...............................................................................................................558 8.4.2 Limit Lines................................................................................................................... 560
8.5 Trace Configuration.................................................................................................. 576 8.5.1 Standard Traces..........................................................................................................576 8.5.2 Spectrograms..............................................................................................................590 8.5.3 Trace Math.................................................................................................................. 608
8.6 Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation........................... 610 8.6.1 Displaying a Reference Trace - Importing Trace Data................................................ 611 8.6.2 Trace/Data Ex/Import.................................................................................................. 612 8.6.3 How to Import Traces.................................................................................................. 617 8.6.4 How to Export Trace Data and Numerical Results......................................................617 8.6.5 How to Export a Peak List...........................................................................................618 8.6.6 Reference: ASCII File Export Format..........................................................................619
8.7 Event-based Actions.................................................................................................622 8.7.1 Managing Rules.......................................................................................................... 623 8.7.2 Defining Rules.............................................................................................................624 8.7.3 Debugging Rules with the EBA-Journal...................................................................... 631 8.7.4 Reference: Overview of Available Result-Events and State-Events........................... 632
9 Optimizing Measurements................................................................ 633
9.1 Minimizing the Measurement Duration................................................................... 633 9.2 Improving Averaging Results.................................................................................. 633
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
9
R&S�FSW
Contents
10 Data Management.............................................................................. 635
10.1 Restoring the Default Instrument Configuration (Preset)..................................... 635 10.2 Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode........................................................636 10.3 Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data.................... 638 10.3.1 Quick Save/Quick Recall.............................................................................................640 10.3.2 Configurable Storage and Recall................................................................................ 642 10.3.3 How to Save and Load Instrument Settings................................................................648 10.4 Import/Export Functions.......................................................................................... 650 10.5 Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings................ 654 10.5.1 Print and Screenshot Settings.....................................................................................654 10.5.2 How to Store or Print Screenshots of the Display....................................................... 665 10.5.3 Example for Storing Multiple Measurement Results to a PDF File............................. 667 10.6 Working with Test Reports....................................................................................... 669 10.6.1 Designing a Test Report Template.............................................................................. 670 10.6.2 Managing Templates................................................................................................... 679 10.6.3 Creating Datasets....................................................................................................... 680 10.6.4 Creating a Test Report................................................................................................ 681 10.6.5 How to Create a Test Report.......................................................................................683
11 General Instrument Setup................................................................. 685
11.1 Alignment...................................................................................................................685 11.1.1 Basics on Alignment....................................................................................................685 11.1.2 Alignment Settings...................................................................................................... 687 11.1.3 How to Perform a Self-Test......................................................................................... 691 11.1.4 How to Align the Instrument........................................................................................ 692 11.1.5 How to Align the Touchscreen.....................................................................................692
11.2 Display Settings........................................................................................................ 693 11.2.1 Display Settings.......................................................................................................... 693 11.2.2 How to Configure the Colors for Display and Printing.................................................704 11.2.3 How to Work with the Soft Front Panels......................................................................705
11.3 Application Starter.................................................................................................... 706 11.3.1 Application Starter Functions...................................................................................... 707 11.3.2 How to Work With the Application Starter................................................................... 711
11.4 Transducers...............................................................................................................712
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
10
R&S�FSW
Contents
11.4.1 Basics on Transducer Factors.....................................................................................712 11.4.2 Transducer Settings.................................................................................................... 714 11.4.3 Reference: Transducer Factor File Format................................................................. 720 11.4.4 How to Configure the Transducer............................................................................... 721
11.5 Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544)............................................... 725 11.5.1 Basics on Frequency Response Correction................................................................725 11.5.2 User-defined Frequency Response Correction Settings.............................................728
11.6 Reference Frequency Settings................................................................................ 737 11.7 System Configuration Settings................................................................................741 11.7.1 Hardware Information..................................................................................................741 11.7.2 Information on Versions and Options.......................................................................... 742 11.7.3 System Messages.......................................................................................................743 11.7.4 Firmware Updates.......................................................................................................744 11.7.5 General Configuration Settings................................................................................... 746 11.7.6 Signal Generator Settings........................................................................................... 748 11.8 Service Functions..................................................................................................... 750 11.8.1 R&S Support Information............................................................................................ 750 11.8.2 Self-test Settings and Results..................................................................................... 752 11.8.3 Calibration Signal Display........................................................................................... 753 11.8.4 Service Functions........................................................................................................755 11.8.5 Hardware Diagnostics................................................................................................. 757 11.9 Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration........................................... 758 11.9.1 General Parameter Coupling...................................................................................... 758 11.9.2 User-Defined Parameter Coupling.............................................................................. 761 11.9.3 Generator Coupling.....................................................................................................765 11.9.4 How to Synchronize Parameters.................................................................................767 11.9.5 Example for a User-Defined Parameter Coupling.......................................................769
12 Network and Remote Operation....................................................... 772
12.1 Remote Control Basics.............................................................................................772 12.1.1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols................................................................... 772 12.1.2 SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments).....................................781 12.1.3 VISA Libraries............................................................................................................. 781 12.1.4 Messages....................................................................................................................782
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
11
R&S�FSW
Contents
12.1.5 SCPI Command Structure...........................................................................................783 12.1.6 Command Sequence and Synchronization.................................................................791 12.1.7 Status Reporting System............................................................................................ 793 12.1.8 General Programming Recommendations..................................................................810
12.2 GPIB Languages........................................................................................................811 12.3 The IECWIN Tool........................................................................................................813 12.4 Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts............................................... 814 12.4.1 The Context-Sensitive SCPI Command Menu............................................................815 12.4.2 The SCPI Recorder.....................................................................................................817 12.4.3 How to Determine the Required SCPI Command.......................................................821 12.4.4 How to Create and Export SCPI Scripts..................................................................... 822 12.4.5 Example for a Recorded SCPI Script..........................................................................824 12.5 Network and Remote Control Settings................................................................... 825 12.5.1 General Network Settings........................................................................................... 826 12.5.2 GPIB Settings..............................................................................................................828 12.5.3 Compatibility Settings..................................................................................................831 12.5.4 LAN Settings............................................................................................................... 835 12.5.5 HUMS Settings............................................................................................................836 12.5.6 Remote Errors.............................................................................................................843 12.5.7 Returning to Manual Mode ("Local")........................................................................... 844 12.6 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control...................................................... 845 12.6.1 How to Configure a Network....................................................................................... 845 12.6.2 How to Operate the Instrument Without a Network.....................................................852 12.6.3 How to Log on to the Network.....................................................................................852 12.6.4 How to Share Directories (only with Microsoft Networks)........................................... 855 12.6.5 How to Control the R&S FSW via the Web Browser Interface.................................... 855 12.6.6 How to Deactivate the Web Browser Interface............................................................857 12.6.7 How to Set Up Remote Desktop................................................................................. 858 12.6.8 How to Start a Remote Control Session from a PC.................................................... 864 12.6.9 How to Return to Manual Operation............................................................................865
13 Remote Commands........................................................................... 866
13.1 Conventions Used in SCPI Command Descriptions..............................................866 13.2 Common Suffixes......................................................................................................867
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
12
R&S�FSW
Contents
13.3 Common Commands................................................................................................ 867 13.4 Selecting the Operating Mode and Application..................................................... 872 13.4.1 Selecting the Mode and Applications.......................................................................... 872 13.4.2 Performing a Sequence of Measurements..................................................................878 13.4.3 Programming Example: Performing a Sequence of Measurements........................... 880 13.5 Configuring and Performing Measurements.......................................................... 882 13.5.1 Performing Measurements..........................................................................................883 13.5.2 Configuring Power Measurements..............................................................................886 13.5.3 Measuring the Channel Power and ACLR.................................................................. 890 13.5.4 Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio......................................................................... 949 13.5.5 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth........................................................................... 950 13.5.6 Remote Commands for Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurements............................ 952 13.5.7 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask....................................................................968 13.5.8 Measuring Spurious Emissions.................................................................................1005 13.5.9 Analyzing Statistics (APD, CCDF)............................................................................ 1020 13.5.10 Measuring the Time Domain Power.......................................................................... 1030 13.5.11 Measuring the Harmonic Distortion...........................................................................1040 13.5.12 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point................................................................1044 13.5.13 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth........................................................................1047 13.5.14 Remote Commands for EMI Measurements.............................................................1049 13.5.15 List Evaluations......................................................................................................... 1058 13.5.16 Measuring the Pulse Power...................................................................................... 1062 13.6 Configuring the Result Display..............................................................................1067 13.6.1 General Window Commands.................................................................................... 1067 13.6.2 Working with Windows in the Display........................................................................1068 13.6.3 Examples: Configuring the Result Display................................................................ 1075 13.7 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters...............................................................1077 13.7.1 Configuring the Data Input and Output..................................................................... 1078 13.7.2 Defining the Frequency and Span............................................................................. 1131 13.7.3 Configuring Bandwidth and Sweep Settings............................................................. 1138 13.7.4 Configuring the Vertical Axis (Amplitude, Scaling).................................................... 1146 13.7.5 Configuring Triggered and Gated Measurements..................................................... 1156 13.7.6 Adjusting Settings Automatically............................................................................... 1171
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
13
R&S�FSW
Contents
13.8 Analyzing Measurements (Basics)........................................................................ 1174 13.8.1 Zooming into the Display........................................................................................... 1174 13.8.2 Configuring the Trace Display and Retrieving Trace Data........................................ 1178 13.8.3 Working with Markers................................................................................................1204 13.8.4 Configuring Display Lines......................................................................................... 1264 13.8.5 Defining Limit Checks............................................................................................... 1267
13.9 Managing Settings and Results.............................................................................1283 13.9.1 General Data Storage and Loading Commands....................................................... 1284 13.9.2 Selecting the Items to Store...................................................................................... 1290 13.9.3 Storing and Loading Instrument Settings.................................................................. 1293 13.9.4 Storing or Printing Screenshots................................................................................ 1298 13.9.5 Storing Measurement Results...................................................................................1310 13.9.6 Test Reports.............................................................................................................. 1312 13.9.7 Examples: Managing Data........................................................................................ 1320 13.10 Configuring the R&S FSW......................................................................................1324 13.10.1 Configuring the Reference Frequency...................................................................... 1324 13.10.2 Calibration and Checks............................................................................................. 1328 13.10.3 Working with Transducers.........................................................................................1333 13.10.4 Compensating for Frequency Response Using Touchstone files (R&S FSW-K544) 1338 13.10.5 Customizing the Screen Layout................................................................................ 1356 13.10.6 Remote Commands for Language Settings.............................................................. 1363 13.10.7 Configuring the Network and Remote Control.......................................................... 1364 13.10.8 Configuring HUMS.................................................................................................... 1368 13.10.9 Checking the System Configuration..........................................................................1374 13.10.10 Signal Generator Control Commands....................................................................... 1383 13.10.11 Using Service Functions........................................................................................... 1384 13.10.12 Remote Commands for Synchronizing Parameters..................................................1387 13.10.13 Configuring the Application Starter........................................................................... 1403 13.11 Using the Status Register...................................................................................... 1406 13.11.1 General Status Register Commands........................................................................ 1407 13.11.2 Reading Out the CONDition Part.............................................................................. 1407 13.11.3 Reading Out the EVENt Part.....................................................................................1408 13.11.4 Controlling the ENABle Part......................................................................................1408
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
14
R&S�FSW
Contents
13.11.5 Controlling the Negative Transition Part....................................................................1409 13.11.6 Controlling the Positive Transition Part..................................................................... 1410
13.12 Commands for Remote Instrument Operation..................................................... 1410 13.13 Emulating Other Instruments' Commands........................................................... 1411 13.13.1 Setting up Instrument Emulation............................................................................... 1411 13.13.2 Reference: GPIB Commands of Emulated HP Models.............................................1415 13.13.3 Reference: Command Set of Emulated PSA Models................................................1443 13.13.4 Reference: Command Set of Emulated PXA Models................................................1447 13.13.5 Command Set for Analog Demodulation for Emulated PXA Models........................ 1450 13.13.6 Command Set for Vector Signal Analysis (VSA) for Emulated R&S FSE Instruments
.................................................................................................................................. 1450 13.14 Deprecated Commands.......................................................................................... 1451 13.15 Programming Examples......................................................................................... 1455 13.15.1 Programming Example: Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep............................... 1455 13.15.2 Service Request........................................................................................................1458
14 Troubleshooting............................................................................... 1467
14.1 Error Information.....................................................................................................1467 14.2 Error Messages in Remote Control Mode.............................................................1469 14.3 Troubleshooting Remote Operation......................................................................1470 14.4 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Hints.................................................................. 1471 14.5 System Recovery.................................................................................................... 1473 14.6 Collecting Information for Support........................................................................1473 14.7 Contacting Customer Support...............................................................................1475
15 Transporting..................................................................................... 1477
16 Maintenance, Storage and Disposal...............................................1478
16.1 Cleaning................................................................................................................... 1478 16.2 Storage.....................................................................................................................1478 16.3 Disposal................................................................................................................... 1478
List of Commands (base unit).........................................................1479
Index..................................................................................................1505
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
15
R&S�FSW
Contents
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
16
R&S�FSW
Safety and Regulatory Information Safety Instructions
1 Safety and Regulatory Information
The product documentation helps you use the product safely and efficiently. Follow the instructions provided here and in the Chapter 1.1, "Safety Instructions", on page 17.
Intended use
The product is intended for the development, production and verification of electronic components and devices in industrial, administrative, and laboratory environments. Use the product only for its designated purpose. Observe the operating conditions and performance limits stated in the data sheet.
Where do I find safety information?
Safety information is part of the product documentation. It warns you of potential dangers and gives instructions on how to prevent personal injury or damage caused by dangerous situations. Safety information is provided as follows: In Chapter 1.1, "Safety Instructions", on page 17. The same information is provi-
ded in many languages as printed "Safety Instructions". The printed "Safety Instructions" are delivered with the product. Throughout the documentation, safety instructions are provided when you need to take care during setup or operation.
1.1 Safety Instructions
Products from the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies are manufactured according to the highest technical standards. To use the products safely, follow the instructions provided here and in the product documentation. Keep the product documentation nearby and offer it to other users.
Use the product only for its intended use and within its performance limits. Intended use and limits are described in the product documentation such as the data sheet, manuals and the printed safety instructions. If you are unsure about the appropriate use, contact Rohde & Schwarz customer service.
Using the product requires specialists or specially trained personnel. These users also need sound knowledge of at least one of the languages in which the user interfaces and the product documentation are available.
If any part of the product is damaged or broken, stop using the product. Never open the casing of the product. Only service personnel authorized by Rohde & Schwarz are allowed to repair the product. Contact Rohde & Schwarz customer service at http:// www.customersupport.rohde-schwarz.com.
Lifting and carrying the product
The product is heavy. Do not move or carry the product by yourself. A single person can only carry a maximum of 18 kg safely depending on age, gender and physical condition. Look up the maximum weight in the data sheet. Use the product handles to
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
17
R&S�FSW
Safety and Regulatory Information
Safety Instructions
move or carry the product. Do not lift by the accessories mounted on the product. Accessories are not designed to carry the weight of the product.
To move the product safely, you can use lifting or transporting equipment such as lift trucks and forklifts. Follow the instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer.
Choosing the operating site
Only use the product indoors. The product casing is not waterproof. Water that enters can electrically connect the casing with live parts, which can lead to electric shock, serious personal injury or death if you touch the casing. If Rohde & Schwarz provides a carrying bag designed for your product, you can use the product outdoors.
Unless otherwise specified, you can operate the product up to an altitude of 2000 m above sea level. The product is suitable for pollution degree 2 environments where nonconductive contamination can occur. For more information on environmental conditions such as ambient temperature and humidity, see the data sheet.
Setting up the product
Always place the product on a stable, flat and level surface with the bottom of the product facing down. If the product is designed for different positions, secure the product so that it cannot fall over.
If the product has foldable feet, always fold the feet completely in or out to ensure stability. The feet can collapse if they are not folded out completely or if the product is moved without lifting it. The foldable feet are designed to carry the weight of the product, but not an extra load.
If stacking is possible, keep in mind that a stack of products can fall over and cause injury.
If you mount products in a rack, ensure that the rack has sufficient load capacity and stability. Observe the specifications of the rack manufacturer. Always install the products from the bottom shelf to the top shelf so that the rack stands securely. Secure the product so that it cannot fall off the rack.
Connecting to power
The product is an overvoltage category II product and has to be connected to a fixed installation used to supply energy-consuming equipment such as household appliances and similar loads. Be aware that electrically powered products have risks, such as electric shock, fire, personal injury or even death.
Take the following measures for your safety: Before switching on the product, ensure that the voltage and frequency indicated
on the product match the available power source. If the power adapter does not adjust automatically, set the correct value and check the rating of the fuse. If a product has an exchangeable fuse, its type and characteristics are indicated next to the fuse holder. Before changing the fuse, switch off the instrument and disconnect it from the power source. How to change the fuse is described in the product documentation.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
18
R&S�FSW
Safety and Regulatory Information Safety Instructions
Only use the power cable delivered with the product. It complies with country-specific safety requirements. Only insert the plug into an outlet with protective conductor terminal.
Only use intact cables and route them carefully so that they cannot be damaged. Check the power cables regularly to ensure that they are undamaged. Also ensure that nobody can trip over loose cables.
If the product needs an external power supply, use the power supply that is delivered with the product or that is recommended in the product documentation or a power supply that conforms to the country-specific regulations.
Only connect the product to a power source with a fuse protection of maximum 20 A.
Ensure that you can disconnect the product from the power source at any time. Pull the power plug to disconnect the product. The power plug must be easily accessible. If the product is integrated into a system that does not meet these requirements, provide an easily accessible circuit breaker at the system level.
Cleaning the product
Use a dry, lint-free cloth to clean the product. When cleaning, keep in mind that the casing is not waterproof. Do not use liquid cleaning agents.
Meaning of safety labels
Safety labels on the product warn against potential hazards.
Potential hazard Read the product documentation to avoid personal injury or product damage.
Heavy product Be careful when lifting, moving or carrying the product. Carrying the product requires at least two people or transport equipment.
Electrical hazard Indicates live parts. Risk of electric shock, fire, personal injury or even death.
Hot surface Do not touch. Risk of skin burns. Risk of fire.
Protective conductor terminal Connect this terminal to a grounded external conductor or to protective ground. This protects you against electric shock should an electric problem occur.
Connecting headphones
Take the following measures to prevent hearing damage. Before using headphones, check the volume and reduce it if necessary. If you monitor varying signal levels, take off the headphones and wait until the signal has settled. Then adjust the volume.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
19
R&S�FSW
Safety and Regulatory Information Korea Certification Class B
1.2 Warning Messages in the Documentation
A warning message points out a risk or danger that you need to be aware of. The signal word indicates the severity of the safety hazard and how likely it will occur if you do not follow the safety precautions.
WARNING Potentially hazardous situation. Could result in death or serious injury if not avoided.
CAUTION Potentially hazardous situation. Could result in minor or moderate injury if not avoided.
NOTICE Potential risks of damage. Could result in damage to the supported product or to other property.
1.3 Korea Certification Class B
(B) , .
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
20
R&S�FSW
Documentation Overview Service Manual
2 Documentation Overview
This section provides an overview of the R&S FSW user documentation. Unless specified otherwise, you find the documents on the R&S FSW product page at: www.rohde-schwarz.com/manual/FSW
2.1 Getting Started Manual
Introduces the R&S FSW and describes how to set up and start working with the product. Includes basic operations, typical measurement examples, and general information, e.g. safety instructions, etc.
A printed version is delivered with the instrument. A PDF version is available for download on the Internet.
2.2 User Manuals and Help
Separate user manuals are provided for the base unit and the firmware applications:
Base unit manual Contains the description of all instrument modes and functions. It also provides an introduction to remote control, a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples, and information on maintenance, instrument interfaces and error messages. Includes the contents of the getting started manual.
Firmware application manual Contains the description of the specific functions of a firmware application, including remote control commands. Basic information on operating the R&S FSW is not included.
The contents of the user manuals are available as help in the R&S FSW. The help offers quick, context-sensitive access to the complete information for the base unit and the firmware applications.
All user manuals are also available for download or for immediate display on the Internet.
2.3 Service Manual
Describes the performance test for checking the rated specifications, module replacement and repair, firmware update, troubleshooting and fault elimination, and contains mechanical drawings and spare part lists.
The service manual is available for registered users on the global Rohde & Schwarz information system (GLORIS):
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
21
R&S�FSW
Documentation Overview Application Notes, Application Cards, White Papers, etc.
https://gloris.rohde-schwarz.com
2.4 Instrument Security Procedures
Deals with security issues when working with the R&S FSW in secure areas. It is available for download on the Internet.
2.5 Printed Safety Instructions
Provides safety information in many languages. The printed document is delivered with the product.
2.6 Data Sheets and Brochures
The data sheet contains the technical specifications of the R&S FSW. It also lists the firmware applications and their order numbers, and optional accessories. The brochure provides an overview of the instrument and deals with the specific characteristics. See www.rohde-schwarz.com/brochure-datasheet/FSW
2.7 Release Notes and Open-Source Acknowledgment (OSA)
The release notes list new features, improvements and known issues of the current firmware version, and describe the firmware installation.
The open-source acknowledgment document provides verbatim license texts of the used open source software.
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/firmware/FSW
2.8 Application Notes, Application Cards, White Papers, etc.
These documents deal with special applications or background information on particular topics. See www.rohde-schwarz.com/application/FSW
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
22
R&S�FSW
Welcome to the R&S FSW
3 Welcome to the R&S FSW
The R&S FSW is a new high-performance Rohde & Schwarz signal and spectrum analyzer developed to meet demanding customer requirements. Offering low phase noise, wide analysis bandwidth and straightforward and intuitive operation, the analyzer makes measurements fast and easy.
This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the instrument provides, including remote control operation. The latest version is available for download at the product homepage (http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/product/FSW.html).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
23
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Key Features
4 Getting Started
Note: the following chapters are identical to those in the printed R&S FSW Getting Started manual.
Key Features...........................................................................................................24 Preparing for Use.................................................................................................... 25 Instrument Tour....................................................................................................... 39 Trying Out the Instrument....................................................................................... 58 Operating the Instrument........................................................................................ 77
4.1 Key Features
The R&S FSW Signal and Spectrum Analyzer sets standards in RF performance and usability. The R&S FSW provides the following outstanding key features:
Unmatched phase noise Excellent dynamic range Up to 8.3 GHz analysis bandwidth 800 MHz real-time analysis bandwidth with 2.4 million FFT/s, 0.46 s POI and
500 MHz I/Q data streaming interface High sensitivity even at low frequencies High measurement rates and fast sweep times with sweep rates up to 1000
sweeps per second Multiple measurement applications can be run and displayed in parallel Easy and intuitive to operate via the large touchscreen user interface and opti-
mized user guidance SCPI recorder simplifies code generation Integrated support of R&S�NRP-Zxx power sensors
For a detailed specification refer to the data sheet.
Due to these features the R&S FSW is ideal for various measurement tasks, for instance: Measuring oscillators for radar and communications applications due to the low
phase noise Identifying and analyzing spurious emissions due to the large spurious-free
dynamic range and low DANL Measuring harmonics due to integrated highpass filters Measuring wide-band modulated or frequency-agile signals due to the large band-
width Detecting errors caused by interaction between signals by measuring multiple
standards simultaneously
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
24
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Preparing for Use
4.2 Preparing for Use
Here, you can find basic information about setting up the instrument for the first time.
Lifting and Carrying................................................................................................. 25 Unpacking and Checking........................................................................................ 25 Choosing the Operating Site................................................................................... 25 Setting Up the Product............................................................................................ 26 Connecting the AC Power.......................................................................................28 Switching the Instrument On and Off...................................................................... 28 Connecting to LAN..................................................................................................29 Connecting a Keyboard...........................................................................................30 Connecting an External Monitor..............................................................................31 Windows Operating System....................................................................................32 Logging On..............................................................................................................34 Checking the Supplied Options...............................................................................36 Performing a Self-Alignment................................................................................... 36 Considerations for Test Setup................................................................................. 37 Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode........................................................ 37
4.2.1 Lifting and Carrying
The carrying handles are designed to lift or carry the instrument. Do not apply excessive external force to the handles. See "Lifting and carrying the product" on page 17.
4.2.2 Unpacking and Checking
1. Unpack the R&S FSW carefully. 2. Retain the original packing material. Use it when transporting or shipping the
R&S FSW later. 3. Using the delivery notes, check the equipment for completeness. 4. Check the equipment for damage.
If the delivery is incomplete or equipment is damaged, contact Rohde & Schwarz.
4.2.3 Choosing the Operating Site
Specific operating conditions ensure proper operation and avoid damage to the product and connected devices. For information on environmental conditions such as ambient temperature and humidity, see the data sheet.
See also "Choosing the operating site" on page 18.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
25
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Preparing for Use
Electromagnetic compatibility classes
The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) class indicates where you can operate the product. The EMC class of the product is given in the data sheet under "General data".
Class B equipment is suitable for use in:
� Residential environments
� Environments that are directly connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings
Class A equipment is intended for use in industrial environments. It can cause radio disturbances in residential environments due to possible conducted and radiated disturbances. It is therefore not suitable for class B environments. If class A equipment causes radio disturbances, take appropriate measures to eliminate them.
4.2.4 Setting Up the Product
See also: "Setting up the product" on page 18 "Intended use" on page 17
<xref>
4.2.4.1 Placing the Product on a Bench Top
To place the product on a bench top
1. Place the product on a stable, flat and level surface. Ensure that the surface can support the weight of the product. For information on the weight, see the data sheet.
2. WARNING! A stack of products can fall over and cause injury. Never stack more than two products. Otherwise, mount them in a rack. Stack as follows:
All products must have the same dimensions (width and length). Do not exceed a total load of 50 kg placed on the product at the bottom of the
stack.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
26
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Preparing for Use
Left = Stacked correctly Right = Stacked incorrectly, too many products
3. NOTICE! Overheating can damage the product. Prevent overheating as follows: Keep a minimum distance of 10 cm between the fan openings of the product and any object in the vicinity. Do not place the product next to heat-generating equipment such as radiators or other products.
4.2.4.2 Mounting the R&S FSW in a Rack
To prepare the rack 1. Observe the requirements and instructions in "Setting up the product" on page 18. 2. NOTICE! Insufficient airflow can cause overheating and damage the product.
Design and implement an efficient ventilation concept for the rack.
To mount the R&S FSW in a rack 1. Use an adapter kit to prepare the R&S FSW for rack mounting.
a) Order the rack adapter kit designed for the R&S FSW. For the order number, see the data sheet.
b) Mount the adapter kit. Follow the assembly instructions provided with the adapter kit.
2. Lift the R&S FSW to shelf height. 3. Grab the handles and push the R&S FSW onto the shelf until the rack brackets fit
closely to the rack. 4. Tighten all screws in the rack brackets with a tightening torque of 1.2 Nm to secure
the R&S FSW in the rack.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
27
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Preparing for Use
To unmount the R&S FSW from a rack 1. Loosen the screws at the rack brackets. 2. Remove the R&S FSW from the rack. 3. If placing the R&S FSW on a bench top again, unmount the adapter kit from the
R&S FSW. Follow the instructions provided with the adapter kit.
4.2.5 Connecting the AC Power
In the standard version, the R&S FSW is equipped with an AC power supply connector. The R&S FSW can be used with different AC power voltages and adapts itself automatically to it. Refer to the datasheet for the requirements of voltage and frequency. For safety information, see "Connecting to power" on page 18.
To connect the AC power 1. Plug the AC power cable into the AC power connector on the rear panel of the
instrument. Only use the AC power cable delivered with the R&S FSW.
2. Plug the AC power cable into a power outlet with ground contact. The required ratings are listed next to the AC power connector and in the data sheet.
For details on the connector, refer to Chapter 4.3.2.2, "AC Power Supply Connection and Main Power Switch", on page 52.
4.2.6 Switching the Instrument On and Off
Table 4-1: Overview of power states
Status
LED on Power key Position of main power switch
Off
gray
[0]
Standby
orange
[I]
Ready
green
[I]
To switch on the R&S FSW
The R&S FSW is off but connected to power.
1. Set the switch on the power supply to position [I]. See Chapter 4.3.2.2, "AC Power Supply Connection and Main Power Switch", on page 52. The LED of the Power key is orange.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
28
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Preparing for Use
See Chapter 4.3.1.1, "Power Key", on page 40. 2. Press the Power key.
See Chapter 4.3.1.1, "Power Key", on page 40. The LED changes to green. The R&S FSW boots. After booting, the instrument is ready for operation.
Warm-up time for OCXO When the instrument is switched on, the OCXO requires an extended warm-up time (see data sheet).
To shut down the product The product is in the ready state. Press the [Power] key.
The operating system shuts down. The LED changes to orange.
If the instrument temperature exceeds the limit specified in the data sheet, the R&S FSW automatically shuts down to protect the instrument from damage.
To disconnect from power The R&S FSW is in the standby state. 1. NOTICE! Risk of data loss. If you disconnect the product from power when it is in
the ready state, you can lose settings and data. Shut it down first. Set the switch on the power supply to position [0]. See Chapter 4.3.2.2, "AC Power Supply Connection and Main Power Switch", on page 52. The LED of the Power key is switched off. 2. Disconnect the R&S FSW from the power source.
4.2.7 Connecting to LAN
You can connect the instrument to a LAN for remote operation via a PC.
For details on the connector, see Chapter 4.3.2.4, "LAN", on page 52.
Provided the network administrator has assigned you the appropriate rights and adapted the Windows firewall configuration, you can use the interface, for example: To transfer data between a controlling device and the test device, e.g. to run a
remote control program To access or control the measurement from a remote computer using the "Remote
Desktop" application (or a similar tool) To connect external network devices (e.g. printers)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
29
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Preparing for Use
To transfer data from a remote computer and back, e.g. using network folders
Network environment
Before connecting the product to a local area network (LAN), consider the following: Install the latest firmware to reduce security risks. For internet or remote access, use secured connections, if applicable. Ensure that the network settings comply with the security policies of your company.
Contact your local system administrator or IT department before connecting your product to your company LAN. When connected to the LAN, the product may potentially be accessed from the internet, which may be a security risk. For example, attackers might misuse or damage the product. For more information about IT security and how to operate the product in a secure LAN environment, see the Rohde & Schwarz white paper 1EF96: Malware Protection Windows 10.
NOTICE! Risk of network failure. Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks: Connecting the instrument to the network Configuring the network Changing IP addresses Exchanging hardware Errors can affect the entire network. Connect the R&S FSW to the LAN via the LAN interface on the rear panel of the instrument.
Windows automatically detects the network connection and activates the required drivers.
By default, the R&S FSW is configured to use DHCP and no static IP address is configured.
The default instrument name is <Type><variant>-<serial_number>, for example, FSW8-123456. For information on determining the serial number, see Chapter 4.3.2.21, "Device ID", on page 58.
For more information on LAN configuration, see the R&S FSW user manual.
4.2.8 Connecting a Keyboard
The keyboard is detected automatically when it is connected. The default input language is English � US.
However, you can also connect foreign language keyboards; currently the following languages are supported for the R&S FSW: German Swiss French
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
30
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Preparing for Use
Russian
To configure the keyboard language 1. To access the Windows operating system, press the Windows key on the external
keyboard. 2. Select "Start > Settings > Time & language > Region & language > Add a lan-
guage" .
4.2.9 Connecting an External Monitor
You can connect an external monitor (or projector) to the "DVI" or "Display port" connector on the rear panel of the R&S FSW (see also Chapter 4.3.2.5, "Display Port and DVI", on page 52).
Screen resolution and format The touchscreen of the R&S FSW is calibrated for a 16:10 format. If you connect a monitor or projector using a different format (e.g. 4:3), the calibration is not correct and the screen does not react to your touch actions properly. The touchscreen has a screen resolution of 1280x800 pixels. Usually, the display of the external monitor is a duplicate of the instrument's monitor. If you configure the external monitor to be used as the only display in the Windows configuration dialog box ("Show only on 2"), the maximum screen resolution of the monitor is used. In this case, you can maximize the R&S FSW application window and see even more details. You cannot change the monitor's screen resolution via the standard Windows configuration dialog box. However, you can restore the default instrument resolution (1280x800) on the monitor using the instrument function "Setup" > "Display" > "Configure Monitor" > "Screen Resolution: Restore to default". The R&S FSW supports a minimum resolution of 1280x768 pixels.
1. Connect the external monitor to the R&S FSW.
2. Press the [Setup] key.
3. Press the "Display" softkey.
4. Select the "Configure Monitor" tab in the "Display" dialog box. The standard Windows "Screen Resolution" dialog box is displayed.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
31
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Preparing for Use
5. Select the instrument for display: "Display 1" : internal monitor only "Display 2" : external monitor only "Duplicate" : both internal and external monitor
6. Tap "Apply" to try out the settings before they are accepted permanently, then you can easily return to the previous settings, if necessary.
7. Select "OK" if the settings are suitable.
4.2.10 Windows Operating System
The instrument contains the Windows 10 operating system which has been configured according to the instrument's features and needs. Changes in the system setup are only required when peripherals like a keyboard or a printer are installed or if the network configuration does not comply with the default settings. After the R&S FSW is started, the operating system boots and the instrument firmware is started automatically.
Tested software
The drivers and programs used on the instrument under Windows 10 are adapted to the instrument. Only install update software released by Rohde & Schwarz to modify existing instrument software.
You can install additional software on the instrument; however, additional software can impair instrument function. Thus, run only programs that Rohde & Schwarz has tested for compatibility with the instrument software.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
32
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Preparing for Use
The following program packages have been tested: R&S Power Viewer Plus - virtual power meter for displaying results of the power
sensor R&S NRPxx (install only this component!) Symantec Endpoint Security � virus-protection software FileShredder - for reliable deletion of files on the hard disk
Service packs and updates
Microsoft regularly creates security updates and other patches to protect Windowsbased operating systems. These are released through the Microsoft Update website and associated update server. Instruments using Windows, especially those that connect to a network, should be updated regularly.
Firewall settings
A firewall protects an instrument by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access to it through a network. Rohde & Schwarz highly recommends the use of the firewall on your instrument. Rohde & Schwarz instruments are shipped with the Windows firewall enabled and preconfigured in such a way that all ports and connections for remote control are enabled.
Note that changing firewall settings requires administrator rights.
Virus protection
Take appropriate steps to protect your instruments from infection. Use strong firewall settings and scan any removable storage device used with a Rohde & Schwarz instrument regularly. It is also recommended that you install anti-virus software on the instrument. Rohde & Schwarz does NOT recommend running anti-virus software in the background ("on-access" mode) on Windows-based instruments, due to potentially degrading instrument performance. However, Rohde & Schwarz does recommend running it during non-critical hours.
For details and recommendations, see the following Rohde & Schwarz white paper: 1EF96: Malware Protection Windows 10
To access the "Start" menu
The Windows "Start" menu provides access to the Windows 10 functionality and installed programs.
Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar, or press the "Windows" key or the [CTRL + ESC] key combination on the (external) keyboard.
The "Start" menu and the Windows taskbar are displayed.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
33
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Preparing for Use
The Windows taskbar also provides quick access to commonly used programs, for example Paint or WordPad. IECWIN, the auxiliary remote control tool provided free of charge and installed by Rohde & Schwarz, is also available from the taskbar or "Start" menu. For details on the IECWIN tool, see the "Network and Remote Control" chapter of the R&S FSW user manual.
All necessary system settings can be defined in the "Start > Settings" menu.
For required settings, refer to the Windows 10 documentation and to the hardware description.
4.2.11 Logging On
Windows 10 requires that users identify themselves by entering a user name and password in a login window. By default, the R&S FSW provides two user accounts:
"Instrument": an administrator account with unrestricted access to the computer/ domain
"NormalUser": a standard user account with limited access
Some administrative tasks require administrator rights (e.g. the configuration of a LAN network). Refer to the description of the basic instrument Setup ([Setup] menu) to find out which functions are affected.
Secure user mode If the secure user mode option (R&S FSW-K33) is installed, an additional account is provided: the "SecureUser". The "SecureUser" is a standard user account with limited functionality. In particular, administrative tasks such as LAN configuration or general instrument settings are not available. Furthermore, for a "SecureUser", data that the R&S FSW normally stores on the solid-state drive is redirected to volatile memory instead. You can access data that is stored in volatile memory during the current instrument session. However, when the instrument's power is removed, all data in volatile memory is erased. For details, see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37.
Passwords
For all default user accounts, the initial password is 894129. Note that this password is very weak, and it is recommended that you change the password for both users after initial login. An administrator can change the password in Windows 10 for any user at any time via "Start > Settings > Account > SignIn Options > Password > Change".
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
34
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Preparing for Use
Auto-login When shipped, the instrument automatically logs on the default "Instrument" user to Windows 10 (with full access) using the default password. This function is active until an administrator explicitly deactivates it or changes the password.
Changing the password and use of auto-login function Note that when you change the default password, the default auto-login function no longer works! In this case, you must enter the new password manually to log on.
Adapting the auto-login function to a new password If you change the password that is used during auto-login, this function no longer works. Adapt the settings for the auto-login function first. 1. Open the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\user\AUTOLOGIN.REG file in any text editor
(e.g. Notepad).
2. In the line "DefaultPassword"="894129", replace the default password (894129) by the new password for automatic login.
3. Save the changes to the file.
4. In the Windows "Start" menu, select "Run". The "Run" dialog box is displayed.
5. Enter the command C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\user\AUTOLOGIN.REG. 6. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm.
The auto-login function is reactivated with the changed password. It will be applied the next time the instrument is switched on.
Switching users when using the auto-login function Which user account is used is defined during login. If auto-login is active, the login window is not displayed. However, you can switch the user account to be used even when the auto-login function is active. 1. Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system of the
R&S FSW (see also "To access the "Start" menu" on page 33).
2. Press [CTRL] + [ALT] + [DEL], then select "Sign out". The "Login" dialog box is displayed, in which you can enter the different user account name and password.
For information on deactivating and reactivating the auto-login function, see "Deactivating the auto-login function" on page 854.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
35
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Preparing for Use
4.2.12 Checking the Supplied Options
The instrument can be equipped with both hardware and firmware options. To check whether the installed options correspond to the options indicated on the delivery note, proceed as follows.
1. Press the [SETUP] key. 2. Press the "System Config" softkey. 3. Switch to the "Versions + Options" tab in the "System Configuration" dialog box.
A list with hardware and firmware information is displayed. 4. Check the availability of the hardware options as indicated in the delivery note.
4.2.13 Performing a Self-Alignment
When strong temperature changes occur in the environment of the R&S FSW, or after updating the firmware, you have to perform a self-alignment to align the data to a reference source.
During self-alignment, do not connect a signal to the RF input connector. Running a self-alignment with a signal connected to the RF input can lead to false measurement results.
Performing a self-alignment
Before performing this functional test, make sure that the instrument has reached its operating temperature (for details, refer to the data sheet).
A message in the status bar ( "Instrument warming up..." ) indicates that the operating temperature has not yet been reached.
Depending on the installation settings, an automatic self-alignment is performed each time the instrument is switched on. A dialog is displayed indicating how much warm-up time is still required before self-alignment can be performed.
1. Press the [Setup] key.
2. Press the "Alignment" softkey.
3. Select the "Start Self Alignment" button in the "Alignment" dialog box.
Once the system correction values have been calculated successfully, a message is displayed.
To display the alignment results again later Press the [SETUP] key. Press the "Alignment" softkey.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
36
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Preparing for Use
4.2.14 Considerations for Test Setup
Cable selection and electromagnetic interference (EMI)
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) can affect the measurement results.
To suppress electromagnetic radiation during operation: Use high-quality shielded cables, for example, double-shielded RF and LAN
cables. Always terminate open cable ends. Ensure that connected external devices comply with EMC regulations.
Signal input and output levels
Information on signal levels is provided in the data sheet. Keep the signal levels within the specified ranges to avoid damage to the R&S FSW and connected devices.
4.2.15 Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode
During normal operation, the R&S FSW uses a solid-state drive to store its operating system, instrument firmware, instrument self-alignment data, and any user data created during operation.
If necessary, the solid-state drive can be removed from the R&S FSW and locked in a secure place to protect any classified data it may contain.
Redirecting storage to volatile memory
Alternatively, to avoid storing any sensitive data on the R&S FSW permanently, the secure user mode was introduced (option R&S FSW-K33). In secure user mode, the instrument's solid-state drive is write-protected so that no information can be written to memory permanently. Data that the R&S FSW normally stores on the solid-state drive is redirected to volatile memory instead, which remains available only until the instrument is switched off. This data includes:
Windows operating system files Firmware shutdown files containing information on last instrument state Self-alignment data General instrument settings such as the IP address Measurement settings User data created during operation
(see also Table 10-1) Any data created by other applications installed on the R&S FSW, for example, text
editors (Notepad), the clipboard, or drawing tools.
Users can access data that is stored in volatile memory just as in normal operation. However, when the instrument's power is switched off, all data in this memory is cleared. Thus, in secure user mode, the instrument always starts in a defined, fixed state when switched on.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
37
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Preparing for Use
To store data such as measurement results permanently, it must be stored to an external storage device, such as a memory stick.
Limited storage space The volatile memory used to store data in secure user mode is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "Memory full" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
Storing required data permanently
Any data that is to be available for subsequent sessions with the R&S FSW must be stored on the instrument permanently, before activating the secure user mode. This includes predefined instrument settings, transducer factors and self-alignment data.
Self-alignment data Note that self-alignment data becomes invalid with time and due to temperature changes. Therefore, to achieve optimal accuracy, it can be preferable to perform a new self-alignment at the start of each new session on the R&S FSW.
Restricted operation
Since permanent storage is not possible, the following functions are not available in secure user mode: Firmware update Activating a new option key Furthermore, since the "SecureUser" used in secure user mode does not have administrator rights, administrative tasks such as LAN configuration and some general instrument settings are not available. Refer to the description of the basic instrument setup ([SETUP] menu) to find out which functions are affected.
Activating and deactivating secure user mode
Only a user with administrator rights can activate (and deactivate) the secure user mode. Once activated, a restart is required. The special user "SecureUser" is then logged on to the R&S FSW automatically using the auto-login function. While the secure user mode is active, a message is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the screen.
Secure passwords By default, the initial password for both the administrator account and the "SecureUser" account is "894129". When the secure user mode is activated the first time after installation, you are prompted to change the passwords for all user accounts to improve system security. Although it is possible to continue without changing the passwords, it is strongly recommended that you do so. You can change the password in Windows 10 for any user at any time via: "Start > Settings > Account > SignIn Options > Password > Change"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
38
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Instrument Tour
To deactivate the secure user mode, the "SecureUser" must log off and a user with administrator rights must log on.
Switching users when using the auto-login function In the "Start" menu, select the arrow next to the "Shut down" button and then "Log off". The "Login" dialog box is displayed, in which you can enter the different user account name and password.
The secure user mode setting and auto-login is automatically deactivated when another user logs on. The "SecureUser" is no longer available. For users with administrator rights, the secure user mode setting is available in the general system configuration settings (see " SecureUser Mode " on page 747).
Remote control Initially after installation of the R&S FSW-K33 option, secure user mode must be enabled manually once before remote control is possible. (See SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe].) Manual activation is necessary to prompt for a change of passwords.
4.3 Instrument Tour
4.3.1 Front Panel View
This chapter describes the front panel, including all function keys and connectors. (Note: the graphic shows a 26 GHz model of the R&S FSW. Some connectors on the 85 GHz model differ slightly; differences are indicated for the individual connectors.)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
39
R&S�FSW
2
Getting Started Instrument Tour
34
5
6
1
7
16
15
14 13 12 11
10 9 8
Figure 4-1: Front panel view of FSW26
1 = POWER key 2 = Touchscreen 3 = Function keys 4 = Keypad 5 = Navigation controls 6 = TRIGGER INPUT/OUTPUT connectors 7 = RF Input 50 connector 8 = EXT MIXER connector (optional) 9 = (Analog) Baseband Input 50 connectors for I/Q signal or Rohde & Schwarz active probes (optional) 10 = (Analog) Baseband Input 50 connectors for inverse part of differential I/Q signal (optional, not for
R&S FSW85) 11 = NOISE SOURCE CONTROL 12 = PROBE connector 13 = POWER SENSOR connector 14 = USB connectors 15 = Headphones connector and volume control 16 = SYSTEM keys
4.3.1.1 Power Key
The power key is on the lower left corner of the front panel. It starts up and shuts down the instrument. See also "Connecting to power" on page 18.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
40
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Instrument Tour
4.3.1.2 Touchscreen
All measurement results are displayed on the screen on the front panel. Additionally, the screen display provides status and setting information and allows you to switch between various measurement tasks. The screen is touch-sensitive, offering an alternative means of user interaction for quick and easy handling of the instrument.
1
2
3
4
8
5 7
6
Figure 4-2: Touchscreen elements
1 = Toolbar with standard application functions, e.g. print, save/open file etc. 2 = Tabs for individual measurement channels 3 = Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 4 = Measurement results area 5 = Softkeys for function access 6 = Instrument status bar with error messages, progress bar and date/time display 7 = Diagram footer with diagram-specific information, depending on application 8 = Window title bar with diagram-specific (trace) information
All measurement results are displayed on the screen on the front panel. Additionally, the screen display provides status and setting information and allows you to switch between various measurement tasks. The screen is touch-sensitive, offering an alternative means of user interaction for quick and easy handling of the instrument. Any user interface elements that react to a click by a mouse pointer also react to a tap on the screen, and vice versa. Using touchscreen gestures, you can perform the following tasks (among others, see also Chapter 4.4, "Trying Out the Instrument", on page 58):
Changing a setting Changing the display Moving a marker Zooming into a diagram Selecting a new evaluation method
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
41
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Instrument Tour
Scrolling through a result list or table Saving or printing results and settings
To imitate a right-click by mouse using the touchscreen, for example to open a contextsensitive menu for a specific item, press the screen for about 1 second.
For details on touchscreen gestures, see Chapter 4.5.5, "Touchscreen Gestures", on page 95.
4.3.1.3 Function Keys
Function keys provide access to the most common measurement settings and functions.
A detailed description of the corresponding functions is provided in the User Manual.
Table 4-2: Function keys
Function key
Assigned functions
Basic measurement settings
[FREQ]
Sets the center frequency and the start and stop frequencies for the frequency range under consideration. This key is also used to set the frequency offset and the signal track function.
[SPAN]
Sets the frequency span to be analyzed.
[AMPT]
Sets the reference level, the displayed dynamic range, the RF attenuation and the unit for the level display.
Sets the level offset and the input impedance.
Activates the preamplifier (option RF Preamplifier, R&S FSW-B24).
[AUTO SET]
Enables automatic settings for level, frequency or sweep type mode.
[BW]
Sets the resolution bandwidth and the video bandwidth.
[SWEEP]
Sets the sweep time and the number of measurement points. Selects continuous measurement or single measurement.
[TRACE]
Configures the measured data acquisition and the analysis of the measurement data.
[TRIG]
Sets the trigger mode, the trigger threshold, the trigger delay, and the gate configuration in the case of gated sweep.
Marker functions
[MKR]
Sets and positions the absolute and relative measurement markers (markers and delta markers).
[PEAK SEARCH]
Performs a peak search for active marker. If no marker is active, normal marker 1 is activated and the peak search is performed for it.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
42
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Instrument Tour
Function key
Assigned functions
[MKR FUNC]
Provides additional analysis functions of the measurement markers: Frequency counter (Sig Count) Fixed reference point for relative measurement markers (Ref Fixed) Noise marker (Noise Meas) Phase noise (Phase Noise) n dB down function AM/FM audio demodulation Peak list
[MKR->]
Used for search functions of the measurement markers (maximum/minimum of the trace).
Assigns the marker frequency to the center frequency, and the marker level to the reference level.
Restricts the search area (Search Limits) and characterizes the maximum points and minimum points (Peak Excursion).
Measurement and evaluation functions
[MEAS]
Provides the measurement functions. Measurement of multicarrier adjacent channel power (Ch Power ACLR) Carrier to noise spacing (C/N C/N0) Occupied bandwidth (OBW) Spectrum emission mask measurement (Spectrum Emission Mask) Spurious emissions (Spurious Emissions) Measurement of time domain power (Time Domain Power) Signal statistics: amplitude probability distribution (APD) and cumulative complementary distribution function (CCDF) Third-order intercept point (TOI) AM modulation depth (AM Mod Depth)
[MEAS CONFIG]
Used to define measurement configuration.
[LINES]
Configures display lines and limit lines.
[INPUT/OUTPUT]
Displays softkeys for input/output functions.
Measurement start functions
[RUN SINGLE]
Starts a single new measurement (Single Sweep Mode).
[RUN CONT]
Starts a continuous measurement (Continuous Sweep Mode).
Function execution (in navigation controls area)
[UNDO]
Reverts last operation
[REDO]
Repeats previously reverted operation.
4.3.1.4 Navigation Controls
The navigation controls include a rotary knob, navigation keys, and Undo / Redo keys. They allow you to navigate within the display or within dialog boxes.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
43
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Instrument Tour
Navigating in tables The easiest way to navigate within tables (both in result tables and configuration tables) is to scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen.
Rotary Knob
The rotary knob has several functions:
For numeric entries: increments (clockwise direction) or decrements (counterclockwise direction) the instrument parameter at a defined step width
In lists: toggles between entries For markers, limit lines, and other graphical elements on the screen: moves their
position For active scroll bars: moves the scroll bar vertically For dialog boxes: Same effect as the Enter key when pressed
Navigation Keys
The navigation keys can be used alternatively to the rotary knob to navigate through dialog boxes, diagrams or tables.
Arrow Up/Arrow Down Keys
The <arrow up> or <arrow down> keys do the following: For numeric entries: increments (Arrow Up) or decrements (Arrow Down) the
instrument parameter at a defined step width In a list: scrolls forward and backward through the list entries In a table: moves the selection bar vertically In windows or dialog boxes with a vertical scroll bar: moves the scroll bar
Arrow Left/Arrow Right Keys
The <arrow left> or <arrow right> keys do the following: In an alphanumeric edit dialog box, move the cursor. In a list, scroll forward and backward through the list entries. In a table, move the selection bar horizontally. In windows or dialog boxes with horizontal scroll bar, move the scroll bar.
Undo/Redo Keys
The [Undo] key reverts the previous action, i.e. the status before the previous action is retrieved. The Undo function is useful, for example, if you are performing a zero span measurement with several markers and a limit line defined and accidentally select a different measurement. In this case, many settings would be lost. However, if you press [Undo] immediately afterwards, the previous status is retrieved, i.e. the zero span measurement and all settings.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
44
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Instrument Tour
The [Redo] key repeats the previously reverted action, i.e. the most recent action is repeated.
The [Undo] function is not available after a [Preset] or "Recall" operation. When these functions are used, the history of previous actions is deleted.
4.3.1.5 Keypad
The keypad is used to enter alphanumeric parameters, including the corresponding units (see also Chapter 4.5.4.2, "Entering Alphanumeric Parameters", on page 93). It contains the following keys:
Table 4-3: Keys on the keypad
Type of key
Description
Alphanumeric keys
Enter numbers and (special) characters in edit dialog boxes.
Decimal point
Inserts a decimal point "." at the cursor position.
Sign key
Changes the sign of a numeric parameter. For an alphanumeric parameter, inserts a "-" at the cursor position.
Unit keys (GHz/-dBm MHz/ dBm, kHz/dB and Hz/dB)
Adds the selected unit to the entered numeric value and complete the entry.
For level entries (e.g. in dB) or dimensionless values, all units have the value "1" as multiplying factor. Thus, they have the same function as an Enter key.
[Esc] key
Closes all kinds of dialog boxes, if the edit Mode is not active. Quits the edit mode, if the edit mode is active. In dialog boxes that contain a "Cancel" button it activates that button.
For "Edit" dialog boxes the following mechanism is used: If data entry has been started, it retains the original value and
closes the dialog box. If data entry has not been started or has been completed, it closes
the dialog box.
Backspace key
If an alphanumeric entry has already been started, this key deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
Enter key
Concludes the entry of dimensionless entries. The new value is accepted.
With other entries, this key can be used instead of the "Hz/dB" unit key.
In a dialog box, selects the default or focused element.
4.3.1.6 TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT
Use the female TRIGGER INPUT connector to input an external trigger or gate data. Thus, you can control the measurement using an external signal. The voltage levels can range from 0.5 V to 3.5 V. The default value is 1.4 V. The typical input impedance is 10 k.
Use the female BNC TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT connector to receive a second external signal or to provide a signal to another device. The signal is TTL compatible (0 V / 5 V). You control the connector usage in the "Trigger" settings ([TRIG] key).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
45
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Instrument Tour
The trigger output also controls signals by the frequency mask trigger available in Real-Time mode.
The rear panel provides a third TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT connector, see Chapter 4.3.2.12, "TRIGGER 3 INPUT/ OUTPUT", on page 54. (Not models 1312.8000Kxx) For R&S FSW85 models, the second trigger (female BNC TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT connector) on the front panel is not available due to the second RF input connector (see Chapter 4.3.1.7, "RF INPUT 50 Ohm", on page 46).
4.3.1.7 RF INPUT 50 Ohm
Provides RF input from a connected device under test (DUT) to the R&S FSW, which is then analyzed in an RF measurement. Connect the DUT to the "RF Input" connector on the R&S FSW. Do not overload the input. For maximum allowed values, see the data sheet.
The specific connector type depends on the instrument model:
R&S FSW26: APC 3.5 mm male (compatible with R&S SMA) R&S FSW43: 2.92 mm male (compatible with R&S SMA) R&S FSW50/67: 1.85 mm male (compatible with 2.4 mm) R&S FSW85:
� Input 1: 1.00 mm RF input connector for frequencies up to 85 GHz (90 GHz with option R&S FSW-B90G)
� Input 2: 1.85 mm RF input connector for frequencies up to 67 GHz For models 1312.8000Kxx: 1.00 mm RF input connector for frequencies up to 85 GHz (90 GHz with option R&S FSW-B90G)
Risk of instrument damage Do not fasten the 1.00 mm RF Input connector with a torque larger than 0.23 Nm. Rohde & Schwarz offers an appropriate torque wrench (R&S�ZN-ZTW Torque 0.23 Nm; delivered with the instrument).
The RF input can be coupled to the DUT by alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC). AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal. This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument. However, some specifications require DC coupling. In this case, you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually. For details, refer to the data sheet. For details on coupling, see the chapter on radio frequency input in the R&S FSW user manual.
See also Chapter 4.2.14, "Considerations for Test Setup", on page 37.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
46
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Instrument Tour
For R&S FSW85 models, which have two input connectors, you must define which input source is used for each measurement channel. (See Chapter 7.2.2.1, "Radio Frequency Input", on page 362).
4.3.1.8 EXT MIXER Connector (Optional)
Connect external mixers to the EXT MIXER LO OUT/IF IN and IF IN female connectors to increase the available frequency range. These connectors are optional and only available with R&S FSW-B21. If no external mixers are connected to the R&S FSW, cover the two front connectors LO OUT / IF IN and IF IN with the supplied SMA caps.
4.3.1.9 (Analog) Baseband Input 50 Connectors (Optional)
The Analog Baseband Interface option provides four "Baseband input" BNC connectors on the front panel of the R&S FSW for analog I and Q signals (R&S FSW85: two connectors).
The upper BNC connectors BASEBAND INPUT I and BASEBAND INPUT Q are used to input: Single-ended signals The positive signal input for differential signals Input from active Rohde & Schwarz probes (see data sheet) The lower BNC connectors and are used to input the negative signal for differential signals.
R&S FSW85 The R&S FSW85 provides only two connectors; differential input is not supported.
Complex signal input (I+jQ) For complex signal input (I+jQ), always use two identical cables for the I and Q connectors (same length, same type, same manufacturer). Otherwise, time delay or gain imbalance can occur between the different cables, which cannot be calibrated.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
47
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Instrument Tour
All connectors have a fixed impedance of 50 . Do not overload the input. For maximum allowed values, see the data sheet. Since the Digital I/Q input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal path, both cannot be used simultaneously. When one is activated, established connections for the other are disconnected. When the second input is deactivated, connections to the first are re-established. This can cause a short delay in data transfer after switching the input source. Input via the Analog Baseband Interface can be enabled in the I/Q Analyzer, the Analog Demodulation application, or in one of the optional applications that process I/Q data (where available).
4.3.1.10 NOISE SOURCE CONTROL
The noise source control female connector is used to provide the supply voltage for an external noise source. For example, use it to measure the noise figure and gain of amplifiers and frequency converting devices. Conventional noise sources require a voltage of +28 V to be switched on and 0 V to be switched off. The output supports a maximum load of 100 mA.
4.3.1.11 Probe
The R&S FSW provides a connector for supply voltages of +15 V to -12 V and ground for active probes and preamplifiers. A maximum current of 140 mA is available. This connector is suitable as a power supply for high-impedance probes. For details on configuring and using power sensors, see Chapter 7.2.3, "Power Sensors", on page 368.
4.3.1.12 POWER SENSOR
The LEMOSA female connector is used to connect Rohde & Schwarz power sensors. For a detailed list of supported sensors, see the data sheet. For details on configuring and using power sensors, see Chapter 7.2.3, "Power Sensors", on page 368.
4.3.1.13 USB
The front panel provides three female USB connectors (USB-A) to connect devices like a keyboard or a mouse. In addition, a memory stick can be connected to store and reload instrument settings and measurement data.
The rear panel provides further USB connectors, including a male (USB-B) connector. See Chapter 4.3.2.3, "USB", on page 52. All USB connectors support standard 2.0.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
48
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Instrument Tour
4.3.1.14 PHONES and VOLUME
You can use headphones to monitor demodulated audio frequencies in time domain measurements acoustically.
Connect headphones equipped with a miniature jack plug to the PHONES female connector. Set the output voltage using the "Volume" control to the right of the female connector. The maximum output voltage (volume) is 1 V. If a headphone is plugged into the instrument, the internal loudspeaker is automatically switched off.
The output provided to the PHONES connector is the same as the (video) output at the IF/VIDEO/DEMOD OUTPUT connector.
See also "Connecting headphones" on page 19.
4.3.1.15 SYSTEM Keys
[SYSTEM] keys set the instrument to a predefined state, change basic settings, and provide print and display functions.
A detailed description of the corresponding functions is provided in the User Manual.
Table 4-4: SYSTEM keys
SYSTEM key
Assigned functions
[PRESET]
Resets the instrument to the default state.
[MODE]
Provides the selection between applications
[SETUP]
Provides basic instrument configuration functions, e.g.:
Reference frequency (external/internal), noise source Date, time, display configuration LAN interface Self-alignment Firmware update and enabling of options Information about instrument configuration incl. firmware version and
system error messages
Service support functions (self-test etc.)
Switches between the on-screen keyboard display:
At the top of the screen At the bottom of the screen Off
Switches between maximized and split display of focus area.
Moves focus area from one active window to the next.
4.3.2 Rear Panel View
This figure shows the rear panel view of the R&S FSW. The individual elements are described in more detail in the subsequent sections.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
49
R&S�FSW
5 6
Figure 4-3: Rear panel view 1 = see Figure 4-4 2 = see Figure 4-5 3 = see Figure 4-6 4 = see Figure 4-7 5 = IF OUT 2 GHz connector 6 = Device ID with serial number and other labels
1
Getting Started Instrument Tour
1 2 3 4
2
6
5
4
3
Figure 4-4: Rear panel view - extract 1
1 = Removable system hard drive 2 = AC Power Supply Connection and Main Power Switch 3 = USB (DEVICE) connectors 4 = LAN connector 5 = DVI connector for external display 6 = DISPLAY PORT for external display
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
50
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Instrument Tour
1
76
5
4
3
2
Figure 4-5: Rear panel view - extract 2
1 = Bandwidth extension options, with IF WIDE OUTPUT connector (option -B160/-B320-B512) and Digital I/Q 40G Streaming Output connector (option B517)
2 = GPIB interface 3 = AUX PORT 4 = SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT/INPUT 5 = DIGITAL BASEBAND INPUT/OUTPUT connectors (option B17) 6 = TRIGGER 3 INPUT/OUTPUT connector 7 = IF/VIDEO/DEMOD connector
1
2
3
Figure 4-6: Rear panel view - extract 3
1 = Analog baseband interface (option B71) 2 = External generator control (option B10) 3 = Alignment Signal Source (option B2000)
1
2
Figure 4-7: Rear panel view - extract 4 1 = REF INPUT/OUTPUT connectors 2 = OCXO external reference (option B4)
4.3.2.1 Removable System Hard Drive
The removable system hard drive contains all measurement data from the R&S FSW, allowing you to store the data securely in an external location.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
51
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Instrument Tour
4.3.2.2 AC Power Supply Connection and Main Power Switch
An AC power supply connector and main power switch are located in a unit on the rear panel of the instrument. Main power switch function: Position 1: The instrument can be started via the Power key on the front panel. The (optional) OCXO reference frequency is warmed up. Position O: The entire instrument is disconnected from the AC power supply. For details, refer to "Connecting to power" on page 18 and Chapter 4.2.5, "Connecting the AC Power", on page 28.
4.3.2.3 USB
The rear panel provides four additional female USB (USB-A) connectors to connect devices like a keyboard, a mouse or a memory stick (see also Chapter 4.3.1.13, "USB", on page 48). Furthermore, a male USB DEVICE connector (USB-B) is provided, for example to connect the R&S FSW to a PC for remote control. All USB connectors support standard 2.0.
4.3.2.4 LAN
The R&S FSW is equipped with a 1 GBit Ethernet IEEE 802.3u network interface with Auto-MDI(X) functionality. The assignment of the RJ-45 connector supports twistedpair category 5 UTP/STP cables in a star configuration (UTP stands for unshielded twisted pair, and STP for shielded twisted pair). For details, see Chapter 12, "Network and Remote Operation", on page 772.
4.3.2.5 Display Port and DVI
You can connect an external monitor or other display device to the R&S FSW to provide an enlarged display. Two different types of connectors are provided for this purpose: Display Port DVI (digital visual interface) For details, see Chapter 4.2.9, "Connecting an External Monitor", on page 31.
4.3.2.6 Bandwidth Extension Options with IF WIDE OUTPUT Connector
You can extend the signal analysis bandwidth of the R&S FSW by a hardware option (R&S FSW-B160/-B320/-B512/-B1200/-B2001/-B4001/-B8001 or R&S FSW-Uxxx). The bandwidth extension allows for an output sample rate of up to 10 GHz and a linear bandwidth up to:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
52
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Instrument Tour
160 MHz (with option B160/U160) 320 MHz (with option B320/U320) 512 MHz (with option B512/U512) 1200 MHz (with option B1200/U1200) 2001 MHz (with option B2001/U2001) 4001 MHz (with option B4001/U4001) 6001 MHz (with option B6001/U6001) 8001 MHz (with option B8001/U8001)
While the extension can be activated or deactivated manually in the R&S FSW base unit (I/Q Analyzer application), it is activated automatically in some applications that also support I/Q data analysis. See the application-specific documentation for details.
Together with the bandwidth extension an additional IF output connector is provided ("IF WIDE OUTPUT"). As opposed to the default IF/VIDEO/DEMOD OUTPUT connector, the IF output frequency of the optional connector cannot be defined manually, but is determined automatically depending on the center frequency. For details on the used frequencies, see the data sheet. The IF WIDE OUTPUT connector is used automatically when the bandwidth extension is activated (i.e. for bandwidths > 80 MHz).
4.3.2.7 Digital I/Q 40G Streaming Output Connector (R&S FSW-B517)
The Digital I/Q 40G Streaming Output (QSFP+) connector is provided by the hardware of any bandwidth extension option for 512 MHz or more.
If necessary, remove the metal cover from the connector on the rear panel of the R&S FSW.
The output connector provides I/Q data streams with a sample rate of up to 600 MHz, if the R&S FSW-B517 option is installed and active.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
53
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Instrument Tour
Output is activated in the software ([INPUT/OUTPUT] key). See the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual for details.
4.3.2.8 GPIB Interface
The GPIB interface is in compliance with IEEE488 and SCPI. A computer for remote control can be connected via this interface. To set up the connection, a shielded cable is recommended. For more details, refer to Chapter 12, "Network and Remote Operation", on page 772.
4.3.2.9 Aux. Port
A 9-pole SUB-D male connector used to provide low-voltage TTL control signals (max. 5 V). The output signals can be used to control external devices.
4.3.2.10 SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT/INPUT
Use the SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT/INPUT connectors to synchronize several devices (e.g. two R&S FSWs) to a common trigger signal or reference frequency. The R&S FSW can output a 100 MHz signal as a trigger or reference signal to another device. The R&S FSW can also receive an external trigger or reference signal at the input connector.
4.3.2.11 DIGITAL BASEBAND INPUT / OUTPUT (R&S FSW-B17)
The optional DIGITAL BASEBAND connectors allow you to provide digital I/Q data for measurements with the R&S FSW. Using the output connector you can provide RF input from the R&S FSW to a connected device as digital I/Q data. The digital input and output connectors cannot be used simultaneously. It is recommended that you use the R&S�SMU-Z6 (1415.0201.02) cable to connect other devices to the Digital Baseband Interface of the R&S FSW.
For high output rates, use the Digital I/Q 40G Streaming Output option (R&S FSWB517), see Chapter 4.3.2.7, "Digital I/Q 40G Streaming Output Connector (R&S FSWB517)", on page 53.
4.3.2.12 TRIGGER 3 INPUT/ OUTPUT
The additional female BNC "TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT" connector can be used to receive a third external signal or to provide a signal to another device. The signal is
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
54
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Instrument Tour
TTL compatible (0 V / 5 V). You can control the connector usage in the "Trigger" settings ([TRIG] key).
4.3.2.13 IF/VIDEO/DEMOD OUTPUT
The female BNC connector can be used for various outputs: Intermediate frequency (IF) output of approximately 20 MHz Video output (1V) Which output is provided is defined in the software ([INPUT/OUTPUT] key). For details, see "Data Output" on page 435.
4.3.2.14 (Analog) Baseband Input 50 Connectors (Optional)
The Analog Baseband Interface option provides four "Baseband input" BNC connectors on the front panel of the R&S FSW for analog I and Q signals (R&S FSW85: two connectors).
The upper BNC connectors BASEBAND INPUT I and BASEBAND INPUT Q are used to input: Single-ended signals The positive signal input for differential signals Input from active Rohde & Schwarz probes (see data sheet) The lower BNC connectors and are used to input the negative signal for differential signals.
R&S FSW85 The R&S FSW85 provides only two connectors; differential input is not supported.
Complex signal input (I+jQ) For complex signal input (I+jQ), always use two identical cables for the I and Q connectors (same length, same type, same manufacturer). Otherwise, time delay or gain imbalance can occur between the different cables, which cannot be calibrated.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
55
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Instrument Tour
All connectors have a fixed impedance of 50 . Do not overload the input. For maximum allowed values, see the data sheet.
Since the Digital I/Q input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal path, both cannot be used simultaneously. When one is activated, established connections for the other are disconnected. When the second input is deactivated, connections to the first are re-established. This can cause a short delay in data transfer after switching the input source.
Input via the Analog Baseband Interface can be enabled in the I/Q Analyzer, the Analog Demodulation application, or in one of the optional applications that process I/Q data (where available).
4.3.2.15 External Generator Control Option (R&S FSW-B10)
The external generator control option provides an additional GPIB and an "AUX control" connector.
The GPIB connector can be used to connect the external generator to the R&S FSW. The 9-pole SUB-D female "AUX control" connector is required for TTL synchronization, if supported by the generator. For details on connecting an external generator, see the "External Generator Control" section of the R&S FSW User Manual.
4.3.2.16 Alignment Signal Source (Option R&S FSW-B2000)
The alignment signal source is required to align the connected oscilloscope and the oscilloscope ADC for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension (R&S FSW-B2000). For details, see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual.
4.3.2.17 REF INPUT / REF OUTPUT
The REF INPUT connectors are used to provide an external reference signal to the R&S FSW. The REF OUTPUT connectors can be used to provide an external reference signal (or the optional OCXO reference signal) from the R&S FSW to other devices that are connected to this instrument. Various connectors are provided for different reference signals:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
56
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Instrument Tour
Connector REF INPUT REF OUTPUT REF OUTPUT
REF INPUT REF OUTPUT REF OUTPUT
Reference signal 1...50 MHz 0...10 dBm 1...50 MHz 0...10 dBm
10 MHz 10 dBm
100 MHz / 1 GHz 0...10 dBm 100 MHz 6 dBm 640 MHz 16 dBm
Usage To provide an external reference signal on the R&S FSW.
To provide the same external reference signal received by the REF INPUT 1...50 MHz connector to another device, when available. To provide the internal reference signal from the R&S FSW to another device continuously. Also used to provide OCXO reference signal to another device. To provide an external reference signal on the R&S FSW.
To provide a 100 MHz reference signal from the R&S FSW to another device.
To provide a 640 MHz reference signal from the R&S FSW to another device.
SYNC TRIGGER
The SYNC TRIGGER connector can also be used to synchronize the reference frequency on several devices (see Chapter 4.3.2.10, "SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT/ INPUT", on page 54).
4.3.2.18 OCXO Option (R&S FSW-B4)
This option generates a 10 MHz reference signal with a very precise frequency. If installed, and if no external signal is used, this signal is used as an internal reference. It can also be used to synchronize other connected devices via the REF OUTPUT 10 MHz connector.
Warm-up time for OCXO When the instrument is switched on, the OCXO requires an extended warm-up time (see data sheet).
4.3.2.19 IF OUT 2 GHz / 5 GHz Connector
The female SMA connector is only available for instrument models R&S FSW26/43/50/67/85. It can be used to provide intermediate frequency (IF) output of approximately 2 GHz at a frequency of 2 GHz. Output is activated in the software ([INPUT/OUTPUT] key). For details, see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
57
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
4.3.2.20 Labels on R&S FSW
Labels on the casing inform about: Personal safety, see "Meaning of safety labels" on page 19 Product and environment safety, see Table 4-5 Identification of the product, see Chapter 4.3.2.21, "Device ID", on page 58
Table 4-5: Labels regarding R&S FSW and environment safety
Labeling in line with EN 50419 for disposal of electrical and electronic equipment after the product has come to the end of its service life. For more information, see the product user manual, chapter "Disposal".
4.3.2.21 Device ID
The unique device identifier is provided as a barcode sticker on the rear panel of the R&S FSW. It consists of the device order number and a serial number.
The serial number is used to define the default instrument name, which is: <Type><variant>-<serial_number> For example, FSW8-123456. The instrument name is required to establish a connection to the instrument in a LAN.
4.4 Trying Out the Instrument
This chapter introduces the most important functions and settings of the R&S FSW step by step. The complete description of the functionality and its usage is given in the R&S FSW User Manual. Basic instrument operation is described in Chapter 4.5, "Operating the Instrument", on page 77.
Prerequisites The instrument is set up, connected to the mains system, and started up as descri-
bed in Chapter 4.2, "Preparing for Use", on page 25. For these first measurements, you use the internal calibration signal, so you do not need any additional signal source or instruments. Try out the following:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
58
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
Measuring a Basic Signal........................................................................................59 Displaying a Spectrogram....................................................................................... 61 Activating Additional Measurement Channels.........................................................63 Performing Sequential Measurements....................................................................66 Setting and Moving a Marker.................................................................................. 67 Displaying a Marker Peak List.................................................................................68 Zooming into the Display.........................................................................................69 Zooming into the Display Permanently................................................................... 72 Saving Settings....................................................................................................... 75 Printing and Saving Results.................................................................................... 76
4.4.1 Measuring a Basic Signal
We will start out by measuring a basic signal, using the internal calibration signal as the input.
To display the internal 64 MHz calibration signal 1. Press the [PRESET] key to start out in a defined instrument configuration. 2. Press the [Setup] key on the front panel. 3. Tap the "Service + Support" softkey. 4. Tap the "Calibration Signal" tab. 5. Tap the "Calibration Frequency RF" option. Leave the frequency at the default
64 MHz, with a narrowband spectrum. The calibration signal is now sent to the RF input of the R&S FSW. By default, a continuous frequency sweep is performed, so that the spectrum of the calibration signal is now displayed in the standard level versus frequency diagram.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
59
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
Figure 4-8: Calibration signal as RF input
Instrument warmup time Note that the instrument requires an initial warmup time after switching it on. A message in the status bar ("Instrument warming up...") indicates that the operating temperature has not yet been reached. Wait until this message is no longer displayed before you start a measurement.
To optimize the display
To optimize the display for the calibration signal, we will adjust the main measurement settings.
1. Set the center frequency to the calibration frequency: a) Tap the "Overview" softkey to display the configuration "Overview". b) Tap the "Frequency" button. c) In the "Center" field, enter 64 on the number pad on the front panel. d) Press the "MHz" key next to the number pad.
2. Reduce the span to 20 MHz: a) In the "Span" field of the "Frequency" dialog box, enter 20 MHz. b) Close the "Frequency" dialog box.
3. Set the reference level to -25 dBm: a) In the configuration "Overview", tap the "Amplitude" button. b) In the "Value" field of the "Amplitude" dialog box, enter -25 dBm.
The display of the calibration signal is now improved. The maximum at the center frequency (=calibration frequency) of 64 MHz becomes visible.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
60
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
Figure 4-9: Calibration signal with optimized display settings
4.4.2 Displaying a Spectrogram
In addition to the standard "level versus frequency" spectrum display, the R&S FSW also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data. A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time. The x-axis shows the frequency, the yaxis shows the time. A third dimension, the power level, is indicated by different colors. Thus you can see how the strength of the signal varies over time for different frequencies.
1. Tap the "Overview" softkey to display the general configuration dialog box. 2. Tap the "Display Config" button.
The SmartGrid mode is activated, and the evaluation bar with the available evaluation methods is displayed. 3.
Drag the "Spectrogram" icon from the evaluation bar to the diagram area. The blue area indicates that the new diagram would replace the previous spectrum display. Since we do not want to replace the spectrum, drag the icon to the lower half of the display to add an additional window instead.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
61
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
Figure 4-10: Adding a Spectrogram to the display
Drop the icon. 4. Close the SmartGrid mode by tapping the "Close" icon at the top right corner of the
toolbar.
You see the spectrogram compared to the standard spectrum display. Since the calibration signal does not change over time, the color of the frequency levels does not change over time, i.e. vertically. The legend at the top of the spectrogram window describes the power levels the colors represent.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
62
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
Figure 4-11: Spectrogram of the calibration signal
4.4.3 Activating Additional Measurement Channels
The R&S FSW features multiple measurement channels, i.e. you can define several measurement configurations in parallel and then switch between the channels automatically to perform the measurements sequentially. We will demonstrate this feature by activating additional measurement channels for a different frequency range, a zero span measurement, and an I/Q analysis.
To activate additional measurement channels 1. Press the [Mode] key on the front panel. 2. On the "New Channel" tab of the "Signal + Spectrum Mode" dialog box, tap the
"Spectrum" button.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
63
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
Figure 4-12: Adding a new measurement channel
3. Change the frequency range for this spectrum display: In the "Frequency" dialog box, set the center frequency to 500 MHz and the span to 1 GHz.
Figure 4-13: Frequency spectrum of the calibration signal with a larger span
4. Repeat the previous steps to activate a third Spectrum window. Change the frequency range for this spectrum display: In the "Frequency" dialog box, set the center frequency to 64 MHz and tap "Zero Span".
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
64
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
As the calibration signal does not vary over time, the level versus time diagram displays a straight line.
Figure 4-14: Time domain display of the calibration signal
5. Create a new channel for I/Q analysis: a) Press the [Mode] key. b) Tap the "IQ Analyzer" button to activate a channel for the I/Q Analyzer application. c) Tap the "Display Config" softkey to activate the SmartGrid mode. d) Drag the "Real/Imag (I/Q)" icon from the evaluation bar to the SmartGrid.
Figure 4-15: Inserting a Real/Imag diagram for I/Q analysis
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
65
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
e) Close the SmartGrid mode. The "IQ Analyzer" channel displays the real and imaginary signal parts in separate windows.
To display the MultiView tab An overview of all active channels is provided in the "MultiView" tab. This tab is always displayed and cannot be closed. Tap the "MultiView" tab.
Figure 4-16: The "MultiView" tab
4.4.4 Performing Sequential Measurements
Although only one measurement can be performed at any one time, the measurements configured in the active channels can be performed sequentially, that means: one after the other, automatically, either once or continuously. 1. Tap the "Sequencer" icon in the toolbar.
2. Toggle the "Sequencer" softkey in the "Sequencer" menu to "On". A continuous sequence is started, i.e. each channel measurement is performed one after the other until the Sequencer is stopped.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
66
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
Figure 4-17: "MultiView" tab with active Sequencer
In Figure 4-17, the "Spectrum 2" measurement is currently active (indicated by the "channel active" icon in the tab label). 3. Stop the Sequencer by tapping the "Sequencer" softkey again.
4.4.5 Setting and Moving a Marker
Markers are useful to determine the position of particular effects in the trace. The most common use is to determine a peak, which is the default setting when you activate a marker. We will set a marker on the peak in our first Spectrum measurement.
1. In the "MultiView" tab, double-tap the "Spectrum" window (frequency sweep with spectrogram display) to return to the "Spectrum" channel.
2. Tap the spectrum display to set the focus on that window. 3. Press the "Split/Maximize" key on the front panel to maximize the spectrum win-
dow, as we currently do not need the spectrogram display. 4. Press the "RUN SINGLE" key on the front panel to perform a single sweep so we
have a fixed trace to set a marker on. 5. Press the [MKR] key on the front panel to display the "Marker" menu.
Marker 1 is activated and automatically set to the maximum of trace 1. The marker position and value is indicated in the diagram area as M1[1].
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
67
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
6. Now you can move the marker by tapping and dragging it to a different position. The current position is indicated by a dotted blue line. Notice how the position and value change in the marker area of the diagram.
4.4.6 Displaying a Marker Peak List
The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum automatically. We will display a marker peak list for the Spectrum 2 channel.
1. Tap the "Spectrum 2" tab.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
68
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
2. Press the "RUN SINGLE" key on the front panel to perform a single sweep for which we will determine the peaks.
3. Tap the "SmartGrid" icon in the toolbar to activate SmartGrid mode.
4. Drag the "Marker Peak List" icon from the evaluation bar to the lower half of the display to add a new window for the peak list.
5. Close the SmartGrid mode.
6. To obtain a more conclusive peak list that does not contain noise peaks, for example, define a threshold that is higher than the noise floor: a) Press the [MKR] key on the front panel. b) Tap the "Marker Config" softkey in the "Marker" menu. c) Tap the "Search" tab in the "Marker" dialog box. d) In the "Threshold" field, enter -68 dBm. e) Tap the "State" box for "Threshold" to activate its use. Only peaks that are larger than -68 dBm will be included in the peak list.
The marker peak list displays the determined peaks that are above the defined threshold.
Figure 4-18: Marker Peak List
4.4.7 Zooming into the Display
To analyze the areas around the peak levels in more detail, we will zoom into the top 3 peaks.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
69
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
1. Tap the "Multiple Zoom" icon in the toolbar.
The icon is highlighted orange to indicate that multiple zoom mode is active.
2. Tap the diagram near the first peak and drag your finger to the opposite corner of the zoom area. A white rectangle is displayed from the point where you tapped to the current position.
Figure 4-19: Defining the zoom area
When you remove your finger, the zoom area is enlarged in a second (sub-)window.
Figure 4-20: Zoomed display around a peak
3. In Figure 4-20, the enlarged peak is represented by a very thick trace. This is due to the insufficient number of sweep points. The missing sweep points for the zoomed display are interpolated, which provides poor results. To optimize the results, we will increase the number of sweep points from the default 1001 to 32001. a) Press the [Sweep] key on the front panel. b) Tap the "Sweep Config" softkey in the "Sweep" menu. c) In the "Sweep Points" field, enter 32001. d) Press the RUN SINGLE key on the front panel to perform a new sweep with the increased number of sweep points.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
70
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
Figure 4-21: Zoomed peak with increased number of sweep points
Note that the trace becomes much more precise. 4. Tap the "Multiple Zoom" icon in the toolbar again and define a zoom area around
markers M4, M5 and M6.
Figure 4-22: Multiple zoom windows
5. Tap the "Multiple Zoom" icon in the toolbar again and define a zoom area around marker M8.
6. To increase the size of the third zoom window, drag the "splitter" between the windows to the left or right or up or down.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
71
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
Figure 4-23: Enlarged zoom window
4.4.8 Zooming into the Display Permanently
The zoomed results from Chapter 4.4.7, "Zooming into the Display", on page 69 were only graphical changes to the display. Now we would like to change the measurement settings such that the zoomed result is maintained permanently. We will demonstrate this in the Spectrum channel.
1. Tap the "Spectrum" tab. 2. Double-tap the diagram close to the peak of the measurement.
A peak marker (M1) is inserted at the detected peak.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
72
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
3. Select the (graphical) zoom icon on the toolbar. Any subsequent touch gestures define the zoom area for the zoom display.
4. Place two fingers on the diagram, to the left and right of the marker, and stretch them apart.
The area around the marker is enlarged in the result display.
5. When the area has the size you require, remove your fingers from the display. The displayed span and the number of displayed sweep points is smaller than before, all other measurement settings remain unchanged.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
73
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
6. Tap the "Measurement Zoom" icon on the toolbar for a second or so.
A context menu with further options is displayed.
7. Select "Adapt Hardware to Zoom (selected diagram)".
The span of the measurement is changed, and due to the automatic coupling of the span to the sweep time, RBW and VBW, those values are also changed. The number of sweep points is restored to the default 1001. The range of the trace is the same as in the graphical zoom. However, due to the smaller RBW filter, the peak is narrower.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
74
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
4.4.9 Saving Settings
To restore the results of our measurements later, we will store the instrument settings to a file.
To save the instrument settings to a file 1. Tap the "Save" icon in the toolbar.
2. Press the keyboard key on the front panel to display the on-screen keyboard, as you will have to enter text in the next step.
3. In the "Save" dialog box, tap the "File Name" field and enter MyMultiViewSetup using the external or onscreen keyboard. Keep the default "File Type" setting "Instrument with all Channels" to store the configuration of all channels.
Figure 4-24: Saving the instrument settings to a file
4. Tap the "Save" button. The file MyMultiViewSetup.dfl is stored in the default directory C:/R_S/ instr/user.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
75
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
To load stored instrument settings You can restore the settings to the instrument at any time using the settings file. 1. Press the [PRESET] button to restore the default instrument settings so you can
check that the stored user settings are actually restored afterwards. 2. Tap the "Load" icon in the toolbar.
3. In the "Load" dialog box, select the MyMultiViewSetup.dfl file in the default directory C:/R_S/instr/user.
4. Tap the "Load" button. All instrument settings are restored and the display should resemble Figure 4-23, which shows the instrument display right before the settings were stored.
4.4.10 Printing and Saving Results
Finally, after a successful measurement, we will document our results. First we will export the numeric trace data, then we will create a screenshot of the graphical display.
To export the trace data 1. Press the [TRACE] key on the front panel. 2. Tap the "Trace Config" softkey. 3. Tap the "Trace Export" tab. 4. Tap the "Export Trace to ASCII File" button. 5. Enter the file name MyPeakResults using the external or onscreen keyboard.
The trace data is stored to MyPeakResults.DAT
To create a screenshot of the display 1. Tap the "Print immediately" icon in the toolbar.
A screenshot of the current display is created. Note that the colors on the screen are inverted in the screenshot to improve printout results. 2. In the "Save Hardcopy as Portable Network Graphics (PNG)" dialog box, enter a file name, e.g. MyPeakDisplay. The screenshot is stored to MyPeakDisplay.png.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
76
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
Figure 4-25: Screenshot of the current display
4.5 Operating the Instrument
This chapter provides an overview on how to work with the R&S FSW.
Remote control In addition to working with the R&S FSW interactively, located directly at the instrument, it is also possible to operate and control it from a remote PC. Various methods for remote control are supported: Connecting the instrument to a (LAN) network Using the web browser interface in a LAN network Using the Windows Remote Desktop application in a LAN network Connecting a PC via the GPIB interface How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in the R&S FSW user manual.
Understanding the Display Information................................................................... 78 Accessing the Functionality.....................................................................................86 Changing the Focus................................................................................................91 Entering Data.......................................................................................................... 92 Touchscreen Gestures............................................................................................ 95 Displaying Results...................................................................................................98 Getting Help.......................................................................................................... 105
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
77
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
4.5.1 Understanding the Display Information
The following figure shows a measurement diagram in Spectrum mode. All different information areas are labeled. They are explained in more detail in the following sections.
1
2
3
5
4
1 = Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 = Window title bar with diagram-specific (trace) information 3 = Diagram area with marker information 4 = Instrument status bar with error messages, progress bar and date/time display 5 = Diagram footer with diagram-specific information, depending on measurement application
Hiding elements in the display You can hide some of the elements in the display, for example the status bar or channel bar, to enlarge the display area for the measurement results. ("Setup > Display > Displayed Items") For details, see the R&S FSW User Manual.
Channel Bar............................................................................................................ 79 Window Title Bar..................................................................................................... 82 Marker Information.................................................................................................. 83 Frequency and Span Information in Diagram Footer.............................................. 84 Instrument and Status Information.......................................................................... 85 Error Information..................................................................................................... 85
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
78
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
4.5.1.1 Channel Bar
Using the R&S FSW you can handle several different measurement tasks (channels) at the same time, although they can only be performed asynchronously. For each channel, a separate tab is displayed on the screen. To switch from one channel display to another, simply select the corresponding tab.
If many tabs are displayed, select the tab selection list icon at the right end of the channel bar. Select the channel you want to switch to from the list.
MultiView tab
An additional tab labeled "MultiView" provides an overview of all active channels at a glance. In the "MultiView" tab, each individual window contains its own channel bar with an additional button. Tap this button, or double-tap in any window, to switch to the corresponding channel display quickly.
Icons in the channel bar
The yellow star icon on the tab label (sometimes referred to as a "dirty flag") indicates that invalid or inconsistent data is displayed, that is: the trace no longer matches the displayed instrument settings. Thiscan happen, for example, when you change the measurement bandwidth, but the displayed trace is still based on the old bandwidth. As soon as a new measurement is performed or the display is updated, the icon disappears.
The icon indicates that an error or warning is available for that measurement channel. This is particularly useful if the MultiView tab is displayed.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
79
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
"IQ" in the channel tab indicates that the results for the channel no longer match the data currently in the capture buffer.
In MSRA mode, the results in an MSRA secondary application no longer match the data captured by the MSRA primary application. The "IQ" disappears after you refresh the results in the outdated application.
For applications using a long capture buffer, this icon appears if you switch channels. The icon disappears after you switch back to the application and perform a new measurement.
The icon indicates the currently active channel during an automatic measurement sequence (Sequencer functionality).
Channel-specific settings
Beneath the channel name, information on channel-specific settings for the measurement is displayed in the channel bar. Channel information varies depending on the active application.
In the Spectrum application, the R&S FSW shows the following settings:
Table 4-6: Channel settings displayed in the channel bar in the Spectrum application
Ref Level
Reference level
m.+el.Att
Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation that has been set.
Ref Offset
Reference level offset
SWT
Sweep time that has been set.
If the sweep time does not correspond to the value for automatic coupling, a bullet is displayed in front of the field. The color of the bullet turns red if the sweep time is set below the value for automatic coupling. In addition, the UNCAL flag is shown. In this case, the sweep time must be increased.
For FFT sweeps, an estimated duration for data capture and processing is indicated behind the sweep time in the channel bar.
Meas Time/AQT
Measurement (acquisition) time, calculated from analysis bandwidth and number of samples (for statistics measurements)
RBW
Resolution bandwidth that has been set.
If the bandwidth does not correspond to the value for automatic coupling, a green bullet appears in front of the field.
VBW
Video bandwidth that has been set.
If the bandwidth does not correspond to the value for automatic coupling, a green bullet is displayed in front of the field.
AnBW
Analysis bandwidth (for statistics measurements)
Compatible
Compatible device mode (FSP, FSU, default; default not displayed)
Mode
Indicates which sweep mode type is selected:
"Auto FFT": automatically selected FFT sweep mode "Auto sweep": automatically selected swept sweep mode "Sweep": manually selected frequency sweep mode "FFT": manually selected FFT sweep mode
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
80
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
Icons for individual settings
A bullet next to the setting indicates that user-defined settings are used, not automatic settings. A green bullet indicates this setting is valid and the measurement is correct. A red bullet indicates an invalid setting that does not provide useful results.
Common settings
The channel bar above the diagram not only displays the channel-specific settings. It also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though it is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values. This information is displayed in gray font and only when applicable for the current measurement, as opposed to the channel-specific settings that are always displayed.
The following types of information are displayed, if applicable.
Table 4-7: Common settings displayed in the channel bar
"SGL"
The sweep is set to single sweep mode.
"Sweep Count"
The current signal count for measurement tasks that involve a specific number of subsequent sweeps
(see "Sweep Count" setting in "Sweep settings" in the User Manual)
"TRG"
Trigger source
(for details see "Trigger settings" in the User Manual) BBP: Baseband power (with Digital Baseband Interface R&S FSW-B17 only) EXT: External GP_0: General purpose bit (with Digital Baseband Interface R&S FSW-B17 only) IFP: IF power (+trigger bandwidth) PSE: Power sensor RFP: RF power SQL: Squelch TIM: Time VID: Video
"6dB"/"RRC"/" Filter type for sweep bandwidth
CHN"
See " Filter Type " on page 341
"PA"/Ext "PA" The preamplifier is activated. / Data compensation is performed using data from the (optional) external preamplifier.
"YIG Bypass" The YIG filter is deactivated.
"GAT"
The frequency sweep is controlled via the TRIGGER INPUT connector.
"TDF"
The specified transducer factor is activated.
"75 "
The input impedance of the instrument is set to 75 .
"FRQ"
A frequency offset 0 Hz is set.
"DC/AC"
DC or AC coupling is used for the input.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
81
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
"ExtMix" <band> "Ext. Gen" <"NOR" | "APX">
"LVL" "Inp: Input 2" "B2000" "B5000"
An external mixer is activated for input (requires option R&S FSW-B21); the used band is also indicated
The R&S FSW is controlling an external generator (requires option R&S FSW-B10). NOR: the measurements are normalized with the results of the external generator calibration APX (approximation): the measurements are normalized with the results of the external generator calibration; however, the measurement settings have been changed since calibration If neither label is displayed, no calibration has been performed yet or normalization is not active. For details, see Chapter 7.2.4, "Optional External Generator Control", on page 377.
A level offset is applied to the external generator signal (only if external generator control is active).
For R&S FSW85 models with two RF input connectors only: the second input connector "RF2" is the current input source for the channel
A connected oscilloscope is being used to acquire data with up to 2 GHz bandwidth (requires bandwidth extension option R&S FSW-B2000)
A connected oscilloscope is being used to acquire data with up to 5 GHz bandwidth (requires bandwidth extension option R&S FSW-B5000)
Changing the Channel Name The measurement channels are labeled with their default name. If that name already exists, a sequential number is added. You can change the name of the measurement channel by double-tapping the name in the channel bar and entering a new name.
For an overview of default names, see INSTrument:LIST? on page 875.
Note: Channel name restrictions. Channel names can have a maximum of 31 characters, and must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names. In particular, they must not contain special characters such as ":", "*", "?".
Remote command: INSTrument:REName on page 877
4.5.1.2 Window Title Bar
Each channel in the R&S FSW display can contain several windows. Each window can display either a graph or a table as a result of the channel measurement. Which type of result evaluation is displayed in which window is defined in the display configuration (see Chapter 4.5.6, "Displaying Results", on page 98). The window title bar indicates which type of evaluation is displayed.
Double-tap the window title bar to enlarge the window temporarily. Double-tap it again to restore the original size. See also Chapter 4.5.6.4, "Switching Between a Split and Maximized Window Display", on page 104.
Trace Information in Window Title Bar Information on the displayed traces is indicated in the window title bar.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
82
R&S�FSW
123 4
5
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
(1) Trace color (2) Trace no. (3) Detector
Color of trace display in diagram
Trace number (1 to 6)
Selected detector:
AP
AUTOPEAK detector
Pk
MAX PEAK detector
Mi
MIN PEAK detector
Sa
SAMPLE detector
Av
AVERAGE detector
Rm
RMS detector
QP
QUASIPEAK detector
(4) Trace Mode (5) Smoothing factor
Clrw Max Min Avg View Smth
Norm/NCor
Sweep mode: CLEAR/WRITE MAX HOLD MIN HOLD AVERAGE (Lin/Log/Pwr) VIEW Smoothing factor, if enabled. (See " Smoothing " on page 587) Correction data is not used.
4.5.1.3 Marker Information
Marker information is provided either in the diagram grid or in a separate marker table, depending on the configuration.
Marker information in diagram grid
Within the diagram grid, the x-axis and y-axis positions of the last two markers or delta markers that were set are displayed, if available, as well as their index. The value in the square brackets after the index indicates the trace to which the marker is assigned. (Example: M2[1] defines marker 2 on trace 1.) For more than two markers, a separate marker table is displayed beneath the diagram by default.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
83
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
Marker information in marker table
In addition to the marker information displayed within the diagram grid, a separate marker table may be displayed beneath the diagram. This table provides the following information for all active markers:
Type Ref Trc X-value Y-value Func Func .Result
Marker type: N (normal), D (delta), T (temporary, internal), PWR (power sensor) Reference (for delta markers) Trace to which the marker is assigned X-value of the marker Y-value of the marker Activated marker or measurement function Result of the active marker or measurement function
The functions are indicated with the following abbreviations:
FXD PHNoise CNT TRK NOIse MDepth TOI
Fixed reference marker Phase noise measurement Signal count Signal tracking Noise measurement AM modulation depth Third order intercept measurement
4.5.1.4 Frequency and Span Information in Diagram Footer
The information in the diagram footer (beneath the diagram) depends on the current application, measurement, and result display.
For a default measurement in the Spectrum mode, the Diagram result display contains the following information, for example:
Label CF Span ms/ Pts
Information Center frequency Frequency span (frequency domain display) Time per division (time domain display) Number of sweep points or (rounded) number of currently displayed points in zoom mode
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
84
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
4.5.1.5 Instrument and Status Information
Global instrument settings and functions, the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram.
In the MultiView tab, the status bar always displays the information for the currently selected measurement. The following information is displayed:
Instrument status
The instrument is configured for operation with an external reference.
IQ 40G
The optional Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B17) is being used for digital input
For details on the Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B17), see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual.
The optional Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B17) is being used to provide digital output.
For details on the Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B17), see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual.
The optional Digital I/Q 40G Streaming Output Connector (R&S FSW-B517) is being used to provide digital output.
For details on the Digital I/Q 40G Streaming Output Connector, see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual.
Progress The progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar.
In the MultiView tab, the progress bar indicates the status of the currently selected measurement, not the measurement a Sequencer is currently performing, for example.
Date and time The date and time settings of the instrument are displayed in the status bar.
4.5.1.6 Error Information
If errors or irregularities are detected, a keyword and an error message, if available, are displayed in the status bar.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
85
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
Depending on the type of message, the status message is indicated in varying colors.
Table 4-8: Status bar information - color coding
Color
Type
Description
Red
Error
An error occurred at the start or during a measurement, e.g. due to missing data or wrong settings, so that the measurement cannot be started or completed correctly.
Orange Warning
An irregular situation occurred during measurement, e.g. the settings no longer match the displayed results, or the connection to an external device was interrupted temporarily.
Gray
Information
Information on the status of individual processing steps.
No color No errors
No message displayed - normal operation.
Green
Measurement Some applications visualize that the measurement was successful by show-
successful
ing a message.
If any error information is available for a channel, an exclamation mark is displayed next to the channel name ( ). This is particularly useful when the MultiView tab is displayed, as the status bar in the MultiView tab always displays the information for the currently selected channel only.
For a description of possible errors, see the R&S FSW user manual.
4.5.2 Accessing the Functionality
All tasks necessary to operate the instrument can be performed using this user interface. Apart from instrument specific keys, all other keys that correspond to an external keyboard (e.g. arrow keys, ENTER key) operate conform to Microsoft.
For most tasks, there are at least 2 alternative methods to perform them:
Using the touchscreen Using other elements provided by the front panel, e.g. the keypad, rotary knob, or
arrow and position keys.
The measurement and instrument functions and settings can be accessed by selecting one of the following elements:
System and function keys on the front panel of the instrument Softkeys on the touchscreen Context menus for specific elements on the touchscreen Icons on the tool bar in the touchscreen Displayed setting on the touchscreen
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
86
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
4.5.2.1 Toolbar
Standard functions can be performed via the icons in the toolbar at thetop of the screen.
You can hide the toolbar display, e.g. when using remote control, to enlarge the display area for the measurement results ("Setup > Display > Displayed Items"). See the R&S FSW User Manual for details.
The following functions are available by default:
Table 4-9: Standard Application Functions in the Toolbar
Icon
Description
Windows: displays the Windows "Start" menu and task bar
Open: opens a file from the instrument ("Save/Recall" menu)
Store: stores data on the instrument ("Save/Recall" menu)
Print: defines print settings ("Print" menu)
Report Menu: Displays the "Report" menu to configure a report. See Chapter 10.6, "Working with Test Reports", on page 669. Undo: reverts last operation
Redo: repeats previously reverted operation
Selection mode: the cursor can be used to select (and move) markers in a zoomed display (This function is only available and required for older instruments that do not support multi-touch gestures.)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
87
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
Icon
Description
Measurement zoom: applies to the next display you select;
Displays a dotted rectangle in the diagram that can be expanded to define the zoom area; the selected diagram is replaced by a new diagram with adapted measurement settings which displays the selected extract of the trace.
Also provides a context menu to determine the firmware behavior for touch gestures: "Level Lock"
(Default:) The reference level (and thus the attenuation) remains unchanged during touch gestures on the screen. "X-Lock" The x-axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch gestures. "Y-Lock" The y-axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch gestures. "Adapt Measurement to Zoom (selected diagram)" Automatically adapts the measurement settings to the currently zoomed display
(Graphical) Zoom mode: applies to the next display you select;
Displays a dotted rectangle in the diagram that can be expanded to define the zoom area; the selected diagram is replaced by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace.
This function changes the behavior of finger gestures such as dragging or stretching a finger (see also "Touch gestures in diagrams change measurement settings" on page 97)
Multiple (graphical) zoom mode: applies to the next display you select;
Allows you to enlarge several different areas of the trace simultaneously.
Displays a dotted rectangle in the diagram that can be expanded to define the zoom area; a subwindow is added to display an enlarged extract of the trace
This function changes the behavior of finger gestures such as dragging or stretching a finger (see also "Touch gestures in diagrams change measurement settings" on page 97)
Zoom off: displays the diagram in its original size
This function only restores graphically zoomed displays. Measurement zooms, for which measurement settings were adapted, remain untouched.
Data shift: Shifts the data to be evaluated in the result display and re-evaluates the new data.
Currently, this function is only available in the Transient Analysis application.
Data zoom: Decreases the amount of data to be evaluated in the result display and re-evaluates the new data, thus enlarging the display of the remaining data.
Currently, this function is only available in the Transient Analysis application.
SmartGrid: activates "SmartGrid" mode to configure the screen layout
Sequencer: opens the "Sequencer" menu to perform consecutive measurements
SCPI Recorder: opens a dialog to record SCPI commands during operation
Event based actions manager: opens a dialog to configure actions based on specific events For details see Chapter 8.7, "Event-based Actions", on page 622.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
88
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
Icon
Description
Application starter: opens a dialog to start an external application directly from the R&S FSW firmware. For details see Chapter 11.3, "Application Starter", on page 706. To return to the R&S FSW window, use the [Alt]+[Tab ] keys.
Help (+ Select): allows you to select an object for which context-specific help is displayed
Help: displays context-sensitive help topic for currently selected element
Report New: Deletes all currently stored datasets and creates a new one. See Chapter 10.6, "Working with Test Reports", on page 669.
Report Append: Adds a new dataset to the existing ones for the next test report. See Chapter 10.6, "Working with Test Reports", on page 669.
Print immediately: prints the current display (screenshot) as configured
In "SmartGrid" mode only: Exit "SmartGrid" mode
4.5.2.2 Softkeys
Softkeys are virtual keys provided by the software. Thus, more functions can be provided than those that can be accessed directly via the function keys on the instrument. Softkeys are dynamic, i.e. depending on the selected function key, a different list of softkeys is displayed on the right side of the screen.
A list of softkeys for a certain function key is also called a menu. Softkeys can either perform a specific function or open a dialog box.
The "More" softkey indicates that the menu contains more softkeys than can be displayed at once on the screen. When pressed, it displays the next set of softkeys.
Recognizing the softkey status by color
Color Orange Blue Gray
Meaning Associated dialog box is open Associated function is active; for toggle keys: currently active state Instrument function is temporarily not available due to a specific setting or missing option
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
89
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
You can hide the softkey display, e.g. when using remote control, to enlarge the display area for the measurement results ("Setup > Display > Displayed Items"). See the User Manual for details.
4.5.2.3 Context Menus
Several items in the diagram area have context menus, such as traces, markers, softkeys, or settings in the channel bar. If you right-click on one of these items (or tap it for about 1 second), a menu is displayed with context-specific menu items for the selected item.
If SCPI Recording is available, the context menu contains a link to the SCPI recorder functions and a link to a help topic for the specific item.
For details, see Chapter 12.4.1, "The Context-Sensitive SCPI Command Menu", on page 815.
Figure 4-26: Context menu for a result display with SCPI Recorder functions
If SCPI Recorder functions are not available, for example for channel bar settings or in some applications, the context menu contains functions for the selected item. These functions correspond to the functions also provided for the item in softkey menus. This is useful, for example, when the softkey display is hidden.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
90
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
Figure 4-27: Context menu for channel bar setting
4.5.2.4 On-screen Keyboard The on-screen keyboard is an additional means of interacting with the instrument without having to connect an external keyboard.
The on-screen keyboard display can be switched on and off as desired using the "OnScreen Keyboard" function key beneath the screen.
When you press this key, the display switches between the following options: Keyboard displayed at the top of the screen Keyboard displayed at the bottom of the screen No keyboard displayed
You can use the TAB key on the on-screen keyboard to move the focus from one field to another in dialog boxes.
4.5.3 Changing the Focus
Any selected function is always performed on the currently focused element in the display, e.g. a dialog field, diagram, or table row. Which element is focused is indicated by
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
91
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
a blue frame (diagram, window, table) or is otherwise highlighted (softkey, marker etc.). Moving the focus is most easily done by tapping on the element on the touchscreen. Alternatively, use the "Tab" key on the on-screen keyboard or the rotary knob to move the focus from one element to the next on the display.
To move the focus between any displayed diagrams or tables in a window, press the "Change focus" key on the front panel. The focus moves from the diagram to the first table to the next table etc. and then back to the diagram, within the same window.
In fullscreen mode, where a single window is displayed in full size on the screen, this key switches the focus (and the display) from one active window to the next.
4.5.4 Entering Data
You can enter data in dialog boxes using any of the following methods:
Using the touchscreen, via the on-screen keyboard Using other elements provided by the front panel, e.g. the keypad, rotary knob, or
navigation keys The rotary knob acts like the [ENTER] key when it is pressed. Using a connected external keyboard
Transparent dialog boxes You can change the transparency of the dialog boxes to see the results in the windows behind the dialog box. Thus, you can see the effects that the changes you make to the settings have on the results immediately. To change the transparency, select the transparency icon at the top of the dialog box. A slider is displayed. To hide the slider, select the transparency icon again.
(The title bar of the dialog box is always slightly transparent and is not affected by the slider.)
Particularities in Windows dialog boxes In some cases, e.g. if you want to install a printer, original Windows dialog boxes are used. In these dialog boxes, the rotary knob and function keys do not work. Use the touchscreen instead.
4.5.4.1 Entering Numeric Parameters
If a field requires numeric input, the keypad provides only numbers.
1. Enter the parameter value using the keypad, or change the currently used parameter value by using the rotary knob (small steps) or the [UP] or [DOWN] keys (large steps).
2. After entering the numeric value via keypad, press the corresponding unit key.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
92
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
The unit is added to the entry.
3. If the parameter does not require a unit, confirm the entered value by pressing the [ENTER] key or any of the unit keys. The editing line is highlighted to confirm the entry.
Digit-based data entry
By default, when you enter a numeric value in an input field, you overwrite the existing value. If you edit the value using the arrow keys or rotary knob, the value is increased or decreased linearly. An extended digit-based data entry mode allows you to edit individual digits and change the unit quickly.
1. In the input field for a numeric value, select the pencil icon to switch to extended data entry mode.
2. Use the left and right arrow keys to scroll through the individual digits of the indicated value.
3. Change the required digit using the up and down arrow keys or the rotary knob to scroll through the values 0 to 9. The new value is applied immediately, without further confirmation. Note: If you enter a digit using the keypad, the entire value is overwritten, as in normal data entry mode. To add a digit to the existing value, you must return to normal data entry mode. Select the pencil icon to toggle between entry modes.
4. To change the unit: a) Press the right arrow key and scroll past the last digit to select the unit list. b) Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the available units. c) Press the left arrow key to return to the last digit of the numeric value. The new unit is applied immediately, without further confirmation.
5. Select the "X" to close the input field.
4.5.4.2 Entering Alphanumeric Parameters
If a field requires alphanumeric input, you can use the on-screen keyboard to enter numbers and (special) characters (see Chapter 4.5.2.4, "On-screen Keyboard", on page 91).
Alternatively, you can use the keypad. Every alphanumeric key represents several characters and one number. The decimal point key (.) represents special characters, and the sign key (-) toggles between capital and small letters. For the assignment, refer to Table 4-10.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
93
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
You can change the default behavior of the keypad for text input. This is useful if you frequently enter numeric values in text fields, for example to define file names consisting of numbers.
For details, see "Number block behavior" on page 748.
To enter numbers and (special) characters via the keypad
1. Press the key once to enter the first possible value.
2. All characters available via this key are displayed.
3. To choose another value provided by this key, press the key again, until your desired value is displayed.
4. With every key stroke, the next possible value of this key is displayed. If all possible values have been displayed, the series starts with the first value again. For information on the series, refer to Table 4-10.
5. To change from capital to small letters and vice versa, press the sign key (-).
6. When you have chosen the desired value, wait for 2 seconds (to use the same key again), or start the next entry by pressing another key.
To enter a blank Press the "Space" bar, or press the "0" key and wait 2 seconds.
To correct an entry 1. Using the arrow keys, move the cursor to the right of the entry you want to delete. 2. Press the [BACKSPACE] key.
The entry to the left of the cursor is deleted. 3. Enter your correction.
To complete the entry Press the [ENTER] key or the rotary knob.
To abort the entry
Press the [ESC] key. The dialog box is closed without changing the settings.
Table 4-10: Keys for alphanumeric parameters
Key name (upper inscription)
Series of (special) characters and number provided
7
7 � � � $ �
8
A B C 8 � �� �
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
94
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
Key name (upper inscription) 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 0 . �
Series of (special) characters and number provided
D E F 9 � G H I 4 J K L 5 M N O 6 � P Q R S 1 T U V 2 � W X Y Z 3 <blank> 0 � @ + / \ < > = % & . * : _ , ; " ' ? ( ) # <toggles between capital and small letters>
4.5.5 Touchscreen Gestures
A touchscreen allows you to interact with the software using various finger gestures on the screen. The basic gestures supported by the software and most applications are described here. Further actions using the same gestures may be possible.
Tapping
Touch the screen quickly, usually on a specific element.
You can tap most elements on the screen; in particular, any elements you can also click on with a mouse pointer.
Figure 4-28: Tapping
Double-tapping Tap the screen twice, in quick succession. Double-tap a diagram or the window title bar to maximize a window in the display, or to restore the original size. Dragging Move your finger from one position to another on the display, keeping your finger on the display the whole time.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
95
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
By dragging your finger over a table or diagram you can pan the displayed area of the table or diagram to show results that were previously out of view.
Figure 4-29: Dragging
Pinching and spreading two fingers
Move two fingers together on the display (pinch) or move two fingers apart on the display (spread).
When you pinch two fingers in the display, you decrease the size of the currently displayed area, showing the surrounding areas previously out of view.
When you spread two fingers in the display, you increase the size of the currently displayed area, showing more details.
You can pinch or spread your fingers vertically, horizontally, or diagonally. The direction in which you move your fingers determines which dimension of the display is changed.
Figure 4-30: Pinching
Figure 4-31: Spreading
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
96
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
Touch gestures in diagrams change measurement settings
When you change the display using touch gestures, the corresponding measurement settings are adapted. This is different to selecting an area on the screen in zoom mode, where merely the resolution of the displayed trace points is changed temporarily (graphical zoom).
For example: Dragging horizontally in a spectrum display changes the center frequency. Dragging vertically in a power vs frequency (spectrum) or power vs. time display
changes the reference level (for absolute scaling) or the min and max power values (for relative scaling). Dragging horizontally in a time domain display changes the trigger offset value (if available, not in free run). Spreading or pinching a spectrum display changes the center frequency and span (horizontal) or reference level and range (vertical), or a combination of these settings (diagonal). Spreading or pinching a time domain display changes the sweep time and trigger offset (horizontal) or reference level position and range (vertical), or a combination of these settings (diagonal).
You can prevent the firmware from changing specific settings using the options in the context menu for the measurement zoom icon. By default, the reference level is locked and thus not changed automatically due to touch gestures.
(See "Measurement Zoom" on page 510).
Mouse vs. touch actions
Any user interface elements that react to actions by a mouse pointer also react to finger gestures on the screen, and vice versa. The following touch actions correspond to mouse actions:
Table 4-11: Correlation of mouse and touch actions
Mouse operation
Touch operation
Click
Tap
Double-click
Double-tap
Click and hold
Touch and hold
Right-click
Touch, hold for 1 second and release
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
97
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
Mouse operation
Touch operation
Drag-&-drop (= click and hold, then drag and release)
Touch, then drag and release
n.a. (Change hardware settings)
Spread and pinch two fingers
Mouse wheel to scroll up or down
Swipe
Dragging scrollbars to scroll up or down, left or right Swipe
In (graphical) Zoom mode only: dragging the borders of the displayed rectangle to change its size
Touch, then drag and release
Example:
You can scroll through a long table in conventional mouse operation by clicking in the table's scrollbar repeatedly. In touch operation, you would scroll through the table by dragging the table up and down with your finger.
4.5.6 Displaying Results
The R&S FSW provides several instrument applications for different analysis tasks and different types of signals, e.g. 3G FDD, I/Q analysis or basic spectrum analysis. For each application, a new measurement channel is created and displayed in a separate tab on the screen.
The results of a measurement channel can be evaluated in many different ways, both graphically and numerically. For each evaluation method the results are displayed in a separate window in the tab.
The R&S FSW allows you to configure the display to suit your specific requirements and optimize analysis.
4.5.6.1 Activating and Deactivating Channels
When you activate an application, a new measurement channel is created which determines the measurement settings for that application. The same application can be activated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application. Whenever you switch channels, the corresponding measurement settings are restored. Each channel is displayed in a separate tab on the screen.
An additional tab ("MultiView") provides an overview of all currently active channels at once.
Only one measurement can be performed at any time, namely the one in the currently active channel. However, in order to perform the configured measurements consecutively, a Sequencer function is provided.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
98
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
To start a new channel 1. Select the [Mode] key. 2. In the "Mode" dialog box, select the required application on the "New Channel" tab.
A new tab is displayed for the new channel.
Remote command: INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] on page 873/ INSTrument:CREate:DUPLicate on page 873
To change the application in an active channel 1. Select the tab of the channel you want to change. 2. Select the [Mode] key. 3. In the "Mode" dialog box, select the new application to be displayed on the
"Replace Current Channel" tab. The selected application is displayed in the current channel.
Remote command: INSTrument:CREate:REPLace on page 874
To close a measurement channel
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
99
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
Select the "Close" icon on the tab of the measurement channel.
The tab is closed, any running measurements are aborted, and all results for that channel are deleted.
Remote command:
INSTrument:DELete on page 874
4.5.6.2 Laying out the Result Display with the SmartGrid
Measurement results can be evaluated in many different ways, for example graphically, as summary tables, statistical evaluations etc. Each type of evaluation is displayed in a separate window in the channel tab. Up to 16 individual windows can be displayed per channel (i.e. per tab). To arrange the diagrams and tables on the screen, the Rohde & Schwarz SmartGrid function helps you find the target position simply and quickly.
Principally, the layout of the windows on the screen is based on an underlying grid, the SmartGrid. However, the SmartGrid is dynamic and flexible, allowing for many different layout possibilities. The SmartGrid functionality provides the following basic features:
Windows can be arranged in columns or in rows, or in a combination of both. Windows can be arranged in up to four rows and four columns. Windows are moved simply by dragging them to a new position on the screen, pos-
sibly changing the layout of the other windows, as well. All evaluation methods available for the currently selected measurement are dis-
played as icons in the evaluation bar. If the evaluation bar contains more icons than can be displayed at once on the screen, it can be scrolled vertically. The same evaluation method can be displayed in multiple windows simultaneously. New windows are added by dragging an evaluation icon from the evaluation bar to the screen. The position of each new window depends on where you drop the evaluation icon in relation to the existing windows. All display configuration actions are only possible in SmartGrid mode. When SmartGrid mode is activated, the evaluation bar replaces the current softkey menu display. When the SmartGrid mode is deactivated again, the previous softkey menu display is restored.
Background Information: The SmartGrid Principle................................................100 How to Activate SmartGrid Mode..........................................................................102 How to Add a New Result Window....................................................................... 102 How to Close a Result Window.............................................................................103 How to Arrange the Result Windows.................................................................... 103
Background Information: The SmartGrid Principle
SmartGrid display
During any positioning action, the underlying SmartGrid is displayed. Different colors and frames indicate the possible new positions. The position in the SmartGrid where you drop the window determines its position on the screen.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
100
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
Figure 4-32: Moving a window in SmartGrid mode
The brown area indicates the possible "drop area" for the window, i.e. the area in which the window can be placed. A blue area indicates the (approximate) layout of the window as it would be if the icon were dropped at the current position. The frames indicate the possible destinations of the new window with respect to the existing windows: above/below, right/left or replacement (as illustrated in Figure 4-33). If an existing window would be replaced, the drop area is highlighted in a darker color shade.
Positioning the window
The screen can be divided into up to four rows. Each row can be split into up to four columns, where each row can have a different number of columns. However, rows always span the entire width of the screen and may not be interrupted by a column. A single row is available as the drop area for the window in the SmartGrid. The row can be split into columns, or a new row can be inserted above or below the existing row (if the maximum of 4 has not yet been reached).
1 A
B
2
3
2
3
2
C 1
Figure 4-33: SmartGrid window positions
1 = Insert row above or below the existing row 2 = Create a new column in the existing row 3 = Replace a window in the existing row
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
101
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
SmartGrid functions Once the evaluation icon has been dropped, icons in each window provide delete and move functions. The "Move" icon allows you to move the position of the window, possibly changing the size and position of the other displayed windows.
The "Delete" icon allows you to close the window, enlarging the display of the remaining windows.
How to Activate SmartGrid Mode All display configuration actions are only possible in SmartGrid mode. In SmartGrid mode the evaluation bar replaces the current softkey menu display. When the SmartGrid mode is deactivated again, the previous softkey menu display is restored.
To activate SmartGrid mode, do one of the following:
Select the "SmartGrid" icon from the toolbar. Select the "Display Config" button in the configuration "Overview" . Select the "Display Config" softkey from the [Meas Config] menu.
The SmartGrid functions and the evaluation bar are displayed.
To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu select the "Close" icon in the right-hand corner of the toolbar, or press any key.
How to Add a New Result Window
Each type of evaluation is displayed in a separate window. Up to 16 individual windows can be displayed per channel (i.e. per tab).
1. Activate SmartGrid mode. All evaluation methods available for the currently selected measurement are displayed as icons in the evaluation bar.
2. Select the icon for the required evaluation method from the evaluation bar. If the evaluation bar contains more icons than can be displayed at once on the screen, it can be scrolled vertically. Touch the evaluation bar between the icons and move it up or down until the required icon appears.
3. Drag the required icon from the evaluation bar to the SmartGrid, which is displayed in the diagram area, and drop it at the required position. (See "How to Arrange the Result Windows" on page 103 for more information on positioning the window).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
102
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
Remote command: LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 1069 / LAYout:WINDow<n>:ADD? on page 1073 How to Close a Result Window
To close a window, activate SmartGrid mode and select the "Delete" icon for the window.
Remote command: LAYout:REMove[:WINDow] on page 1071 / LAYout:WINDow<n>:REMove on page 1074 How to Arrange the Result Windows
1. Select an icon from the evaluation bar or the "Move" icon for an existing evaluation window.
2. Drag the evaluation over the SmartGrid. A blue area shows where the window will be placed.
3. Move the window until a suitable area is indicated in blue. 4. Drop the window in the target area.
The windows are rearranged to the selected layout, and "Delete" and "Move" icons are displayed in each window. 5. To close a window, select the corresponding "Delete" icon.
Remote command:
LAYout:REPLace[:WINDow] on page 1071 / LAYout:WINDow<n>:REPLace on page 1074
LAYout:MOVE[:WINDow] on page 1071
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
103
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
4.5.6.3 Changing the Size of Windows
Each channel tab may contain several windows to evaluate the measurement results using different methods. A "splitter" allows you to change the size of neighboring windows.
The splitters are not available in SmartGrid mode.
To change the size of two neighboring windows, drag the splitter between the windows in either direction.
4.5.6.4 Switching Between a Split and Maximized Window Display
To get an overview of the results, displaying several windows at the same time may be helpful. However, the individual windows may become rather small. In this case it is useful to maximize an individual window to the entire screen temporarily in order to analyze the results in more detail.
To switch between a split and a maximized display without having to close and re-open windows, press the [SPLIT/MAXIMIZE] key on the front panel. In maximized display, the currently focused window is maximized. In split display, all active windows are displayed. Alternatively, double-tap the title bar of a window to maximize it.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
104
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
4.5.6.5 Changing the Display
The display can be optimized for your individual needs. The following display functions are available and are described in detail in Chapter 11.2, "Display Settings", on page 693 and Chapter 8, "Common Analysis and Display Functions", on page 501.
Displaying a simulation of the entire front panel of the instrument on the screen ("Front Panel")
Displaying the main function hardkeys in a separate window on the screen ("Mini Front Panel")
Hiding or showing various screen elements Selecting a display theme and colors Changing the display update rate Activating or deactivating the touch-sensitivity of the screen Zooming into the diagram
4.5.7 Getting Help
If any questions or problems concerning the R&S FSW arise, an extensive online help system is provided on the instrument and can be consulted at any time. The help system is context-sensitive and provides information specifically for the current operation or setting to be performed. In addition, general topics provide an overview on complete tasks or function groups as well as background information.
The online help can be opened at any time by selecting one of the "Help" icons on the toolbar or by pressing the [F1] key on an external or the on-screen keyboard.
To call context-sensitive help
To display the "Help" dialog box for the currently focused screen element, e.g. a softkey or a setting in an opened dialog box, select the "Help" icon on the toolbar.
The "Help" dialog box "View" tab is displayed. A topic containing information about the focused screen element is displayed. If no context-specific help topic is available, a more general topic or the "Content" tab is displayed.
For standard Windows dialog boxes (e.g. File Properties, Print dialog etc.), no contextsensitive help is available.
To display a help topic for a screen element not currently focused 1. Select the "Help pointer" icon on the toolbar.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
105
R&S�FSW
Getting Started Operating the Instrument
The pointer changes its shape to a "?" and an arrow.
2. Select the screen element to change the focus.
A topic containing information about the selected (now focused) screen element is displayed.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
106
R&S�FSW
Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes
5 Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes
The R&S FSW allows you to perform all sorts of different analysis tasks on different types of signals, e.g. W-CDMA, I/Q analysis or basic spectrum analysis. Depending on the task or type of signal, a different set of measurement functions and parameters are required. Therefore, the R&S FSW provides various applications - some of which are included in the base unit, others are optional. The default application when you start the R&S FSW is "Spectrum", for basic spectrum analysis measurements on any type of signal.
For each application, a separate measurement channel is created, which determines the measurement settings for that application. The same application can be activated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application. Each channel is displayed in a separate tab on the screen.
The maximum number of measurement channels may be limited by the available memory on the instrument.
By default, each application operates independently of the others, measuring and analyzing its own distinct data. However, the R&S FSW also provides other operating modes, in which the individual applications are correlated and analyze the same set of data.
Signal and Spectrum Analyzer Mode
With the conventional R&S FSW Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode, you can perform several different measurements almost simultaneously. However, the individual measurements are independent of each other - each application captures and evaluates its own set of data, regardless of what the other applications do.
In some cases it may be useful to analyze the exact same input data using different applications. For example, imagine capturing data from a base station and analyzing the RF spectrum in the Analog Demodulation application. If a spur or an unexpected peak occurs, you may want to analyze the same data in the I/Q Analyzer to see the real and imaginary components of the signal and thus detect the reason for the irregular signal. Normally when you switch to a different application, evaluation is performed on the data that was captured by that application, and not the previous one. In our example that would mean the irregular signal would be lost. Therefore, a second operating mode is available in the R&S FSW: Multi-Standard Radio Analyzer (MSRA) mode.
Multi-Standard Radio Analyzer mode
In Multi-Standard Radio Analyzer (MSRA) mode, data acquisition is performed once as an I/Q measurement in a primary application, and the captured data is then evaluated by any number of secondary applications for different radio standards. Data acquisition and global configuration settings are controlled globally, while the evaluation and display settings can be configured individually for each secondary application.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
107
R&S�FSW
Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes Available Applications
Using the Multi-Standard Radio Analyzer, unwanted correlations between different signal components using different transmission standards can be detected. Thus, for example, an irregularity in a GSM burst can be examined closer in the R&S FSW 3G FDD BTS (W-CDMA) secondary application to reveal dependencies like a change in the EVM value.
Multi-Standard Real-Time mode
In order to combine the advantages of the MSRA mode with its correlated measurements and the gapless results and frequency mask provided by real-time measurements, a third operating mode has been introduced: the Multi-Standard Real-Time (MSRT) mode. This operating mode is only available if one of the real-time options (R&S FSW-K160RE/-B160R/-B512R/-U160R/-U512R) is installed.
In this operating mode, data acquisition is performed once as a real-time measurement, and the captured data is then evaluated by any number of secondary applications. Thus, a real-time measurement triggered with a frequency mask can be performed, and the results can be evaluated in the VSA secondary application, for example, to detect the cause of a frequency exception.
Distinct operating modes
Although the applications themselves are identical in all operating modes, the handling of the data between applications is not. Thus, the operating mode determines which secondary applications are available and active. Whenever you change the operating mode, the currently active measurement channels are closed. The default operating mode is Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode; however, the presetting can be changed.
Remote command:
INST:MODE SAN, see INSTrument:MODE on page 876
Switching between secondary applications
When you switch to a new secondary application, a set of parameters is passed on from the current secondary application to the new one: center frequency and frequency offset reference level and reference level offset attenuation
After initial setup, the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re-entering the channel. Thus, you can switch between secondary applications quickly and easily.
5.1 Available Applications
Access: [MODE]
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
108
R&S�FSW
Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes Available Applications
The R&S FSW provides some applications in the base unit while others are available only if the corresponding firmware options are installed. Not all R&S FSW applications are supported in MSRA/MSRT mode.
For details on the MSRT operating mode, see the R&S FSW Real-Time Spectrum Application and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual.
Spectrogram application Spectrogram measurements are not a separate application, but rather a trace evaluation method, thus they are available as an evaluation method for the Display Configuration, not by creating a new channel. Spectrograms are configured and activated in the "Trace" settings. See Chapter 8.5.2.1, "Working with Spectrograms", on page 590 for details.
Trial licenses The trial license allows you to use further optional applications that require a separate license from Rohde & Schwarz. It is pre-installed at the factory on request. If enabled, you can use additional applications for a limited period of time (90 days from factory installation). Applications with trial licenses are indicated by a special tag:
Currently, the following options are included in the trial license: R&S FSW-K6: "Pulse Measurements" on page 114 R&S FSW-K7: "AM/FM/PM Modulation Analysis" on page 112 R&S FSW-K17: "(Multi-Carrier) Group Delay" on page 113 R&S FSW-K18: "Amplifier" on page 112 R&S FSW-K19: Chapter 6.5, "Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement",
on page 212 (no separate application, part of Spectrum application) R&S FSW-K30: "Noise Figure" on page 114 R&S FSW-K40: "Phase Noise" on page 114 R&S FSW-K50: "Fast Spur Search" on page 115 R&S FSW-K54: Chapter 6.13, "Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement",
on page 325 (no separate application, part of Spectrum application) R&S FSW-K60: "Transient Analysis" on page 115 R&S FSW-K70: "Vector Signal Analysis (VSA)" on page 116 R&S FSW-K544: Chapter 11.5, "Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-
K544)", on page 725 (no separate application, available in several applications)
For more information on the trial license see Chapter 11.7.2, "Information on Versions and Options", on page 742.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
109
R&S�FSW
Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes
Available Applications
Spectrum..................................................................................................................... 110 1xEV-DO BTS..............................................................................................................110 1xEV-DO MS............................................................................................................... 111 3G FDD BTS................................................................................................................111 3G FDD UE..................................................................................................................111 5G NR..........................................................................................................................111 802.11ad...................................................................................................................... 111 802.11ay...................................................................................................................... 112 Amplifier.......................................................................................................................112 AM/FM/PM Modulation Analysis..................................................................................112 Avionics....................................................................................................................... 112 cdma2000 BTS............................................................................................................112 cdma2000 MS............................................................................................................. 113 (Multi-Carrier) Group Delay......................................................................................... 113 GSM............................................................................................................................ 113 I/Q Analyzer.................................................................................................................113 LTE.............................................................................................................................. 113 NB-IoT......................................................................................................................... 113 Noise Figure................................................................................................................ 114 OneWeb...................................................................................................................... 114 Phase Noise................................................................................................................ 114 Pulse Measurements...................................................................................................114 Real-Time Spectrum....................................................................................................114 Fast Spur Search.........................................................................................................115 TD-SCDMA BTS..........................................................................................................115 TD-SCDMA UE............................................................................................................115 Transient Analysis....................................................................................................... 115 Verizon 5GTF Measurement Application (V5GTF)......................................................115 Vector Signal Analysis (VSA)...................................................................................... 116 WLAN.......................................................................................................................... 116 DOCSIS 3.1.................................................................................................................116
Spectrum In the Spectrum application the provided functions correspond to those of a conventional spectrum analyzer. The analyzer measures the frequency spectrum of the RF input signal over the selected frequency range with the selected resolution and sweep time, or, for a fixed frequency, displays the waveform of the video signal. This application is used in the initial configuration.
For details see Chapter 6, "Measurements and Results", on page 124.
Remote command: INST:SEL SAN, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
1xEV-DO BTS The 1xEV-DO BTS application requires an instrument equipped with the 1xEV-DO BTS Measurements option, R&S FSW-K84. This application provides test measurements for 1xEV-DO BTS downlink signals (base station signals) according to the test specification.
For details see the R&S FSW-K84/-K85 User Manual.
For details see the R&S FSW-K84 User Manual.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
110
R&S�FSW
Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes
Available Applications
Remote command: INST:SEL BDO, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
1xEV-DO MS The 1xEV-DO MS application requires an instrument equipped with the 1xEV-DO MS Measurements option, R&S FSW-K85. This application provides test measurements for 1xEV-DO MS uplink signals (mobile signals) according to the test specification. For details see the R&S FSW-K84/-K85 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL MDO, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
3G FDD BTS The 3G FDD BTS application requires an instrument equipped with the 3GPP Base Station Measurements option, R&S FSW-K72. This application provides test measurements for W-CDMA downlink signals (base station signals) according to the test specification. For details see the R&S FSW-K72/-K73 User Manual. For details see the R&S FSW-K72 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL BWCD, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
3G FDD UE The 3G FDD UE application requires an instrument equipped with the 3GPP User Equipment Measurements option, R&S FSW-K73. This application provides test measurements for W-CDMA uplink signals (mobile signals) according to the test specification. For details see the R&S FSW-K72/-K73 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL MWCD, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
5G NR The 5G NR application requires an instrument equipped with one of the 5G NR Measurements options. The R&S FSW-K144 application provides 5G NR measurements on the downlink. The R&S FSW-K145 application provides 5G NR measurements on the uplink. For details see the user manuals for the 5G NR downlink and uplink measurement application. Remote command: INST:SEL NR5G, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
802.11ad The 802.11ad application requires an instrument equipped with the 802.11ad option, R&S FSW-K95. This application provides measurements and evaluations according to the IEEE 802.11 ad standard. For details see the R&S FSW-K95/-K97 User Manual.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
111
R&S�FSW
Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes
Available Applications
Remote command: INST:SEL WIGIG, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
802.11ay The 802.11ay application requires an instrument equipped with the 802.11ay option, R&S FSW-K97. This application provides measurements and evaluations according to the IEEE 802.11 ay standard. For details see the R&S FSW-K95/-K97 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL EDMG, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
Amplifier The Amplifier Measurement application requires an instrument equipped with the Amplifier Measurement option R&S FSW-K18. This application provides measurements to measure the efficiency of traditional amplifiers and amplifiers that support envelope tracking with the R&S FSW. Also available is option R&S FSW-K18D, which provides direct DPD functionality. For details see the R&S FSW-K18 User Manual (also contains information about R&S FSW-K18D. Remote command: INST:SEL AMPL, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
AM/FM/PM Modulation Analysis The AM/FM/PM Modulation Analysis application requires an instrument equipped with the corresponding optional software. This application provides measurement functions for demodulating AM, FM, or PM signals. For details see the R&S FSW-K7 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL ADEM, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
Avionics The Avionics application requires an instrument equipped with the corresponding optional software. This application provides measurement functions for measuring avionics (ILS/VOR) signals. For details see the R&S FSW-K15 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL AVIONICS, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
cdma2000 BTS The cdma2000 BTS application requires an instrument equipped with the cdma2000 BTS Measurements option, R&S FSW-K82. This application provides test measurements for cdma2000 BTS downlink signals (base station signals) according to the test specification. For details see the R&S FSW-K82/-K83 User Manual. For details see the R&S FSW-K82 User Manual.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
112
R&S�FSW
Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes
Available Applications
Remote command: INST:SEL BC2K, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
cdma2000 MS The cdma2000 MS application requires an instrument equipped with the cdma2000 MS Measurements option, R&S FSW-K83. This application provides test measurements for cdma2000 MS uplink signals (mobile signals) according to the test specification. For details see the R&S FSW-K82/-K83 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL MC2K, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
(Multi-Carrier) Group Delay The Group Delay application requires an instrument equipped with the Multi-Carrier Group Delay Measurements option R&S FSW-K17. This application provides a MultiCarrier Group Delay measurement. For details see the R&S FSW-K17 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL MCGD, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
GSM The GSM application requires an instrument equipped with the GSM Measurements option R&S FSW-K10. This application provides GSM measurements. For details see the R&S FSW-K10 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL GSM, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
I/Q Analyzer The I/Q Analyzer application provides measurement and display functions for I/Q data. For details see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL IQ, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
LTE The LTE application requires an instrument equipped with the LTE Measurements option R&S FSW-K10x. This application provides LTE measurements. For details see the user manuals for the LTE downlink and uplink measurement application. Remote command: INST:SEL LTE, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
NB-IoT The NB-IoT application requires an instrument equipped with the NB-IoT measurements option R&S FSW-K106. This application provides NB-IoT measurements in the downlink. For details see the R&S FSW-K106 (NB-IoT Downlink) User Manual.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
113
R&S�FSW
Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes
Available Applications
Remote command: INST:SEL NIOT, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
Noise Figure The Noise Figure application requires an instrument equipped with the Noise Figure Measurements option R&S FSW-K30. This application provides noise figure measurements. For details see the R&S FSW-K30 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL NOISE, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
OneWeb The OneWeb application requires an instrument equipped with the OneWeb measurements option R&S FSW-K201. This application provides OneWeb reverse link measurements. For details see the R&S FSW-K201 (OneWeb Reverse Link Measurements) User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL OWEB, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
Phase Noise The Phase Noise application requires an instrument equipped with the Phase Noise Measurements option, R&S FSW-K40. This application provides measurements for phase noise tests. For details see the R&S FSW-K40 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL PNOISE, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
Pulse Measurements The Pulse application requires an instrument equipped with the Pulse Measurements option, R&S FSW-K6. This application provides measurement functions for pulsed signals. For details see the R&S FSW-K6 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL PULSE, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
Real-Time Spectrum The Real-Time Spectrum application requires an instrument equipped with the RealTime Spectrum option, (R&S FSW-B160R/-K160RE/-U160R). This application provides real-time measurement functions. For details see the R&S FSW Real-Time User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL RTIM, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
114
R&S�FSW
Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes
Available Applications
Fast Spur Search The Fast Spur Search application requires an instrument equipped with the Fast Spur Search option, R&S FSW-K50. This application provides measurements and evaluations for spurious signal effects. For details see the R&S FSW-K50 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL SPUR, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
TD-SCDMA BTS The TD-SCDMA BTS application requires an instrument equipped with the TD-SCDMA Base Station Measurements option, R&S FSW-K76. This application provides test measurements for TD-SCDMA downlink signals (base station signals) according to the test specification. For details see the R&S FSW-K76/-K77 User Manual. For details see the R&S FSW-K76 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL BTDS, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
TD-SCDMA UE The TD-SCDMA UE application requires an instrument equipped with the TD-SCDMA User Equipment Measurements option, R&S FSW-K77. This application provides test measurements for TD-SCDMA uplink signals (mobile signals) according to the test specification. For details see the R&S FSW-K76/-K77 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL MTDS, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
Transient Analysis The Transient Analysis application requires an instrument equipped with the Transient Analysis option, R&S FSW-K60. This application provides measurements and evaluations for Transient Analysis. For details see the R&S FSW-K60 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL TA, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
Verizon 5GTF Measurement Application (V5GTF) The Verizon 5GTF measurement application requires an instrument equipped with the V5GTF option, R&S FSW-K118/K119. This application provides measurements and evaluations for uplink and downlink signals according to the Verizon 5G technical forum (TS V5G.211 standard). For details see the R&S FSW-K118/-K119 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL V5GT, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
115
R&S�FSW
Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes
R&S MultiView
Vector Signal Analysis (VSA) The VSA application requires an instrument equipped with the Vector Signal Analysis option, R&S FSW-K70. This application provides measurements and evaluations for single-carrier digitally modulated signals. For details see the R&S FSW-K70 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL DDEM, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
WLAN The WLAN application requires an instrument equipped with the WLAN option, R&S FSW-K91/91n. This application provides measurements and evaluations according to the WLAN IEEE 802.11 standards. For details see the R&S FSW-K91 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL WLAN, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
DOCSIS 3.1 The DOCSIS 3.1 application requires an instrument equipped with the DOCSIS 3.1 option, R&S FSW-K192. This application provides measurements and evaluations according to the DOCSIS 3.1 standard. For details see the R&S FSW-K192 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL DOCS, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
5.2 R&S MultiView
Each application is displayed in a separate tab. An additional tab ("MultiView") provides an overview of all currently active channels at a glance. In the "MultiView" tab, each individual window contains its own channel bar with an additional button. Select this button to switch to the corresponding channel display quickly.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
116
R&S�FSW
Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes Selecting the Operating Mode and Applications
Remote command: DISPlay:FORMat on page 1068
5.3 Selecting the Operating Mode and Applications
Access: [MODE] The default operating mode is Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode, however, the presetting can be changed (see " Preset Mode " on page 746).
The default application in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode is a Spectrum measurement.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
117
R&S�FSW
Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes
Selecting the Operating Mode and Applications
Switching between applications
When you switch to a new application, a set of parameters is passed on from the current application to the new one: center frequency and frequency offset reference level and reference level offset attenuation
After initial setup, the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re-entering the channel. Thus, you can switch between applications quickly and easily.
Switching the operating mode..................................................................................... 118 Selecting an application.............................................................................................. 118
New Channel.................................................................................................118 Replace Current Channel..............................................................................118 Duplicate Current Channel ...........................................................................119 Closing an application................................................................................................. 119
Switching the operating mode To switch the operating mode, select the corresponding tab. Remote command: INSTrument:MODE on page 876
Selecting an application To start a new or replace an existing application, select the corresponding button in the correct tab. Note: The measurement channels are labeled with their default name. If that name already exists, a sequential number is added. You can change the name of the measurement channel by double-tapping the name in the channel bar and entering a new name. For an overview of default names see INSTrument:LIST? on page 875. Remote command: INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
New Channel Selecting an application The applications selected on this tab are started in a new measurement channel, i.e. a new tab in the display. Remote command: INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] on page 873 INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877
Replace Current Channel Selecting an application The applications selected on this tab are started in the currently displayed measurement channel, replacing the current application. Remote command: INSTrument:CREate:REPLace on page 874
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
118
R&S�FSW
Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes Running a Sequence of Measurements
Duplicate Current Channel Selecting an application The currently active channel can be duplicated, i.e. a new channel of the same type and with the identical measurement settings is started. The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel, extended by a consecutive number (e.g. "Spectrum" > "Spectrum 2" ). This command is not available if the MSRA primary channel is selected. Remote command: INSTrument:CREate:DUPLicate on page 873
Closing an application To close an application, simply close the corresponding tab by selecting the "x" next to the channel name. Remote command: INSTrument:DELete on page 874
5.4 Running a Sequence of Measurements
Only one measurement can be performed at any time, namely the one in the currently active channel. However, in order to perform the configured measurements consecutively, a Sequencer function is provided.
The Sequencer function is slightly different in MSRA or MSRT operating mode. For details see the R&S FSW MSRA User Manual or the R&S FSW Real-Time Spectrum Application and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual.
The Sequencer Concept....................................................................................... 119 Sequencer Settings...............................................................................................121 How to Set Up the Sequencer...............................................................................122
5.4.1 The Sequencer Concept
The instrument can only activate one specific channel at any time. Thus, only one measurement can be performed at any time, namely the one in the currently active channel. However, in order to perform the configured measurements consecutively, a Sequencer function is provided, which changes the channel of the instrument as required. If activated, the measurements configured in the currently defined "Channel" s are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs.
For each individual measurement, the sweep count is considered. Thus, each measurement may consist of several sweeps. The currently active measurement is indicated by a symbol in the tab label.
The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs as the measurements are performed. Sequential operation itself is independent of the currently displayed tab.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
119
R&S�FSW
Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes Running a Sequence of Measurements
Sequencer modes
Three different Sequencer modes are available:
Single Sequence Similar to single sweep mode; each measurement is performed once, until all measurements in all defined "Channel" s have been performed.
Continuous Sequence Similar to continuous sweep mode; the measurements in each defined "Channel" are performed one after the other, repeatedly, in the same order, until sequential operation is stopped. This is the default Sequencer mode.
Channel-defined Sequence First, a single sequence is performed. Then, only "Channel" s in continuous sweep mode are repeated continuously.
Example: Sequencer procedure Assume the following active channel definition:
Tab name Spectrum Spectrum 2
Application Spectrum Spectrum
Sweep mode Cont. Sweep Single Sweep
Sweep count 5 6
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
120
R&S�FSW
Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes Running a Sequence of Measurements
Tab name
Application
Sweep mode
Sweep count
Spectrum 3
Spectrum
Cont. Sweep
2
IQ Analyzer
IQ Analyzer
Single Sweep
7
For Single Sequence, the following sweeps will be performed: 5x Spectrum, 6x Spectrum 2, 2 x Spectrum 3, 7x IQ Analyzer For Continuous Sequence, the following sweeps will be performed: 5x Spectrum, 6x Spectrum 2, 2 x Spectrum 3, 7x IQ Analyzer, 5x Spectrum, 6x Spectrum 2, 2 x Spectrum 3, 7x IQ Analyzer, ... For Channel-defined Sequence, the following sweeps will be performed: 5x Spectrum, 6x Spectrum 2, 2 x Spectrum 3, 7x IQ Analyzer, 5x Spectrum, 2 x Spectrum 3, 5x Spectrum, 2 x Spectrum 3, ...
Run Single/Run Cont and Single Sweep/Sweep Continuous keys
While the Sequencer is active, the [Run Single] and [Run Cont] keys control the Sequencer, not individual sweeps. [Run Single] starts the Sequencer in single mode, while [Run Cont] starts the Sequencer in continuous mode.
The "Single Sweep" and "Continuous Sweep" softkeys control the sweep mode for the currently selected channel only; the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel, and only for a channel-defined sequence. In this case, a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer. A channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly.
5.4.2 Sequencer Settings
The "Sequencer" menu is available from the toolbar.
Sequencer in MSRA/MSRT mode In MSRA/MSRT operating mode and in the Real-Time Spectrum Application, the Sequencer behaves slightly differently. For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R&S FSW MSRA User Manual. For details on the MSRT operating mode and the Real-Time Spectrum application see the R&S FSW Real-Time Spectrum Application and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual.
Sequencer State ........................................................................................................ 121 Sequencer Mode ........................................................................................................122
Sequencer State Activates or deactivates the Sequencer. If activated, sequential operation according to the selected Sequencer mode is started immediately.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
121
R&S�FSW
Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes Running a Sequence of Measurements
Remote command: SYSTem:SEQuencer on page 880 INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate on page 879 INITiate:SEQuencer:ABORt on page 878
Sequencer Mode Defines how often which measurements are performed. The currently selected mode softkey is highlighted blue. During an active Sequencer process, the selected mode softkey is highlighted orange.
"Single Sequence" Each measurement is performed once, until all measurements in all active channels have been performed.
"Continuous Sequence" The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other, repeatedly, in the same order, until sequential operation is stopped. This is the default Sequencer mode.
"Channel Defined Sequence" First, a single sequence is performed. Then, only channels in continuous sweep mode are repeated. Channel-defined sequence is not available in Multi-Standard RealTime (MSRT) operating mode.
Remote command: INITiate:SEQuencer:MODE on page 879
5.4.3 How to Set Up the Sequencer
In order to perform the configured measurements consecutively, a Sequencer function is provided.
1. Configure a channel for each measurement configuration as required, including the sweep mode.
2. In the toolbar, select the "Sequencer" icon.
The "Sequencer" menu is displayed.
3. Toggle the "Sequencer" softkey to "On" . A continuous sequence is started immediately.
4. To change the Sequencer mode and start a new sequence immediately, select the corresponding mode softkey, or press the [Run Single] or [Run Cont] key.
The measurements configured in the currently active channels are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs until the Sequencer is stopped.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
122
R&S�FSW
Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes Running a Sequence of Measurements
The result displays in the individual channels are updated as the measurements are performed.
To stop the Sequencer To stop the Sequencer temporarily, press the highlighted [Run Single] or [Run
Cont] key (not for a channel-defined sequence). To continue the Sequencer, press the key again. To stop the Sequencer permanently, select the "Sequencer" icon in the toolbar and toggle the "Sequencer" softkey to "Off" .
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
123
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
6 Measurements and Results
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement"
Or: [MEAS]
In the Spectrum application, the R&S FSW provides a variety of different measurement functions.
Basic measurements - measure the spectrum of your signal or watch your signal in time domain
Power measurements - calculate the powers involved in modulated carrier signals Emission measurements - detect unwanted signal emission Statistic measurements - evaluate the spectral distribution of the signal Special measurements - provide characteristic values of the signal EMI measurements - detect electromagnetic interference in the signal
The individual functions are described in detail in the following chapters.
Trial licenses The trial license allows you to use further optional measurements that require a separate license from Rohde & Schwarz. It is pre-installed at the factory on request. If enabled, you can use additional measurements for a limited period of time (90 days from factory installation). Measurements with trial licenses are indicated by a special tag:
Currently, the following measurements are included in the trial license: R&S FSW-K19: Chapter 6.5, "Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement",
on page 212 R&S FSW-K54: Chapter 6.13, "Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement",
on page 325
For more information on the trial license see Chapter 11.7.2, "Information on Versions and Options", on page 742.
The measurement function determines which settings, functions and evaluation methods are available in the R&S FSW. The various measurement functions are described in detail here.
When you select a measurement function, the measurement is started with its default settings immediately and the corresponding measurement configuration menu is displayed. The measurement configuration menu can be displayed at any time by pressing the [MEAS CONFIG] key.
The easiest way to configure measurements is using the configuration "Overview" , see Chapter 7.1, "Configuration Overview", on page 351.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
124
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Basic Measurements
In addition to the measurement-specific parameters, the general parameters can be configured as usual, see Chapter 7, "Common Measurement Settings", on page 351. Many measurement functions provide special result displays or evaluation methods; however, in most cases the general evaluation methods are also available, see Chapter 8, "Common Analysis and Display Functions", on page 501.
After a preset, and when all other functions are switched off ("All Functions Off" in the "Select Measurement" dialog) the R&S FSW performs a basic frequency sweep.
The remote commands required to retrieve measurement results are described in Chapter 13.8.2.4, "Retrieving Trace Results", on page 1195.
Measurements on I/Q-based data The I/Q Analyzer secondary application (not primary) in MSRA mode can also perform measurements on the captured I/Q data in the time and frequency domain. The measurements are configured using the same settings as described here for the Spectrum application. The results, however, may differ slightly as hardware settings are not adapted automatically as for the Spectrum application. Additionally, the analysis interval used for the measurement is indicated as in all MSRA applications. For more information see the R&S FSW MSRA User Manual.
Basic Measurements.............................................................................................125 Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement..................145 Carrier-to-Noise Measurements............................................................................202 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW).......................................................... 206 Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement.............................................................. 212 Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement................................................... 229 Spurious Emissions Measurement........................................................................274 Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF)............................................................... 287 Time Domain Power Measurement.......................................................................301 Harmonic Distortion Measurement........................................................................306 Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement............................................................ 312 AM Modulation Depth Measurement.....................................................................322 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement............................................... 325
6.1 Basic Measurements
Basic measurements are common sweeps in the time or frequency domain which provide an overview of the basic input signal characteristics.
If no other measurement function is selected, or if all measurement functions are switched off, the R&S FSW performs a basic frequency or time sweep.
After a preset, a frequency sweep is performed.
Use the general measurement settings to configure the measurement, e.g. via the "Overview" (see Chapter 7, "Common Measurement Settings", on page 351).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
125
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
6.1.1 Basic Measurement Types
Frequency Sweep ...................................................................................................... 126 Zero Span .................................................................................................................. 126 All Functions Off .........................................................................................................126
Frequency Sweep A common frequency sweep of the input signal over a specified span. Can be used for general purposes to obtain basic measurement results such as peak levels and spectrum traces. The "Frequency" menu is displayed. This is the default measurement if no other function is selected.
Use the general measurement settings to configure the measurement, e.g. via the "Overview" (see Chapter 7, "Common Measurement Settings", on page 351).
Remote command: [SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt on page 1135, [SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP on page 1135 INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 885 INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884
Zero Span A sweep in the time domain at the specified (center) frequency, i.e. the frequency span is set to zero. The display shows the time on the x-axis and the signal level on the yaxis, as on an oscilloscope. On the time axis, the grid lines correspond to 1/10 of the current sweep time.
Use the general measurement settings to configure the measurement, e.g. via the "Overview" (see Chapter 7, "Common Measurement Settings", on page 351).
Most result evaluations can also be used for zero span measurements, although some functions (e.g. markers) may work slightly differently and some may not be available. If so, this will be indicated in the function descriptions (see Chapter 8, "Common Analysis and Display Functions", on page 501).
Remote command: [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN on page 1135 INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 885 INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884
All Functions Off Switches off all measurement functions and returns to a basic frequency sweep.
Selecting "Frequency Sweep" has the same effect.
6.1.2 How to Perform a Basic Sweep Measurement
The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to perform basic sweep measurements.
For remote operation, see Chapter 13.15.1, "Programming Example: Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep", on page 1455.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
126
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
To perform one or more single sweeps
1. Configure the frequency and span to be measured ( "Frequency" dialog box, see Chapter 7.3, "Frequency and Span Configuration", on page 439).
2. Configure the number of sweeps to be performed in a single measurement ( "Sweep Config" dialog box, see " Sweep/Average Count " on page 469).
3. If necessary, configure how the signal is processed internally ( "Bandwidth" dialog box, see " Sweep Type " on page 471).
4. If necessary, configure a trigger for the measurement ( "Trigger/ Gate Config" dialog box, see Chapter 7.6, "Trigger and Gate Configuration", on page 475).
5. Define how the results are evaluated for display ( "Trace" dialog box, see Chapter 8.5.1.2, "Trace Settings", on page 585).
6. If necessary, configure the vertical axis of the display ( "Amplitude" dialog box, see Chapter 7.4, "Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration", on page 447).
7. To start the measurement, select one of the following: [RUN SINGLE] key "Single Sweep" softkey in the "Sweep" menu The defined number of sweeps are performed, then the measurement is stopped. While the measurement is running, the [RUN SINGLE] key is highlighted. To abort the measurement, press the [RUN SINGLE] key again. The key is no longer highlighted. The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started.
8. To repeat the same number of sweeps without deleting the last trace, select the "Continue Single Sweep" softkey in the "Sweep" menu.
To start continuous sweeping
1. If you want to average the trace or search for a maximum over more (or less) than 10 sweeps, configure the "Sweep/Average Count" ( "Sweep Config" dialog box, see " Sweep/Average Count " on page 469).
2. To start the measurement, select one of the following: [RUN CONT] key "Continuous Sweep" softkey in the "Sweep" menu After each sweep is completed, a new one is started automatically. While the measurement is running, the [RUN CONT] key is highlighted. To stop the measurement, press the [RUN CONT] key again. The key is no longer highlighted. The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started.
6.1.3 Measurement Examples - Measuring a Sinusoidal Signal
One of the most common measurement tasks that can be handled using a signal analyzer is determining the level and frequency of a signal. When measuring an unknown signal, you can usually start with the presettings.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
127
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
High input values
If levels higher than +30 dBm (=1 W) are expected or are possible, a power attenuator must be inserted before the RF input of the analyzer. Otherwise, signal levels exceeding 30 dBm can damage the RF attenuator or the input mixer. The total power of all occurring signals must be taken into account.
Test setup Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R&S FSW.
Table 6-1: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW)
Frequency
128 MHz
Level
-30 dBm
Measuring the Level and Frequency Using Markers.............................................128 Measuring the Signal Frequency Using the Signal Counter................................. 130
6.1.3.1 Measuring the Level and Frequency Using Markers
The level and frequency of a sinusoidal signal can be measured easily using the marker function. The R&S FSW always displays its amplitude and frequency at the marker position. The frequency measurement uncertainty is determined by the reference frequency of the R&S FSW, the resolution of the marker frequency display and the number of sweep points.
1. Select [PRESET] to reset the instrument.
2. Connect the signal to be measured to the "RF INPUT" connector on the R&S FSW.
3. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz.
4. Reduce the frequency span to 1 MHz.
Note: Coupled settings. When the frequency span is defined, the resolution bandwidth, the video bandwidth and the sweep time are automatically adjusted, because these functions are defined as coupled functions in the presettings.
5. Select [MKR] to activate marker 1 and automatically set it to the maximum of the trace.
The level and frequency values measured by the marker are displayed in the marker information at the top of the display. Note: Performing a peak search. When a marker is initially activated, it automatically performs the peak search function (as shown in the example). If a marker was already active, select the [Peak Search] key or the "Peak" softkey in the [MKR >] menu in order to set the currently active marker to the maximum of the displayed signal.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
128
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
Increasing the Frequency Resolution The frequency resolution of the marker is determined by the resolution of the trace. A trace consists of 1001 trace points, i.e. if the frequency span is 1 MHz, each trace point represents a span of approximately 1 kHz. This corresponds to a maximum uncertainty of +/- 0.5 kHz. You can increase the resolution of the trace by reducing the frequency span.
Reducing the frequency span to 10 kHz Reduce the frequency span to 10 kHz.
The resolution of the trace is now approximately 10 Hz (10 kHz span / 1001 trace points), thus, the precision of the marker frequency display increases to approximately �5 Hz.
Setting the Reference Level The reference level is the level at the upper limit of the diagram. To achieve the widest dynamic range possible for a spectrum measurement, use the entire level span of the R&S FSW. In other words, the highest level that occurs in the signal should be located at the top edge of the diagram ( = reference level) or immediately below it.
Low Reference Levels If the selected reference level is lower than the highest signal that occurs in the spectrum, the signal path in the R&S FSW is overloaded. In this case, the message "IFOVL" is displayed in the error message field.
In the presettings, the value of the reference level is 0 dBm. If the input signal is -30 dBm, the reference level can be reduced by 30 dB without causing the signal path to be overloaded.
Reducing the reference level by 30 dB Set the reference level to -30 dBm.
The maximum of the trace is near the maximum of the measurement diagram. The increase in the displayed noise is not substantial. Thus, the distance between the signal maximum and the noise display (=dynamic range) has increased.
Setting the reference level with the help of a marker You can also use a marker to shift the maximum value of the trace directly to the top edge of the diagram. If the marker is located at the maximum level of the trace (as in this example), the reference level can be moved to the marker level as follows: 1. Press the [MKR ->] key.
2. Select "Ref Lvl = Mkr Lvl" . The reference level is set to the current marker level.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
129
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
6.1.3.2 Measuring the Signal Frequency Using the Signal Counter
The built-in signal counter allows you to measure the frequency more accurately than measuring it with the marker. The frequency sweep is stopped at the marker, and the R&S FSW measures the frequency of the signal at the marker position (see also Chapter 8.3.4.1, "Precise Frequency (Signal Count) Marker", on page 533).
In the following example, the frequency of the generator at 128 MHz is shown using the marker.
Prerequisite
Precise frequency measurements require a precise reference frequency. Therefore, an external reference frequency from the signal generator is used. Connect the signal generator's "Ref OUT" connector to the analyzer's "Ref IN" connector.
1. Select [PRESET] to reset the instrument.
2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz.
3. Set the frequency span to 1 MHz.
4. Select "Setup" > "Reference" > "External Reference 10 MHz" to activate the external reference frequency.
5. Select [MKR] to activate marker 1 and automatically set it to the maximum of the trace. The level and the frequency of the marker are displayed in the marker results in the diagram or the marker table.
6. Select [MKR FUNC] > "Signal Count" to activate the signal counter. The result of the signal counter is displayed in the marker results.
7. If necessary, increase the resolution of the signal counter by selecting "Signal Count Resolution" (in the "Signal Count" menu).
Prerequisites for using the internal signal counter In order to obtain a correct result when measuring the frequency with the internal signal counter, an RF sinusoidal signal or a spectral line must be available. The marker must be located more than 25 dB above the noise level to ensure that the specified measurement accuracy is adhered to.
6.1.4 Measurement Example � Measuring Levels at Low S/N Ratios
The minimum signal level a signal analyzer can measure is limited by its intrinsic noise. Small signals can be swamped by noise and therefore cannot be measured. For signals that are just above the intrinsic noise, the accuracy of the level measurement is influenced by the intrinsic noise of the R&S FSW.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
130
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
The displayed noise level of a signal analyzer depends on its noise figure, the selected RF attenuation, the selected reference level, the selected resolution and video bandwidth and the detector.
For details see: Chapter 7.4.1.2, "RF Attenuation", on page 449 Chapter 7.4.1.1, "Reference Level", on page 448 Chapter 7.5.1.1, "Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Band-
width", on page 459 Chapter 7.5.1.2, "Smoothing the Trace Using the Video Bandwidth", on page 460 "Mapping Samples to sweep Points with the Trace Detector" on page 576
This measurement example shows the different factors influencing the S/N ratio.
Table 6-2: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW)
Frequency
128 MHz
Level
-95 dBm
1. Preset the R&S FSW.
2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz. 3. Set the span to 100 MHz. 4. Set the reference level to -30 dBm.
The signal is measured with the auto peak detector and is completely hidden in the intrinsic noise of the R&S FSW.
Figure 6-1: Sine wave signal with low S/N ratio
5. To suppress noise spikes, average the trace. In the "Traces" configuration dialog, set the "Trace Mode" to "Average" (see " Trace Mode " on page 586).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
131
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
The traces of consecutive sweeps are averaged. To perform averaging, the R&S FSW automatically switches on the sample detector. The RF signal, therefore, can be more clearly distinguished from noise.
Figure 6-2: RF sine wave signal with low S/N ratio with an averaged trace
6. Instead of trace averaging, you can select a video filter that is narrower than the resolution bandwidth. Set the trace mode back to "Clear/ Write" , then set the VBW to 10 kHz manually in the "Bandwidth" configuration dialog. The RF signal can be distinguished from noise more clearly.
Figure 6-3: RF sine wave signal with low S/N ratio with a smaller video bandwidth
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
132
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
7. By reducing the resolution bandwidth by a factor of 10, the noise is reduced by 10 dB. Set the RBW to 100 kHz.
The displayed noise is reduced by approximately 10 dB. The signal, therefore, emerges from noise by about 10 dB. Compared to the previous setting, the video bandwidth has remained the same, i.e. it has increased relative to the smaller resolution bandwidth. The averaging effect of the video bandwidth is therefore reduced. The trace will be noisier.
Figure 6-4: Reference signal at a smaller resolution bandwidth
6.1.5 Measurement Examples - Measuring Signal Spectra with Multiple Signals
Separating Signals by Selecting the Resolution Bandwidth................................. 133 Measuring the Modulation Depth of an AM-Modulated Carrier in the Frequency
Domain..................................................................................................................137 Measuring AM-Modulated Signals........................................................................ 138
6.1.5.1 Separating Signals by Selecting the Resolution Bandwidth
A basic feature of a Signal and Spectrum Analyzer is the ability to separate the spectral components of a mixture of signals. The resolution at which the individual components can be separated is determined by the resolution bandwidth. Selecting a resolution bandwidth that is too large may make it impossible to distinguish between spectral components, i.e. they are displayed as a single component (see also Chapter 7.5.1.1, "Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth", on page 459). Two signals with the same amplitude can be resolved if the resolution bandwidth is smaller than or equal to the frequency spacing of the signal. If the resolution bandwidth is equal to the frequency spacing, the spectrum display shows a level drop of 3 dB pre-
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
133
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
cisely in the center of the two signals. Decreasing the resolution bandwidth makes the level drop larger, which thus makes the individual signals clearer. In this measurement example we will analyze two signals with a level of -30 dBm each and a frequency spacing of 30 kHz.
Figure 6-5: Test setup
Table 6-3: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW)
Level
Signal generator 1
-30 dBm
Signal generator 2
-30 dBm
Frequency 128,00 MHz 128,03 MHz
1. Select [PRESET] to reset the instrument.
2. Set the center frequency to 128.015 MHz.
3. Set the frequency span to 300 kHz.
4. Set the resolution bandwidth to 30 kHz and the video bandwidth to 1 kHz.
Note: Larger video bandwidths. The video bandwidth is set to 1 kHz in order to make the level drop in the center of the two signals clearly visible. At larger video bandwidths, the video voltage that results from envelope detection is not sufficiently suppressed. This produces additional voltages, which are visible in the trace, in the transition area between the two signals.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
134
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
Figure 6-6: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with the resolution bandwidth which corresponds to the frequency spacing of the signals
Matching generator and R&S FSW frequencies The level drop is located exactly in the center of the display only if the generator frequencies match the frequency display of the R&S FSW exactly. To achieve exact matching, the frequencies of the generators and the R&S FSW must be synchronized.
5. Set the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz.
It is no longer possible to clearly distinguish the two generator signals.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
135
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
Figure 6-7: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with a resolution bandwidth which is larger than their frequency spacing
6. Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 kHz.
The two generator signals are shown with high resolution. However, the sweep time becomes longer. At smaller bandwidths, the noise display decreases simultaneously (10 dB decrease in noise floor for a decrease in bandwidth by a factor of 10).
Figure 6-8: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with a resolution bandwidth (1 kHz) which is significantly smaller than their frequency spacing
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
136
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
6.1.5.2 Measuring the Modulation Depth of an AM-Modulated Carrier in the Frequency Domain
In the frequency range display, the AM side bands can be resolved with a narrow bandwidth and measured separately. The modulation depth of a carrier modulated with a sinusoidal signal can then be measured. Since the dynamic range of a signal analyzer is very large, extremely small modulation depths can also be measured precisely. For this purpose, the R&S FSW provides measurement routines that output the modulation depth numerically in percent directly.
Figure 6-9: Test setup
Table 6-4: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW)
Frequency
128 MHz
Level
-30 dBm
Modulation
50 % AM, 10 kHz AF
1. Select [PRESET] to reset the instrument.
2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz.
3. Set the frequency span to 50 kHz.
4. Select [MEAS] > "AM Modulation Depth" to activate the modulation depth measurement. The R&S FSW automatically sets a marker to the carrier signal in the center of the diagram and one delta marker each to the upper and lower AM sidebands. The R&S FSW calculates the AM modulation depth from the level differences of the delta markers to the main marker and outputs the numeric value in the marker information.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
137
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
Figure 6-10: Measurement of the AM modulation depth
The modulation depth is displayed as "MDepth" . The frequency of the AF signal can be obtained from the frequency display of the delta marker.
6.1.5.3 Measuring AM-Modulated Signals
The R&S FSW rectifies the RF input signal (that is, removes the negative parts) and displays it as a magnitude spectrum. The rectification also demodulates AM-modulated signals. The AF voltage can be displayed in zero span if the modulation sidebands fall within the resolution bandwidth. Displaying the AF of an AM-modulated signal (Zero Span)
Figure 6-11: Test setup
Table 6-5: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW)
Frequency
128 MHz
Level
-30 dBm
Modulation
50 % AM, 1 kHz AF
1. Select [PRESET] to reset the instrument.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
138
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz.
3. Set the frequency span to 0 Hz or select "Zero Span" .
4. Set the sweep time to 2.5 ms.
5. Set the RBW to 3 MHz.
6. Set the reference level to -24 dBm and the display range to linear ([AMPT] > "Scale Config" > "Scaling" : "Linear Percent" ).
7. Set the scaling unit to Volt ([AMPT] > "Amplitude Config" > "Unit": "V").
8. Define triggering in response to the AF signal using the video trigger to produce a static image. a) Press the [TRIG] key. b) Select "Video" . c) Set the "Trg/Gate Level" to 50%. The trigger level is displayed as a horizontal line across the entire measurement diagram. The R&S FSW displays the 1 kHz AF signal as a static image in zero span.
Figure 6-12: Measurement of the AF signal of a carrier that is AM-modulated with 1 kHz
9. Activate the internal AM demodulator to output the audio signal. a) Press the [MKR FUNC] key.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
139
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
b) Select "Marker Demodulation" . The R&S FSW automatically switches on the AM audio demodulator. A 1 kHz tone can be heard over headset (via the PHONES connector). If necessary, use the volume control to turn up the volume.
6.1.6 Measurement Examples in Zero Span
For radio transmission systems that use the TDMA method (for example, GSM), transmission quality is determined not only by spectral characteristics but also by characteristics in zero span. A timeslot is assigned to each user since several users share the same frequency. Smooth operation is ensured only if all users adhere exactly to their assigned timeslots. Both the power during the send phase as well as the timing and duration of the TDMA burst, and rise and fall times of the burst, are important. Measuring the Power Characteristic of Burst Signals........................................... 140 Measuring the Signal-to-Noise Ratio of Burst Signals.......................................... 144
6.1.6.1 Measuring the Power Characteristic of Burst Signals
To measure power in zero span, the R&S FSW offers easy-to-use functions that measure the power over a predefined time.
Measuring the Power of a GSM Burst During the Activation Phase
Figure 6-13: Test setup
Table 6-6: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW)
Frequency
890 MHz
Level
0 dBm
Modulation
GSM, one timeslot activated
1. Select [PRESET] to reset the instrument. 2. Set the center frequency to 890 MHz ([FREQ]). 3. Set the frequency span to 0 Hz ([SPAN] > "Zero Span" ). 4. Set the reference level to 10 dBm (= level of the signal generator +10 dB) (AMPT). 5. Set the attenuation to 20 dB ([AMPT] > "RF Atten Manual" ). 6. Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz ([BW] > "Res BW" ).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
140
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
7. Set the sweep time to 1 ms ([SWEEP] > "Sweep Time Manual" ).
The R&S FSW shows the GSM burst continuously across the display.
8. Using the video trigger, set triggering on the rising edge of the burst.
a) Press the [TRIG] key. b) Set the "Trg Source" to "Video" . c) Set the "Trg/Gate Level" to 70%.
The R&S FSW shows a static image with the GSM burst at the start of the trace. The trigger level is displayed as a horizontal line labeled with the absolute level for the trigger threshold in the measurement diagram.
9. Activate power measurement within the activation phase of the burst in zero span.
a) Press the [MEAS] key. b) Select "Time Domain Power" . c) Select "Time Dom Power Config" . d) Set the "Limits" state to "On" . e) Select the "Left Limit" input field. f) By turning the rotary knob clockwise, move the vertical line "S1" to the start of
the burst. g) Select the "Right Limit" input field. h) By turning the rotary knob clockwise, move the vertical line "S2" to the end of
the burst.
The R&S FSW displays the average (mean) power during the activation phase of the burst.
Figure 6-14: Measurement of the average power during the burst of a GSM signal
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
141
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
Measuring the Edges of a GSM Burst with High Time Resolution Due to the high time resolution of the R&S FSW at the 0 Hz display range, the edges of TDMA bursts can be measured precisely. The edges can be shifted to the display area using the trigger offset.
Figure 6-15: Test setup
Table 6-7: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW)
Frequency
890 MHz
Level
0 dBm
Modulation
GSM, one timeslot activated
The measurement is based on the example "Measuring the Power of a GSM Burst During the Activation Phase" on page 140.
1. Switch off the power measurement.
a) Press the [MEAS] key. b) Select "Zero Span".
2. Increase the time resolution by setting the sweep time to 100 �s ([SWEEP] > "Sweep Time Manual" ).
3. Shift the rising edge of the GSM burst to the center of the display by defining a trigger offset.
a) Press the [TRIG] key. b) Select "Trigger Offset" .
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
142
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
c) By turning the rotary knob counterclockwise, reduce the trigger offset until the burst edge is displayed in the center of the display, or enter -50 �s. The R&S FSW displays the rising edge of the GSM burst.
Figure 6-16: Rising edge of the GSM burst displayed with high time resolution
4. Move the falling edge of the burst to the center of the display. To do so, switch the trigger "Slope" to "Falling" ([TRIG] > "Trigger/ Gate Config" ). The R&S FSW displays the falling edge of the GSM burst.
Figure 6-17: Falling edge of the GSM burst displayed with high time resolution
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
143
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Basic Measurements
6.1.6.2 Measuring the Signal-to-Noise Ratio of Burst Signals
When TDMA transmission methods are used, the signal-to-noise ratio or the dynamic range for deactivation can be measured by comparing the power values during the activation phase and the deactivation phase of the transmission burst. Therefore, the R&S FSW provides a measurement for absolute and relative power in zero span. In the following example, the measurement is performed using a GSM burst.
Signal-to-Noise Ratio of a GSM Signal
Figure 6-18: Test setup
Table 6-8: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW)
Frequency
890 MHz
Level
0 dBm
Modulation
GSM, one time slot is switched on
1. Select [PRESET] to reset the instrument.
2. Set the center frequency to 890 MHz.
3. Set the frequency span to 0 Hz.
4. Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz.
5. Set the reference level to 0 dBm (= level of the signal generator).
6. Set the sweep time to 2 ms ([SWEEP] > "Sweep Time Manual" ).
The R&S FSW shows the GSM burst continuously across the display.
7. Use the trigger source "Video" and the trigger slope "Rising" to trigger on the rising edge of the burst and shift the start of the burst to the center of the display (see step 3 in "Measuring the Edges of a GSM Burst with High Time Resolution" on page 142).
8. Activate power measurement within the activation phase of the burst in zero span. a) Press the [MEAS] key. b) Select "Time Domain Power" . c) Select "Time Dom Power Config" . d) Set the "Limits" state to "On" . e) Select the "Left Limit" input field. f) By turning the rotary knob clockwise, move the vertical line "S1" to the start of the burst. g) Select the "Right Limit" input field.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
144
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
h) By turning the rotary knob clockwise, move the vertical line "S2" to the end of the burst.
i) Note down the power result for the burst, indicated by the "TD Pow RMS" result in the marker table.
9. Measure the power during the deactivation phase of the burst by switching the trigger slope to "Falling" ([TRIG] > "Trigger/ Gate Config" ).
The R&S FSW initiates triggering in response to the falling edge of the burst. This shifts the burst to the left-hand side of the measurement diagram. The power is measured in the deactivation phase.
Figure 6-19: Measurement of the signal-to-noise ratio of a GSM burst signal in zero span
10. Note down the power result for the measured noise, indicated by the "TD Pow RMS" result in the marker table. Subtract the measured noise power from the burst power to obtain the signal-tonoise ratio of the burst signal.
6.2 Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Measuring the power in channels adjacent to the carrier or transmission channel is useful to detect interference. The results are displayed as a bar chart for the individual channels. About Channel Power Measurements.................................................................. 146 Channel Power Results.........................................................................................146 Channel Power Basics.......................................................................................... 149 Channel Power Configuration............................................................................... 162
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
145
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
MSR ACLR Configuration..................................................................................... 171 How to Perform Channel Power Measurements...................................................188 Measurement Examples....................................................................................... 193 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement.............................................. 199 Reference: Predefined CP/ACLR Standards........................................................ 200 Reference: Predefined ACLR User Standard XML Files...................................... 201
6.2.1 About Channel Power Measurements
Measuring channel power and adjacent channel power is one of the most important tasks during signal analysis with the necessary test routines in the field of digital transmission. Theoretically, a power meter could be used to measure channel power at highest accuracy. However, its low selectivity means that it is not suitable for measuring adjacent channel power as an absolute value or relative to the transmit channel power. Only a selective power meter can measure the power in the adjacent channels.
A signal analyzer cannot be classified as a true power meter, because it displays the IF envelope voltage. However, it is calibrated such as to display the power of a pure sine wave signal correctly, irrespective of the selected detector. This calibration cannot be applied for non-sinusoidal signals. Assuming that the digitally modulated signal has a Gaussian amplitude distribution, the signal power within the selected resolution bandwidth can be obtained using correction factors. The internal power measurement routines in a signal analyzer normally use these correction factors to determine the signal power from IF envelope measurements. These factors apply if and only if the assumption of a Gaussian amplitude distribution is correct.
Apart from this common method, the R&S FSW also has a true power detector, i.e. an RMS detector. It displays the power of the test signal within the selected resolution bandwidth correctly, irrespective of the amplitude distribution, without additional correction factors being required.
The R&S FSW software allows you to perform ACLR measurements on input containing multiple signals for different communication standards. A measurement standard is provided that allows you to define multiple discontiguous transmit channels at specified frequencies, independent from the selected center frequency. The ACLR measurement determines the power levels of the individual transmit, adjacent, and gap channels, as well as the total power for each sub block of transmit channels.
A detailed measurement example is provided in Chapter 6.2.7, "Measurement Examples", on page 193.
6.2.2 Channel Power Results
For channel or adjacent-channel power measurements, the individual channels are indicated by different colored bars in the diagram. The height of each bar corresponds to the measured power of that channel. In addition, the name of the channel ( "Adj" , "Alt %1" , "Tx %1" , etc., or a user-defined name) is indicated above the bar (separated by a line which has no further meaning).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
146
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
For "Fast ACLR" measurements, which are performed in the time domain, the power versus time is shown for each channel.
Multi-standard radio (MSR) channel power results The channel power results for MSR signals are described in Chapter 6.2.3.4, "Measurement on Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Signals", on page 156.
Results are provided for the TX channel and the number of defined adjacent channels above and below the TX channel. If more than one TX channel is defined, you must specify the channel to which the relative adjacent-channel power values refer. By default, it is the TX channel with the maximum power.
Table 6-9: Measurements performed depending on the number of adjacent channels
Number Measurement results of adj. chan.
0
Channel powers
1
Channel powers
Power of the upper and lower adjacent channel
2
Channel powers
Power of the upper and lower adjacent channel
Power of the next higher and lower channel (alternate channel 1)
3
Channel powers
Power of the upper and lower adjacent channel
Power of the next higher and lower channel (alternate channel 1)
Power of the second next higher and lower adjacent channel (alternate channel 2)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
147
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Number Measurement results of adj. chan.
...
...
12
Channel powers
Power of the upper and lower adjacent channel
Power of all the higher and lower channels (alternate channels 1 to 11)
In the R&S FSW display, only the first neighboring channel of the carrier (TX) channel is labeled "Adj" (adjacent) channel; all others are labeled "Alt" (alternate) channels. In this manual, "Adjacent" refers to both adjacent and alternate channels.
The measured power values for the TX and adjacent channels are also output as a table in the Result Summary window. Which powers are measured depends on the number of configured channels.
For each channel, the following values are displayed:
Label Channel
Bandwidth Offset
Power (Lower/Upper)
Description
Channel name as specified in the "Channel Settings" (see " Channel Names " on page 171).
Configured channel bandwidth (see " Channel Bandwidth " on page 168)
Offset of the channel to the TX channel (configured channel spacing, see " Channel Bandwidth " on page 168)
The measured power values for the TX and lower and upper adjacent channels. The powers of the transmission channels are output in dBm or dBm/Hz, or in dBc, relative to the specified reference TX channel.
Retrieving Results via Remote Control
All or specific channel power measurement results can be retrieved using the CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? command from a remote computer (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 886). Alternatively, the results can be output as channel power density, i.e. in reference to the measurement bandwidth.
Furthermore, the measured power values of the displayed trace can be retrieved as usual using the TRAC:DATA? commands (see TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1196). In this case, the measured power value for each sweep point (by default 1001) is returned.
For a full list of remote commands for ACLR measurements, see Chapter 13.5.3.9, "Retrieving and Analyzing Measurement Results", on page 938.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
148
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
6.2.3 Channel Power Basics
Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in channel power measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings.
Measurement Methods......................................................................................... 149 Measurement Repeatability.................................................................................. 151 Recommended Common Measurement Parameters............................................152 Measurement on Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Signals........................................ 156
6.2.3.1 Measurement Methods
The channel power is defined as the integration of the power across the channel bandwidth.
The Adjacent Channel Leakage Power Ratio (ACLR) is also known as the Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR). It is defined as the ratio between the total power of the adjacent channel to the power of the carrier channel. An ACLR measurement with several carrier channels (also known as transmission or TX channels) is also possible and is referred to as a multicarrier ACLR measurement.
There are two possible methods for measuring channel and adjacent channel power with a signal analyzer: IBW method (Integration BandWidth method) Fast ACLR (Zero-span method ), i.e. using a channel filter
IBW method
When measuring the channel power, the R&S FSW integrates the linear power which corresponds to the levels of the measurement points within the selected channel. The signal analyzer uses a resolution bandwidth which is far smaller than the channel bandwidth. When sweeping over the channel, the channel filter is formed by the passband characteristics of the resolution bandwidth.
Figure 6-20: Approximating the channel filter by sweeping with a small resolution bandwidth
The following steps are performed: 1. The linear power of all the trace points within the channel is calculated.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
149
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Pi = 10(Li/10) Where Pi = power of the trace pixel i Li = displayed level of trace point i
2. The powers of all trace points within the channel are summed up and the sum is divided by the number of trace points in the channel.
3. The result is multiplied by the quotient of the selected channel bandwidth and the noise bandwidth of the resolution filter (RBW).
Since the power calculation is performed by integrating the trace within the channel bandwidth, this method is called the IBW method (Integration Bandwidth method).
Fast ACLR
The integrated bandwidth method (IBW) calculates channel power and ACLR from the trace data obtained during a continuous sweep over the selected span. Most parts of this sweep are not part of the channel itself or the defined adjacent channels. Therefore, most of the samples taken during the sweep time cannot be used for channel power or ACLR calculation.
To decrease the measurement times, the R&S FSW offers a "Fast ACLR" mode. In Fast ACLR mode, the power of the frequency range between the channels of interest is not measured, because it is not required for channel power or ACLR calculation. The measurement time per channel is set with the sweep time. It is equal to the selected measurement time divided by the selected number of channels.
In the "Fast ACLR" mode, the R&S FSW measures the power of each channel in the time domain, with the defined channel bandwidth, at the center frequency of the channel in question. The digital implementation of the resolution bandwidths makes it possible to select filter characteristics that are precisely tailored to the signal. For CDMA2000, for example, the power in the useful channel is measured with a bandwidth of 1.23 MHz. The power of the adjacent channels is measured with a bandwidth of 30 kHz. Therefore the R&S FSW changes from one channel to the other and measures the power at a bandwidth of 1.23 MHz or 30 kHz using the RMS detector.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
150
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Figure 6-21: Measuring the channel power and adjacent channel power ratio for CDMA2000 signals with zero span (Fast ACLR)
6.2.3.2 Measurement Repeatability
The repeatability of the results, especially in the narrow adjacent channels, strongly depends on the measurement time for a given resolution bandwidth. A longer sweep time can increase the probability that the measured value converges to the true value of the adjacent channel power, but obviously increases measurement time.
Assume a measurement with five channels (1 channel plus 2 lower and 2 upper adjacent channels) and a sweep time of 100 ms. This measurement requires a measurement time per channel of 20 ms. To calculate the power in one channel, the analyzer considers the following number of effective samples:
<sweep time in channel> * <selected resolution bandwidth>
For example, for a sweep time of 100 ms the analyzer considers (30 kHz / 4.19 MHz) * 100 ms * 10 kHz 7 samples. Whereas in Fast ACLR mode, it considers (100 ms / 5) * 30 kHz 600 samples. If you compare these numbers, you understand the increase of repeatability with a 95 % confidence level (2). It rises from � 2.8 dB in normal mode to � 0.34 dB in Fast ACLR mode for a sweep time of 100 ms.
For the same repeatability, the integration method requires a sweep time of 8.5 s. The Figure 6-22 shows the standard deviation of the results as a function of the sweep time.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
151
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Figure 6-22: Repeatability of adjacent channel power measurement on CDMA2000 standard signals if the integration bandwidth method is used
The Figure 6-23 shows the repeatability of power measurements in the transmit channel and of relative power measurements in the adjacent channels as a function of sweep time. The standard deviation of measurement results is calculated from 100 consecutive measurements. Consider the scaling when you compare power values.
Figure 6-23: Repeatability of adjacent channel power measurements on CDMA2000 signals in the fast ACLR mode
6.2.3.3 Recommended Common Measurement Parameters
The following sections provide recommendations on the most important measurement parameters for channel power measurements.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
152
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
All instrument settings for the selected channel setup (channel bandwidth, channel spacing) can be optimized automatically using the "Adjust Settings" function (see "Optimized Settings ( Adjust Settings )" on page 167). The easiest way to configure a measurement is using the configuration "Overview" , see Chapter 7.1, "Configuration Overview", on page 351.
Sweep Time ......................................................................................................... 153 Frequency Span....................................................................................................154 Resolution Bandwidth (RBW)................................................................................154 Video Bandwidth (VBW)........................................................................................155 Detector.................................................................................................................155 Trace Averaging....................................................................................................156 Reference Level....................................................................................................156
Sweep Time
The "Sweep Time" is selected depending on the desired reproducibility of results. Reproducibility increases with "Sweep Time" since power measurement is then performed over a longer time period. As a general approach, approximately 500 non-correlated measured values are required for a reproducibility of 0.5 dB. (That means: 95 % of the measurements are within 0.5 dB of the true measured value). Approximately 5000 measured values are required for a reproducibility of 0.1 dB (99 %). These values are valid for white noise. The measured values are considered as non-correlated if their time interval corresponds to the reciprocal of the measured bandwidth.
The number of A/D converter values, N, used to calculate the power, is defined by the "Sweep Time" . The time per trace pixel for power measurements is directly proportional to the selected "Sweep Time" .
If the sample detector is used, it is best to select the smallest "Sweep Time" possible for a given span and resolution bandwidth. The minimum time is obtained if the setting is coupled, that is: the time per measurement is minimal. Extending the measurement time does not have any advantages. The number of samples for calculating the power is defined by the number of trace points in the channel.
If the RMS detector is used, the selection of "Sweep Time" s can affect the repeatability of the measurement results. Repeatability is increased at longer "Sweep Time" s.
If the RMS detector is used, the number of samples can be estimated as follows:
Since only uncorrelated samples contribute to the RMS value, the number of samples can be calculated from the "Sweep Time" and the resolution bandwidth.
Samples can be assumed to be uncorrelated if sampling is performed at intervals of 1/ RBW. The number of uncorrelated samples is calculated as follows:
Ndecorr = SWT * RBW
(Ndecorr means uncorrelated samples)
The number of uncorrelated samples per trace pixel is obtained by dividing Ndecorr by 1001 (= pixels per trace).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
153
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
The "Sweep Time" can be defined using the softkey in the "Ch Power" menu or in the "Sweep" configuration dialog box (see " Sweep Time " on page 167).
Frequency Span
The frequency span must cover at least the channels to be measured plus a measurement margin of approximately 10 %.
If the frequency span is large in comparison to the channel bandwidth (or the adjacentchannel bandwidths) being analyzed, only a few points on the trace are available per channel. The calculated waveform for the used channel filter is less accurate, which has a negative effect on the measurement accuracy. It is therefore strongly recommended that you consider the described formulas when you select the frequency span.
The frequency span for the defined channel settings can be optimized. Use the "Adjust Settings" function in the "Ch Power" menu or the "General Settings" tab of the "ACLR Setup" dialog box (see "Optimized Settings ( Adjust Settings )" on page 167). You can set the frequency span manually in the "Frequency" configuration dialog box.
(See Chapter 7.3.4, "How To Define the Frequency Range", on page 446.)
For channel power measurements the "Adjust Settings" function sets the frequency span as follows:
"(No. of transmission channels � 1) x transmission channel spacing + 2 x transmission channel bandwidth + measurement margin"
For adjacent-channel power measurements, the "Adjust Settings" function sets the frequency span as a function of the following parameters:
Number of transmission channels Transmission channel spacing Adjacent-channel spacing Bandwidth of one of adjacent-channels ADJ, ALT1 or ALT2, whichever is furthest
away from the transmission channels
"(No. of transmission channels � 1) * (transmission channel spacing + 2) * (adjacentchannel spacing + adjacent-channel bandwidth) + measurement margin"
The measurement margin is approximately 10 % of the value obtained by adding the channel spacing and the channel bandwidth.
Resolution Bandwidth (RBW)
It is important to suppress spectral components outside the channel to be measured, especially of the adjacent channels. At the same time, you expect an acceptable measurement speed. To fulfill both these requirements, the appropriate resolution bandwidth is essential. As a general approach, set the resolution bandwidth to values between 1 % and 4 % of the channel bandwidth.
If the spectrum within the channel to be measured and the spectrum around the channel has a flat characteristic, you can select a larger resolution bandwidth. In the standard setting, e.g. for standard IS95A REV at an adjacent channel bandwidth of 30 kHz, a resolution bandwidth of 30 kHz is used. This yields correct results since the spectrum near the adjacent channels normally has a constant level.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
154
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
You can optimize the resolution bandwidth for the defined channel settings. Use the "Adjust Settings" function in the "Ch Power" menu or the "General Settings" tab of the "ACLR Setup" dialog box (see "Optimized Settings ( Adjust Settings )" on page 167). You can set the RBW manually in the "Bandwidth" configuration dialog box, see " RBW " on page 341.
Except for the IS95 CDMA standards, the "Adjust Settings" function sets the resolution bandwidth (RBW) as a function of the channel bandwidth:
"RBW" 1/40 of "Channel Bandwidth"
The maximum resolution bandwidth (concerning the requirement RBW 1/40) resulting from the available RBW steps (1, 3) is selected.
Video Bandwidth (VBW)
For a correct power measurement, the video signal must not be limited in bandwidth. A restricted bandwidth of the logarithmic video signal causes signal averaging and thus results in a too low indication of the power (-2.51 dB at very low video bandwidths). Thus, select the video bandwidth at least three times the resolution bandwidth:
VBW 3 * RBW
For FFT sweeps, instead of increasing the VBW, you can also select the trace average mode "Power" to ensure correct power measurements (see " Average Mode " on page 587). Note that in power measurements this setting affects the VBW regardless of whether or not a trace is actually averaged.
The video bandwidth for the defined channel settings can be optimized. Use the "Adjust Settings" function in the "Ch Power" menu or the "General Settings" tab of the "ACLR Setup" dialog box (see "Optimized Settings ( Adjust Settings )" on page 167). You can set the VBW manually in the "Bandwidth" configuration dialog box, see " VBW " on page 467.
The video bandwidth (VBW) is set as a function of the channel bandwidth (see formula above) and the smallest possible VBW with regard to the available step size is selected.
Detector
The RMS detector correctly indicates the power irrespective of the characteristics of the signal to be measured. The whole IF envelope is used to calculate the power for each measurement point. The IF envelope is digitized using a sampling frequency which is at least five times the resolution bandwidth which has been selected. Based on the sample values, the power is calculated for each measurement point using the following formula:
Where: si = linear digitized video voltage at the output of the A/D converter N = number of A/D converter values per measurement point
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
155
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Z = electrical impedance
PRMS = power represented by a measurement point
When the power has been calculated, the power units are converted into decibels and the value is displayed as a measurement point.
In principle, the sample detector would be possible as well. Due to the limited number of measurement points used to calculate the power in the channel, the sample detector would yield less stable results.
The RMS detector can be set for the defined channel settings automatically. Use the "Adjust Settings" function in the "Ch Power" menu or the "General Settings" tab of the "ACLR Setup" dialog box (see "Optimized Settings ( Adjust Settings )" on page 167). You can set the detector manually in the "Traces" configuration dialog box, see " Detector " on page 586.
Trace Averaging
Avoid averaging, which is often performed to stabilize the measurement results but leads to a level indication that is too low. The reduction in the displayed power depends on the number of averages and the signal characteristics in the channel to be measured.
The "Adjust Settings" function switches off trace averaging. You can deactivate the trace averaging manually in the "Traces" configuration dialog box, see " Average Mode " on page 587.
Reference Level
To achieve an optimum dynamic range, set the reference level so that the signal is as close to the reference level as possible without forcing an overload message. However, if the signal-to-noise ratio becomes too small, the dynamic range is also limited. The measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly smaller than the signal bandwidth. Thus, the signal path can be overloaded although the trace is still significantly below the reference level.
Selecting a predefined standard or automatically adjusting settings does not affect the reference level. The reference level can be set automatically using the "Auto Level" function in the [Auto Set] menu, or manually in the "Amplitude" menu.
6.2.3.4 Measurement on Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Signals
Modern base stations can contain multiple signals for different communication standards. A new measurement standard is provided for the R&S FSW ACLR measurement that allows you to measure such MSR signals, including non-contiguous setups. Multiple (also non-) contiguous transmit channels can be specified at absolute frequencies, independent from the common center frequency selected for display.
Signal structure
Up to 18 transmit channels can be grouped in a maximum of 8sub blocks. Between two sub blocks, two gaps are defined: a lower gap and an upper gap. Each gap in turn
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
156
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
contains two channels (gap channels). The channels in the upper gap are identical to those in the lower gap, but inverted. To either side of the outermost transmit channels, lower and upper adjacent channels can be defined as in common ACLR measurement setups.
Figure 6-24: MSR signal structure
Asymmetrical gap channels
Gap channels between sub blocks can now also be asymmetrical, that is: channels in the lower and upper gaps are not identical. For example, in Figure 6-25, the gap between sub blocks A and B contains one lower channel (AB:Gap1L), but two upper channels (AB:Gap1U, AB:Gap2U). Furthermore, the gaps between different sub blocks need not be identical. For example, the gap between sub blocks A and B contains 3 gap channels, while the gap between sub blocks B and C contains only two gap channels (BC:Gap1L, BC:Gap2L, which are not identical to the lower gap channels in gap AB.
Figure 6-25: Asymmetrical MSR signal structure
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
157
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Sub block and channel definition The sub blocks are defined by a specified center frequency, RF bandwidth, and number of transmit channels.
Figure 6-26: Sub block definition
As opposed to common ACLR channel definitions, the Tx channels are defined at absolute frequencies, rather than by a spacing relative to the (common) center frequency. Each transmit channel can be assigned a different technology, used to predefine the required bandwidth.
Gap channels and CACLR
If two or more sub blocks are defined, the power in the gaps between the sub blocks must also be measured. Gap channels are defined using bandwidths and spacings, relative to the outer edges of the surrounding sub blocks.
If the upper and lower gap channels are symmetrical, only two gap channels must be configured. The required spacing can be determined according to the following formula (indicated for lower channels):
Spacing = [CF of gap channel] - [left sub block CF] + ([RF bandwidth of left sub block] /2)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
158
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Figure 6-27: Gap channel definition for lower gap
If the gap channels are not symmetrical, you must configure up to four channels individually. The formula indicated above applies for the lower channels. For the upper channels, the spacing is defined as:
Spacing = [right sub block CF]- [CF of gap channel] - ([RF bandwidth of right sub block] /2)
According to the MSR standard, the Cumulative Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio (CACLR) power must be determined for the gap channels. The CACLR power is measured in the two gap channels for the upper and lower gap. The power in the gap channels is then set in relation to the power of the two closest transmission channels to either side of the gap. The CACLR power for the gap channels is indicated in the Result Summary.
In addition, the ACLR power for the individual gap channels is indicated in the Result Summary. The ACLR power of the lower gap channels refers to the TX channel to the left of the gap. The ACLR power of the upper gap channels refers to the TX channel to the right of the gap. A separate relative limit value can be defined for the ACLR power.
Adjacent channels
Adjacent channels are defined as in common ACLR measurements using bandwidths and spacings, relative to the uppermost or lowermost transmit channels in the sub blocks (see also Figure 6-24):
The spacing of the lower adjacent channels refers to the CF of the first Tx channel in the first sub block.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
159
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
The spacing of the upper adjacent channels refers to the CF of the last Tx channel in the last sub block.
The upper and lower adjacent channels can also be defined asymmetrically (see " Symmetrical Adjacent Setup " on page 176). This is particularly useful if the lowest Tx channel and highest Tx channel use different standards and thus require different bandwidths for adjacent channel power measurement.
Channel display for MSR signals
As in common ACLR measurements, the individual channels are indicated by different colored bars in the diagram. The height of each bar corresponds to the measured power of that channel. In addition, the name of the channel is indicated above the bar. Sub blocks are named A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H and are also indicated by a slim blue bar along the frequency axis.
Tx channel names correspond to the specified technology (for LTE including the bandwidth), followed by a consecutive number. (If the channel is too narrow to display the channel name, "..." is displayed instead.) The assigned sub block is indicated with the channel name, e.g. "B: LTE_5M1" for the first Tx channel in sub block B that uses the LTE 5 MHz bandwidth technology.
Adjacent and alternate channels are displayed as in common ACLR measurements.
Gap channels are indicated using the following syntax: The names of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub
blocks A and B), The channel name ( "Gap1" or "Gap2" ) "L" (for lower) or "U" (for upper)
For example: "ABGap1L" indicates the first lower gap channel between sub blocks A and B.
Both the lower and upper gap channels are displayed.
For symmetrical configuration, gap channels can be hidden if they do not reach a minimum size. For asymmetrical configuration, you can define the number of upper or lower gap channels to be displayed. In both cases, you can deactivate all gap channels. This enhances the result display, as fewer lines and bars are displayed. If gap channels are deactivated, the power results are not calculated and thus are not shown in the Result Summary table. Furthermore, channel names for all TX, adjacent, and alternate channels are userdefinable (not gap channels).
Channel power results
The Result Summary for MSR signal measurements is similar to the table for common signals (see Chapter 6.2.2, "Channel Power Results", on page 146). However, the Tx channel results are grouped by sub blocks, and sub block totals are provided instead
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
160
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
of a total Tx channel power. Instead of the individual channel frequency offsets, the absolute center frequencies are indicated for the transmit channels. The CACLR and ACLR power results for each gap channel are appended at the end of the table. The CACLR results are calculated as the power in the gap channel divided by the power sum of the two closest transmission channels to either side of it.
Figure 6-28: Result summary for symmetrical channel definition
Figure 6-29: Result summary for asymmetrical channel definition
Remote command:
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? GACLr or CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? MACM , see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 886
Restrictions and dependencies
As the signal structure in multi-standard radio signals can vary considerably, you can define the channels very flexibly for the ACLR measurement with the R&S FSW. No checks or limitations are implemented concerning the channel definitions, apart from the maximum number of channels to be defined. Thus, you are not notified if transmit channels for a specific sub block lie outside the defined frequency range for the sub block, or if transmit and gap channels overlap.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
161
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
6.2.4 Channel Power Configuration
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Channel Power ACLR" > "CP / ACLR Config" Both Channel Power (CP) and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) measurements are available.
If the "Multi-Standard Radio" standard is selected (see " Standard " on page 163), the "ACLR Setup" dialog box is replaced by the "MSR ACLR Setup" dialog box. See Chapter 6.2.5, "MSR ACLR Configuration", on page 171 for a description of these settings.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 13.5.3, "Measuring the Channel Power and ACLR", on page 890. General CP/ACLR Measurement Settings............................................................162 Channel Setup...................................................................................................... 168
6.2.4.1 General CP/ACLR Measurement Settings
General measurement settings are defined in the "ACLR Setup" dialog, in the "General Settings" tab. Standard .....................................................................................................................163
Predefined Standards .................................................................................. 163 User Standards ............................................................................................ 163
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
162
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Number of channels: Tx , Adj .....................................................................................164 Reference Channel .................................................................................................... 165 Noise Cancellation ..................................................................................................... 165 Fast ACLR ..................................................................................................................166 Selected Trace ........................................................................................................... 166 Absolute and Relative Values (ACLR Mode) ............................................................. 166 Channel power level and density ( Power Unit )......................................................... 166 Power Mode ............................................................................................................... 167 Setting a fixed reference for Channel Power measurements ( Set CP Reference )... 167 Optimized Settings ( Adjust Settings ).........................................................................167 Sweep Time ............................................................................................................... 167
Standard The main measurement settings can be stored as a standard file. When such a standard is loaded, the required channel and general measurement settings are automatically set on the R&S FSW. However, the settings can be changed. Predefined standards are available for standard measurements, but standard files with user-defined configurations can also be created.
Note: If the "Multi-Standard Radio" standard is selected, the "ACLR Setup" dialog box is replaced by the "MSR ACLR Setup" dialog box (see Chapter 6.2.5, "MSR ACLR Configuration", on page 171). If any other predefined standard (or "NONE" ) is selected, the "ACLR Setup" dialog box is restored (see Chapter 6.2.4, "Channel Power Configuration", on page 162).
Note that changes in the configuration are not stored when the dialog boxes are exchanged.
Predefined Standards Standard Predefined standards contain the main measurement settings for standard measurements. When such a standard is loaded, the required channel settings are automatically set on the R&S FSW. However, you can change the settings.
The predefined standards contain the following settings:
Channel bandwidths Channel spacings Detector Trace Average setting Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) Weighting Filter For details on the available standards, see Chapter 6.2.9, "Reference: Predefined CP/ ACLR Standards", on page 200.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 891
User Standards Standard Access: "CP / ACLR Config" > "General Settings" tab > "Manage User Standards"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
163
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
In addition to the predefined standards, you can save your own standards with your specific measurement settings in an XML file so you can use them again later. Userdefined standards are stored on the instrument in the C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\acp_std directory.
A sample file is provided for an MSR ACLR measurement (MSR_ACLRExample.xml). It sets up the measurement for the MSR signal generator waveform described in the file C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\waveform\MSRA_GSM_WCDMA_LTE_GSM.wv.
Note that ACLR user standards are not supported for Fast ACLR measurements.
Note: User standards created on an analyzer of the R&S FSP family are compatible to the R&S FSW. User standards created on an R&S FSW, however, are not necessarily compatible to the analyzers of the R&S FSP family and may not work there.
The following parameter definitions are saved in a user-defined standard: Number of adjacent channels Channel bandwidth of transmission (Tx), adjacent (Adj) and alternate (Alt) chan-
nels Channel spacings Weighting filters Resolution bandwidth Video bandwidth Detector ACLR limits and their state "Sweep Time" and "Sweep Time" coupling Trace and power mode (MSR only: sub block and gap channel definition)
Save the current measurement settings as a user-defined standard, load a stored measurement configuration, or delete an existing configuration file.
For details see Chapter 6.2.6.4, "How to Manage User-Defined Configurations", on page 192.
Remote command: To query all available standards: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:CATalog? on page 891 To load a standard: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 891 To save a standard: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:SAVE on page 892 To delete a standard: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:DELete on page 892
Number of channels: Tx , Adj Up to 18 carrier channels and up to 12 adjacent channels can be defined.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
164
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Results are provided for the Tx channel and the number of defined adjacent channels above and below the Tx channel. If more than one Tx channel is defined, the carrier channel to which the relative adjacent-channel power values should be referenced must be defined (see " Reference Channel " on page 165).
Note: If several carriers (Tx channels) are activated for the measurement, the number of sweep points is increased to ensure that adjacent-channel powers are measured with adequate accuracy.
For more information on how the number of channels affects the measured powers, see Chapter 6.2.2, "Channel Power Results", on page 146.
Remote command: Number of Tx channels: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt on page 897 Number of Adjacent channels: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs on page 893
Reference Channel The measured power values in the adjacent channels can be displayed relative to the transmission channel. If more than one Tx channel is defined, define which one is used as a reference channel.
Tx Channel 1
Transmission channel 1 is used. (Not available for MSR ACLR)
Min Power Tx Channel The transmission channel with the lowest power is used as a reference channel.
Max Power Tx Chan- The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a reference channel
nel
(Default).
Lowest & Highest Channel
The outer left-hand transmission channel is the reference channel for the lower adjacent channels, the outer right-hand transmission channel that for the upper adjacent channels.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual on page 900 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO on page 900
Noise Cancellation The R&S FSW can correct the results by removing the inherent noise of the analyzer, which increases the dynamic range.
In this case, a reference measurement of the inherent noise of the analyzer is carried out. The measured noise power is then subtracted from the power in the channel that is being analyzed (first active trace only).
The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency, resolution bandwidth and level setting. Therefore, the correction function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is changed. A disable message is displayed on the screen. To enable the correction function after changing one of these settings, activate it again. A new reference measurement is carried out.
Noise cancellation is also available in zero span.
Currently, noise cancellation is only available for the following trace detectors (see " Detector " on page 586):
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
165
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
RMS Average Sample Positive peak
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection on page 1148
Fast ACLR If activated, instead of using the IBW method, the R&S FSW sets the center frequency to the different channel center frequencies consecutively and measures the power with the selected measurement time (= sweep time/number of channels).
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:HSPeed on page 907
Selected Trace The CP/ACLR measurement can be performed on any active trace.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:TRACe on page 890
Absolute and Relative Values (ACLR Mode) The powers of the adjacent channels are output in dBm or dBm/Hz (absolute values), or in dBc, relative to the specified reference Tx channel.
"Abs"
The absolute power in the adjacent channels is displayed in the unit of the y-axis, e.g. in dBm, dB�V.
"Rel"
The level of the adjacent channels is displayed relative to the level of the transmission channel in dBc.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE on page 941
Channel power level and density ( Power Unit ) By default, the channel power is displayed in absolute values. If "/Hz" is activated, the channel power density is displayed instead. Thus, the absolute unit of the channel power is switched from dBm to dBm/Hz.
Note: The channel power density in dBm/Hz corresponds to the power inside a bandwidth of 1 Hz and is calculated as follows: "channel power density = channel power � log10(channel bandwidth)"
Thus you can measure the signal/noise power density, for example, or use the additional functions Absolute and Relative Values (ACLR Mode) and Reference Channel to obtain the signal to noise ratio.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult:PHZ on page 940 LTE and 5G NR: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult: UNIT on page 941
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
166
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Power Mode The measured power values can be displayed directly for each trace ( "Clear/ Write" ), or only the maximum values over a series of measurements can be displayed ( "Max Hold" ). In the latter case, the power values are calculated from the current trace and compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm. The higher value is retained. If "Max Hold" mode is activated, "Pwr Max" is indicated in the table header. Note that the trace mode remains unaffected by this setting.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:MODE on page 886
Setting a fixed reference for Channel Power measurements ( Set CP Reference ) If only one Tx channel and no adjacent channels are defined, the currently measured channel power can be used as a fixed reference value for subsequent channel power measurements.
When you select this button, the channel power currently measured on the Tx channel is stored as a fixed reference power. In the following channel power measurements, the power is indicated relative to the fixed reference power. The reference value is displayed in the "Reference" field (in relative ACLR mode); the default value is 0 dBm.
Note: In adjacent-channel power measurement, the power is always referenced to a transmission channel (see " Reference Channel " on page 165), thus, this function is not available.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE on page 899
Optimized Settings ( Adjust Settings ) All instrument settings for the selected channel setup (channel bandwidth, channel spacing) can be optimized automatically.
The adjustment is carried out only once. If necessary, the instrument settings can be changed later.
The following settings are optimized by "Adjust Settings" :
"Frequency Span" on page 154 "Resolution Bandwidth (RBW)" on page 154 "Video Bandwidth (VBW)" on page 155 "Detector" on page 155 "Trace Averaging" on page 156 Note: The reference level is not affected by this function. To adjust the reference level automatically, use the Setting the Reference Level Automatically ( Auto Level ) function in the [Auto Set] menu.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 889
Sweep Time With the RMS detector, a longer "Sweep Time" increases the stability of the measurement results. For recommendations on setting this parameter, see " Sweep Time " on page 153.
The "Sweep Time" can be set via the softkey in the "Ch Power" menu and is identical to the general setting in the "Sweep" configuration dialog box.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
167
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME on page 1144
6.2.4.2 Channel Setup
The "Channel Settings" tab in the "ACLR Setup" dialog box provides all the channel settings to configure the channel power or ACLR measurement. You can define the channel settings for all channels, independent of the defined number of used Tx or adjacent channels (see " Number of channels: Tx , Adj " on page 164). For details on setting up channels, see Chapter 6.2.6.2, "How to Set Up the Channels", on page 189.
In addition to the specific channel settings, the general settings " Standard " on page 163 and " Number of channels: Tx , Adj " on page 164 are also available in this tab.
The following settings are available in individual subtabs of the "Channel Settings" tab. Channel Bandwidth .................................................................................................... 168 Channel Spacings ...................................................................................................... 169 Limit Check ................................................................................................................ 170 Weighting Filters .........................................................................................................170 Channel Names ......................................................................................................... 171
Channel Bandwidth
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
168
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
The Tx channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission standard.
The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected standard. The bandwidth for each channel is indicated by a colored bar in the display.
For measurements that require channel bandwidths which deviate from those defined in the selected standard, use the IBW method ( "Fast ACLR" "Off" ). With the IBW method, the channel bandwidth borders are right and left of the channel center frequency. Thus, you can visually check whether the entire power of the signal under test is within the selected channel bandwidth.
The value entered for any Tx channel is automatically also defined for all subsequent Tx channels. Thus, only enter one value if all Tx channels have the same bandwidth.
The value entered for any ADJ or ALT channel is automatically also defined for all alternate (ALT) channels. Thus, only enter one value if all adjacent channels have the same bandwidth.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>] on page 894 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel on page 893 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate<ch> on page 893
Channel Spacings Channel spacings are normally defined by the transmission standard but can be changed.
If the spacings are not equal, the channel distribution in relation to the center frequency is as follows:
Odd number of Tx channels Even number of Tx channels
The middle Tx channel is centered to center frequency.
The two Tx channels in the middle are used to calculate the frequency between those two channels. This frequency is aligned to the center frequency.
The spacings between all Tx channels can be defined individually. When you change the spacing for one channel, the value is automatically also defined for all subsequent Tx channels. This allows you to set up a system with equal Tx channel spacing quickly. For different spacings, set up the channels from top to bottom.
Tx1-2 Tx2-3 ...
Spacing between the first and the second carrier Spacing between the second and the third carrier ...
If you change the adjacent-channel spacing (ADJ), all higher adjacent channel spacings (ALT1, ALT2, ...) are multiplied by the same factor (new spacing value/old spacing value). Again, only enter one value for equal channel spacing. For different spacing, configure the spacings from top to bottom.
For details, see Chapter 6.2.6.2, "How to Set Up the Channels", on page 189
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
169
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<ch> on page 896 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel] on page 895 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<ch> on page 896
Limit Check During an ACLR measurement, the power values can be checked whether they exceed user-defined or standard-defined limits. A relative or absolute limit can be defined, or both. Both limit types are considered, regardless whether the measured levels are absolute or relative values. The check of both limit values can be activated independently. If any active limit value is exceeded, the measured value is displayed in red and marked by a preceding asterisk in the result table.
The results of the power limit checks are also indicated in the STAT:QUES:ACPL status registry (see "STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register" on page 802).
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe] on page 906 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe on page 901 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute on page 901 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe on page 903 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative] on page 902 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute:STATe on page 904 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute on page 904 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative]:STATe on page 906 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative] on page 905 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult? on page 902
Weighting Filters Weighting filters allow you to determine the influence of individual channels on the total measurement result. For each channel you can activate or deactivate the use of the weighting filter and define an individual weighting factor ( "Alpha:" value).
Weighting filters are not available for all supported standards and cannot always be defined manually where they are available.
Remote command: Activating/Deactivating: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:CHANnel<ch> on page 899 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ACHannel on page 898
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
170
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<ch> on page 899 Alpha value: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:CHANnel<ch> on page 898 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel on page 897 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<ch> on page 897
Channel Names In the R&S FSW's display, carrier channels are labeled "Tx" by default; the first neighboring channel is labeled "Adj" (adjacent) channel; all others are labeled "Alt" (alternate) channels. You can define user-specific channel names for each channel which are displayed in the result diagram and result table.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel on page 894 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<ch> on page 895 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:CHANnel<ch> on page 895
6.2.5 MSR ACLR Configuration
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Channel Power ACLR" > "CP / ACLR Standard" > "Standard" : "Multi-Standard Radio" > "CP / ACLR Config"
ACLR measurements can also be performed on input containing multiple signals for different communication standards. A new measurement standard is provided that allows you to define multiple discontiguous transmit channels at specified frequencies, independent from the selected center frequency. If the "Multi-Standard Radio" standard is selected (see " Standard " on page 163), the "ACLR Setup" dialog box is replaced by the "MSR ACLR Setup" dialog box.
For more information, see Chapter 6.2.3.4, "Measurement on Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Signals", on page 156.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 13.5.3, "Measuring the Channel Power and ACLR", on page 890.
General MSR ACLR Measurement Settings.........................................................171 MSR Sub Block and Tx Channel Definition...........................................................177 MSR Adjacent Channel Setup.............................................................................. 179 MSR Gap Channel Setup......................................................................................182 MSR Channel Names........................................................................................... 187
6.2.5.1 General MSR ACLR Measurement Settings
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Channel Power ACLR" > "CP / ACLR Standard" > "Standard" : "Multi-Standard Radio" > "CP / ACLR Config" > "MSR General Settings" tab
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
171
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Standard .....................................................................................................................172 Predefined Standards .................................................................................. 173 User Standards ............................................................................................ 173
Number of Sub Blocks ............................................................................................... 174 Reference Channel .................................................................................................... 174 Noise Cancellation ..................................................................................................... 174 Selected Trace ........................................................................................................... 175 Absolute and Relative Values (ACLR Mode) ............................................................. 175 Channel power level and density ( Power Unit )......................................................... 175 Power Mode ............................................................................................................... 176 Optimized Settings ( Adjust Settings ).........................................................................176 Symmetrical Adjacent Setup ...................................................................................... 176 Limit Checking ............................................................................................................176
Standard The main measurement settings can be stored as a standard file. When such a standard is loaded, the required channel and general measurement settings are automatically set on the R&S FSW. However, the settings can be changed. Predefined standards are available for standard measurements, but standard files with user-defined configurations can also be created.
Note: If the "Multi-Standard Radio" standard is selected, the "ACLR Setup" dialog box is replaced by the "MSR ACLR Setup" dialog box (see Chapter 6.2.5, "MSR ACLR Configuration", on page 171). If any other predefined standard (or "NONE" ) is selected, the "ACLR Setup" dialog box is restored (see Chapter 6.2.4, "Channel Power Configuration", on page 162).
Note that changes in the configuration are not stored when the dialog boxes are exchanged.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
172
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Predefined Standards Standard Predefined standards contain the main measurement settings for standard measurements. When such a standard is loaded, the required channel settings are automatically set on the R&S FSW. However, you can change the settings.
The predefined standards contain the following settings:
Channel bandwidths Channel spacings Detector Trace Average setting Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) Weighting Filter
For details on the available standards, see Chapter 6.2.9, "Reference: Predefined CP/ ACLR Standards", on page 200.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 891
User Standards Standard Access: "CP / ACLR Config" > "General Settings" tab > "Manage User Standards"
In addition to the predefined standards, you can save your own standards with your specific measurement settings in an XML file so you can use them again later. Userdefined standards are stored on the instrument in the C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\acp_std directory.
A sample file is provided for an MSR ACLR measurement (MSR_ACLRExample.xml). It sets up the measurement for the MSR signal generator waveform described in the file C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\waveform\MSRA_GSM_WCDMA_LTE_GSM.wv.
Note that ACLR user standards are not supported for Fast ACLR measurements.
Note: User standards created on an analyzer of the R&S FSP family are compatible to the R&S FSW. User standards created on an R&S FSW, however, are not necessarily compatible to the analyzers of the R&S FSP family and may not work there.
The following parameter definitions are saved in a user-defined standard: Number of adjacent channels Channel bandwidth of transmission (Tx), adjacent (Adj) and alternate (Alt) chan-
nels Channel spacings Weighting filters Resolution bandwidth Video bandwidth Detector ACLR limits and their state "Sweep Time" and "Sweep Time" coupling Trace and power mode (MSR only: sub block and gap channel definition)
Save the current measurement settings as a user-defined standard, load a stored measurement configuration, or delete an existing configuration file.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
173
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
For details see Chapter 6.2.6.4, "How to Manage User-Defined Configurations", on page 192.
Remote command: To query all available standards: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:CATalog? on page 891 To load a standard: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 891 To save a standard: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:SAVE on page 892 To delete a standard: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:DELete on page 892
Number of Sub Blocks Defines the number of sub blocks, i.e. groups of transmission channels in an MSR signal.
For more information, see Chapter 6.2.3.4, "Measurement on Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Signals", on page 156.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBCount on page 909
Reference Channel The measured power values in the adjacent channels can be displayed relative to the transmission channel. If more than one Tx channel is defined, define which one is used as a reference channel.
Tx Channel 1
Transmission channel 1 is used. (Not available for MSR ACLR)
Min Power Tx Channel The transmission channel with the lowest power is used as a reference channel.
Max Power Tx Chan- The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a reference channel
nel
(Default).
Lowest & Highest Channel
The outer left-hand transmission channel is the reference channel for the lower adjacent channels, the outer right-hand transmission channel that for the upper adjacent channels.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual on page 900 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO on page 900
Noise Cancellation The R&S FSW can correct the results by removing the inherent noise of the analyzer, which increases the dynamic range.
In this case, a reference measurement of the inherent noise of the analyzer is carried out. The measured noise power is then subtracted from the power in the channel that is being analyzed (first active trace only).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
174
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency, resolution bandwidth and level setting. Therefore, the correction function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is changed. A disable message is displayed on the screen. To enable the correction function after changing one of these settings, activate it again. A new reference measurement is carried out.
Noise cancellation is also available in zero span.
Currently, noise cancellation is only available for the following trace detectors (see " Detector " on page 586):
RMS Average Sample Positive peak
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection on page 1148
Selected Trace The CP/ACLR measurement can be performed on any active trace.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:TRACe on page 890
Absolute and Relative Values (ACLR Mode) The powers of the adjacent channels are output in dBm or dBm/Hz (absolute values), or in dBc, relative to the specified reference Tx channel.
"Abs"
The absolute power in the adjacent channels is displayed in the unit of the y-axis, e.g. in dBm, dB�V.
"Rel"
The level of the adjacent channels is displayed relative to the level of the transmission channel in dBc.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE on page 941
Channel power level and density ( Power Unit ) By default, the channel power is displayed in absolute values. If "/Hz" is activated, the channel power density is displayed instead. Thus, the absolute unit of the channel power is switched from dBm to dBm/Hz.
Note: The channel power density in dBm/Hz corresponds to the power inside a bandwidth of 1 Hz and is calculated as follows: "channel power density = channel power � log10(channel bandwidth)"
Thus you can measure the signal/noise power density, for example, or use the additional functions Absolute and Relative Values (ACLR Mode) and Reference Channel to obtain the signal to noise ratio.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult:PHZ on page 940 LTE and 5G NR: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult: UNIT on page 941
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
175
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Power Mode The measured power values can be displayed directly for each trace ( "Clear/ Write" ), or only the maximum values over a series of measurements can be displayed ( "Max Hold" ). In the latter case, the power values are calculated from the current trace and compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm. The higher value is retained. If "Max Hold" mode is activated, "Pwr Max" is indicated in the table header. Note that the trace mode remains unaffected by this setting.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:MODE on page 886
Optimized Settings ( Adjust Settings ) All instrument settings for the selected channel setup (channel bandwidth, channel spacing) can be optimized automatically.
The adjustment is carried out only once. If necessary, the instrument settings can be changed later.
The following settings are optimized by "Adjust Settings" :
"Frequency Span" on page 154 "Resolution Bandwidth (RBW)" on page 154 "Video Bandwidth (VBW)" on page 155 "Detector" on page 155 "Trace Averaging" on page 156 Note: The reference level is not affected by this function. To adjust the reference level automatically, use the Setting the Reference Level Automatically ( Auto Level ) function in the [Auto Set] menu.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 889
Symmetrical Adjacent Setup If enabled, the upper and lower adjacent and alternate channels are defined symmetrically. This is the default behavior.
If disabled, the upper and lower channels can be configured differently. This is particularly useful if the lowest Tx channel and highest Tx channel use different standards and thus require different bandwidths for adjacent channel power measurement.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SSETup on page 914
Limit Checking Activates or deactivates limit checks globally for all adjacent and gap channels. In addition to this setting, limits must be defined and activated individually for each channel.
The results of the power limit checks are also indicated in the STAT:QUES:ACPL status registry (see "STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register" on page 802).
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe] on page 906
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
176
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
6.2.5.2 MSR Sub Block and Tx Channel Definition
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Channel Power ACLR" > "CP / ACLR Standard" > "Standard" : "Multi-Standard Radio" > "CP / ACLR Config" > "Tx Channels" tab
The "Tx Channels" tab provides all the channel settings to configure sub blocks and Tx channels in MSR ACLR measurements.
For details on MSR signals, see Chapter 6.2.3.4, "Measurement on Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Signals", on page 156.
For details on setting up channels, see Chapter 6.2.6.3, "How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement", on page 190.
The Tx channel settings for the individual sub blocks are configured in individual subtabs of the "Tx Channel Settings" tab.
Sub Block Definition ................................................................................................... 178 Sub Block / Center Freq ...............................................................................178 RF Bandwidth .............................................................................................. 178 Number of Tx Channels ( Tx Count )............................................................ 178
Tx Channel Definition .................................................................................................178 Tx Center Frequency ................................................................................... 178 Technology Used for Transmission ..............................................................179 Tx Channel Bandwidth .................................................................................179 Weighting Filters .......................................................................................... 179
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
177
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Sub Block Definition Sub blocks are groups of transmit channels in an MSR signal. Up to 8 sub blocks can be defined. They are defined as an RF bandwidth around a center frequency with a specific number of transmit channels (max. 18). Sub blocks are named A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H and are indicated by a slim blue bar along the frequency axis.
Sub Block / Center Freq Sub Block Definition Defines the center of an MSR sub block. Note that the position of the sub block also affects the position of the adjacent gap channels. Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:FREQuency:CENTer on page 911
RF Bandwidth Sub Block Definition Defines the bandwidth of the individual MSR sub block. Note that sub block ranges also affect the position of the adjacent gap channels. Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:RFBWidth on page 911
Number of Tx Channels ( Tx Count ) Sub Block Definition Defines the number of transmit channels the specific sub block contains. The maximum is 18 Tx channels. Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:TXCHannel:COUNt on page 913
Tx Channel Definition As opposed to common ACLR channel definitions, the Tx channels are defined at absolute frequencies, rather than by a spacing relative to the (common) center frequency. Each transmit channel can be assigned a different technology, used to predefine the required bandwidth. The Tx channel settings for the individual sub blocks are configured in individual subtabs of the "Tx Channel Settings" tab. For details on configuring MSR Tx channels, see Chapter 6.2.6.3, "How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement", on page 190. Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:NAME[:CHANnel<ch>] on page 937
Tx Center Frequency Tx Channel Definition Defines the (absolute) center frequency of an MSR Tx channel. Each Tx channel is defined independently of the others; automatic spacing as in common ACLR measurements is not performed. Note that the position of the adjacent channels is also affected by: The position of the first Tx channel in the first sub block The position of last Tx channel in the last sub block Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:CENTer[:CHANnel<ch>] on page 910
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
178
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Technology Used for Transmission Tx Channel Definition The technology used for transmission by the individual channel can be defined for each channel. The required channel bandwidth and use of a weighting filter are preconfigured automatically according to the selected technology standard.
"GSM"
Transmission according to GSM standard
"W-CDMA"
Transmission according to W-CDMA standard
"LTE_xxx"
Transmission according to LTE standard for different channel bandwidths
"USER"
User-defined transmission; no automatic preconfiguration possible
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:TECHnology[:CHANnel<ch>] on page 912
Tx Channel Bandwidth Tx Channel Definition The Tx channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission technology standard. The correct bandwidth is predefined automatically for the selected technology. Each Tx channel is defined independently of the others; automatic bandwidth configuration for subsequent channels as in common ACLR measurements is not performed.
The bandwidth for each channel is indicated by a colored bar in the display.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>] on page 910
Weighting Filters Tx Channel Definition Weighting filters allow you to determine the influence of individual channels on the total measurement result. For each channel, you can activate or deactivate the use of the weighting filter and define an individual weighting factor ( "Alpha:" value).
Remote command: Activating/Deactivating: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:SBLock<sb>:CHANnel<ch> on page 909 Alpha value: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:SBLock<sb>:CHANnel<ch> on page 909
6.2.5.3 MSR Adjacent Channel Setup
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Channel Power ACLR" > "CP / ACLR Standard" > "Standard" : "Multi-Standard Radio" > "CP / ACLR Config" > "Adjacent Channels" tab
The "Adjacent Channels" tab provides all the channel settings to configure adjacent and gap channels in MSR ACLR measurements.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
179
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
For symmetrical channel definition (see " Symmetrical Adjacent Setup " on page 176), the dialog box is reduced as the upper and lower channels are identical.
Figure 6-30: Asymmetrical adjacent channel definition
For details on setting up channels, see Chapter 6.2.6.3, "How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement", on page 190.
Number of Adjacent Channels ( Adj Count )............................................................... 180 Adjacent Channel Definition .......................................................................................181
Adjacent Channel Spacings .........................................................................181 Adjacent Channel Bandwidths ..................................................................... 181 Weighting Filters .......................................................................................... 181 Limit Checking ............................................................................................. 182
Number of Adjacent Channels ( Adj Count ) Defines the number of adjacent channels above and below the Tx channel block in an MSR signal. You must define the carrier channel to which the relative adjacent-channel power values refer (see " Reference Channel " on page 165).
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs on page 893
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
180
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Adjacent Channel Definition Defines the channels adjacent to the transmission channel block in MSR signals. A maximum of 12 adjacent channels can be defined.
For MSR signals, adjacent channels are defined in relation to the center frequency of the first and last transmission channel in the entire block, i.e.: The lower adjacent channels are defined in relation to the CF of the first Tx chan-
nel in the first sub block. The upper adjacent channels are defined in relation to the CF of the last Tx chan-
nel in the last sub block.
Adjacent channels are named "Adj" and "Alt1" to "Alt11" by default; the names can be changed manually (see Chapter 6.2.5.5, "MSR Channel Names", on page 187).
In all other respects, channel definition is identical to common ACLR measurements.
Adjacent Channel Spacings Adjacent Channel Definition Channel spacings are normally predefined by the selected technology but can be changed.
For MSR signals, adjacent channels are defined in relation to the center frequency of the first and last transmission channel in the entire block, i.e.: The spacing of the lower adjacent channels refers to the CF of the first Tx channel
in the first sub block. The spacing of the upper adjacent channels refers to the CF of the last Tx channel
in the last sub block.
For details, see Chapter 6.2.6.3, "How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement", on page 190
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel] on page 895 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<ch> on page 896 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:UACHannel on page 913 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:UALTernate<ch> on page 913
Adjacent Channel Bandwidths Adjacent Channel Definition The adjacent channel bandwidth is normally predefined by the transmission technology standard. The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected technology. The bandwidth for each channel is indicated by a colored bar in the display.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel on page 893 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate<ch> on page 893 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:UACHannel on page 914 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:UALTernate<ch> on page 914
Weighting Filters Adjacent Channel Definition Weighting filters allow you to determine the influence of individual channels on the total measurement result. For each channel, you can activate or deactivate the use of the weighting filter and define an individual weighting factor ( "Alpha:" value).
Remote command: Activating/Deactivating: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ACHannel on page 898
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
181
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<ch> on page 899 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UACHannel on page 915 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UALTernate<ch> on page 916 Alpha value: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel on page 897 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<ch> on page 897 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UACHannel on page 915 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UALTernate<ch> on page 915
Limit Checking Adjacent Channel Definition During an ACLR measurement, the power values can be checked whether they exceed user-defined or standard-defined limits. A relative or absolute limit can be defined, or both, for each individual adjacent channel. Both limit types are considered, regardless whether the measured levels are absolute or relative values. The check of both limit values can be activated independently. If any active limit value is exceeded, the measured value is displayed in red and marked by a preceding asterisk in the result table.
Note that in addition to activating limit checking for individual channels, limit checking must also be activated globally for the MSR ACLR measurement (see " Limit Checking " on page 176).
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe] on page 906 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe on page 901 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute on page 901 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe on page 903 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative] on page 902 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute:STATe on page 904 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute on page 904 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative]:STATe on page 906 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative] on page 905 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult? on page 902
6.2.5.4 MSR Gap Channel Setup
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Channel Power ACLR" > "CP / ACLR Standard" > "Standard" : "Multi-Standard Radio" > "CP / ACLR Config" > "Gap Channels" tab
The "Gap Channels" tab provides all the channel settings to configure gap channels in MSR ACLR measurements.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
182
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Figure 6-31: Symmetrical (auto) gap channel configuration
Figure 6-32: Asymmetrical (manual) gap channel configuration
For details on MSR signals, see Chapter 6.2.3.4, "Measurement on Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Signals", on page 156. For details on setting up channels, see Chapter 6.2.6.3, "How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement", on page 190.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
183
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Activate Gaps .............................................................................................................184 Gap Mode................................................................................................................... 184 Gap Channel Definition .............................................................................................. 184
Minimum gap size to show Gap 1 / Minimum gap size to show Gap 2 ........185 Gap Channel Active...................................................................................... 185 Gap Channel Spacing ..................................................................................185 Gap Channel Bandwidths ............................................................................ 186 Weighting Filters .......................................................................................... 186 Limit Checking ............................................................................................. 187
Activate Gaps If enabled, the gap channels are displayed and channel power results are calculated and displayed in the Result Summary.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:AGCHannels on page 916
Gap Mode In "Auto" mode, upper and lower gap channels are configured identically, so only two channels need to be configured (gap 1, gap 2). Gap channels are configured identically for all gaps, if more than two sub blocks are defined. Depending on the defined minimum gap size, the actual number of evaluated gap channels is determined automatically.
In "Manual" mode, up to four channels can be configured individually for each gap. If enabled, the configured gap channels are always evaluated, regardless of the gap size.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GAP<gap>:MODE on page 916
Gap Channel Definition Between two sub blocks in an MSR signal, two gaps are defined: a lower gap and an upper gap. Each gap in turn can contain two channels, the gap channels.
By default ("Auto" gap mode, see "Gap Mode" on page 184), the channels in the upper gap are assumed to be identical to those in the lower gap, but inverted. Thus, you only have to configure two gap channels in the R&S FSW MSR ACLR measurement. All other gap channels are configured automatically.
In manual gap mode, you can define up to four different gap channels per gap individually. Each gap is configured on a separate subtab. Only gaps between defined sub blocks are available. If only one sub block is defined, gap channels cannot be defined manually.
Gap channels are indicated using the following syntax: The names of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub
blocks A and B) The channel name ( "Gap1" or "Gap2" ) "L" (for lower) or "U" (for upper)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
184
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Minimum gap size to show Gap 1 / Minimum gap size to show Gap 2 Gap Channel Definition If the gap between the sub blocks does not exceed the specified bandwidth, the gap channels are not displayed in the diagram. The gap channel results are not calculated in the result summary. This command is only available for symmetrical gap channels in "Auto" gap mode (see "Gap Mode" on page 184). Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:MSIZe on page 921
Gap Channel Active Gap Channel Definition Defines which gap channels are active in the specified gap for asymmetrical (manual) configuration of gap channels. Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GCHannel[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer on page 934 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GCHannel[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer on page 935
Gap Channel Spacing Gap Channel Definition Gap channel spacings are normally predefined by the MSR standard but can be changed. Gap channels are defined using bandwidths and spacings, relative to the outer edges of the surrounding sub blocks. The required spacing can be determined according to the following formula (indicated for lower channels): Spacing = [CF of gap channel] - [left sub block CF] + ([RF bandwidth of left sub block] /2)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
185
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Figure 6-33: Gap channel definition for lower gap
For details, see Chapter 6.2.6.3, "How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement", on page 190.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap>[:AUTO] on page 922 For manual (asymmetrical) configuration: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer on page 935 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer on page 936
Gap Channel Bandwidths Gap Channel Definition The gap channel bandwidth is normally predefined by the transmission technology standard. The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected technology. The bandwidth for each channel is indicated by a colored bar in the display (if the gap is not too narrow, see "Channel display for MSR signals" on page 160).
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>[:AUTO] on page 920 For manual (asymmetrical) configuration: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer on page 931 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer on page 931
Weighting Filters Gap Channel Definition Weighting filters allow you to determine the influence of individual channels on the total measurement result. For each channel, you can activate or deactivate the use of the weighting filter and define an individual weighting factor ( "Alpha:" value).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
186
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>[:AUTO] on page 921 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>[:AUTO] on page 921 For manual (asymmetrical) configuration: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer on page 932 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer on page 932 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer on page 933 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer on page 933
Limit Checking Gap Channel Definition During an ACLR measurement, the power values can be checked whether they exceed user-defined or standard-defined limits. A relative or absolute limit can be defined, or both, for each individual gap channel. Both limit types are considered, regardless whether the measured levels are absolute or relative values. The check of both limit values can be activated independently. Furthermore, relative limits can be defined and activated individually for ACLR or CACLR power levels.
If any active limit value is exceeded, the measured value is displayed in red and marked by a preceding asterisk in the result table.
Note that in addition to activating limit checking for individual channels, limit checking must also be activated globally for the MSR ACLR measurement (see " Limit Checking " on page 176).
Remote command: "Automatic (Symmetrical) Configuration" on page 917
6.2.5.5 MSR Channel Names
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Channel Power ACLR" > "CP / ACLR Standard" > "Standard" : "Multi-Standard Radio" > "CP / ACLR Config" > "Names" tab
Channel names for all TX, adjacent, and alternate channels are user-definable.
In the "Names" tab, you can define a customized name for each channel in each sub block. Note that the names are not checked for uniqueness.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
187
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Figure 6-34: Channel name definition for asymmetric adjacent channels
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:NAME[:CHANnel<ch>] on page 937 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel on page 894 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<ch> on page 895 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UACHannel on page 937 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UALTernate<ch> on page 937
6.2.6 How to Perform Channel Power Measurements
The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate the most common tasks when performing channel power measurements.
For remote operation, see Chapter 13.5.3.10, "Programming Examples for Channel Power Measurements", on page 942.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
188
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
How to Perform a Standard Channel Power Measurement.................................. 189 How to Set Up the Channels.................................................................................189 How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement...................................................190 How to Manage User-Defined Configurations.......................................................192 How to Compare the Tx Channel Power in Successive Measurements...............193
6.2.6.1 How to Perform a Standard Channel Power Measurement
Performing a channel power or ACLR measurement according to common standards is a very easy and straightforward task with the R&S FSW.
1. Press the [MEAS] key or select "Select Measurement" in the "Overview" .
2. Select "Channel Power ACLR" . The measurement is started immediately with the default settings.
3. Select the "CP / ACLR Standard" softkey.
4. Select a standard from the list. The measurement is restarted with the predefined settings for the selected standard.
5. If necessary, edit the settings for your specific measurement as described in Chapter 6.2.6.2, "How to Set Up the Channels", on page 189, or load a user-defined configuration (see "To load a user-defined configuration" on page 192).
6.2.6.2 How to Set Up the Channels
Channel definition is the basis for measuring power levels in certain frequency ranges. Usually, the power levels in one or more carrier (Tx) channels and possibly the adjacent channels are of interest. Up to 18 carrier channels and up to 12 adjacent channels can be defined.
When a measurement standard is selected, all settings including the channel bandwidths and channel spacings are set according to the selected standard. Select a standard in the "Ch Power" menu or the "ACLR Setup" dialog box. You can adjust the settings afterwards.
Channel setup consists of the following settings:
The number of transmission (Tx) and adjacent channels The bandwidth of each channel For multicarrier ACLR measurements: which Tx channel is used as a reference The spacing between the individual channels Optionally: the names of the channels displayed in the diagram and result table Optionally: the influence of individual channels on the total measurement result
( "Weighting Filter" ) Optionally: limits for a limit check on the measured power levels
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
189
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Changes to an existing standard can be stored as a user-defined standard, see Chapter 6.2.6.4, "How to Manage User-Defined Configurations", on page 192.
To configure the channels in the "Ch Power" dialog box, select "Ch Power" > "CP / ACLR Config" > "Channel Settings" tab.
In the "Channel Setup" dialog box, you can define the channel settings for all channels, independent of the defined number of used Tx or adjacent channels.
To define channel spacings Channel spacings are normally defined by the selected standard but can be changed. In the "Channel Settings" tab of the "ACLR Setup" dialog box, select the "Spacing"
subtab. The value entered for any Tx channel is automatically also defined for all subsequent Tx channels. Thus, only enter one value if all Tx channels have the same spacing. If the channel spacing for the adjacent or an alternate channel is changed, all higher alternate channel spacings are multiplied by the same factor (new spacing value/old spacing value). The lower adjacent-channel spacings remain unchanged. Only enter one value for equal channel spacing.
Example: Defining channel spacing In the default setting, the adjacent channels have the following spacing: 20 kHz ("ADJ"), 40 kHz ("ALT1"), 60 kHz ("ALT2"), 80 kHz ("ALT3"), 100 kHz ("ALT4"), ... Set the spacing of the first adjacent channel ("ADJ") to 40 kHz. For all other adjacent channels, the spacing is multiplied by factor 2: 80 kHz ("ALT1"), 120 kHz ("ALT2"), 160 kHz ("ALT3"), ... Starting from the default setting, set the spacing of the fifth adjacent channel ("ALT4") to 150 kHz. For all higher adjacent channels, the spacing is multiplied by factor 1.5: 180 kHz ("ALT5"), 210 kHz ("ALT6"), 240 kHz ("ALT7"), ...
6.2.6.3 How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement
You configure ACLR measurements on MSR signals in a special configuration dialog box on the R&S FSW.
1. Press the [MEAS] key or select "Select Measurement" in the "Overview" .
2. Select "Channel Power ACLR" . The measurement is started immediately with the default settings.
3. Select the "CP / ACLR Standard" softkey.
4. Select the "Multi-Standard Radio" standard from the list.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
190
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
5. Select the "CP / ACLR Config" softkey to configure general MSR settings, including the number of sub blocks (up to 8). To configure asymmetric adjacent channels, deactivate the "Symmetrical" option in the general MSR settings.
6. Select the "Tx Channels" tab to configure the sub blocks and transmission channels. For each sub block:
a) Define the (center frequency) position and bandwidth of the sub block, as well as the number of transmission channels it contains.
b) For each transmission channel in the sub block:
Define the center frequency. Select the technology used for transmission. Check the bandwidth. If necessary, define the use of a weighting filter for the channel.
7. Select the "Adjacent Channels" tab to configure the adjacent channels.
8. Define the number of adjacent channels and the settings for each channel:
The spacing, defined as the distance of the center frequency from the center frequency of the first transmission channel in the first sub block. For asymmetrical channels, define the upper adjacent channel spacing as the distance from the center frequency of the last transmission channel in the last sub block.
The bandwidth If necessary, a weighting filter Optionally, define and activate relative or absolute limits, or both, against which
the power levels of the channel are to be checked.
9. Select the "Gap Channels" tab to configure the gap channels.
10. Define the following settings for the two (upper or lower) gap channels. Since the upper and lower channels are identical, it is only necessary to configure two channels.
The spacing, defined as the distance of the center frequency from the outer edge of the sub block to the left or right of the gap. You can determine the required spacing as follows: Spacing = [CF of the gap channel] - [left sub block center] + ([RF bandwidth of left sub block] /2)
The bandwidth If necessary, a weighting filter Optionally, define and activate relative or absolute limits, or both, against which
the power levels of the channel are to be checked.
11. If power limits are defined and activated, activate global limit checking for the measurement on the "MSR General Settings" tab.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
191
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
12. Optionally, store the settings for the MSR ACLR measurement as a user-defined standard as described in "To store a user-defined configuration" on page 192. Otherwise the configuration is lost when you select a different measurement standard.
6.2.6.4 How to Manage User-Defined Configurations
You can define measurement configurations independently of a predefined standard and save the current ACLR configuration as a "user standard" in an XML file. You can then load the file and thus the settings again later. User-defined standards are not supported for "Fast ACLR" and multicarrier ACLR measurements.
Compatibility to R&S FSP User standards created on an analyzer of the R&S FSP family are compatible to the R&S FSW. User standards created on an R&S FSW, however, are not necessarily compatible to the analyzers of the R&S FSP family and may not work there.
To store a user-defined configuration 1. In the "Ch Power" menu, select the "CP / ACLR Config" softkey to display the
"ACLR Setup" dialog box.
2. Configure the measurement as required (see also Chapter 6.2.6.2, "How to Set Up the Channels", on page 189).
3. In the "General Settings" tab, select the "Manage User Standards" button to display the "Manage" dialog box.
4. Define a filename and storage location for the user standard. By default, the XML file is stored in C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\acp_std\. However, you can define any other storage location.
5. Select "Save" .
To load a user-defined configuration 1. In the "General Settings" tab of the "ACLR Setup" dialog box, select the "Manage
User Standards" button to display the "Manage" dialog box.
2. Select the user standard file.
3. Select "Load" . The stored settings are automatically set on the R&S FSW and the measurement is restarted with the new parameters.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
192
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
6.2.6.5 How to Compare the Tx Channel Power in Successive Measurements
For power measurements with only one Tx channel and no adjacent channels, you can define a fixed reference power and compare subsequent measurement results to the stored reference power.
1. Configure a measurement with only one Tx channel and no adjacent channels (see also Chapter 6.2.6.2, "How to Set Up the Channels", on page 189).
2. In the "ACLR Setup" dialog box, select the "Set CP Reference" button. The channel power currently measured on the Tx channel is stored as a fixed reference power. The reference value is displayed in the "Reference" field of the result table (in relative ACLR mode).
3. Start a new measurement. The resulting power is indicated relative to the fixed reference power.
4. Repeat this for any number of measurements.
5. To start a new measurement without the fixed reference, temporarily define a second channel or preset the instrument.
6.2.7 Measurement Examples
The R&S FSW has test routines for simple channel and adjacent channel power measurements. These routines give quick results without any complex or tedious setting procedures.
A programming example demonstrating an ACLR measurement in a remote environment is provided in Chapter 13.5.3.10, "Programming Examples for Channel Power Measurements", on page 942.
Measurement Example 1 � ACPR Measurement on a CDMA2000 Signal.......... 193 Measurement Example 2 � Measuring Adjacent Channel Power of a W-CDMA
Uplink Signal......................................................................................................... 195 Measurement Example 3 � Measuring the Intrinsic Noise of the R&S FSW with the
Channel Power Function.......................................................................................198
6.2.7.1 Measurement Example 1 � ACPR Measurement on a CDMA2000 Signal
Test setup:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
193
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW):
Frequency: Level: Modulation:
850 MHz 0 dBm CDMA2000
Procedure:
1. Preset the R&S FSW.
2. Set the center frequency to 850 MHz.
3. Set the span to 4 MHz.
4. Set the reference level to +10 dBm.
5. Press the [MEAS] key or select "Select Measurement" in the "Overview" .
6. Select the "Channel Power ACLR" measurement function.
7. Set the "CDMA2000" standard for adjacent channel power measurement in the "ACLR Setup" dialog box. The R&S FSW sets the channel configuration according to the 2000 standard with two adjacent channels above and 2 below the transmit channel. The spectrum is displayed in the upper part of the screen, the numeric values of the results and the channel configuration in the lower part of the screen. The various channels are represented by vertical lines on the graph. The frequency span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth and detector are selected automatically to give correct results. To obtain stable results � especially in the adjacent channels (30 kHz bandwidth) which are narrow in comparison with the transmission channel bandwidth (1.23 MHz) � the RMS detector is used.
8. Set the optimal reference level and RF attenuation for the applied signal level using the "Auto Level" function in the [Auto Set] menu.
The R&S FSW sets the optimal RF attenuation and the reference level based on the transmission channel power to obtain the maximum dynamic range. The Figure 6-35 shows the result of the measurement.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
194
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Figure 6-35: Adjacent channel power measurement on a CDMA2000 signal
6.2.7.2 Measurement Example 2 � Measuring Adjacent Channel Power of a W-CDMA Uplink Signal
Test setup:
Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW):
Frequency: Level: Modulation:
1950 MHz 4 dBm 3GPP W-CDMA Reverse Link
Procedure:
1. Preset the R&S FSW. 2. Set the center frequency to 1950 MHz. 3. Select the "Channel Power ACLR" measurement function from the "Select Mea-
surement" dialog box. 4. Set the "W-CDMA 3GPP REV" standard for adjacent channel power measurement
in the "ACLR Setup" dialog box.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
195
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
The R&S FSW sets the channel configuration to the W-CDMA standard for mobiles with two adjacent channels above and below the transmit channel. The frequency span, the resolution and video bandwidth and the detector are automatically set to the correct values. The spectrum is displayed in the upper window and the channel power, the level ratios of the adjacent channel powers and the channel configuration in the lower window. The individual channels are displayed as bars in the graph.
5. Set the optimal reference level and RF attenuation for the applied signal level using the "Auto Level" function.
The R&S FSW sets the optimum RF attenuation and the reference level for the power in the transmission channel to obtain the maximum dynamic range. The following figure shows the result of the measurement.
Figure 6-36: Measuring the relative adjacent channel power on a W-CDMA uplink signal
The R&S FSW measures the power of the individual channels. A root raised cosine filter with the parameters = 0.22 and chip rate 3.84 Mcps (= receive filter for WCDMA) is used as channel filter.
Optimum Level Setting for ACLR Measurements on W-CDMA Signals
The dynamic range for ACLR measurements is limited by the thermal noise floor, the phase noise and the intermodulation (spectral regrowth) of the signal analyzer. The power values produced by the R&S FSW due to these factors accumulate linearly. They depend on the applied level at the input mixer. The three factors are shown in the figure below for the adjacent channel (5 MHz carrier offset).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
196
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Figure 6-37: Dynamic range for ACLR measurements on W-CDMA uplink signals as a function of the mixer level
The level of the W-CDMA signal at the input mixer is shown on the horizontal axis, i.e. the measured signal level minus the selected RF attenuation. The individual components which contribute to the power in the adjacent channel and the resulting relative level (total ACPR) in the adjacent channel are displayed on the vertical axis. The optimum mixer level is -12 dBm. The relative adjacent channel power (ACPR) at an optimum mixer level is -77 dBc. At a given signal level, the mixer level is set in 1 dB steps with the 1 dB RF attenuator. Thus, the optimum range spreads from -10 dBm to -14 dBm.
To set the attenuation parameter manually, the following method is recommended:
Set the RF attenuation so that the mixer level (= measured channel power � RF attenuation) is between -10 dBm and -14 dBm.
This method is automated with the "Auto Level" function. Especially in remote control mode, e.g. in production environments, set the attenuation parameters correctly before the measurement. That saves the time required for automatic setting.
To measure the R&S FSW's intrinsic dynamic range for W-CDMA adjacent channel power measurements, a filter which suppresses the adjacent channel power is required at the output of the transmitter. A SAW filter with a bandwidth of 4 MHz, for example, can be used.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
197
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
6.2.7.3 Measurement Example 3 � Measuring the Intrinsic Noise of the R&S FSW with the Channel Power Function
Noise in any bandwidth can be measured with the channel power measurement functions. Thus the noise power in a communication channel can be determined, for example.
If the noise spectrum within the channel bandwidth is flat, the noise marker can be used to determine the noise power in the channel by considering the channel bandwidth. However, in the following cases, the channel power measurement method must be used to obtain correct measurement results: If phase noise and noise that normally increases towards the carrier is dominant in
the channel to be measured If there are discrete spurious signals in the channel
Test setup:
Leave the RF input of the R&S FSW open-circuited or terminate it with 50 .
Procedure:
1. Preset the R&S FSW.
2. Set the center frequency to 1 GHz and the span to 1 MHz.
3. To obtain maximum sensitivity, set RF attenuation to 0 dB and the reference level to -40 dBm.
4. Select the "Channel Power ACLR" measurement function from the "Select Measurement" dialog box.
5. In the "ACLR Setup" dialog box, set up a single Tx channel with the channel bandwidth 1.23 MHz.
6. Select the "Adjust Settings" softkey. The settings for the frequency span, the bandwidth (RBW and VBW) and the detector are automatically set to the optimum values required for the measurement.
7. Stabilize the measurement result by increasing the "Sweep Time" . Set the "Sweep Time" to 1 s. The trace becomes much smoother because of the RMS detector and the channel power measurement display is much more stable.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
198
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Figure 6-38: Measurement of the R&S FSW's intrinsic noise power in a 1.23 MHz channel bandwidth.
6.2.8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement
If the results do not meet your expectations, or if you want to minimize the measurement duration, try the following methods to optimize the measurement:
Only activate as many adjacent channels as necessary to minimize the required span and thus the required measurement time for the measurement.
Increase the RBW to minimize the measurement time; however, consider the requirements of the standard if you need to measure according to standard! The automatic settings are always according to standard.
Take advantage of the speed optimization mode in the "Sweep" settings if you do not require the larger dynamic range (see " Optimization " on page 470).
Reduce the "Sweep Time" and thus the amount of data to be captured and calculated; however, consider the requirements regarding the standard deviation.
To improve the stability of the measured results, increase the "Sweep Time" , which also leads to more averaging steps.
Instead of trace averaging, use an RMS detector with a higher "Sweep Time" to obtain better average power results in less time.
To determine a channel power level quickly, use the Time Domain Power Measurement (TDP) rather than a Channel Power measurement. The TDP measurement is a zero span measurement where the sweep time determines the measurement time. Due to the FFT measurement, duplicate averaging is performed, providing very stable results very quickly. Note, however, that for TDP measurements, channel filters are not available and a fixed RBW is used. Thus, the measurement may not be according to standard for some test cases.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
199
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
6.2.9 Reference: Predefined CP/ACLR Standards
When using predefined standards for ACLR measurement, the test parameters for the channel and adjacent-channel measurements are configured automatically.
You can select a predefined standard via the "CP / ACLR Standard" softkey in the "Ch Power" menu or the selection list in the "General Settings" tab of the "ACLR Setup" dialog box (see " Standard " on page 163).
Table 6-10: Predefined CP / ACLR standards with remote command parameters
Standard
Remote parameter
None
NONE
Multi-Standard Radio
MSR
EUTRA/LTE Square
EUTRa
EUTRA/LTE Square/RRC
REUTra
5G NR DL FR1 20MHz
F1D20nr5g
5G NR DL FR1 100MHz
F1D100nr5g
5G NR UL FR1 20MHz
F1U20nr5g
5G NR UL FR1 100MHz
F1U100nr5g
5G NR DL FR2 100MHz
F2D100nr5g
5G NR DL FR2 200MHz
F2D200nr5g
5G NR UL FR2 100MHz
F2U100nr5g
5G NR UL FR2 200MHz
F2U200nr5g
W-CDMA 3GPP FWD
FW3Gppcdma
W-CDMA 3GPP REV
RW3Gppcdma
CDMA IS95A FWD
F8CDma
CDMA IS95A REV
R8CDma
CDMA IS95C Class 0 FWD*)
FIS95c0
CDMA IS95C Class 0 REV*)
RIS95c0
CDMA J-STD008 FWD
F19Cdma
CDMA J-STD008 REV
R19Cdma
CDMA IS95C Class 1 FWD*)
FIS95c1
CDMA IS95C Class 1 REV*)
RIS95c1
CDMA2000
S2CDma
TD-SCDMA FWD
FTCDma
TD-SCDMA REV
TRCDma
WLAN 802.11A
AWLAN
WLAN 802.11B
BWLAN
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
200
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement
Standard WIMAX WIBRO GSM RFID 14443 TETRA PDC PHS CDPD APCO-25 P2 User Standard Customized Standard
Remote parameter WIMax WIBRo GSM RFID14443 TETRa PDC PHS CDPD PAPCo25 USER <string>
For the R&S FSW, the channel spacing is defined as the distance between the center frequency of the adjacent channel and the center frequency of the transmission channel. The definition of the adjacent-channel spacing in standards IS95C and CDMA 2000 is different. These standards define the adjacent-channel spacing from the center of the transmission channel to the closest border of the adjacent channel. This definition is also used by the R&S FSW for the standards marked with an asterisk *).
6.2.10 Reference: Predefined ACLR User Standard XML Files
In addition to the predefined standards, some user standards with specific measurement settings for common ACLR measurements are provided in XML files on the instrument in the C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\acp_std directory.
In particular, a sample file (MSR_ACLRExample.xml) is provided for an MSR ACLR measurement. It sets up the measurement for the MSR signal generator waveform described in the file C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\waveform\MSRA_GSM_WCDMA_LTE_GSM.wv.
Furthermore, the following XML files are provided:
5GNR\DL 5GNR\DL\5GNR_DL_FR1_20MHz 5GNR\DL\5GNR_DL_FR1_100MHz 5GNR\DL\5GNR_DL_FR2_100MHz 5GNR\DL\5GNR_DL_FR2_200MHz
5GNR\UL 5GNR\UL\5GNR_UL_FR1_20MHz
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
201
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Carrier-to-Noise Measurements
5GNR\UL\5GNR_UL_FR1_100MHz 5GNR\UL\5GNR_UL_FR2_100MHz 5GNR\UL\5GNR_UL_FR2_200MHz
LTE\DL LTE\DL\LTE_DL_5MHZ.XML LTE\DL\LTE_DL_10MHZ.XML LTE\DL\LTE_DL_15MHZ.XML LTE\DL\LTE_DL_20MHZ.XML
LTE\UL LTE\UL\LTE_UL_5MHZ.XML LTE\UL\LTE_UL_10MHZ.XML LTE\UL\LTE_UL_15MHZ.XML LTE\UL\LTE_UL_20MHZ.XML
WLAN WLAN\802_11ac\802_11ac_20MHZ.XML WLAN\802_11ac\802_11ac_40MHZ.XML WLAN\802_11ac\802_11ac_80MHZ.XML WLAN\802_11ac\802_11ac_160MHZ.XML
To load a stored measurement configuration, in the "General Settings" tab of the "ACLR Setup" dialog box, select the "Manage User Standards" button to display the "Manage" dialog box. Select the user standard file, then "Load" . The stored settings are automatically set on the R&S FSW and the measurement is restarted with the new parameters. For details, see Chapter 6.2.6.4, "How to Manage User-Defined Configurations", on page 192.
6.3 Carrier-to-Noise Measurements
Measures the carrier-to-noise ratio. C/No measurements normalize the ratio to a 1 Hz bandwidth. About the Measurement........................................................................................202 Carrier-to-Noise Results........................................................................................203 Carrier-to-Noise Configuration.............................................................................. 204 How to Determine the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio....................................................... 206
6.3.1 About the Measurement
The largest signal in the frequency span is the carrier. It is searched when the C/N or C/N0 function is activated and is marked using a fixed reference marker ( "FXD" ).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
202
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Carrier-to-Noise Measurements
To determine the noise power, a channel with a defined bandwidth at the defined center frequency is analyzed. The power within this channel is integrated to obtain the noise power level. (If the carrier is within this channel, an extra step is required to determine the correct noise power level, see below.)
The noise power of the channel is subtracted from the maximum carrier signal level, and in the case of a C/N0 measurement, it is referred to a 1 Hz bandwidth.
For this measurement, the RMS detector is activated. The carrier-to-noise measurements are only available in the frequency domain (span >0).
Measurement process
Depending on whether the carrier is inside or outside the analyzed channel, the measurement process for the carrier-to-noise ratio varies:
The carrier is outside the analyzed channel: In this case, it is sufficient to switch on the desired measurement function and to set the channel bandwidth. The carrier/ noise ratio is displayed on the screen.
The carrier is inside the analyzed channel: In this case, the measurement must be performed in two steps: � First, perform the reference measurement by switching on either the C/N or the C/N0 measurement and waiting for the end of the next measurement run. The fixed reference marker is set to the maximum of the measured carrier signal. � Then, switch off the carrier so that only the noise of the test setup is active in the channel. The carrier-to-noise ratio is displayed after the subsequent measurement has been completed.
Frequency Span
The frequency span should be set to approximately twice the channel bandwidth in order to measure the carrier-to-noise ratio correctly. This setting is defined automatically by the "Adjust Settings" function.
6.3.2 Carrier-to-Noise Results
As a result of the carrier-to-noise measurement the evaluated bandwidth and the calculated C/N ratio are displayed in the result window. The fixed reference marker is indicated in the diagram.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
203
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Carrier-to-Noise Measurements
Remote command: You can also query the determined carrier-to-noise ratio via the remote command CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CN or CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CN0, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 886.
6.3.3 Carrier-to-Noise Configuration
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "C/N" / "C/N0" > "Carrier Noise Config" Both a carrier-to-noise ratio (C/N) and a carrier-to-noise ratio in relation to the bandwidth (C/N0) measurement are available.
Carrier-to-noise measurements are not available in zero span mode.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
204
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Carrier-to-Noise Measurements
The easiest way to configure a measurement is using the configuration "Overview" , see Chapter 7.1, "Configuration Overview", on page 351.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 13.5.4, "Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio", on page 949.
C/N ............................................................................................................................. 205 C/N0 ........................................................................................................................... 205 Channel Bandwidth .................................................................................................... 205 Adjust Settings ........................................................................................................... 205
C/N Switches the measurement of the carrier/noise ratio on or off. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated.
The measurement is performed on the trace that marker 1 is assigned to. To shift marker 1 and measure another trace, use the "Marker To Trace" softkey in the "Marker" menu (see " Assigning the Marker to a Trace " on page 339).
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:SELect on page 888 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 886 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>[:STATe] on page 889
C/N0 Switches the measurement of the carrier/noise ratio with reference to a 1 Hz bandwidth on or off. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated.
The measurement is performed on the trace that marker 1 is assigned to. To shift marker 1 and measure another trace, use the "Marker To Trace" softkey in the "Marker" menu (see " Assigning the Marker to a Trace " on page 339).
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:SELect on page 888 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 886 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>[:STATe] on page 889
Channel Bandwidth Defines the channel bandwidth.
The default setting is 14 kHz.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>] on page 894
Adjust Settings Enables the RMS detector and adjusts the span to the selected channel bandwidth according to:
"4 x channel bandwidth + measurement margin"
The adjustment is performed once; if necessary, the setting can be changed later on.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 889
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
205
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW)
6.3.4 How to Determine the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio
The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to determine the carrier-tonoise ratio.
For remote operation, see "Programming example: Measuring the carrier-to-noise ratio" on page 950.
1. Press the "C/N" , "C/N0" softkey to configure the carrier-to-noise ratio measurement.
2. To change the channel bandwidth to be analyzed, press the "Channel Bandwidth" softkey.
3. To optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration, press the "Adjust Settings" softkey.
4. To activate the measurements without reference to the bandwidth, press the "C/N" softkey. To activate the measurements with reference to the bandwidth, press the "C/N0" softkey .
5. If the carrier signal is located within the analyzed channel bandwidth, switch off the carrier signal so that only the noise is displayed in the channel and perform a second measurement.
The carrier-to-noise ratio is displayed after the measurement has been completed.
6.4 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW)
An important characteristic of a modulated signal is its occupied bandwidth, that is: the bandwidth which must contain a defined percentage of the power. In a radio communications system, for instance, the occupied bandwidth must be limited to enable distortion-free transmission in adjacent channels.
About the Measurement........................................................................................206 OBW Results.........................................................................................................208 OBW Configuration............................................................................................... 209 How to Determine the Occupied Bandwidth..........................................................211 Measurement Example......................................................................................... 212
6.4.1 About the Measurement
The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth containing a defined percentage of the total transmitted power. A percentage between 10 % and 99.9 % can be set.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
206
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW)
Measurement principle
The bandwidth containing 99% of the signal power is to be determined, for example. The algorithm first calculates the total power of all displayed points of the trace. In the next step, the points from the right edge of the trace are summed up until 0.5 % of the total power is reached. Auxiliary marker 1 is positioned at the corresponding frequency. Then the points from the left edge of the trace are summed up until 0.5 % of the power is reached. Auxiliary marker 2 is positioned at this point. 99 % of the power is now between the two markers. The distance between the two frequency markers is the occupied bandwidth which is displayed in the marker field.
OBW within defined search limits - multicarrier OBW measurement in one sweep The occupied bandwidth of the signal can also be determined within defined search limits instead of for the entire signal. Thus, only a single sweep is required to determine the OBW for a multicarrier signal. To do so, search limits are defined for an individual carrier and the OBW measurement is restricted to the frequency range contained within those limits. Then the search limits are adapted for the next carrier and the OBW is automatically recalculated for the new range.
For step-by-step instructions, see "How to determine the OBW for a multicarrier signal using search limits" on page 211.
Prerequisites
To ensure correct power measurement, especially for noise signals, and to obtain the correct occupied bandwidth, the following prerequisites and settings are necessary:
Only the signal to be measured is displayed in the window, or search limits are defined to include only one (carrier) signal. An additional signal would falsify the measurement.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
207
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW)
RBW << occupied bandwidth (approx. 1/20 of occupied bandwidth, for voice communication type: 300 Hz or 1 kHz)
VBW 3 x RBW RMS detector Span 2 to 3 x occupied bandwidth
Some of the measurement specifications (e.g. PDC, RCR STD-27B) require measurement of the occupied bandwidth using a peak detector. The detector setting of the R&S FSW has to be changed accordingly then.
6.4.2 OBW Results
As a result of the OBW measurement the occupied bandwidth ( "Occ Bw" ) is indicated in the marker results. Furthermore, the marker at the center frequency and the temporary markers are indicated.
The measurement is performed on the trace with marker 1. In order to evaluate another trace, marker 1 must be placed on another trace (see Assigning the Marker to a Trace ).
The OBW calculation is repeated if the Search Limits are changed, without performing a new sweep. Thus, the OBW for a multicarrier signal can be determined using only one sweep.
Centroid frequency
The centroid frequency is defined as the point in the center of the occupied bandwidth, calculated using the temporary OBW markers T1 and T2. This frequency is indicated as a function result ( "Occ Bw Centroid" ) in the marker table.
Frequency offset
The offset of the calculated centroid frequency to the defined center frequency of the R&S FSW is indicated as a function result ( "Occ Bw Freq Offset" ) in the marker table.
Remote command:
The determined occupied bandwidth can also be queried using the remote command CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW or CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? AOBW. While the OBW parameter returns only the occupied bandwidth, the AOBW parameter also returns the position and level of the temporary markers T1 and T2 used to calculate the occupied bandwidth.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL OBW, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion: POWer<sb>:SELect on page 888
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>[:STATe] on page 889
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion: POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 886
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
208
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW)
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? COBW, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion: POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 886
6.4.3 OBW Configuration
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "OBW" > "OBW Config"
This measurement is not available in zero span.
Configuring search limits for OBW measurement The OBW measurement uses the same search limits as defined for marker search (see " Search Limits " on page 526). However, only the left and right limits are considered.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 13.5.5, "Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth", on page 950.
% Power Bandwidth ................................................................................................... 210 Channel Bandwidth .................................................................................................... 210 Adjust Settings ........................................................................................................... 210 Search Limits ( Left / Right )........................................................................................210 Deactivating All Search Limits ....................................................................................210
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
209
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW)
% Power Bandwidth Defines the percentage of total power in the displayed frequency range which defines the occupied bandwidth. Values from 10 % to 99.9 % are allowed.
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth on page 951
Channel Bandwidth Defines the channel bandwidth for the transmission channel in single-carrier measurements. This bandwidth is used to optimize the test parameters (for details see " Adjust Settings " on page 210). The default setting is 14 kHz.
For measurements according to a specific transmission standard, define the bandwidth specified by the standard for the transmission channel. For multicarrier measurements, this setting is irrelevant. Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>] on page 894
Adjust Settings Optimizes the instrument settings for the measurement of the occupied bandwidth according to the specified channel bandwidth. This function is only useful for single carrier measurements. All instrument settings relevant for power measurement within a specific frequency range are optimized: Frequency span: 3 � channel bandwidth RBW 1/40 of channel bandwidth VBW 3 � RBW Detector: RMS The reference level is not affected by "Adjust Settings" . For an optimum dynamic range,select the reference level such that the signal maximum is close to the reference level. (See " Setting the Reference Level Automatically ( Auto Level )" on page 453). The adjustment is carried out only once. If necessary, the instrument settings can be changed later. Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 889
Search Limits ( Left / Right ) If activated, limit lines are defined and displayed for the search. Only results within the limited search range are considered. For details on limit lines for searches, see "Peak search limits" on page 549. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 1213 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT on page 1214 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt on page 1214
Deactivating All Search Limits Deactivates the search range limits.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
210
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW)
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 1213 CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe on page 1216
6.4.4 How to Determine the Occupied Bandwidth
The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to determine the occupied bandwidth.
For remote operation, see Chapter 13.5.5.2, "Programming Example: OBW Measurement", on page 951.
How to determine the OBW for a single signal 1. Press the [MEAS] key or select "Select Measurement" in the "Overview" . 2. Select the "OBW" measurement function.
The measurement is started immediately with the default settings. 3. Select the "OBW Config" softkey.
The "Occupied Bandwidth" configuration dialog box is displayed. 4. Define the percentage of power ( "% Power Bandwidth" ) that defines the band-
width to be determined. 5. If necessary, change the channel bandwidth for the transmission channel. 6. To optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration, select "Adjust Set-
tings" . 7. Start a sweep.
The result is displayed as OBW in the marker results.
How to determine the OBW for a multicarrier signal using search limits 1. Press the [MEAS] key or select "Select Measurement" in the "Overview" . 2. Select the "OBW" measurement function. 3. Select the "OBW Config" softkey. 4. Define the percentage of power ( "% Power Bandwidth" ) that defines the band-
width to be determined. 5. Define search limits so the search area contains only the first carrier signal:
a) Enter values for the left or right limits, or both. b) Enable the use of the required limits. 6. Start a sweep. The result for the first carrier is displayed as OBW in the marker results.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
211
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement
7. Change the search limits so the search area contains the next carrier signal as described in step 5.
The OBW is recalculated and the result for the next carrier is displayed. A new sweep is not necessary!
8. Continue in this way until all carriers have been measured.
6.4.5 Measurement Example
In the following example, the bandwidth that occupies 99 % of the total power of a PDC signal at 800 MHz, level 0 dBm is measured.
A programming example demonstrating an OBW measurement in a remote environment is provided in Chapter 13.5.5.2, "Programming Example: OBW Measurement", on page 951.
1. Preset the R&S FSW. 2. Set the "Center Frequency" to 800 MHz. 3. Set the "Reference Level" to -10 dBm. 4. Press the [MEAS] key or select "Select Measurement" in the "Overview" . 5. Select the "OBW" measurement function. 6. Select the "OBW Config" softkey. 7. Set the "% Power Bandwidth" to 99 %. 8. Set the "Channel Bandwidth" to 21 kHz as specified by the PDC standard. 9. Optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration by selecting "Adjust
Settings" . 10. Adjust the reference level to the measured total power by selecting "Auto Level" in
the [Auto set] menu. 11. The PDC standard requires the peak detector for OBW measurement. In the
"Traces" configuration dialog, set the trace detector to "PositivePeak" . 12. Start a sweep.
The result is displayed as OBW in the marker results.
6.5 Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement
The R&S FSW noise power ratio measurement is similar to the common adjacent channel power (ACP) measurement, but less sophisticated and therefore easier to configure.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
212
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement
This measurement requires the Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement firmware option R&S FSW-K19.
About Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurements.................................................. 213 NPR Basics........................................................................................................... 213 NPR Results..........................................................................................................215 NPR Configuration................................................................................................ 216 Generator Setup....................................................................................................221 Generator Frequency Coupling.............................................................................225 How to Perform NPR Measurements....................................................................227 Measurement Example......................................................................................... 228
6.5.1 About Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurements
The noise power ratio is defined as the relationship between the total power density in a channel and the noise power density. The noise power ratio is commonly used to describe the distortion caused by in-band multi-carrier intermodulation in a wideband satellite channel. A satellite can be considered to be a "transparent transponder". It receives the uplink signal, amplifies it, translates the frequency, amplifies it more, and finally retransmits it. Typically, the signal contains a large number of carriers. To measure the in-band distortions of specific carriers in a satellite DUT, notch filters are inserted inside the channel. Notch filters remove the effects of the underlying subcarriers from the signal. Thus, the distortion of these carriers caused by the others can be determined.
The R&S FSW noise power ratio measurement allows you to specify your satellite channel and up to 25 notch filters in your measurement setup. For a more general measurement, the bandwidth on which the total power density is based can be selected freely. As a result, the channel power density, the notch power density, and the noise power ratio are calculated.
6.5.2 NPR Basics
Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in noise power ratio measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings.
Channel bandwidth, integration bandwidth and notch bandwidth
The Channel Bandwidth defines the width of the channel, or general measurement range. The displayed span usually depends on the channel bandwidth (span = channel bandwidth * 1.1)
The Integration Bandwidth defines the frequency range over which measurement results are actually calculated. By default, it is the same as the channel bandwidth, but you can define any other value, smaller or larger, as well.
The Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to Channel BW) defines the width of the notches, if you define any.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
213
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement
Notches and their effects on the measurement results
You can select from an automatic measurement mode that selects the integration bandwidth automatically, and a manual measurement mode that allows you to define a custom integration bandwidth.
In automatic measurement mode, the power within the notches is deducted from the total noise power density.
Channel Bandwidth Integration Bandwidth
Notch 1
Notch 2
Figure 6-39: Auto mode: Integration bandwidth = channel bandwidth (notches deducted)
In manual measurement, however, the notch power is not deducted. In manual mode, the application simply integrates all measured powered levels over the integration bandwidth, including the power levels measured within the notches.
Channel Bandwidth
Integration Bandwidth Notch 1
Notch 2
Figure 6-40: Manual mode: Integration bandwidth channel bandwidth (notches not deducted)
Overlapping notches or notches outside the channel bandwidth Note that measurement results can become inaccurate when notches overlap or lie outside of the channel bandwidth.
NPR measurements with signal generator control To test the NPR of a satellite channel with multiple notch filters using a signal generator, you must configure the same settings on the analyzer and on the generator. The R&S FSW can now take control of the connected generator, so that you only need to
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
214
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement
configure the notches once. The analyzer can then automatically set the generator to the same settings.
Generator control by the R&S FSW has the following preconditions on the signal generator: R&S SMW Notched Noise option (R&S SMW-K811) installed Either ARB waveforms or one of the standards supported by the K811 option active
on the generator
Frequency-coupled NPR measurements
For NPR measurements, configuring and re-configuring the carrier frequencies and notches first on the analyzer, and then on the generator, can become very tedious. Therefore, frequency coupling is now provided in which the analyzer takes control of the generator. The frequency on the generator is automatically set to the analyzer frequency, possibly with a fixed factor or offset applied.
6.5.3 NPR Results
The R&S FSW shows the measurement results in a diagram and a table in numerical form.
The diagram consists of several elements. A horizontal blue bar at the bottom of the diagram indicates the channel bandwidth. Two vertical blue lines indicate the integration range or integration bandwidth. It is
the same as the channel bandwidth by default (it is labeled "channel bandwidth" in that case). Vertical green lines indicate notches and their bandwidth. The number of displayed notches is variable.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
215
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement
In the result summary, the following results are provided for the specified channel and individual notches:
Table 6-11: Noise Power Ratio result summary parameters
Parameter
Description
"Channel" / "Notch"
Channel or notch number
"Channel BW" (auto mode) / "Integration BW"
Specified channel bandwidth or manually defined integration bandwidth used as basis for power density calculation in total channel or notch
"Offset"
Frequency offset of notch or integration bandwidth to center frequency
"Channel Power" / "Power Power measured in channel or notch - absolute value or density (= power
density"
divided by the "Channel BW"/"Integration BW" in dBm/Hz)
"NPR"
(Notches only:) Ratio of total channel power density to notch power density in dB
Remote command: Channel power (density), notch power density, power ratio: CALCulate<n>:NPRatio:RESult? on page 967 Measured power values for each sweep point (by default 1001): TRAC:DATA? TRACe1 (see TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1196).
6.5.4 NPR Configuration
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Noise Power Measurement" > "NPR Config" > "Noise Power Ratio" tab
The R&S FSW noise power ratio measurement allows you to specify your satellite channel and up to 25 notch filters in your measurement setup. For a more general measurement, the bandwidth on which the total power density is based can be selected freely.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
216
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement
Figure 6-41: Noise Power Ratio configuration dialog with a signal generator connected
An LED next to a setting indicates whether the setting was adjusted on the connected generator successfully. They are only available if a valid generator IP address is detected (see "Signal Generator IP Address" on page 222). The LED indicates the following states: green: setting on the R&S FSW is valid and was successfully applied on the signal
generator red: control error, for example because the specified value cannot be applied on
the signal generator gray: signal generator control off
Note that if you change the setting on the generator manually, the analyzer does not adapt the setting automatically. The green LED for a previous successful transmission does not change.
Channel Bandwidth..................................................................................................... 218 Integration Bandwidth................................................................................................. 218 Number of Notches..................................................................................................... 218 Generator Notch Filter State....................................................................................... 218 Frequency Offset per Notch........................................................................................ 219 Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to Channel BW).............................................. 219 Generator Notch State................................................................................................ 219
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
217
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement
Upload all Notch Settings to Generator.......................................................................220 Query all Notch Settings from Generator.................................................................... 220 Result Power Mode.....................................................................................................220
Channel Bandwidth Defines the channel bandwidth on which the total power density is based. The bandwidth is positioned around the currently defined Center Frequency .
To specify a different bandwidth for total power density calculation, or to shift the bandwidth, define an Integration Bandwidth manually.
Remote command: [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:BWIDth on page 953
Integration Bandwidth Defines a bandwidth other than the channel bandwidth to be used for total power density calculation. Select the "Manual" option and define the bandwidth manually.
In auto mode, the integration bandwidth is the same as the channel bandwidth. Notches are deducted from the results.
In manual mode, you can customize the integration bandwidth. The results include the power levels measured within notches, however.
A "Frequency Offset" shifts the bandwidth away from the currently defined Center Frequency .
Remote command: [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:BWIDth on page 954 [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:AUTO on page 953 [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:FREQuency:OFFSet on page 954
Number of Notches Defines the number of notches for which results are determined. A maximum of 25 notches can be defined. Note that even if bandwidths for further notches are defined, only the number specified here are actually calculated and displayed.
If Generator Control State is enabled in the generator settings, the specified number of notches is sent to the generator on upload. An LED next to the setting indicates whether the setting was adjusted on the connected instrument successfully.
See Chapter 6.5.3, "NPR Results", on page 215 for more information about how notches are treated in the measurement.
Remote command: [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:COUNt on page 955 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:COUNt:CSTate? on page 962
Generator Notch Filter State Activates or deactivates a notch filter on the signal generator.
This setting is only available if Generator Control State is enabled. Its value is only sent to the signal generator when you select Upload all Generator Setup Settings to Generator. An LED next to the setting indicates whether the setting was adjusted on the connected instrument successfully.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
218
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement
Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio[:STATe] on page 965 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:STATe:CSTate? on page 965
Frequency Offset per Notch Defines the center position of the notch in relation to the currently defined Center Frequency .
If Generator Control State is enabled, the frequency offset for the notch is sent to the generator on upload. An LED next to the setting indicates whether the setting was adjusted on the connected instrument successfully.
If a variable frequency definition is used (see Chapter 6.5.6, "Generator Frequency Coupling", on page 225), the defined factor (Numerator / Denominator) is also applied to the frequency offset per notch.
FreqOffsetGen = Numerator / Denominator * FreqOffsetAnalyzer
Remote command: [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:FREQuency:OFFSet on page 956 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:FREQuency:OFFSet: CSTate? on page 961
Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to Channel BW) Defines the bandwidth of the individual notch either as an absolute value, or as a percentage of the defined Channel Bandwidth.
If Generator Control State is enabled, the absolute notch bandwidth is sent to the generator on upload. An LED next to the setting indicates whether the setting was adjusted on the connected instrument successfully.
If a variable frequency definition is used (see Chapter 6.5.6, "Generator Frequency Coupling", on page 225), the defined factor (Numerator / Denominator) is also applied to the absolute notch bandwidth.
Notch_BWGen = Numerator / Denominator * Notch_BWAnalyzer
Remote command: [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:BWIDth[:ABSolute] on page 955 [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:BWIDth:RELative on page 955 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:BWIDth:ABSolute:CSTate? on page 960
Generator Notch State If enabled, the notch is considered for signal generation on the connected signal generator.
This setting is only available if Generator Control State is enabled. Its value is only sent to the signal generator when you select Upload all Generator Setup Settings to Generator. An LED next to the setting indicates whether the setting was adjusted on the connected instrument successfully.
Note: on the R&S FSW, all notches are always active. The "Generator Notch State" parameter determines whether the individual notch is considered by the generator or not.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
219
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement
Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>[:STATe] on page 962 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:STATe:CSTate? on page 961
Upload all Notch Settings to Generator Transmits the notch settings defined on this tab from the R&S FSW to the connected signal generator. The signal generator uses the settings to create an ARB waveform, which in turn is used as the input signal for the measurement.
In particular, the following settings are transmitted to the generator: Generator Notch Filter State Number of Notches
Per notch: Frequency Offset per Notch Notch bandwidth (absolute) Generator Notch State
As opposed to the general generator settings, changes to the notch settings are not applied to the generator immediately. Since creating the waveform can take some time, it is best done after all notch settings have been defined, rather than after each individual setting.
Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:SETTings:NOTCh:UPDate on page 964
Query all Notch Settings from Generator Queries all currently defined notch settings on the connected signal generator and applies the settings to the R&S FSW.
This is useful directly after activating generator control, for example, or after making changes to the notch settings on the generator.
In particular, the following settings are transmitted to the analyzer: Generator Notch Filter State Number of Notches
Per notch: Frequency Offset per Notch Notch bandwidth (absolute) Generator Notch State
Remote command: CONFigure:SETTings:NPRatio:NOTCh on page 967
Result Power Mode Determines whether the power measured in a channel or notch is indicated as a power or a density value.
"Power"
Absolute power measured in channel or notch in current amplitude unit
"Density"
Power measured in channel or notch divided by the "Channel BW"/"Integration BW" in dBm/Hz
Remote command: [SENSe:]NPRatio:MODE on page 954
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
220
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement
6.5.5 Generator Setup
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Noise Power Measurement" > "NPR Config" > "Generator Setup" tab
The general settings required to control a connected signal generator by the R&S FSW are defined here. The control settings are only available if a connection to a signal generator has been established.
The individual settings are only available if generator control is enabled.
For each setting, an LED indicates whether the setting was adjusted on the connected generator successfully. Thus, you can quickly detect the cause of possible errors. The LED indicates the following states: green: connection established and all settings valid red: control error, for example because a specified value cannot be applied on the
signal generator gray: signal generator control off
If you change the setting on the generator manually after an automatic setting, the LED might not indicate the correct state.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:STATe:CSTate? on page 965
Signal Generator IP Address...................................................................................... 222 IP Address / Computer Name....................................................................... 222 Connect/Disconnect......................................................................................223
Generator Control State.............................................................................................. 223
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
221
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement
Path RF/ Path BB........................................................................................................223 RF Output State.......................................................................................................... 224 Frequency................................................................................................................... 224 Level (RMS)................................................................................................................ 224 Level Offset................................................................................................................. 224 Reference Frequency..................................................................................................224 Standard......................................................................................................................224 ARB Waveform File.....................................................................................................225 Upload all Generator Setup Settings to Generator..................................................... 225 Query all Generator Setup Settings from Generator...................................................225
Signal Generator IP Address Indicates the state and address of a connected signal generator.
The LED indicates the following connection states: green: connection established to compatible generator red: connection could not be established, possibly due to an incompatible instru-
ment gray: no signal generator connected Select the TCPIP address or "Configure" to define the connection information for the connected signal generator.
Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection:CSTate? on page 1383
IP Address / Computer Name Signal Generator IP Address The IP address or computer name of the signal generator connected to the R&S FSW via LAN.
By default, the IP address is expected. To enter the computer name, toggle the "123"/"ABC" button to "ABC".
Select Connect/Disconnect to establish a connection from the R&S FSW to the specified signal generator.
Note: While a connection to a signal generator is established, you cannot change the connection information. The IP address / computer name is maintained after a [PRESET], and is transferred between applications. However, when you switch applications, the control is disabled in the other applications. Only one application can control a generator at any time.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
222
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement
Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:IPConnection:ADDRess on page 1384
Connect/Disconnect Signal Generator IP Address The R&S FSW attempts to establish a connection to the signal generator, or disconnects it.
If an instrument is connected, the following information is displayed: Device type Name and serial number Connection state
Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection[:STATe] on page 1384 CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection:CSTate? on page 1383
Generator Control State Activates or disables control of the signal generator by the R&S FSW.
If a connection was defined in another measurement channel, the connection is maintained when you switch to the Spectrum application. However, generator control is disabled to protect the DUT from possibly erroneous or damaging settings. Check the settings, then enable the control state.
Note: While generator control is active, you cannot change the connection information. Only one channel can control a generator at any time. If you switch on generator control while it is still active in another channel, for example for parameter coupling with a generator, the control is disabled in the other channel. Exception: The SCPI Recorder maintains control of the generator even if you switch channels. For details on parameter coupling, see Chapter 11.9, "Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration", on page 758. As long as the R&S FSW controls the signal generator, any (general) generator settings you define on the R&S FSW are automatically adapted on the generator. The opposite does not apply, that is: changes you make on the generator are not automatically applied to the R&S FSW. The green LED for a previous successful transmission does not change. Use the Query all Generator Setup Settings from Generator function to apply the generator settings on the R&S FSW.
Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:CONTrol[:STATe] on page 958
Path RF/ Path BB Selects the RF signal path and indicates the BB signal path of the generator to be used for signal generation.
Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:TARGet:PATH:RF on page 966 CONFigure:GENerator:TARGet:PATH:BB? on page 966
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
223
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement
RF Output State To protect the instrument from possibly erroneous or damaging settings, you must manually activate the RF output on the signal generator to start providing a signal. Check all settings on the signal generator, in particular the level settings, before activating the RF output. A red LED on the "Generator Control" tab indicates a setting error on the generator. Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:RFOutput[:STATe] on page 966 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:RFOutput:STATe:CSTate? on page 964
Frequency Defines the frequency of the signal provided by the signal generator. If the Generator Frequency Coupling State is active, this value is read-only and indicates the resulting frequency setting on the generator. Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:FREQuency:CENTer on page 957 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency:CENTer:CSTate? on page 959
Level (RMS) (Default:) The specified power level is used for the output power by the connected signal generator. Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:POWer:LEVel on page 965 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:POWer:LEVel:CSTate? on page 963
Level Offset Defines a fixed offset in the power level used by the generator, for example due to a gain from the DUT. Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:POWer:LEVel:OFFSet on page 966 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:POWer:LEVel:OFFSet:CSTate? on page 963
Reference Frequency Selects the source of the generator reference frequency. The internal reference is that of the signal generator itself. An external reference is provided via the EXT connectors on the generator, for example by the R&S FSW.
Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:EXTernal:ROSCillator on page 957 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:EXTernal:ROSCillator:CSTate? on page 959
Standard For reference only: the standard currently used by the signal generator. If no standard is defined on the generator, notched signals are not available (see "Generator Notch Filter State" on page 218).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
224
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement
Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:BB:STANdard? on page 958
ARB Waveform File For reference only: the ARB waveform file currently used by the signal generator.
Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:BB:ARBitrary:WAVeform:SELect? on page 957
Upload all Generator Setup Settings to Generator Applies all generator setup settings defined on this tab to the connected signal generator once.
This is useful directly after activating generator control, for example, or when you change settings on the generator. As soon as generator control is active, any changes to the general settings on the R&S FSW are immediately applied to the generator automatically.
In particular, the following settings are transmitted to the generator: RF Output State Frequency Level (RMS) Level Offset Reference Frequency
Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:SETTings:UPDate on page 964
Query all Generator Setup Settings from Generator Queries all currently defined generator setup settings on the connected signal generator and applies the settings to the R&S FSW.
This is useful directly after activating generator control, for example, or when you change settings on the generator. The R&S FSW does not automatically adapt its settings when you make changes on the generator.
In particular, the following settings are transmitted to the analyzer: RF Output State Frequency Level (RMS) Level Offset Reference Frequency
Remote command: CONFigure:SETTings:NPRatio on page 967
6.5.6 Generator Frequency Coupling
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Noise Power Measurement" > "NPR Config" > "Generator Freq Coupling" tab
These settings are only available if generator control is enabled (see "Generator Control State" on page 223).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
225
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement
Instead of defining a fixed frequency to be used by the signal generator, you can couple the frequency of the generator to the analyzer using a variable frequency definition. Note that the frequency definition also affects the (absolute) Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to Channel BW) and the "Frequency Offset per Notch" on page 219.
The overall status of the frequency coupling is indicated by an LED next to the frequency definition. The LED indicates the following states: green: frequency setting valid red: frequency value cannot be applied on the signal generator gray: signal generator control or coupling off
Generator Frequency Coupling State......................................................................... 226 fGen...............................................................................................................................226 fAnalyzer.......................................................................................................................... 227 Numerator................................................................................................................... 227 Denominator................................................................................................................227 Frequency Offset.........................................................................................................227
Generator Frequency Coupling State Enables or disables frequency coupling between the R&S FSW and the connected generator. If disabled, a fixed frequency is used by the generator. Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe] on page 959
fGen Indicates the resulting frequency setting on the generator, depending on the other frequency parameters. The generator frequency is defined as: fGen = [fAnalyzer * Numerator / Denominator] + Frequency Offset Any changes to one of the interdependent parameters automatically affect the calculated signal levels on the connected generator.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
226
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement
If Generator Frequency Coupling State is disabled, define a fixed frequency to be used by the generator. Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:FREQuency:CENTer on page 957 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency:CENTer:CSTate? on page 959
fAnalyzer Sets the analyzer (center) frequency, which is used as a basis for the variable frequency definition. Remote command: [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer on page 1132
Numerator Defines the numerator of the frequency-defining factor. Note that this factor also affects the (absolute) Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to Channel BW) and the "Frequency Offset per Notch" on page 219. Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator on page 960
Denominator Defines the denominator of the frequency-defining factor. Note that this factor also affects the (absolute) Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to Channel BW) and the "Frequency Offset per Notch" on page 219. Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator on page 960
Frequency Offset Defines a fixed offset to be applied to the generator frequency. Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency:OFFSet on page 960
6.5.7 How to Perform NPR Measurements
Measuring the noise power ratio is a very easy and straightforward task with the R&S FSW.
1. From the "Overview" , select "Frequency" . 2. Define the "Center Frequency" of your channel. 3. From the "Overview" , select "Select Measurement" . 4. Select "Noise Power Measurement".
The measurement is started immediately with the default settings.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
227
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement
5. Select the "NPR Config" softkey.
6. Specify the "Channel Bandwidth" of your entire channel.
7. If necessary, define an appropriate span.
8. Enter the "Number of notches" in your signal.
9. For each notch, define the bandwidth (absolute or relative to the channel bandwidth) and its position (relative to the center frequency). The channel and notches are indicated in the spectrum diagram, and the power results are indicated in the result summary.
6.5.8 Measurement Example
Assume a satellite channel with a bandwidth of 72 MHz at a center frequency of 500 MHz. Notch filters are located around the subcarrier frequencies 487.8 MHz and 512.2 MHz, with a bandwidth of 3.6 MHz. We will demonstrate how to determine the distortion caused by each subcarrier on the other, defined as the noise power ratio for each notch.
How to perform this measurement in a remote environment is described in Chapter 13.5.6.5, "Programming Example: Measuring the Noise Power Ratio", on page 968.
1. From the "Overview" , select "Frequency" .
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
228
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
2. Define the "Center Frequency" = 500 MHz.
3. Define a "Span" = 80 MHz.
4. From the "Overview" , select "Select Measurement" .
5. Select "Noise Power Measurement".
6. Select the "NPR Config" softkey.
7. Specify the "Channel Bandwidth" = 72 MHz.
8. Enter the "Number of notches" = 2.
9. For notch 1, define: "Frequency Offset" = -12.2 MHz "Notch Bandwidth Absolute" = 3.6 MHz
10. For notch 2, define: "Frequency Offset" = +12.2 MHz "Notch Bandwidth Relative" = 5 % (for demonstration purposes; the effect is the same as "Notch Bandwidth Absolute" = 3.6 MHz) The channel and two notches are indicated in the spectrum diagram, and the noise power ratio for each notch is indicated in the result summary.
6.6 Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurements monitor compliance with a spectral mask.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
229
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
About the Measurement........................................................................................230 Typical Applications...............................................................................................230 SEM Results......................................................................................................... 230 SEM Basics...........................................................................................................233 SEM Configuration................................................................................................ 244 How to Perform a Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement..................................261 Measurement Example: Multi-SEM Measurement................................................266 Reference: SEM File Descriptions........................................................................ 267
6.6.1 About the Measurement
The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement defines a measurement that monitors compliance with a spectral mask. The mask is defined with reference to the input signal power. The R&S FSW allows for a flexible definition of all parameters in the SEM measurement. The analyzer performs measurements in predefined frequency ranges with settings that can be specified individually for each of these ranges.
In the basic Spectrum application, spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels, where the sub blocks can include gaps or overlap, and define separate masks. Radio signals using multiple standards can also be analyzed.
SEM measurement configurations can be saved to an XML file which can then be exported to another application or loaded on the R&S FSW again later. Some predefined XML files are provided that contain ranges and parameters according to the selected standard.
To improve the performance of the R&S FSW for spectrum emission mask measurements, a "Fast SEM" mode is available.
A special limit check for SEM measurements allows for monitoring compliance of the spectrum.
6.6.2 Typical Applications
Spectrum Emission Mask measurements are typically performed to ensure that modulated signals remain within the valid signal level ranges. These ranges are defined by a particular transmission standard, both in the transmission channel and neighboring channels. Any violations of the mask can interfere with other transmissions.
The 3GPP TS 34.122 standard, for example, defines a mask for emissions outside the transmission channel. This mask is defined relative to the input signal power. Three frequency ranges to each side of the transmission channel are defined.
6.6.3 SEM Results
As a result of the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement, the following results are displayed in a diagram (see also Chapter 6.6.4.2, "Limit Lines in SEM Measurements", on page 236):
The measured signal levels
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
230
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
The result of the limit check (mask monitoring) The defined limit lines TX channel power "P" The used power class
Multi-SEM measurements Multi-SEM measurements are SEM measurements with more than one sub block. In these measurements, each sub block has its own power class definitions. In this case, the power class is not indicated in the graphical result displays.
Example: For example, in Figure 6-42, "31 < P < 39" is indicated as the used power class is defined from 31 to 39.
Figure 6-42: Spectrum Emission Mask result displays
In addition to the graphical results of the SEM measurement displayed in the diagram, a result summary is displayed to evaluate the limit check results (see also Chapter 6.6.4.2, "Limit Lines in SEM Measurements", on page 236).
The following information is provided in the result summary:
Label General information "Standard" "Tx Power" "Tx Bandwidth"
Description
Loaded standard settings Power of the reference range Tx bandwidth used by the reference range
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
231
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Label "RBW" Range results "Range Low" "Range Up" "RBW" "Frequency" "Power Abs" "Power Rel" "Limit"
Description RBW used by the reference range
Start of the frequency range the peak value was found in Frequency range end the peak value was found in RBW of the range Frequency of the peak power level Absolute peak power level within the range Peak power level within the range, relative to the "Tx Power" Deviation of the peak power level from the limit line
You can define in which detail the data is displayed in the result summary in the "List Evaluation" settings (see Chapter 6.6.5.7, "List Evaluation (Results Configuration)", on page 259). By default, one peak per range is displayed. However, you can change the settings to display only peaks that exceed a threshold ( "Margin" ).
Detected peaks are not only listed in the Result Summary, they are also indicated by colored squares in the diagram (optionally, see Show Peaks in the "List Evaluation" settings).
Figure 6-43: Detected peak display in SEM measurement
Furthermore, you can export the results of the result summary to a file which can be exported to another application for further analysis.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
232
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Results for SEM with multiple sub blocks
In the Spectrum application only, spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels (see Chapter 6.6.4.5, "SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks ("MultiSEM")", on page 240 for details). Up to 8 sub blocks (with 7 gaps) can be defined. For each sub block and each gap, the results described above are provided individually in the result summary.
Figure 6-44: SEM results for multiple sub blocks
Retrieving results via remote control
The measurement results of the spectrum emission mask test can be retrieved using the CALC:LIM:FAIL? command from a remote computer; see CALCulate<n>: LIMit<li>:FAIL? on page 1280 for a detailed description. The power result for the reference range can be queried using CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CPOW; The peak power for the reference range can be queried using CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? PPOW, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion: POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 886. The measured power trace can be queried using TRAC:DATA? and TRAC:DATA:X?, see TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1196 and TRACe<n>[:DATA]:X? on page 1198: The measured peak power list can be queried using TRAC:DATA? LIST, see TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1196.
6.6.4 SEM Basics
Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in SEM measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
233
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Ranges and Range Settings................................................................................. 234 Limit Lines in SEM Measurements........................................................................236 Fast SEM Measurements......................................................................................238 Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) SEM Measurements............................................... 240 SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks ("Multi-SEM")........................................................ 240
6.6.4.1 Ranges and Range Settings
In the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements, a range defines a segment for which you can define the following parameters separately:
Start and stop frequency RBW VBW "Sweep Time" "Sweep Points" Reference level Attenuator settings Preamplifier settings Transducer settings Limit values
Via the sweep list, you define the ranges and their settings. For details on settings, refer to Chapter 6.6.5.1, " Sweep List ", on page 245.
For details on defining the limits (masks), see Chapter 6.6.4.2, "Limit Lines in SEM Measurements", on page 236.
Range definition
After a preset, the sweep list contains a set of default ranges and parameters. For each range, you can change the parameters listed above. You can insert or delete ranges.
The changes of the sweep list are only kept until you load another parameter set (by pressing [PRESET] or by loading an XML file). If you want a parameter set to be available permanently, create an XML file for this configuration (for details refer to "How to save a user-defined SEM settings file" on page 264).
If you load one of the provided XML files, the sweep list contains ranges and parameters according to the selected standard.
Reference range
The range containing the center frequency is defined as the reference range for all other ranges in the sweep list. All range limits are defined in relation to the reference range. The TX power used as a reference for all power level results in the result summary is also calculated for this reference range. You can define whether the power used for reference is the peak power level or the integrated power of the reference
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
234
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
range. In the "Sweep List" , the reference range is highlighted in blue and cannot be deleted.
Rules
The following rules apply to ranges: The minimum span of a range is 20 Hz. The individual ranges must not overlap (but can have gaps). The maximum number of ranges is 30. The minimum number of ranges is 3. The reference range cannot be deleted. Center the reference range on the center frequency. The current "Tx Bandwidth" defines the minimum span of the reference range (see
" Channel Power Settings " on page 252). Define frequency values for each range relative to the center frequency.
To change the start frequency of the first range or the stop frequency of the last range, select the appropriate span with the [SPAN] key. You can define a span that is smaller than the combined span of all ranges. In this case, the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz. The first and last ranges are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated.
Changing the frequency range of the measurement using external mixers If you change the used frequency range of the measurement by activating or deactivating an external mixer, the R&S FSW automatically adapts the span to full span. Thus, the ranges for the SEM measurement can change, as well.
Sweep points
You can define a minimum number of sweep points for each range. The total number of available sweep points is then distributed among the ranges in consideration of the minimum values. If the total number of sweep points is not enough to satisfy the minimum sweep point requirements in all ranges, the R&S FSW adjusts the global number of Sweep Points accordingly. By default, each range has a minimum of one sweep point.
This allows you to increase the resolution within a specific range for detailed analysis. You do not have to increase the overall number of sweep points and thus the measurement time for the SEM measurement.
Symmetrical ranges
You can easily define a sweep list with symmetrical range settings, i.e. the ranges to the left and right of the reference range are defined symmetrically. When symmetrical setup is activated, the current sweep list configuration is changed to define a symmetrical setup regarding the reference range. The number of ranges to the left of the reference range is reflected to the right, i.e. any missing ranges on the right are inserted,
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
235
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
while superfluous ranges are removed. The values in the ranges to the right of the reference range are adapted symmetrically to those in the left ranges.
Symmetrical ranges fulfill the conditions required for "Fast SEM" mode (see Chapter 6.6.4.3, "Fast SEM Measurements", on page 238).
Power classes
If the signal power level to be monitored varies and the limits vary accordingly, you can define power classes, which can then be assigned to the frequency ranges. Thus, the limits for the signal levels can be defined differently for varying input levels. For instance, for higher input levels a transmission standard can allow for higher power levels in adjacent channels, whereas for lower input levels the allowed deviation can be stricter. Up to four different power classes can be defined.
6.6.4.2 Limit Lines in SEM Measurements
For the R&S FSW, the spectrum emission mask is defined using limit lines. Limit lines allow you to check the measured data (that is, the trace results) against specified limit values. Generally, it is possible to define limit lines for any measurement in the Spectrum application application using the [Lines] function. For SEM measurements, however, special limit lines are available via the "Sweep List" , and it is strongly recommended that you use only these limit line definitions.
In the "Sweep List" , you can define a limit line for each power class that varies its level according to the specified frequency ranges. Special limit lines are automatically defined for each power class according to the current "Sweep List" settings every time the settings change. These limit lines are labeled "_SEM_LINE_<xxx>_ABS<0...3>" and "_SEM_LINE_<xxx>_REL<0...3>" , where <xxx> is an index to distinguish limit lines between different channels.
The limit line defined for the currently used power class is indicated by a red line in the display. The result of the limit check is indicated at the top of the diagram. Note that only "Pass" or "Fail" is indicated; a "Margin" function as for general limit lines is not available.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
236
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
The indicated limit line depends on the settings in the "Sweep List" . Several types of limit checks are possible:
Table 6-12: Limit check types
Limit check type Pass/fail criteria
Limit line definition
"Absolute"
Absolute power levels must not exceed limit line
Defined by the "Abs Limit Start" / "Abs Limit Stop" values for each range
"Relative"
Power deviations relative to the TX channel power must not exceed limit line
Defined by the "Rel Limit Start" / "Rel Limit Stop" values (relative to the TX channel power), fixed for each range.
"Relative with function f(x)"
If the power exceeds both the absolute and the relative limits, the check fails (see Relative limit line functions below)
Defined by the maximum of the absolute or relative start and stop limit values for each range. Thus, the start or stop point of the limit range, or both, are variable (since the maximum can vary).
"Abs and Rel"
If the power exceeds both the absolute and the relative limits, the check fails.
The less strict (higher) limit line is displayed for each range.
If you use a function to define the relative limit start or stop value, the signal is checked against an additional condition: the power must exceed the absolute limit, as well as the absolute and relative function values.
"Abs or Rel"
If the power exceeds either the absolute or the relative limits, the check fails.
The stricter (lower) limit line is displayed for each range.
If you use a function to define the relative limit start or stop value, the signal is checked against an additional condition: if the power exceeds the absolute limit, or the higher of the absolute and relative function values, the check fails.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
237
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Relative limit line functions
A new function allows you to define limit lines whose start or end points (or both) are variable, depending on the carrier power. Thus, the resulting limit line can change its slope within the range, depending on the carrier power. Common relative limit lines are calculated once for the defined start and end points and maintain a constant slope.
If the relative limit value function is used in combination with the "Abs and Rel" or "Abs or Rel" limit check types, an additional condition is considered for the limit check (see Table 6-12).
Limit check results in the result summary
For each range, the peak measured value and the deviation of these values from the limit line are displayed in the result summary. If the limit check is passed for the range, the deviation represents the closest value to the limit line. If the limit check is passed for the range, the deviation represents the closest value to the limit line. If the limit check for the range fails, the deviation represents the maximum violation against the limit line. Furthermore, the absolute power levels and the relative deviation of the peaks from the TX channel power are displayed. Values that exceed the limit are indicated in red and by an asterisk (*).
Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check, a margin (threshold) for the peak values to be displayed in the Result Summary can be defined. (In the "List Evaluation" settings, see Chapter 6.6.5.7, "List Evaluation (Results Configuration)", on page 259).
6.6.4.3 Fast SEM Measurements
To improve the performance of the R&S FSW for spectrum emission mask measurements, a "Fast SEM" mode is available. If this mode is activated, several consecutive ranges with identical sweep settings are combined to one sweep internally, which makes the measurement considerably faster. The displayed results remain unchanged and still consist of several ranges. Thus, measurement settings that apply only to the results, such as limits, can nevertheless be defined individually for each range.
Prerequisites
"Fast SEM" mode is available if the following criteria apply: The frequency ranges are consecutive, without frequency gaps The following sweep settings are identical (for details see Chapter 6.6.5.1, " Sweep
List ", on page 245): � "Filter Type" � "RBW" � "VBW"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
238
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
� "Sweep Time Mode" � "Reference Level" � "RF Attenuation Mode" � "RF Attenuation" � "Preamplifier"
Activating Fast SEM mode "Fast SEM" mode is activated in the sweep list (see Chapter 6.6.5.1, " Sweep List ", on page 245) or using a remote command. Activating the mode for one range automatically activates it for all ranges in the sweep list. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:HSPeed on page 973
Fast SEM not supported for multiple sub blocks For SEM with multiple sub blocks, fast SEM is not available. If more than one sub block is defined and a standard is loaded which contains an active fast SEM setting, this setting is disabled. For more information on multi-SEM measurements, see Chapter 6.6.4.5, "SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks ("Multi-SEM")", on page 240.
Consequences When the "Fast SEM" mode is activated, the ranges for which these criteria apply are displayed as one single range. The sweep time is defined as the sum of the individual sweep times, initially, but can be changed.
If "Symmetrical Setup" mode is active when "Fast SEM" mode is activated, not all sweep list settings can be configured symmetrically automatically (see also " Symmetrical Setup " on page 250).
Any other changes to the sweep settings of the combined range are applied to each included range and remain changed even after deactivating "Fast SEM" mode.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
239
R&S�FSW Example
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Figure 6-45: Sweep list using Fast SEM mode
In Figure 6-45, a sweep list is shown for which Fast SEM is activated. The formerly five separately defined ranges are combined to two sweep ranges internally.
6.6.4.4 Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) SEM Measurements
Multi-standard radio (MSR) measurements allow you to perform SEM tests on signals with multiple carriers using different digital standards. MSR measurements are described in the specification 3GPP TS 37.141. Various typical combinations of standards for base station tests are described, e.g. LTE FDD and W-CDMA carriers. By performing an MSR SEM measurement you can determine if or how the different carriers affect each other, i.e. if unwanted emissions occur. On the R&S FSW, the MSR SEM measurement is a standard measurement as for single carriers. The MSR settings merely provide a convenient way of configuring the sweep list for all required ranges according to the specification quickly.
Refined settings allow the R&S FSW to calculate the SEM limits according to standard 3GPP 37.141 V12.2.0, which distinguishes between base station configurations and power values.
6.6.4.5 SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks ("Multi-SEM")
In the Spectrum application application only, spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels (also referred to as a "Multi-SEM" measurement). Sub blocks are a set of multiple ranges around a defined center frequency (carrier). Multiple sub blocks can include gaps or overlap, and each sub block defines a separate mask.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
240
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
In the overlapping masks, multi-limit lines are calculated. Up to 8 sub blocks (with 7 gaps) can be defined. For each sub block, the familiar configuration settings concerning ranges, limit lines etc. can be defined individually.
Comparison to "traditional" SEM measurement
The default SEM measurement is simply a special case of "Multi-SEM" - consisting of one single block. Only if the number of sub blocks in the basic SEM configuration is larger than 1, multiple sub blocks are inserted in the configuration settings and result tables.
Particular features of configuring multiple sub blocks
The sub blocks are independent of the global start, stop, center and span frequencies for the complete SEM measurement. Thus, there can be gaps that can even include other carrier ranges, but are not configured for the SEM measurement.
For each sub block, you define: The center frequency of the reference range of the sub block; center frequencies
must be defined in ascending order for sub blocks A,B,C The reference range; note that although individual ranges of different sub blocks
can overlap, reference ranges for different sub blocks cannot; they must define distinct frequency ranges The sweep list, including the limit lines Optionally: a standard file or MSR settings to be used for measurement (if one is selected, the other is disabled)
Fast SEM not supported for multiple sub blocks For SEM with multiple sub blocks, fast SEM is not available. If more than one sub block is defined and a standard is loaded which contains an active fast SEM setting, this setting is disabled.
Absolute vs relative frequencies
In the default configuration with only one sub block, frequencies are defined relative to the center frequency; this is the familiar configuration.
For setups with more than one sub block, frequencies are defined relative to the center frequency of the reference ranges for the individual sub blocks. However, in the result summary, frequencies are indicated as absolute values. Relative frequencies that refer to different reference ranges would be inconvenient and difficult to analyze.
Limit check behavior for overlapping masks
Since spectrum emission masks are defined individually for each sub block, and sub blocks can overlap, the question arises what happens during the limit check in the overlapping regions? To answer this question, we must distinguish the following cases:
For the reference range, no limit checking is performed, as the reference range contains the carrier
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
241
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
For other ranges, only the limit lines defined for ranges between the carriers, that is the reference ranges to either side, are significant. In other words: if a limit line definition covers the frequency area of several carriers, only the limit lines for ranges between the corresponding reference range and the next closest reference range are significant.
Figure 6-46: Behavior for overlapping masks
For the ranges in which multiple limit lines are significant, a range-specific function determines the behavior of the limit check
Limit calculation for individual ranges
For each range a function can be defined that determines the behavior of the limit check if there are multiple limit lines: "NONE" : In reference ranges no limit check is performed;
Reference ranges always use the function "NONE" . For other ranges, see the combinations for overlapping ranges below. "SUM" : sum of the two limit lines (calculated for linear powers) is used "MAX" : maximum of the two limit lines is used
This leads to the following combinations for overlapping ranges:
"MAX" + "MAX" : maximum of the two limit lines is used "MAX" + "SUM" : maximum of the two limit lines is used "SUM" + "SUM" : sum of the two limit lines (calculated for linear powers) is used "NONE" + "MAX" / "NONE" + "SUM" : limit line (and parameters) of the "NONE"
range are ignored "NONE" + "NONE" : depends on the position of the overlapping ranges in relation
to the mid-frequency between the two neighboring sub blocks: � Overlap is completely below the mid-frequency: limits and parameters of the
left sub block are used � Overlap is completely above the mid-frequency: limits and parameters of the
right sub block are used � Overlap crosses the mid-frequency: new subranges are created: one to the left
of the mid-frequency, one to the right of the mid-frequency. The left subrange uses the limits and parameters of the left sub block, the right subrange uses the limits and parameters of the right sub block.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
242
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Different RBWs in overlapping ranges If different RBWs are defined for the overlapping ranges, the following parameters from the range with the smaller RBW are considered for both ranges: RBW VBW Attenuation Reference level Transducer Filter type (proportional) sweep time
In the range with the higher RBW, the following offset is applied to the limit line: -10*log(RBWlarge / RBWsmall)
Table 6-13: Limit lines in overlapping ranges crossing the mid-frequency
Initial situation: overlapping ranges
Range 4 ("None") + Range 5 ("None") overlap and cross the mid-frequency between sub blocks 1 and 2
Result: Subranges 4a and 5a are created left and right of the mid-frequency;
For subrange 4a: limit line and parameters of range 4 apply
For subrange 5a: limit line and parameters of range 5 apply
Global SEM limit check
For the complete SEM measurement, which can consist of multiple sub blocks, only one single limit check is performed. A single limit line is calculated according to the individual range limit lines and the defined functions for overlapping ranges. The measured values are then compared with this single limit line. If the limit is exceeded in any range, the result of the limit check is . "' failed!"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
243
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Figure 6-47: Summarized limit line for multiple sub blocks
6.6.5 SEM Configuration
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask" The SEM measurement is started immediately with the default settings. The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 13.5.7, "Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask", on page 968.
Global span settings The span of the signal to be monitored is configured in the general span settings (see Chapter 7.3.2, "Frequency and Span Settings", on page 441). Only ranges within this global span are considered for the SEM measurement.
Multi-SEM configuration In the Spectrum application application only, spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels (see Chapter 6.6.4.5, "SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks ("Multi-SEM")", on page 240). Up to 8 sub blocks (with 7 gaps) can be defined. For each sub block, the familiar configuration settings concerning ranges, limit lines etc. can be defined in individual tabs. In addition, settings on the sub blocks themselves must be configured in the "Sub Block" tab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" configuration dialog box (see Chapter 6.6.5.2, "Multi-SEM (Sub Block) Settings", on page 250).
The following settings are available in individual tabs of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" configuration dialog box.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
244
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Sweep List ............................................................................................................245 Multi-SEM (Sub Block) Settings............................................................................ 250 Reference Range..................................................................................................252 Power Classes...................................................................................................... 253 MSR Settings........................................................................................................ 254 Standard Files.......................................................................................................257 List Evaluation (Results Configuration)................................................................. 259
6.6.5.1 Sweep List
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask" > "Sweep List"
For SEM measurements, the input signal is split into several frequency ranges which are swept individually and for which different limitations apply. You configure the individual frequency ranges and mask limits in the "Sweep List" .
If you edit the sweep list, always follow the rules and consider the limitations described in Chapter 6.6.4.1, "Ranges and Range Settings", on page 234.
Range Start / Range Stop .......................................................................................... 246 Fast SEM ................................................................................................................... 246 Filter Type .................................................................................................................. 246 RBW ...........................................................................................................................247 VBW ........................................................................................................................... 247 Sweep Time Mode ..................................................................................................... 247 Sweep Time ............................................................................................................... 247
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
245
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Ref Level .................................................................................................................... 247 RF Att Mode ............................................................................................................... 247 RF Attenuation ........................................................................................................... 247 Preamp .......................................................................................................................248 Transducer Factor ...................................................................................................... 248 Limit Check <n> ......................................................................................................... 248 Abs Limit Start / Stop <n> .......................................................................................... 248 Rel Limit Start / Stop <n> ........................................................................................... 248 Multi-Limit Calc <n> ................................................................................................... 249 Min Sweep Points ...................................................................................................... 249 Insert before Range / Insert after Range ....................................................................250 Delete Range ............................................................................................................. 250 Symmetrical Setup ..................................................................................................... 250
Range Start / Range Stop Sets the start frequency/stop frequency of the selected range.
To change the start/stop frequency of the first or last range, respectively, select the appropriate span in the [SPAN] configuration dialog. You can set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges. In this case, the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz. The first and last ranges are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated.
Define frequency values for each range relative to the center frequency. Center the reference range on the center frequency. The current "Tx Bandwidth" defines the minimum span of the reference range (see " Channel Power Settings " on page 252).
Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STARt on page 976 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STOP on page 976
Fast SEM Activates "Fast SEM" mode for all ranges in the sweep list. For details, see Chapter 6.6.4.3, "Fast SEM Measurements", on page 238.
Note: If you deactivate "Fast SEM" mode while "Symmetrical Setup" mode is on, "Symmetrical Setup" mode is automatically also deactivated. If you activate "Fast SEM" mode while "Symmetrical Setup" mode is on, not all range settings can be configured symmetrically automatically.
Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:HSPeed on page 973
Filter Type Sets the filter type for this range.
For details on filter types, see Chapter 7.5.1.6, "Which Data May Pass: Filter Types", on page 462.
Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:FILTer:TYPE on page 975
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
246
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
RBW Sets the resolution bandwidth for this range. For details on the RBW, see Chapter 7.5.1.1, "Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth", on page 459. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:RESolution on page 973
VBW Sets the video bandwidth for this range. For details on the VBW, see Chapter 7.5.1.2, "Smoothing the Trace Using the Video Bandwidth", on page 460. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:VIDeo on page 974
Sweep Time Mode Activates or deactivates the auto mode for the sweep time. For details on the sweep time mode, see Chapter 7.5.1.7, "How Long the Data is Measured: Sweep Time ", on page 463 Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 986
Sweep Time Sets the sweep time value for the range. For details on the sweep time, see Chapter 7.5.1.7, "How Long the Data is Measured: Sweep Time ", on page 463 Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME on page 986
Ref Level Sets the reference level for the range. For details on the reference level, see Chapter 7.4.1.1, "Reference Level", on page 448. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:RLEVel on page 985
RF Att Mode Activates or deactivates the auto mode for RF attenuation. For details on attenuation, see Chapter 7.4.1.2, "RF Attenuation", on page 449. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 977
RF Attenuation Sets the attenuation value for the range. For details on attenuation, see Chapter 7.4.1.3, "Scaling", on page 450.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
247
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation on page 977
Preamp Switches the preamplifier on or off. For details on the preamplifier, see " Preamplifier " on page 454. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN:STATe on page 978
Transducer Factor Sets a transducer for the specified range. You can only choose a transducer that fulfills the following conditions: The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range. The x-axis is linear. The unit is dB. For details on transducers, see Chapter 11.4.1, "Basics on Transducer Factors", on page 712. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:TRANsducer on page 986
Limit Check <n> Sets the type of limit check for the n-th power class in the range. Up to four limits are possible. For details on limit checks, see Chapter 6.6.4.2, "Limit Lines in SEM Measurements", on page 236. The limit state affects the availability of all limit settings. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:STATe on page 984 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:FAIL? on page 1280
Abs Limit Start / Stop <n> Sets an absolute limit value for the n-th power class at the start or stop frequency of the range [dBm]. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:ABSolute:STARt on page 979 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:ABSolute:STOP on page 979
Rel Limit Start / Stop <n> Sets a relative limit value for the n-th power class at the start or stop frequency of the range [dBc]. By default, this value is a fixed relative limit, i.e. no function is defined. To define a function for the relative limit, select the input field for "Rel Limit Start" or "Rel Limit Stop" and then the "f(x)" icon that appears.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
248
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
If the function is set to "Max" , you can define a relative and an absolute limit level. In this case, the maximum of the two values is used as the limit level.
For more information, see "Relative limit line functions" on page 238.
Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARt on page 980 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STOP on page 982 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARt: FUNCtion on page 981 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STOP:FUNCtion on page 983 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARt:ABS on page 980 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STOP:ABS on page 982
Multi-Limit Calc <n> Defines the function used to calculate the limit line for the n-th power class for overlapping ranges in Multi-SEM measurements. For details, see "Limit calculation for individual ranges" on page 242.
"NONE"
(reference ranges only:) the limit of the reference range is used
"SUM"
Sum of the two limit lines (calculated for linear powers) is used
"MAX"
Maximum of the two limit lines is used
Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:MLCalc on page 985
Min Sweep Points Defines the minimum number of sweep points for the range.
If necessary to fulfill all minimum sweep point requirements in all ranges, the global Sweep Points setting is increased. By default, each range is supplied with a minimum of one sweep point.
For details, see "Sweep points" on page 235
Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:POINts:MINimum[:VALue] on page 984
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
249
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Insert before Range / Insert after Range Inserts a new range to the left (before) or to the right (after) of the range in which the cursor is currently displayed. The range numbers of the currently focused range and all higher ranges are increased accordingly. The maximum number of ranges is 30.
Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INSert on page 978
Delete Range Deletes the currently focused range, if possible. (The reference range cannot be deleted. A minimum of three ranges is required.) The range numbers are updated accordingly.
Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:DELete on page 975
Symmetrical Setup Any changes to the range settings in active "Symmetrical Setup" mode lead to symmetrical changes in the other ranges (where possible). In particular, this means:
Inserting ranges: a symmetrical range is inserted on the other side of the reference range
Deleting ranges: the symmetrical range on the other side of the reference range is also deleted
Editing range settings: the settings in the symmetrical range are adapted accordingly
Note: If "Fast SEM" mode is deactivated while "Symmetrical Setup" mode is on, "Sym Setup" mode is automatically also deactivated. If "Fast SEM" mode is activated while "Symmetrical Setup" mode is on, not all range settings can be set automatically.
Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SSETup on page 987
6.6.5.2 Multi-SEM (Sub Block) Settings
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask" > "Sub Blocks"
In the Spectrum application application only, spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels (see Chapter 6.6.4.5, "SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks ("Multi-SEM")", on page 240). Sub blocks are a set of multiple ranges around a defined center frequency (carrier).
By default, a single sub block is assumed. If more than one sub blocks are defined, additional tabs are inserted for each sub block in the individual tabs of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" configuration dialog box.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
250
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Sub Block Count ........................................................................................................ 251 Sub Block / Center Freq .............................................................................................251 Standard / MSR Settings ............................................................................................251 Edit Sweep List .......................................................................................................... 251
Sub Block Count Defines the number of sub blocks. By default, the familiar SEM measurement with just one single block of ranges is configured.
Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SCOunt on page 972
Sub Block / Center Freq Defines the center frequency for an individual sub block. The center frequency determines the reference range used for each block.
For measurements with only one sub block, this setting corresponds to the global setting in the "Frequency" settings (see Center Frequency ).
Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SCENter on page 971
Standard / MSR Settings Defines the use of a standard settings file or a multi-standard radio configuration for a particular sub block. For details, see Chapter 6.6.5.6, "Standard Files", on page 257 and Chapter 6.6.5.5, "MSR Settings", on page 254.
Note that either a standard or an MSR setting can be selected; if one is selected, the other is disabled.
Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet[:STANdard] on page 969 Chapter 13.5.7.3, "Configuring a Multi-SEM Measurement", on page 971
Edit Sweep List Switches to the "Sweep List" tab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" dialog box to configure the individual frequency ranges and mask limits for the corresponding sub block. See Chapter 6.6.5.1, " Sweep List ", on page 245.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
251
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
6.6.5.3 Reference Range
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask" > "Reference Range" The range around the center frequency is defined as the reference range for all other ranges in the sweep list.
Power Reference Type ...............................................................................................252 Channel Power Settings .............................................................................................252
Tx Bandwidth ............................................................................................... 253 RRC Filter State ...........................................................................................253 Alpha: ...........................................................................................................253
Power Reference Type Defines how the reference power is calculated.
"Channel Power" Measures the channel power within the reference range using the integration bandwidth method. Additional settings can be configured for this method. (See also "IBW method" on page 149)
"Peak Power" Determines the peak power within the reference range.
Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RTYPe on page 989
Channel Power Settings If the "Power Reference Type:" "Channel Power" was selected, additional parameters can be configured.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
252
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Tx Bandwidth Channel Power Settings Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power, with: Minimum span "Tx Bandwidth" of reference range Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:BWID on page 987
RRC Filter State Channel Power Settings Activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:FILTer[:RRC][:STATe] on page 988
Alpha: Channel Power Settings Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter (if activated). Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:FILTer[:RRC]:ALPHa on page 988
6.6.5.4 Power Classes
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask" > "Power Classes"
You can configure power classes which you can then assign to sweep list ranges. For details, see "Power classes" on page 236.
Used Power Classes: .................................................................................................254 PMin / PMax ...............................................................................................................254 Sweep List ..................................................................................................................254 Adding or Removing a Power Class .......................................................................... 254
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
253
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Used Power Classes: Defines which power classes are considered for the SEM measurement. Limits can be defined only for used power classes. It is only possible to select either one specific power class or all the defined power classes.
If "All" is selected, the power class that corresponds to the currently measured power in the reference range is used for monitoring. The limits assigned to that power class are applied (see " Abs Limit Start / Stop <n> " on page 248 and " Rel Limit Start / Stop <n> " on page 248).
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>[:EXCLusive] on page 992 To define all limits in one step: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:LIMit[:STATe] on page 992
PMin / PMax Defines the power limits for each power class. The first range always starts at -200 dBm (-INF) and the last range always stops at 200 dBm (+INF). These fields cannot be modified. If more than one power class is defined, the value of "PMin" must be equal to the value of "PMax" of the previous power class and vice versa.
Note that the power level can be equal to the lower limit(s), but must be lower than the upper limit(s):
PminP<Pmax
Otherwise the ranges are corrected automatically.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:MINimum on page 994 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:MAXimum on page 993
Sweep List Switches to the "Sweep List" tab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" dialog box and focuses the "Limit Check" setting for the corresponding power class (1-4) in the reference range (see " Limit Check <n> " on page 248).
Adding or Removing a Power Class Adds a new power class at the end of the list or removes the last power class. After adding or removing, the last power class is adapted to end at "+INF" . Note that a maximum of four power classes are available.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:COUNt on page 991
6.6.5.5 MSR Settings
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask" > "MSR Settings"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
254
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Multi-standard radio (MSR) measurements allow you to perform SEM tests on multiple carriers using different digital standards. For details, see Chapter 6.6.4.4, "Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) SEM Measurements", on page 240.
Band Category ........................................................................................................... 255 Base Station Class .....................................................................................................256 Base Station Maximum Output Power ....................................................................... 256 Bands ......................................................................................................................... 256 Base Station RF Bandwidth ....................................................................................... 256 Carrier Adjacent to RF Bandwidth Edge .................................................................... 256 Power Gsm Carrier .................................................................................................... 257 Apply to SEM ............................................................................................................. 257
Band Category Defines the band category for MSR measurements, i.e. the combination of available carriers to measure.
"BC1"
LTE FDD and W-CDMA
"BC2"
LTE FDD, W-CDMA and GSM/EDGE
"BC3"
LTE TDD and TD-SCDMA
Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:BCATegory on page 996
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
255
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Base Station Class Defines the class of the base station according to its sending range. This setting is required to calculate the SEM limits according to standard 3GPP 37.141 V12.2.0. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:CLASs on page 997
Base Station Maximum Output Power Defines the maximum output power of the base station. Possible values are from 0 dBm to 100 dBm in 1 dB steps. This setting is only available for base stations with a medium range Base Station Class . This value is required to calculate the SEM limits according to standard 3GPP 37.141 V12.2.0. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:MPOWer on page 999
Bands Defines the frequency range of the bands used by the base station. This setting is only available for Band Category 1 or 3. This setting is required to calculate the SEM limits according to standard 3GPP 37.141 V12.2.0. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:BAND on page 995
Base Station RF Bandwidth Defines the relevant RF bandwidth (span) required to measure all available carriers in MSR SEM measurements. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:RFBWidth on page 1000
Carrier Adjacent to RF Bandwidth Edge For particular measurement setups, the specification demands specific limits for the SEM ranges. These settings are only available for Band Category 2. "GSM/Edge Present"
A GSM/EDGE carrier is located at the edge of the RF band. In this case, the power of the GSM carrier must be specified (see " Power Gsm Carrier " on page 257). "LTE FDD 1.4MHz/3MHz Present" An LTE FDD 1.4 MHz or 3 MHz carrier is located at the edge of the RF band. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:GSM:CPResent on page 998 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:LTE:CPResent on page 999
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
256
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Power Gsm Carrier Defines the power of the GSM carrier (if available, see " Carrier Adjacent to RF Bandwidth Edge " on page 256). Possible values are from 0 dBm to 100 dBm in 1 dB steps. This setting is only available for Band Category 2. This setting is required to calculate the SEM limits according to standard 3GPP 37.141 V12.2.0. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:GSM:CARRier on page 997
Apply to SEM Configures the SEM sweep list according to the specified MSR settings. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:APPLy on page 995
6.6.5.6 Standard Files
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask" > "Standard Files"
You can save the current measurement settings as a user-defined standard (XML file), or load stored measurement settings. Furthermore, you can delete an existing settings file.
For details, see Chapter 6.6.6.1, "How to Manage SEM Settings Files", on page 264.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
257
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Standard files for sub blocks (Multi-SEM measurements) If more than one sub blocks are defined, the "Standard Files" tab and softkey are not available. To load a standard file for an individual sub block, use the Standard / MSR Settings setting in the "Sub Blocks" tab.
Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files...........................................................258 File Name ...................................................................................................................258 Load Standard ............................................................................................................258 File Explorer................................................................................................................ 258 Save Standard ........................................................................................................... 259 Delete Standard ......................................................................................................... 259 Restore Standard Files .............................................................................................. 259
Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files Select the storage location of the file on the instrument or an external drive.
The default storage location for the SEM settings files is: C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std.
Note: Saving instrument settings in secure user mode. In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available. To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory device. For details, see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37.
Remote command: MMEMory:CATalog on page 1285
File Name Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension.
By default, the name of a user file consists of a base name followed by an underscore. Multiple files with the same base name are extended by three numbers, e.g. limit_lines_005.
File names must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names. In particular, they must not contain special characters such as ":", "*", "?".
For details on the filename and location, see Chapter 10.3.2.2, "Storage Location and Filename", on page 643.
Load Standard Loads the selected measurement settings file.
Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet[:STANdard] on page 969
File Explorer Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
258
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Remote command: not supported
Save Standard Saves the current measurement settings for a specific standard as a file with the defined name. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet:STORe on page 970
Delete Standard Deletes the selected standard. Standards predefined by Rohde & Schwarz can also be deleted. A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion of the standard. Note: Restoring predefined standard files. The standards predefined by Rohde & Schwarz available at the time of delivery can be restored using the "Restore Standard Files" function (see " Restore Standard Files " on page 259).
Restore Standard Files Restores the standards predefined by Rohde & Schwarz available at the time of delivery. The XML files from the C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_backup folder are copied to the C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std folder. Note that this function will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards. Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet:RESTore on page 970
6.6.5.7 List Evaluation (Results Configuration)
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask" > "List Evaluation"
In the "List Evaluation" dialog box, you configure the contents and display of the SEM results.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
259
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
List Evaluation State (Result Summary)..................................................................... 260 Show Peaks ............................................................................................................... 260 Margin ........................................................................................................................ 260 Saving the Result Summary (Evaluation List) to a File .............................................. 261
List Evaluation State (Result Summary) Activates or deactivates the Result Summary.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:AUTO on page 1001 TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1196
Show Peaks If activated, all peaks that have been detected during an active SEM measurement are marked with blue squares in the Spectrum diagram.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:PSHow on page 1002
Margin Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check, you can define a margin (or: threshold) for the peak values to be displayed in the result summary. Only peaks that exceed the margin value are displayed (also in the diagram, if activated).
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:MARGin on page 1001
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
260
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Saving the Result Summary (Evaluation List) to a File Exports the Result Summary of the SEM measurement to an ASCII file for evaluation in an external application. If necessary, change the decimal separator for evaluation in other languages.
Define the filename and storage location in the file selection dialog box that is displayed when you select the "Save" function.
For details, see Chapter 6.6.8.2, "ASCII File Export Format (Spectrum Emission Mask)", on page 273.
Remote command: MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST on page 1310 FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 1284
6.6.6 How to Perform a Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement
SEM measurements can be performed according to a specific standard or freely configured. Configuration for signals with a regular channel definition can be configured quickly and easily. Selecting the SEM measurement is a prerequisite for all other tasks. For signals with multiple carriers, also in non-contiguous ranges, an SEM measurement with multiple sub blocks can be configured. For multi-standard radio SEM measurements, configuration for specified scenarios can be done automatically. The following tasks are described: "To select an SEM measurement" on page 261 "To perform an SEM measurement according to a standard" on page 261 "To configure a user-defined SEM measurement" on page 261 "To perform an MSR SEM measurement" on page 263 "To perform a Multi-SEM measurement" on page 263
For remote operation, see Chapter 13.5.7.11, "Example: SEM Measurement", on page 1002.
To select an SEM measurement Press the [MEAS] key, then select the "Spectrum Emission Mask" measurement.
To perform an SEM measurement according to a standard Load the settings file as described in "How to load an SEM settings file"
on page 264 and start a measurement.
To configure a user-defined SEM measurement 1. Define the span of the signal you want to monitor in the general span settings. 2. Split the frequency span of the measurement into ranges for signal parts with simi-
lar characteristics.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
261
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Starting from the center frequency, determine which sections of the signal to the left and right can be swept and monitored using the same parameters. Criteria for such a range definition may be, for example:
The signal power level The required resolution bandwidth or sweep time Transducer factors Permitted deviation from the defined signal level, i.e. the required limit values
for monitoring
If the signal consists of a transmission channel and adjacent channels, the channel ranges can usually be used for the range definition.
3. If the signal power level to be monitored varies and the limits vary, define power classes. For each range of levels that can be monitored in the same way, define a power class.
a) Select the "Overview" softkey. b) Select the "SEM Setup" button. c) Switch to the "Power Classes" tab. d) To add a power class, select the "Add" button. e) Enter the start and stop power levels to define the class. f) Select the power classes to be used for the current measurement:
a specific class all classes, to have the required class selected automatically according to
the input level measured in the reference range
4. Select the "Sweep List" tab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" dialog box.
5. Insert the required ranges using the "Insert before Range" and "Insert after Range" buttons, which refer to the currently selected range (the reference range by default). If the signal trace is symmetric to the center frequency, activate the "Sym Setup" option to make setup easier and quicker.
6. Define the measurement parameters for each range as required. If symmetrical setup is activated, you only have to configure the ranges to one side of the center range. In particular, define the limits for each range of the signal, i.e. the area in which the signal level can deviate without failing the limit check. If several power classes were defined (see step 3), define limits for each power class.
a) Define the type of limit check, i.e. whether absolute values or relative values are checked, or both. The type of limit check is identical for all power classes.
b) Define the limit start and stop values.
7. If the sweep list settings - other than the limit and transducer values - are identical for several adjacent ranges, activate "Fast SEM" mode to speed up the measurement. You only have to activate the mode for one range, the others are adapted automatically.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
262
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
8. If necessary, change the settings for the reference power to which all SEM results refer in the "Reference Range" tab.
9. To indicate the determined peaks in the display during an SEM measurement, select "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Show Peaks" .
10. To save the current SEM measurement settings to a file to re-use them later, save a settings file as described in "How to save a user-defined SEM settings file" on page 264.
11. Start a sweep. The determined powers and limit deviations for each range are indicated in the Result Summary. If activated, the peak power levels for each range are also indicated in the Spectrum diagram.
12. To save the Result Summary, export the results to a file as described in Chapter 6.6.6.2, "How to Save SEM Result Files", on page 265.
To perform an MSR SEM measurement
1. Select the "MSR Config" softkey.
2. Select the band category that determines the digital standards used in the measurement setup (see " Band Category " on page 255).
3. Define the bandwidth that contains all relevant carrier signals to be measured.
4. For measurements with GSM/EDGE, LTE FDD and W-CDMA carriers (BC2), define whether a GSM/EDGE or an LTE FDD carrier, or both, are located at the edge of the bandwidth.
5. Select the "Apply to SEM" button. The sweep list is configured according to the MSR specification, with the required number of ranges and defined limits.
6. Start a sweep. The determined powers and limit deviations for each range are indicated in the Result Summary. If activated, the peak power levels for each range are also indicated in the Spectrum diagram.
7. To save the Result Summary, export the results to a file as described in Chapter 6.6.6.2, "How to Save SEM Result Files", on page 265.
To perform a Multi-SEM measurement
1. Define the span of the signal to be monitored in the general span settings.
2. Select the "Multi-SEM Config" softkey.
3. Define the number of sub blocks (up to 8) that contain the relevant carriers.
4. For each sub block, define the center frequency, that is, the frequency of the TX carrier or a frequency in the dedicated reference range.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
263
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
5. For each sub block, do one of the following: Select a standard settings file to be used. Select the "MSR Settings" button and define the MSR configuration as described in "To perform an MSR SEM measurement" on page 263. Select the "Edit" button and configure the sweep list manually as defined in "To configure a user-defined SEM measurement" on page 261. Be sure to select the correct vertical tab for the corresponding sub block within each subtab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" configuration dialog. Define a function to be used for overlapping ranges in the "Multi-Limit Calc" field of the sweep list.
6. Start a sweep. The determined powers and limit deviations for each sub block, each gap, and each range are indicated in the Result Summary. If activated, the peak power levels for each range are also indicated in the Spectrum diagram.
7. To save the Result Summary, export the results to a file as described in Chapter 6.6.6.2, "How to Save SEM Result Files", on page 265.
6.6.6.1 How to Manage SEM Settings Files
SEM measurement settings can be saved to an XML file which can then be exported to another application or loaded on the R&S FSW again later. Some predefined XML files are provided that contain ranges and parameters according to the selected standard. All XML files are stored under C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std.
For details on the file format of the SEM settings file, see Chapter 6.6.8.1, "Format Description of SEM XML Files", on page 267.
SEM settings or standard files are managed in the "Standard" tab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" dialog box. To display this dialog box, select the "Overview" softkey and then the "SEM Setup" button.
How to load an SEM settings file
1. From the file selection dialog box, select the settings file (with a .xml extension).
2. Select the "Load" button.
The settings from the selected file are restored to the R&S FSW and you can repeat the SEM measurement with the stored settings.
How to save a user-defined SEM settings file
1. Configure the SEM measurement as required (see Chapter 6.6.6, "How to Perform a Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement", on page 261).
2. In the "Standard Files" tab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" dialog box, define a filename and storage location for the settings file.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
264
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
3. Select the "Save" button. The settings are stored to a file with the extension .xml as specified.
How to delete an SEM settings file 1. In the "Standard Files" tab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" dialog box, select the
file you want to delete. 2. Select the "Delete" button. 3. Confirm the message.
The settings file is removed from the R&S FSW.
How to restore default SEM settings files The R&S FSW is delivered with predefined settings files which can be edited and overwritten. However, you can restore the original files. In the "Standard Files" tab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" dialog box, select the
"Restore Standard Files" button. The original predefined settings files are available for selection on the R&S FSW.
6.6.6.2 How to Save SEM Result Files
The Result Summary from an SEM measurement can be saved to a file, which can be exported to another application for further analysis, for example. For details on the file format of the SEM export file, see Chapter 6.6.8.2, "ASCII File Export Format (Spectrum Emission Mask)", on page 273.
1. Configure and perform an SEM measurement as described in Chapter 6.6.6, "How to Perform a Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement", on page 261.
2. In the "Overview" , select the "Analysis" button. 3. If necessary, change the "Decimal Separator" to "COMMA" for evaluation in other
languages. 4. Select the "Save" button. 5. In the file selection dialog box, select a storage location and filename for the result
file. 6. Select the "Save" button.
The file with the specified name and the extension .dat is stored in the defined storage location.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
265
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
6.6.7 Measurement Example: Multi-SEM Measurement
The following measurement example demonstrates an SEM measurement for a signal with multiple sub blocks.
A programming example demonstrating a SEM measurement in a remote environment is provided in Chapter 13.5.7.11, "Example: SEM Measurement", on page 1002.
Test setup:
Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S FSW SMW):
Device SigGen 1 SigGen 2
Standard 3GPP/FDD EUTRA/LTE
Center frequency 900 MHz 906.5 MHz
Level 0 dBm 0 dBm
Test model 1-16 1_1_5MHz
Setting up the measurement 1. Preset the R&S FSW.
2. Set the center frequency to 903.25 MHz.
3. Set the reference level to 10 dBm with an offset of to 30 dB.
4. Press the [MEAS] key or select "Select Measurement" in the "Overview" .
5. Select the "SEM" measurement function.
6. Select the "Sub Blocks" softkey and enter "Sub Block Count" of 2.
7. For "Sub Block A" , define the settings for the 3GPP/FDD signal: Set the "Center Frequency" to 900 MHz Select "MSR Settings" . Set the "Base Station RF Bandwidth" to 5 MHz. Select "Apply to SEM" .
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
266
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
8. For "Sub Block B" , define the settings for the EUTRA/LTE signal:
Set the "Center Frequency" to 906.5 MHz Select "MSR Settings" . Set the "Base Station RF Bandwidth" to 5 MHz. Select "Apply to SEM" .
9. Select [RUN SINGLE] to perform a measurement with the new settings.
The results of the measurement for each sub block are displayed in the Result Summary. The summarized limit line is indicated in the Spectrum graph.
Figure 6-48: Multi-SEM measurement: results of the measurement for each sub block
6.6.8 Reference: SEM File Descriptions
This reference provides details on the format of the SEM settings and result files. Format Description of SEM XML Files.................................................................. 267 ASCII File Export Format (Spectrum Emission Mask).......................................... 273
6.6.8.1 Format Description of SEM XML Files
The SEM XML files offer a quick way to change the measurement settings. A set of predefined XML files for different standards is already provided. You can also create and use your own XML files. Alternatively, edit the settings directly in the "Spectrum Emission Mask" dialog box and save the XML file afterwards. This way, you do not have to modify the XML file itself. In addition to saving the current settings to a file, settings files can also be created independently of the R&S FSW, in an external application. When creating your own XML files, be sure to comply with the following conventions because the R&S FSW can
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
267
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
only interpret XML files of a known structure. For sample files, see the C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std directory of the R&S FSW.
To load a settings file, use the "Load" function in the "Standard Files" tab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" dialog box (see "How to load an SEM settings file" on page 264). All XML files are stored under C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std.
The files for importing range settings obey the rules of the XML standard. The child nodes, attributes, and structure defined for the data import are described here.
Be sure to follow the structure exactly as shown below or else the R&S FSW is not able to interpret the XML file and error messages are shown on the screen. It is recommended that you make a copy of an existing file and edit the copy of the file.
Basically, the file consists of three elements that can be defined:
The BaseFormat element The PowerClass element The Range element
The "BaseFormat" element
It carries information about basic settings. In this element, only the ReferencePower child node has any effects on the measurement itself. The other attributes and child nodes are used to display information about the Spectrum Emission Mask standard on the measurement screen. The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in Table 6-14.
Example: In the sample file PowerClass_39_43.xml under C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std\ WCDMA\3GPP, these attributes are defined as follows: Standard="W-CDMA 3GPP" LinkDirection="DL" PowerClass="(39,43)dBm"
The "PowerClass" element
It is embedded in the BaseFormat element and contains settings information about the power classes. Up to four different power classes can be defined. For details, refer to Chapter 6.6.5.4, "Power Classes", on page 253. The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in Table 6-15.
The "Range" element
This element is embedded in the PowerClass element. It contains the settings information of the range. There have to be at least three defined ranges: one reference range and at least one range to either side of the reference range. The maximum num-
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
268
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
ber of ranges is 30. Note that the R&S FSW uses the same ranges in each power class. Therefore, the contents of the ranges of each defined power class have to be identical to the first power class. The Start and Stop values of the two Limit nodes that are used to determine the power class are an exception. Note also that you must define two limit nodes: one that defines the limit in absolute values and one in relative values. Make sure units for the Start and Stop nodes are identical for each Limit node.
For details, refer to Chapter 6.6.5.1, " Sweep List ", on page 245. The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in Table 6-16.
The following tables show the child nodes and attributes of each element and show if a child node or attribute is mandatory for the R&S FSW to interpret the file or not. The hierarchy of the XML cannot be seen in the tables. View one of the predefined files already stored on the R&S FSW in the "C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std" directory, or check the structure as shown below.
Below, a basic example of the structure of the file is shown, containing all mandatory attributes and child nodes. Note that the PowerClass element and the Range element are themselves elements of the BaseFormat element. They must be inserted where noted. They are separated here simply to provide a better overview. Also, no example values are given here to allow a quick reference to the tables above. Italic font shows the placeholders for the values.
The BaseFormat element is structured as follows:
� <RS_SEM_ACP_FileFormat Version="1.0.0.0"> <Name>"Standard"</Name> <Instrument> <Type>"Instrument Type"</Type> <Application>"Application"</Application> </Instrument> <LinkDirection Name="Name"> <ReferencePower> <Method>"Method"</Method> </ReferencePower> <PowerClass Index="n"> <!-- For contents of the PowerClass node, see Table 6-15 --> <!-- Define up to four PowerClass nodes --> </PowerClass> </LinkDirection> </RS_SEM_ACP_File>
The "PowerClass" element is structured as follows:
� <PowerClass Index="n"> <StartPower Unit="dBm" InclusiveFlag="true" Value="StartPowerValue"/> <StopPower Unit="dBm" InclusiveFlag="false" Value="StopPowerValue"/> <DefaultLimitFailMode>"Limit Fail Mode"</DefaultLimitFailMode> <Range Index="n"> <!-- For contents of the Range node, see Table 6-16 --> <!-- Define up to twenty Range nodes --> </Range>
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
269
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
... </PowerClass>
The "Range" element is structured as follows:
� <Range Index="n"> <Name="Name"> <ChannelType>"Channel Type"</Channel Type> <WeightingFilter> <Type>"FilterType"</Type> <RollOffFactor>"Factor"</RollOffFactor> <Bandwith>"Bandwidth"</Bandwidth> </WeightingFilter> <FrequencyRange> <Start>"RangeStart"</Start> <Stop>"RangeStop"</Stop> </FrequencyRange> <Limit> <Start Unit="Unit" Value="Value"/> <Stop Unit="Unit" Value="Value"/> </Limit> <Limit> <Start Unit="Unit" Value="Value"/> <Stop Unit="Unit" Value="Value"/> </Limit> <RBW Bandwidth="Bandwidth" Type="FilterType"/> <VBW Bandwidth="Bandwidth"/> <Detector>"Detector"</Detector> <Sweep Mode="SweepMode" Time="SweepTime"/> <Amplitude> <ReferenceLevel Unit="dBm" Value="Value"/> <RFAttenuation Mode="Auto" Unit="dB" Value="Value"/> <Preamplifier State="State"/> </Amplitude> <MeasPointsMin>1</MeasPointsMin> <CalcRuleMulti>Sum</CalcRuleMulti> </Range>
Table 6-14: Attributes and child nodes of the BaseFormat element
Child Node
Attribute
Value
Parameter Description
FileFormatVersion 1.0.0.0
Date
YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS
Date in ISO 8601 format
Name
<string>
Name of the standard
Instrument
Type
FSL
Name of the instrument
Application
SA | K72 | K82
Name of the application
LinkDirection Name
Downlink | Uplink | None
ShortName
DL | UL
Mand. Yes No
Yes No No Yes
No
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
270
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Child Node ReferencePower Method
ReferenceChannel
Attribute
Value
TX Channel Power | TX Channel Peak Power
<string>
Parameter Description
Mand. Yes
Yes
No
Table 6-15: Attributes and child nodes of the PowerClass element
Child Node
Attribute
Value
Parameter description
Mand.
StartPower
Value
<power in dBm>
The start power must be equal Yes to the stop power of the previous power class. The StartPower value of the first range is -200
Unit
dBm
Yes
InclusiveFlag true
Yes
StopPower
Value
<power in dBm>
The stop power must be equal Yes to the start power of the next power class. The StopPower value of the last range is 200
Unit
dBm
InclusiveFlag false
Yes
DefaultLimitFailMode
Absolute | Relative
Yes
| Absolute and Rel-
ative | Absolute or
Relative
Table 6-16: Attributes and child nodes of the Range element (normal ranges)
Child node
Attribute Value
Parameter description
Mand.
Index
0...19
Indices are continuous and Yes have to start with 0
Name
<string>
Name of the range
Only if ReferenceChannel contains a name and the range is the reference range
ShortName
<string>
Short name of the range
No
ChannelType
TX | Adjacent
Yes
WeightingFilter
Only if ReferencePower method is TX Channel Power and the range is the reference range
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
271
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Child node Type Roll Off Factor Bandwidth FrequencyRange Start Stop Limit
Start
Stop
LimitFailMode
RBW
VBW Detector Sweep
Amplitude ReferenceLevel
Attribute Value
Parameter description
Mand.
RRC | CFilter
Type of the weighting filter Yes
0...1
Excess bandwidth of the fil- Only if the filter
ter
type is RRC
<bandwidth in Hz> Filter bandwidth
Only if the filter type is RRC
Yes
<frequency in Hz> Start value of the range
Yes
<frequency in Hz> Stop value of the range
Yes
dBm/Hz | dBm | dBc | dBr | dB
A Range must contain
Yes
exactly two limit nodes; one
of the limit nodes has to
have a relative unit (e.g.
dBc), the other one must
have an absolute unit (e.g.
dBm)
Value
<numeric_value> Power limit at start fre-
Yes
quency
Unit
dBm/Hz | dBm |
Sets the unit of the start
dBc | dBr | dB
value
Value
<numeric_value>
Power limit at stop frequency
Unit
dBm/Hz | dBm |
Sets the unit of the stop
dBc | dBr | dB
value
Absolute | Relative If used, it has to be identical No | Absolute and Rel- to DefaultLimitFailMode ative | Absolute or Relative
Bandwidth <bandwidth in Hz> " RBW " on page 247
Yes
Type
NORM | PULS |
No
CFIL | RRC
Bandwidth <bandwidth in Hz> " VBW " on page 247
Yes
NEG | POS | SAMP | RMS | AVER | QUAS
If used, it has to be identical No in all ranges.
Mode
Manual | Auto
" Sweep Time Mode "
Yes
on page 247
Time
<time in sec>
" Sweep Time "
No
on page 247
No
Value
<power in dBm>
" Ref Level " on page 247
Yes, if the ReferenceLevel child node is used
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
272
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement
Child node RFAttenuation Preamplifier
Attribute Unit
Value dBm
Parameter description Defines dBm as unit
Mode
Manual | Auto
" RF Att Mode " on page 247
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
" Preamp " on page 248
Mand.
Yes, if the ReferenceLevel node is used
Yes, if the ReferenceLevel child node is used
Yes
6.6.8.2 ASCII File Export Format (Spectrum Emission Mask)
When trace data from an SEM measurement is exported, the data is stored in ASCII format as described below. The first part of the file lists information about the signal analyzer and the general setup.
File contents File header Type;FSW-26; Version;1.00; Date;31.Mar 17; Mode;ANALYZER;SEM; Center Freq;13250000000.000000;Hz Freq Offset;0.000000;Hz Span;25500000.000000;Hz x-Axis;LIN; Start;13237250000.000000;Hz Stop;13262750000.000000;Hz Level Offset;0.000000;dB Ref Position;100.000000;% y-Axis;LOG; Level Range;100.000000;dB Trace settings Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE; Detector;RMS; Sweep Count;0; Trace 1:; x-Unit;Hz; y-Unit;dBm;
Explanation Model Firmware version Storage date of data set Operating mode and measurement function X-axis settings
Y-axis settings
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
273
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spurious Emissions Measurement
File contents
Explanation
List evaluation settings
Margin;200;
Peak List margin
Reference range settings
RefType; CPOWER;
Reference power type
TxBandwidth;3840000;;Hz
Channel power settings
Filter State; ON;
Alpha;0.22;
PeaksPerRange;1;
Max. number of peaks per range to be detected
Values;2;
Number of detected peaks
File data section
0;-12750000;-2515000;30000;13242367500;-43.844 722747802734;-0.33028793334960938;49.6697120 66650391;FAIL;
2;2515000;12750000;30000;13257632500;-43.8447 22747802734;-0.33028793334960938;49.66971206 6650391;FAIL;
Measured peak values: <range number>; <start frequency>; <stop frequency>; <resolution bandwidth of range>; <frequency of peak>;
<absolute power in dBm of peak>;
<relative power in dBc of peak>; (related to the channel power)
<distance to the limit line in dB>; (positive value means above the limit)
<limit fail (pass = 0, fail =1)>;
6.7 Spurious Emissions Measurement
Spurious Emissions measurements monitor unwanted RF products outside the assigned frequency band generated by an amplifier.
About the Measurement........................................................................................274 Spurious Emissions Measurement Results...........................................................275 Spurious Emissions Basics................................................................................... 276 Spurious Emissions Measurement Configuration................................................. 278 How to Perform a Spurious Emissions Measurement...........................................284 Reference: ASCII Export File Format (Spurious).................................................. 286
6.7.1 About the Measurement
The Spurious Emissions measurement monitors unwanted RF products outside the assigned frequency band generated by an amplifier. The spurious emissions are usually measured across a wide frequency range. The Spurious Emissions measurement allows a flexible definition of all parameters. A result table indicates the largest devia-
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
274
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spurious Emissions Measurement
tions of the absolute power from the limit line for each range, and the results can be checked against defined limits automatically.
6.7.2 Spurious Emissions Measurement Results
The measured signal, including any spurious emissions, and optionally the detected peaks are displayed in the Spurious Emissions measurement diagram. If defined, the limit lines and the limit check results are also indicated. In addition to the graphical results, a result table can be displayed to evaluate the measured powers and limit check results (see also Chapter 6.7.3.2, "Limit Lines in Spurious Measurements", on page 277). The details of the evaluation list can be configured.
The following information is provided in the evaluation list for each range:
Column Range Low Range Up RBW Frequency Power Abs Limit
Description Frequency range start for the range the peak value belongs to Frequency range end for the range the peak value belongs to RBW of the range Frequency at the peak value Absolute power level at the peak value Deviation of the absolute power level from the defined limit for the peak value
By default, one peak per range is displayed. However, you can change the settings to: Display all peaks
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
275
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spurious Emissions Measurement
Display a certain number of peaks per range Display only peaks that exceed a threshold ( "Margin" ) Display detected peaks as blue squares in the diagram, as well as in the peak list
Furthermore, you can save the evaluation list to a file.
Retrieving Results via Remote Control The measured spurious values of the displayed trace can be retrieved using the TRAC:DATA? SPUR command (see TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1196).
6.7.3 Spurious Emissions Basics
Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in Spurious Emissions measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings. Ranges and Range Settings................................................................................. 276 Limit Lines in Spurious Measurements................................................................. 277
6.7.3.1 Ranges and Range Settings
Conditions for ranges The following rules apply to ranges: The minimum span of a range is 20 Hz. The individual ranges must not overlap (but can have gaps). The maximum number of ranges is 30 The maximum number of sweep points in all ranges is limited to 100001. You can define a span that is smaller than the combined span of the ranges. In this case, the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
276
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spurious Emissions Measurement
Defining ranges by remote control In Spurious Emissions measurements, there are no remote commands to insert new ranges between existing ranges directly. However, you can delete or redefine the existing ranges to create the required order. A remote command example for defining parameters and ranges in Spurious Emissions measurements is described in Chapter 13.5.8.7, "Programming Example: Spurious Emissions Measurement", on page 1018.
6.7.3.2 Limit Lines in Spurious Measurements
Limit lines allow you to check the measured data against specified limit values. Generally, it is possible to define limit lines for any measurement in the Spectrum application using the [Lines] key. For Spurious measurements, however, a special limit line is available via the "Sweep List" , and it is strongly recommended that you use only this limit line definition.
In the "Sweep List" , you can define a limit line that varies its level according to the specified frequency ranges. A distinguished limit line is automatically defined according to the current "Sweep List" settings every time the settings change. This limit line is labeled "_SPURIOUS_LINE_ABS_<xxx>" , where <xxx> is an index to distinguish limit lines between different channels.
If a limit check is activated in the "Sweep List" , the "_SPURIOUS_LINE_ABS_<xxx>" limit line is indicated by a red line in the display. The result of the limit check is indicated at the top of the diagram. Note that only "Pass" or "Fail" is indicated; a margin function as for general limit lines is not available. Also, only absolute limits can be checked, not relative ones.
As for general limit lines, the results of each limit line check are displayed (here: "_SPURIOUS_LINE_ABS_<xxx>" ), as well as the combined result for all defined limit lines ( "Limit Check" ).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
277
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spurious Emissions Measurement
The limit check is considered to be "' failed!" if any signal level outside the absolute limits is measured. If the limit check is activated, the limit line values for each range are displayed in the evaluation list. Furthermore, the largest deviations of the absolute power from the limit line for each range are displayed. Values that exceed the limit are indicated in red and by an asterisk (*).
Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check, a margin (threshold) for the peak values to be displayed in the evaluation list can be defined. Furthermore, you can define how many peaks per range are listed. For details, see Chapter 6.7.4.3, "List Evaluation", on page 282.
6.7.4 Spurious Emissions Measurement Configuration
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spurious Emissions" The spurious emissions measurement is started immediately with the default settings. The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 13.5.8, "Measuring Spurious Emissions", on page 1005. Sweep List.............................................................................................................278 Adjusting the X-Axis to the Range Definitions.......................................................282 List Evaluation.......................................................................................................282
6.7.4.1 Sweep List
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spurious Emissions" > "Sweep List" For Spurious Emissions measurements, the input signal is split into several frequency ranges which are swept individually and for which different limitations apply.
If you edit the sweep list, always follow the rules and consider the limitations described in Chapter 6.7.3.1, "Ranges and Range Settings", on page 276.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
278
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spurious Emissions Measurement
Range Start / Range Stop .......................................................................................... 279 Filter Type .................................................................................................................. 280 RBW ...........................................................................................................................280 VBW ........................................................................................................................... 280 Sweep Time Mode ..................................................................................................... 280 Sweep Time ............................................................................................................... 280 Detector ......................................................................................................................280 Reference Level ......................................................................................................... 281 RF Attenuation Mode ................................................................................................. 281 RF Attenuation ........................................................................................................... 281 Preamp .......................................................................................................................281 Sweep Points.............................................................................................................. 281 Stop After Sweep ....................................................................................................... 281 Transducer ................................................................................................................. 281 Limit Check ................................................................................................................ 282 Abs Limit Start / Abs Limit Stop ..................................................................................282 Insert before Range / Insert after Range ....................................................................282 Delete Range ............................................................................................................. 282
Range Start / Range Stop Sets the start frequency/stop frequency of the selected range.
You can define a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges. In this case, the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
279
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spurious Emissions Measurement
Remote command: [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STARt on page 1009 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STOP on page 1009
Filter Type Sets the filter type for this range. For details on filter types, see Chapter 7.5.1.6, "Which Data May Pass: Filter Types", on page 462. Remote command: [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:FILTer:TYPE on page 1010
RBW Sets the RBW value for this range. For details on the RBW, see Chapter 7.5.1.1, "Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth", on page 459. Remote command: [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:RESolution on page 1007
VBW Sets the VBW value for this range. For details on the VBW, see Chapter 7.5.1.2, "Smoothing the Trace Using the Video Bandwidth", on page 460. Remote command: [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:VIDeo on page 1007
Sweep Time Mode Activates or deactivates the auto mode for the sweep time. For details on the sweep time mode, see Chapter 7.5.1.7, "How Long the Data is Measured: Sweep Time ", on page 463 Remote command: [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 1014
Sweep Time Sets the sweep time value for the range. For details on the sweep time, see Chapter 7.5.1.7, "How Long the Data is Measured: Sweep Time ", on page 463 Remote command: [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME on page 1014
Detector Sets the detector for the range. For details, refer to "Mapping Samples to sweep Points with the Trace Detector" on page 576. Remote command: [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:DETector on page 1008
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
280
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spurious Emissions Measurement
Reference Level Sets the reference level for the range.
For details on the reference level, see Chapter 7.4.1.1, "Reference Level", on page 448.
Remote command: [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:RLEVel on page 1013
RF Attenuation Mode Activates or deactivates the auto mode for RF attenuation.
For details on attenuation, see Chapter 7.4.1.2, "RF Attenuation", on page 449.
Remote command: [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 1011
RF Attenuation Sets the attenuation value for that range.
For details on attenuation, see Chapter 7.4.1.2, "RF Attenuation", on page 449.
Remote command: [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation on page 1011
Preamp Switches the preamplifier on or off.
For details on the preamplifier, see " Preamplifier " on page 454.
Remote command: [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN:STATe on page 1011
Sweep Points Sets the number of sweep points for the specified range.
For details on sweep points, see Chapter 7.5.1.8, "How Much Data is Measured: Sweep Points and Sweep Count", on page 464.
Remote command: [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:POINts[:VALue] on page 1013
Stop After Sweep This command configures the sweep behavior.
"On"
The R&S FSW stops after one range is swept and continues only if you confirm (a message box is displayed).
"Off"
The R&S FSW sweeps all ranges in one go.
Remote command: [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:BREak on page 1007
Transducer Sets a transducer for the specified range. You can only choose a transducer that fulfills the following conditions:
The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range. The x-axis is linear.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
281
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spurious Emissions Measurement
The unit is dB.
For details on transducers, see Chapter 11.4.1, "Basics on Transducer Factors", on page 712.
Remote command: [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:TRANsducer on page 1014
Limit Check Activates or deactivates the limit check for all ranges.
For details on limit checks, see Chapter 6.7.3.2, "Limit Lines in Spurious Measurements", on page 277.
"ABSOLUTE" Signal is checked against absolute limit values
"NONE"
No limit check is performed.
Remote command: [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:LIMit:STATe on page 1012 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:FAIL? on page 1280
Abs Limit Start / Abs Limit Stop Sets an absolute limit value at the start or stop frequency of the range [dBm].
Remote command: [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:LIMit:STARt on page 1012 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:LIMit:STOP on page 1013
Insert before Range / Insert after Range Inserts a new range to the left of the currently focused range (before) or to the right (after). The range numbers of the currently focused range and all higher ranges are increased accordingly. The maximum number of ranges is 30.
Delete Range Deletes the currently focused range. The range numbers are updated accordingly.
6.7.4.2 Adjusting the X-Axis to the Range Definitions
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spurious Emissions" > "Adjust X-Axis" The frequency axis of the measurement diagram can be adjusted automatically so that the span of all sweep list ranges corresponds to the displayed span. Thus, the x-axis range is set from the start frequency of the first sweep range to the stop frequency of the last sweep range.
Remote command: [SENSe:]LIST:XADJust on page 1017
6.7.4.3 List Evaluation
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spurious Emissions" > "List Evaluation"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
282
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spurious Emissions Measurement
Configure the contents and display of the result list.
List Evaluation State .................................................................................................. 283 Show Peaks ............................................................................................................... 283 Margin ........................................................................................................................ 283 Details ........................................................................................................................ 284 Peaks per Range ....................................................................................................... 284 Save Evaluation List ...................................................................................................284
List Evaluation State Activates or deactivates the list evaluation.
Remote command: TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1196
Show Peaks If activated, all peaks that have been detected during an active list evaluation are marked with blue squares in the diagram.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PSHow on page 1016
Margin A margin functionality is not available for the limit check. However, you can define a margin (=threshold) for the peak values to be displayed in the evaluation list. Only peaks that exceed the margin value are displayed (also in the diagram, if activated).
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:MARGin on page 1016
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
283
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spurious Emissions Measurement
Details Configures how detailed the list in the Result Summary is.
On
Includes all detected peaks (up to a maximum defined by "Peaks per Range" ).
Off
Includes only one peak per range.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:DETails on page 1015
Peaks per Range Defines the maximum number of peaks per range that are stored in the list. Once the selected number of peaks has been reached, the peak search is stopped in the current range and continued in the next range. The maximum value is 50.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges on page 1017
Save Evaluation List Exports the evaluation list of the Spurious Emissions measurement to an ASCII file for evaluation in an external application. If necessary, change the decimal separator for evaluation in other languages.
Define the file name and storage location in the file selection dialog box that is displayed when you select the "Save" function.
For details, see "How to Save the Spurious Emissions Evaluation List" on page 285.
Remote command: MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST on page 1310 FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 1284
6.7.5 How to Perform a Spurious Emissions Measurement
The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to perform spurious emissions measurements.
For remote operation, see Chapter 13.5.8.7, "Programming Example: Spurious Emissions Measurement", on page 1018.
1. Press the [MEAS] key, then select the "Spurious Emissions" measurement. 2. Define the span of the signal to be monitored in the general span settings. 3. Select the "Overview" softkey, then select the "Spurious Setup" button.
The "Spurious Emissions" dialog box is displayed. 4. Split the frequency span of the measurement into ranges for signal parts with simi-
lar characteristics. Define the required ranges in the "Sweep List" using the "Insert before Range" and "Insert after Range" buttons, which refer to the currently selected range.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
284
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spurious Emissions Measurement
5. Define the measurement parameters for each range as required.
6. Optionally, define a limit check. a) Activate the limit check by setting "Limit Check" to "ABSOLUTE" . The limit check is always activated or deactivated for all ranges simultaneously. b) Define the limit line's start and stop values for each range of the signal. If a signal level higher than the defined limit is measured, the limit check fails, which may indicate a spurious emission.
7. Configure the peak detection during a Spurious Emissions measurement: select the "Evaluations" button in the "Overview" . To indicate the determined peaks in the display, activate the "Show Peaks" option. To restrict peak detection, define a "Margin" . Only peaks that exceed this value are detected. To allow for more peaks per range to be detected than the default 1, increase the "Peaks per Range" value and set "Details" to "On" .
8. Start a sweep. The determined powers and limit deviations for each range are indicated in the evaluation list. If activated, the peak power levels for each range are also indicated in the diagram.
9. To save the evaluation list, export the results to a file as described in "How to Save the Spurious Emissions Evaluation List" on page 285.
How to Save the Spurious Emissions Evaluation List
The evaluation list from a Spurious Emissions measurement can be saved to a file, which can be exported to another application for further analysis, for example.
1. Configure and perform a Spurious Emissions measurement as described in Chapter 6.7.5, "How to Perform a Spurious Emissions Measurement", on page 284.
2. Select the "Evaluations" button in the "Overview" .
3. If necessary, change the "Decimal Separator" to "COMMA" for evaluation in other languages.
4. Select the "Save" button.
5. In the file selection dialog box, select a storage location and file name for the result file.
6. Select the "Save" button.
The file with the specified name and the extension .dat is stored in the defined storage location.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
285
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Spurious Emissions Measurement
6.7.6 Reference: ASCII Export File Format (Spurious)
The file has a header containing important parameters for scaling, several data sections containing the sweep settings per range, and a data section containing the peak list.
The header data is made up of three columns, separated by ';', with the syntax:
Parameter name; numeric value; basic unit
File contents File header Type;FSW-26; Version;1.00; Date;31.Mar 11; Mode;ANALYZER; SPURIOUS; Center Freq;13250000000.000000;Hz Freq Offset;0.000000;Hz Span;26499982000.000000;Hz x-Axis;LIN; Start;9000.000000;Hz Stop;8000000000.000000;Hz Level Offset;0.000000;dB Ref Position;100.000000;% y-Axis;LOG; Level Range;100.000000;dB Trace settings Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE; Sweep Count;1; TRACE 1: Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE; x-Unit;Hz; y-Unit;dBm; List evaluation settings Margin;6.000000;s PeaksPerRange;25; Values;3;
Explanation Model Firmware version Storage date of data set Operating mode and measurement function X-axis settings
Y-axis settings
Peak List margin Max. number of peaks per range to be detected Number of detected peaks
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
286
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF)
File contents
Explanation
File data section
0;9000;150000;1000;79500;-25.006643295288086;12.006643295288086;PASS;
0;9000;150000;1000;101022.11126961483;-47.075 111389160156;-34.075111389160156;PASS;
0;9000;150000;1000;58380.171184022824;-47.079 341888427734;-34.079341888427734;PASS;
Measured peak values: <range number>; <start frequency>; <stop frequency>; <resolution bandwidth of range>; <frequency of peak>;
<absolute power in dBm of peak>;
<distance to the limit line in dB>; (positive value means above the limit)
<limit fail (pass = 0, fail =1)>;
6.8 Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF)
To measure the amplitude distribution, the R&S FSW has simple measurement functions to determine both the Amplitude Probability Distribution (APD) and the Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF). Only one of the signal statistic functions can be switched on at a time.
About the Measurements...................................................................................... 287 Typical Applications...............................................................................................288 APD and CCDF Results........................................................................................288 APD and CCDF Basics - Gated Triggering........................................................... 290 APD and CCDF Configuration.............................................................................. 291 How to Perform an APD or CCDF Measurement..................................................297 Examples.............................................................................................................. 298 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement.............................................. 301
6.8.1 About the Measurements
The probability of amplitude values can be measured with the Amplitude Probability Distribution function (APD). During a selectable measurement time all occurring amplitude values are assigned to an amplitude range. The number of amplitude values in the individual ranges is counted and the result is displayed as a histogram.
Alternatively, the Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF) can be displayed. It shows the probability that the mean signal power amplitude will be exceeded in percent.
Only one of the signal statistic functions can be switched on at a time. When a statistic function is switched on, the R&S FSW is set into zero span mode automatically. The R&S FSW measures the statistics of the signal applied to the RF input with the defined analysis bandwidth. To avoid affecting the peak amplitudes the video bandwidth is automatically set to 10 times the analysis bandwidth. The sample detector is used for detecting the video voltage.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
287
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF)
Statistic measurements on pulsed signals can be performed using a gated trigger. For details see Chapter 6.8.4, "APD and CCDF Basics - Gated Triggering", on page 290.
6.8.2 Typical Applications
Digital modulated signals are similar to white noise within the transmit channel, but are different in their amplitude distribution. In order to transmit the modulated signal without distortion, all amplitudes of the signal have to be transmitted linearly from the output power amplifier. Most critical are the peak amplitude values. Degradation in transmit quality caused by a transmitter two port network is dependent on the amplitude of the peak values as well as on their probability.
If modulation types are used that do not have a constant envelope in zero span, the transmitter has to handle peak amplitudes that are greater than the average power. This includes all modulation types that involve amplitude modulation, QPSK for example. CDMA transmission modes in particular may have power peaks that are large compared to the average power.
For signals of this kind, the transmitter must provide large reserves for the peak power to prevent signal compression and thus an increase of the bit error rate at the receiver. The peak power or the crest factor of a signal is therefore an important transmitter design criterion. The crest factor is defined as the peak power to mean power ratio or, logarithmically, as the peak level minus the average level of the signal. To reduce power consumption and cut costs, transmitters are not designed for the largest power that could ever occur, but for a power that has a specified probability of being exceeded (e.g. 0.01 %).
The statistical functions provide information on such signal criteria.
6.8.3 APD and CCDF Results
Amplitude Probability Distribution (APD)
As a result of the Amplitude Probability Distribution (APD) function, the probability of measured amplitude values is displayed. During a selectable measurement time all measured amplitude values are assigned to an amplitude range (bin). The number of amplitude values in the individual ranges is counted and the result is displayed as a histogram. Each bar of the histogram represents the percentage of measured amplitudes within the specific amplitude range. The x-axis represents the amplitude values and is scaled in absolute values (dBm).
The size of each amplitude range (bin) determines the resolution of the histogram and is indicated in the channel bar, for example / 0.10 dB. In this case, a single bar in the histogram represents an amplitude range of 0.10 dB.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
288
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF)
In addition to the histogram, a result table is displayed containing the following information:
Number of samples used for calculation For each displayed trace:
� Mean amplitude � Peak amplitude � Crest factor
The crest factor is defined as the peak power to mean power ratio or, logarithmically, as the peak level minus the average level of the signal.
Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF)
The Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF) shows the probability that the mean signal power amplitude will be exceeded in percent. The level above the mean power is plotted along the x-axis of the graph. The origin of the axis corresponds to the mean power level. The probability that a level will be exceeded is plotted along the y-axis.
A red line indicates the ideal Gaussian distribution for the measured amplitude range.
The displayed amplitude range is indicated as "Mean Pwr" + "<x dB>" In addition to the histogram, a result table is displayed containing the following information: Number of samples used for calculation
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
289
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF)
For each displayed trace:
Mean Peak Crest 10 % 1 % 0,1 % 0,01 %
Mean power Peak power Crest factor (peak power � mean power) 10 % probability that the level exceeds mean power + [x] dB 1 % probability that the level exceeds mean power + [x] dB 0,1 % probability that the level exceeds mean power + [x] dB 0,01 % probability that the level exceeds mean power + [x] dB
Percent marker
In addition to the results for specific percentages in the table, a percent marker can be activated for a freely selectable percentage. This marker indicates how many level values are over <x> % above the mean power.
Percent marker
As all markers, the percent marker can be moved simply by selecting it with a finger or mouse cursor and dragging it to the desired position.
Diagram Scaling The scaling for both the x-axis and y-axis of the statistics diagram can be configured. In particular, you can restrict the range of amplitudes to be evaluated and the probabilities to be displayed.
Remote commands: CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF:X<t>? on page 1027 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:RESult<res>? on page 1028
6.8.4 APD and CCDF Basics - Gated Triggering
Statistic measurements on pulsed signals can be performed using a gated trigger. An external or power trigger is required as a time (frame) reference.
The gate ranges define the part of the measured data taken into account for the statistics calculation. These ranges are defined relative to a reference point T=0. The gate interval is repeated for each period until the end of the capture buffer.
The reference point T=0 is defined by the external trigger event and the instrument's trigger offset.
For each trace you can define up to 3 separate ranges of a single period to be traced.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
290
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF)
6.8.5 APD and CCDF Configuration
Configuration consists of the following settings: Make sure the specified reference level is higher than the measured peak value
(see " Reference Level " on page 451).
Basic Settings....................................................................................................... 292 Gate Range Definition for APD and CCDF........................................................... 293 Scaling for Statistics Diagrams............................................................................. 295
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
291
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF)
6.8.5.1 Basic Settings
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "APD" / "CCDF" > "APD Config" / "CCDF Config" The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 13.5.9, "Analyzing Statistics (APD, CCDF)", on page 1020.
Both dialog boxes are identical except for the "Percent Marker" setting, which is only available for CCDF measurements.
Percent Marker (CCDF only).......................................................................................292 Analysis Bandwidth .................................................................................................... 292 Number of Samples ................................................................................................... 293 Gated Trigger ............................................................................................................. 293 Edit Gate Ranges .......................................................................................................293 Adjust Settings ........................................................................................................... 293
Percent Marker (CCDF only) Defines a probability value. Thus, the power which is exceeded with a given probability can be determined very easily. If marker 1 is deactivated, it is switched on automatically.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y:PERCent on page 1021
Analysis Bandwidth Defines the analysis bandwidth.
For correct measurement of the signal statistics, the analysis bandwidth has to be wider than the signal bandwidth in order to measure the peaks of the signal amplitude correctly. To avoid influencing the peak amplitudes, the video bandwidth is automatically set to 10 MHz. The sample detector is used for detecting the video voltage.
If a B4001/B6001/B8001 bandwidth extension option is installed, APD and CCDF measurements are only available up to a bandwidth of 80 MHz.
The calculated measurement time is displayed for reference only.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
292
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF)
Remote command: [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 1138
Number of Samples Defines the number of power measurements that are taken into account for the statistics. For statistics measurements with the R&S FSW, the number of samples to be measured is defined instead of the sweep time. Since only statistically independent samples contribute to statistics, the sweep or measurement time is calculated automatically and displayed in the channel bar ( "Meas Time" ). The samples are statistically independent if the time difference is at least 1/RBW. The measurement time is, therefore, expressed as follows: Meas Time = NSamples/RBW The maximum number of samples is limited by the hardware capability. For gated triggered APD or CCDF measurements, the maximum number is limited further, if necessary, to accommodate for very small ranges within a relatively long period. In this case, the smallest gate/period ratio is considered, and the number is adapted to capture full periods of data. If the defined number of samples exceeds the limit, it is automatically reduced to the maximum value. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:STATistics:NSAMples on page 1022
Gated Trigger Activates and deactivates gating for statistics functions for the ACP and the CCDF measurements. The gate ranges are defined using the Edit Gate Ranges function. Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>[:STATe<gr>] on page 1023
Edit Gate Ranges Opens a dialog box to configure up to 3 gate ranges for each trace. For details see Chapter 6.8.5.2, "Gate Range Definition for APD and CCDF", on page 293.
Adjust Settings Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and minimum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement in order to obtain maximum power resolution. Adjusts the reference level to the current input signal. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE on page 1025
6.8.5.2 Gate Range Definition for APD and CCDF
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "APD" / "CCDF" > "APD Config" / "CCDF Config" > "Edit Gate Ranges"
You can configure gate ranges for gated triggering in statistical measurements.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
293
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF)
For background information on defining gate ranges see Chapter 6.8.4, "APD and CCDF Basics - Gated Triggering", on page 290. The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 13.5.9.3, "Using Gate Ranges for Statistical Measurements", on page 1022.
Up to three ranges can be defined for each of the six available traces.
Comment ....................................................................................................................294 Period .........................................................................................................................294 Range <x> Use .......................................................................................................... 294 Range <x> Start/Stop .................................................................................................295
Comment An optional comment can be defined for the gate range settings of each trace. Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:COMMent on page 1022
Period Length of the period to be traced. The period is the same for all traces. If you change the period for one trace, it is automatically changed for all traces. Make sure the defined period is not longer than the total measurement time of the current measurement. Keep in mind that the measurement time depends on the bandwidth and the number of samples (see " Number of Samples " on page 293). The current measurement time is indicated as "Meas Time" in the channel bar. Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:PERiod on page 1022
Range <x> Use Activates tracing of the defined range during a gated measurement. Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>[:STATe<gr>] on page 1023
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
294
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF)
Range <x> Start/Stop Defines the start and stop points of the range within the tracing period. Make sure the value for the stopping time is smaller than the length of the period. Note: You can define the time values with a greater numerical resolution than is displayed; the values are only rounded for display. Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:STARt<gr> on page 1023 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:STOP<gr> on page 1024
6.8.5.3 Scaling for Statistics Diagrams
Access: "Overview" > "Amplitude" > "Scale" tab
Or: [AMPT] > "Scale Config"
For statistics displays, scale settings are available for both the y-axis and the x-axis.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 13.5.9.4, "Scaling the Diagram", on page 1024.
Figure 6-49: Scale settings for CCDF diagram
In statistical diagrams, the x-axis displays the signal level values (= y-axis in standard display), while the y-axis displays the probability of the values.
X-Axis .........................................................................................................................296 Ref Level ......................................................................................................296 Range .......................................................................................................... 296 Shifting the Display ( Offset )........................................................................ 296
Y-Axis ......................................................................................................................... 296 Y-Unit ........................................................................................................... 296
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
295
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF)
Y-Max / Y-Min ...............................................................................................296 Default Settings ..........................................................................................................297 Adjust Settings ........................................................................................................... 297
X-Axis Defines the scaling settings for signal level values.
Ref Level X-Axis Defines the reference level for the signal levels in the currently active unit (dBm, dB�V, etc.). For the APD function this value corresponds to the right diagram border. For the CCDF function there is no direct representation of this value on the diagram as the x-axis is scaled relatively to the measured mean power. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RLEVel on page 1025
Range X-Axis Defines the level range in dB to be evaluated by the statistics measurement. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RANGe on page 1025
Shifting the Display ( Offset ) X-Axis Defines an arithmetic level offset. This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit. The scaling of the x-axis is changed accordingly. The setting range is �200 dB in 0.1 dB steps. Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet on page 1148
Y-Axis Defines the scaling settings for the probability distribution.
Y-Unit Y-Axis Defines the scaling type of the y-axis as either percentage or absolute. The default value is absolute scaling. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT on page 1026
Y-Max / Y-Min Y-Axis Defines the upper (max) and lower (min) limit of the displayed probability range. Values on the y-axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1.0. The minimum value must be in the range: 1E-9 < Y-Min < 0.1 The distance between "Y-Max" and "Y-Min" must be at least one decade. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer on page 1026 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:LOWer on page 1026
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
296
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF)
Default Settings Resets the x- and y-axis scalings to their preset values.
X-axis ref level: X-axis range APD: X-axis range CCDF: Y-axis upper limit: Y-axis lower limit:
-10 dBm 100 dB 20 dB 1.0 1E-6
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:STATistics:PRESet on page 1024
Adjust Settings Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and minimum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement in order to obtain maximum power resolution. Adjusts the reference level to the current input signal.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE on page 1025
6.8.6 How to Perform an APD or CCDF Measurement
The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to perform basic statistic measurements.
For remote operation, see Chapter 13.5.9.7, "Programming Example: Measuring Statistics", on page 1028.
To start a basic statistic measurement 1. Press the [MEAS] key, then select the "APD" or "CCDF" measurement. 2. Start a sweep.
As soon as the defined number of samples have been measured, the statistical evaluation is displayed.
To perform a statistic measurement using gate ranges For pulsed signals, the transmission intervals should not be included in the statistical evaluation. Thus, you must define gate ranges to be included in the measurement. 1. Press the [MEAS Config] key, then select the "APD Config" or "CCDF Config" soft-
key. The "APD" "APD" or "CCDF" dialog box is displayed. 2. Select the "Edit Gate Ranges" button.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
297
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF)
3. Define the time period for which the input signal is to be analyzed, for example the duration of 3 signal pulses.
4. For each active trace, define up to three ranges within the time period to be measured. In the example covering 3 pulses, you could define one range for each pulse.
a) Assuming the external trigger determines T=0 as the start of the first pulse, define the start time of range 1 at 0 s.
b) Define the stop time of range 1 at the duration of the first pulse. c) Activate range 1 by setting "Range 1 Use" to On. d) Define the start time of range 2 as (duration of pulse 1 + duration of interval) e) Define the stop time of range 2 as (start time of range 2 + duration of pulse 2) f) Activate range 2 by setting "Range 2 Use" to On. g) Define the third range in the same way.
5. Start a sweep.
As soon as the defined number of samples have been measured, the statistical evaluation is displayed. Only the signal levels within the pulse periods are considered.
6.8.7 Examples
6.8.7.1 Configuration Example: Gated Statistics
A statistics evaluation has to be done over the useful part of the signal between t3 and t4. The period of the GSM signal is 4.61536 ms.
t1: External positive trigger slope t2: Begin of burst (after 25 �s)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
298
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF)
t3: Begin of useful part, to be used for statistics (after 40 �s) t4: End of useful part, to be used for statistics (after 578 �s) t5: End of burst (after 602 �s) The instrument has to be configured as follows:
Trigger Offset Range1 Start Range1 End
t2 � t1 = 25 �s t3 � t2 = 15 �s t4 � t2 = 553 �s
now the gate ranges are relative to t2 start of range 1 relative to t2 end of range 1 relative to t2
6.8.7.2 Measurement Example � Measuring the APD and CCDF of White Noise Generated by the R&S FSW
Setting the analysis bandwidth When the amplitude distribution is measured, the analysis bandwidth must be set so that the complete spectrum of the signal to be measured falls within the bandwidth. This is the only way of ensuring that all the amplitudes will pass through the IF filter without being distorted. If the selected bandwidth is too small for a digitally modulated signal, the amplitude distribution at the output of the IF filter becomes a Gaussian distribution according to the central limit theorem and thus corresponds to a white noise signal. The true amplitude distribution of the signal therefore cannot be determined.
A programming example demonstrating a statistics measurement in a remote environment is provided in Chapter 13.5.9.7, "Programming Example: Measuring Statistics", on page 1028.
1. Preset the R&S FSW.
2. Set the reference level to -60 dBm.
The R&S FSW's intrinsic noise is displayed at the top of the screen.
3. Select the "APD" measurement function from the "Select Measurement" dialog box. The R&S FSW sets the frequency span to 0 Hz and measures the amplitude probability distribution (APD). The number of uncorrelated level measurements used for the measurement is 100000. The mean power and the peak power are displayed in dBm. The crest factor (peak power � mean power) is output as well.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
299
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF)
Figure 6-50: Amplitude probability distribution of white noise
4. Now select the "CCDF" measurement function from the "Select Measurement" dialog box.
Figure 6-51: CCDF of white noise
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
300
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Time Domain Power Measurement
The CCDF trace indicates the probability that a level will exceed the mean power. The level above the mean power is plotted along the x-axis of the graph. The origin of the axis corresponds to the mean power level. The probability that a level will be exceeded is plotted along the y-axis.
6.8.8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement
If the results do not meet your expectations, try the following methods to optimize the measurement:
Make sure the defined bandwidth is wide enough for the signal bandwidth of the device under test to be fully analyzed (see " Analysis Bandwidth " on page 292).
If the complete signal is be measured, increase the number of samples so that the resulting measurement time is longer than one period of a bursted signal.
If only parts of the signal are to be examined, define a trigger source and a gate.
6.9 Time Domain Power Measurement
The Time Domain Power measurement determines the power of a signal in the time domain. A time domain power measurement is only possible for zero span. About the Measurement........................................................................................301 Time Domain Power Results.................................................................................301 Time Domain Power Basics - Range Definition Using Limit Lines........................302 Time Domain Power Configuration....................................................................... 303 How to Measure Powers in the Time Domain.......................................................304 Measurement Example......................................................................................... 305
6.9.1 About the Measurement
Using the Time Domain Power measurement function, the R&S FSW determines the power of the signal in zero span by summing up the power at the individual measurement points and dividing the result by the number of measurement points. Thus it is possible to measure the power of TDMA signals during transmission, for example, or during the muting phase. Both the mean power and the RMS power can be measured. For this measurement, the sample detector is recommended. The sample detector is activated automatically if the detector is in auto mode.
6.9.2 Time Domain Power Results
Several different power results can be determined simultaneously:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
301
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Time Domain Power Measurement
Mode Peak RMS Mean
Std Dev
Description
Peak value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof.
RMS value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof.
Mean value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof. The linear mean value of the equivalent voltages is calculated. For example to measure the mean power during a GSM burst
The standard deviation of the measurement points from the mean value.
The result is displayed in the marker results, indicated by "Power" and the selected power mode, e.g. "RMS" . The measured values are updated after each sweep or averaged over a user-defined number of sweeps (trace averaging).
The results can also be queried using the remote commands described in Chapter 13.5.10, "Measuring the Time Domain Power", on page 1030.
6.9.3 Time Domain Power Basics - Range Definition Using Limit Lines
The range of the measured signal to be evaluated for the power measurement can be restricted using limit lines. The left and right limit lines (S1, S2) define the evaluation range and are indicated by vertical red lines in the diagram. If activated, the power results are only calculated from the levels within the limit lines. For example, if both the on and off phase of a burst signal are displayed, the measurement range can be limited to the transmission or to the muting phase. The ratio
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
302
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Time Domain Power Measurement
between signal and noise power of a TDMA signal for instance can be measured by using a measurement as a reference value and then varying the measurement range.
In order to get stable measurement results for a limited evaluation range, usually a trigger is required.
6.9.4 Time Domain Power Configuration
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Time Domain Power" > "Time Dom Power Config"
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 13.5.10, "Measuring the Time Domain Power", on page 1030.
Results ....................................................................................................................... 304 Limit State .................................................................................................................. 304 Left Limit / Right Limit .................................................................................................304
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
303
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Time Domain Power Measurement
Results Activates the power results to be evaluated from the displayed trace or a limited area of the trace.
"Peak"
Peak power over several measurements (uses trace averaging, Max Hold)
"RMS"
RMS value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof.
"Mean"
Mean value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof. The linear mean value of the equivalent voltages is calculated.
"Std Dev"
The standard deviation of the measurement points from the mean value. The measurement of the mean power is automatically switched on at the same time.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] on page 1033 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult? on page 1036 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe] on page 1033 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult? on page 1037 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] on page 1032 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult? on page 1035
Limit State Switches the limitation of the evaluation range on or off. Default setting is off.
If deactivated, the entire sweep time is evaluated. If switched on, the evaluation range is defined by the left and right limit. If only one limit is set, it corresponds to the left limit and the right limit is defined by the stop frequency. If the second limit is also set, it defines the right limit.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 1213
Left Limit / Right Limit Defines a power level limit for line S1 (left) or S2 (right).
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT on page 1214 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt on page 1214
6.9.5 How to Measure Powers in the Time Domain
The step-by-step procedure to measure powers in the time domain is described here in detail.
For remote operation, see Chapter 13.5.10.4, "Programming Example: Time Domain Power", on page 1039.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
304
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Time Domain Power Measurement
To measure the power in the time domain
1. Select the [MEAS] key.
2. From the "Select Measurement" dialog box, select the "Time Domain Power" measurement function.
3. Select the type of power measurement results to be determined by selecting the corresponding softkeys.
4. To restrict the power evaluation range, define limits: a) Select the "Time Dom Power Config" softkey to display the "Time Domain Power" configuration dialog box. b) Switch on the limits by setting the "Limit State" to "On" . The limit lines S1 and S2 are displayed. c) Define the left limit (limit line S1), the right limit (S2), or both.
5. Start a sweep.
The measured powers are displayed in the marker results.
6.9.6 Measurement Example
This measurement example demonstrates the time domain power calculation for a GSM burst.
Test setup:
Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW):
Frequency: Level: Modulation:
1.8 GHz -10 dBm GSM/EDGE
Procedure: 1. Preset the R&S FSW. 2. Set the center frequency to 1.8 GHz. 3. Set the RBW to 100 kHz. 4. Set the sweep time to 640 s. 5. Set the trigger source to "IF Power" .
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
305
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Harmonic Distortion Measurement
6. Define a trigger offset of -50 s. 7. Select the "Time Domain Power" measurement function from the "Select Measure-
ment" dialog box.
8. In the Time Domain Power configuration dialog box, set all four results to "On" .
9. Set the "Limit State" to "On" .
10. Define the left limit at 326 s and the right limit at 538 s. This range corresponds to the useful part of the GSM burst. The mean power of the useful part of the GSM burst is calculated to be -13 dBm.
6.10 Harmonic Distortion Measurement
The "Harmonic Distortion" measurement measures harmonics and their distortion, including the total harmonic distortion. About the Measurement........................................................................................306 Harmonic Distortion Basics................................................................................... 307 Harmonic Distortion Results..................................................................................309 Harmonic Distortion Configuration........................................................................ 310 How to Determine the Harmonic Distortion...........................................................312
6.10.1 About the Measurement
With this measurement it is possible to measure the harmonics easily, for example from a VCO. In addition, the total harmonic distortion (THD) is calculated. For measurements in the frequency domain, the Harmonic Distortion measurement starts with an automatic search for the first harmonic (= peak) within the set frequency
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
306
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Harmonic Distortion Measurement
range. The center frequency is set to this frequency and the reference level is adjusted accordingly. For measurements in zero span, the center frequency remains unchanged. The Harmonic Distortion measurement then performs zero span sweeps at the center frequency and at each harmonic, i.e. at frequencies that are a multiple of the center frequency. As a result, the zero span sweeps on all harmonics are shown, as well as the RMS values and the total harmonic distortion (THD).
An application note discussing harmonics measurement is available from the Rohde & Schwarz website: 1EF78: Measurement of Harmonics using Spectrum Analyzers
6.10.2 Harmonic Distortion Basics
Measuring the harmonics of a signal is a frequent problem which can be solved best using a signal analyzer. In general, every signal contains harmonics. Harmonics are generated by nonlinear characteristics, which add frequencies to a pure sinewave. They can often be reduced by low pass filters. Since the signal analyzer itself has a nonlinear characteristic, for example in its first mixer, measures must be taken to ensure that harmonics produced in the signal analyzer do not cause spurious results. If necessary, the fundamental wave must be attenuated selectively with respect to the other harmonics with a high pass filter. Harmonics are particularly critical regarding high-power transmitters such as transceivers because large harmonics can interfere with other radio services.
Harmonic distortion can be determined as the level of the individual components, or as the root mean square of all components together, the total harmonic distortion (THD). The THD is set in relation to the power of the fundamental frequency (= center frequency).
Obtainable dynamic range
When harmonics are being measured, the obtainable dynamic range depends on the second harmonic intercept of the signal analyzer. The second harmonic intercept is the virtual input level at the RF input mixer at which the level of the 2nd harmonic becomes equal to the level of the fundamental wave. In practice, however, applying a level of this magnitude would damage the mixer. Nevertheless the available dynamic range for measuring the harmonic distance of a DUT can be calculated relatively easily using the second harmonic intercept.
As shown in Figure 6-52, the level of the 2nd harmonic drops by 20 dB if the level of the fundamental wave is reduced by 10 dB.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
307
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Harmonic Distortion Measurement
Figure 6-52: Extrapolation of the 1st and 2nd harmonics to the 2nd harmonic intercept at 40 dBm
The following formula for the obtainable harmonic distortion d2 in dB is derived from the straight-line equations and the given intercept point:
d2 = S.H.I � PI (1)
where:
d2
=
S.H.I.
=
PI
=
harmonic distortion second harmonic intercept mixer level/dBm
The mixer level is the RF level applied to the RF input minus the set RF attenuation.
The formula for the internally generated level P1 at the 2nd harmonic in dBm is:
P1 = 2 * PI � S.H.I. (2)
The lower measurement limit for the harmonic is the noise floor of the signal analyzer. The harmonic of the measured DUT should � if sufficiently averaged by means of a video filter � be at least 4 dB above the noise floor so that the measurement error due to the input noise is less than 1 dB.
Rules for measuring high harmonic ratios
The following rules for measuring high harmonic ratios can be derived:
Select the smallest possible IF bandwidth for a minimal noise floor. Select an RF attenuation which is high enough to measure the harmonic ratio only.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
308
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Harmonic Distortion Measurement
The maximum harmonic distortion is obtained if the level of the harmonic equals the intrinsic noise level of the receiver. The level applied to the mixer, according to (2), is:
At a resolution bandwidth of 10 Hz (noise level -143 dBm, S.H.I. = 40 dBm), the optimum mixer level is � 51.5 dBm. According to (1) a maximum measurable harmonic distortion of 91.5 dB minus a minimum S/N ratio of 4 dB is obtained.
Detecting the origin of harmonics If the harmonic emerges from noise sufficiently (approx. >15 dB), it is easy to check (by changing the RF attenuation) whether the harmonics originate from the DUT or are generated internally by the signal analyzer. If a harmonic originates from the DUT, its level remains constant if the RF attenuation is increased by 10 dB. Only the displayed noise is increased by 10 dB due to the additional attenuation. If the harmonic is exclusively generated by the signal analyzer, the level of the harmonic is reduced by 20 dB or is lost in noise. If both � the DUT and the signal analyzer � contribute to the harmonic, the reduction in the harmonic level is correspondingly smaller.
High-sensitivity harmonics measurements
If harmonics have very small levels, the resolution bandwidth required to measure them must be reduced considerably. The sweep time is, therefore, also increased considerably. In this case, the measurement of individual harmonics is carried out with the R&S FSW set to a small span. Only the frequency range around the harmonics will then be measured with a small resolution bandwidth.
Required measurement time
During the harmonics measurement, zero span sweeps are performed at the center frequency and at each harmonic. The duration of each sweep ( "Harmonic Sweep Time" , SWT) and the "Number of Harmonics" (n) are defined in the "Harmonic Distortion" configuration dialog box. Thus, the required measurement time for the harmonic distortion measurement (Cumulated Measurement Time, CMT) is:
CMT = n*SWT
The required measurement time is indicated as "CMT" in the channel bar.
6.10.3 Harmonic Distortion Results
As a result of the harmonics distortion measurement, the zero span sweeps of all detected harmonics are shown in the diagram, separated by red display lines. This provides a very good overview of the measurement.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
309
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Harmonic Distortion Measurement
In addition, a result table is displayed providing the following information: First harmonic frequency THD (total harmonic distortion), relative and absolute values For each detected harmonic:
� Frequency � RBW � Power
Remote commands The results can also be queried using remote commands. The first harmonic frequency can be read out via the general center frequency command [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer on page 1132. THD: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion? on page 1042 List of harmonics: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST on page 1042
6.10.4 Harmonic Distortion Configuration
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Harmonic Distortion" > "Harmonic Distortion Config"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
310
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Harmonic Distortion Measurement
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 13.5.11, "Measuring the Harmonic Distortion", on page 1040.
Number of Harmonics .................................................................................................311 Harmonic Sweep Time ............................................................................................... 311 Harmonic RBW Auto .................................................................................................. 311 Adjust Settings ............................................................................................................311
Number of Harmonics Defines the number of harmonics to be measured. The range is from 1 to 26. Default is 10.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics on page 1041
Harmonic Sweep Time Defines the sweep time for the zero span measurement on each harmonic frequency. This setting is identical to the normal sweep time for zero span, see also " Sweep Time " on page 467.
Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 1145
Harmonic RBW Auto Enables/disables the automatic adjustment of the resolution bandwidth for Normal (3dB) (Gaussian) and 5-Pole filter types.
The automatic adjustment is carried out according to:
"RBWn = RBW1 * n"
If RBWn is not available, the next higher value is used.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:BANDwidth:AUTO on page 1041
Adjust Settings If harmonic measurement was performed in the frequency domain, a new peak search is started in the frequency range that was set before starting the harmonic measurement. The center frequency is set to this frequency and the reference level is adjusted accordingly.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
311
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement
If harmonic measurement was performed in the time domain, this function adjusts the reference level only.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet on page 1041
6.10.5 How to Determine the Harmonic Distortion
In Chapter 8.3.6, "Measurement Example: Measuring Harmonics Using Marker Functions", on page 556, measuring harmonics was described using marker functions. This task can be performed much simpler using the Harmonic Distortion measurement, as described in the following procedure. For remote operation, see Chapter 13.5.11.5, "Example: Measuring the Harmonic Distortion", on page 1043.
1. Select the "Harmonic Distortion" measurement function from the "Select Measurement" dialog box.
2. Define the number of harmonics to be determined using the "Number of Harmonics" softkey.
3. Perform a sweep.
The trace for the determined harmonics are displayed in the diagram, separated by red display lines. The measured power for each harmonic in relation to the fundamental is indicated in the result table.
4. If the signal changes significantly during or after the harmonics measurement, use the "Adjust Settings" function to adjust the settings automatically and restart the measurement.
6.11 Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement
The third order intercept point of the R&S FSW can be determined if a two-tone signal with equal carrier levels is applied to the input.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult? on page 1045
About the TOI Measurement.................................................................................313 TOI Basics.............................................................................................................313 TOI Results........................................................................................................... 317 TOI Configuration..................................................................................................318 How to Determine the Third Order Intercept......................................................... 319 Measurement Example � Measuring the R&S FSW's Intrinsic Intermodulation... 320
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
312
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement
6.11.1 About the TOI Measurement
If several signals are applied to a transmission two-port device with nonlinear characteristic, intermodulation products appear at its output at the sums and differences of the signals. The nonlinear characteristic produces harmonics of the useful signals which intermodulate at the characteristic. The intermodulation products of lower order have a special effect since their level is largest and they are near the useful signals. The intermodulation product of third order causes the highest interference. It is the intermodulation product generated from one of the useful signals and the 2nd harmonic of the second useful signal in case of two-tone modulation.
In order to measure the third order intercept point (TOI), a two-tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the R&S FSW input. Marker 1 and marker 2 (both normal markers) are set to the maximum of the two signals. Marker 3 and marker 4 are placed on the intermodulation products.
The R&S FSW calculates the third order intercept point from the level difference between the first 2 markers and the markers 3 and 4 and displays it in the marker table.
6.11.2 TOI Basics
If several signals are applied to a transmission two-port device with nonlinear characteristic, intermodulation products appear at its output at the sums and differences of the signals. The nonlinear characteristic produces harmonics of the useful signals which intermodulate at the characteristic.
The frequencies of the intermodulation products are above and below the useful signals. The Figure 6-53 shows intermodulation products PS1 and PS2 generated by the two useful signals PU1 and PU2.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
313
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement
Figure 6-53: Intermodulation products Ps1 and Ps2
The intermodulation product at fi2 is generated by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal PU2 and signal PU1. The intermodulation product at fi1 is generated by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal PU1 and signal PU2. fi1 = 2 � fu1 � fu2 (1) fi2 = 2 � fu2 � fu1 (2)
Dependency on level of useful signals
The level of the intermodulation products depends on the level of the useful signals. If the two useful signals are increased by 1 dB, the level of the intermodulation products increases by 3 dB, which means that the spacing aD3 between intermodulation signals and useful signals is reduced by 2 dB. This is illustrated in Figure 6-54.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
314
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement
Figure 6-54: Dependency of intermodulation products on level of useful signals
The useful signals at the two-port output increase proportionally with the input level as long as the two-port is in the linear range. A level change of 1 dB at the input causes a level change of 1 dB at the output. Beyond a certain input level, the two-port goes into compression and the output level stops increasing. The intermodulation products of the third order increase three times as quickly as the useful signals. The intercept point is the fictitious level where the two lines intersect. It cannot be measured directly since the useful level is previously limited by the maximum two-port output power.
Calculation method
However, the intercept point can be calculated from the known line slopes and the measured spacing aD3 at a given level according to the following formula:
IP3
aD3 2
PN
The third order intercept point (TOI), for example, is calculated for an intermodulation of 60 dB and an input level PU of -20 dBm according to the following formula:
IP3
60 2
(20dBm)
10dBm
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
315
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results
Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement
Intermodulation-free dynamic range
The "Intermodulation-free dynamic range", i.e. the level range in which no internal intermodulation products are generated if two-tone signals are measured, is determined by the third order intercept point, the phase noise and the thermal noise of the signal analyzer. At high signal levels, the range is determined by intermodulation products. At low signal levels, intermodulation products disappear below the noise floor, i.e. the noise floor and the phase noise of the signal analyzer determine the range. The noise floor and the phase noise depend on the resolution bandwidth that has been selected. At the smallest resolution bandwidth, the noise floor and phase noise are at a minimum and so the maximum range is obtained. However, a large increase in sweep time is required for small resolution bandwidths. It is therefore best to select the largest resolution bandwidth possible to obtain the range that is required. Since phase noise decreases as the carrier-offset increases, its influence decreases with increasing frequency offset from the useful signals.
The following diagrams illustrate the intermodulation-free dynamic range as a function of the selected bandwidth and of the level at the input mixer (= signal level � set RF attenuation) at different useful signal offsets.
Figure 6-55: Intermodulation-free range as a function of level at the input mixer and the set resolution bandwidth
(Useful signal offset = 1 MHz, DANL = -145 dBm/Hz, TOI = 15 dBm; typical values at 2 GHz)
The optimum mixer level, i.e. the level at which the intermodulation distance is at its maximum, depends on the bandwidth. At a resolution bandwidth of 10 Hz, it is approx. -35 dBm and at 1 kHz increases to approx. -30 dBm.
Phase noise has a considerable influence on the intermodulation-free range at carrier offsets between 10 and 100 kHz ( see Figure 6-56). At greater bandwidths, the influence of the phase noise is greater than it would be with small bandwidths. The optimum mixer level at the bandwidths under consideration becomes almost independent of bandwidth and is approx. -40 dBm.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
316
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement
Figure 6-56: Intermodulation-free dynamic range as a function of level at the input mixer and of the selected resolution bandwidth
(Useful signal offset = 10 to 100 kHz, DANL = -145 dBm/Hz, TOI = 15 dBm; typical values at 2 GHz).
If the intermodulation products of a DUT with a very high dynamic range are to be measured and the resolution bandwidth to be used is therefore very small, it is best to measure the levels of the useful signals and those of the intermodulation products separately using a small span. The measurement time will be reduced, in particular if the offset of the useful signals is large. To find signals reliably when frequency span is small, it is best to synchronize the signal sources and the R&S FSW.
6.11.3 TOI Results
As a result of the TOI measurement, the following values are displayed in the marker area of the diagram:
Label TOI
TOI (max) TOI (min) M1 M2 M3 M4
Description Third-order intercept point for averaged levels (s. also Chapter 6.11.3, "TOI Results", on page 317 and Figure 6-53): PU-AVG+ (PU-AVG-PS-AVG)/2 PU-MAX+ (PU-MAX-PS-MIN)/2 PU-MIN+ (PU-MIN-PS-MAX)/2 Maximum of first useful signal Maximum of second useful signal First intermodulation product Second intermodulation product
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
317
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement
Remote command The TOI can also be queried using the remote commands: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult? on page 1045. CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult:MAXimum? on page 1045 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult:MINimum? on page 1046
6.11.4 TOI Configuration
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Third Order Intercept" > "TOI Config"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
318
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 13.5.12, "Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point", on page 1044.
Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / Marker 4 ................................................................. 319 Search Signals ........................................................................................................... 319
Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / Marker 4 Indicates the detected characteristic values as determined by the TOI measurement (see Chapter 6.11.3, "TOI Results", on page 317).
The marker positions can be edited; the TOI is then recalculated according to the new marker values.
To reset all marker positions automatically, use the Search Signals function.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 1210 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 1208 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative? on page 1223
Search Signals Performs a new search on the input signals and recalculates the TOI according to the measured values.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:SEARchsignal ONCE on page 1045
6.11.5 How to Determine the Third Order Intercept
The precise TOI for the R&S FSW in relation to the input signals is provided in the data sheet. For remote operation, see Chapter 13.5.12.2, "Programming Example: Measuring the TOI", on page 1046.
1. Apply a two-tone signal with equal carrier levels to the R&S FSW input.
2. On the R&S FSW, press the [MEAS] key.
3. Select the "Third Order Intercept" measurement function from the "Select Measurement" dialog box. The calculated TOI is indicated in the marker information. The markers required for calculation are displayed in the marker table.
4. If the signal changes significantly during or after the TOI measurement, use the "Search Signals" function to start a new signal search automatically and restart the calculation of the TOI.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
319
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement
6.11.6 Measurement Example � Measuring the R&S FSW's Intrinsic Intermodulation
A programming example demonstrating a TOI measurement in a remote environment is provided in Chapter 13.5.12.2, "Programming Example: Measuring the TOI", on page 1046.
Test setup:
Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW):
Device Signal generator 1 Signal generator 2
Level -4 dBm -4 dBm
Frequency 799.6 MHz 800.4 MHz
Setting up the measurement 1. Preset the R&S FSW.
2. Set the center frequency to 800 MHz and the frequency span to 3 MHz.
3. Set the reference level to -10 dBm and RF attenuation to 0 dB.
4. Set the resolution bandwidth to 10 kHz. The noise is reduced, the trace is smoothed further and the intermodulation products can be seen clearly.
5. Set the VBW to 1 kHz.
Measuring intermodulation using the Third Order Intercept (TOI) measurement function 1. Press the [MEAS] key and select the "Third Order Intercept" measurement function
from the "Select Measurement" dialog box.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
320
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement
The R&S FSW activates four markers to measure the intermodulation distance. Two markers are positioned on the useful signals and two on the intermodulation products. The TOI is calculated from the level difference between the useful signals and the intermodulation products. It is then displayed on the screen:
The third order intercept (TOI) is displayed in the marker information.
2. The level of a signal analyzer's intrinsic intermodulation products depends on the RF level of the useful signals at the input mixer. When the RF attenuation is added, the mixer level is reduced and the intermodulation distance is increased. With an additional RF attenuation of 10 dB, the levels of the intermodulation products are reduced by 20 dB. The noise level is, however, increased by 10 dB. Increase the RF attenuation to 20 dB to reduce intermodulation products.
The R&S FSW's intrinsic intermodulation products disappear below the noise floor.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
321
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results AM Modulation Depth Measurement
6.12 AM Modulation Depth Measurement
This measurement determines the AM modulation depth of an AM-modulated carrier.
About the Measurement........................................................................................322 AM Modulation Depth Results...............................................................................323 AM Modulation Depth Configuration..................................................................... 323 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement.............................................. 324 How to Determine the AM Modulation Depth........................................................325
6.12.1 About the Measurement
The AM modulation depth, also known as a modulation index, indicates how much the modulated signal varies around the carrier amplitude. It is defined as:
MDepth = peak signal amplitude / unmodulated carrier amplitude
So for MDepth = 0.5, for example, the carrier amplitude varies by 50% above and below its unmodulated level, and for MDepth = 1.0 it varies by 100%.
When this measurement is activated, marker 1 is set to the peak level, which is considered to be the carrier level. Delta markers 2 and 3 are automatically set symmetrically to the carrier on the adjacent peak values of the trace. The markers can be adjusted manually, if necessary.
The R&S FSW calculates the power at the marker positions from the measured levels. The AM modulation depth is calculated as the ratio between the power values at the reference marker and at the delta markers. If the powers of the two AM side bands are unequal, the mean value of the two power values is used for AM modulation depth calculation.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
322
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results AM Modulation Depth Measurement
6.12.2 AM Modulation Depth Results
As a result of the AM Modulation Depth measurement, the following values are displayed in the marker area of the diagram:
Label MDepth M1 D2 D3
Description AM modulation depth in percent Maximum of the signal (= carrier level) Offset of next peak to the right of the carrier Offset of the next peak to the left of the carrier
Remote command: The AM modulation depth can also be queried using the remote command CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult<t>? on page 1048.
6.12.3 AM Modulation Depth Configuration
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "AM Modulation Depth" > "AM Mod Depth Config"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
323
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results AM Modulation Depth Measurement
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 13.5.13, "Measuring the AM Modulation Depth", on page 1047.
Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 ...................................................................................324 Search Signals ........................................................................................................... 324
Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 Indicates the detected characteristic values as determined by the AM Modulation Depth measurement:
Marker M1 D2 D3
Description Maximum of the signal (= carrier level) Offset of next peak to the right of the carrier Offset of the next peak to the left of the carrier
The marker positions can be edited; the modulation depth is then recalculated according to the new marker values.
To reset all marker positions automatically, use the Search Signals function.
Note: Moving the marker positions manually. When the position of delta marker 2 is changed, delta marker 3 is moved symmetrically with respect to the reference marker 1. Delta marker 3, on the other hand, can be moved for fine adjustment independently of marker 2.
Marker 1 can also be moved manually for re-adjustment without affecting the position of the delta markers.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 1210 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 1208 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative? on page 1223
Search Signals Performs a new search on the input signal and recalculates the AM Modulation Depth according to the measured values.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:SEARchsignal ONCE on page 1048
6.12.4 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement
If the results do not meet your expectations, try the following methods to optimize the measurement:
Set the center frequency to the frequency of the device under test. Adjust the span so the peaks to the left and right of the carrier, produced by the AM
modulated signal, are clearly visible. If the span is too wide, these signals may fall together with the carrier and the measurement can not be performed.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
324
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
If the span is too narrow, theses signals are outside of the measured span and the delta markers can not find these peaks. The rule of thumb is to set the span to three times the value of the AM modulation frequency.
6.12.5 How to Determine the AM Modulation Depth
The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to determine the AM modulation depth.
For remote operation, see Chapter 13.5.13.2, "Example: Measuring the AM Modulation Depth", on page 1048.
1. Apply a modulated carrier signal to the R&S FSW input. 2. On the R&S FSW, press the [MEAS] key. 3. Select the "AM Modulation Depth" measurement function from the "Select Mea-
surement" dialog box. The calculated AM Modulation Depth is indicated in the marker information. The markers required for calculation are displayed in the marker table. 4. If the signal changes significantly during or after the AM Modulation Depth measurement, use the "Search Signals" function to start a new peak search automatically and restart the calculation of the AM Modulation Depth.
6.13 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
The electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement is suitable for measurements according to commercial and military electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) standards. The functionality of the measurement is particularly useful in research and development.
The EMI measurement requires the R&S FSW-K54 option.
The EMI measurement features:
EMI marker functionality Marker demodulation Measurement bandwidths and detectors for EMI measurements Logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis Additional predefined limit lines for EMC standards Predefined transducer factors Additional amplitude units, normalized to 1 MHz LISN control
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
325
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
About the EMI Measurement................................................................................ 326 EMI Measurement Results....................................................................................326 EMI Measurement Basics..................................................................................... 328 EMI Measurement Configuration.......................................................................... 336 EMI Result Analysis.............................................................................................. 345 How to Perform EMI Measurements..................................................................... 346 Measurement Example: Measuring Radio Frequency Interference......................348 Optimizing and Troubleshooting EMI Measurements........................................... 350
6.13.1 About the EMI Measurement
EMI measurements can be very time-consuming, especially if weighting detectors are required for the measurement. In addition, EMC testing often requires various procedures to locate local EMI maxima. Such procedures are, for example, movements of an absorbing clamp, variations in the height of the test antenna or the rotation of the DUT.
Covering all test setups with one of the (slow) EMI weighting detectors over the required frequency range can lead to very long measurement times.
Splitting the measurement procedure into several stages, however, can eliminate this problem.
The first stage is a peak search, used to get a rough idea about the location of peak levels that may indicate interference over the required frequency range. This stage uses a detector that allows for a fast sweep time, e.g. the peak detector.
During the second stage, or final test, the R&S FSW performs the actual EMC test, a refined measurement with detectors designed for and required by EMC standards. To keep measurement times brief, the R&S FSW performs a final measurement only on frequencies you have marked with a marker or delta marker. You can assign a different detector to every marker and thus test a particular frequency easily for compliance.
Optionally, you can activate continuous demodulation of the signal during the initial measurement and at the peak marker positions during the final test.
After the final measurement, you can check the signal levels against specified limits.
6.13.2 EMI Measurement Results
As the result of an EMI measurement, the measured signal levels and active markers are displayed in a Spectrum diagram.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
326
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
Figure 6-57: EMI measurement results
Initial peak search results - Marker Table
As a result of the initial peak search, the active markers are set to the positive peaks of the measured signal.
If Auto peak search and limit lines are active, the active markers are set to the peak delta values between the measured signal and the limit lines.
The active marker levels and positions are displayed in the Marker Table.
(Note: the marker results are also displayed in the Result Summary; in addition, the Marker Table contains the marker results for those markers for which no final EMI test is performed.)
Final test results - Result Summary
The results of the final EMI tests at the active marker frequencies are displayed in the Result Summary.
The Result Summary provides the following information:
Label Type Ref Trace X-value Y-value Final Test Line name
Description Marker name Reference marker for delta markers Assigned trace Marker x-value (frequency for final test) Marker y-value (level during inital measurement) Detector used for final EMI test Line activated for limit check
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
327
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
Label
Description
Limit
Delta between measured level and limit line (if active)
The value is colored to indicate the following states: green: does not exceed limit yellow: within margin red: exceeds limit
Final Result Value measured during final EMI test using specified detector at marker frequency
6.13.3 EMI Measurement Basics
Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in EMI measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings.
Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types.................................................................328 Detectors and Dwell Time..................................................................................... 329 Frequency Resolution - Sweep Points and Scaling.............................................. 332 Controlling V-Networks (LISN).............................................................................. 333 Using Transducer Factors.....................................................................................334 Initial Measurement - Peak Search....................................................................... 334 Final Measurement at the Marker Position........................................................... 335 Limit Checks..........................................................................................................336
6.13.3.1 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types
EMI testing requires resolution filters with a 6 dB bandwidth. The EMI measurement adds the following bandwidths, which comply to commercial and military standards, to those already available with the base unit:
Commercial (CISPR, FFC etc.) 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 1 MHz (not with Quasipeak detector, see "Quasipeak detector (CISPR filter only)"
on page 330)
Military (MIL Std) 10 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
328
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
For the Quasipeak, CISPR Average, or RMS Average detector, the bandwidth is fixed depending on the frequency. For more information see Chapter 6.13.3.2, "Detectors and Dwell Time", on page 329.
6.13.3.2 Detectors and Dwell Time
The EMI measurement adds new detectors to those already available with the base unit. The additional detectors are especially designed for and required by EMI applications.
The additional detectors are available only if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement option is installed and the filter type "CISPR" or "MIL" is selected (see Chapter 6.13.3.1, "Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types", on page 328). However, the EMI measurement need not be active.
The detector to be used for the initial peak search is configured in the trace settings (see Chapter 8.5.1.2, "Trace Settings", on page 585), while the detector for the final test is configured in the EMI marker settings, see Chapter 6.13.4.1, "EMI Marker Configuration", on page 337.
Dwell time
EMC tests often require a specific dwell time for an EMI measurement. The dwell time defines how long the R&S FSW measures the signal at the individual frequencies. Each detector needs a different period of time to fully charge and discharge; the individual requirements on the dwell time are described for each detector. For details on defining the dwell time for an EMI measurement, see "Defining a Dwell Time for the Final Measurement" on page 336.
Positive and negative peak detector
The maximum and minimum peak detectors display the maximum and minimum signal level that was detected during the specified dwell time.
The minimum and maximum peak detectors are already available with the base unit.
Consider the following when defining the dwell time: Unmodulated signals: minimum time required by the detector Pulsed signals: the time must be long enough to capture at least one complete
pulse
Average detector
The average detector displays the average signal level of the samples that were collected during the specified dwell time.
The average detector is already available with the base unit.
Consider the following when defining the dwell time: Unmodulated signals: minimum time required by the detector Pulsed signals: the time must be long enough to capture several complete pulses
(at least 10)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
329
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
The time is determined by the lowest modulation frequency to be averaged
RMS detector
The RMS detector displays the root mean square (RMS) value over the specified dwell time. The integration time is the specified dwell time. The RMS detector is already available with the base unit. The same considerations apply to the dwell time as for the average detector.
Sample detector
The sample detector displays the last value from the samples allocated to a pixel.
The sample detector is used for noise or phase noise marker calculation. However, it is unreliable if the displayed span is much greater then the resolution bandwidth or if the tuning steps of the local oscillator are too large. The sample detector is not recommended for EMI tests.
Quasipeak detector (CISPR filter only)
The quasipeak detector displays the maximum signal level weighted to CISPR 16-1-1 that was detected during the dwell time.
The quasipeak detector is only available for the CISPR filter, and not for an RBW of 1 MHz.
The filter bandwidth and time parameters of the detector depend on the measured frequency. The time lag of the simulated pointer instrument reflects the weighting factor of the signal depending on its form, modulation, etc.
Table 6-17: Required parameters depending on frequency for CISPR quasipeak detector
Band A
Band B
Band C/D
Frequency range
< 150 kHz
150 kHz to 30 MHz
> 30 MHz
Resolution bandwidth
200 Hz
9 kHz
120 kHz
Charge time
45 ms
1 ms
1 ms
Discharge time
500 ms
160 ms
550 ms
Time lag of the simulated 160 ms pointer instrument
160 ms
100 ms
Consider the following when defining the dwell time:
Unknown signals: select a dwell time of at least 1 second to ensure that pulses down to a frequency of 5 Hz are weighted correctly
Known signals: shorter dwell time possible, as the signal level does not change during the final measurement
When you change the frequency or the attenuation, the R&S FSW waits until the lowpass filter has settled before starting the measurement.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
330
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
CISPR Average detector (CISPR filter only)
The CISPR Average detector displays a weighted average signal level according to CISPR 16-1-1.
The average value according to CISPR 16-1-1 is the maximum value detected while calculating the linear average value during the specified dwell time.
The CISPR Average detector is only available for the CISPR filter.
The CISPR Average detector is applied to measure pulsed sinusoidal signals with a low pulse frequency, for example. It is calibrated with the RMS value of an unmodulated sinusoidal signal. The average value is determined by lowpass filters of the 2nd order (simulating a mechanical pointer instrument).
The filter bandwidth and time lag of the detector depend on the measured frequency. The time lag of the simulated pointer instrument reflects the weighting factor of the signal depending on its form, modulation, etc.
Table 6-18: Required parameters depending on frequency for CISPR Average detector
Band A
Band B
Band C/D
Band E
Frequency range <150 kHz
150 kHz to 30 MHz 30 MHz to 1 GHz >1 GHz
IF bandwidth
200 Hz
9 kHz
120 kHz
1 MHz
Time lag of the simulated pointer instrument
160 ms
160 ms
100 ms
100 ms
Consider the following when defining the dwell time: Unknown signals: select a dwell time of at least 1 second to ensure that pulses
down to a frequency of 5 Hz are weighted correctly Pulsed signals or signals that fluctuate slowly: the dwell time must cover at
least the time until the first signal peak is measured; can require long dwell time Unmodulated signals or signals with a high modulation frequency: the dwell
time must cover at least the time until the first signal peak is measured; usually shorter than for pulsed signals
When you change the frequency or the attenuation, the R&S FSW waits until the lowpass filter has settled before starting the measurement. In this case, the measurement time depends on the resolution bandwidth and the characteristics of the signal.
RMS Average detector (CISPR filter only)
The RMS Average detector is a combination of the RMS detector (for pulse repetition frequencies above a corner frequency) and the Average detector (for pulse repetition frequencies below the corner frequency). It thus achieves a pulse response curve with the following characteristics:
10 dB/decade above the corner frequency 20 dB/decade below the corner frequency
The average value is determined by lowpass filters of the 2nd order (simulation of a mechanical pointer instrument).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
331
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
The RMS Average detector is only available for the CISPR filter.
The detector is used, for example, to measure broadband emissions and may replace the quasipeak detector in the future.
The detector parameters depend on the measured frequency. The time lag of the simulated pointer instrument reflects the weighting factor of the signal depending on its form, modulation, etc.
Table 6-19: Required parameters depending on frequency for RMS Average detector
Band A
Band B
Band C/D
Band E
Frequency range <150 kHz
150 kHz to 30 MHz 30 MHz to 1 GHz >1 GHz
IF bandwidth
200 Hz
9 kHz
120 kHz
1 MHz
Time lag of simulated pointer instrument
160 ms
160 ms
100 ms
100 ms
Corner frequency 10 Hz
100 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
The same considerations apply to the dwell time as for the CISPR average detector.
6.13.3.3 Frequency Resolution - Sweep Points and Scaling
The number of sweep points defines the number of measurement values collected during one sweep. Thus, increasing the sweep points also increases the accuracy of the results regarding the frequency resolution.
Because EMI measurements often cover a large frequency range you should define an adequate number of sweep points, especially when performing the measurement on a logarithmic axis. As on a linear axis, the distance from one sweep point to the next is calculated graphically on a logarithmic axis, and is not based on the frequency itself. Thus, the frequency resolution between two sweep points deteriorates with higher frequencies.
The resolution bandwidth should cover at least one sweep point (more is better). If this condition is not met, signals or interferences could be missed during refined measurement of narrowband interferers. If the distance between two sweep points is larger than RBW/3, a warning is displayed in the status bar ( "Increase Sweep Points" ).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
332
R&S�FSW
Example: Linear axis:
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
With a linear axis, the distance between the sweep points is equal, e.g. 200 kHz. Logarithmic axis:
With a logarithmic axis, the distance between sweep points is variable. In the spectrum from 10 Hz to 100 Hz, the distance is a few Hz. Between 100 MHz and 1 GHz, the distance is several MHz.
The R&S FSW supports a maximum of 200001 sweep points for EMI measurements.
This number is based on typical bands measured with a single resolution bandwidth. There are sufficient sweep points to make sure that a signal is found during the refined measurement, even when covering 30 MHz to 1 GHz with logarithmic scaling and 120 kHz RBW.
6.13.3.4 Controlling V-Networks (LISN)
For measurements on power lines, EMI measurement adds functionality to the R&S FSW to control a line impedance stabilization network (LISN) directly. Thus you can determine the interference caused by power supplies and cables.
You can connect the LISN to the user port of the R&S FSW. Control cables for the various LISNs are available as accessories. The R&S FSW then controls which phase of the LISN is to be tested and outputs the information to the user port.
The EMI measurement supports several V-networks. For each type of network, you can define the phase you want to test for interferences. The EMI measurement allows you to test one phase at a time.
Table 6-20: Supported networks and phases
Network type
Phases
Two-line V-networks
ESH3-Z5
N, L1
ENV216
N, L1
Four-line V-networks
ESH2-Z5
N, L1. L2, L3
ENV4200
N, L1. L2, L3
ENV432
N, L1. L2, L3
For the ENV216 network, a 150 kHz high pass filter is available to protect the input of the R&S FSW.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
333
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
6.13.3.5 Using Transducer Factors
The R&S FSW EMI measurement provides functionality to include transducer factors in the test setup. Transducers are devices like antennas, probes or current probes that are connected to the R&S FSW to measure interferences or useful signals. The transducer converts the measured value such as field strength, current or RFI voltage into a voltage across 50 . During the measurement, the transducer is considered a part of the instrument.
A transducer usually has a frequency-dependent transducer factor that includes the frequency response of the corresponding device. During level measurement, the transducer factor automatically converts the results into the correct unit and magnitude. A transducer factor consists of a maximum of 1001 reference values. Each reference value includes frequency, unit and level.
The R&S FSW EMI measurement adds several predefined transducer factors. In addition you can also create new and edit existing transducer factors.
For more information see Chapter 11.4.1, "Basics on Transducer Factors", on page 712 .
6.13.3.6 Initial Measurement - Peak Search
The purpose of an initial peak search is to find signals with a high interference level quickly. The peak search is performed with a fast detector like the peak or average detector. The initial peak search is the basis for a possible refined measurement of interferences with the detectors specific to EMI measurements.
The results of the initial peak search are shown in the Marker Table (see Chapter 6.13.2, "EMI Measurement Results", on page 326).
Peak searches can be performed automatically or manually.
Automatic peak search
If enabled, the automatic peak search starts as soon as you select the EMI measurement and one or more markers are active. During automatic peak search, the R&S FSW looks for the strongest peaks in the frequency range you are measuring and positions a marker on those peaks after each sweep. If a limit line is assigned to the trace, the peak search is based on the level difference between the trace and the limit line. For each active marker a peak is searched. You can use up to 16 markers simultaneously.
The largest peak is always assigned to the active marker with the lowest number; subsequent peaks are assigned to the active markers in ascending order.
The R&S FSW allows you to distribute markers among several traces. If you do so, the marker with the lowest number assigned to a particular trace is positioned on the largest peak of the corresponding trace.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
334
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
Manual peak search
If automatic peak search is off, you can set the markers to any frequency you need more information about manually. You can change the marker position with the rotary knob or the cursor keys, or position it to a particular frequency with the number keys.
Setting markers is the same as setting markers in other Spectrum measurements. For more information see Chapter 8.3, "Marker Usage", on page 515.
Searching for peaks over several traces
You can search for peaks on six traces simultaneously with a different weighting detector for each trace.
In this case, the R&S FSW searches for peaks on all traces separately, provided that you have assigned at least one marker to each trace.
A typical selection for EMI measurement is to use the peak and the average detector. After initial measurement, search for peaks on the peak trace and the average trace separately so that the distribution of narrowband and wideband sources of interference can be taken into account.
Example: In the initial measurement, determine the peak on one trace using the average
detector by assigning a marker to that trace. For the marker frequency, perform a refined measurement using the CISPR or RMS average detector. In the initial measurement, determine the peak on another trace using the peak detector by assigning another marker to that trace. For this marker frequency, perform a refined measurement using the quasipeak detector.
6.13.3.7 Final Measurement at the Marker Position
Finding peaks with the help of an initial marker peak search reduces data to be evaluated and thus measurement time. A final measurement with a special EMI detector can then refine the intial results.
The R&S FSW EMI measurement performs the final measurement automatically as soon as a detector for the final test is defined for an EMI marker and the marker is activated. The final measurement starts immediately after the marker has been set. The advantage of an immediate final measurement is that it eliminates the risk of measurement errors based on frequency drifts of the disturbance signal.
The final measurement at the marker frequency may have a different detector than during the initial peak search. Thus, the final measurement consumes much less time because detectors with a long measurement time are needed only at the critical frequency.
The R&S FSW EMI measurement also allows you to use multiple detectors for the final measurement. The advantage of multiple detection is that you only need one test run to see if the results comply with the limits specified in a standard. The detectors for the final EMI tests are defined in the marker configuration as opposed to the trace detector which is used for the initial peak search.)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
335
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
The results of the final measurement are shown in the Result Summary (see Chapter 6.13.2, "EMI Measurement Results", on page 326).
Defining a Dwell Time for the Final Measurement
EMC tests often require a specific dwell time for an EMI measurement. The dwell time defines how long the R&S FSW measures the signal at the frequencies of the marker positions. The dwell time is identical for all EMI final measurements and is thus defined in the EMI measurement configuration. Select a dwell time according to the characteristics of the measured signal. See also Chapter 6.13.3.2, "Detectors and Dwell Time", on page 329.
6.13.3.8 Limit Checks
General limit line functionality is provided by the R&S FSW base unit. The base unit also provides various predefined limit lines that you can use for various applications. The EMI measurement adds further predefined limit lines designed in compliance with several EMC standards.
When using limit lines in combination with EMI measurements, the marker levels from the initial measurement are compared to the limit line values. The result of the limit line check is displayed in the diagram as usual.
In the EMI Result Summary, the limit check is based on the results of the final test. Since the marker may be determined using a different detector than the final test results, the two limit check results may differ. The difference between the limit line and the measured value is colored to indicate the following states:
green: does not exceed limit yellow: within margin red: exceeds limit
For more information on using limit lines see Chapter 8.4.2.1, "Basics on Limit Lines", on page 560.
6.13.4 EMI Measurement Configuration
Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "EMI" > "EMI Config" On the R&S FSW, EMI measurement configuration consists of the following settings.
In addition, some common settings are also relevant for EMI measurements: Chapter 11.4.2, "Transducer Settings", on page 714 " Reference Level " on page 451 Chapter 8.4.2.2, "Limit Line Settings and Functions", on page 564 EMI Marker Configuration..................................................................................... 337 EMI Final Measurement Configuration..................................................................340 LISN Control Settings............................................................................................344
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
336
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
6.13.4.1 EMI Marker Configuration
Access: [MKR] > "Marker Config" The initial peak search for the EMI measurement is defined by the marker configuration.
Selected Marker ......................................................................................................... 337 Marker State ...............................................................................................................337 Marker Position X-value ............................................................................................. 337 Marker Type ............................................................................................................... 338 Reference Marker ...................................................................................................... 338 Linking to Another Marker .......................................................................................... 338 Assigning the Marker to a Trace ................................................................................ 339 Final Test Detector ..................................................................................................... 339 Select Marker ............................................................................................................. 339
Selected Marker Marker name. The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange.
Remote command: Marker selected via suffix <m> in remote commands.
Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1209 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 1207
Marker Position X-value Defines the position (x-value) of the marker in the diagram. For normal markers, the absolute position is indicated. For delta markers, the position relative to the reference marker is provided.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
337
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
To create a delta marker in a fixed distance to another marker, define the distance as the x-value for the delta marker. Then link the delta marker to another marker using the Linking to Another Marker function.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 1210 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 1208
Marker Type Toggles the marker type.
The type for marker 1 is always "Normal" , the type for delta marker 1 is always "Delta" . These types cannot be changed.
Note: If normal marker 1 is the active marker, switching the "Mkr Type" activates an additional delta marker 1. For any other marker, switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker, it only switches the type of the selected marker.
"Normal"
A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram.
"Delta"
A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the specified reference marker (marker 1 by default).
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1209 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 1207
Reference Marker Defines a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis results (delta marker values).
If the reference marker is deactivated, the delta marker referring to it is also deactivated.
If a fixed reference point is configured (see "Defining a Fixed Reference" on page 523), the reference point ( "FXD" ) can also be selected instead of another marker.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREFerence on page 1207
Linking to Another Marker Links the current marker to the marker selected from the list of active markers. If the xaxis value of the initial marker is changed, the linked marker follows to the same position on the x-axis. Linking is off by default.
Using this function you can set two markers on different traces to measure the difference (e.g. between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a reference trace).
For linked delta markers, the x-value of the delta marker is 0 Hz by default. To create a delta marker in a fixed distance to another marker, define the distance as the x-value for the linked delta marker.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<ms>:LINK:TO:MARKer<md> on page 1209 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<ms>:LINK:TO:MARKer<md> on page 1206 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK on page 1205
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
338
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
Assigning the Marker to a Trace The "Trace" setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace. The trace determines which value the marker shows at the marker position. If the marker was previously assigned to a different trace, the marker remains on the previous frequency or time, but indicates the value of the new trace.
If a trace is turned off, the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactivated.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe on page 1210
Final Test Detector Defines the detector to be used for the final EMI test at the marker frequency.
This setting is only available if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement option is installed.
For details, see Chapter 6.13.3.2, "Detectors and Dwell Time", on page 329.
Note: The trace detector configured in the trace settings is used for the initial peak search only, see Chapter 8.5.1.2, "Trace Settings", on page 585.
"Off"
No final test is performed.
"PositivePeak" Determines the maximum signal level that was detected during the specified dwell time.
"Average"
Determines the average signal level of the samples that were collected during the specified dwell time.
"Quasi-Peak"
Determines the maximum signal level weighted to CISPR 16-1-1 that was detected during the dwell time. The "Quasi-Peak" detector is only available for the CISPR filter, and not for an RBW of 1 MHz.
"CISPR Average"
Determines a weighted average signal level according to CISPR 16-1-1. The average value according to CISPR 16-1-1 is the maximum value detected while calculating the linear average value during the specified dwell time. The "CISPR Average" detector is only available for the CISPR filter.
"RMS Average"
A combination of the RMS detector (for pulse repetition frequencies above a corner frequency) and the Average detector (for pulse repetition frequencies below the corner frequency). Lowpass filters of the second order determine the average value (simulation of a mechanical pointer instrument). The "RMS Average" detector is only available for the CISPR filter.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector on page 1050
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector on page 1050
Select Marker The "Select Marker" function opens a dialog box to select and activate or deactivate one or more markers quickly.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
339
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1209 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 1207
6.13.4.2 EMI Final Measurement Configuration
The final EMI measurement can be performed with different settings than the initial peak search. These settings are described here.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
340
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
The detector to be used for the final EMI test can be defined differently for each frequency, thus the detector is configured in the EMI marker settings, see " Final Test Detector " on page 339.
Filter Type .................................................................................................................. 341 RBW ...........................................................................................................................341 Automatic Peak Search ..............................................................................................342 Dwell Time ..................................................................................................................342 Final Test Detector ..................................................................................................... 342 Frequency Axis Scaling ..............................................................................................343 Res BW CISPR .......................................................................................................... 343 Res BW MIL ............................................................................................................... 343
Filter Type Defines the filter type.
The following filter types are available:
Normal (3dB) Channel RRC 5-Pole (not available for sweep type "FFT" ) CISPR (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option MIL Std (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option
For more information see Chapter 7.5.1.6, "Which Data May Pass: Filter Types", on page 462.
Note: The EMI-specific filter types are available if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement option is installed, even if EMI measurement is not active. For details see Chapter 6.13.3.1, "Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types", on page 328. The RBW filter configured in the bandwidth settings is identical to the filter configured in the EMI configuration.
Remote command: [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE on page 1139
RBW Defines the resolution bandwidth. The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet. Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth.
If "Auto" is selected, the resolution bandwidth is coupled to the selected span (for span > 0). If the span is changed, the resolution bandwidth is automatically adjusted.
If the resolution bandwidth is defined manually, a green bullet is displayed next to the "RBW" display in the channel bar.
For more information see Chapter 7.5.1.1, "Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth", on page 459.
Note: Restrictions. For measurements on I/Q data in the frequency domain, the maximum RBW is
1 MHz.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
341
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
For EMI measurements using the quasipeak detector, the 1 MHz RBW filter is not available (see Chapter 6.13.3.1, "Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types", on page 328).
Remote command: [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 1138 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO on page 1139
Automatic Peak Search If activated, a peak search is performed automatically for all active markers after each sweep.
If Auto peak search and limit lines are active, the active markers are set to the peak delta values between the measured signal and the limit lines.
Note: The general search functions Auto Max Peak Search / Auto Min Peak Search are not available for EMI measurements.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PEAKsearch:AUTO on page 1051
Dwell Time Sets the dwell time for the EMI marker measurement.
For more information see Chapter 6.13.3.2, "Detectors and Dwell Time", on page 329.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DWELl on page 1051
Final Test Detector Defines the detector to be used for the final EMI test at the marker frequency.
This setting is only available if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement option is installed.
For details, see Chapter 6.13.3.2, "Detectors and Dwell Time", on page 329.
Note: The trace detector configured in the trace settings is used for the initial peak search only, see Chapter 8.5.1.2, "Trace Settings", on page 585.
"Off"
No final test is performed.
"PositivePeak" Determines the maximum signal level that was detected during the specified dwell time.
"Average"
Determines the average signal level of the samples that were collected during the specified dwell time.
"Quasi-Peak"
Determines the maximum signal level weighted to CISPR 16-1-1 that was detected during the dwell time. The "Quasi-Peak" detector is only available for the CISPR filter, and not for an RBW of 1 MHz.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
342
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
"CISPR Average"
Determines a weighted average signal level according to CISPR 16-1-1. The average value according to CISPR 16-1-1 is the maximum value detected while calculating the linear average value during the specified dwell time. The "CISPR Average" detector is only available for the CISPR filter.
"RMS Average"
A combination of the RMS detector (for pulse repetition frequencies above a corner frequency) and the Average detector (for pulse repetition frequencies below the corner frequency). Lowpass filters of the second order determine the average value (simulation of a mechanical pointer instrument). The "RMS Average" detector is only available for the CISPR filter.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector on page 1050
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector on page 1050
Frequency Axis Scaling Switches between linear and logarithmic scaling for the frequency axis.
Logarithmic scaling is only available if R&S FSW-K54 is installed.
By default, the frequency axis has linear scaling. Logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis, however, is common for measurements over large frequency ranges as it enhances the resolution of the lower frequencies. On the other hand, high frequencies get more crowded and become harder to distinguish.
For more information see Chapter 7.3.1.3, "Coping with Large Frequency Ranges Logarithmic Scaling", on page 440.
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing on page 1132
Res BW CISPR Defines the measurement bandwidth for commercial EMC standards according to CISPR.
For more information see Chapter 6.13.3.1, "Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types", on page 328.
Remote command: Filter type: [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE on page 1139 Filter bandwidth: [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 1138
Res BW MIL Defines the measurement bandwidth for military EMC standards.
For more information see Chapter 6.13.3.1, "Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types", on page 328.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
343
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
Remote command: Filter type: [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE on page 1139 Filter bandwidth: [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 1138
6.13.4.3 LISN Control Settings
Access: [MEAS CONFIG] > "LISN Config"
For measurements with power lines, the following settings are available for the R&S FSW to control which phase of the LISN is to be tested (e.g. for EMI measurements). LISN control requires the EMI measurement (R&S FSW-K54) option.
For more information see Chapter 6.13.3.4, "Controlling V-Networks (LISN)", on page 333.
LISN Type .................................................................................................................. 344 Phase ......................................................................................................................... 345 150 kHz Highpass ...................................................................................................... 345
LISN Type Selects the network type and activates output to the network via the user port of the R&S FSW. The network type determines the supported phases (see Table 6-20).
"Off" disables LISN control and output.
Remote command: INPut<ip>:LISN[:TYPE] on page 1053
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
344
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
Phase Selects the phase to be measured. Phase N and L1 are included in all four LISN. Phase L2 and L3 are only included in four-line networks.
You can select one phase only for each measurement.
Remote command: INPut<ip>:LISN:PHASe on page 1052
150 kHz Highpass Enables or disables the use of an additional 150 kHz highpass filter to protect the R&S FSW LISN from excessive input.
The filter is available for the ENV 216 network only.
Remote command: INPut<ip>:LISN:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe] on page 1052
6.13.5 EMI Result Analysis
The EMI measurement provides functionality to analyze the results.
Marker demodulation
The R&S FSW is able to demodulate AM and FM signals for acoustic tests and monitoring purposes.
When the demodulator function is active, the EMI measurement demodulates the signal continuously (regardless of the "Continuous Demodulation" setting in the marker function configuration). The demodulation begins as soon as a marker is activated. During the initial measurement, demodulation is performed for the entire measurement span; during the final measurement only the detected peak marker positions are demodulated (for the defined dwell time). You can listen to the results during the measurement using headphones or the internal speaker.
For more information see Chapter 8.3.4.7, "Demodulating Marker Values and Providing Audio Output (Marker Demodulation)", on page 546.
Limit lines
General limit line functionality is provided by the R&S FSW base unit. The base unit also provides various predefined limit lines that you can use for various applications. The EMI measurement adds further predefined limit lines designed in compliance with several EMC standards.
Limit line configuration is described in Chapter 8.4.2.2, "Limit Line Settings and Functions", on page 564.
Test reports
The R&S FSW features a test report generator. A test report is a document that summarizes the results and configuration of measurements.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
345
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
Test reports are based on a general template, and are completed with user-defined, measurement-specific contents. You can create multiple templates for different applications.
Test reports are described in Chapter 10.6, "Working with Test Reports", on page 669.
6.13.6 How to Perform EMI Measurements
The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to perform an EMI measurement with the R&S FSW.
For remote operation, see Chapter 13.5.14.8, "Programming Example: EMI Measurement", on page 1056.
1. Press the [MODE] key on the front panel and select the "Spectrum" application.
2. Define the frequency range of the EMI measurement. a) Press the [FREQ] key and then the "Frequency Config" softkey. b) Define the start and stop frequency.
3. Configure the traces for the intial EMI measurement. a) Press the [TRACE] key. b) Select the "Trace Config" softkey to configure as many traces as required. c) Define the detectors to use for the initial measurement, for example the peak detector and the average detector.
4. Press the [MEAS] key on the front panel and select the "EMI" measurement. The EMI main menu is displayed.
5. Select the "EMI Config" softkey and define the resolution bandwidth and filter type to be used for the measurement. By default, the R&S FSW uses a filter with a 3 db bandwidth. EMI measurements usually require a filter with a 6 dB bandwidth.
6. Define the dwell time for which each marker position is measured during the final measurement.
7. To obtain an overview of peak values in the input signal during the initial measurement, activate the "Auto Peak Search" . As soon as a sweep is started, the R&S FSW looks for the strongest peaks in the frequency range you are measuring and positions one of the active markers on those peaks. The number of active markers determines the number of detected peaks; no additional markers are activated.
8. Define the type of scaling for the frequency axis according to the definition of the limit lines in the standard.
9. Optionally, select the "LISN Config" softkey to configure a LISN control.
10. Configure the EMI measurement markers.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
346
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
a) Select the "Marker Config" softkey and activate the number of markers or delta markers you want to analyze.
b) For each active marker, select a detector to be used for the "Final Test" , that is: the subsequent EMI measurement at the marker position.
c) If you already know which frequencies cause irregular values, set the markers to those positions. (Otherwise perform an initial peak search to obtain an overview, see step 7).
11. Optionally, select the "Marker Demod Config" softkey to configure continuous marker demodulation. Demodulation begins immediately with the next measurement. During the initial measurement, demodulation is performed for the entire measurement span; during the final measurement only the detected peak marker positions are demodulated (for the defined dwell time).
12. Increase the number of sweep points for the EMI measurement.
a) Press the [SWEEP] key on the front panel. b) Select the "Sweep Config" softkey. c) Set the number of "Sweep Points" so that the distance between two sweep
points is smaller than RBW/3.
13. Optionally, select or configure limit lines against which the marker results are checked.
a) Press the [Lines] key and then the "Lines Config" softkey, then select the "Lines Config" tab.
b) In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the "View Filter" option: "Show Compatible" . All stored limit lines with the file extension .LIN in the limits subfolder of the main installation folder of the instrument that are compatible to the current EMI measurement settings are displayed in the overview.
c) Select the "Check Traces" setting for a limit line in the overview and select the trace numbers to be included in the limit check. One limit line can be assigned to several traces.
14. Define a suitable unit for the measured values, as the default unit dBm is not suitable for EMI measurements, or select a transducer. To change the unit: Press the [AMPT] key, then select the "Amplitude Config" softkey and, in the "Amplitude" dialog box, select the required unit. To select a transducer:
a) Press the [SETUP] key. b) Select the "Transducer" softkey. c) In the "Transducer" dialog box, set the "View Filter" to "Show Compatible" to
determine the available transducers for the current EMI measurement setup. d) Select a transducer line in the overview and select the "Active" setting for it.
15. Press the [RUN SINGLE] key to start a new EMI measurement.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
347
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
If activated, a peak search is performed. For each active marker, a final measurement is performed using the specified detector for the specified dwell time. If activated, the signal is demodulated at the active marker positions. The specified traces to be checked are compared with the active limit lines. The status of the limit check for the final measurement is indicated in the Result Summary.
6.13.7 Measurement Example: Measuring Radio Frequency Interference
A common measurement task that you can do with the EMI measurement is to detect radio frequency interference (RFI) or electromagnetic interferences (EMI).
The measurement shows signal levels over a particular frequency range. A typical frequency range for EMI measurements is 150 kHz to 1 GHz. As the captured signal characteristics will most likely be unknown, the best way to start the measurement is to preset the R&S FSW and perform a peak search to obtain a general overview.
If you perform measurements according to a particular EMI standard, a preset also eliminates the risk of wrong settings inherited from previous measurements. Note that EMI measurements are possible in the Spectrum application only.
A programming example demonstrating an EMI measurement in a remote environment is provided in Chapter 13.5.14.8, "Programming Example: EMI Measurement", on page 1056.
Preparing the measurement
1. Press the [PRESET] key. The R&S FSW restores the default settings.
2. Define the frequency range of the measurement. a) Press the [FREQ] key. b) Press the "Start Frequency" softkey and enter a frequency of 150 kHz. c) Press the "Stop Frequency" softkey and enter a frequency of 1 GHz. The R&S FSW scales the horizontal axis accordingly.
3. Press the [MEAS] key on the front panel and select the "EMI" measurement. The EMI main menu is displayed.
4. Select the "EMI Config" softkey and define the resolution bandwidth and filter type to be used for the measurement. By default, the R&S FSW uses a filter with a 3 db bandwidth. EMI measurements usually require a filter with a 6-dB bandwidth.
5. Define the dwell time for which each marker position is measured during the final measurement.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
348
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
6. To obtain an overview of exceptional values in the input signal during the initial measurement, activate the "Auto Peak Search" .
7. Select the measurement bandwidth.
a) Select the "Res BW CISPR" softkey. A CISPR (6 dB) filter is configured.
b) Set the bandwidth to 1 MHz.
The R&S FSW shows the currently selected resolution bandwidth in the diagram header.
8. Configure the traces for the initial EMI measurement.
a) Press the [TRACE] key. b) Press the "Trace Config" softkey to configure two traces. c) Define the detectors to use for the initial measurement. Select the peak detec-
tor for trace 1 and the average detector for trace 2. The peak detector ensures that the detected peak levels in the frequency range covered by one pixel are displayed.
The R&S FSW now displays two traces. Trace 1 shows the peak values, trace 2 shows the average values.
9. Increase the number of sweep points for the EMI measurement.
a) Press the [SWEEP] key on the front panel. b) Select the "Sweep Config" softkey. c) Set the number of "Sweep Points" to 200000.
10. Press the [AMPT] key, then select the "Amplitude Config" softkey and, in the "Amplitude" dialog box, select V as the "Unit" .
Performing the measurement
1. Configure the EMI measurement markers. In this example we will use 6 markers.
a) Select the "Marker Config" softkey and activate six normal markers. b) Set markers 1 to 3 on trace 1. Set markers 4 to 6 on trace 2. c) For each of these markers, select the "CISPR AV" detector to be used for the
"Final Test" , i.e. the subsequent EMI measurement at the marker positions.
2. Select a limit line against which the marker results are checked.
a) Press the [Lines] key and then the "Lines Config" softkey, then select the "Lines Config" tab.
b) In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the "View Filter" option: "Show Compatible" . All stored limit lines with the file extension .LIN in the limits subfolder of the main installation folder of the instrument that are compatible to the current EMI measurement settings are displayed in the overview.
c) In the overview, click the "Check Traces" setting for the EN55011A limit line and select trace 1 to be included in the limit check. (Trace 2, which is defined as the average, will always be lower than trace 1, which contains peak values.)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
349
R&S�FSW
Measurements and Results Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement
3. Press the [RUN SINGLE] key to start a new EMI measurement.
If activated, a peak search is performed. For each active marker, a final measurement is performed using the specified detector for the specified dwell time. If activated, the signal is demodulated. During the initial measurement, demodulation is performed for the entire measurement span; during the final measurement only the detected peak marker positions are demodulated (for the defined dwell time). The specified traces to be checked are compared with the active limit line. The status of the limit check for the final measurement is indicated in the Result Summary.
Evaluating the measurement
Check the Result Summary to detect exceeded limit values.
Zoom into the diagram at the conspicuous frequency for more details.
If necessary, decrease the span to the area in which irregular values occurred and repeat the measurement.
6.13.8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting EMI Measurements
If the results do not meet your expectations, try the following methods to optimize the measurement:
Number of sweep points
The resolution bandwidth should cover at least one sweep point (more is better). If this condition is not met, signals or interferences could be missed during refined measurement of narrowband interferers. See Chapter 6.13.3.3, "Frequency Resolution - Sweep Points and Scaling", on page 332.
If the distance between two sweep points is larger than RBW/3, a warning is displayed in the status bar ( "Increase Sweep Points" or "RBW" ).
Dwell time
Consider the following when defining the dwell time: Unknown signals: select a dwell time of at least 1 second to ensure that pulses
down to a frequency of 5 Hz are weighted correctly Pulsed signals or signals that fluctuate slowly: the dwell time must cover at
least the time until the first signal peak is measured; can require long dwell time unmodulated signals or signals with a high modulation frequency: the dwell
time must cover at least the time until the first signal peak is measured; usually shorter than for pulsed signals
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
350
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Configuration Overview
7 Common Measurement Settings
Basic measurement settings that are common to many measurement tasks, regardless of the application or operating mode, are described here. If you are performing a specific measurement task, using an operating mode other than Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode, or an application other than the Spectrum application, be sure to check the specific application or mode description for settings that may deviate from these common settings.
Configuration Overview.........................................................................................351 Data Input and Output...........................................................................................353 Frequency and Span Configuration...................................................................... 439 Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration............................................................ 447 Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration.......................................................... 458 Trigger and Gate Configuration.............................................................................475 Adjusting Settings Automatically........................................................................... 497
7.1 Configuration Overview
Access: all menus
Each channel provides an overview of the most important currently defined settings and access to the most important configuration dialog boxes for the particular measurement. This overview is available via the "Overview" icon, which is displayed in all menus.
Using this overview, you can easily configure an entire channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated.
In particular, the "Overview" provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes (listed in the recommended order of processing):
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
351
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Configuration Overview
1. "Select Measurement" See Chapter 6, "Measurements and Results", on page 124
2. Input See Chapter 7.2.2, "Input Source Settings", on page 361
3. Amplitude See Chapter 7.4, "Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration", on page 447
4. Frequency See Chapter 7.3, "Frequency and Span Configuration", on page 439
5. (Optionally:) Trigger/Gate See Chapter 7.6, "Trigger and Gate Configuration", on page 475
6. Bandwidth See Chapter 7.5.2, "Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Settings", on page 464 (For SEM measurements: SEM Setup, see Chapter 6.6.5, "SEM Configuration", on page 244) (For Spurious measurements: Spurious Setup, see Chapter 6.7.4, "Spurious Emissions Measurement Configuration", on page 278)
7. (Optionally:) Outputs See Chapter 7.2.6, "Output Settings", on page 434
8. Analysis See Chapter 8, "Common Analysis and Display Functions", on page 501
9. Display See Chapter 8.1, "Result Display Configuration", on page 501
To configure settings
Select any button to open the corresponding dialog box. Select a setting in the channel bar (at the top of the channel tab) to change a specific setting.
Preset Channel Select the "Preset Channel" button in the lower left-hand corner of the "Overview" to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values. Do not confuse the "Preset Channel" button with the [Preset] key, which restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all channels on the R&S FSW (except for the default channel)! Remote command: SYSTem:PRESet:CHANnel[:EXEC] on page 1298
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
352
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
7.2 Data Input and Output
The R&S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output (such as video or trigger signals).
Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output................................................. 353 Input Source Settings............................................................................................361 Power Sensors......................................................................................................368 Optional External Generator Control.....................................................................377 Optional External Mixers....................................................................................... 405 Output Settings..................................................................................................... 434 Trigger Input/Output Settings................................................................................ 436 How to Output a Trigger Signal.............................................................................438
7.2.1 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output
The R&S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output (such as noise or trigger signals).
7.2.1.1 Using Probes
Probes allow you to perform voltage measurements very flexibly and precisely on all sorts of devices to be tested, without interfering with the signal. The R&S FSW base unit and some (optional) applications support input from probes.
Probe connectors
Probes can be connected to the following connectors on the R&S FSW: BASEBAND INPUT connectors, if the Analog Baseband Interface (option
R&S FSW-B71) is installed; Allows you to perform I/Q analysis or frequency sweeps on data from all active probes up to a frequency of 5 GHz. The power supply for the probe is integrated in the connector. Supported only by applications that can process I/Q data. "RF Input" connector using an R&S RT-ZA9 adapter; Allows you to perform I/Q analysis or frequency sweeps on data from active modular probes directly on the RF input up to the maximum frequency of the probe and analyzer. Does not require the optional Analog Baseband Interface (R&S FSWB71). Supported by all R&S FSW applications, in particular the Spectrum application. The R&S RT-ZA9 provides an interface between the probe's BNC socket and the analyzer's N-socket. The USB connection provides the necessary supply voltages for the probe.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
353
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Active probes When using active probes from the R&S RT family, consider the following: Active probes require operating power from the instrument and have a proprietary
interface to the instrument. The probe is automatically recognized by the instrument, no adjustment is
required. Connections should be as short as possible to keep the usable bandwidth high. Observe the operating voltage range.
Microbutton action
You can define an action to be performed by the R&S FSW when the probe's microbutton (if available) is pressed. Currently, a single data acquisition via the probe can be performed simply by pressing the microbutton.
Analog Baseband Probes
Probes are automatically detected when you plug them into the upper BASEBAND INPUT connectors on the front panel of the R&S FSW. The detected information on the probe is displayed in the "Probes" tab of the "Input" dialog box, individually for each connector.
To determine whether the probe has been connected properly and recognized by the R&S FSW, use the [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:STATe? remote control command.
Analog baseband input from connected probes can only be analyzed in applications that support I/Q data processing and the optional Analog Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B71), such as the I/Q Analyzer, the Analog Demodulation application, or one of the optional applications.
However, probes can also provide RF input to the R&S FSW via the BASEBAND INPUT I connector. In this case, the input is redirected to the RF input path. Then the probe data can also be analyzed in the Spectrum application, allowing you to perform measurements in the time or frequency domain on the input from a probe.
For details see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual.
As opposed to common RF input processing, a transducer is activated before the common process to compensate for the additional path of the redirected signal.
Impedance and attenuation
The measured signal from the probe is attenuated internally by the probe's specific attenuation. For probe signals that are redirected to the RF path, the attenuation is compensated by the transducer. The reference level is adjusted automatically.
For analog baseband input, the attenuation is compensated without a transducer. In this case, higher levels are available for the full scale level.
A fixed impedance of 50 is used for all probes to convert voltage values to power levels.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
354
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Additional information
An application note discussing differential measurements with spectrum analyzers is available from the Rohde & Schwarz website:
1EF84: Differential measurements with Spectrum Analyzers and Probes
Common Mode Offset (for Differential Probes)
Common mode offset compensation is available for R&S�RT-ZD10/20/30 probes with serial number 200 000. It can compensate a common DC voltage applied to both input sockets (referenced to the ground socket). This is particularly helpful for measurements on differential signals with high common mode levels, for example, current measurements using a shunt resistor.
Figure 7-1: Common mode (CM) offset compensation for a differential measurement
If the input signals fit into the operating voltage window of the R&S�RT-ZD10/20/30, it is not necessary to set a common mode offset compensation.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
355
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Clipping effects due to incorrect common mode offset The R&S�RT-ZD10/20/30 probe measures only differential input signals. Common mode signals are suppressed by the probe. Therefore, the common mode offset compensation is not directly visible in the result display. An incorrect common mode offset compensation can lead to unwanted clipping effects. Measuring the common mode input voltage using the R&S ProbeMeter is a convenient way to detect breaches of the operating voltage window. For more information on common mode offset see the R&S�RT-ZD10/20/30 User Manual.
RF Probes
Generally, you can perform frequency sweeps on active probes connected to the BASEBAND INPUT connectors by redirecting the input to the RF Input path (see "Analog Baseband Probes" on page 354). However, this measurement setup is restricted to a maximum frequency of 5 GHz by the BASEBAND INPUT connectors. Furthermore, this setup is restricted to applications that can process I/Q data.
Connecting probes directly to the RF Input connector allows you to make use of the maximum frequency range provided by the probe and the R&S FSW, which can be much higher than 5 GHz.
Furthermore, input from probes at the RF Input connector can be analyzed in all R&S FSW applications, including applications that do not process I/Q data, and do not support the optional Analog Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B71).
Only active modular probes can be connected to the RF Input connector via the optional R&S RT-ZA9 adapter.
To connect an active probe to the RF Input
1. Connect the R&S RT-ZA9 adapter to the RF Input connector on the R&S FSW.
2. Connect the R&S RT-ZA9 adapter's USB cable to a USB connector on the R&S FSW.
3. Connect the probe to the adapter.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
356
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
4. In the "Input source" settings, select the "Input connector": "RF Probe".
Probes are automatically detected when you plug them into the R&S FSW. The detected information on the probe is displayed in the "Probes" tab of the "Input" dialog box.
To determine whether the probe has been connected properly and recognized by the R&S FSW, use the [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:STATe? remote control command.
Impedance and attenuation
The measured signal from the probe is attenuated internally by the probe's specific attenuation. For RF probes, the attenuation is compensated using a pre-defined "Probe on RF Input" transducer factor. This special transducer factor is automatically activated before the common RF data processing when you select "RF probe" as the input connector. The reference level is adjusted automatically.
A fixed impedance of 50 is used for all probes to convert voltage values to power levels.
MultiMode Function and Offset Compensation for Modular RF Probes
The R&S RT-ZM probe family features the MultiMode function which allows you to switch between single-ended, differential, and common mode measurements without reconnecting or resoldering the probe.
Four different input voltages can be measured with the MultiMode feature: P-Mode: (pos.) Single-ended input voltage (Vp)
Voltage between the positive input terminal and ground N-Mode: (neg.) Single-ended input voltage (Vn)
Voltage between the negative input terminal and ground DM-Mode: Differential mode input voltage (Vdm)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
357
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Voltage between the positive and negative input terminal
CM-Mode: Common mode input voltage (Vcm) Mean voltage between the positive and negative input terminal vs. ground
The R&S FSW supports all probe modes. The mode is configured in the Chapter 7.2.2.2, "Probe Settings", on page 366.
Offset compensation
The R&S RT-ZM probes feature a comprehensive offset compensation function. The compensation of DC components directly at the probe tip even in front of the active probe amplifier is possible with an extremely wide compensation range of �16 V (�24 V for P and N modes).
The offset compensation feature is available for every MultiMode setting:
MultiMode setting DM-Mode CM-Mode P-Mode
N-Mode
Offset compensation
Offset compen- Application sation range
Differential DC voltage �16 V
Probing single-ended signals, e.g. power rails with high DC component and small AC signal.
Common mode DC volt- �16 V age
Measurements of signals with high common mode levels, e.g. current measurements with a shunt resistor.
DC voltage at positive input terminal
�24 V
Measurement of single-ended AC signals with high superimposed DC component at the positive input terminal.
Note: The maximum voltage difference between the positive and negative input terminals is 16 V.
DC voltage at negative input terminal
�24 V
Measurement of single ended AC signals with high superimposed DC component at the negative input terminal.
Note: The maximum voltage difference between the positive and negative input terminals is 16 V.
If the offset for DM-mode or CM-mode is changed, the offsets for the P-mode and Nmode are adapted accordingly, and vice versa.
7.2.1.2 Receiving and Providing Trigger Signals
Using one of the "TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT" connectors of the R&S FSW, the R&S FSW can use a signal from an external device as a trigger to capture data. Alternatively, the internal trigger signal used by the R&S FSW can be output for use by
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
358
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
other connected devices. Using the same trigger on several devices is useful to synchronize the transmitted and received signals within a measurement. For details on the connectors see the R&S FSW "Getting Started" manual.
External trigger as input
If the trigger signal for the R&S FSW is provided by an external device, the trigger signal source must be connected to the R&S FSW and the trigger source must be defined as "External" in the R&S FSW.
External triggers with R&S FSW-B2000/B5000 When the input is provided from an R&S FSW with the B2000/B5000 option, the connected oscilloscope samples the data. Thus, triggering is also processed by the oscilloscope. The trigger source can be either the IF level or an external trigger, for example from the R&S FSW. In this case, the trigger source must be defined as "External CH3" (or "External Analog" for power splitting mode) on the R&S FSW.
Trigger output
The R&S FSW can provide output to another device either to pass on the internal trigger signal, or to indicate that the R&S FSW itself is ready to trigger.
The trigger signal can be output by the R&S FSW automatically, or manually by the user. If it is provided automatically, a high signal is output when the R&S FSW has triggered due to a sweep start ( "Device Triggered" ), or when the R&S FSW is ready to receive a trigger signal after a sweep start ( "Trigger Armed" ).
Manual triggering
If the trigger output signal is initiated manually, the length and level (high/low) of the trigger pulse is also user-definable. Note, however, that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output "Level" setting, e.g. for "Level" = "High", a constant high signal is output to the connector until the "Send Trigger" button is selected. Then, a low pulse is provided.
7.2.1.3 IF and Video Signal Output
The measured IF signal or displayed video signal (i.e. the filtered and detected IF signal) can be provided at the IF/VIDEO/DEMOD or "IF OUT 2 GHz/ IF OUT 5 GHz " output connector.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
359
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
The video output is a signal of 1 V. It can be used, for example, to control demodulated audio frequencies.
The IF output is a signal of the measured level at a specified frequency.
The "2ND IF" output is a signal with a bandwidth of 2 GHz at the frequency 2 GHz. This output is only available if the "IF OUT 2 GHz/ IF OUT 5 GHz " output connector is installed. (The availability of this connector depends on the instrument model.)
If the optional 2 GHz / 5 GHz bandwidth extension (R&S FSW-B2000/B5000) is active, the "IF OUT 2 GHz/ IF OUT 5 GHz " output connector is used to transfer the measured data from the R&S FSW to the connected oscilloscope. In this case, the "2ND IF" output is automatically deactivated. It is not reactivated when the B2000/B5000 option is switched off.
The frequency at which the active B5000 option transmits data to the oscilloscope via the "IF 5 GHz OUT" connector depends on the analysis bandwidth.
Restrictions
Note the following restrictions for data output:
IF and video output is only available in the time domain (zero span). For I/Q data, only IF output is available. IF output is not available if any of the following conditions apply:
� The optional Digital Baseband Interface is active (for input or output) � MSRA operating mode is active � MSRT operating mode is active � A wideband extension is used (hardware options R&S FSWB160--B512; used
automatically for bandwidths > 80 MHz; in this case select the "IF WIDE OUT" output, which uses the "IF WIDE OUTPUT" connector; for bandwidths larger than 512 MHz, IF output is not available.) A wideband extension is used (hardware options R&S FSWB160--B512; used automatically for bandwidths > 80 MHz; in this case select the "IF WIDE OUT" output, which uses the "IF WIDE OUTPUT" connector) � The sample rate is larger than 200 MHz (upsampling)
IF WIDE OUTPUT
For bandwidths > 80 MHz, but less than 512 MHz, the IF output is provided at the "IF WIDE OUTPUT" connector.
For bandwidths larger than 512 MHz, IF output is not available.
In this case, the IF output frequency cannot be defined manually, but is determined automatically depending on the center frequency. The currently used output frequency is indicated in the "IF Wide Out Frequency" field of the "Output" dialog box. For details on the used frequencies see the data sheet.
2ND IF Output
For instrument models R&S FSW26/43/50/67/85, the IF output can also be provided at the optional "IF OUT 2 GHz" output connector at a frequency of 2 GHz and with a
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
360
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
bandwidth of 2 GHz. The IF output can then be analyzed by a different instrument, for example an R&S�RTO oscilloscope.
For instrument model R&S FSW85, the IF output can also be provided at the optional "IF OUT 2 GHz" output connector at a frequency of 2 GHz and with a bandwidth of 2 GHz. The IF output can then be analyzed by a different instrument. However, consider the note on the 2 GHz / 5 GHz bandwidth extension option below.
If "2ND IF" output is activated, the measured values are no longer available on the display; thus, the trace data currently displayed on the R&S FSW becomes invalid. A message in the status bar indicates this situation. The message also indicates whether the sidebands of the IF spectrum output are in normal or inverted order compared to the RF signal, which depends on the used center frequency.
2 GHz / 5 GHz bandwidth extension option (R&S FSW-B2000/B5000) To analyze IF data with a bandwidth of 2 GHz / 5 GHz using an R&S�RTO oscilloscope, it is recommended that you use the fully integrated solution including alignment with the 2 GHz / 5 GHz bandwidth extension option (R&S FSW-B2000/B5000), rather than the "2ND IF" output solution. If the B2000/B5000 option is activated, the "2ND IF" output is automatically deactivated. It is not reactivated when the B2000/B5000 option is switched off. For details see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual.
Prerequisites
Note the following prerequisites for output to the "IF OUT 2 GHz" connector ( "2ND IF" ): Instrument model R&S FSW26/43/50/67/85; external mixers can be used Zero span mode, I/Q Analyzer, or optional application supporting B2000
(See the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual) Center frequency 5.5 GHz Optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension (R&S FSW-B2000) is not active
Prerequisites for output to the "IF OUT 2 GHz" connector ( "2ND IF" ): Instrument model R&S FSW85; external mixers cannot be used Zero span mode, I/Q Analyzer, or Analog Demodulation (R&S FSW-K7) application Center frequency 5.5 GHz Optional 5 GHz bandwidth extension (R&S FSW-B5000) is not active
7.2.2 Input Source Settings
Access: "Overview" > "Input" > "Input Source" The input source determines which data the R&S FSW will analyze.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
361
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
The default input source for the R&S FSW is "Radio Frequency" , i.e. the signal at the "RF Input" connector of the R&S FSW. If no additional options are installed, this is the only available input source. External mixers are not supported in MSRA/MSRT mode. Radio Frequency Input..........................................................................................362 Probe Settings.......................................................................................................366
7.2.2.1 Radio Frequency Input
Access: "Overview" > "Input/Frontend" > "Input Source" > "Radio Frequency"
RF Input Protection
The RF input connector of the R&S FSW must be protected against signal levels that exceed the ranges specified in the data sheet. Therefore, the R&S FSW is equipped with an overload protection mechanism for DC and signal frequencies up to 30 MHz. This mechanism becomes active as soon as the power at the input mixer exceeds the specified limit. It ensures that the connection between RF input and input mixer is cut off.
When the overload protection is activated, an error message is displayed in the status bar ( "INPUT OVLD" ), and a message box informs you that the RF Input was disconnected. Furthermore, a status bit (bit 3) in the STAT:QUES:POW status register is set. In this case you must decrease the level at the RF input connector and then close the message box. Then measurement is possible again. Reactivating the RF input is also possible via the remote command INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:PROTection:RESet.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
362
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Data Input and Output
Radio Frequency State .............................................................................................. 363 Input Coupling ............................................................................................................ 363 Impedance ................................................................................................................. 363 Direct Path ................................................................................................................. 364 High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz ........................................................................................364 YIG-Preselector ..........................................................................................................364 Preselector Adjust....................................................................................................... 365 Input Connector ..........................................................................................................365
Radio Frequency State Activates input from the "RF Input" connector. For R&S FSW85 models with two input connectors, you must define which input source is used for each measurement channel.
"Input 1"
1.00 mm RF input connector for frequencies up to 85 GHz (90 GHz with option R&S FSW-B90G)
"Input2"
1.85 mm RF input connector for frequencies up to 67 GHz
Remote command: INPut<ip>:SELect on page 1082 INPut<ip>:TYPE on page 1083
Input Coupling The RF input of the R&S FSW can be coupled by alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC).
AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal. This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument. Very low frequencies in the input signal may be distorted.
However, some specifications require DC coupling. In this case, you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually. For details, refer to the data sheet.
Remote command: INPut<ip>:COUPling on page 1079
Impedance The R&S FSW has an internal impedance of 50 . However, some applications use other impedance values. In order to match the impedance of an external application to the impedance of the R&S FSW, an impedance matching pad can be inserted at the input. If the type and impedance value of the used matching pad is known to the R&S FSW, it can convert the measured units accordingly so that the results are calculated correctly.
(See " Reference Level " on page 451).
This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface. Not all settings are supported by all R&S FSW applications.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
363
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
The impedance conversion does not affect the level of the output signals (such as IF, video, demod, digital I/Q output)
"50"
(Default:) no conversion takes place
"75"
The 50 input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 adapter of the selected "Pad Type": "Series-R" (default) or "MLP" (Minimum Loss Pad)
"User"
The 50 input impedance is transformed to a user-defined impedance value according to the selected "Pad Type": "Series-R" (default) or "MLP" (Minimum Loss Pad)
Remote command: INPut<ip>:IMPedance on page 1081 INPut<ip>:IMPedance:PTYPe on page 1082
Direct Path Enables or disables the use of the direct path for small frequencies.
In spectrum analyzers, passive analog mixers are used for the first conversion of the input signal. In such mixers, the LO signal is coupled into the IF path due to its limited isolation. The coupled LO signal becomes visible at the RF frequency 0 Hz. This effect is referred to as LO feedthrough.
To avoid the LO feedthrough the spectrum analyzer provides an alternative signal path to the A/D converter, referred to as the direct path. By default, the direct path is selected automatically for RF frequencies close to zero. However, this behavior can be disabled. If "Direct Path" is set to "Off" , the spectrum analyzer always uses the analog mixer path.
"Auto"
(Default) The direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to zero.
"Off"
The analog mixer path is always used.
Remote command: INPut<ip>:DPATh on page 1080
High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high-pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz. This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the analyzer to measure the harmonics for a DUT, for example.
This function requires an additional hardware option.
(Note: for RF input signals outside the specified range, the high-pass filter has no effect. For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards, the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG-preselector, if available.)
Remote command: INPut<ip>:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe] on page 1080
YIG-Preselector Enables or disables the YIG-preselector, if available on the R&S FSW.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
364
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
An internal YIG-preselector at the input of the R&S FSW ensures that image frequencies are rejected. However, this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth. To use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can disable the YIG-preselector at the input of the R&S FSW, which can lead to image-frequency display.
Note that the YIG-preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz. Therefore, switching the YIG-preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value.
In order to make use of the optional 90 GHz frequency extension (R&S FSW-B90G), the YIG-preselector must be disabled.
Note: For the following measurements, the YIG-Preselector is off by default (if available). I/Q Analyzer All secondary applications in MSRA operating mode Real-Time (and thus in all secondary applications in MSRT operating mode) Multi-Carrier Group Delay GSM VSA
Remote command: INPut<ip>:FILTer:YIG[:STATe] on page 1081
Preselector Adjust Activates or deactivates the preselector adjustment.
This function is only available for instrument modelsR&S FSW43/50/67/85, for frequency sweeps in the Spectrum application.
Generally, sweeps exceeding a certain span use different signal paths to measure the required spectrum. In order to minimize the hysteresis impact of the YIG preselector at the transition frequencies, you can activate this function. It is applied only when the YIG-preselector is active.
If activated, the R&S FSW automatically performs a short internal adjustment. If you change the frequency or span settings, the adjustment is repeated.
If activated, "PRADJ" is indicated in the window title bar.
Remote command: CALibration:PADJust[:STATe] on page 1078
Input Connector Determines which connector the input data for the measurement is taken from.
"RF"
(Default:) the RF INPUT connector
"RF Probe"
The RF INPUT connector with an adapter for a modular probe This setting is only available if a probe is connected to the RF INPUT connector.
"Baseband Input I"
The optional Baseband Input I connector This setting is only available if the optional Analog Baseband Interface is installed and active for input. It is not available for the R&S FSW67. For R&S FSW85 models with two input connectors, this setting is only available for "Input 1".
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
365
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Remote command: INPut<ip>:CONNector on page 1079
7.2.2.2 Probe Settings
Access: [INPUT / OUTPUT] > "Input Source Config" > "Probes" Data input for the measurement can be provided by probes if the optional Analog Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B71) is available or the R&S RT-ZA9 adapter is used.
For each possible probe connector (Baseband Input I, Baseband Input Q, RF), the detected type of probe, if any, is displayed.
For more information on using probes with an R&S FSW, see Chapter 7.2.1.1, "Using Probes", on page 353.
For general information on the R&S�RT probes, see the device manuals.
Name...........................................................................................................................366 Serial Number............................................................................................................. 367 Part Number................................................................................................................367 Type............................................................................................................................ 367 Mode........................................................................................................................... 367 Common Mode Offset / Diff. Mode Offset / P Offset / N Offset /................................. 367 Attenuation.................................................................................................................. 367 Microbutton Action ..................................................................................................... 368
Name Probe name
Remote command: [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:NAME? on page 1103
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
366
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Serial Number Serial number of the probe
Remote command: [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:ID:SRNumber? on page 1100
Part Number Rohde & Schwarz part number
Remote command: [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:ID:PARTnumber? on page 1100
Type Type of probe:
Single-ended Differential Active Modular
Remote command: [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:TYPE? on page 1105
Mode Mode for multi-mode modular probes. Determines which voltage is measured.
"DM-mode"
Voltage between the positive and negative input terminal
"CM-mode"
Mean voltage between the positive and negative input terminal vs. ground
"P-mode"
Voltage between the positive input terminal and ground
"N-mode"
Voltage between the negative input terminal and ground
Remote command: [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:PMODe on page 1103
Common Mode Offset / Diff. Mode Offset / P Offset / N Offset / Sets the offset for the probe, depending on the used mode (CM and DM mode both use the "Common Mode Offset"). The setting is only available if a differential (R&S RTZD) or modular (R&S RT-ZM) probe is connected to the R&S FSW.
If the probe is disconnected, the offset of the probe is reset to 0.0 V.
Note: If the offset for DM-mode or CM-mode is changed, the offsets for the P-mode and N-mode are adapted accordingly, and vice versa.
Remote command: [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:CMOFfset on page 1101 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:DMOFfset on page 1102 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:NMOFfset on page 1103 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:PMOFfset on page 1104
Attenuation Defines the attenuation applied to the input at the probe. This setting is only available for modular probes.
"10:1"
Attenuation by 20 dB
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
367
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
"2:1"
Attenuation by 6 dB
Remote command: [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:ATTRatio on page 1101
Microbutton Action Active Rohde & Schwarz probes (except for R&S RT-ZS10E) have a configurable microbutton on the probe head. By pressing this button, you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe.
Select the action that you want to start from the probe:
"Run Single" Starts one data acquisition.
"No Action"
Prevents unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the microbutton.
Remote command: [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:MODE on page 1102
7.2.3 Power Sensors
The R&S FSW can also analyze data from a connected power sensor. Basics on Power Sensors..................................................................................... 368 Power Sensor Settings..........................................................................................370 How to Work With a Power Sensor.......................................................................374
7.2.3.1 Basics on Power Sensors
For precise power measurement, up to 4 power sensors can be connected to the instrument via the power sensor interface (on the front panel) or the USB connectors. Both manual operation and remote control are supported.
For a detailed list of supported sensors, see the data sheet.
Power sensors can also be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level, e.g. from a signal generator (see "Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Trigger" on page 369).
Signal source
Power sensor
Signal analyzer
Figure 7-2: Power sensor support � standard test setup
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
368
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Using the power sensor with several applications The power sensor cannot be used from the R&S FSW firmware and the R&S Power Viewer Plus (virtual power meter for displaying results of the R&S NRP power sensors) simultaneously.
Result display
The results of the power sensor measurements are displayed in the marker table. For each power sensor, a row is inserted. The sensor index is indicated in the "Type" column.
Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Trigger
Power sensors can be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level, e.g. from a signal generator. For a list of supported power sensors see the data sheet.
With the R&S FSW, the power sensors can be connected to the "Power Sensor" interface directly, and no further cables are required. They can then be configured as an external power sensor trigger.
Figure 7-3: Connecting a power sensor using the POWER SENSOR interface
The R&S FSW receives an external trigger signal when the defined trigger level is measured by the power sensor. Power measurement results are provided as usual.
The "Gate Mode" Level is not supported for R&S power sensors. The signal sent by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded, rather than a time period. However, only time periods can be used for gating in level mode. Thus, the trigger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement; the measurement cannot be completed. For details on gating see Chapter 7.6.2.1, "Gated Measurements", on page 487.
For details see "How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External (PSE) Trigger" on page 376.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
369
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
7.2.3.2 Power Sensor Settings
Access: "Overview" > "Input" > "Power Sensor" tab Each sensor is configured on a separate tab.
State ...........................................................................................................................371 Continuous Value Update .......................................................................................... 371 Select ......................................................................................................................... 371 Zeroing Power Sensor ............................................................................................... 371 Frequency Manual ..................................................................................................... 372 Frequency Coupling ................................................................................................... 372 Unit/Scale ...................................................................................................................372 Meas Time/Average ................................................................................................... 372 Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas -> Ref ............................. 372 Reference Value .........................................................................................................372 Use Ref Level Offset .................................................................................................. 373 Sensor Level Offset.....................................................................................................373 Average Count ( Number of Readings )......................................................................373 Duty Cycle ..................................................................................................................373 Using the power sensor as an external trigger ...........................................................373
External Trigger Level ..................................................................................374 Hysteresis .................................................................................................... 374 Trigger Holdoff ............................................................................................. 374 Drop-Out Time ............................................................................................. 374 Slope ............................................................................................................374
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
370
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Data Input and Output
State Switches the power measurement for all power sensors on or off. Note that in addition to this general setting, each power sensor can be activated or deactivated individually by the Select setting on each tab. However, the general setting overrides the individual settings.
Remote command: [SENSe:]PMETer<p>[:STATe] on page 1124
Continuous Value Update If activated, the power sensor data is updated continuously during a sweep with a long sweep time, and even after a single sweep has completed.
This function cannot be activated for individual sensors.
If the power sensor is being used as a trigger (see " Using the power sensor as an external trigger " on page 373), continuous update is not possible; this setting is ignored.
Remote command: [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:UPDate[:STATe] on page 1124
Select Selects the individual power sensor for usage if power measurement is generally activated ( State function).
The detected serial numbers of the power sensors connected to the instrument are provided in a selection list. For each of the four available power sensor indexes ( "Power Sensor 1" ... "Power Sensor 4" ), which correspond to the tabs in the configuration dialog, one of the detected serial numbers can be assigned. The physical sensor is thus assigned to the configuration setting for the selected power sensor index.
By default, serial numbers not yet assigned are automatically assigned to the next free power sensor index for which "Auto Assignment" is selected.
Alternatively, you can assign the sensors manually by deactivating the "Auto" option and selecting a serial number from the list.
Remote command: [SENSe:]PMETer<p>[:STATe] on page 1124 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<p>:DEFine on page 1118 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<p>:CONFigure:AUTO[:STATe] on page 1117 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<p>:COUNt? on page 1117
Zeroing Power Sensor Starts zeroing of the power sensor.
For details on the zeroing process refer to "How to Zero the Power Sensor" on page 376.
Remote command: CALibration:PMETer<p>:ZERO:AUTO ONCE on page 1119
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
371
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Frequency Manual Defines the frequency of the signal to be measured. The power sensor has a memory with frequency-dependent correction factors. This allows extreme accuracy for signals of a known frequency.
Remote command: [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:FREQuency on page 1121
Frequency Coupling Selects the coupling option. The frequency can be coupled automatically to the center frequency of the instrument or to the frequency of marker 1.
Remote command: [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:FREQuency:LINK on page 1122
Unit/Scale Selects the unit with which the measured power is to be displayed. Available units are dBm, dB, W and %.
If dB or % is selected, the display is relative to the reference value that is defined with either the "Meas -> Ref" setting or the "Reference Value" setting.
Remote command: UNIT<n>:PMETer<p>:POWer on page 1125 UNIT<n>:PMETer<p>:POWer:RATio on page 1125
Meas Time/Average Selects the measurement time or switches to manual averaging mode. In general, results are more precise with longer measurement times. The following settings are recommended for different signal types to obtain stable and precise results:
"Short"
Stationary signals with high power (> -40dBm), because they require only a short measurement time and short measurement time provides the highest repetition rates.
"Normal"
Signals with lower power or modulated signals
"Long"
Signals at the lower end of the measurement range (<-50 dBm) or Signals with lower power to minimize the influence of noise
"Manual"
Manual averaging mode. The average count is set with the Average Count ( Number of Readings ) setting.
Remote command: [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:MTIMe on page 1122 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:MTIMe:AVERage[:STATe] on page 1123
Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas -> Ref Sets the currently measured power as a reference value for the relative display. The reference value can also be set manually via the Reference Value setting.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:PMETer<p>:RELative[:MAGNitude]:AUTO ONCE on page 1119
Reference Value Defines the reference value in dBm used for relative power meter measurements.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
372
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Data Input and Output
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:PMETer<p>:RELative[:MAGNitude] on page 1119
Use Ref Level Offset If activated, takes the reference level offset defined for the analyzer into account for the measured power (see " Shifting the Display ( Offset )" on page 452). If deactivated, takes the Sensor Level Offset into account. Remote command: [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:ROFFset[:STATe] on page 1123
Sensor Level Offset Takes the specified offset into account for the measured power. Only available if Use Ref Level Offset is disabled. Remote command: [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:SOFFset on page 1124
Average Count ( Number of Readings ) Defines the number of readings (averages) to be performed after a single sweep has been started. This setting is only available if manual averaging is selected ( Meas Time/Average setting). The values for the average count range from 0 to 256 in binary steps (1, 2, 4, 8, ...). For average count = 0 or 1, one reading is performed. The general averaging and sweep count for the trace are independent from this setting. Results become more stable with extended average, particularly if signals with low power are measured. This setting can be used to minimize the influence of noise in the power sensor measurement. Remote command: [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:MTIMe:AVERage:COUNt on page 1122
Duty Cycle Sets the duty cycle to a percent value for the correction of pulse-modulated signals and activates the duty cycle correction. With the correction activated, the sensor calculates the signal pulse power from this value and the mean power. Remote command: [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:DCYCle[:STATe] on page 1121 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:DCYCle:VALue on page 1121
Using the power sensor as an external trigger If activated, the power sensor creates a trigger signal when a power higher than the defined "External Trigger Level" is measured. This trigger signal can be used as an external power trigger by the R&S FSW. This setting is only available in conjunction with a compatible power sensor. For details on using a power sensor as an external trigger, see "Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Trigger" on page 369.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
373
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Remote command: [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger[:STATe] on page 1127 TRIG:SOUR PSE, see TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1160
External Trigger Level Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the trigger level for the power sensor trigger. For details on supported trigger levels, see the data sheet. Remote command: [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:LEVel on page 1126
Hysteresis Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs. Setting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level. Remote command: [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:HYSTeresis on page 1126
Trigger Holdoff Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the minimum time (in seconds) that must pass between two trigger events. Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored. Remote command: [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:HOLDoff on page 1126
Drop-Out Time Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again.
Slope Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it. Remote command: [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:SLOPe on page 1127
7.2.3.3 How to Work With a Power Sensor
The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to set up a power sensor. For details on individual functions and settings see Chapter 7.2.3.2, "Power Sensor Settings", on page 370.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 13.7.1.5, "Working with Power Sensors", on page 1117.
Power sensors can also be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level, e.g. from a signal generator. This is described in "How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External (PSE) Trigger" on page 376.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
374
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
How to Set Up a Power Sensor
Up to 4 external power sensors can be configured separately and used for precise power measurement. All power sensors can be activated and deactivated individually.
The following procedure describes in detail how to configure and activate power sensors.
1. To display the "Power Sensor" tab of the "Input" dialog box, do one of the following: Select "Input" from the "Overview" . Select the [INPUT/OUTPUT] key and then the "Power Sensor Config" softkey.
2. Select the tab for the power sensor index you want to configure, e.g. "Power Sensor 1" .
3. Press "Select" to analyze the power sensor data according to the current configuration when power measurement is activated.
4. From the selection list with serial numbers of connected power sensors, select the sensor you want to configure. To have newly connected power sensors assigned to a tab automatically (default), select "Auto" .
5. Define the frequency of the signal whose power you want to measure. a) To define the frequency manually, select "Frequency Manual" and enter a frequency. b) To determine the frequency automatically, select "Frequency Coupling" and then either "Center" , to use the center frequency, or "Marker" , to use the frequency defined by marker 1.
6. Select the unit for the power result display.
7. Select the measurement time for which the average is calculated, or define the number of readings to average. To define the number of readings to be taken into account manually, select "Manual" and enter the number in the "Number of Readings" field.
8. To activate the duty cycle correction, select "DutyCycle" and enter a percentage as the correction value.
9. If you selected "dB" or "%" as units (relative display), define a reference value: a) To set the currently measured power as a reference value, press the "Meas -> Ref" button. b) Alternatively, enter a value manually in the "Reference Value" field. c) Optionally, select the "Use Ref Level Offset" option to take the reference level offset set for the analyzer into account for the measured power.
10. To use the power sensor as an external power trigger, select the "External Power Trigger" option and define the trigger settings. For details see "How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External (PSE) Trigger" on page 376.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
375
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
11. If necessary, repeat steps 3-10 for another power sensor.
12. Set the "Power Sensor State" at the top of the "Power Sensor" tab to "On" to activate power measurement for the selected power sensors. The results of the power measurement are displayed in the marker table (Function: "Sensor <1...4>" ).
How to Zero the Power Sensor
1. To display the "Power Sensor" tab of the "Input" dialog box, do one of the following: Select "Input" from the "Overview" . Select the [INPUT/OUTPUT] key and then the "Power Sensor Config" softkey.
2. Select the tab that is assigned to the power sensor you want to zero.
3. Press the "Zeroing Power Sensor" button. A dialog box is displayed that prompts you to disconnect all signals from the input of the power sensor.
4. Disconnect all signals sending input to the power sensor and press [ENTER] to continue.
5. Wait until zeroing is complete. A corresponding message is displayed.
How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External (PSE) Trigger The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to configure a power sensor to be used as an external power sensor trigger.
To configure a power sensor as an external power sensor (PSE) trigger 1. Connect a compatible power sensor to the "Power Sensor" interface on the front
panel of the R&S FSW. (For details on supported sensors see "Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Trigger" on page 369).
2. Set up the power sensor as described in "How to Set Up a Power Sensor" on page 375.
3. In the "Power Sensor" tab of the "Input" dialog box, select the "External Power Trigger" option.
4. Enter the power level at which a trigger signal is to be generated ( "External Trigger Level" ) and the other trigger settings for the power sensor trigger.
5. Press the [TRIG] key and then select "Trigger/ Gate Config" .
6. In the "Trigger And Gate" dialog box, select "Signal Source" = "PSE" . The R&S FSW is configured to trigger when the defined conditions for the power sensor occur. Power measurement results are provided as usual.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
376
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
7.2.4 Optional External Generator Control
If the R&S FSW optional External Generator Control is installed, you can operate various commercially available generators as an external generator with the R&S FSW. Thus, scalar network analysis with the R&S FSW is possible.
About External Generator Control.........................................................................377 Basics on External Generator Control...................................................................377 External Generator Control Settings..................................................................... 389 How to Work With External Generator Control..................................................... 397 Measurement Example: Calibration with an External Generator.......................... 400
7.2.4.1 About External Generator Control
A common measurement setup includes a signal generator, a device under test (DUT), and a signal and spectrum analyzer, for example the R&S FSW. In this setup, the signal analyzer can control which signal the generator is to send, which is in turn measured by the analyzer. This process is referred to as external generator control. The generator in this setup is referred to as a tracking generator.
A measurement with a tracking generator is useful to measure any effects on the power level caused by the cables and connectors from the signal generator and the signal analyzer in advance. The known effects can then be removed from the measurement results in order to obtain accurate information on the DUT.
7.2.4.2 Basics on External Generator Control
Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used for external generator control is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings.
External generator control is only available in the following applications. Spectrum Analyzer I/Q Analyzer Analog Demodulation Noise Figure Measurements
External Generator Connections...........................................................................378 Overview of Supported Generators.......................................................................380 Generator Setup Files........................................................................................... 382 Calibration Mechanism..........................................................................................382 Normalization........................................................................................................ 383 Reference Trace, Reference Line and Reference Level.......................................385 Coupling the Frequencies..................................................................................... 385 Displayed Information and Errors..........................................................................387
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
377
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
External Generator Connections The external generator is controlled either via a LAN connection or via the EXT. GEN. CONTROL GPIB interface of the R&S FSW supplied with the option. For more information on configuring interfaces see Chapter 12.1.1, "Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols", on page 772.
TTL synchronization In addition, TTL synchronization can be used with some Rohde & Schwarz generators connected via GPIB. The TTL interface is included in the AUX control connector of the External Generator Control option.
Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control, because the frequency stepping of the R&S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator. For details see "Coupling the Frequencies" on page 385.
In Figure 7-4 the TTL connection is illustrated using an R&S SMU generator, for example.
R&S SMU rear
Analyzer rear
BNC Blank
BNC Trigger
Figure 7-4: TTL connection for an R&S SMU generator
In Figure 7-5, the connection for an R&S SMW is shown.
Signal generator rear panel
Signal analyzer rear panel
BNC Trigger
BNC Blank
Figure 7-5: TTL connection for an R&S SMW generator
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
378
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Signal generator rear panel
BNC Trigger
Signal analyzer rear panel
BNC Blank
Figure 7-6: TTL connection for an R&S SMA100B generator
The external generator can be used to calibrate the data source by performing either transmission or reflection measurements.
Transmission Measurement This measurement yields the transmission characteristics of a two-port network. The external generator is used as a signal source. It is connected to the input connector of the DUT. The input of the R&S FSW is fed from the output of the DUT. A calibration can be carried out to compensate for the effects of the test setup (e.g. frequency response of connecting cables).
Figure 7-7: Test setup for transmission measurement
Reflection Measurement Scalar reflection measurements can be carried out using a reflection-coefficient measurement bridge.
Figure 7-8: Test setup for reflection measurement
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
379
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Generated signal input
In order to use the functions of the external generator, an appropriate generator must be connected and configured correctly. In particular, the generator output must be connected to the RF input of the R&S FSW.
External reference frequency
In order to enhance measurement accuracy, a common reference frequency should be used for both the R&S FSW and the generator. If no independent 10 MHz reference frequency is available, it is recommended that you connect the reference output of the generator with the reference input of the R&S FSW and that you enable usage of the external reference on the R&S FSW via "SETUP" > "Reference" > "External Reference".
For more information on external references see Chapter 11.6, "Reference Frequency Settings", on page 737.
Connection errors
If no external generator is connected, if the connection address is not correct, or the generator is not ready for operation, an error message is displayed (e.g."Ext. Generator TCPIP Handshake Error!", see "Displayed Information and Errors" on page 387).
Overview of Supported Generators
Generator type
Model Driver file
TTL sup- Generator type port
SGS100A
6 GHz SGS100A6
-
SMJ
12 GHz SGS100A12
-
SGT100A
3 GHz SGT100A3
-
SML
6 GHz SGT100A6
-
SMA01A
3 GHz
SMA01A 1)
X
SMA100A
3 GHz SMA100A3
X
SMP
6 GHz SMA100A6
X
SMA100B
3 GHz SMA100B3
X
6 GHz SMA100B6
X
12 GHz SMA100B12
X
SMR
20 GHz SMA100B20
X
32 GHz SMA100B32
X
40 GHz SMA100B40
X
1) Requires firmware version V2.10.x or later on the signal generator 2) Requires firmware version V1.10.x or later on the signal generator 3) Requires the option SMR-B11 on the signal generator 4) Requires firmware version V3.20.200 or later on the signal generator
Model Driver file
3 GHz 6 GHz 1 GHz 2 GHz 3 GHz 2 GHz 3 GHz 4 GHz 22 GHz 20 GHz 20 GHz 27 GHz 27 GHz
SMJ03 SMJ06 SML01 SML02 SML03 SMP02 SMP03 SMP04 SMP22 SMR20 SMR20B11 3) SMR27 SMR27B11 3)
TTL support X X X X X X X X X
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
380
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Generator type SMB100A
SMB100B SMBV100A SMBV100B SMC100A SMCV100B SME
Model Driver file
50 GHz 67 GHz 1 GHz 12 GHz 2 GHz 20 GHz 3 GHz 40 GHz 1 GHz 3 GHz 6 GHz 3 GHz 6 GHz 3 GHz 6 GHz 1 GHz 3 GHz 3 GHz 6 GHz 7 GHz 2 GHz 3 GHz 6 GHz
SMA100B50 SMA100B67 SMB100A1 SMB100A12 SMB100A2 SMB100A20 SMB100A3 SMB100A40 SMB100B1 SMB100B3 SMB100B6 SMBV100A3 SMBV100A6 SMBV100B3 SMBV100B6 SMC100A1 SMC100A3 SMCV100B3 SMCV100B6 SMCV100B7 SME02 SME03 SME06
TTL sup- Generator type port
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SMT
X
X
X
SMU
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
SMV
X
SMW
X
X
SMF100A
43.5 GHz SMF100A
X
SMF
22 GHz SMF22
X
22 GHz SMF22B2
X
43 GHz SMF43
X
43 GHz SMF43B2
X
SMX
1) Requires firmware version V2.10.x or later on the signal generator 2) Requires firmware version V1.10.x or later on the signal generator 3) Requires the option SMR-B11 on the signal generator 4) Requires firmware version V3.20.200 or later on the signal generator
Model Driver file
30 GHz SMR30
30 GHz SMR30B11 3)
40 GHz SMR40
40 GHz SMR40B11 3)
50 GHz SMR50
50 GHz SMR50B11 3)
60 GHz SMR60
60 GHz SMR60B11 3)
2 GHz SMT02
3 GHz SMT03
6 GHz SMT06
2 GHz SMU02
2 GHz
SMU02B31 2)
3 GHz
SMU03 2)
3 GHz
SMU03B31 2)
4 GHz
SMU04 2)
4 GHz
SMU04B31 2)
6 GHz
SMU06 2)
6 GHz
SMU06B31 2)
3 GHz SMV03
3 GHz SMW03
6 GHz SMW06
12.75 GH SMW12 z
20 GHz SMW20
31.8 GHz SMW31
40 GHz SMW40
44 GHz SMW44
all
SMX
TTL support X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X4) X4) X4)
X4) X4) X4) X -
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
381
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Generator type
Model Driver file
TTL sup- Generator type port
SMG
all
SMG
-
SMY
SMGL
all
SMGL
-
SMGU
all
SMGU
-
SMH
all
SMH
-
SMHU
SMHU
-
SMIQ
2 GHz SMIQ02
X
2 GHz SMIQ02B
X
2 GHz SMIQ02E
-
3 GHz SMIQ03
X
3 GHz SMIQ03B
X
3 GHz SMIQ03E
-
4 GHz SMIQ04B
X
6 GHz SMIQ06B
X
1) Requires firmware version V2.10.x or later on the signal generator 2) Requires firmware version V1.10.x or later on the signal generator 3) Requires the option SMR-B11 on the signal generator 4) Requires firmware version V3.20.200 or later on the signal generator
Model Driver file
1 GHz 2 GHz
SMY01 SMY02
TTL support
-
-
Generator Setup Files
For each signal generator type to be controlled by the R&S FSW a generator setup file must be configured and stored on the R&S FSW. The setup file defines the frequency and power ranges supported by the generator, as well as information required for communication. For the signal generators listed in "Overview of Supported Generators" on page 380, default setup files are provided. If necessary, these files can be edited or duplicated for varying measurement setups or other instruments.
The existing setup files can be displayed in an editor in read-only mode directly from the "External Generator" configuration dialog box. From there, they can be edited and stored under a different name, and are then available on the R&S FSW.
(For details see "To define a new generator setup file" on page 398).
Calibration Mechanism
A common measurement setup includes a signal generator, a device under test (DUT), and a signal and spectrum analyzer. Therefore, it is useful to measure the attenuation or gain caused by the cables and connectors from the signal generator and the signal analyzer in advance. The known level offsets can then be removed from the measurement results in order to obtain accurate information on the DUT.
Calculating the difference between the currently measured power and a reference trace is referred to as calibration. Thus, the measurement results from the controlled
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
382
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Data Input and Output
external generator - including the inherent distortions - can be used as a reference trace to calibrate the measurement setup.
The inherent frequency and power level distortions can be determined by connecting the R&S FSW to the signal generator. The R&S FSW sends a predefined list of frequencies to the signal generator (see also "Coupling the Frequencies" on page 385). The signal generator then sends a signal with the specified level at each frequency in the predefined list. The R&S FSW measures the signal and determines the level offsets to the expected values.
Saving calibration results
A reference dataset for the calibration results is stored internally as a table of value pairs (frequency/level), one for each sweep point. The measured offsets can then be used as calibration factors for subsequent measurement results. The calibration data can also be stored permanently with the instrument settings using the "Save" function in the toolbar.
The calibration can be performed using either transmission or reflection measurements. The selected type of measurement used to determine the reference trace is included in the reference dataset.
Normalization
Once the measurement setup has been calibrated and the reference trace is available, subsequent measurement results can be corrected according to the calibration factors, if necessary. This is done by subtracting the reference trace from the measurement results. This process is referred to as normalization and can be activated or deactivated as required. If normalization is activated, "NOR" is displayed in the channel bar, next to the indication that an external generator is being used ("Ext.Gen").The normalized trace from the calibration sweep is a constant 0 dB line, as <calibration trace> <reference trace> = 0.
As long as the same settings are used for measurement as for calibration, the normalized measurement results should not contain any inherent frequency or power distortions. Thus, the measured DUT values are very accurate.
Approximate normalization
As soon as any of the calibration measurement settings are changed, the stored reference trace will no longer be identical to the new measurement results. However, if the measurement settings do not deviate too much, the measurement results can still be normalized approximately using the stored reference trace. This is indicated by the "APX" label in the channel bar (instead of "NOR").
This is the case if one or more of the following values deviate from the calibration settings: Coupling (RBW, VBW, SWT) Reference level, RF attenuation Start or stop frequency Output level of external generator Detector (max. peak, min. peak, sample, etc.)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
383
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Data Input and Output
Frequency deviation at a maximum of 1001 points within the set sweep limits (corresponds to a doubling of the span)
Differences in level settings between the reference trace and the current instrument settings are taken into account automatically. If the span is reduced, a linear interpolation of the intermediate values is applied. If the span increases, the values at the left or right border of the reference dataset are extrapolated to the current start or stop frequency, i.e. the reference dataset is extended by constant values.
Thus, the instrument settings can be changed in a wide area without giving up normalization. This reduces the necessity to carry out a new normalization to a minimum.
The normalized trace in the display
The normalized reference trace is also displayed in the spectrum diagram, by default at the top of the diagram (= 100% of the window height). It is indicated by a red line labeled "NOR", followed by the current reference value. However, it can be shifted vertically to reflect an attenuation or gain caused by the measured DUT (see also "Shifting the reference line (and normalized trace)" on page 385).
Restoring the calibration settings
If the measurement settings no longer match the instrument settings with which the calibration was performed (indicated by the "APX" or no label next to "Ext.TG" in the channel bar), you can restore the calibration settings, which are stored with the reference dataset on the R&S FSW.
Storing the normalized reference trace as a transducer factor
The (inverse) normalized reference trace can also be stored as a transducer factor for use in other R&S FSW applications that do not support external generator control. The normalized trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix .trd under c:\r_s\instr\trd. The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between the start and stop frequency.
This is useful, for example, to determine the effects of a particular device component and then remove these effects from a subsequent measurement which includes this component.
For an example see "How to Remove the Effects of a Particular Component from Measurement Results Using Calibration" on page 399.
Note that the normalized measurement data is stored, not the original reference trace! Thus, if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration, without changing any settings, the transducer factor will be 0 dB for the entire span (by definition of the normalized trace).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
384
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Reference Trace, Reference Line and Reference Level
Reference trace
The calibration results are stored internally on the R&S FSW as a reference trace. For each measured sweep point the offset to the expected values is determined. If normalization is activated, the offsets in the reference trace are removed from the current measurement results to compensate for the inherent distortions.
Reference line
The reference line is defined by the Reference Value and Reference Position in the "External Generator" > "Source Calibration" settings. It is similar to the Reference Level defined in the "Amplitude" settings. However, as opposed to the reference level, this reference line only affects the y-axis scaling in the diagram, it has no effect on the expected input power level or the hardware settings.
The reference line determines the range and the scaling of the y-axis, just as the reference level does.
The normalized reference trace (0 dB directly after calibration) is displayed on this reference line, indicated by a red line in the diagram. By default, the reference line is displayed at the top of the diagram. If you shift the reference line, the normalized trace is shifted, as well.
Shifting the reference line (and normalized trace)
You can shift the reference line - and thus the normalized trace - in the result display by changing the Reference Position or the Reference Value .
If the DUT inserts a gain or an attenuation in the measurement, this effect can be reflected in the result display on the R&S FSW. To reflect a power offset in the measurement trace, change the Reference Value .
For a detailed example see Chapter 7.2.4.5, "Measurement Example: Calibration with an External Generator", on page 400.
Coupling the Frequencies
As described in "Normalization" on page 383, normalized measurement results are very accurate as long as the same settings are used as for calibration. Although approximate normalization is possible, it is important to consider the required frequencies for calibration in advance. The frequencies and levels supported by the connected signal generator are provided for reference with the interface configuration.
Two different methods are available to define the frequencies for calibration, that is to couple the frequencies of the R&S FSW with those of the signal generator:
Manual coupling: a single frequency is defined Automatic coupling: a series of frequencies is defined (one for each sweep
point), based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R&S FSW; the RF frequency range covers the currently defined span of the R&S FSW (unless limited by the range of the signal generator)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
385
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Automatic coupling
If automatic coupling is used, the output frequency of the generator (source frequency) is calculated as follows:
FGenerator
FAnalyzer
Numerator Denomin ator
FOffset
Equation 7-1: Output frequency of the generator
Where:
FGenerator = output frequency of the generator
FAnalyzer = current frequency at the RF input of the R&S FSW
Numerator = multiplication factor for FAnalyzer
Denominator = division factor for FAnalyzer
FOffset = frequency offset for FAnalyzer, for example for frequency-converting measurements or harmonics measurements
The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator. The default setting is 0 Hz. Offsets other than 0 Hz are indicated by the "FRQ" label in the channel bar (see also "Displayed Information and Errors" on page 387).
Swept frequency range
The FAnalyzer values for the calibration sweep start with the start frequency and end with the stop frequency defined in the "Frequency" settings of the R&S FSW. The resulting output frequencies ( Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop ) are displayed in "External Generator" > "Measurement Configuration" for reference.
If the resulting frequency range exceeds the allowed ranges of the signal generator, an error message is displayed (see "Displayed Information and Errors" on page 387) and the Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop values are corrected to comply with the range limits.
The calibration sweep nevertheless covers the entire span defined by the R&S FSW; however, no input is received from the generator outside the generator's defined limits.
TTL synchronization
Some Rohde & Schwarz signal generators support TTL synchronization when connected via GPIB. The TTL interface is included in the AUX control connector of the External Generator Control option.
When pure GPIB connections are used between the R&S FSW and the signal generator, the R&S FSW sets the generator frequency for each frequency point individually via GPIB, and only when the setting procedure is finished, the R&S FSW can measure the next sweep point.
For generators with a TTL interface, the R&S FSW sends a list of the frequencies to be set to the generator before the beginning of the first sweep. Then the R&S FSW starts
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
386
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
the sweep and the next frequency point is selected by both the R&S FSW and the generator using the TTL handshake line "TRIGGER". The R&S FSW can only measure a value when the generator signals the end of the setting procedure via the "BLANK" signal. Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates, because the frequency stepping of the R&S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator.
Reverse sweep
The frequency offset for automatic coupling can be used to sweep in the reverse direction. To do so, define a negative offset in the external generator measurement configuration. (Note that the frequency is defined as the unsigned value of the equation, thus a negative frequency is not possible.)
Example: Example for reverse sweep FAnalyzerStart= 100 MHz FAnalyzerStop = 200 MHz FOffset = -300 MHz Numerator = Denominator = 1 FGeneratorStart = 200 MHz FGeneratorStop = 100 MHz
If the offset is adjusted so that the sweep of the generator crosses the minimum generator frequency, a message is displayed in the status bar ("Reverse Sweep via min. Ext. Generator Frequency!").
Example: Example for reverse sweep via minimum frequency FAnalyzerStart= 100 MHz FAnalyzerStop = 200 MHz FOffset = -150 MHz Fmin = 20 MHz Numerator = Denominator = 1 FGeneratorStart = 50 MHz FGeneratorStop = 50 MHz via Fmin
Displayed Information and Errors
Channel bar
If external generator control is active, some additional information is displayed in the channel bar.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
387
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Label EXT TG: <source power> LVL FRQ NOR
APX (approximation)
-
Description
External generator active; signal sent with <source power> level
Power Offset (see " Source Offset " on page 392
Frequency Offset (see "(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset)" on page 393
Normalization on; No difference between reference setting and measurement
Normalization on; Deviation from the reference setting occurs
Aborted normalization or no calibration performed yet
Error and status messages The following status and error messages may occur during external generator control.
Message "Ext. Generator GPIB Handshake Error!" / "Ext. Generator TCPIP Handshake Error!" / "Ext. Generator TTL Handshake Error!" "Ext. Generator Limits Exceeded!"
"Reverse Sweep via min. Ext. Generator Frequency!"
"Ext. Generator File Syntax Error!"
"Ext. Generator Command Error!"
"Ext. Generator Visa Error!"
Description
Connection to the generator is not possible, e.g. due to a cable damage or loose connection or wrong address.
The allowed frequency or power ranges for the generator were exceeded.
Reverse sweep is performed; frequencies are reduced to the minimum frequency, then increased again; see "Reverse sweep" on page 387
Syntax error in the generator setup file (see "Generator Setup Files" on page 382
Missing or wrong command in the generator setup file (see "Generator Setup Files" on page 382
Error with Visa driver provided with installation (very unlikely)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
388
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Overloading At a reference level of -10 dBm and at an external generator output level of the same value, the R&S FSW operates without overrange reserve. That means the R&S FSW is in danger of being overloaded if a signal is applied whose amplitude is higher than the reference line. In this case, either the message "RF OVLD" for overload or "OVLD" for exceeded display range (clipping of the trace at the upper diagram border = overrange) is displayed in the status line. Overloading can be avoided as follows: Reducing the output level of the external generator (" Source Power " on page 392
in "External Generator > Measurement Configuration") Increasing the reference level ( Reference Level in the "Amplitude" menu)
7.2.4.3 External Generator Control Settings
Access: [INPUT/OUPUT] > "External Generator Config"
The "External Generator" settings are available if the R&S FSW External Generator Control option is installed. For each measurement channel, you can configure one external generator. To switch between different configurations, define multiple measurement channels.
For more information on external generator control, see Chapter 7.2.4.2, "Basics on External Generator Control", on page 377.
Interface Configuration Settings............................................................................389 Measurement Settings.......................................................................................... 391 Source Calibration Functions................................................................................ 394
Interface Configuration Settings
Access: [INPUT/OUPUT] > "External Generator Config" > "Interface Configuration" tab
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
389
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Data Input and Output
For more information on configuring interfaces, see Chapter 12.1.1, "Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols", on page 772.
Generator Type .......................................................................................................... 390 Interface ..................................................................................................................... 390 TTL Handshake ..........................................................................................................390 GPIB Address / TCPIP Address / Computer Name ................................................... 390 Reference ...................................................................................................................391 Edit Generator Setup File ...........................................................................................391 Frequency Min / Frequency Max ................................................................................391 Level Min / Level Max ................................................................................................ 391
Generator Type Selects the generator type and thus defines the generator setup file to use. For an overview of supported generators, see "Overview of Supported Generators" on page 380. For information on generator setup files, see "Generator Setup Files" on page 382. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:TYPE on page 1112
Interface Type of interface connection used. For details on which signal generators support which interfaces, see the documentation of the corresponding signal generator. GPIB TCP/IP Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:INTerface on page 1111
TTL Handshake If available for the specified generator type, this option activates TTL synchronization via handshake. Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates, because the frequency stepping of the R&S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator. For more information on TTL synchronization, see "TTL synchronization" on page 386. For an overview of which generators support TTL synchronization see "Overview of Supported Generators" on page 380. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:LINK on page 1111
GPIB Address / TCPIP Address / Computer Name For LAN connections: TCP/IP address of the signal generator For GPIB connections: GPIB address of the signal generator.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
390
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess on page 1110 SYSTem:COMMunicate:TCPip:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess on page 1112
Reference Selects the internal R&S FSW or an external frequency reference to synchronize the R&S FSW with the generator (default: internal). Remote command: SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:ROSCillator[:SOURce] on page 1110
Edit Generator Setup File Displays the setup file for the currently selected Generator Type in read-only mode in an editor. Although the existing setup files are displayed in read-only mode in the editor, they can be saved under a different name (using "File > SaveAs"). Be careful, however, to adhere to the required syntax and commands. Errors are only detected and displayed when you try to use the new generator (see also "Displayed Information and Errors" on page 387). For details, see "Generator Setup Files" on page 382.
Frequency Min / Frequency Max For reference only: Lower and upper frequency limit for the generator.
Level Min / Level Max For reference only: Lower and upper power limit for the generator.
Measurement Settings
Access: [INPUT/OUPUT] > "External Generator Config" > "Measurement Configuration" tab
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
391
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Source State .............................................................................................................. 392 Source Power .............................................................................................................392 Source Offset ............................................................................................................. 392 Source Frequency Coupling........................................................................................393 (Manual) Source Frequency........................................................................................393 (Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset)............................... 393 Result Frequency Start .............................................................................................. 394 Result Frequency Stop ...............................................................................................394
Source State Activates or deactivates control of an external generator.
Remote command: SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe] on page 1109
Source Power The output power of the external generator. The default output power is -20 dBm. The range is specified in the data sheet.
Remote command: SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:POWer[:LEVel] on page 1109
Source Offset Constant level offset for the external generator. Values from -200 dB to +200 dB in 1 dB steps are allowed. The default setting is 0 dB. Offsets are indicated by the "LVL" label in the channel bar (see also "Displayed Information and Errors" on page 387).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
392
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Using this offset, attenuators or amplifiers at the output connector of the external generator can be taken into account. This is useful, for example, for the displayed output power values on screen or during data entry. Positive offsets apply to an amplifier, while negative offsets apply to an attenuator after the external generator.
Remote command: SOURce<si>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet on page 1109
Source Frequency Coupling Defines the frequency coupling mode between the R&S FSW and the generator.
For more information on coupling frequencies, see "Coupling the Frequencies" on page 385.
"Auto"
Default setting: a series of frequencies is defined (one for each sweep point), based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R&S FSW (see "(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset)" on page 393). The RF frequency range covers the currently defined span of the R&S FSW (unless limited by the range of the signal generator).
"Manual"
The generator uses a single fixed frequency, defined by (Manual) Source Frequency which is displayed when you select "Manual" coupling.
Remote command: SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe] on page 1106
(Manual) Source Frequency Defines the fixed frequency to be used by the generator.
Remote command: SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency on page 1106
(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset) With automatic frequency coupling, a series of frequencies is defined (one for each sweep point), based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R&S FSW.
However, the frequency used by the generator may differ from the input from the R&S FSW. The RF frequency can be multiplied by a specified factor, or a frequency offset can be added, or both.
Note: The input for the generator frequency is not validated, i.e. you can enter any values. However, if the allowed frequency ranges of the generator are exceeded, an error message is displayed on the R&S FSW. The values for Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop are corrected to comply with the range limits.
The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator. The default setting is 0 Hz. Offsets <> 0 Hz are indicated by the "FRQ" label in the channel bar. Negative offsets can be used to define reverse sweeps.
For more information on coupling frequencies and reverse sweeps, see "Coupling the Frequencies" on page 385. For more information on error messages and the channel bar, see "Displayed Information and Errors" on page 387.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
393
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Remote command: SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator on page 1107 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator on page 1108 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:OFFSet on page 1108
Result Frequency Start For reference only: The start frequency for the generator, calculated from the configured generator frequency and the start value defined for the R&S FSW.
Result Frequency Stop For reference only: The stop frequency for the generator, calculated from the configured generator frequency and the stop value defined for the R&S FSW.
Source Calibration Functions Access: [INPUT/OUPUT] > "External Generator Config" > "Source Calibration" tab The calibration functions of the external generator are available only if external generator control is active (see " Source State " on page 392).
Calibrate Transmission................................................................................................395 Calibrate Reflection Short........................................................................................... 395 Calibrate Reflection Open........................................................................................... 395 Normalization state..................................................................................................... 395 Recall Cal. Settings.....................................................................................................395
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
394
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Data Input and Output
Save as Trd Factor .....................................................................................................396 Reference Position .....................................................................................................396 Reference Value .........................................................................................................396
Calibrate Transmission Starts a transmission type measurement to determine a reference trace. This trace is used to calculate the difference for the normalized values. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:METHod on page 1114
Calibrate Reflection Short Starts a short-circuit reflection type measurement to determine a reference trace for calibration. If both calibrations (open circuit, short circuit) are carried out, the calibration trace is calculated by averaging the two measurements. The order of the two calibration measurements is irrelevant. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:METHod on page 1114 Selects the reflection method. [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] on page 1113 Starts the sweep for short-circuit calibration.
Calibrate Reflection Open Starts an open-circuit reflection type measurement to determine a reference trace for calibration. If both reflection-type calibrations (open circuit, short circuit) are carried out, the reference trace is calculated by averaging the two measurements. The order of the two calibration measurements is irrelevant. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:METHod on page 1114 Selects the reflection method. [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] on page 1113 Starts the sweep for open-circuit calibration.
Normalization state Switches the normalization of measurement results on or off. This function is only available if the memory contains a reference trace, that is, after a calibration has been performed. For details on normalization, see "Normalization" on page 383. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe] on page 1114
Recall Cal. Settings Restores the settings that were used during source calibration. This can be useful if instrument settings were changed after calibration (e.g. center frequency, frequency deviation, reference level, etc.).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
395
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Data Input and Output
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:RECall on page 1114
Save as Trd Factor Uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor. The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix .trd under C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\trd. The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency.
The generated transducer factor can be further adapted using the "Transducer" function in the [Setup] menu.
For more information on transducers, see Chapter 11.4.1, "Basics on Transducer Factors", on page 712.
Note: Note that the normalized measurement data is used, not the reference trace! Thus, if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration, without changing any settings, the transducer factor will be 0 dB for the entire span (by definition of the normalized trace).
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:GENerate on page 1115
Reference Position Defines the position of the reference line in percent of the total y-axis range.
The top of the diagram is 100%, the bottom is 0%. By default, the 0 dB line is displayed at the top of the diagram (100%).
This setting is only available if normalization is on (see " Normalization state" on page 395).
The reference line defined by the reference value and reference position is similar to the Reference Level defined in the "Amplitude" settings. However, this reference line only affects the y-axis scaling in the diagram, it has no effect on the expected input power level or the hardware settings.
The normalized trace (0 dB directly after calibration) is displayed on this reference line, indicated by a red line in the diagram. If you shift the reference line, the normalized trace is shifted, as well.
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition on page 1155
Reference Value Defines an offset for the position of the reference line.
This setting can be used to shift the reference line and thus the normalized trace, similar to the Shifting the Display ( Offset ) defined in the "Amplitude" settings shifts the reference level in the display.
Shifting the normalized trace is useful, for example, to reflect an attenuation or gain caused by the measured DUT. If you then zoom into the diagram around the normalized trace, the measured trace still remains fully visible.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
396
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue on page 1113
7.2.4.4 How to Work With External Generator Control
The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to work with the optional External Generator Control.
For remote operation, see "Programming Example for External Generator Control" on page 1115.
How to Calibrate a Measurement Setup using an External Generator................. 397 How to Remove the Effects of a Particular Component from Measurement Results
Using Calibration...................................................................................................399 How to Compensate for Additional Gain or Attenuation after Calibration............. 399
How to Calibrate a Measurement Setup using an External Generator
1. Connect the signal generator's GPIB interface connector to the "Ext. Gen.Control GPIB" connector on the rear panel of the R&S FSW.
2. Connect the signal generator output to the "RF input" connector of the R&S FSW. 3. If the signal generator supports TTL synchronization, connect the signal generator
to the optional"Aux.Control" port. 4. If the measurement setup does not require the full span of the R&S FSW, change
the "Frequency Start" and "Frequency Stop" values ([FREQ] key > "Frequency Config" softkey). 5. Press the [INPUT/OUTPUT] key and select "External Generator Config". 6. In the "Interface Configuration" subtab, select the "Generator Type" connected to the R&S FSW. If the required generator type is not available, define a new setup file as described in "To define a new generator setup file" on page 398. 7. Select the type of interface and the address used to connect the generator to the R&S FSW. 8. If the generator supports "TTL Synchronization", activate this function. 9. Select "Reference: External" to synchronize the analyzer with the generator. 10. Switch to the "Measurement Configuration" subtab. 11. Set the "Source State" to "On". 12. Define the generator output level as the "Source Power".
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
397
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
13. Optionally, to define a constant level offset for the external generator, define a "Source Offset".
14. The default frequency list for the calibration sweep contains 1001 values, divided in equi-distant frequencies between the R&S FSW's start and stop frequency. For most cases, this automatic coupling should be correct. Check the "Result Frequency Start" and "Result Frequency Stop" values to make sure the required measurement span is covered. If necessary, change the frequency settings on the R&S FSW ([FREQ] key > "Frequency Config" softkey), or use a different generator type.
15. Switch to the "Source Calibration" subtab.
16. Select the "Source Calibration Type": "Transmission" to perform a calibration sweep and store a reference trace for the measurement setup.
17. Select "Source Calibration Normalize": "On".
18. Optionally, shift the reference line further down in the result display by descreasing the "Reference": "Position".
The measurement setup is now calibrated. Subsequent measurement results are normalized, so that any unwanted effects from the cables and connectors are removed.
To define a new generator setup file
1. Press the [INPUT/OUTPUT] key and select "External Generator Config".
2. In the "Interface Configuration" subtab, select a generator type that has similar characteristics (frequency and power ranges).
3. Select "Edit Generator Setup File". The configuration file for the selected generator type is displayed (read-only) in an editor.
4. Edit the configuration values according to your generator. Be sure not to change the syntax of the file - only change the values of the parameters. Errors will only be detected and displayed when you try to use the new generator (see also "Displayed Information and Errors" on page 387).
5. Save the file under a different name with the extension .gen: a) In the editor, select "File > SaveAs". b) Select "Save as type: All Files (*.*)". c) Specify a name with the extension .gen.
6. In the R&S FSW firmware, close the "External Generator Config" dialog and reopen it.
Now you can select the new generator type from the selection list on the "Interface Configuration" tab.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
398
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
How to Remove the Effects of a Particular Component from Measurement Results Using Calibration
1. Set up the measurement, including the component, and perform a calibration as described in "How to Calibrate a Measurement Setup using an External Generator" on page 397.
2. After setting "Source Calibration Normalize": "On", select "Save as Trd Factor" to store the normalized reference trace as a transducer factor.
3. If necessary, switch to another measurement channel for a different R&S FSW application.
4. Press the [Setup] key, then select the "Transducer" softkey.
5. Select the stored transducer in the list of available transducers and select the "Active" setting for it.
6. Perform any measurement with the setup that contains the calibrated component. The measurement results do not include the effects from the component.
How to Compensate for Additional Gain or Attenuation after Calibration If a gain or an attenuation is inserted in the measurement after calibration, this effect can be reflected in the display of the normalized trace on the R&S FSW. Thus, the measured trace and the normalized trace are not so far apart in the display, so that you can zoom into the normalized trace without cropping the measurement trace.
Prerequisite: a calibration has been performed for the original measurement setup, except for the component causing an additional gain or attenuation (as described in "How to Calibrate a Measurement Setup using an External Generator" on page 397) 1. Insert the additional component in the calibrated measurement setup and perform
a new measurement.
2. Press the [INPUT/OUTPUT] key and select "External Generator Config".
3. Switch to the "Source Calibration" subtab.
4. With active normalization, set the "Reference":" Value" to the same value as the gain or attenuation the inserted component causes.
5. Optionally, shift the reference line further down in the result display by decreasing the "Reference": "Position". The normalized reference trace moves to the position of the measured trace.
6. Optionally, zoom into the measured trace by changing the y-axis scaling (or the range: "AMPT > Scale Config > Range"). The measured trace is still fully visible, and the absolute values are still valid.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
399
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
7.2.4.5 Measurement Example: Calibration with an External Generator
The following measurement example demonstrates the most common functions using an external generator. This example requires the External Generator Control option. The example assumes an SMW100A generator is connected to the R&S FSW. A band elimination filter is the device under test. After calibration, an additional attenuator is inserted between the DUT and the R&S FSW. The following procedures are described: "Calibrating the measurement setup" on page 400 "Measuring the effects of the DUT" on page 401 "Compensating the effects of additional attenuation after calibration" on page 403
Calibrating the measurement setup 1. Connect the signal generator's GPIB interface connector to the [Ext. Gen.Control
GPIB] connector on the rear panel of the R&S FSW.
2. Connect the signal generator output to the [RF input] connector of the R&S FSW.
3. Adapt the measurement range of the R&S FSW to the filter to be tested. In this measurement, define the following settings: a) Press the [FREQ] key, select "Frequency Config" and enter "Frequency Start": 100 MHz. b) Enter "Frequency Stop": 300 MHz
4. Press the [INPUT/OUTPUT] key and select "External Generator Config".
5. In the "Interface Configuration" sub-tab, select "Generator Type":"SMW06".
6. Select "Reference: External" to synchronize the analyzer with the generator.
7. Switch to the "Measurement Configuration" sub-tab.
8. Set the "Source State" to "On".
9. Define the generator output level as the "Source Power": -20 dBm.
10. Set the "Coupling State" to "Auto". The "Result Frequency Start" value for the generator is indicated as 100.0 MHz. The "Result Frequency Stop" value is indicated as 300.0 MHz.
11. Switch to the "Source Calibration" sub-tab.
12. Select the "Source Calibration Type": "Transmission" to perform a calibration sweep and store a reference trace for the measurement setup.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
400
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Figure 7-9: Measurement results from generator, analyzer and connecting cables
13. Select "Source Calibration Normalize": "On" to set the measurement results for the current setup to 0, thus eliminating all effects from the generator, the analyzer and the connecting cables from subsequent measurements with the band elimination filter.
The reference line is displayed at 0 dB at the top of the diagram (100%).
Figure 7-10: Normalized measurement results after calibration
Measuring the effects of the DUT After calibration we can insert the band elimination filter (our DUT) in the measurement setup. 1. Connect the signal generator output to the band elimination filter.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
401
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
2. Connect the band elimination filter output to the [RF input] connector of the R&S FSW.
Figure 7-11: Band elimination filter results
3. Shift the reference line from the top of the diagram to the middle of the diagram by changing the position of the reference point 0.0 dB to 50 %. In the "Source Calibration" tab, enter "Position": 50 %. At the same time, the range of the displayed y-axis moves from [-100.0 dB to 0 dB] to [-50 dB to +50 dB].
Figure 7-12: Reference line shifted to middle of diagram (50%)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
402
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Compensating the effects of additional attenuation after calibration After calibration, an additional attenuator is inserted between the DUT and the R&S FSW. This may be necessary, for example, to protect the analyzer's input connector. Nevertheless, we are only interested in the effects of the DUT, not those of the additional protective attenuator. Thus, we will compensate these effects in the result display on the R&S FSW by moving the reference line.
1. Connect a 3 dB attenuator between the band elimination filter output and the [RF input] connector on the R&S FSW. The measurement results are now 3 dB lower.
Figure 7-13: Measurement results with additional attenuator
2. In the "Source Calibration" tab, enter "Reference Value": -3 dB. The reference line is shifted down by 3 dB so that the measurement trace is displayed on the reference line again. At the same time, the scaling of the y-axis is changed: -3 dB are now shown at 50% of the diagram; the range is [-53 dB to +47 dB].
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
403
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Figure 7-14: Reference line with an offset of -3 dB and shifted to middle of diagram (50%)
3. After the reference trace has been shifted, you can zoom into the measured trace to determine the offsets to the reference line, which represent the effects of the band elimination filter in the measurement setup. Change the y-axis scaling to 1 dB/div (or the range to 10 dB).
a) Press the [AMPT] key, then select "Scale Config" > " Range". b) Enter 10 dB.
Figure 7-15: Reference line with measurement results using larger scale
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
404
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
7.2.5 Optional External Mixers
If the R&S FSW External Mixer option is installed, an external mixer can be connected to the R&S FSW to increase the available frequency range. In this case, the input to measure is not taken from the RF input connector, but from the [Ext Mixer] connector(s).
Basics on External Mixers.....................................................................................405 External Mixer Settings......................................................................................... 416 How to Work with External Mixers........................................................................ 427 Measurement Examples: Using an External Mixer............................................... 430
7.2.5.1 Basics on External Mixers
Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used with external mixers is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings.
Frequency Ranges................................................................................................405 Two-port and Three-port Mixers............................................................................406 Bias Current.......................................................................................................... 407 Conversion Loss Tables........................................................................................ 408 External Mixers and Large Bandwidth Extension Options.................................... 409 Automatic Signal Identification.............................................................................. 411
Frequency Ranges
In a common spectrum analyzer, rather than providing one large (and thus inaccurate) filter, or providing several filters to cover the required frequency range of the input signal (at a high cost), a single, very accurate filter is used. Therefore, the input signal must be converted to the frequencies covered by the single accurate filter. This is done by a mixer, which converts and multiplies the frequency of the input signal with the help of the local oscillator (LO). The result is a higher and lower intermediate frequency (IF). The local oscillator can be tuned within the supported frequency range of the input signal.
In order to extend the supported frequency range of the input signal, an external mixer can be used. In this case, the LO frequency is output to the external mixer, where it is mixed with the RF input from the original input signal. In addition, the harmonics of the LO are mixed with the input signal, and converted to new intermediate frequencies. Thus, a wider range of frequencies can be obtained. The IF from the external mixer is then returned to the spectrum analyzer.
The frequency of the input signal can be expressed as a function of the LO frequency and the selected harmonic of the first LO as follows:
fin = n * fLO + fIF
Where:
fin: Frequency of input signal
n: Order of harmonic used for conversion
fLO: Frequency of first LO: 7.65 GHz to 17.45 GHz
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
405
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
fIF: Intermediate frequency (variable; defined internally depending on RBW and span)
Thus, depending on the required frequency band, the appropriate order of harmonic must be selected. For commonly required frequency ranges, predefined bands with the appropriate harmonic order setting are provided. By default, the lowest harmonic order is selected that allows conversion of input signals in the whole band.
For the band "USER", the order of harmonic is defined by the user. The order of harmonic can be between 2 and 128, the lowest usable frequency being 16.88 GHz.
The frequency ranges for pre-defined bands are described in Table 13-4.
Changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the [PRESET] function. A "Preset band" function allows you to restore the original band settings.
Extending predefined ranges
In some cases, the harmonics defined for a specific band allow for an even larger frequency range than the band requires. By default, the pre-defined range is used. However, you can take advantage of the extended frequency range by overriding the defined start and stop frequencies by the maximum possible values ("RF Overrange" option).
Additional ranges
If due to the LO frequency the conversion of the input signal is not possible using one harmonic, the band must be split. An adjacent, partially overlapping frequency range can be defined using different harmonics. In this case, the sweep begins using the harmonic defined for the first range, and at a specified frequency in the overlapping range ("handover frequency"), switches to the harmonic for the second range.
Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type.
Two-port and Three-port Mixers
External mixers are connected to the R&S FSW at the LO OUT/IF IN and IF IN connectors.
When using three-port mixers, the LO signal output from the R&S FSW and the IF input from the mixer are transmitted on separate connectors, whereas for two-port mixers, both signals are exchanged via the same connector (LO OUT/IF IN). Because of the diplexer contained in the R&S FSW, the IF signal can be tapped from the line which is used to feed the LO signal to the mixer.
For measurements with a bandwidth larger than 2 GHz and an external mixer, only 3port mixers are supported. For more information see "External Mixers and Large Bandwidth Extension Options" on page 409.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
406
R&S�FSW
Two-port mixer
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Three-port mixer
In both cases, the nominal LO level is 15.5 dBm.
Bias Current
Single-diode mixers generally require a DC voltage which is applied via the LO line. This DC voltage is to be tuned to the minimum conversion loss versus frequency. Such a DC voltage can be set via the "BIAS" function using the D/A converter of the R&S FSW. The value to be entered is not the voltage but the short-circuit current. The current is defined in the "Bias Settings" or set to the value of the conversion loss table.
See " Bias Value " on page 422 and " Bias " on page 425.
Figure 7-16: Bias circuit of the R&S FSW
The voltage U0 at the output of the operational amplifier can be set in the range �2.0 to +2.0 V. An open-circuit voltage Ubias of �0.5 to +0.5 V is obtained accordingly at the output of the voltage divider. A short-circuit current of Ishort = U0 / 200 = 10 mA to +
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
407
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Data Input and Output
10 mA is obtained for a short circuit at the output of the voltage divider. In order to use biasing it is not important to know the exact current flowing through the diode since the conversion loss must be set to a minimum with the frequency. Therefore, it makes no difference whether the setting is performed by an open-circuit voltage or by a short-circuit current. A DC return path is ensured via the 66 resistor, which is an advantage in some mixers.
Conversion Loss Tables
Conversion loss tables consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for conversion loss at certain frequencies. Correction values for frequencies between the reference values are obtained by interpolation. Linear interpolation is performed if the table contains only two values. If it contains more than two reference values, spline interpolation is carried out. Outside the frequency range covered by the table the conversion loss is assumed to be the same as that for the first and last reference value (see Figure 7-17).
Figure 7-17: Conversion loss outside the band's frequency range
Predefined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R&S FSW.
Alternatively, you can define your own conversion loss tables. Conversion loss tables are configured and managed in the "Conversion loss Table Settings" tab of the "External Mixer Configuration" dialog box.
See "Managing Conversion Loss Tables" on page 422 for more information about conversion loss tables.
When using external mixers with optional bandwidth extensions larger than 512 MHz, special conversion loss tables are required, see "External Mixers and Large Bandwidth Extension Options" on page 409.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
408
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Importing CVL tables
The conversion loss table to be used for a particular measurement range is also defined in the "External Mixer Configuration" dialog box.
The frequency range that the cvl table must cover depends on the used IF, which varies depending on the instrument and installed bandwidth extension options. Thus, external mixers from Rohde & Schwarz provide multiple conversion loss table files. When you select a storage path containing cvl files, or a particular cvl file from a Rohde & Schwarz mixer for import, all available files are copied to the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\ directory on the R&S FSW. Provided .acl files are renamed according to the following syntax:
<serial_number>_<harmonic_order>_<IF>.acl,
e.g. 12345_2_1330M.acl
To select a conversion loss table for use in a measurement, you merely have to select the serial number for the external mixer in use. The R&S FSW automatically selects the correct cvl file for the current IF. As an alternative, you can also select a userdefined conversion loss table (.acl file).
Before copying any files to the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\ directory, the R&S FSW firmware moves any existing user-defined cvl tables to a backup subdirectory. To use a user-defined cvl table later, select the file in the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\backup directory.
A validation check is then performed on the selected table to ensure that it complies with the settings. In particular, the following is checked:
The assigned band name The harmonic order The mixer type The table must contain at least one frequency that lies within the frequency range
for the band
Reference level
The maximum possible reference level depends on the maximum used conversion loss value. Thus, the reference level can be adjusted for each range according to the used conversion loss table or average conversion loss value. If a conversion loss value is used which exceeds the maximum reference level, the reference level is adjusted to the maximum value permitted by the firmware.
External Mixers and Large Bandwidth Extension Options
If the bandwidth extension options R&S FSW-B1200/-B2001/-B2000 are active, external mixers with a bandwidth up to 2 GHz are supported. For information on which mixers are supported for these bandwidth options, see the R&S FSW data sheet. Two-port mixers are not supported.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
409
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
If the bandwidth extension option R&S FSW-B5000 is active, some external (threeport) mixers with a bandwidth up to 5 GHz are supported. For information on which mixers are supported for these bandwidth options, see the R&S FSW data sheet. Twoport mixers are not supported. Instrument models 1312.8000Kxx require an additional hardware option,R&S FSW-U21 or R&S FSW-U85.
If the bandwidth extension options R&S FSW-B4001/B6001/B8001 are active, external mixers are supported for an analysis bandwidth up to 4 GHz. For information on which mixers are supported for these bandwidth options, see the R&S FSW data sheet.
Depending on the installed and active bandwidth extension options and used measurement bandwidth, special conversion loss tables are required.
Table 7-1: Required conversion loss tables depending on measurement bandwidth
BW extension option Used meas bandwidth Required conversion loss table format
B1200/B2001
<=512 MHz
*.ACL
>512 MHz
*_B1200_B2001.B2G
B2000 (active)
<=2 GHz
*_B2000.B2G
B5000 (active)
<=4.4 GHz
*_B5000_2G8.B5G
>4.4 GHz
*_B5000_3G5.B5G
B4001/B6001/B8001
<=80 MHz
*.ACL
80 MHz< bw <=4 GHz *_B5000_2G8.B5G
While the common .acl files can be used, data acquisition with larger bandwidths using such conversion loss tables leads to substantial inaccuracy. Using an average conversion loss for the entire range (instead of a conversion loss table) during data acquisition with the large bandwidth extension options causes even more inaccuracy. In both cases, the UNCAL status message indicates that the measurement can have inaccurate results.
Special conversion loss tables (in .b2g or .b5g files) cannot be edited within the R&S FSW firmware; they can only be imported and deleted.
B2000-specific conversion loss tables
A B2000 conversion loss table consists of 43 magnitude correction values (as opposed to 1 for .acl files). To each side of the specific frequency, 21 reference values are defined with an offset of 25 MHz to 1025 MHz. Thus, correction levels are measured with a spacing of 50 MHz.
Example: For example, for the level measured at the frequency 50 GHz, 43 correction levels are defined: 21 for the frequencies 48.075 GHz, 49.125 GHz, 49.175 GHz, ..., 49.975 GHz 1 for the frequency 50 GHz 21 for the frequencies 50.025 GHz, 50.075 GHz, 50.125 GHz, ..., 51.025 GHz
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
410
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
B2000-specific conversion loss tables are provided in files according to the following syntax:
<serial_no.>_MAG_<harmonic>_B2000.b2g
Phase correction tables
In addition to the magnitude correction tables, B2000 phase correction tables with the same layout are defined in a separate file. Both files are always delivered as a pair by the manufacturer of the external mixer. Currently, the R&S FSW uses only the magnitude correction files for external mixers; the phase is assumed to be ideal (correction values are all 0).
B2000-specific phase conversion loss tables are provided in files according to the following syntax:
<serial_no.>_PHASE_<harmonic>_B2000.b2g
B5000-specific conversion loss tables
For bandwidths larger than 2 GHz, two different types of conversion loss tables are available, depending on the required bandwidth: For bandwidths 4.4 GHz: table consists of 91 correction values per frequency, for
an IF of 2.8 GHz The tables are provided in files according to the following syntax: <serial_no.>_MAG|PHASE_<harmonic>_B5000_2G8.b5g For bandwidths between 4.4 GHz and 5 GHz: table consists of 103 correction values per frequency, for an IF of 3.5 GHz The tables are provided in files according to the following syntax: <serial_no.>_MAG|PHASE_<harmonic>_B5000_3G5.b5g
Currently, the R&S FSW uses only the magnitude correction files; the phase is assumed to be ideal (correction values are all 0).
Automatic Signal Identification
Automatic signal identification allows you to compare the upper and lower band results of the mixer, thus detecting unwanted mixer products due to conversion.
Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that perform frequency sweeps (not in vector signal analysis or the I/Q Analyzer, for instance).
The "Auto ID" function is now also available for Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement and Spurious Emissions Measurement using an external mixer.
Signal ID function
Two sweeps are performed alternately. Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band (USB) of the LO (the test sweep), trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band (LSB), i.e. the reference sweep.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
411
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Figure 7-18: Signal identification function (Signal ID) with optional external mixer
The reference sweep is performed using an LO setting shifted downwards by 2*IF/ <Harmonic order>. Input signals in the desired sideband that are converted using the specified harmonic are displayed in both traces at the same position on the frequency axis. Image signals and mixer products caused by other harmonics are displayed at different positions in both traces. The user identifies the signals visually by comparing the two traces.
Since the LO frequency is displaced downwards in the reference sweep, the conversion loss of the mixer may differ from the test sweep. Therefore the signal level should only be measured in the test sweep (trace 1).
Auto ID function
The Auto ID function basically functions like Signal ID function. However, the test and reference sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak values of each sweep point. The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if "Signal ID" is active at the same time. If "Signal ID" is not active, the result can be displayed in any of the traces 1 to 3. Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this calculated trace.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
412
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Test sweep and reference sweep traces
Depending on which of the automatic signal identification functions are used, the traces are used to display either the test sweep (the upper side-band sweep) or the reference sweep (lower side-band sweep).
Function Signal ID
Auto ID Signal ID + Auto ID
Trace 1
Signal ID upper sideband
Auto ID
Signal ID upper sideband
Trace 2
Signal ID lower sideband
-
Signal ID lower sideband
Trace 3 -
Auto ID
Tolerance for the comparison of test sweep and reference
Since the LO frequency is displaced downwards in the reference sweep, the conversion loss of the mixer may differ from that of the test sweep. This is due to the fact that the LO output power of the R&S FSW varies with the frequency, and also due to the non-ideal characteristics of the mixer. A certain tolerance should therefore be permitted for the comparison of the signal levels in the test sweep and reference sweep. A userdefined threshold is used to determine deviations.
Auto ID detection threshold
Real input signals are displayed at the same frequency in the test and reference sweeps, i.e. theoretically, identical signal levels are expected at the frequency of the real mixer product in both sweeps. If the level difference is lower than the user-defined threshold, the signal obtained in the test sweep is displayed. If a signal occurs only in the test sweep or reference sweep, it is an unwanted mixer product. The level of this signal is compared to the noise floor in the other sweep. If the S/N ratio is sufficiently large, the threshold is exceeded. This means that the signal with the lower level, i.e. noise in this case, is displayed.
Note that the Auto ID method operates according to the fail-safe principle, i.e. unwanted mixer products may not be detected as such but signals which are in fact real input signals are not blanked out.
Time-constant spectrum
The automatic comparison of the test sweep and reference sweep with the Auto ID function can only be applied usefully for signals with a time-constant spectrum since the two sweeps are always required to determine the actual spectrum.
Mixer products with low S/N ratio
If the S/N ratio of a mixer product is lower than the user-defined threshold, the level difference between the test sweep and reference sweep at the frequency of this mixer product is always within limits, even if the signal occurs in one of the sweeps only. Such mixer products cannot be identified by the Auto ID function. It is therefore recommended that you perform a visual comparison of the test sweep and reference sweep using the Signal ID function.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
413
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Data Input and Output
Examining unwanted mixer products with small span
With large spans in which non-modulated sine-wave signals are represented as single lines, unwanted mixer products are generally completely blanked out. However, if you examine the frequency range containing a blanked signal in detail using a small span, e.g. an image-frequency response, part of the signal may nevertheless be displayed. This happens when the displayed components of a blanked signal have a level difference which is smaller than the user-defined threshold when compared with the noise floor. These components are therefore not blanked out.
An unwanted signal with an S/N ratio that corresponds approximately to the userdefined threshold may not be blanked out permanently. Due to the fact that the noise display varies from one sweep to another, the S/N ratio changes and thus the level difference between the test sweep and reference sweep measured at a frequency changes as well. As a result, the criterion for detecting unwanted signals is not fulfilled. To blank out unwanted signals permanently, an almost constant noise indication is therefore required. This can be achieved by reducing the video bandwidth. Since the average noise indication lies well below the generated noise peak values, the minimum level diminishes. For identification using the Auto ID function, signals should have this minimum noise level.
Display of mixer products at the same frequency
If the input signal consists of a very large number of spectral components, it will become more and more probable that two different unwanted mixer products will be displayed at the same frequency in the test sweep and reference sweep.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
414
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Figure 7-19: Different mixer products displayed at the same frequency in the test sweep and reference sweep (large span)
Example:
The external mixer is set to use the 2nd order harmonic. The signal recorded in the test sweep is displayed by trace 1. The IF filter of the R&S FSW is represented at a 3 dB bandwidth of 20 kHz, the real IF bandwidth being 30 kHz. If, however, the 3 dB bandwidth of the signal recorded in the reference sweep is examined (trace 2), it will be found to be larger exactly by a factor of 2. This shows that the two products were generated by mixing with LO harmonics of different orders. The signal recorded in the test sweep was generated by mixing with the 3rd order harmonic. Since the frequency axis scaling is based on the 2nd order, the mixer product or the resulting diagram of the IF filter is compressed by a factor of 2/3. The signal recorded in the reference sweep was generated by mixing with the fundamental of the LO signal. Since the frequency axis scaling is based on the 2nd order, the mixer product or the resulting diagram of the IF filter is expanded by a factor of 2.
Automatic identification with a large span is not possible since the two mixer products are displayed at the same frequency. The diagram shown in Figure 7-20 is obtained when examining products with a narrow span using the Auto ID function. You can easily recognize unwanted mixer products in the diagram obtained using one of the automatic detection functions.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
415
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Figure 7-20: Unwanted mixer products displayed for small span
7.2.5.2 External Mixer Settings
Access: [INPUT/OUTPUT] > "External Mixer Config" Note that external mixers are not supported in MSRA/MSRT mode. Special conversion loss tables (in .b2g or .b5g files) cannot be edited within the R&S FSW firmware; they can only be imported and deleted. See "External Mixers and Large Bandwidth Extension Options" on page 409 Mixer Settings....................................................................................................... 416 Basic Settings....................................................................................................... 420 Managing Conversion Loss Tables....................................................................... 422 Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables...................................................... 424
Mixer Settings Access: [INPUT/OUTPUT] > "External Mixer Config" > "Mixer Settings"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
416
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
External Mixer (State)................................................................................................. 417 RF Start / RF Stop ......................................................................................................417 Handover Freq ........................................................................................................... 418 Band ...........................................................................................................................418 RF Overrange ............................................................................................................ 418 Preset Band ............................................................................................................... 418 Mixer Type ..................................................................................................................418 Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration).................................................................. 419
Range 1 / Range 2 .......................................................................................419 Harmonic Type .............................................................................................419 Harmonic Order ........................................................................................... 419 Conversion Loss .......................................................................................... 419
External Mixer (State) Activates or deactivates the external mixer for input. If activated, "ExtMix" is indicated in the channel bar of the application, together with the used band (see " Band " on page 418).
Remote command: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>[:STATe] on page 1085
RF Start / RF Stop Displays the start and stop frequency of the selected band (read-only).
The frequency range for the user-defined band is defined via the harmonics configuration (see " Range 1 / Range 2 " on page 419).
For details on available frequency ranges, see table 13-4 on page 1089.
Remote command: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:STARt on page 1088 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:STOP on page 1088
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
417
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Data Input and Output
Handover Freq If due to the LO frequency the conversion of the input signal is not possible using one harmonic, the band must be split. An adjacent, partially overlapping frequency range can be defined using different harmonics. In this case, the sweep begins using the harmonic defined for the first range. At the specified "handover frequency" in the overlapping range, it switches to the harmonic for the second range. The handover frequency can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range. Remote command: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:HANDover on page 1088
Band Defines the waveguide frequency band or user-defined frequency band to be used by the mixer. The start and stop frequencies of the selected band are displayed in the "RF Start" and "RF Stop" fields. For a definition of the frequency range for the pre-defined bands, see table 13-4 on page 1089. The mixer settings for the user-defined band can be selected freely. The frequency range for the user-defined band is defined via the harmonics configuration (see " Range 1 / Range 2 " on page 419). Remote command: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:BAND on page 1089
RF Overrange In some cases, the harmonics defined for a specific band allow for an even larger frequency range than the band requires. By default, the pre-defined range is used. However, you can take advantage of the extended frequency range by overriding the defined "RF Start" and "RF Stop" frequencies by the maximum values. If "RF Overrange" is enabled, the frequency range is not restricted by the band limits ( "RF Start" and "RF Stop" ). In this case, the full frequency range that can be reached using the selected harmonics is used. Remote command: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:RFOVerrange[:STATe] on page 1093
Preset Band Restores the presettings for the selected band. Note: changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the [PRESET] function. This function allows you to restore the original band settings. Remote command: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:BAND:PRESet on page 1088
Mixer Type The External Mixer option supports the following external mixer types: Note: For measurements with a bandwidth larger than 2 GHz and an external mixer, only 3-port mixers are supported.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
418
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
For more information see "External Mixers and Large Bandwidth Extension Options" on page 409.
"2 Port"
LO and IF data use the same port
"3 Port"
LO and IF data use separate ports
Remote command: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:PORTs on page 1093
Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration) The harmonics configuration determines the frequency range for user-defined bands (see " Band " on page 418).
Range 1 / Range 2 Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration) Enables the use of one or two frequency ranges, where the second range is based on another harmonic frequency of the mixer to cover the band's frequency range.
For each range, you can define which harmonic to use and how the conversion loss is handled.
Remote command: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:HIGH:STATe on page 1090
Harmonic Type Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration) Defines if only even, only odd, or even and odd harmonics can be used for conversion. Depending on this selection, the order of harmonic to be used for conversion changes (see " Harmonic Order " on page 419). Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type.
Remote command: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:TYPE on page 1090
Harmonic Order Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration) Defines which order of the harmonic of the LO frequencies is used to cover the frequency range.
By default, the lowest order of the specified harmonic type is selected that allows conversion of input signals in the whole band. If due to the LO frequency the conversion is not possible using one harmonic, the band is split.
For the "USER" band, you define the order of harmonic yourself. The order of harmonic can be between 2 and 128, the lowest usable frequency being 16.88 GHz.
Remote command: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic[:LOW] on page 1091 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:HIGH[:VALue] on page 1090
Conversion Loss Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration) Defines how the conversion loss is handled. The following methods are available:
"Average"
Defines the average conversion loss for the entire frequency range in dB.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
419
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
"Table"
Defines the conversion loss via the table selected from the list. Predefined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R&S FSW. Alternatively, you can define your own conversion loss tables. Imported tables are checked for compatibility with the current settings before being assigned. Conversion loss tables are configured and managed in the Conversion Loss Table tab. For details on conversion loss tables, see "Conversion Loss Tables" on page 408. For details on importing tables, see " Import Table " on page 423.
Remote command: Average for range 1: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS[:LOW] on page 1092 Table for range 1: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:TABLe[:LOW] on page 1092 Average for range 2: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:HIGH on page 1091 Table for range 2: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:TABLe:HIGH on page 1091
Basic Settings
Access: [INPUT/OUTPUT] > "External Mixer Config" > "Basic Settings"
The basic settings concern general use of an external mixer. They are only available if the External Mixer (State) is "On" .
LO Level .....................................................................................................................421 Signal ID .....................................................................................................................421 Auto ID ....................................................................................................................... 421 Auto ID Threshold ...................................................................................................... 421 Bias Value .................................................................................................................. 422
Write to CVL table ........................................................................................422
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
420
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Data Input and Output
LO Level Defines the LO level of the external mixer's LO port. Possible values are from 13.0 dBm to 17.0 dBm in 0.1 dB steps. Default value is 15.5 dB.
Remote command: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOPower on page 1086
Signal ID Activates or deactivates visual signal identification. Two sweeps are performed alternately. Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band (USB) of the LO (the test sweep). Trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band (LSB), i.e. the reference sweep.
Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that perform frequency sweeps (not in the VSA, the I/Q Analyzer, or the Real-Time Spectrum application, for instance).
(See also "Automatic Signal Identification" on page 411).
Mathematical functions with traces and trace copy cannot be used with the Signal ID function.
Remote command: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:SIGNal on page 1086
Auto ID Activates or deactivates automatic signal identification.
Auto ID basically functions like Signal ID . However, the test and reference sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak values of each sweep point. The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if "Signal ID" is active at the same time. If "Signal ID" is not active, the result can be displayed in any of the traces 1 to 3. Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this calculated trace.
Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that perform frequency sweeps (not in vector signal analysis or the I/Q Analyzer, for instance).
Note: The "Auto ID" function is now also available for Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement and Spurious Emissions Measurement using an external mixer. (See also "Automatic Signal Identification" on page 411).
Remote command: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:SIGNal on page 1086
Auto ID Threshold Defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison (" Auto ID " on page 421 function). The input range is between 0.1 dB and 100 dB. Values of about 10 dB (i.e. default setting) generally yield satisfactory results.
(See also "Automatic Signal Identification" on page 411).
Remote command: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:THReshold on page 1087
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
421
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Data Input and Output
Bias Value Define the bias current for each range, which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point. It corresponds to the short-circuit current. The bias current can range from -10 mA to 10 mA. The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode(s). Tip: The trace in the currently active result display (if applicable) is adapted to the settings immediately so you can check the results. To store the bias setting in the currently selected conversion loss table, select the Write to CVL table button. Remote command: [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:BIAS[:LOW] on page 1085 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:BIAS:HIGH on page 1085
Write to CVL table Bias Value Stores the bias setting in the currently selected "Conversion Loss Table" for the range. If no conversion loss table is selected yet, this function is not available ( "CVL Table not selected" ). (See " Conversion Loss " on page 419). Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS on page 1094
Managing Conversion Loss Tables
Access: [INPUT/OUTPUT] > "External Mixer Config" > "Conversion Loss Table"
In this tab, you configure and manage conversion loss tables. Conversion loss tables consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for conversion loss at certain frequencies. The correction values for frequencies between the reference points are obtained via interpolation.
The currently selected table for each range is displayed at the top of the dialog box. All conversion loss tables found in the instrument's C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\ directory are listed in the "Modify Tables" list.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
422
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Data Input and Output
New Table .................................................................................................................. 423 Edit Table ................................................................................................................... 423 Delete Table ............................................................................................................... 423 Import Table ............................................................................................................... 423
New Table Opens the "Edit conversion loss table" dialog box to configure a new conversion loss table.
For details on table configuration, see "Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables" on page 424.
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 1097
Edit Table Opens the "Edit conversion loss table" dialog box to edit the selected conversion loss table.
For details on table configuration, see "Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables" on page 424.
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 1097
Delete Table Deletes the currently selected conversion loss table after you confirm the action.
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar on page 1095
Import Table Imports one or more stored conversion loss tables from any directory and copies them to the instrument's C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\ directory. They can then be assigned for use for a specific frequency range (see " Conversion Loss " on page 419).
Note: Before copying any files to the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\ directory, the R&S FSW firmware moves any existing user-defined cvl tables to a backup subdirectory. To use a user-defined cvl table later, select the file in the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\backup directory. Note: If the bandwidth extension options R&S FSW-B6001/-B8001 are active, external mixers are supported for an analysis bandwidth up to 4 GHz. Measurements using bandwidth extension options over 512 MHz require special conversion loss tables, see Table 7-1. Supported tables have the file extension .b2g or .b5g, as opposed to .acl for common tables. While .acl files can be used, data acquisition with larger bandwidths using such conversion loss tables leads to substantial inaccuracy. Using no conversion loss tables at all during data acquisition with the larger bandwidth options causes even more inaccuracy. Note that only common conversion loss tables (in .acl files) can be edited. Special conversion loss tables (in .b2g or .b5g files) can only be imported and deleted.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
423
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
For more details, see "External Mixers and Large Bandwidth Extension Options" on page 409. Remote command: MMEM:COPY '<conversionlosstable>',C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\ See MMEMory:COPY on page 1286
Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables Access: [INPUT/OUTPUT] > "External Mixer Config" > "Conversion Loss Table" > "New Table" / "Edit Table" Conversion loss tables can be newly defined and edited.
Note that only common conversion loss tables (in .acl files) can be edited. Special conversion loss tables (in .b2g or .b5g files) can only be imported and deleted. For details see "External Mixers and Large Bandwidth Extension Options" on page 409.
A preview pane displays the current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position/value entries.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
424
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Data Input and Output
File Name ...................................................................................................................425 Comment ....................................................................................................................425 Band ...........................................................................................................................425 Harmonic Order ..........................................................................................................425 Bias ............................................................................................................................ 425 Mixer Name ................................................................................................................426 Mixer S/N ................................................................................................................... 426 Mixer Type ..................................................................................................................426 Position / Value ...........................................................................................................426 Insert Value ................................................................................................................ 426 Delete Value ...............................................................................................................427 Shift x ......................................................................................................................... 427 Shift y ......................................................................................................................... 427 Save ........................................................................................................................... 427
File Name Defines the name under which the table is stored in the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\ directory on the instrument. The name of the table is identical with the name of the file (without extension) in which the table is stored. This setting is mandatory. The .ACL extension is automatically appended during storage.
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 1097
Comment An optional comment that describes the conversion loss table. The comment is userdefinable.
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent on page 1095
Band The waveguide or user-defined band to which the table applies. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range.
For a definition of the frequency range for the pre-defined bands, see table 13-4 on page 1089.
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BAND on page 1094
Harmonic Order The harmonic order of the range to which the table applies. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range.
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:HARMonic on page 1096
Bias The bias current which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point. It corresponds to the short-circuit current. The bias current can range from -10 mA to 10 mA. The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode(s).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
425
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Data Input and Output
Tip: You can also define the bias interactively while a preview of the trace with the changed setting is displayed, see " Bias Value " on page 422. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS on page 1094
Mixer Name Specifies the name of the external mixer to which the table applies. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer on page 1096
Mixer S/N Specifies the serial number of the external mixer to which the table applies. The specified number is checked against the currently connected mixer number before the table can be assigned to the range. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber on page 1097
Mixer Type Specifies whether the external mixer to which the table applies is a two-port or threeport type. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs on page 1096
Position / Value Each position/value pair defines the conversion loss value in dB for a specific frequency. The reference values must be entered in order of increasing frequencies. A maximum of 50 reference values can be entered. To enter a new value pair, select an empty space in the "Position" / "Value" table, or select the Insert Value button. Correction values for frequencies between the reference values are interpolated. Linear interpolation is performed if the table contains only two values. If it contains more than two reference values, spline interpolation is carried out. Outside the frequency range covered by the table, the conversion loss is assumed to be the same as that for the first and last reference value. The current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position/ value entries is displayed in the preview pane to the right of the table. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:DATA on page 1095
Insert Value Inserts a new position/value entry in the table. If the table is empty, a new entry at 0 Hz is inserted. If entries already exist, a new entry is inserted above the selected entry. The position of the new entry is selected such that it divides the span to the previous entry in half.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
426
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Delete Value Deletes the currently selected position/value entry.
Shift x Shifts all positions in the table by a specific value. The value can be entered in the edit dialog box. The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the x-axis.
Shift y Shifts all conversion loss values by a specific value. The value can be entered in the edit dialog box. The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the yaxis.
Save The conversion loss table is stored under the specified file name in the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\ directory of the instrument.
7.2.5.3 How to Work with External Mixers
The required tasks to work with external mixers are described step-by-step: "To connect a three-port mixer" on page 427 "To connect a two-port mixer" on page 429 "To activate and configure the external mixer" on page 429 "To define a new conversion loss table" on page 430 "To shift the conversion loss values" on page 430
For remote operation, see "Programming Example: Working with an External Mixer" on page 1097.
To connect a three-port mixer External mixers can be connected at the LO OUT/IF IN and IF IN female connectors (if option is installed). Both two-port and three-port mixers can be used. Connect the mixer as follows:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
427
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Use the supplied coaxial cable to feed in the LO signal. If no external mixers are connected to the R&S FSW, cover the two front connectors [LO OUT / IF IN] and [IF IN] with the SMA caps supplied.
1. Connect the LO OUT / IF IN output of the R&S FSW to the LO port of the external mixer.
2. Connect the IF IN input of the R&S FSW to the IF port of the external mixer.
3. Feed the signal to be measured to the RF input of the external mixer.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
428
R&S�FSW To connect a two-port mixer
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
1. 1. Connect the LO OUT / IF IN output of the R&S FSW to the LO/IF port of the external mixer. The nominal LO level is 15.5 dBm. Because of the diplexer contained in the R&S FSW, the IF signal can be tapped from the line which is used to feed the LO signal to the mixer.
2. Feed the signal to be measured to the RF input of the external mixer.
To activate and configure the external mixer
1. Select "INPUT > Input Source Config > External Mixer: ON" to activate the external mixer for the current application.
2. Select "Mixer Settings > Band" to define the required frequency range.
3. From the "Band" selection list, select the required band.
4. In the Mixer Settings, select "Conversion Loss: Table" for Range 1 to define frequency-dependent level correction.
5. From the selection list, select a conversion loss table stored on the instrument. No further settings are necessary since the selected file contains all required parameters. If the selected table is not valid for the selected band, an error message is displayed. If no conversion loss table is available yet, create a new table first (as described in "To define a new conversion loss table" on page 430).
6. Optionally, select "Basic Settings> Auto ID: On" to activate automatic signal identification.
7. If necessary, adapt the tolerance limit by selecting "Basic Settings> Auto ID Threshold".
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
429
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
To define a new conversion loss table
1. Select "INPUT > Input Source Config > External Mixer > Conversion Loss Table".
2. Select "New Table".
3. Define a file name and, optionally, a comment for the new table.
4. Define the band and mixer settings for which the conversion loss table is to be used. These settings will be compared to the current mixer settings during the validation check when the table is imported.
5. Define the reference values for the frequency-dependant conversion loss: a) Select "Insert Value" to add a new row in the table. b) Enter the first reference frequency. c) Enter the corresponding conversion loss value. The conversion loss function is updated and displayed in the preview diagram in the dialog box. d) Repeat these steps to define up to 50 reference values.
6. Select "Save".
The table is stored and is then available for import and assignment to a specific frequency range.
To shift the conversion loss values In order to increase each reference value in the conversion-loss table a constant value (a0), the values can be shifted either in x-directoin or in y-direction.
1. Select "INPUT > Input Source Config > External Mixer > Conversion Loss Table".
2. Select the assigned conversion loss table.
3. Select "Edit Table".
4. Select "Shift y" and enter the constant value <a0> to shift all y-values in the table by this value. Or: Select "Shift x" and enter the constant value <a0> to shift all x-values in the table by this value.
5. Select "Save".
7.2.5.4 Measurement Examples: Using an External Mixer
Measurement Example 1: Two-Port Mixer
The following example demonstrates the basic operation of an external two-port mixer as well as the required settings. A sine wave signal with f = 14.5 GHz is applied to the input of a multiplier. The spectrum at the multiplier output is to be recorded in the range of 52 GHz to 60 GHz using a 2-port mixer for the V band. The mixer used is a doublediode mixer. The example of operation is described in the following steps:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
430
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
"To set up the measurement" on page 431 "To activate and configure the external mixer" on page 431 "To take into account the cable loss in the IF path" on page 432
To set up the measurement
IF IN LO OUT/IF IN
External Mixer
LO/IF RF
Multiplier
Figure 7-21: External Mixer test setup
RF INPUT
1. Connect the [LO OUT / IF IN] output of the R&S FSW to the [LO/IF] port of the external mixer.
2. Connect the multiplier to the RF input of the external mixer.
3. Apply a sine wave signal with f = 14.5 GHz to the input of the multiplier.
To activate and configure the external mixer
1. Select "INPUT > Input Source Config > External Mixer: ON" to activate the external mixer for the current application.
2. Select "Mixer Settings > Band" to define the required frequency range.
3. From the "Band" selection list, select the band "V".
4. In the Mixer Settings, select "Conversion Loss: Table" for Range 1 to define frequency-dependent level correction.
5. From the selection list, select a conversion loss table stored on the instrument. No further settings are necessary since the selected file contains all required parame-
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
431
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
ters. If the selected table is not valid for the selected band, an error message is displayed. If no conversion loss table is available yet, create a new table first (as described in "To define a new conversion loss table" on page 430).
6. A span is automatically set which covers the whole V band (50 GHz to 75 GHz).
7. Reduce the video bandwidth by selecting "BW > Video Bandwidth Manual": 1 MHz. This allows for correct signal identification using the Auto ID function (see also "Automatic Signal Identification" on page 411).
8. Select "Basic Settings> Auto ID: On" to activate automatic signal identification.
9. Adapt the tolerance limit by selecting "Basic Settings> Auto ID Threshold". The tolerance limit is set to 5 dB in this example.
To take into account the cable loss in the IF path
On performing level correction, the conversion loss of the mixer and also the insertion loss a0 of the cable used to tap off the IF signal are to be taken into account. This additional loss is frequency-dependent.
1. Determine the insertion of the cable at the used intermediate frequency.
2. Increase each reference value in the conversion-loss table by the insertion loss (a0). a) Select "INPUT > Input Source Config > External Mixer > Conversion Loss Table". b) Select the assigned conversion loss table. c) Select "Edit Table". d) Select "Shift y" and enter the insertion loss value <a0> to shift all y-values in the table by this value.
3. Select "Save".
Measurement Example 2: Three-Port Mixer with a Large Analysis Bandwidth
The following example demonstrates the operation of an external three-port mixer with a large analysis bandwidth in the I/Q Analyzer. This example requires the optional bandwidth extension R&S FSW-B5000. It is assumed that this option has been installed and set up and is ready for use.
(See the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual.)
A broadband 5G-modulated signal with a carrier frequency of 58 GHz is applied. The spectrum is to be recorded in the range of 52 GHz to 60 GHz using a 3-port mixer for the V band. The mixer used is an RPG FS-Z75 (new model) double-diode mixer.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
432
R&S�FSW To set up the measurement
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
IF IN LO OUT/IF IN
LO IF
External
Mixer
RF
RF INPUT
Figure 7-22: 3-port external mixer test setup
1. Connect the [LO] port of the external mixer to the [LO OUT / IF IN] connector of the R&S FSW.
2. Connect the [IF] port of the external mixer to the [IF IN] connector of the R&S FSW. 3. Apply a 5G-modulated signal with a carrier frequency of 58 GHz to the RF input of
the mixer.
To activate the large analysis bandwidth 1. Press the [Mode] key. 2. Select the I/Q Analyzer. 3. On the R&S FSW, press the [Input/Output] key. 4. Select the "B5000 Config" softkey. 5. Set the B5000 "State" to "On". 6. If necessary, start an alignment for the measurement setup with the R&S FSW-
B5000.
To activate and configure the external mixer 1. Select "INPUT" > "Input Source Config" >" External Mixer":" ON" to activate the
external mixer for the current application. 2. Import the conversion loss table for the RPG FS-Z75 mixer, which is provided with
the device. a) Select the "Conversion Loss Table" tab. b) Select "Import Table".
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
433
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
c) From the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl directory, select the 100112_MAG_4_B5000_3G5.B5G file.
d) Select [ENTER].
3. Switch to the "Mixer Settings" tab.
4. Select the "Mixer Type": "3-port".
5. Select "Mixer Settings > Band" to define the required frequency range.
6. From the "Band" selection list, select the band "V".
7. A span is automatically set which covers the whole V band (50 GHz to 75 GHz).
8. In the "Mixer Settings", select "Conversion Loss: Table" for Range 1 to define frequency-dependent level correction.
9. From the selection list, select the 100112_MAG_4_B5000_3G5.B5G conversion loss table which you imported previously. No further settings are necessary since the selected file contains all required parameters.
Now you can analyze the broadband signal with an analysis bandwidth of 5 GHz.
7.2.6 Output Settings
Access: [Input/Output] > "Output" The R&S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices. For details on connectors, refer to the R&S FSW Getting Started manual, "Front / Rear Panel View" chapters.
Providing trigger signals as output is described in Chapter 7.2.7, "Trigger Input/Output Settings", on page 436. Providing output for LISN control in EMI measurements is described in Chapter 6.13.4.3, "LISN Control Settings", on page 344.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
434
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Data Output.................................................................................................................435 Noise Source Control.................................................................................................. 436
Data Output Defines the type of signal available at one of the output connectors of the R&S FSW.
For restrictions and additional information, see Chapter 7.2.1.3, "IF and Video Signal Output", on page 359.
"IF"
The measured IF value is provided at the IF/VIDEO/DEMOD output
connector.
For bandwidths up to 80 MHZ, the IF output is provided at the speci-
fied "IF Out Frequency" .
If an optional bandwidth extension R&S FSW-B160/-B320/-B512 is
used, the measured IF value is available at the "IF WIDE OUTPUT"
connector. The frequency at which this value is output is determined
automatically. It is displayed as the "IF Wide Out Frequency" . For
details on the used frequencies, see the data sheet.
This setting is not available for bandwidths larger than 512 MHz.
"2ND IF"
The measured IF value is provided at the "IF OUT 2 GHz/ IF OUT 5 GHz " output connector, if available, at a frequency of 2 GHz and with a bandwidth of 2 GHz. The availability of this connector depends on the instrument model. This setting is not available if the optional 2 GHz / 5 GHz bandwidth extension (R&S FSW-B2000/B5000) is active.
"Video"
The displayed video signal (i.e. the filtered and detected IF signal, 200mV) is available at the IF/VIDEO/DEMOD output connector. This setting is required to provide demodulated audio frequencies at the output. It is not available for frequency sweeps or I/Q measurements. The video output is a signal of 1 V. It can be used, for example, to control demodulated audio frequencies.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
435
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Remote command: OUTPut<up>:IF[:SOURce] on page 1129 OUTPut<up>:IF:IFFRequency on page 1129 SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume on page 1130
Noise Source Control The R&S FSW provides a connector ("NOISE SOURCE CONTROL") with a 28 V voltage supply for an external noise source. By switching the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off in the firmware, you can enable or disable the device as required.
External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R&S FSW itself, for example when measuring the noise level of an amplifier.
In this case, you can first connect an external noise source (whose noise power level is known in advance) to the R&S FSW and measure the total noise power. From this value you can determine the noise power of the R&S FSW. Then when you measure the power level of the actual DUT, you can deduct the known noise level from the total power to obtain the power level of the DUT.
Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:NSOurce on page 1128
7.2.7 Trigger Input/Output Settings
Access: "Overview" > "Trigger" > "Trigger In/Out" Or: [TRIG] > "Trigger Config" > "Trigger In/Out" The R&S FSW can use a signal from an external device as a trigger to capture data. Alternatively, the internal trigger signal used by the R&S FSW can be output for use by other connected devices.
Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in Chapter 7.2.1.2, "Receiving and Providing Trigger Signals", on page 358 and Chapter 7.2.8, "How to Output a Trigger Signal", on page 438.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
436
R&S�FSW Trigger 2/3
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Defines the usage of the variable Trigger Input/Output connectors, where:
"Trigger 2" : Trigger Input/Output connector on the front panel
(not available for R&S FSW85 models with 2 RF input connectors)
"Trigger 3" : Trigger 3 Input/Output connector on the rear panel
(Trigger 1 is INPUT only.)
"Input"
The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R&S FSW. Trigger input parameters are available in the "Trigger" dialog box.
"Output"
The R&S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices. Further trigger parameters are available for the connector.
Remote command: OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:DIRection on page 1168
Output Type Trigger 2/3 Type of signal to be sent to the output
"Device Triggered"
(Default) Sends a trigger when the R&S FSW triggers.
"Trigger Armed"
Sends a (high level) trigger when the R&S FSW is in "Ready for trigger" state. This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus:OPERation register (bit 5), as well as by a low-level signal at the AUX port (pin 9). For details, see "STATus:OPERation Register" on page 799 and the R&S FSW Getting Started manual.
"User Defined" Sends a trigger when you select the "Send Trigger" button. In this case, further parameters are available for the output signal.
Remote command: OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:OTYPe on page 1169
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
437
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output
Level Output Type Trigger 2/3 Defines whether a high (1) or low (0) constant signal is sent to the trigger output connector. The trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined here. For example, for "Level = High", a constant high signal is output to the connector until you select the Send Trigger function. Then, a low pulse is provided.
Remote command: OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:LEVel on page 1168
Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2/3 Defines the duration of the pulse (pulse width) sent as a trigger to the output connector. Remote command: OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:LENGth on page 1170
Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2/3 Sends a user-defined trigger to the output connector immediately. Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting. For example, for "Level" = "High", a constant high signal is output to the connector until you select the "Send Trigger" function. Then, a low pulse is sent. Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button. Remote command: OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:IMMediate on page 1169
7.2.8 How to Output a Trigger Signal
Using the variable Trigger 2/3 connector of the R&S FSW, the internal trigger signal can be output for use by other connected devices. For details on the connectors see the R&S FSW "Getting Started" manual.
To output a trigger to a connected device
1. Select [Trigger] > "Trigger Config".
2. Switch to the "Trigger In/Out" tab of the "Trigger and Gate".
3. Set the trigger to be used to "Output". (Note: Trigger 2 is output to the front panel connector, Trigger 3 is output to the rear panel connector. For R&S FSW85 models with two RF input connectors, Trigger 2 is not available.)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
438
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Frequency and Span Configuration
4. Define whether the trigger signal is to be output automatically ("Output Type" = "Device triggered" or "Trigger Armed") or whether you want to start output manually ("Output Type" = "User-defined").
5. For manual output: Specify the constant signal level and the length of the trigger pulse to be output. Note that the level of the trigger pulse is opposite to the constant output "Level" setting (compare the graphic on the "Send Trigger" button).
6. Connect a device that will receive the trigger signal to the configured TRIGGER 2 INPUT / OUTPUT connector.
7. Start a measurement and wait for an internal trigger, or select the "Send Trigger" button.
The configured trigger is output to the connector.
7.3 Frequency and Span Configuration
The frequency and span settings define the scope of the signal and spectrum to be analyzed with the R&S FSW.
Impact of the Frequency and Span Settings......................................................... 439 Frequency and Span Settings...............................................................................441 Keeping the Center Frequency Stable - Signal Tracking...................................... 445 How To Define the Frequency Range................................................................... 446 How to Move the Center Frequency through the Frequency Range.................... 447
7.3.1 Impact of the Frequency and Span Settings
Some background knowledge on the impact of the described settings is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration.
Defining the Scope of the Measurement - Frequency Range............................... 439 Stepping Through the Frequency Range - Center Frequency Stepsize............... 440 Coping with Large Frequency Ranges - Logarithmic Scaling............................... 440
7.3.1.1 Defining the Scope of the Measurement - Frequency Range
The frequency range defines the scope of the signal and spectrum to be analyzed. It can either be defined as a span around a center frequency, or as a range from a start to a stop frequency. Furthermore, the full span comprising the entire possible frequency range can be selected, or a zero span. The full span option allows you to perform an overview measurement over the entire span. Using the "Last Span" function you can easily switch back to the detailed measurement of a specific frequency range.
For sinusoidal signals, the center frequency can be defined automatically by the R&S FSW as the highest frequency level in the frequency span (see " Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically ( Auto Frequency )" on page 498).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
439
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Frequency and Span Configuration
7.3.1.2 Stepping Through the Frequency Range - Center Frequency Stepsize
Using the arrow keys you can move the center frequency in discrete steps through the available frequency range. The step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased is defined by the "Center Frequency Stepsize" .
The "Center Frequency Stepsize" also defines the step size by which the value is increased or decreased when you use the rotary knob to change the center frequency; however, the rotary knob moves in steps of only 1/10 of the "Center Frequency Stepsize" to allow for a more precise setting.
By default, the step size is set in relation to the selected span or resolution bandwidth (for zero span measurements). In some cases, however, it may be useful to set the step size to other values.
For example, to analyze signal harmonics, you can define the step size to be equal to the center frequency. In this case, each stroke of the arrow key selects the center frequency of another harmonic. Similarly, you can define the step size to be equal to the current marker frequency.
7.3.1.3 Coping with Large Frequency Ranges - Logarithmic Scaling
In a linear display, the frequencies are distributed linearly across the x-axis. That means the entire frequency range is divided by the number of sweep points, and the distance between sweep points is equal. Linear scaling is useful to determine precise frequencies within a small range.
1 MHz
10 MHz
Figure 7-23: Linear x-axis scaling: the distance between the sweep points is equal, e.g. 200 kHz
However, if high and low frequencies appear in the same display, it is difficult to determine individual frequencies precisely or to distinguish frequencies that are close together.
In a logarithmic display, lower frequencies are distributed among a much larger area of the display, while high frequencies are condensed to a smaller area. Now it is much easier to distinguish several lower frequencies, as they are spread over a wider area. Logarithmic scaling is useful for overview measurements when a large frequency range must be displayed in one diagram.
Note that logarithmic scaling is only available if R&S FSW-K54 is installed.
However, with logarithmic scaling, the frequency resolution between two sweep points deteriorates with higher frequencies.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
440
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Frequency and Span Configuration
1 Hz
1 MHz
1 GHz
Figure 7-24: Logarithmic x-axis scaling: the distance between sweep points is variable
In the spectrum from 10 Hz to 100 Hz, the distance is a few Hz. Between 100 MHz and 1 GHz, the distance is several MHz.
Thus, for logarithmic x-axis scaling, the number of sweep points must be sufficiently high in order to distinguish high frequencies precisely. The resolution bandwidth should cover at least one sweep point (that means: the distance between two sweep points should not exceed the RBW). If this condition is not met, signals or interferers could be missed, especially narrowband interferers.
Insufficient measurement points Filter may miss a signal
Resolution filter bandwidth covers one measurement point
Resolution filter bandwidth covers several measurement points
7.3.2 Frequency and Span Settings
Access: "Overview" > "Frequency" For more information see Chapter 7.3.4, "How To Define the Frequency Range", on page 446.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
441
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Frequency and Span Configuration
Center Frequency ...................................................................................................... 443 Span ...........................................................................................................................443 Start / Stop ................................................................................................................. 443 Frequency Axis Scaling ..............................................................................................443 Full Span .................................................................................................................... 444 Zero Span .................................................................................................................. 444 Last Span ................................................................................................................... 444 Center Frequency Stepsize ........................................................................................444 Frequency Offset ........................................................................................................445
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
442
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Frequency and Span Configuration
Center Frequency Defines the center frequency of the signal in Hertz. The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span. span > 0: spanmin/2 fcenter fmax � spanmin/2 zero span: 0 Hz fcenter fmax fmax and spanmin depend on the instrument and are specified in the data sheet. Remote command: [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer on page 1132
Span Defines the frequency span. The center frequency is kept constant. The following range is allowed: span = 0: 0 Hz span >0: spanmin f span f max fmax and spanmin are specified in the data sheet. For more information see Chapter 7.3.1.1, "Defining the Scope of the Measurement Frequency Range", on page 439. Remote command: [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN on page 1135
Start / Stop Defines the start and stop frequencies. The following range of values is allowed: fmin fstart fmax � spanmin fmin + spanmin fstop fmax fmin, fmax and spanmin are specified in the data sheet. Remote command: [SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt on page 1135 [SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP on page 1135
Frequency Axis Scaling Switches between linear and logarithmic scaling for the frequency axis. Logarithmic scaling is only available if R&S FSW-K54 is installed. By default, the frequency axis has linear scaling. Logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis, however, is common for measurements over large frequency ranges as it enhances the resolution of the lower frequencies. On the other hand, high frequencies get more crowded and become harder to distinguish. For more information see Chapter 7.3.1.3, "Coping with Large Frequency Ranges Logarithmic Scaling", on page 440. Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing on page 1132
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
443
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Frequency and Span Configuration
Full Span Sets the span to the full frequency range of the R&S FSW specified in the data sheet. This setting is useful for overview measurements.
Remote command: [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL on page 1135
Zero Span Sets the span to 0 Hz (zero span). The x-axis becomes the time axis with the grid lines corresponding to 1/10 of the current sweep time ( "SWT" ).
For details see Chapter 6.1, "Basic Measurements", on page 125.
Remote command: FREQ:SPAN 0Hz, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN on page 1135
Last Span Sets the span to the previous value. With this function you can switch between an overview measurement and a detailed measurement quickly.
Remote command: [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN on page 1135
Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed. When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in much smaller steps (1/10 the size as for the arrow keys).
The step size can be coupled to the span (span > 0) or the resolution bandwidth (span = 0), or it can be manually set to a fixed value.
For more details see Chapter 7.3.1.2, "Stepping Through the Frequency Range - Center Frequency Stepsize", on page 440.
"0.1 * Span" / "0.1 * RBW"
Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 % of the span / RBW. This is the default setting.
"0.5 * Span" / Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 % of the span / "0.5 * RBW" RBW.
"x * Span" / "x * RBW"
Sets the step size for the center frequency to a manually defined factor of the span / RBW. The "X-Factor" defines the percentage of the span / RBW. Values between 1 and 100 % in steps of 1 % are allowed. The default setting is 10 %.
"= Center"
Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth. The used value is indicated in the "Value" field.
"= Marker"
This setting is only available if a marker is active. Sets the step size to the value of the current marker and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth. The used value is indicated in the "Value" field.
"Manual"
Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency. Enter the step size in the "Value" field.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
444
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Frequency and Span Configuration
Remote command: [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK on page 1133 [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor on page 1134 [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP on page 1133
Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x-axis by the defined offset.
This parameter has no effect on the instrument's hardware, or on the captured data or on data processing. It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute frequency values are displayed. Thus, the x-axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies. However, if it shows frequencies relative to the signal's center frequency, it is not shifted.
A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup, for example.
The allowed values range from -1 THz to 1 THz. The default setting is 0 Hz.
Remote command: [SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet on page 1134
7.3.3 Keeping the Center Frequency Stable - Signal Tracking
If the signal drifts on the display but you want to keep the center frequency on the signal peak, the center frequency can be adjusted automatically using signal tracking. In this case, the signal trace is surveyed in a specified bandwidth around the expected center frequency. After each sweep, the center frequency is set to the maximum signal found within the searched bandwidth. If no maximum signal above a defined threshold value is found in the searched bandwidth, the center frequency remains unchanged. The search bandwidth and the threshold value are shown in the diagram by red lines which are labeled as "TRK" .
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
445
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Frequency and Span Configuration
Signal Tracking Access: "Overview" > "Frequency" > "Signal Tracking" tab Defines the settings for signal tracking. These settings are only available for spans > 0. For more details see Chapter 7.3.3, "Keeping the Center Frequency Stable - Signal Tracking", on page 445. If activated, after each sweep, the center frequency is set to the maximum level of the specified "Signal Track Trace" found within the searched "Tracking Bandwidth" . If the signal level does not pass the "Tracking Threshold" , the center frequency is not changed. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] on page 1136 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth on page 1136 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold on page 1137 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe on page 1137
7.3.4 How To Define the Frequency Range
The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to configure the frequency and span settings. For details on individual functions and settings see Chapter 7.3.2, "Frequency and Span Settings", on page 441.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
446
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 13.7.2, "Defining the Frequency and Span", on page 1131.
To configure the frequency and span
Frequency and span settings can be configured via the "Frequency" dialog box. Signal tracking is configured in the "Signal Tracking" tab of this dialog box.
1. To display the "Frequency" dialog box, do one of the following:
Select "Frequency" from the "Overview" . Select the [FREQ] key and then the "Frequency Config" softkey. Select the [SPAN] key and then the "Frequency Config" softkey.
2. Define the frequency range using one of the following methods:
Define the "Center Frequency" and "Span" . Define the "Start Frequency" and "Stop Frequency" . To perform a measurement in the time domain, define the "Center Frequency"
and select the "Zero Span" button. To perform a measurement over the entire available frequency range, select
the "Full Span" button. To return to the previously set frequency range, select the "Last Span" button.
7.3.5 How to Move the Center Frequency through the Frequency Range
In some cases it may be useful to move the center frequency through a larger frequency range, for example from one harmonic to another.
1. In the "Frequency" dialog box, define the "Center Frequency Stepsize" . This is the size by which the center frequency is to be increased or decreased in each step. Enter a manual or relative value, or set the step size to the current center frequency or marker value. To move from one harmonic to the next, use the center frequency or marker value.
2. Select the "Center Frequency" dialog field.
3. Use the arrow keys to move the center frequency in discrete steps through the available frequency range.
7.4 Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration
In the Spectrum application, measurement results usually consist of the measured signal levels (amplitudes) displayed on the vertical (y-)axis for the determined frequency spectrum or for the measurement time (horizontal, x-axis). The settings for the vertical axis, regarding amplitude and scaling, are described here.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
447
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration
Impact of the Vertical Axis Settings.......................................................................448 Amplitude Settings................................................................................................ 450 Scaling the Y-Axis................................................................................................. 456 How to Optimize the Amplitude Display................................................................ 457
7.4.1 Impact of the Vertical Axis Settings
Some background knowledge on the impact of the described settings is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration.
Reference Level....................................................................................................448 RF Attenuation...................................................................................................... 449 Scaling.................................................................................................................. 450
7.4.1.1 Reference Level
The reference level value is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value. Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly, which is indicated by the "IF Overload" status display.
Internally, the reference level is also used to determine the optimum hardware settings for the R&S FSW. The defined reference level should correspond with the maximum expected RF input level.
When determining the expected input level, consider that the power from all input signals contribute to the total power. The reference level must be higher than the total power from all signals.
The optimum reference level for the current measurement settings can be set automatically by the R&S FSW (see " Reference Level " on page 451).
The reference level determines the amplitude represented by the topmost grid line in the display. When you change the reference level, the measurement is not restarted; the results are merely shifted in the display. Only if the reference level changes due to a coupled RF attenuation (see " Attenuation Mode / Value " on page 453), the measurement is restarted.
In general, the R&S FSW measures the signal voltage at the RF input. The level display is calibrated in RMS values of an unmodulated sine wave signal. In the default state, the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW (= dBm). Via the known input impedance, conversion to other units is possible.
See " Impedance " on page 363.
Reference level offset
If the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R&S FSW, you can define an (arithmetic) offset to the reference level so the application shows correct power results. All displayed power level results are shifted by this value, and the scaling of the y-axis is changed accordingly.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
448
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration
To determine the required offset, consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal. For attenuation, define a positive offset so the R&S FSW increases the displayed power values.
If an external gain is applied, define a negative offset so the R&S FSW decreases the displayed power values.
Note, however, that the internal reference level (used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally) ignores any "Reference Level Offset" . Thus, it is important to keep in mind the actual power level the R&S FSW must handle, and not to rely on the displayed reference level.
internal reference level = displayed reference level - offset
Example
1. The initial reference level is 2 dBm with no offset.
Both the displayed reference level and the internal reference level are 2 dBm.
2. An offset of 3 dB is defined.
The displayed reference level is adjusted to 5 dBm. The internal reference level remains at 2 dBm. (5 dBm (displayed ref level) - 3 dB (offset) = 2 dBm)
3. Now the user decreases the reference level to 1 dBm.
The displayed reference level is adjusted to 1 dBm. The internal reference level is adjusted to: 1 dBm (displayed ref level) - 3 dB (offset) = -2 dBm.
7.4.1.2 RF Attenuation
The attenuation is meant to protect the input mixer from high RF input levels. The level at the input mixer is determined by the set RF attenuation according to the formula:
"levelmixer = levelinput � RF attenuation"
The maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm.
Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results, which is indicated by the "RF Overload" status display. Furthermore, higher input levels may damage the instrument. Therefore, the required RF attenuation is determined automatically according to the reference level by default.
High attenuation levels also avoid intermodulation. On the other hand, attenuation must be compensated for by re-amplifying the signal levels after the mixer. Thus, high attenuation values cause the inherent noise (i.e the noise floor) to rise and the sensitivity of the analyzer decreases.
The sensitivity of a signal analyzer is directly influenced by the selected RF attenuation. The highest sensitivity is obtained at an RF attenuation of 0 dB. Each additional 10 dB step reduces the sensitivity by 10 dB, i.e. the displayed noise is increased by 10 dB. To measure a signal with an improved signal-to-noise ratio, decrease the RF attenuation.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
449
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration
For ideal sinusoidal signals, the displayed signal level is independent of the RF attenuation.
Depending on the type of measurement you must find a compromise between a low noise floor and high intermodulation levels, and protecting the instrument from high input levels. You achieve this best by letting the R&S FSW determine the optimum level automatically (see " Attenuation Mode / Value " on page 453).
Electronic attenuation If the optional electronic attenuation hardware is installed on the R&S FSW, you can also activate an electronic attenuator. For details, see " Using Electronic Attenuation " on page 453.
7.4.1.3 Scaling
In a linear display, the measurement values are distributed linearly throughout the grid. That means the entire range of measured values is divided by the number of rows in the grid (10) and each row corresponds to 1/10 of the total range. Linear scaling is useful to determine precise levels for a small range of values. However, if large and small values appear in the same display, it is difficult to determine individual values precisely or to distinguish values that are close together.
In a logarithmic display, smaller values are distributed among a much larger area of the display, while large values are condensed to a smaller area. Now it is much easier to distinguish several lower values, as they are spread over a wider area. Logarithmic scaling is useful when large ranges of values must be combined in one display. Logarithmic scaling is best applied to measurement values in logarithmic units (dB, dBm etc.).
In addition to linear or logarithmic scaling, the vertical axis can be set to display either absolute or relative values. Absolute values show the measured levels, while relative values show the difference between the measured level and the defined reference level. Relative values are indicated in percent for linear scaling, and in dB for logarithmic scaling.
7.4.2 Amplitude Settings
Access: "Overview" > "Amplitude"
Amplitude settings determine how the R&S FSW must process or display the expected input power levels.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 13.7.4.1, "Amplitude Settings", on page 1146.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
450
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration
Reference Level ......................................................................................................... 451 Shifting the Display ( Offset )........................................................................ 452 Unit ...............................................................................................................452 Setting the Reference Level Automatically ( Auto Level ).............................453
RF Attenuation ........................................................................................................... 453 Attenuation Mode / Value .............................................................................453
Using Electronic Attenuation ...................................................................................... 453 Input Settings ............................................................................................................. 454
Preamplifier ..................................................................................................454 Ext. PA Correction.........................................................................................455 Noise Cancellation ..................................................................................................... 455
Reference Level Defines the expected maximum input signal level. Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly, which is indicated by the "IF Overload" status display ( "OVLD" for analog baseband or digital baseband input).
The reference level can also be used to scale power diagrams; the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y-axis.
Since the hardware of the R&S FSW is adapted according to this value, it is recommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level. Thus you ensure an optimum measurement (no compression, good signal-tonoise ratio).
For details, see Chapter 7.4.1.1, "Reference Level", on page 448.
Note that for input from the External Mixer (R&S FSW-B21) the maximum reference level also depends on the conversion loss, see "Reference level" on page 409.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
451
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel on page 1147
Shifting the Display ( Offset ) Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset. This offset is added to the measured level. In some result displays, the scaling of the y-axis is changed accordingly.
Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R&S FSW so the application shows correct power results. All displayed power level results are shifted by this value.
The setting range is �200 dB in 0.01 dB steps.
Note, however, that the internal reference level (used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal) ignores any "Reference Level Offset" . Thus, it is important to keep in mind the actual power level the R&S FSW must handle. Do not rely on the displayed reference level (internal reference level = displayed reference level - offset).
For details, see "Reference level offset" on page 448.
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet on page 1148
Unit Reference Level The R&S FSW measures the signal voltage at the RF input.
In the default state, the level is displayed at a power level of 1 mW (= dBm). Via the known input impedance (50 or 75 , see " Impedance " on page 363), conversion to other units is possible.
The following units are available and directly convertible: dBm dBmV dBV dBm/MHz (power density) dBA dBpW Volt Ampere Watt
Additional units available only for installed R&S FSW-K54 (EMI measurements) option. The "dBx/MHz" units are normalized to the pulse bandwidth and intended to be used only for EMI and EMC measurements. They are not suitable to measure power densities in the spectrum application. dBmV/MHz (normalized to 1 MHz) dB�V/MHz (normalized to 1 MHz) dB�V/mMHz (normalized to 1 MHz)
(only available for active transducers with dB�V/m values) dB�A/MHz (normalized to 1 MHz) dB�A/mMHz (normalized to 1 MHz)
(only available for active transducers with dB�A/m values) dBpW/MHz (normalized to 1 MHz)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
452
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration
Remote command: INPut<ip>:IMPedance on page 1081 CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer on page 1147
Setting the Reference Level Automatically ( Auto Level ) Reference Level Automatically determines a reference level which ensures that no overload occurs at the R&S FSW for the current input data. At the same time, the internal attenuators and the preamplifier (for analog baseband input: the full scale level) are adjusted so the signal-to-noise ratio is optimized, while signal compression and clipping are minimized. To determine the required reference level, a level measurement is performed on the R&S FSW.
If necessary, you can optimize the reference level further. Decrease the attenuation level manually to the lowest possible value before an overload occurs, then decrease the reference level in the same way. You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary (see " Changing the Automatic Measurement Time ( Meastime Manual )" on page 499). Remote command: [SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel on page 1174
RF Attenuation Defines the attenuation applied to the RF input of the R&S FSW.
Attenuation Mode / Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level (Auto mode). This ensures that no overload occurs at the RF Input connector for the current reference level. It is the default setting. By default and when no (optional) electronic attenuation is available, mechanical attenuation is applied. In "Manual" mode, you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps (down to 0 dB). Other entries are rounded to the next integer value. The range is specified in the data sheet. If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation, the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning "limit reached" is displayed.
NOTICE! Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels. When decreasing the attenuation manually, ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input, as an overload may lead to hardware damage. For details, see Chapter 7.4.1.2, "RF Attenuation", on page 449. Remote command: INPut<ip>:ATTenuation on page 1149 INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 1149
Using Electronic Attenuation If the (optional) Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the R&S FSW, you can also activate an electronic attenuator. In "Auto" mode, the settings are defined automatically; in "Manual" mode, you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
453
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration
Note: Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies (or center frequencies in zero span) above 15 GHz. In "Auto" mode, RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required. Mechanical attenuation may provide a better signal-to-noise ratio, however.
When you switch off electronic attenuation, the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode (auto/manual) as the electronic attenuation was set to. Thus, the RF attenuation can be set to automatic mode, and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator, if possible.
The electronic attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps. If the electronic attenuation is on, the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 5 dB steps. Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value.
For the R&S FSW85, the mechanical attenuation can be varied only in 10 dB steps.
If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation, the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning "limit reached" is displayed in the status bar.
Remote command: INPut<ip>:EATT:STATe on page 1151 INPut<ip>:EATT:AUTO on page 1150 INPut<ip>:EATT on page 1150
Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal, as well.
The parameters "Input Coupling" and "Impedance" are identical to those in the "Input" settings.
See Chapter 7.2.2, "Input Source Settings", on page 361.
Preamplifier Input Settings If the (optional) internal preamplifier hardware is installed, a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal.
You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low output power.
Note that if an optional external preamplifier is activated, the internal preamplifier is automatically disabled, and vice versa.
For all R&S FSW models except for R&S FSW85, the following settings are available:
"Off"
Deactivates the preamplifier.
"15 dB"
The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB.
"30 dB"
The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB.
For R&S FSW85 models, the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the preamplifier is activated.
Remote command: INPut<ip>:GAIN:STATe on page 1152 INPut<ip>:GAIN[:VALue] on page 1153
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
454
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration
Ext. PA Correction Input Settings This function is only available if an external preamplifier is connected to the R&S FSW, and only for frequencies above 1 GHz. For details on connection, see the preamplifier's documentation.
Using an external preamplifier, you can measure signals from devices under test with low output power, using measurement devices which feature a low sensitivity and do not have a built-in RF preamplifier.
When you connect the external preamplifier, the R&S FSW reads out the touchdown (.S2P) file from the EEPROM of the preamplifier. This file contains the s-parameters of the preamplifier. As soon as you connect the preamplifier to the R&S FSW, the preamplifier is permanently on and ready to use. However, you must enable data correction based on the stored data explicitly on the R&S FSW using this setting.
When enabled, the R&S FSW automatically compensates the magnitude and phase characteristics of the external preamplifier in the measurement results. Any internal preamplifier, if available, is disabled.
An active external preamplifier is also included in the calculation of the combined userdefined frequency response correction filter and displayed in the preview for SnP files (see "Preview" on page 734).
For R&S FSW85 models with two RF inputs, you can enable correction from the external preamplifier for each input individually, but not for both at the same time.
When disabled, no compensation is performed even if an external preamplifier remains connected.
Remote command: INPut<ip>:EGAin[:STATe] on page 1151
Noise Cancellation The R&S FSW can correct the results by removing the inherent noise of the analyzer, which increases the dynamic range.
In this case, a reference measurement of the inherent noise of the analyzer is carried out. The measured noise power is then subtracted from the power in the channel that is being analyzed (first active trace only).
The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency, resolution bandwidth and level setting. Therefore, the correction function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is changed. A disable message is displayed on the screen. To enable the correction function after changing one of these settings, activate it again. A new reference measurement is carried out.
Noise cancellation is also available in zero span.
Currently, noise cancellation is only available for the following trace detectors (see " Detector " on page 586):
RMS Average Sample Positive peak
Remote command: [SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection on page 1148
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
455
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration
7.4.3 Scaling the Y-Axis
The individual scaling settings that affect the vertical axis are described here. Access: "Overview" > "Amplitude" > "Scale" tab Or: [AMPT] > "Scale Config" The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 13.7.4, "Configuring the Vertical Axis (Amplitude, Scaling)", on page 1146.
Range .........................................................................................................................456 Ref Level Position ...................................................................................................... 456 Auto Scale Once ........................................................................................................ 457 Scaling ....................................................................................................................... 457
Range Defines the displayed y-axis range in dB.
The default value is 100 dB.
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] on page 1153
Ref Level Position Defines the reference level position, i.e. the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis in %.
0 % corresponds to the lower and 100 % to the upper limit of the diagram.
Values from -120 % to +600 % are available. Larger values are useful for small scales, such as a power range of 10 dB or 20 dB, and low signal levels, for example 60 dB below the reference level. In this case, large reference level position values allow you to see the trace again.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
456
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration
For spectrograms, this value defines the position of the reference level value within the span covered by the color map. In this case, the value is given in %, where 0 % corresponds to the maximum (right end) and 100 % to the minimum (left end) of the color map.
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition on page 1155
Auto Scale Once Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be displayed for the current measurement settings.
The display is only set once; it is not adapted further if the measurement settings are changed again.
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO ONCE on page 1154
Scaling Defines the scaling method for the y-axis.
For more information, see Chapter 7.4.1.3, "Scaling", on page 450.
"Logarithmic" Logarithmic scaling (only available for logarithmic units - dB..., and A, V, Watt)
"Linear with Unit"
Linear scaling in the unit of the measured signal
"Linear Percent"
Linear scaling in percentages from 0 to 100
"Absolute"
The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the reference level (not available for "Linear Percent" )
"Relative"
The scaling is in dB, relative to the reference level (only available for logarithmic units - dB...). The upper line of the grid (reference level) is always at 0 dB.
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing on page 1155
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE on page 1154
7.4.4 How to Optimize the Amplitude Display
This section gives you some advice on how to optimize the display of the measured signal amplitudes depending on the required evaluation.
1. Perform a measurement with the default settings to get an impression of the values to be expected.
2. Use the "Auto Level" function ([AUTO] menu) to optimize the reference level. 3. Use the "AF Auto Scale" function ([AUTO] menu) to optimize the scaling. 4. To determine a precise level at a specific point in the signal:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
457
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration
Reduce the "Range" of the y-axis to a small area around the required level. If necessary, change the "Ref Level Position" so the required range remains visible.
Select "Linear with Unit" scaling.
Now you can set a marker at the point in question and read the result.
5. To detect a spurious signal close to the noise floor:
Set the "RF Attenuation" to "Manual" mode and reduce the "Value" to lower the noise floor.
Select "Relative" - "Logarithmic" scaling.
Now you can determine if any spurious levels of a certain size are visible.
7.5 Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration
The basic bandwidth, filter and sweep settings that apply to most measurements are described here. These parameters define how the data is measured: how much data is collected internally and which filters are used.
Impact of the Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Settings.............................................458 Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Settings.................................................................. 464 Reference: List of Available RRC and Channel Filters......................................... 473
7.5.1 Impact of the Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Settings
The bandwidth, filter and sweep settings are closely related and interdependent. The values available for resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth depend on the selected filter type. In addition, these settings have an impact on other measurement parameters. The following equation shows the interdependency of these settings:
TMIN = K*Span/RBW2
where K = Filter constant
By default, a Gaussian filter is used. The resolution bandwidth, the video bandwidth and the "Sweep Time" are set automatically according to the set span, and default coupling is used. Thus, the following settings are applied:
RBW = 100 * Span
VBW = RBW = 100 * Span
"Sweep Time" = Tmin for set Span, RBW, VBW
When defining the bandwidth and filter settings, consider the impact of the individual settings on the other settings and the measurement result, as described in more detail in the following sections.
Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth............... 459 Smoothing the Trace Using the Video Bandwidth.................................................460 Coupling VBW and RBW...................................................................................... 460
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
458
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration
Coupling Span and RBW...................................................................................... 461 How Data is Measured: the Sweep Type.............................................................. 461 Which Data May Pass: Filter Types...................................................................... 462 How Long the Data is Measured: Sweep Time ....................................................463 How Much Data is Measured: Sweep Points and Sweep Count.......................... 464 How Often Data is Measured: Sweep Mode......................................................... 464
7.5.1.1 Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth
The resolution bandwidth defines the 3 dB bandwidth of the resolution filter to be used. An RF sinusoidal signal is displayed according to the passband characteristic of the resolution filter (RBW), i.e. the signal display reflects the shape of the filter.
A basic feature of a signal analyzer is being able to separate the spectral components of a mixture of signals. The resolution at which the individual components can be separated is determined by the resolution bandwidth. Selecting a resolution bandwidth that is too large may make it impossible to distinguish between spectral components, i.e. they are displayed as a single component. Smaller resolution bandwidths, however, increase the required "Sweep Time" .
Two signals with the same amplitude can be resolved if the resolution bandwidth is smaller than or equal to the frequency spacing of the signal. If the resolution bandwidth is equal to the frequency spacing, the spectrum display screen shows a level drop of 3 dB precisely in the center of the two signals. Decreasing the resolution bandwidth makes the level drop larger, which thus makes the individual signals clearer.
The highest sensitivity is obtained at the smallest bandwidth (1 Hz). If the bandwidth is increased, the reduction in sensitivity is proportional to the change in bandwidth. Increasing the bandwidth by a factor of 3 increases the displayed noise by approx. 5 dB (4.77 dB precisely). If the bandwidth is increased by a factor of 10, the displayed noise increases by a factor of 10, i.e. 10 dB.
If there are large level differences between signals, the resolution is determined by selectivity as well as by the resolution bandwidth that has been selected. The measure of selectivity used for signal analyzers is the ratio of the 60 dB bandwidth to the 3 dB bandwidth (= shape factor).
For the R&S FSW, the shape factor for bandwidths is < 5, i.e. the 60 dB bandwidth of the 30 kHz filter is <150 kHz.
The higher spectral resolution with smaller bandwidths is won by longer sweep times for the same span. The sweep time has to allow the resolution filters to settle during a sweep at all signal levels and frequencies to be displayed.
If the RBW is too large, signal parts that are very far away (e.g. from a different signal) are considered in the measurement and distort the results. The noise increases.
If the RBW is too small, parts of the signal are lost. As the displayed signal always reflects the shape of the filter, select a bandwidth large enough so the displayed signal reflects the entire shape of the filter.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
459
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration
7.5.1.2 Smoothing the Trace Using the Video Bandwidth
The video filters are responsible for smoothing the displayed trace. Using video bandwidths that are small compared to the resolution bandwidth, only the signal average is displayed and noise peaks and pulsed signals are repressed. If pulsed signals are to be measured, it is advisable to use a video bandwidth that is large compared to the resolution bandwidth (VBW = 10 x RBW) for the amplitudes of pulses to be measured correctly.
The level of a sine wave signal is not influenced by the video bandwidth. A sine wave signal can therefore be freed from noise by using a video bandwidth that is small compared with the resolution bandwidth, and thus be measured more accurately.
RMS/Average detector and VBW
If an RMS detector is used, the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed. Thus, duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS or average detector no longer occurs. However, the VBW is still considered when calculating the "Sweep Time" . This leads to a longer "Sweep Time" for small VBW values. Thus, you can reduce the VBW value to achieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector. Normally, if the RMS detector is used, the "Sweep Time" should be increased to get more stable traces.
If an average detector is used, the video bandwidth in the hardware is only bypassed if the video filter is set to "Auto" mode. Use this mode to avoid duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs.
7.5.1.3 Coupling VBW and RBW
The video bandwidth can be coupled to the resolution bandwidth automatically. In this case, if the resolution bandwidth is changed, the video bandwidth is automatically adjusted.
Coupling is recommended if a minimum "Sweep Time" is required for a selected resolution bandwidth. Narrow video bandwidths require longer "Sweep Time" s due to the longer settling time. Wide bandwidths reduce the signal/noise ratio.
Table 7-2: Overview of RBW/VBW ratios and recommendations for use
Ratio RBW/VBW
Recommendation for use
1/1
Recommended for sinusoidal signals
This is the default setting for automatic coupling.
0.1
Recommended when the amplitudes of pulsed signals are to be measured
correctly. The IF filter is exclusively responsible for the pulse shape. No
additional evaluation is performed by the video filter.
10
Recommended to suppress noise and pulsed signals in the video domain.
Manually set (0.001 to 1000) Recommended for other measurement requirements
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
460
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration
7.5.1.4 Coupling Span and RBW
The resolution bandwidth can be coupled to the span setting, either by a manually defined factor or automatically. If the span is changed, the resolution bandwidth is automatically adjusted. The automatic coupling adapts the resolution bandwidth to the currently set frequency span/100.
The 6 dB bandwidths 200 Hz, 9 kHz and 120 kHz and the available channel filters are not changed by the coupling.
With a span/RBW ratio of 100 and a screen resolution of 1000 pixels, each frequency in the spectrum is displayed by 10 pixels. A span/RBW ratio of 1000 provides the highest resolution.
A higher span/RBW ratio (i.e. low RBW values and large frequency spans), however, results in large amounts of data.
7.5.1.5 How Data is Measured: the Sweep Type
In a standard analog frequency sweep, the local oscillator of the analyzer sweeps the applied signal quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency to determine the frequency spectrum.
Alternatively, the analyzer can sample signal levels over time at a defined frequency and transform the data to a spectrum by Fast Fourier Transformation (FFT). Although this measurement method requires additional calculations, it can provide results much faster than the frequency sweep, in particular for small RBWs.
Which sweep mode is appropriate for the current measurement depends on the span, RBW, VBW and "Sweep Time" settings. By default ( "Auto" sweep type), the R&S FSW automatically uses the sweep type with the highest sweep rate depending on these measurement settings.
Restrictions for FFT mode FFT mode is not available when using 5-pole filters, channel filters or RRC filters, or the quasi peak detector. In this case, sweep mode is used. The same applies when an external generator is active (with the optional External Generator Control).
Optimization
In FFT mode, FFT analysis is performed to determine a spectrum of frequencies. Several analysis steps are required to cover the entire span. The subspan which is covered by one FFT analysis depends on the RBW. The subspan cannot be defined directly, but it can be optimized according to measurement requirements.
Narrow subspans provide a higher dynamic range, and also allow you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level. With a wide subspan, the carrier and the useful signal are likely to be measured at the same time, in which case the powers of both signals are summarized, so the reference level must be high enough to consider this factor. With a narrow subspan, this is less likely to happen, so the reference level can be reduced.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
461
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration
For an optimal dynamic range, the narrowest possible subspan (depending on the RBW) is used. Furthermore, the autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is activated to obtain the best control range of the A/D converter. On the other hand, the narrower the subspan, the more steps are required to cover the entire span, thus increasing analysis and calculation time. To optimize the sweep rate, the widest possible subspan (depending on the RBW) is used.
For an optimal sweep rate, it is recommended that you set the "Sweep Time" to "Auto" , as well.
For general purpose measurements, an "Auto" mode is available, which provides a compromise between a large dynamic range and a fast sweep. In this case, a medium-sized subspan is used.
FFT mode and external mixers (R&S FSW-B21) The subspan optimation modes "Dynamic" and "Auto" include automatic suppression of unwanted mixing products. Thus, when using external mixers (R&S FSW-B21), use the "Speed" mode to obtain similar results in FFT mode as in normal sweep mode.
FFT mode and EMI measurements (R&S FSW-K54) For EMI measurements (using R&S FSW-K54), the subspan optimization mode "Dynamic" is not supported. "Auto" mode always uses "Speed" optimization.
Optimization for zero span sweeps For normal sweeps in the time domain (zero span), the optimization mode determines the selection of the A/D converter prefilter, which depends on the RBW. In "Dynamic" mode, the narrowest possible prefilter is used. In "Speed" mode, the widest possible prefilter is used. In "Auto" mode, a medium-sized prefilter is used.
Number of subspans Several analysis steps are required to cover the entire span, in particular if the span exceeds the maximum I/Q bandwidth for a single measurement. In this case, each FFT analysis covers a subspan. The subspan cannot be defined directly, but it can be optimized according to measurement requirements, as described above. The number of required subspans is indicated in the sweep settings dialog box. Thus, you can determine the required measurement time for an individual span (and thus sweep point) as: <Meas time subspan> = <sweep time> / <no. of subspans>
7.5.1.6 Which Data May Pass: Filter Types
While the filter is irrelevant when measuring individual narrowband signals (as long as the signal remains within the RBW), the measurement result for broadband signals is
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
462
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration
very dependant on the selected filter type and its shape. If the filter is too narrow, the signal is distorted by the filter. If the filter is too wide, multiple signals can no longer be distinguished. Generally, the smaller the filter width and the steeper its edges, the longer the settling time and thus the longer the "Sweep Time" must be.
All resolution bandwidths are realized with digital filters. Normal (3dB) Gaussian filters are set by default. Some communication standards require different filters.
For a list of available filter types, see Chapter 7.5.3, "Reference: List of Available RRC and Channel Filters", on page 473.
Normal (3 dB) Gaussian filters
Gaussian filters provide a good compromise between steep edges and a short settling time. This filter is suitable for most measurement tasks and is used by default.
The available Gaussian (3 dB) filters are listed in the R&S FSW data sheet.
Channel filters
Channel filters are fairly steep but require a long settling time; they are useful for pulse measurements in the time domain.
RRC filters
Root raised cosine filters are similar in shape to channel filters and are required by some measurement standards.
5-Pole filters
5-Pole filters are very broad and allow for a large bandwidth to pass.
7.5.1.7 How Long the Data is Measured: Sweep Time
Each filter has a settling time that must be awaited in order to obtain correct results. Since the resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth define the filter, the smaller of the two determines the minimum "Sweep Time" required for the measurement. Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW.
If the selected "Sweep Time" is too short for the selected bandwidth and span, level measurement errors will occur. In this case, the R&S FSW displays the error message "Sweep time too low" and marks the indicated "Sweep Time" with a red bullet. Furthermore, a status bit indicates an error.
(For more information see "STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe Register" on page 806.)
The "Sweep Time" can be coupled to the span (not zero span), video bandwidth (VBW) and resolution bandwidth (RBW) automatically. If the span, resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth is changed, the "Sweep Time" is automatically adjusted.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
463
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration
Note that the "Sweep Time" only indicates how long data is captured; the time required to process the captured data may be considerably longer, in particular for FFT mode. For FFT mode, an estimated duration is indicated behind the "Sweep Time" in the channel bar (for RF measurements only).
7.5.1.8 How Much Data is Measured: Sweep Points and Sweep Count
By default, 1001 data points are determined in a single sweep. During the next sweep, 1001 new data points are collected, and so on. The number of sweep points defines how much of the entire span is covered by a single data point. By increasing the number of sweep points you can increase the reliability of the individual data points and thus the accuracy of the analyzed results. However, these data points are all stored on the instrument, occupying a large amount of memory, and each sweep point increases the overall measurement time.
The number of sweeps to be performed in single sweep mode is defined by the "Sweep Count". Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed. If the values 0 or 1 are set, one sweep is performed. The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram.
If the trace configurations "Average" , "Max Hold" or "Min Hold" are set, the "Sweep/ Average Count" also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures (see "Analyzing Several Traces - Trace Mode" on page 581).
For details on how the number of sweep points and the sweep count affect the trace results on the screen, see "Mapping Samples to sweep Points with the Trace Detector" on page 576.
7.5.1.9 How Often Data is Measured: Sweep Mode
How often the spectrum is swept depends on the sweep mode. Either a certain number of sweeps can be defined ("Sweep Count") which are performed in "Single Sweep" mode, or the sweep is repeated continuously ( "Continuous Sweep" mode).
By default, the data is collected for the specified number of sweeps and the corresponding trace is displayed. When the next sweep is started, the previous trace is deleted.
However, the data from a single sweep run can also be retained and displayed together with the new data ( "Continue Single Sweep" mode). This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations "Average" or "Max Hold" to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging/maximum search (see "Analyzing Several Traces - Trace Mode" on page 581).
7.5.2 Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Settings
Access: "Overview" > "Bandwidth"
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 13.7.3, "Configuring Bandwidth and Sweep Settings", on page 1138.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
464
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration
How to perform a basic sweep measurement is described in Chapter 6.1.2, "How to Perform a Basic Sweep Measurement", on page 126.
Figure 7-25: Bandwidth dialog box for RF measurements
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
465
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration
Figure 7-26: Sweep dialog box for spectrogram display
RBW ...........................................................................................................................467 VBW ........................................................................................................................... 467 Sweep Time ............................................................................................................... 467 Span/RBW ................................................................................................................. 468 RBW/VBW ..................................................................................................................468 Filter Type .................................................................................................................. 468 Default Coupling .........................................................................................................469 Sweep/Average Count ............................................................................................... 469 Sweep Points.............................................................................................................. 470 Optimization ............................................................................................................... 470 Sweep Type ............................................................................................................... 471 FFT Subspans.............................................................................................................471 Single Sweep / Run Single .........................................................................................471 Continuous Sweep / Run Cont ...................................................................................472 Continue Single Sweep ..............................................................................................472 Spectrogram Frames ................................................................................................. 472
Select Frame.................................................................................................473 Continue Frame ........................................................................................... 473 Frame Count ................................................................................................ 473 Clear Spectrogram .......................................................................................473
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
466
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration
RBW Defines the resolution bandwidth. The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet. Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth.
If "Auto" is selected, the resolution bandwidth is coupled to the selected span (for span > 0). If the span is changed, the resolution bandwidth is automatically adjusted.
If the resolution bandwidth is defined manually, a green bullet is displayed next to the "RBW" display in the channel bar.
For more information see Chapter 7.5.1.1, "Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth", on page 459.
Note: Restrictions. For measurements on I/Q data in the frequency domain, the maximum RBW is
1 MHz. For EMI measurements using the quasipeak detector, the 1 MHz RBW filter is not
available (see Chapter 6.13.3.1, "Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types", on page 328).
Remote command: [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 1138 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO on page 1139
VBW Defines the video bandwidth automatically or manually.
For more information see Chapter 7.5.1.2, "Smoothing the Trace Using the Video Bandwidth", on page 460.
"Auto"
The video bandwidth is coupled to the resolution bandwidth. If the resolution bandwidth is changed, the video bandwidth is automatically adjusted.
"Manual"
For manual mode, define the bandwidth value. The available video bandwidths are specified in the data sheet. Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth. If the video bandwidth is defined manually, a green bullet is displayed next to the "VBW" display in the channel bar.
Remote command: [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO on page 1140 [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo on page 1140
Sweep Time Defines the duration of a single sweep, during which the defined number of sweep points are measured. The "Sweep Time" can be defined automatically or manually.
The allowed "Sweep Time" s depend on the device model; refer to the data sheet.
For more information see Chapter 7.5.1.7, "How Long the Data is Measured: Sweep Time ", on page 463.
Note: The "Sweep Time" only indicates how long data is captured; the time required to process the captured data may be considerably longer, in particular for FFT mode. For FFT mode, an estimated duration is indicated behind the "Sweep Time" in the channel bar (for RF measurements only).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
467
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration
"Auto"
The "Sweep Time" is coupled to the span (not zero span), video bandwidth (VBW) and resolution bandwidth (RBW). If the span, resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth is changed, the "Sweep Time" is automatically adjusted.
"Manual"
For manual mode, define the "Sweep Time" . Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW. For details refer to the data sheet. Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible "Sweep Time" .
Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 1145 [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME on page 1144 [SENSe:]SWEep:DURation? on page 1142
Span/RBW Sets the coupling ratio if RBW is set to auto mode.
For more information see Chapter 7.5.1.4, "Coupling Span and RBW", on page 461.
"Auto[100]"
"Resolution Bandwidth" = "Span/100" This coupling ratio is the default setting of the R&S FSW.
"Manual"
The coupling ratio is defined manually. The span/resolution bandwidth ratio can be set in the range from 1 to 10000.
Remote command: [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio on page 1139
RBW/VBW Sets the coupling ratio between the resolution bandwidth and the video bandwidth.
This setting is only effective if VBW is set to auto mode.
For more information see Chapter 7.5.1.3, "Coupling VBW and RBW", on page 460.
"Sine[1/1]"
"Video Bandwidth" = "Resolution Bandwidth" This is the default setting for the coupling ratio RBW/VBW and is recommended if sinusoidal signals are to be measured.
"Pulse[0.1]"
"Video Bandwidth" = 10 x "Resolution Bandwidth" or "Video Bandwidth" = "10 MHz" (= max. VBW) Recommended for pulse signals
"Noise[10]"
"Video Bandwidth" = "Resolution Bandwidth/10" Recommended for noise measurements
"Manual"
The coupling ratio is defined manually. The RBW/VBW ratio can be set in the range of 0.001 to 1000.
Remote command: [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO on page 1140 [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:RATio on page 1141
Filter Type Defines the filter type.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
468
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration
The following filter types are available:
Normal (3dB) Channel RRC 5-Pole (not available for sweep type "FFT" ) CISPR (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option MIL Std (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option For more information see Chapter 7.5.1.6, "Which Data May Pass: Filter Types", on page 462.
Note: The EMI-specific filter types are available if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement option is installed, even if EMI measurement is not active. For details see Chapter 6.13.3.1, "Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types", on page 328. The RBW filter configured in the bandwidth settings is identical to the filter configured in the EMI configuration.
Remote command: [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE on page 1139
Default Coupling Sets all coupled functions to the default state ( "Auto" ). In addition, the ratio "RBW/ VBW" is set to "Sine[1/1]" and the ratio "Span/RBW" to 100.
For more information see Chapter 7.5.1.3, "Coupling VBW and RBW", on page 460.
Remote command: [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO on page 1139 [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO on page 1140 [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 1145
Sweep/Average Count Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode. Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed. If the values 0 or 1 are set, one sweep is performed.
The sweep count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams.
If the trace modes "Average" , "Max Hold" or "Min Hold" are set, this value also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures.
In continuous sweep mode, if "Sweep Count" = 0 (default), averaging is performed over 10 sweeps. For "Sweep Count" =1, no averaging, maxhold or minhold operations are performed.
For more information, see Chapter 7.5.1.8, "How Much Data is Measured: Sweep Points and Sweep Count", on page 464.
For spectrogram displays, the sweep count determines how many sweeps are combined in one frame in the spectrogram; that is: how many sweeps the R&S FSW performs to plot one trace in the spectrogram result display. For more details, see "Time Frames" on page 592.
Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt on page 1142 [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:COUNt on page 1182
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
469
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration
Sweep Points Defines the number of measured values to be collected during one sweep.
For details see Chapter 7.5.1.8, "How Much Data is Measured: Sweep Points and Sweep Count", on page 464.
All values from 101 to 100001 can be set. The default value is 1001 sweep points.
For EMI measurements, 200001 sweep points are available.
Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep[:WINDow<n>]:POINts on page 1144
Optimization In FFT mode, several FFT analysis steps are required to cover the entire measurement span. The span which is covered by one FFT analysis step is called subspan. The subspan cannot be defined directly, but it can be optimized according to measurement requirements.
Note: To determine the number of required subspans for the measurement, see "FFT Subspans" on page 471.
Table 7-3: Optimization parameters in FFT mode
Optimization mode Description
Dynamic
Optimizes the dynamic range by using the narrowest possible subspan (depending on the RBW).
The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is activated to obtain the best control range for the A/D converter.
Speed
Optimizes the sweep rate by using the widest possible subspan (depending on the RBW).
The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is deactivated. (Note: set the reference level accordingly to optimize the control range for the A/D converter).
It is recommended that you set the Sweep Time to "Auto" to optimize the sweep rate.
Auto
Uses a medium-sized subspan to obtain a compromise between a large dynamic range and a fast sweep rate.
The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is deactivated. (Note: set the reference level accordingly to optimize the control range for the A/D converter).
Note: FFT mode and external mixers (R&S FSW-B21)
The subspan optimization modes "Dynamic" and "Auto" include automatic suppression of unwanted mixing products. Thus, when using external mixers (R&S FSW-B21), use the "Speed" mode to obtain similar results in FFT mode as in frequency sweep mode.
Zero span mode
For zero span measurements, the optimization mode defines the selection of the A/D converter prefilter.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
470
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration
Table 7-4: Optimization parameters in zero span mode Optimization mode Description
Dynamic
The narrowest filter possible (depending on the RBW) is used.
Speed
The widest filter possible (depending on the RBW) is used.
Auto
A medium-sized prefilter is used.
Note: EMI measurements For EMI measurements (using R&S FSW-K54), "Dynamic" mode is not supported. "Auto" mode always uses "Speed" optimization.
Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:OPTimize on page 1143
Sweep Type Defines the sweep type.
"Sweep"
In the standard sweep mode, the local oscillator is set to provide the spectrum quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency.
"Auto"
Automatically sets the fastest available sweep type for the current measurement (Frequency or FFT). Auto mode is set by default.
"FFT"
The FFT sweep samples on a defined frequency value and transforms it to the spectrum by fast Fourier transformation (FFT) (see also Chapter 7.5.1.5, "How Data is Measured: the Sweep Type", on page 461).
FFT is not available in the following cases: When using 5-Pole filters or RRC filters When using one of the CISPR detectors When an external generator is active (via hardware option)
In these cases, frequency sweep is used.
Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE on page 1145
FFT Subspans Indicates the number of FFT subspans required to cover the entire measurement range (read-only). See also "Number of subspans" on page 462.
Only available in FFT sweep mode in the Spectrum application, and not for SEM, ACLR, or Spurious emissions measurements.
Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:FFTSubspan? on page 1143
Single Sweep / Run Single After triggering, starts the number of sweeps set in "Sweep Count". The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed.
While the measurement is running, the "Single Sweep" softkey and the [RUN SINGLE] key are highlighted. The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
471
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration
Note: Sequencer. If the Sequencer is active, the "Single Sweep" softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel. However, the sweep mode only takes effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel, and only for a channel-defined sequence. In this case, the Sequencer sweeps a channel in single sweep mode only once. Furthermore, the [RUN SINGLE] key controls the Sequencer, not individual sweeps. [RUN SINGLE] starts the Sequencer in single mode. If the Sequencer is off, only the evaluation for the currently displayed channel is updated. For details on the Sequencer, see Chapter 5.4.1, "The Sequencer Concept", on page 119.
Remote command: INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 885 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CONTinuous on page 1186
Continuous Sweep / Run Cont After triggering, starts the sweep and repeats it continuously until stopped. This is the default setting.
While the measurement is running, the "Continuous Sweep" softkey and the [RUN CONT] key are highlighted. The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again. The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started.
Note: Sequencer. If the Sequencer is active, the "Continuous Sweep" softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel. However, the sweep mode only takes effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel, and only for a channel-defined sequence. In this case, a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly. Furthermore, the [RUN CONT] key controls the Sequencer, not individual sweeps. [RUN CONT] starts the Sequencer in continuous mode. For details on the Sequencer, see Chapter 5.4.1, "The Sequencer Concept", on page 119.
Remote command: INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884
Continue Single Sweep After triggering, repeats the number of sweeps set in "Sweep Count", without deleting the trace of the last measurement.
While the measurement is running, the "Continue Single Sweep" softkey and the [RUN SINGLE] key are highlighted. The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again.
Remote command: INITiate<n>:CONMeas on page 884
Spectrogram Frames These settings are only available if spectrogram display is active.
For more information see Chapter 8.5.2.3, "How to Display and Configure a Spectrogram", on page 604.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
472
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration
Select Frame Spectrogram Frames Selects a specific frame, loads the corresponding trace from the memory, and displays it in the Spectrum window.
Note that activating a marker or changing the position of the active marker automatically selects the frame that belongs to that marker.
This function is only available in single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped, and only if a spectrogram is selected.
The most recent frame is number 0, all previous frames have a negative number.
For more details see "Time Frames" on page 592.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:SELect on page 1187
Continue Frame Spectrogram Frames Determines whether the results of the previous sweeps are included in the analysis of the next sweeps for trace modes "Max Hold" , "Min Hold" , and "Average" .
This function is available in single sweep mode only.
On When the average or peak values are determined for the new sweep, the results of the previous sweeps in the spectrogram are also taken into account.
Off The average or peak values are determined from the results of the newly swept frames only.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CONTinuous on page 1186
Frame Count Spectrogram Frames Determines how many frames are plotted during a single sweep (as opposed to a continuous sweep). The maximum number of possible frames depends on the history depth (see " History Depth " on page 601).
For more details see "Time Frames" on page 592.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:COUNt on page 1186
Clear Spectrogram Spectrogram Frames Resets the spectrogram result display and clears the history buffer.
This function is only available if a spectrogram is selected.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CLEar[:IMMediate] on page 1186
7.5.3 Reference: List of Available RRC and Channel Filters
For power measurement a number of especially steep-edged channel filters are available (see the following table). The indicated filter bandwidth is the 3-dB bandwidth. For RRC filters, the fixed roll-off factor (a) is also indicated.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
473
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration
The available Gaussian 3 dB sweep filters are listed in the R&S FSW data sheet.
Table 7-5: Filter types Filter Bandwidth 100 Hz 200 Hz 300 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 1.5 kHz 2 kHz 2.4 kHz 2.7 kHz 3 kHz 3.4 kHz 4 kHz 4.5 kHz 5 kHz 6 kHz 6 kHz, a=0.2 8.5 kHz 9 kHz 10 kHz 12.5 kHz 14 kHz 15 kHz 16 kHz 18 kHz, a=0.35 20 kHz 21 kHz 24.3 kHz, a=0.35 25 kHz 30 kHz 50 kHz
Filter Type CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter RRC CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter RRC CFILter CFILter RRC CFILter CFILter CFILter
Application
SSB
DAB, Satellite
APCO ETS300 113 (12.5 kHz channels) AM Radio CDMAone ETS300 113 (20 kHz channels) ETS300 113 (25 kHz channels) TETRA PDC IS 136 APCO 25-P2 CDPD, CDMAone
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
474
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration
Filter Bandwidth
Filter Type
Application
100 kHz
CFILter
150 kHz
CFILter
FM Radio
192 kHz
CFILter
PHS
200 kHz
CFILter
GSM
300 kHz
CFILter
500 kHz
CFILter
J.83 (8-VSB DVB, USA); RF ID 14333
1 MHz
CFILter
CDMAone
1.228 MHz
CFILter
CDMAone
1.28 MHz, a=0.22
RRC
TD-SCDMA
1.5 MHz
CFILter
DAB
2 MHz
CFILter
3 MHz
CFILter
3.75 MHz
CFILter
3.84 MHz, a=0.22
RRC
W-CDMA 3GPP
4.096 MHz, a=0.22
RRC
W-CDMA NTT DOCoMo
5 MHz
CFILter
10 MHz
CFILter
20 MHz *)
CFILter
28 MHz *)
CFILter
40 MHz *)
CFILter
80 MHz **)
CFILter
*) These filters are only available with option R&S FSW-B8 (Resolution Bandwidths > 10 MHz) or option R&S FSW-B8E (Resolution Bandwidths up to 40 MHz).
**) These filters are only available with option R&S FSW-B8 (Resolution Bandwidths > 10 MHz).
Filters larger than 28 MHz require an appropriate bandwidth extension option.
7.6 Trigger and Gate Configuration
Triggering means to capture the interesting part of the signal. Choosing the right trigger type and configuring all trigger settings correctly allows you to detect various incidents in your signals.
Gating allows you to restrict measurement analysis to the important part or parts of the signal, for example bursts.
Triggering.............................................................................................................. 476 Gating....................................................................................................................487
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
475
R&S�FSW
7.6.1 Triggering
Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration
7.6.1.1 Triggered Measurements
In a basic measurement with default settings, the sweep is started immediately. However, sometimes you want the measurement to start only when a specific condition is fulfilled, for example a signal level is exceeded, or in certain time intervals. For these cases you can define a trigger for the measurement. In FFT sweep mode, the trigger defines when the data acquisition starts for the FFT conversion.
An "Offset" can be defined to delay the measurement after the trigger event, or to include data before the actual trigger event in time domain measurements (pre-trigger offset).
For complex tasks, advanced trigger settings are available: Hysteresis to avoid unwanted trigger events caused by noise Holdoff to define exactly which trigger event will cause the trigger in a jittering sig-
nal
Trigger Source...................................................................................................... 476 Trigger Offset........................................................................................................ 476 Trigger Hysteresis................................................................................................. 477 Trigger Drop-Out Time.......................................................................................... 477 Trigger Holdoff.......................................................................................................478
Trigger Source
The trigger source defines which source must fulfill the condition that triggers the measurement. Basically, this can be:
Time: the measurement is repeated in a regular interval Power: an input signal is checked for a defined power level
The trigger signal can be any of the following: � The input signal at one of various stages in the signal analysis process - before
or after the input mixer, after the video filter etc. � A signal from an external device via one of the TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT
connectors on the instrument � A signal from a power sensor, see "Using a Power Sensor as an External
Power Trigger" on page 369.
For details on the available trigger sources see " Trigger Source " on page 481.
Trigger Offset
An offset can be defined to delay the measurement after the trigger event, or to include data before the actual trigger event in time domain measurements (pre-trigger offset). Pre-trigger offsets are possible because the R&S FSW captures data continuously in the time domain, even before the trigger occurs.
See " Trigger Offset " on page 484.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
476
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration
Trigger Hysteresis
Setting a hysteresis for the trigger helps avoid unwanted trigger events caused by noise, for example. The hysteresis is a threshold to the trigger level that the signal must fall below on a rising slope or rise above on a falling slope before another trigger event occurs.
Example: In the following example, the second possible trigger event on the rising edge is ignored as the signal does not drop below the hysteresis (threshold) before it reaches the trigger level again. On the falling edge, however, two trigger events occur as the signal exceeds the hysteresis before it falls to the trigger level the second time.
Trigger on rising edge
Trigger on falling edge
Trigger level
T T
Trigger hysteresis
T T
Figure 7-27: Effects of the trigger hysteresis
See " Hysteresis " on page 485
Trigger Drop-Out Time
If a modulated signal is instable and produces occasional "drop-outs" during a burst, you can define a minimum duration that the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again. This is called the "drop-out" time. Defining a dropout time helps you stabilize triggering when the analyzer is triggering on undesired events.
T
TT
Drop-Out
Figure 7-28: Effect of the trigger drop-out time
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
477
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration
See " Drop-Out Time " on page 484.
Drop-out times for falling edge triggers
If a trigger is set to a falling edge ( "Slope" = "Falling" , see " Slope " on page 485) the measurement is to start when the power level falls below a certain level. This is useful, for example, to trigger at the end of a burst, similar to triggering on the rising edge for the beginning of a burst.
If a drop-out time is defined, the power level must remain below the trigger level at least for the duration of the drop-out time (as defined above). However, if a drop-out time is defined that is longer than the pulse width, this condition cannot be met before the final pulse, so a trigger event will not occur until the pulsed signal is over!
T
T
T
Drop-Out
Figure 7-29: Trigger drop-out time for falling edge trigger
For gated measurements, a combination of a falling edge trigger and a drop-out time is generally not allowed.
Trigger Holdoff
The trigger holdoff defines a waiting period before the next trigger after the current one will be recognized.
Frame 1
T
T
T
T
Frame 2
Holdoff
Figure 7-30: Effect of the trigger holdoff
See " Trigger Holdoff " on page 485.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
478
R&S�FSW
7.6.1.2 Trigger Settings Access: "Overview" > "Trigger/Gate"
Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration
External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT connectors on the R&S FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box.
See Chapter 7.2.7, "Trigger Input/Output Settings", on page 436
For step-by-step instructions on configuring triggered measurements, see Chapter 7.6.1.4, "How to Configure a Triggered Measurement", on page 486.
Preview ...................................................................................................................... 480 Frequency .................................................................................................... 480 RBW .............................................................................................................480 Sweep Time.................................................................................................. 480
Trigger Source ............................................................................................................481 Free Run ...................................................................................................... 481 External Trigger 1/2/3................................................................................... 481 Video ............................................................................................................482 IF Power .......................................................................................................482 Baseband Power ..........................................................................................483 RF Power ..................................................................................................... 483
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
479
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Trigger and Gate Configuration
Power Sensor .............................................................................................. 483 Time ............................................................................................................. 484 Trigger Level .............................................................................................................. 484 Repetition Interval ...................................................................................................... 484 Drop-Out Time ............................................................................................................484 Trigger Offset ............................................................................................................. 484 Hysteresis .................................................................................................................. 485 Trigger Holdoff ............................................................................................................485 Slope .......................................................................................................................... 485
Preview The preview mode allows you to try out trigger and gate settings before actually applying them to the current measurement.
The preview diagram displays a zero span measurement at the center frequency with the defined RBW and sweep time. This is useful to analyze bursts, for example, to determine the required gate settings.
The trigger and gate settings are applied to the measurement when the dialog box is closed.
Note: The zero span settings refer only to the preview diagram. The main diagram remains unchanged. If preview mode is switched off, any changes to the settings in this dialog box are applied to the measurement diagram directly. In this case, the zero span settings for the preview diagram are not displayed.
For information on the zero span settings see: " Center Frequency " on page 443 " RBW " on page 341 " Sweep Time " on page 467
Frequency Preview Defines the center frequency.
Remote command: [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer on page 1132
RBW Preview Defines the bandwidth value. The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet. Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth.
Remote command: [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 1138
Sweep Time Preview Defines the sweep time. Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW. For details refer to the data sheet. Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time.
Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME on page 1144
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
480
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Trigger and Gate Configuration
Trigger Source Selects the trigger source. If a trigger source other than "Free Run" is set, "TRG" is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated.
For gated measurements, this setting also selects the gating source.
For more information see "Trigger Source" on page 476.
Note: When triggering or gating is activated, the squelch function is automatically disabled. (See " Squelch " on page 548). Note: If the 1.2 GHz bandwidth extension option (B1200) or the internal 2 GHz option (B2001) is active, only an external trigger, IF power trigger, or no trigger is available. If a B4001/B6001/B8001 bandwidth extension option is active, only an external trigger, power trigger, or no trigger is available for bandwidths 80 MHz. If any trigger other than an external trigger or power trigger is active and the analysis bandwidth is increased above 80 MHz (thus activating the B4001/B6001/B8001 option), the trigger is automatically deactivated.
Remote command: TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1160 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce on page 1167
Free Run Trigger Source No trigger source is considered. Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitly.
In the Spectrum application, this is the default setting.
Remote command: TRIG:SOUR IMM, see TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1160
External Trigger 1/2/3 Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger level.
(See " Trigger Level " on page 484).
Note: The "External Trigger 1" softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector on the front panel. For details, see the "Instrument Tour" chapter in the R&S FSW Getting Started manual.
"External Trigger 1" Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector.
"External Trigger 2" Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 2 INPUT / OUTPUT connector. Note: Connector must be configured for "Input" in the "Output" configuration For R&S FSW85 models, Trigger 2 is not available due to the second RF input connector on the front panel.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
481
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Trigger and Gate Configuration
"External Trigger 3" Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT / OUTPUT connector on the rear panel. Note: Connector must be configured for "Input" in the "Output" configuration. (See Chapter 7.2.7, "Trigger Input/Output Settings", on page 436).
Remote command: TRIG:SOUR EXT, TRIG:SOUR EXT2 TRIG:SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1160 SWE:EGAT:SOUR EXT for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce on page 1167
Video Trigger Source Defines triggering by the video signal, i.e. the filtered and detected version of the input signal (the envelope of the IF signal), as displayed on the screen.
Define a trigger level from 0 % to 100 % of the diagram height. The absolute trigger level is indicated by a horizontal trigger line in the diagram, which you can also move graphically to change the trigger level.
A fixed hysteresis of �5 % of the specified trigger value (in V) is applied to the video trigger level automatically and cannot be changed.
Video mode is only available in the time domain, and not for I/Q-based data.
Remote command: TRIG:SOUR VID, see TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1160 SWE:EGAT:SOUR VID for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce on page 1167
IF Power Trigger Source The R&S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency.
For frequency sweeps, the third IF represents the start frequency. The trigger threshold depends on the defined trigger level, as well as on the RF attenuation and preamplification. A reference level offset, if defined, is also considered. The trigger bandwidth at the intermediate frequency depends on the RBW and sweep type. For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet.
For measurements on a fixed frequency (e.g. zero span or I/Q measurements), the third IF represents the center frequency.
This trigger source is only available for RF input.
The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification. A reference level offset, if defined, is also considered.
For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths, see the data sheet.
Note: Be aware that in auto sweep type mode, due to a possible change in sweep types, the trigger bandwidth can vary considerably for the same RBW setting.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
482
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Trigger and Gate Configuration
Remote command: TRIG:SOUR IFP, see TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1160 SWE:EGAT:SOUR IFP for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce on page 1167
Baseband Power Trigger Source Defines triggering on the baseband power (for baseband input via the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband interface).
Remote command: TRIG:SOUR BBP, see TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1160
RF Power Trigger Source Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed measurement range.
For this purpose, the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate frequency.
The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preamplification. For details on available trigger levels, see the instrument's data sheet.
Note: If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range (e.g. for fullspan measurements), the sweep may be aborted. A message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar. A "Trigger Offset" , "Trigger Polarity" and "Trigger Holdoff" (to improve the trigger stability) can be defined for the RF trigger, but no "Hysteresis" .
Remote command: TRIG:SOUR RFP, see TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1160 SWE:EGAT:SOUR RFP for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce on page 1167
Power Sensor Trigger Source Uses an external power sensor as a trigger source. This option is only available if a power sensor is connected and configured.
(See Chapter 7.2.3.3, "How to Work With a Power Sensor", on page 374.)
If a B4001/B6001/B8001 bandwidth extension option is active, this trigger is not available for bandwidths 80 MHz.
If a power sensor is selected as the trigger mode, the following softkeys are not available; these settings are configured in the "Power Sensor Config" dialog box (seeChapter 7.2.3.2, "Power Sensor Settings", on page 370 ).
" Trigger Level " on page 484 " Slope " on page 485 " Hysteresis " on page 485 " Trigger Holdoff " on page 485 Note: For Rohde & Schwarz power sensors, the "Gate Mode" Lvl is not supported. The signal sent by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded, rather than a time period. However, only time periods can be used for gating in level mode. Thus, the trigger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement; the measurement cannot be completed.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
483
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Trigger and Gate Configuration
Remote command: TRIG:SOUR PSE, see TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1160 SWE:EGAT:SOUR PSE for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce on page 1167
Time Trigger Source Triggers in a specified repetition interval. See " Repetition Interval " on page 484. If a B4001/B6001/B8001 bandwidth extension option is active, this trigger is not available for bandwidths 80 MHz. Remote command: TRIG:SOUR TIME, see TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1160
Trigger Level Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source. For gated measurements, this setting also defines the gate level. For details on supported trigger levels, see the data sheet. For time triggers, the repetition interval is defined. See " Repetition Interval " on page 484. Remote command: TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower on page 1159 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IQPower on page 1159 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal<port>] on page 1158 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo on page 1160 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:RFPower on page 1159
Repetition Interval Defines the repetition interval for a time trigger. The shortest interval is 2 ns. The repetition interval should be set to the exact pulse period, burst length, frame length or other repetitive signal characteristic. Remote command: TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TIME:RINTerval on page 1162
Drop-Out Time Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again. For more information on the drop-out time, see "Trigger Drop-Out Time" on page 477. Remote command: TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DTIMe on page 1157
Trigger Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep. For more information, see "Trigger Offset" on page 476.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
484
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration
Offset > 0: Offset < 0:
Start of the sweep is delayed
Sweep starts earlier (pretrigger) Only possible for zero span (e.g. I/Q Analyzer application) and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time: Pretriggermax = sweep timemax
For the "Time" trigger source, this function is not available.
Remote command: TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME] on page 1157
Hysteresis Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs. Setting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level.
This setting is only available for "IF Power" trigger sources. The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB.
For more information, see "Trigger Hysteresis" on page 477.
Remote command: TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HYSTeresis on page 1158
Trigger Holdoff Defines the minimum time (in seconds) that must pass between two trigger events. Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored.
For more information, see "Trigger Holdoff" on page 478.
Remote command: TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff on page 1157
Slope For all trigger sources except time, you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it.
For gated measurements in "Edge" mode, the slope also defines whether the gate starts on a falling or rising edge.
Remote command: TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe on page 1160 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity on page 1166
7.6.1.3 How to Determine the Required Trigger/Gate Parameters
1. In the "Trigger And Gate" dialog box, switch on "Show Preview" . A zero span measurement for the currently defined center frequency is displayed.
2. Set the "Frequency" , "RBW" and "Sweep Time" such that the relevant part of the signal is displayed, for example a complete burst.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
485
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration
3. Determine the parameters you want to use to define the trigger and gate conditions from the preview diagram, for example: the length of a burst or slot the upper or lower power level of a pulse the maximum noise level the power level or time at which a certain incident occurs
4. Try out different trigger and gate settings as described in How to Configure a Triggered Measurement and How to Configure a Gated Measurement, then select "Update Main Diagram" to see the effect of the current settings on the main measurement in the background.
5. If the results are as expected, close the dialog box to keep the changes permanently. Otherwise, correct the settings as necessary.
7.6.1.4 How to Configure a Triggered Measurement
To define a time trigger:
1. In the "Trigger And Gate" dialog box, define the "Trigger Source" = "Time" .
2. Define the "Repetition Interval" : the time after which a new measurement is started.
To define an external trigger:
1. Connect an external device that will provide the trigger signal to one of the TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT connectors on the R&S FSW. For details see the R&S FSW "Getting Started" manual.
2. In the "Trigger And Gate" dialog box, define the "Trigger Source" = "External" .
3. If you are using the variable TRIGGER 2 INPUT / OUTPUT connector, you must define its use as an input connector. In the "Trigger In/Out" tab of the "Trigger And Gate" dialog box, set the corresponding trigger to "Input" . (Note: Trigger 2 is on the front panel, Trigger 3 is on the rear panel.)
4. Configure the external trigger as described for the other power triggers.
To define a power trigger:
1. In the "Trigger And Gate" dialog box, define the "Trigger Source" = "IF Power" . Alternatively, define "Trigger Source" = "Video" . The video signal corresponds to the envelope of the IF signal: it has been processed by the resolution and video filters and the selected detector.
2. Define the "Trigger Level" : the power level at which the measurement will start. For a "Video" trigger source you can move the level line graphically to define the level. If you define the value numerically, you must enter a percentage of the full diagram height as the level.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
486
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration
3. Define whether the signal must cross the trigger level on a falling or on a rising edge ( "Slope" ) to trigger the measurement.
4. To start the measurement with a time delay, define a "Trigger Offset" .
5. To reject triggers due to noise or jittering in the signal, define a "Hysteresis" that is larger than the expected noise or jittering. After the previous trigger, the signal must exceed this threshold before the next level crossing triggers a new measurement.
6. To skip multiple triggers in a burst, define a "Holdoff" time that must pass between two triggers. The holdoff time should be slightly larger than the burst.
7.6.2 Gating
Gated Measurements............................................................................................487 Gate Settings........................................................................................................ 491 Continuous Gate Settings..................................................................................... 493 Gate Source Settings............................................................................................ 494 How to Configure a Gated Measurement..............................................................495
7.6.2.1 Gated Measurements
Like a gate provides an opening in a fence, a gated measurement lets data from the input signal pass in defined areas only. The gate controls exactly when data is included in the measurement results and when not. The gate is opened by the trigger source, which is also the gate source.
Gates can be used in two different modes: Level: The gate opens and the measurement starts when a defined level in the
gate source is exceeded and stops when the gate source drops below the "Gate Level" . Using a pulsed gate signal in level mode, the following behavior can be achieved: When the gate source signal is active, the input signal data is collected; when the gate signal is inactive, the input signal is ignored. Edge: The gate opens and the measurement starts when a defined level in the gate source is exceeded and stops when the defined "Gate Length" is reached.
Restrictions The "Gate Mode" Level is not supported for Rohde & Schwarz power sensors. The
signal sent by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded, rather than a time period. However, only time periods can be used for gating in level mode. Thus, the trigger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement; the measurement cannot be completed. For details on power sensors see "Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Trigger" on page 369.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
487
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration
Additionally, a delay time can be defined so that the first few measurement points after the gate opening are ignored.
Figure 7-31: Effects of Gate mode, Gate delay and Gate length
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
488
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration
Example: By using a gate in sweep mode and stopping the measurement while the gate signal is inactive, the spectrum for pulsed RF carriers can be displayed without the superposition of frequency components generated during switching. Similarly, the spectrum can also be analyzed for an inactive carrier. The sweep can be controlled by an external gate or by the internal power trigger.
Figure 7-32: GSM signal with GATE OFF
Figure 7-33: GSM signal with GATE ON
Gated sweep operation is also possible for zero span measurements. This allows you to display level variations of individual slots, for instance in burst signals, versus time.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
489
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration
To indicate that a gate is used for the sweep, "GAT" and the gate source is displayed in the channel bar.
Continuous gating
With common gating, a measurement is performed each time the trigger event occurs. However, when using an external trigger, the measurement time for a single gate is restricted by the repetition rate of the external trigger. Now, a new function in the R&S FSW allows you to perform a number of measurements periodically after each external trigger event. This function can speed up the measurement significantly. After the first external trigger event, a specified number of gate periods are generated internally, in a specified interval, without requiring additional trigger events. Only after the specified number of measurements have been performed, the R&S FSW waits for the next external trigger event.
Example:
Figure 7-34: Continuous gating for a gate period count of 9
Continuous gating is useful, for example, if you want to measure a periodic signal which occurs after a specific trigger event. Using gate periods, you can average the individual periods of the signal for several trigger events. Continuous gating can also improve the measurement speed, as you no longer have to wait for the next external trigger events, but can measure several periodic bursts after a single trigger event. Settings for continuous gate periods are defined in a separate tab of the "Trigger / Gate Config" dialog box (see Chapter 7.6.2.3, "Continuous Gate Settings", on page 493).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
490
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration
Restrictions for continuous gating
While continuous gating reduces the number of required external trigger events, not every sweep constellation can be performed using just one external trigger event. Note the following restrictions:
The number of gates is limited to 1023. If the required measurement time exceeds the duration of 1023 gates, a new external trigger event is necessary for each subsequent 1023 gates.
In "Sweep Mode Type: Sweep", more than one external trigger events may be necessary due to hardware segmentation of the sweep
In "Sweep Mode Type: FFT", more than one external trigger event may be necessary, but the covered span with one external trigger event is normally larger than in "Sweep Mode Type: Sweep". In FFT mode, it is recommended that you activate the "Optimization mode: Speed", as it further reduces the required number of external trigger events.
Triggered gated measurements
By default, the gate is opened by the trigger source, which is also the gate source. However, you can also use different sources for a general trigger and the beginnning of the individual gates. In this case, the trigger source defines when measurement is generally possible, and the gate source determines which data is actually measured.
Example:
A rotating antenna can be used as a general (external) trigger source, for example. Only when the antenna reaches a specified position, measurement is possible. A second external trigger can then be used to control the gating periods to measure a bursted signal.
RF Signal
...
Ext. Trigger1
Frame trigger (Ext. Trigger2)
Measured Gates
...
...
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
...
Figure 7-35: Triggered gated measurement
Triggered gated measurements are only available in applications based on frequency sweeps (not I/Q-data based), such as the Spectrum application.
7.6.2.2 Gate Settings Access: "Overview" > "Trigger" > "Trigger / Gate Config." > "Gate Settings"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
491
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration
Gate settings define one or more extracts of the signal to be measured.
Gating is not available for measurements on I/Q-based data.
Gated Trigger ............................................................................................................. 492 Gate Mode ................................................................................................................. 492 Gate Delay ................................................................................................................. 493 Gate Length ............................................................................................................... 493
Gated Trigger Switches gated triggering on or off.
If the gate is switched on, a gate signal applied to one of the TRIGGER INPUT connectors or the internal IF power detector controls the sweep.
Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe on page 1162
Gate Mode Sets the gate mode.
For more information see Chapter 7.6.2.1, "Gated Measurements", on page 487
"Edge"
The trigger event for the gate to open is the detection of the signal edge. After the gate signal has been detected, the gate remains open until the gate length is over.
"Level"
The trigger event for the gate to open is a particular power level. After the gate signal has been detected, the gate remains open until the signal disappears. Note: If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger, the R&S FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep, FFT sweep, zero span and I/Q mode measurements. This mode is not supported when using R&S Power Sensors as power triggers ( "Trg/Gate Source" = Power Sensor or External).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
492
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration
Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE on page 1167
Gate Delay Defines the delay time between the gate signal and the continuation of the measurement. The delay position on the time axis in relation to the sweep is indicated by a line labeled "GD" . For more information see Chapter 7.6.2.1, "Gated Measurements", on page 487 Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff on page 1165
Gate Length Defines how long the gate is open when it is triggered. The gate length can only be set in the edge-triggered gate mode. In the level-triggered mode the gate length depends on the level of the gate signal. The gate length in relation to the sweep is indicated by a line labeled "GL" . For more information see Chapter 7.6.2.1, "Gated Measurements", on page 487 Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth on page 1165
7.6.2.3 Continuous Gate Settings
Access: "Overview" > "Trigger" > "Trigger / Gate Config." > "Cont. Gate" tab
Continuous gating allows you to perform a continuous gated sweep after a single external trigger is received.
For details see "Continuous gating" on page 490.
Continuous Gate......................................................................................................... 493 Gate Period Length..................................................................................................... 494 Gate Period Count...................................................................................................... 494
Continuous Gate Activates or deactivates continuous gating. This setting is only available if Gated Trigger is "On".
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
493
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration
If no external trigger is active yet when continuous gating is activated, external trigger 1 is automatically activated as the trigger source. Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous[:STATe] on page 1164
Gate Period Length Defines the length in seconds of a single gate period in continuous gating. The length is determined from the beginning of one gate measurement to the beginning of the next one. Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PLENgth on page 1164
Gate Period Count Defines the number of gate periods to be measured after a single trigger event in continuous gating. Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PCOunt on page 1164
7.6.2.4 Gate Source Settings
Access: "Overview" > "Trigger" > "Gate Settings" > "Source" tab
By default, the gate is opened by the trigger source, which is also the gate source. However, you can also use different sources for a general trigger and the beginnning of the individual gates. In this case, the trigger source defines when measurement is generally possible, and the gate source determines which data is actually measured.
Triggered gated measurements are only available in applications based on frequency sweeps (not I/Q-data based), such as the Spectrum application.
For more information see "Triggered gated measurements" on page 491.
Gate Source Mode...................................................................................................... 495 Source......................................................................................................................... 495 Level............................................................................................................................495 Polarity........................................................................................................................ 495
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
494
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration
Gate Source Mode Determines whether the same or different triggers are used for general measurement and gating.
"AUTO"
(Default:) The trigger defined by Trigger Source is used both for the general measurement trigger and the gating trigger.
"MANUAL"
The gate is opened by the trigger source defined in Source, but only after a trigger from the general Trigger Source occurs.
Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:AUTO on page 1163
Source Selects the gating trigger source which determines when the gate is opened. For Gate Source Mode "AUTO", the trigger defined by Trigger Source is used both for the general measurement trigger and the gating trigger.
The following gate trigger sources are supported: External Trigger 1/2/3 Power Sensor
Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce on page 1167
Level Defines the gate level for which the gate is open.
Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel[:EXTernal<tp>] on page 1166 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel:RFPower on page 1165
Polarity Defines whether the gate is opened when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it. For gated measurements in "Edge" mode, the slope defines whether the gate starts on a falling or rising edge.
Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity on page 1166
7.6.2.5 How to Configure a Gated Measurement
A gated measurement records data only while the gate conditions are fulfilled. These step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to configure a gated measurement manually.
To configure a common gated measurement 1. Determine the required parameters as described in Chapter 7.6.1.3, "How to Deter-
mine the Required Trigger/Gate Parameters", on page 485.
2. The gate is opened by a trigger event, which must be based on a power source. Define the trigger as described in Chapter 7.6.1.4, "How to Configure a Triggered
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
495
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration
Measurement", on page 486. As the "Trigger Source" , use "IF Power" , "Video" or "External" .
3. Define how long the gate is to remain open: To measure the signal as long as the trigger level is exceeded, for example for one or more pulses, define "Gate Mode" = "Level" . To measure the signal for a certain time after a level is exceeded, for example during a burst: a) Define "Gate Mode" = "Edge" . b) Define the time to measure for each gate: "Gate Length" .
4. To open the gate with a time delay, for example to ignore an overshoot, define a "Gate Delay" .
5. Select "Gated Trigger" = "On" .
To configure a continuous gated measurement
A continuous gated measurement is based on a common gated measurement. However, after a single external trigger event, multiple further gate measurements are performed.
1. The gate is opened by a trigger event, which must be provided by an external trigger source. Define the trigger as described in Chapter 7.6.1.4, "How to Configure a Triggered Measurement", on page 486. As the "Trigger Source" , use "External" .
2. In the "Gate Settings" of the "Trigger and Gate" dialog box, select "Gated Trigger": "On".
3. Define the gate settings as described in "To configure a common gated measurement" on page 495.
4. Select the "Cont. Gate" tab next to the "Gate Settings".
5. Set "Continuous Gate" to "On".
6. Define the length in seconds from the beginning of one gate measurement to the beginning of the next one ("Gate Period Length").
7. Define how many gate measurements are to be performed after a single trigger event ("Gate Period Count").
8. Run a measurement and wait for the external trigger event to occur.
To configure a triggered gated measurement
A triggered gated measurement is based on a common gated measurement. However, the gates are only opened after an initial trigger event.
1. Determine the required parameters as described in Chapter 7.6.1.3, "How to Determine the Required Trigger/Gate Parameters", on page 485.
2. In order to trigger the initial gate, define a trigger event based on a power source. Define the trigger as described in Chapter 7.6.1.4, "How to Configure a Triggered
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
496
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Adjusting Settings Automatically
Measurement", on page 486. As the "Trigger Source" , use "External" or "Power Sensor" (if available).
3. Each individual gate is also opened by a trigger event. To use a different trigger source for the individual gates than for general measurement:
a) Switch to the "Source" tab for gate settings. b) As the "Source", select "External" or "Power Sensor" (if available). c) Configure the power trigger as defined in Chapter 7.6.1.4, "How to Configure a
Triggered Measurement", on page 486.
4. Switch to the "Gate Settings" tab to define the individual gates.
5. Define how long the gate is to remain open: To measure the signal as long as the trigger level is exceeded, for example for one or more pulses, define "Gate Mode" = "Level" . To measure the signal for a certain time after a level is exceeded, for example during a burst:
a) Define "Gate Mode" = "Edge" . b) Define the time to measure for each gate: "Gate Length" .
6. To open the gate with a time delay, for example to ignore an overshoot, define a "Gate Delay" .
7. Select "Gated Trigger" = "On" .
7.7 Adjusting Settings Automatically
Access: [AUTO SET] Some settings can be adjusted by the R&S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings. In order to do so, a measurement is performed. You can configure this measurement.
MSRA/MSRT operating mode In MSRA and MSRT operating mode, settings related to data acquisition can only be adjusted automatically for the MSRA/MSRT primary, not the secondary applications.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
497
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Adjusting Settings Automatically
Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements When you select an auto adjust function, a measurement is performed to determine the optimal settings. If you select an auto adjust function for a triggered measurement, you are asked how the R&S FSW should behave:
(default:) The measurement for adjustment waits for the next trigger The measurement for adjustment is performed without waiting for a trigger.
The trigger source is temporarily set to "Free Run" . After the measurement is completed, the original trigger source is restored. The trigger level is adjusted as follows: � For IF Power and RF Power triggers:
Trigger Level = Reference Level - 15 dB � For Video trigger:
Trigger Level = 85 %
Remote command: [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:TRIGger on page 1173
Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically ( Auto All ).................................... 498 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically ( Auto Frequency )............................ 498 Setting the Reference Level Automatically ( Auto Level )........................................... 499 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time ( Meastime Auto ).................................499 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time ( Meastime Manual )............................ 499 Upper Level Hysteresis .............................................................................................. 499 Lower Level Hysteresis .............................................................................................. 499
Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically ( Auto All ) Activates all automatic adjustment functions for the current measurement settings.
This includes:
Auto Frequency Auto Level Note: MSRA/MSRT operating modes. In MSRA/MSRT operating mode, this function is only available for the MSRA/MSRT primary, not the secondary applications.
Remote command: [SENSe:]ADJust:ALL on page 1171
Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically ( Auto Frequency ) The R&S FSW adjusts the center frequency automatically.
The optimum center frequency is the frequency with the highest S/N ratio in the frequency span. As this function uses the signal counter, it is intended for use with sinusoidal signals.
This function is not available during signal tracking (see Chapter 7.3.3, "Keeping the Center Frequency Stable - Signal Tracking", on page 445).
Remote command: [SENSe:]ADJust:FREQuency on page 1174
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
498
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings
Adjusting Settings Automatically
Setting the Reference Level Automatically ( Auto Level ) Automatically determines a reference level which ensures that no overload occurs at the R&S FSW for the current input data. At the same time, the internal attenuators and the preamplifier (for analog baseband input: the full scale level) are adjusted so the signal-to-noise ratio is optimized, while signal compression and clipping are minimized.
To determine the required reference level, a level measurement is performed on the R&S FSW.
If necessary, you can optimize the reference level further. Decrease the attenuation level manually to the lowest possible value before an overload occurs, then decrease the reference level in the same way.
You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary (see " Changing the Automatic Measurement Time ( Meastime Manual )" on page 499).
Remote command: [SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel on page 1174
Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time ( Meastime Auto ) Resets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the default value.
(Spectrum application: 1 ms)
Remote command: [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation:MODE on page 1172
Changing the Automatic Measurement Time ( Meastime Manual ) This function allows you to change the measurement duration for automatic setting adjustments. Enter the value in seconds.
Note: The maximum possible measurement duration depends on the currently selected measurement and the installed (optional) hardware. Thus, the measurement duration actually used to determine the automatic settings may be shorter than the value you define here.
Remote command: [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation:MODE on page 1172 [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation on page 1172
Upper Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function, the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted. To avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal, you can define a hysteresis. This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed (compared to the last measurement) before the reference level is adapted automatically.
Remote command: [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:HYSTeresis:UPPer on page 1173
Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function, the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted. To avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal, you can define a hysteresis. This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below (compared to the last measurement) before the reference level is adapted automatically.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
499
R&S�FSW
Common Measurement Settings Adjusting Settings Automatically
Remote command: [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:HYSTeresis:LOWer on page 1173
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
500
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Result Display Configuration
8 Common Analysis and Display Functions
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis"
General methods and basic settings to display and analyze measurements, regardless of the operating mode, are described here. If you are performing a specific measurement task, using an operating mode other than Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode, or an application other than the Spectrum application, be sure to check the specific application or mode description for settings and functions that may deviate from these common settings.
Result Display Configuration.................................................................................501 Zoomed Displays.................................................................................................. 508 Marker Usage........................................................................................................515 Display and Limit Lines......................................................................................... 557 Trace Configuration...............................................................................................576 Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation............................. 610 Event-based Actions............................................................................................. 622
8.1 Result Display Configuration
Measurement results can be evaluated in many different ways, for example graphically, as summary tables, statistical evaluations etc. Thus, the result display is highly configurable to suit your specific requirements and optimize analysis. Here you can find out how to optimize the display for your measurement results.
Basic operations concerning the R&S FSW display, for example how to use the SmartGrid, are described in the R&S FSW Getting Started manual.
General display settings that are usually configured during initial instrument setup, independently of the current measurement, e.g. which items or colors are displayed on the screen, are described in Chapter 11.2, "Display Settings", on page 693.
Basic Evaluation Methods.....................................................................................501 Laying out the Result Display with the SmartGrid.................................................504
8.1.1 Basic Evaluation Methods
Measurement results can be displayed and evaluated using various different methods, also at the same time. Depending on the currently selected measurement, in particular when using optional firmware applications, not all evaluation methods are available.
The evaluation methods described here are available for most measurements in the Spectrum application.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
501
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions
Result Display Configuration
Diagram ......................................................................................................................502 Marker Table .............................................................................................................. 502 Marker Peak List ........................................................................................................ 503 Result Summary .........................................................................................................503 Spectrogram ...............................................................................................................503
Diagram Displays a basic level vs. frequency or level vs. time diagram of the measured data to evaluate the results graphically. This is the default evaluation method. Which data is displayed in the diagram depends on the "Trace" settings. Scaling for the y-axis can be configured. See Chapter 8.5, "Trace Configuration", on page 576 and Chapter 7.4.3, "Scaling the Y-Axis", on page 456.
Remote command: LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH, DIAG, see LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 1069 Results: TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1196
Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers. This table is displayed automatically if configured accordingly. (See " Marker Table Display " on page 522).
Tip: To navigate within long marker tables, simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen. Remote command: LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH, MTAB, see LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 1069 Results: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 1210 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y? on page 1224
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
502
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Result Display Configuration
Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum or time domain. How many peaks are displayed can be defined, as well as the sort order. In addition, the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram. The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external application. You can define search and sort criteria to influence the results of the analysis. (See Chapter 8.3.3.1, "Marker Search Settings", on page 524).
Tip: To navigate within long marker peak lists, simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen.
Remote command: LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH, PEAK, see LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 1069 Results: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 1210 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y? on page 1224
Result Summary Result summaries provide the results of specific measurement functions in a table for numerical evaluation. The contents of the result summary vary depending on the selected measurement function. See the description of the individual measurement functions for details.
Tip: To navigate within long result summary tables, simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen.
Remote command: LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH, RSUM, see LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 1069
Spectrogram A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time. The x-axis shows the frequency or sweep time, the y-axis shows the measurement time. A third dimension, the power level, is indicated by different colors. Thus you can see how the strength of the signal varies over time for different frequencies.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
503
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Result Display Configuration
The spectrogram display consists of two diagrams: the standard spectrum result display (upper diagram) and the spectrogram result display (lower diagram).
For details see Chapter 8.5.2.1, "Working with Spectrograms", on page 590.
Remote command: LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH, SGR, see LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 1069
8.1.2 Laying out the Result Display with the SmartGrid
Measurement results can be evaluated in many different ways, for example graphically, as summary tables, statistical evaluations etc. Each type of evaluation is displayed in a separate window in the channel tab. Up to 16 individual windows can be displayed per channel (i.e. per tab). To arrange the diagrams and tables on the screen, the Rohde & Schwarz SmartGrid function helps you find the target position simply and quickly.
Principally, the layout of the windows on the screen is based on an underlying grid, the SmartGrid. However, the SmartGrid is dynamic and flexible, allowing for many different layout possibilities. The SmartGrid functionality provides the following basic features:
Windows can be arranged in columns or in rows, or in a combination of both. Windows can be arranged in up to four rows and four columns. Windows are moved simply by dragging them to a new position on the screen, pos-
sibly changing the layout of the other windows, as well.
All evaluation methods available for the currently selected measurement are displayed as icons in the evaluation bar. If the evaluation bar contains more icons than can be displayed at once on the screen, it can be scrolled vertically. The same evaluation method can be displayed in multiple windows simultaneously.
New windows are added by dragging an evaluation icon from the evaluation bar to the screen. The position of each new window depends on where you drop the evaluation icon in relation to the existing windows.
All display configuration actions are only possible in SmartGrid mode. When SmartGrid mode is activated, the evaluation bar replaces the current softkey menu display. When the SmartGrid mode is deactivated again, the previous softkey menu display is restored.
Background Information: The SmartGrid Principle................................................504 How to Activate SmartGrid Mode..........................................................................506 How to Add a New Result Window....................................................................... 506 How to Close a Result Window.............................................................................507 How to Arrange the Result Windows.................................................................... 507
8.1.2.1 Background Information: The SmartGrid Principle
SmartGrid display
During any positioning action, the underlying SmartGrid is displayed. Different colors and frames indicate the possible new positions. The position in the SmartGrid where you drop the window determines its position on the screen.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
504
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Result Display Configuration
Figure 8-1: Moving a window in SmartGrid mode
The brown area indicates the possible "drop area" for the window, i.e. the area in which the window can be placed. A blue area indicates the (approximate) layout of the window as it would be if the icon were dropped at the current position. The frames indicate the possible destinations of the new window with respect to the existing windows: above/below, right/left or replacement (as illustrated in Figure 4-33). If an existing window would be replaced, the drop area is highlighted in a darker color shade.
Positioning the window
The screen can be divided into up to four rows. Each row can be split into up to four columns, where each row can have a different number of columns. However, rows always span the entire width of the screen and may not be interrupted by a column. A single row is available as the drop area for the window in the SmartGrid. The row can be split into columns, or a new row can be inserted above or below the existing row (if the maximum of 4 has not yet been reached).
1 A
B
2
3
2
3
2
C 1
Figure 8-2: SmartGrid window positions
1 = Insert row above or below the existing row 2 = Create a new column in the existing row 3 = Replace a window in the existing row
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
505
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Result Display Configuration
SmartGrid functions Once the evaluation icon has been dropped, icons in each window provide delete and move functions. The "Move" icon allows you to move the position of the window, possibly changing the size and position of the other displayed windows.
The "Delete" icon allows you to close the window, enlarging the display of the remaining windows.
8.1.2.2 How to Activate SmartGrid Mode
All display configuration actions are only possible in SmartGrid mode. In SmartGrid mode the evaluation bar replaces the current softkey menu display. When the SmartGrid mode is deactivated again, the previous softkey menu display is restored.
To activate SmartGrid mode, do one of the following:
Select the "SmartGrid" icon from the toolbar. Select the "Display Config" button in the configuration "Overview" . Select the "Display Config" softkey from the [Meas Config] menu. The SmartGrid functions and the evaluation bar are displayed.
To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu select the "Close" icon in the right-hand corner of the toolbar, or press any key.
8.1.2.3 How to Add a New Result Window
Each type of evaluation is displayed in a separate window. Up to 16 individual windows can be displayed per channel (i.e. per tab).
1. Activate SmartGrid mode. All evaluation methods available for the currently selected measurement are displayed as icons in the evaluation bar.
2. Select the icon for the required evaluation method from the evaluation bar. If the evaluation bar contains more icons than can be displayed at once on the screen, it can be scrolled vertically. Touch the evaluation bar between the icons and move it up or down until the required icon appears.
3. Drag the required icon from the evaluation bar to the SmartGrid, which is displayed in the diagram area, and drop it at the required position. (See "How to Arrange the Result Windows" on page 103 for more information on positioning the window).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
506
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Result Display Configuration
Remote command: LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 1069 / LAYout:WINDow<n>:ADD? on page 1073
8.1.2.4 How to Close a Result Window
To close a window, activate SmartGrid mode and select the "Delete" icon for the window.
Remote command: LAYout:REMove[:WINDow] on page 1071 / LAYout:WINDow<n>:REMove on page 1074
8.1.2.5 How to Arrange the Result Windows
1. Select an icon from the evaluation bar or the "Move" icon for an existing evaluation window.
2. Drag the evaluation over the SmartGrid. A blue area shows where the window will be placed.
3. Move the window until a suitable area is indicated in blue. 4. Drop the window in the target area.
The windows are rearranged to the selected layout, and "Delete" and "Move" icons are displayed in each window. 5. To close a window, select the corresponding "Delete" icon.
Remote command:
LAYout:REPLace[:WINDow] on page 1071 / LAYout:WINDow<n>:REPLace on page 1074
LAYout:MOVE[:WINDow] on page 1071
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
507
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Zoomed Displays
8.2 Zoomed Displays
You can zoom into the diagram to visualize the measurement results in greater detail. Using the touchscreen or a mouse pointer you can easily define the area to be enlarged.
Graphical Zoom Versus Measurement Zoom
Graphical zooming is merely a visual tool, it does not change any measurement settings, such as the number of sweep points, the frequency range, or the reference level. Graphical zooming only changes the resolution of the displayed trace points temporarily. You must explicitly activate the graphical zoom function (see Chapter 8.2.2, "Zoom Functions", on page 510).
Graphical zoom and the number of sweep points Note that (graphical) zooming is merely a visual tool, it does not change any measurement settings, such as the number of sweep points! You should increase the number of sweep points before zooming, as otherwise the resolution of the trace in the zoomed region is poor (see Chapter 7.5.1.8, "How Much Data is Measured: Sweep Points and Sweep Count", on page 464).
When you change the display using touch gestures, however, the corresponding measurement settings are adapted. For example, dragging horizontally in a spectrum display changes the center frequency. Dragging vertically in a spectrum display changes the reference level (for absolute scaling). These changes are permanent for the measurement. This behavior is also referred to as measurement zoom, and is active by default in the new R&S FSW.However, you can also activate it manually for a display that has already been zoomed graphically. In this case, the temporary changes to the display are replaced by permanent changes to the measurement settings with the same effect.
Example: Assume you have a spectrum display from a spurious emission measurement. You graphically zoom into the area around a detected spur. If you now activate a measurement zoom, the reference level, the center frequency, the frequency span, and the scaling settings are adapted so that the results of the measurement now indicate only the formerly zoomed area around the detected spur.
Single Zoom Versus Multiple Zoom...................................................................... 508 Zoom Functions.................................................................................................... 510 How to Zoom Into a Diagram................................................................................ 512
8.2.1 Single Zoom Versus Multiple Zoom
Two different (graphical) zoom modes are available: single zoom and multiple zoom. A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace. This function can be used repetitively until the required
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
508
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Zoomed Displays
details are visible. In multiple zoom mode, you can enlarge up to four different areas of the trace simultaneously. An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace, while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows. The zoom areas can be moved and resized any time. The zoom area that corresponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner, between the scrollbars.
Figure 8-3: Single zoom
Figure 8-4: Multiple zoom
Using the zoom area to restrict a peak search The selected zoom area can be used to restrict the search range for a peak search, but only in single zoom mode (see " Use Zoom Limits " on page 526).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
509
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Zoomed Displays
8.2.2 Zoom Functions
Access: "Zoom" icons in toolbar
Single Zoom ............................................................................................................... 510 Multi-Zoom ................................................................................................................. 510 Measurement Zoom.................................................................................................... 510
Level Lock..................................................................................................... 511 X-Lock........................................................................................................... 511 Y-Lock........................................................................................................... 511 Adapt Measurement to Zoom (selected diagram).........................................511 Restore Original Display .............................................................................................511 Data shift ( Pan )..................................................................................................... 512 Data Zoom ............................................................................................................. 512
Single Zoom
A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace. This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible.
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM[:STATe] on page 1176 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:AREA on page 1174
Multi-Zoom
In multiple zoom mode, you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultaneously. An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace, while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows. The zoom area that corresponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner, between the scrollbars.
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>[:STATe] on page 1177 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>:AREA on page 1176
Measurement Zoom As opposed to the graphical zoom, which is merely a visual tool, the measurement zoom adapts the measurement settings such that the data you are interested in is displayed in the required detail. In measurement zoom mode, you can change the display using touch gestures. This is the default operating mode of the R&S FSW.
For details on touch gestures see "Operating Basics" in the R&S FSW Getting Started manual.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
510
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions
Zoomed Displays
Note: The measurement settings are adapted to practical values based on a suitable grid for the current settings, rather than to unwieldy values that reflect precisely the pixel you happen to tap. If the measurement zoom leads to undesirable results, you can easily return to the original measurement settings using the "UNDO" function. When you select the "Measurement Zoom" icon, then tap in a diagram, a dotted rectangle is displayed which you can drag to define the zoom area. This allows you to define the zoom area more precisely than by spreading two fingers in the display.
The measurement zoom function provides further options in a context-sensitive menu, which is displayed when you tap the icon for a second or so (or right-click it). These options concern the behavior of the firmware for subsequent touch gestures on the screen. Note that these settings remain unchanged after a channel preset.
Level Lock Measurement Zoom If activated (default), the reference level (and thus the attenuation) is locked, that is: remains unchanged during touch gestures on the screen.
X-Lock Measurement Zoom If activated, the x-axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch gestures.
Y-Lock Measurement Zoom If activated, the y-axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch gestures.
Adapt Measurement to Zoom (selected diagram) Measurement Zoom If you already performed a graphical zoom using the " Single Zoom " on page 510 or " Multi-Zoom " on page 510 functions, this function automatically adapts the measurement settings to maintain the currently zoomed display.
Restore Original Display
Restores the original display, that is, the originally calculated displays for the entire capture buffer, and closes all zoom windows. Note: This function only restores graphically zoomed displays. Measurement zooms, for which measurement settings were adapted, are recalculated based on the adapted measurement settings. In this case, the zoomed display is maintained.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
511
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Zoomed Displays
Remote command: Single zoom: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM[:STATe] on page 1176 Multiple zoom: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>[:STATe] on page 1177 (for each multiple zoom window)
Data shift ( Pan ) Shifts the data to be evaluated in the result display (analysis region or hop/chirp) and re-evaluates the new data. ALL result displays based on the same data (analysis region or hop/chirp) are updated.
Currently, this function is only available in the Transient Analysis application.
Tip: Result tables are also re-evaluated for each data shift, which can take some time. Close the result tables during a data shift/zoom to improve the screen update speed.
Data Zoom Decreases the amount of data to be evaluated in the result display (analysis region or hop/chirp) and re-evaluates the new data, thus enlarging the display of the remaining data.
ALL result displays based on the same data (analysis region or hop/chirp) are updated.
Currently, this function is only available in the Transient Analysis application.
Tip: result tables are also re-evaluated for each data zoom, which can take some time. Close the result tables during a data shift/zoom to improve the screen update speed.
8.2.3 How to Zoom Into a Diagram
The remote commands required to zoom into a display are described in Chapter 13.8.1, "Zooming into the Display", on page 1174. The following tasks are described here: "To zoom into the diagram at one position" on page 512 "To return to original display" on page 513 "To zoom into multiple positions in the diagram" on page 513 "To maintain a zoomed display permanently" on page 514
For information on how to zoom into a diagram using touch gestures and change the display permanently, see Chapter 4.5.5, "Touchscreen Gestures", on page 95.
To zoom into the diagram at one position 1.
Click on the "Single Zoom" icon in the toolbar. Zoom mode is activated.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
512
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Zoomed Displays
2. Tap and drag your finger in the diagram to select the area to be enlarged. The selected area is indicated by a dotted rectangle.
When you leave the touchscreen, the diagram is replaced by the zoomed trace area. 3. Repeat these steps, if necessary, to enlarge the diagram further.
Scrolling in the zoomed display You can scroll the diagram area to display the entire diagram using the scrollbars at the right and at the bottom of the diagram.
To return to original display
Click on the "Zoom Off" icon in the toolbar. The original trace display is restored. Zoom mode remains active, however.
To zoom into multiple positions in the diagram 1.
Click on the "Multi-Zoom" icon in the toolbar. Multiple zoom mode is activated. 2. Select the first area in the diagram to be enlarged as described in "To zoom into the diagram at one position" on page 512. The selected area is indicated by a dotted rectangle. When you have completed your selection, the original trace is shown in an overview diagram with the selected area indicated by a dotted rectangle. The zoomed trace area is displayed in a separate window (see Figure 8-4.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
513
R&S�FSW 3.
Common Analysis and Display Functions Zoomed Displays
Click on the "Multi-Zoom" icon in the toolbar again. 4. In the overview diagram, select the next area to be enlarged.
The second zoom area is indicated in the overview diagram, and a second zoom window is displayed. 5. Repeat these steps, if necessary, to zoom into further trace areas (up to four).
To move or change zoom areas In multiple zoom mode, you can change the size or position of the individual zoom areas easily at any time. To resize a zoom area, tap directly on the corresponding frame in the overview
window and drag the line to change the size of the frame. To move a zoom area, tap inside the corresponding frame in the overview window and drag the frame to the new position. The contents of the zoom windows are adapted accordingly.
To maintain a zoomed display permanently Graphical zooming only changes the resolution of the displayed trace points temporarily. In order to change the display permanently, you must change the corresponding measurement settings. (Note: Performing a measurement zoom automatically adapts the measurement settings to reflect a graphically zoomed display, see "To perform a measurement zoom" on page 514). 1. Perform a graphical zoom as described in the previous procedures. 2. Select the "Measurement Zoom" icon from the toolbar.
3. Select "Adapt Measurement to Zoom (selected diagram)". The measurement settings are adapted as required to obtain the zoomed result display.
To perform a measurement zoom Performing a measurement zoom automatically adapts the measurement settings to reflect a graphically zoomed display. 1. Select the "Measurement Zoom" icon from the toolbar.
2. Do one of the following to define the zoom area: Stretch two fingers in the diagram to enlarge the area between them.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
514
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Tap and drag one finger in the diagram to select the area to be enlarged. The selected area is indicated by a dotted rectangle.
The measurement settings are adapted as required to obtain the zoomed result display.
8.3 Marker Usage
Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram. Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display both in the time and frequency domain. In addition to basic markers, sophisticated marker functions are provided for special results such as noise or demodulation.
Markers in Spectrogram Displays In the spectrogram result display, you can activate up to 16 markers or delta markers at the same time. Each marker can be assigned to a different frame. Therefore, in addition to the frequency you also define the frame number when activating a new marker. If no frame number is specified, the marker is positioned on the currently selected frame. All markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame.
Basics on Markers.................................................................................................515 Marker Settings..................................................................................................... 518 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions.............................................. 524 Marker (Measurement) Functions......................................................................... 532 How to Work With Markers................................................................................... 553 Measurement Example: Measuring Harmonics Using Marker Functions............. 556
8.3.1 Basics on Markers
Some background knowledge on marker settings and functions is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings.
Markers are used to mark points on traces, to read out measurement results and to select a display section quickly. R&S FSW provides 16 markers per display window. In the Spectrum application, the same markers are displayed in all windows.
The easiest way to work with markers is using the touch screen. Simply double-tap the diagram near a peak. A marker is automatically inserted at the closest detected peak. If necessary, drag the marker and drop it at a different position. When a marker label is selected, a vertical line is displayed which indicates the marker's current xvalue.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
515
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Alternatively, change the position of the selected marker using the rotary knob. By default, the marker is moved from one pixel to the next. If you need to position the marker more precisely, change the step size to move from one sweep point to the next (General Marker Setting).
You can also set an active marker to a new position by defining its x-position numerically. When you select the softkey for a marker, an edit dialog box is displayed.
The most commonly required marker settings and functions are also available as softkeys or via the context menu. Tap the marker on the touch screen and hold your finger for about 2 seconds until the context menu is opened, then select the required entry.
Softkeys for active markers (displayed on the screen) are highlighted blue. The softkey for the currently selected marker (for which functions are performed) is highlighted orange.
To set individual markers very quickly, use the softkeys in the "Marker" menu.
To set up several markers at once, use the "Marker" dialog box.
To position the selected marker to a special value, use the softkeys in the "Marker To" menu.
To determine more sophisticated marker results, use the special functions in the "Marker Function" dialog box.
In addition to basic markers, sophisticated marker functions are provided for special results such as noise or band power measurements.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
516
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Marker Types........................................................................................................ 517 Activating Markers.................................................................................................517 Marker Results...................................................................................................... 517
8.3.1.1 Marker Types
All markers can be used either as normal markers or delta markers. A normal marker indicates the absolute signal value at the defined position in the diagram. A delta marker indicates the value of the marker relative to the specified reference marker (by default marker 1).
In addition, special functions can be assigned to the individual markers. The availability of special marker functions depends on whether the measurement is performed in the frequency or time domain, and on the type of measurement.
Temporary markers are used in addition to the markers and delta markers to analyze the measurement results for special marker functions. They disappear when the associated function is deactivated.
8.3.1.2 Activating Markers
Only active markers are displayed in the diagram and in the marker table.
Active markers are indicated by a highlighted softkey.
By default, marker 1 is active and positioned on the maximum value (peak) of trace 1 as a normal marker. If several traces are displayed, the marker is set to the maximum value of the trace which has the lowest number and is not frozen (View mode). The next marker to be activated is set to the frequency of the next lower level (next peak) as a delta marker; its value is indicated as an offset to marker 1.
A marker can only be activated when at least one trace in the corresponding window is visible. If a trace is switched off, the corresponding markers and marker functions are also deactivated. If the trace is switched on again, the markers along with coupled functions are restored to their original positions, provided the markers have not been used on another trace.
8.3.1.3 Marker Results
Normal markers point to a trace point on the x-axis and display the associated numeric value for that trace point. Delta markers indicate an offset between the level at the delta marker position and the level at the position of the assigned reference marker, in dB.
Note that markers placed on the start and stop values of the x-axis indicate the y-values of the first and last trace point, respectively. For details see "X-Value of the Sweep Point" on page 580.
Signal count markers determine the frequency of a signal at the marker position very accurately.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
517
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
The results can be displayed directly within the diagram area or in a separate table. By default, the first two active markers are displayed in the diagram area. If more markers are activated, the results are displayed in a marker table.
Marker information in diagram area By default, the results of the last two markers or delta markers that were activated are displayed in the diagram area.
The following information is displayed there:
The marker type (M for normal, D for delta, or special function name) The marker number (1 to 16) The assigned trace number in square brackets [ ] The marker value on the y-axis, or the result of the marker function The marker position on the x-axis
For n dB down markers, additional information is displayed, see Table 8-1.
Marker information in marker table
In addition to the marker information displayed within the diagram area, a separate marker table may be displayed beneath the diagram. This table provides the following information for all active markers:
Type Ref Trc Frame
X-value Y-value Function Function Result
Marker type: N (normal), D (delta), T (temporary, internal) and number Reference marker for delta markers Trace to which the marker is assigned Spectrogram frame the marker is positioned in. Displayed only when the Spectrogram is displayed. X-value of the marker Y-value of the marker Activated marker or measurement function Result of the active marker or measurement function
8.3.2 Marker Settings
Or: [MKR] > "Marker Config"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
518
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 13.8.3.1, "Setting Up Individual Markers", on page 1205. Individual Marker Setup........................................................................................ 519 General Marker Settings....................................................................................... 522
8.3.2.1 Individual Marker Setup
Up to 17 markers or delta markers can be activated for each window simultaneously. Initial marker setup is performed using the "Marker" dialog box.
The markers are distributed among 3 tabs for a better overview. By default, the first marker is defined as a normal marker, whereas all others are defined as delta markers with reference to the first marker. All markers are assigned to trace 1, but only the first marker is active.
Selected Marker ......................................................................................................... 519 Marker State ...............................................................................................................520 Marker Position X-value ............................................................................................. 520 Frame (Spectrogram only).......................................................................................... 520 Marker Type ............................................................................................................... 520 Reference Marker ...................................................................................................... 520 Linking to Another Marker .......................................................................................... 521 Assigning the Marker to a Trace ................................................................................ 521 Select Marker ............................................................................................................. 521 All Markers Off ............................................................................................................522
Selected Marker Marker name. The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange.
Remote command: Marker selected via suffix <m> in remote commands.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
519
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1209 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 1207
Marker Position X-value Defines the position (x-value) of the marker in the diagram. For normal markers, the absolute position is indicated. For delta markers, the position relative to the reference marker is provided.
To create a delta marker in a fixed distance to another marker, define the distance as the x-value for the delta marker. Then link the delta marker to another marker using the Linking to Another Marker function.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 1210 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 1208
Frame (Spectrogram only) Spectrogram frame the marker is assigned to.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe on page 1225 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe on page 1230
Marker Type Toggles the marker type.
The type for marker 1 is always "Normal" , the type for delta marker 1 is always "Delta" . These types cannot be changed.
Note: If normal marker 1 is the active marker, switching the "Mkr Type" activates an additional delta marker 1. For any other marker, switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker, it only switches the type of the selected marker.
"Normal"
A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram.
"Delta"
A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the specified reference marker (marker 1 by default).
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1209 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 1207
Reference Marker Defines a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis results (delta marker values).
If the reference marker is deactivated, the delta marker referring to it is also deactivated.
If a fixed reference point is configured (see "Defining a Fixed Reference" on page 523), the reference point ( "FXD" ) can also be selected instead of another marker.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
520
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions
Marker Usage
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREFerence on page 1207
Linking to Another Marker Links the current marker to the marker selected from the list of active markers. If the xaxis value of the initial marker is changed, the linked marker follows to the same position on the x-axis. Linking is off by default. Using this function you can set two markers on different traces to measure the difference (e.g. between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a reference trace). For linked delta markers, the x-value of the delta marker is 0 Hz by default. To create a delta marker in a fixed distance to another marker, define the distance as the x-value for the linked delta marker. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<ms>:LINK:TO:MARKer<md> on page 1209 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<ms>:LINK:TO:MARKer<md> on page 1206 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK on page 1205
Assigning the Marker to a Trace The "Trace" setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace. The trace determines which value the marker shows at the marker position. If the marker was previously assigned to a different trace, the marker remains on the previous frequency or time, but indicates the value of the new trace. If a trace is turned off, the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactivated. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe on page 1210
Select Marker The "Select Marker" function opens a dialog box to select and activate or deactivate one or more markers quickly.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
521
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1209 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 1207
All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF on page 1209
8.3.2.2 General Marker Settings
Some general marker settings allow you to influence the marker behavior for all markers.
Marker Table Display ..................................................................................................522 Marker Info ................................................................................................................. 523 Marker Stepsize ......................................................................................................... 523 Defining a Fixed Reference.........................................................................................523
Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed.
"On"
Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram.
"Off"
No separate marker table is displayed. If Marker Info is active, the marker information is displayed within the diagram area.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
522
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
"Auto"
(Default) If more than two markers are active, the marker table is displayed automatically. If Marker Info is active, the marker information for up to two markers is displayed in the diagram area.
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MTABle on page 1211
Marker Info Turns the marker information displayed in the diagram on and off.
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MINFo[:STATe] on page 1211
Marker Stepsize Defines the size of the steps that the marker position is moved using the rotary knob.
"Standard"
The marker position is moved in steps of (Span/1000), which corresponds approximately to the number of pixels for the default display of 1001 sweep points. This setting is most suitable to move the marker over a larger distance.
"Sweep Points"
The marker position is moved from one sweep point to the next. This setting is required for a very precise positioning if more sweep points are collected than the number of pixels that can be displayed on the screen. It is the default mode.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SSIZe on page 1212
Defining a Fixed Reference Instead of using a reference marker that may vary its position depending on the measurement results, a fixed reference marker can be defined for trace analysis.
Note that this function may not be available in all result displays.
For "State" = "On" , a vertical and a horizontal red display line are displayed, marked as "FXD" . The normal marker 1 is activated and set to the peak value of the trace assigned to marker 1, and a delta marker to the next peak. The fixed reference marker is set to the position of marker 1 at the peak value. The delta marker refers to the fixed reference marker.
The "Level" and "Frequency" or "Time" settings define the position and value of the reference marker. To move the fixed reference, move the red display lines marked "FXD" in the diagram, or change the position settings in the "Marker Settings" tab of the "Marker" dialog box.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
523
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Peak Search sets the fixed reference marker to the current maximum value of the trace assigned to marker 1.
If activated, the fixed reference marker ( "FXD" ) can also be selected as a Reference Marker instead of another marker.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] on page 1235 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y on page 1234 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X on page 1234 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 1234
8.3.3 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker" > "Search" or: [MKR TO] Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily, or to use the current marker position to define another characteristic value. In order to determine the required marker position, searches may be performed. The search results can be influenced by special settings. For more information on searching for signal peaks see Chapter 8.3.4.8, "Marker Peak List", on page 549. The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 13.8.3.4, "Positioning the Marker", on page 1216. Marker Search Settings.........................................................................................524 Marker Search Settings for Spectrograms............................................................ 527 Positioning Functions............................................................................................ 530
8.3.3.1 Marker Search Settings
Access: [MKR TO] > "Search Config" Markers are commonly used to determine peak values, i.e. maximum or minimum values, in the measured signal. Configuration settings allow you to influence the peak search results.
For Spectrograms, special marker settings are available, see Chapter 8.3.3.2, "Marker Search Settings for Spectrograms", on page 527.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
524
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Search Mode for Next Peak ....................................................................................... 525 Exclude LO .................................................................................................................525 Peak Excursion .......................................................................................................... 526 Auto Max Peak Search / Auto Min Peak Search ........................................................526 Search Limits ............................................................................................................. 526
Search Limits ( Left / Right )......................................................................... 526 Search Threshold .........................................................................................526 Use Zoom Limits .......................................................................................... 526 Deactivating All Search Limits ..................................................................... 527
Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak search.
"Left"
Determines the next maximum/minimum to the left of the current peak.
"Absolute"
Determines the next maximum/minimum to either side of the current peak.
"Right"
Determines the next maximum/minimum to the right of the current peak.
Remote command: Chapter 13.8.3.4, "Positioning the Marker", on page 1216
Exclude LO If activated, restricts the frequency range for the marker search functions.
"On"
The minimum frequency included in the peak search range is 5 � resolution bandwidth (RBW). Due to the interference by the first local oscillator to the first intermediate frequency at the input mixer, the LO is represented as a signal at 0 Hz. To avoid the peak marker jumping to the LO signal at 0 Hz, this frequency is excluded from the peak search.
"Off"
No restriction to the search range. The frequency 0 Hz is included in the marker search functions.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
525
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions
Marker Usage
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LOEXclude on page 1212
Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it is identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions. Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed; the resolution is 0.1 dB. The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB. For Analog Modulation Analysis, the unit and value range depend on the selected result display type. For more information, see Chapter 8.3.4.8, "Marker Peak List", on page 549. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion on page 1213
Auto Max Peak Search / Auto Min Peak Search If activated, a maximum or minimum peak search is performed automatically for marker 1 after each sweep. For spectrogram displays, define which frame the peak is to be searched in. For EMI measurements, these functions are not available; use Automatic Peak Search instead (see Chapter 6.13.4.2, "EMI Final Measurement Configuration", on page 340). Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:AUTO on page 1216 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:AUTO on page 1218
Search Limits The search results can be restricted by limiting the search area or adding search conditions.
Search Limits ( Left / Right ) Search Limits If activated, limit lines are defined and displayed for the search. Only results within the limited search range are considered. For details on limit lines for searches, see "Peak search limits" on page 549. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 1213 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT on page 1214 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt on page 1214
Search Threshold Search Limits Defines an absolute threshold as an additional condition for the peak search. Only peaks that exceed the threshold are detected. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:THReshold on page 1215
Use Zoom Limits Search Limits If activated, the peak search is restricted to the active zoom area defined for a single zoom.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
526
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM[:STATe] on page 1215
Deactivating All Search Limits Search Limits Deactivates the search range limits. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 1213 CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe on page 1216
8.3.3.2 Marker Search Settings for Spectrograms
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Markers" > "Search" or: [MKR TO] > "Search Config" Spectrograms show not only the current sweep results, but also the sweep history. Thus, when searching for peaks, you must define the search settings within a single time frame (x-direction) and within several time frames (y-direction). These settings are only available for spectrogram displays.
Search Mode for Next Peak in X-Direction ................................................................ 528 Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction .................................................................528 Marker Search Type ...................................................................................................528 Marker Search Area ................................................................................................... 529 Exclude LO .................................................................................................................529 Peak Excursion .......................................................................................................... 529 Auto Max Peak Search / Auto Min Peak Search ........................................................529 Search Limits ............................................................................................................. 530
Search Limits ( Left / Right )......................................................................... 530
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
527
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Search Threshold .........................................................................................530 Use Zoom Limits .......................................................................................... 530 Deactivating All Search Limits ..................................................................... 530
Search Mode for Next Peak in X-Direction Selects the search mode for the next peak search within the currently selected frame.
"Left"
Determines the next maximum/minimum to the left of the current peak.
"Absolute"
Determines the next maximum/minimum to either side of the current peak.
"Right"
Determines the next maximum/minimum to the right of the current peak.
Remote command: Chapter 13.8.3.4, "Positioning the Marker", on page 1216
Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction Selects the search mode for the next peak search within all frames at the current marker position.
"Up"
Determines the next maximum/minimum above the current peak (in more recent frames).
"Absolute"
Determines the next maximum/minimum above or below the current peak (in all frames).
"Down"
Determines the next maximum/minimum below the current peak (in older frames).
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe on page 1226
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe on page 1231 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:BELow on page 1227
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:BELow on page 1231 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:NEXT on page 1227
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:NEXT on page 1232 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:ABOVe on page 1228
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:ABOVe on page 1232 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:BELow on page 1228
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:BELow on page 1232 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:NEXT on page 1228
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:NEXT on page 1233
Marker Search Type Defines the type of search to be performed in the spectrogram.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
528
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
"X-Search"
Searches only within the currently selected frame.
"Y-Search"
Searches within all frames but only at the current frequency position.
"XY-Search" Searches in all frames at all positions.
Remote command: Defined by the search function, see Chapter 13.8.3.6, "Marker Search (Spectrograms)", on page 1224
Marker Search Area Defines which frames the search is performed in.
"Visible"
Only the visible frames are searched.
"Memory"
All frames stored in the memory are searched.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:SARea on page 1226 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:SARea on page 1230
Exclude LO If activated, restricts the frequency range for the marker search functions.
"On"
The minimum frequency included in the peak search range is 5 � resolution bandwidth (RBW). Due to the interference by the first local oscillator to the first intermediate frequency at the input mixer, the LO is represented as a signal at 0 Hz. To avoid the peak marker jumping to the LO signal at 0 Hz, this frequency is excluded from the peak search.
"Off"
No restriction to the search range. The frequency 0 Hz is included in the marker search functions.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LOEXclude on page 1212
Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it is identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions.
Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed; the resolution is 0.1 dB. The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB.
For Analog Modulation Analysis, the unit and value range depend on the selected result display type.
For more information, see Chapter 8.3.4.8, "Marker Peak List", on page 549.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion on page 1213
Auto Max Peak Search / Auto Min Peak Search If activated, a maximum or minimum peak search is performed automatically for marker 1 after each sweep.
For spectrogram displays, define which frame the peak is to be searched in.
For EMI measurements, these functions are not available; use Automatic Peak Search instead (see Chapter 6.13.4.2, "EMI Final Measurement Configuration", on page 340).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
529
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:AUTO on page 1216 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:AUTO on page 1218
Search Limits The search results can be restricted by limiting the search area or adding search conditions.
Search Limits ( Left / Right ) Search Limits If activated, limit lines are defined and displayed for the search. Only results within the limited search range are considered. For details on limit lines for searches, see "Peak search limits" on page 549. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 1213 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT on page 1214 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt on page 1214
Search Threshold Search Limits Defines an absolute threshold as an additional condition for the peak search. Only peaks that exceed the threshold are detected. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:THReshold on page 1215
Use Zoom Limits Search Limits If activated, the peak search is restricted to the active zoom area defined for a single zoom. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM[:STATe] on page 1215
Deactivating All Search Limits Search Limits Deactivates the search range limits. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 1213 CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe on page 1216
8.3.3.3 Positioning Functions
Access: [MKR ->]
The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search or set other characteristic values to the current marker value.
Peak Search ...............................................................................................................531 Search Next Peak ...................................................................................................... 531 Search Minimum ........................................................................................................ 531 Search Next Minimum ................................................................................................531 Center Frequency = Marker Frequency ..................................................................... 531 Reference Level = Marker Level ................................................................................ 532
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
530
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions
Marker Usage
Peak Search Sets the selected marker/delta marker to the maximum of the trace. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated.
For spectrogram displays, define which frame the peak is to be searched in.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 1217 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 1221
Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker/delta marker to the next (lower) maximum of the assigned trace. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated.
For spectrogram displays, define which frame the next peak is to be searched in.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 1217 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 1218 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 1217 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 1220 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 1221 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 1220
Search Minimum Sets the selected marker/delta marker to the minimum of the trace. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated.
For spectrogram displays, define which frame the minimum is to be searched in.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 1219 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 1222
Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker/delta marker to the next (higher) minimum of the selected trace. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated.
For spectrogram displays, define which frame the next minimum is to be searched in.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 1219 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT on page 1219 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt on page 1219 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 1221 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT on page 1221 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt on page 1222
Center Frequency = Marker Frequency Sets the center frequency to the selected marker or delta marker frequency. A peak can thus be set as center frequency, for example to analyze it in detail with a smaller span.
This function is not available for zero span measurements.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
531
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer on page 1131
Reference Level = Marker Level Sets the reference level to the selected marker level. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:REFerence on page 1147
8.3.4 Marker (Measurement) Functions
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions"
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 13.8.3, "Working with Markers", on page 1204.
Precise Frequency (Signal Count) Marker............................................................ 533 Measuring Noise Density (Noise Meas Marker)....................................................534 Phase Noise Measurement Marker.......................................................................537 Measuring Characteristic Bandwidths (n dB Down Marker)..................................540 Fixed Reference Marker........................................................................................542 Measuring the Power in a Channel (Band Power Marker)....................................543 Demodulating Marker Values and Providing Audio Output (Marker Demodulation)
.............................................................................................................................. 546 Marker Peak List................................................................................................... 549 Deactivating All Marker Functions.........................................................................552
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
532
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
8.3.4.1 Precise Frequency (Signal Count) Marker
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "Select Marker Function" > "Signal Count" > "Signal Count Config"
Or: [MKR FUNC] > "Select Marker Function" > "Signal Count" > "Signal Count Config"
A normal marker determines the position of the point on the trace and indicates the signal frequency at this position. The trace, however, contains only a limited number of points. Depending on the selected span, each trace point can contain many measurement values. Thus, the frequency resolution of each trace point is limited.
(See also Chapter 7.5.1.8, "How Much Data is Measured: Sweep Points and Sweep Count", on page 464).
Frequency resolution is further restricted by the RBW and sweep time settings.
To determine the frequency of a signal point accurately without changing the sweep settings, the R&S FSW is equipped with a signal counter. The signal counter sets the RF to the current marker position, then counts the zero crossings of the IF (thus the term signal counter) and derives the precise frequency value.
Signal counting can be performed explicitly at the current marker position ( "Signal Count" marker function), or implicitly by the R&S FSW for certain functions.
Signal counting is only possible while the instrument is not sweeping. Thus, to perform a signal count for a marker, the sweep is stopped at the marker position. The frequency is determined with the desired resolution and then the sweep is allowed to continue.
A measurement example is described in Chapter 6.1.3.2, "Measuring the Signal Frequency Using the Signal Counter", on page 130.
Signal counters are not available for measurements on I/Q-based data.
Remote commands: "Example: Performing a Highly Accurate Frequency Measurement Using the Signal Count Marker" on page 1263 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt on page 1251 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:RESolution on page 1252 Signal Count Marker State ......................................................................................... 534 Resolution .................................................................................................................. 534
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
533
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Signal Count Marker State Activates or deactivates the special signal count marker function. When activated, the sweep stops at the reference marker until the signal counter has delivered a result. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt on page 1251 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency? on page 1252
Resolution Defines the resolution with which the signal is analyzed around the reference marker 1. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:RESolution on page 1252
8.3.4.2 Measuring Noise Density (Noise Meas Marker)
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "Select Marker Function" > "Noise Measurement" > "Noise Meas Config"
Or: [MKR FUNC] > "Select Marker Function" > "Noise Measurement" > "Noise Meas Config"
Using the noise measurement marker function, the noise power density is measured at the position of the marker. In the time domain mode, all points of the trace are used to determine the noise power density. When measurements are performed in the frequency domain, eight points to the right and left of the marker (if available) are used for the measurement to obtain a stable result.
Result display
Noise density is the noise referred to a bandwidth of 1 Hz. With logarithmic amplitude units (dBm, dBmV, dBm�V, dB�A), the noise power density is output in dBm/Hz, i.e. as the level in 1 Hz bandwidth with reference to 1 mW. With linear amplitude units (V, A, W), the noise voltage density is analyzed in �V/Hz; the noise current density in �A/ Hz; the noise power density in �W/Hz.
The result is indicated as the function result in the Marker Table.
Prerequisite settings
The following settings are required to obtain correct values:
Detector: Sample or RMS Video bandwidth:
0.1 resolution bandwidth with sample detector 3 x resolution bandwidth with RMS detector Trace averaging: In the default setting, the R&S FSW uses the sample detector for the noise function. With the sample detector, you can set the trace to "Average" mode to stabilize the measured values. When the RMS detector is used, trace averaging produces noise levels that are too low and cannot be corrected. Instead, increase the sweep time to obtain stable measurement results.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
534
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions
Marker Usage
Correction factors
The R&S FSW uses the following correction factors to analyze the noise density from the marker level:
Since the noise power is indicated with reference to 1 Hz bandwidth, the bandwidth correction value is deducted from the marker level. It is 10 x lg (1 Hz/BWNoise), where BWNoise is the noise or power bandwidth of the set resolution filter (RBW).
RMS detector: With the exception of bandwidth correction, no further corrections are required since this detector already indicates the power for each point of the trace.
Sample detector: As a result of video filter averaging and trace averaging, 1.05 dB is added to the marker level. This is the difference between the average value and the RMS value of white noise. With a logarithmic level axis, 1.45 dB is added additionally. Logarithmic averaging is thus fully taken into account, which yields a value that is 1.45 dB lower than that of linear averaging.
To allow for a more stable noise display, eight trace points on each side of the measurement frequency are averaged.
For span > 0, the measured values are averaged versus time (after a sweep).
The R&S FSW noise figure can be calculated from the measured power density level. It is calculated by deducting the set RF attenuation (RF Att) from the displayed noise level and adding 174 to the result.
The individual marker settings correspond to those defined in the "Marker" dialog box (see Chapter 8.3.2.1, "Individual Marker Setup", on page 519). Any settings to the marker state or type changed in the "Marker Function" dialog box are also changed in the "Marker" dialog box and vice versa.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
535
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Remote commands:
"Example: Measuring Noise Density" on page 1260
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] on page 1240
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult? on page 1240
Marker State ...............................................................................................................536 Marker Type ............................................................................................................... 536 Noise Measurement State ..........................................................................................537 Switching All Noise Measurement Off ........................................................................ 537
Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1209 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 1207
Marker Type Toggles the marker type. The type for marker 1 is always "Normal" , the type for delta marker 1 is always "Delta" . These types cannot be changed.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
536
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Note: If normal marker 1 is the active marker, switching the "Mkr Type" activates an additional delta marker 1. For any other marker, switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker, it only switches the type of the selected marker.
"Normal"
A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram.
"Delta"
A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the specified reference marker (marker 1 by default).
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1209 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 1207
Noise Measurement State Activates or deactivates noise measurement for the marker in the diagram.
This function is only available for normal markers.
If activated, the marker displays the noise power density measured at the position of the marker.
For details see Chapter 8.3.4.2, "Measuring Noise Density (Noise Meas Marker)", on page 534.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] on page 1240 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult? on page 1240
Switching All Noise Measurement Off Deactivates noise measurement for all markers.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] on page 1240
8.3.4.3 Phase Noise Measurement Marker
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "Phase Noise" > "Phase Noise Config"
Or: [MKR FUNC] > "Select Marker Function" > "Phase Noise" > "Phase Noise Config"
For each of the 16 markers phase noise measurement can be activated.
Phase noise is unintentional modulation of a carrier; it creates frequencies next to the carrier frequency. A phase noise measurement consists of noise density measurements at defined offsets from the carrier; the results are given in relation to the carrier level (dBc). The phase noise marker function measures the noise power at the delta markers referred to 1 Hz bandwidth. Marker 1 is used as the reference for the phase noise measurement. By default, the current frequency and level of marker 1 are used as the fixed reference marker. However, a peak search can be started to use the current signal peak as the reference point, or a reference point can be defined manually.
Since the reference point is fixed, the reference level or the center frequency can be set so that the carrier is outside the displayed frequency range after phase noise measurement is started. Or a notch filter can be switched on to suppress the carrier.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
537
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions
Marker Usage
Alternatively, the reference point can be determined automatically by a peak search after each sweep. This function can be used to track a drifting source during a phase noise measurement. The delta marker 2, which shows the phase noise measurement result, keeps the delta frequency value. Therefore the phase noise measurement leads to reliable results in a certain offset although the source is drifting. Only if the marker 2 reaches the border of the span, the delta marker value is adjusted to be within the span. In these cases, select a larger span.
The result of the phase noise measurement is the difference in level between the reference point and the noise power density. It is indicated as the function result of the phase noise marker in the marker table.
The sample detector is automatically used and the video bandwidth set to 0.1 times the resolution bandwidth (RBW). The two settings are taken into account in the correction values used for the noise power measurement. To obtain stable results, two pixels on the right and the left of the delta marker position are taken for the measurement.
The procedure for determining the noise power is identical to the method used for the noise power measurement (see Chapter 8.3.4.2, "Measuring Noise Density (Noise Meas Marker)", on page 534).
The individual marker settings correspond to those defined in the "Marker" dialog box. Any settings to the marker state or type changed in the "Marker Function" dialog box are also changed in the "Marker" dialog box and vice versa.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
538
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Remote commands:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] on page 1243
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult? on page 1243
Phase Noise Measurement State .............................................................................. 539 Defining Reference Point ........................................................................................... 540 Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off ........................................................... 540
Phase Noise Measurement State Activates or deactivates phase noise measurement for the reference point in the diagram. This function is only available for delta markers.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
539
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
If activated, the delta markers display the phase noise measured at defined offsets from the reference position.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] on page 1242 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult? on page 1241
Defining Reference Point Instead of using marker 1 as the reference marker, a fixed reference marker can be defined for phase noise measurement.
The "Level" and "Frequency" or "Time" settings define the position and value of the reference point.
Alternatively, a Peak Search can be performed to set the maximum value of the selected trace as the reference point.
If "Automatic Peak Search" is activated, a peak search is started automatically after each sweep and the result is used as the reference point.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y on page 1234 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X on page 1234 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 1234 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AUTO on page 1241
Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off Deactivates phase noise measurement for all markers.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] on page 1242
8.3.4.4 Measuring Characteristic Bandwidths (n dB Down Marker)
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "n dB down" > "n dB Down Config"
Or: [MKR FUNC] > "Select Marker Function" > "n dB down" > "n dB Down Config"
When characterizing the shape of a signal, the bandwidth at a specified offset from its peak level is often of interest. The offset is specified as a relative decrease in amplitude of n dB. To measure this bandwidth, you could use several markers and delta markers and determine the bandwidth manually. However, using the n dB down marker function makes the task very simple and quick.
The n dB down marker function uses the current value of marker 1 as the reference point. It activates two temporary markers T1 and T2 located on the signal, whose level is n dB below the level of the reference point. Marker T1 is placed to the left and marker T2 to the right of the reference marker. The default setting for n is 3 dB, but it can be changed.
If a positive offset is entered, the markers T1 and T2 are placed below the active reference point. If a negative value is entered (for example for notch filter measurements), the markers T1 and T2 are placed above the active reference point.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
540
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Figure 8-5: n dB down marker function
The following marker function results are displayed:
Table 8-1: n dB down marker function results
Label
Description
M1
Current position and level of marker 1
ndB
Offset value (n dB down)
ndB down Bw / Determined bandwidth or pulse width (zero span) at the offset PWid
Q-factor
Center frequency / n-dB-down-bandwidth Quality factor of the determined bandwidth (characteristic of damping or resonance)
T1, T2
Current position and level of the temporary markers
If the required position for the temporary markers cannot be determined uniquely, for example due to noise, dashes are displayed as a result.
Remote commands: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe on page 1250
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
541
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult? on page 1249
n dB down Marker State .............................................................................................542 n dB down Value......................................................................................................... 542
n dB down Marker State Activates or deactivates the special n dB down marker function. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe on page 1250 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult? on page 1249
n dB down Value Defines the delta level from the reference marker 1 used to determine the bandwidth or time span. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency? on page 1248 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME? on page 1250
8.3.4.5 Fixed Reference Marker
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "Reference Fixed"
Or: [MKR FUNC] > "Select Marker Function" > "Reference Fixed"
Instead of using a reference marker that may vary its position depending on the measurement results, a fixed reference marker can be defined for trace analysis. Once positioned, the reference marker does not move during subsequent sweeps unless you explicitely move it manually.
When you select this marker function, a vertical and a horizontal red display line are displayed, marked as "FXD" . A normal marker is activated and set to the peak value and a delta marker to the next peak. The fixed reference marker is set to the position of the normal marker at the peak value. The delta marker refers to the fixed reference marker.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
542
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
You can move the position of the fixed reference marker graphically by dragging the display lines, or numerically by entering values for the marker position and level.
Remote commands:
"Example: Using a Fixed Reference Marker" on page 1258
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] on page 1235
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X on page 1234
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y on page 1234
8.3.4.6 Measuring the Power in a Channel (Band Power Marker)
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "Band Power" > "Band Power Config"
or: [MKR FUNC] > "Select Marker Function" > "Band Power"
To determine the noise power in a transmission channel, you can use a noise marker and multiply the result with the channel bandwidth. However, the results are only accurate for flat noise.
Band power markers allow you to measure the integrated power for a defined span (band) around a marker (similar to ACP measurements). By default, 5 % of the current span is used. The span is indicated by limit lines in the diagram. You can easily change the span by moving the limit lines in the diagram. They are automatically aligned symmetrically to the marker frequency. They are also moved automatically if you move the marker on the screen.
The results can be displayed either as a power (dBm) or density (dBm/Hz) value and are indicated in the marker table for each band power marker.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
543
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Relative band power markers
The results for band power markers which are defined as delta markers and thus have a reference value can also be calculated as reference power values (in dB).
For Analog Modulation Analysis, relative band power markers are not available.
In this case, the result of the band power deltamarker is the difference between the absolute power in the band around the delta marker and the absolute power for the reference marker. The powers are subtracted logarithmically, so the result is a dB value.
[Relative band power (Delta2) in dB] = [absolute band power (Delta2) in dBm] - [absolute (band) power of reference marker in dBm]
The measured power for the reference marker may be an absolute power at a single point (if the reference marker is not a band power marker), or the power in a band (if the reference marker is a band power marker itself).
If the reference marker for the band power marker is also a delta marker, the absolute power level for the reference marker is used for calculation.
Band power markers are only available for standard frequency measurements (not zero span) in the Spectrum and Spectrum application. In Analog Modulation Analysis with AM, FM, or PM spectrum results, this marker function does not determine a power value, but rather the deviation within the specified span.
For the I/Q Analyzer application, band power markers are only available for Spectrum displays.
The entire band must lie within the display. If it is moved out of the display, the result cannot be calculated (indicated by "- - -" as the "Function Result" ). However, the width of the band is maintained so that the band power can be calculated again when it returns to the display.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
544
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
All markers can be defined as band power markers, each with a different span. When a band power marker is activated, if no marker is active yet, marker 1 is activated. Otherwise, the currently active marker is used as a band power marker (all other marker functions for this marker are deactivated).
If the detector mode for the marker trace is set to "Auto" , the RMS detector is used.
The individual marker settings correspond to those defined in the "Marker" dialog box (see Chapter 8.3.2.1, "Individual Marker Setup", on page 519). Any settings to the marker state or type changed in the "Marker Function" dialog box are also changed in the "Marker" dialog box and vice versa.
Remote commands:
"Example: Measuring the Power in a Channel Using Band Power Markers" on page 1261
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] on page 1245
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult? on page 1244
Band Power Measurement State ............................................................................... 545 Span ...........................................................................................................................546 Power Mode ............................................................................................................... 546 Switching All Band Power Measurements Off ............................................................546
Band Power Measurement State Activates or deactivates band power measurement for the marker in the diagram. Band power markers are only available for standard frequency measurements (not zero span) in the Spectrum application. If activated, the markers display the power or density measured in the band around the current marker position. For details see Chapter 8.3.4.6, "Measuring the Power in a Channel (Band Power Marker)", on page 543.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
545
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] on page 1245 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] on page 1247
Span Defines the span (band) around the marker for which the power is measured.
The span is indicated by lines in the diagram. You can easily change the span by moving the limit lines in the diagram. They are automatically aligned symmetrically to the marker frequency. They are also moved automatically if you move the marker on the screen.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN on page 1245 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN on page 1247
Power Mode Defines the mode of the power measurement result.
For Analog Modulation Analysis, the power mode is not editable for AM, FM, or PM spectrum results. In this case, the marker function does not determine a power value, but rather the deviation within the specified span.
"Power"
The result is an absolute power level. The power unit depends on the Unit setting.
"Relative Power"
This setting is only available for a delta band power marker. The result is the difference between the absolute power in the band around the delta marker and the absolute power for the reference marker (see " Reference Marker " on page 338). The powers are subtracted logarithmically, so the result is a dB value. [Relative band power (Delta2) in dB] = [absolute band power (Delta2) in dBm] - [absolute (band) power of reference marker in dBm] For details see "Relative band power markers" on page 544
"Density"
The result is a power level in relation to the bandwidth, displayed in dBm/Hz.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE on page 1244 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE on page 1246
Switching All Band Power Measurements Off Deactivates band power measurement for all markers.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] on page 1245 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] on page 1247
8.3.4.7 Demodulating Marker Values and Providing Audio Output (Marker Demodulation)
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "Select Marker Function" > "Marker Demodulation" > "Marker Demod Config"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
546
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Or: [MKR FUNC] > "Select Marker Function" > "Marker Demodulation" > "Marker Demod Config"
The R&S FSW provides demodulators for AM, FM and PM signals. The demodulation marker function sends the demodulated data at the current marker frequency to the audio output. Thus, a displayed signal can be identified acoustically with the help of the internal loudspeaker or with headphones.
This function is not available for Spectrum Emission Mask measurements or measurements on I/Q-based data.
The sweep stops at the frequency determined by marker 1 for the selected time and the RF signal is demodulated in a bandwidth that corresponds to the RBW. Alternatively, demodulation can be activated continuously, i.e. audio output occurs regardless of the marker position and the marker stop time. For measurements in the time domain (zero span), demodulation is always continuous.
Optionally, a minimum level ( "Squelch Level" ) can be defined so that the signal is only demodulated when it exceeds the set level. This is useful during continuous demodulation to avoid listening to noise.
The squelch function activates the video trigger function (see " Video " on page 482) and deactivates any other trigger or gating settings. The squelch level and trigger level are set to the same value. The trigger source in the channel bar is indicated as "SQL" for squelch. The squelch level is indicated by a red line in the diagram.
Remote commands:
Chapter 13.8.3.15, "Programming Examples for Using Markers and Marker Functions", on page 1255
Marker Demodulation State ....................................................................................... 548 Continuous Demodulation ..........................................................................................548 Marker Stop Time .......................................................................................................548 Modulation ..................................................................................................................548 Squelch ...................................................................................................................... 548 Squelch Level .............................................................................................................549
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
547
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions
Marker Usage
Marker Demodulation State Activates or deactivates the demodulation output. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] on page 1254
Continuous Demodulation If activated, the signal is demodulated continuously and sent to the audio output, instead of stopping the sweep at the marker frequency of marker 1 and demodulating there for the configured marker stop time. This allows you to monitor the frequency range acoustically (assuming the sweep time is long enough). For zero span, demodulation is always active continuously. In FFT mode, "Continuous Demodulation" is not available. The sweep always stops at the frequency of marker 1. For EMI measurements, demodulation is always performed during the final measurement, and only the detected peak marker positions are demodulated (for the defined dwell time), regardless of the "Continuous Demodulation" setting. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:CONTinuous on page 1253
Marker Stop Time Defines how long the sweep is stopped at the marker position to output the demodulated signal. For zero span measurements, demodulation is always active continuously, regardless of the marker stop time. For EMI measurements, the duration of the demodulation at each marker position is limited by the dwell time of the EMI measurement marker (see " Dwell Time " on page 342). Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff on page 1254
Modulation Defines the demodulation mode for output (AM/FM). The default setting is AM. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect on page 1254
Squelch Activates or deactivates the squelch function. If activated, the audible AF is cut off below a defined threshold level. Thus, you avoid hearing noise at the audio output when no signal is available. The squelch function activates the video trigger function (see " Video " on page 482) and deactivates any other trigger or gating settings. The squelch level and trigger level are set to the same value. The trigger source in the channel bar is indicated as "SQL" for squelch. The squelch level is indicated by a red line in the diagram. The trigger source in the channel bar is indicated as "SQL" for squelch. The squelch level is indicated by a red line in the diagram.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
548
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Remote command: [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] on page 1255
Squelch Level Defines the level threshold below which the audible AF is cut off if squelching is enabled. The video trigger level is set to the same value. The squelch level is indicated by a red line in the diagram. Remote command: [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel on page 1255
8.3.4.8 Marker Peak List
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "Marker Peak List"
Or: [MKR FUNC] > "Marker Peak List"
A common measurement task is to determine peak values, i.e. maximum or minimum signal levels. The R&S FSW provides various peak search functions and applications:
Setting a marker to a peak value once (Peak Search) Searching for a peak value within a restricted search area (Search Limits) Creating a marker table with all or a defined number of peak values for one sweep
(Marker Peak List) Updating the marker position to the current peak value automatically after each
sweep (Auto Peak Search) Creating a fixed reference marker at the current peak value of a trace (Fixed Refer-
ence)
Peak search limits
The peak search can be restricted to a search area. The search area is defined by limit lines which are also indicated in the diagram. In addition, a minimum value (threshold) can be defined as a further search condition.
When is a peak a peak? - Peak excursion
During a peak search, for example when a marker peak table is displayed, noise values may be detected as a peak if the signal is very flat or does not contain many peaks. Therefore, you can define a relative threshold ( "Peak Excursion" ). The signal level must increase by the threshold value before falling again before a peak is detected. To avoid identifying noise peaks as maxima or minima, enter a peak excursion value that is higher than the difference between the highest and the lowest value measured for the displayed inherent noise.
Effect of peak excursion settings (example)
The following figure shows a trace to be analyzed.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
549
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
Figure 8-6: Trace example
The following table lists the peaks as indicated by the marker numbers in the diagram above, as well as the minimum decrease in amplitude to either side of the peak:
Marker # 1 2 3 4 5
Min. amplitude decrease to either side of the signal 80 dB 80 dB 55 dB 39 dB 32 dB
In order to eliminate the smaller peaks M3, M4 and M5 in the example above, a peak excursion of at least 60 dB is required. In this case, the amplitude must rise at least 60 dB before falling again before a peak is detected.
Marker peak list
The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum. It is updated automatically after each sweep. How many peaks are displayed can be defined, as well as the sort order. In addition, the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram. The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external application.
Automatic peak search
A peak search can be repeated automatically after each sweep in order to keep the maximum value as the reference point for a phase noise measurement. This is useful to track a drifting source. The delta marker 2, which shows the phase noise measure-
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
550
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
ment result, keeps the delta frequency value. Therefore the phase noise measurement leads to reliable results in a certain offset although the source is drifting.
Using a peak as a fixed reference marker Some results are analyzed in relation to a peak value, for example a carrier frequency level. In this case, the maximum level can be determined by an initial peak search and then be used as a reference point for further measurement results.
Remote commands:
"Example: Obtaining a Marker Peak List" on page 1259
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:STATe on page 1238
TRAC? LIST, see TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1196
Peak List State ........................................................................................................... 551 Sort Mode ...................................................................................................................552 Maximum Number of Peaks .......................................................................................552 Peak Excursion .......................................................................................................... 552 Display Marker Numbers ............................................................................................552 Export Peak List ......................................................................................................... 552
Peak List State Activates/deactivates the marker peak list. If activated, the peak list is displayed and the peaks are indicated in the trace display.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
551
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
For each listed peak the frequency/time ( "X-value" ) and level ( "Y-Value" ) values are given. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:STATe on page 1238
Sort Mode Defines whether the peak list is sorted according to the x-values or y-values. In either case the values are sorted in ascending order. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT on page 1238
Maximum Number of Peaks Defines the maximum number of peaks to be determined and displayed. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:LIST:SIZE on page 1237
Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it is identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions. Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed; the resolution is 0.1 dB. The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB. For Analog Modulation Analysis, the unit and value range depend on the selected result display type. For more information, see Chapter 8.3.4.8, "Marker Peak List", on page 549. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion on page 1213
Display Marker Numbers By default, the marker numbers are indicated in the diagram so you can find the peaks from the list. However, for large numbers of peaks the marker numbers may decrease readability; in this case, deactivate the marker number display. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:ANNotation:LABel[:STATe] on page 1236
Export Peak List The peak list can be exported to an ASCII file (.DAT) for analysis in an external application. Remote command: MMEMory:STORe<n>:PEAK on page 1311 FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 1284
8.3.4.9 Deactivating All Marker Functions
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "All Functions Off"
Or: [MKR FUNC] > "All Functions Off"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
552
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
All special marker functions can be deactivated in one step.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:AOFF on page 1244 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:AOFF on page 1239 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AOFF on page 1242
8.3.5 How to Work With Markers
The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate in detail how to work with markers. How to Analyze a Signal Point in Detail................................................................ 553 How to Use a Fixed Reference Marker................................................................. 554 How to Output the Demodulated Signal Accoustically.......................................... 554 How to Export a Peak List.....................................................................................555
8.3.5.1 How to Analyze a Signal Point in Detail
Step-by-step instructions on working with markers are provided here. For details on individual functions and settings see Chapter 8.3.2, "Marker Settings", on page 518. The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 13.8.3, "Working with Markers", on page 1204.
When you need to analyze a characteristic point in the signal in more detail, the following procedure can be helpful:
1. Perform a peak search to determine the characteristic point roughly by pressing the [Peak Search] key.
2. If the required signal point is not the maximum, continue the peak search to one of the subsequent maxima or minima: a) Press the [Mkr ->] key. b) Select the "Next Peak" or "Next Min" key. c) If necessary, change the search settings by selecting the "Search Config" softkey.
3. Center the display around the determined signal point by setting the marker value to the center frequency. Select the "Center = Mkr Freq" softkey.
4. Determine the precise frequency of the signal point: a) Select the "Select Marker Function" softkey. b) Select the "Signal Count" button. c) Select the "Signal Count Resolution" softkey. d) Select the resolution depending on how precise the result needs to be.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
553
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
8.3.5.2 How to Use a Fixed Reference Marker
By default, delta markers refer to marker 1. However, they can also refer to a fixed reference marker.
How to Define and Move a Fixed Reference Marker
1. To display a fixed reference marker, do one of the following: Press the [MKR FUNC] key, then select the "Reference Fixed" marker function. In the "Marker" dialog box, in the "Reference Fixed" area of the "Marker Config" tab, set the "State" to "On" . A vertical and a horizontal red display line are displayed, marked as "FXD" . The normal marker 1 is activated and set to the peak value of the trace assigned to marker 1, and a delta marker to the next peak. The fixed reference marker is set to the position of marker 1 at the peak value.
2. To move the fixed reference marker, do one of the following: Change the "Level" and "Frequency" of the reference point in the "Marker Config" tab of the "Marker" dialog box, . By default, the current peak value of trace 1 is set. Set the fixed reference marker to the current peak value by selecting the "Peak Search" button in the "Marker Config" tab of the "Marker" dialog box. Move the "FXD" display lines that define the position of the fixed reference marker by dragging them on the screen.
How to Assign a Fixed Reference Marker to Delta Markers
1. In the "Marker" dialog box, select the horizontal "Markers" tab.
2. For the active delta marker that is to refer to the fixed reference marker, select "FXD" from the "Reference Marker" list.
The delta marker indicates the offset of the current trace value at the marker position from the fixed reference value.
8.3.5.3 How to Output the Demodulated Signal Accoustically
For long sweep times you may wish to monitor a measurement accoustically rather than visually to determine when a certain signal level is reached.
Risk of hearing damage To protect your hearing, make sure that the volume setting is not too high before putting on the headphones.
1. Set marker 1 to the signal level you want to monitor. 2. Press the [Mkr FUNCT] key.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
554
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
3. Select the "Select Marker Function" softkey.
4. Select the "Marker Demodulation" button.
5. Select the "Marker Demod Config" softkey. The marker function results are determined immediately according to the default settings.
6. Define how long you want to hear the output signal when the marker value is reached by entering the duration in the "Marker Stop Time" field. Alternatively, the audio signal can be output continuously, regardless of the marker value; in this case, set "Continuous Demodulation" to "On" .
7. Select the modulation type (AM/FM/PM) of the signal.
8. To avoid listening to noise during continuous output, set "Squelch" to "On" and define the signal level below which the signal is ignored ( "Squelch" ).
9. Set "Marker Demodulation" to "On" .
10. Plug your headphones into the PHONES connector on the front panel of the R&S FSW.
11. Adjust the volume using the rotary knob next to the PHONES connector. During the next or currently running measurement, when the sweep reaches the marker position, the demodulated signal is output as an audio signal via the headphones for the given duration. Or, depending on the configuration, the demodulated signal is continuously output via the headphones, if the signal level exceeds the squelch level.
8.3.5.4 How to Export a Peak List
You can save the results of a marker peak list to an ASCII file.
1. Press the [MKR FUNCT] key.
2. Select the "Marker Peak List" softkey.
3. Configure the peak search and list settings as described in Chapter 8.3.4.8, "Marker Peak List", on page 549.
4. Set the marker peak list "State" to "On" .
5. Press the [RUN SINGLE] key to perform a single sweep measurement and create a marker peak list.
6. Select the "Marker Peak List" softkey to display the "Marker Peak List" dialog box again.
7. If necessary, change the decimal separator to be used for the ASCII export file.
8. Select the "Export Peak List" button.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
555
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Marker Usage
9. In the file selection dialog box, select the storage location and file name for the export file.
10. Select "Save" to close the dialog box and export the peak list data to the file.
8.3.6 Measurement Example: Measuring Harmonics Using Marker Functions
This measurement example describes how to measure harmonics using the provided marker functions. Note that this task can be performed much simpler using the Harmonic Distortion measurement (see Chapter 6.10, "Harmonic Distortion Measurement", on page 306).
Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW):
Frequency: Level:
128 MHz +15 dBm
Procedure:
1. Preset the R&S FSW.
2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz.
3. Set the span to 100 kHz.
4. Select "Auto Level". The R&S FSW displays the reference signal with a span of 100 kHz and resolution bandwidth of 1 kHz.
5. Switch on the marker by pressing the [MKR] key. The marker is positioned on the trace maximum.
6. Set the measured signal frequency and the measured level as reference values: a) Press the [MKR FUNC] key b) Press the "Reference Fixed" softkey. The position of the marker becomes the reference point. The reference point level is indicated by a horizontal line, the reference point frequency with a vertical line. At the same time, the delta marker 2 is switched on.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
556
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Display and Limit Lines
Figure 8-7: Fundamental wave and the frequency and level reference point
7. Make the step size for the center frequency correspond to the signal frequency: in the "Frequency" configuration dialog box, select "Center Frequency Stepsize" = "Marker" . The step size for the center frequency is now equal to the marker frequency.
8. Move the center frequency to the 2nd harmonic of the signal by pressing the [UP] ( ) key. The center frequency is set to the 2nd harmonic.
9. Select "Auto Level" to ensure the R&S FSW measures the harmonics with a high sensitivity.
10. Place the delta marker on the 2nd harmonic: in the "Marker To" menu, select the "Peak" softkey. The delta marker moves to the maximum of the 2nd harmonic. The displayed level result is relative to the reference point level (= fundamental wave level).
The other harmonics are measured by repeating steps step 8 to step 10, with the center frequency being incremented or decremented in steps of 128 MHz using the [UP] or [DOWN] keys.
8.4 Display and Limit Lines
Display and limit lines help you analyze a measurement trace.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
557
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Display and Limit Lines
Display lines are only available in the Spectrum and (optional) Analog Demodulation applications. In the I/Q Analyzer application, lines are only available for measurements in the frequency domain.
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines" For remote operation, see Chapter 13.8.4, "Configuring Display Lines", on page 1264. Display Lines.........................................................................................................558 Limit Lines.............................................................................................................560
8.4.1 Display Lines
8.4.1.1 Basics on Display Lines
Display lines help you analyze a trace � as do markers. The function of a display line is comparable to that of a ruler that can be shifted on the trace in order to mark absolute values. They are used exclusively to visually mark relevant frequencies or points in time (zero span), as well as constant level values. It is not possible to check automatically whether the points are below or above the marked level values - use limit lines for that task (see Chapter 8.4.2.1, "Basics on Limit Lines", on page 560).
Two different types of display lines are provided: Two horizontal lines: "Horizontal Line 1" and "Horizontal Line 2".
These lines are continuous horizontal lines across the entire width of a diagram and can be shifted up and down. Four vertical lines: "Vertical Line 1" to "Vertical Line 4" These lines are continuous vertical lines across the entire height of the diagram and can be shifted left and right.
Lables
Each line is identified by one of the following abbreviations in the diagrams: H1: "Horizontal Line 1" H2: "Horizontal Line 2" V1: "Vertical Line 1" V2: "Vertical Line 2" V3: "Vertical Line 3" V4: "Vertical Line 4"
8.4.1.2 Display Line Settings
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines" > "Display Lines"
Four vertical and two horizontal lines can be defined in the display.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
558
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Display and Limit Lines
Vertical Line <x>..........................................................................................................559 Horizontal Line 1 / Horizontal Line 2 .......................................................................... 559
Vertical Line <x> Activates a vertical display line in the diagram at the specified point of the x-axis, depending on the scale of the axis. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:FLINe<dl> on page 1265 CALCulate<n>:TLINe<dl> on page 1266
Horizontal Line 1 / Horizontal Line 2 Activates a horizontal display line (H1 or H2) in the diagram at the specified point of the y-axis. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:DLINe<dl> on page 1264 CALCulate<n>:DLINe<dl> on page 1264
8.4.1.3 Defining Display Lines
1. Display lines are configured in the "Lines Config" dialog box. To display this dialog box, press the [Lines] key and then "Lines Config" .
2. Select the "Display Lines" tab.
3. To define a vertical line: a) Select "Vertical Line 1" , 2, 3, or 4. b) Enter the x-value at which the line is to be displayed.
4. To define a horizontal line: a) Select "Horizontal Line 1" or 2.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
559
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Display and Limit Lines
b) Enter the y-value at which the line is to be displayed.
8.4.2 Limit Lines
Limit lines allow you to check automatically whether the measured points are below or above specified values.
Basics on Limit Lines............................................................................................ 560 Limit Line Settings and Functions......................................................................... 564 How to Define Limit Lines..................................................................................... 571 Reference: Limit Line File Format......................................................................... 575
8.4.2.1 Basics on Limit Lines
Limit lines are used to define amplitude curves or spectral distribution boundaries in the result diagram which are not to be exceeded. They indicate, for example, the upper limits for interference radiation or spurious waves which are allowed from a device under test (DUT). When transmitting information in TDMA systems (e.g. GSM), the amplitude of the bursts in a time slot must adhere to a curve that falls within a specified tolerance band. The lower and upper limits may each be specified by a limit line. Then, the amplitude curve can be controlled either visually or automatically for any violations of the upper or lower limits (GO/NOGO test).
The R&S FSW supports limit lines with a maximum of 200 data points. Eight of the limit lines stored in the instrument can be activated simultaneously. The number of limit lines stored in the instrument is only limited by the capacity of the storage device used.
Limit line data can also be exported to a file in ASCII (CSV) format for further evaluation in other applications. Limit lines stored in the specified ASCII (CSV) format can also be imported to the R&S FSW for other measurements.
Compatibility
Limit lines are compatible with the current measurement settings, if the following applies:
The x unit of the limit line has to be identical to the current setting. The y unit of the limit line has to be identical to the current setting with the excep-
tion of dB based units; all dB based units are compatible with each other.
Validity
Only limit lines that fulfill the following conditions can be activated:
Each limit line must consist of a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 200 data points. The frequencies/times for each data point must be defined in ascending order;
however, for any single frequency or time, two data points may be entered (to define a vertical segment of a limit line). Gaps in frequency or time are not allowed. If gaps are desired, two separate limit lines must be defined and then both enabled.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
560
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Display and Limit Lines
The entered frequencies or times need not necessarily be selectable in R&S FSW. A limit line may also exceed the specified frequency or time range. The minimum frequency for a data point is -200 GHz, the maximum frequency is 200 GHz. For the time range representation, negative times may also be entered. The allowed range is -1000 s to +1000 s.
Figure 8-8: Example for an upper limit line
Limits and Margins
Limit lines define strict values that must not be exceeded by the measured signal. A margin is similar to a limit, but less strict and it still belongs to the valid data range. It can be used as a warning that the limit is almost reached. The margin is not indicated by a separate line in the display, but if it is violated, a warning is displayed. Margins are defined as lines with a fixed distance to the limit line.
To check the signal for maximum levels you must define an upper limit, whereas to check the signal for minimum levels you must define a lower limit.
Limits can be defined relative to the reference level, the beginning of the time scale, or the center frequency, or as absolute values.
Relative scaling is suitable, for example, if masks for bursts are to be defined in zero span, or if masks for modulated signals are required in the frequency domain.
Thresholds
If the y-axis for the limit line data points uses relative scaling, an additional absolute threshold can be defined for the limit check. In this case, both the threshold value and the relative limit line must be exceeded before a violation occurs.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
561
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Display and Limit Lines
Offsets and Shifting
A configured limit line can easily be moved vertically or horizontally. Two different methods to do so are available:
An offset moves the entire line in the diagram without editing the configured values or positions of the individual data points. This option is only available if relative scaling is used. Thus, a new limit line can be easily generated based upon an existing limit line which has been shifted horizontally or vertically.
Defining a shift width for the values or position of the individual data points changes the line configuration, thus changing the position of the line in the diagram.
Limit Check Results
A limit check is automatically performed as soon as any of the limit lines is activated ( "Visibility" setting). Only the specified "Traces to be Checked" are compared with the active limit lines. The status of the limit check for each limit line is indicated in the diagram. If a violation occurs, the limit check status is set to "MARG" for a margin violation, or to "Fail" for a limit violation.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
562
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Display and Limit Lines
Figure 8-9: Margin violation for limit check
Figure 8-10: Limit violation for limit check
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
563
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Display and Limit Lines
Storing and Recalling Limit Lines Limit lines can be stored with the configuration settings so they can be recalled for other measurements at a later time (seeChapter 10.3, "Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data", on page 638). Note, however, that any changes made to the limit lines after storing the configuration file cannot be restored and will be overwritten by the stored values when the configuration file is recalled. Always remember to store the settings again after changing the limit line values. After recalling measurement settings, the limit line values applied to the measurement may be different to those displayed in the "Limit Lines" dialog box; see "Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 639.
8.4.2.2 Limit Line Settings and Functions
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines" or: [LINES] > "Line Config" Up to 8 limit lines can be displayed simultaneously in the R&S FSW. Many more can be stored on the instrument.
Stored limit line settings When storing and recalling limit line settings, consider the information provided in "Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 639.
Limit Line Management.........................................................................................564 Limit Line Details...................................................................................................567
Limit Line Management Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines" > "Limit Lines" or: [LINES] > "Line Config" > "Limit Lines"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
564
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Display and Limit Lines
For the limit line overview, the R&S FSW searches for all stored limit lines with the file extension .LIN in the limits subfolder of the main installation folder. The overview allows you to determine which limit lines are available and can be used for the current measurement.
For details on settings for individual lines see "Limit Line Details" on page 567.
For more basic information on limit lines see Chapter 8.4.2.1, "Basics on Limit Lines", on page 560.
Name ..........................................................................................................................565 Unit .............................................................................................................................566 Compatibility ...............................................................................................................566 Visibility ...................................................................................................................... 566 Traces to be Checked ................................................................................................ 566 Comment ....................................................................................................................566 Included Lines in Overview ( View Filter )................................................................... 566
Show Lines for all Modes .............................................................................566 X-Offset ...................................................................................................................... 566 Y-Offset ...................................................................................................................... 567 Create New Line ........................................................................................................ 567 Edit Line ..................................................................................................................... 567 Copy Line ................................................................................................................... 567 Delete Line ................................................................................................................. 567 Disable All Lines .........................................................................................................567
Name The name of the stored limit line.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
565
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Display and Limit Lines
Unit The unit in which the y-values of the data points of the limit line are defined.
Compatibility Indicates whether the limit line definition is compatible with the current measurement settings.
For more information on which conditions a limit line must fulfill to be compatible, see "Compatibility" on page 560.
Visibility Displays or hides the limit line in the diagram. Up to 8 limit lines can be visible at the same time. Inactive limit lines can also be displayed in the diagram.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:STATe on page 1272 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:STATe on page 1276 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACTive? on page 1277
Traces to be Checked Defines which traces are automatically checked for conformance with the limit lines. As soon as a trace to be checked is defined, the assigned limit line is active. One limit line can be activated for several traces simultaneously. If any of the "Traces to be Checked" violate any of the active limit lines, a message is indicated in the diagram.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t>:CHECk on page 1278
Comment An optional description of the limit line.
Included Lines in Overview ( View Filter ) Defines which of the stored lines are included in the overview.
"Show Compatible"
Only compatible lines Whether a line is compatible or not is indicated in the Compatibility setting.
"Show All"
All stored limit lines with the file extension .LIN in the limits subfolder of the main installation folder (if not restricted by "Show Lines for all Modes" setting).
Show Lines for all Modes Included Lines in Overview ( View Filter ) If activated (default), limit lines from all applications are displayed. Otherwise, only lines that were created in the Spectrum application are displayed.
Note that limit lines from some applications may include additional properties that are lost when the limit lines are edited in the Spectrum application. In this case a warning is displayed when you try to store the limit line.
X-Offset Shifts a limit line that has been specified for relative frequencies or times (x-axis) horizontally.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
566
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Display and Limit Lines
This setting does not have any effect on limit lines that are defined by absolute values for the x-axis. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:OFFSet on page 1269
Y-Offset Shifts a limit line that has relative values for the y-axis (levels or linear units such as volt) vertically. This setting does not have any effect on limit lines that are defined by absolute values for the y-axis. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:OFFSet on page 1271 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:OFFSet on page 1275
Create New Line Creates a new limit line.
Edit Line Edit an existing limit line configuration.
Copy Line Copy the selected limit line configuration to create a new line. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:COPY on page 1277
Delete Line Delete the selected limit line configuration. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:DELete on page 1277
Disable All Lines Disable all limit lines in one step. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:STATe on page 1278
Limit Line Details Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines" > "Limit Lines" > "New" / "Edit" / "Copy To" or: [LINES] > "Line Config" > "Limit Lines" > "New" / "Edit" / "Copy To"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
567
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Display and Limit Lines
Name ..........................................................................................................................568 Comment ....................................................................................................................568 Threshold ................................................................................................................... 568 Margin ........................................................................................................................ 569 X-Axis .........................................................................................................................569 Y-Axis ......................................................................................................................... 569 Data Points .................................................................................................................569 Insert Value ................................................................................................................ 570 Delete Value ...............................................................................................................570 Shift x ......................................................................................................................... 570 Shift y ......................................................................................................................... 570 Save ........................................................................................................................... 570 Import ......................................................................................................................... 570
File Explorer..................................................................................................570 Export .........................................................................................................................570
File Explorer..................................................................................................571
Name Defines the limit line name. All names must be compatible with Windows conventions for file names. The limit line data is stored under this name (with a .LIN extension).
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:NAME on page 1273
Comment Defines an optional comment for the limit line.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:COMMent on page 1267
Threshold Defines an absolute threshold value (only for relative scaling of the y-axis).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
568
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions
Display and Limit Lines
For details on thresholds see "Thresholds" on page 561.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:THReshold on page 1272 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:THReshold on page 1276
Margin Defines a margin for the limit line. The default setting is 0 dB (i.e. no margin).
For details on margins see "Limits and Margins" on page 561.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:MARGin on page 1270 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:MARGin on page 1274
X-Axis Describes the horizontal axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined. Includes the following settings:
Unit: � "Hz" : for frequency domain � "s" : for time domain
Scaling mode: absolute or relative values For relative values, the frequencies are referred to the currently set center frequency. In the time domain, the left boundary of the diagram is used as the reference.
Scaling: linear or logarithmic
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:MODE on page 1271 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:MODE on page 1274 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:DOMain on page 1268 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:SPACing on page 1270
Y-Axis Describes the vertical axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined. Includes the following settings:
Level unit Scaling mode: absolute or relative (dB/%) values
Relative limit values refer to the reference level. Limit type: upper or lower limit; values must stay above the lower limit and below
the upper limit to pass the limit check
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UNIT on page 1273 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:SPACing on page 1272 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:SPACing on page 1275
Data Points Each limit line is defined by a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 200 data points. Each data point is defined by its position (x-axis) and value (y-value). Data points must be defined in ascending order. The same position can have two different values.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
569
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Display and Limit Lines
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol[:DATA] on page 1268 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer[:DATA] on page 1270 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer[:DATA] on page 1273
Insert Value Inserts a data point in the limit line above the selected one in the "Edit Limit Line" dialog box.
Delete Value Deletes the selected data point in the "Edit Limit Line" dialog box.
Shift x Shifts the x-value of each data point horizontally by the defined shift width (as opposed to an additive offset defined for the entire limit line, see " X-Offset " on page 566). Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:SHIFt on page 1269
Shift y Shifts the y-value of each data point vertically by the defined shift width (as opposed to an additive offset defined for the entire limit line, see " Y-Offset " on page 567). Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:SHIFt on page 1271 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:SHIFt on page 1275
Save Saves the currently edited limit line under the name defined in the "Name" field.
Import Opens a file selection dialog box and loads the limit line from the selected file in .CSV format. Note that a valid import file must contain a minimum of required information for the R&S FSW. For details on the file format see Chapter 8.4.2.4, "Reference: Limit Line File Format", on page 575. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD<n>:LIMit on page 1279
File Explorer Import Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer. Remote command: not supported
Export Opens a file selection dialog box and stores the currently displayed limit line to the defined file in .CSV format.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
570
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Display and Limit Lines
For details on the file format see Chapter 8.4.2.4, "Reference: Limit Line File Format", on page 575. The limit line can be imported again later by the R&S FSW for use in other measurements. Remote command: MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIMit on page 1279
File Explorer Export Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer. Remote command: not supported
8.4.2.3 How to Define Limit Lines
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines" > "Limit Lines"
or: [LINES] > "Line Config" > "Limit Lines"
Limit lines for spurious and SEM measurements Note that for spurious and SEM measurements, special limit lines can be defined for each frequency range, see Chapter 6.6.4.2, "Limit Lines in SEM Measurements", on page 236 and Chapter 6.7.3.2, "Limit Lines in Spurious Measurements", on page 277. It is strongly recommended that you define limits only via the "Sweep List" dialog for these measurements, not using the [Lines] key. Any changes to the special limit lines are automatically overwritten when the sweep list settings are changed.
The following tasks are described here:
"How to find compatible limit lines" on page 571 "How to activate and deactivate a limit check" on page 572 "How to edit existing limit lines" on page 572 "How to copy an existing limit line" on page 572 "How to delete an existing limit line" on page 572 "How to configure a new limit line" on page 573 "How to move the limit line vertically or horizontally" on page 574
How to find compatible limit lines
In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the "View Filter" option: "Show Compatible" . All stored limit lines with the file extension .LIN in the limits subfolder of the main installation folder of the instrument that are compatible to the current measurement settings are displayed in the overview.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
571
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Display and Limit Lines
How to activate and deactivate a limit check A limit check is automatically performed as soon as any of the limit lines is activated. 1. To activate a limit check:
Select the "Check Traces" setting for a limit line in the overview and select the trace numbers to be included in the limit check. One limit line can be assigned to several traces. The specified traces to be checked are compared with the active limit lines. The status of the limit check is indicated in the diagram. 2. To deactivate a limit line, deactivate all "Traces to be Checked" for it. To deactivate all limit lines at once, select the "Disable All Lines" button. The limit checks for the deactivated limit lines are stopped and the results are removed form the display.
How to edit existing limit lines Existing limit line configurations can be edited. 1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the limit line. 2. Select the "Edit" button. 3. Edit the line configuration as described in "How to configure a new limit line"
on page 573. 4. Save the new configuration by selecting the "Save" button.
If the limit line is active, the edited limit line is displayed in the diagram.
How to copy an existing limit line 1. In the dialog box, select the limit line. 2. Select the "Line Config" "Copy To" button. 3. Define a new name to create a new limit with the same configuration as the source
line. 4. Edit the line configuration as described in "How to configure a new limit line"
on page 573. 5. Save the new configuration by selecting the "Save" button.
The new limit line is displayed in the overview and can be activated.
How to delete an existing limit line 1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the limit line. 2. Select the "Delete" button. 3. Confirm the message.
The limit line and the results of the limit check are deleted.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
572
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Display and Limit Lines
How to configure a new limit line
1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the "New" button. The "Edit Limit Line" dialog box is displayed. The current line configuration is displayed in the preview area of the dialog box. The preview is updated after each change to the configuration.
2. Define a "Name" and, optionally, a "Comment" for the new limit line.
3. Define the x-axis configuration: Time domain or frequency domain Absolute or relative limits Linear or logarithmic scaling
4. Define the y-axis configuration: Level unit Absolute or relative limits Upper or lower limit line
5. Define the data points: minimum 2, maximum 200: a) Select "Insert Value" . b) Define the x-value ( "Position" ) and y-value ( "Value" ) of the first data point. c) Select "Insert Value" again and define the second data point. d) Repeat this to insert all other data points. To insert a data point before an existing one, select the data point and then "Insert Value" . To insert a new data point at the end of the list, move the focus to the line after the last entry and then select "Insert Value" . To delete a data point, select the entry and then "Delete Value" .
6. Check the current line configuration in the preview area of the dialog box. If necessary, correct individual data points or add or delete some. If necessary, shift the entire line vertically or horizontally by selecting the "Shift x" or "Shift y" button and defining the shift width.
7. Optionally, define a "Margin" at a fixed distance to the limit line. The margin must be within the valid value range and is not displayed in the diagram or preview area.
8. Optionally, if the y-axis uses relative scaling, define an absolute "Threshold" as an additional criteria for a violation.
9. Save the new configuration by selecting the "Save" button.
The new limit line is displayed in the overview and can be activated.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
573
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Display and Limit Lines
How to move the limit line vertically or horizontally A configured limit line can easily be moved vertically or horizontally. Thus, a new limit line can be easily generated based upon an existing limit line which has been shifted horizontally.
1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the limit line.
2. To shift the complete limit line parallel in the horizontal direction, select the "X-Offset" button and enter an offset value. To shift the complete limit line parallel in the vertical direction, select the "Y-Offset" button and enter an offset value.
3. To shift the individual data points of a limit line by a fixed value (all at once): a) Select the "Edit" button. b) In the "Edit Limit Line" dialog box, select the "Shift x" or "Shift y" button and define the shift width. c) Save the shifted data points by selecting the "Save" button.
If activated, the limit line is shifted in the diagram.
How to export a limit line Limit line configurations can be stored to an ASCII file for evaluation in other programs or to be imported later for other measurements.
1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the limit line.
2. Select the "New" or "Edit" button.
3. Define the limit line as described in "How to configure a new limit line" on page 573.
4. Select "Export" to save the configuration to a file. You are asked whether you would like to save the configuration internally on the R&S FSW first.
5. Select a file name and location for the limit line.
6. Select the decimal separator to be used in the file.
7. Select "Save" .
The limit line is stored to a file with the specified name and the extension .CSV. For details on the file format see Chapter 8.4.2.4, "Reference: Limit Line File Format", on page 575.
How to import a limit line Limit line configurations that are stored in an ASCII file and contain a minimum of required data can be imported to the R&S FSW. For details on the required file format see Chapter 8.4.2.4, "Reference: Limit Line File Format", on page 575.
1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the limit line.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
574
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Display and Limit Lines
2. Select the "New" or "Edit" button.
3. Select "Import" to load a limit line from a file. You are asked whether you would like to save the current configuration on the R&S FSW first.
4. Select the file name of the limit line.
5. Select the decimal separator that was used in the file.
6. Select "Select" . The limit line is loaded from the specified file and displayed in the "Edit Limit Line" dialog box.
7. Activate the limit line as described in "How to activate and deactivate a limit check" on page 572.
8.4.2.4 Reference: Limit Line File Format
Limit line data can be exported to a file in ASCII (CSV) format for further evaluation in other applications. Limit lines stored in the specified ASCII (CSV) format can also be imported to the R&S FSW for other measurements (see "How to import a limit line" on page 574). This reference describes in detail the format of the export/import files for limit lines. Note that the bold data is mandatory, all other data is optional.
Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point. Thus, you can define the decimal separator to be used (see " Decimal Separator " on page 614).
Table 8-2: ASCII file format for limit line files
File contents
Description
Header data
sep=;
Separator for individual values (required by Microsoft Excel, for example)
Type;RS_LimitLineDefinition;
Type of data
FileFormatVersion;1.00;
File format version
Date;01.Oct 2006;
Date of data set storage
OptionID;SpectrumAnalyzer
Application the limit line was created for
Name;RELFREQ1
Limit line name
Comment;Defines the upper limit line
Description of limit line
Mode;UPPER
Type of limit line (upper, lower)
ThresholdUnit;LEVEL_DBM
Unit of threshold value
ThresholdValue;-200
Threshold value
MarginValue;0
Margin value
XAxisScaling;LINEAR
Scaling of x-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
575
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
File contents
Description
XAxisUnit;FREQ_HZ
Unit of x values
XAxisScaleMode;ABSOLUTE
Scaling of x-axis (absolute or relative)
YAxisUnit;LEVEL_DB
Unit of y values
YAxisScaleMode;ABSOLUTE
Scaling of y-axis (absolute or relative)
NoOfPoints;5
Number of points the line is defined by
Data section for individual data points
-4500000000;-50
x- and y-values of each data point defining the line
-2000000000;-30
-1000000000;0
0;-30
2500000000;-50
8.5 Trace Configuration
A trace is a collection of measured data points. The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the screen. Standard Traces....................................................................................................576 Spectrograms........................................................................................................590 Trace Math............................................................................................................ 608
8.5.1 Standard Traces
8.5.1.1 Basics on Setting up Traces
Some background knowledge on traces is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings. Mapping Samples to sweep Points with the Trace Detector.................................576 X-Value of the Sweep Point.................................................................................. 580 Analyzing Several Traces - Trace Mode............................................................... 581 How Many Traces are Averaged - Sweep Count + Sweep Mode.........................582 How Trace Data is Averaged - the Averaging Mode............................................. 583 Trace Smoothing...................................................................................................584
Mapping Samples to sweep Points with the Trace Detector A trace displays the values measured at the sweep points. The number of samples taken during a sweep can be much larger than the number of sweep points that are displayed in the measurement trace.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
576
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
Example: Assume the following measurement parameters: Sample rate: 32 MSamples / s sweep points: 1000 sweep time: 100 ms Span: 5 GHz During a single sweep, 3.2 * 106 samples are collected and distributed to 1000 sweep points, i.e. 3200 samples are collected per sweep point. For each sweep point, the measured data for a frequency span of 5 MHz (span/<sweep points>) is analyzed. Note that if you increase the number of sweep points, the frequency span analyzed for each point in the trace decreases, making the result more stable. See also Chapter 7.5.1.8, "How Much Data is Measured: Sweep Points and Sweep Count", on page 464.
Obviously, a data reduction must be performed to determine which of the samples are displayed for each sweep point. This is the trace detector's task.
The trace detector can analyze the measured data using various methods:
The detector activated for the specific trace is indicated in the corresponding trace information by an abbreviation.
Table 8-3: Detector types
Detector
Abbrev. Description
Positive Peak Pk
Determines the largest of all positive peak values of the levels measured at the individual frequencies which are displayed in one sample point
Negative Peak Mi
Determines the smallest of all negative peak values of the levels measured at the individual frequencies which are displayed in one sample point
Auto Peak
Ap
Combines the peak detectors; determines the maximum and the minimum value of the levels measured at the individual frequencies which are displayed in one sample point
(not available for SEM)
RMS
Rm
Calculates the root mean square of all samples contained in a sweep point.
To do so, R&S FSW uses the linear voltage after envelope detection. The sampled linear values are squared, summed and the sum is divided by the number of samples (= root mean square). For logarithmic display, the logarithm is formed from the square sum. For linear display, the root mean square value is displayed. Each sweep point thus corresponds to the power of the measured values summed up in the sweep point.
The RMS detector supplies the power of the signal irrespective of the waveform (CW carrier, modulated carrier, white noise or impulsive signal). Correction factors as needed for other detectors to measure the power of the different signal classes are not required.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
577
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
Detector
Abbrev. Description
Average
Av
Calculates the linear average of all samples contained in a sweep point.
To this effect, R&S FSW uses the linear voltage after envelope detection. The sampled linear values are summed up and the sum is divided by the number of samples (= linear average value). For logarithmic display, the logarithm is formed from the average value. For linear display, the average value is displayed. Each sweep point thus corresponds to the average of the measured values summed up in the sweep point.
The average detector supplies the average value of the signal irrespective of the waveform (CW carrier, modulated carrier, white noise or impulsive signal).
Sample
Sa
Selects the last measured value of the levels measured at the individual fre-
quencies which are displayed in one sample point; all other measured values
for the frequency range are ignored
Quasi Peak
QP
Resembles the behavior of an analog voltmeter by analyzing the measured values for a sample point. The quasipeak detector is especially designed for the requirements of EMI measurements and is used for analyzing pulse-shaped spurious.
The quasipeak detector displays the maximum signal level weighted to CISPR 16-1-1 that was detected during the dwell time.
This detector is only available for the CISPR filter, and only if the R&S FSW EMI measurement option (K54) is installed.
The quasipeak detector is not available for an RBW of 1 MHz.
CISPR Average detector
CISPR AV
The CISPR Average detector displays a weighted average signal level according to CISPR 16-1-1.
The average value according to CISPR 16-1-1 is the maximum value detected while calculating the linear average value during the specified dwell time.
This detector is only available for the CISPR filter, and only if the R&S FSW EMI measurement option (K54) is installed.
RMS Average detector
RMS AV
The RMS Average detector is a combination of the RMS detector (for pulse repetition frequencies above a corner frequency) and the Average detector (for pulse repetition frequencies below the corner frequency).
The CISPR Average detector is only available for the CISPR filter, and only if the R&S FSW EMI measurement option (K54) is installed.
The result obtained from the selected detector for a sweep point is displayed as the value at this frequency point in the trace.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
578
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
Measurement point n
Meas. point n+1
AVG RMS
Video video Signal signal
s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6
s8 s1
SAMPLE
MAX PEAK AUTO PEAK MIN PEAK
You can define the trace detector to be used for the individual traces manually, or the R&S FSW can select the appropriate detector automatically.
The detectors of the R&S FSW are implemented as pure digital devices. All detectors work in parallel in the background, which means that the measurement speed is independent of the detector combination used for different traces.
RMS detector and VBW
If the RMS detector is selected, the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed. Thus, duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs. However, the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time. This leads to a longer sweep time for small VBW values. Thus, you can reduce the VBW value to achieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector. Normally, if the RMS detector is used, the sweep time should be increased to get more stable traces.
Auto detector
If the R&S FSW is set to define the appropriate detector automatically, the detector is set depending on the selected trace mode:
Trace mode Clear Write Max Hold Min Hold Average View Blank
Detector Auto Peak Positive Peak Negative Peak Sample Peak � �
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
579
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
X-Value of the Sweep Point
As described in "Mapping Samples to sweep Points with the Trace Detector" on page 576, the number of samples taken during a sweep can be much larger than the number of sweep points that are displayed in the measurement trace.
To determine the x-value of the sweep point, two different methods are available: Start/stop Bin-centered
Start/stop
This is the default (legacy) method for trace values in the frequency domain. The xvalue of the first sweep point corresponds to the starting point of the full measurement span. The x-value of the last sweep point corresponds to the end point of the full measurement span. All other sweep points are divided evenly between the first and last points. The distance between two sweep points is span/(<no_sweep_points> -1).
Bin-centered
This is the default method for all marker values. The full measurement span is divided by the number of sweep points. The result is the span that is evaluated for an individual sweep point, also referred to as a bin. The x-value of the sweep point is then defined as the x-value at the center of the bin (bin/2).
Measurement point n
Meas. point n+1
Video video Signal signal
s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6
s8 s1
x
xn
xn+1
Span/<no. of meas points> Span/<no. of meas points>
Using the bin-centered method, the first and last x-values of the trace are not identical to the exact starting and end point of the measurement span. The distance between two sweep points is span/(<no_sweep_points>) or span/bin_size.
Marker values are always determined using the bin-centered method. Markers placed on the first and last x-values of the measured span indicate the same results as the first and last trace point.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
580
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
Example: Assume the following measurement parameters: Start frequency: 1.000 GHz Stop frequency: 6.000 GHz => Span: 5 GHz sweep points: 1000 =>bin: 5 MHz (span/<sweep points>) The first trace point is displayed at (<fstart> + bin/2) = 1.0025 GHz. The last trace point is displayed at (<fstop> - bin/2) = 5.9975 GHz. A marker placed at 1.000 GHz indicates the same result as a marker placed at 1.0025 GHz, since no other value is available.
For trace values in the frequency domain, you can select which method is used to determine the x-values in the frequency domain, that is: In the result displays When exporting traces For the TRACe<n>[:DATA]:X? command
See "X-Value Distribution" on page 614.
Note the possible minor discrepancy between marker values and trace values using the start/stop method.
Analyzing Several Traces - Trace Mode
If several sweep are performed one after the other, or continuous sweep are performed, the trace mode determines how the data for subsequent traces is processed. After each sweep, the trace mode determines whether:
The data is frozen (View) The data is hidden (Blank) The data is replaced by new values (Clear Write) The data is replaced selectively (Max Hold, Min Hold, Average)
Each time the trace mode is changed, the selected trace memory is cleared.
The trace mode also determines the detector type if the detector is set automatically, see "Mapping Samples to sweep Points with the Trace Detector" on page 576.
The R&S FSW supports the following trace modes:
Table 8-4: Overview of available trace modes
Trace Mode
Description
Blank
Hides the selected trace.
Clear Write
Overwrite mode: the trace is overwritten by each sweep. This is the default setting. All available detectors can be selected.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
581
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
Trace Mode Max Hold
Min Hold
Average View
Description
The maximum value is determined over several measurements and displayed. The R&S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one. This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals. The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of envelope. This mode is not available for statistics measurements.
The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed. The R&S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one. This mode is useful for example for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visible. Noise, interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed, whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level. This mode is not available for statistics measurements.
The average is formed over several measurements and displayed. The Sweep/Average Count determines the number of averaging procedures. This mode is not available for statistics measurements.
The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed.
If a trace is frozen ( "View" mode), the measurement settings, apart from scaling settings, can be changed without impact on the displayed trace. The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current measurement settings is indicated by a yellow asterisk on the tab label.
If you change any parameters that affect the scaling of the diagram axes, the R&S FSW automatically adapts the trace data to the changed display range. This allows you to zoom into the diagram after the measurement to show details of the trace.
How Many Traces are Averaged - Sweep Count + Sweep Mode
In "Average" trace mode, the sweep count and sweep mode determine how many traces are averaged. The more traces are averaged, the smoother the trace is likely to become.
The algorithm for averaging traces depends on the sweep mode and sweep count.
sweep count = 0 (default)
� In "Continuous" sweep mode, a continuous average is calculated for 10 sweeps, according to the following formula:
Trace
9
*
Traceold
10
MeasValue
Figure 8-11: Equation 1
Due to the weighting between the current trace and the average trace, past values have practically no influence on the displayed trace after about ten
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
582
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
sweeps. With this setting, signal noise is effectively reduced without need for restarting the averaging process after a change of the signal.
� In "Single" sweep mode, the current trace is averaged with the previously stored averaged trace. No averaging is carried out for the first sweep but the measured value is stored in the trace memory. The next time a sweep is performed, the trace average is calculated according to the following formula:
Trace
Traceold
MeasValue 2
The averaged trace is then stored in the trace memory.
sweep count = 1 The currently measured trace is displayed and stored in the trace memory. No averaging is performed.
sweep count > 1 For both "Single" sweep mode and "Continuous" sweep mode, averaging takes place over the selected number of sweeps. In this case the displayed trace is determined during averaging according to the following formula:
Tracen
1 n
n 1 i 1
(Ti
)
MeasValuen
Figure 8-12: Equation 2
Where n is the number of the current sweep (n = 2 ... Sweep Count). No averaging is carried out for the first sweep but the measured value is stored in the trace memory. With increasing n, the displayed trace is increasingly smoothed since there are more individual sweeps for averaging. After the selected number of sweeps, the average trace is saved in the trace memory. Until this number of sweeps is reached, a preliminary average is displayed. When the averaging length defined by the "Sweep Count" is attained, averaging is continued in continuous sweep mode or for "Continue Single Sweep" according to the following formula:
Trace
(N
1) *Traceold N
MeasValue
Where N is the sweep count
How Trace Data is Averaged - the Averaging Mode
When the trace is averaged over several sweeps (Trace mode: "Average" ), different methods are available to determine the trace average.
With logarithmic averaging, the dB values of the display voltage are averaged or subtracted from each other with trace mathematical functions.
With linear averaging, the level values in dB are converted into linear voltages or powers before averaging. Voltage or power values are averaged or offset against each other and reconverted into level values.
For stationary signals, the two methods yield the same result.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
583
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions
Trace Configuration
Logarithmic averaging is recommended if sinewave signals are to be clearly visible against noise since with this type of averaging noise suppression is improved while the sinewave signals remain unchanged.
For noise or pseudo-noise signals, the positive peak amplitudes are decreased in logarithmic averaging due to the characteristic involved. The negative peak values are increased relative to the average value. If the distorted amplitude distribution is averaged, a value is obtained that is smaller than the actual average value. The difference is -2.5 dB.
This low average value is usually corrected in noise power measurements by a 2.5 dB factor. Therefore the R&S FSW offers the selection of linear averaging. The trace data is linearized before averaging, then averaged and logarithmized again for display on the screen. The average value is always displayed correctly irrespective of the signal characteristic.
Trace Smoothing
A Video Bandwidth Filter (VBW) is a hardware-based method of smoothing the trace (see also Chapter 7.5.1.2, "Smoothing the Trace Using the Video Bandwidth", on page 460). However, other sweep and bandwidth settings can be coupled to the VBW. For some signals, a VBW may not be freely selectable to obtain the required smoothing effect. Therefore, a software-based trace smoothing function is also available.
(Software-based) smoothing is a way to remove anomalies visually in the trace that can distort the results. The smoothing process is based on a moving average over the complete measurement range. The number of samples included in the averaging process (the aperture size) is variable and is a percentage of all samples that the trace consists of.
Figure 8-13: Sample size included in trace smoothing
Effects of smoothing on post-processing functions Note that in Spectrum mode, all functions performed after the sweep, such as limit checks, markers, or channel power measurements, are based on the smoothed trace data. Thus, the results differ from results based on the original trace.
You can turn trace smoothing on and off for all traces individually and compare, for example, the raw and the smooth trace. Linear smoothing is based on the following algorithm:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
584
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
y's
1 n
xs
n1 2
yx
xs
n1 2
Equation 8-1: Linear trace smoothing
With:
s = sample number
x = sample offset from s
n = aperture size
8.5.1.2 Trace Settings
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Traces" Or: [TRACE] > "Trace Config" You can configure the settings for up to 6 individual traces. For settings on spectrograms, see Chapter 8.5.2.2, "Spectrogram Settings", on page 599.
Trace data can also be exported to an ASCII file for further analysis. For details see Chapter 8.6.2, "Trace/Data Ex/Import", on page 612.
Trace 1 / Trace 2 / Trace 3 / Trace 4 / Trace 5 / Trace 6 ............................................586 Trace Mode ................................................................................................................ 586 Detector ......................................................................................................................586 Hold ............................................................................................................................587
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
585
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
Smoothing .................................................................................................................. 587 Average Mode ............................................................................................................587 Average Count ........................................................................................................... 588 Predefined Trace Settings - Quick Config .................................................................. 588 Trace 1 / Trace 2 / Trace 3 / Trace 4 (Softkeys)..........................................................589 Copy Trace .................................................................................................................589
Trace 1 / Trace 2 / Trace 3 / Trace 4 / Trace 5 / Trace 6 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration. The currently selected trace is highlighted.
For details see Chapter 8.5.1.3, "How to Configure a Standard Trace", on page 589.
Remote command: Selected via numeric suffix of:TRACe<1...6> commands DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe] on page 1181
Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces.
For details, see "Analyzing Several Traces - Trace Mode" on page 581.
"Clear/ Write" Overwrite mode (default): the trace is overwritten by each sweep. The "Detector" is automatically set to "Auto Peak" .
"Max Hold"
The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed. The R&S FSW saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one. The "Detector" is automatically set to "PositivePeak" . This mode is not available for statistics measurements.
"Min Hold"
The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed. The R&S FSW saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one. The "Detector" is automatically set to "Negative Peak" . This mode is not available for statistics measurements.
"Average"
The average is formed over several sweeps. The Sweep/Average Count determines the number of averaging procedures. The "Detector" is automatically set to "Sample" . This mode is not available for statistics measurements.
"View"
The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed.
"Blank"
Removes the selected trace from the display.
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 1178
Detector Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis.
For details see "Mapping Samples to sweep Points with the Trace Detector" on page 576.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
586
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
Note: For EMI measurements, the trace detector is used for the initial peak search only, not for the final test. The detector for the final test is configured in the EMI marker settings, see Chapter 6.13.4.1, "EMI Marker Configuration", on page 337.
"Auto"
Selects the optimum detector for the selected trace and filter mode. This is the default setting.
"Type"
Defines the selected detector type.
Note: If the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement option is installed and the filter type "CISPR" is selected, additional detectors are available, even if EMI measurement is not active. For details see Chapter 6.13.3.2, "Detectors and Dwell Time", on page 329.
Remote command: [SENSe:][WINDow<n>:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion] on page 1183 [SENSe:][WINDow<n>:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO on page 1184
Hold If activated, traces in "Min Hold" , "Max Hold" and "Average" mode are not reset after specific parameter changes have been made.
Normally, the measurement is started again after parameter changes, before the measurement results are analyzed (e.g. using a marker). In all cases that require a new measurement after parameter changes, the trace is reset automatically to avoid false results (e.g. with span changes). For applications that require no reset after parameter changes, the automatic reset can be switched off.
The default setting is off.
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:MODE:HCONtinuous on page 1179
Smoothing If enabled, the trace is smoothed by the specified value (between 1 % and 50 %). The smoothing value is defined as a percentage of the display width. The larger the smoothing value, the greater the smoothing effect.
Note: Effects of smoothing on post-processing functions. Note that in Spectrum mode, all functions performed after the sweep, such as limit checks, markers, or channel power measurements, are based on the smoothed trace data. Thus, the results will differ from results based on the original trace.
For more information see "Trace Smoothing" on page 584.
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:SMOothing[:STATe] on page 1181 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:SMOothing:APERture on page 1181
Average Mode Defines the mode with which the trace is averaged over several sweeps.
This setting is generally applicable if trace mode "Average" is selected.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
587
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
For FFT sweeps, the setting also affects the VBW (regardless of whether or not the trace is averaged).
(See also "Video Bandwidth (VBW)" on page 155).
How many sweeps are averaged is defined by the " Sweep/Average Count " on page 469.
For details see "How Trace Data is Averaged - the Averaging Mode" on page 583.
"Linear"
The power level values are converted into linear units prior to averaging. After the averaging, the data is converted back into its original unit.
"Logarithmic" For logarithmic scaling, the values are averaged in dBm. For linear scaling, the behavior is the same as with linear averaging.
"Power"
Activates linear power averaging. The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averaging. After the averaging, the data is converted back into its original unit. Use this mode to average power values in Volts or Amperes correctly. In particular, for small VBW values (smaller than the RBW), use power averaging mode for correct power measurements in FFT sweep mode.
Remote command: [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE on page 1183
Average Count Determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures If the trace modes "Average" , "Max Hold" or "Min Hold" are set.
In continuous sweep mode, if sweep count = 0 (default), averaging is performed over 10 sweeps. For sweep count =1, no averaging, Max Hold or Min Hold operations are performed.
This value is identical to the Sweep/Average Count setting in the "Sweep" settings.
Remote command: [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:COUNt on page 1182
Predefined Trace Settings - Quick Config Commonly required trace settings have been predefined and can be applied very quickly by selecting the appropriate button.
Function Preset All Traces
Set Trace Mode Max | Avg | Min
Trace Settings
Trace 1:
Clear Write Auto Detector (Auto Peak)
Traces 2-6:
Blank Auto Detector
Trace 1:
Max Hold Auto Detector (Positive Peak)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
588
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
Function
Set Trace Mode Max | ClrWrite | Min
Trace Settings
Trace 2:
Average Auto Detector (Sample)
Trace 3:
Min Hold Auto Detector (Negative Peak)
Traces 4-6:
Blank Auto Detector
Trace 1:
Max Hold Auto Detector (Positive Peak)
Trace 2:
Clear Write Auto Detector (Auto Peak)
Trace 3:
Min Hold Auto Detector (Negative Peak)
Traces 4-6:
Blank Auto Detector
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:PRESet on page 1180
Trace 1 / Trace 2 / Trace 3 / Trace 4 (Softkeys) Displays the "Traces" settings and focuses the "Mode" list for the selected trace. For details see Chapter 8.5.1.3, "How to Configure a Standard Trace", on page 589. Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe] on page 1181
Copy Trace Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Traces" > "Copy Trace" Or: [TRACE] > "Copy Trace" Copies trace data to another trace. The first group of buttons (labeled "Trace 1" to "Trace 6" ) selects the source trace. The second group of buttons (labeled "Copy to Trace 1" to "Copy to Tace 6" ) selects the destination. Remote command: TRACe<n>:COPY on page 1184
8.5.1.3 How to Configure a Standard Trace
Step-by-step instructions on configuring the trace settings are provided here. For details on individual functions and settings see Chapter 8.5.1.2, "Trace Settings", on page 585. The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 13.8.2, "Configuring the Trace Display and Retrieving Trace Data", on page 1178.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
589
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
Trace settings are configured in the "Traces" dialog box.
To display the "Traces" dialog box, do one of the following: Press the [TRACE] key and then select the "Trace Config" softkey. Select "Analysis" from the "Overview" , then select the "Traces" tab.
1. For each trace, select the "Trace Mode" and "Trace Detector" . Traces with the trace mode "Blank" are not displayed.
2. To configure several traces to predefined display modes in one step, press the button for the required function: "Preset All Traces" "Set Trace Mode Max | Avg | Min" "Set Trace Mode Max | ClrWrite | Min" For details see Chapter 8.5.1.2, "Trace Settings", on page 585.
3. For "Average" trace mode, define the number of sweeps to be averaged in the "Count:" field.
4. If linear scaling is used, select the "Average Mode" : "Linear" .
5. To improve the trace stability, increase the number of "Sweep Points" or the "Sweep Time" (in the "Sweep" settings).
All configured traces (not set to "Blank" ) are displayed after the next sweep.
How to Copy Traces
1. A trace copy function is provided in a separate tab of the "Traces" dialog box. To display this tab do one of the following: Select the [TRACE] key and then the "Trace Copy" softkey. Select "Analysis" from the "Overview" , then select the "Trace Copy" tab.
2. Select the "Source" trace to be copied.
3. Select the "Copy to Trace" button for the trace to which the settings are to be applied.
The settings from the source trace are applied to the destination trace. The newly configured trace (if not set to "Blank" ) is displayed after the next sweep.
8.5.2 Spectrograms
8.5.2.1 Working with Spectrograms
In addition to the standard "level versus frequency" or "level versus time" traces, the R&S FSW also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data.
A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time. The x-axis shows the frequency, the y-axis shows the time. A third dimension, the power level, is
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
590
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
indicated by different colors. Thus you can see how the strength of the signal varies over time for different frequencies.
Three-dimensional spectrograms are also available and are described in "ThreeDimensional Spectrograms" on page 595. Most basic information described in the following sections applies similarly to both two- and three-dimensional spectrograms.
Example:
In this example, you see the spectrogram for the calibration signal of the R&S FSW, compared to the standard spectrum display. Since the signal does not change over time, the color of the frequency levels does not change over time, i.e. vertically. The legend above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the colors represent.
Result display
The spectrogram result can consist of the following elements:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
591
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
1
2 8
3
6
4 5
8 7
Figure 8-14: Screen layout of the spectrogram result display
1 = Spectrum result display 2 = Spectrogram result display 3 = Marker list 4 = Marker 5 = Delta marker 6 = Color map 7 = Timestamp / frame number 8 = Current frame indicator
For more information about spectrogram configuration, see Chapter 8.5.2.2, "Spectrogram Settings", on page 599.
Remote commands:
Activating and configuring spectrograms:
Chapter 13.8.2.2, "Configuring Spectrograms", on page 1185
Storing results:
MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPECtrogram on page 1311
Time Frames......................................................................................................... 592 Markers in the Spectrogram..................................................................................594 Three-Dimensional Spectrograms........................................................................ 595 Color Maps............................................................................................................596
Time Frames
The time information in the spectrogram is displayed vertically, along the y-axis. Each line (or trace) of the y-axis represents one or more captured sweep and is called a time frame or simply "frame". As with standard spectrum traces, several measured values are combined in one sweep point using the selected detector.
(See "Mapping Samples to sweep Points with the Trace Detector" on page 576).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
592
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
Frames are sorted in chronological order, beginning with the most recently recorded frame at the top of the diagram (frame number 0). With the next sweep, the previous frame is moved further down in the diagram, until the maximum number of captured frames is reached. The display is updated continuously during the measurement, and the measured trace data is stored. Spectrogram displays are continued even after single measurements unless they are cleared manually.
In three-dimensional spectrograms, frames are displayed vertically. The most recently recorded frame (frame 0) is added at the front of the display (in the default position). For more information, see "Three-Dimensional Spectrograms" on page 595.
The maximum number of frames that you can capture is summarized in Table 8-5.
Table 8-5: Correlation between number of sweep points and number of frames stored in the history buffer
Sweep Points
Max. History Depth
1250
20000
2001
12488
4001
6247
8.001
3124
16.001
1562
32.001
781
The scaling of the time axis (y-axis) is not configurable. However, you can enlarge the spectrogram display by maximizing the window using the "Split/Maximize" key.
Frame analysis - Frame count vs. sweep count
As described for standard spectrum sweeps, the sweep count defines how many sweeps are analyzed to create a single trace. Thus, for a trace in "Average" mode, for example, a sweep count of 10 means that 10 sweeps are averaged to create a single trace, or frame.
The frame count, on the other hand, determines how many frames are plotted during a single sweep measurement (as opposed to a continuous sweep). For a frame count of 2, for example, 2 frames will be plotted during each single sweep. For continuous sweep mode, the frame count is irrelevant; one frame is plotted per sweep until the measurement is stopped.
If you combine the two settings, 20 sweeps will be performed for each single sweep measurement. The first 10 will be averaged to create the first frame, the next 10 will be averaged to create the second frame.
As you can see, increasing the sweep count increases the accuracy of the individual traces, while increasing the frame count increases the number of traces in the diagram.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
593
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
Especially for "Average" or "Min Hold" and "Max Hold" trace modes, the number of sweeps that are analyzed to create a single trace has an effect on the accuracy of the results. Thus, you can also define whether the results from frames in previous traces are considered in the analysis for each new trace ( "Continue Frame" ).
Tracking absolute time - timestamps
Alternatively to the frame count, the absolute time (that is: a timestamp) at which a frame was captured can be displayed. While the measurement is running, the timestamp shows the system time. In single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped, the timestamp shows the time and date at the end of the sweep.Thus, the individual frames can be identified by their timestamp or their frame count.
When active, the timestamp replaces the display of the frame number in the diagram footer (see Figure 8-14).
Displaying individual frames
The spectrogram diagram contains all stored frames since it was last cleared. Arrows on the left and right border of the spectrogram indicate the currently selected frame. The spectrum diagram always displays the spectrum for the currently selected frame.
The current frame number is indicated in the diagram footer, or alternatively a timestamp, if activated. The current frame, displayed at the top of the diagram, is frame number 0. Older frames further down in the diagram are indicated by a negative index, e.g. "-10" . You can display the spectrum diagram of a previous frame by changing the current frame number.
Markers in the Spectrogram
Markers and delta markers are shaped like diamonds in the spectrogram. They are only displayed in the spectrogram if the marker position is inside the visible area of the spectrogram. If more than two markers are active, the marker values are displayed in a separate marker table.
Markers in three-dimensional spectrograms are slightly different and are described in "Markers in three-dimensional spectrograms" on page 596.
In the spectrum result display, the markers and their frequency and level values (1) are displayed as usual. Additionally, the frame number is displayed to indicate the position of the marker in time (2).
In the spectrogram result display, you can activate up to 16 markers or delta markers at the same time. Each marker can be assigned to a different frame. Therefore, in addition to the frequency you also define the frame number when activating a new marker. If no frame number is specified, the marker is positioned on the currently selected frame. All markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame. Special search functions are provided for spectrogram markers.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
594
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
In the spectrum result display, only the markers positioned on the currently selected frame are visible. In "Continuous Sweep" mode, this means that only markers positioned on frame 0 are visible. To view markers that are positioned on a frame other than frame 0 in the spectrum result display, you must stop the measurement and select the corresponding frame.
Three-Dimensional Spectrograms
A common spectrogram shows the frequency on the x-axis, while the y-axis shows the time (in frames). The power level is indicated by different colors of the 2-dimensional points.
In the new 3-dimensional spectrogram, the power is indicated by a value in a third dimension, the z-axis. The color mapping is maintained for the point in the 3-dimensional result display.
This new display provides an even better overview of how the strength of the signal varies over time for different frequencies.
Figure 8-15: Three-dimensional spectrogram
The number of frames displayed on the time (y-)axis is user-definable, whereas for 2dimensional spectrograms, the number of frames is determined automatically according to the size of the window. All other spectrogram settings are identical for 3-dimensional and 2-dimensional spectrograms.
When the measurement is stopped or completed, the currently selected frame is indicated by a gray vertical plane. (As opposed to the small white arrows at the borders of the 2-dimensional display.) The spectrum diagram always displays the spectrum for the currently selected frame.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
595
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
By default, the most recently recorded frame (frame 0) is selected, and added at the front of the diagram.
Rotating the spectrogram in three dimensions
Depending on which aspect of the spectrogram is currently of interest, you can rotate the display to have a closer look at the frequency, the time, or the power dimension. Simply drag your finger or the mouse pointer over the spectrogram in the direction you want to rotate it. You can rotate the display left or right, up and down. Note, however, that the degree of rotation is restricted in the upward direction to avoid confusing views. If you rotate the spectrogram such that you see the frequency-frame-plane directly from above, the display is identical to the 2-dimensional spectrogram.
Table 8-6: Effect of rotating the spectrogram in three dimensions
Rotation to the left > focus on frame
Rotation down > focus on frequency and frame
Rotation to the right > focus on frequency
Markers in three-dimensional spectrograms
In three-dimensional spectrograms, the markers are indicated by the common arrows used in the spectrum display, for example. New markers are automatically placed on the current frame. You can move the markers to any position in all dimensions of the diagram. When you select a marker on the screen, three-dimensional cross-hairs indicate the position on all axes.
Sometimes, a marker can be hidden by other frames. If necessary, rotate the spectrogram or select a different frame as the current frame.
Color Maps
Spectrograms assign power levels to different colors to visualize them. The legend above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the colors represent.
The color display is highly configurable to adapt the spectrograms to your needs. You can define:
Which colors to use (Color scheme) Which value range to apply the color scheme to How the colors are distributed within the value range, i.e where the focus of the vis-
ualization lies (shape of the color curve)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
596
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
The individual colors are assigned to the power levels automatically by the R&S FSW.
The Color Scheme Hot
Uses a color range from blue to red. Blue colors indicate low levels, red colors indicate high ones.
Cold
Uses a color range from red to blue. Red colors indicate low levels, blue colors indicate high ones. The "Cold" color scheme is the inverse "Hot" color scheme.
Radar
Uses a color range from black over green to light turquoise with shades of green in between. Dark colors indicate low levels, light colors indicate high ones.
Grayscale
Shows the results in shades of gray. Dark gray indicates low levels, light gray indicates high ones.
The Value Range of the Color Map
If the measured values only cover a small area in the spectrogram, you can optimize the displayed value range so it becomes easier to distinguish between values that are close together. Display only parts of interest.
The Shape and Focus of the Color Curve
The color mapping function assigns a specified color to a specified power level in the spectrogram display. By default, colors on the color map are distributed evenly. However, to visualize a certain area of the value range in greater detail than the rest, you can set the focus of the color mapping to that area. Changing the focus is performed by changing the shape of the color curve.
The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of the color distribution on the color map. By default, the color curve is linear. If you shift the curve to the left or right, the distribution becomes non-linear. The slope of the color curve increases or decreases. One end of the color palette then covers a large range of results, while the other end distributes several colors over a relatively small result range.
You can use this feature to put the focus on a particular region in the diagram and to be able to detect small variations of the signal.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
597
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
Example: In the color map based on the linear color curve, the range from -100 dBm to -60 dBm is covered by blue and a few shades of green only. The range from -60 dBm to -20 dBm is covered by red, yellow and a few shades of green.
Figure 8-16: Spectrogram with (default) linear color curve shape = 0
The sample spectrogram is dominated by blue and green colors. After shifting the color curve to the left (negative value), more colors cover the range from -100 dBm to -60 dBm (blue, green and yellow). This range occurs more often in the example. The range from -60 dBm to -20 dBm, on the other hand, is dominated by various shades of red only.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
598
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
Figure 8-17: Spectrogram with non-linear color curve (shape = -0.5)
8.5.2.2 Spectrogram Settings
Access: [TRACE] > "Spectrogram Config" The individual settings available for spectrogram display are described here. For settings on color mapping, see "Color Map Settings" on page 603. Settings concerning the frames and how they are handled during a sweep are provided as additional sweep settings for spectrogram display. See Chapter 7.5, "Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration", on page 458. Search functions for spectrogram markers are described in Chapter 8.3.3.2, "Marker Search Settings for Spectrograms", on page 527. General Spectrogram Settings..............................................................................599 Color Map Settings................................................................................................603
General Spectrogram Settings Access: [TRACE] > "Spectrogram Config" This section describes general settings for spectrogram display.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
599
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
State............................................................................................................................ 600 3D Spectrogram State.................................................................................................601 Select Frame...............................................................................................................601 History Depth ............................................................................................................. 601 3-D Display Depth....................................................................................................... 601 Time Stamp ................................................................................................................ 601 Color Mapping ............................................................................................................601 Continuous Sweep / Run Cont ...................................................................................602 Single Sweep / Run Single .........................................................................................602 Clear Spectrogram ..................................................................................................... 602
State Activates and deactivates a Spectrogram subwindow.
"Split"
Displays the Spectrogram as a subwindow in the original result display.
"Full"
Displays the Spectrogram in a subwindow in the full size of the original result display.
"Off"
Closes the Spectrogram subwindow.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:LAYout on page 1188
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
600
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
3D Spectrogram State Activates and deactivates a 3-dimensional spectrogram. As opposed to the common 2dimensional spectrogram, the power is not only indicated by a color mapping, but also in a third dimension, the z-axis. For details see "Three-Dimensional Spectrograms" on page 595. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:THReedim[:STATe] on page 1189
Select Frame Selects a specific frame, loads the corresponding trace from the memory, and displays it in the Spectrum window. Note that activating a marker or changing the position of the active marker automatically selects the frame that belongs to that marker. This function is only available in single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped, and only if a spectrogram is selected. The most recent frame is number 0, all previous frames have a negative number. For more details see "Time Frames" on page 592. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:SELect on page 1187
History Depth Sets the number of frames that the R&S FSW stores in its memory. The maximum number of frames depends on the Sweep Points. If the memory is full, the R&S FSW deletes the oldest frames stored in the memory and replaces them with the new data. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:HDEPth on page 1187
3-D Display Depth Defines the number of frames displayed in a 3-dimensional spectrogram. For details see "Three-Dimensional Spectrograms" on page 595.
Time Stamp Activates and deactivates the timestamp. The timestamp shows the system time while the measurement is running. In single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped, the timestamp shows the time and date of the end of the sweep. When active, the timestamp replaces the display of the frame number. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TSTamp[:STATe] on page 1190 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TSTamp:DATA? on page 1189
Color Mapping Opens the "Color Mapping" dialog. For details see "Color Maps" on page 596.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
601
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions
Trace Configuration
Continuous Sweep / Run Cont After triggering, starts the sweep and repeats it continuously until stopped. This is the default setting.
While the measurement is running, the "Continuous Sweep" softkey and the [RUN CONT] key are highlighted. The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again. The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started.
Note: Sequencer. If the Sequencer is active, the "Continuous Sweep" softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel. However, the sweep mode only takes effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel, and only for a channel-defined sequence. In this case, a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly. Furthermore, the [RUN CONT] key controls the Sequencer, not individual sweeps. [RUN CONT] starts the Sequencer in continuous mode.
For details on the Sequencer, see Chapter 5.4.1, "The Sequencer Concept", on page 119.
Remote command: INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884
Single Sweep / Run Single After triggering, starts the number of sweeps set in "Sweep Count". The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed.
While the measurement is running, the "Single Sweep" softkey and the [RUN SINGLE] key are highlighted. The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again.
Note: Sequencer. If the Sequencer is active, the "Single Sweep" softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel. However, the sweep mode only takes effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel, and only for a channel-defined sequence. In this case, the Sequencer sweeps a channel in single sweep mode only once. Furthermore, the [RUN SINGLE] key controls the Sequencer, not individual sweeps. [RUN SINGLE] starts the Sequencer in single mode.
If the Sequencer is off, only the evaluation for the currently displayed channel is updated.
For details on the Sequencer, see Chapter 5.4.1, "The Sequencer Concept", on page 119.
Remote command: INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 885 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CONTinuous on page 1186
Clear Spectrogram Resets the spectrogram result display and clears the history buffer.
This function is only available if a spectrogram is selected.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CLEar[:IMMediate] on page 1186
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
602
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
Color Map Settings Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Traces" > "Spectrogram" > "Color Mapping" or: [TRACE] > "Spectrogram Config" > "Color Mapping" For more information on color maps see "Color Maps" on page 596. For details on changing color mapping settings see "How to Configure the Color Mapping" on page 606. In addition to the available color settings, the dialog box displays the current color map and provides a preview of the display with the current settings.
Figure 8-18: Color Mapping dialog box
1 = Color map: shows the current color distribution 2 = Preview pane: shows a preview of the spectrogram with any changes that you make to the color
scheme 3 = Color curve pane: graphical representation of all settings available to customize the color scheme 4/5 = Color range start and stop sliders: define the range of the color map or amplitudes for the spectrogram 6 = Color curve slider: adjusts the focus of the color curve 7 = Histogram: shows the distribution of measured values 8 = Scale of the horizontal axis (value range)
Start / Stop ................................................................................................................. 603 Shape .........................................................................................................................604 Hot / Cold / Radar / Grayscale ................................................................................... 604 Auto ............................................................................................................................604 Set to Default ............................................................................................................. 604 Close........................................................................................................................... 604
Start / Stop Defines the lower and upper boundaries of the value range of the spectrogram.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
603
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:LOWer on page 1191 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:UPPer on page 1192
Shape Defines the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram result display.
"-1 to <0"
More colors are distributed among the lower values
"0"
Colors are distributed linearly among the values
">0 to 1"
More colors are distributed among the higher values
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:SHAPe on page 1191
Hot / Cold / Radar / Grayscale Sets the color scheme for the spectrogram.
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor[:STYLe] on page 1192
Auto Defines the color range automatically according to the existing measured values for optimized display.
Set to Default Sets the color mapping to the default settings.
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:DEFault on page 1191
Close Saves the changes and closes the dialog box.
8.5.2.3 How to Display and Configure a Spectrogram
Step-by-step instructions on how to display and configure a spectrogram are provided here. For details on individual functions and settings see Chapter 8.5.2.2, "Spectrogram Settings", on page 599.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 13.8.2.2, "Configuring Spectrograms", on page 1185.
The following tasks are described here:
"To display a spectrogram" on page 605 "To remove the spectrogram display" on page 605 "To set a marker in the spectrogram" on page 605 "To configure a spectrogram" on page 605 "To select a color scheme" on page 606 "To set the value range graphically using the color range sliders" on page 607 "To set the value range of the color map numerically" on page 607
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
604
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
"To set the color curve shape graphically using the slider" on page 608 "To set the color curve shape numerically" on page 608
To display a spectrogram 1. In the "Overview" , select "Display" , then drag the evaluation type "Spectrogram"
to the diagram area. Alternatively: a) Select the [TRACE] key and then the "Spectrogram Config" softkey. b) Toggle "Spectrogram" to "On" . 2. To clear an existing spectrogram display, select "Clear Spectrogram" . 3. Start a new measurement using [RUN SINGLE] or [RUN CONT]. The spectrogram is updated continuously with each new sweep. 4. To display the spectrum diagram for a specific time frame: a) Stop the continuous measurement or wait until the single sweep is completed. b) Select the frame number in the diagram footer. c) Enter the required frame number in the edit dialog box.
Note that the most recent sweep is frame number 0, all previous frames have negative numbers.
To remove the spectrogram display 1. Select the [TRACE] key and then the "Spectrogram Config" softkey. 2. Toggle "Spectrogram" to "Off" .
The standard spectrum display is restored.
To set a marker in the spectrogram 1. While a spectrogram is displayed, select the [MARKER] key. 2. Select a "Marker" softkey. 3. Enter the frequency or time (x-value) of the marker or delta marker. 4. Enter the frame number for which the marker is to be set, for example 0 for the cur-
rent frame, or -2 for the second to last frame. Note that the frame number is always 0 or a negative value! The marker is only visible in the spectrum diagram if it is defined for the currently selected frame. In the spectrogram result display all markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame.
To configure a spectrogram 1. Configure the spectrogram frames:
a) Select the [SWEEP] key. b) Select the "Sweep Config" softkey.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
605
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
c) In the "Sweep/Average Count" field, define how many sweeps are to be analyzed to create a single frame.
d) In the "Frame Count" field, define how many frames are to be plotted during a single sweep measurement.
e) To include frames from previous sweeps in the analysis of the new frame (for "Max Hold" , "Min Hold" and "Average" trace modes only), select "Continue Frame" = "On" .
2. Define how many frames are to be stored in total: a) Select the [TRACE] key and then the "Spectrogram Config" softkey. b) Select the "History Depth" softkey. c) Enter the maximum number of frames to store.
3. Optionally, replace the frame number by a time stamp by toggling the "Time Stamp" softkey to "On" .
4. If necessary, adapt the color mapping for the spectrogram to a different value range or color scheme as described in "How to Configure the Color Mapping" on page 606.
How to Configure the Color Mapping
The color display is highly configurable to adapt the spectrogram to your needs.
The settings for color mapping are defined in the "Color Mapping" dialog box. To display this dialog box, do one of the following:
Select the color map in the window title bar of the Spectrogram result display. Select the "Color Mapping" softkey in the "Spectrogram" menu.
To select a color scheme
You can select which colors are assigned to the measured values.
In the "Color Mapping" dialog box, select the option for the color scheme to be used.
Editing the value range of the color map
The distribution of the measured values is displayed as a histogram in the "Color Mapping" dialog box. To cover the entire measurement value range, make sure the first and last bar of the histogram are included.
To ignore noise in a spectrogram, for example, exclude the lower power levels from the histogram.
The value range of the color map must cover at least 10% of the value range on the horizontal axis of the diagram, that means, the difference between the start and stop values must be at least 10%.
The value range of the color map can be set numerically or graphically.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
606
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
To set the value range graphically using the color range sliders 1. Select and drag the bottom color curve slider (indicated by a gray box at the left of
the color curve pane) to the lowest value you want to include in the color mapping. 2. Select and drag the top color curve slider (indicated by a gray box at the right of
the color curve pane) to the highest value you want to include in the color mapping.
To set the value range of the color map numerically
1. In the "Start" field, enter the percentage from the left border of the histogram that marks the beginning of the value range.
2. In the "Stop" field, enter the percentage from the right border of the histogram that marks the end of the value range.
Example: The color map starts at -110 dBm and ends at -10 dBm (that is: a range of 100 dB). In order to suppress the noise, you only want the color map to start at -90 dBm. Thus, you enter 10% in the "Start" field. The R&S FSW shifts the start point 10% to the right, to -90 dBm.
Adjusting the reference level and level range Since the color map is configured using percentages of the total value range, changing the reference level and level range of the measurement (and thus the power value range) also affects the color mapping in the spectrogram.
Editing the shape of the color curve
The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of the color distribution on the color map. By default, the color curve is linear, i.e. the colors on the color map are distributed evenly. If you shift the curve to the left or right, the distribution becomes non-linear. The slope of the color curve increases or decreases. One end of the color palette then covers a large number of results, while the other end distributes several colors over a relatively small result range.
The color curve shape can be set numerically or graphically.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
607
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
To set the color curve shape graphically using the slider Select and drag the color curve shape slider (indicated by a gray box in the middle
of the color curve) to the left or right. The area beneath the slider is focused, i.e. more colors are distributed there.
To set the color curve shape numerically
In the "Shape" field, enter a value to change the shape of the curve: A negative value (-1 to <0) focuses the lower values 0 defines a linear distribution A positive value (>0 to 1) focuses the higher values
8.5.3 Trace Math
Access: [TRACE] > "Trace Math"
If you have several traces with different modes, for example an average trace and a maximum trace, it may be of interest to compare the results of both traces. In this example, you could analyze the maximum difference between the average and maximum values. To analyze the span of result values, you could subtract the minimum trace from the maximum trace. For such tasks, the results from several traces can be combined using mathematical functions.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
608
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Trace Configuration
Trace Math Function .................................................................................................. 609 Trace Math Off ........................................................................................................... 609 Trace Math Position ................................................................................................... 609 Trace Math Mode ....................................................................................................... 609
Trace Math Function Defines which trace is subtracted from trace 1. The result is displayed in trace 1.
The result refers to the zero point defined with the Trace Math Position setting. The following subtractions can be performed:
"T1-T2->T1" "T1-T3->T1" "T1-T4->T1" "T1-T5->T1" "T1-T6->T1"
Subtracts trace 2 from trace 1. Subtracts trace 3 from trace 1 Subtracts trace 4 from trace 1 Subtracts trace 5 from trace 1 Subtracts trace 6 from trace 1
To switch off the trace math, use the Trace Math Off button. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>[:EXPRession][:DEFine] on page 1193 CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:STATe on page 1194
Trace Math Off Deactivates any previously selected trace math functions. Remote command: CALC:MATH:STAT OFF, see CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:STATe on page 1194
Trace Math Position Defines the zero point on the y-axis of the resulting trace in % of the diagram height. The range of values extends from -100 % to +200 %. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:POSition on page 1194
Trace Math Mode Defines the mode for the trace math calculations.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
609
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation
"Lin"
Activates linear subtraction, which means that the power level values are converted into linear units prior to subtraction. After the subtraction, the data is converted back into its original unit. This setting takes effect if the grid is set to a linear scale. In this case, subtraction is done in two ways (depending on the set unit):
The unit is set to either W or dBm: the data is converted into W prior to subtraction, i.e. averaging is done in W.
The unit is set to either V, A, dBmV, dB�V, dB�A or dBpW: the data is converted into V prior to subtraction, i.e. subtraction is done in V.
"Log"
Activates logarithmic subtraction. This subtraction method only takes effect if the grid is set to a logarithmic scale, i.e. the unit of the data is dBm. In this case the values are subtracted in dBm. Otherwise (i.e. with linear scaling) the behavior is the same as with linear subtraction.
"Power"
Activates linear power subtraction. The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to subtraction. After the subtraction, the data is converted back into its original unit. Unlike the linear mode, the subtraction is always done in W.
Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:MODE on page 1193
8.6 Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation
The R&S FSW provides various evaluation methods for the results of the performed measurements. However, you may want to evaluate the data with further, external applications. In this case, you can export the measurement data to a standard format file (ASCII or XML). Some of the data stored in these formats can also be re-imported to the R&S FSW for further evaluation later, for example in other applications.
The following data types can be exported (depending on the application): Trace data Table results, such as result summaries, marker peak lists etc. I/Q data
The following data types can be imported (depending on the application): I/Q data
I/Q data can only be imported and exported in applications that process I/Q data, such as the I/Q Analyzer or optional applications. See the corresponding user manuals for those applications for details.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
610
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation
Displaying a Reference Trace - Importing Trace Data.......................................... 611 Trace/Data Ex/Import............................................................................................ 612 How to Import Traces............................................................................................617 How to Export Trace Data and Numerical Results................................................617 How to Export a Peak List.....................................................................................618 Reference: ASCII File Export Format....................................................................619
8.6.1 Displaying a Reference Trace - Importing Trace Data
Trace data that was stored during a previous measurement can be imported to the Spectrum application, for example as a reference trace.
The data in the import file must have a specified format (see Chapter 8.6.6, "Reference: ASCII File Export Format", on page 619), and can be stored in .CSV or .DAT format.
Trace Mode
The trace mode for the imported traces is set to "View" so that the data is not overwritten immediately during the next sweep. Other trace settings remain unchanged. Thus, the displayed trace may not comply with the displayed trace settings in the channel bar.
Detector type and number of sweep points
In particular, the detector type and the number of sweep points remain unchanged.
If the detector type of the active trace requires two points per x-value ( "Auto Peak" ), but the file contains only one, each point is duplicated. If the detector type requires only one point per x-value, but the file contains two, each second point is ignored.
If the file contains more sweep points than the active trace requires, the superfluous points are ignored. If the file does not contain enough sweep points, the missing points are inserted as -200 dBm.
Units
If the unit of the y-axis values in the file does not correspond to the active result display, the imported values are converted. If no unit is defined in the file, it is assumed to be dBm.
Importing multiple traces in one file
If the import file contains more than one trace, you can import several traces at once, overwriting the existing trace data for any active trace in the result display with the same trace number. Data from the import file for currently not active traces is not imported.
Alternatively, you can import a single trace only, which is displayed for the trace number specified in "Import to Trace" . This list contains all currently active traces in the result display. If a trace with the specified number exists in the import file, that trace is imported. Otherwise, the first trace in the file is imported (indicated by a message in the status bar).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
611
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation
Example:
The import file contains trace 1, trace 2, and trace 4. The current result display has 4 active traces.
"Import to Trace" = 2: trace 2 of the import file is displayed as trace 2 in the result display.
"Import to Trace" = 3: trace 3 is not available in the import file, thus trace 1 is imported and displayed as trace 3 in the result display
"Import to Trace" is enabled: Trace 1 is imported from the file and replaces trace 1 in the result display.
Trace 2 is imported from the file and replaces trace 2 in the result display.
Trace 4 is imported from the file and replaces trace 4 in the result display.
Trace 3 in the result display remains unchanged.
Importing spectrogram traces
Trace data can also be imported to an active Spectrogram result display.
Note the following differences that apply in this case: The measurement must be stopped before import. Only trace 1 is imported to the spectrogram. Any other traces may be imported to a
Spectrum display, if available. However, they do not change the spectrogram display, which always refers to trace 1. A single spectrum is inserted as a new frame number 0. The trace mode is not changed to "View" as for Spectrum trace imports.
8.6.2 Trace/Data Ex/Import
Access: [TRACE] > "Trace Config" > "Trace / Data Export"
The R&S FSW provides various evaluation methods for the results of the performed measurements. However, you may want to evaluate the data with other, external applications. In this case, you can export the measurement data to a standard ASCII format file (DAT or CSV). You can also import existing trace data from a file, for example as a reference trace (Spectrum application only).
The standard data management functions (e.g. saving or loading instrument settings) that are available for all R&S FSW applications are not described here. See Chapter 10.3, "Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data", on page 638 for a description of the standard functions.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
612
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation
Export all Traces and all Table Results ...................................................................... 613 Include Instrument & Measurement Settings ............................................................. 613 Trace to Export ...........................................................................................................613 Decimal Separator ..................................................................................................... 614 X-Value Distribution.....................................................................................................614 Export Trace to ASCII File ..........................................................................................614
File Type ...................................................................................................... 616 Decimal Separator ....................................................................................... 616 Column Separator.........................................................................................616 File Explorer..................................................................................................616 Importing Traces......................................................................................................... 616 Import All Traces / Import to Trace ...............................................................616 Import ASCII File to Trace ........................................................................... 617
File Explorer........................................................................................617
Export all Traces and all Table Results Selects all displayed traces and result tables (e.g. Result Summary, marker table etc.) in the current application for export to an ASCII file.
Alternatively, you can select one specific trace only for export (see Trace to Export ).
The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen: window by window, trace by trace, and table row by table row.
Remote command: FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes on page 1200
Include Instrument & Measurement Settings Includes additional instrument and measurement settings in the header of the export file for result data.
See Chapter 8.6.6, "Reference: ASCII File Export Format", on page 619 for details.
Remote command: FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer on page 1310
Trace to Export Defines an individual trace to be exported to a file.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
613
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation
This setting is not available if Export all Traces and all Table Results is selected.
Decimal Separator Defines the decimal separator for floating-point numerals for the data export/import files. Evaluation programs require different separators in different languages.
Remote command: FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 1284
X-Value Distribution Defines how the x-values of the trace are determined in the frequency domain.
See "X-Value of the Sweep Point" on page 580.
"Bin-Centered" The full measurement span is divided by the number of sweep points to obtain bins. The x-value of the sweep point is defined as the xvalue at the center of the bin (bin/2).
"Start/Stop"
(Default): The x-value of the first sweep point corresponds to the starting point of the full measurement span. The x-value of the last sweep point corresponds to the end point of the full measurement span. All other sweep points are divided evenly between the first and last points.
Remote command: FORMat:DEXPort:XDIStrib on page 1200
Export Trace to ASCII File Saves the selected trace or all traces in the currently active result display to the specified file and directory in the selected ASCII format.
"File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the R&S FSW firmware, you can also use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
614
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation
If the spectrogram display is selected when you perform this function, the entire histogram buffer with all frames is exported to a file. The data for a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded. For large history buffers the export operation can take some time.
For details on the file format in the Spectrum application, see Chapter 8.6.6, "Reference: ASCII File Export Format", on page 619.
Note: Secure user mode. In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory device.
For details, see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37.
Remote command: MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe on page 1201 MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPECtrogram on page 1311
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
615
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation
File Type Export Trace to ASCII File Determines the format of the ASCII file to be imported or exported. Depending on the external program in which the data file was created or is evaluated, a comma-separated list (CSV) or a plain data format (DAT) file is required. Remote command: FORMat:DEXPort:FORMat on page 1199
Decimal Separator Export Trace to ASCII File Defines the decimal separator for floating-point numerals for the data export/import files. Evaluation programs require different separators in different languages. Remote command: FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 1284
Column Separator Export Trace to ASCII File Selects the character that separates columns in the exported ASCII file. The character can be either a semicolon, a comma or a tabulator (tab). Example for semicolon:
Type;FSW13;Version;1.80;Date;01.Jan 3000;
Example for comma:
Type,FSW13, Version,1.80, Date,01.Jan 3000,
Example for tabulator (tab after the last column is not visible):
Type FSW13 Version 1.80 Date 01.Jan 3000
The selected column separator settings remains the same, even after a preset. Remote command: FORMat:DEXPort:CSEParator on page 1199
File Explorer Export Trace to ASCII File Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer. Remote command: not supported
Importing Traces Trace data that was stored during a previous measurement can be imported to the Spectrum application, for example as a reference trace.
Import All Traces / Import to Trace Importing Traces If the import file contains more than one trace, you can import several traces at once, overwriting the existing trace data for any active trace in the result display with the same trace number. Data from the import file for currently not active traces is not imported.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
616
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation
Alternatively, you can import a single trace only, which is displayed for the trace number specified in "Import to Trace" . This list contains all currently active traces in the result display. If a trace with the specified number exists in the import file, that trace is imported. Otherwise, the first trace in the file is imported (indicated by a message in the status bar).
Remote command: FORMat:DIMPort:TRACes on page 1201
Import ASCII File to Trace Importing Traces Loads one trace or all traces from the selected file in the selected ASCII format (.DAT or .CSV) to the currently active result display.
Remote command: FORMat:DIMPort:TRACes on page 1201
File Explorer Import ASCII File to Trace Importing Traces Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command: not supported
8.6.3 How to Import Traces
Trace data that was stored during a previous measurement can be imported to the Spectrum application, for example as a reference trace.
To import trace data 1. Press the [Trace] key. 2. Select "Trace Config" > "Trace / Data Export" / "Import" . 3. Select "Import All Traces" to import traces for all the currently active traces, or
select a specific trace to be imported in "Import to Trace" . 4. Select "Import ASCII File to Trace" . 5. Select the file format in which the data is stored. 6. Select the file that contains the trace data. 7. Select "Select" to close the dialog box and start the import.
8.6.4 How to Export Trace Data and Numerical Results
The measured trace data and numerical measurement results in tables can be exported to an ASCII file. For each sweep point the measured trace position and value are output.
The file is stored with a .DAT or .CSV extension. For details on the storage format see Chapter 8.6.6, "Reference: ASCII File Export Format", on page 619.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
617
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation
For the results of a Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) or Spurious Emissions measurement, special file export functions are available, see Chapter 6.6.6.2, "How to Save SEM Result Files", on page 265(SEM) and " Save Evaluation List " on page 284 (Spurious).
To export trace data and table results 1. Select [TRACE] > "Trace Config" > "Trace / Data Export" tab. 2. Select "Export all Traces and all Table Results" to export all available measurement
result data for the current application, or select a specific "Trace to Export" . 3. Optionally, select the "Include Instrument & Measurement Settings" option to insert
additional information in the export file header. 4. Select the "Export Trace to ASCII File" button. 5. In the file selection dialog box, select the storage location and file name for the
export file. 6. If necessary, change the decimal separator to be used for the ASCII export file. 7. Select the data format of the ASCII file. 8. Select "Save" to close the dialog box and export the data to the file.
8.6.5 How to Export a Peak List
You can save the results of a marker peak list to an ASCII file.
1. Press the [MKR FUNCT] key. 2. Select the "Marker Peak List" softkey. 3. Configure the peak search and list settings as described in Chapter 8.3.4.8,
"Marker Peak List", on page 549. 4. Set the marker peak list "State" to "On" . 5. Press the [RUN SINGLE] key to perform a single sweep measurement and create
a marker peak list. 6. Select the "Marker Peak List" softkey to display the "Marker Peak List" dialog box
again. 7. If necessary, change the decimal separator to be used for the ASCII export file. 8. Select the "Export Peak List" button. 9. In the file selection dialog box, select the storage location and file name for the
export file. 10. Select "Save" to close the dialog box and export the peak list data to the file.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
618
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation
8.6.6 Reference: ASCII File Export Format
Trace data can be exported to a file in ASCII format for further evaluation in other applications. This reference describes in detail the format of the export files for result data.
(For details see Chapter 8.6.4, "How to Export Trace Data and Numerical Results", on page 617)
For a description of the file formats for spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement settings and results, see Chapter 6.6.8, "Reference: SEM File Descriptions", on page 267.
The file format for Spurious Emissions measurement results is described in Chapter 6.7.6, "Reference: ASCII Export File Format (Spurious)", on page 286.
The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data section containing the trace data. Optionally, the header can be excluded from the file (see " Include Instrument & Measurement Settings " on page 613).
The data of the file header consist of three columns, each separated by a semicolon: parameter name; numeric value; basic unit. The data section starts with the keyword "Trace <n>" (<n> = number of stored trace), followed by the measured data in one or several columns (depending on the measurement) which are also separated by a semicolon.
The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen: window by window, trace by trace, and table row by table row.
Generally, the format of this ASCII file can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs, e.g. MS-Excel. Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point. Thus you can define the decimal separator to be used (decimal point or comma, see " Decimal Separator " on page 614).
If the spectrogram display is selected when you select the "ASCII Trace Export" softkey, the entire histogram buffer with all frames is exported to a file. The data corresponding to a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded.
Table 8-7: ASCII file format for trace export in the Spectrum application
File contents
Description
Header data
Type;R&S FSW;
Instrument model
Version;1.00;
Firmware version
Date;01.Oct 2006;
Date of data set storage
Mode;ANALYZER;
Operating mode
Preamplifier;OFF
Preamplifier status
Transducer; OFF
Transducer status
Center Freq;55000;Hz
Center frequency
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
619
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation
File contents Freq Offset;0;Hz Start;10000;Hz Stop;100000;Hz
Span;90000;Hz
Ref Level;-30;dBm Level Offset;0;dB Rf Att;20;dB El Att;2.0;dB RBW;100000;Hz VBW;30000;Hz SWT;0.005;s Sweep Count;20; Ref Position;75;%
Level Range;100;dB
x-Axis;LIN; y-Axis;LOG; x-Unit;Hz;
y-Unit;dBm;
Data section for individual window Window;1;Frequency Sweep Trace 1;; Trace Mode;AVERAGE;
Detector;AUTOPEAK; Values; 1001; 10000;-10.3;-15.7 10130;-11.5;-16.9 10360;-12.0;-17.4 ...;...; Data section for individual trace Trace 2;;
Description Frequency offset Start/stop of the display range. Unit: Hz for span > 0, s for span = 0, dBm/dB for statistics measurements Frequency range (0 Hz in zero span and statistics measurements) Reference level Level offset Input attenuation Electrical attenuation Resolution bandwidth Video bandwidth Sweep time Number of sweeps set Position of reference level referred to diagram limits (0 % = lower edge) Display range in y direction. Unit: dB with x-axis LOG, % with xaxis LIN Scaling of x-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG) Scaling of y-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG) Unit of x values: Hz with span > 0; s with span = 0; dBm/dB with statistics measurements Unit of y values: dB*/V/A/W depending on the selected unit with y-axis LOG or % with y-axis LIN
Window number and name Selected trace Display mode of trace: CLR/WRITE,AVERAGE,MAXHOLD,MINHOLD Selected detector Number of measurement points Measured values: <x value>, <y1>, <y2>; <y2> being available only with detector AUTOPEAK and containing in this case the smallest of the two measured values for a measurement point.
Next trace in same window
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
620
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation
File contents ... Data section for individual window Window;2 ..; Data section for individual trace Trace 1;; ...
Description Name of next window First trace
Table 8-8: ASCII file format for spectrogram trace export
File contents
Description
Header
Type;R&S FSW;
Instrument model
Version;5.00;
Firmware version
Date;01.Oct 2006;
Date of data set storage
Mode;ANALYZER;SPECTROGRAM
Operating mode
Center Freq;55000;Hz
Center frequency
Freq Offset;0;Hz
Frequency offset
Span;90000;Hz
Frequency range (0 Hz in zero span and statistics measurements)
x-Axis;LIN;
Scaling of x-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)
Start;10000;Hz Stop;100000;Hz
Start/stop of the display range.
Unit: Hz for span > 0, s for span = 0, dBm/dB for statistics measurements
Ref Level;-30;dBm
Reference level
Level Offset;0;dB
Level offset
Ref Position;75; %
Position of reference level referred to diagram limits (0 % = lower edge)
y-Axis;LOG;
Scaling of y-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)
Level Range;100;dB
Display range in y direction. Unit: dB with x-axis LOG, % with xaxis LIN
Rf Att;20;dB
Input attenuation
RBW;100000;Hz
Resolution bandwidth
VBW;30000;Hz
Video bandwidth
SWT;0.005;s
Sweep time
Trace Mode;AVERAGE;
Display mode of trace: CLR/WRITE,AVERAGE,MAXHOLD,MINHOLD
Detector;AUTOPEAK;
Selected detector
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
621
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Event-based Actions
File contents Sweep Count;20; Data section Trace 1:;; x-Unit;Hz;
y-Unit;dBm;
Values; 1001; Frames;2; Frame;0; Timestamp;17.Mar 11;11:27:05.990 10000;-10.3;-15.7 10130;-11.5;-16.9 10360;-12.0;-17.4 ...;...; Frame;-1; Timestamp;17.Mar 11;11:27:05.342 ...
Description Number of sweeps set
Selected trace Unit of x values: Hz with span > 0; s with span = 0; dBm/dB with statistics measurements Unit of y values: dB*/V/A/W depending on the selected unit with y-axis LOG or % with y-axis LIN Number of measurement points Number of exported frames Most recent frame number Timestamp of this frame Measured values, identical to spectrum data: <x value>, <y1>, <y2>; <y2> being available only with detector AUTOPEAK and containing in this case the smallest of the two measured values for a measurement point.
Next frame Timestamp of this frame
8.7 Event-based Actions
During a measurement, specific events require that you take a certain action. The R&S FSW allows you to automize such tasks.
The event-based actions feature allows you to capture a particular state of the device under test. Then you can document it for further research or start a specific procedure. The mechanism triggers one or more actions at the end of a sweep if a certain condition applies. The combinations of condition and actions are called rules. Each application individually specifies its own set of rules. Triggering conditions are referred to as events. Typical examples are exceeding or going below a limit value, the (non-) violation of a limit line, hitting a marker value, etc. The range of actions includes taking a screenshot, starting a separate program, saving I/Q data, etc. Also, continuous sweeping can be stopped to retain the data of a particular state of the system.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
622
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Event-based Actions
Some general conditions apply to event-based actions: A maximum of 5 rules can be defined for each application. The base unit applications (Spectrum, I/Q analyzer, Analog Demodulation) are
counted together and thus support a total of 5 rules over all three applications. Rules defined in one application are visible, but cannot be edited or enabled, in the other two applications. The same applies to different measurements within a single application (e.g. SEM and ACLR). Only the currently active measurement channel processes rules. The R&S FSW in general, or any applications, do not perform a validity check on the rules. When you save and then recall the instrument settings, any rule definitions are also stored and loaded, including their state. After an instrument preset or restart, the rules are maintained, but disabled. The trigger count for rules is cleared.
Managing Rules.................................................................................................... 623 Defining Rules.......................................................................................................624 Debugging Rules with the EBA-Journal................................................................ 631 Reference: Overview of Available Result-Events and State-Events..................... 632
8.7.1 Managing Rules
Access: toolbar
The event-based actions manager allows you to configure actions to be performed when specific events occur in the measurement.
Rule state.................................................................................................................... 624 Rule............................................................................................................................. 624 Events......................................................................................................................... 624 Actions........................................................................................................................ 624 Triggered..................................................................................................................... 624 New Rule.....................................................................................................................624 Edit Rule......................................................................................................................624
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
623
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Event-based Actions
Copy Rule................................................................................................................... 624 Delete Rule................................................................................................................. 624 Show Journal.............................................................................................................. 624
Rule state Enables/disables processing of the defined rule for the currently active channel only. Note that the application does not perform a validity check on the rules. For example, if you change or delete the required command file for a rule, the rule becomes invalid. However, the application still attempts to process the rule as far as possible. An easy way to detect such a situation is using the log information, see Chapter 8.7.3, "Debugging Rules with the EBA-Journal", on page 631.
Rule Name of the rule
Events Specified trigger events for the rule
Actions Specified actions to be performed by the rule.
Triggered Number of trigger events for the rule that occurred since the last instrument preset or restart.
New Rule Opens the "Event Based Actions: Modify Rule" dialog box to define a new rule as described in Chapter 8.7.2, "Defining Rules", on page 624.
Edit Rule Opens the "Event Based Actions: Modify Rule" dialog box to edit the selected rule as described in Chapter 8.7.2, "Defining Rules", on page 624.
Copy Rule Creates a copy of the selected rule and opens the "Event Based Actions: Modify Rule" dialog box to edit it, as described in Chapter 8.7.2, "Defining Rules", on page 624.
Delete Rule Deletes the selected event-based action rule.
Show Journal Shows the logging information for the rules defined in the EBA rule manager. This information is useful to debug rules when expected actions are not performed. For details, see Chapter 8.7.3, "Debugging Rules with the EBA-Journal", on page 631.
8.7.2 Defining Rules
Access: "Event-based actions" > "New Rule" / "Edit Rule" / "Copy Rule"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
624
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Event-based Actions
Rules are defined individually for each measurement channel. You must activate each rule for each application individually, and only the currently active channel processes the rules.
A maximum of 5 rules can be defined for each application. The base unit applications (Spectrum, I/Q analyzer, Analog Demodulation) are counted together and thus support a total of 5 rules over all three applications. Rules defined in one application are visible, but cannot be edited or enabled, in the other two applications. The same applies to different measurements within a single application (e.g. SEM and ACLR).
Rule Name.................................................................................................................. 626 Event........................................................................................................................... 626
Limit Line.......................................................................................................626 Limit Line............................................................................................ 626 Trigger condition................................................................................. 626 Window............................................................................................... 626
Marker Y Pos................................................................................................ 626 Marker.................................................................................................627 Window............................................................................................... 627 Trigger condition (Marker value is)..................................................... 627 Value...................................................................................................627
Result Value..................................................................................................627 Result..................................................................................................627 Trigger condition (Value is)................................................................. 627 Value...................................................................................................627
State Value....................................................................................................627 Result..................................................................................................628 Trigger condition (Check for).............................................................. 628
Action.......................................................................................................................... 628 Store Screenshot.......................................................................................... 628 Storage location (Browse).................................................................. 628 File name............................................................................................ 628 Format................................................................................................ 629
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
625
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions
Event-based Actions
Stop Cont Sweep.......................................................................................... 629 Deactivate Rule.............................................................................................629 Auto Level..................................................................................................... 629 Trace Export................................................................................................. 629
Browse................................................................................................629 Mode...................................................................................................629 I/Q Export......................................................................................................629 Start Program/Script..................................................................................... 630 Type.................................................................................................... 630 Program/script (Browse)..................................................................... 630 Add Action...................................................................................................................630 Remove Action............................................................................................................630 Save............................................................................................................................ 630
Rule Name Defines the unique name for the actions to be taken under specific conditions. Without a name, the rule cannot be stored.
Event Defines the event that triggers the action. Depending on the selected event, further parameters are available.
Limit Line Event The result of a limit line check triggers the actions.
Limit Line Limit Line Event The name of a limit line that is defined for the current measurement channel (see Chapter 8.4.2, "Limit Lines", on page 560). The limit line must be active in the current measurement channel for the rule to be processed.
Trigger condition Limit Line Event The result of the limit check ("Pass" / "Fail" / "Margin") that triggers the actions.
Window Limit Line Event Window in which the specified limit line is evaluated.
Marker Y Pos Event The value of a specific marker triggers the actions. The marker must be active in the current measurement channel for the rule to be processed (see " Marker State " on page 337).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
626
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Event-based Actions
Marker Marker Y Pos Event The marker whose value triggers the actions; only for marker 1: also the marker type ("Norm"/"Delta")
Window Marker Y Pos Event Window in which the specified marker is evaluated.
Trigger condition (Marker value is) Marker Y Pos Event The relation of the marker value to the specified value ("greater than" / "lower than") that triggers the actions
Value Marker Y Pos Event Value with which the marker value is compared.
Result Value Event The value of a specific result triggers the actions. Depending on the currently selected measurement, different result values are available (see Chapter 6, "Measurements and Results", on page 124, Chapter 8.7.4, "Reference: Overview of Available ResultEvents and State-Events", on page 632).
Result Result Value Event The measurement result whose value is evaluated (see also Chapter 8.7.4, "Reference: Overview of Available Result-Events and State-Events", on page 632).
Trigger condition (Value is) Result Value Event The relation of the result value to the specified value ("greater than" / "lower than") that triggers the actions
Value Result Value Event Value with which the result value is compared.
State Value Event The measurement result whose state ("Pass" / "Fail") is evaluated. Depending on the currently selected measurement, different state results are available (see Table 8-9). For example, a limit check for a specific result triggers the actions.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
627
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Event-based Actions
Result State Value Event The measurement result whose state is evaluated (see also Table 8-9).
Trigger condition (Check for) State Value Event The state ("Pass" / "Fail") that triggers the actions.
Action Defines the actions to be taken when the specified events occur. Depending on the selected action, further settings are available.
Store Screenshot Action Creates and stores a screenshot of the current display to a file.
Storage location (Browse) Store Screenshot Action Defines the storage location of the screenshots. Enter the path of the target directory directly, or browse in the file explorer and select the directory there.
File name Store Screenshot Action Defines the (generic) file name for the screenshots. If necessary, a consecutive number is added to the specified file name to create unique file names. Placeholders can be inserted in square brackets to create generic file names. The placeholders are replaced by current values at the time the screenshot is created.
The following placeholders are supported: [Year] [Month] [Day] [Hour] [Minute] [Second] [Date] = [Year]-[Month]-[Day] [Time]: =[Hour]-[Minute]-[Second]
Example:
The definition ScreenShot_[Date]_[Time] creates file names such as ScreenShot_2018-12-14_12-49-51.PNG, ScreenShot_2018-12-14_12-50-01.PNG.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
628
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Event-based Actions
Format Store Screenshot Action Defines the image file format
Stop Cont Sweep Action Stops a continuous sweep. No further parameters required.
Deactivate Rule Action Deactivates the rule after the specified number of trigger events occurred; useful to perform a single action only.
Auto Level Action Automatically optimizes the level settings according to the current measurement.
If several "Auto Level" actions are defined for the same rule or for multiple rules, only one "Auto Level" action is performed.
Trace Export Action Stores the current trace data to the specified file.
Define the path and (generic) file name. The default directory is C:\R_S\INSTR\USER. If necessary, a consecutive number is added to the specified file name to create unique file names. Placeholders can be inserted in square brackets to create generic file names. The placeholders are replaced by current values at the time the data is exported.
The following placeholders are supported: [Date] = [Year]-[Month]-[Day] [Time]: =[Hour]-[Minute]-[Second]
Browse Trace Export Action Opens a file-selection dialog box to select the directory for exported traces.
Mode Trace Export Action Defines whether all traces or only user-defined traces are exported (as defined in [Trace ] > "Trace export" settings).
I/Q Export Action Stores the current I/Q data to the specified file. Only available for I/Q-based applications.
Define the path and (generic) file name. The default directory is C:\R_S\INSTR\USER. If necessary, a consecutive number is added to the specified file name to create unique file names. Placeholders can be inserted in square brackets to create generic file names. The placeholders are replaced by current values at the time the data is exported.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
629
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions
Event-based Actions
The following placeholders are supported: [Date] = [Year]-[Month]-[Day] [Time]: =[Hour]-[Minute]-[Second] Select "Browse" to select the directory for exported data from a file-selection dialog box.
Start Program/Script Action Executes the specified program, script, or command, for example a user-defined script or an external application. The command is executed asynchronously to the measurement, that is: the measurement continues without waiting for the command to finish execution. However, you can combine the action "Stop continuous sweep" with the "Start Program/Script" to retain the processed measurement results (see "Add Action" on page 630).
Type Start Program/Script Action Defines the type of command to be executed, which determines the application required to execute the command. For example, a SCPI command script (*.inp) is executed in the R&S IECWIN tool.
Program/script (Browse) Start Program/Script Action Defines the path and file name of the script or program to be executed; invalid (not available) file names are indicated by red font.
Add Action Adds another action to be taken when the specified events occur. You can define up to 3 different actions. The order in which the actions are defined is irrelevant.
If several actions are scheduled due to one or more rules, the actions are performed in the following order (if specified): 1. Store Screenshot 2. Auto Level 3. Start Program/Script Any other actions are performed in parallel.
Remove Action Removes the corresponding action from the rule.
Save Saves the rule definition. Saving is only available if the rule definition is valid. Invalid parts of the definition are indicated by red font, for example if the specified command name, result, or limit line does not exist. Other validity checks are not performed.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
630
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Event-based Actions
8.7.3 Debugging Rules with the EBA-Journal
Access: "Event-based actions" > "Show Journal"
The event-based actions journal shows the logging information for the rules defined in the EBA manager. This information is useful to debug rules when actions are not performed as expected.
Debug / Info / Warning / Error..................................................................................... 631 Refresh........................................................................................................................631 Clear............................................................................................................................632 Debug Logging............................................................................................................632
Debug / Info / Warning / Error Determines which level of information is provided in the journal, depending on its importance. Each level displays information of the selected level or higher. The type of information is indicated in the log display.
"DBG"
Additional descriptions as debugging information (only if Debug Logging is enabled).
"INF"
Basic information on triggering events or executed actions defined by the active rules
"WNG"
Information on possibly unexpected results due to conflicting rule definitions, for example if an "Auto Level" action causes the EBA manager to pause execution of further actions
"ERR"
Errors concerning failed rules, for example due to missing action command or invalid trigger event
Refresh Updates the journal display to include the latest information (since journal was opened or last updated).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
631
R&S�FSW
Common Analysis and Display Functions Event-based Actions
Clear Clears all currently stored information in the journal
Debug Logging If enabled, additional debug information is logged in the journal. Since this information requires large amounts of storage space and can slow down the performance of the firmware, use this mode carefully and only when necessary for troubleshooting. Debug mode is automatically disabled when you close the "EBA Journal" dialog.
8.7.4 Reference: Overview of Available Result-Events and State-Events
Using the event-based actions, you can define actions to be performed depending on the values or states of specific results (see Result Value and "State Value" on page 627). The following overview shows you which results and states are available for which measurements.
Table 8-9: Available result and state events
Measurement
Results
States
Channel power ACLR
Channel Power ACLR Tx Total
Channel Power ACLR
Channel Power ACLR Tx<1-n>
Channel Power ACLR Adj Lower
Channel Power ACLR Adj Upper
Channel Power ACLR Alt<1-n> Lower
Channel Power ACLR Alt<1-n> Upper
Carrier-to-Noise
C/N
C/N0
OBW
OBW Occ BW
OBW Occ BW Freq Offset
Statistics
APD Crest (TRC <1-6>)
CCDF Crest (TRC <1-6>)
Spectrum Emission Mask
Spectrum Emission Mask Tx Power
Spectrum Emission Mask Limit Check
Spurious Emissions
Spurious Emissions Limit Check
Time Domain Power
Time Domain Power Peak
Time Domain Power RMS
Time Domain Power Mean
Time Domain Power Std Dev
Noise Power Ratio
NPR Channel Power Density
NPR Notch Power Density
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
632
R&S�FSW
Optimizing Measurements Improving Averaging Results
9 Optimizing Measurements
9.1 Minimizing the Measurement Duration
If you want to minimize the measurement duration, try the following methods to optimize the measurement: Reduce the span of the measurement to the relevant parts of the signal only. Increase the RBW to minimize the measurement time; however, consider the
requirements of the standard if you need to measure according to standard! Take advantage of the speed optimization mode in the "Sweep" settings if you do
not require the larger dynamic range (see " Optimization " on page 470). Reduce the sweep time and thus the amount of data to be captured and calcula-
ted; however, consider the requirements regarding the standard deviation. To determine average (or peak) values, use an RMS detector (or peak detector)
with a higher sweep time instead of trace averaging to obtain better average power results in less time. Furthermore, enforce the use of the sweep type "FFT" (as opposed to "Auto" ; in Sweep mode, the averaging effect of the RMS detector may be less efficient). When performing multiple measurements, use multiple channels to switch between measurements rather than changing the settings within one channel repeatedly. Take advantage of the Sequencer function to switch between multiple measurements automatically or continuously (see also Chapter 5.4, "Running a Sequence of Measurements", on page 119).
Additional information
An application note discussing measurement speed optimization is available from the Rohde & Schwarz website:
1EF90: Speeding up Spectrum Analyzer Measurements
9.2 Improving Averaging Results
Instead of trace averaging, use an RMS detector with a higher sweep time to obtain better average power results in less time. Furthermore, enforce the use of the sweep type "FFT" (as opposed to "Auto" ; in Sweep mode, the averaging effect of the RMS detector may be less efficient).
In FFT mode, FFTs are calculated per bin and combined using the RMS detector. For trace averaging, on the other hand, the local oscillator must be switched repeatedly for each trace, which takes additional time.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
633
R&S�FSW
Optimizing Measurements Improving Averaging Results
Generally, a higher sweep time leads to more data to be averaged and thus stabilizes the results. In FFT mode, a higher sweep time means more FFTs are calculated and combined per bin. Thus, in the same capture time, the FFT mode with an RMS detector can provide better results than an averaged trace.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
634
R&S�FSW
Data Management Restoring the Default Instrument Configuration (Preset)
10 Data Management
The R&S FSW allows you to store and load instrument settings, as well as import and export measurement data for analysis later. Finally, you can store or print the measurement results displayed on the screen.
General storage and import/export functions are available via the toolbar. Some special storage functions are (also) available via softkeys or dialog boxes in the corresponding menus, for example trace data export.
See Chapter 8.6, "Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation", on page 610 for RF measurements in the Spectrum mode, or the description of the specific applications.
Restoring the Default Instrument Configuration (Preset)...................................... 635 Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode...................................................... 636 Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data..................... 638 Import/Export Functions........................................................................................ 650 Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings................. 654 Working with Test Reports.................................................................................... 669
10.1 Restoring the Default Instrument Configuration (Preset)
When delivered, the R&S FSW has a default configuration. You can restore this defined initial state at any time as a known starting point for measurements. This is often recommendable as a first step in troubleshooting when unusual measurement results arise.
Factory default configuration The factory default configuration is selected such that the RF input is always protected against overload, provided that the applied signal levels are in the allowed range for the instrument. Alternatively to the factory default settings, you can define user-specific recall settings to be restored after a preset or reboot, see "To recall settings automatically after preset or reboot" on page 650.
To restore the default instrument configuration for all channels at once
Press the [PRESET] key.
After you use the [PRESET] function, the history of previous actions is deleted, i.e. any actions performed previously cannot be undone or redone using the [UNDO/REDO] keys.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
635
R&S�FSW
Data Management Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode
Remote command: *RST or SYSTem:PRESet
To restore the default configuration for a single channel The default measurement settings can also be reset for an individual channel only, rather than resetting the entire instrument. In the "Overview" , select the "Preset Channel" button.
The factory default settings are restored to the current channel. Note that a userdefined recall settings file is NOT restored.
Remote command: SYSTem:PRESet:CHANnel[:EXEC] on page 1298
10.2 Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode
During normal operation, the R&S FSW uses a solid-state drive to store its operating system, instrument firmware, instrument self-alignment data, and any user data created during operation.
If necessary, the solid-state drive can be removed from the R&S FSW and locked in a secure place to protect any classified data it may contain.
Redirecting storage to volatile memory
Alternatively, to avoid storing any sensitive data on the R&S FSW permanently, the secure user mode was introduced (option R&S FSW-K33). In secure user mode, the instrument's solid-state drive is write-protected so that no information can be written to memory permanently. Data that the R&S FSW normally stores on the solid-state drive is redirected to volatile memory instead, which remains available only until the instrument is switched off. This data includes:
Windows operating system files Firmware shutdown files containing information on last instrument state Self-alignment data General instrument settings such as the IP address Measurement settings User data created during operation
(see also Table 10-1) Any data created by other applications installed on the R&S FSW, for example, text
editors (Notepad), the clipboard, or drawing tools.
Users can access data that is stored in volatile memory just as in normal operation. However, when the instrument's power is switched off, all data in this memory is cleared. Thus, in secure user mode, the instrument always starts in a defined, fixed state when switched on.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
636
R&S�FSW
Data Management Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode
To store data such as measurement results permanently, it must be stored to an external storage device, such as a memory stick.
Limited storage space The volatile memory used to store data in secure user mode is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "Memory full" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
Storing required data permanently
Any data that is to be available for subsequent sessions with the R&S FSW must be stored on the instrument permanently, before activating the secure user mode. This includes predefined instrument settings, transducer factors and self-alignment data.
Self-alignment data Note that self-alignment data becomes invalid with time and due to temperature changes. Therefore, to achieve optimal accuracy, it can be preferable to perform a new self-alignment at the start of each new session on the R&S FSW.
Restricted operation
Since permanent storage is not possible, the following functions are not available in secure user mode: Firmware update Activating a new option key Furthermore, since the "SecureUser" used in secure user mode does not have administrator rights, administrative tasks such as LAN configuration and some general instrument settings are not available. Refer to the description of the basic instrument setup ([SETUP] menu) to find out which functions are affected.
Activating and deactivating secure user mode
Only a user with administrator rights can activate (and deactivate) the secure user mode. Once activated, a restart is required. The special user "SecureUser" is then logged on to the R&S FSW automatically using the auto-login function. While the secure user mode is active, a message is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the screen.
Secure passwords By default, the initial password for both the administrator account and the "SecureUser" account is "894129". When the secure user mode is activated the first time after installation, you are prompted to change the passwords for all user accounts to improve system security. Although it is possible to continue without changing the passwords, it is strongly recommended that you do so. You can change the password in Windows 10 for any user at any time via: "Start > Settings > Account > SignIn Options > Password > Change"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
637
R&S�FSW
Data Management Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data
To deactivate the secure user mode, the "SecureUser" must log off and a user with administrator rights must log on.
Switching users when using the auto-login function In the "Start" menu, select the arrow next to the "Shut down" button and then "Log off". The "Login" dialog box is displayed, in which you can enter the different user account name and password.
The secure user mode setting and auto-login is automatically deactivated when another user logs on. The "SecureUser" is no longer available. For users with administrator rights, the secure user mode setting is available in the general system configuration settings (see " SecureUser Mode " on page 747).
Remote control Initially after installation of the R&S FSW-K33 option, secure user mode must be enabled manually once before remote control is possible. (See SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe].) Manual activation is necessary to prompt for a change of passwords.
10.3 Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data
Access: "Save" / "Open" icon in the toolbar
Possibly you would like to restore or repeat a measurement you performed under specific conditions on the instrument. Or you want to evaluate imported data in another application on the R&S FSW and would like to restore the measurement settings applied during measurement. In these cases, you can store and recall instrument and measurement settings, and possibly other related measurement data.
Two different methods are available for managing instrument settings:
Quick Save/Quick Recall - a defined set of instrument settings or channels are stored or recalled quickly in just one step
Configurable Save/Recall - a user-defined set of instrument settings or channels are stored to a definable storage location
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
638
R&S�FSW
Data Management Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data
Restrictions when recalling measurement settings When recalling a saved configuration file, the following restrictions apply: The R&S FSW must support the frequency range defined in the configuration file. Configuration files created on a R&S FSW with certain options in use do not work
on an R&S FSW without these options. Files created with newer firmware versions may not work with a previous version. Files created on an instrument other than the R&S FSW do not work on the
R&S FSW.
Saving instrument settings in secure user mode Be sure to store instrument settings that you require beyond the current session before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37. Settings that are saved via QuickSave in secure user mode are only available during the current session. As soon as the power is switched off on the R&S FSW, the data is cleared.
Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings If a transducer file was in use when the save set was stored (with the save item "Current Settings" only) the R&S FSW assumes that these transducer values should remain valid after every recall of that save set. Thus, even if the transducer file is changed and the original save set file is recalled later, the originally stored transducer values are recalled and applied to the measurement. In the "Edit" transducer dialog box, however, the changed transducer file values are displayed, as no updated transducer file was loaded. The same applies to limit line settings. The same applies to integrated measurements' weighting filter. If you want to apply the changed transducer values after recalling the save set, you must force the application to reload the transducer file. To do so, simply open the "Edit Transducer" dialog box (see Chapter 11.4.2, "Transducer Settings", on page 714) and toggle the "X-Axis" option from "Lin" to "log" and back. Due to that change, the transducer file is automatically reloaded, and the changed transducer values are applied to the current measurement. Now you can create a new save set with the updated transducer values. Similarly, if you want to apply the changed limit values after recalling the save set, you must force the application to reload the limit file. To do so, simply open the "Edit Limit Line" dialog box (see Chapter 8.4.2.2, "Limit Line Settings and Functions", on page 564) and toggle the "Y-Axis" unit. Due to that change, the limit line file is automatically reloaded, and the changed limit values are applied to the current measurement. Now a new save set with the updated limit values can be created.
Quick Save/Quick Recall.......................................................................................640 Configurable Storage and Recall.......................................................................... 642 How to Save and Load Instrument Settings..........................................................648
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
639
R&S�FSW
Data Management Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data
10.3.1 Quick Save/Quick Recall
The "Quick Save" and "Quick Recall" functions allow you to store instrument settings or channels very easily and quickly in one step. Up to ten different sets of settings can be stored to or recalled from "save sets". Each save set is identified by its storage date and type (instrument or specific "Channel" ) in the display. The save sets are stored in the C:\R_S\INSTR\QuickSave directory, in files named QuickSave1.dfl to QuickSave10.dfl. Only the current measurement settings are stored, not any additional data such as traces, limit line or transducer files (see Chapter 10.3.2.1, "Stored Data Types", on page 642). Source calibration files for an optional external generator, if available, are included.
Saving instrument settings in secure user mode Settings that are saved via Quick Save in secure user mode are stored to the SDRAM, and are only available during the current session. As soon as the power is switched off on the R&S FSW, the data is cleared (see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37).
During recall, save sets of type "Instrument" replace the settings of the entire instrument. All other save sets start a new channel with the stored settings.
If a channel with the same name as the "Channel" to be restored is already active, the name for the new channel is extended by a consecutive number:
10.3.1.1 Quick Save / Quick Recall Settings
Access: "Save" / "Open" icon in the toolbar > "Quick Save" / "Quick Recall" Both dialog boxes are very similar and closely related.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
640
R&S�FSW
Data Management Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data
QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10 ............................................................................... 641 Rename........................................................................................................ 642 Write Protection............................................................................................ 642
Storage Type (Save only) ...........................................................................................642 Recall ......................................................................................................................... 642
QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10 Selects one of the save sets to store the current settings in or to be recalled. At the time of storage, the "QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10" placeholder is replaced by a label indicating the storage date and time and the storage type.
Right-click on one of the QuickSave buttons to display a context menu with additional functions for the save set.
During recall, save sets of type "Instrument" replace the settings of the entire instrument. All other save sets start a new channel with the stored settings.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
641
R&S�FSW
Data Management Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data
Note: Saving instrument settings in secure user mode. Settings that are saved via Quick Save in secure user mode are only available during the current session. As soon as the power is switched off on the R&S FSW, the data is cleared (see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37).
Rename QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10 Displays an input field to rename the save set, if write protection is disabled.
Write Protection QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10 Enables or disables write protection for the save set. If enabled, the save set cannot be renamed or overwritten.
Storage Type (Save only) Defines which type of settings are stored in the save set.
"Instrument with all Channels"
The instrument settings for all currently active "Channel" s are stored.
"Current Chan- Only the instrument settings for the currently selected measurement
nel"
"Channel" s are stored.
Recall Restores the instrument settings as saved in the selected settings file. If the settings file contains settings for a specific "Channel" only, a new channel with the stored settings is activated, otherwise all "Channel" s and instrument settings are overwritten with the stored settings.
Note: After you use the "Recall" function, the history of previous actions is deleted, i.e. any actions performed previously cannot be undone or redone using the [UNDO/ REDO] keys.
Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 1294
10.3.2 Configurable Storage and Recall
The more sophisticated storage and recall functions allow you to define which settings are stored, and where the settings file is stored to. Any settings file can be selected for recall. Stored Data Types................................................................................................ 642 Storage Location and Filename............................................................................ 643 Save and Recall Dialog Boxes..............................................................................643 Startup Recall Settings..........................................................................................646
10.3.2.1 Stored Data Types
The following types of data can be stored to and loaded from files via the "Save" dialog box on the R&S FSW:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
642
R&S�FSW
Data Management Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data
Table 10-1: Items that can be stored to files
Item
Description
Current Settings
Current instrument and measurement settings.
All Transducers
All transducer factor files.
(Note: Restoring a saveset overwrites transducer factor files on the hard disk that have the same name as those in the saveset. For more information, see "Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 639.)
All Traces
All active traces.
All Limit Lines
All limit line files.
Source Cal Data
Source calibration data for an optional external generator (If available, see "Saving calibration results" on page 383).
Spectrograms
Spectrogram trace data (only available if spectrogram display is currently active).
10.3.2.2 Storage Location and Filename
The data is stored on the internal flash disk or, if selected, on a memory stick or network drive. The operating system, firmware and stored instrument settings are located on drive C.
Saving instrument settings in secure user mode In secure user mode all data is stored to the SDRAM, and is only available during the current session. As soon as the power is switched off on the R&S FSW, the data is cleared (see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37). Other storage locations cannot be selected in this mode.
The storage location and filename are selected in a file selection dialog box which is displayed when you perform a storage function.
By default, the name of a settings file consists of a base name followed by an underscore and three numbers, e.g. limit_lines_005. In the example, the base name is limit_lines. The base name can contain characters, numbers and underscores. The file extension dfl is added automatically. The default folder for settings files is C:\R_S\INSTR\Save.
File name restrictions File names must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names. In particular, they must not contain special characters such as ":", "*", "?".
10.3.2.3 Save and Recall Dialog Boxes
Access: "Save" / "Open" icon in the toolbar > "Save" / "Recall" Both dialog boxes are very similar and closely related.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
643
R&S�FSW
Data Management Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data
Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files...........................................................644 File Name ...................................................................................................................645 Comment ....................................................................................................................645 File Explorer................................................................................................................ 645 File Type .....................................................................................................................645 Items: ......................................................................................................................... 645 Save File .................................................................................................................... 645 Recall in New Channel / Recall in Current Channel ...................................................646
Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files Select the storage location of the file on the instrument or an external drive.
The default storage location for the SEM settings files is: C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std.
Note: Saving instrument settings in secure user mode. In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory device.
For details, see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
644
R&S�FSW
Data Management
Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data
Remote command: MMEMory:CATalog on page 1285
File Name Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension. By default, the name of a user file consists of a base name followed by an underscore. Multiple files with the same base name are extended by three numbers, e.g. limit_lines_005. File names must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names. In particular, they must not contain special characters such as ":", "*", "?". For details on the filename and location, see Chapter 10.3.2.2, "Storage Location and Filename", on page 643.
Comment An optional description for the data file. A maximum of 60 characters can be displayed. Remote command: MMEMory:COMMent on page 1286
File Explorer Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer. Remote command: not supported
File Type Determines whether the global instrument settings with all "Channel" s are stored or recalled, or the current "Channel" settings only.
Items: Defines which data and settings are stored or are recalled. Depending on the "File Type" , either channels only, or global settings are available. Which items are available also depends on the installed options (see also Chapter 10.3.2.1, "Stored Data Types", on page 642). Remote command: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL on page 1290 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault on page 1291 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE on page 1292 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings on page 1291 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL on page 1291 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SCData on page 1292 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SGRam on page 1292 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1...3>[:ACTive] on page 1293 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL on page 1293
Save File Saves the settings file with the defined filename. Note: Secure user mode. In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
645
R&S�FSW
Data Management Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data
limit reached" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available. For details, see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37. Remote command: MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe on page 1296 MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe:NEXT on page 1296
Recall in New Channel / Recall in Current Channel Restores the instrument settings as saved in the selected settings file. If the settings file contains settings for a specific "Channel" only, select "Recall in New Channel" to activate a new channel with the stored settings. Select "Recall in Current Channel" to replace the current "Channel" settings. Note: After you use the "Recall" function, the history of previous actions is deleted, i.e. any actions performed previously cannot be undone or redone using the [UNDO/ REDO] keys. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 1294
10.3.2.4 Startup Recall Settings
Access: "Open" icon in the toolbar > "Startup Recall"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
646
R&S�FSW
Data Management Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data
Startup Recall .............................................................................................................647 Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files...........................................................647 File Name ...................................................................................................................648 Comment ....................................................................................................................648
Startup Recall Activates or deactivates the startup recall function. If activated, the settings stored in the selected file are loaded each time the instrument is started or preset. If deactivated, the default settings are loaded.
Note that only instrument settings files can be selected for the startup recall function, not "Channel" files.
Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO on page 1294
Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files Select the storage location of the file on the instrument or an external drive.
The default storage location for the SEM settings files is: C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std.
Note: Saving instrument settings in secure user mode. In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
647
R&S�FSW
Data Management Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory device. For details, see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37.
Remote command: MMEMory:CATalog on page 1285
File Name Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension.
By default, the name of a user file consists of a base name followed by an underscore. Multiple files with the same base name are extended by three numbers, e.g. limit_lines_005.
File names must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names. In particular, they must not contain special characters such as ":", "*", "?".
For details on the filename and location, see Chapter 10.3.2.2, "Storage Location and Filename", on page 643.
Comment An optional description for the data file. A maximum of 60 characters can be displayed.
Remote command: MMEMory:COMMent on page 1286
10.3.3 How to Save and Load Instrument Settings
Instrument settings can be saved to a file and loaded again later, so that you can repeat the measurement with the same settings. Optionally, user-defined measurement settings can automatically be restored each time you start or preset the instrument.
To save and recall instrument settings using the Quick Save function 1. Select the "Save" icon from the toolbar.
2. Select whether the instrument settings for all "Channel" s are stored, or only those for the current "Channel" .
3. Select one of the save sets in which the settings are stored ( "QuickSaveX" ). The selected settings are stored to the file C:\R_S\INSTR\QuickSave\QuickSaveX.dfl. Note: If you make any changes to the settings after storing the configuration file, remember to save the settings again. Otherwise those settings cannot be restored and will be overwritten by the stored values when the configuration file is recalled.
4. To restore the settings, select the "Open" icon from the toolbar.
5. Select the save set in which the settings were stored ( "QuickSaveX" ). The selected settings are restored to the instrument or channel.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
648
R&S�FSW
Data Management Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data
To save configurable instrument settings 1. Select the "Save" icon from the toolbar.
2. In the "Save" dialog box, switch to the "Save" tab. 3. In the file selection dialog box, select a filename and storage location for the set-
tings file. 4. Optionally, define a comment to describe the stored settings. 5. Select whether the instrument settings for all "Channel" s are stored, or only those
for the current "Channel" . 6. Select the items to be saved with the settings. Either the settings for the currently
selected "Channel" only, or the settings for all "Channel" s can be stored. Various other items, such as lines or traces etc., can be stored as well (see Chapter 10.3.2.1, "Stored Data Types", on page 642). 7. Select "Save" . A file with the defined name and path and the extension .dfl is created.
If you make any changes to the settings after storing the configuration file, remember to save the settings again. Otherwise those settings cannot be restored and will be overwritten by the stored values when the configuration file is recalled.
To recall configurable instrument settings 1. Select the "Open" icon from the toolbar.
2. In the "Recall" dialog box, switch to the "Recall" tab. 3. In the file selection dialog box, select the filename and storage location of the set-
tings file. Note: The "File Type" indicates whether the file contains instrument settings for all "Channel" s, or only those for the current "Channel" . 4. If several items were saved, select which items are restored. 5. If a "Channel" was saved, select whether the settings will replace the settings in the current "Channel" , or whether a new channel with the saved settings will be opened. 6. Select "Recall" . The settings and selected items from the saved measurement are restored and you can repeat the measurement with the same settings. Note that any changes made to the settings after storing the configuration file will be overwritten by the stored values when the configuration file is recalled.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
649
R&S�FSW
Data Management Import/Export Functions
To recall settings automatically after preset or reboot You can define the settings that are restored when you preset or reboot the instrument. 1. Configure the settings as required and save them as described in "To save configu-
rable instrument settings" on page 649. 2. In the "Save/Recall" menu, select "Startup Recall" . 3. From the file selection dialog box, select the recall settings to restore. 4. Select "Select File" . 5. Set "Startup Recall" to "On" .
Now when you press the [PRESET] key or reboot the instrument, the defined settings will be restored. 6. To restore the factory preset settings, set "Startup Recall" to "Off" .
10.4 Import/Export Functions
Access: "Save" / "Open" icon in the toolbar > "Import" / "Export" The R&S FSW provides various evaluation methods for the results of the performed measurements. However, you may want to evaluate the data with further, external applications. In this case, you can export the measurement data to a standard format file (ASCII or XML). Some of the data stored in these formats can also be re-imported to the R&S FSW for further evaluation later, for example in other applications.
The following data types can be exported (depending on the application): Trace data Table results, such as result summaries, marker peak lists etc. I/Q data The following data types can be imported (depending on the application): I/Q data
I/Q data can only be imported and exported in applications that process I/Q data, such as the I/Q Analyzer or optional applications. See the corresponding user manuals for those applications for details.
These functions are only available if no measurement is running. In particular, if Continuous Sweep / Run Cont is active, the import/export functions are not available.
Import ......................................................................................................................... 651 Export .........................................................................................................................651
Export Trace to ASCII File ........................................................................... 651 File Type ............................................................................................ 653
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
650
R&S�FSW
Data Management Import/Export Functions
Decimal Separator ............................................................................. 653 Column Separator...............................................................................653 File Explorer........................................................................................653 Trace Export Configuration .......................................................................... 653 I/Q Export .....................................................................................................653 File Explorer........................................................................................654
Import Access: "Save/Recall" > Import Provides functions to import data. Importing trace data is only available via the "Trace Config" dialog box, see Chapter 8.6.2, "Trace/Data Ex/Import", on page 612. I/Q data can only be imported by applications that process I/Q data. Importing I/Q data is not possible in MSRA operating mode. See the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer user manual for more information.
Export Access: "Save/Recall" > Export Opens a submenu to configure data export.
Export Trace to ASCII File Export Saves the selected trace or all traces in the currently active result display to the specified file and directory in the selected ASCII format. "File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the R&S FSW firmware, you can also use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
651
R&S�FSW
Data Management Import/Export Functions
If the spectrogram display is selected when you perform this function, the entire histogram buffer with all frames is exported to a file. The data for a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded. For large history buffers the export operation can take some time.
For details on the file format in the Spectrum application, see Chapter 8.6.6, "Reference: ASCII File Export Format", on page 619.
Note: Secure user mode. In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory device.
For details, see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37.
Remote command: MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe on page 1201 MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPECtrogram on page 1311
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
652
R&S�FSW
Data Management Import/Export Functions
File Type Export Trace to ASCII File Export Determines the format of the ASCII file to be imported or exported. Depending on the external program in which the data file was created or is evaluated, a comma-separated list (CSV) or a plain data format (DAT) file is required. Remote command: FORMat:DEXPort:FORMat on page 1199
Decimal Separator Export Trace to ASCII File Export Defines the decimal separator for floating-point numerals for the data export/import files. Evaluation programs require different separators in different languages. Remote command: FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 1284
Column Separator Export Trace to ASCII File Export Selects the character that separates columns in the exported ASCII file. The character can be either a semicolon, a comma or a tabulator (tab). Example for semicolon:
Type;FSW13;Version;1.80;Date;01.Jan 3000;
Example for comma:
Type,FSW13, Version,1.80, Date,01.Jan 3000,
Example for tabulator (tab after the last column is not visible):
Type FSW13 Version 1.80 Date 01.Jan 3000
The selected column separator settings remains the same, even after a preset. Remote command: FORMat:DEXPort:CSEParator on page 1199
File Explorer Export Trace to ASCII File Export Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer. Remote command: not supported
Trace Export Configuration Export Opens the "Traces" dialog box to configure the trace and data export settings. Chapter 8.6.2, "Trace/Data Ex/Import", on page 612
I/Q Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to define an export file name to which the I/Q data is stored. This function is only available in single sweep mode. It is not available in the Spectrum application, only in applications that process I/Q data, such as the I/Q Analyzer or optional applications.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
653
R&S�FSW
Data Management
Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings
For details, see the description in the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual ("Importing and Exporting I/Q Data"). Note: Storing large amounts of I/Q data (several Gigabytes) can exceed the available (internal) storage space on the R&S FSW. In this case, it can be necessary to use an external storage medium. Note: Secure user mode. In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available. To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory device. For details, see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37.
File Explorer I/Q Export Export Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer. Remote command: not supported
10.5 Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings
To document the graphical results and the most important settings for the currently performed measurement, you can create a screenshot of the current display. Screenshots can either be printed or stored to a file. Print and Screenshot Settings...............................................................................654 How to Store or Print Screenshots of the Display................................................. 665 Example for Storing Multiple Measurement Results to a PDF File....................... 667
10.5.1 Print and Screenshot Settings
Access: "Print" icon in the toolbar For step-by-step instructions, see Chapter 10.5.2, "How to Store or Print Screenshots of the Display", on page 665. Remote commands for these settings are described in Chapter 13.9.4, "Storing or Printing Screenshots", on page 1298.
To print a screenshot of the current display with the current settings immediately, without switching to the "Print" menu, use the "Print immediately" icon in the toolbar.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
654
R&S�FSW
Data Management Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings
Print Content Settings........................................................................................... 655 Print Preview Functions........................................................................................ 657 Printer Settings......................................................................................................659 Page Setup........................................................................................................... 662 Print Color Settings............................................................................................... 664
10.5.1.1 Print Content Settings
Access: "Print" > "Print Config" > "Content" tab The content settings determine which data is included in the printout. Note that some content settings are independent of the selected printing device, others are printing device-specific.
Print Screenshot .........................................................................................................656 Print Multiple Windows ...............................................................................................656 Comment ....................................................................................................................656
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
655
R&S�FSW
Data Management
Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings
Print Logo ...................................................................................................................656 Print Page Count ........................................................................................................657 Select Device 1/2 ....................................................................................................... 657 Print Dialog .................................................................................................................657 Print Date and Time ................................................................................................... 657
Print Screenshot Selects all measurement results displayed on the screen for the current channel (or "MultiView" ): diagrams, traces, markers, marker lists, limit lines, etc., including the channel bar and status bar, for printout on a single page. Displayed items belonging to the software user interface (e.g. softkeys) are not included. The position and size of the elements in the printout is identical to the display.
This setting is independent of the printing device.
Remote command: HCOPy:CONTent on page 1299
Print Multiple Windows Includes only the selected windows in the printout. All currently active windows for the current channel (or "MultiView" ) are available for selection. How many windows are printed on a single page of the printout is user-definable (see " Windows Per Page " on page 663).
This option is only available when printing on a printer or to a PDF file (see " Destination " on page 661). If the Destination is currently set to an image file or the clipboard for the selected printing device, it is automatically changed to be a PDF file.
Remote command: HCOPy:CONTent on page 1299 HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow<1|2>:STATe on page 1308 HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow<1|2>:CHANnel:STATe on page 1307
Comment Defines an optional comment to be included in the printout of the display. Maximum 120 characters are allowed. Up to 60 characters fit in one line. In the first line, a manual line-feed can be forced at any point by entering "@".
The comment is printed in the top left corner of each printout page. If a comment should not be printed, it must be deleted.
This setting is independent of the printing device.
Tip: The current date and time can be inserted automatically, see " Print Date and Time " on page 657.
Remote command: HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TEXT on page 1304
Print Logo Activates/deactivates the printout of the Rohde & Schwarz company logo in the upper right corner.
This setting is independent of the printing device.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
656
R&S�FSW
Data Management Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings
Remote command: DISPlay:LOGO on page 1299
Print Page Count Includes the page number for printouts consisting of multiple windows (" Print Multiple Windows " on page 656). This setting is independent of the printing device. Remote command: HCOPy:PAGE:COUNt:STATe on page 1304
Select Device 1/2 Selects the printing device to be configured. Two different printout devices can be configured, for example one for printing and one for storage to a file. When you execute the "Print immediately" function, the selected printing device and its settings determine the behavior of the R&S FSW.
Print Dialog Includes any currently displayed dialog in the screenshot printout. This setting is (printing) device-specific and only available if Print Screenshot is selected.
Print Date and Time Includes or removes the current date and time at the bottom of the printout. This setting is (printing) device-specific. Remote command: HCOPy:TDSTamp:STATe<1|2> on page 1309
10.5.1.2 Print Preview Functions
Access: "Print"
The "Print Preview" of the printout according to the current configuration is available in all "Print Settings" dialog tabs.
The preview display (not the functions) is device-specific (see " Select Device 1/2 " on page 657).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
657
R&S�FSW
Data Management Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings
Zoom In / Zoom Out ................................................................................................... 658 Fit Page ......................................................................................................................659 Zoom 1:1 .................................................................................................................... 659 Page Up / Page Down ................................................................................................659 Print ............................................................................................................................659
Zoom In / Zoom Out Zooms into (enlarges) or zooms out of (decreases) the preview display. Note that the zoom functions affect only the preview, not the printout itself.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
658
R&S�FSW
Data Management Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings
Fit Page Adapts the preview display zoom factor so that one complete page is visible as large as possible in the available display space. Note that the zoom functions affect only the preview, not the printout itself.
Zoom 1:1 Displays the printout in its original size, as it will be printed.
Page Up / Page Down Depending on the selected contents (see Chapter 10.5.1.1, "Print Content Settings", on page 655), the printout can consist of multiple pages. Use these functions to scroll within the preview to see the individual pages.
Print Starts to print or store the selected screen contents to a file (see Chapter 10.5.1.1, "Print Content Settings", on page 655). Whether the output is sent to the printer or stored in a file or the clipboard depends on the selected printing device and the printing device settings (see Chapter 10.5.1.3, "Printer Settings", on page 659). If the output is stored to a file, a file selection dialog box is opened to select the filename and location. The default path is C:\R_S\INSTR\USER. Remote command: HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>] on page 1304 HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]:NEXT on page 1304
10.5.1.3 Printer Settings
Access: "Print" > "Print Config" > "Printer" tab
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
659
R&S�FSW
Data Management Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings
Printer settings are (printing) device-specific. That means you can configure two different printing devices (for example, a printer and a file) and switch between configurations easily simply by selecting the appropriate device before printing.
Select Device 1/2 ....................................................................................................... 660 Destination ................................................................................................................. 661
Destination: File ........................................................................................... 661 Destination: Clipboard ..................................................................................661 Destination: Printer ...................................................................................... 661 Suppress File Name Dialog ....................................................................................... 661 Printer Name .............................................................................................................. 661 Print to file .................................................................................................................. 662 Install Printer .............................................................................................................. 662
Select Device 1/2 Selects the printing device to be configured.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
660
R&S�FSW
Data Management
Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings
Two different printout devices can be configured, for example one for printing and one for storage to a file. When you execute the "Print immediately" function, the selected printing device and its settings determine the behavior of the R&S FSW.
Destination Defines the medium to which the printout is output.
Destination: File Destination Stores the printout to a file in the selected format. The filename is queried at the time of storage, or a default name is used (see Suppress File Name Dialog ). Multiple windows can only be printed to a file in PDF format. If you select an image file format, the content setting is automatically set to Print Screenshot . Page settings are not available for image files; however, you can configure the colors used for the screenshot (see Chapter 10.5.1.5, "Print Color Settings", on page 664). Remote command: HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2> on page 1303
Destination: Clipboard Destination Copies the printout to the clipboard. Since only single pages can be copied, only screenshots can be copied to this destination, not multiple windows (see Chapter 10.5.1.1, "Print Content Settings", on page 655). Page settings are not available; however, you can configure the colors used for the screenshot (see Chapter 10.5.1.5, "Print Color Settings", on page 664). If you select the clipboard as the printing destination, the content setting is automatically set to Print Screenshot . Remote command: HCOP:DEST1 'SYSTem:COMMunicate:CLIPboard'
Destination: Printer Destination Sends the printout to the printer selected from the Printer Name list. Remote command: HCOP:DEST1 'SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter'
Suppress File Name Dialog If the Destination is a file, the file selection dialog box is not displayed. Instead, the default storage location and filename are used. (C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\FSW_ScreenShot_<date and time>).
Printer Name Defines the printer to print to if a printer is selected as the Destination . Any printers detected in the network are listed for selection. Tip: the printout can also be stored in a print file using the selected printer driver, see " Print to file " on page 662. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT] on page 1309 SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt on page 1309 SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect<1|2> on page 1309
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
661
R&S�FSW
Data Management Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings
Print to file If a printer is selected as the Destination , use this option to store the data in a .prn file using the selected printer driver. Remote command: To enable: HCOP:DEST1 'MMEM' To disable: HCOP:DEST1 'SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter'
Install Printer This softkey opens the standard Windows dialog box to install a new printer. All printers that are already installed are displayed. Only user accounts with administrator rights can install a printer. For further information, refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation.
10.5.1.4 Page Setup
Access: "Print" > "Print Config" > "Page Setup" tab
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
662
R&S�FSW
Data Management Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings
Page settings are (printing) device-specific. That means you can configure two different printing devices (for example, a printer and a file) and switch between configurations easily simply by selecting the appropriate device before printing.
Page settings are only available when printing on a printer or to a PDF file (see " Destination " on page 661).
Select Device 1/2 ....................................................................................................... 663 Orientation ..................................................................................................................663 Windows Per Page .....................................................................................................663 Scaling ....................................................................................................................... 663 Margins ...................................................................................................................... 663
Select Device 1/2 Selects the printing device to be configured.
Two different printout devices can be configured, for example one for printing and one for storage to a file. When you execute the "Print immediately" function, the selected printing device and its settings determine the behavior of the R&S FSW.
Orientation Selects the page orientation of the printout: portrait or landscape.
Remote command: HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2> on page 1306
Windows Per Page Defines how many windows are displayed on a single page of the printout. This setting is only available if Print Multiple Windows is active (see Chapter 10.5.1.1, "Print Content Settings", on page 655).
If more than one window is printed on one page, each window is printed in equal size.
Remote command: HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow<1|2>:COUNt on page 1307
Scaling Determines the scaling of the windows in the printout if Print Multiple Windows is active (see Chapter 10.5.1.1, "Print Content Settings", on page 655).
If more than one window is printed on one page (see Windows Per Page ), each window is printed in equal size.
"Maintain aspect ratio"
Each window is printed as large as possible while maintaining the aspect ratio of the original display.
"Size to fit"
Each window is scaled to fit the page size optimally, not regarding the aspect ratio of the original display.
Remote command: HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow<1|2>:SCALe on page 1307
Margins Defines margins for the printout page on which no elements are printed. The margins are defined according to the selected unit.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
663
R&S�FSW
Data Management Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings
Remote command: HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:BOTTom on page 1305 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:LEFT on page 1305 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:RIGHt on page 1305 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:TOP on page 1306 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:UNIT on page 1306
10.5.1.5 Print Color Settings
Access: "Print" > "Print Config" > "Color" tab
The settings provided here are identical to those in the "Print Colors" section of the "Display" > "Theme + Color" dialog box.
See " Print Colors " on page 700.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
664
R&S�FSW
Data Management Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings
10.5.2 How to Store or Print Screenshots of the Display
The measurement results displayed on the screen can be printed or stored to a file very easily.
Two different scenarios can be configured in parallel, assigned to different printing devices. You can then perform one or the other simply by selecting the corresponding printing device and the "Print" function.
For a programming example, see Chapter 13.9.7, "Examples: Managing Data", on page 1320.
To start printing or storing results to a file
If the R&S FSW has already been set up according to your current requirements, simply press the "Print immediate" icon at the far right end of the toolbar. The current measurement display is printed or stored to a file, as configured.
To print a screenshot
This configuration assumes a printer has already been installed. To install a new printer, use the Install Printer function (common Microsoft Windows procedure).
1. Select the "Printer" tool in the toolbar. The "Print Settings" dialog box is displayed.
2. Select "Device 1" or "Device 2" to define which printing device you want to configure. (Note: Some settings are independent of the printing-device.)
3. In the "Content" tab, define the elements of the screen and additional information to be included in the printout. a) Select "Print Screenshot" to include all elements displayed on the screen in a single-page printout. b) Optionally, add a comment to be printed at the top of the printout. c) Optionally, activate the date and time or the logo so they are added to the printout. d) Optionally, activate "Print Dialog" to include any dialog boxes currently displayed on the screen in the printout. This is useful, for example, to document the used settings for a particular result. e) Check the "Print Preview" to make sure all relevant elements of the display are visible.
4. In the "Printer" tab, select "Printer" as the "Destination" .
5. Select the "Printer Name" to print to from the list of installed printers.
6. In the "Page Setup" tab, configure the layout of the printout page. a) Select the page orientation. b) Define the page margins.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
665
R&S�FSW
Data Management Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings
c) Check the "Print Preview" to make sure all relevant elements of the display are visible.
7. In the "Color" tab, define the colors to be used for the printout.
a) By default, "Optimized Colors" are used to improve the visibility of the colors. The background is always printed in white and the grid in black. For a printout that reflects exactly what you see on the screen, select "Screen Colors (Screenshot)" .
b) Check the "Print Preview" to find out if the setting is appropriate.
8. Select "Print" to execute the print function.
The screenshot is printed on the printer as configured.
9. To print another screenshot using the same configuration any other time, simply press the "Print immediate" icon at the far right end of the toolbar. If you use different printing scenarios alternately, perform the following steps to print another screenshot:
a) Select the "Printer" tool in the toolbar. b) Select "Device 1" or "Device 2" to select the configured printing device. c) Select "Print" to execute the print function.
To store a printout containing multiple windows
1. Select the "Printer" tool in the toolbar.
The "Print Settings" dialog box is displayed.
2. Select "Device 1" or "Device 2" to define which printing device you want to configure.
3. In the "Content" tab, define the elements of the screen and additional information to be included in the printout.
a) Select "Print Selected Windows" to include the selected windows in the printout, possibly on multiple pages.
b) Select the result displays in the currently selected channel to be included in the printout. Tip: Select the "MultiView" before configuring the printout to include result displays from any active channel.
c) Optionally, add a comment to be printed at the top of each page of the printout. d) Optionally, activate the date and time or the logo so they are added to the print-
out pages.
4. Check the "Print Preview" to make sure all required result displays are included.
a) Scroll through the individual pages of the printout using "Page Up" and "Page Down" .
b) Use the zoom functions to make sure all relevant parts of the result display are visible.
5. In the "Printer" tab, select "File" as the "Destination" .
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
666
R&S�FSW
Data Management Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings
6. Select the file format from the selection list.
7. By default, you define the filename individually for each print operation. To avoid having the "File Selection" dialog box being displayed for each print operation, select "Suppress File Name Dialog" . In this case, the previously used or default storage location and filename are used. (C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\FSW_ScreenShot_<date and time>).
8. In the "Page Setup" tab, configure the layout of the printout page.
a) Select the page orientation. b) Define the page margins. c) Check the "Print Preview" to make sure all relevant elements of the display are
visible.
9. In the "Color" tab, define the colors to be used for the printout.
a) By default, "Optimized Colors" are used to improve the visibility of the colors. The background is always printed in white and the grid in black. For a printout that reflects the colors you see on the screen, but with a white background, select "Screen Colors (Print)" .
b) Check the "Print Preview" to find out if the setting is appropriate.
10. Select "Print" to execute the print function.
11. If you did not select the option to suppress the dialog, enter a filename in the file selection dialog box.
The selected data elements are stored to the file as configured.
12. To store another file using the same configuration any other time, simply press the "Print immediate" icon at the far right end of the toolbar. If you use different printing scenarios alternately, perform the following steps to store another file:
a) Select the "Printer" tool in the toolbar. b) Select "Device 1" or "Device 2" to select the configured printing device. c) Select "Print" to execute the print function.
10.5.3 Example for Storing Multiple Measurement Results to a PDF File
The following example describes the procedure to store results from measurements in the Spectrum application and the I/Q Analyzer to a single PDF file.
1. Configure and perform the measurements in the Spectrum application and I/Q Analyzer as required. Configure at least the following result displays: Frequency Sweep, Spectrogram (Spectrum) Magnitude, Spectrum (I/Q Analyzer)
2. Switch to the "MultiView" tab to display an overview of the result displays in all active channels.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
667
R&S�FSW
Data Management Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings
3. Select the "Printer" tool in the toolbar. The "Print Settings" dialog box is displayed.
4. Select "Device 1" to configure the settings for this printing device. 5. In the "Content" tab, select "Print Selected Windows" . 6. Select the result displays listed in step 1. 7. Enter the comment Measurement Test Report to be inserted at the top of each
page. 8. Select "Print Page Count" and "Print Date and Time" . 9. In the "Content" tab, select "Print Selected Windows" . 10. In the "Printer" tab, select "File" as the "Destination" . 11. Select "PDF" from the file format selection list. 12. Select "Suppress File Name Dialog" . 13. In the "Page Setup" tab, select "Landscape" as the "Orientation" . 14. Select "Windows Per Page" : 1 to print a single result display on each page. 15. Select the "Scaling" option "Size to fit" to maximize the result display on each page. 16. In the "Color" tab, select "Screen Colors (Print)" for a printout that reflects the col-
ors you see on the screen, but with a white background. 17. Check the "Print Preview" to make sure all required result displays are included
and all relevant data elements are visible. a) Scroll through the individual pages of the printout using "Page Up" and "Page
Down" .
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
668
R&S�FSW
Data Management Working with Test Reports
b) Use the zoom functions to make sure all relevant parts of the result display are visible.
18. Select "Print" to execute the print function. The selected data elements are stored to the file as configured.
10.6 Working with Test Reports
Access: Toolbar:
The R&S FSW features a test report generator. A test report is a document that summarizes the results and configuration of measurements.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
669
R&S�FSW
Data Management Working with Test Reports
Figure 10-1: Example of a test report
A test report is made up of one or more datasets. Each dataset contains the results and configuration of one measurement. Test reports are based on a general template, and are completed with user-defined, measurement-specific contents. You can create multiple templates for different applications.
Currently, test reports are only supported in the Spectrum application, and only if the option R&S FSW-K54 is installed.
Designing a Test Report Template........................................................................ 670 Managing Templates.............................................................................................679 Creating Datasets................................................................................................. 680 Creating a Test Report.......................................................................................... 681 How to Create a Test Report.................................................................................683
10.6.1 Designing a Test Report Template
Access: > "Report menu" > "Templates" The R&S FSW allows you to create multiple test report templates. Thus, you can document measurement tasks that require different information or a different layout in the test report. The properties available in the "Templates" tab define the information that each dataset in the test report will contain. Templates contain general contents and application-specific contents. The test report consists of different types of information, some of which are displayed on each page, others per measurement (subreport):
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
670
R&S�FSW
1 2 3
4 5
6
Data Management Working with Test Reports
7
Figure 10-2: Types of information in the test report 1 = Logo (each page) 2 = Global information (each page) 3 = Measurement-specific information (per subreport) 4 = General instrument settings (per subreport) 5 = Measurement-specific settings (per subreport) 6 = Measurement results (per subreport) 7 = Date and page count (each page)
To see the result of your template configuration, use the Show Preview function.
General Contents..................................................................................................672 Title Page.............................................................................................................. 673 Measurement Information..................................................................................... 676 Application-Specific Contents............................................................................... 678
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
671
R&S�FSW
Data Management Working with Test Reports
10.6.1.1 General Contents
Access: > "Report menu" > "Templates" > "General" > "" > "General" The "General" area defines general properties of the report document.
Page format.................................................................................................................672 File type.......................................................................................................................672 Use Screen Colors...................................................................................................... 672 Date.............................................................................................................................673 Page Count................................................................................................................. 673 Report Path................................................................................................................. 673
Suppress Dialog............................................................................................673 Raw Data Storage.......................................................................................................673
Page format Selects the format of the document (A4 or "Letter" format).
Remote command: HCOPy:TREPort:PAGesize on page 1318
File type Selects the file type (*.pdf or *.doc).
Remote command: HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2> on page 1303
Use Screen Colors Enables or disables the use of printer-friendly color schemes (as opposed to the colors used on the screen).
Remote command: HCOPy:TREPort:PCOLors[:STATe] on page 1319
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
672
R&S�FSW
Data Management Working with Test Reports
Date Adds the current date to each page of the report. Remote command: HCOPy:TREPort:TDSTamp[:STATe] on page 1319
Page Count Adds page numbers to each page of the report. Remote command: HCOPy:TREPort:PAGecount:STATe on page 1318
Report Path Defines the name of the report and the location where the report file is to be saved. Enter the path and filename in the input field, or select the directory using the "..." button. If you omit the path, the report is saved in the default directory (C:\R_S\INSTR\USER). Note: This path defines the location of the actual test report. Templates are stored in a different location (see "Save" on page 680). Remote command: MMEMory:NAME on page 1288
Suppress Dialog Report Path By default, when you store a report, a dialog is displayed to define the storage path. If the dialog is suppressed, reports are saved to the default directory (C:\R_S\INSTR \USER) with a generic name without further interaction.
Raw Data Storage Defines the location where the measurement data sets for the report are stored until the report is created. Enter the path and filename in the input field, or select the directory using the "..." button. Remote command: MMEMory:RAW on page 1320
10.6.1.2 Title Page
Access: > "Report menu" > "Templates" > "General" > "" > "Title Page"
You can define an optional title page for the test report with a title and a short description of the report contents. It is only included in the report if you enable it.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
673
R&S�FSW
Data Management Working with Test Reports
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
674
R&S�FSW
Data Management Working with Test Reports
Figure 10-3: Example of a test report title page
State: HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe:STATe on page 1320 Title: HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe on page 1320 Abstract: HCOPy:TREPort:DESCription on page 1314
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
675
R&S�FSW
Data Management Working with Test Reports
10.6.1.3 Measurement Information
Access: > "Report menu" > "Templates" > "General" > "" > "Measurement Information"
The "Measurement Information" area allows you to add user-defined information on the measurement to the report.
You can add up to six lines to the report, plus one picture, for example a company logo. The first line is a heading. Each of the following five lines consists of a title and a value, which is displayed next to the title. The information can be global, that is: valid for the entire report, or specific to an individual measurement. In this case, you define the actual value when you store the measurement data.
Figure 10-4: Dialog box for measurement information when appending data to a report
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
676
R&S�FSW
Data Management Working with Test Reports
Figure 10-5: Example for measurement-specific information in a test report
State............................................................................................................................ 677 Title..............................................................................................................................677 Value........................................................................................................................... 677 Visibility....................................................................................................................... 677 Logo............................................................................................................................ 678
State Enables or disables the user-defined measurement information on the test report.
Remote command: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:STATe on page 1315
Title Defines a title for the type of information, for example "Test equipment" for the name of the device under test. Default titles are provided, but you can change and customize each title, except for the initial "heading". A maximum of 17 characters are available.
For data that is specific to an individual measurement, this title is used in the dialog box asking you to provide the information when you append the measurement results to the report.
Remote command: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:TITLe on page 1315
Value Defines the actual text for the content defined by the title. A maximum of 25 characters are available.
For data that is specific to an individual measurement, you are asked to provide this information when you append the measurement results to the report.
Remote command: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:TEXT on page 1314
Visibility Determines the validity of the content and thus when the contents are configured and where the line is displayed in the report.
"Never"
(Default): Contents are ignored.
"Global"
Contents are valid globally for the entire report. They are configured in the template and included on each page.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
677
R&S�FSW
Data Management Working with Test Reports
"Subreport"
Contents are valid for an individual measurement only. They are configured when you append the measurement results to the report, and included once for each subreport (measurement).
Remote command: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:CONTrol on page 1314 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO:CONTrol on page 1316
Logo Includes a picture or logo in the report. Enter the path and filename in the input field, or select the directory using the "..." button.
The following formats are supported: .bmp .jpg .png .gif .emf .wmf
Remote command: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO on page 1316
10.6.1.4 Application-Specific Contents
For each application, you can select which graphical results, numerical results, or information on the measurement setup to include in the report. Information that is to be included in the test report is represented by a blue button. Information not included is represented by a gray button. Some information is only included if it is also displayed for the measurement, indicated by an asterisk (*).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
678
R&S�FSW
Data Management Working with Test Reports
For the R&S FSW, test reports are only available in Spectrum mode, and only if the R&S FSW-K54 is installed.
For details on the provided information, see: " Diagram " on page 502 " Spectrogram " on page 503 " Marker Table " on page 502 " Marker Peak List " on page 503 " Result Summary " on page 503 Chapter 11.4, "Transducers", on page 712 Chapter 6.13.4.3, "LISN Control Settings", on page 344
Result list: a table that contains the trace values for each trace point A maximum of 50001 measurement points per trace are written to the report. The rest is dismissed. If you have more measurement points, export the data to an ASCII file (see " Export Trace to ASCII File " on page 614 ).
Settings: basic instrument and measurement-specific settings (as indicated in the channel bar)
Select All / Select None Selects or deselects all items in the corresponding area: Diagrams Tables All items Remote command: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect on page 1316
10.6.2 Managing Templates
Access: > "Report menu" > "Templates"
Some general functions to manage test report templates are available on all "Templates" subtabs.
Template name............................................................................................................679 Save............................................................................................................................ 680 Load............................................................................................................................ 680 Default......................................................................................................................... 680
Template name Enter the path and filename of the template in the input field, or select the directory using the "..." button.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
679
R&S�FSW
Data Management Working with Test Reports
If you omit the path, the template is saved in the default directory (C:\R_S\INSTR \USER). Remote command: Query available templates: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:CATalog? on page 1317
Save Saves the current test report configuration to the specified Template name. Remote command: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:SAVE on page 1317
Load Restores the selected test report configuration. Remote command: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:LOAD on page 1317
Default Restores the default template configuration. Remote command: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:DEFault on page 1314
10.6.3 Creating Datasets
Access: Toolbar:
Before you can print a test report, you have to create report data.
Test report data is organized in datasets. Each dataset contains the information for one measurement. A dataset can contain several subsets for different kinds of data for a single measurement, for example settings and a result summary.
You create new datasets manually after a measurement.
Datasets are stored in the directory specified in "Raw Data Storage" on page 673.
After creating a dataset, you can view the details in the "Preview" dialog box (see "Show Preview" on page 682).
Report New.............................................................................................................. 680 Report Append.........................................................................................................680
Report New Deletes all currently stored datasets and creates a new one. Remote command: HCOPy:TREPort:NEW on page 1318
Report Append Adds a new dataset to the existing ones for the next test report. If measurement-specific data is configured in the report template, a dialog box prompts you to provide the information for the appended dataset.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
680
R&S�FSW
Data Management Working with Test Reports
Remote command: HCOPy:TREPort:APPend on page 1313
10.6.4 Creating a Test Report
Access: > "Report menu" > "Preview"
Once you have created datasets for a report, you can create and save the actual test report. Optionally, you can select which of the saved datasets to include. Before you save the test report to a file, you can check a preview of the current configuration and contents.
File type.......................................................................................................................681 Save............................................................................................................................ 681 Selecting items to include in the report....................................................................... 682
Remove All....................................................................................................682 Show Preview............................................................................................................. 682
File type Selects the file type of the report (*.pdf or *.doc).
Remote command: HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2> on page 1303
Save Access: > "Report menu" > "Save"
Saves the test report with the selected items to the selected Report Path with the selected File type. If the option Suppress Dialog is enabled, the report is saved to the directory specified in the general contents area (see Report Path).
Tip: before saving the report, check the contents using the Show Preview function.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
681
R&S�FSW
Data Management Working with Test Reports
Remote command: Print mode: HCOPy:MODE on page 1313 Report name and directory: MMEMory:NAME on page 1288 Print report: HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>] on page 1304
Selecting items to include in the report By default, all datasets and subsets stored for the test report are included (see Chapter 10.6.3, "Creating Datasets", on page 680). However, you can remove individual datasets or subsets before creating the report. Each dataset is indicated by the date and time it was stored. A dataset can contain subsets for individual results.
To delete an item, select the "X" next to the item. Remote command: HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove on page 1319
Remove All Selecting items to include in the report Deletes all items currently stored for the test report. Remote command: HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove:ALL on page 1319
Show Preview If enabled, a preview of the current test report configuration and contents is displayed. Note that it can take a short time until the preview has been created. The preview area provides typical viewing functions as in common PDF viewers.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
682
R&S�FSW
Data Management Working with Test Reports
10.6.5 How to Create a Test Report
Using a test report you can summarize the results and configuration of measurements in a document directly from the Spectrum application.
To configure a test report template
1. Access: > "Report menu" > "Templates"
2. In the "General" area, define the general report settings, including: Page format File type Color scheme (as on screen or print-optimized) Include date Include page numbers Storage path for the final report and temporary data
3. Optionally, in the "Title Page" area, configure a separate title page with a title and description of the report.
4. Optionally, in the "Measurement Information" area, configure further information on the measurement to be included in the report. a) Define a label ("Title"). b) Enter the text for the label ("Value"). c) Select whether the text is to appear on each page ("Global"), or only once per measurement ("Subreport"). d) Upload a picture, e.g. a logo.
5. Select the "Spectrum" tab to configure application-specific contents.
6. Select the diagrams and tables to include in the report.
7. Enter a name for the test report template.
8. Select "Save" to save the template.
To create an initial test report
1. Access: > "Report menu" > "Templates"
2. Select the "..." button at the bottom of the "Templates" tab to select the preconfigured template for your report.
3. Select "Load". The preconfigured report template is loaded to the dialog box.
4. Configure and perform your measurement as usual.
5. When the measurement is finished, save the results for your report: From the toolbar, select > "Report new" to delete any existing report data and start a new report.
6. Perform further measurements and save the results as required. From the toolbar, select "Report Append".
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
683
R&S�FSW
Data Management Working with Test Reports
7. When you are ready to create the report, from the toolbar, select > "Report menu" > "Preview".
8. Optionally, remove any datasets you do not want to include in the report, for example due to false measurement settings. In the "Select items to include in the report" area, select the "X" to remove an item.
9. Optionally, use the browser functions to view the report preview in more detail.
10. Select "Save". A file selection dialog box is displayed, unless you enabled the "Suppress dialog" option in the general template settings.
11. Select the file name and path for the report.
12. Select "OK". The test report is saved to the selected location.
To create subsequent test reports 1. Configure and perform your measurement as usual.
2. When the measurement is finished, save the results for your report: From the toolbar, select "Report New".
3. Perform further measurements and save the results as required. From the toolbar, select "Report Append".
4. When you are ready to create the report, from the toolbar, select > "Report menu" > "Save". A file selection dialog box is displayed, unless you enabled the "Suppress dialog" option in the general template settings.
5. Select the file name and path for the report.
6. Select "OK". The test report is saved to the selected location.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
684
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Alignment
11 General Instrument Setup
Access: [SETUP]
Some basic instrument settings can be configured independently of the selected operating mode or application. Usually, you will configure most of these settings initially when you set up the instrument according to your personal preferences or requirements and then only adapt individual settings to special circumstances when necessary. Some special functions are provided for service and basic system configuration.
Network and Remote Settings, Display Settings Settings for network and remote operation are described in Chapter 12, "Network and Remote Operation", on page 772. Display settings are described in Chapter 11.2.1, "Display Settings", on page 693.
Alignment.............................................................................................................. 685 Display Settings.................................................................................................... 693 Application Starter.................................................................................................706 Transducers.......................................................................................................... 712 Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544)............................................. 725 Reference Frequency Settings..............................................................................737 System Configuration Settings..............................................................................741 Service Functions..................................................................................................750 Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration............................................758
11.1 Alignment
11.1.1 Basics on Alignment
When you put the instrument into operation for the first time or when strong temperature changes occur, align the data to a reference source (see "Temperature check" on page 686).
The correction data and characteristics required for the alignment are determined by the firmware. It compares the results at different settings with the known characteristics of the high-precision calibration signal source at 64 MHz.
Depending on the installation settings, an automatic self-alignment is performed directly after installation, and a dialog is displayed indicating how much warm-up time is still required before self-alignment can be performed.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
685
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Alignment
During instrument start, the firmware checks whether the installed hardware is supported. If not, an error message is displayed ( "Wrong Firmware Version" ) and you are asked to update the firmware. Until the firmware version is updated, self-alignment fails.
If you start a self-alignment remotely and then select the "Local" softkey while the alignment is still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the alignment is completed.
During self-alignment, do not connect a signal to the RF input connector. Running a self-alignment with a signal connected to the RF input can lead to false measurement results.
Alignment results
The alignment results are displayed and contain the following information: Date and time of last correction data record Overall results of correction data record List of found correction values according to function/module The results are classified as follows:
PASSED CHECK
FAILED
Calibration successful without any restrictions
Deviation of correction value larger than expected, correction could however be performed
Deviations of correction value too large, no correction was possible. The found correction data is not applicable.
The results are available until the next self-alignment process is started or the instrument is switched off.
Temperature check
During self-alignment, the instrument's frontend temperature is measured (as soon as the instrument has warmed up completely). This temperature is used as a reference for a continuous temperature check during operation. If the current temperature deviates from the stored self-alignment temperature by a certain degree, a warning is displayed in the status bar. The warning indicates the resulting deviation in the measured power levels. A status bit in the STATUs:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register indicates a possible deviation. The current temperature of the frontend can be queried using a remote command (see SOURce<si>:TEMPerature:FRONtend on page 1333).
Touchscreen alignment
When the device is delivered, the touchscreen is initially calibrated. However, to ensure that the touchscreen responds to the finger contact correctly, a touchscreen alignment is required.
Alignment of the touchscreen is useful: At first use
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
686
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Alignment
After an image update or after exchanging a hard disk
If you notice that touching a specific point on the screen does not achieve the correct response
If the position of the instrument has been changed and you cannot look straight on the screen
If another person operates the instrument
11.1.2 Alignment Settings
Access: [Setup] > "Alignment" Both the instrument and the touchscreen can be aligned when necessary (see Chapter 11.1.1, "Basics on Alignment", on page 685).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
687
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Alignment
Automatic self-alignment
During installation of the R&S FSW firmware, you can configure an automatic selfalignment to be performed directly after installation. In addition, you can activate a preceding warmup time before self-alignment, which is strongly recommended. If you do not activate this option, make sure the instrument has reached its operating temperature before installing the firmware. Furthermore, you can force the instrument to shut down after self-alignment. Note, however, that you cannot switch the instrument back on remotely afterwards.
The additional settings for self-alignment can also be activated or deactivated during operation in the "Alignment" settings dialog (see Await Warm-Up Operation before Self Alignment and Shut down Device after Self Alignment.)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
688
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Alignment
Self-alignment results in secure user mode
Be sure to store self-alignment results before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37.
In secure user mode, the results are not stored permanently. Thus, if the currently stored self-alignment results are not suitable, you must perform a self-alignment each time you switch on the R&S FSW.
Start Self Alignment ................................................................................................... 689 Abort Self Alignment .................................................................................................. 690 Await Warm-Up Operation before Self Alignment....................................................... 690 Schedule..................................................................................................................... 690 Shut down Device after Self Alignment.......................................................................690 Reuse Old Alignment Data..........................................................................................690 Start Preselector Centering.........................................................................................691 Align all........................................................................................................................691 Starting Touch Screen Alignment ...............................................................................691 Alignment Results: ..................................................................................................... 691
Start Self Alignment Starts recording correction data for the instrument. If the correction data acquisition fails or if the correction values are deactivated, a corresponding message is displayed in the status field.
For details, see Chapter 11.1.1, "Basics on Alignment", on page 685.
Note: A running Sequencer operation is aborted when you start a self-alignment.
During self-alignment, do not connect a signal to the RF input connector. Running a self-alignment with a signal connected to the RF input can lead to false measurement results.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
689
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Alignment
Remote command: *CAL? on page 868, see also CALibration[:ALL]? on page 1328
Abort Self Alignment As long as the self-alignment data is being collected, the procedure can be canceled using the "Abort Self Alignment" button. Note: If you start a self-alignment remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the alignment is still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the alignment is completed. In this case, you cannot abort a self-alignment manually.
Await Warm-Up Operation before Self Alignment Displays a message indicating the remaining warmup time required before self-alignment is performed. After the warmup operation has completed, self-alignment is started automatically.
Schedule If enabled, a self-alignment is performed regularly at specific days and time.
Shut down Device after Self Alignment If activated, the R&S FSW is automatically shut down after self-alignment is completed. Note that the instrument cannot be restarted via remote control.
Reuse Old Alignment Data If data from a previous self-alignment is available on the instrument, it can be reused even though the instrument claims the instrument is uncalibrated. This is useful, for example, after activating a software option or updating the firmware to a beta version. After rebooting the instrument, you must re-activate this function if you still want to reuse the old alignment data.
Note, however, that re-using old alignment data can lead to inaccurate measurement results, or even cause the R&S FSW firmware to fail altogether. For measurements using old alignment data, an [OLD CAL] message is indicated in the status bar (instead of [UNCAL], which indicates that a new self-alignment is actually required.)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
690
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Alignment
To measure with the accuracy specified in the data sheet, always perform a selfalignment when the instrument calls for it.
Start Preselector Centering Due to changes in temperature, the YIG-preselector frequency may become slightly offset. This function re-aligns the preselector quickly, without requiring a full self-alignment of the R&S FSW.
This function is only available for R&S FSW models 1331.5003Kxx, and only if a YIGpreselector is available. Remote command: CALibration:PRESelection on page 1329
Align all Performs an extended self-alignment as performed in the factory. Any previous selfalignment results are deleted. Note that this process takes longer than the common self-alignment. Remote command: CALibration[:ALL] ACLEAR
Starting Touch Screen Alignment Starts the touchscreen alignment. Tap the 4 markers on the screen as you are asked to do. The touchscreen is aligned according to the executed pointing operations.
Alignment Results: Information on whether the alignment was performed successfully and on the applied correction data is displayed. The results are available until the next self-alignment process is started or the instrument is switched off. Remote command: CALibration:RESult? on page 1329
11.1.3 How to Perform a Self-Test
You do not have to repeat the self-test every time you switch on the instrument. It is only necessary when instrument malfunction is suspected.
Operating temperature Before performing this functional test, make sure that the instrument has reached its operating temperature (for details, refer to the data sheet).
1. Select [SETUP]. 2. Select "Service" .
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
691
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Alignment
3. Select "Selftest" .
Once the instrument modules have been checked successfully, a message is displayed.
11.1.4 How to Align the Instrument
Operating temperature Before performing this functional test, make sure that the instrument has reached its operating temperature (for details, refer to the data sheet).
To perform a self-alignment Make sure no signal is connected to the RF input connector. Running a self-alignment with a signal connected to the RF input can lead to false measurement results. 1. Select [SETUP]. 2. Select "Alignment" . 3. Select "Start Self Alignment" . 4. To abort the self-alignment process, select "Abort Self Alignment" .
Once the system correction values have been calculated successfully, a message is displayed.
To display the alignment results again later Select [SETUP] > "Alignment" .
11.1.5 How to Align the Touchscreen
To align the touchscreen 1. Press the [Setup] key. 2. Select the "Alignment" softkey. 3. Select "Touch Screen Alignment" .
A blinking cross appears in the lower left corner of the screen. 4. Touch and hold the blinking cross until it stops blinking.
Repeat this action for the crosses in the other corners.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
692
R&S�FSW
11.2 Display Settings
General Instrument Setup Display Settings
11.2.1 Display Settings
Access: [Setup] > "Display" Some general display settings are available regardless of the current application or operating mode. For information on optimizing your display for measurement results, see Chapter 8.1, "Result Display Configuration", on page 501. General Display Settings.......................................................................................693 Displayed Items.....................................................................................................694 Display Theme and Colors....................................................................................698 External Monitor Settings...................................................................................... 703 Touch(screen) Settings......................................................................................... 704
11.2.1.1 General Display Settings
Access: [Setup] > "Display" > "General" This section includes general screen display behavior and date and time display.
Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen ............................................................ 693 Display Update Rate .................................................................................................. 694 Set Date and Time ..................................................................................................... 694 Date and Time Format ............................................................................................... 694
Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen The touchscreen function can be deactivated, e.g. when the instrument is being used for demonstration purposes and tapping the screen must not provoke an action.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
693
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Display Settings
To reactivate the touchscreen, simply press the [Setup] key on the front panel. The "Display" dialog box is opened automatically and the "Touch Screen" option is set to "On" .
"Touch On"
Touchscreen function is active for the entire screen.
"Touch Off"
Touchscreen is deactivated for the entire screen.
"Touch Diagram Off" Touchscreen is deactivated for the diagram area of the screen, but active for the surrounding softkeys, toolbars and menus.
Remote command: DISPlay:TOUChscreen[:STATe] on page 1358
Display Update Rate By default, a fast update rate ensures the most recent measurement results on the display. However, when performance is poor due to slow data transfer (for example during remote control), it can be helpful to decrease the frequency with which the screen display is updated.
Set Date and Time Sets the current date and time for the internal real-time clock on the instrument. This function uses the standard Windows "Date and Time Properties" dialog box. Setting the clock requires administrator rights.
Select the "Set Date and Time" button in the "Display" dialog box, or select the date and time display in the status bar to open the Windows dialog box.
Remote command: SYSTem:DATE on page 1359 SYSTem:TIME on page 1359
Date and Time Format Switches the time and date display on the screen between US and German (DE) format.
Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME:FORMat on page 1358
11.2.1.2 Displayed Items
Access: [Setup] > "Display" > "Displayed Items" Several elements on the screen display can be hidden or shown as required, for example to enlarge the display area for the measurement results.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
694
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Display Settings
Toolbar ....................................................................................................................... 695 Status Bar .................................................................................................................. 695 Softkey Bar .................................................................................................................695 Channel Bar ............................................................................................................... 696 Diagram Footer (Annotation) ......................................................................................696 Date and Time ............................................................................................................696 Front Panel .................................................................................................................696 Mini Front Panel ......................................................................................................... 697
Toolbar The toolbar provides access to frequently used functions via icons at the top of the screen. Some functions, such as zooming, finding help, printing screenshots or storing and loading files are not accessible at all without the toolbar.
Remote command: DISPlay:TBAR[:STATe] on page 1358
Status Bar The status bar beneath the diagram indicates the global instrument settings, the instrument status and any irregularities during measurement or display.
Some of the information displayed in the status bar can be queried from the status registry via remote commands, see Chapter 13.11, "Using the Status Register", on page 1406.
Remote command: DISPlay:SBAR[:STATe] on page 1357
Softkey Bar Softkeys are virtual keys provided by the software. Thus, more functions can be provided than can be accessed directly via the function keys on the device.
The functions provided by the softkeys are often also available via dialog boxes. However, some functions are not accessible at all without the softkey bar.
Note: The softkey bar is hidden while the SmartGrid is displayed and restored automatically when the SmartGrid is closed.
Remote command: DISPlay:SKEYs[:STATe] on page 1357
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
695
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup
Display Settings
Channel Bar The channel bar provides information on firmware and measurement settings for a specific channel. Remote command: DISPlay:ANNotation:CBAR on page 1357
Diagram Footer (Annotation) The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains information on the x-axis of the diagram display, such as: The current center frequency and span settings The displayed span per division The number of sweep points Remote command: DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency on page 1357
Date and Time The date and time display can be switched off independently of the status bar. You can set the current date and time and configure the display format in the "General" tab of the "Display" dialog box. Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME on page 1358
Front Panel The "Front Panel" display simulates the entire front panel of the device (except for the external connectors) on the screen. Thus, you can interact with the R&S FSW without the keypad and keys on the front panel of the device. That is useful, for example, when working with an external monitor or operating via remote control from a computer.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
696
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Display Settings
To activate or deactivate the front panel temporarily, press the [F6] key on the external keyboard (if available) or the remote computer.
For more information, see Chapter 11.2.3, "How to Work with the Soft Front Panels", on page 705.
Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel[:STATe] on page 1359
Mini Front Panel If you require a front panel display but do not want to lose too much space for results in the display area, a mini front panel is available. The mini version displays only the main function keys in a separate window in the display area.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
697
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Display Settings
Note: You can also activate the mini front panel using the key combination [ALT + m] (be aware of the keyboard language defined in the operating system!). That is useful when you are working from a remote PC and the front panel function is not active. Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel[:STATe] on page 1359
11.2.1.3 Display Theme and Colors
Access: [Setup] > "Display" > "Theme + Color" You can configure the used colors and styles of display elements on the screen. For step-by-step instructions see Chapter 11.2.2, "How to Configure the Colors for Display and Printing", on page 704.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
698
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Display Settings
Theme ........................................................................................................................ 699 Screen Colors ............................................................................................................ 699 Print Colors ................................................................................................................ 700 Showing Print Colors on Display.................................................................................700 Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments............................................................... 700
Selecting the Object......................................................................................701 Predefined Colors ........................................................................................ 701 Preview ........................................................................................................ 701 Defining User-specific Colors......................................................................................702 Restoring the User Settings to Default Colors............................................................ 702
Theme The theme defines the colors and style used to display softkeys and other screen objects.
The default theme is "IndustrialDark" .
Remote command: DISPlay:THEMe:SELect on page 1362
Screen Colors Two different color sets are provided by the instrument, a third user-defined set can be configured.
The default color schemes provide optimum visibility of all screen objects when regarding the screen from above or below. Default setting is "Default Colors 1" .
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
699
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Display Settings
If "User Defined Colors" is selected, a user-defined color set can be defined (see "Defining User-specific Colors" on page 702).
Remote command: DISPlay:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci> on page 1360
Print Colors Defines the color settings used for printout.
In addition to the predefined settings, a user-defined color set can be configured (see "Defining User-specific Colors" on page 702).
If "Show Print Colors on Display" is activated, the currently selected print colors are displayed as a preview for your selection.
Gui setting
Description
Remote command
"Optimized Colors"
Selects an optimized color setting for the printout to improve the visibility of the colors (default setting). Trace 1 is blue, trace 2 black, trace 3 green, and the markers are turquoise. The background is always printed in white and the grid in black.
HCOP:CMAP:DEF2
"Screen Colors (Print)" Selects the current screen colors for the
HCOP:CMAP:DEF1
printout. The background is always printed in
white and the grid in black.
"Screen Colors (Screenshot)"
Selects the current screen colors without any HCOP:CMAP:DEF4 changes for a screenshot.
"User Defined Colors" Selects the user-defined color setting.
HCOP:CMAP:DEF3
Remote command: HCOPy:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci> on page 1300
Showing Print Colors on Display Temporarily shows the currently selected print colors on the screen display. This function can be used as a preview for printing.
Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments You can configure the colors used to display and print individual screen objects according to your specific requirements. The colors are configured in the (identical) "Screen Color Setup" / "Printer Color Setup" dialog boxes.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
700
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Display Settings
Selecting the Object Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments Selects the object for which the color is to be defined. Colors can be defined for the following objects:
Background Grid Individual traces Display lines Limit lines and check results Markers and marker information
Remote command: Each object is assigned to a specific suffix of the CMAP commands, see Chapter 13.10.5.3, "CMAP Suffix Assignment", on page 1362.
Predefined Colors Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments Displays the available colors from the predefined color set that can be used for the selected object.
Remote command: HCOPy:CMAP<it>:PDEFined on page 1301
Preview Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments Indicates the currently selected color that will be used for the selected object.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
701
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Display Settings
Defining User-specific Colors In addition to the colors in the predefined color set you can configure a user-specific color to be used for the selected object. When you select "Userdefined Colors..." , the set of predefined colors is replaced by a color palette and color configuration settings.
The color palette allows you to select the color directly. The color settings allow you to define values for tint, saturation and brightness.
Remote command: HCOPy:CMAP<it>:HSL on page 1301
Restoring the User Settings to Default Colors In addition to the predefined color settings, a user-defined setting can be configured. By default, the same settings as defined in "Default Colors 1" are used. They can then be modified according to user-specific requirements (see "Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments" on page 700).
The "Set to Default" function restores the original default settings for the user-defined color set. You can select which of the three default settings are restored.
Remote command: DISPlay:CMAP<it>:PDEFined on page 1361
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
702
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Display Settings
11.2.1.4 External Monitor Settings
Access: [Setup] > "Display" > "Configure Monitor"
You can connect an external monitor (or projector) to the "DVI" or "display port" connector on the instrument's rear panel.
Screen resolution and format The touchscreen of the R&S FSW is calibrated for a 16:10 format. If you connect a monitor or projector using a different format (e.g. 4:3), the calibration is not correct and the screen does not react to your touch actions properly. The touchscreen has a screen resolution of 1280x800 pixels. Usually, the display of the external monitor is a duplicate of the instrument's monitor. If you configure the external monitor to be used as the only display in the Windows configuration dialog box ("Show only on 2"), the maximum screen resolution of the monitor is used. In this case, you can maximize the R&S FSW application window and see even more details. You cannot change the monitor's screen resolution via the standard Windows configuration dialog box. However, you can restore the default instrument resolution (1280x800) on the monitor using the instrument function "Setup" > "Display" > "Configure Monitor" > "Screen Resolution: Restore to default".
Setup ..........................................................................................................................703 Screen Resolution: Restore to Default........................................................................703
Setup Opens the standard Windows configuration dialog box to configure the used display devices.
Screen Resolution: Restore to Default The default screen resolution (1280 x 800) is restored in the Windows configuration settings. This is useful, for instance, if the instrument was connected to a display device and was adapted to different requirements.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
703
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Display Settings
11.2.1.5 Touch(screen) Settings
Access: [Setup] > "Display" > "Touch" These options concern the behavior of the firmware for touch gestures on the screen. Note that these settings remain unchanged after a channel preset.
Level Lock................................................................................................................... 704 X-Lock......................................................................................................................... 704 Y-Lock......................................................................................................................... 704 Adapt Measurement to Zoom (selected diagram).......................................................704
Level Lock If activated (default), the reference level (and thus the attenuation) is locked, that is: remains unchanged during touch gestures on the screen.
X-Lock If activated, the x-axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch gestures.
Y-Lock If activated, the y-axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch gestures.
Adapt Measurement to Zoom (selected diagram) If you already performed a graphical zoom using the " Single Zoom " on page 510 or " Multi-Zoom " on page 510 functions, this function automatically adapts the measurement settings to maintain the currently zoomed display.
11.2.2 How to Configure the Colors for Display and Printing
You can configure the style and colors with which various screen objects are displayed or printed.
To select a color set
1. Press the [Setup] key and select the "Display" softkey.
2. Select the "Theme + Color" tab.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
704
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Display Settings
3. In the "Screen Colors" area, do one of the following: Select a predefined set of colors for screen display. Select "User Defined Colors" to configure the color set yourself.
4. In the "Print Colors" area, do one of the following: Select a predefined set of colors for printing screenshots. Select "User Defined Colors" to configure the color set yourself.
5. Activate the "Show Print Colors on Display" option to see a preview of the print colors.
To configure a user-defined color set
1. In the "Theme + Color" tab of the "Display" dialog box, select "User Defined Colors" either for the screen or the print colors.
2. Select "Modify User Defined Colors" . The "Screen Color Setup" dialog box is opened.
3. From the "Selected Object:" list, select the object to which you want to assign a color.
4. Do one of the following: Select a color from the "Predefined Colors" . Select the "Userdefined Colors ..." button to define a different color. The "Preview" area indicates the currently selected color.
5. To assign a user-specific color to the selected object, do one of the following: Select the color from the palette. Enter values for the "Tint:" , "Saturation:" , and "Brightness:" . Note: In the continuous color spectrum ( "Tint:" ), 0 % represents red and 100 % represents blue. Enter an "ARGB:" value in hexadecimal format.
6. Select the next object to which you want to assign a color from the "Selected Object:" list.
7. Repeat these steps until you have assigned a color to all objects you want to configure.
8. Select "OK" to close the dialog box.
The colors are applied to the assigned objects.
11.2.3 How to Work with the Soft Front Panels
Basic operation with the soft front panels is identical to normal operation, except for the following aspects: To activate a key, select the key on the touchscreen.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
705
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Application Starter
To simulate the use of the rotary knob, use the additional keys displayed between the keypad and the arrow keys:
Icon
Function Turn left Enter Turn right
Mini front panel
The mini front panel provides only the keys on the touchscreen, to operate the R&S FSW via an external monitor or remote desktop.
By default, the "Auto close" option is activated and the mini front panel window closes automatically after you select a key. This is useful if you only require the mini front panel display occasionally to press a single function key.
If you want the window to remain open, deactivate the "Auto close" option. You can close the window manually by selecting "Close planel" or the key combination [ALT + M] (be aware of the keyboard language defined in the operating system!).
To display the soft front panel or mini front panel
1. Press the [Setup] key and select the "Display" softkey.
2. Select the "Displayed Items" tab.
3. Select "Front Panel" : "On" or "Mini Front Panel" : "On" .
To activate or deactivate the front panel temporarily, press the [F6] key on the external keyboard (if available) or on the remote computer.
11.3 Application Starter
The Application Starter allows you to start any external application directly from the R&S FSW firmware.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
706
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Application Starter
This is useful, for example, for the following scenarios: Starting analysis software for the measurement data, such as R&S Vector Signal
Analysis (VSA) software Starting the provided auxiliary tool IECWIN to test a remote command script that
was created using the SCPI Recorder, for example Start an application to send the measurement results to a connected PC or cloud Start any custom application script to provide additional functionality to the firm-
ware, such as measurement-specific auto leveling
11.3.1 Application Starter Functions
Access: Toolbar
The Application Starter dialog box provides different tabs for different types of applications: "External Applications": contains applications that are provided with, but are not
part of the R&S FSW, such as auxiliary tools "User Applications": contains any user-defined applications that can be accessed
from the R&S FSW, such as command scripts "R&S Applications": contains applications predefined by Rohde & Schwarz to
enhance the functionality of your R&S FSW
You can add further applications to the "User Applications" and "External Applications" tabs as you like. They are separated only to improve usability if you have a large number of applications. The "R&S Applications" tab cannot be edited by users.
The Application Starter provides the following functions.
Application buttons......................................................................................................708 Add Application/ Change Application.......................................................................... 708
Drive/ Path/ File Name..................................................................................709
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
707
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup
Application Starter
File Type....................................................................................................... 709 File Explorer..................................................................................................709 Select............................................................................................................ 709 Edit Properties.............................................................................................................709 Application.................................................................................................... 710 Parameters................................................................................................... 710 Working Directory......................................................................................... 710 Display Name................................................................................................710 Choose Icon..................................................................................................710 Delete Link...................................................................................................................711 Add to Toolbar............................................................................................................. 711 Remove from Toolbar.................................................................................................. 711
Application buttons Start the selected application directly on the R&S FSW. Any application windows, outputs, or results are displayed on the R&S FSW screen.
Add Application/ Change Application Opens the "Add Application"/ "Change Application" dialog box. Both dialog boxes are identical.
This function is not available for applications on the "R&S Applications" tab.
Remote command: SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:ADD on page 1404
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
708
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Application Starter
Drive/ Path/ File Name Add Application/ Change Application Defines the path and file name of the application. Remote command: SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:PATH on page 1406
File Type Add Application/ Change Application Defines a filter for the type of application, for example an .exe, .inp (IECWIN script) or other file. If you select a file type other than .exe, the R&S FSW searches for the appropriate application to start your file with. For .inp files, for example, the IECWIN tool provided by Rohde & Schwarz to execute scripts is preselected as the application to start.
File Explorer Add Application/ Change Application Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer. Remote command: not supported
Select Add Application/ Change Application Closes the "Add Application"/ "Change Applicaiton" dialog box and opens the "Edit Properties" dialog box. Remote command: SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:SELect on page 1406
Edit Properties Access: Application button context menu
Defines the display and behavior of the selected application. This function is not available for applications on the "R&S Applications" tab.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
709
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Application Starter
Tip: For .inp files, the IECWIN tool provided by Rohde & Schwarz to execute scripts is preselected as the application to start. The script is defined as the parameter for the application. The file name without the extension is used as the application name. The IECWIN icon is selected as the application icon.
Application Edit Properties Indicates the application selected in the "Add Application" dialog box. Provides access to the Add Application/ Change Application dialog box to change the application. Remote command: SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:PATH on page 1406
Parameters Edit Properties Defines parameters that are provided with the application for execution, for example arguments for a custom script. Remote command: SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:PARams on page 1405
Working Directory Edit Properties Defines the working directory used by the selected application. Remote command: SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:DIRectory on page 1405
Display Name Edit Properties Defines the name of the application as displayed on the button in the "Application Starter" dialog box. Remote command: SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:NAME on page 1405
Choose Icon Edit Properties Defines an icon for the application to be displayed on the button in the "Application Starter" dialog box and optionally in the toolbar.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
710
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Application Starter
Remote command: SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:ICON on page 1405
Delete Link Access: Application button context menu Removes the application from the "Application Starter" dialog box and the toolbar. This function is not available for applications on the "R&S Applications" tab. Remote command: SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:DELete on page 1404
Add to Toolbar Access: Application button context menu Inserts the specified application icon in the R&S FSW toolbar.
Remove from Toolbar Access: Application button context menu Removes the application icon from the R&S FSW toolbar.
11.3.2 How to Work With the Application Starter
To start an application 1. Select the Application Starter icon from the toolbar.
The "Application Starter" dialog box is displayed. 2. Select the required application from the dialog box.
The application is started and displayed on the R&S FSW screen.
To return to the R&S FSW 1. If no external keyboard is connected to the instrument, select the online keyboard
icon. 2. Press the [Alt]+[Tab] keys.
To add an application to the Application Starter 1. Select the Application Starter icon from the toolbar.
The "Application Starter" dialog box is displayed. 2. Select "Add Application". 3. Select the file type of the application to filter the file selection in the dialog box. 4. Select or enter the file name of the required application. 5. Select "Select".
The "Edit Properties" dialog box is displayed.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
711
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Transducers
6. Optionally, define parameters to be provided to the application. 7. Define the working directory to be used by the application. 8. Define the name to be displayed on the button in the "Application Starter" dialog
box. 9. Select an icon to be displayed on the button in the "Application Starter" dialog box
and optionally in the toolbar. 10. Select "OK".
The application is available in the Application Starter. 11. Optionally, add an icon for the application to the toolbar.
To add an icon for the application to the toolbar 1. Select the Application Starter icon from the toolbar.
The "Application Starter" dialog box is displayed. 2. Right-click the application button in the Application Starter. 3. Select "Add to Toolbar".
11.4 Transducers
11.4.1 Basics on Transducer Factors
The transducer allows you to manipulate the trace at discrete trace points to correct the signal coming from an input device. Transducers are often used to correct the frequency response for antennas, for example. The transducer is configured by defining
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
712
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup
Transducers
transducer factors for specific trace points. A set of transducer factors defines an interpolated transducer line and can be stored on the instrument.
In the Spectrum application, the correction factor from all active transducers is calculated for each displayed trace point once in advance and is added to the result of the level measurement during the sweep. If the sweep range changes, the correction values are calculated again. If several measured values are combined in one point, only one value is taken into consideration. If the active transducer line is not defined for the entire sweep range, the missing values are replaced by zeroes.
When a transducer is used, the trace is shifted by a calculated factor. However, an upward shift reduces the dynamic range for the displayed values. Thus, the reference level can be adapted automatically to restore the original dynamic range. The reference level is shifted by the maximum transducer factor. By default, if transducers are active the reference level function is adapted automatically to obtain the best dynamic performance.
If a transducer factor is active, "TDF" is displayed in the channel bar.
Transducers can also be defined when an optional external mixer is used (R&S FSWB21). When using probes for RF input, transducers are automatically created according to the probe's detected characteristics as soon as the probe is connected. (See the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual.) Input from I/Q data files is imported as it was stored, including any correction factors, for example from transducers. Any currently configured correction factors at the time of import, however, are not applied.
Y-Axis Unit
The individual transducer factors can be defined as absolute values or relative (dB) values. However, all factors for one transducer line use the same unit. As soon as a transducer is activated, the unit of the transducer is automatically used for all the level settings and outputs. The unit cannot be changed in the amplitude settings since the R&S FSW and the active transducer are regarded as one measuring instrument. Only for relative transducer factors (unit dB), the unit originally set on the instrument is maintained and can be changed.
When all transducers have been switched off, the R&S FSW returns to the unit that was used before a transducer was activated.
Configuration
The R&S FSW supports transducer lines with a maximum of 1001 data points. Eight of the transducer lines stored in the instrument can be activated simultaneously. The number of transducer lines stored in the instrument is only limited by the capacity of the storage device used.
A transducer line consists of the following data:
A maximum of 1001 data points with a position and value A unit for the values
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
713
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Transducers
A name to distinguish the transducer lines
Validity
The transducer factors must comply with the following rules to ensure correct operation:
The frequencies for the data points must always be defined in ascending order. Otherwise the entry will not be accepted and an error message is displayed.
The frequencies of the data points may exceed the valid frequency range of the R&S FSW since only the set frequency range is taken into account for measurements. The minimum frequency of a data point is 0 Hz, the maximum frequency 200 GHz.
The value range for the transducer factor is �200 dB. Gain has to be entered as a negative value, and attenuation as a positive value.
Storing transducer factors
Transducer factors can be exported to a file in ASCII (CSV) format for further evaluation in other applications. Transducer factors stored in the specified ASCII (CSV) format can also be imported to the R&S FSW for other measurements.
Transducer factors can also be stored with the configuration settings so they can be recalled for other measurements at a later time. Note, however, that any changes made to the transducer factors after storing the configuration file cannot be restored and will be overwritten by the stored values when the configuration file is recalled. Always remember to store the settings again after changing the transducer factors.
(See Chapter 10.3, "Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data", on page 638).
Recalling transducer factors stored with measurement settings After recalling measurement settings, the transducer factors applied to the measurement may be different to those displayed in the "Transducer" dialog box; see "Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 639.
11.4.2 Transducer Settings
Access: [Setup] > "Transducer" Up to 8 transducer lines can be activated simultaneously in the R&S FSW. Many more can be stored on the instrument.
Transducers can also be defined when an optional external mixer is used (R&S FSWB21).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
714
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Transducers
Transducer settings in secure user mode Be sure to store transducer files before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37.
Stored transducer settings When storing and recalling transducer settings, consider the information provided in "Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 639.
Transducer Management...................................................................................... 715 Transducer Factors............................................................................................... 717
11.4.2.1 Transducer Management
Access: [Setup] > "Transducer" The settings required to manage all transducer lines on the instrument are described here.
For the transducer line overview, the R&S FSW searches for all stored transducer lines with the file extension .TDF in the C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\trd directory. The overview allows you to determine which transducer lines are available and can be used for the current measurement.
For details on settings for individual lines see Chapter 11.4.2.2, "Transducer Factors", on page 717.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
715
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup
Transducers
For instructions on configuring and working with transducers see Chapter 11.4.4, "How to Configure the Transducer", on page 721.
Name ..........................................................................................................................716 Unit .............................................................................................................................716 Compatibility ...............................................................................................................716 Activating / Deactivating .............................................................................................716 Comment ....................................................................................................................717 Included Transducer Lines in Overview (View Filter) ................................................. 717 Adjust Ref Level ......................................................................................................... 717 Create New Line ........................................................................................................ 717 Edit Line ..................................................................................................................... 717 Copy Line ................................................................................................................... 717 Delete Line ................................................................................................................. 717
Name The name of the stored transducer line.
Unit The unit in which the y-values of the data points of the transducer line are defined.
The following units are available: dB dBm dBmV dBV dBV/m dBA dBA/m dBpW dBpT Additional units available only for installed R&S FSW-K54 (EMI measurements) option: dBmV/MHz (normalized to 1 MHz) dB�V/MHz (normalized to 1 MHz) dB�A/MHz (normalized to 1 MHz)
Compatibility Indicates whether the transducer factors are compatible with the current measurement settings.
For more information on which conditions a transducer line must fulfill to be compatible, see Chapter 11.4.1, "Basics on Transducer Factors", on page 712.
Activating / Deactivating Activates/deactivates the transducer line. Up to 8 transducer lines can be active at the same time.
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect on page 1336 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe] on page 1336
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
716
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Transducers
Comment An optional description of the transducer line.
Included Transducer Lines in Overview (View Filter) Defines which of the stored transducer lines are included in the overview. The view can be restricted to compatible transducer lines only or include all transducer lines found. Whether a line is compatible or not is indicated in the Compatibility setting.
Adjust Ref Level Activates or deactivates the automatic adjustment of the reference level to the selected transducer factor.
"Auto"
Activates the automatic adjustment. The original dynamic range is restored by shifting the reference level by the maximum transducer factor.
"Manual"
Deactivates the automatic adjustment. Adjust the reference level via the "Amplitude" menu.
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ADJust:RLEVel[:STATe] on page 1334
Create New Line Create a new transducer line.
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect on page 1336
Edit Line Edit an existing transducer line configuration.
Copy Line Copy the selected transducer line configuration to create a new line.
Delete Line Delete the selected transducer line.
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete on page 1335
11.4.2.2 Transducer Factors
Access: [Setup] > "Transducer" > "Edit Line" / "Copy Line" / "New Line" The settings and functions available for individual transducer lines are described here. For instructions on creating and editing transducer lines see Chapter 11.4.4, "How to Configure the Transducer", on page 721.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
717
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Transducers
Name ..........................................................................................................................718 Comment ....................................................................................................................718 Unit .............................................................................................................................719 X-Axis Scaling ............................................................................................................ 719 Data Points .................................................................................................................719 Insert Value ................................................................................................................ 719 Delete Value ...............................................................................................................719 Shift x ......................................................................................................................... 719 Shift y ......................................................................................................................... 719 Save ........................................................................................................................... 719 Import ......................................................................................................................... 720
File Explorer..................................................................................................720 Export .........................................................................................................................720
File Explorer..................................................................................................720
Name Defines the transducer line name. All names must be compatible with the Windows 10 conventions for file names. The transducer data is stored under this name (with a .TDF extension) in the C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\trd directory.
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect on page 1336
Comment Defines an optional comment for the transducer line. The text may contain up to 40 characters.
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent on page 1335
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
718
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup
Transducers
Unit The unit in which the y-values of the data points of the transducer line are defined. As soon as a transducer is activated, the unit of the transducer is automatically used for all the level settings and outputs. The unit cannot be changed in the amplitude settings unless dB is used. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT on page 1336
X-Axis Scaling Describes the scaling of the horizontal axis on which the data points of the transducer line are defined. Scaling can be linear or logarithmic. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing on page 1336
Data Points Each transducer line is defined by a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 50 data points. Each data point is defined by its position (x-axis) and value (y-value). The data points must comply with the following rules to ensure correct operation: The frequencies for the data points must always be defined in ascending order.
Otherwise the entry will not be accepted and the an error message is displayed. The frequencies of the data points may exceed the valid frequency range of the
R&S FSW since only the set frequency range is taken into account for measurements. The minimum frequency of a data point is 0 Hz, the maximum frequency 200 GHz. The value range for the transducer factor is �200 dB. Gain has to be entered as a negative value, and attenuation as a positive value. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA on page 1335
Insert Value Inserts a data point in the transducer line above the selected one in the "Edit Transducer" dialog box.
Delete Value Deletes the selected data point in the "Edit Transducer" dialog box.
Shift x Shifts the x-value of each data point horizontally by the defined shift width.
Shift y Shifts the y-value of each data point vertically by the defined shift width.
Save Saves the currently edited transducer line under the name defined in the "Name" field. Remote command: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL on page 1293 MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe on page 1296
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
719
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Transducers
Import Opens a file selection dialog box and loads the transducer factor from the selected file in .CSV format.
Note that a valid import file must contain a minimum of required information for the R&S FSW. For details on the file format see Chapter 11.4.3, "Reference: Transducer Factor File Format", on page 720.
Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD<n>:TFACtor on page 1337
File Explorer Import Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command: not supported
Export Opens a file selection dialog box and stores the currently displayed transducer factor to the defined file in .CSV format.
For details on the file format see Chapter 11.4.3, "Reference: Transducer Factor File Format", on page 720.
The transducer factor can be imported again later by the R&S FSW for use in other measurements.
Remote command: MMEMory:STORe<n>:TFACtor on page 1337
File Explorer Export Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command: not supported
11.4.3 Reference: Transducer Factor File Format
Transducer factor data can be exported to a file in ASCII (CSV) format for further evaluation in other applications. Transducer factors stored in the specified ASCII (CSV) format can also be imported to the R&S FSW for other measurements.
For more information about transducer factors, see " Import " on page 720.
This reference describes in detail the format of the export/import files for transducer factors. Note that the bold data is mandatory, all other data is optional.
Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point. Thus, you can define the decimal separator to be used (see " Decimal Separator " on page 614).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
720
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Transducers
Table 11-1: ASCII file format for transducer factor files
File contents
Description
Header data
sep=;
Separator for individual values (required by Microsoft Excel, for example)
Type;RS_TransducerFactor;
Type of data
FileFormatVersion;1.00;
File format version
Date;01.Oct 2006;
Date of data set storage
OptionID;SpectrumAnalyzer
Application the transducer factor was created for
Name;TestTDF1
Transducer factor name
Comment;Transducer for device A
Description of transducer factor
XAxisScaling;LINEAR
Scaling of x-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)
YAxisUnit;LEVEL_DB
Unit of y values
YAxisScaleMode;ABSOLUTE
Scaling of y-axis (absolute or relative)
NoOfPoints;5
Number of points the line is defined by
Data section for individual data points
100000000;-50.000000
x- and y-values of each data point defining the line
500000000;-30.000000
1000000000;0.000000
1500000000;-30.000000
2500000000;-50.000000
11.4.4 How to Configure the Transducer
Configuring the transducer is very similar to configuring transducer factors. The transducer settings are defined in the "Transducer" dialog box which is displayed when you press the [Setup] key and then select "Transducer" .
Stored transducer settings When storing and recalling transducer settings, consider the information provided in "Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 639.
The following tasks are described: "How to find compatible transducer lines" on page 722 "How to activate and deactivate a transducer" on page 722 "How to edit existing transducer lines" on page 722 "How to copy an existing transducer line" on page 722 "How to delete an existing transducer line" on page 723
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
721
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Transducers
"How to configure a new transducer line" on page 723 "How to move the transducer line vertically or horizontally" on page 724
How to find compatible transducer lines In the "Transducer" dialog box, select the "View Filter" option: "Show Compatible" .
All transducer lines stored on the instrument that are compatible to the current measurement settings are displayed in the overview.
How to activate and deactivate a transducer 1. To activate a transducer select a transducer line in the overview and select the
"Active" setting for it. The trace is automatically recalculated for the next sweep after a transducer line is activated. 2. To deactivate a transducer line, deactivate the "Active" setting for it. After the next sweep, the originally measured values are displayed.
How to edit existing transducer lines Existing transducer line configurations can be edited. 1. In the "Transducer" dialog box, select the transducer line. 2. Select the "Edit" button. 3. Edit the line configuration as described in "How to configure a new transducer line"
on page 723. 4. Save the new configuration by selecting the "Save" button.
The trace is automatically recalculated for the next sweep if the transducer line is active.
In order to store the changes to the transducer lines in a settings file, select the "Save" icon in the toolbar. (See Chapter 10.3, "Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data", on page 638).
How to copy an existing transducer line 1. In the "Transducer" dialog box, select the transducer line. 2. Select the "Copy" button.
The "Edit Transducer" dialog box is opened with the configuration of the selected transducer. 3. Define a new name to create a new transducer with the same configuration as the source line.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
722
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Transducers
4. Edit the line configuration as described in "How to configure a new transducer line" on page 723.
5. Save the new configuration by selecting the "Save" button.
The new transducer line is displayed in the overview and can be activated.
How to delete an existing transducer line
1. In the "Transducer" dialog box, select the transducer line.
2. Select the "Delete" button.
3. Confirm the message.
The transducer line is deleted. After the next sweep, the originally measured values are displayed.
How to configure a new transducer line
1. In the "Transducer" dialog box, select the "New" button. The "Edit Transducer" dialog box is displayed. The current line configuration is displayed in the preview area of the dialog box. The preview is updated after each change to the configuration.
2. Define a "Name" and, optionally, a "Comment" for the new transducer line.
3. Define the scaling for the x-axis.
4. Define the data points: minimum 2, maximum 1001: a) Select "Insert Value" . b) Define the x-value ( "Position" ) and y-value ( "Value" ) of the first data point. c) Select "Insert Value" again and define the second data point. d) Repeat this to insert all other data points. To insert a data point before an existing one, select the data point and then "Insert Value" . To insert a new data point at the end of the list, move the focus to the line after the last entry and then select "Insert Value" . To delete a data point, select the entry and then "Delete Value" .
5. Check the current line configuration in the preview area of the dialog box. If necessary, correct individual data points or add or delete some. If necessary, shift the entire line vertically or horizontally by selecting the "Shift x" or "Shift y" button and defining the shift width.
6. Save the new configuration by selecting the "Save" button.
The new transducer line is displayed in the overview and can be activated.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
723
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Transducers
How to move the transducer line vertically or horizontally A configured transducer line can easily be moved vertically or horizontally. Thus, a new transducer line can be easily generated based upon an existing transducer line which has been shifted. 1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the transducer line. 2. Select the "Edit" button. 3. In the "Edit Transducer Line" dialog box, select the "Shift x" or "Shift y" button and
define the shift width. 4. Save the shifted data points by selecting the "Save" button.
If activated, the trace is recalculated after the next sweep.
How to export a transducer factor Transducer factor configurations can be stored to an ASCII file for evaluation in other programs or to be imported later for other measurements. 1. In the "Edit Transducer" dialog box, select the transducer factor. 2. Select the "New" or "Edit" button. 3. Define the transducer factor as described in "How to configure a new transducer
line" on page 723. 4. Select "Export" to save the configuration to a file.
You are asked whether you would like to save the configuration internally on the R&S FSW first.
5. Select a file name and location for the transducer factor. 6. Select the decimal separator to be used in the file. 7. Select "Save" .
The transducer factor is stored to a file with the specified name and the extension .CSV. For details on the file format see Chapter 11.4.3, "Reference: Transducer Factor File Format", on page 720.
How to import a transducer factor Transducer factor configurations that are stored in an ASCII file and contain a minimum of required data can be imported to the R&S FSW. For details on the required file format see Chapter 11.4.3, "Reference: Transducer Factor File Format", on page 720. 1. In the "Edit Transducer" dialog box, select the transducer factor. 2. Select the "New" or "Edit" button. 3. Select "Import" to load a transducer factor from a file.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
724
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544)
You are asked whether you would like to save the current configuration on the R&S FSW first.
4. Select the file name of the transducer factor.
5. Select the decimal separator that was used in the file.
6. Select "Select" . The transducer factor is loaded from the specified file and displayed in the "Edit Transducer" dialog box.
7. Activate the transducer factor as described in "How to activate and deactivate a transducer" on page 722.
11.5 Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544)
If the Frequency Response Correction option (R&S FSW-K544) is installed, the R&S FSW supports frequency response correction using Touchstone (.snp) files or .fres files.
11.5.1 Basics on Frequency Response Correction
Input-specific frequency correction
Frequency response correction can be configured individually for all available input types (RF, baseband). The settings in the "User-defined Frequency Response Correction" dialog box apply to the currently selected input type. Be sure to select the appropriate input source before you define the correction data (see Chapter 7.2.2, "Input Source Settings", on page 361). In remote operation, be sure to use the correct command for the required input type (see "Input-specific frequency correction" on page 1338).
Otherwise the correction may seem to fail because it was defined for a different input type than the one being used.
Touchstone (.snp) files
Touchstone (.snp) files contain data to characterize a measurement setup in respect to the gain and phase error over frequency. Such files are generated by network analyzers, for example. The R&S FSW can use such files to compensate for any gain or phase errors between the DUT and the connection from the DUT to the instrument.
Touchstone files can be defined for a varying number of input and output ports. The total number of ports configured in the file is indicated by the file extension; the "n" in .snp is merely a placeholder. Thus, a file for a cable with one input and one output is referred to as an S2P file. A file for a switch with one input and 3 outputs is referred to as an S4P file etc.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
725
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544)
Transducer vs filter function
Touchstone files are handled similarly to transducer files by the R&S FSW. However, while a transducer adapts the frequency values by a fixed factor, Touchstone files act as a filter on I/Q input data. For common frequency sweeps, the effects of transducers and Touchstone files are the same.
.fres files
Additional frequency response correction files in .fres format allow you to correct effects from components for which no Touchstone files are available.
Files in .fres format correspond to an S1P file. They contain exactly three values for each frequency:
The frequency The magnitude correction value The phase correction value Instead of the magnitude and phase correction values, the I and Q values can be provided.
These values are applied to the input data. If the file contains any other data, it cannot be loaded.
For .fres files, magnitude and phase correction can be activated separately.
Group delay compensation
The phase correction values can be used to compensate for a group delay. However, to calculate the correction correctly, the distance between two values must not be too large. Thus, the application requires a minimum number of values in the correction file. Define at least enough values so the following equation is true:
Group_delay * Frequency_Spacing * 360 < 180
Combining multiple correction files
Since the measurement setup may consist of several cables, DUTs and other components, multiple Touchstone and frequency response files can be required for full compensation. In this case, the order in which the files are applied is important. The R&S FSW combines all active Touchstone files to a single S2P file, and creates the required filter or correction factors for the measurement.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
726
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544)
Correction filters for I/Q data
Filters can only be applied to I/Q data if they are defined for the complete analysis bandwidth. Therefore, if the combined frequency response filter does not cover the complete analysis span, it is invalid and cannot be used for the measurement. See also "Recognizing frequency response correction in measurement results" on page 727.
For common frequency sweeps, values not covered by the combined frequency response are not corrected, but the settings remain valid. A message is displayed in the status bar. See also "Recognizing frequency response correction in measurement results" on page 727.
External preamplifier Touchstone files
If an external preamplifier is connected to the R&S FSW, an additional Touchstone file is provided by the preamplifier. The combined frequency response filter also considers those values. For your convenience, the external preamplifier can be switched on and off directly in the "User-Defined Frequency Response Correction" dialog box, as an alternative to the common input settings.
Correcting data in one or more applications
While transducer files are always used for all measurements on the instrument, .snp and .fres files can be configured either for the current application only, or for all measurement channels.
Thus, you can configure different files for individual measurement setups with a particular input source and channel setup. For example, you can set up three different I/Q Analyzer channels in parallel and use different Touchstone files for each measurement channel.
Recognizing frequency response correction in measurement results
If frequency response correction is active for a measurement channel, "FRCORR" is indicated in the channel bar. The status of the correction settings is indicated by the color of this message:
Color Green Yellow
Red
Meaning
Active correction settings valid and in use
For Spectrum mode only: Correction settings active, but not all frequencies in measurement span are covered by filter, or the combined filter does not cover any frequencies. Use the [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER: SCOVered? command to determine the covered span.
Correction settings active, but not in use, e.g. due to invalid settings (see "Correction filters for I/Q data" on page 727)
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:VALid? on page 1355
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
727
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544)
Since multiple correction settings can be active at the same time, the channel bar merely indicates that frequency response correction is being applied, but not which files are being used. To find out which correction files are being used for the active application, open the "User-Defined Frequency Response Correction" dialog box (see Chapter 11.5.2, "User-defined Frequency Response Correction Settings", on page 728). An LED-like symbol indicates whether each file is active and user correction or the external preamplifier in general is switched on (symbol "lights up") or not (symbol is dark). A purple symbol represents a Touchstone file. A green symbol represents a frequency response (.fres) file.
Storing frequency response correction settings
You can store frequency response correction settings to a file (saveset) and load them for future measurements. For details see "Save Settings" on page 732.
Storing SaveSets with a loaded Touchstone file If you store the settings for a measurement using a Touchstone file in a saveset, only the link to the Touchstone file name is actually stored. That means that if you change the settings in the file and recall the saveset for the measurement later, the results will differ from the original measurement.
Imported I/Q data Correction factors are not applied to input from I/Q data files during import. Data from these files is imported as it was stored. However, if any correction factors were applied to the stored data, for example from Touchstone files, the imported data contains those corrections.
Restrictions
Currently, the R&S FSW has the following restrictions for Touchstone file support: Trace data containing corrections from Touchstone files cannot be returned in I/Q
block format (See TRAC:IQ:DATA:FORM, described in the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual).
11.5.2 User-defined Frequency Response Correction Settings
Access: [SETUP] > "User Correction"
User-defined frequency response correction can be defined in one or more Touchstone files and in one or more frequency response (.fres) files, or a combination of them. A configuration of correction files can be stored to and loaded from a file.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
728
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544)
Frequency response correction can be configured individually for all available input types (RF, baseband). The settings in the "User-defined Frequency Response Correction" dialog box apply to the currently selected input type.
State............................................................................................................................ 730 Refresh........................................................................................................................730 Ext. PA Correction.......................................................................................................730 Adjust Ref Level.......................................................................................................... 731 Apply to....................................................................................................................... 731 Load Settings.............................................................................................................. 731 Save Settings.............................................................................................................. 732 Clear Settings..............................................................................................................732 Touchstone File Information........................................................................................ 732
ID.................................................................................................................. 732 Filename....................................................................................................... 732 Active............................................................................................................ 732 To - From.......................................................................................................732 Add Touchstone File....................................................................................................733 Remove File................................................................................................................ 733 Move File Up or Down.................................................................................................733 Frequency Response active........................................................................................733 Frequency Response File Information........................................................................ 733 ID.................................................................................................................. 733 Filename....................................................................................................... 734 Magnitude..................................................................................................... 734 Phase............................................................................................................734 Add Freq Resp File..................................................................................................... 734 Remove Frequency Response File.............................................................................734 Preview....................................................................................................................... 734
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
729
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup
Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544)
Selected File................................................................................................. 734 IQ Mode........................................................................................................ 735 Spectrum Mode.............................................................................................736
State Enables or disables the general usage of user-defined frequency response correction settings. If activated, the data in the active correction files is combined to create a filter. This filter is applied to the measurement results of subsequent sweeps.
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:STATe on page 1354 Testing the validity of the correction setting: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:VALid? on page 1355
Refresh Retrieves the specified files again and creates a new combined filter. If enabled, the filter is applied immediately.
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:REFResh on page 1346
Ext. PA Correction This function is only available if an external preamplifier is connected to the R&S FSW, and only for frequencies above 1 GHz. For details on connection, see the preamplifier's documentation.
Using an external preamplifier, you can measure signals from devices under test with low output power, using measurement devices which feature a low sensitivity and do not have a built-in RF preamplifier.
When you connect the external preamplifier, the R&S FSW reads out the touchdown (.S2P) file from the EEPROM of the preamplifier. This file contains the s-parameters of the preamplifier. As soon as you connect the preamplifier to the R&S FSW, the preamplifier is permanently on and ready to use. However, you must enable data correction based on the stored data explicitly on the R&S FSW using this setting.
When enabled, the R&S FSW automatically compensates the magnitude and phase characteristics of the external preamplifier in the measurement results. Any internal preamplifier, if available, is disabled.
An active external preamplifier is also included in the calculation of the combined userdefined frequency response correction filter and displayed in the preview for SnP files (see "Preview" on page 734).
For R&S FSW85 models with two RF inputs, you can enable correction from the external preamplifier for each input individually, but not for both at the same time.
When disabled, no compensation is performed even if an external preamplifier remains connected.
Remote command: INPut<ip>:EGAin[:STATe] on page 1151
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
730
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544)
Adjust Ref Level Activates or deactivates the automatic adjustment of the reference level to the active filter calculation configuration. The offset is the mean of the filter calculation. The reference level offset is calculated individually for each channel the frequency response correction settings apply to (see "Apply to" on page 731).
Note the following prerequisites and restrictions concerning the automatic reference level adjustment: The reference level offset is only applied if frequency response correction is
enabled (see "State" on page 730). If you disable frequency response correction, "Adjust Ref Level" is automatically set to "Manual". The reference level offset is only applied if the center frequency is within the currently covered filter frequency range. The reference level offset is applied independently of a transducer reference level offset (see " Adjust Ref Level " on page 717).
"Auto"
Activates the automatic adjustment. The original dynamic range of the reference level is shifted by the filter calculation offset.
"Manual"
Deactivates the automatic adjustment. Adjust the reference level in the "Amplitude" settings (see " Reference Level " on page 451).
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:ADJust:RLEVel:STATe on page 1340
Apply to Determines which channels the correction settings are applied to.
Note: In MSRA mode, the settings are always applied to all active measurement channels.
"All Input Src"
The frequency response correction settings are applied to all active measurement channels with the same input source. A new filter is calculated for each measurement channel as soon as you switch to it, or when a measurement is performed (e.g. by the Sequencer).
"Channel"
The frequency response correction settings are applied to the currently selected channel only.
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SCOPe on page 1347
Load Settings Loads a stored saveset for a user-defined frequency response correction scenario. Existing settings in the dialog box are overwritten. The settings apply to the currently selected channel or all channels, depending on the Apply to setting.
Only .dfl files can be loaded. The default storage directory for correction files is C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\FResponse.
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:LOAD on page 1346
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
731
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup
Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544)
Save Settings Stores a saveset for a user-defined frequency response correction scenario. As for all instrument settings, a .dfl file is created for the correction data. Note that only the settings defined in this dialog box are stored, not the contents of the files themselves. Whether the settings for the currently selected channel only or for all channels are stored depends on the Apply to setting. The default storage directory is C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\FResponse. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:STORe on page 1355
Clear Settings Clears all current user-defined frequency response correction settings, either for the currently selected channel only or for all channels, depending on the Apply to setting. Merely files specific to the R&S FSW itself remain in the list of Touchstone files. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:PRESet on page 1346
Touchstone File Information Provides information on loaded Touchstone files and the order of their application. If an external preamplifier is active, it is also included at the bottom of the list.
ID Touchstone File Information Consecutive number which determines the order in which the correction files are applied to the measurement data. The maximum number of files per configuration is 15. An LED-like symbol indicates whether the file is active and Touchstone files or the external preamplifier in general are switched on (symbol "lights up") or not (symbol is dark). A purple symbol represents a Touchstone file.
Filename Touchstone File Information Name of a loaded Touchstone file.
Active Touchstone File Information Activates or deactivates the selected file for the current configuration. Only active files are included in filter calculation. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:STATe on page 1353
To - From Touchstone File Information Touchstone files can be defined for a varying number of input and output ports. You must define the ports from the Touchstone file whose data is to be applied. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:TO on page 1351 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:FROM on page 1350
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
732
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup
Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544)
Add Touchstone File Loads a new Touchstone file for the current configuration. The maximum number of files per configuration is 15. The new file is added below the currently selected file. To change the order of the files, use the Move File Up or Down icons. The file extension of the Touchstone file must correspond to the number of ports included in the file. For example, a file containing 4 parameters for S11, S22, S12 and S21 must have the extension .s2p. A minimum number of values is required to compensate for a group delay, see "Group delay compensation" on page 726. The default directory for Touchstone files is C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Fresponse. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:INSert on page 1349
Remove File Removes the selected Touchstone file from the current configuration. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:REMove on page 1351 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:CLEar on page 1348
Move File Up or Down Moves the selected Touchstone file one position up or down in the list of files, changing the order in which the correction data is applied. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:MOVE on page 1350
Frequency Response active Activates or deactivates the use of additional frequency response (.fres) files. The correction data in these files is applied after any correction settings in active Touchstone files. Only active files are included in filter calculation. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FSTate on page 1345
Frequency Response File Information Provides information on loaded frequency response files and the order of their application.
ID Frequency Response File Information Consecutive number which determines the order in which the correction files are applied to the measurement data. The maximum number of files per configuration is 15. An LED-like symbol indicates whether the file and frequency response in general is active (symbol "lights up") or not (symbol is dark). A green symbol represents a frequency response (.fres) file.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
733
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup
Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544)
Filename Frequency Response File Information Name of a loaded Touchstone file.
Magnitude Frequency Response File Information Activates or deactivates the use of the correction data in the selected file for magnitude results. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:MAGNitude[: STATe] on page 1342
Phase Frequency Response File Information Activates or deactivates the use of the correction data in the selected file for phase results. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:PHASe[:STATe] on page 1343
Add Freq Resp File Loads a frequency response (.fres) file to the current configuration. The maximum number of files per configuration is 15. A minimum number of values is required to compensate for a group delay, see "Group delay compensation" on page 726. The default directory for .fres files is C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Fresponse. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:INSert on page 1342
Remove Frequency Response File Removes the selected frequency response (.fres) file from the current configuration. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:REMove on page 1343 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:CLEar on page 1341
Preview The preview of the (combined) user correction files shows the correction values. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:PSTate on page 1352 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SCOVered? on page 1347
Selected File Preview The preview of the selected user correction file shows the correction values for the specified frequency range. The values for individual ports can be activated or deactivated.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
734
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544)
Figure 11-1: Preview of selected user correction file
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:FREQuency? on page 1341 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:MAGNitude? on page 1341 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:PHASe? on page 1341 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA: FREQuency<spi>? on page 1348 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA: MAGNitude<spi>? on page 1348 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA: PHASe<spi>? on page 1348
IQ Mode Preview The preview in IQ Mode indicates the frequency ranges covered by the individual correction files. The blue bar indicates the valid frequency range for which all files contain values.
An LED-like symbol indicates whether each file is active and user correction in general is switched on (symbol "lights up") or not (symbol is dark). A purple symbol represents a Touchstone file. A green symbol represents a frequency response (.fres) file.
The lower part shows the combined correction values for the valid frequency range.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
735
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544)
Figure 11-2: IQ Mode preview of user correction files
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:IQ:DATA:FREQuency? on page 1345 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:IQ:DATA:MAGNitude? on page 1345 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:IQ:DATA:PHASe? on page 1345
Spectrum Mode Preview The preview in Spectrum Mode indicates the frequency ranges covered by the individual correction files. The blue bar indicates the valid frequency range for which at least one file contains values.
An LED-like symbol indicates whether each file is active and user correction in general is switched on (symbol "lights up") or not (symbol is dark). A purple symbol represents a Touchstone file. A green symbol represents a frequency response (.fres) file.
The lower part shows the combined correction values for the valid frequency range.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
736
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Reference Frequency Settings
Figure 11-3: Spectrum Mode preview of user correction files
Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:FREQuency? on page 1354 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:MAGNitude? on page 1354 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:PHASe? on page 1354
11.6 Reference Frequency Settings
Access: [Setup] > "Reference"
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
737
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Reference Frequency Settings
Reference Frequency Input.........................................................................................738 Behavior in case of missing external reference............................................ 739 Tuning Range............................................................................................... 740 Frequency..................................................................................................... 740 Loop Bandwidth............................................................................................ 740
Reference Frequency Output......................................................................................740 Resetting the Default Values.......................................................................................740
Reference Frequency Input The R&S FSW can use the internal reference source or an external reference source as the frequency standard for all internal oscillators. A 10 MHz crystal oscillator is used as the internal reference source. In the external reference setting, all internal oscillators of the R&S FSW are synchronized to the external reference frequency.
External references are connected to one of the REF INPUT or the SYNC TRIGGER connectors on the rear panel.
Note: The optional, and more precise OCXO signal can replace the internal reference source.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
738
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Reference Frequency Settings
The default setting is the internal reference. When an external reference is used, EXT REF is displayed in the status bar.
The following reference inputs are available:
Table 11-2: Available Reference Frequency Input
Setting
Source Connector
Frequency Tuning Range
Loop Band- Description width
Internal
(OCXO)
10 MHz
-
1-100 Hz
Internal reference signal or optional OCXO
External Reference REF INPUT
10 MHz
1..50 MHz
10 MHz
+/- 6 ppm 1-100 Hz
Fixed external 10 MHZ reference frequency
Good phase noise performance
External Reference REF INPUT
1..50MHz
1..50 MHz
1..50 MHz in 1 Hz steps
+/- 0.5 ppm
0.1 Hz (fixed)
Variable external reference frequency in 1 Hz steps
Good external phase noise suppression. Small tuning range.
+/- 6 ppm 1-30 Hz
Variable external reference frequency in 1 Hz steps
Wide tuning range.
External Reference REF INPUT
100 MHz
100 MHz / 1 GHz
100 MHz +/- 6 ppm 1-300 Hz
External reference Good phase noise performance
External Reference REF INPUT
1 GHz
100 MHz / 1 GHz
1 GHz
+/- 6 ppm 1-300 Hz
External reference
Sync Trigger
SYNC TRIGGER INPUT
100 MHz +/- 6 ppm 1-300 Hz
External reference
Remote command: [SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce on page 1326
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<ext>:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency on page 1325
Behavior in case of missing external reference Reference Frequency Input If an external reference is selected but none is available, there are different ways the instrument can react.
"Show Error Flag"
The error message "External reference missing" is displayed if no valid external reference signal is available. Additionally, the flag "NO REF" is displayed to indicate that no synchronization was performed for the last measurement.
"Switch to internal reference"
The instrument automatically switches back to the internal reference if no external reference is available. Note that you must re-activate the external reference if it becomes available again at a later time.
Remote command: [SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce on page 1326 [SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce:EAUTo? on page 1327
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
739
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Reference Frequency Settings
Tuning Range Reference Frequency Input The tuning range is only available for the variable external reference frequency. It determines how far the frequency may deviate from the defined level in parts per million (10-6).
"+/- 0.5 ppm"
With this smaller deviation a very narrow fixed loop bandwidth of 0.1 Hz is realized. With this setting the instrument can synchronize to an external reference signal with a very precise frequency. Due to the very narrow loop bandwidth, unwanted noise or spurious components on the external reference input signal are strongly attenuated. Furthermore, the loop requires about 30 seconds to reach a locked state. During this locking process, "NO REF" is displayed in the status bar.
"+/- 6 ppm"
The larger deviation allows the instrument to synchronize to less precise external reference input signals.
Remote command: [SENSe:]ROSCillator:TRANge on page 1327
Frequency Reference Frequency Input Defines the external reference frequency to be used (for variable connectors only).
Loop Bandwidth Reference Frequency Input Defines the speed of internal synchronization with the reference frequency. The setting requires a compromise between performance and increasing phase noise.
For a variable external reference frequency with a narrow tuning range (+/- 0.5 ppm), the loop bandwidth is fixed to 0.1 Hz and cannot be changed.
Remote command: [SENSe:]ROSCillator:LBWidth on page 1325
Reference Frequency Output A reference frequency can be provided by the R&S FSW to other devices that are connected to this instrument. If activated, the reference signal is output to the corresponding connector.
"Output 100 MHz" Provides a 100 MHz reference signal to the REF OUTPUT 100 MHz connector.
"Output 640 MHz" Provides a 640 MHz reference signal to the REF OUTPUT 640 MHz connector.
"Output Sync Trigger" Provides a 100 MHz reference signal to the SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT connector.
Remote command: [SENSe:]ROSCillator:O640 on page 1325 [SENSe:]ROSCillator:OSYNc on page 1326
Resetting the Default Values The values for the "Tuning Range", "Frequency" and "Loop Bandwidth" are stored for each source of "Reference Frequency Input".
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
740
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup System Configuration Settings
When you switch the input source, the previously defined settings are restored. You can restore the default values for all input sources using the "Preset Channel" function.
11.7 System Configuration Settings
Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" Hardware Information............................................................................................741 Information on Versions and Options.................................................................... 742 System Messages.................................................................................................743 Firmware Updates.................................................................................................744 General Configuration Settings............................................................................. 746 Signal Generator Settings..................................................................................... 748
11.7.1 Hardware Information
Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "Hardware Info" An overview of the installed hardware in your R&S FSW is provided. Every listed component is described by its serial number, order number, model information, hardware code, and hardware revision. This information can be useful when problems occur with the instrument and you require support from Rohde & Schwarz.
Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:HWINfo? on page 1378
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
741
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup System Configuration Settings
11.7.2 Information on Versions and Options
Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "Versions + Options"
Information on the firmware version and options installed on your instrument is provided. The unique Rohde & Schwarz device ID is also indicated here, as it is required for license and option administration.
You can also install new firmware options in this dialog box.
The table also contains: The open source acknowledgements (PDF file) for the firmware and other software
packages used by the R&S FSW
Installing options in secure user mode Be sure to install any new options before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37. For restricted users in secure user mode, this function is not available!
Expired option licenses If an option is about to expire, a message box is displayed to inform you. You can then use the "Install Option" function to enter a new license key. If an option has already expired, a message box appears for you to confirm. In this case, all instrument functions are unavailable (including remote control) until the R&S FSW is rebooted. You must then use the "Install Option" function to enter the new license key.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
742
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup System Configuration Settings
Remote commands:
SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt on page 1381
DIAGnostic:SERVice:BIOSinfo? on page 1377
DIAGnostic:SERVice:VERSinfo? on page 1378
Open Source Acknowledgment: Open Displays a PDF file containing information on open source code used by the R&S FSW firmware.
Install Option Opens an edit dialog box to enter the license key for the option that you want to install. Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to install options.
Install Option by XML Opens a file selection dialog box to install an additional option to the R&S FSW using an XML file. Enter or browse for the name of an XML file that contains the option key and select "Select" . Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to install options.
Trial option State The trial option allows you to use further optional applications that require a separate license from Rohde & Schwarz. It is pre-installed at the factory on request. If enabled, you can use additional applications for a limited period of time (90 days from factory installation). They are accessible from the common "Mode" dialog box (see Chapter 5.3, "Selecting the Operating Mode and Applications", on page 117). If the trial option has already expired, a message box appears for you to confirm. In this case, all instrument functions are unavailable (including remote control) until the R&S FSW is rebooted. To continue to use the optional applications, you must acquire a permanent license. Then use the "Install Option" function to enter the new license key. Remote command: Enable/disable trial option: SYSTem:OPTion:TRIal[:STATe] on page 1382 Determine available trial applications: SYSTem:OPTion:TRIal:LIST? on page 1381
11.7.3 System Messages
Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "System Messages" The system messages generated by the R&S FSW are displayed.
The messages are displayed in the order of their occurrence; the most recent messages are placed at the top of the list. Messages that have occurred since you last visited the system messages tab are marked with an asterisk '*'.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
743
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup System Configuration Settings
If the number of error messages exceeds the capacity of the error buffer, "Message Buffer Overflow" is displayed. To clear the message buffer use the "Clear All Messages" button.
The following information is available:
No Message Component
Date/Time
device-specific error code brief description of the message hardware messages: name of the affected module software messages: name of the affected software date and time of the occurrence of the message
Remote command: SYSTem:ERRor:LIST? on page 1380
11.7.4 Firmware Updates
Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "Firmware Update"
During instrument start, the installed hardware is checked against the current firmware version to ensure the hardware is supported. If not, an error message is displayed ( "Wrong Firmware Version" ) and you are asked to update the firmware. Until the firmware version is updated, self-alignment fails. To see which components are not supported, see the System Messages.
The firmware on your R&S FSW may also need to be updated in order to enable additional new features or if reasons for improvement come up. Ask your sales representa-
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
744
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup System Configuration Settings
tive or check the Rohde&Schwarz website for availability of firmware updates. A firmware update package includes at least a setup file and release notes.
Before updating the firmware on your instrument, read the release notes delivered with the firmware version. Administrator rights are no longer required to perform a firmware update.
Installing options in secure user mode Be sure to perform any firmware updates before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37. For restricted users in secure user mode, this function is not available!
Enter the name or browse for the firmware installation file and press the "Install" button.
Remote command:
SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate on page 1381
How to Update the Instrument Firmware
1. Download the update package from the Rohde&Schwarz website and store it on a memory stick, on the instrument, or on a server network drive that can be accessed by the instrument.
2. NOTICE! Stop measurement. The firmware update must not be performed during a running measurement. If a measurement is running, stop it by pressing the highlighted [Run Cont] or [Run Single] key.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
745
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup System Configuration Settings
3. Select the [Setup] key.
4. Select the "System Config" softkey.
5. Select the "Firmware Update" tab.
6. In the file selection dialog box select the FSWSetup*.exe file. "File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the R&S FSW firmware, you can also use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.
7. Select "Install" to start the update.
8. After the firmware update, the R&S FSW reboots automatically.
9. Depending on the previous firmware version, a reconfiguration of the hardware might be required during the first startup of the firmware. The reconfiguration starts automatically, and a message box informs you about the process. When the reconfiguration has finished, the instrument again reboots automatically. Note: Do not switch off the instrument during the reconfiguration process!
Now the firmware update is complete. It is recommended that you perform a self-alignment after the update (see Chapter 11.1.4, "How to Align the Instrument", on page 692).
11.7.5 General Configuration Settings
Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "Config" General system settings, for example concerning the initial behaviour of the R&S FSW after booting, can also be configured.
Preset Mode ...............................................................................................................746 Out-of-range value behavior ...................................................................................... 747 SecureUser Mode ...................................................................................................... 747
Changing the password................................................................................ 747 Number block behavior............................................................................................... 748
Preset Mode The presettings can be defined in the "Config" tab of the "System Configuration" dialog box.
"SAN"
Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
746
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup System Configuration Settings
"MSRA"
Multi-Standard Radio Analysis mode
"MSRT"
Multi-Standard Real-Time mode
Remote command: SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible on page 1382
Out-of-range value behavior By default, if you enter a value that is outside the valid range in an input field for a setting, a warning is displayed and the value is not accepted. Alternatively, entries below the minimum value can automatically be set to the minimum possible entry, and entries above the maximum value set to the maximum possible entry. This behavior avoids errors and facilitates setting correct values.
SecureUser Mode If activated, the R&S FSW requires a reboot and then automatically logs in using the "SecureUser" account.
Data that the R&S FSW normally stores on the solid-state drive is redirected to volatile memory instead. Data that is stored in volatile memory can be accessed by the user during the current instrument session; however, when the instrument's power is removed, all data in volatile memory is erased.
The Secure User Mode can only be activated or deactivated by a user with administrator rights.
Note: Storing instrument settings permanently. Before you activate secure user mode, store any instrument settings that are required beyond the current session, such as predefined instrument settings, transducer files, or self-alignment data.
For details on the secure user mode see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37.
Remote command: SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe] on page 1382 Note: Initially after installation of the R&S FSW-K33 option, secure user mode must be enabled manually once before remote control is possible.
Changing the password SecureUser Mode When the secure user mode is activated the first time after installation, you are prompted to change the passwords for all user accounts in order to improve system security.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
747
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup System Configuration Settings
To save the new password, select "Save" . The password dialog for the next user is displayed, until you have been prompted to change the password all user accounts.
If you cancel the dialog without changing the password, the password dialog for the next user is displayed, until you have been prompted to change the password all user accounts. Although it is possible to continue in secure user mode without changing the passwords (and you will not be prompted to do so again), it is strongly recommended that you do define a more secure password for all users.
By default, the password characters are not displayed to ensure confidentiality during input. To display the characters, select "Show password" .
To display the onscreen keyboard, select "Keyboard" .
Number block behavior Defines the default behavior of the keypad on the front panel of the R&S FSW for text input. Depending on the type of values you most frequently enter using the keypad, a different default is useful.
"123"
Numeric values are entered when you press a key on the keypad. To enter alphanumeric values, use an external or the on-screen keyboard, or switch this setting.
"ABC"
(Default) Every key on the keypad represents several characters and one number. If you press the key multiple times in quick succession, you toggle through the symbols assigned to the key. For the assignment, refer to Table 4-10.
11.7.6 Signal Generator Settings
Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "Signal Generator" These settings configure a connected signal generator that can then be used for various tasks, for example for external generator control or NPR measurements.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
748
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup System Configuration Settings
IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator................................................... 749 123/ABC........................................................................................................749 Password...................................................................................................... 749
Test Connection.......................................................................................................... 749 Connect/Disconnect.................................................................................................... 750 View Signal Generator................................................................................................ 750
IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator The IP address or computer name of the signal generator connected to the R&S FSW via LAN.
For tips on how to determine the default computer name, see Chapter 4.3.2.21, "Device ID", on page 58, or the signal generator's user documentation.
By default, the IP address is expected. To enter the computer name, toggle the "123"/"ABC" button to "ABC".
Note: While a connection to a signal generator is established, you cannot change the connection information. The IP address / computer name is maintained after a [PRESET], and is transferred between applications. However, when you switch applications, the control is disabled in the other applications. Only one application can control a generator at any time. Select "Test Connection" on page 749 to establish a temporary connection from the R&S FSW to the specified signal generator.
If a connection to a signal generator is already configured, the connection data is provided for information only.
Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:IPConnection:ADDRess on page 1384
123/ABC IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator By default, the TCPIP address is expected. To enter the computer name, toggle the "123"/"ABC" button to "ABC".
Password IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator Enter the password required to operate the connected signal generator.
Test Connection The R&S FSW attempts to establish a connection to the signal generator.
If an instrument is connected, the following information is displayed: Device type Name and serial number
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
749
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup
Service Functions
Connection state Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection:CSTate? on page 1383 CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection[:STATe] on page 1384
Connect/Disconnect The R&S FSW attempts to establish a connection to the signal generator, or disconnects it. If an instrument is connected, the following information is displayed: Device type Name and serial number Connection state Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection[:STATe] on page 1384 CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection:CSTate? on page 1383
View Signal Generator Access: Toolbar Displays the screen of a connected signal generator. If no generator is connected yet, select "Configure Generator" to display the Signal Generator connection dialog. The signal generator can be operated directly from the R&S FSW display.
11.8 Service Functions
Access: [Setup] > "Service" When unexpected problems arise with the R&S FSW some service functions may help you solve them. For more helpful information for support, see also Chapter 14.6, "Collecting Information for Support", on page 1473 R&S Support Information...................................................................................... 750 Self-test Settings and Results............................................................................... 752 Calibration Signal Display..................................................................................... 753 Service Functions..................................................................................................755 Hardware Diagnostics........................................................................................... 757
11.8.1 R&S Support Information
Access: [Setup] > "Service" > "R&S Support" In case of errors you can store useful information for troubleshooting and send it to your Rohde & Schwarz support center.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
750
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Service Functions
Create R&S Support Information ............................................................................... 751 Save Device Footprint ................................................................................................751 Last Service Date........................................................................................................752 Last Calibration Date...................................................................................................752 Next Calibration Due................................................................................................... 752
Create R&S Support Information Creates a *.zip file with important support information. The *.zip file contains the system configuration information ( "Device Footprint" ), the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display.
This data is stored to the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER directory on the instrument.
The file name consists of the unique device ID and the current date and time of the file creation.
If you contact the Rohde & Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem, send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster.
Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:SINFo? on page 1385
Save Device Footprint Creates an *.xml file with information on installed hardware, software, image and FPGA versions. The *.xml file is stored under C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\devicedata\ xml\ on the instrument. It is also included in the service ZIP file (see " Create R&S Support Information " on page 751).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
751
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Service Functions
Remote command: SYSTem:DFPRint on page 1379
Last Service Date Opens a calendar to define the date that the R&S FSW was inspected by Rohde & Schwarz service. The service date is updated by the service technicians. For new instruments, the last service date (= date of production) is entered during production.
If the field contains no date, we recommend that you enter the date of last service according to the service certificates you received after the R&S FSW has been serviced.
If the R&S FSW has not been serviced yet, leave the field empty.
Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:DATE on page 1376
Last Calibration Date Opens a calendar to define the date that the R&S FSW was calibrated. For new instruments, we recommend to enter the factory calibration date specified on the calibration certificate.
Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:DATE on page 1376
Next Calibration Due Opens a calendar to define the date that the R&S FSW needs its next calibration. The recommended calibration interval is specified in a read only field next to this input field.
This date must always be configured by the customer due to ISO17025.
Remote command: Set date: DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:DUE:DATE on page 1376 Recommended interval: DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:INTerval? on page 1376
11.8.2 Self-test Settings and Results
Access: [Setup] > "Service" > "Selftest" If the R&S FSW fails you can perform a self-test of the instrument to identify any defective modules.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
752
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Service Functions
Once the self-test is started, all modules are checked consecutively and the test result is displayed. You can abort a running test. In case of failure a short description of the failed test, the defective module, the associated value range and the corresponding test results are indicated.
A running Sequencer process is aborted when you start a self-test. If you start a self-test remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the test is still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the test is completed. In this case, the self-test cannot be aborted.
Remote command: *TST? on page 872 DIAGnostic:SERVice:STESt:RESult? on page 1333
11.8.3 Calibration Signal Display
Access: [Setup] > "Service" > "Calibration Signal" Alternatively to the RF input signal from the front panel connector you can use the instrument's calibration signal as the input signal, for example to perform service functions on.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
753
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Service Functions
NONE .........................................................................................................................754 Calibration Frequency RF .......................................................................................... 754
Spectrum ......................................................................................................754 Frequency .................................................................................................... 755 Calibration Frequency MW .........................................................................................755 Calibration Analog Baseband .....................................................................................755 Calibration Signal Type ................................................................................ 755
NONE Uses the current RF signal at the input, i.e. no calibration signal (default).
Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 1332
Calibration Frequency RF Uses the internal calibration signal as the RF input signal.
Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 1332 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:CFRequency on page 1330
Spectrum Calibration Frequency RF Defines whether a broadband or narrowband calibration signal is sent to the RF input.
"Narrowband" Used to calibrate the absolute level of the frontend at 64 MHz.
"Broadband" Used to calibrate the IF filter.
Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:RF[:SPECtrum] on page 1331
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
754
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Service Functions
Frequency Calibration Frequency RF Defines the frequency of the internal broadband calibration signal to be used for IF filter calibration (max. 64 MHz).
For narrowband signals, 64 MHz is sent.
Calibration Frequency MW Uses the microwave calibration signal as the RF input (for frequencies higher than 8 GHz). This function is used to calibrate the YIG-filter on the microwave converter. The microwave calibration signal is pulsed.
You can define whether the distance between input pulses is small or wide.
Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 1332 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:MC[:DISTance] on page 1330 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:MC:CFRequency on page 1330
Calibration Analog Baseband Uses an internal calibration signal as input to the optional Analog Baseband interface. This signal is only available if the R&S FSW-B71 option is installed.
For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B71) see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual.
Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 1332
Calibration Signal Type Calibration Analog Baseband Defines the type of calibration signal to be used for Analog Baseband.
"AC"
1.5625 MHz square wave AC signal
"DC"
DC signal
"DC zero"
no signal
Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:AIQ[:TYPE] on page 1332
11.8.4 Service Functions
Access: [Setup] > "Service" > "Service Function"
Using service functions
The service functions are not necessary for normal measurement operation. Incorrect use can affect correct operation and/or data integrity of the R&S FSW.
Therefore, only user accounts with administrator rights can use service functions and many of the functions can only be used after entering a password. These functions are described in the instrument service manual.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
755
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Service Functions
Service Function ........................................................................................................ 756 Send ...........................................................................................................................756 Numeric Mode ............................................................................................................756 Clear History .............................................................................................................. 756 Password ................................................................................................................... 757 Clear Results ..............................................................................................................757 Save Results .............................................................................................................. 757 Result List .................................................................................................................. 757
Service Function Selects the service function by its numeric code or textual name.
The selection list includes all functions previously selected (since the last "Clear History" action).
Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction on page 1384
Send Starts the selected service function.
Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction on page 1384
Numeric Mode If activated, the service function is selected by its numeric code. Otherwise, the function is selected by its textual name.
Clear History Deletes the list of previously selected service functions.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
756
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Service Functions
Password Most service functions require a special password as they may disrupt normal operation of the R&S FSW. There are different levels of service functions, depending on how restrictive their use is handled. Each service level has a different password.
"Reset Password" clears any previously entered password and returns to the most restrictive service level.
Remote command: SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] on page 1386 SYSTem:PASSword:RESet on page 1386
Clear Results Clears the result display for all previously performed service functions.
Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:DELete on page 1385
Save Results Opens a file selection dialog box to save the results of all previously performed service functions to a file.
Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:SAVE on page 1385
Result List The Results List indicates the status and results of the executed service functions.
11.8.5 Hardware Diagnostics
In case problems occur with the instrument hardware, some diagnostic tools provide information that may support troubleshooting.
The hardware diagnostics tools are available in the "Hardware Diagnostics" tab of the "Service" dialog box.
Relays Cycle Counter ................................................................................................ 758
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
757
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration
Relays Cycle Counter The hardware relays built into the R&S FSW may fail after a large number of switching cycles (see data sheet). The counter indicates how many switching cycles the individual relays have performed since they were installed. Remote command: DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt? on page 1375
11.9 Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration
Access: [SETUP] > "Parameter Coupling"
Each of the applications of the R&S FSW is usually treated as an independent entity regarding their configuration: changing a setting in one measurement channel does not automatically change the corresponding setting in another channel.
For example, changing the frequency in the spectrum application does not, by default, change the frequency in the vector signal analysis (VSA) application.
However, sharing settings can be convenient for certain measurement tasks. The R&S FSW provides a tool to couple (or synchronize) selected parameters across applications - the coupling manager.
The coupling managers allows you not only to couple parameters, but also markers and lines accross applications.
General Parameter Coupling................................................................................ 758 User-Defined Parameter Coupling........................................................................ 761 Generator Coupling...............................................................................................765 How to Synchronize Parameters...........................................................................767 Example for a User-Defined Parameter Coupling.................................................769
11.9.1 General Parameter Coupling
Access: [SETUP] > "Parameter Coupling" > "General"
The "General" tab of the coupling manager contains several parameters that you can couple across all (active) measurement channels - if the channel supports the corresponding parameter.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
758
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration
When you couple a parameter across all active measurement channels, a change in the currently selected application is passed on to all other active measurement channels.
In MSRA mode, the data is captured by the MSRA primary only. Thus, parameter coupling is not available for data acquisition parameters. However, it can be useful to couple time or frequency markers between applications. Thus, you can easily determine effects that occur at the same time or frequency in different measurement views. Note that the accuracy of time marker couplings is �1 sample.
Synchronizing parameters across all measurement channels....................................759 Selecting all or no coupling mechanisms.................................................................... 761 Restoring the default configuration............................................................................. 761
Synchronizing parameters across all measurement channels To synchronize a specific parameter, turn on the corresponding function. Note that you cannot synchronize all parameters at the same time, because some parameters are interdependent. For example, you cannot synchronize the resolution and video bandwidth simultaneously, because the video bandwidth depends on the resolution bandwidth and vice versa. "Center Frequency"
Synchronizes the center frequency Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:CENTer on page 1389
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
759
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration
"Start / Stop Frequency" Synchronizes the start and stop frequencies for measurements in the frequency domain Note: The start and stop frequencies can automatically change when you change another frequency parameter (such as center frequency or span).
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:SPAN on page 1392
"Reference Level"
Synchronizes the reference level
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:RLEVel on page 1392
"Attenuation" Synchronizes the attenuation
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:ATTen on page 1388
"Preamplifier" Synchronizes the gain of the optional preamplifier
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:GAIN on page 1390
"Amplitude Unit" Synchronizes the unit of the level axis
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:AUNit on page 1388
"Video Bandwidth" Synchronizes the video bandwidth Note: You cannot synchronize the video bandwidth and the resolution bandwidth is not possible.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:VBW on page 1393
"Resolution Bandwidth" Synchronizes the measurement bandwidth Note: You cannot synchronize the video bandwidth and the resolution bandwidth simultaneously.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:BANDwidth on page 1389
"Limit Lines"
Activates the limit line over all channels Note: Limit lines are only synchronized over channels if the limit line is compatible to the channel configuration (especially units of the xand y-axis).
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:LIMit on page 1390
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
760
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration
"AC DC Coupling" Synchronizes the Input Coupling
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:ACDC on page 1388
"Impedance"
Synchronizes the impedance for RF input
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:IMPedance on page 1390
"Analog Baseband Impedance" Synchronizes the impedance for analog baseband input
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:ABIMpedance on page 1387
Selecting all or no coupling mechanisms Select all items available in the general coupling manager using the "Enable All Items" button.
Note that you cannot actually select all items, because some of them are mutually exclusive.
Deselect all items available in the coupling manager using the "Disable All Items" button.
Remote command: not supported
Restoring the default configuration You can restore the default parameter coupling configuration any time with the "Default Config" button.
Remote command: not supported
11.9.2 User-Defined Parameter Coupling
Access: [SETUP] > "Parameter Coupling" > "User Coupling"
User couplings allow you to synchronize user-defined parameters, as well as markers and lines, between measurement channels.
Compared to the predefined couplings, user couplings do not necessarily have to synchronize all active measurement channels. Instead you can define specific channels that are synchronized with each other, in any combination, while other channels remain independent.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
761
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration
Example: You currently run two instances of the Spectrum application, two instances of the VSA application, and one instance of the AM/FM/PM Analog Demod application. You can synchronize only the first instance of the Spectrum application with the first instance of the VSA application, while the other three channels remain independent. Alternatively, you can synchronize all instances of the VSA application, while the Spectrum and AM/FM/PM Analog Demod applications remain independent.
Any existing user-defined couplings are displayed in the dialog box.
Index........................................................................................................................... 762 Edit coupling definition................................................................................................ 762 Parameter 1 / Parameter 2..........................................................................................763 State............................................................................................................................ 763 Direction...................................................................................................................... 763 Delete coupling definition............................................................................................ 763 Info.............................................................................................................................. 763 Delete All.....................................................................................................................763 Add New User Coupling..............................................................................................763
Category....................................................................................................... 764 Channel 1 / Channel 2.................................................................................. 764 Specifics for Window.....................................................................................764 Coupling Element 1 / Coupling Element 2.................................................... 764 Couple Selected Parameters........................................................................ 765
Index Index of the user-defined parameter coupling, used to identify the definition in remote operation.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST? on page 1399
Edit coupling definition Opens a dialog box to edit the selected coupling. See "Add New User Coupling" on page 763.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc> on page 1393
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
762
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration
Parameter 1 / Parameter 2 The coupled parameters, markers, or lines.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NEW? on page 1397
State Enables or disables the coupling.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:STATe on page 1400
Direction Determines which parameter controls the other.
"<-"
Parameter 2 controls parameter 1. If parameter 2 is changed, param-
eter 1 is adapted. If parameter 1 is changed, parameter 2 remains
unchanged.
Remote command: INST:COUP:USER:REL RTOL
"->"
Parameter 1 controls parameter 2. If parameter 1 is changed, param-
eter 2 is adapted. If parameter 2 is changed, parameter 1 remains
unchanged.
Remote command: INST:COUP:USER:REL LTOR
"<->"
Both parameters are equal. If one parameter is changed, the other parameter is adapted and vice versa.
Remote command: INST:COUP:USER:REL BID
Delete coupling definition Deletes the selected coupling definition permanently.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:REMove on page 1400
Info Shows information for the selected coupling, for example, restrictions regarding the coupling.
Note that usually, no information is displayed.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:INFO on page 1396
Delete All Deletes all current coupling definitions. Parameters are no longer coupled.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:REMove on page 1400
Add New User Coupling Opens a dialog box to create a new user-defined coupling definition.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
763
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NEW? on page 1397
Category Add New User Coupling Selects the category of parameters to be displayed in the Coupling Element 1 / Coupling Element 2 selection list.
Channel 1 / Channel 2 Add New User Coupling Selects the channels for which the parameters are coupled. Only active channels are available for selection. If no other active measurement channels have the selected parameter, "Channel 2" is not available.
The following selections are possible: Individual channels All channels of the same type All channels
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:CHANnel:LIST? on page 1395
Specifics for Window Add New User Coupling Selects the windows of the selected channel for which the parameters are coupled. This setting is only available for AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channels. Individual windows can only be coupled for frequency markers.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:WINDow:LIST? on page 1401
Coupling Element 1 / Coupling Element 2 Add New User Coupling Defines the parameter or marker to be coupled. All available elements in the selected applications are displayed. If no other active measurement channels have the selected "Coupling Element 1", "Coupling Element 2" is not available.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
764
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:ELEMent:LIST? on page 1395
Couple Selected Parameters Add New User Coupling Closes the dialog box and adds the new user-defined coupling definition to the list.
11.9.3 Generator Coupling
You cannot only couple parameters between R&S FSW applications, but also between the R&S FSW and a connected signal generator. Coupling parameters is especially useful when you use the SCPI recorder and need to include generator commands (see "Combined Recording of Spectrum Analyzer and R&S Signal Generator" on page 820).
IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator................................................... 766 123/ABC........................................................................................................766 Password...................................................................................................... 766
Connect/Disconnect.................................................................................................... 766 Coupling State.............................................................................................................766 Center Frequency....................................................................................................... 767 Generator Frequency Offset........................................................................................767 Reference level........................................................................................................... 767 Generator Reference Level Offset.............................................................................. 767
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
765
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup
Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration
IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator The IP address or computer name of the signal generator connected to the R&S FSW via LAN.
For tips on how to determine the default computer name, see Chapter 4.3.2.21, "Device ID", on page 58, or the signal generator's user documentation.
By default, the IP address is expected. To enter the computer name, toggle the "123"/"ABC" button to "ABC".
Note: While a connection to a signal generator is established, you cannot change the connection information. The IP address / computer name is maintained after a [PRESET], and is transferred between applications. However, when you switch applications, the control is disabled in the other applications. Only one application can control a generator at any time. Select "Test Connection" on page 749 to establish a temporary connection from the R&S FSW to the specified signal generator.
If a connection to a signal generator is already configured, the connection data is provided for information only.
Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:IPConnection:ADDRess on page 1384
123/ABC IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator By default, the TCPIP address is expected. To enter the computer name, toggle the "123"/"ABC" button to "ABC".
Password IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator Enter the password required to operate the connected signal generator.
Connect/Disconnect The R&S FSW attempts to establish a connection to the signal generator, or disconnects it.
If an instrument is connected, the following information is displayed: Device type Name and serial number Connection state Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection[:STATe] on page 1384 CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection:CSTate? on page 1383
Coupling State Enables or disables coupling between the R&S FSW and a connected signal generator.
Note that only one channel can control a generator at any time. If a measurement channel already has control of the connected generator and you enable parameter coupling, the control is disabled in the other channel.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:STATe on page 1403
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
766
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration
Center Frequency Couples the center frequency of the connected signal generator to the R&S FSW. This setting requires the Coupling State to be enabled. Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:CENTer[:STATe] on page 1402
Generator Frequency Offset Defines a fixed offset to the center frequency of the R&S FSW for the coupled signal generator. This setting requires the Coupling State to be enabled. Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:CENTer:OFFSet on page 1402
Reference level Couples the reference level of the connected signal generator to the R&S FSW. This setting requires the Coupling State to be enabled. Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:RLEVel[:STATe] on page 1403
Generator Reference Level Offset Defines a fixed offset to the reference level of the R&S FSW for the coupled signal generator. This setting requires the Coupling State to be enabled. Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:RLEVel:OFFSet on page 1402
11.9.4 How to Synchronize Parameters
Access: [SETUP] > "Parameter Coupling"
User-defined couplings allow you to couple parameters other than those available in the "General" tab of the coupling manager. Thus, you can create highly customized couplings between measurement channels.
Compared to the predefined couplings, user couplings do not necessarily have to synchronize all active measurement channels. Instead you can define specific channels that are synchronized with each other, in any combination, while other channels remain independent.
How to use predefined parameter couplings
1. Select the [SETUP] key.
2. Select "Parameter Coupling".
3. In the "General" tab, set the parameter you want to synchronize over all measurement channels to "On".
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
767
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration
4. Close the dialog box.
How to create user-defined parameter couplings
1. Select the [SETUP] key.
2. Select "Parameter Coupling".
3. Select the "User Coupling" tab.
4. Select "Add New User Coupling".
5. From the "Channel 1" list, select the channels or type of channel to couple.
6. From the "Coupling Element 1" list, select the parameter or marker to couple for the selected measurement channels. To shorten the list and restrict it to a certain type of parameters, select a "Category" first.
7. For AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channels and frequency markers only, select the individual windows (in the frequency domain) to couple.
8. To couple specific channels rather than all channels of a type: a) Select the second channel for coupling from the "Channel 2" list b) Select the parameter to which the first parameter is coupled from the "Coupling Element 2" list. c) For AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channels and frequency markers only, select the individual windows (in the frequency domain) from the second AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channel to couple.
9. Select "Couple Selected Parameters". The "Add New User Coupling" dialog box is closed, and the new user-defined coupling is added to the list in the "Parameter Coupling" dialog box.
10. If specific channels are coupled, select the "Direction" to define which channel controls the other, that is: in which channel the parameter is adapted if the other is changed.
11. Close the dialog box.
From now on, if you change a coupled parameter in one channel, the parameter in the coupled channel or channels is set to the same value.
How to edit user-defined parameter couplings
1. Select the [SETUP] key.
2. Select "Parameter Coupling".
3. Select the "User Coupling" tab.
4. Select the "Edit" icon for the parameter coupling you want to edit.
5. Continue as described in How to create user-defined parameter couplings, step 5.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
768
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration
How to deactivate user-defined parameter couplings 1. Select the [SETUP] key. 2. Select "Parameter Coupling". 3. Select the "User Coupling" tab. 4. To deactivate the coupling temporarily, without deleting the coupling definition
entirely, set the "State" of the coupling to "Off". To delete the coupling permanently, select the "Delete" icon for the parameter coupling you want to remove. 5. Close the dialog box.
11.9.5 Example for a User-Defined Parameter Coupling
Currently two Spectrum application channels are active, one VSA channel, and two AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channels.
Synchronizing all Spectrum channels The following example demonstrates how to synchronize the center frequency in all Spectrum application channels, while the VSA and AM/FM/PM Analog Demod applications remain independent. 1. Select the [SETUP] key. 2. Select "Parameter Coupling". 3. Select the "User Coupling" tab. 4. Select "Add New User Coupling". 5. From the "Channel 1" list, select "All Spectrum". 6. From the "Coupling Element 1" list, select "Center Frequency". 7. Select "Couple Selected Parameters". 8. Close the "Parameter Coupling" dialog box. 9. In the first Spectrum channel, change the "Center Frequency" to 1 GHz. 10. Switch to the second Spectrum channel.
The center frequency in the second Spectrum channel is also set to 1 GHz.
Synchronizing specific channels The following example demonstrates how to synchronize the attenuation only for the first Spectrum channel and the first AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channel, while the other three channels remain independent. 1. Select "Add New User Coupling".
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
769
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration
2. From the "Channel 1" list, select "Spectrum 1".
3. From the "Coupling Element 1" list, select "Attenuation".
4. From the "Channel 2" list, select "AnaDemod 1".
5. From the "Coupling Element 2" list, select "Attenuation".
6. Select "Couple Selected Parameters".
7. Close the "Parameter Coupling" dialog box.
8. In the first Spectrum channel, change the "Attenuation" to 15 dB.
9. Switch to the first AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channel. The attenuation in the second AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channel is also set to 15 dB.
Synchronizing markers in AM/FM/PM Analog Demod windows Now you have two AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channels. AnaDemod1 has an FM Spectrum and an FM Time Domain window. AnaDemod2 has an RF Spectrum and an RF Time Domain window. Only when the frequency marker in the FM Spectrum window is moved, the marker in the RF Spectrum window is to move to the same position. 1. Select "Add New User Coupling".
2. From the "Channel 1" list, select "AnaDemod 1".
3. From the "Coupling Element 1" list, select "Frequency Marker 1".
4. From the "Specifics for Window" list, select window "1" (which is the FM Spectrum window).
5. From the "Channel 2" list, select "AnaDemod 2".
6. From the "Coupling Element 2" list, select "Frequency Marker 1".
7. From the "Specifics for Window" list, select window "1" (which is the RF Spectrum window).
8. Select "Couple Selected Parameters".
9. In the "Parameter Coupling" dialog box, for the coupling definition for the frequency markers in the AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channels, select the "Direction": "->"
10. Close the "Parameter Coupling" dialog box.
11. In the first AnaDemod channel, set the frequency marker in the FM Spectrum to 900 MHz. In the second AnaDemod channel, the frequency marker in the RF Spectrum is also at 900 MHz.
12. In the second AnaDemod channel, set the frequency marker in the RF Spectrum to 1100 MHz.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
770
R&S�FSW
General Instrument Setup Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration
In the first AnaDemod channel, the frequency marker in the FM Spectrum is still at 900 MHz.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
771
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
12 Network and Remote Operation
In addition to working with the R&S FSW interactively, located directly at the instrument, it is also possible to operate and control it from a remote PC. Various methods for remote control are supported:
Connecting the instrument to a (LAN) network Using the web browser interface in a LAN network Using the Windows Remote Desktop application in a LAN network Connecting a PC via the GPIB interface
How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in Chapter 12.6, "How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control", on page 845.
Remote Control Basics......................................................................................... 772 GPIB Languages................................................................................................... 811 The IECWIN Tool.................................................................................................. 813 Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts............................................... 814 Network and Remote Control Settings..................................................................825 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control.....................................................845
12.1 Remote Control Basics
Basic information on operating an instrument via remote control is provided here. This information applies to all applications and operating modes on the R&S FSW.
For additional information on remote control of spectrum analyzers see the following application notes available from the Rohde & Schwarz website: 1EF62: Hints and Tricks for Remote Control of Spectrum and Network Analyzers 1MA171: How to use Rohde & Schwarz Instruments in MATLAB 1MA208: Fast Remote Instrument Control with HiSLIP
Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols............................................................. 772 SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)...............................781 VISA Libraries....................................................................................................... 781 Messages..............................................................................................................782 SCPI Command Structure.....................................................................................783 Command Sequence and Synchronization...........................................................791 Status Reporting System...................................................................................... 793 General Programming Recommendations............................................................810
12.1.1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
The instrument supports different interfaces and protocols for remote control. The following table gives an overview.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
772
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Table 12-1: Remote control interfaces and protocols Interface Protocols, VISA*) address string
Remarks
Local Area
Network
(LAN)
HiSLIP High-Speed LAN Instrument Protocol (IVI-6.1) TCPIP::host address::hislip0[::INSTR] VXI-11 TCPIP::host address::inst0[::INSTR] Library: VISA socket communication (Raw Ethernet, simple Telnet) TCPIP::host address[::LAN device name]::<port>:: SOCKET Library: VISA or socket controller
A LAN connector is located on the rear panel of the instrument.
The interface is based on TCP/IP and supports various protocols.
For a description of the protocols refer to:
VXI-11 Protocol
HiSLIP Protocol
Socket Communication
GPIB (IEC/ IEEE Bus Interface)
VISA*) address string: GPIB::primary address[::INSTR] (no secondary address)
A GPIB bus interface according to the IEC 625.1/IEEE 488.1 standard is located on the rear panel of the instrument.
For a description of the interface refer to 12.1.1.2 GPIB Interface (IEC 625/ IEEE 418 Bus Interface).
USB
VISA*) address string: USB::<vendor ID>::<product_ID>::<serial_number>[::INSTR]
USB connectors are located on the front and rear panel of the instrument.
For a description of the interface refer to 12.1.1.3 USB Interface.
*) VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments. A VISA installation on the controller is a prerequisite for remote control using the indicated interfaces.
(See also Chapter 12.1.3, "VISA Libraries", on page 781).
Within this interface description, the term GPIB is used as a synonym for the IEC/IEEE bus interface.
12.1.1.1 LAN Interface
To be integrated in a LAN, the instrument is equipped with a LAN interface, consisting of a connector, a network interface card and protocols. The network card can be operated with the following interfaces: 10 Mbit/s Ethernet IEEE 802.3 100 Mbit/s Ethernet IEEE 802.3u 1Gbit/s Ethernet IEEE 802.3ab
For remote control via a network, the PC and the instrument must be connected via the LAN interface to a common network with TCP/IP network protocol. They are connected using a commercial RJ45 cable (shielded or unshielded twisted pair category 5). The TCP/IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured on the instrument. Software for instrument control and the VISA program library must be installed on the controller.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
773
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
VISA library
Instrument access is usually achieved from high level programming platforms using VISA as an intermediate abstraction layer. VISA encapsulates the low level VXI, GPIB, LAN or USB function calls and thus makes the transport interface transparent for the user. See Chapter 12.1.3, "VISA Libraries", on page 781 for details.
The R&S FSW supports various LAN protocols such as VXI11, RSIB, raw socket or the newer HiSLIP protocol.
IP address
Only the IP address or a valid DNS host name is required to set up the connection. The host address is part of the "VISA resource string" used by the programs to identify and control the instrument.
The VISA resource string has the form:
TCPIP::host address[::LAN device name][::INSTR]
or
TCPIP::host address::port::SOCKET
where:
TCPIP designates the network protocol used host address is the IP address or host name of the device LAN device name defines the protocol and the instance number of a subinstru-
ment; � inst0 selects the VXI-11 protocol (default) � hislip0 selects the newer HiSLIP protocol INSTR indicates the instrument resource class (optional) port determines the used port number SOCKET indicates the raw network socket resource class
Example: Instrument has the IP address 192.1.2.3; the valid resource string using VXI-11
protocol is: TCPIP::192.1.2.3::INSTR The DNS host name is FSW13-123456; the valid resource string using HiSLIP is: TCPIP::FSW13-123456::hislip0 A raw socket connection can be established using: TCPIP::192.1.2.3::5025::SOCKET
Identifying instruments in a network If several instruments are connected to the network, each instrument has its own IP address and associated resource string. The controller identifies these instruments by the resource string.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
774
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
For details on configuring the LAN connection, see Chapter 12.6.1, "How to Configure a Network", on page 845.
VXI-11 Protocol..................................................................................................... 775 HiSLIP Protocol.....................................................................................................775 Socket Communication......................................................................................... 775 LAN Web Browser Interface..................................................................................776
VXI-11 Protocol
The VXI-11 standard is based on the ONC RPC (Open Network Computing Remote Procedure Call) protocol which in turn relies on TCP/IP as the network/transport layer. The TCP/IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured. TCP/IP ensures connection-oriented communication, where the order of the exchanged messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified. With this protocol, messages cannot be lost.
HiSLIP Protocol
The High Speed LAN Instrument Protocol (HiSLIP) is the successor protocol for VXI-11 for TCP-based instruments specified by the IVI foundation. The protocol uses two TCP sockets for a single connection - one for fast data transfer, the other for non-sequential control commands (e.g. Device Clear or SRQ).
HiSLIP has the following characteristics:
High performance as with raw socket network connections Compatible IEEE 488.2 support for Message Exchange Protocol, Device Clear,
Serial Poll, Remote/Local, Trigger, and Service Request Uses a single IANA registered port (4880), which simplifies the configuration of fire-
walls Supports simultaneous access of multiple users by providing versatile locking
mechanisms Usable for IPv6 or IPv4 networks
Using VXI-11, each operation is blocked until a VXI-11 instrument handshake returns. However, using HiSLIP, data is sent to the instrument using the "fire and forget" method with immediate return. Thus, a successful return of a VISA operation such as viWrite() guarantees only that the command is delivered to the instrument's TCP/IP buffers. There is no confirmation, that the instrument has started or finished the requested command.
For more information see also the application note:
1MA208: Fast Remote Instrument Control with HiSLIP
Socket Communication
An alternative way for remote control of the product is to establish a simple network communication using sockets. The socket communication, also referred to as "Raw Ethernet communication", does not necessarily require a VISA installation on the remote controller side. It is available by default on all operating systems.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
775
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
The simplest way to establish socket communication is to use the built-in telnet program. The telnet program is part of every operating system and supports a communication with the software on a command-by-command basis. For more convenience and to enable automation by programs, user-defined sockets can be programmed.
Socket connections are established on a specially defined port. The socket address is a combination of the IP address or the host name of the instrument and the number of the port configured for remote-control. Typically, the products of Rohde & Schwarz use port number 5025 for this purpose. The port is configured for communication on a command-to-command basis and for remote control from a program.
LAN Web Browser Interface
The LAN web browser interface allows for easy configuration of the LAN and remote control of the R&S FSW without additional installation requirements.
The instrument's LAN web browser interface works correctly with all W3C compliant browsers.
Via the web browser interface to the R&S FSW you can control the instrument remotely from another PC. Manual instrument controls are available via the front panel simulation. File upload and download between the instrument and the remote PC is also available. Using this feature, several users can access and operate the R&S FSW simultaneously. This is useful for troubleshooting or training purposes.
For details, see Chapter 12.6.1.4, "How to Configure the LAN Using the Web Browser Interface", on page 849 and Chapter 12.6.5, "How to Control the R&S FSW via the Web Browser Interface", on page 855.
If you do not want other users in the LAN to be able to access and operate the R&S FSW you can deactivate this function. See Chapter 12.6.6, "How to Deactivate the Web Browser Interface", on page 857.
Restrictions Only user accounts with administrator rights can use the LAN web browser functionality.
To display the LAN web browser interface
In the address field of the browser on your PC, type the host name or IP address of the instrument, for example: http://10.113.10.203. The instrument home page (welcome page) opens.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
776
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
The navigation pane of the browser interface contains the following elements:
"LAN"
� "Home" opens the instrument home page. The home page displays device information, including the VISA resource string in read-only format. The "Device Indicator" button allows you to physically identify the instrument. This is useful if you have several instruments and want to know which instrument the LAN home page belongs to. To identify the instrument, activate the "Device Indicator" . Then check the "LAN Status" indicator of the instruments.
� "LAN Configuration" allows you to configure LAN parameters and to initiate a ping. (See "Ping Client" on page 851.)
� "Utilities" provides access to an event log.
"Instrument Control"
� "Web Control" provides remote access to the instrument via VNC (no installation required). Manual instrument controls are available via the front panel simulation.
� "File Download" downloads files from the instrument.
� "File Upload" uploads files to the instrument.
(See Chapter 12.6.5, "How to Control the R&S FSW via the Web Browser Interface", on page 855.)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
777
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
"License Manager" � "License Manager" allows you to install or uninstall license keys and to activate, register or unregister licenses.
"Help" "www.rohde-schwarz.com" opens the Rohde & Schwarz home page.
12.1.1.2 GPIB Interface (IEC 625/IEEE 418 Bus Interface)
A GPIB interface is integrated on the rear panel of the instrument.
By connecting a PC to the R&S FSW via the GPIB connection you can send remote commands to control and operate the instrument.
To be able to control the instrument via the GPIB bus, the instrument and the controller must be linked by a GPIB bus cable. A GPIB bus card, the card drivers and the program libraries for the programming language used must be provided in the controller. The controller must address the instrument with the GPIB bus address (see Chapter 12.6.1.5, "How to Change the GPIB Instrument Address", on page 852). You can set the GPIB address and the ID response string. The GPIB language is set as SCPI by default and cannot be changed for the R&S FSW.
Notes and Conditions
In connection with the GPIB interface, note the following:
Up to 15 instruments can be connected The total cable length is restricted to a maximum of 15 m or 2 m times the number
of devices, whichever is less; the cable length between two instruments should not exceed 2 m. A wired "OR"-connection is used if several instruments are connected in parallel. Any connected IEC-bus cables should be terminated by an instrument or controller.
GPIB Interface Messages
Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines, with the attention line (ATN) being active (LOW). They are used for communication between the controller and the instrument and can only be sent by a computer which has the function of a GPIB bus controller. GPIB interface messages can be further subdivided into:
Universal commands: act on all instruments connected to the GPIB bus without previous addressing
Addressed commands: only act on instruments previously addressed as listeners
The following figure provides an overview of the available communication lines used by the GPIB interface.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
778
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Figure 12-1: Communication lines used by the GPIB interface
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
779
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Universal Commands
Universal commands are encoded in the range 10 through 1F hex. They affect all instruments connected to the bus and do not require addressing.
Command
Effect on the instrument
DCL (Device Clear)
Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state. Does not change the instrument settings.
IFC (Interface Clear) *)
Resets the interfaces to the default setting.
LLO (Local Lockout)
The "Local" softkey is disabled. Manual operation is no longer available until GTL is executed.
SPE (Serial Poll Enable)
Ready for serial poll.
SPD (Serial Poll Disable)
End of serial poll.
PPU (Parallel Poll Unconfig- End of the parallel-poll state. ure)
*) IFC is not a real universal command, it is sent via a separate line; however, it also affects all instruments connected to the bus and does not require addressing
Addressed Commands
Addressed commands are encoded in the range 00 through 0F hex. They only affect instruments addressed as listeners.
Command GET (Group Execute Trigger)
GTL (Go to Local) GTR (Go to Remote) PPC (Parallel Poll Configure) SDC (Selected Device Clear)
Effect on the instrument
Triggers a previously active instrument function (e.g. a sweep). The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input.
Transition to the "local" state (manual control).
Transition to the "remote" state (remote control).
Configures the instrument for parallel poll.
Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state. Does not change the instrument setting.
12.1.1.3 USB Interface
For remote control via the USB connection, the PC and the instrument must be connected via the USB type B interface. A USB connection requires the VISA library to be installed. VISA detects and configures the R&S instrument automatically when the USB connection is established. You do not have to enter an address string or install a separate driver.
USB address
The used USB address string is:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
780
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
USB::<vendor ID>::<product ID>::<serial number>[::INSTR]
where:
<vendor ID> is the vendor ID for Rohde & Schwarz (0x0AAD) <product ID> is the product ID for the Rohde & Schwarz instrument <serial number> is the individual serial number on the rear of the instrument
Table 12-2: Product IDs for R&S FSW
Instrument model
Product ID
FSW8
C6
FSW13
C7
FSW26
C8
FSW43
CA
FSW50
CB
FSW67
CC
FSW85
CD
Example: USB::0x0AAD::0x00C7::100001::INSTR 0x0AAD is the vendor ID for Rohde & Schwarz 0x00C7 is the product ID for the R&S FSW13 100001 is the serial number of the particular instrument
12.1.2 SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)
SCPI commands - messages - are used for remote control. Commands that are not taken from the SCPI standard follow the SCPI syntax rules. The R&S FSW supports the SCPI version 1999. The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of device-specific commands, error handling and the status registers. The tutorial "Automatic Measurement Control - A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488.2" from John M. Pieper (R&S order number 0002.3536.00) offers detailed information on concepts and definitions of SCPI.
Tables provide a fast overview of the bit assignment in the status registers. The tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers.
12.1.3 VISA Libraries
VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments. The I/O channel (LAN or TCP/IP etc.) is selected at initialization time by one of the following:
The channel�specific address string ("VISA resource string") indicated in Table 12-1
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
781
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
An appropriately defined VISA alias (short name).
A VISA installation is a prerequisite for remote control using the following interfaces: Chapter 12.1.1.2, "GPIB Interface (IEC 625/IEEE 418 Bus Interface)", on page 778 Chapter 12.1.1.1, "LAN Interface", on page 773 Chapter 12.1.1.3, "USB Interface", on page 780
For more information about VISA, refer to the user documentation.
12.1.4 Messages
The messages transferred on the data lines are divided into the following categories:
Interface messages Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines, with the attention line being active (LOW). They are used to communicate between the controller and the instrument. Interface messages can only be sent by instruments that have GPIB bus functionality. For details see the sections for the required interface.
Instrument messages Instrument messages are employed in the same way for all interfaces, if not indicated otherwise in the description. Structure and syntax of the instrument messages are described in Chapter 12.1.5, "SCPI Command Structure", on page 783. A detailed description of all messages available for the instrument is provided in the chapter "Remote Control Commands". There are different types of instrument messages, depending on the direction they are sent:
� Commands
� Instrument responses
Commands
Commands (program messages) are messages the controller sends to the instrument. They operate the instrument functions and request information. The commands are subdivided according to two criteria:
According to the effect they have on the instrument:
� Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instrument or setting the frequency.
� Queries cause data to be provided for remote control, e.g. for identification of the instrument or polling a parameter value. Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the command header.
According to their definition in standards:
� Common commands: their function and syntax are precisely defined in standard IEEE 488.2. They are employed identically on all instruments (if implemented). They refer to functions such as management of the standardized status registers, reset and self-test.
� Instrument control commands refer to functions depending on the features of the instrument such as frequency settings. Many of these commands have also been standardized by the SCPI committee. These commands are marked as
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
782
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
"SCPI confirmed" in the command reference chapters. Commands without this SCPI label are instrument-specific; however, their syntax follows SCPI rules as permitted by the standard.
Instrument responses
Instrument responses (response messages and service requests) are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query. They can contain measurement results, instrument settings and information on the instrument status.
12.1.5 SCPI Command Structure
SCPI commands consist of a header and, usually, one or more parameters. The headers may consist of several mnemonics (keywords). Queries are formed by appending a question mark directly to the header.
The commands can be either instrument-specific or instrument-independent (common commands). Common and instrument-specific commands differ in their syntax.
12.1.5.1 Syntax for Common Commands
Common (= instrument-independent) commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk (*), and possibly one or more parameters.
Table 12-3: Examples of common commands
*RST
RESET
Resets the instrument.
*ESE
EVENT STATUS ENABLE
Sets the bits of the event status enable registers.
*ESR?
EVENT STATUS QUERY
Queries the contents of the event status register.
*IDN?
IDENTIFICATION QUERY
Queries the instrument identification string.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
783
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
12.1.5.2 Syntax for Instrument-Specific Commands
Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the instrument. For demonstration purposes only, assume the existence of the following commands for this section: DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean> FORMat:READings:DATA <type>[,<length>] HCOPy:DEVice:COLor <Boolean> HCOPy:DEVice:CMAP:COLor:RGB <red>,<green>,<blue> HCOPy[:IMMediate] HCOPy:ITEM:ALL HCOPy:ITEM:LABel <string> HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>] HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe <numeric value> MMEMory:COPY <file_source>,<file_destination> SENSE:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value> SENSe:FREQuency:STOP <numeric value> SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
Long and Short Form............................................................................................ 784 Numeric Suffixes................................................................................................... 784 Optional Mnemonics............................................................................................. 785
Long and Short Form
The mnemonics feature a long form and a short form. The short form is marked by upper case letters, the long form corresponds to the complete word. Either the short form or the long form can be entered; other abbreviations are not permitted.
Example: HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON is equivalent to HCOP:DEV:COL ON.
Case-insensitivity Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the manual, the instrument itself is case-insensitive.
Numeric Suffixes
If a command can be applied to multiple instances of an object, e.g. specific channels or sources, the required instances can be specified by a suffix added to the command. Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets (<1...4>, <n>, <i>) and are replaced by a single value in the command. Entries without a suffix are interpreted as having the suffix 1.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
784
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Example: Definition: HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>] Command: HCOP:PAGE:DIM:QUAD2 This command refers to the quadrant 2.
Different numbering in remote control For remote control, the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selection used in manual operation. SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1. Suffix 1 is the default state and used when no specific suffix is specified. Some standards define a fixed numbering, starting with 0. If the numbering differs in manual operation and remote control, it is indicated for the corresponding command.
Optional Mnemonics
Some command systems permit certain mnemonics to be inserted into the header or omitted. These mnemonics are marked by square brackets in the description. The instrument must recognize the long command to comply with the SCPI standard. Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics.
Example: Definition: HCOPy[:IMMediate] Command: HCOP:IMM is equivalent to HCOP
Optional mnemonics with numeric suffixes Do not omit an optional mnemonic if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the effect of the command. Example: Definition:DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean> Command: DISP:MAX ON refers to window 1. To refer to a window other than 1, you must include the optional WINDow parameter with the suffix for the required window. DISP:WIND2:MAX ON refers to window 2.
12.1.5.3 SCPI Parameters
Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters. The parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank).
The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are specified in the command description.
Allowed parameters are:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
785
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Numeric Values..................................................................................................... 786 Special Numeric Values........................................................................................ 786 Boolean Parameters............................................................................................. 787 Text Parameters.................................................................................................... 787 Character Strings.................................................................................................. 787 Block Data.............................................................................................................788
Numeric Values
Numeric values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and exponent. Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down. The mantissa may comprise up to 255 characters, the exponent must lie inside the value range -32000 to 32000. The exponent is introduced by an "E" or "e". Entry of the exponent alone is not allowed.
Example: SENS:FREQ:STOP 1500000 = SENS:FREQ:STOP 1.5E6
Units
For physical quantities, the unit can be entered. If the unit is missing, the basic unit is used. Allowed unit prefixes are: G (giga) MA (mega), MOHM, MHZ K (kilo) M (milli) U (micro) N (nano)
Example: SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5GHz = SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5E9
Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent. According to SCPI, this unit is represented by the PCT string.
Example: HCOP:PAGE:SCAL 90PCT
Special Numeric Values
The following mnemonics are special numeric values. In the response to a query, the numeric value is provided.
MIN and MAX: denote the minimum (MINimum) and maximum (MAXimum) value. DEF: denotes a preset value (DEFault) which has been stored in the EPROM. This
value conforms to the default setting, as it is called by the *RST command. UP and DOWN: increases or reduces the numeric value by one step. The step
width can be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter which can be set via UP and DOWN.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
786
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
INF and NINF: INFinity and Negative INFinity (NINF) represent the numeric values 9.9E37 or -9.9E37, respectively. INF and NINF are only sent as instrument responses.
NAN: Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as an instrument response. This value is not defined. Possible causes are the division of zero by zero, the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing values.
Example: Setting command: SENSe:LIST:FREQ MAXimum Query: SENS:LIST:FREQ? Response: 3.5E9
Queries for special numeric values The numeric values associated to MAXimum/MINimum/DEFault can be queried by adding the corresponding mnemonic after the question mark. Example: SENSe:LIST:FREQ? MAXimum Returns the maximum numeric value as a result.
Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states. The "ON" state (logically true) is represented by "ON" or a numeric value 1. The "OFF" state (logically untrue) is represented by "OFF" or the numeric value 0. The numeric values are provided as the response for a query.
Example: Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL? Response: 1
Text Parameters Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for mnemonics, i.e. they can be entered using a short or long form. Like any parameter, they have to be separated from the header by a white space. In the response to a query, the short form of the text is provided.
Example: Setting command: HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape Query: HCOP:PAGE:ORI? Response: LAND
Character Strings Always enter strings in quotation marks (' or ").
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
787
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Example: HCOP:ITEM:LABel "Test1" HCOP:ITEM:LABel 'Test1'
Block Data
Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data. For example, a command using a block data parameter has the following structure:
FORMat:READings:DATA #45168xxxxxxxx
The ASCII character # introduces the data block. The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block. In the example, the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes. The data bytes follow. During the transmission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted.
#0 specifies a data block of indefinite length. The use of the indefinite format requires a NL^END message to terminate the data block. This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length.
12.1.5.4 Overview of Syntax Elements
The following tables provide an overview of the syntax elements and special characters.
Table 12-4: Syntax elements
: The colon separates the mnemonics of a command.
; The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path.
, The comma separates several parameters of a command.
? The question mark forms a query.
* The asterisk marks a common command.
' ' Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it (both single and double quotation marks are pos" sible).
# The hash symbol introduces the following numeral systems: Binary: #B10110 Octal: #O7612 Hexadecimal: #HF3A7 Block data: #21312
A "white space" (ASCII-Code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank) separates the header from the parameters.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
788
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Table 12-5: Special characters
| Parameters A pipe in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of "or". The effect of the command differs, depending on which parameter is used. Example: Definition:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI PORT specifies portrait orientation Mnemonics A selection of mnemonics with an identical effect exists for several commands. These mnemonics are indicated in the same line; they are separated by a pipe. Only one of these mnemonics needs to be included in the header of the command. The effect of the command is independent of which of the mnemonics is used. Example: DefinitionSENSE:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value> The two following commands with identical meaning can be created: SENS:BAND:RES 1 SENS:BWID:RES 1
[ ] Mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted. Example: HCOPy[:IMMediate] HCOP:IMM is equivalent to HCOP
{ } Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times, or omitted. Example: SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>} The following are valid commands: SENS:LIST:FREQ 10 SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20 SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20,30,40
12.1.5.5 Structure of a Command Line
A command line may consist of one or several commands. It is terminated by one of the following: <New Line> <New Line> with EOI EOI together with the last data byte
Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ";".
Example:
MMEM:COPY "Test1","MeasurementXY";:HCOP:ITEM ALL
This command line contains two commands. The first command belongs to the MMEM system, the second command belongs to the HCOP system. If the next command belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
789
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Example:
HCOP:ITEM ALL;:HCOP:IMM
This command line contains two commands. Both commands are part of the HCOP command system, i.e. they have one level in common. If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels in common, the command line can be abbreviated. When abbreviating the command line, the second command begins with the level below HCOP. The colon after the semicolon is omitted. The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows:
HCOP:ITEM ALL;IMM
Example: HCOP:ITEM ALL HCOP:IMM A new command line always begins with the complete path.
12.1.5.6 Responses to Queries
A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise. It is formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command. According to SCPI, the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488.2.
The requested parameter is transmitted without a header. Example: HCOP:PAGE:ORI? Response: LAND
Maximum values, minimum values and all other quantities that are requested via a special text parameter are returned as numeric values. Example: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAX Response: 3.5E9
Numeric values are output without a unit. Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the units set using the Unit command. The response 3.5E9 in the previous example stands for 3.5 GHz.
Truth values (Boolean values) are returned as 0 (for OFF) and 1 (for ON). Example: Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL? Response: 1
Text (character data) is returned in a short form. Example: Setting command: HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape Query: HCOP:PAGE:ORI? Response: LAND
Invalid numerical results Sometimes, particularly when a result consists of multiple numeric values, invalid values are returned as 9.91E37 (not a number).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
790
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
12.1.6 Command Sequence and Synchronization
IEEE 488.2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands:
A sequential command is one which finishes executing before the next command starts executing. Commands that are processed quickly are usually implemented as sequential commands.
An overlapping command is one which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing. Usually, overlapping commands take longer to process and allow the program to do other tasks while being executed. If overlapping commands do have to be executed in a defined order, e.g. in order to avoid wrong measurement results, they must be serviced sequentially. This is called synchronization between the controller and the instrument.
Setting commands within one command line, even though they may be implemented as sequential commands, are not necessarily serviced in the order in which they have been received. In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a certain order, each command must be sent in a separate command line.
Example: Commands and queries in one message The response to a query combined in a program message with commands that affect the queried value is not predictable. The following commands always return the specified result: :FREQ:STAR 1GHZ;SPAN 100;:FREQ:STAR? Result: 1000000000 (1 GHz) Whereas the result for the following commands is not specified by SCPI: :FREQ:STAR 1GHz;STAR?;SPAN 1000000 The result could be the value of STARt before the command was sent since the instrument might defer executing the individual commands until a program message terminator is received. The result could also be 1 GHz if the instrument executes commands as they are received.
As a general rule, send commands and queries in different program messages.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
791
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Example: Overlapping command with *OPC
The instrument implements INITiate[:IMMediate] as an overlapped command. Assuming that INITiate[:IMMediate] takes longer to execute than *OPC, sending the following command sequence results in initiating a sweep and, after some time, setting the OPC bit in the ESR:
INIT; *OPC.
Sending the following commands still initiates a sweep:
INIT; *OPC; *CLS
However, since the operation is still pending when the instrument executes *CLS, forcing it into the "Operation Complete Command Idle" State (OCIS), *OPC is effectively skipped. The OPC bit is not set until the instrument executes another *OPC command.
12.1.6.1 Preventing Overlapping Execution
To prevent an overlapping execution of commands, one of the commands *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI can be used. All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out after the hardware has been set. The controller can be forced to wait for the corresponding action to occur.
Table 12-6: Synchronization using *OPC, *OPC? and *WAI
Command
Action
Programming the controller
*OPC
Sets the Operation Complete bit in the Standard Event Status Register (ESR) after all previous commands have been executed.
Setting bit 0 in the ESE Setting bit 5 in the SRE Waiting for service request (SRQ)
*OPC?
Stops command processing until 1 is
Send *OPC? directly after the command
returned. This occurs when all pending opera- whose processing must be terminated before
tions are completed.
other commands can be executed.
*WAI
Stops further command processing until all commands sent before Wait-to-Continue Command (WAI) have been executed.
Send *WAI directly after the command whose processing must be terminated before other commands are executed.
Command synchronization using *WAI or *OPC? is a good choice if the overlapped command takes only little time to process. The two synchronization commands simply block overlapped execution of the command. Append the synchronization command to the overlapping command, for example:
SINGle; *OPC?
For time consuming overlapped commands, you can allow the controller or the instrument to do other useful work while waiting for command execution. Use one of the following methods:
*OPC with a service request
1. Execute *ESE 1 Sets the OPC mask bit (bit No. 0) of the Standard Event Status Register (ESR) to 1
2. Execute *SRE 32
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
792
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Sets the Event Status Bit (ESB - bit No. 5) of the Service Request Enable Register (SRE) to 1 to enable ESB service request. 3. Send the overlapped command with *OPC Example: INIT; *OPC 4. Wait for an ESB service request. The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
*OPC? with a service request 1. Execute *SRE 16
Sets the Message Available bit (MAV - bit No. 4) of the Service Request Enable Register (SRE) to 1 to enable MAV service request. 2. Send the overlapped command with *OPC? Example: INIT; *OPC? 3. Wait for an MAV service request. The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
Event status enable register (ESE) 1. Execute *ESE 1
Sets the OPC mask bit (bit No. 0) of the Standard Event Status Register (ESR) to 1 2. Send the overlapped command without *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI.
Example: INIT; *OPC? 3. Poll the operation complete state periodically (with a timer) using the sequence:
*OPC; *ESR? A return value (LSB) of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
12.1.7 Status Reporting System
The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument, and on errors which have occurred. This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue. Both can be queried via GPIB bus or LAN interface (STATus... commands.
(See Chapter 13.11, "Using the Status Register", on page 1406).
Hierarchy of Status Registers............................................................................... 794 Structure of a SCPI Status Register......................................................................795 Contents of the Status Registers.......................................................................... 797 Application of the Status Reporting System..........................................................807 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System...................................................... 809
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
793
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
12.1.7.1 Hierarchy of Status Registers
As shown in the following figure, the status information is of hierarchical structure.
& logic AND logic OR of all bits
*)
one register for each channel
SRQ
& & & & &
SRE
& & & & & &
PPE
7 6 RQS/MSS 5 ESB 4 MAV 3 2 1 0 STB
15 not used
14
13
12
11
10 Range completed
9
Multi-Standard Capture Finish
8 HCOPy in progress
7
6
5 Waiting for TRIGger
4 MEASuring
3 SWEeping
2
1
0 CALibrating
STATus:OPERation
15 not used 14 DIQ 13 12 ACPLimit 11 SYNC 10 LMARGin 9 LIMit 8 CALibration (=UNCAL) 7 6 5 FREQuency 4 TEMPerature 3 POWer 2 TIME 1 0 EXTended
STATus:QUEStionable
ISTflag
& 7 Power On
& 6 User Request
& 5 Command Error
& 4 Execution Error
&
3
Device Dependent Error
& 2 Query Error
&1
Error/ Event Output
& 0 Operation Complete
Queue Buffer
ESE ESR
15 not used 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 GAP ACLR FAIL 7 CACLR FAIL 6 ALT3...11 LOWer/UPPer FAIL 5 ALT2 LOWer FAIL 4 ALT2 UPPer FAIL 3 ALT1 LOWer FAIL 2 ALT1 UPPer FAIL 1 ADJ LOWer FAIL 0 ADJ UPPer FAIL
STAT:QUES:ACPLimit *)
15
not used
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7 LMARgin 8 FAIL
6 LMARgin 7 FAIL
5 LMARgin 6 FAIL
4 LMARgin 5 FAIL
3 LMARgin 4 FAIL
2 LMARgin 3 FAIL
1 LMARgin 2 FAIL
0 LMARgin 1 FAIL
STAT:QUES:LMARgin<n> *)
15 not used 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 LIMit 8 FAIL 6 LIMit 7 FAIL 5 LIMit 6 FAIL 4 LIMit 5 FAIL 3 LIMit 4 FAIL 2 LIMit 3 FAIL 1 LIMit 2 FAIL 0 LIMit 1 FAIL
STAT:QUES:LIMit<n> *)
15 not used ...
9 8 External REFerence 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LO UNLocked 0 OVEN COLD
STAT:QUES:FREQuency *)
15 not used ...
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Frontend temp. error
STAT:QUES:TEMPerature *)
15 not used ...
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 INPut_overload 2 IF_OVerload 1 0 OVERload
STAT:QUES:POWer *)
15 not used ... 5 4 3 2 1 Sweep time too low 0
STAT:QUES:TIME *)
15 not used ... 5 4 3 2 1 INFO 0
STAT:QUES:EXTended *)
15 not used ...
5 4 FATal 3 ERRor 2 WARNing 1 INFO 0 MESSage
STAT:QUES:EXTended:INFO *)
Figure 12-2: Graphical overview of the R&S FSW status registers hierarchy
STB, SRE The STatus Byte (STB) register and its associated mask register Service Request Enable (SRE) form the highest level of the status reporting system. The STB provides a rough overview of the instrument status, collecting the information of the lower-level registers.
ESR, SCPI registers The STB receives its information from the following registers:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
794
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
� The Event Status Register (ESR) with the associated mask register standard Event Status Enable (ESE).
� The STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable registers which are defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument.
IST, PPE The IST flag ("Individual STatus"), like the SRQ, combines the entire instrument status in a single bit. The PPE fulfills the same function for the IST flag as the SRE for the service request.
Output buffer The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller. It is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB and thus is represented in the overview.
All status registers have the same internal structure.
SRE, ESE
The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENABle part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be used as the ENABle part of the ESR.
12.1.7.2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register
Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts. Each part has a width of 16 bits and has different functions. The individual bits are independent of each other, i.e. each hardware status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts. Bit 15 (the most significant bit) is set to zero for all parts. Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive integers.
Figure 12-3: The status-register model
Description of the five status register parts The five parts of a SCPI register have different properties and functions:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
795
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation
Remote Control Basics
CONDition The CONDition part is written into directly by the hardware or the sum bit of the next lower register. Its contents reflect the current instrument status. This register part can only be read, but not written into or cleared. Its contents are not affected by reading.
PTRansition / NTRansition The two transition register parts define which state transition of the CONDition part (none, 0 to 1, 1 to 0 or both) is stored in the EVENt part. The Positive-TRansition part acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1, the associated PTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
� PTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
� PTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read as required. Its contents are not affected by reading. The Negative-TRansition part also acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
� NTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
� NTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read as required. Its contents are not affected by reading.
EVENt The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading, it is the "memory" of the condition part. It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters. It is permanently updated by the instrument. This part can only be read by the user. Reading the register clears it. This part is often equated with the entire register.
ENABle The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the sum bit (see below). Each bit of the EVENt part is "ANDed" with the associated ENABle bit (symbol '&'). The results of all logical operations of this part are passed on to the sum bit via an "OR" function (symbol '+'). ENABle bit = 0: the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit ENABle bit = 1: if the associated EVENt bit is "1", the sum bit is set to "1" as well. This part can be written into and read by the user as required. Its contents are not affected by reading.
Sum bit
The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register. The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher-order register.
The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register. Thus an event can lead to a service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
796
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
12.1.7.3 Contents of the Status Registers
In the following sections, the contents of the status registers are described in more detail.
STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ register The STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ register is used for digital I/Q data from the optional Digital Baseband Interface and is described in the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual.
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register The STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register is used by the R&S FSW applications and is described in the individual sections (manuals) for each application.
Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)..........................797 IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE)................................................ 798 Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register (ESE)............... 798 STATus:OPERation Register................................................................................ 799 STATus:QUEStionable Register............................................................................800 STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register............................................................802 STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended Register.......................................................... 802 STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO Register................................................ 803 STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register....................................................... 803 STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register...................................................................804 STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register............................................................805 STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Register...............................................................805 STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature Register..................................................... 806 STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe Register.................................................................. 806
Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)
The STatus Byte (STB) is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers. A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte.
The STB can thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy.
The STB is read using the command *STB? or a serial poll.
The STatus Byte (STB) is linked to the Service Request Enable (SRE) register. Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE. Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored. If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1, a service request (SRQ) is generated. The SRE can be set using the command *SRE and read using the command *SRE?.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
797
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Table 12-7: Meaning of the bits used in the status byte Bit No. Meaning
0...1
Not used
2
Error Queue not empty
The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue. If this bit is enabled by the SRE, each entry of the error queue generates a service request. Thus an error can be recognized and specified in greater detail by polling the error queue. The poll provides an informative error message. This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with remote control.
3
QUEStionable status register summary bit
The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1. A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status, which can be specified in greater detail by querying the STATus:QUEStionable status register.
4
MAV bit (message available)
The bit is set if a message is available in the output queue which can be read. This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller.
5
ESB bit
Sum bit of the event status register. It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in the event status enable register. Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register.
6
MSS bit (main status summary bit)
The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits of this registers is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE.
7
STATus:OPERation status register summary bit
The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1. A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action. The type of action can be determined by querying the STATus:OPERation status register.
IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE)
As with the SRQ, the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit. It can be read by means of a parallel poll (see "Parallel Poll" on page 808) or using the command *IST?.
The parallel poll enable register (PPE) determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag. The bits of the STB are "ANDed" with the corresponding bits of the PPE, with bit 6 being used as well in contrast to the SRE. The IST flag results from the "ORing" of all results. The PPE can be set using commands *PRE and read using command *PRE?.
Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register (ESE)
The ESR is defined in IEEE 488.2. It can be compared with the EVENt part of a SCPI register. The event status register can be read out using command *ESR?.
The ESE corresponds to the ENABle part of a SCPI register. If a bit is set in the ESE and the associated bit in the ESR changes from 0 to 1, the ESB bit in the STB is set. The ESE register can be set using the command *ESE and read using the command *ESE?.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
798
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Table 12-8: Meaning of the bits used in the event status register Bit No. Meaning
0
Operation Complete
This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed.
1
Not used
2
Query Error
This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query, or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead. The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed.
3
Device-dependent Error
This bit is set if a device-dependent error occurs. An error message with a number between -300 and -399 or a positive error number, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue.
4
Execution Error
This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other reasons. An error message with a number between -200 and -300, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue.
5
Command Error
This bit is set if a command is received, which is undefined or syntactically incorrect. An error message with a number between -100 and -200, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue.
6
User Request
This bit is set when the instrument is switched over to manual control.
7
Power On (supply voltage on)
This bit is set on switching on the instrument.
STATus:OPERation Register
The STATus:OPERation register contains information on current activities of the R&S FSW. It also contains information on activities that have been executed since the last read out.
You can read out the register with STATus:OPERation:CONDition? or STATus: OPERation[:EVENt]?.
Table 12-9: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:OPERation register
Bit No. Meaning
0
CALibrating
This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a self-alignment.
1-2
Not used
3
SWEeping
Sweep is being performed in base unit (applications are not considered); identical to bit 4
In applications, this bit is not used.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
799
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Bit No. 4
5 6-7 8 9
10 11-14 15
Meaning
MEASuring Measurement is being performed in base unit (applications are not considered); identical to bit 3 In applications, this bit is not used.
Waiting for TRIgger Instrument is ready to trigger and waiting for trigger signal.
Not used
HardCOPy in progress This bit is set while the instrument is printing a hardcopy.
For data acquisition in MSRA/MSRT mode only: Multi-Standard capture finish This bit is set if a data acquisition measurement was completed successfully in MSRA/MSRT operating mode and data is available for evaluation. For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R&S FSW Real-Time Spectrum Application and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual.
Range completed This bit is set when a range in the sweep list is completed if "Stop after Sweep" is enabled (see " Stop After Sweep " on page 281).
Not used
This bit is always 0.
STATus:QUEStionable Register
The STATus:QUEStionable register contains information on instrument states that do not meet the specifications.
The STAT:QUES:SYNC register is used by the applications and is thus described in the individual applications' User Manuals.
You can read out the register with STAT:QUES:COND or STAT:QUES:EVEN.
The STATus:QUEStionable register "sums up" the information from all subregisters (e.g. bit 2 sums up the information for all STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe registers). For some subregisters, there may be separate registers for each active channel. Thus, if a status bit in the STATus:QUEStionable register indicates an error, the error may have occurred in any of the channel-specific subregisters. In this case, you must check the subregister of each channel to determine which channel caused the error. By default, querying the status of a subregister always returns the result for the currently selected channel.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
800
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Table 12-10: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable register Bit No. Meaning
0
"EXTended"
This bit indicates further status information not covered by the other status registers in any of the active channels.
1
Unused
2
"TIMe"
This bit is set if a time error occurs in any of the active channels.
The STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe Register provides more information on the error type.
3
"POWer"
This bit is set if the measured power level in any of the active channels is questionable.
The STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Register provides more information on the error type.
4
"TEMPerature"
This bit is set if the temperature is questionable.
5
"FREQuency"
This bit is set if there is anything wrong with the frequency of the local oscillator or the reference frequency in any of the active channels.
The STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register provides more information on the error type.
6 - 7
Unused
8
"CALibration"
This bit is set if the R&S FSW is unaligned ("UNCAL" display)
9
"LIMit" (device-specific)
This bit is set if a limit value is violated in any of the active channels in any window.
The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register provides more information on the error type.
10
"LMARgin" (device-specific)
This bit is set if a margin is violated in any of the active channels in any window.
The STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register provides more information on the error type.
11
"SYNC" (device-specific)
This bit is set if the R&S FSW is not synchronized to the signal that is applied.
The R&S FSW is not synchronized if:
it cannot synchronize to midamble during a measurement or premeasurement it cannot find a burst during a measurement or premeasurement the results deviate too much from the expected value during premeasurements
12
"ACPLimit" (device-specific)
This bit is set if a limit during ACLR measurements is violated in any of the active channels.
The STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register provides more information on the error type.
13
Unused
14
Digital I/Q (device-specific)
This bit is set if a connection error occurs at the optional Digital Baseband Interface.
For details see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual.
15
This bit is always 0.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
801
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register
The STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register contains information about the results of a limit check during ACLR measurements. A separate ACPLimit register exists for each active channel.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]?
Table 12-11: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register
Bit No. Meaning
0
ADJ UPPer FAIL
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper adjacent channel
1
ADJ LOWer FAIL
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower adjacent channel.
2
ALT1 UPPer FAIL
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 1st alternate channel.
3
ALT1 LOWer FAIL
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 1st alternate channel.
4
ALT2 UPPer FAIL
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 2nd alternate channel.
5
ALT2 LOWer FAIL
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 2nd alternate channel.
6
ALT3 ... 11 LOWer/UPPer FAIL
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in one of the lower or upper alternate channels 3 ... 11.
7
CACLR FAIL
This bit is set if the CACLR limit is exceeded in one of the gap channels.
8
GAP ACLR FAIL
This bit is set if the ACLR limit is exceeded in one of the gap channels.
9 to 14 Unused
15
This bit is always 0.
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended Register
The STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended register contains further status information not covered by the other status registers of the R&S FSW. A separate EXTended register exists for each active channel.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended[:EVENt]?
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
802
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Table 12-12: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended register Bit No. Meaning
0
not used
1
INFO
This bit is set if a status message is available for the application.
Which type of message occurred is indicated in the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO Register.
2 to 14 Unused
15
This bit is always 0.
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO Register
The STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO register contains information on the type of messages that occur during operation of the R&S FSW. A separate INFO register exists for each active channel.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO: CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO[:EVENt]?. You can query all messages that occur for a specific channel using the command SYSTem: ERRor:EXTended? on page 1379.
Table 12-13: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO register
Bit No. Meaning
0
MESSage
This bit is set if event or state has occurred that may lead to an error during further operation.
1
INFO
This bit is set if an informational status message is available for the application.
2
WARNing
This bit is set if an irregular situation occurs during measurement, e.g. the settings no longer match the displayed results, or the connection to an external device was interrupted temporarily.
3
ERRor
This bit is set if an error occurs during a measurement, e.g. due to missing data or wrong settings, so that the measurement cannot be completed correctly.
4
FATal
This bit is set if a serious error occurs in the application and regular operation is no longer possible.
5 to 14 Unused
15
This bit is always 0.
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register
The STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register contains information about the condition of the local oscillator and the reference frequency. A separate frequency register exists for each active channel.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
803
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency: CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?.
Table 12-14: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register
Bit No. Meaning
0
OVEN COLD
This bit is set if the reference oscillator has not yet attained its operating temperature. "OCXO" is displayed.
1
LO UNLocked
This bit is set if the local oscillator no longer locks. "LOUNL" is displayed.
2 to 7 Not used
8
EXTernalREFerence
This bit is set if you have selected an external reference oscillator but did not connect a useable external reference source.
In that case the synthesizer can not lock. The frequency in all probability is not accurate.
9 to 14 Not used
15
This bit is always 0.
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register
The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register contains information about the results of a limit check when you are working with limit lines.
A separate LIMit register exists for each active channel and for each window.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>[:EVENt]?.
Table 12-15: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register
Bit No. Meaning
0
LIMit 1 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 1 is violated.
1
LIMit 2 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 2 is violated.
2
LIMit 3 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 3 is violated.
3
LIMit 4 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 4 is violated.
4
LIMit 5 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 5 is violated.
5
LIMit 6 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 6 is violated.
6
LIMit 7 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 7 is violated.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
804
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Bit No. 7
8 to 14 15
Meaning LIMit 8 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 8 is violated. Unused This bit is always 0.
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register
This register contains information about the observance of limit margins.
A separate LMARgin register exists for each active channel and for each window.
It can be read using the commands STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:CONDition? and STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin[:EVENt]?.
Table 12-16: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register
Bit No. Meaning
0
LMARgin 1 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 1 is violated.
1
LMARgin 2 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 2 is violated.
2
LMARgin 3 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 3 is violated.
3
LMARgin 4 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 4 is violated.
4
LMARgin 5 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 5 is violated.
5
LMARgin 6 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 6 is violated.
6
LMARgin 7 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 7 is violated.
7
LMARgin 8 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 8 is violated.
8 to 14 Not used
15
This bit is always 0.
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Register
The STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register contains information about possible overload situations that may occur during operation of the R&S FSW. A separate power register exists for each active channel.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
805
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Table 12-17: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register Bit No. Meaning
0
OVERload
This bit is set if an overload occurs at the RF input, causing signal distortion but not yet causing damage to the device.
The R&S FSW displays the keyword "RF OVLD".
1
Unused
2
IF_OVerload
This bit is set if an overload occurs in the IF path.
The R&S FSW displays the keyword "OVLD".
3
Input Overload
This bit is set if the signal level at the RF input connector exceeds the maximum.
The RF input is disconnected from the input mixer to protect the device. In order to re-enable measurement, decrease the level at the RF input connector and reconnect the RF input to the mixer input.
For details on the protection mechanism see "RF Input Protection" on page 362 or INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:PROTection:RESet on page 1079.
The R&S FSW displays the keyword "INPUT OVLD".
4 to 14 Unused
15
This bit is always 0.
STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature Register
The STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register contains information about possible temperature deviations that may occur during operation of the R&S FSW. A separate temperature register exists for each active channel.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature: CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature[:EVENt]?
Table 12-18: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register
Bit No. Meaning
0
This bit is set if the frontend temperature sensor deviates by a certain degree from the self-
alignment temperature.
During warmup, this bit is always 1.
For details see "Temperature check" on page 686.
1 to 14 Unused
15
This bit is always 0.
STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe Register
The STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe register contains information about possible time errors that may occur during operation of the R&S FSW. A separate time register exists for each active channel.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:TIME:CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:TIME[:EVENt]?
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
806
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Table 12-19: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe register Bit No. Meaning
0
not used
1
Sweep time too low
This bit is set if the sweep time is too low.
2 to 14 Unused
15
This bit is always 0.
12.1.7.4 Application of the Status Reporting System
The purpose of the status reporting system is to monitor the status of one or several devices in a measuring system. To do this and react appropriately, the controller must receive and evaluate the information of all devices. The following standard methods are used:
Service request (SRQ) initiated by the instrument Serial poll of all devices in the bus system, initiated by the controller in order to
find out who sent a SRQ and why Parallel poll of all devices Query of a specific instrument status by means of commands Query of the error queue
Service Request
Under certain circumstances, the instrument can send a service request (SRQ) to the controller. A service request is a request from an instrument for information, advice or treatment by the controller. Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller, to which the control program can react appropriately. As evident from Figure 12-2, an SRQ is always initiated if one or several of bits 2, 3, 4, 5 or 7 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE. Each of these bits combines the information of a further register, the error queue or the output buffer. The ENABle parts of the status registers can be set such that arbitrary bits in an arbitrary status register initiate an SRQ. In order to make use of the possibilities of the service request effectively, all bits should be set to "1" in enable registers SRE and ESE.
The service request is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each controller program should cause the instrument to initiate a service request if errors occur. The program should react appropriately to the service request.
Use of the command *OPC to generate an SRQ at the end of a sweep
1. CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "*ESE 1") 'Set bit 0 in the ESE (Operation Complete)
2. CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "*SRE 32") 'Set bit 5 in the SRE (ESB)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
807
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
3. CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "*INIT;*OPC") ' Generate an SRQ after operation complete
After its settings have been completed, the instrument generates an SRQ.
A detailed example for a service request routine is provided in Chapter 13.15.2, "Service Request", on page 1458.
Serial Poll
In a serial poll, just as with command *STB, the status byte of an instrument is queried. However, the query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster.
The serial poll method is defined in IEEE 488.1 and used to be the only standard possibility for different instruments to poll the status byte. The method also works for instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488.2.
The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to the controller.
Parallel Poll
In a parallel poll, up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller using a single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines, i.e., to set the data line allocated to each instrument to a logical "0" or "1".
In addition to the SRE register, which determines the conditions under which an SRQ is generated, there is a Parallel Poll Enable register (PPE) which is ANDed with the STB bit by bit, considering bit 6 as well. This register is ANDed with the STB bit by bit, considering bit 6 as well. The results are ORed, the result is possibly inverted and then sent as a response to the parallel poll of the controller. The result can also be queried without parallel poll using the command *IST?.
The instrument first has to be set for the parallel poll using the command PPC. This command allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response is to be inverted. The parallel poll itself is executed using PPE.
The parallel poll method is mainly used to find out quickly which one of the instruments connected to the controller has sent a service request. To this effect, SRE and PPE must be set to the same value.
Query of an instrument status
Each part of any status register can be read using queries. There are two types of commands:
The common commands *ESR?, *IDN?, *IST?, *STB? query the higher-level registers.
The commands of the STATus system query the SCPI registers (STATus:QUEStionable...)
The returned value is always a decimal number that represents the bit pattern of the queried register. This number is evaluated by the controller program.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
808
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the SRQ.
Decimal representation of a bit pattern The STB and ESR registers contain 8 bits, the SCPI registers 16 bits. The contents of a status register are specified and transferred as a single decimal number. To make this possible, each bit is assigned a weighted value. The decimal number is calculated as the sum of the weighted values of all bits in the register that are set to 1.
Example: The decimal value 40 = 32 + 8 indicates that bits no. 3 and 5 in the status register (e.g. the QUEStionable status summary bit and the ESB bit in the STatus Byte ) are set.
Error Queue
Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue. The entries of the error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be looked up in the Error Log or queried via remote control using SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?. Each call of SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? provides one entry from the error queue. If no error messages are stored there any more, the instrument responds with 0, "No error".
The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers. Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well.
12.1.7.5 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System
The following table contains the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be reset. None of the commands, except *RST and SYSTem:PRESet, influence the functional instrument settings. In particular, DCL does not change the instrument settings.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
809
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics
Table 12-20: Resetting the status reporting system
Event
Switching on supply voltage
Power-On-StatusClear
Effect
0
1
DCL, SDC
(Device Clear, Selected Device Clear)
*RST or SYSTem:PRE Set
STATus:PRESet
*CLS
Clear STB, ESR
-
yes
-
-
-
yes
Clear SRE, ESE
-
yes
-
-
-
-
Clear PPE
-
yes
-
-
-
-
Clear EVENt parts of the regis- -
yes
-
-
-
yes
ters
Clear ENABle parts of all
-
yes
-
-
yes
-
OPERation and QUEStionable
registers;
Fill ENABle parts of all other registers with "1".
Fill PTRansition parts with "1"; -
yes
-
-
yes
-
Clear NTRansition parts
Clear error queue
yes
yes
-
-
-
yes
Clear output buffer
yes
yes
yes
1)
1)
1)
Clear command processing
yes
yes
yes
-
-
-
and input buffer
1) The first command in a command line that immediately follows a <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR> clears the output buffer.
12.1.8 General Programming Recommendations
Initial instrument status before changing settings
Manual operation is designed for maximum possible operating convenience. In contrast, the priority of remote control is the "predictability" of the instrument status. Thus, when a command attempts to define incompatible settings, the command is ignored and the instrument status remains unchanged, i.e. other settings are not automatically adapted. Therefore, control programs should always define an initial instrument status (e.g. using the *RST command) and then implement the required settings.
Command sequence
As a general rule, send commands and queries in different program messages. Otherwise, the result of the query may vary depending on which operation is performed first (see also Chapter 12.1.6.1, "Preventing Overlapping Execution", on page 792).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
810
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation GPIB Languages
Reacting to malfunctions
The service request is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each controller program should instruct the instrument to initiate a service request in case of malfunction. The program should react appropriately to the service request.
Error queues
The error queue should be queried after every service request in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers. Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well.
12.2 GPIB Languages
The R&S FSW analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands used by other devices. Thus it can emulate other devices in order to use existing remote control programs.
The device model to be emulated is selected manually using "SETUP > Network + Remote > GPIB tab > Language". Via the GPIB interface using the SYSTem: LANGuage on page 1413 command.
In order to emulate device models that are not part of the selection list of the GPIB "Language" setting, you can modify the identification string received in response to the ID command ("Identification String" setting). Thus, any device model whose command set is compatible with one of the supported device models can be emulated.
Supported languages
Language SCPI 71100C 71200C 71209A 8560E 8561E 8562E 8563E 8564E 8565E 8566A
Comment Compatible to 8566A/B Compatible to 8566A/B Compatible to 8566A/B
Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command structure.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
811
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation GPIB Languages
Language 8566B 8568A
8568A_DC 8568B
8568B_DC 8591E 8594E
PSA89600 PSA PXA R&S FSEA R&S FSEB R&S FSEM R&S FSEK R&S FSP R&S FSQ R&S FSU R&S FSV
Comment
Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command structure. Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command structure. Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument Compatible to 8594E Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command structure.
Notes:
If you select a language other than "SCPI", the GPIB address is set to 18 if it was 20 before.
The Start/stop frequency, reference level and number of sweep points are adapted to the selected instrument model.
For R&S FSP/FSQ/FSU emulation, HP commands are not automatically also allowed. In this case, set HP Additional to ON.
When you switch between remote control languages, the following settings or changes are made: SCPI: The instrument performs a PRESET. 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8594E; FSEA, FSEB, FSEM; FSEK:
� The instrument performs a PRESET.
� The following instrument settings are changed:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
812
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation The IECWIN Tool
Table 12-21: Instrument settings for emulation of 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8594E; FSEA, FSEB, FSEM; FSEK instruments
Model
# of Trace Points
Start Freq.
Stop Freq.
Ref Level
Input Coupling
8566A/B
1001
2 GHz
22 GHz
0 dBm
AC
8568A/B
1001
0 Hz
1.5 GHz
0 dBm
AC
8560E
601
0 Hz
2.9 GHz
0 dBm
AC
8561E
601
0 Hz
6.5 GHz
0 dBm
AC
8562E
601
0 Hz
13.2 GHz
0 dBm
AC
8563E
601
0 Hz
26.5 GHz
0 dBm
AC
8564E
601
0 Hz
40 GHz
0 dBm
AC
8565E
601
0 Hz
50 GHz
0 dBm
AC
8594E
401
0 Hz
3 GHz
0 dBm
AC
FSEA
500
0 Hz
3.5 GHz
-20 dBm
AC
FSEB
500
0 Hz
7 GHz
-20 dBm
AC
FSEM
500
0 Hz
26.5 GHz
-20 dBm
AC
FSEK
500
0 Hz
40 GHz
-20 dBm
AC
Note: The stop frequency indicated in the table may be limited to the corresponding frequency of the R&S FSW, if required.
12.3 The IECWIN Tool
The R&S FSW is delivered with IECWIN installed, an auxiliary tool provided free of charge by R&S. IECWIN is a program to send SCPI commands to a measuring instrument either interactively or from a command script.
The R&S IECWIN32 tool is provided free of charge. The functionality may change in a future version without notice.
IECWIN offers the following features: Connection to instrument via several interfaces/protocols (GPIB, VISA, named pipe
(if IECWIN is run on the instrument itself), RSIB) Interactive command entry Browsing available commands on the instrument Error checking following every command Execution of command scripts Storing binary data to a file Reading binary data from a file
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
813
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
Generation of a log file For command scripts, IECWIN offers the following features: Synchronization with the instrument on every command Checking expected result for query commands (as string or numeric value) Checking for expected errors codes Optional pause on error Nested command scripts Single step mode Conditional execution, based on the *IDN and *OPT strings
You can use the IECWIN to try out the programming examples provided in the R&S FSW User Manuals.
Starting IECWIN
IECWIN is available from the Windows "Start" menu on the R&S FSW, or by executing the following file: C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\iecwin32.exe You can also copy the program to any Windows PC or laptop. Simply copy the iecwin32.exe, iecwin.chm and rsib32.dll files from the location above to the same folder on the target computer. When the tool is started, a "Connection settings" dialog box is displayed. Define the connection from the computer the IECWIN tool is installed on to the R&S FSW you want to control. If you are using the tool directly on the R&S FSW, you can use an NT Pipe (COM Parser) connection, which requires no further configuration. For help on setting up other connection types, check the tool's online help (by clicking the "Help" button in the dialog box).
The IECWIN offers an online help with extensive information on how to work with the tool.
12.4 Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
To configure a test setup quickly and make complex test setups or repetitive measurements reproducible, you can automate the required settings with scripts. A script contains a series of SCPI commands corresponding to the settings. When completed, it is converted to an executable format, saved in a file, and can be run whenever needed.
Creating a SCPI script
Using the SCPI Recorder functions, you can create a SCPI script directly on the instrument and then export the script for use on the controller. You can also edit or write a script manually, using a suitable editor on the controller. For manual creation, the
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
814
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
instrument supports you by showing the corresponding command syntax for the current setting value.
You can create a SCPI script directly on the instrument at any time of operation, in the following ways:
Recording individual steps manually In manual recording mode, you can record an individual SCPI command using the "Add SCPI Command to Recording" function, see "How to record SCPI commands manually" on page 823.
Recording all performed steps automatically The instrument records the SCPI command and settings value of each step you perform, and then writes the commands to the file system, see "How to record SCPI commands automatically" on page 822. You can start, stop and resume automatic recording, and also record individual commands manually.
Copying commands from the context-sensitive SCPI Recorder menu and pasting them into an editor The SCPI Recorder enables you to copy the SCPI command and the current setting shown in the context-sensitive menu and paste them into any suitable editor, see "To edit a SCPI command list" on page 823.
12.4.1 The Context-Sensitive SCPI Command Menu
The SCPI Recorder provides information on the required SCPI command for the available measurement settings, functions, and results in a context-sensitive menu. The SCPI command menu is displayed when you tap and hold (right-click) any interface element that allows you to define a setting, perform a function, or displays results, for example:
Softkeys Buttons or input fields in dialog boxes Traces or markers in a diagram
Figure 12-4: Context-sensitive SCPI command menu for a trace in a result display
The menu provides the syntax of the remote command with the current setting, and some functions to help you create your script.
Show SCPI result query commands........................................................................... 816 Show SCPI command................................................................................................. 816
Copy SCPI Command to Clipboard.............................................................. 816 Help...............................................................................................................816 Add SCPI Command to Recording............................................................... 816 Help............................................................................................................................. 816
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
815
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
Show SCPI result query commands This menu item is displayed if you selected a result display. All possible commands to query the results in the diagram are displayed. Select the query command you are interested in to display the SCPI command dialog box, as described in "Show SCPI command" on page 816.
Figure 12-5: Possible result query commands for an ACLR measurement
Show SCPI command This menu item is displayed if you selected a setting or function. A dialog box displays the SCPI command required to perform the setting or function, or to query the trace or marker results.
Figure 12-6: SCPI command dialog for a trace in a result display
Copy SCPI Command to Clipboard Show SCPI command Copies the command and the current value for the selected setting to the clipboard.
Help Show SCPI command Provides help on the displayed SCPI command, its syntax and possible parameter values.
Add SCPI Command to Recording Show SCPI command Adds the command and the current value for the selected setting to the recorded SCPI list.
Help Provides help on the selected setting, function, or result display, as opposed to the SCPI command itself. This function is identical to selecting the context-sensitive help icon in the toolbar and then the interface element.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
816
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
12.4.2 The SCPI Recorder
Access: Toolbar
The SCPI Recorder displays a list of the currently recorded commands and provides functions to create and export a script of SCPI commands. Some additional settings for recording are provided on a separate tab in the dialog box.
Auto Recording........................................................................................................... 817 List of recorded commands / script editor................................................................... 818 Remove Last............................................................................................................... 818
Load Recording....................................................................................................... 818 Save As................................................................................................................... 818 Export...................................................................................................................... 818 Clear All...................................................................................................................819 Settings....................................................................................................................... 820
Add Synchronization Commands..................................................................820 Combined Recording of Spectrum Analyzer and R&S Signal Generator..... 820 IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator..................................... 820
123/ABC............................................................................................. 821 Password............................................................................................ 821 Test Connection............................................................................................ 821
Auto Recording If enabled, the SCPI Recorder automatically records the required SCPI commands and parameter values for the settings and functions you use while operating the R&S FSW.
To view the list of currently recorded SCPI commands at any time, select the SCPI Recorder icon in the toolbar.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
817
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation
Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
Recording is stopped when you deactivate "Auto Recording". To continue recording, reactivate "Auto Recording". To start a new SCPI command list, select Clear All before activating "Auto Recording". Note: Some parameters cannot be set by a SCPI command.
In this case, no SCPI command found is entered in the list instead of a command when you record settings automatically. The R&S FSW automatically clears the SCPI command list after booting.
List of recorded commands / script editor The currently recorded commands are displayed in a basic editor directly in the SCPI Recorder dialog box. Right-click the editor to display a context-sensitive menu with basic editing functions for the list, such as copy, paste, delete, undo and redo.
Remove Last Deletes the last recorded SCPI command from the list.
Load Recording Loads an existing script in ASCII format (*.inp) from a file to the script editor. If the editor contains recorded commands, you must confirm a message to overwrite them. A file selection dialog box is displayed.
Save As Saves the current SCPI command list to the C:\R_S\INSTR\ScpiRecordings directory in ASCII format with the file extension .inp. Tip: You can execute the command list in an .inp file without further editing using the IECWIN tool provided with the R&S FSW, see Chapter 12.3, "The IECWIN Tool", on page 813. You can also reload .inp files to the script editor later.
Export Exports the current SCPI command list to the specified file and directory in the selected format. By default, the file is stored in the C:\R_S\INSTR\ScpiRecordings directory. Besides the recorded commands themselves, the exported script includes all format-specific header data required to execute the script using an external program on the controller.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
818
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
Before storing the file, you can display a "Preview" of the file in the selected format.
Currently, the following file formats are supported:
"C#"
A commonly used general programming language for various applications (*.cs)
"C++"
A commonly used general programming language for various applications (*.cpp)
"MATLAB (Instrument Control Toolbox)"
A programming environment, frequently used in signal processing and test and measurement applications (*.m) You can use this format directly with the MATLAB� Instrument Control Toolbox.
"MATLAB
You can use this format directly with the MATLAB� Toolkit.
(R&S Toolkit)"
"NICVI"
An ANSI C programming environment designed for measurements and tests (*.cvi) You can use this format directly with National Instruments LabWindows CVI.
"Plain SCPI"
Represents SCPI base format, that is ASCII format, saved as a text file (*.inp); contains no additional header data Use this format to load a recorded script back to the editor later.
"Python"
A commonly used general programming language for various applications (.py)
Clear All Removes all recorded commands from the current SCPI command list.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
819
R&S�FSW Settings
Network and Remote Operation Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
Some additional settings are available to configure the exported SCPI command files.
Add Synchronization Commands Settings If enabled, additional commands are included in the script to synchronize the recorded commands when necessary. For instance, when a measurement is started, a *WAI command is inserted to ensure that the next command is only executed after the measurement has finished.
Combined Recording of Spectrum Analyzer and R&S Signal Generator Settings Records commands both from the R&S FSW and from a connected R&S signal generator.
IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator Settings The IP address or computer name of the signal generator connected to the R&S FSW via LAN.
For tips on how to determine the default computer name, see Chapter 4.3.2.21, "Device ID", on page 58, or the signal generator's user documentation.
By default, the IP address is expected. To enter the computer name, toggle the "123"/"ABC" button to "ABC".
Note: While a connection to a signal generator is established, you cannot change the connection information. The IP address / computer name is maintained after a [PRESET], and is transferred between applications. However, when you switch applications, the control is disabled in the other applications. Only one application can control a generator at any time. Select "Test Connection" on page 749 to establish a temporary connection from the R&S FSW to the specified signal generator.
If a connection to a signal generator is already configured, the connection data is provided for information only.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
820
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:IPConnection:ADDRess on page 1384
123/ABC IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator Settings By default, the TCPIP address is expected. To enter the computer name, toggle the "123"/"ABC" button to "ABC".
Password IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator Settings Enter the password required to operate the connected signal generator.
Test Connection Settings The R&S FSW attempts to establish a connection to the signal generator.
If an instrument is connected, the following information is displayed: Device type Name and serial number Connection state Remote command: CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection:CSTate? on page 1383 CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection[:STATe] on page 1384
12.4.3 How to Determine the Required SCPI Command
The SCPI Recorder provides information on the required SCPI command for the available measurement settings, functions, and results in a context-sensitive menu.
1. Define the setting or navigate to the function you need the SCPI command for. To find the query command for trace or marker results, select the result diagram.
2. On the screen, tap and hold, or right-click the measurement setting, function, or result display.
The context-sensitive menu for that particular setting, function, or result is displayed. Tip: If the SCPI command menu is not displayed, you probably tapped outside of a softkey or input field, for example in a block diagram. Tap within the corresponding softkey, button or input field, or in a result display, to display the context-sensitive SCPI command menu.
3. Select "Show SCPI result query commands" or "Show SCPI command", depending on which item you selected.
A dialog box with the required command and some functions is displayed. If multiple commands are possible, for example to query different measurement results, all possible commands are displayed.
4. To display the SCPI command dialog box for a query command, select the query command you are interested in from the list.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
821
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
12.4.4 How to Create and Export SCPI Scripts
Using the SCPI Recorder functions, you can create a SCPI script directly on the instrument and then export the script for use on the controller. The SCPI Recorder allows you to record SCPI command lists either automatically or manually.
How to record SCPI commands automatically
The following procedure explains how to record SCPI commands automatically during operation.
1. Define the setting or navigate to the function you want to record. To query trace or marker results, select the result diagram.
2. On the screen, tap and hold, or right-click the measurement setting, function, or result display. The context-sensitive menu containing the SCPI command for that particular setting, function, or result is displayed. Tip: If the SCPI command menu is not displayed, you probably tapped outside of a softkey or input field, for example in a block diagram. Tap within the corresponding softkey, button or input field, or in a result display, to display the context-sensitive SCPI command menu.
3. Select "Show SCPI result query commands" or "Show SCPI command", depending on which item you selected.
4. On the toolbar, select the SCPI Recorder icon. The SCPI Recorder dialog box is displayed.
5. Select "Auto Recording": "On". From now on, the commands required to execute all steps you perform on the instrument are recorded.
6. To query results in the SCPI script: a) Right-click (or tap and hold) in the result display. All possible commands to query the results in the diagram are displayed in the SCPI command menu. b) Select the results you want to query. c) Select "Add SCPI Command to Recording".
7. To stop SCPI recording, select the SCPI Recorder icon again. The SCPI Recorder dialog box with the recorded command list is displayed.
8. Select "Auto Recording": "Off".
9. Save the recorded command list to a file for later use. a) Select "Save As". b) Define a file name for the script file.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
822
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
How to record SCPI commands manually
1. Determine the required SCPI command as described in Chapter 12.4.3, "How to Determine the Required SCPI Command", on page 821.
2. From the SCPI command dialog box, select "Add SCPI Command to Recording". The command is added to the SCPI Recorder command list.
3. Repeat these steps for any settings, functions, or results you want to record.
4. To check the progress of the recording, select the SCPI Recorder icon in the toolbar. The SCPI Recorder dialog box with the currently recorded command list is displayed.
5. Save the recorded command list to a file for later use. a) Select "Save As". b) Define a file name for the script file.
To edit a SCPI command list
All command lists can be edited after recording, either directly on the instrument or in any suitable editor on the controller. The following functions describe how to edit the SCPI command list directly in the SCPI Recorder dialog box.
1. On the toolbar, select the SCPI Recorder icon. The SCPI Recorder dialog box with the currently recorded command list is displayed.
2. To load a stored script in ASCII format: a) Select "Load Recording" in the SCPI Recorder dialog box. b) If necessary, confirm the message to overwrite existing commands in the editor. c) Select the stored *.inp file. d) Select "Select". The stored commands are displayed in the editor.
3. To remove the most recently recorded command, select "Remove Last" in the SCPI Recorder dialog box.
4. To remove any other command in the recorded command list: a) Select the command by tapping it or using the arrow keys. b) Press the [BACK SPACE] key on the front panel of the instrument, or press the [Delete] key on a connected keyboard.
5. To insert a command within the recorded command list: a) Define the setting or navigate to the function you want to record. b) Select "Copy SCPI Command to ClipBoard". c) Tap and hold or right-click the position in the SCPI command list at which you want to insert the new command.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
823
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
d) From the context menu, select "Paste".
6. Select "Save As" to store the changes to the script.
How to check a SCPI script
The easiest way to check a script is to execute it, for example in the auxiliary tool IECWIN, which is provided with the R&S FSW firmware (see Chapter 12.3, "The IECWIN Tool", on page 813).
The tool shows an error message if a command could not be executed.
Some suggestions on how you can check and improve a recorded SCPI script: Search and remove missing command entries.
If a configured setting or performed function does not have a corresponding command, :SYST:INF:SCPI 'SCPI command not available' is entered in the list instead. Remove unnecessary commands written after a preset. Rearrange the commands to a reasonable order. For example, if you move a STATe command to the end of your script, you can avoid intermediate calculations of the signal. Check the script for completeness by comparing its results with the modified settings in manual mode.
How to export a SCPI script
When you save a command list to a file, only the recorded commands are stored in a text file. However, to execute a script in an external programming environment, it requires additional header data according to the specific format.
1. On the toolbar, select the SCPI Recorder icon.
The SCPI Recorder dialog box with the currently recorded command list is displayed.
2. Select "Export".
3. Define a file name and storage location for the script file. 4. Select the "File Type" which defines the format of the script. 5. Select "Save".
A script with the required header data for the selected format is stored to a file.
12.4.5 Example for a Recorded SCPI Script
The following example shows a recorded SCPI script in python format. The script configures the ACLR measurement example described in Chapter 6.2.7.1, "Measurement Example 1 � ACPR Measurement on a CDMA2000 Signal", on page 193.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
824
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
# python script created by FSW: 29:11:2017 09:08:53
import visa
# connect to instrument (MU717225) VisaResourceManager = visa.ResourceManager() FSW = VisaResourceManager.open_resource("TCPIP::10.124.0.195::INSTR")
# Display update ON FSW.write("SYST:DISP:UPD ON")
FSW.write("*RST") FSW.write("INIT:CONT OFF") FSW.write("SENS:FREQ:CENT 850000000") FSW.write("SENS:FREQ:SPAN 4000000") FSW.write("DISP:WIND:SUBW:TRAC:Y:SCAL:RLEV 10") FSW.write("CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP") FSW.write("CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES S2CD") FSW.write("SENS:ADJ:LEV;*WAI") FSW.write("SENS:POW:HSP ON") FSW.write("TRAC1:DATA? TRACE1") FSW.query("CALC1:MARK:Y?") FSW.write("CALC1:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CPOW")
# Back to local mode FSW.write("@LOC")
12.5 Network and Remote Control Settings
Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote"
Network settings in secure user mode Be sure to store all network settings before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37. If the currently stored network settings are not suitable, you must correct them each time you switch on the R&S FSW in secure user mode, as the settings are not stored permanently in this case.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 13.10.7, "Configuring the Network and Remote Control", on page 1364.
Step-by-step instructions are provided in Chapter 12.6, "How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control", on page 845.
General Network Settings..................................................................................... 826 GPIB Settings........................................................................................................828 Compatibility Settings............................................................................................831 LAN Settings......................................................................................................... 835
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
825
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
HUMS Settings......................................................................................................836 Remote Errors.......................................................................................................843 Returning to Manual Mode ("Local")..................................................................... 844
12.5.1 General Network Settings
Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "Network" tab The R&S FSW can be operated in a local area network (LAN), for example to control the instrument from a remote PC or use a network printer.
Network settings can only be edited in the firmware if a LAN cable is connected to the R&S FSW.
Risk of network problems All parameters can be edited here; however, beware that changing the computer name has major effects in a network. For details, see Chapter 12.6, "How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control", on page 845.
Network settings in secure user mode Be sure to store all network settings before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37. If the currently stored network settings are not suitable, you must correct them each time you switch on the R&S FSW in secure user mode, as the settings are not stored permanently in this case.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
826
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
Computer Name..........................................................................................................827 IP Address...................................................................................................................828 Subnet Mask............................................................................................................... 828 DHCP.......................................................................................................................... 828 Network Configuration.................................................................................................828
Computer Name Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name, but this name can be changed. The naming conventions of Windows apply. If too many characters and/or numbers are entered, an error message is displayed in the status line.
The default instrument name is a non-case-sensitive string with the following syntax:
<Type><variant>-<serial_number>
For example FSW13-123456
The serial number can be found on the rear panel of the instrument. It is the third part of the device ID printed on the bar code sticker:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
827
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
IP Address Defines the IP address. The TCP/IP protocol is preinstalled with the IP address 10.0.0.10. If the DHCP server is available ("DHCP On"), the setting is read-only.
The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Each block contains 3 numbers in maximum (e.g. 100.100.100.100), but also one or two numbers are allowed in a block (as an example see the preinstalled address).
Subnet Mask Defines the subnet mask. The TCP/IP protocol is preinstalled with the subnet mask 255.255.255.0. If the DHCP server is available ("DHCP On"), this setting is read-only.
The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Each block contains 3 numbers in maximum (e.g. 100.100.100.100), but also one or two numbers are allowed in a block (as an example see the preinstalled address).
DHCP Switches between DHCP server available (On) or not available (Off). If a DHCP server is available in the network, the IP address and subnet mask of the instrument are obtained automatically from the DHCP server.
Network Configuration Opens the standard Windows "Network Configuration" dialog box for further configuration.
12.5.2 GPIB Settings
Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "GPIB" tab
Alternatively to connecting the R&S FSW to a LAN, the GPIB interface can be used to connect a remote PC. For details see Chapter 12.1.1.2, "GPIB Interface (IEC 625/IEEE 418 Bus Interface)", on page 778).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
828
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
GPIB Address............................................................................................................. 829 Identification String......................................................................................................829 Reset to Factory String............................................................................................... 829 Remote Display Update.............................................................................................. 830 GPIB Terminator..........................................................................................................830 *IDN Format................................................................................................................ 830 I/O Logging..................................................................................................................830 Display Remote Errors................................................................................................ 831 Set Hardware Immediately..........................................................................................831
GPIB Address Defines the GPIB address. Values from 0 to 30 are allowed. The default address is 20.
Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess on page 1364
Identification String Defines the identification string for the R&S FSW which is provided as a response to the *IDN? query. Maximum 36 characters are allowed.
Remote command: SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing] on page 1366
Reset to Factory String Restores the default identification string. Each R&S FSW has a unique ID according to the following syntax:
Rohde&Schwarz,FSW,<Unique number>
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
829
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
Remote command: SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory on page 1366
Remote Display Update Defines whether the display of the R&S FSW is updated when changing from manual operation to remote control.
Turning off the display update function improves performance during remote control.
Note: Usually, this function remains available on the display during remote operation. However, it can be disabled remotely. In this case, the display is not updated during remote operation, and cannot be turned on again locally until local operation is resumed.
Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate on page 1365 SYSTem:DISPlay:LOCK on page 1365
GPIB Terminator Changes the GPIB receive terminator.
"LFEOI"
According to the standard, the terminator in ASCII is <LF> and/or <EOI>.
"EOI"
For binary data transfers (e.g. trace data) from the control computer to the instrument, the binary code used for <LF> might be included in the binary data block, and therefore should not be interpreted as a terminator in this particular case. This can be avoided by using only the receive terminator EOI.
Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator on page 1365
*IDN Format Defines the response format to the remote command *IDN? (see *IDN? on page 869). This function is intended for re-use of existing control programs together with the R&S FSW.
"Leg"
Legacy format, as in the R&S FSP/FSU/FSQ family.
"New"
R&S FSW format.
Remote command: SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt on page 1381
I/O Logging Activates or deactivates the SCPI error log function. All remote control commands received by the R&S FSW are recorded in a log file. The files are named according to the following syntax:
C:\R_S\INSTR\ScpiLogging\ScpiLog.<no.>
where <no.> is a sequential number
A new log file is started each time logging was stopped and is restarted.
Logging the commands may be extremely useful for debug purposes, e.g. in order to find misspelled keywords in control programs.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
830
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
Remote command: SYSTem:CLOGging on page 1411
Display Remote Errors Activates and deactivates the display of errors that occur during remote operation of the R&S FSW. If activated, the R&S FSW displays a message box at the bottom of the screen that contains the type of error and the command that caused the error.
The error message remains in place when you switch to "Local" mode. To close the message box, select the "Close" icon. Only the most recent error is displayed in remote mode. However, in local mode, all errors that occurred during remote operation are listed in a separate tab of the "Network + Remote" dialog box (see Chapter 12.5.6, "Remote Errors", on page 843). Remote command: SYSTem:ERRor:DISPlay on page 1366 SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:REMote on page 1379
Set Hardware Immediately Determines when the remote commands that change hardware settings on the R&S FSW are executed.
If enabled (default), remote commands are always executed immediately when they are received by the instrument. If disabled, remote commands that cause changes to the hardware are only executed when an appropriate command is executed explicitely. Regardless of this setting, the firmware automatically sets the hardware when a sweep is started. Postponing hardware changes is useful, for example, when switching measurement channels. When you switch channels, the settings from the previous channel are used by default. However, if you have to change the frequency and level values for the new channel measurement, the default settings cause unnecessary hardware settling times. This setting is not changed by the preset function. Remote command: SYSTem:SHIMmediate:STATe on page 1368 SYSTem:SHIMmediate ONCE on page 1367
12.5.3 Compatibility Settings
The R&S FSW can emulate the GPIB interface of other signal and spectrum analyzers, e.g. in order to use existing control applications.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
831
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
Compatibility with former R&S signal and spectrum analyzers As a rule, the R&S FSW supports most commands from previous R&S signal and spectrum analyzers such as the FSQ, FSP, FSU, or FSV. However, the default values, in particular the number of sweep points or particular bandwidths, may vary. Therefore, the R&S FSW can emulate these other devices, including their default values, in order to repeat previous measurements or support existing control applications as in legacy systems.
The required settings are configured in the "Compatibility" tab of the "Network +Remote" dialog box.
Language.................................................................................................................... 832 IF Gain........................................................................................................................ 833 Sweep Repeat.............................................................................................................833 Coupling...................................................................................................................... 833 Wideband.................................................................................................................... 834 FSU/FSQ Preamplifier................................................................................................ 834 HP Additional.............................................................................................................. 834 Revision String............................................................................................................ 834 Resetting the Factory Revision................................................................................... 834
Language Defines the system language used to control the instrument.
For details on the available GPIB languages, see Chapter 13.13.2, "Reference: GPIB Commands of Emulated HP Models", on page 1415.
Note: Emulating previous R&S signal and spectrum analyzers. This function is also used to emulate previous R&S signal and spectrum analyzers.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
832
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
As a rule, the R&S FSW supports most commands from previous R&S signal and spectrum analyzers such as the FSQ, FSP, FSU, or FSV. However, the default values, in particular the number of sweep points or particular bandwidths, may vary. Therefore, the R&S FSW can emulate these other devices, including their default values, in order to repeat previous measurements or support existing control applications as in legacy systems.
For R&S FSP/FSQ/FSU emulation, HP commands are not automatically also allowed. In this case, set SYSTem:HPADditional to ON.
Note: For PSA89600 emulation, the option is indicated as "B7J" for the *OPT? query ("B7J, 140" or "B7J, 122" if Wideband is activated, see SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband on page 1414).
Remote command: SYSTem:LANGuage on page 1413
IF Gain Configures the internal IF gain settings in HP emulation mode due to the application needs. This setting is only taken into account for resolution bandwidth < 300 kHz.
NORM PULS
Optimized for high dynamic range, overload limit is close to reference level. Optimized for pulsed signals, overload limit up to 10 dB above reference level.
This setting is only available if an HP language is selected (see "Language" on page 832).
Remote command: SYSTem:IFGain:MODE on page 1412
Sweep Repeat Controls a repeated sweep of the E1 and MKPK HI HP model commands (for details on the commands refer to Chapter 13.13.2, "Reference: GPIB Commands of Emulated HP Models", on page 1415). If the repeated sweep is OFF, the marker is set without sweeping before.
Note: In single sweep mode, switch off this setting before you set the marker via the E1 and MKPK HI commands in order to avoid sweeping again. This setting is only available if a HP language is selected (see "Language" on page 832).
Remote command: SYSTem:RSWeep on page 1415
Coupling Controls the default coupling ratios in the HP emulation mode for:
span and resolution bandwidth (Span/RBW) resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth (RBW/VBW) For FSx, the standard parameter coupling of the instrument is used. As a result, in most cases a shorter sweep time is used than in case of HP.
This setting is only available if a HP language is selected (see "Language" on page 832).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
833
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
Remote command: SYSTem:HPCoupling on page 1412
Wideband This setting defines which option is returned when the *OPT? query is executed, depending on the state of the wideband option.
It is only available for PSA89600 emulation.
"Off"
No wideband is used. The option is indicated as "B7J".
"40 MHz"
The 40 MHz wideband is used. The option is indicated as "B7J, 140".
"80 MHz"
The 80 MHz wideband is used. The option is indicated as "B7J, 122".
Remote command: SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband on page 1414
FSU/FSQ Preamplifier This setting defines which option is returned when the *OPT? query is executed, depending on the used preamplifier.
It is only available for FSU/FSQ emulation, and only if a preamplifier is used by the R&S FSW (-B24/-B25 option).
Remote command: SYSTem:PREamp on page 1414
HP Additional Allows the use of HP commands in addition to SCPI commands for R&S FSP/FSQ/FSU emulation (see Language).
Remote command: SYSTem:HPADditional on page 1413
Revision String Defines the response to the REV? query for the revision number.
(HP emulation only, see "Language" on page 832).
Max. 36 characters are allowed.
Remote command: SYSTem:REVision[:STRing] on page 1414
Resetting the Factory Revision Resets the response to the REV? query for the revision number to the factory default (HP emulation only, see "Language" on page 832).
Remote command: SYSTem:REVision:FACTory on page 1367
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
834
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
12.5.4 LAN Settings
Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "LAN" tab
In a LAN network, the R&S FSW can be accessed via any web browser (e.g. the Microsoft Internet Explorer) to perform the following tasks:
Modifying network configurations Modifying device configurations Monitoring connections from the device to other devices
The "LAN" tab of the "Network + Remote" dialog box provides basic LAN configuration functions and information for the R&S FSW.
Alternatively, you can change the LAN settings using the web browser interface.
For details see Chapter 12.6.1.4, "How to Configure the LAN Using the Web Browser Interface", on page 849.
Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to use LAN configuration and web browser functionality.
Current LAN Configuration..........................................................................................835 LAN Password............................................................................................................ 836 LAN Reset...................................................................................................................836
Current LAN Configuration Displays the current LAN information from the R&S FSW (read-only).
"Computer name"
Name of the R&S FSW as defined in the operating system (see also "Computer Name" on page 827)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
835
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
"MAC address" Media Access Control address (MAC address), a unique identifier for the network card in the R&S FSW
"IP address"
IP address of the R&S FSW as defined in the operating system (see also "IP Address" on page 828).
LAN Password Password for LAN configuration. The default password is LxiWebIfc.
Remote command: SYSTem:LXI:PASSword on page 1367
LAN Reset Resets the "LAN" configuration to its default settings (LCI function).
Parameter TCP/IP Mode Dynamic DNS ICMP Ping Password for "LAN" configuration
Value DHCP + Auto IP Address Enabled Enabled LxiWebIfc
The LAN settings are configured in the "Network" tab of the "Network + Remote" dialog box or using the instrument's "LAN" web browser interface.
Remote command: SYSTem:LXI:LANReset on page 1367
12.5.5 HUMS Settings
Available with option R&S FSW-K980.
The R&S FSW comes with a health and utilization monitoring system (HUMS) providing information about the R&S FSW. Aim is to increase the overall utilization, to avoid downtime and to increase the overall security level of a fleet of instruments.
HUMS provides, for example, information about: Instrument identification, hardware components, software packages, licenses Usage of remote control, usage via keyboard / mouse, usage of test applications Hardware utilization and status, including S.M.A.R.T. data of the system drive User-defined static information, for example, an inventory code
Interfaces and protocols
The HUMS installation on the R&S FSW includes an SNMP agent and a REST service with HTTP endpoints. So you can access the health and usage information via LAN, using the SNMP protocol or the REST protocol. Accessing the data does not interfere with remote control via SCPI commands or with measurement execution.
Reference information for both protocols is available on the R&S FSW at the address http://<instrument>/api/hums/v1/documents?name=<interface>.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
836
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
For <instrument>, enter the hostname (e.g. fsw8-123456) or the IP address (e.g. 10.121.0.34) of your instrument, as for access to the GUI. For <interface> = snmp, you get a .zip file containing the MIB files for SNMP. For <interface> = rest, you get a web page with the OpenAPI specification of the REST API. Address example: http://fsw8-123456/api/hums/v1/documents?name=snmp. The following table lists the REST endpoints and the SNMP MIB file names. For further information about the HUMS service itself, see R&S HUMS user manual. Basic Settings....................................................................................................... 837 Protocol Settings................................................................................................... 838 Device Tags...........................................................................................................841
12.5.5.1 Basic Settings
Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "HUMS" tab The "HUMS" tab of the "Network + Remote" dialog provides basic R&S HUMS configuration functions. To export the complete HUMS history, use the REST API with the endpoint: http://<IP>/api/hums/v1/dump
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
837
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
State............................................................................................................................ 838 Enhanced Settings...................................................................................................... 838 View Tracked Information............................................................................................838 Delete HUMS History.................................................................................................. 838
State Turns HUMS on or off. If you want to track HUMS data, turn on this function. If HUMS has been used before, turning on restores the previous protocol settings. Remote command: DIAGnostic:HUMS:STATe on page 1369
Enhanced Settings Opens the dialog to configure the protocol settings and device tags.
View Tracked Information Opens the R&S HUMS device web in the web browser of the R&S FSW. For more information about the R&S HUMS device web, see its user manual. You can also reach the device web from a remote PC by entering the following address into a browser's address bar: http://<instrumentaddress>/hums/ The <instrumentaddress> is either the IP address of the instrument or the instrument name.
Delete HUMS History Deletes complete HUMS data which includes the device history, device tags, SCPI connections, utilization history, utilization (table values). Remote command: DIAGnostic:HUMS:DELete:ALL on page 1369
12.5.5.2 Protocol Settings
Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "HUMS" > "Enhanced Settings" > "Configure" > "Protocol"
The "Protocol" tab of the "Enhanced Settings" dialog provides protocol settings for SNMP or REST protocol.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
838
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
SNMP.......................................................................................................................... 839 REST...........................................................................................................................839 SNMPv2c Configuration..............................................................................................839
Access.......................................................................................................... 840 Community....................................................................................................840 SNMPv3 Configuration................................................................................................840 User Name....................................................................................................840 Access.......................................................................................................... 840 Security Level............................................................................................... 840 Passwords.................................................................................................... 841 SNMP Location........................................................................................................... 841 SNMP Contact............................................................................................................ 841
SNMP Selects the SNMP version. You can select: None, v2c, v3, v2c+v3.
If you activate v2c, version v1 is also active.
Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:VERSion on page 1374
REST Turns communication via REST API on or off.
Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:REST:ENABle on page 1371
SNMPv2c Configuration For SNMPv2c/v1 authentication, you can define the "Access" and "Community".
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
839
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
Access SNMPv2c Configuration Defines the access an SNMP user can have for a specific SNMP community: readwrite = RW, read-only = RO.
"RW"
Read-write access allows the user to read and change information. By default, the user has read-write access rights.
"RO"
Read-only access allows the user to only read information.
Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RO on page 1371 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RW on page 1372
Community SNMPv2c Configuration Defines the SNMP community string. An SNMP community represents a collection of devices and agents grouped to monitor them. Authorized managers and the managed devices belong to an SNMP community.
You can define an individual community for each read-write and read-only access.
The default community is the serial number of the instrument in accordance with the California law (same community for read-only and for read-write).
Entering a community is mandatory.
SNMPv3 Configuration For SNMPv3 authentication, you can define user profiles. You can manage them via a table.
To add a new user, select the "Add" button and enter the data.
To delete all user profiles, select the "Delete All" button.
To delete a single user profile, select the "x" in the appropriate user line of the table.
Remote command: Create user: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER on page 1373 Query all users: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:ALL? on page 1373 Delete a single user: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete on page 1373 Delete all users: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete:ALL on page 1374
User Name SNMPv3 Configuration Defines the name of the user who should have specific user rights.
Entering a user name is mandatory.
Access SNMPv3 Configuration Defines the access right a user can have: read-write = RW, read-only = RO.
"RW"
Read-write access allows the user to read and change information.
"RO"
Read-only access allows the user to only read information.
Security Level SNMPv3 Configuration Defines the security level for access: noAuthNoPriv, authNoPriv or authPriv.
For security reasons, we recommend that you only allow access via passwords.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
840
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
"noAuthNoPriv" "authNoPriv"
"authPriv"
Low security level: no authentication, no data transfer encryption, user name query only. No authentication password and no privacy password to be defined.
Medium security level: authentication, no data transfer encryption, user name and password query. Authentication password to be defined, privacy password is not available.
High security level: authentication, data transfer encryption, user name, password and encryption password query. Authentication password and privacy password to be defined. If no privacy password is defined, the HUMS service uses the authentication password as privacy password.
Passwords SNMPv3 Configuration Depending on the selected Security Level, you have to define specific passwords: authentication password (Auth. Password) and privacy password (Priv. Password).
"Auth. Password"
For authentication, you have to define an authentication password. For authentication password, the R&S FSW supports the MD5 protocol.
"Priv. Password"
For stronger encryption, you have to define a second password, the privacy password. For privacy password, the R&S FSW supports the DES protocol.
SNMP Location "SNMP Location" defines the SNMP location information. This information complies with the server's physical location and is used for identification of the SNMP server. By default, this input field is empty.
Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:LOCation on page 1372
SNMP Contact "SNMP Contact" defines the SNMP contact information. This information complies with the person who manages the SNMP server and is used for identification of the SNMP server. By default, this input field is empty.
Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:CONTact on page 1372
12.5.5.3 Device Tags
Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "HUMS" > "Enhanced Settings" > "Configure" > "Device Tags"
The "Device Tags" tab of the "Enhanced Settings" dialogs displays the defined device tags. You can also add or delete device tags here.
A device tag is a label to assign to your instrument. You can create any device tag for your instrument and define it by a specific key and value.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
841
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
Add.............................................................................................................................. 842 Index........................................................................................................................... 842 Key.............................................................................................................................. 842 Value........................................................................................................................... 842 Delete All.....................................................................................................................842
Add Adds a new device tag. Remote command: DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS[:VALue] on page 1370
Index Index (ID) of the created device tag. You can change the ID if necessary.
Key Defines a key for your device tag. A device tag key represents the type of tag.
Value Defines the actual value of the device tag or key. Example: "Key" = Location "Value" = Building 1 Remote command: DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:ALL? on page 1370
Delete All Deletes all defined device tags.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
842
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
Remote command: Delete all device tags:DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete:ALL on page 1370 Delete a single device tag:DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete on page 1370
12.5.6 Remote Errors
Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "Remote Errors " tab The error messages generated by the R&S FSW during remote operation are displayed here. The messages are displayed in the order of their occurrence; the most recent messages are placed at the top of the list.
The most recent error message during remote operation can be displayed on the screen, see "Display Remote Errors" on page 831.
If the number of error messages exceeds the capacity of the error buffer, the oldest error message is removed before the newest one is inserted. To clear the message buffer use the "Clear Error List" button. It is automatically cleared when the R&S FSW is shut down.
The following information is available:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
843
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings
No Error Date/Time
Device-specific error code Brief description of the error Time the message occurred
Remote command:
SYSTem:ERRor:LIST? on page 1380
Clear Error List Deletes the error message buffer for remote operation. Note: The remote error list is automatically cleared when the R&S FSW is shut down. Remote command: SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:REMote on page 1379
12.5.7 Returning to Manual Mode ("Local")
When switched on, the instrument is always in the manual measurement mode and can be operated via the front panel. As soon as the instrument receives a remote command, it is switched to the remote control mode.
In remote control mode, all keys of the instrument except the [PRESET] key are disabled. The "LOCAL" softkey and the Remote Display Update softkey are displayed.
Local The instrument switches from remote to manual operation, but only if the local lockout function has not been activated in the remote control mode (see "GPIB Interface Messages" on page 778).
Furthermore, when you return to manual operation, the following happens: All front panel keys are enabled. The main softkey menu of the current mode is displayed. The measurement diagrams, traces and display fields are displayed again. If, at the time of pressing the "LOCAL" softkey, the synchronization mechanism via
*OPC, *OPC? or *WAI is active, the currently running measurement procedure is aborted and synchronization is achieved by setting the corresponding bits in the registers of the status reporting system. Bit 6 (User Request) of the Event Status Register is set. If the status reporting system is configured accordingly, this bit immediately causes the generation of a service request (SRQ) to inform the control software that the user wishes to return to front panel control. For example, this can be used to interrupt the control program and to correct instrument settings manually. This bit is set each time the "LOCAL" softkey is pressed.
Note: Before you switch back to manual operation, all remote command processing must be completed. Otherwise, the instrument will switch back to remote control immediately. If you select the "Local" softkey while a self-alignment or a self-test is still running (which was started remotely), the instrument only returns to the manual operation state when the alignment or test is completed.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
844
R&S�FSW
Remote command: SYSTem:KLOCk on page 1366
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
12.6 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
Risk of network failure Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks: Connecting the instrument to the network Configuring the network Changing IP addresses Exchanging hardware
Errors can affect the entire network.
Remote operation
You can operate the instrument remotely from a connected computer using SCPI commands (see Chapter 12.1.2, "SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)", on page 781). Before you send remote commands you must configure the instrument in a LAN network or connect it to a PC via the GPIB interface as described in Chapter 12.6.1, "How to Configure a Network", on page 845.
Remote Desktop
In production test and measurement, a common requirement is central monitoring of the T&M instruments for remote maintenance and remote diagnostics. Equipped with the Remote Desktop software of Windows, the R&S FSW ideally meets requirements for use in production. The computer that is used for remote operation is called "controller" here.
The following tasks can be performed using Remote Desktop: Access to the control functions via a virtual front panel (soft front panel) Printout of measurement results directly from the controller Storage of measured data on the controller's hard disk
This documentation provides basic instructions on setting up the Remote Desktop for the R&S FSW. For details refer to the Windows 10 operating system documentation.
12.6.1 How to Configure a Network
A precondition for operating or monitoring the instrument remotely is that it is connected to a LAN network or a PC connected to the GPIB interface. Setup is described here.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
845
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
Windows Firewall Settings A firewall protects an instrument by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access to it through a network. Rohde & Schwarz highly recommends the use of the firewall on your instrument. R&S instruments are shipped with the Windows firewall enabled and preconfigured in such a way that all ports and connections for remote control are enabled. For more details on firewall configuration see the Windows 10 help system and the R&S White Paper (available from the Rohde & Schwarz website): 1EF96: Malware Protection Windows 10
12.6.1.1 How to Connect the Instrument to the Network
There are two methods to establish a LAN connection to the instrument:
A non-dedicated network (Ethernet) connection from the instrument to an existing network made with an ordinary RJ-45 network cable. The instrument is assigned an IP address and can coexist with a computer and with other hosts on the same network.
A dedicated network connection (Point-to-point connection) between the instrument and a single computer made with a (crossover) RJ-45 network cable. The computer must be equipped with a network adapter and is directly connected to the instrument. The use of hubs, switches, or gateways is not required, however, data transfer is still performed using the TCP/IP protocol. An IP address has to be assigned to the instrument and the computer, see Chapter 12.6.1.2, "How to Assign the IP Address", on page 846. Note: As the R&S FSW uses a 1 GBit LAN, a crossover cable is not necessary (due to Auto-MDI(X) functionality).
To establish a non-dedicated network connection, connect a commercial RJ-45 cable to one of the LAN ports. To establish a dedicated connection, connect a (crossover) RJ-45 cable between the instrument and a single PC.
If the instrument is connected to the LAN, Windows automatically detects the network connection and activates the required drivers.
The network card can be operated with a 1 GBit Ethernet IEEE 802.3u interface.
12.6.1.2 How to Assign the IP Address
Depending on the network capacities, the TCP/IP address information for the instrument can be obtained in different ways. If the network supports dynamic TCP/IP configuration using the Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP), all address information can be assigned automatically. If the network does not support DHCP, or if the instrument is set to use alternate TCP/IP configuration, the addresses must be set manually.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
846
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
By default, the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration and obtain all address information automatically. This means that it is safe to establish a physical connection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration.
When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address may be assigned each time the PC is restarted. This address must first be determined on the PC itself. Thus, when using a DHCP server, it is recommended that you use the permanent computer name, which determines the address via the DNS server (see "Using a DNS server to determine the IP address" on page 848).
Risk of network errors Connection errors can affect the entire network. If your network does not support DHCP, or if you choose to disable dynamic TCP/IP configuration, you must assign valid address information before connecting the instrument to the LAN. Contact your network administrator to obtain a valid IP address.
Assigning the IP address on the instrument
1. Press the [SETUP] key.
2. Press the "Network + Remote" softkey.
3. Select the "Network" tab.
4. In the "Network + Remote" dialog, toggle the "DHCP On/Off" setting to the required mode. If DHCP is "Off", you must enter the IP address manually, as described in the following steps. Note: When DHCP is changed from "On" to "Off", the previously set IP address and subnet mask are retrieved. If DHCP is "On", the IP address of the DHCP server is obtained automatically. The configuration is saved, and you are prompted to restart the instrument. You can skip the remaining steps. Note: When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address may be assigned each time the instrument is restarted. This address must first be determined on the instrument itself. Thus, when using a DHCP server, it is recommended that you use the permanent computer name, which determines the address via the DNS server (See "Using a DNS server to determine the IP address" on page 848 and Chapter 12.6.1.3, "How to Change the Instrument Name", on page 849).
5. Enter the "IP Address", for example 192.0.2.0. The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Every block contains a maximum of 3 numbers.
6. Enter the "Subnet Mask", for example 255.255.255.0. The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Every block contains a maximum of 3 numbers.
7. Close the dialog box.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
847
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
If you have entered an invalid IP address or subnet mask, the message "out of range" is displayed in the status line. If the settings are correct, the configuration is saved, and you are prompted to restart the instrument.
8. Confirm the displayed message ("Yes" button) to restart the instrument.
Using a DNS server to determine the IP address If a DNS server is configured on the R&S FSW, the server can determine the current IP address for the connection using the permanent computer name. 1. Obtain the name of your DNS domain and the IP addresses of the DNS and WINS
servers on your network (see Chapter 12.6.1.3, "How to Change the Instrument Name", on page 849).
2. Press the [Setup] key and then the "Network + Remote" softkey.
3. In the "Network" tab, select the "Open Dialog 'Network Connections'" button.
4. Double-tap the "Local Area Network" entry.
5. In the "Local Area Connection Status" dialog box, select the "Properties" button. The items used by the LAN connection are displayed.
6. Tap the entry named "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" to highlight it.
7. Select the "Properties" button.
8. On the "General" tab, select "Use the following DNS server addresses" and enter your own DNS addresses.
For more information refer to the Windows 10 operating system Help.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
848
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
12.6.1.3 How to Change the Instrument Name
In a LAN that uses a DNS server (Domain Name System server), each PC or instrument connected in the LAN can be accessed via an unambiguous computer name instead of the IP address. The DNS server translates the host name to the IP address. This is especially useful when a DHCP server is used, as a new IP address may be assigned each time the instrument is restarted. Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name, but this name can be changed.
To change the instrument's computer name 1. Press the [Setup] key and then the "Network + Remote" softkey.
The current "Computer Name" is displayed in the "Network" tab. 2. Enter the new computer name and close the dialog box.
The configuration is saved, and you are prompted to restart the instrument. 3. Confirm the displayed message ("Yes" button) to restart the instrument.
12.6.1.4 How to Configure the LAN Using the Web Browser Interface
The instrument's "LAN" web browser interface works correctly with all W3C compliant browsers.
In the web browser, open the http://<instrument-hostname> or http:// <instrument-ip-address> page, e.g. http://10.113.10.203. The default password to change "LAN" configurations is LxiWebIfc. The "Instrument Home Page" (welcome page) opens.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
849
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
The instrument home page displays device information, including the VISA resource string, in read-only format.
Press the "Device Indicator" button on the "Instrument Home Page" to activate or deactivate the "LAN" status icon on the status bar of the R&S FSW. A green "LAN" status symbol indicates that a LAN connection has been established; a red symbol indicates an error, for example, that no LAN cable is connected. When a device is connecting to the instrument, the "LAN" icon blinks. The "Device Indicator" setting is not password-protected.
The most important control elements in the navigation pane of the browser interface are the following:
"LAN Configuration" opens the menu with configuration pages. "Status" displays information about the "LAN" status of the instrument.
LAN Configuration
The LAN configuration consists of three parts: "IP configuration" provides all mandatory LAN parameters. "Advanced LAN Configuration" provides further LAN settings. "Ping Client" provides the ping utility to verify the connection between the instru-
ment and other devices.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
850
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
IP Configuration
The "LAN Configuration > IP configuration" web page displays all mandatory LAN parameters and allows their modification.
The "TCP/IP Mode" configuration field controls how the IP address for the instrument gets assigned (see also Chapter 12.6.1.2, "How to Assign the IP Address", on page 846).
For the manual configuration mode, the static IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway are used to configure the LAN. The automatic configuration mode uses DHCP server or Dynamic Link Local Addressing (Automatic IP) to obtain the instrument IP address.
Changing the LAN configuration is password-protected. The default password is LxiWebIfc (notice upper and lower case characters). You can change the LAN password in the "Network + Remote" dialog box, see Chapter 12.5.4, "LAN Settings", on page 835.
Advanced LAN Configuration
The "LAN Configuration > Advanced LAN Configuration" parameters are used as follows: The "Negotiation" configuration field provides different Ethernet speed and duplex
mode settings. In general, the "Auto Detect" mode is sufficient. "ICMP Ping" must be enabled to use the ping utility. "VXI-11" is the protocol that is used to detect the instrument in the LAN. mDNS and DNS-SD are two additional protocols: Multicast DNS and DNS Service
Discovery. They are used for device communication in zero configuration networks working without DNS and DHCP
Ping Client
Ping is a utility that verifies the connection between the instrument and another device. The ping command uses the ICMP echo request and echo reply packets to determine whether the LAN connection is functional. Ping is useful for diagnosing IP network or router failures. The ping utility is not password-protected.
To initiate a ping between the instrument and a second connected device:
1. Enable "ICMP Ping" on the "Advanced LAN Configuration" page (enabled after an LCI).
2. Enter the IP address of the second device without the ping command and without any further parameters into the "Destination Address" field (e.g. 10.113.10.203).
3. Select "Submit".
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
851
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
12.6.1.5 How to Change the GPIB Instrument Address
In order to operate the instrument via remote control, it must be addressed using the GPIB address. The remote control address is factory-set to 20, but it can be changed if it does not fit in the network environment. For remote control, addresses 0 through 30 are allowed. The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings.
Setting the GPIB address 1. On the R&S FSW, press the [SETUP] key. 2. Press the "Network + Remote" softkey. 3. In the "Network + Remote" dialog box, select the "GPIB" tab. 4. In the "GPIB Address" field, enter a value between 0 and 30.
Remote command: SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18
12.6.2 How to Operate the Instrument Without a Network
To operate the instrument without a network connection either temporarily or permanently, no special measures are necessary. Windows 10 automatically detects the interruption of the network connection and does not set up the connection when the instrument is switched on.
If you are not prompted to enter the user name and password, proceed as described in Chapter 12.6.3.3, "How to Configure the Automatic Login Mechanism", on page 854.
12.6.3 How to Log on to the Network
Windows 10 requires that users identify themselves by entering a user name and password in a login window. You can set up two types of user accounts, either an administrator account with unrestricted access to the computer/domain or a standard user account with limited access. The instrument provides an auto-login function for the administrator account, i.e. login with unrestricted access is carried out automatically in the background. By default, the user name for the administrator account is "Instrument", and the user name for the standard user account is "NormalUser". In both cases the initial password is "894129". You can change the password in Windows 10 for any user at any time. Some administrative tasks require administrator rights (e.g. firmware updates or the configuration of a LAN network).
Refer to Chapter 11, "General Instrument Setup", on page 685 to find out which functions are affected.
At the same time you log on to the operating system, you are automatically logged on to the network. As a prerequisite, the user name and the password must be identical on the instrument and on the network.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
852
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
12.6.3.1 How to Create Users
After the software for the network has been installed, the instrument issues an error message the next time it is switched on because there is no user named "instrument" (= default user ID for Windows auto-login) in the network. Thus, a matching user must be created in the R&S FSW and in the network, the password must be adapted to the network password, and the auto-login mechanism must then be deactivated.
The network administrator is responsible for creating new users in the network.
1.
Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system. 2. Select "Start > Settings > Accounts > Other users". 3. Select "Add someone else to this PC". 4. In the "Microsoft account" dialog box, enter the new user name and password. 5. Select "OK". 6. Select "Finish".
The new user is created.
12.6.3.2 How to Change the User Password
After the new user has been created on the instrument, the password must be adapted to the network password. 1.
Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system. 2. Press [Ctrl + Alt + Delete], then select "Change a password". 3. Enter the user account name. 4. Enter the old password. 5. Enter the new password in the upper text line and repeat it in the following line. 6. Press [Enter].
The new password is now active.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
853
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
12.6.3.3 How to Configure the Automatic Login Mechanism
Adapting the auto-login function to a new password
If you change the password that is used during auto-login, this function no longer works. Adapt the settings for the auto-login function first.
1. Open the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\user\AUTOLOGIN.REG file in any text editor (e.g. Notepad).
2. In the line "DefaultPassword"="894129", replace the default password (894129) by the new password for automatic login.
3. Save the changes to the file.
4. In the Windows "Start" menu, select "Run". The "Run" dialog box is displayed.
5. Enter the command C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\user\AUTOLOGIN.REG.
6. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm. The auto-login function is reactivated with the changed password. It will be applied the next time the instrument is switched on.
Switching users when using the auto-login function
Which user account is used is defined during login. If auto-login is active, the login window is not displayed. However, you can switch the user account to be used even when the auto-login function is active.
1. Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system of the R&S FSW (see also "To access the "Start" menu" on page 33).
2. Press [CTRL] + [ALT] + [DEL], then select "Sign out". The "Login" dialog box is displayed, in which you can enter the different user account name and password.
Deactivating the auto-login function
When shipped, the instrument is already configured to automatically log on the "instrument" user under Windows 10. To deactivate the auto-login function, perform the following steps:
1. In the "Start" menu, select "Run". The "Run" dialog box is displayed.
2. Enter the command C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\user\NO_AUTOLOGIN.REG.
3. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm. The auto-login function is deactivated. The next time you switch on the instrument, you are prompted to enter your user name and password before the firmware is started.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
854
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
Reactivating the auto-login function
To reactivate the auto-login function after manually deactivating it, perform the following steps:
1. In the "Start" menu, select "Run". The "Run" dialog box is displayed.
2. Enter the command C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\user\AUTOLOGIN.REG.
3. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm. The auto-login function is reactivated. It will be applied the next time the instrument is switched on.
12.6.4 How to Share Directories (only with Microsoft Networks)
Sharing directories makes data available for other users. This is only possible in Microsoft networks. Sharing is a property of a file or directory.
1. In the "Start" menu, select "Programs", "Accessories" and then select "Windows Explorer".
2. Select the desired folder with the right mouse button. 3. In the context menu, select "Sharing with > Specific people".
The dialog box for sharing a directory is displayed. 4. Select a user from the list or add a new name and select the "Add" button. 5. Select the "Share" button. 6. Select "Done" to close the dialog box.
The drive is shared and can be accessed by the selected users.
12.6.5 How to Control the R&S FSW via the Web Browser Interface
Via the LAN web browser interface to the R&S FSW, one or more users can control the instrument remotely from another PC without additional installation. Most instrument controls are available via the front panel simulation. File upload and download between the instrument and the remote PC is also available.
To access the R&S FSW via the web browser interface
1. Start a web browser that supports html5 (W3C compliant).
2. Enter the IP address of the R&S FSW in the browser's address bar. The R&S FSW's Welcome page is displayed.
3. In the navigation pane, select "Instrument Control > Web Control". The instrument's display is shown in a new browser window, with a software front panel displayed beside or below it.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
855
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
4. Use the mouse cursor to access the functionality in the software front panel or in the display as you would directly on the instrument's front panel.
To exchange files with the R&S FSW
You can download files, for example stored measurement data, from the R&S FSW to the remote PC, or upload files, for example limit line definitions, from the PC to the R&S FSW.
1. In the web browser, select the Welcome page window.
2. In the navigation pane, select "Instrument Control" > "File Upload" or "File Download".
The most commonly used folders on the instrument are displayed, for example those that contain user data, as well as the top-most My Computer folder, from which you can access all other folders on the instrument.
3. To download a file from the R&S FSW, select the file from the displayed folders and then select "Download File".
4. To upload a file to the R&S FSW:
a) From the displayed folders in the web browser window, select the folder on the R&S FSW to which you want to copy a file.
b) Under "File to Upload", select "Browse" to open a file selection dialog box and select the required file on the PC.
c) Select "Upload" to copy the file from the PC to the defined folder on the R&S FSW.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
856
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
12.6.6 How to Deactivate the Web Browser Interface
If you want to prevent other users in the LAN from accessing or operating the R&S FSW via its LAN web browser interface, you must deactivate this function. Note that after a firmware update the function is automatically active again until you deactivate it manually.
To deactivate the LAN web browser interface 1.
Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system. 2. In the "Start" menu, select "Control Panel". 3. Select "System and Security" > "Administrative Tools". 4. From the list on the right, select "Services". 5. From the list of local services, select "R&S TightVNC Server".
6. Set "Startup type" to "Disabled".
7. Select "Stop".
8. Select "Apply".
The next time a user enters the IP address of the instrument in a web browser, an error message is displayed: Failed to connect to server (code. 1006)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
857
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
12.6.7 How to Set Up Remote Desktop
Remote Desktop is a Windows application which can be used to access and control the instrument from a remote computer through a LAN connection. While the instrument is in operation, the instrument screen contents are displayed on the remote computer, and Remote Desktop provides access to all of the applications, files, and network resources of the instrument. Thus, remote operation of the R&S FSW is possible.
With Windows 10, Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system. For other versions of Windows, Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add-on. For details refer to the Windows 10 operating system documentation.
With the factory settings, the default "instrument" user can connect to the R&S FSW with the Remote Desktop program of the controller immediately. No further configuration is required. However, if the connection fails or other users need to connect, this section provides basic instructions on setting up the Remote Desktop for the R&S FSW.
12.6.7.1 How to Configure the R&S FSW for Remote Operation via Remote Desktop
1. Create a fixed IP address for the TCP/IP protocol as described in Chapter 12.6.1.2, "How to Assign the IP Address", on page 846.
Note: To avoid problems, use a fixed IP address. When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address is assigned each time the instrument is restarted. This address must first be determined on the instrument itself. Thus, using a DHCP server is not suitable for remote operation of the R&S FSW via Remote Desktop.
2.
Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system.
3. In the Windows "Start" menu, select "Settings > System".
4. Search for "remote access".
5. Select "Allow remote access to your computer".
6. Define which users are to be given access to the R&S FSW via Remote Desktop. Note: The user account under which configuration is carried out is automatically enabled for Remote Desktop.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
858
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
a) Select the "Select Users" button. b) Select the users or create new user accounts as described in Chapter 12.6.3.1,
"How to Create Users", on page 853. c) Select "OK" to confirm the settings. 7. The R&S FSW is now ready for connection setup with the Remote Desktop program of the controller.
12.6.7.2 How to Configure the Controller
Remote Desktop Client With Windows 10, Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system and can be accessed via "Start > Programs > Accessories > Remote Desktop Connection". For other versions of Windows, Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an addon.
1.
Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system. 2. From the "Start" menu, select "All Programs > Accessories > Remote Desktop
Connection". The "Remote Desktop Connection" dialog box is displayed. 3. Select the "Options >>" button.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
859
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
The dialog box is expanded to display the configuration data.
4. Open the "Experience" tab. The settings on this tab are used to select and optimize the connection speed.
5. In the list, select the appropriate connection (for example: LAN (10 Mbps or higher)). Depending on your selection (and how powerful the connection is), the options are activated or deactivated.
6. To improve the performance, you can deactivate the "Desktop background", "Show contents of window while dragging" and "Menu and window animation" options.
7. Open the "Local Resources" tab for enabling printers, local drives and serial interfaces.
8. If you will need to access drives of the controller from the R&S FSW (e.g. in order to store settings or to copy files from the controller to the R&S FSW), select "More", then enable the "Drives" option.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
860
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
Windows will then map drives of the controller to the corresponding network drives.
9. To use printers connected to the controller while accessing them from the R&S FSW, activate the "Printers" option. Do not change the remaining settings.
10. Open the "Display" tab. The options for configuring the R&S FSW screen display are displayed.
11. Under "Remote desktop size", you can set the size of the R&S FSW window on the desktop of the controller.
12. Under "Colors", do not change the settings.
13. Set the "Display the connection bar when I use the full screen" option:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
861
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
If activated, a bar showing the network address of the R&S FSW will appear at the top edge of the screen. You can use this bar to reduce, minimize or close the window.
If deactivated, the only way you can return to the controller desktop from the R&S FSW screen in full screen mode is to select "Disconnect" from the "Start" menu.
12.6.7.3 How to Start and Close the Remote Desktop
To set up a connection to the R&S FSW
1. In the "Remote Desktop Connection" dialog box (see Chapter 12.6.7.2, "How to Configure the Controller", on page 859), open the "General" tab.
2. In the "Computer" field, enter the IP address of the R&S FSW. In the "User name" field, enter instrument to log in as an administrator, or Normal User to log in as a standard user. In the "Password" field, enter 894129.
3. To save the connection configuration for later use:
a) Select the "Save As" button. The "Save As" dialog box is displayed.
b) Enter the name for the connection information (*.RDP).
4. To load an existing connection configuration:
a) Select the "Open" button. The "Open" dialog box is displayed.
b) Select the *.RDP file.
5. Select the "Connect" button. The connection is set up.
6. If the "Disk drives" option is activated on the "Local Resources" tab, a warning is displayed indicating that the drives are enabled for access from the R&S FSW. Select "OK" to confirm the warning.
7. After a few moments, the R&S FSW screen is displayed. If a dark screen appears or a dark square appears in the upper left-hand corner of the screen, you must restart the R&S FSW in order to see the modified screen resolution.
Press the key combination [ALT] + [F4]. The R&S FSW firmware is shut down, which may take a few sec-
onds. On the desktop, double-tap the "Analyzer" icon.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
862
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
The firmware restarts and then automatically opens the "Soft Front Panel", i.e. the user interface on which all front panel controls and the rotary knob are mapped to buttons. For more information see Chapter 11.2.3, "How to Work with the Soft Front Panels", on page 705.
8. To deactivate or activate the "Softfrontpanel", press the [F6] key. After the connection is established, the R&S FSW screen is displayed in the "Remote Desktop" application window.
The Windows "Start" menu can be made available by expanding the "Remote Desktop" window to full size. During the connection with the controller, the login entry is displayed on the R&S FSW screen.
To terminate Remote Desktop control
The connection can be terminated by the controller or by a user at the R&S FSW:
1. On the controller, close the "Remote Desktop" window at any time. The connection to the R&S FSW is terminated.
2. On the R&S FSW, a user logs on. The connection to the controller is terminated as a result. A message is displayed on the controller display indicating that another user has assumed control of the instrument.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
863
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
Restoring the connection to the R&S FSW Follow the instructions above for setting up a connection to the R&S FSW. If the connection is terminated and then restored, the R&S FSW remains in the same state.
12.6.7.4 How to Shut Down the R&S FSW via Remote Operation
1. Select the R&S FSW softfrontpanel and close the application with the key combination [ALT] + [F4].
2. Select the desktop and press the key combination [ALT] + [F4]. A safety query is displayed to warn you that the instrument cannot be reactivated via remote operation and asks you whether you want to continue the shutdown process.
3. Respond to the safety query with "Yes". The connection with the controller is terminated and the R&S FSW is shut down.
12.6.8 How to Start a Remote Control Session from a PC
When you switch on the R&S FSW, it is always in manual operation state ("local" state) and can be operated via the front panel.
To start remote control
1. Send an addressed command (GTR - Go to Remote) from a controller to the instrument.
The instrument is switched to remote control ("remote" state). Operation via the front panel is disabled. Only the "Local" softkey is displayed to return to manual operation. The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual state via the instrument or via remote control interfaces. Switching from manual operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the other instrument settings.
2. During program execution, send the SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ON command to activate the display of results (see SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate on page 1365). The changes in the device settings and the recorded measurement values are displayed on the instrument screen.
3. To obtain optimum performance during remote control, send the SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate OFF command to hide the display of results and diagrams again (default setting in remote control).
4. To prevent unintentional return to manual operation, disable the keys of the instrument using the universal command LLO. Switching to manual mode is only possible via remote control then. This function is only available for the GPIB interface.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
864
R&S�FSW
Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control
5. To enable the keys of the R&S FSW again, switch the instrument to local mode (GTL - Go to Local), i.e. deactivate the REN line of the remote control interface.
If the instrument is operated exclusively in remote control, it is recommended that you switch off the display. For details see "Remote Display Update" on page 830.
12.6.9 How to Return to Manual Operation
Before you switch back to manual operation, all remote command processing must be completed. Otherwise, the instrument will switch back to remote control immediately.
Select the "Local" softkey, or use the following GPIB command: status = viGpibControlREN(vi, VI_GPIB_REN_ADDRESS_GTL)
If you select the "Local" softkey while a self-alignment or a self-test is still running (which was started remotely), the instrument only returns to the manual operation state when the alignment or test is completed.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
865
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Conventions Used in SCPI Command Descriptions
13 Remote Commands
The commands required to perform measurements in the Spectrum application in a remote environment are described here.
It is assumed that the R&S FSW has already been set up for remote operation in a network as described in Chapter 12.6, "How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control", on page 845.
Compatibility with former R&S signal and spectrum analyzers
As a rule, the R&S FSW supports most commands from previous R&S signal and spectrum analyzers such as the FSQ, FSP, FSU, or FSV. However, the default values, in particular the number of sweep points or particular bandwidths, may vary. Therefore, the R&S FSW can emulate these other devices, including their default values, in order to repeat previous measurements or support existing control applications as in legacy systems.
Conventions Used in SCPI Command Descriptions............................................. 866 Common Suffixes..................................................................................................867 Common Commands............................................................................................ 867 Selecting the Operating Mode and Application..................................................... 872 Configuring and Performing Measurements......................................................... 882 Configuring the Result Display............................................................................1067 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters.............................................................1077 Analyzing Measurements (Basics)...................................................................... 1174 Managing Settings and Results.......................................................................... 1283 Configuring the R&S FSW.................................................................................. 1324 Using the Status Register................................................................................... 1406 Commands for Remote Instrument Operation.................................................... 1410 Emulating Other Instruments' Commands.......................................................... 1411 Deprecated Commands...................................................................................... 1451 Programming Examples......................................................................................1455
13.1 Conventions Used in SCPI Command Descriptions
Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions:
Command usage If not specified otherwise, commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters. If a command can be used for setting or querying only, or if it initiates an event, the usage is stated explicitly.
Parameter usage If not specified otherwise, a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query. Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters. Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
866
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands
Common Commands
Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values. Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI confirmed. All commands used by the R&S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules.
Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing (overlapping command) is indicated as an Asynchronous command.
Reset values (*RST) Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument (*RST command) are indicated as *RST values, if available.
Default unit The default unit is used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parameter.
Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation, a link to the description is inserted.
13.2 Common Suffixes
In the Spectrum application, the following common suffixes are used in remote commands:
Table 13-1: Common suffixes used in remote commands in the Spectrum application
Suffix
Value range
Description
<m>
1 to 16
Marker
<n>
1 to 16
Window (in the currently selected channel)
<t>
1 to 6
Trace
<li>
1 to 8
Limit line
13.3 Common Commands
Common commands are described in the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. These commands have the same effect and are employed in the same way on different devices. The headers of these commands consist of "*" followed by three letters. Many common commands are related to the Status Reporting System.
Available common commands:
*CAL?........................................................................................................................... 868 *CLS.............................................................................................................................868 *ESE.............................................................................................................................868 *ESR?...........................................................................................................................868
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
867
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Common Commands
*IDN?............................................................................................................................869 *IST?............................................................................................................................ 869 *OPC............................................................................................................................ 869 *OPT?...........................................................................................................................869 *PCB............................................................................................................................ 870 *PRE............................................................................................................................ 870 *PSC............................................................................................................................ 870 *RST.............................................................................................................................871 *SRE............................................................................................................................ 871 *STB?........................................................................................................................... 871 *TRG............................................................................................................................ 871 *TST?........................................................................................................................... 872 *WAI............................................................................................................................. 872
*CAL?
Calibration query
Initiates a calibration of the instrument and then queries the calibration status. Responses > 0 indicate errors.
Note: If you start a self-alignment remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the alignment is still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the alignment is completed.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Start Self Alignment " on page 689
*CLS
Clear status
Sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero. The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers. It clears the output buffer.
Usage:
Setting only
*ESE <Value>
Event status enable
Sets the event status enable register to the specified value. The query returns the contents of the event status enable register in decimal form.
Parameters: <Value>
Range: 0 to 255
*ESR? Event status read
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
868
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Common Commands
Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and then sets the register to zero.
Return values: <Contents>
Range: 0 to 255
Usage:
Query only
*IDN?
Identification
Returns the instrument identification.
Return values: <ID>
"Rohde&Schwarz,<device type>,<part number>/<serial number>,<firmware version>"
Example:
Rohde&Schwarz,FSW-26,1312.8000K26/100005,1.30
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "*IDN Format" on page 830
*IST?
Individual status query
Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form. The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll.
Return values:
<ISTflag>
0 | 1
Usage:
Query only
*OPC
Operation complete
Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been executed. This bit can be used to initiate a service request. The query writes a "1" into the output buffer when all preceding commands have been executed, which is useful for command synchronization.
*OPT? Option identification query
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
869
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Common Commands
Queries the options included in the instrument. For a list of all available options and their description, refer to the data sheet.
Return values: <Options>
The query returns a list of all installed and activated options, separated by commas, where: B<number> describes hardware options. K<number> describes software options. For PSA89600 emulation, the option is indicated as "B7J" for the *OPT? query ("B7J, 140" if SYST:PSA:WID is activated). (See SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband on page 1414.) Note that B3 (Audio demodulator), K9 (Power Meter) and K14 (Spectrograms) are displayed for compatibility reasons only; in fact they are standard functionality of the R&S FSW base unit and do not require additional ordering.
Usage:
Query only
*PCB <Address>
Pass control back
Indicates the controller address to which remote control is returned after termination of the triggered action.
Setting parameters:
<Address>
Range:
0 to 30
Usage:
Setting only
*PRE <Value>
Parallel poll register enable
Sets parallel poll enable register to the indicated value. The query returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form.
Parameters: <Value>
Range: 0 to 255
*PSC <Action>
Power on status clear
Determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers are preserved or reset when the instrument is switched on. Thus a service request can be triggered when the instrument is switched on, if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured. The query reads out the contents of the "power-on-status-clear" flag.
Parameters: <Action>
0 | 1
0 The contents of the status registers are preserved.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
870
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Common Commands
1 Resets the status registers.
*RST
Reset
Sets the instrument to a defined default status. The default settings are indicated in the description of commands.
The command is equivalent to SYSTem:PRESet.
Note that the factory set default values can be modified to user-defined settings (see MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 1294). For more details on default values, see Chapter 10.1, "Restoring the Default Instrument Configuration (Preset)", on page 635.
Usage:
Setting only
*SRE <Contents>
Service request enable
Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value. This command determines under which conditions a service request is triggered.
Parameters: <Contents>
Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form. Bit 6 (MSS mask bit) is always 0.
Range: 0 to 255
*STB?
Status byte query
Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form.
Usage:
Query only
*TRG
Trigger
Triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event. In particular, *TRG generates a manual trigger signal. This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger subsystem.
*TRG corresponds to the INITiate:IMMediate command (see INITiate<n>[: IMMediate] on page 885).
Usage:
Event
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
871
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Selecting the Operating Mode and Application
*TST?
Self-test query
Initiates self-tests of the instrument and returns an error code.
Note: If you start a self-test remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the test is still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the test is completed. In this case, the self-test cannot be aborted.
Return values: <ErrorCode>
integer > 0 (in decimal format) An error occurred. (For details, see the Service Manual supplied with the instrument).
0 No errors occurred.
Usage:
Query only
*WAI
Wait to continue
Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled (see also command synchronization and *OPC).
Usage:
Event
13.4 Selecting the Operating Mode and Application
The following commands are required to select the operating mode or the application and to configure a Sequencer in a remote environment.
The tasks for manual operation are described in Chapter 5, "Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes", on page 107.
Selecting the Mode and Applications.................................................................... 872 Performing a Sequence of Measurements............................................................878 Programming Example: Performing a Sequence of Measurements..................... 880
13.4.1 Selecting the Mode and Applications
DISPlay:ATAB................................................................................................................873 INSTrument:CREate:DUPLicate...................................................................................... 873 INSTrument:CREate[:NEW]............................................................................................ 873 INSTrument:CREate:REPLace........................................................................................ 874 INSTrument:DELete....................................................................................................... 874 INSTrument:LIST?......................................................................................................... 875
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
872
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Selecting the Operating Mode and Application
INSTrument:MODE........................................................................................................ 876 INSTrument:REName..................................................................................................... 877 INSTrument[:SELect]......................................................................................................877
DISPlay:ATAB <State>
This command switches between the MultiView tab and the most recently displayed channel. If only one channel is active, this command has no effect.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
INSTrument:CREate:DUPLicate
This command duplicates the currently selected channel, i.e creates a new channel of the same type and with the identical measurement settings. The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel, extended by a consecutive number (e.g. "IQAnalyzer" -> "IQAnalyzer 2").
The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST:SEL command.
This command is not available if the MSRA/MSRT primary channel is selected.
Example:
INST:SEL 'IQAnalyzer' INST:CRE:DUPL Duplicates the channel named 'IQAnalyzer' and creates a new channel named 'IQAnalyzer2'.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See " Duplicate Current Channel " on page 119
INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] <ChannelType>, <ChannelName>
This command adds an additional measurement channel. You can configure up to 10 measurement channels at the same time (depending on available memory).
See also INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877 INSTrument:DELete on page 874
Parameters: <ChannelType>
Channel type of the new channel. For a list of available channel types see INSTrument:LIST? on page 875.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
873
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Selecting the Operating Mode and Application
<ChannelName> Example: Manual operation:
String containing the name of the channel. Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel; this will cause an error.
INST:CRE SAN, 'Spectrum 2' Adds an additional spectrum display named "Spectrum 2".
See "New Channel" on page 118
INSTrument:CREate:REPLace <ChannelName1>,<ChannelType>,<ChannelName2>
This command replaces a channel with another one.
Setting parameters: <ChannelName1> String containing the name of the channel you want to replace.
<ChannelType>
Channel type of the new channel. For a list of available channel types see INSTrument:LIST? on page 875.
<ChannelName2>
String containing the name of the new channel. Note: If the specified name for a new channel already exists, the default name, extended by a sequential number, is used for the new channel (see INSTrument:LIST? on page 875). Channel names can have a maximum of 31 characters, and must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names. In particular, they must not contain special characters such as ":", "*", "?".
Example:
INST:CRE:REPL 'IQAnalyzer2',IQ,'IQAnalyzer' Replaces the channel named "IQAnalyzer2" by a new channel of type "IQ Analyzer" named "IQAnalyzer".
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See "Replace Current Channel" on page 118
INSTrument:DELete <ChannelName>
This command deletes a channel.
If you delete the last channel, the default "Spectrum" channel is activated.
Setting parameters: <ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel you want to delete.
A channel must exist in order to be able delete it.
Example:
INST:DEL 'IQAnalyzer4' Deletes the channel with the name 'IQAnalyzer4'.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See "Closing an application" on page 119
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
874
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Selecting the Operating Mode and Application
INSTrument:LIST?
This command queries all active channels. This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing channels, which are required in order to replace or delete the channels.
Return values: <ChannelType>, <ChannelName>
For each channel, the command returns the channel type and channel name (see tables below). Tip: to change the channel name, use the INSTrument: REName command.
Example:
INST:LIST? Result for 3 channels: 'ADEM','Analog Demod','IQ','IQ Analyzer','IQ','IQ Analyzer2'
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Changing the Channel Name" on page 82 See "Selecting an application" on page 118
Table 13-2: Available channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode
Application
<ChannelType> parameter
Default Channel name*)
Spectrum
SANALYZER
Spectrum
1xEV-DO BTS (R&S FSW-K84)
BDO
1xEV-DO BTS
1xEV-DO MS (R&S FSW-K85)
MDO
1xEV-DO MS
3GPP FDD BTS (R&S FSW-K72)
BWCD
3G FDD BTS
3GPP FDD UE (R&S FSW-K73)
MWCD
3G FDD UE
802.11ad (R&S FSW-K95)
WIGIG
802.11ad
802.11ay (R&S FSW-K97)
EDMG
802.11ay EDMG
Amplifier Measurements (R&S FSW-K18)
AMPLifier
Amplifier
AM/FM/PM Modulation Analysis (R&S FSW-K7)
ADEM
Analog Demod
Avionics (R&S FSW-K15)
AVIonics
Avionics
cdma2000 BTS (R&S FSW-K82)
BC2K
CDMA2000 BTS
cdma2000 MS (R&S FSW-K83)
MC2K
CDMA2000 MS
DOCSIS 3.1 (R&S FSW-K192/193)
DOCSis
DOCSIS 3.1
Fast Spur Search (R&S FSW-K50)
SPUR
Spurious
GSM (R&S FSW-K10)
GSM
GSM
I/Q Analyzer
IQ
IQ Analyzer
LTE (R&S FSW-K10x)
LTE
LTE
*) If the specified name for a new channel already exists, the default name, extended by a sequential number, is used for the new channel.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
875
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Selecting the Operating Mode and Application
Application
<ChannelType> parameter
Default Channel name*)
Multi-Carrier Group Delay (R&S FSW-K17)
MCGD
MC Group Delay
NB-IoT (R&S FSW-K106)
NIOT
NB-IoT
Noise (R&S FSW-K30)
NOISE
Noise
5G NR (R&S FSW-K144)
NR5G
5G NR
OneWeb (R&S FSW-K201)
OWEB
OneWeb
Phase Noise (R&S FSW-K40)
PNOISE
Phase Noise
Pulse (R&S FSW-K6)
PULSE
Pulse
Real-Time Spectrum
RTIM
Real-Time Spectrum
TD-SCDMA BTS (R&S FSW-K76)
BTDS
TD-SCDMA BTS
TD-SCDMA UE (R&S FSW-K77)
MTDS
TD-SCDMA UE
Transient Analysis (R&S FSW-K60)
TA
Transient Analysis
Verizon 5GTF Measurement Application (V5GTF, R&S FSW-K118)
V5GT
V5GT
VSA (R&S FSW-K70)
DDEM
VSA
WLAN (R&S FSW-K91)
WLAN
WLAN
*) If the specified name for a new channel already exists, the default name, extended by a sequential number, is used for the new channel.
INSTrument:MODE <OpMode>
The operating mode of the R&S FSW determines which applications are available and active. Whenever you change the operating mode, the currently active channels are closed. The default operating mode is Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode, however, the presetting can be changed.
For details on operating modes and applications see Chapter 5, "Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes", on page 107.
Parameters: <OpMode>
SANalyzer Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode
MSRanalyzer Multi-Standard Radio Analysis (MSRA) mode
RTMStandard Multi-Standard Real-Time (MSRT) mode Only available if one of the real-time options is installed.
*RST:
SAN
Example:
INST:MODE MSR Switches to Multi-Standard Radio Analysis (MSRA) mode.
Manual operation: See "Switching the operating mode" on page 118
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
876
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Selecting the Operating Mode and Application
INSTrument:REName <ChannelName1>, <ChannelName2>
This command renames a channel.
Setting parameters: <ChannelName1> String containing the name of the channel you want to rename.
<ChannelName2>
String containing the new channel name. Note that you cannot assign an existing channel name to a new channel; this will cause an error. Channel names can have a maximum of 31 characters, and must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names. In particular, they must not contain special characters such as ":", "*", "?".
Example:
INST:REN 'IQAnalyzer2','IQAnalyzer3' Renames the channel with the name 'IQAnalyzer2' to 'IQAnalyzer3'.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See "Changing the Channel Name" on page 82
INSTrument[:SELect] <ChannelType> | <ChannelName>
This command activates a new channel with the defined channel type, or selects an existing channel with the specified name.
Also see
INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] on page 873
Chapter 13.4.3, "Programming Example: Performing a Sequence of Measurements", on page 880
Parameters: <ChannelType>
Channel type of the new channel. For a list of available channel types see INSTrument:LIST? on page 875.
<ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel.
Example:
INST IQ Activates a channel for the I/Q Analyzer application (evaluation mode). INST 'MyIQSpectrum' Selects the channel named 'MyIQSpectrum' (for example before executing further commands for that channel).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
877
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Selecting the Operating Mode and Application
Manual operation:
See "Spectrum" on page 110 See "1xEV-DO BTS" on page 110 See "1xEV-DO MS" on page 111 See "3G FDD BTS" on page 111 See "3G FDD UE" on page 111 See "5G NR" on page 111 See "802.11ad" on page 111 See "802.11ay" on page 112 See "Amplifier" on page 112 See "AM/FM/PM Modulation Analysis" on page 112 See "Avionics" on page 112 See "cdma2000 BTS" on page 112 See "cdma2000 MS" on page 113 See "(Multi-Carrier) Group Delay" on page 113 See "GSM" on page 113 See "I/Q Analyzer" on page 113 See "LTE" on page 113 See "NB-IoT" on page 113 See "Noise Figure" on page 114 See "OneWeb" on page 114 See "Phase Noise" on page 114 See "Pulse Measurements" on page 114 See "Real-Time Spectrum" on page 114 See "Fast Spur Search" on page 115 See "TD-SCDMA BTS" on page 115 See "TD-SCDMA UE" on page 115 See "Transient Analysis" on page 115 See "Verizon 5GTF Measurement Application (V5GTF)" on page 115 See "Vector Signal Analysis (VSA)" on page 116 See "WLAN" on page 116 See "DOCSIS 3.1" on page 116 See "Selecting an application" on page 118 See "New Channel" on page 118
13.4.2 Performing a Sequence of Measurements
The following commands control the sequencer. For details on the Sequencer see Chapter 5.4.1, "The Sequencer Concept", on page 119. INITiate:SEQuencer:ABORt............................................................................................ 878 INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate....................................................................................... 879 INITiate:SEQuencer:MODE.............................................................................................879 SYSTem:SEQuencer...................................................................................................... 880
INITiate:SEQuencer:ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
878
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Selecting the Operating Mode and Application
You can start a new sequence any time using INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate on page 879.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See " Sequencer State " on page 121
INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate
This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer.
Its effect is similar to the INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] command used for a single measurement.
Before this command can be executed, the Sequencer must be activated (see SYSTem:SEQuencer on page 880).
Example:
SYST:SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer. INIT:SEQ:MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once. INIT:SEQ:IMM Starts the sequential measurements.
Manual operation: See " Sequencer State " on page 121
INITiate:SEQuencer:MODE <Mode>
Defines the capture mode for the entire measurement sequence and all measurement groups and channels it contains.
Note: In order to synchronize to the end of a measurement sequence using *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI you must use SINGle Sequence mode.
Parameters: <Mode>
SINGle Each measurement group is started one after the other in the order of definition. All measurement channels in a group are started simultaneously and performed once. After all measurements are completed, the next group is started. After the last group, the measurement sequence is finished.
CONTinuous Each measurement group is started one after the other in the order of definition. All measurement channels in a group are started simultaneously and performed once. After all measurements are completed, the next group is started. After the last group, the measurement sequence restarts with the first one and continues until it is stopped explicitely.
*RST:
CONTinuous
Manual operation: See " Sequencer Mode " on page 122
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
879
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Selecting the Operating Mode and Application
SYSTem:SEQuencer <State>
This command turns the Sequencer on and off. The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands (INIT:SEQ...) are executed, otherwise an error will occur.
A detailed programming example is provided in Chapter 13.4.3, "Programming Example: Performing a Sequence of Measurements", on page 880.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
ON | 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately.
OFF | 0 The Sequencer is deactivated. Any running sequential measurements are stopped. Further Sequencer commands (INIT:SEQ...) are not available.
*RST:
0
Example:
SYST:SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer. INIT:SEQ:MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once. INIT:SEQ:IMM Starts the sequential measurements. SYST:SEQ OFF
Manual operation: See " Sequencer State " on page 121
13.4.3 Programming Example: Performing a Sequence of Measurements
This example demonstrates how to perform several measurements in a sequence in a remote environment.
//2xSpectrumanalyzer + 2xIQ, start Sequencer at the end, test OPC? // ------------------------------------------------------------------------
//------Preparing the instrument and first channel ----------*RST //Activate new IQ channel INSTrument:CREate:NEW IQ,'IQ 1' //Set sweep count for new IQ channel SENS:SWEEP:COUNT 6 //Change trace modes for IQ channel DISP:TRAC1:MODE BLANK DISP:TRAC2:MODE MAXH DISP:TRAC3:MODE MINH
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
880
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Selecting the Operating Mode and Application
//Switch to single sweep mode INIT:CONT OFF //switch back to first (default) analyzer channel INST:SEL 'Spectrum';*WAI //Switch into SEM SENSe:SWEep:MODE ESPectrum //Load Sem standard file for W-CDMA SENSe:ESPectrum:PRESet:STANdard 'WCDMA\3GPP\DL\3GPP_DL.xml' //Set sweep count in Spectrum channel SENS:SWEEP:COUNT 5
//----------Creating a second measurement channel ----------------
//Create second IQ channel INSTrument:CREate:NEW IQ,'IQ 2' //Set sweep count SENS:SWEEP:COUNT 2 //Change trace modes DISP:TRAC1:MODE MAXH DISP:TRAC2:MODE MINH //Create new analyzer channel INSTrument:CREate:NEW SANalyzer,'Spectrum 2' //Activate ACLR measurement in channel 'Spectrum 2' CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect ACPower //Load W-CDMA Standard CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet FW3Gppcdma //Change trace modes DISP:TRAC2:MODE MAXH DISP:TRAC1:MODE MINH
//--------Performing a sweep and retrieving results----------------
//Change sweep count
SENS:SWEep:COUNt 7
//Single Sweep mode
INIT:CONT OFF
//Switch back to first IQ channel
INST:SEL 'IQ 1';*WAI
//Perform a measurement
INIT:IMM;*OPC?
//Retrieve results
CALC:MARK:Y?
//Activate Multiview
DISPlay:ATAB
ON
//---------Performing a sequence of measurements with the Sequencer-----------//Activate Sequencer SYSTem:SEQuencer ON //Start sweep in Sequencer INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate;*OPC?
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
881
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
//Switch into first IQ channel to get results INST:SEL 'IQ 1';*WAI CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum CALC:MARK:Y? //Change sweep time in IQ SENS:SWE:TIME 300us //Switch to single Sequencer mode INITiate:SEQuencer:MODE SINGle //Sweep all channels once, taking the sweep count in each channel into account INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate;*OPC? //Set marker to maximum in IQ1 and query result CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum CALC:MARK:Y? //Switch to second IQ channel and retrieve results INST:SEL 'IQ 2';*WAI CALCulate:MARKer:MIN CALC:MARK:Y? //Switch to first Spectrum channel INST:SEL 'Spectrum';*WAI //Query one of the SEM results CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? CPOWer //Switch to second Spectrum channel INST:SEL 'Spectrum 2';*WAI //Query channel power result CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? ACPower
13.5 Configuring and Performing Measurements
The following commands are required to configure measurements in a remote environment. The tasks for manual operation are described in Chapter 6, "Measurements and Results", on page 124.
Performing Measurements....................................................................................883 Configuring Power Measurements........................................................................886 Measuring the Channel Power and ACLR............................................................ 890 Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio................................................................... 949 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth..................................................................... 950 Remote Commands for Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurements...................... 952 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask..............................................................968 Measuring Spurious Emissions...........................................................................1005 Analyzing Statistics (APD, CCDF)...................................................................... 1020 Measuring the Time Domain Power....................................................................1030 Measuring the Harmonic Distortion.....................................................................1040 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point..........................................................1044 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth..................................................................1047 Remote Commands for EMI Measurements.......................................................1049 List Evaluations...................................................................................................1058 Measuring the Pulse Power................................................................................ 1062
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
882
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
13.5.1 Performing Measurements
Useful commands for performing measurements described elsewhere
INITiate<n>:ESPectrum on page 971 INITiate<n>:SPURious on page 1006
Remote commands exclusive for performing measurements:
ABORt.......................................................................................................................... 883 INITiate<n>:CONMeas................................................................................................... 884 INITiate<n>:CONTinuous................................................................................................ 884 INITiate<n>[:IMMediate]..................................................................................................885 [SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt:CURRent?................................................................................ 885
ABORt
This command aborts the measurement in the current channel and resets the trigger system.
To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measurement has been aborted successfully, use the *OPC? or *WAI command after ABOR and before the next command.
For details see Chapter 12.1.6.1, "Preventing Overlapping Execution", on page 792.
Note on blocked remote control programs:
If a sequential command cannot be completed, for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger, the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R&S FSW is blocked for further commands. In this case, you must interrupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement.
To do so, send a "Device Clear" command from the control instrument to the R&S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels. Depending on the used interface and protocol, send the following commands:
Visa: viClear() GPIB: ibclr() RSIB: RSDLLibclr()
Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the measurement.
Example:
ABOR;:INIT:IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one.
Example:
ABOR;*WAI INIT:IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed.
Usage:
Event
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
883
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
INITiate<n>:CONMeas
This command restarts a (single) measurement that has been stopped (using ABORt) or finished in single sweep mode.
The measurement is restarted at the beginning, not where the previous measurement was stopped.
As opposed to INITiate<n>[:IMMediate], this command does not reset traces in maxhold, minhold or average mode. Therefore it can be used to continue measurements using maxhold or averaging functions.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
Example:
INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging. SWE:COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps. INIT;*WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps. INIT:CONM;*WAI Continues the measurement (next 20 sweeps) and waits for the end. Result: Averaging is performed over 40 sweeps.
Manual operation: See " Continue Single Sweep " on page 472
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous <State>
This command controls the sweep mode for an individual channel.
Note that in single sweep mode, you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI. In continuous sweep mode, synchronization to the end of the measurement is not possible. Thus, it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control, as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization.
For details on synchronization see Chapter 12.1.6, "Command Sequence and Synchronization", on page 791.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
ON | 1 Continuous sweep
OFF | 0 Single sweep
*RST:
1
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
884
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Manual operation:
INIT:CONT OFF Switches the sweep mode to single sweep. INIT:CONT ON Switches the sweep mode to continuous sweep.
See " Frequency Sweep " on page 126 See " Zero Span " on page 126 See " Continuous Sweep / Run Cont " on page 472
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate]
This command starts a (single) new measurement.
With sweep count or average count > 0, this means a restart of the corresponding number of measurements. With trace mode MAXHold, MINHold and AVERage, the previous results are reset on restarting the measurement.
You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI.
For details on synchronization see Chapter 12.1.6, "Command Sequence and Synchronization", on page 791.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
Example:
INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging. SWE:COUN 20 Sets the sweep counter to 20 sweeps. INIT;*WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps.
Manual operation:
See " Frequency Sweep " on page 126 See " Zero Span " on page 126 See " Single Sweep / Run Single " on page 471
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt:CURRent?
This query returns the current number of started sweeps or measurements. This command is only available if a sweep count value is defined and the instrument is in single sweep mode.
Return values: <CurrentCount>
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
885
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Usage:
SWE:COUNt 64 Sets sweep count to 64 INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT Starts a sweep (without waiting for the sweep end!) SWE:COUN:CURR? Queries the number of started sweeps
Query only
13.5.2 Configuring Power Measurements
The following commands work for several power measurements.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:MODE............................................... 886 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult?............................................. 886 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:SELect.............................................. 888 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>[:STATe]..............................................889 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet................................................................................ 889 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel.....................................................................890 [SENSe:]POWer:TRACe................................................................................................. 890
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the trace display mode for power measurements.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
<sb>
irrelevant
Parameters: <Mode>
WRITe | MAXHold
WRITe The power is calculated from the current trace.
MAXHold The power is calculated from the current trace and compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm.
Manual operation: See " Power Mode " on page 167
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? <Measurement>
This command queries the results of power measurements.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
886
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
<sb>
Sub block in a Multi-standard radio measurement; MSR ACLR: 1 to 8 Multi-SEM: 1 to 8 for all other measurements: irrelevant
Parameters: <Measurement>
ACPower | MCACpower ACLR measurements (also known as adjacent channel power or multicarrier adjacent channel measurements). Returns the power for every active transmission and adjacent channel. The order is: � power of the transmission channels � power of adjacent channel (lower,upper) � power of alternate channels (lower,upper) MSR ACLR results: For MSR ACLR measurements, the order of the returned results is slightly different: � power of the transmission channels � total power of the transmission channels for each sub block � power of adjacent channels (lower, upper) � power of alternate channels (lower, upper) � power of gap channels (lower1, upper1, lower2, upper2) The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the yaxis: � logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit � linear scaling returns the power in W
GACLr For MSR ACLR measurements only: returns a list of ACLR values for each gap channel (lower1, upper1, lower2, upper2)
MACM For MSR ACLR measurements only: returns a list of CACLR values for each gap channel (lower1, upper1, lower2, upper2)
CN Carrier-to-noise measurements. Returns the C/N ratio in dB.
CN0 Carrier-to-noise measurements. Returns the C/N ratio referenced to a 1 Hz bandwidth in dBm/Hz.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
887
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Manual operation:
CPOWer Channel power measurements. Returns the channel power. The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y-axis: � logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit � linear scaling returns the power in W For SEM measurements, the return value is the channel power of the reference range (in the specified sub block).
PPOWer Peak power measurements. Returns the peak power. The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y-axis: � logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit � linear scaling returns the power in W For SEM measurements, the return value is the peak power of the reference range (in the specified sub block). Note that this result is only available if the power reference type is set to peak power (see [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RTYPe on page 989).
OBANdwidth | OBWidth Occupied bandwidth. Returns the occupied bandwidth in Hz.
COBandwidth | COBWidth <Centroid frequency>,<Frequency offset> See Chapter 6.4.2, "OBW Results", on page 208
See " C/N " on page 205 See " C/N0 " on page 205
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:SELect <MeasType>
This command selects a power measurement and turns the measurement on.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
<sb>
irrelevant
Parameters: <MeasType>
ACPower | MCACpower Adjacent channel leakage ratio (ACLR), also known as adjacent channel power or multicarrier adjacent channel. The R&S FSW performs the measurement on the trace selected with [SENSe:]POWer:TRACe.
CPOWer Channel power measurement with a single carrier. The R&S FSW performs the measurement on the trace selected with [SENSe:]POWer:TRACe.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
888
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Manual operation:
OBANdwidth | OBWidth Occupied bandwidth measurement. The R&S FSW performs the measurement on the trace that marker 1 is positioned on.
CN Carrier-to-noise ratio measurement.
CN0 Carrier-to-noise ratio measurement referenced to 1 Hz bandwidth
See " C/N " on page 205 See " C/N0 " on page 205
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>[:STATe] <State>
This command turns a power measurement on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
<sb>
irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
ON | 1 The power measurement selected with CALCulate<n>: MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:SELect is activated.
OFF | 0 A standard frequency sweep is activated.
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See " C/N " on page 205 See " C/N0 " on page 205
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet <Measurement>
This command determines the ideal span, bandwidths and detector for the current power measurement.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Parameters: <Measurement>
ACPower | MCACpower ACLR measurement
CPOWer channel power measurement
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
889
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Manual operation:
OBANdwidth | OBWidth Occupied bandwidth measurement
CN Carrier to noise ratio
CN0 Carrier to noise ration referenced to a 1 Hz bandwidth
See "Optimized Settings ( Adjust Settings )" on page 167 See " Adjust Settings " on page 205 See " Adjust Settings " on page 210
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel
This command determines the ideal reference level for the current measurement.
This automatic routine makes sure that the that the signal power level does not overload the R&S FSW or limit the dynamic range by too small a S/N ratio.
To determine the best reference level, the R&S FSW aborts current measurements and performs a series of test sweeps. After it has finished the test, it continues with the actual measurement.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end. This is only possible in single sweep mode.
[SENSe:]POWer:TRACe <TraceNumber>
This command selects the trace channel power measurements are performed on.
For the measurement to work, the corresponding trace has to be active.
Parameters: <TraceNumber>
Range: *RST:
1 to 6 1
Example:
POW:TRAC 2 Assigns the measurement to trace 2.
Manual operation: See " Selected Trace " on page 166
13.5.3 Measuring the Channel Power and ACLR
All remote control commands specific to channel power or ACLR measurements are described here.
See also Chapter 13.5.2, "Configuring Power Measurements", on page 886.
Managing Measurement Configurations............................................................... 891 Configuring the Channels......................................................................................892 Defining Weighting Filters..................................................................................... 897
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
890
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Selecting the Reference Channel......................................................................... 899 Checking Limits.....................................................................................................900 General ACLR Measurement Settings..................................................................907 Configuring MSR ACLR Measurements............................................................... 908 Performing an ACLR Measurement...................................................................... 938 Retrieving and Analyzing Measurement Results.................................................. 938 Programming Examples for Channel Power Measurements................................ 942
13.5.3.1 Managing Measurement Configurations
The following commands control measurement configurations for ACLR measurements.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet............................................. 891 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:CATalog?........................... 891 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:DELete.............................. 892 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:SAVE.................................892
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet <Standard>
This command loads a measurement configuration.
The measurement configuration for power measurements consists of weighting filter, channel bandwidth and spacing, resolution and video bandwidth, detector and sweep time.
If the "Multi-Standard Radio" standard is selected (see " Standard " on page 163), different commands are required to configure ACLR measurements (see Chapter 13.5.3.7, "Configuring MSR ACLR Measurements", on page 908).
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
<sb>
irrelevant
Parameters: <Standard>
For more information see Chapter 6.2.9, "Reference: Predefined CP/ACLR Standards", on page 200. If you want to load a customized configuration, the parameter is a string containing the file name.
Manual operation: See " Predefined Standards " on page 163 See " User Standards " on page 163
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:CATalog?
This command queries all files containing ACLR standards.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
891
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
<sb>
Return values: <Standards> Usage: Manual operation:
Sub block in a Multi-standard radio measurement; MSR ACLR: 1 to 8 Multi-SEM: 1 to 8 for all other measurements: irrelevant
List of standard files. Query only See " User Standards " on page 163
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:DELete <Standard>
This command deletes a file containing an ACLR standard.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
<sb>
irrelevant
Parameters: <Standard>
String containing the file name of the standard.
Manual operation: See " User Standards " on page 163
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:SAVE <Standard>
This command saves the current ACLR measurement configuration as a new ACLR standard.
The measurement configuration for power measurements consists of weighting filter, channel bandwidth and spacing, resolution and video bandwidth, detector and sweep time.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
<sb>
irrelevant
Parameters: <Standard>
String containing the file name. The file format is xml.
Manual operation: See " User Standards " on page 163
13.5.3.2 Configuring the Channels
The following commands configure channels for channel power and ACLR measurements.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
892
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs................................................................................ 893 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:ACHannel................................................................. 893 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel............................................................893 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:ALTernate<ch>.......................................................... 893 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate<ch>.....................................................893 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth[:CHANnel<ch>]......................................................... 894 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>].................................................... 894 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel...................................................................894 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<ch>............................................................ 895 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:CHANnel<ch>............................................................. 895 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel]............................................................. 895 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<ch>........................................................ 896 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<ch>......................................................... 896 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt................................................................897
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs <ChannelPairs>
This command defines the number of pairs of adjacent and alternate channels.
Parameters: <ChannelPairs>
Range: *RST:
0 to 12 1
Manual operation: See " Number of channels: Tx , Adj " on page 164 See " Number of Adjacent Channels ( Adj Count )" on page 180
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:ACHannel <Bandwidth> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel <Bandwidth>
This command defines the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channels.
The adjacent channels are the first channels to the left and right of the transmission channels. If you set the channel bandwidth for these channels, the R&S FSW sets the bandwidth of the alternate channels to the same value (not for MSR signals).
For asymmetrical MSR signals, this command defines the bandwidth of the lower adjacent channel. To configure the bandwidth for the upper adjacent channel, use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:UACHannel command.
Steep-edged channel filters are available for fast ACLR measurements.
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
Range: 100 Hz to 1000 MHz
*RST:
14 kHz
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See " Channel Bandwidth " on page 168 See " Adjacent Channel Bandwidths " on page 181
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:ALTernate<ch> <Bandwidth> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate<ch> <Bandwidth>
This command defines the channel bandwidth of the alternate channels.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
893
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
For MSR signals, this command defines the bandwidth of the lower alternate channels in asymmetrical configurations. To configure the bandwidth for the upper alternate channel, use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:UALTernate<ch> command.
If you set the channel bandwidth for the first alternate channel, the R&S FSW sets the bandwidth of the other alternate channels to the same value, but not the other way round (not for MSR signals). The command works hierarchically: to set a bandwidth of the 3rd and 4th channel, you have to set the bandwidth of the 3rd channel first.
Steep-edged channel filters are available for fast ACLR measurements.
Suffix: <ch>
. 1..n Alternate channel number
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
Range: 100 Hz to 1000 MHz
*RST:
14 kHz
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See " Channel Bandwidth " on page 168 See " Adjacent Channel Bandwidths " on page 181
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth[:CHANnel<ch>] <Bandwidth> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>] <Bandwidth>
This command defines the channel bandwidth of the transmission channels.
Steep-edged channel filters are available for fast ACLR measurements.
Suffix: <ch>
. 1..n Tx channel number
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
Range: 100 Hz to 1000 MHz
*RST:
14 kHz
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation:
See " Channel Bandwidth " on page 168 See " Channel Bandwidth " on page 205 See " Channel Bandwidth " on page 210
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel <Name>
This command defines a name for the adjacent channel.
For MSR ACLR measurements, this command defines the name for the lower adjacent channel in asymmetric channel definitions. To define the name for the upper adjacent channel use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UACHannel command.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
894
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Parameters: <Name>
Manual operation:
String containing the name of the channel
*RST:
ADJ
See " Channel Names " on page 171
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<ch> <Name>
This command defines a name for an alternate channel.
For MSR ACLR measurements, this command defines the name for the lower alternate channel in asymmetric channel definitions. To define the name for the upper alternate channels use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UALTernate<ch> command.
Suffix: <ch>
. 1..n Alternate channel number
Parameters: <Name>
String containing the name of the channel
*RST:
ALT<1...11>
Manual operation: See " Channel Names " on page 171
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:CHANnel<ch> <Name>
This command defines a name for a transmission channel.
Suffix: <ch>
. 1..n Tx channel number
Parameters: <Name>
String containing the name of the channel
*RST:
TX<1...12>
Manual operation: See " Channel Names " on page 171
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel] <Spacing>
This command defines the distance from transmission channel to adjacent channel.
For MSR signals, this command defines the distance from the CF of the first Tx channel in the first sub block to the lower adjacent channel. To configure the spacing for the upper adjacent channel in asymmetrical configurations, use the [SENSe:]POWer: ACHannel:SPACing:UACHannel command.
A change of the adjacent channel spacing causes a change in the spacing of all alternate channels below the adjacent channel (not for MSR signals).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
895
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Parameters: <Spacing>
Manual operation:
Range: 100 Hz to 2000 MHz
*RST:
14 kHz
Default unit: Hz
See " Channel Spacings " on page 169 See " Adjacent Channel Spacings " on page 181
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<ch> <Spacing>
This command defines the distance from transmission channel to alternate channels.
For MSR signals, this command defines the distance from the CF of the first Tx channel in the first sub block to the lower alternate channel. To configure the spacing for the upper alternate channel in asymmetrical configurations, use the [SENSe:]POWer: ACHannel:SPACing:UALTernate<ch> command.
If you set the channel spacing for the first alternate channel, the R&S FSW adjusts the spacing of alternate channels of a lower order, but not the other way round (not for MSR signals). The command works hierarchically: to set a distance from the transmission channel to the 2nd and 3rd alternate channel, you have to define a spacing for the 2nd alternate channel first.
Suffix: <ch>
. 1..n Alternate channel number
Parameters: <Spacing>
Range: 100 Hz to 2000 MHz
*RST:
40 kHz (ALT1), 60 kHz (ALT2), 80 kHz (ALT3), ...
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See " Channel Spacings " on page 169 See " Adjacent Channel Spacings " on page 181
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<ch> <Spacing>
This command defines the distance between transmission channels.
If you set the channel spacing for a transmission channel, the R&S FSW sets the spacing of the lower transmission channels to the same value, but not the other way round. The command works hierarchically: to set a distance between the 2nd and 3rd and 3rd and 4th channel, you have to set the spacing between the 2nd and 3rd channel first.
Suffix: <ch>
. 1..n Tx channel number
Parameters: <Spacing>
Range: 14 kHz to 2000 MHz
*RST:
20 kHz
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See " Channel Spacings " on page 169
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
896
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt <Number>
This command defines the number of transmission channels.
The command works for measurements in the frequency domain.
Parameters: <Number>
Range: *RST:
1 to 18 1
Manual operation: See " Number of channels: Tx , Adj " on page 164
13.5.3.3 Defining Weighting Filters
The following commands define weighting filters for ACLR measurements.
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel........................................................ 897 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa[:ALL]............................................................... 897 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<ch>................................................. 897 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:CHANnel<ch>.................................................. 898 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ACHannel....................................................... 898 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe][:ALL].............................................................. 898 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<ch>................................................ 899 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:CHANnel<ch>................................................. 899
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel <Alpha>
This command defines the roll-off factor for the adjacent channel weighting filter.
For asymmetrical MSR signals, this command defines the roll-off factor for the lower adjacent channel. To configure the factor for the upper adjacent channel, use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UACHannel command.
Parameters: <Alpha>
Roll-off factor
Range: *RST:
0 to 1 0.22
Manual operation: See " Weighting Filters " on page 170 See " Weighting Filters " on page 181
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa[:ALL] <Value>
This command defines the alpha value for the weighting filter for all channels.
Parameters: <Value>
*RST:
0.22
Example:
POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:ALL 0.35
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<ch> <Alpha> This command defines the roll-off factor for the alternate channel weighting filter.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
897
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
For asymmetrical MSR signals, this command defines the roll-off factor for the lower alternate channels. To configure the factor for the upper alterante channels, use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UALTernate<ch> command.
Suffix: <ch>
. 1..n Alternate channel number
Parameters: <Alpha>
Roll-off factor
Range: *RST:
0 to 1 0.22
Manual operation: See " Weighting Filters " on page 170 See " Weighting Filters " on page 181
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:CHANnel<ch> <Alpha>
This command defines the roll-off factor for the transmission channel weighting filter.
Suffix: <ch>
. 1..n Tx channel number
Parameters: <Alpha>
Roll-off factor
Range: *RST:
0 to 1 0.22
Manual operation: See " Weighting Filters " on page 170
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ACHannel <State>
This command turns the weighting filter for the adjacent channel on and off.
For asymmetrical MSR signals, this command turns the weighting filter for the lower adjacent channel on and off. To configure the filter state for the upper adjacent channel, use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UACHannel command.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See " Weighting Filters " on page 170 See " Weighting Filters " on page 181
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe][:ALL] <State> This command turns the weighting filters for all channels on and off.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
898
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<ch> <State>
This command turns the weighting filter for an alternate channel on and off.
For asymmetrical MSR signals, this command turns the weighting filter for the lower alternate channels on and off. To configure the filter state for the upper alternate channels, use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UALTernate<ch> command.
Suffix: <ch>
. 1..n Alternate channel number
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See " Weighting Filters " on page 170 See " Weighting Filters " on page 181
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:CHANnel<ch> <State>
This command turns the weighting filter for a transmission channel on and off.
Suffix: <ch>
. 1..n Tx channel number
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See " Weighting Filters " on page 170
13.5.3.4 Selecting the Reference Channel
The following commands define the reference channel for relative ACLR measurements.
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE....................................................... 899 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO................................................ 900 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual............................................. 900
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE
This command sets the channel power as the reference for relative ACLR measurements.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
899
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Usage: Manual operation:
POW:ACH:REF:AUTO ONCE
Event
See "Setting a fixed reference for Channel Power measurements ( Set CP Reference )" on page 167
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO <RefChannel>
This command selects the reference channel for relative measurements.
You need at least one channel for the command to work.
Parameters: <RefChannel>
MINimum | MAXimum | LHIGhest
MINimum Transmission channel with the lowest power
MAXimum Transmission channel with the highest power
LHIGhest Lowest transmission channel for lower adjacent channels and highest transmission channel for upper adjacent channels
Example:
POW:ACH:REF:TXCH:AUTO MAX Selects the channel with the peak power as reference channel.
Manual operation: See " Reference Channel " on page 165
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual <ChannelNumber>
This command defines a reference channel for relative ACLR measurements.
You need at least one channel for the command to work.
Note that this command is not available for MSR ACLR measurements (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 891).
Parameters: <ChannelNumber>
Range: *RST:
1 to 18 1
Manual operation: See " Reference Channel " on page 165
13.5.3.5 Checking Limits
The following commands configure and query limit checks for channel power and ACLR measurements.
The results of the power limit checks are also indicated in the STAT:QUES:ACPL status registry (see "STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register" on page 802).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
900
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute..................................................... 901 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe........................................... 901 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]....................................................902 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult?....................................................... 902 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe..........................................903 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute.............................................. 904 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute:STATe.................................... 904 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative]............................................. 905 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:RESult?................................................ 905 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative]:STATe...................................906 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe]....................................................................... 906
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute <LowerLimit>[, <UpperLimit>]
This command defines the absolute limit of the adjacent channels.
If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
Parameters: <LowerLimit>
The limit of the lower adjacent channel.
Range: -200 dBm to 200 dBm
*RST:
-200 dBm
Default unit: dBm
<UpperLimit>
The limit of the upper adjacent channel.
Range: -200 dBm to 200 dBm
*RST:
-200 dBm
Default unit: dBm
Manual operation: See " Limit Check " on page 170 See " Limit Checking " on page 182
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe <State>[, <State>]
This command turns the absolute limit check for the adjacent channels on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
901
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Parameters: <State>
<State>
Manual operation:
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Absolute limit check for lower adjacent channel
*RST:
0
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Absolute limit check for upper adjacent channel
*RST:
0
See " Limit Check " on page 170 See " Limit Checking " on page 182
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative] <LowerLimit>[, <UpperLimit>]
This command defines the relative limit of the adjacent channels. The reference value for the relative limit is the measured channel power.
If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
Parameters: <LowerLimit>
The limit of the lower adjacent channel.
Range: 0 dB to 100 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Default unit: dB
<UpperLimit>
The limit of the upper adjacent channel.
Range: 0 dB to 100 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Default unit: dB
Manual operation: See " Limit Check " on page 170 See " Limit Checking " on page 182
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult?
This command queries the state of the limit check for the adjacent channels in an ACLR measurement.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
902
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
<li> Return values: <LowerACH>
<UpperACH>
Example: Usage: Manual operation:
irrelevant
text value Thestate of the limit check for the lower adjacent channels. PASSED Limit check has passed. FAIL Limit check has failed.
text value The state of the limit check for the upper adjacent channels. PASSED Limit check has passed. FAIL Limit check has failed.
INIT:IMM;*WAI; CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES? PASSED,PASSED
Query only
See " Limit Check " on page 170 See " Limit Checking " on page 182
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe <State>[, <State>]
This command turns the relative limit check for the adjacent channels on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Relative limit check for lower adjacent channel
*RST:
0
<State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Relative limit check for upper adjacent channel
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See " Limit Check " on page 170 See " Limit Checking " on page 182
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
903
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute <LowerLimit>[, <UpperLimit>]
This command defines the absolute limit of the alternate channels.
If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<ch>
1..n Alternate channel number
Parameters: <LowerLimit>
The limit of the lower adjacent channel.
Range: -200 dBm to 200 dBm
*RST:
-200 dBm
Default unit: dBm
<UpperLimit>
The limit of the upper adjacent channel.
Range: -200 dBm to 200 dBm
*RST:
-200 dBm
Default unit: dBm
Manual operation: See " Limit Check " on page 170 See " Limit Checking " on page 182
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute:STATe <State>[, <State>]
This command turns the absolute limit check for the alternate channels on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<ch>
1..n Alternate channel number
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Absolute limit check for lower alternate channel
*RST:
0
<State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Absolute limit check for upper alternate channel
*RST:
0
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
904
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Manual operation: See " Limit Check " on page 170 See " Limit Checking " on page 182
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative] <LowerLimit>[, <UpperLimit>]
This command defines the relative limit of the alternate channels. The reference value for the relative limit is the measured channel power.
If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<ch>
1..n Alternate channel number
Parameters: <LowerLimit>
The limit of the lower alternate channel.
Range: 0 dB to 100 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Default unit: dB
<UpperLimit>
The limit of the upper alternate channel.
Range: 0 dB to 100 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Default unit: dB
Manual operation: See " Limit Check " on page 170 See " Limit Checking " on page 182
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:RESult?
This command queries the state of the limit check for the adjacent or alternate channels in an ACLR measurement.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<ch>
Alternate channel number
Return values: <LowerChan>
text value
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
905
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
<UpperChan>
Example: Usage:
The state of the limit check for the lower alternate or adjacent channels.
PASSED Limit check has passed.
FAIL Limit check has failed.
text value
The state of the limit check for the upper alternate or adjacent channels.
PASSED Limit check has passed.
FAIL Limit check has failed.
INIT:IMM;*WAI; CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES? PASSED,PASSED
Query only
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative]:STATe <State>[, <State>]
This command turns the relative limit check for the alternate channels on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<ch>
1..n Alternate channel number
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Relative limit check for lower alternate channel
*RST:
0
<State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Relative limit check for upper alternate channel
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See " Limit Check " on page 170 See " Limit Checking " on page 182
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe] <State> This command turns the limit check for ACLR measurements on and off.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
906
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
In addition, limits must be defined and activated individually for each channel (see CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe, CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative]:STATe, CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:ABSolute:STATe,
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:ACLR[:RELative]: STATe and CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO][: CACLr][:RELative]:STATe).
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Manual operation:
See " Limit Check " on page 170 See " Limit Checking " on page 176 See " Limit Checking " on page 182
13.5.3.6 General ACLR Measurement Settings
The following commands control the measurement algorithm. Useful commands for the ACLR measurement described elsewhere: [SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection on page 1148 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 889 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel on page 890 [SENSe:]POWer:TRACe on page 890 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:MODE on page 886
Remote commands exclusive to ACLR measurement [SENSe:]POWer:HSPeed............................................................................................... 907
[SENSe:]POWer:HSPeed <State>
This command turns high speed ACLR and channel power measurements on and off.
If on, the R&S FSW performs a measurement on each channel in the time domain. It returns to the frequency domain when the measurement is done.
In some telecommunications standards, high speed measurements use weighting filters with characteristic or steep-edged channel filters for band limitation.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
POW:HSP ON
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
907
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Manual operation: See " Fast ACLR " on page 166
13.5.3.7 Configuring MSR ACLR Measurements
If the "Multi-Standard Radio" standard is selected (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>: FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 891), the channels for the ACLR measurement are configured differently. (For more information see Chapter 6.2.3.4, "Measurement on Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Signals", on page 156.)
In this case, use the following commands.
General MSR ACLR Measurement Settings.........................................................908 MSR Sub Block and Tx Channel Setup................................................................ 908 MSR Adjacent Channel Setup...............................................................................911 General Gap Channel Setup.................................................................................916 Automatic (Symmetrical) Configuration.................................................................917 Manual (Asymmetrical) Configuration................................................................... 922 MSR Channel Names........................................................................................... 936
General MSR ACLR Measurement Settings
Useful commands for configuring general MSR ACLR settings described elsewhere: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 891 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 886 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult:PHZ
on page 940 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:MODE on page 886 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe] on page 906 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO on page 900 [SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection on page 1148 [SENSe:]POWer:TRACe on page 890 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE on page 941 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 889 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SSETup on page 914
MSR Sub Block and Tx Channel Setup
The functions for manual operation are described in Chapter 6.2.5.2, "MSR Sub Block and Tx Channel Definition", on page 177.
Useful commands for configuring Tx channels described elsewhere: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:NAME[:CHANnel<ch>]
on page 937
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
908
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Remote commands exclusive to configuring sub blocks and Tx channels
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:SBLock<sb>:CHANnel<ch>............................... 909 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:SBLock<sb>:CHANnel<ch>.............................. 909 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBCount............................................................................... 909 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:BWIDth[:CHANnel<ch>]...................................... 910 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>].................................910 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:CENTer[:CHANnel<ch>]...................................... 910 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:FREQuency:CENTer........................................... 911
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:SBLock<sb>:CHANnel<ch> <Alpha>
This command defines the roll-off factor for the specified transmission channel's weighting filter.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 sub block number
<ch>
1..n Tx channel number
Parameters: <Alpha>
Roll-off factor
Range: *RST:
0 to 1 0.22
Manual operation: See " Weighting Filters " on page 179
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:SBLock<sb>:CHANnel<ch> <State>
This command turns the weighting filter for the specified transmission channel on and off.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 sub block number
<ch>
1..n Tx channel number
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
W-CDMA: 1, other technologies: 0
Manual operation: See " Weighting Filters " on page 179
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBCount <Number>
This command defines the number of sub blocks, i.e. groups of transmission channels in an MSR signal.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
909
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
For more information see Chapter 6.2.3.4, "Measurement on Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Signals", on page 156.
Parameters: <Number>
Range: *RST:
1 to 8 1
Manual operation: See " Number of Sub Blocks " on page 174
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:BWIDth[:CHANnel<ch>] <Bandwidth> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>]
<Bandwidth>
This command defines the bandwidth of the specified MSR Tx channel.
This command is for MSR signals only (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>: FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 891).
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 sub block number
<ch>
1..n Tx channel number
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
Bandwidth in Hz Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See " Tx Channel Bandwidth " on page 179
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:CENTer[:CHANnel<ch>] <Frequency>
This command defines the (absolute) center frequency of the specified MSR Tx channel.
Note that the position of the first Tx channel in the first sub block and the last Tx channel in the last sub block also affect the position of the adjacent channels.
This command is for MSR signals only (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>: FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 891).
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 sub block number
<ch>
1..n Tx channel number
Parameters: <Frequency>
absolute frequency in Hz Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See " Tx Center Frequency " on page 178
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
910
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:FREQuency:CENTer <Frequency>
This command defines the center of the specified MSR sub block. Note that the position of the sub block also affects the position of the adjacent gap (CACLR) channels.
This command is for MSR signals only (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>: FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 891).
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 sub block number
Parameters: <Frequency>
absolute frequency in Hz Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See " Sub Block / Center Freq " on page 178
MSR Adjacent Channel Setup
The functions for manual operation are described in Chapter 6.2.5, "MSR ACLR Configuration", on page 171.
Useful commands for MSR adjacent channel setup described elsewhere:
Chapter 13.5.3.5, "Checking Limits", on page 900
"MSR Channel Names" on page 936
Remote commands exclusive to MSR adjacent channel setup:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:RFBWidth.......................................................... 911 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:TECHnology[:CHANnel<ch>]............................... 912 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:TXCHannel:COUNt............................................ 913 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:UACHannel............................................................. 913 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:UALTernate<ch>...................................................... 913 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SSETup................................................................................ 914 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:UACHannel...............................................................914 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:UACHannel......................................................... 914 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:UALTernate<ch>........................................................914 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:UALTernate<ch>.................................................. 914 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UACHannel......................................................915 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UALTernate<ch>...............................................915 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UACHannel..................................................... 915 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UALTernate<ch>.............................................. 916
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:RFBWidth <Bandwidth>
This command defines the bandwidth of the individual MSR sub block. Note that sub block ranges also affect the position of the adjacent gap channels (CACLR).
This command is for MSR signals only (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>: FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 891).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
911
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Suffix: <sb>
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
Manual operation:
. 1 to 8 sub block number
Bandwidth in Hz Default unit: Hz See " RF Bandwidth " on page 178
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:TECHnology[:CHANnel<ch>] <Standard>
This command defines the technology used for transmission by the specified MSR Tx channel.
This command is for MSR signals only (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>: FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 891).
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 sub block number
<ch>
1..n Tx channel number
Parameters: <Standard>
Technology used for transmission
GSM Transmission according to GSM standard
WCDMa Transmission according to W-CDMA standard
LTE_1_40 | LTE_3_00 | LTE_5_00 | LTE_10_00 | LTE_15_00 | LTE_20_00 Transmission according to LTE standard for different channel bandwidths
NR5G_fr1_5 | NR5G_fr1_10 | NR5G_fr1_15 | NR5G_fr1_20 | NR5G_fr1_25 | NR5G_fr1_30 | NR5G_fr1_40 | NR5G_fr1_50 | NR5G_fr1_60 | NR5G_fr1_70 | NR5G_fr1_80 | NR5G_fr1_90 | NR5G_fr1_100 | NR5G_fr2_50 | NR5G_fr2_100 | NR5G_fr2_200 | NR5G_fr2_400 Transmission according to new radio 5G standard
USER User-defined transmission; no automatic preconfiguration possible
Manual operation: See " Technology Used for Transmission " on page 179
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
912
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:TXCHannel:COUNt <Number>
This command defines the number of transmission channels the specific sub block contains.
This command is for MSR signals only (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>: FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 891).
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 sub block number
Parameters: <Number>
Range: *RST:
1 to 18 1
Manual operation: See " Number of Tx Channels ( Tx Count )" on page 178
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:UACHannel <Spacing>
This command defines the distance from the transmission channel to the upper adjacent channel.
For MSR signals, this command defines the distance from the CF of the last Tx channel in the last sub block to the upper adjacent channel in asymmetrical configurations. To configure the spacing for the lower adjacent channel use the [SENSe:]POWer: ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel] command.
Parameters: <Spacing>
Range: 100 Hz to 2000 MHz
*RST:
14 kHz
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See " Adjacent Channel Spacings " on page 181
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:UALTernate<ch> <Spacing>
This command defines the distance from transmission channel to the upper alternate channels.
For MSR signals, this command defines the distance from the CF of the last Tx channel in the last sub block to the upper alternate channel in asymmetrical configurations. To configure the spacing for the lower alternate channel, use the [SENSe:]POWer: ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<ch> command.
Suffix: <ch>
. 1..n Alternate channel number
Parameters: <Spacing>
Range: 100 Hz to 2000 MHz
*RST:
40 kHz (ALT1), 60 kHz (ALT2), 80 kHz (ALT3), ...
Default unit: Hz
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
913
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Manual operation: See " Adjacent Channel Spacings " on page 181
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SSETup <State>
This command defines whether adjacent channels are defined symmetrically or not.
For more information see Chapter 6.2.3.4, "Measurement on Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Signals", on page 156.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
ON | 1 The upper and lower adjacent and alternate channels are defined symmetrically. This is the default behaviour and corresponds to the behavior in firmware versions before 2.10.
OFF | 0 The upper and lower channels can be configured differently.
*RST:
1
Manual operation: See " Symmetrical Adjacent Setup " on page 176
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:UACHannel <Bandwidth> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:UACHannel <Bandwidth>
This command defines the channel bandwidth of the upper adjacent channel in asymmetrical configurations.
The adjacent channel is the first pair of channels next to the transmission channels. To configure the bandwidth for the lower adjacent channel, use the [SENSe:]POWer: ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel command.
Steep-edged channel filters are available for fast ACLR measurements.
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
Range: 100 Hz to 1000 MHz
*RST:
14 kHz
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See " Adjacent Channel Bandwidths " on page 181
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:UALTernate<ch> <Bandwidth> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:UALTernate<ch> <Bandwidth>
This command defines the channel bandwidth of the upper alternate channels in asymmetrical configurations. To configure the bandwidth for the lower alternate channel, use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate<ch> command.
Steep-edged channel filters are available for fast ACLR measurements.
Suffix: <ch>
. 1..n Alternate channel number
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
914
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
Manual operation:
Range: 100 Hz to 1000 MHz
*RST:
14 kHz
Default unit: Hz
See " Adjacent Channel Bandwidths " on page 181
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UACHannel <Alpha>
This command defines the roll-off factor for the upper adjacent channel weighting filter for asymmetrical MSR signals. To configure the factor for the upper adjacent channel, use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel command.
Parameters: <Alpha>
Roll-off factor
Range: *RST:
0 to 1 0.22
Manual operation: See " Weighting Filters " on page 181
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UALTernate<ch> <Alpha>
This command defines the roll-off factor for the upper alternate channels' weighting filter for asymmetrical MSR signals. To configure the factor for the upper alternate channels, use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<ch> command.
Suffix: <ch>
. 1..n Alternate channel number
Parameters: <Alpha>
Roll-off factor
Range: *RST:
0 to 1 0.22
Manual operation: See " Weighting Filters " on page 181
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UACHannel <State>
This command turns the weighting filter for the upper adjacent channel on and off for asymmetrical MSR signals. To configure the factor for the lower adjacent channel, use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ACHannel command.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See " Weighting Filters " on page 181
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
915
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UALTernate<ch> <State>
This command turns the weighting filter for the upper alternate channels on and off for asymmetrical MSR signals. To configure the factor for the lower alternate channels, use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<ch> command.
Suffix: <ch>
. 1..n Alternate channel number
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See " Weighting Filters " on page 181
General Gap Channel Setup
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:AGCHannels......................................................................... 916 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GAP<gap>:MODE................................................................. 916
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:AGCHannels <State>
This command activates or deactivates gap channels in an MSR signal.
For more information see Chapter 6.2.3.4, "Measurement on Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Signals", on page 156.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
ON | 1 The gap channels are displayed and channel power results are calculated and displayed in the Result Summary.
OFF | 0 The gap channels are not displayed in the diagram and channel power results are not calculated nor displayed in the Result Summary.
*RST:
1
Manual operation: See " Activate Gaps " on page 184
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GAP<gap>:MODE <Mode>
Defines how gap channels are configured.
Suffix: <gap>
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
Parameters: <Mode>
AUTO | MANual
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
916
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Example:
Manual operation:
AUTO In "Auto" mode, upper and lower gap channels are configured identically, so only two channels need to be configured (gap 1, gap 2). Gap channels are configured identically for all gaps, if more than two sub blocks are defined. Depending on the defined minimum gap size, the actual number of evaluated gap channels is determined automatically. See also [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]: MSIZe on page 921.
MANual In "Manual" mode, up to four channels can be configured individually for each gap. Active gap channels are always evaluated, regardless of the gap size. See also [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GCHannel[:STATe]: GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer on page 934 and [SENSe:
]POWer:ACHannel:GCHannel[:STATe]:GAP<gap>: MANual:UPPer on page 935.
*RST:
AUTO
SENS:POW:ACH:GAP:MODE MAN
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
See "Gap Mode" on page 184
Automatic (Symmetrical) Configuration
The following commands are only available for symmetrical (automatic) configuration of gap channels (see [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GAP<gap>:MODE on page 916).
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:ABSolute........................................ 917 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:ABSolute:STATe.............................. 918 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:ACLR[:RELative]............................. 918 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:ACLR[:RELative]:STATe................... 919 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO][:CACLr][:RELative].......................... 919 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO][:CACLr][:RELative]:STATe................ 920 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:GAP<gap>[:AUTO].................................................... 920 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]...............................................920 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]........................................... 921 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>[:AUTO].......................................... 921 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:MSIZe......................................................921 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap>[:AUTO].................................................. 922
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:ABSolute <Limit>[, <Reserved>]
This command defines the absolute limit of the specified gap (CACLR) channel.
If you define both an absolute limit and a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
917
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Suffix: <n> <li> <gap>
Parameters: <Limit>
<Reserved> Example:
. irrelevant irrelevant 1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Defines the absolute limit of the specified gap channel. Default unit: dBm Ignored. CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP2:ABS 44.2dBm
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:ABSolute:STATe <State>
This command turns the absolute limit check for the specified gap (CACLR) channel on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<gap>
1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:ABS:STAT ON
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:ACLR[:RELative] <Limit>[, <UpperLimit>]
This command defines the relative limit for the ACLR power in the specified gap channel. The reference value for the relative limit is the measured channel power.
If you define both an absolute limit and a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<gap>
1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
918
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Parameters: <Limit>
<UpperLimit> Example:
Defines the relative limit for the ACLR power in the specified gap channel in dB. Default unit: DB
Ignored. Default unit: DB
CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:ACLR:REL 3dB
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:ACLR[:RELative]:STATe <State>
This command turns the relative limit check for the specified gap (CACLR) channel on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<gap>
1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:ACLR:REL:STAT ON
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO][:CACLr][:RELative] <Limit>, <UpperLimit>
This command defines the relative limit of the specified gap (CACLR) channel. The reference value for the relative limit is the measured channel power.
If you define both an absolute limit and a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<gap>
1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Parameters: <Limit>
Defines the relative limit of the specified gap channel in dB. Default unit: DB
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
919
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
<UpperLimit> Example:
Optional: Defines the relative upper limit of the specified gap channel. Default unit: dB
CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:REL 3dB,0
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO][:CACLr][:RELative]:STATe <State>
This command turns the relative limit check for the specified gap (CACLR) channel on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<gap>
1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:REL:STAT ON
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:GAP<gap>[:AUTO] <Bandwidth> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>[:AUTO] <Bandwidth>
This command defines the bandwidth of the MSR gap (CACLR) channel in all sub block gaps.
This command is for MSR signals only (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>: FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 891).
Suffix: <gap>
. 1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
numeric value in Hz
*RST:
3.84 MHz
Default unit: Hz
Example:
SENS:POW:ACH:BAND:GAP2 5MHZ
Manual operation: See " Gap Channel Bandwidths " on page 186
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
920
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>[:AUTO] <Alpha>
This command defines the roll-off factor for the specified gap (CACLR) channel's weighting filter in all sub block gaps.
Suffix: <gap>
. 1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Parameters: <Alpha>
Roll-off factor
Range: *RST:
0 to 1 0.22
Example:
SENS:POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:GAP2 0.2
Manual operation: See " Weighting Filters " on page 186
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>[:AUTO] <State>
This command turns the weighting filter for the specified gap (CACLR) channel in all sub block gaps on and off.
Suffix: <gap>
. 1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
SENS:POW:ACH:FILT:GAP2 ON
Manual operation: See " Weighting Filters " on page 186
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:MSIZe <Bandwidth>
If the gap between the sub blocks does not exceed the specified bandwidth, the gap channels are not displayed in the diagram, and the gap channel results are not calculated in the result summary.
This command is only available for symmetrical gap channels in "Auto" gap mode (see [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GAP<gap>:MODE on page 916).
Suffix: <gap>
. 1 | 2 Gap channel number
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
numeric value in Hz
*RST:
gap1: 5 MHz; gap2: 10 MHz
Default unit: Hz
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
921
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Manual operation:
POW:ACH:GAP2:MSIZ 5 MHz Gap channel 2 is only evaluated if the gap is wider than 5 MHz.
See " Minimum gap size to show Gap 1 / Minimum gap size to show Gap 2 " on page 185
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap>[:AUTO] <Spacing>
This command defines the distance from sub block to the specified gap channel.
In "Auto" gap mode, channels in the upper gap are identical to those in the lower gap. Thus, only 2 gap channels are configured.
The spacing for gap channels is defined in relation to the outer edges of the surrounding sub blocks, i.e.
Spacing = [CF of the gap channel] - [left sub block center] + ([RF bandwidth of left sub block] /2)
(See also Figure 6-24 and Figure 6-26.)
Suffix: <gap>
. 1 | 2 Gap channel number
Parameters: <Spacing>
numeric value in Hz
*RST:
2.5 MHz
Default unit: HZ
Example:
SENS:POW:ACH:SPAC:GAP2 5MHZ
Manual operation: See " Gap Channel Spacing " on page 185
Manual (Asymmetrical) Configuration
The following commands are only available for asymmetrical (manual) configuration of gap channels (see [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GAP<gap>:MODE on page 916).
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer:ABSolute............................ 923 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer:ABSolute:STATe.................. 923 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer:ACLR[:RELative]................. 924 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer:ACLR[:RELative]:STATe....... 925 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer[:CACLr][:RELative]...............925 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer[:CACLr][:RELative]:STATe.... 926 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer:ABSolute............................. 927 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer:ABSolute:STATe................... 927 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer:ACLR[:RELative].................. 928 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer:ACLR[:RELative]:STATe........ 929 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer[:CACLr][:RELative]............... 929 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer[:CACLr][:RELative]:STATe..... 930 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer........................................ 931 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer................................... 931 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer......................................... 931
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
922
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer................................... 931 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer.............................. 932 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer............................... 932 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer............................... 933 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer................................ 933 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GCHannel[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer........................ 934 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GCHannel[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer......................... 935 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer...................................... 935 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer....................................... 936
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer:ABSolute <SBGaps>, <Limit>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer:ABSolute? <SBGaps>
This command defines the absolute limit of the specified lower gap (CACLR) channel.
If you define both an absolute limit and a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<gap>
1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Parameters: <Limit>
Defines the absolute limit of the specified gap channel. Default unit: dBm
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP2:MAN:LOW:ABS AB,44.2dBm
Example:
CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP:MAN:LOW:ABS? BC,DEF
Example:
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer:ABSolute:STATe <SBGaps>, <State>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer:ABSolute:STATe? <SBGaps>
This command turns the absolute limit check for the specified lower gap (CACLR) channel on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
923
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Suffix:
.
<n>
1..n
<li>
1..n
<gap>
1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP2:MAN:LOW:ABS:STAT BC,ON
Example:
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer:ACLR[:RELative] <SBGaps>, <Limit>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer:ACLR[:RELative]? <SBGaps>
This command defines the relative limit for the ACLR power in the specified lower gap channel. The reference value for the relative limit is the measured channel power.
If you define both an absolute limit and a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<gap>
1 | 2 Gap channel number
Parameters: <Limit>
Defines the relative limit for the ACLR power in the specified gap channel.
Default unit: DB
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
924
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Example:
CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:MAN:LOW:ACLR:REL AB,3dB
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer:ACLR[:RELative]: STATe <SBGaps>, <State>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer:ACLR[:RELative]: STATe? <SBGaps>
This command turns the relative limit check for the specified lower gap (CACLR) channel on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<gap>
1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP2:MAN:LOW:ACLR:STAT BC,ON
Example:
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer[:CACLr][: RELative] <SBGaps>, <Limit>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer[:CACLr][: RELative]? <SBGaps>
This command defines the relative limit of the specified lower gap (CACLR) channel. The reference value for the relative limit is the measured channel power.
If you define both an absolute limit and a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
925
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<gap>
1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Parameters: <Limit>
Defines the relative limit of the specified gap channel in dB. Default unit: DB
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
CALC:LIM:ACPower:GAP2:MANual:LOWer BC, 5
Example:
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer[:CACLr][: RELative]:STATe <SBGaps>, <State>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer[:CACLr][: RELative]:STATe? <SBGaps>
This command turns the relative limit check for the specified lower gap (CACLR) channel on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<gap>
1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
926
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Example:
CAL:LIMit:ACPower:GAP2:MAN:LOW:STAT BC,ON
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer:ABSolute <SBGaps>, <Limit>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer:ABSolute? <SBGaps>
This command defines the absolute limit of the specified upper gap (CACLR) channel.
If you define both an absolute limit and a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<gap>
1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Parameters: <Limit>
Defines the absolute limit of the specified gap channel. Default unit: dBm
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP2:MAN:UPP:ABS AB,44.2dBm
Example:
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer:ABSolute:STATe <SBGaps>, <State>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer:ABSolute:STATe? <SBGaps>
This command turns the absolute limit check for the specified upper gap (CACLR) channel on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
927
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
<gap>
1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP2:MAN:UPP:ABS:STAT BC,ON
Example:
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer:ACLR[:RELative] <SBGaps>, <Limit>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer:ACLR[:RELative]? <SBGaps>
This command defines the relative limit for the ACLR power in the specified upper gap channel. The reference value for the relative limit is the measured channel power.
If you define both an absolute limit and a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<gap>
1 | 2 Gap channel number
Parameters: <Limit>
Defines the relative limit for the ACLR power in the specified gap channel in dB.
Default unit: DB
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:MAN:UPP:ACLR:REL AB,3dB
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
928
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer:ACLR[:RELative]: STATe <SBGaps>, <State>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer:ACLR[:RELative]: STATe? <SBGaps>
This command turns the relative limit check for the specified upper gap (CACLR) channel on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<gap>
1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP2:MAN:UPP:ACLR:STAT BC,ON
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer[:CACLr][:RELative] <SBGaps>, <Limit>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer[:CACLr][: RELative]? <SBGaps>
This command defines the relative limit of the specified upper gap (CACLR) channel. The reference value for the relative limit is the measured channel power.
If you define both an absolute limit and a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<gap>
1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
929
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Parameters: <Limit>
Defines the relative limit of the specified gap channel in dB. Default unit: DB
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
CALC:LIM:ACPower:GAP2:MANual:UPPer BC, 5
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer[:CACLr][: RELative]:STATe <SBGaps>, <State>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer[:CACLr][: RELative]:STATe? <SBGaps>
This command turns the relative limit check for the specified upper gap (CACLR) channel on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Suffix:
.
<n>
1..n
<li>
1..n
<gap>
1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
CAL:LIMit:ACPower:GAP2:MAN:UPP:STATe BC,ON
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
930
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer <SBGaps>, <Bandwidth>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer? <SBGaps> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer <SBGaps>,
<Bandwidth> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer? <SBGaps>
Defines the bandwidth of the lower gap channel in the specified gap.
Suffix: <gap>
. 1 | 2 Gap channel number
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
*RST:
3.84 MHz
Default unit: HZ
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
POW:ACH:BAND:GAP:MAN:LOW BC,5MHz
Example:
POW:ACH:BWIDth:GAP:MAN:LOW? AB,MIN
Example:
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
Manual operation: See " Gap Channel Bandwidths " on page 186
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer <SBGaps>, <Bandwidth>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer? <SBGaps> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer <SBGaps>,
<Bandwidth> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer? <SBGaps>
Defines the bandwidth of the upper gap channel in the specified gap.
Suffix: <gap>
. 1 | 2 Gap channel number
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
*RST:
3.84 MHz
Default unit: HZ
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
POW:ACH:BAND:GAP:MAN:UPP BC,5MHz
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
931
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Manual operation:
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
See " Gap Channel Bandwidths " on page 186
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer <SBGaps>, <State>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer? <SBGaps>
This command turns the weighting filter for the specified lower gap channel on and off.
Suffix: <gap>
. 1 | 2 Gap channel number
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
SENS:POW:ACH:FILT:GAB:MAN:LOW BC,ON
Example:
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
Manual operation: See " Weighting Filters " on page 186
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer <SBGaps>, <State>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer? <SBGaps>
This command turns the weighting filter for the specified upper gap channel on and off.
Suffix: <gap>
. 1 | 2 Gap channel number
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
932
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
*RST:
0
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
SENS:POW:ACH:FILT:GAP:MAN:UPP BC,ON
Example:
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
Manual operation: See " Weighting Filters " on page 186
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer <SBGaps>, <Alpha>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer? <SBGaps>
This command defines the roll-off factor for the specified lower gap channel's weighting filter.
Suffix: <gap>
. 1 | 2 Gap channel number
Parameters: <Alpha>
Roll-off factor
Range: *RST:
0 to 1 0.22
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
SENS:POW:ACH:FILT-ALPH:GAP:MAN:LOW BC,0.25
Example:
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
Manual operation: See " Weighting Filters " on page 186
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer <SBGaps>, <Alpha>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer? <SBGaps>
This command defines the roll-off factor for the specified upper gap channel's weighting filter.
This command is only available for for asymmetrical (manual) configuration of gap channels (see [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GAP<gap>:MODE on page 916).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
933
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Suffix: <gap>
. 1 | 2 Gap channel number
Parameters: <Alpha>
Roll-off factor
Range: *RST:
0 to 1 0.22
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
SENS:POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:GAP2:MAN:UPP BC,0.25
Example:
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
Manual operation: See " Weighting Filters " on page 186
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GCHannel[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer <SBGaps>, <State>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GCHannel[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer? <SBGaps>
Defines which lower gap channels are active in the specified gap.
Suffix: <gap>
. 1 | 2 gap channel
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
SENS:POW:ACH:GCH:GAP2:MAN:LOW BC, ON Enables the second lower gap channel in the gap between sub blocks B and C.
Example:
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
Manual operation: See "Gap Channel Active" on page 185
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
934
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GCHannel[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer <SBGaps>, <State>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GCHannel[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer? <SBGaps>
Defines which upper gap channels are active in the specified gap.
Suffix: <gap>
. 1 | 2 gap channel
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
SENS:POW:ACH:GCH:GAP2:MAN:UPP BC, ON Enables the second upper gap channel in the gap between sub blocks B and C.
Example:
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
Manual operation: See "Gap Channel Active" on page 185
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer <SBGaps>, <Spacing>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer? <SBGaps>
This command defines the distance from sub block to the specified lower gap channel.
The required spacing can be determined according to the following formula:
Spacing = [CF of the gap channel] - [left sub block center] + ([RF bandwidth of left sub block] /2)
Suffix: <gap>
. 1 | 2 Gap channel number
Parameters: <Spacing>
Default unit: HZ
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
935
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
POW:ACH:SPAC:GAP:MAN:LOW AB, 5MHz
Example:
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
Manual operation: See " Gap Channel Spacing " on page 185
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer <SBGaps>, <Spacing>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer? <SBGaps>
This command defines the distance from the sub block to the specified upper gap channel.
The required spacing can be determined according to the following formula:
Spacing = [right sub block CF] - [CF of gap channel] - ([RF bandwidth of right sub block] /2)
Suffix: <gap>
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
Parameters: <Spacing>
Default unit: HZ
Parameters for setting and query:
<SBGaps>
AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH
Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B).
Example:
POW:ACH:SPAC:GAP:MAN:UPP AB,5MHz
Example:
See "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 946
Manual operation: See " Gap Channel Spacing " on page 185
MSR Channel Names
The functions for manual operation are described in Chapter 6.2.5.5, "MSR Channel Names", on page 187.
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:GAP<gap>..................................................................937 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UACHannel................................................................ 937 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UALTernate<ch>......................................................... 937 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:NAME[:CHANnel<ch>]........................................ 937
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
936
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:GAP<gap> <Name>
This command queries the name of the GAP channel.
Suffix: <gap>
. 1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Parameters: <Name>
String containing the name of the channel
*RST:
'Gap1', 'Gap2'
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UACHannel <Name>
This command defines the name for the upper adjacent channel in asymmetrical MSR channel definitions. To define the name for the lower adjacent channel use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel command.
Parameters: <Name>
String containing the name of the channel
*RST:
ADJ
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UALTernate<ch> <Name>
This command defines the name for the specified upper alternate channel in asymmetrical MSR channel definitions. To define the name for the lower adjacent channels use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<ch> command.
Suffix: <ch>
. 1..n Alternate channel number
Parameters: <Name>
String containing the name of the channel
*RST:
ALT<1...11>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:NAME[:CHANnel<ch>] <Name>
This command defines the name of the specified MSR Tx channel.
This command is for MSR signals only.
In MSR ACLR measurements, the default TX channel names correspond to the specified technology, followed by a consecutive number. The assigned sub block (A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H) is indicated as a prefix (e.g. A: WCDMA1).
This command is for MSR signals only (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>: FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 891).
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 sub block number
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
937
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
<ch>
Parameters: <Name> Example:
Manual operation:
1 to 18 Tx channel number
String containing the name of the channel POW:ACH:SBL2:NAME:CHAN2? Result: 'B:WCDMA' See " Tx Channel Definition " on page 178
13.5.3.8 Performing an ACLR Measurement
The following commands are required to perform an ACLR measurement: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:
FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:SELect on page 888 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>[:STATe] on page 889 INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 885
13.5.3.9 Retrieving and Analyzing Measurement Results
The following commands retrieve and analyze measurement results for ACLR measurements.
Useful commands for channel power measurements described elsewhere
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 886 TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1196 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult? on page 902 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:RESult?
on page 905
Remote commands exclusive to channel power measurements
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:ACLR:RESult?............................................ 938 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:CACLr]:RESult?......................................... 939 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult:PHZ....................................... 940 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult:UNIT...................................... 941 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE.................................................................................. 941
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:ACLR:RESult?
The command returns the ACLR power limit check results for the selected gap channel in an MSR ACLR measurement.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
938
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
The results of the power limit checks are also indicated in the STAT:QUES:ACPL status registry (see "STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register" on page 802).
Suffix:
.
<n>
1..n
<li>
1..n
irrelevant
<gap>
1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Return values: <LowerGap_AB>
<UpperGap_AB>
<LowerGap_BC>
<UpperGap_BC>
<LowerGap_CD>
<UpperGap_CD>
<LowerGap_DE>
<UpperGap_DE>
Example:
INIT:IMM;*WAI; CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP2:ACLR:RES? PASSED,PASSED
Usage:
Query only
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:CACLr]:RESult?
The command returns the limit check results for the upper and lower gap (CACLR) channels for the selected gap in an MSR ACLR measurement.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
The results of the power limit checks are also indicated in the STAT:QUES:ACPL status registry (see "STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register" on page 802).
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
939
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
<gap>
Return values: <LowerGap_AB>, <UpperGap_AB> [,<LowerGap_BC>, <UpperGap_BC>, <LowerGap_CD>, <UpperGap_CD>, <LowerGap_DE>, <UpperGap_DE>, <LowerGap_EF>, <UpperGap_EF>, <LowerGap_FG>, <UpperGap_FG>, <LowerGap_GH>, <UpperGap_GH>]
Example:
Usage:
1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number
Limit check results for the CACLR power in the upper and lower gap channels for the selected gap. Results are only returned for the available sub blocks. PASSED Limit check has passed. FAIL Limit check has failed. NONE No results available, e.g. because limit checking was deactivated
INIT:IMM;*WAI; CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP2:RES? PASSED,PASSED Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult:PHZ <State>
This command selects the unit the R&S FSW returns results for power measurements.
You can query results with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>: RESult?.
For LTE and 5G applications, use the command CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>: FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult:UNIT.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
<sb>
irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
ON | 1 Channel power density in dBm/Hz
OFF | 0 Channel power in dBm
*RST:
0
Example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES:PHZ ON Output of results referred to the channel bandwidth.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
940
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Manual operation: See "Channel power level and density ( Power Unit )" on page 166
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult:UNIT <Unit>
LTE and 5G applications only.
This command selects the unit the R&S FSW returns results for power measurements.
You can query results with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>: RESult?.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
irrelevant
<sb>
irrelevant
Parameters: <Measurement>
ABS Channel power in dBm
PHZ Channel power density in dBm/Hz
MPHZ Channel power density in dBm/MHz
*RST:
ABS
Example:
//Select unit for power measurements CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES:UNIT PHZ
Manual operation: See "Channel power level and density ( Power Unit )" on page 166
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the way the R&S FSW displays the power of adjacent channels.
You need at least one adjacent channel for the command to work.
Parameters: <Mode>
ABSolute | RELative
ABSolute Shows the absolute power of all channels
RELative Shows the power of adjacent and alternate channels in relation to the transmission channel
*RST:
RELative
Manual operation: See " Absolute and Relative Values (ACLR Mode) " on page 166
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
941
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
13.5.3.10 Programming Examples for Channel Power Measurements
The following programming examples are meant to demonstrate the most important commands to perform channel power measurements in a remote environment.
Example: Configuring and Performing an ACLR Measurement............................942 Example: Configuring and Performing an MSR ACLR Measurement...................944 Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement
.............................................................................................................................. 946
Example: Configuring and Performing an ACLR Measurement
In this example we will configure and perform an adjacent-channel power measurement. Note that this example is primarily meant to demonstrate the remote control commands, it does not necessarily reflect a useful measurement task. For most common measurement standards, the R&S FSW performs the measurement optimally with the predefined settings, without further configuration.
//-----------Preparing the measurement -----------//Reset the instrument *RST
//-------------Preparing the measurement---------------------
//Activate adjacent-channel power measurement. CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP //Select the user standard "GSM" CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES GSM
//---------------Setting Up Channels-----------//Create one transmission channel. POW:ACH:TXCH:COUN 1 //Name the first transmission channel 'TX Channel'. POW:ACH:NAME:CHAN1 'TX Channel' //Create two adjacent channels - one adjacent channel and one alternate channel. POW:ACH:ACP 2 //Name the adjacent channel 'ABC' POW:ACH:NAME:ACH 'ABC' //Name the first alternate channel 'XYZ'. POW:ACH:NAME:ALT1 'XYZ' //Define a bandwidth of 30 kHz for the transmission channel. POW:ACH:BWID:CHAN1 30kHz //Define a bandwidth of 30 kHz for the adjacent channel. POW:ACH:BWID:ACH 30kHz //Define a bandwidth of 30 kHz for the first alternate channel. POW:ACH:BWID:ALT1 30kHz //Define a distance of 33 kHz from the center of the transmission channel to the //center of the adjacent channel. //Also adjust the distance to the alternate channels (66 kHz). POW:ACH:SPAC 33kHz //Define a distance of 100 kHz from the center of the transmission channel to the //center of the first alternate channel.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
942
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT1 100kHz
//---------------Selecting a Reference Channel-//Select relative display of the channel power. POW:ACH:MODE REL //Define transmission channel 1 as the reference channel. POW:ACH:REF:TXCH:MAN 1
//-----------Saving the settings as a user standard-------------//Save the user standard with the name "my_aclr_standard". //Weighting filters can only be defined for user-defined standards. CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:STAN:SAVE 'my_aclr_standard'
//---------------Defining Weighting Filters----//Define a roll-off factor of 0.35 for the weighting filter of the first //transmission channel. POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:CHAN1 0.35 //Turn the weighting filter for the first transmission channel on. POW:ACH:FILT:CHAN1 ON //Define a roll-off factor of 0.35 for the weighting filter of the adjacent //channel. POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:ACH 0.35 //Turn the weighting filter for the adjacent channel on. POW:ACH:FILT:ACH ON //Define a roll-off factor of 0.35 for the weighting filter of the first //alternate channel. POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:ALT1 0.35 //Turn the weighting filter for the first alternate channel on. POW:ACH:FILT:ALT1 ON
//---------------Working with Limits-----------//Define a relative limit of 30 dB below the power of the reference channel //for both adjacent channels. CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30DB,30DB //Define a relative limit of 25 dB below the power of the reference channel //for the first alternate channels. CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT1 25DB,25DB //Define an absolute limit of -35 dBm for both adjacent channels. CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS -35DBM,-35DBM //Turn the ACLR limit check on. CALC:LIM:ACP ON //Turn the relative limit check for adjacent channels on. CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT ON //Turn the absolute limit check for adjacent channels on. CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS:STAT ON //Turn the absolute limit check for the first alternate channel on. CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT1:ABS:STAT ON
//--------------Performing the Measurement----//Determine the ideal ACLR measurement configuration.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
943
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
POW:ACH:PRES ACP;*WAI //Determine the ideal reference level for the measurement. POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV;*WAI //Initiate a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished. INIT;*WAI
//---------------Limit Check-------------------//Query the results of the limit check for the adjacent channels. CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES? //Query the results of the limit check for the first alternate channels. CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT1:RES?
//---------------Retrieving Results------------//Query the results for the ACLR measurement. CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? ACP
Example: Configuring and Performing an MSR ACLR Measurement This example demonstrates how to configure and perform an ACLR measurement on a multi-standard radio signal in a remote environment.
//-----------Preparing the measurement -----------//Reset the instrument *RST
// Select ACLR measurement :CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect ACPower
// Select MSR Standard :CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet MSR
//Configure general measurement settings :SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer 1.25GHz :SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN 62.0MHz :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBCount 3
//----------------- Configuring Sub block A
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TXCHannel:COUNt 3 :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:FREQuency:CENTer 1.230GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:RFBWidth 12MHZ
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:CENTer:CHANnel1 1.226GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:CENTer:CHANnel2 1.230GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:CENTer:CHANnel3 1.234GHZ
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TECHnology:CHANnel1 WCDMA :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TECHnology:CHANnel2 WCDMA :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TECHnology:CHANnel3 GSM
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
944
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:BANDwidth:CHANnel1 2.5MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:BANDwidth:CHANnel2 2.5MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:BANDwidth:CHANnel3 2.5MHZ
//----------------- Configuring Sub block B
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:TXCHannel:COUNt 1 :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:FREQuency:CENTer 1.255GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:RFBWidth 4MHZ
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:CENTer:CHANnel1 1.255GHZ
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:TECHnology:CHANnel1 LTE_1_40
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:BANDwidth:CHANnel1 3.25MHZ
//----------------- Configuring Sub block C
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:TXCHannel:COUNt 2 :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:FREQuency:CENTer 1.268GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:RFBWidth 8MHZ
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:CENTer:CHANnel1 1.266GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:CENTer:CHANnel2 1.270GHZ
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:BANDwidth:CHANnel1 2.75MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:BANDwidth:CHANnel2 2.75MHZ
//----------------- Configuring ADJ channels
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel 1.60MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate1 1.60MHZ
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ACHannel 3MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate1 5MHZ
//----------------- Configuring gap (CACLR) channels
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP1 2.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP2 5.0MHZ
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP1 2.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP2 2.0MHZ
//--------------Performing the Measurement-----
//Select single sweep mode. INIT:CONT OFF //Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
945
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
INIT;*WAI
//---------------Retrieving Results-------------
//Return the results for the ACLR measurement. CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? MCAC //Results: //Transmission channels in sub block A //-13.2346727385,-13.2346723793,-13.2390131759, //Transmission channels in sub block B //-17.0863336597, //Transmission channels in sub block C //-13.2390127767,-13.2390134744, //Totals for each sub block //-8.4649064021,-17.0863336597,-10.2287131689, //Adjacent channels //-67.9740721019,-67.9740728014,-0.00434041734,-0.00434041734, //CACLR channels //-0.52933512766,-64.9990115835,-64.5012521492,-0.33507330922, //-64.4924159646,-0.52932552499,-0.52932552495,-64.4934163414
Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement
This example demonstrates how to configure and perform an ACLR measurement on an asymmetrical multi-standard radio signal in a remote environment.
Figure 13-1: Asymmetrical MSR signal structure
//-----------Preparing the measurement -----------//Reset the instrument *RST
// Select ACLR measurement :CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect ACPower
// Select MSR Standard :CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet MSR
//Configure general measurement settings :SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer 1.25GHz
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
946
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
:SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN 62.0MHz :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBCount 3
//----------------- Configuring Sub block A
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TXCHannel:COUNt 3 :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:FREQuency:CENTer 1.230GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:RFBWidth 12MHZ
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:CENTer:CHANnel1 1.226GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:CENTer:CHANnel2 1.230GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:CENTer:CHANnel3 1.234GHZ
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TECHnology:CHANnel1 WCDMA :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TECHnology:CHANnel2 WCDMA :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TECHnology:CHANnel3 GSM
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:BANDwidth:CHANnel1 2.5MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:BANDwidth:CHANnel2 2.5MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:BANDwidth:CHANnel3 2.5MHZ
//----------------- Configuring Sub block B
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:TXCHannel:COUNt 1 :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:FREQuency:CENTer 1.255GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:RFBWidth 4MHZ
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:CENTer:CHANnel1 1.255GHZ
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:TECHnology:CHANnel1 LTE_1_40
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:BANDwidth:CHANnel1 3.25MHZ
//----------------- Configuring Sub block C
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:TXCHannel:COUNt 2 :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:FREQuency:CENTer 1.268GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:RFBWidth 8MHZ
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:CENTer:CHANnel1 1.266GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:CENTer:CHANnel2 1.270GHZ
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:BANDwidth:CHANnel1 2.75MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:BANDwidth:CHANnel2 2.75MHZ
//----------------- Configuring ADJ channels
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel 1.60MHZ
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
947
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate1 1.60MHZ
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ACHannel 3MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate1 5MHZ
//----------------- Configuring gap channels manually :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:AGCHannels ON :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:GAP:MODE MAN
//----------------- Configuring AB gap channels // 1 lower, 2 upper
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:GCH:GAP1:MAN:LOW AB, ON :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:GCH:GAP1:MAN:UPP AB, ON :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:GCH:GAP2:MAN:UPP AB, ON
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP1:MAN:LOW AB,2.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP1:MAN:UPP AB,2.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP2:MAN:UPP AB,4.2MHZ
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP1:MAN:LOW AB,2.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP1:MAN:UPP AB,2.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP2:MAN:UPP AB,2.0MHZ
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:STATe:GAP1:MAN:LOW AB,ON :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:STATe:GAP1:MAN:UPP AB,ON :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:STATe:GAP2:MAN:UPP AB,ON
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP1:MAN:LOW AB,0.25 :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP1:MAN:UPP AB,0.25 :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP2:MAN:UPP AB,0.25
//Limit check :CALC:LIM:ACP ON :CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:MAN:UPP:ABS:STAT AB,ON :CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:MAN:UPP:ABS AB,3DBM :CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP2:MAN:UPP:ABS:STAT AB,ON :CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP2:MAN:UPP:ABS AB,3DBM
//----------------- Configuring BC gap channels // 2 lower, 0 upper
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:GCH:GAP1:MAN:LOW AB, ON :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:GCH:GAP2:MAN:LOW AB, ON
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP1:MAN:LOW BC,2.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP2:MAN:LOW BC,4.2MHZ
:SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP1:MAN:LOW BC,2.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP2:MAN:LOW BC,2.0MHZ
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
948
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
//Limit check :CALC:LIM:ACP ON :CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:MAN:LOW:ABS:STAT BC,ON :CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:MAN:LOW:ABS BC,3DBM :CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:MAN:LOW:CACL:REL:STAT BC,ON :CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:MAN:LOW:CACL:REL BC,-3DB
:CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP2:MAN:LOW:ACLR:REL:STAT BC,ON :CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP2:MAN:LOW:ACLR:REL BC,-3DB
//--------------Performing the Measurement-----
//Select single sweep mode. INIT:CONT OFF //Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished. INIT;*WAI
//---------------Retrieving Results-------------
//Return the results for the ACLR measurement. CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? MCAC //Results: //Transmission channels in sub block A //-13.2346727385,-13.2346723793,-13.2390131759, //Transmission channels in sub block B //-17.0863336597, //Transmission channels in sub block C //-13.2390127767,-13.2390134744, //Totals for each sub block //-8.4649064021,-17.0863336597,-10.2287131689, //Adjacent channels //-67.9740721019,-67.9740728014,-0.00434041734,-0.00434041734, //CACLR channels (AB2L, BC1U, BC2U invalid) //-0.52933512766,-64.9990115835 9.91e37,-0.33507330922, //-64.4924159646, 9.91e37,-0.52932552495, 9.91e37
//Limit check CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:ACLR:RES? //Result for gap 1 channels: ABGap1L,ABGap1U,BCGap1L, ( BCGap1U invalid ) //PASSED,PASSED,PASSED,NONE CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP2:ACLR:RES? //Result for gap 2 channels: (ABGap2L invalid ),ABGap2U,BCGap2L, ( BCGap2U invalid ) //NONE,PASSED,PASSED,NONE
13.5.4 Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio
The following commands are necessary to perform carrier-to-noise measurements.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
949
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL CN | CN0, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>: FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:SELect
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>[:STATe] CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>] [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet
Programming example: Measuring the carrier-to-noise ratio
This programming example demonstrates how to perform a Carrier-to-noise measurement in a remote environment.
//----------Preparing the measurement-----------*RST //Reset the instrument FREQ:CENT 800MHz //Sets the center frequency to the carrier frequency of 800 MHz. CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL CN //Activates carrier-to-noise ratio measurement. POW:ACH:PRES CN //Optimizes the instrument settings according to the channel bandwidth. POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV //Determines the ideal reference level for the measurement.
//--------------Performing the Measurement----INIT:CONT OFF //Selects single sweep mode. INIT;*WAI //Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished.
// Now turn off the carrier signal and repeat the measurement: INIT;*WAI //Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished.
//---------------Retrieving Results------------CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CN //Returns the carrier-to-noise ratio.
13.5.5 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth
All remote control commands specific to occupied bandwidth measurements are described here.
Configuring the Measurement...............................................................................951 Programming Example: OBW Measurement........................................................ 951
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
950
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
13.5.5.1 Configuring the Measurement
The following commands configure measurements of the occupied bandwidth.
Useful commands for occupied bandwidth measurements described elsewhere Configuring the channel: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>] [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel Defining search limits: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 1213 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT on page 1214 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt on page 1214 Performing the measurement: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:SELect on page 888 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>[:STATe] on page 889 Retrieving results: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 886
Remote commands exclusive to occupied bandwidth measurements: [SENSe:]POWer:BWIDth................................................................................................ 951 [SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth........................................................................................... 951
[SENSe:]POWer:BWIDth <Percentage> [SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth <Percentage>
This command selects the percentage of the total power that defines the occupied bandwidth.
Parameters: <Percentage>
Range: 10 PCT to 99.9 PCT
*RST:
99 PCT
Default unit: PCT
Example:
POW:BAND 95PCT
Manual operation: See " % Power Bandwidth " on page 210
13.5.5.2 Programming Example: OBW Measurement
This programming example demonstrates the measurement example described in Chapter 6.4.5, "Measurement Example", on page 212 in a remote environment.
//-----------Preparing the measurement -----------//Reset the instrument *RST
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
951
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
//-------------Configuring the Measurement----------------------//Set the center frequency to 800 MHz. FREQ:CENT 800MHz //Set the reference level to -10 dBm. DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV -10dBm //Activate occupied bandwidth measurement. CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL OBW //Set the percentage of power to 99%. POW:BWID 99PCT //Set the channel bandwidth to 21 kHz. POW:ACH:BAND 21kHz //Optimize the instrument settings according to the channel bandwidth. POW:ACH:PRES OBW //Determine the ideal reference level for the measurement. POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV //Set the trace detector to positive peak. DET APE
//--------------Performing the Measurement----//Select single sweep mode.INIT:CONT OFF
//Initiate a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished. INIT;*WAI
//---------------Retrieving Results------------//Return the occupied bandwidth. CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW
13.5.6 Remote Commands for Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurements
Activating an NPR Measurement.......................................................................... 952 Configuring an NPR Measurement....................................................................... 953 Configuring Signal Generator Control................................................................... 956 Retrieving Results from an NP Measurement.......................................................967 Programming Example: Measuring the Noise Power Ratio.................................. 968
13.5.6.1 Activating an NPR Measurement [SENSe:]NPRatio:STATe.................................................................................................952
[SENSe:]NPRatio:STATe <State>
Activates or deactivates the noise power ratio (NPR) measurement.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Deactivates the NPR measurement (returns to common frequency sweep)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
952
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example:
ON | 1 Activates the NPR measurement
*RST:
0
NPR:STAT ON
13.5.6.2 Configuring an NPR Measurement
[SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:BWIDth................................................................................ 953 [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:AUTO................................................................. 953 [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:BWIDth............................................................... 954 [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:FREQuency:OFFSet............................................ 954 [SENSe:]NPRatio:MODE................................................................................................ 954 [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:BWIDth:RELative......................................................... 955 [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:BWIDth[:ABSolute]....................................................... 955 [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:COUNt........................................................................ 955 [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:FREQuency:OFFSet.................................................... 956
[SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:BWIDth <Frequency>
Defines the channel bandwidth as an absolute value. Bandwidths covered by defined notches are deducted from this value.
Parameters: <Frequency>
*RST:
72 MHz
Default unit: HZ
Example:
NPR:CHAN:BWID 100000000 NPR:NOTC:COUN 2 NPR:NOTC1:BWID 5000000 A bandwidth of 100000000 - (2*5000000) = 90000000 Hz is used as a basis for the total power density.
Manual operation: See "Channel Bandwidth" on page 218
[SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:AUTO <State>
Determines which bandwidth is used for total power density calculation.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 The integration bandwidth and its position is defined manually using [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:BWIDth on page 954 and [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel: INTegration:FREQuency:OFFSet on page 954. The entire specified bandwidth is used, including any defined notches.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
953
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Manual operation:
ON | 1 The integration bandwidth is defined automatically as the channel bandwidth, without the notches, centered around the center frequency (see [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:BWIDth on page 953).
*RST:
1
NPR:CHAN:INT:AUTO ON
See "Integration Bandwidth" on page 218
[SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:BWIDth <Frequency>
Defines the bandwidth to be used for total power calculation as an absolute value. This value is only considered for [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:AUTOOFF.
The entire specified bandwidth is used, including any defined notches.
Parameters: <Frequency>
*RST:
72 MHz
Default unit: HZ
Example:
NPR:CHAN:INT:AUTO OFF Selects manual definition of the integration bandwidth. NPR:CHAN:INT:BWID 100000000 Sets the integration bandwidth to 100 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Integration Bandwidth" on page 218
[SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:FREQuency:OFFSet <Frequency>
Shifts the bandwidth to be used for total power density calculation away from the currently defined center frequency.
Parameters: <Frequency>
*RST:
0
Default unit: HZ
Example:
NPR:CHAN:INT:FREQ:OFFS 10000000 Shifts the integration bandwidth by 10 MHz from the center frequency.
Manual operation: See "Integration Bandwidth" on page 218
[SENSe:]NPRatio:MODE <Mode>
Determines whether the power measured in a channel or notch is indicated as a power or a density value.
Parameters: <Mode>
POWer | DENSity
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
954
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Manual operation:
DENSity Power measured in channel or notch divided by the "Channel BW"/"Integration BW" in dBm/Hz
POWer Absolute power measured in channel or notch in current amplitude unit
*RST:
DENSity
NPR:MODE DENS
See "Result Power Mode" on page 220
[SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:BWIDth:RELative <Percentage>
Defines the bandwidth of the individual notch as a percentage of the defined channel frequency.
Suffix:
.
<notch>
1..n
Parameters: <Percentage>
Range: *RST:
0 to 100 5
Example:
NPR:CHAN:BWID 100000000 NPR:NOTC2:BWID:REL 5 Defines a notch bandwidth of 5% of channel bandwidth (100 MHz) = 5 MHz
Manual operation: See "Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to Channel BW)" on page 219
[SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:BWIDth[:ABSolute] <Frequency>
Defines the bandwidth of the individual notch as an absolute value.
Suffix:
.
<notch>
1..n
Parameters: <Frequency>
Default unit: HZ
Example:
NPR:NOTC1:BWID 50000000
Manual operation: See "Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to Channel BW)" on page 219
[SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:COUNt <Amount>
Defines the number of notches for which results are determined. Note that even if bandwidths for further notches are defined, only the number specified here are actually calculated and displayed.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
955
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Suffix: <notch>
Parameters: <Amount>
Example: Manual operation:
. 1..n irrelevant
integer
Range: *RST:
1 to 25 1
NPR:NOTC:COUN 2
See "Number of Notches" on page 218
[SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:FREQuency:OFFSet <Frequency>
Defines the center position of the notch in relation to the currently defined center frequency.
Suffix:
.
<notch>
1..n
Parameters: <Frequency>
Default unit: HZ
Example:
NPR:NOTC1:FREQ:OFFS -100000000
Manual operation: See "Frequency Offset per Notch" on page 219
13.5.6.3 Configuring Signal Generator Control
Useful commands for controlling generators described elsewhere:
CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection:CSTate? on page 1383
CONFigure:GENerator:IPConnection:ADDRess on page 1384
Remote commands exclusive to controlling generators for NPR measurements
CONFigure:GENerator:EXTernal:ROSCillator................................................................... 957 CONFigure:GENerator:FREQuency:CENTer.....................................................................957 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:BB:ARBitrary:WAVeform:SELect?..................................... 957 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:BB:STANdard?................................................................958 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:CONNection:CSTate?...................................................... 958 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:CONTrol[:STATe]............................................................. 958 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:EXTernal:ROSCillator:CSTate?......................................... 959 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency:CENTer:CSTate?.......................................... 959 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe].........................................959 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency:OFFSet........................................................960 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator.................................. 960 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator......................................960 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:BWIDth:ABSolute:CSTate?....................... 960 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:FREQuency:OFFSet:CSTate?................... 961 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:STATe:CSTate?....................................... 961 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>[:STATe]................................................... 962
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
956
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:CLOCk?..................................................962 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:COUNt:CSTate?...................................... 962 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:POWer:LEVel:CSTate?.................................................... 963 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:POWer:LEVel:OFFSet:CSTate?........................................ 963 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:RFOutput:STATe:CSTate?................................................ 964 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:SETTings:NOTCh:UPDate............................................... 964 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:SETTings:UPDate........................................................... 964 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:STATe:CSTate?............................................................... 965 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio[:STATe]...........................................................................965 CONFigure:GENerator:POWer:LEVel...............................................................................965 CONFigure:GENerator:POWer:LEVel:OFFSet.................................................................. 966 CONFigure:GENerator:RFOutput[:STATe].........................................................................966 CONFigure:GENerator:TARGet:PATH:BB?....................................................................... 966 CONFigure:GENerator:TARGet:PATH:RF......................................................................... 966 CONFigure:SETTings:NPRatio........................................................................................ 967 CONFigure:SETTings:NPRatio:NOTCh............................................................................ 967
CONFigure:GENerator:EXTernal:ROSCillator <ReferenceType>
Selects the source of the generator reference frequency.
Parameters: <ReferenceType>
EXTernal | INTernal
EXTernal An external reference is provided via the EXT connectors on the generator, for example by the R&S FSW.
INTernal The internal reference is that of the signal generator itself.
Manual operation: See "Reference Frequency" on page 224
CONFigure:GENerator:FREQuency:CENTer <Frequency>
Defines the frequency of the signal provided by the signal generator.
Parameters: <Frequency>
Default unit: HZ
Example:
CONF:GEN:FREQ:CENT 1GHZ
Manual operation: See "Frequency" on page 224 See "fGen" on page 226
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:BB:ARBitrary:WAVeform:SELect?
Queries the ARB waveform file currently used by the signal generator.
Return values: <ArbWaveform>
Example:
CONF:GEN:NPR:BB:ARB:WAV:SEL?
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
957
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "ARB Waveform File" on page 225
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:BB:STANdard?
Queries the standard currently used by the signal generator.
Return values: <Standard>
Example:
CONF:GEN:NPR:BB:STAN?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Standard" on page 224
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:CONNection:CSTate?
Queries the state of the connected signal generator and its availability for the Spectrum application.
Return values: <ControlState>
OFF | SUCCessful | ERRor
OFF No signal generator defined
SUCCessful Connection established to compatible generator
ERRor Connection error, for example due to an incompatible generator
Usage:
Query only
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:CONTrol[:STATe] <State>
Activates or deactivates control of the signal generator by the R&S FSW.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Example:
CONF:GEN:NPR:CONT:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Generator Control State" on page 223
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
958
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:EXTernal:ROSCillator:CSTate?
Queries the state of the generator reference frequency.
Return values: <ControlState>
OFF | SUCCessful | ERRor
OFF Signal generator control off
SUCCessful Setting successfully applied on the signal generator
ERRor Control error, for example because a specified value cannot be applied on the signal generator
Example:
CONF:GEN:NPR:EXT:ROSC:CST?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Reference Frequency" on page 224
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency:CENTer:CSTate?
Queries the state of the generator center frequency.
Return values: <ControlState>
OFF | SUCCessful | ERRor
OFF Signal generator control off
SUCCessful Setting successfully applied on the signal generator
ERRor Control error, for example because a specified value cannot be applied on the signal generator
Example:
CONF:GEN:NPR:FREQ:CENT:CST?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Frequency" on page 224 See "fGen" on page 226
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe] <State>
Enables or disables frequency coupling between the R&S FSW and the connected generator.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off A fixed frequency is used by the generator.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
959
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Manual operation:
ON | 1 Switches the function on The frequency defined on the analyzer is automatically also used by the generator.
*RST:
0
CONF:GEN:NPR:FREQ:COUP:STAT ON
See "Generator Frequency Coupling State" on page 226
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency:OFFSet <FrequencyOffset>
Defines a fixed offset to be applied to the generator frequency.
Parameters: <FrequencyOffset>
numeric value Default unit: HZ
Example:
CONF:GEN:NPR:FREQ:OFFS 5
Manual operation: See "Frequency Offset" on page 227
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator <Denominator>
Defines the denominator of the frequency-defining factor for the generator frequency (see "fGen" on page 226).
Parameters: <Denominator>
numeric value
Example:
CONF:GEN:NPR:FREQ:FACT:DEN 5
Manual operation: See "Denominator" on page 227
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator <Numerator>
Defines the numerator of the frequency-defining factor for the generator frequency (see "fGen" on page 226).
Parameters: <Numerator>
numeric value
Example:
CONF:GEN:NPR:REQ:FACT:NUM 1
Manual operation: See "Numerator" on page 227
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:BWIDth:ABSolute:CSTate? Queries the state of the absolute notch bandwidth for the specified notch.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
960
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Suffix: <notch> Return values: <ControlState>
Example: Usage: Manual operation:
. 1..n
OFF | SUCCessful | ERRor OFF Signal generator control off SUCCessful Setting successfully applied on the signal generator ERRor Control error, for example because a specified value cannot be applied on the signal generator
CONF:GEN:NPR:NOTC1:STAT?
Query only
See "Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to Channel BW)" on page 219
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:FREQuency:OFFSet:CSTate?
Queries the state of the frequency offset for the specified notch.
Suffix:
.
<notch>
1..n
Return values: <ControlState>
OFF | SUCCessful | ERRor
OFF Signal generator control off
SUCCessful Setting successfully applied on the signal generator
ERRor Control error, for example because a specified value cannot be applied on the signal generator
Example:
CONF:GEN:NPR:NOTC1:FREQ:OFFS:CST?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Frequency Offset per Notch" on page 219
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:STATe:CSTate?
Queries the state of the generator notch setting for the specified notch.
Suffix:
.
<notch>
1..n
Return values: <ControlState>
OFF | SUCCessful | ERRor
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
961
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Usage: Manual operation:
OFF Signal generator control off SUCCessful Setting successfully applied on the signal generator ERRor Control error, for example because a specified value cannot be applied on the signal generator
CONF:GEN:NPR:NOTC:STAT:CST?
Query only
See "Generator Notch State" on page 219
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>[:STATe] <State>
Enables or disables the specified notch on the signal generator.
Suffix:
.
<notch>
1..n
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 The notch is not considered for signal generation on the connected signal generator.
ON | 1 The notch is considered for signal generation on the connected signal generator.
*RST:
0
Example:
CONF:GEN:NPR:NOTC2:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Generator Notch State" on page 219
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:CLOCk?
Queries the generator clock frequency.
Suffix: <notch>
. 1..n irrelevant
Return values: <ClockFrequency>
Example:
CONF:GEN:NPR:NOTC:CLOC?
Usage:
Query only
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:COUNt:CSTate? Queries the state of the number of notches.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
962
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Suffix: <notch> Return values: <ControlState>
Example:
. 1..n irrelevant
OFF | SUCCessful | ERRor OFF Signal generator control off SUCCessful Setting successfully applied on the signal generator ERRor Control error, for example because a specified value cannot be applied on the signal generator
CONF:GEN:NPR:NOTC:COUN:CST?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Number of Notches" on page 218
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:POWer:LEVel:CSTate?
Queries the state of the generator power level.
Return values: <ControlState>
OFF | SUCCessful | ERRor
OFF Signal generator control off
SUCCessful Setting successfully applied on the signal generator
ERRor Control error, for example because a specified value cannot be applied on the signal generator
Example:
CONF:GEN:NPR:POW:LEV:CST?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Level (RMS)" on page 224
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:POWer:LEVel:OFFSet:CSTate?
Queries the state of the generator level offset.
Return values: <ControlState>
OFF | SUCCessful | ERRor
OFF Signal generator control off
SUCCessful Setting successfully applied on the signal generator
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
963
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Usage: Manual operation:
ERRor Control error, for example because a specified value cannot be applied on the signal generator
CONF:GEN:NPR:POW:LEV:OFFS:CST?
Query only
See "Level Offset" on page 224
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:RFOutput:STATe:CSTate?
Queries the state of the generator RF output.
Return values: <ControlState>
OFF | SUCCessful | ERRor
OFF Signal generator control off
SUCCessful Setting successfully applied on the signal generator
ERRor Control error, for example because a specified value cannot be applied on the signal generator
Example:
CONF:GEN:NPR:RFO:STAT:CST?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "RF Output State" on page 224
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:SETTings:NOTCh:UPDate
Applies all notch settings to the connected signal generator once.
Example:
CONF:GEN:NPR:SETT:NOTC:UPD
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Upload all Notch Settings to Generator" on page 220
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:SETTings:UPDate
Applies all generator setup settings to the connected signal generator once.
Example:
CONF:GEN:NPR:SETT:UPD
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Upload all Generator Setup Settings to Generator" on page 225
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
964
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:STATe:CSTate?
Queries the state of the generator notch filter.
Return values: <ControlState>
OFF | SUCCessful | ERRor
OFF Signal generator control off
SUCCessful Setting successfully applied on the signal generator
ERRor Control error, for example because a specified value cannot be applied on the signal generator
Example:
CONF:GEN:NPR:STAT:CST?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Generator Notch Filter State" on page 218
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio[:STATe] <State>
Activates or deactivates a notch filter on the signal generator.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Example:
CONF:GEN:NPR:STAT ON Enables a notch filter on the connected generator.
Manual operation: See "Generator Notch Filter State" on page 218
CONFigure:GENerator:POWer:LEVel <Level>
Defines the output power level used by the connected signal generator.
Parameters: <Level>
numeric value Default unit: DBM
Example:
CONF:GEN:POW:LEV 25
Manual operation: See "Level (RMS)" on page 224
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
965
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CONFigure:GENerator:POWer:LEVel:OFFSet <LevelOffset>
Defines a fixed offset in the power level used by the generator, for example due to a gain from the DUT.
Parameters: <LevelOffset>
numeric value Default unit: DBM
Example:
CONF:GEN:POW:LEV:OFFS 5
Manual operation: See "Level Offset" on page 224
CONFigure:GENerator:RFOutput[:STATe] <State>
This command enables or disables RF output on the connected generator.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Example:
CONF:GEN:RFO:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "RF Output State" on page 224
CONFigure:GENerator:TARGet:PATH:BB?
Queries the BB signal path of the generator used for signal generation.
Return values: <Path>
A | B
Example:
CONF:GEN:TARG:PATH:BB?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Path RF/ Path BB" on page 223
CONFigure:GENerator:TARGet:PATH:RF <Path>
Selects the RF signal path of the generator to be used for signal generation.
Parameters: <Path>
A | B
Example:
CONF:GEN:TARG:PATH:RF B
Manual operation: See "Path RF/ Path BB" on page 223
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
966
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CONFigure:SETTings:NPRatio
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Query all Generator Setup Settings from Generator" on page 225
CONFigure:SETTings:NPRatio:NOTCh
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Query all Notch Settings from Generator" on page 220
13.5.6.4 Retrieving Results from an NP Measurement CALCulate<n>:NPRatio:RESult?..................................................................................... 967
CALCulate<n>:NPRatio:RESult? <ResultType>
Queries the power results of the noise power ratio measurement.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
Query parameters: <ResultType>
CPOWer | NPOWer | NPRatio | ALL
CPOWer Returns the total measured power divided by the channel bandwidth (without notches) or integration bandwidth (with notches) in dBm/Hz
NPOWer Returns the power measured in each notch divided by the notch bandwidth in dBm/Hz
NPRatio Returns the ratio of the total channel power density divided by the notch power density for each notch in dB
ALL Returns all power results for the channel and <n> defined notches in the following order: <ChannelPowerDens>,<NotchPowerDens1>,..,<NotchPowerDens<n>>,<NPR1>,..,<NPR<n>>
Return values: <ResultTypeResult>
Example:
CALC:NPR:RES? NPR Returns the power ratio in dB for each notch.
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
967
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
13.5.6.5 Programming Example: Measuring the Noise Power Ratio
This example demonstrates how to determine the noise power ratio for the Chapter 6.5.8, "Measurement Example", on page 228 in a remote environment.
//-----------Configuring the measurement -----------//Reset the instrument *RST //Set the center frequency to 500 MHz FREQ:CENT 500000000 FREQ:SPAN 80000000
//Activate NPR measurement. NPR:STAT ON
//Specify the channel bandwidth to be used = 72 MHz NPR:CHAN:BWID 72000000 NPR:CHAN:INT:AUTO ON //Define the two notches at +/- 12.2 MHz from the CF, //with a bandwidth of 3.6 MHz NPR:NOTC:COUN 2 NPR:NOTC1:FREQ:OFFS -12200000 NPR:NOTC1:BWID 3.600000 NPR:NOTC2:FREQ:OFFS 12200000 NPR:NOTC2:BWID:REL 5
//--------------Performing the Measurement----//Select single sweep mode. INIT:CONT OFF
//Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished. INIT;*WAI
//---------------Retrieving Results------------//Query the noise power ratio for each notch. CALC:NPR:RES? ALL //Result: //9.38,-51.73,-4685,-61.10,-56.26
//Query the measured power in each trace point TRAC:DATA? TRACe1 //Returns 1001 power values
13.5.7 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask
All remote control commands specific to spectrum emission mask measurements are described here.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
968
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
See also Chapter 13.5.2, "Configuring Power Measurements", on page 886.
Remote commands exclusive to spectrum emission mask measurements:
Managing Measurement Configurations............................................................... 969 Controlling the Measurement................................................................................ 970 Configuring a Multi-SEM Measurement................................................................ 971 Configuring a Sweep List...................................................................................... 972 Configuring the Reference Range.........................................................................987 Configuring the Power Classes.............................................................................989 Configuring MSR SEM Measurements................................................................. 994 Configuring the List Evaluation........................................................................... 1000 Performing an SEM Measurement......................................................................1002 Retrieving Results............................................................................................... 1002 Example: SEM Measurement............................................................................. 1002
13.5.7.1 Managing Measurement Configurations
The following commands control measurement configurations for SEM measurements.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:RESTore............................................................969 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet[:STANdard]................................................................. 969 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet:RESTore..................................................................... 970 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet:STORe....................................................................... 970
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:RESTore
This command restores the predefined limit lines for the selected Spectrum Emission Mask standard.
All modifications made to the predefined limit lines are lost and the factory-set values are restored.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<sb>
irrelevant
Example:
CALC:LIM:ESP:REST Resets the limit lines for the current Spectrum Emission Mask standard to the default setting.
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet[:STANdard] <Standard>
This command loads a measurement configuration.
Standard definitions are stored in an xml file. The default directory for SEM standards is C:\R_S\INSTR\sem_std.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
969
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Suffix: <sb>
Parameters: <Standard>
Manual operation:
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
String containing the file name. If you have stored the file in a subdirectory of the directory mentioned above, you have to include the relative path to the file.
See " Standard / MSR Settings " on page 251 See " Load Standard " on page 258
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet:RESTore
This command restores the default configurations of predefined SEM standards.
Note that the command will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Manual operation: See " Restore Standard Files " on page 259
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet:STORe <Standard>
This command saves the current SEM measurement configuration.
Standard definitions are stored in an xml file. The default directory for SEM standards is C:\R_S\INSTR\sem_std.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Parameters: <Standard>
String containing the file name. You can save the file in a subdirectory of the directory mentioned above. In that case, you have to include the relative path to the file.
Manual operation: See " Save Standard " on page 259
13.5.7.2 Controlling the Measurement
The following commands control the measurement itself. INITiate<n>:ESPectrum.................................................................................................. 971 [SENSe:]SWEep:MODE................................................................................................. 971
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
970
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
INITiate<n>:ESPectrum
This command initiates a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
[SENSe:]SWEep:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the spurious emission and spectrum emission mask measurements.
You can select other measurements with
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>[:STATe]
Parameters: <Mode>
LIST | AUTO | ESPectrum
AUTO Turns on basic spectrum measurements.
ESPectrum Turns on spectrum emission mask measurements.
LIST Turns on spurious emission measurements.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
SWE:MODE ESP
13.5.7.3 Configuring a Multi-SEM Measurement
In the Spectrum application only, spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels (see Chapter 6.6.4.5, "SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks ("MultiSEM")", on page 240). Up to 8 sub blocks (with 7 gaps) can be defined. For each sub block, the familiar configuration settings concerning ranges, limit lines etc. can be defined in individual tabs (select the sub block using the <sb> suffix in the corresponding commands). In addition, settings on the sub blocks themselves must be configured.
Useful commands for multi-SEM measurements described elsewhere: [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:MLCalc on page 985
Remote commands exclusive to multi-SEM measurements
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SCENter..................................................................................971 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SCOunt................................................................................... 972
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SCENter <Frequency>
This command defines the center frequency of the selected sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
971
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Suffix: <sb> Parameters: <Frequency>
Example: Manual operation:
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Frequency within the currently defined global span (see [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN on page 1135 and [SENSe: ]FREQuency:CENTer on page 1132).
Range: 1 to 3
*RST:
1
Default unit: Hz
ESP1:SCEN 1GHZ
See " Sub Block / Center Freq " on page 251
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SCOunt <Subblocks>
This command defines the number of sub blocks in the SEM measurement.
Suffix: <sb>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <Subblocks>
Number of sub blocks in the SEM measurement.
Range: *RST:
1 to 8 1
Example:
ESP:SCO 2
Manual operation: See " Sub Block Count " on page 251
13.5.7.4 Configuring a Sweep List The following commands define a sweep list for SEM measurements.
The sweep list cannot be configured using remote commands during an on-going sweep operation.
See also:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:LIMit[:STATe] on page 992
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:HSPeed.................................................................................. 973 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:RESolution........................................... 973 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:VIDeo.................................................. 974 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:COUNt?.................................................................974 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:DELete.................................................................. 975 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:FILTer:TYPE.......................................................... 975 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STARt............................................... 976 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STOP................................................976
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
972
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation.................................................. 977 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO........................................ 977 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN[:VALue]................................................978 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN:STATe..................................................978 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INSert....................................................................978 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:ABSolute:STARt........................................ 979 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:ABSolute:STOP........................................ 979 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARt........................................ 980 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARt:ABS................................. 980 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARt:FUNCtion......................... 981 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STOP......................................... 982 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STOP:ABS................................. 982 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STOP:FUNCtion..........................983 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:STATe...................................................... 984 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:POINts:MINimum[:VALue]....................................... 984 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:MLCalc.................................................................. 985 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:RLEVel.................................................................. 985 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME......................................................... 986 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO............................................... 986 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:TRANsducer.......................................................... 986 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SSETup.................................................................................. 987
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:HSPeed <State>
This command turns high speed mode for SEM measurements on and off.
For more information including restrictions see Chapter 6.6.4.3, "Fast SEM Measurements", on page 238.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
ESP:HSP ON
Manual operation: See " Fast SEM " on page 246
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:RESolution <RBW>
This command defines the resolution bandwidth for a SEM range.
In case of high speed measurements, the resolution bandwidth has to be identical for all ranges.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
973
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Suffix: <sb> <ri> Parameters: <RBW>
Manual operation:
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
1..n Selects the measurement range.
Resolution bandwidth. Refer to the data sheet for available resolution bandwidths.
*RST:
30.0 kHz
Default unit: Hz
See " RBW " on page 247
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:VIDeo <VBW>
This command defines the video bandwidth for a SEM range.
In case of high speed measurements, the video bandwidth has to be identical for all ranges.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <VBW>
Video bandwidth. Refer to the data sheet for available video bandwidths.
*RST:
10.0 MHz
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See " VBW " on page 247
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:COUNt?
This command queries the number of ranges in the sweep list.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
irrelevant
Return values: <Ranges>
Number of ranges in the sweep list.
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
974
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:DELete
This command removes a range from the sweep list.
Note that
you cannot delete the reference range a minimum of three ranges is mandatory.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
Selects the measurement range.
Manual operation: See " Delete Range " on page 250
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:FILTer:TYPE <FilterType>
This command selects the filter type for an SEM range.
In case of high speed measurements, the filter has to be identical for all ranges.
The EMI-specific filter types are available if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement option is installed, even if EMI measurement is not active. For details see Chapter 6.13.3.1, "Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types", on page 328.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1...30
Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <FilterType>
NORMal Gaussian filters
CFILter channel filters
RRC RRC filters
CISPr | PULSe CISPR (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option Return value for query is always PULS.
MIL MIL Std (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option
P5 5 Pole filters
*RST:
NORM
Refer to the datasheet for available filter bandwidths.
Manual operation: See " Filter Type " on page 246
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
975
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STARt <Frequency>
This command defines the start frequency of a SEM range.
Make sure to set an appropriate span. If you set a span that is
smaller than the span the SEM sweep list covers, the R&S FSW will not measure the ranges that are outside the span - results may be invalid.
greater than the span the SEM sweep list covers, the R&S FSW will adjust the start frequency of the first SEM range and the stop frequency of the last SEM range to the span
For more information see Chapter 6.6.4.1, "Ranges and Range Settings", on page 234.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1..n Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <Frequency>
Numeric value. Note that the minimum frequency range of a SEM range is 20 Hz.
*RST:
-12.75 MHz (range 1), -2.515 MHz (range 2), 2.515
MHz (range 3)
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See " Range Start / Range Stop " on page 246
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STOP <Frequency>
This command defines the stop frequency of a SEM range.
Make sure to set an appropriate span. If you set a span that is
smaller than the span the SEM sweep list covers, the R&S FSW will not measure the ranges that are outside the span - results may be invalid.
greater than the span the SEM sweep list covers, the R&S FSW will adjust the start frequency of the first SEM range and the stop frequency of the last SEM range to the span
For more information see Chapter 6.6.4.1, "Ranges and Range Settings", on page 234.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1..n Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the measurement range.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
976
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Parameters: <Frequency>
Manual operation:
Numeric value.
*RST:
-2.52 MHz (range 1), 2.52 MHz (range 2), 250.0
MHz (range 3)
Default unit: Hz
See " Range Start / Range Stop " on page 246
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation <Attenuation>
This command defines the input attenuation for a SEM range.
In case of high speed measurements, the input attenuation has to be identical for all ranges.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <Attenuation>
Numeric value. Refer to the data sheet for the attenuation range.
*RST:
10 dB
Default unit: dB
Manual operation: See " RF Attenuation " on page 247
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO <State>
This command turns automatic selection of the input attenuation for a SEM range on and off.
In case of high speed measurements, the input attenuation has to be identical for all ranges.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
ESP:RANG2:INP:ATT:AUTO OFF Deactivates the RF attenuation auto mode for range 2.
Manual operation: See " RF Att Mode " on page 247
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
977
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN[:VALue] <Gain>
This command selects the gain for a SEM range.
In case of high speed measurements, the level of the preamplifier has to be identical for all ranges.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..30
Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <Gain>
15 dB | 30 dB
The availability of preamplification levels depends on the R&S FSW model. � R&S FSW8/13: 15dB and 30 dB � R&S FSW26 or higher: 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two.
*RST:
OFF
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN:STATe <State>
This command turns the preamplifier for a SEM range on and off.
In case of high speed measurements, the state of the preamplifier has to be identical for all ranges.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See " Preamp " on page 248
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INSert <Mode>
This command inserts a new SEM range and updates the range numbers accordingly.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
978
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
<ri> Parameters: <Mode>
Manual operation:
1..n Selects the SEM range.
AFTer | BEFore AFTer Inserts a range after the selected range. BEFore Inserts a range before the selected range.
See " Insert before Range / Insert after Range " on page 250
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:ABSolute:STARt <Level>
This command defines an absolute limit for a SEM range.
Unlike manual operation, you can define an absolute limit anytime and regardless of the limit check mode.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the measurement range.
<li>
1..n
Power class for which the limit is defined.
Parameters: <Level>
Absolute limit at the start frequency of a SEM range.
Range: -400 to 400
*RST:
-13
Default unit: dBm
Example:
SENSe:ESPectrum:RANGe:LIMit:ABSolute:STARt -10 For a detailed example see Chapter 13.5.7.11, "Example: SEM Measurement", on page 1002.
Manual operation: See " Abs Limit Start / Stop <n> " on page 248
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:ABSolute:STOP <Level>
This command defines an absolute limit for a SEM range.
Unlike manual operation, you can define an absolute limit anytime and regardless of the limit check mode.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the measurement range.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
979
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
<li> Parameters: <Level>
Example:
Manual operation:
1..n Power class for which the limit is defined.
Absolute limit at the stop frequency of a SEM range.
Range: -400 to 400
*RST:
-13
Default unit: dBm
SENSe:ESPectrum:RANGe:LIMit:ABSolute:STOP -15 For a detailed example see Chapter 13.5.7.11, "Example: SEM Measurement", on page 1002.
See " Abs Limit Start / Stop <n> " on page 248
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARt <Level>
This command defines a relative limit for a SEM range.
Unlike manual operation, you can define a relative limit regardless of the limit check mode.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the SEM range.
<li>
1..n
Power class for which the limit is defined.
Parameters: <Level>
Relative limit at the start frequency of a SEM range.
Range: -400 to 400
*RST:
-50
Default unit: dBc
Example:
SENS:ESP:RANG:LIM:REL:STAR -10
Manual operation: See " Rel Limit Start / Stop <n> " on page 248
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARt:ABS <Level>
This command defines an absolute limit for the MAX function of the relative limit for a SEM range.
For more information see "Relative limit line functions" on page 238.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the SEM range.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
980
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
<li> Parameters: <Level>
Example: Manual operation:
1..n Power class for which the limit is defined.
Absolute limit at the start frequency of a SEM range to be used in addition to the relative limit if the MAX function is enabled (see
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>: RELative:STARt:FUNCtion on page 981).
Range: -400 to 400
*RST:
-13
Default unit: dBm
SENSe:ESPectrum:RANGe:LIMit:RELative:STARt: ABSolute -10 For a detailed example see Chapter 13.5.7.11, "Example: SEM Measurement", on page 1002.
See " Rel Limit Start / Stop <n> " on page 248
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARt:FUNCtion <Function>
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the SEM range.
<li>
1..n
Power class for which the limit is defined.
Parameters: <Function>
OFF | MAX
Defines the function to be used to determine the relative limit line start value
MAX The maximum of the relative and the absolute level is used as the limit start value. Use the [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>: RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARt and [SENSe:
]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative: STARt:ABS commands to define these values.
OFF No function is used, the relative limit line is defined by a fixed relative start value. Use the [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>: RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARtcommand to define this value.
*RST:
OFF
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
981
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Manual operation:
SENSe:ESPectrum:RANGe:LIMit:RELative:STARt: FUNCtion MAX For a detailed example see Chapter 13.5.7.11, "Example: SEM Measurement", on page 1002.
See " Rel Limit Start / Stop <n> " on page 248
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STOP <Level>
This command defines a relative limit for a SEM range.
Unlike manual operation, you can define a relative limit anytime and regardless of the limit check mode.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the SEM range.
<li>
1..n
Power class for which the limit is defined.
Parameters: <Level>
Relative limit at the stop frequency of a SEM range.
Range: -400 to 400
*RST:
-50
Default unit: dBc
Example:
SENSe:ESPectrum:RANGe:LIMit:RELative:STOP -15 For a detailed example see Chapter 13.5.7.11, "Example: SEM Measurement", on page 1002.
Manual operation: See " Rel Limit Start / Stop <n> " on page 248
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STOP:ABS <Level>
This command defines an absolute limit for the MAX function of the relative limit for a SEM range.
For more information see "Relative limit line functions" on page 238.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the SEM range.
<li>
1..n
Power class for which the limit is defined.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
982
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Parameters: <Level>
Example: Manual operation:
Absolute limit at the stop frequency of a SEM range to be used in addition to the relative limit if the MAX function is enabled (see
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>: RELative:STOP:FUNCtion on page 983).
Range: -400 to 400
*RST:
-13
Default unit: dBm
SENSe:ESPectrum:RANGe:LIMit:RELative:STOP: ABSolute -15 For a detailed example see Chapter 13.5.7.11, "Example: SEM Measurement", on page 1002.
See " Rel Limit Start / Stop <n> " on page 248
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STOP:FUNCtion <Function>
This command enables the use of a function when defining the relative limit for a SEM range.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the SEM range.
<li>
1..n
Power class for which the limit is defined.
Parameters: <Function>
OFF | MAX
Defines the function to be used to determine the relative limit line stop value
MAX The maximum of the relative and the absolute level is used as the limit stop value. Use the [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>: RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STOP and [SENSe:
]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative: STOP:ABS commands to define these values.
OFF No function is used, the relative limit line is defined by a fixed relative stop value. Use the [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>: RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STOP command to define this value.
*RST:
OFF
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
983
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Manual operation:
SENSe:ESPectrum:RANGe:LIMit:RELative:STOP: FUNCtion MAX For a detailed example see Chapter 13.5.7.11, "Example: SEM Measurement", on page 1002.
See " Rel Limit Start / Stop <n> " on page 248
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:STATe <State>
This command selects the limit check mode for all SEM ranges (<range> is irrelevant).
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the SEM range.
<li>
1..n
Power class for which the limit is defined.
Parameters: <State>
ABSolute | RELative | AND | OR
ABSolute Checks only the absolute limits defined.
RELative Checks only the relative limits. Relative limits are defined as relative to the measured power in the reference range.
AND Combines the absolute and relative limit. The limit check fails when both limits are violated.
OR Combines the absolute and relative limit. The limit check fails when one of the limits is violated.
*RST:
RELative
Manual operation: See " Limit Check <n> " on page 248
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:POINts:MINimum[:VALue] <SweepPoint>
Defines the minimum number of sweep points for the range.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <SweepPoint>
Minimum number of sweep points per range
Range: *RST:
1 to 32001 1
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
984
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example:
SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:POINts:MIN:VALue 400
Manual operation: See " Min Sweep Points " on page 249
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:MLCalc <Function>
Defines the function used to calculate the limit line for the n-th power class for overlapping ranges in Multi-SEM measurements. For details see "Limit calculation for individual ranges" on page 242.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <Function>
NONE | MAX | SUM
NONE (reference ranges only:) the limit of the reference range is used; Reference ranges always use the function "NONE".
SUM sum of the two limit lines (calculated for linear powers) is used
MAX maximum of the two limit lines is used
*RST:
SUM (reference range: NONE)
Manual operation: See " Multi-Limit Calc <n> " on page 249
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:RLEVel <RefLevel>
This command defines the reference level for a SEM range.
In case of high speed measurements, the reference level has to be identical for all ranges.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <RefLevel>
Reference level. Refer to the data sheet for the reference level range.
*RST:
0 dBm
Default unit: dBm
Manual operation: See " Ref Level " on page 247
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
985
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME <SweepTime>
This command defines the sweep time for a SEM range.
In case of high speed measurements, the sweep time has to be identical for all ranges.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <SweepTime>
Sweep time. The range depends on the ratios of the span to the RBW and the RBW to the VBW. Refer to the data sheet for more information.
Default unit: s
Manual operation: See " Sweep Time " on page 247
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO <State>
This command turns automatic selection of the sweep time for a SEM range on and off.
In case of high speed measurements, the sweep time has to be identical for all ranges.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<ri>
1..n
Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
ESP:RANG3:SWE:TIME:AUTO OFF Deactivates the sweep time auto mode for range 3.
Manual operation: See " Sweep Time Mode " on page 247
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:TRANsducer <Transducer> This command selects a transducer factor for a SEM range. Note that the transducer must cover at least the span of the range the x-axis has to be linear the unit has to be dB
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
986
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Suffix: <sb>
<ri>
Parameters: <Transducer>
Manual operation:
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
1..n Selects the measurement range.
String containing the transducer file name, including the path information.
See " Transducer Factor " on page 248
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SSETup <State>
Enables or disables symmetrical configuration of the range settings.
See Chapter 6.6.4.1, "Ranges and Range Settings", on page 234.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See " Symmetrical Setup " on page 250
13.5.7.5 Configuring the Reference Range
The following commands define the reference range for the SEM sweep list.
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:BWID...................................................................................... 987 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:FILTer[:RRC]:ALPHa.................................................................988 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:FILTer[:RRC][:STATe]................................................................ 988 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RRANge?................................................................................ 988 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RTYPe.................................................................................... 989
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:BWID <Bandwidth>
This command defines the channel bandwidth of the reference range.
The bandwidth is available if the power reference is the channel power.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
987
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
Manual operation:
minimum span value span of reference range
*RST:
3.84 MHz
Default unit: Hz
See " Tx Bandwidth " on page 253
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:FILTer[:RRC]:ALPHa <Alpha>
This command defines the roll-off factor for the RRC filter.
The RRC filter is available if the power reference is the channel power.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Parameters: <Alpha>
Range: *RST:
0 to 1 0.22
Manual operation: See " Alpha: " on page 253
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:FILTer[:RRC][:STATe] <State>
This command turns the RRC filter in the reference range on and off.
The RRC filter is available if the power reference is the channel power.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Manual operation: See " RRC Filter State " on page 253
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RRANge?
This command queries the reference range.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Return values: <RefRange>
Number of the current reference range. Range: 1 to 30
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
988
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RTYPe <Type>
This command defines the type of the power reference.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Parameters: <Type>
PEAK | CPOWer
PEAK Measures the highest peak within the reference range.
CPOWer Measures the channel power within the reference range (integral bandwidth method).
*RST:
CPOWer
Manual operation: See " Power Reference Type " on page 252
13.5.7.6 Configuring the Power Classes
The following commands define the power classes for SEM measurements.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:LIMits................................................................ 989 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:MODE...............................................................990 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:VALue............................................................... 991 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:COUNt...........................................991 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>[:EXCLusive]................................... 992 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:LIMit[:STATe].................................. 992 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:MAXimum...................................... 993 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:MINimum....................................... 994
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:LIMits <Max1>,<Max2>,<Max3>
This command sets or queries up to 4 power classes in one step. You can only define values for the number of power classes defined by CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>: ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:COUNt on page 991.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<sb>
1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
989
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Setting parameters:
<Max1>
Defines the value range for power class 1 as -200 to
<Max1>.
Only available for CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL:COUNT >=2
If only 2 power classes are defined, the value range for power
class 2 is defined as <Max1> to 200.
Range: -199 to + 199 Default unit: DBM
<Max2>
Defines the value range for power class 2 as <Max1> to <Max2>. Only available for CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL:COUNT >=3 If only 3 power classes are defined, the value range for power class 3 is defined as <Max2> to 200.
Range:
-199 to + 199, <Max2> must be higher than <Max1>
<Max3>
Defines the value range for power class 3 as <Max2> to <Max3>. The value range for power class 4 is defined as <Max3> to 200. Only available for CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL:COUNT = 4
Range:
-199 to + 199, <Max3> must be higher than <Max2>
Example:
CALC:LIM:ESP:LIM -50,50,70 Defines the following power classes: <-200, -50> <-50, 50> <50, 70> <70, 200> Query: CALC:LIM:ESP:LIM? Response: -200,-50,50,70,200
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:MODE <Mode>
Which limit line is to be used for an SEM measurement depends on the power class the input signal power belongs to. This command defines wether the power class is determined automatically or manually.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
990
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
<sb> Parameters: <Mode>
Example:
1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
AUTO The power class (and thus the limit line) is assigned dynamically according to the currently measured channel power.
MANUAL One of the specified power classes is selected manually for the entire measurement. The selection is made with the
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>: PCLass<pc>[:EXCLusive] command.
*RST:
AUTO
CALC:LIM:ESP:MODE AUTO Activates automatic selection of the limit line.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:VALue <Power>
This command activates the manual limit line selection as and specifies the expected power as a value. Depending on the entered value, the associated predefined limit lines is selected.
This command has the same effect as a combination of the CALC:LIM:ESP:MODE MAN and the CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>[: EXCLusive] commands; however, the power class to be used is not defined directly, but via the expected power. As opposed to CALC:LIM:ESP:MODE AUTO, the power class is not re-assigned to the input signal power dynamically, but only once when the command is executed.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<sb>
1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Parameters: <Power>
integer
Range: *RST:
-200 to 199 0
Example:
CALC:LIM:ESP:VAL 33 Activates manual selection of the limit line and selects the limit line for P = 33.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:COUNt <NoPowerClasses> This command sets the number of power classes to be defined.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
991
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
This command must be executed before any new power class values can be defined using CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:MAXimum and CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:MINimum.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<sb>
1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<pc>
irrelevant
Parameters: <NoPowerClasses> 1 to 4
*RST:
1
Example:
CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL:COUN 2 Two power classes can be defined.
Manual operation: See " Adding or Removing a Power Class " on page 254
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>[:EXCLusive] <State>
This command selects the power class used by the measurement if CALCulate<n>: LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:MODE is set to manual.
Note that:
You can only use power classes for which limits are defined.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<sb>
1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<pc>
1..n power class
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL1 ON Activates the first defined power class.
Manual operation: See " Used Power Classes: " on page 254
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:LIMit[:STATe] <State> This command selects the limit check mode for each power class.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
992
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Suffix: <n> <li> <sb> <pc> Parameters: <State>
Example: Manual operation:
. irrelevant
irrelevant
1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
1..n power class
ABSolute | RELative | AND | OR
ABSolute Evaluates only limit lines with absolute power values
RELative Evaluates only limit lines with relative power values
AND Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values. A negative result is returned if both limits fail.
OR Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values. A negative result is returned if at least one limit failed.
*RST:
REL
CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL:LIM ABS
See " Used Power Classes: " on page 254
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:MAXimum <Level>
This command defines the upper limit of a particular power class.
Note:
The last power class always has an upper limit of 200 dBm.
The upper limit of a power class must always be the same as the lower limit of the subsequent power class.
The power class must already exist (see CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>: ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:COUNt on page 991).
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<sb>
1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<pc>
1..n power class
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
993
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Parameters: <Level> Example:
Manual operation:
Range: -199.9 dBm to 200 dBm Default unit: dBm
CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL1:MAX -40 dBm Sets the maximum power value of the first power class to -40 dBm.
See " PMin / PMax " on page 254
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:MINimum <Level>
This command defines the lower limit of a particular power class.
Note:
The first power class always has a lower limit of -200 dBm.
The lower limit of a power class must always be the same as the upper limit of the previous power class.
The power class must already exist (see CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>: ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:COUNt on page 991).
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
<sb>
1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
<pc>
1..n power class
Parameters: <Level>
Range: -200 dBm to 199.9 dBm Default unit: dBm
Example:
CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL2:MIN -40 dBm Sets the minimum power value of the second power class to -40 dBm.
Manual operation: See " PMin / PMax " on page 254
13.5.7.7 Configuring MSR SEM Measurements
The following commands configure MSR SEM measurements. For details see Chapter 6.6.4.4, "Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) SEM Measurements", on page 240.
For manual operation see Chapter 6.6.5.5, "MSR Settings", on page 254.
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:APPLy.............................................................................995 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:BAND............................................................................. 995 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:BCATegory...................................................................... 996 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:CLASs............................................................................ 997 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:GSM:CARRier................................................................. 997
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
994
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:GSM:CPResent............................................................... 998 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:LTE:CPResent................................................................. 999 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:MPOWer......................................................................... 999 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:RFBWidth......................................................................1000
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:APPLy
This command configures the SEM sweep list according to the MSR settings defined by previous commands.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Example:
//Select the band category 1 ESP2:MSR:BCAT 1 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the frequency range of the base station to > 3 GHz ESP2:MSR:BAND:HIGH //Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2:MSR:RFBW 20MHZ //Calculate limits for MSR SEM ESP2:MSR:APPL
Manual operation: See " Apply to SEM " on page 257
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:BAND <Range>
Defines the frequency range of the bands used by the base station.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Parameters: <Range>
LOW | HIGH
LOW 3 GHz
HIGH > 3 GHz
*RST:
LOW
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
995
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Manual operation:
//Select the band category 1 ESP2:MSR:BCAT 1 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the frequency range of the base station to > 3 GHz ESP2:MSR:BAND:HIGH //Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2:MSR:RFBW 20MHZ //Calculate limits for MSR SEM ESP2:MSR:APPL
See " Bands " on page 256
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:BCATegory <Category>
This command defines the band category for MSR measurements, i.e. the combination of available carriers to measure.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Parameters: <Category>
1 | 2 | 3
1 2 carriers: LTE FDD and W-CDMA
2 3 carriers: LTE FDD, W-CDMA and GSM/EDGE
3 2 carriers: LTE TDD and TD-SCDMA
*RST:
1
Example:
//Select the band category 1 ESP2:MSR:BCAT 1 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the frequency range of the base station to > 3 GHz ESP2:MSR:BAND:HIGH //Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2:MSR:RFBW 20MHZ //Calculate limits for MSR SEM ESP2:MSR:APPL
Manual operation: See " Band Category " on page 255
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
996
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:CLASs <Class>
Defines the class of the base station according to its sending range.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Parameters: <Class>
WIDE | MEDium | LOCal
WIDE Wide Area
MEDium Medium Range
LOCal Local Area
*RST:
WIDE
Example:
//Select the band category 1 ESP2:MSR:BCAT 1 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the frequency range of the base station to > 3 GHz ESP2:MSR:BAND:HIGH //Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2:MSR:RFBW 20MHZ //Calculate limits for MSR SEM ESP2:MSR:APPL
Manual operation: See " Base Station Class " on page 256
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:GSM:CARRier <Power>
Defines the power of the GSM carrier (if available, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>: MSR:GSM:CPResent on page 998).
This command is only available for band category 2 (see [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>: MSR:BCATegory on page 996).
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Parameters: <Power>
Range: 0 dBm to 100 dBm
*RST:
39.0 dBm
Default unit: dBm
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
997
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Manual operation:
//Select the band category 2 ESP2:MSR:BCAT BC2 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2:MSR:RFBW 20MHZ //GSM/Edge present ESP2:MSR:GSM:CPR ON //Power of the GSM carrier is 20dBm ESP2:MSR:GSM:CARR 20 //Calculate limits for MSR SEM ESP2:MSR:APPL
See " Power Gsm Carrier " on page 257
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:GSM:CPResent <State>
This command defines whether a GSM/Edge carrier is located at the edge of the specified RF bandwidth. In this case, the specification demands specific limits for the SEM ranges.
This command is only available for band category 2 (see [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>: MSR:BCATegory on page 996).
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
//Select the band category 2 ESP2:MSR:BCAT BC2 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2:MSR:RFBW 20MHZ //GSM/Edge present ESP2:MSR:GSM:CPR ON //Power of the GSM carrier is 20dBm ESP2:MSR:GSM:CARR 20
Manual operation: See " Carrier Adjacent to RF Bandwidth Edge " on page 256
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
998
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:LTE:CPResent <State>
This command defines whether an LTE FDD 1.4 MHz or 3 MHz carrier is located at the edge of the specified RF bandwidth. In this case, the specification demands specific limits for the SEM ranges.
This command is only available for band category 2 (see [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>: MSR:BCATegory on page 996).
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
//Select the band category 2 ESP2:MSR:BCAT BC2 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2:MSR:RFBW 20MHZ //LTE present ESP2:MSR:LTE:CPR ON //Calculate limits for MSR SEM ESP2:MSR:APPL
Manual operation: See " Carrier Adjacent to RF Bandwidth Edge " on page 256
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:MPOWer <Power>
Defines the maximum output power of the base station.
This setting is only available for base stations with a medium range base station class (see [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:CLASs on page 997).
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Parameters: <Power>
Range: 0 dBm to 100 dBm Increment: 1 dB Default unit: dBm
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
999
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Manual operation:
//Select the band category 1 ESP2:MSR:BCAT 1 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the frequency range of the base station to > 3 GHz ESP2:MSR:BAND:HIGH //Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2:MSR:RFBW 20MHZ
See " Base Station Maximum Output Power " on page 256
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:RFBWidth <Bandwidth>
This command defines the RF bandwidth of the base station for MSR measurements.
Suffix: <sb>
. 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
Bandwidth in Hz
*RST:
10.0 MHz
Default unit: Hz
Example:
//Select the band category 1 ESP2:MSR:BCAT 1 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the frequency range of the base station to > 3 GHz ESP2:MSR:BAND:HIGH //Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2:MSR:RFBW 20MHZ //Calculate limits for MSR SEM ESP2:MSR:APPL
Manual operation: See " Base Station RF Bandwidth " on page 256
13.5.7.8 Configuring the List Evaluation The following commands configure the list evaluation. Useful commands for SEM measurements described elsewhere MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST on page 1310
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1000
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Remote commands exclusive to SEM measurements
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch:AUTO.................................................................... 1001 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:AUTO...............................................................1001 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch[:IMMediate]............................................................ 1001 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch[:IMMediate].......................................................1001 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch:MARGin................................................................. 1001 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:MARGin........................................................... 1001 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch:PSHow.................................................................. 1002 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:PSHow.............................................................1002
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch:AUTO <State> CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:AUTO <State>
This command turns the list evaluation on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
CALC:ESP:PSE:AUTO OFF Deactivates the list evaluation.
Manual operation: See " List Evaluation State (Result Summary)" on page 260
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch[:IMMediate] CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch[:IMMediate]
This command initiates a list evaluation.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch:MARGin <Threshold> CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:MARGin <Margin>
This command defines the threshold of the list evaluation.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <Margin>
Range: -200 to 200
*RST:
200
Default unit: dB
Example:
CALC:ESP:PSE:MARG 100 Sets the margin to 100 dB.
Manual operation: See " Margin " on page 260
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1001
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch:PSHow <State> CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:PSHow <State>
This command turns the peak labels in the diagram on and off.
Peak labels are blue squares.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
CALC:ESP:PSE:PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares.
Manual operation: See " Show Peaks " on page 260
13.5.7.9 Performing an SEM Measurement
The following commands are required to perform an SEM measurement: SENS:SWE:MODE ESP, see [SENSe:]SWEep:MODE on page 971 INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 885
13.5.7.10 Retrieving Results
The following commands analyze and retrieve measurement results for SEM measurements.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:FAIL? on page 1280 TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1196 TRACe<n>[:DATA]:MEMory? on page 1197 TRACe<n>[:DATA]:X? on page 1198 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 886
13.5.7.11 Example: SEM Measurement
In this example we will configure and perform an SEM measurement. Note that this example is primarily meant to demonstrate the remote control commands, it does not necessarily reflect a useful measurement task. For most common measurement standards, the R&S FSW performs the measurement optimally with the predefined settings, without further configuration.
//-----------Preparing the measurement -----------//Reset the instrument *RST
//------------ Preparing the measurement-----------//Activate SEM Measurement
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1002
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
SWE:MODE ESP
//Selects single sweep mode. //SEM has to be in single sweep mode to be configured and no sweep operation //may be running! // If required, a sweep stop can be ensured by INIT:IMM;*WAI INIT:CONT OFF
//------------ Managing Measurement Configurations---------//Load the 3GPP configuration stored in the file '3GPP_UL.xml' ESP:PRES 'WCDMA\3GPP\UL\3GPP_UL.xml'
//------------ Defining the Reference Range----------------//Query the current reference range. ESP:RRAN? //Select the channel power as the power reference. ESP:RTYP CPOW //Define a channel bandwidth of 4 MHz for the power reference. ESP:BWID 4 MHZ //Use an RRC filter with a roll-off factor of 0.5 when measuring //the reference power. ESP:FILT:RRC ON ESP:FILT:ALPH 0.5
//------------ Configuring Power Classes-------------------//Define 3 power classes. CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL:COUN 3 //Define the value ranges of the three power classes as [dBm]: //power class 1: -200 to -100 //power class 2: -100 to 0 //power class 3: 0 to 200 CALC:LIM:ESP:LIM -100,0 //Define an absolute limit check for class 1. CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL1:LIM ABS //Define a relative limit check for class 2. CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL2:LIM REL //Define a manual selection of the power class. CALC:LIM:ESP:MODE MAN //Activate the use of the second power class for the entire measurement. CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL2 ON
//------------ Configuring a Sweep List--------------------//Insert a range after range 2. ESP:RANG2:INS AFT //Insert a range before range 1. ESP:RANG1:INS BEF //Query the number of measurement ranges in the sweep list (currently 11). ESP:RANG:COUNt? //Delete the 11th range.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1003
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
ESP:RANG5:DEL
//Define a stop frequency of -9 MHz for range 1. ESP:RANG1:STOP -10000000
//Define a start frequency of -10 MHz for range 2. ESP:RANG2:STAR -9000000
//Switch off Fast SEM mode so the ranges can be configured individually. ESP:HSP OFF
//Define a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz for range 2. ESP:RANG2:BAND:RES 1000000
//Select an RRC filter for range 2. ESP:RANG2:FILT:TYPE RRC
//Define a video bandwidth of 5 MHz for range 2. ESP:RANG2:BAND:VID 5000000 //Define a sweep time of 1 second for range 2. ESP:RANG2:SWE:TIME 1 //Define a reference level of 0 dBm for range 2. ESP:RANG2:RLEV 0 //Define an input attenuation of 10 dB for range 2. ESP:RANG2:INP:ATT 10
// Create a transducer that can be used. // It has to cover the corresponding frequency range
SENSe1:CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect 'Transducer' SENSe1:CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT 'DB' SENSe1:CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent 'Test Transducer' // Frequency Span 0 MHz bis 20 Ghz SENSe1:CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA 0e6,5, 20e9,3
//Include a transducer called 'transducer' for range 2. ESP:RANG2:TRAN 'Transducer'
//------------ Configuring the limit check------------------
//Check the absolute and relative limits for all ranges in power class 1 and //fails if both limits are violated. Since power class 2 is set to be used for //the entire measurement, values for Limit Check 1 are irrelevant. They are //defined here to demonstrate the use of the MAX function for relative limits. ESP:RANG:LIM1:STAT AND //Enable the use of maximum function for relative limit start. If the value //exceeds the larger of the absolute (-13 dBm) and relative (-10 dBc) start //values, the check fails. ESP:RANG2:LIM1:REL:STAR:FUNC MAX
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1004
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
ESP:RANG2:LIM1:REL:STAR -10 ESP:RANG2:LIM1:REL:STAR:ABS -13 ESP:RANG2:LIM1:REL:STOP:FUNC MAX ESP:RANG2:LIM1:REL:STOP -10 ESP:RANG2:LIM1:REL:STOP:ABS -13
//Check the absolute and relative limits for all ranges in power class 2 and //fails if either limit is violated. Since power class 2 is set to be used for //the entire measurement, values for Limit Check 1 are irrelevant. ESP:RANG:LIM2:STAT OR //Define an absolute limit of 10 dBm for the entire range 2 for power class 2. ESP:RANG2:LIM2:ABS:STAR 10 ESP:RANG2:LIM2:ABS:STOP 10 //Define a relative limit of -20 dBc for the entire range 2 for power class 2. ESP:RANG2:LIM2:REL:STAR -20 ESP:RANG2:LIM2:REL:STOP -20
//------------ Configuring List Evaluation----------------//Activate list evaluation, i.e. the peak is determined for each range //after each sweep. CALC:ESP:PSE:AUTO ON //Define a peak threshold of 10 dB. CALC:ESP:PSE:MARG 10dB
//------------ Managing Measurement Configurations----------
//Save the current configuration in a new file named '3GPP_UL_User' //in the same directory so the standard is not overwritten. ESP:PRES:STOR 'WCDMA\3GPP\UL\3GPP_UL_User.xml'
//------------ Performing the measurement------------------//One sweep INIT:ESP
//------------ Checking the Results------------------------//Query the result of the limit check for all ranges. CALC:LIM:FAIL? //Query the peak for each range of the SEM measurement as a list. TRAC:DATA? LIST
13.5.8 Measuring Spurious Emissions
The following commands are required to perform spurious emissions measurements.
Initializing the Measurement............................................................................... 1006 Configuring a Sweep List.................................................................................... 1006 Configuring the List Evaluation........................................................................... 1015 Adjusting the X-Axis to the Range Definitions.....................................................1017
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1005
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Performing a Spurious Measurement................................................................. 1017 Retrieving and Saving Settings and Results....................................................... 1017 Programming Example: Spurious Emissions Measurement............................... 1018
13.5.8.1 Initializing the Measurement
Note that with the R&S FSW, the spurious measurement must be initialized before you can start configuring the sweep list or list evaluation. INITiate<n>:SPURious..................................................................................................1006
INITiate<n>:SPURious
This command initiates a Spurious Emission measurement.
Suffix:
.
<n>
13.5.8.2 Configuring a Sweep List
The following commands configure the sweep list for spurious emission measurements.
The sweep list cannot be configured using remote commands during an on-going sweep operation.
Useful commands for configuring the sweep described elsewhere:
[SENSe:]SWEep:MODE on page 971
Remote commands exclusive to spurious measurements:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:RESolution.......................................................... 1007 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:VIDeo................................................................. 1007 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:BREak.................................................................................. 1007 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:COUNt?................................................................................1008 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:DELete................................................................................. 1008 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:DETector...............................................................................1008 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STARt.............................................................. 1009 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STOP............................................................... 1009 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:FILTer:TYPE..........................................................................1010 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation................................................................. 1011 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO....................................................... 1011 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN:STATe................................................................. 1011 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN[:VALue]............................................................... 1012 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:LIMit:STARt...........................................................................1012 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:LIMit:STATe...........................................................................1012 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:LIMit:STOP........................................................................... 1013 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:POINts[:VALue]..................................................................... 1013 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:RLEVel................................................................................. 1013
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1006
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME........................................................................ 1014 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO.............................................................. 1014 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:TRANsducer......................................................................... 1014
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:RESolution <RBW>
This command defines the resolution bandwidth for a spurious emission measurement range.
Suffix: <ri>
. 1..n Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <RBW>
Resolution bandwidth. Refer to the data sheet for available resolution bandwidths.
Default unit: Hz
Example:
LIST:RANG2:BAND:RES 3KHZ
Manual operation: See " RBW " on page 280
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:VIDeo <VBW>
This command defines the video bandwidth for a spurious emission measurement range.
Suffix: <ri>
. 1..n Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <VBW>
Video bandwidth. Refer to the data sheet for available video bandwidths.
Default unit: Hz
Example:
LIST:RANG2:BAND:VID 3KHZ
Manual operation: See " VBW " on page 280
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:BREak <State>
This command controls the sweep for all ranges.
Suffix: <ri>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | 1 The R&S FSW stops after measuring one range, and the status bit number 10 in the STAT:OPER register is set. (See "STATus:OPERation Register" on page 799.) To continue with the next range, use INITiate<n>:CONMeas.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1007
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Manual operation:
OFF | 0 The R&S FSW sweeps all ranges in one go.
*RST:
0
LIST:RANG2:BRE ON
See " Stop After Sweep " on page 281
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:COUNt?
This command queries the number of ranges in the sweep list.
Suffix: <ri>
. irrelevant
Return values: <Ranges>
Number of ranges in the sweep list.
Example:
LIST:RANG:COUN?
Usage:
Query only
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:DELete
This command removes a range from the sweep list.
Note that
you cannot delete the reference range a minimum of three ranges is mandatory.
Suffix: <ri>
. 1..n Selects the measurement range.
Example:
LIST:RANG2:DEL
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:DETector <Detector>
This command selects the detector for a spurious emission measurement range.
Suffix: <ri>
. 1..n Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <Detector>
APEak Autopeak
NEGative minimum peak detector
POSitive peak detector
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1008
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Manual operation:
SAMPle sample detector
RMS RMS detector
AVERage average detector
*RST:
RMS
LIST:RANG2:DET AVER
See " Detector " on page 280
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STARt <Frequency>
This command defines the start frequency of a spurious emission measurement range.
Make sure to set an appropriate span. If you set a span that is
smaller than the span the sweep list covers, the R&S FSW will not measure the ranges that are outside the span - results may be invalid.
greater than the span the sweep list covers, the R&S FSW will adjust the start frequency of the first range and the stop frequency of the last range to the span
For more information seeChapter 6.7, "Spurious Emissions Measurement", on page 274 .
Suffix: <ri>
. 1..n Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <Frequency>
Numeric value.
*RST:
-12.75 MHz (range 1), -2.515 MHz (range 2), 2.515
MHz (range 3)
Default unit: Hz
Example:
LIST:RANG2:STAR 2MHZ
Manual operation: See " Range Start / Range Stop " on page 279
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STOP <Frequency>
This command defines the stop frequency of a spurious emission measurement range.
Make sure to set an appropriate span. If you set a span that is
smaller than the span the sweep list covers, the R&S FSW will not measure the ranges that are outside the span - results may be invalid.
greater than the span the sweep list covers, the R&S FSW will adjust the start frequency of the first range and the stop frequency of the last range to the span
For more information seeChapter 6.7, "Spurious Emissions Measurement", on page 274 .
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1009
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Suffix: <ri>
Parameters: <Frequency>
Example: Manual operation:
. 1..n Selects the measurement range.
Numeric value.
*RST:
-2.52 MHz (range 1), 2.52 MHz (range 2), 250.0
MHz (range 3)
Default unit: Hz
LIST:RANG2:STOP 5MHZ
See " Range Start / Range Stop " on page 279
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:FILTer:TYPE <FilterType>
This command selects the filter type for a spurious emission measurement range.
The EMI-specific filter types are available if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement option is installed, even if EMI measurement is not active. For details see Chapter 6.13.3.1, "Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types", on page 328.
Suffix: <ri>
. 1..30 Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <FilterType>
NORMal Gaussian filters
CFILter channel filters
RRC RRC filters
CISPr | PULSe CISPR (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option Return value for query is always PULS.
MIL MIL Std (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option
P5 5 Pole filters
*RST:
NORM
The available bandwidths of the filters are specified in the data
sheet.
Example:
LIST:RANG2:FILT:TYPE NORM
Manual operation: See " Filter Type " on page 280
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1010
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation <Attenuation>
This command defines the input attenuation for a spurious emission measurement range.
Suffix: <ri>
. 1..n Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <Attenuation>
Numeric value. Refer to the data sheet for the attenuation range.
*RST:
10 dB
Default unit: dB
Example:
LIST:RANG2:INP:ATT 5
Manual operation: See " RF Attenuation " on page 281
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO <State>
This command turns automatic selection of the input attenuation for a spurious emission measurement range on and off.
Suffix: <ri>
. 1..n Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
LIST:RANG2:INP:ATT:AUTO ON
Manual operation: See " RF Attenuation Mode " on page 281
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN:STATe <State>
This command turns the preamplifier for a spurious emission measurement range on and off.
The gain level is defined by [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN[:VALue] on page 1012.
Suffix: <ri>
. 1..n Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
LIST:RANG2:INP:GAIN:STAT ON
Manual operation: See " Preamp " on page 281
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1011
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN[:VALue] <Gain>
This command selects the preamplification level for the range.
The command requires option R&S FSW-B24.
Suffix: <ri>
. 1..n Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <Gain>
15 dB | 30 dB
The availability of preamplification levels depends on the R&S FSW model. �R&S FSW8/13: 15dB and 30 dB �R&S FSW26 or higher: 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two.
*RST:
OFF
Example:
LIST:RANG2:INP:GAIN 15
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:LIMit:STARt <Level>
This command defines an absolute limit for a spurious emission measurement range.
Suffix: <ri>
. 1..n Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <Level>
Absolute limit at the start frequency of a SEM range.
Range: -400 to 400
*RST:
13
Default unit: dBm
Example:
LIST:RANG2:LIM:STAR 200
Manual operation: See " Abs Limit Start / Abs Limit Stop " on page 282
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:LIMit:STATe <State>
This command turns the limit check for all spurious emission measurement ranges on and off.
Suffix: <ri>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
LIST:RANG2:LIM:STAT ON
Manual operation: See " Limit Check " on page 282
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1012
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:LIMit:STOP <Level>
This command defines an absolute limit for a spurious emission measurement range.
Suffix: <ri>
. 1..n Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <Level>
Absolute limit at the stop frequency of a SEM range.
Range: -400 to 400
*RST:
13
Default unit: dBm
Example:
LIST:RANG2:LIM:STOP 200
Manual operation: See " Abs Limit Start / Abs Limit Stop " on page 282
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:POINts[:VALue] <Points>
This command defines the number of sweep points in a spurious emission measurement range.
Suffix: <ri>
. 1..n Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <Points>
For more information on sweep points see Chapter 7.5.1.8, "How Much Data is Measured: Sweep Points and Sweep Count", on page 464.
*RST:
1001
Example:
LIST:RANG2:POIN 1000
Manual operation: See "Sweep Points" on page 281
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:RLEVel <RefLevel>
This command defines the reference level for a spurious emission measurement range.
Suffix: <ri>
. 1..n Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <RefLevel>
Reference level. Refer to the data sheet for the reference level range.
*RST:
0 dBm
Default unit: dBm
Example:
LIST:RANG2:RLEV 1DBM
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1013
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Manual operation: See " Reference Level " on page 281
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME <SweepTime>
This command defines the sweep time for a spurious emission measurement range.
Suffix: <ri>
. 1..n Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <SweepTime>
Sweep time. The range depends on the ratios of the span to the RBW and the RBW to the VBW. Refer to the data sheet for more information.
Example:
LIST:RANG2:SWE:TIME 2MS
Manual operation: See " Sweep Time " on page 280
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO <State>
This command turns automatic selection of the sweep time for a spurious emission measurement range on and off.
Suffix: <ri>
. 1..n Selects the measurement range.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
LIST:RANG2:SWE:TIME:AUTO ON
Manual operation: See " Sweep Time Mode " on page 280
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:TRANsducer <Transducer>
This command selects a transducer factor for a spurious emission measurement range.
Note the following prerequisites for the selected transducer: The transducer must cover at least the span of the range. The x-axis has to be linear. The unit has to be dB.
Suffix: <ri>
. 1..n Selects the measurement range.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1014
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Parameters: <Transducer>
Example: Manual operation:
String containing the transducer file name. Do not include a file extension or the file path. The file must be located in the C:\R_S\INSTR\trd directory.
LIST:RANG2:TRAN 'MYTRANS'
See " Transducer " on page 281
13.5.8.3 Configuring the List Evaluation
The following commands configure the list evaluation.
Useful commands for spurious emission measurements described elsewhere
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST on page 1310
Remote commands exclusive to spurious emission measurements
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:AUTO..................................................................................... 1015 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:AUTO................................................................................ 1015 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch:DETails.................................................................. 1015 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:DETails.............................................................1015 CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:MARGin.................................................................................. 1016 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:MARGin.............................................................................1016 CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PSHow....................................................................................1016 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PSHow.............................................................................. 1016 CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:SUBRanges.............................................................................1017 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges....................................................................... 1017
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:AUTO <State> CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:AUTO <State>
This command turns the list evaluatio
n on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
CALC:PSE:AUTO OFF Deactivates the list evaluation.
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch:DETails <State> CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:DETails <State>
This command configures how detailed the list in the Result Summary is.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1015
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Suffix: <n> Parameters: <State>
Example: Manual operation:
. Window
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
ON | 1 Includes all detected peaks (up to a maximum defined by CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges on page 1017).
OFF | 0 Includes only one peak per range.
*RST:
0
CALC:ESP:PSE:DET ON CALC:PSE:SUBR 10 Includes up to 10 peaks per range in the list.
See " Details " on page 284
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:MARGin <Threshold> CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:MARGin <Margin>
This command defines the threshold of the list evaluation.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <Margin>
Range: -200 to 200 Default unit: dB
Example:
CALC:PSE:MARG 100 Sets the threshold to 100 dB.
Manual operation: See " Margin " on page 283
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PSHow <State> CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PSHow <State>
This command turns the peak labels in the diagram on and off.
Peak labels are blue squares.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
CALC:PSE:PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares.
Manual operation: See " Show Peaks " on page 283
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1016
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:SUBRanges <NumberPeaks> CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges <NumberPeaks>
This command defines the number of peaks included in the peak list.
After this number of peaks has been found, the R&S FSW stops the peak search and continues the search in the next measurement range.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <NumberPeaks>
Range: *RST:
1 to 50 25
Example:
CALC:PSE:SUBR 10 Sets 10 peaks per range to be stored in the list.
Manual operation: See " Peaks per Range " on page 284
13.5.8.4 Adjusting the X-Axis to the Range Definitions
[SENSe:]LIST:XADJust
Sets the x-axis range for the spurious emission measurement from the start frequency of the first sweep range to the stop frequency of the last sweep range.
Example:
SENS:LIST:XADJ
Usage:
Event
13.5.8.5 Performing a Spurious Measurement
The following commands are required to perform a Spurious measurement: SENS:SWE:MODE LIST, see [SENSe:]SWEep:MODE on page 971 INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 885, see Chapter 13.5.1, "Performing Measurements", on page 883
13.5.8.6 Retrieving and Saving Settings and Results
The following commands analyze and retrieve measurement results for Spurious measurements.
Useful commands for spurious emission measurements described elsewhere CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:FAIL? on page 1280 TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1196 TRACe<n>[:DATA]:MEMory? on page 1197 TRACe<n>[:DATA]:X? on page 1198
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1017
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
13.5.8.7 Programming Example: Spurious Emissions Measurement
In the following example, the Spurious Emissions measurement is configured by defining ranges and parameters to create the following sweep list.
Note that this example is primarily meant to demonstrate the remote control commands, it does not necessarily reflect a useful measurement task.
//------------Preparing the measurement------------*RST //Resets the instrument
SWE:MODE LIST //Activates spurious emissions measurement
INIT:CONT OFF //Selects single sweep mode.
//Spurious measurement has to be in single sweep mode to be configured //and no sweep operation may be running!
// If required, a sweep stop can be ensured by INIT:IMM;*WAI
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1018
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
//---------------Configuring a Sweep List----------
LIST:RANG:COUNt? //Returns the number of measurement ranges in the sweep list. LIST:RANG4:DEL //Deletes the fourth range. LIST:RANG1:STAR 10000000 //Defines a start frequency of 10 MHz for range 1. LIST:RANG1:STOP 100000000 //Defines a stop frequency of 100 MHz for range 1. LIST:RANG1:BAND 500000 //Defines a resolution bandwidth of 500 kHz in range 1. LIST:RANG1:BAND:VID 5000000 //Defines a video bandwidth of 5 MHz for range 1. LIST:RANG1:INP:ATT:AUTO OFF //Turns automatic selection of the input attenuation in range 1 off.
LIST:RANG1:INP:ATT 10 //Defines a input attenuation of 10 dBm for range 1.
LIST:RANG1:FILT:TYPE CFILter //Selects an Channel filter for range 1. LIST:RANG1:DET SAMP //Selects a sample detector for range 1. LIST:RANG1:POIN 601 //Defines 601 sweep points for range 1. LIST:RANG1:RLEV -20 //Defines a reference level of -20 dBm for range 1. LIST:RANG1:SWE:TIME 5 //Defines a manual sweep time of 5 second for range 1.
// Create a transducer that can be used. // It has to cover the corresponding frequency range // SENSe1:CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect 'Test' SENSe1:CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT 'DB' SENSe1:CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent 'Test Transducer' // Frequency Span 0 MHz to 20 Ghz SENSe1:CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA 0e6,5, 20e9,3
SENS:LIST:RANG1:TRAN 'Test' //Includes a transducer called 'Test' for range 1.
LIST:RANG1:LIM:STAR 10 LIST:RANG1:LIM:STOP 10 //Defines an absolute limit of 10 dBm at the start and stop frequencies of range 1. LIST:RANG:LIM:STAT ON //Turns the limit check for all ranges on.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1019
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
//---------------Configuring the List Evaluation---------CALC:PSE:MARG 100 //Sets the threshold to 100 dB. CALC:PSE:PSH ON //Marks all peaks in the diagram with blue squares. CALC:PSE:SUBR 10 //Sets 10 peaks per range to be stored in the list.
//--------------Performing the Measurement-----
INIT:SPUR; *WAI //Performs a spurious emission measurement and waits until the sweep has finished.
//---------------Retrieving Results------------CALC:LIM1:FAIL? //Queries the result of the check for limit line 1. TRAC? SPUR //Queries the peak list of the spurious emission measurement.
13.5.9 Analyzing Statistics (APD, CCDF)
All remote control commands specific to statistical measurements are described here.
Activating Statistical Measurements................................................................... 1020 Configuring Statistical Measurements.................................................................1021 Using Gate Ranges for Statistical Measurements.............................................. 1022 Scaling the Diagram............................................................................................1024 Performing a Statistical Measurement................................................................ 1027 Retrieving Results............................................................................................... 1027 Programming Example: Measuring Statistics..................................................... 1028
13.5.9.1 Activating Statistical Measurements
The following commands activate statistical measurements. CALCulate<n>:STATistics:APD[:STATe]..........................................................................1020 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe]....................................................................... 1021
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:APD[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the APD measurement on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
CALC:STAT:APD ON Switches on the APD measurement.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1020
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the CCDF on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
CALC:STAT:CCDF ON Switches on the CCDF measurement.
13.5.9.2 Configuring Statistical Measurements
The following commands configure the measurement. Useful commands for configuring statistical measurements described elsewhere: [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 1138 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel on page 1147
(Make sure the specified reference level is higher than the measured peak value, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y? on page 1224).
Remote commands exclusive to statistical measurements:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y:PERCent........................................................................ 1021 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:NSAMples............................................................................. 1022
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y:PERCent <Probability>
This command sets a marker to a particular probability value. You can query the corresponding level with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X.
Using the command turns delta markers into normal markers.
This command is available for CCDF measurements.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <Probability>
Range: 0 % to 100 % Default unit: %
Example:
CALC1:MARK:Y:PERC 95PCT Positions marker 1 to a probability of 95 %.
Manual operation: See " Percent Marker (CCDF only)" on page 292
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1021
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:NSAMples <Samples>
This command defines the number of samples included in the analysis of statistical measurement functions.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <Samples>
Range: *RST:
Min: 100, Max: depends on the RBW filter 100000
Example:
CALC:STAT:NSAM 500 Sets the number of measurement points to be acquired to 500.
Manual operation: See " Number of Samples " on page 293
13.5.9.3 Using Gate Ranges for Statistical Measurements
The following commands control gated statistical measurements.
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:COMMent............................................................... 1022 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:PERiod................................................................... 1022 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:STARt<gr>.............................................................. 1023 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>[:STATe<gr>]............................................................ 1023 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:STOP<gr>.............................................................. 1024
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:COMMent <Comment>
This command defines a comment for the gate of a particular trace.
Suffix: <t>
. Trace
Parameters: <Comment>
String containing the comment.
Example:
SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:COMM 'MyComment' Defines a comment for the gate in trace 1.
Manual operation: See " Comment " on page 294
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:PERiod <Length>
This command defines the length of the gate for all traces.
The gate length applies to all traces.
Suffix: <t>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <Length>
Range: 100 ns to 1000 s
*RST:
2 ms
Default unit: s
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1022
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Manual operation:
SWE:EGAT:TRAC:PER 5ms Defines the period for gated triggering to 5 ms.
See " Period " on page 294
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:STARt<gr> <Time>
This command defines the start time for a gate range.
Suffix: <t>
. Trace
<gr>
1..n gate range
Parameters: <Time>
The value range depends on the gate period you have set for the selected trace with [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>: PERiod. The following rules apply: � the start time may not be higher than the length of the gate � the start time may not be lower than the stop time of the gate range of a lower order The reset values depend on the gate range. � for gate range 1, the start time is 0 ms � for gate range 3, the start time is 2 ms � for gate range 5, the start time is 4 ms
Default unit: s
Example:
SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STAR1 3ms Sets the Starting point for range 1 on trace 1 at 3 ms.
Manual operation: See " Range <x> Start/Stop " on page 295
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>[:STATe<gr>] <State>
This command includes or excludes a gate range for a particular trace.
Suffix: <t>
. Trace
<gr>
gate range
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STAT1 ON Activates gate range 1 for trace 1.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1023
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Manual operation: See " Gated Trigger " on page 293 See " Range <x> Use " on page 294
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:STOP<gr> <Time>
This command defines the stop time for a gate range.
Suffix: <t>
. Trace
<gr>
1..n gate range
Parameters: <Time>
The value range depends on the gate period you have set for the selected trace with [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>: PERiod. The following rules apply: � the stop time may not be higher than the length of the gate � the stop time may not be lower than the start time The reset values depend on the gate range. � for gate range 1, the stop time is 1 ms � for gate range 3, the stop time is 3 ms � for gate range 5, the stop time is 5 ms
Default unit: s
Example:
SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STOP1 5ms Sets the stopping point for range 1 on trace 1 at 5 ms.
Manual operation: See " Range <x> Start/Stop " on page 295
13.5.9.4 Scaling the Diagram
The following commands set up the diagram for statistical measurements.
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:PRESet................................................................................. 1024 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE.............................................................. 1025 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RANGe................................................................... 1025 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RLEVel................................................................... 1025 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:LOWer.................................................................... 1026 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT.......................................................................1026 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer.....................................................................1026
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:PRESet
This command resets the scale of the diagram (x- and y-axis).
Reference level (x-axis) 0.0 dBm
Display range (x-axis) for APD measurements 100 dB
Display range (x-axis) for CCDF measurements
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1024
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
20 dB
Upper limit of the y-axis 1.0
Lower limit of the y-axis 1E-6
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Example:
CALC:STAT:PRES Resets the scaling for statistical functions
Manual operation: See " Default Settings " on page 297
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE
This command initiates an automatic scaling of the diagram (x- and y-axis).
To obtain maximum resolution, the level range is set as a function of the measured spacing between peak power and the minimum power for the APD measurement and of the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement. In addition, the probability scale for the number of test points is adapted.
To get valid results, you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the auto range process. This is only possible in single sweep mode.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Manual operation: See " Adjust Settings " on page 293
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RANGe <Range>
This command defines the display range of the x-axis for statistical measurements.
The effects are identical to DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe].
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <Range>
Range: 1 dB to 200 dB
*RST:
100 dB
Default unit: dB
Example:
CALC:STAT:SCAL:X:RANG 20dB
Manual operation: See " Range " on page 296
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RLEVel <RefLevel>
This command sets the reference level for statistical measurements. The effects are identical to DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1025
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Note that in case of statistical measurements the reference level applies to the x-axis.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <RefLevel>
The unit is variable. If a reference level offset is included, the range is adjusted by that offset.
Range: -130 dBm to 30 dBm
*RST:
0 dBm
Default unit: dBm
Example:
CALC:STAT:SCAL:X:RLEV -60dBm
Manual operation: See " Ref Level " on page 296
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:LOWer <Magnitude>
This command defines the lower vertical limit of the diagram.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <Magnitude>
The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless.
Range: *RST:
1E-9 to 0.1 1E-6
Example:
CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:LOW 0.001
Manual operation: See " Y-Max / Y-Min " on page 296
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT <Unit>
This command selects the unit of the y-axis.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <Unit>
PCT | ABS
*RST:
ABS
Example:
CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:UNIT PCT Sets the percentage scale.
Manual operation: See " Y-Unit " on page 296
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer <Magnitude> This command defines the upper vertical limit of the diagram.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1026
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Suffix: <n> Parameters: <Magnitude>
Example: Manual operation:
. Window
The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless.
Range: *RST:
1E-5 to 1.0 1.0
CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:UPP 0.01
See " Y-Max / Y-Min " on page 296
13.5.9.5 Performing a Statistical Measurement
The following commands are required to perform a statistical measurement: INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 885, see Chapter 13.5.1, "Performing Measurements", on page 883
13.5.9.6 Retrieving Results
The following commands are required to retrieve the measurement results. Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 1210
Remote commands exclusive to statistical results CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF:X<t>?..........................................................................1027 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:RESult<res>?........................................................................ 1028
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF:X<t>? <Probability>
This command queries the results of the CCDF.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<t>
Trace
Query parameters: <Probability>
P0_01 Level value for 0.01 % probability
P0_1 Level value for 0.1 % probability
P1 P1: Level value for 1 % probability
P10 Level value for 10 % probability
Return values: <CCDF Result>
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1027
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Usage:
CALC:STAT:CCDF:X1? P10 Returns the level values that are over 10 % above the mean value.
Query only
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:RESult<res>? <ResultType>
This command queries the results of a measurement for a specific trace.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<res>
Trace
Query parameters: <ResultType>
MEAN Average (=RMS) power in dBm measured during the measurement time.
PEAK Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time.
CFACtor Determined crest factor (= ratio of peak power to average power) in dB.
ALL Results of all three measurements mentioned before, separated by commas: <mean power>,<peak power>,<crest factor>
Example:
CALC:STAT:RES2? ALL Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2. Example of answer string: 5.56,19.25,13.69 i.e. mean power: 5.56 dBm, peak power 19.25 dBm, crest factor 13.69 dB
Usage:
Query only
13.5.9.7 Programming Example: Measuring Statistics
This example demonstrates how to determine statistical values for a measurement in a remote environment using the gated statistics example described in Chapter 6.8.4, "APD and CCDF Basics - Gated Triggering", on page 290.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1028
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
//-----------Configuring the measurement -----------*RST //Reset the instrument TRIG:SOUR EXT //Defines the use of an external trigger. TRIG:HOLD 25us //Defines a trigger offset of 25 s. CALC:STAT:APD ON //Activates APD measurement. CALC:STAT:NSAM 1000 //Sets the number of samples to be included in the statistical evaluation to 1000.
//-------------Defining Gate ranges -----------------
SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:COMM 'GSM - useful part' //Defines a comment for the gate SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:PER 4.61536ms //Sets the gate period to 4.61536ms. SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STAR1 15us //Sets the start of range 1 to 15 s. SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STOP1 557.8us //Sets the end of range 1 to 15 s (start time) + 542.77 s (useful part) = 557.8 s. SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STAT1 ON //Activates the use of range 1.
//--------------Performing the Measurement----INIT:CONT OFF //Selects single sweep mode. INIT;*WAI //Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1029
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
//---------------Retrieving Results------------CALC:STAT:RES1? MEAN //Returns the mean average power for the useful part of the GSM signal.
//------------- Determining the CCDF values-------------------
CALC:STAT:CCDF ON //Activates CCDF measurement. CALC:MARK2:Y:PERC 95PCT //Sets marker 2 to the 95% probability value. INIT;*WAI //Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished. CALC:STAT:CCDF:X? P1 //Returns the level value for 10% probability for the CCDF. CALC:MARK2:X? //Returns the level for a probability of 95%.
//----------- Scaling the diagram ------------------------CALC:STAT:SCAL:X:RLEV -70dBm //Sets the reference level to -70 dBm (x-axis!) CALC:STAT:SCAL:X:RANG 20dB //Defines a power level range of 20 dB for the x-axis CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:LOW 0.0001 //Sets the minimum of the y-axis to 0.01% probability CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:UPP 1.0 //Sets the maximum of the y-axis to 100% probability CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:UNIT PCT //Displays percentage values on y-axis scale
13.5.10 Measuring the Time Domain Power
All remote control commands specific to time domain power measurements are described here. Configuring the Measurement.............................................................................1030 Performing a Time Domain Power Measurement............................................... 1033 Retrieving Measurement Results........................................................................ 1034 Programming Example: Time Domain Power..................................................... 1039
13.5.10.1 Configuring the Measurement
The following remote commands measure the time domain power.
Useful commands for time domain power measurements described elsewhere
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1030
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Remote commands exclusive to time domain power measurements
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF................................................. 1031 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage............................................ 1031 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd............................................... 1032 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe]............................................... 1032 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe]..................................... 1032 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe].................................... 1033 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe]....................................... 1033 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation[:STATe]..............................1033
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF
This command turns all time domain power evaluation modes off.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage <State>
This command switches on or off averaging for the active power measurement in zero span in the window specified by the suffix <n>. If activated, a time domain value is calculated from the trace after each sweep; in the end, all values are averaged to calculate the final result.
The number of results required for the calculation of average is defined with [SENSe: ]AVERage<n>:COUNt .
Averaging is reset by switching it off and on again.
Synchronization to the end of averaging is only possible in single sweep mode.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON Switches on the calculation of average. AVER:COUN 200 Sets the measurement counter to 200. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1031
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd <State>
This command switches on or off the peak-hold function for the active power measurement in zero span in the window specified by the suffix <n>. If activated, the peak for each sweep is compared to the previously stored peak; the maximum of the two is stored as the current peak.
The peak-hold function is reset by switching it off and on again.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe] <State>
This command turns time domain power measurements on and off. This measurement is only available in zero span.
When you turn the measurement on, the R&S FSW activates a marker and positions it on the peak power level in the marker search range.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the evaluation to determine the mean time domain power on and off.
The R&S FSW performs the measurement on the trace marker 1 is positioned on.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See " Results " on page 304
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1032
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the evaluation to determine the positive peak time domain power on and off.
The R&S FSW performs the measurement on the trace marker 1 is positioned on.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See " Results " on page 304
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the evaluation to determine the RMS time domain power on and off.
The R&S FSW performs the measurement on the trace marker 1 is positioned on.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See " Results " on page 304
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the evaluation to determine the standard deviation of the time domain power on and off.
The R&S FSW performs the measurement on the trace marker 1 is positioned on.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
13.5.10.2 Performing a Time Domain Power Measurement The following commands are required to perform a Time Domain Power measurement:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1033
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 885 See Chapter 13.5.1, "Performing Measurements", on page 883
13.5.10.3 Retrieving Measurement Results
The following commands query the results for time domain measurements.
Measuring the Mean Power CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult?..................... 1034 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult?........................ 1034 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult?.................................... 1035
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the average mean time domain power. The query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>: FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage on page 1031.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <MeanPower>
Mean power of the signal during the measurement time.
Usage:
Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the maximum mean time domain power. The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>: MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <MeanPower>
Mean power of the signal during the measurement time.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1034
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Usage:
Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult?
This command queries the mean time domain power.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <MeanPower>
Mean power of the signal during the measurement time.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Results " on page 304
Measuring the Peak Power
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the average positive peak time domain power. The query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>: MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage on page 1031.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <PeakPower>
Peak power of the signal during the measurement time.
Usage:
Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the maximum positive peak time domain power. The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1035
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <PeakPower>
Peak power of the signal during the measurement time.
Usage:
Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult?
This command queries the positive peak time domain power.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <PeakPower>
Peak power of the signal during the measurement time.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Results " on page 304
Measuring the RMS Power
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the average RMS of the time domain power. The query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>: MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage on page 1031.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1036
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Return values: <RMSPower>
Usage:
RMS power of the signal during the measurement time. Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the maximum RMS of the time domain power. The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <RMSPower>
RMS power of the signal during the measurement time.
Usage:
Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult?
This command queries the RMS of the time domain power.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <RMSPower>
RMS power of the signal during the measurement time.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Results " on page 304
Measuring the Standard Deviation
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the average standard deviation of the time domain power. The query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage on page 1031.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1037
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <StandardDeviation> Standard deviation of the signal during the measurement time.
Usage:
Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the maximum standard deviation of the time domain power. The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <StandardDeviation> Standard deviation of the signal during the measurement time.
Usage:
Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:RESult?
This command queries the standard deviation of the time domain power.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <StandardDeviation> Standard deviation of the signal during the measurement time.
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1038
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
13.5.10.4 Programming Example: Time Domain Power
This programming example demonstrates the measurement example described in Chapter 6.9.6, "Measurement Example", on page 305 in a remote environment.
//-------------Configuring the Measurement----------------------*RST //Resets the instrument
INIT:CONT OFF //Turns on single sweep mode.
FREQ:CENT 1.8GHz //Sets the center frequency to 1.8 GHz.
BAND:RES 100kHz //Sets the bandwidth to 100 kHz.
SWE:TIME 10ms //Sets the sweep time to 640 �s.
FREQ:SPAN 0 //Sets the instrument to zero span.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:STAT ON //Turns on time domain power measurements.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS ON //Turns the evalution of the mean, peak and RMS time domain power.
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON //Activates limit lines for evaluation.
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:LEFT 1ms //Sets the left limit line to 326 �s.
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:RIGH 6ms //Sets the right limit line to 538 �s.
//--------------Performing the Measurement------------------------
INIT;*WAI //Initiates the measurement and waits until the measurement is finished.
//-------------Retrieving the Results-------------------------------CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:RES? CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:RES?
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1039
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:RES? //Queries the mean, peak and RMS time domain power.
13.5.11 Measuring the Harmonic Distortion
All remote control commands specific to harmonic distortion measurements are described here.
Activating the Measurement................................................................................1040 Configuring the Measurement.............................................................................1040 Performing the Measurement..............................................................................1042 Retrieving Results............................................................................................... 1042 Example: Measuring the Harmonic Distortion.....................................................1043
13.5.11.1 Activating the Measurement
The following command activates harmonic distortion measurement. CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics[:STATe]............................................ 1040
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the harmonic distortion measurement on and off.
Note the following:
If you perform the measurement in the frequency domain, the search range for the frequency of the first harmonic, whose power is determined, is defined by the last span.
If you perform the measurement in the time domain, the current center frequency is used as the frequency of the first harmonic. Thus, the frequency search is bypassed. The first harmonic frequency is set by a specific center frequency in zero span before the harmonic measurement is started.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM ON Activates the harmonic distortion measurement.
13.5.11.2 Configuring the Measurement The following commands control the harmonic distortion measurement.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1040
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Useful commands for harmonic distortion measurements described elsewhere
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer on page 1131 [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 1145
Remote commands exclusive to harmonic distortion measurements
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:BANDwidth:AUTO............................. 1041 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics.................................... 1041 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet............................................ 1041
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:BANDwidth:AUTO <State>
This command selects the resolution bandwidth of the harmonic in respect to the bandwidth of the first harmonic.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 identical
ON | 1 a multiple
*RST:
1
Manual operation: See " Harmonic RBW Auto " on page 311
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics <NoHarmonics>
This command selects the number of harmonics that the R&S FSW looks for.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <NoHarmonics>
Range: *RST:
1 to 26 10
Manual operation: See " Number of Harmonics " on page 311
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet
This command initiates a measurement to determine the ideal configuration for the harmonic distortion measurement. The method depends on the span. Frequency domain (span > 0)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1041
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Frequency and level of the first harmonic are determined and used for the measurement list.
Time domain (span = 0) The level of the first harmonic is determined. The frequency remains unchanged.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Adjust Settings " on page 311
13.5.11.3 Performing the Measurement
The following commands are required to perform a harmonic distortion measurement: INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 885, see Chapter 13.5.1, "Performing Measurements", on page 883
13.5.11.4 Retrieving Results
The following commands retrieve the results of the harmonic distortion measurement. CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion?...................................... 1042 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST.................................................1042
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion?
This command queries the total harmonic distortion of the signal.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Query parameters:
<Result>
TOTal
Return values: <DistortionPct>
<DistortionDb>
Usage:
Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST This command queries the position of the harmonics.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1042
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <Harmonics>
Returns one value for every harmonic. The first value is the absolute power of the first harmonic. The unit is variable. The other values are power levels relative to the first harmonic. The unit for these is dB.
13.5.11.5 Example: Measuring the Harmonic Distortion
//-------------Configuring the Measurement------------*RST //Resets the instrument.
INIT:CONT OFF //Turns on single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM ON //Turns on the harmonic distortion measurement. CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:NHAR 3 //Defines three harmonics to be found.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:BAND:AUTO OFF //Turns off automatic bandwidth selection. CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:PRES //Determines the ideal configuration.
//-------------Performing the Measurement-------------------
INIT;*WAI //Initiates the measurement and finishes the sweep.
//-------------Retrieving the Results-----------------------CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:LIST? //Queries the position of the harmonics. CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:DIST? TOT //Queries the total harmonic distortion.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1043
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
13.5.12 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point
Determining the TOI............................................................................................1044 Programming Example: Measuring the TOI........................................................1046
13.5.12.1 Determining the TOI
All remote control commands specific to TOI measurements are described here.
Useful commands for TOI measurements described elsewhere
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 1208 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative? on page 1223 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y? on page 1223 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 1210 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y? on page 1224
Remote commands exclusive to TOI measurements
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI[:STATe]........................................................ 1044 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:SEARchsignal ONCE.................................... 1045 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult?....................................................... 1045 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult:MAXimum?....................................... 1045 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult:MINimum?........................................ 1046
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI[:STATe] <State>
This command initiates a measurement to determine the third intercept point.
A two-tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the RF input of the instrument. Marker 1 and marker 2 (both normal markers) are set to the maximum of the two signals. Delta marker 3 and delta marker 4 are positioned to the intermodulation products. The delta markers can be modified separately afterwards with the CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X command.
The third-order intercept is calculated from the level spacing between the normal markers and the delta markers.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI ON Switches on the measurement of the third-order intercept.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1044
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:SEARchsignal ONCE
This command initiates a search for signals in the current trace to determine the third intercept point.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Manual operation: See " Search Signals " on page 319
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult?
This command queries the results for the third order intercept point measurement.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <TOI>
Third order intercept point.
Example:
INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI ON Switches the intercept measurement. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:RES? Outputs the measured value.
Usage:
Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult:MAXimum?
This command queries the results for the maximum third order intercept point measurement (see Chapter 6.11.3, "TOI Results", on page 317).
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1045
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Return values: <TOI> Example:
Usage:
Maximum third order intercept point.
INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI ON Switches the intercept measurement. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:RES:MAX? Returns the maximum TOI.
Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult:MINimum?
This command queries the results for the minimum third order intercept point measurement (see Chapter 6.11.3, "TOI Results", on page 317).
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <TOI>
Minimum third order intercept point.
Example:
INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI ON Switches the intercept measurement. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:RES:MIN? Returns the minimum TOI.
Usage:
Query only
13.5.12.2 Programming Example: Measuring the TOI
This example demonstrates how to determine the TOI in a remote environment.
//-----------Configuring the measurement -----------*RST //Reset the instrument CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI ON //Activate TOI measurement.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1046
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
//--------------Performing the Measurement----INIT:CONT OFF //Selects single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:SEAR ONCE //Initiates a search for signals in the current trace.
//---------------Retrieving Results------------CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:RES? //Returns the TOI.
13.5.13 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth
All remote control commands specific to AM modulation depth measurements are described here.
Configuring and Performing the Measurement................................................... 1047 Example: Measuring the AM Modulation Depth..................................................1048
13.5.13.1 Configuring and Performing the Measurement
The following commands control the measurement.
Useful commands for AM modulation depth described elsewhere CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 1208 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative? on page 1223 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 1210
Remote commands exclusive to AM modulation depth measurements CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe]................................................. 1047 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:SEARchsignal ONCE............................. 1048 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult<t>?............................................ 1048
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the AM Modulation Depth measurement on and off.
To work correctly, the measurement requires an AM modulated signal.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1047
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:SEARchsignal ONCE
This command initiates a search for the signals required for the AM depth measurement.
Note that the command does not perform a new measurement, but looks for the signals on the current trace.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP:SEAR ONCE Executes the search of an AM modulated signal at the currently available trace.
Manual operation: See " Search Signals " on page 324
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult<t>?
This command queries the results of the AM modulation depth measurement..
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
<t>
Trace
Return values: <ModulationDepth> Modulation depth in %.
Usage:
Query only
13.5.13.2 Example: Measuring the AM Modulation Depth
This example demonstrates how to determine the AM modulation depth in a remote environment. Note that without a real input signal this measurement will not return useful results.
//-----------Configuring the measurement -----------*RST //Reset the instrument FREQ:CENT 100MHz //Set center frequency FREQ:SPAN 10KHz // Set span CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP ON
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1048
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
//Activate AM modulation depth measurement.
//--------------Performing the Measurement----INIT:CONT OFF //Selects single sweep mode. INIT:IMM // Perform a single measurement CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP:SEAR ONCE //Initiates a search for signals in the current trace.
//---------------Retrieving Results------------CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP:RES? //Queries the measurement results.
//If the results are not accurate, change the position of the //the temporary markers manually.
//----Changing the position of the temp markers----CALC:MARK:X 100MHZ //Positions the reference marker on 100 MHz. CALC:DELT2:X 5KHZ //Positions delta marker 2 and 3 at a distance of 5 kHz to the reference marker. CALC:DELT3:X 1KHZ //Corrects the position of delta marker 3 by 1 kHz.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP:RES? //Queries the measurement results for the repositioned markers.
13.5.14 Remote Commands for EMI Measurements
The following commands are required to perform EMI measurements in a remote environment. This measurement requires the R&S FSW-K54 option. The following tasks specific to the EMI application are described here: Activating EMI Measurement.............................................................................. 1049 Configuring EMI Markers.................................................................................... 1050 Configuring the EMI Final Test............................................................................ 1051 Configuring EMI Limit Lines................................................................................ 1052 Controlling LISN..................................................................................................1052 Retrieving EMI Results........................................................................................1054 Evaluating the Results........................................................................................ 1056 Programming Example: EMI Measurement........................................................ 1056
13.5.14.1 Activating EMI Measurement
EMI measurement must be activated explicitely. CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement[:STATe]................................ 1050 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement[:STATe]....................................... 1050
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1049
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement[:STATe] <State> CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the EMI measurement marker functionality on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
13.5.14.2 Configuring EMI Markers
The commands required to configure EMI markers are described here.
Useful commands for configuring EMI markers described elsewhere: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1209
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 1207 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1209
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 1207 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREFerence on page 1207 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<ms>:LINK:TO:MARKer<md> on page 1209
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<ms>:LINK:TO:MARKer<md> on page 1206 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK on page 1205 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe on page 1210
Remote commands exclusive to configuring EMI markers
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector..............................1050 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector..................................... 1050
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector <Detector> CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector <Detector>
This command selects the detector for a specific marker during the final measurement.
If the marker is not yet active, the command also turns the marker on.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <Detector>
OFF no final measurement is performed
AVER average detector
CAV CISPR Average detector
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1050
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Manual operation:
CRMS RMS Average detector
POS maximum peak detector
QPE quasipeak detector
*RST:
OFF
See " Final Test Detector " on page 339
13.5.14.3 Configuring the EMI Final Test
The commands required to configure the EMI final test are described here.
Useful commands for configuring EMI final tests described elsewhere: [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE on page 1139 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 1138 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing
on page 1132
Remote commands exclusive to configuring EMI final tests
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PEAKsearch:AUTO...................... 1051 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PSEarch:AUTO.................... 1051 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PSEarch:AUTO............................1051 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PEAKsearch:AUTO............... 1051 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DWELl................................. 1051 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DWELl........................................ 1051
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PEAKsearch:AUTO
<State>
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PSEarch:AUTO
<State>
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PSEarch:AUTO <State>
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PEAKsearch:AUTO
<State>
Suffix:
.
<n>
1..n
<m>
1..n
Parameters: <State>
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DWELl <Time> CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DWELl <Time>
This command defines the dwell time during the final measurement.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1051
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Suffix: <n> <m> Parameters: <Time>
Manual operation:
. irrelevant
irrelevant
Range: 100 us to 100 s
*RST:
1 s
Default unit: s
See " Dwell Time " on page 342
13.5.14.4 Configuring EMI Limit Lines
The commands required to define limit lines for EMI measurements are described in Chapter 13.8.4, "Configuring Display Lines", on page 1264.
13.5.14.5 Controlling LISN
The commands required to control a LISN are described here. INPut<ip>:LISN:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe]........................................................................... 1052 INPut<ip>:LISN:PHASe................................................................................................ 1052 INPut<ip>:LISN[:TYPE].................................................................................................1053
INPut<ip>:LISN:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the 150 kHz highpass filter for the ENV216 network on and off.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Example:
//Turn on high pass filter INP:LISN:TYPE ENV216 INP:LISN:FILT:HPAS ON
Manual operation: See " 150 kHz Highpass " on page 345
INPut<ip>:LISN:PHASe <Phase> This command selects one LISN phase to be measured.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1052
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Suffix: <ip> Parameters: <Phase>
Example: Manual operation:
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
L1
L2 Available for networks with four phases (R&S ESH2Z5, R&S ENV4200 and R&S ENV432)
L3 Available for networks with four phases (R&S ESH2Z5, R&S ENV4200 and R&S ENV432)
N
*RST:
L1
//Select phase L1 INP:LISN:PHAS L1
See " Phase " on page 345
INPut<ip>:LISN[:TYPE] <Type>
This command turns automatic control of a LISN on and off. It also selects the type of network.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
Parameters: <Type>
ENV216 R&S ENV 216: two phases and highpass are controllable.
ENV432 R&S ENV 432: four phases are controllable.
ENV4200 R&S ENV 4200: four phases are controllable.
ESH2Z5 R&S ESH2-Z5: four phases (incl. protective earth) are controllable.
ESH3Z5 R&S ESH3-Z5: two phases (incl. protective earth) are controllable.
FOURphase R&S ESH2-Z5: four phases (incl. protective earth) are controllable.
OFF Turns off remote control of the LISN.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1053
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Example: Manual operation:
TWOPhase R&S ESH3-Z5: two phases (incl. protective earth) are controllable.
*RST:
OFF
//Select LISN INP:LISN:TYPE TWOP
See " LISN Type " on page 344
13.5.14.6 Retrieving EMI Results
The commands required to retrieve EMI measurement results are described here.
Useful commands for retrieving EMI measurement results described elsewhere: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 1210
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 1208 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y? on page 1224
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y? on page 1223
Remote commands exclusive to retrieving EMI measurement results
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:RESult?............................... 1054 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:RESult?...................................... 1054 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<li>:LCONdition?........... 1055 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<li>:LCONdition?...................1055 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<li>:LDELta?................. 1055 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<li>:LDELta?.........................1055
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:RESult? <Result> CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:RESult? <Result>
This command queries the result of the EMI measurement at the marker position.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <Result>
Power level. The unit depends on the one you have currently set.
Example:
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:FME:RES? Queries the result of marker 1.
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1054
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<li>: LCONdition? <Condition>
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<li>:LCONdition? <Condition>
This command queries the condition of a marker position in relation to a certain limit line.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
<li>
Limit line
Return values: <Condition>
0 The marker has passed the limit check.
1 The marker is inside the margins of a limit line.
2 The marker has failed the limit check.
Example:
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:FME:LIM2:LCON? Queries the condition of marker 1 in relation to limit line 2.
Usage:
Query only
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<li>:LDELta? CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<li>:LDELta?
<Amplitude>
This command queries the vertical distance from the marker position to the limit line. The unit is dB.
If the marker has been assigned to a different trace than the limit line, or if no limit ine is defined for the marker position, the command returns -200.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
<li>
1..n
Limit line
Return values: <Amplitude>
Vertical distance to the limit line in dB.
Example:
CALC:MARK3:FUNC:FME:LIM2:LDEL? Queries the distance of marker 3 to the second limit line.
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1055
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
13.5.14.7 Evaluating the Results
The commands required to control the demodulation of signals at the marker position are described in Chapter 13.8.3.14, "Marker Demodulation", on page 1253.
13.5.14.8 Programming Example: EMI Measurement
This example demonstrates how to detect electromagnetic interferences (EMI) in a remote environment.
//----------- Preparing the measurement -----------//Reset the instrument *RST //Define the span to be analyzed FREQ:STAR 150kHz FREQ:STOP 1GHz //Configure two traces, one with peak detector, one with average detector DISP:TRAC1 ON DISP:TRAC2 ON DET1 POS DET2 AVER
//----------- Configuring the measurement -----------//Select EMI measurement CALC:MARK:FUNC:FME:STAT ON //Configure CISPR filter and RBW BAND:TYPE CISP BAND:RES 1MHz //Define the dwell time CALC:MARK:FUNC:FME:DWEL 1ms //Configure an auto peak search CALC:MARK:FUNC:FME:PEAK:AUTO ON //Configure a logarithmic frequency scaling DISP:TRAC:X:SPAC LOG //Configure marker demodulation for marker 1 CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM ON //Increase the number of sweep points SWE:POIN 200000 //Set the unit to V CALC:UNIT:POW V
//----------- Configuring EMI markers --------------//Activate 6 normal EMI markers CALC:MARK1 ON CALC:MARK2 ON CALC:MARK3 ON CALC:MARK4 ON CALC:MARK5 ON CALC:MARK6 ON
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1056
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
//Set markers 1 to 3 on trace 1. Set markers 4 to 6 on trace 2. CALC:MARK1:TRAC 1 CALC:MARK2:TRAC 1 CALC:MARK3:TRAC 1 CALC:MARK4:TRAC 2 CALC:MARK5:TRAC 2 CALC:MARK6:TRAC 2 //Use CISPR average detector for all markers during final test CALC:MARK1:FUNC:FME:DET CAV CALC:MARK2:FUNC:FME:DET CAV CALC:MARK3:FUNC:FME:DET CAV CALC:MARK4:FUNC:FME:DET CAV CALC:MARK5:FUNC:FME:DET CAV CALC:MARK6:FUNC:FME:DET CAV
//----------- Configuring a limit check ------------//Select EN55011A.LIN as limit line 1 CALC:LIM1:NAME "EN55011A.LIN" //Configure trace 1 to be checked against limit line 1 CALC:LIM1:TRAC1:CHEC ON //Clear the results of all previous limit checks CALC:LIM:CLE
//----------- Performing the Measurement -----------//Select single sweep mode. INIT:CONT OFF //Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished. INIT;*WAI
//------------ Retrieving Results ------------------//Query the results for the EMI measurement //First marker frequency, then final test level CALC:MARK1:X? CALC:MARK1:FUNC:FME:RES? CALC:MARK2:X? CALC:MARK2:FUNC:FME:RES? CALC:MARK3:X? CALC:MARK3:FUNC:FME:RES? CALC:MARK4:X? CALC:MARK4:FUNC:FME:RES? CALC:MARK5:X? CALC:MARK5:FUNC:FME:RES? CALC:MARK6:X? CALC:MARK6:FUNC:FME:RES?
//Query the result of the limit check for trace 1 CALC:LIM1:FAIL? //Query the result of the limit check and the distance from the limit lines //for each marker
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1057
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:FME:LIM:COND? CALC:MARK1:FUNC:FME:LIM:DELT? CALC:MARK2:FUNC:FME:LIM:COND? CALC:MARK2:FUNC:FME:LIM:DELT? CALC:MARK3:FUNC:FME:LIM:COND? CALC:MARK3:FUNC:FME:LIM:DELT? CALC:MARK4:FUNC:FME:LIM:COND? CALC:MARK4:FUNC:FME:LIM:DELT? CALC:MARK5:FUNC:FME:LIM:COND? CALC:MARK5:FUNC:FME:LIM:DELT? CALC:MARK6:FUNC:FME:LIM:COND? CALC:MARK6:FUNC:FME:LIM:DELT?
13.5.15 List Evaluations
A list evaluation is a multiple power measurement that measures the power at up to 200 frequencies. The measurement itself is a time domain measurement. Note that if you set a span greater than 0, the R&S FSW aborts the list evaluation.
Noise cancellation in list evaluations Noise cancellation is also available in zero span and thus also for list evaluations. See " Noise Cancellation " on page 165 for details.
List evaluations allow for a different instrument setup for each frequency you want to measure. You can define most of the settings with the commands described here. Settings not covered by the commands listed below can be controlled with the common commands (see Chapter 13.7, "Setting Basic Measurement Parameters", on page 1077. Note that these commands have to be sent prior to the commands that control the list evaluation.
In case of a triggered measurement, a separate trigger event is required for each frequency to initiate that measurement. Note that you have to make changes to the trigger level in the time domain in order for it to take effect for the List Evaluation commands.
The list evaluation is incompatible to other measurement functions (e.g. marker functionality or statistics). If you use a command that controls those functions, the R&S FSW aborts the list evaluation. The R&S FSW also aborts the list evaluation if you end the remote session.
The commands can be used in two different ways.
Instrument setup, measurement and querying of the results in a single command line. This method causes the least delay between the measurement and the result output. However, it requires the control computer to wait for the response from the instrument.
Instrument setup and querying of the result list at the end of the measurement: With this method, the control computer may be used for other activities while the
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1058
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
measurement is being performed. However, more time is needed for synchronization via service request.
13.5.15.1 Performing List Evaluations
All remote control commands specific to list evaluations (which are available via remote control only) are described here.
Useful commands for list evaluation described elsewhere: [SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection on page 1148
Remote commands exclusive to list evaluation
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:RESult?...................................................................................... 1059 [SENSe:]LIST:POWer[:SEQuence].................................................................................1059 [SENSe:]LIST:POWer:SET............................................................................................1060 [SENSe:]LIST:POWer:STATe......................................................................................... 1061
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:RESult?
This command queries the results of the list evaluation.
This command may be used to obtain measurement results in an asynchronous way, using the service request mechanism for synchronization to the end of the measurement.
If there are no results, the command returns an error.
Return values: <PowerLevel>
Power level for each frequency included in the measurement. The command returns up to 3 power levels for each frequency, depending on the number of evaluation modes you have turned on with [SENSe:]LIST:POWer:SET. The result is a list of floating point values separated by commas. The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer.
Usage:
Query only
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer[:SEQuence] {<Frequency>, <RefLevel>, <RFAttenuation>, <ElAttenuation>,<FilterType>, <RBW>, <VBW>, <MeasTime>, <TriggerLevel>}...
This command configures and initiates the List Evaluation measurement.
The list can contain up to 200 entries (frequencies). You can define a different instrument setup for each frequency that is in the list.
If you synchronize the measurement with *OPC, the R&S FSW produces a service request when all frequencies have been measured and the number of individual measurements has been performed.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1059
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Note that using the command as a query initiates the measurement and returns the results if all frequencies have been measured. For more information on querying the results see [SENSe:]LIST:POWer:RESult?.
Parameters: <Frequency>
Defines the frequency. Each frequency corresponds to one list entry.
Range: 0 to Fmax Default unit: Hz
<RefLevel>
Defines the reference level for a list entry.
Range: -130 to 30 Increment: 0.01 Default unit: dBm
<RFAttenuation>
Defines the RF attenuation for a list entry.
Range: 0 to 70 Increment: 1 Default unit: dB
<RFAttenuation>
numeric value
Defines the electronic attenuation for a list entry. A setting other than 0 (OFF) requires option R&S FSW-B25.
Range: 0 to 30 Increment: 0 (OFF) Default unit: dB
<FilterType>
Selects the filter type for a list entry. For more information see [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE.
<RBW>
Defines the resolution bandwidth for a list entry.
<VBW>
Defines the measurement time for a list entry.
<MeasTime>
Defines the measurement time for a list entry.
Range: 1 �s to 16000 s Default unit: s
<TriggerLevel>
Reserved for future use; currently: must be 0.
Example:
See Chapter 13.5.15.2, "Example: Performing List Evaluation", on page 1061.
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:SET <State>, <State>, <State>, <TriggerSource>, <TriggerSlope>, <TriggerOffset>, <GateLength>
This command defines global List Evaluation parameters.
These parameters are valid for every frequency you want to measure.
The state of the first three parameters (<PeakPower>, <RMSPower> and <AVGPower>) define the number of results for each frequency in the list.
Note that you have to set the trigger level after sending this command.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1060
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
Parameters: <State> <State> <State> <TriggerSource>
<TriggerSlope> <TriggerOffset>
<GateLength>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
Turns peak power evaluation on and off.
*RST:
1
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
Turns RMS power evaluation on and off.
*RST:
0
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
Turns average power evaluation on and off.
*RST:
0
EXTernal | EXT2 | EXT3 | IMMediate | IFPower | RFPower | VIDeo
Selects a trigger source. For more information see Configuring Triggered and Gated Measurements.
POSitive | NEGative Selects the trigger slop.
Defines the trigger delay.
Range: negative measurement time to 30 s
*RST:
0
Default unit: s
Defines the gate length for gated measurements. Setting 0 seconds turns gated measurements off. To perform gated measurements, the trigger source must be different from IMMediate.
Range: 31.25 ns to 30 s
*RST:
0 s
Default unit: s
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:STATe <State>
This command turns the List Evaluation off.
Parameters: <State>
OFF | 0
*RST:
0
13.5.15.2 Example: Performing List Evaluation The following example shows a list evaluation with the following configuration.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1061
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
No
Freq
Ref
RF
El
Filter
RBW
VBW
Meas
Trigger
[MHz] Level Attenu- Attenu-
Time
Level
[dBm] ation ation
[dB]
[dB]
1
935.2 0
10
---
Normal 1 MHz 3 MHz 440 �s 0
2
935.4 0
10
10
Channel 30 kHz 100 kHz 440 �s 0
3
935.6 0
10
20
Channel 30 kHz 100 kHz 440 �s 0
-----Measurement with synchronization via service request----*ESE 1 *SRE 32 // Configures the status reporting system to produce a service request. LIST:POW:SET ON,ON,OFF,EXT,POS,10us,434us //Turns on the list evaluation, configures the global list evaluation settings and //evaluates the peak and RMS power. LIST:POW 935.2MHZ,0,10,OFF,NORM,1MHZ,3MHZ,440us,0, 935.4MHZ,0,10,10,CFIL,30KHZ,100KHZ,440us,0, 935.6MHZ,0,10,20,CFIL,30KHZ,100KHZ,440us,0; *OPC //Defines a list with 3 entries and initiates the measurement with synchronization to the end. //Analyzer produces a service request //On service request: SENS:LIST:POW:RES? //Returns the results of the measurements, two for each frequency (peak and RMS power).
-----Initiliazing the measurement and querying results simultaneously----LIST:POW? 935.2MHZ,0,10,OFF,NORM,1MHZ,3MHZ,440us,0, 935.4MHZ,0,10,10,CFIL,30KHZ,100KHZ,440us,0, 935.6MHZ,0,10,20,CFIL,30KHZ,100KHZ,440us,0 //Defines a list with 3 entries, initiates the measurement and queries the results. //Result example: -28.3,-30.6,-38.1
13.5.16 Measuring the Pulse Power
All remote control commands specific to measuring the mean or peak pulse power (e.g. bursts in various telecommunications standards) are described here. This measurement is available via remote control only.
The Pulse Power measurement is a gated measurement that determines the power over a particular number of pulses. The measurement is controlled by an external trigger or the video signal. A separate trigger event is required for each burst included in the measurement. In case of an external trigger source, the trigger level corresponds to the TTL level. In case of a video signal, you can define any threshold.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1062
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
The figure below shows the relations between the available trigger settings.
The measurement is always on trace 1, either with the peak detector to determine the peak power or the RMS detector to determine the RMS power. Overall, you can configure the measurement independent of the instrument setup with the commands listed below only, which results in faster measurements.
The Pulse Power measurement is incompatible to other measurement functions (e.g. marker functionality or statistics). If you use a command that controls those functions, the R&S FSW aborts the Pulse Power measurement. The R&S FSW also aborts the Pulse Power measurement if you end the remote session.
The commands can be used in two different ways.
Instrument setup, measurement and querying of the results in a single command line. With this method, there is the least delay between the measurement and the result output. However, it requires the control computer to wait for the response from the instrument.
Instrument setup and querying of the result list at the end of the measurement: With this method, the control computer may be used for other activities while the measurement is being performed. However, more time is needed for synchronization via service request.
13.5.16.1 Performing Pulse Power Measurements
The following commands control pulse power measurements.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MSUMmary........................................................ 1063 [SENSe:]MPOWer:FTYPe.............................................................................................1064 [SENSe:]MPOWer:RESult[:LIST]?................................................................................. 1065 [SENSe:]MPOWer[:SEQuence]..................................................................................... 1065 [SENSe:]MPOWer:RESult:MIN?.................................................................................... 1066
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MSUMmary <TimeOffset>, <MeasTime>, <PulsePeriod>, <OfPulses>
This command configures power measurements on pulses in the time domain.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1063
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
To evaluate the pulse power, the R&S FSW uses the data captured during a previous measurement. The data recorded during the set measurement time is combined to a measured value for each pulse according to the detector specified and the indicated number of results is output as a list.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <TimeOffset>
Defines a time offset to start the measurement at the first pulse of a trace.
*RST:
0
Default unit: s
<MeasTime>
Defines the measurement time. Default unit: s
<PulsePeriod>
Defines the pulse period. Default unit: s
<OfPulses>
Defines the number of pulses to measure.
Example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:MSUM 50US,450US,576.9US,8 Evaluates data that contains 8 pulses during a measurement time of 450 �s and a pulse period of 576.9 �s. The evaluation starts with an offset of 50 �s.
[SENSe:]MPOWer:FTYPe <FilterType>
This command selects the filter type for pulse power measurements.
The EMI-specific filter types are available if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement option is installed, even if EMI measurement is not active. For details see Chapter 6.13.3.1, "Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types", on page 328.
Parameters: <FilterType>
CFILter
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1064
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
NORMal
P5
RRC
CISPr | PULSe CISPR (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option Return value for query is always PULS.
MIL MIL Std (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option
[SENSe:]MPOWer:RESult[:LIST]?
This command queries the results of the pulse power measurement.
This command may be used to obtain measurement results in an asynchronous way, using the service request mechanism for synchronization to the end of the measurement.
If there are no results, the command returns an error.
Return values: <PulsePower>
List of pulse powers. The number of values depends on the number of pulses you have been measuring. The unit is dBm.
Usage:
Query only
[SENSe:]MPOWer[:SEQuence] <Frequency>, <RBW>, <MeasTime>, <TriggerSource>, <TriggerLevel>, <TriggerOffset>, <Detector>, <NoPulses>
This command configures and initiates the pulse power measurement.
The R&S FSW caches all measurement parameters that you can set with this command. If you use the command repeatedly, the R&S FSW only changes those settings that you have actually changed before initiating the measurement. Thus, measurement times are kept as low as possible.
If you synchronize the measurement with *OPC, the R&S FSW produces a service request when all frequencies have been measured and the number of individual measurements has been performed.
Note that using the command as a query initiates the measurement and returns the results if all frequencies have been measured. For more information on querying the results see [SENSe:]LIST:POWer:RESult?.
Parameters: <Frequency>
Defines the pulse frequency.
Range: 0 to Fmax Default unit: Hz
<RBW>
Defines the resolution bandwidth. Default unit: HZ
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1065
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements
<MeasTime> <TriggerSource> <TriggerLevel>
<TriggerOffset> <Detector>
<OfPulses> Return values: <PowerLevel>
Defines the measurement time.
Range: 1 �s to 30 s Default unit: S
EXTernal | EXT2 | EXT3 | VIDeo
Selects a trigger source. For more information see Configuring Triggered and Gated Measurements.
Defines a trigger level. The trigger level is available for the video trigger. In that case, the level is a percentage of the diagram height. In case of an external trigger, the R&S FSW uses a fix TTL level.
Range: 0 to 100 Default unit: PCT
Defines the trigger delay.
Range: 0 s to 30 s
*RST:
0 s
Default unit: s
Selects the detector and therefore the way the measurement is evaluated.
MEAN Calculates the RMS pulse power.
PEAK Calculates the peak pulse power.
Defines the number of pulses included in the measurement. Range: 1 to 32001
Pulse power level. The result is a list of floating point values separated by commas. The unit is dBm.
[SENSe:]MPOWer:RESult:MIN?
This command queries the lowest pulse power that has been measured during a pulse power measurement.
If there are no results, the command returns an error.
Return values: <PulsePower>
Lowest power level of the pulse power measurement. The unit is dBm.
Usage:
Query only
13.5.16.2 Example: Performing a Pulse Power Measurement The following example shows a pulse power measurement.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1066
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the Result Display
-----Measurement with synchronization via service request----*ESE 1 *SRE 32 // Configures the status reporting system to produce a service request. MPOW:FTYP NORM //Selects a Gaussian filter for the measurement. MPOW 935.2MHZ,1MHZ,434us,VID,50,5us,MEAN,20; *OPC //Configures and initiates a measurement on 20 pulses with synchronization to the end. //Analyzer produces a service request //On service request: MPOW:RES? //Returns the results of the measurements (20 power levels). MPOW:RES:MIN? //Returns the lowest of the 20 power level that have been measured.
-----Initiliazing the measurement and querying results simultaneously----MPOW? 935.2MHZ,1MHZ,434us,VID,50,5us,MEAN,20 //Configures, initiates and queries the results of the measurement. //Result example: -105.225059509,-105.656074524,-105.423065186,-104.374649048,-103.059822083,-101.29511261, -99.96534729,-99.7452468872,-99.6610794067,-100.327224731,-100.96686554,-101.450386047, -102.150642395,-103.240142822,-105.95476532,-110.583129883,-115.7760849,-126.279388428, -124.620399475,-116.97366333
13.6 Configuring the Result Display
The commands required to configure the screen display in a remote environment are described here. The tasks for manual operation are described in Chapter 8.1, "Result Display Configuration", on page 501. General Window Commands.............................................................................. 1067 Working with Windows in the Display................................................................. 1068 Examples: Configuring the Result Display.......................................................... 1075
13.6.1 General Window Commands
The following commands are required to configure general window layout, independent of the application. Note that the suffix <n> always refers to the window in the currently selected channel (see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877). DISPlay:FORMat......................................................................................................... 1068 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SIZE......................................................................................... 1068
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1067
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the Result Display
DISPlay:FORMat <Format>
This command determines which tab is displayed.
Parameters: <Format>
SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active channels (See Chapter 5.2, "R&S MultiView", on page 116).
SINGle Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused.
*RST:
SING
Example:
DISP:FORM SPL
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SIZE <Size>
This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily. To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently, use the LAY:SPL command (see LAYout:SPLitter on page 1072).
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <Size>
LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen. Other windows are still active in the background.
SMALl Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size. If more than one measurement window was displayed originally, these are visible again.
*RST:
SMALl
Example:
DISP:WIND2:SIZE LARG
13.6.2 Working with Windows in the Display
The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation. Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application, some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected channel.
Note that the suffix <n> always refers to the window in the currently selected channel.
(See INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877).
LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]?............................................................................................... 1069 LAYout:CATalog[:WINDow]?.......................................................................................... 1070 LAYout:IDENtify[:WINDow]?.......................................................................................... 1070 LAYout:MOVE[:WINDow].............................................................................................. 1071
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1068
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the Result Display
LAYout:REMove[:WINDow]........................................................................................... 1071 LAYout:REPLace[:WINDow].......................................................................................... 1071 LAYout:SPLitter............................................................................................................1072 LAYout:WINDow<n>:ADD?........................................................................................... 1073 LAYout:WINDow<n>:IDENtify?...................................................................................... 1074 LAYout:WINDow<n>:REMove........................................................................................1074 LAYout:WINDow<n>:REPLace...................................................................................... 1074
LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? <WindowName>,<Direction>,<WindowType>
This command adds a window to the display in the active channel.
This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result.
To replace an existing window, use the LAYout:REPLace[:WINDow] command.
Query parameters: <WindowName>
String containing the name of the existing window the new window is inserted next to. By default, the name of a window is the same as its index. To determine the name and index of all active windows, use the LAYout:CATalog[:WINDow]? query.
<Direction>
LEFT | RIGHt | ABOVe | BELow
Direction the new window is added relative to the existing window.
<WindowType>
text value
Type of result display (evaluation method) you want to add. See the table below for available parameter values.
Return values: <NewWindowName> When adding a new window, the command returns its name (by
default the same as its number) as a result.
Example:
LAY:ADD? '1',LEFT,MTAB Result: '2' Adds a new window named '2' with a marker table to the left of window 1.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See " Diagram " on page 502 See " Marker Table " on page 502 See " Marker Peak List " on page 503 See " Result Summary " on page 503 See " Spectrogram " on page 503
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1069
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the Result Display
Table 13-3: <WindowType> parameter values for the Spectrum application
Parameter value
Window type
DIAGram
Diagram
MTABle
Marker table
PEAKlist
Marker peak list
RSUMmary
Result summary
SGRam
Spectrogram
LAYout:CATalog[:WINDow]?
This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active channel from top left to bottom right. The result is a comma-separated list of values for each window, with the syntax:
<WindowName_1>,<WindowIndex_1>..<WindowName_n>,<WindowIndex_n>
Return values: <WindowName>
string
Name of the window. In the default state, the name of the window is its index.
<WindowIndex>
numeric value Index of the window.
Example:
LAY:CAT? Result: '2',2,'1',1 Two windows are displayed, named '2' (at the top or left), and '1' (at the bottom or right).
Usage:
Query only
LAYout:IDENtify[:WINDow]? <WindowName>
This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active channel.
Note: to query the name of a particular window, use the LAYout:WINDow<n>: IDENtify? query.
Query parameters:
<WindowName>
String containing the name of a window.
Return values: <WindowIndex>
Index number of the window.
Example:
LAY:WIND:IDEN? '2' Queries the index of the result display named '2'. Response: 2
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1070
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the Result Display
LAYout:MOVE[:WINDow] <WindowName>, <WindowName>, <Direction>
Setting parameters:
<WindowName>
String containing the name of an existing window that is to be
moved.
By default, the name of a window is the same as its index. To
determine the name and index of all active windows in the active
channel, use the LAYout:CATalog[:WINDow]? query.
<WindowName>
String containing the name of an existing window the selected window is placed next to or replaces. By default, the name of a window is the same as its index. To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active channel, use the LAYout:CATalog[:WINDow]? query.
<Direction>
LEFT | RIGHt | ABOVe | BELow | REPLace
Destination the selected window is moved to, relative to the reference window.
Example:
LAY:MOVE '4','1',LEFT Moves the window named '4' to the left of window 1.
Example:
LAY:MOVE '1','3',REPL Replaces the window named '3' by window 1. Window 3 is deleted.
Usage:
Setting only
LAYout:REMove[:WINDow] <WindowName>
This command removes a window from the display in the active channel.
Setting parameters:
<WindowName>
String containing the name of the window. In the default state,
the name of the window is its index.
Example:
LAY:REM '2' Removes the result display in the window named '2'.
Usage:
Setting only
LAYout:REPLace[:WINDow] <WindowName>,<WindowType>
This command replaces the window type (for example from "Diagram" to "Result Summary") of an already existing window in the active channel while keeping its position, index and window name.
To add a new window, use the LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? command.
Setting parameters:
<WindowName>
String containing the name of the existing window.
By default, the name of a window is the same as its index. To
determine the name and index of all active windows in the active
channel, use the LAYout:CATalog[:WINDow]? query.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1071
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the Result Display
<WindowType> Example: Usage:
Type of result display you want to use in the existing window. See LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 1069 for a list of available window types.
LAY:REPL:WIND '1',MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table.
Setting only
LAYout:SPLitter <Index1>, <Index2>, <Position>
This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the windows on each side of the splitter.
Compared to the DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SIZE on page 1068 command, the LAYout:SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter permanently, it does not just maximize a single window temporarily.
Note that windows must have a certain minimum size. If the position you define conflicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows, the command will not work, but does not return an error.
Figure 13-2: SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters
Setting parameters:
<Index1>
The index of one window the splitter controls.
<Index2>
The index of a window on the other side of the splitter.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1072
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the Result Display
<Position>
Example: Example: Usage:
New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area (without channel and status bar and softkey menu). The point of origin (x = 0, y = 0) is in the lower left corner of the screen. The end point (x = 100, y = 100) is in the upper right corner of the screen. (See Figure 13-2.) The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout. If the windows are positioned horizontally, the splitter also moves horizontally. If the windows are positioned vertically, the splitter also moves vertically.
Range: 0 to 100
LAY:SPL 1,3,50 Moves the splitter between window 1 ('Frequency Sweep') and 3 ('Marker Table') to the center (50%) of the screen, i.e. in the figure above, to the left.
LAY:SPL 1,4,70 Moves the splitter between window 1 ('Frequency Sweep') and 3 ('Marker Peak List') towards the top (70%) of the screen. The following commands have the exact same effect, as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically. LAY:SPL 3,2,70 LAY:SPL 4,1,70 LAY:SPL 2,1,70
Setting only
LAYout:WINDow<n>:ADD? <Direction>,<WindowType>
This command adds a measurement window to the display. Note that with this command, the suffix <n> determines the existing window next to which the new window is added, as opposed to LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]?, for which the existing window is defined by a parameter.
To replace an existing window, use the LAYout:WINDow<n>:REPLace command.
This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Query parameters:
<Direction>
LEFT | RIGHt | ABOVe | BELow
<WindowType>
Type of measurement window you want to add. See LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 1069 for a list of available window types.
Return values: <NewWindowName> When adding a new window, the command returns its name (by
default the same as its number) as a result.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1073
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the Result Display
Example: Usage:
LAY:WIND1:ADD? LEFT,MTAB Result: '2' Adds a new window named '2' with a marker table to the left of window 1.
Query only
LAYout:WINDow<n>:IDENtify?
This command queries the name of a particular display window (indicated by the <n> suffix) in the active channel.
Note: to query the index of a particular window, use the LAYout:IDENtify[: WINDow]? command.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Return values: <WindowName>
String containing the name of a window. In the default state, the name of the window is its index.
Example:
LAY:WIND2:IDEN? Queries the name of the result display in window 2. Response: '2'
Usage:
Query only
LAYout:WINDow<n>:REMove
This command removes the window specified by the suffix <n> from the display in the active channel.
The result of this command is identical to the LAYout:REMove[:WINDow] command.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Example:
LAY:WIND2:REM Removes the result display in window 2.
Usage:
Event
LAYout:WINDow<n>:REPLace <WindowType>
This command changes the window type of an existing window (specified by the suffix <n>) in the active channel.
The effect of this command is identical to the LAYout:REPLace[:WINDow] command.
To add a new window, use the LAYout:WINDow<n>:ADD? command.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1074
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the Result Display
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Setting parameters:
<WindowType>
Type of measurement window you want to replace another one
with.
See LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 1069 for a list of availa-
ble window types.
Example:
LAY:WIND2:REPL MTAB Replaces the result display in window 2 with a marker table.
Usage:
Setting only
13.6.3 Examples: Configuring the Result Display
The following example demonstrates how to configure result displays in a remote environment.
13.6.3.1 Example 1: Adding and Arranging Windows
Starting from the default initial display in the Spectrum application (Frequency Sweep), we will configure the following result displays:
1 Frequency Sweep 2 Spectrogram
3 Marker Table 4 Marker Peak List
//--------------Resetting the instrument ----------*RST //--------------- Adding new windows -------------------//Add a Spectrogram window beneath the Frequency Sweep window LAY:ADD? '1',BEL,SGR
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1075
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the Result Display
//Result: window number: '2' //Add a Marker Table window to the right of the Frequency Sweep window LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH,MTAB //Result: window number: '3' //Add a Marker Peak List window to the right of the Spectrogram window LAY:WIND2:ADD? RIGH,PEAK //Result: window number: '4'
//--------------- Changing the size of individual windows ------------//Move the splitter between the Frequency Sweep window and the Marker Table //window to enlarge the spectrum display to 60% of the entire width. LAY:SPL 1,3,60 //Move the splitter between the Spectrogram window and the Marker Peak List //window to enlarge the Spectrogram display to 60% of the entire width. LAY:SPL 2,4,60
//--------------- Querying all displayed windows -----------------//Query the name and number of all displayed windows //(from top left to bottom right) LAY:CAT? //Result : '1',1,'2',2,'3',3,'4',4
//------------- Maximizing a Window -----------------//Maximize the window "2 Spectrogram" DISP:WIND2:SIZE LARG
//-------------Restore multiple window display ----------DISP:WIND2:SIZE SMAL
13.6.3.2 Example 2: Replacing and Removing Windows
Starting from the display configured in Example 1: Adding and Arranging Windows, we will remove and replace result displays to obtain the following configuration:
1 Frequency Sweep
4 Marker Table
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1076
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
//-------------- Preparing the configuration from example 1 ----------*RST LAY:ADD? '1',BEL,SGR LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH,MTAB LAY:WIND2:ADD? RIGH,PEAK LAY:CAT? //Result : '1',1,'2',2,'3',3,'4',4 //Remove Spectrogram LAY:WIND2:REM //Remove Marker Table window LAY:REM '3' //Replace Marker Peak List window by Marker Table LAY:REPL '4',MTAB
//--------------- Querying all displayed windows -----------------//Query the name and number of all displayed windows (from top left to bottom right) LAY:CAT? //Result : '1',1,'4',4
//--------------- Changing the size of individual windows ------------//Move the splitter between the Frequency Sweep window and the Marker Table window //to enlarge the spectrum display to 80% of the entire height. LAY:SPL 1,4,80
13.7 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
All commands that set measurement-independent parameters are described here. Configuring the Data Input and Output............................................................... 1078 Defining the Frequency and Span.......................................................................1131 Configuring Bandwidth and Sweep Settings....................................................... 1138
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1077
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Configuring the Vertical Axis (Amplitude, Scaling).............................................. 1146 Configuring Triggered and Gated Measurements............................................... 1156 Adjusting Settings Automatically......................................................................... 1171
13.7.1 Configuring the Data Input and Output
The following commands are required to configure data input and output.
RF Input.............................................................................................................. 1078 Using External Mixers......................................................................................... 1084 Setting up Probes................................................................................................1100 External Generator Control................................................................................. 1106 Working with Power Sensors...............................................................................1117 Configuring the Outputs...................................................................................... 1128
13.7.1.1 RF Input
CALibration:PADJust[:STATe]........................................................................................ 1078 INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:PROTection:RESet.....................................................................1079 INPut<ip>:CONNector.................................................................................................. 1079 INPut<ip>:COUPling.....................................................................................................1079 INPut<ip>:DPATh......................................................................................................... 1080 INPut<ip>:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe]................................................................................... 1080 INPut<ip>:FILTer:YIG[:STATe]........................................................................................1081 INPut<ip>:IMPedance...................................................................................................1081 INPut<ip>:IMPedance:PTYPe....................................................................................... 1082 INPut<ip>:SELect........................................................................................................ 1082 INPut<ip>:TYPE.......................................................................................................... 1083 INPut<ip>:UPORt:STATe...............................................................................................1084 INPut<ip>:UPORt[:VALue]............................................................................................ 1084
CALibration:PADJust[:STATe]
Activates or deactivates the preselector adjustment.
This command is only available for instrument modelsR&S FSW43/50/67, for frequency sweeps in the Spectrum application.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Manual operation: See "Preselector Adjust" on page 365
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1078
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:PROTection:RESet
This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer for the R&S FSW after an overload condition occurred and the protection mechanism intervened. The error status bit (bit 3 in the STAT:QUES:POW status register) and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared.
(See STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]? on page 1408 and "STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Register" on page 805).
The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first.
For details on the protection mechanism see "RF Input Protection" on page 362.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 For R&S FSW85 models with two RF input connectors: 1: Input 1 (1 mm [RF Input] connector) 2: Input 2 (1.85 mm [RF2 Input] connector) For all other models: irrelevant
Example:
INP:ATT:PROT:RES
INPut<ip>:CONNector <ConnType>
Determines which connector the input for the measurement is taken from.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
Parameters: <ConnType>
RF RF input connector
AIQI Analog Baseband I connector This setting is only available if the Analog Baseband interface (R&S FSW-B71) is installed and active for input. It is not available for the R&S FSW67 or R&S FSW85.
RFPRobe Active RF probe
*RST:
RF
Example:
INP:CONN RF Selects input from the RF input connector.
Manual operation: See " Input Connector " on page 365
INPut<ip>:COUPling <CouplingType> This command selects the coupling type of the RF input.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1079
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Suffix: <ip> Parameters: <CouplingType>
Example: Manual operation:
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
AC | DC
AC AC coupling
DC DC coupling
*RST:
AC
INP:COUP DC
See " Input Coupling " on page 363
INPut<ip>:DPATh <DirectPath>
Enables or disables the use of the direct path for frequencies close to 0 Hz.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
Parameters: <DirectPath>
AUTO | OFF
AUTO | 1 (Default) the direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to 0 Hz.
OFF | 0 The analog mixer path is always used.
Example:
INP:DPAT OFF
Manual operation: See " Direct Path " on page 364
INPut<ip>:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe] <State>
Activates an additional internal high-pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz. This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R&S FSW in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT, for example.
This function requires an additional high-pass filter hardware option.
(Note: for RF input signals outside the specified range, the high-pass filter has no effect. For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards, the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG-preselector, if available.)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1080
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Suffix: <ip> Parameters: <State>
Example: Manual operation:
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
INP:FILT:HPAS ON Turns on the filter.
See " High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz " on page 364
INPut<ip>:FILTer:YIG[:STATe] <State>
Enables or disables the YIG filter.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
Example:
INP:FILT:YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG-preselector.
Manual operation: See " YIG-Preselector " on page 364
INPut<ip>:IMPedance <Impedance>
This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input. In some applications, only 50 are supported.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
Parameters: <Impedance>
50 | 75
numeric value User-defined impedance from 50 Ohm to 100000000 Ohm (=100 MOhm) User-defined values are only available for the Spectrum application, the I/Q Analyzer, and some optional applications. (In MSRA mode, primary only)
*RST:
50
Default unit: OHM
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1081
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Manual operation:
INP:IMP 75
See " Impedance " on page 363 See " Unit " on page 452
INPut<ip>:IMPedance:PTYPe <PadType>
Defines the type of matching pad used for impedance conversion for RF input.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
Parameters: <PadType>
SRESistor | MLPad
SRESistor Series-R
MLPad Minimum Loss Pad
*RST:
SRESistor
Example:
INP:IMP 100 INP:IMP:PTYP MLP
Manual operation: See " Impedance " on page 363
INPut<ip>:SELect <Source>
This command selects the signal source for measurements, i.e. it defines which connector is used to input data to the R&S FSW.
If no additional input options are installed, only RF input is supported.
For R&S FSW85 models with two RF input connectors you must select the input connector to configure first using INPut<ip>:TYPE.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 For R&S FSW85 models with two RF input connectors: 1: Input 1 (1 mm [RF Input] connector) 2: Input 2 (1.85 mm [RF2 Input] connector) For all other models: irrelevant
Parameters: <Source>
OBB Oscilloscope Baseband signal For details on Oscilloscope Baseband Input see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual. Not available for Input2.
RF Radio Frequency ("RF INPUT" connector)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1082
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Manual operation:
FIQ I/Q data file Not available for Input2.
DIQ Digital IQ data (only available with optional Digital Baseband Interface) For details on I/Q input see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual. Not available for Input2.
AIQ Analog Baseband signal (only available with optional Analog Baseband Interface R&S FSW-B71) For details on Analog Baseband input see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual. Not available for Input2.
*RST:
RF
INP:TYPE INP1 For R&S FSW85 models with two RF input connectors: selects the 1.00 mm RF input connector for configuration. INP:SEL RF
See " Radio Frequency State " on page 363
INPut<ip>:TYPE <Input>
The command selects the input path.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 For R&S FSW85 models with two RF input connectors: 1: Input 1 (1 mm [RF Input] connector) 2: Input 2 (1.85 mm [RF2 Input] connector) For all other models: irrelevant
Parameters: <Input>
INPUT1 Selects RF input 1. 1 mm [RF Input] connector
INPUT2 Selects RF input 2. For R&S FSW85 models with two RF input connectors: 1.85 mm [RF2 Input] connector For all other models: not available
*RST:
INPUT1
Example:
//Select input path INP:TYPE INPUT1
Manual operation: See " Radio Frequency State " on page 363
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1083
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
INPut<ip>:UPORt:STATe <State>
This command toggles the control lines of the user ports for the AUX PORT connector. This 9-pole SUB-D male connector is located on the rear panel of the R&S FSW.
See the R&S FSW Getting Started manual for details.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | 1 User port is switched to INPut
OFF | 0 User port is switched to OUTPut
*RST:
1
INPut<ip>:UPORt[:VALue]
This command queries the control lines of the user ports.
For details see OUTPut<up>:UPORt[:VALue] on page 1130.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
Return values: <Level>
bit values in hexadecimal format TTL type voltage levels (max. 5V) Range: #B00000000 to #B00111111
Example:
INP:UPOR? //Result: #B00100100 Pins 5 and 7 are active.
13.7.1.2 Using External Mixers
The commands required to work with external mixers in a remote environment are described here. Note that these commands require the R&S FSW to have an external mixer option installed and an external mixer to be connected to the R&S FSW.
In MSRA/MSRT mode, external mixers are not supported.
For details on working with external mixers see Chapter 7.2.5.1, "Basics on External Mixers", on page 405.
Basic Settings..................................................................................................... 1085 Mixer Settings..................................................................................................... 1087 Conversion Loss Table Settings..........................................................................1093 Programming Example: Working with an External Mixer.................................... 1097
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1084
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Basic Settings
The basic settings concern general usage of an external mixer.
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>[:STATe]........................................................................................... 1085 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:BIAS:HIGH......................................................................................1085 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:BIAS[:LOW].....................................................................................1085 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOPower........................................................................................ 1086 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:SIGNal............................................................................................1086 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:THReshold......................................................................................1087
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>[:STATe] <State>
Activates or deactivates the use of a connected external mixer as input for the measurement. This command is only available if the optional External Mixer is installed and an external mixer is connected.
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
MIX ON
Manual operation: See " External Mixer (State)" on page 417
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:BIAS:HIGH <BiasSetting>
This command defines the bias current for the high (last) range.
This command is only available if the external mixer is active (see [SENSe: ]MIXer<x>[:STATe] on page 1085).
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <BiasSetting>
*RST:
0.0 A
Default unit: A
Manual operation: See " Bias Value " on page 422
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:BIAS[:LOW] <BiasSetting>
This command defines the bias current for the low (first) range.
This command is only available if the external mixer is active (see [SENSe: ]MIXer<x>[:STATe] on page 1085).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1085
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Suffix: <x>
Parameters: <BiasSetting>
Manual operation:
. 1..n irrelevant
*RST:
0.0 A
Default unit: A
See " Bias Value " on page 422
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOPower <Level>
This command specifies the LO level of the external mixer's LO port.
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <Level>
numeric value
Range: 13.0 dBm to 17.0 dBm
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
15.5 dBm
Example:
MIX:LOP 16.0dBm
Manual operation: See " LO Level " on page 421
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:SIGNal <State>
This command specifies whether automatic signal detection is active or not.
Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that perform frequency sweeps (not in vector signal analysis or the I/Q Analyzer, for instance).
The "Auto ID" function is now also available for Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement and Spurious Emissions Measurement using an external mixer.
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
OFF | ON | AUTO | ALL
OFF | ON | AUTO | ALL
OFF No automatic signal detection is active.
ON Automatic signal detection (Signal ID) is active.
AUTO Automatic signal detection (Auto ID) is active.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1086
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Manual operation:
ALL Both automatic signal detection functions (Signal ID+Auto ID) are active.
*RST:
OFF
See " Signal ID " on page 421 See " Auto ID " on page 421
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:THReshold <Value>
This command defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison (see [SENSe: ]MIXer<x>:SIGNal on page 1086).
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <Value>
<numeric value>
Range: 0.1 dB to 100 dB
*RST:
10 dB
Default unit: DB
Example:
MIX:PORT 3
Manual operation: See " Auto ID Threshold " on page 421
Mixer Settings
The following commands are required to configure the band and specific mixer settings.
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:HANDover.................................................................... 1088 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:STARt.......................................................................... 1088 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:STOP...........................................................................1088 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:BAND:PRESet................................................................ 1088 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:BAND.............................................................................1089 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:HIGH:STATe................................................................... 1090 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:HIGH[:VALue]................................................................. 1090 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:TYPE............................................................................. 1090 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic[:LOW]............................................................................ 1091 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:HIGH.................................................................................... 1091 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:TABLe:HIGH..........................................................................1091 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:TABLe[:LOW].........................................................................1092 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS[:LOW]................................................................................... 1092 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:PORTs............................................................................................1093 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:RFOVerrange[:STATe]...................................................................... 1093
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1087
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:HANDover <Frequency>
This command defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next (if two different ranges are selected). The handover frequency for each band can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range.
This command is only available if the external mixer is active (see [SENSe: ]MIXer<x>[:STATe] on page 1085).
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <Frequency>
Default unit: HZ
Example:
MIX ON Activates the external mixer. MIX:FREQ:HAND 78.0299GHz Sets the handover frequency to 78.0299 GHz.
Manual operation: See " Handover Freq " on page 418
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:STARt
This command sets or queries the frequency at which the external mixer band starts.
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Example:
MIX:FREQ:STAR? Queries the start frequency of the band.
Manual operation: See " RF Start / RF Stop " on page 417
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:STOP
This command sets or queries the frequency at which the external mixer band stops.
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Example:
MIX:FREQ:STOP? Queries the stop frequency of the band.
Manual operation: See " RF Start / RF Stop " on page 417
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:BAND:PRESet
This command restores the preset frequency ranges for the selected standard waveguide band.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1088
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Note: Changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the [PRESET] function. Use this command to restore the predefined band ranges.
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Example:
MIX:HARM:BAND:PRES Presets the selected waveguide band.
Manual operation: See " Preset Band " on page 418
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:BAND <Band>
This command selects the external mixer band. The query returns the currently selected band.
This command is only available if the external mixer is active (see [SENSe: ]MIXer<x>[:STATe] on page 1085).
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <Band>
KA | Q | U | V | E | W | F | D | G | Y | J | USER Standard waveguide band or user-defined band.
Manual operation: See " Band " on page 418
Table 13-4: Frequency ranges for pre-defined bands
Band
Frequency start [GHz]
Frequency stop [GHz]
KA (A) *)
26.5
40.0
Q
33.0
50.0
U
40.0
60.0
V
50.0
75.0
E
60.0
90.0
W
75.0
110.0
F
90.0
140.0
D
110.0
170.0
G
140.0
220.0
J
220.0
325.0
Y
325.0
500.0
USER
32.18 (default)
68.22 (default)
*) The band formerly referred to as "A" is now named "KA".
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1089
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:HIGH:STATe <State>
This command specifies whether a second (high) harmonic is to be used to cover the band's frequency range.
Suffix:
.
<x>
1..n
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
ON
Example:
MIX:HARM:HIGH:STAT ON
Manual operation: See " Range 1 / Range 2 " on page 419
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:HIGH[:VALue] <HarmOrder>
This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the high (second) range.
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <HarmOrder
numeric value
Range:
2 to 128 (USER band); for other bands: see band definition
Example:
MIX:HARM:HIGH:STAT ON MIX:HARM:HIGH 2
Manual operation: See " Harmonic Order " on page 419
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:TYPE <OddEven>
This command specifies whether the harmonic order to be used should be odd, even, or both.
Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type.
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <OddEven>
ODD | EVEN | EODD
ODD | EVEN | EODD
*RST:
EVEN
Example:
MIX:HARM:TYPE ODD
Manual operation: See " Harmonic Type " on page 419
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1090
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic[:LOW] <HarmOrder>
This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the low (first) range.
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <HarmOrder>
Range: *RST:
2 to 128 (USER band); for other bands: see band definition 2 (for band F)
Example:
MIX:HARM 3
Manual operation: See " Harmonic Order " on page 419
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:HIGH <Average>
This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire high (second) range.
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <Average>
Range: 0 to 100
*RST:
24.0 dB
Default unit: dB
Example:
MIX:LOSS:HIGH 20dB
Manual operation: See " Conversion Loss " on page 419
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:TABLe:HIGH <FileName>
This command defines the conversion loss table to be used for the high (second) range.
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Setting parameters:
<FileName>
String containing the path and name of the file, or the serial
number of the external mixer whose file is required. The
R&S FSW automatically selects the correct cvl file for the current
IF. As an alternative, you can also select a user-defined conver-
sion loss table (.acl file).
Return values: <FileName>
As the result of a query, the actually used file is returned.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1091
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Manual operation:
MIX:LOSS:TABL:HIGH '101567' MIX:LOSS:TABL:HIGH? //Result for installed B5000, bw<= 4.4 GHz: 101567_B5000_2G8.B5G: //'101567_MAG_6_B5000_2G8.B5G' //Result for installed B5000, bw> 4.4 GHz: 101567_B5000_2G8.B5G: //'101567_MAG_6_B5000_3G5.B5G' //Result for installed B2001 and bw> 80 MHz: //'101567_MAG_6_B1200_B2001.B2G' //Result for installed B2001 and bw<= 80 MHz: //'101567_MAG_6.ACL'
See " Conversion Loss " on page 419
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:TABLe[:LOW] <FileName>
This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the low (first) range.
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <FileName>
String containing the path and name of the file, or the serial number of the external mixer whose file is required. The R&S FSW automatically selects the correct cvl file for the current IF. As an alternative, you can also select a user-defined conversion loss table (.acl file).
Example:
MIX:LOSS:TABL '101567' MIX:LOSS:TABL? //Result: '101567_MAG_6_B5000_3G5.B5G'
Manual operation: See " Conversion Loss " on page 419
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS[:LOW] <Average>
This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire low (first) range.
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <Average>
Range: 0 to 100
*RST:
24.0 dB
Default unit: dB
Example:
MIX:LOSS 20dB
Manual operation: See " Conversion Loss " on page 419
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1092
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:PORTs <PortType>
This command selects the mixer type.
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <PortType>
2 | 3
2 Two-port mixer.
3 Three-port mixer.
*RST:
2
Example:
MIX:PORT 3
Manual operation: See " Mixer Type " on page 418
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:RFOVerrange[:STATe] <State>
If enabled, the band limits are extended beyond "RF Start" and "RF Stop" due to the capabilities of the used harmonics.
Suffix: <x>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See " RF Overrange " on page 418
Conversion Loss Table Settings
The following settings are required to configure and manage conversion loss tables.
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BAND..................................................................................1094 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS................................................................................... 1094 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CATalog?............................................................................. 1094 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar................................................................................. 1095 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent............................................................................ 1095 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:DATA.................................................................................. 1095 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:HARMonic........................................................................... 1096 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer.................................................................................. 1096 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs................................................................................ 1096 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect................................................................................ 1097 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber............................................................................ 1097
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1093
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BAND <Band>
This command defines the waveguide band for which the conversion loss table is to be used. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range.
Before this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected (see [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 1097).
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Parameters: <Band>
K | KA | Q | U | V | E | W | F | D | G | Y | J | USER
Standard waveguide band or user-defined band. For a definition of the frequency range for the pre-defined bands, see Table 13-4).
*RST:
F (90 GHz - 140 GHz)
Example:
CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4' Selects the conversion loss table. CORR:CVL:BAND KA Sets the band to KA (26.5 GHz - 40 GHz).
Manual operation: See " Band " on page 425
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS <BiasSetting>
This command defines the bias setting to be used with the conversion loss table.
Before this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected (see [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 1097.
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Parameters: <BiasSetting>
*RST:
0.0 A
Default unit: A
Example:
CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4' Selects the conversion loss table. CORR:CVL:BIAS 3A
Manual operation: See " Write to CVL table " on page 422 See " Bias " on page 425
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CATalog?
This command queries all available conversion loss tables saved in the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\ directory on the instrument.
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1094
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Return values: <Files>
Example: Usage:
'string' Comma-separated list of strings containing the file names. CORR:CVL:CAT? Query only
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar
This command deletes the selected conversion loss table. Before this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected (see [SENSe: ]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 1097).
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Example:
CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4' Selects the conversion loss table. CORR:CVL:CLE
Manual operation: See " Delete Table " on page 423
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent <Text>
This command defines a comment for the conversion loss table. Before this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected (see [SENSe: ]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 1097).
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Parameters: <Text>
Example:
CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4' Selects the conversion loss table. CORR:CVL:COMM 'Conversion loss table for FS_Z60'
Manual operation: See " Comment " on page 425
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:DATA {<Freq>, <Level>}...
This command defines the reference values of the selected conversion loss tables. The values are entered as a set of frequency/level pairs. A maximum of 50 frequency/ level pairs may be entered. Before this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected (see [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 1097).
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Parameters: <Freq>
The frequencies have to be sent in ascending order. Default unit: HZ
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1095
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
<Level> Example:
Manual operation:
Default unit: DB
CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4' Selects the conversion loss table. CORR:CVL:DATA 1MHZ,-30DB,2MHZ,-40DB
See " Position / Value " on page 426
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:HARMonic <HarmOrder>
This command defines the harmonic order for which the conversion loss table is to be used. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range.
Before this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected (see [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 1097.
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Parameters: <HarmOrder>
Range: 2 to 65
Example:
CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4' Selects the conversion loss table. CORR:CVL:HARM 3
Manual operation: See " Harmonic Order " on page 425
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer <Type>
This command defines the mixer name in the conversion loss table. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range.
Before this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected (see [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 1097).
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Parameters: <Type>
string Name of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters
Example:
CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4' Selects the conversion loss table. CORR:CVL:MIX 'FS_Z60'
Manual operation: See " Mixer Name " on page 426
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs <PortType>
This command defines the mixer type in the conversion loss table. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1096
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Before this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected (see [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 1097).
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Parameters: <PortType>
2 | 3
*RST:
2
Example:
CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4' Selects the conversion loss table. CORR:CVL:PORT 3
Manual operation: See " Mixer Type " on page 426
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect <FileName>
This command selects the conversion loss table with the specified file name. If <file_name> is not available, a new conversion loss table is created.
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Parameters: <FileName>
String containing the path and name of the file.
Example:
CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4'
Manual operation:
See " New Table " on page 423 See " Edit Table " on page 423 See " File Name " on page 425
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber <SerialNo>
This command defines the serial number of the mixer for which the conversion loss table is to be used. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range.
Before this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected (see [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 1097).
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Parameters: <SerialNo>
Serial number with a maximum of 16 characters
Example:
CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4' Selects the conversion loss table. CORR:CVL:MIX '123.4567'
Manual operation: See " Mixer S/N " on page 426
Programming Example: Working with an External Mixer
This example demonstrates how to work with an external mixer in a remote environment. It is performed in the Spectrum application in the default layout configuration.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1097
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands
Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Note that without a real input signal and connected mixer, this measurement will not return useful results.
//--------------Preparing the instrument ----------//Reset the instrument *RST //Activate the use of the connected external mixer. SENS:MIX ON //----------- Configuring basic mixer behavior ------------//Set the LO level of the mixer's LO port to 15 dBm. SENS:MIX:LOP 15dBm //Set the bias current to -1 mA . SENS:MIX:BIAS:LOW -1mA //----------- Configuring the mixer and band settings ------------//Use band "V" to full possible range extent for assigned harmonic (6). SENS:MIX:HARM:BAND V SENS:MIX:RFOV ON //Query the possible range SENS:MIX:FREQ:STAR? //Result: 47480000000 (47.48 GHz) SENS:MIX:FREQ:STOP? //Result: 138020000000 (138.02 GHz) //Use a 3-port mixer type SENS:MIX:PORT 3 //Split the frequency range into two ranges; //range 1 covers 47.48 GHz GHz to 80 GHz; harmonic 6, average conv. loss of 20 dB //range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138.02 GHz; harmonic 8, average conv.loss of 30 dB SENS:MIX:HARM:TYPE EVEN SENS:MIX:HARM:HIGH:STAT ON SENS:MIX:FREQ:HAND 80GHz SENS:MIX:HARM:LOW 6 SENS:MIX:LOSS:LOW 20dB SENS:MIX:HARM:HIGH 8 SENS:MIX:LOSS:HIGH 30dB //--------- Activating automatic signal identification functions ----------//Activate both automatic signal identification functions. SENS:MIX:SIGN ALL //Use auto ID threshold of 8 dB. SENS:MIX:THR 8dB
//--------------Performing the Measurement----//Select single sweep mode. INIT:CONT OFF //Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished. INIT;*WAI //---------------Retrieving Results------------//Return the trace data for the input signal without distortions //(default screen configuration) TRAC:DATA? TRACE3
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1098
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Configuring a conversion loss table for a user-defined band
//--------------Preparing the instrument ----------//Reset the instrument *RST //Activate the use of the connected external mixer. SENS:MIX ON //--------------Configuring a new conversion loss table -------------//Define cvl table for range 1 of band as described in previous example // (extended V band) SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL 'UserTable' SENS:CORR:CVL:COMM 'User-defined conversion loss table for USER band' SENS:CORR:CVL:BAND USER SENS:CORR:CVL:HARM 6 SENS:CORR:CVL:BIAS -1mA SENS:CORR:CVL:MIX 'FS_Z60' SENS:CORR:CVL:SNUM '123.4567' SENS:CORR:CVL:PORT 3 //Conversion loss is linear from 55 GHz to 75 GHz SENS:CORR:CVL:DATA 55GHZ,-20DB,75GHZ,-30DB //----------- Configuring the mixer and band settings ------------//Use user-defined band and assign new cvl table. SENS:MIX:HARM:BAND USER //Define band by two ranges; //range 1 covers 47.48 GHz to 80 GHz; harmonic 6, cvl table 'UserTable' //range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138.02 GHz; harmonic 8, average conv.loss of 30 dB SENS:MIX:HARM:TYPE EVEN SENS:MIX:HARM:HIGH:STAT ON SENS:MIX:FREQ:HAND 80GHz SENS:MIX:HARM:LOW 6 SENS:MIX:LOSS:TABL:LOW 'UserTable' SENS:MIX:HARM:HIGH 8
SENS:MIX:LOSS:HIGH 30dB //Query the possible range SENS:MIX:FREQ:STAR? //Result: 47480000000 (47.48 GHz) SENS:MIX:FREQ:STOP? //Result: 138020000000 (138.02 GHz)
//--------------Performing the Measurement----//Select single sweep mode. INIT:CONT OFF //Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished. INIT;*WAI //---------------Retrieving Results------------//Return the trace data (default screen configuration) TRAC:DATA? TRACe1
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1099
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
13.7.1.3 Setting up Probes
Modular probes can be connected to the RF input connector of the R&S FSW.
For details see Chapter 7.2.1.1, "Using Probes", on page 353.
Probes can also be connected to the optional "Baseband Input" connectors, if the Analog Baseband interface ( option R&S FSW-B71) is installed.
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:ID:PARTnumber?.........................................................................1100 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:ID:SRNumber?............................................................................ 1100 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:ATTRatio.......................................................................... 1101 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:CMOFfset........................................................................ 1101 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:DMOFfset........................................................................ 1102 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:MODE..............................................................................1102 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:NAME?............................................................................ 1103 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:NMOFfset........................................................................ 1103 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:PMODe............................................................................1103 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:PMOFfset.........................................................................1104 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:STATe?............................................................................ 1105 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:TYPE?............................................................................. 1105
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:ID:PARTnumber?
Queries the R&S part number of the probe.
Suffix: <pb>
. 1..n Selects the connector: 1 = Baseband Input I 2 = Baseband Input Q 3 = RF
Return values: <PartNumber>
Example:
//Query part number PROB3:ID:PART?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Part Number" on page 367
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:ID:SRNumber?
Queries the serial number of the probe.
Suffix: <pb>
. 1..n Selects the connector: 1 = Baseband Input I 2 = Baseband Input Q 3 = RF
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1100
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Return values: <SerialNo> Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
//Query serial number PROB3:ID:SRN?
Query only
See "Serial Number" on page 367
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:ATTRatio <AttenuationRatio>
Defines the attenuation applied to the input at the probe. This setting is only available for modular probes.
Suffix: <pb>
. 1..n Selects the connector: 1 = Baseband Input I 2 = Baseband Input Q 3 = RF
Parameters: <AttenuationRatio>
10 Attenuation by 20 dB (ratio= 10:1)
2 Attenuation by 6 dB (ratio= 2:1)
*RST:
10
Default unit: DB
Manual operation: See "Attenuation" on page 367
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:CMOFfset <CMOffset>
Sets the common mode offset. The setting is only available if a differential probe in CM-mode is connected to the R&S FSW.
If the probe is disconnected, the common mode offset of the probe is reset to 0.0 V.
Note that if the offset for DM-mode or CM-mode is changed, the offsets for the P-mode and N-mode are adapted accordingly, and vice versa.
For details see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual.
Suffix: <pb>
. 1..n Selects the connector: 1 = Baseband Input I 2 = Baseband Input Q 3 = RF
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1101
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Parameters: <CMOffset>
Manual operation:
Offset of the mean voltage between the positive and negative input terminal vs. ground
Range: -16 V to +16 V Default unit: V
See "Common Mode Offset / Diff. Mode Offset / P Offset / N Offset /" on page 367
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:DMOFfset <DMOffset>
Sets the DM-mode offset. The setting is only available if a modular probe in DM-mode is connected to the R&S FSW.
If the probe is disconnected, the DM-mode offset of the probe is reset to 0.0 V.
Note that if the offset for DM-mode or CM-mode is changed, the offsets for the P-mode and N-mode are adapted accordingly, and vice versa.
For details see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual.
Suffix: <pb>
. 1..n Selects the connector: 1 = Baseband Input I 2 = Baseband Input Q 3 = RF
Parameters: <DMOffset>
Voltage offset between the positive and negative input terminal Default unit: V
Manual operation: See "Common Mode Offset / Diff. Mode Offset / P Offset / N Offset /" on page 367
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:MODE <Mode>
Suffix: <pb>
. 1..n Selects the connector: 1 = Baseband Input I 2 = Baseband Input Q 3 = RF
Parameters: <Mode>
RSINgle | NOACtion
RSINgle Run single: starts one data acquisition.
NOACtion Nothing is started on pressing the micro button.
Manual operation: See " Microbutton Action " on page 368
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1102
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:NAME?
Queries the name of the probe.
Suffix: <pb>
. 1..n Selects the connector: 1 = Baseband Input I 2 = Baseband Input Q 3 = RF
Return values: <Name>
String containing the name of the probe.
Example:
//Query name of the probe PROB3:SET:NAME?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Name" on page 366
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:NMOFfset <NMOffset>
Sets the N-mode offset. The setting is only available if a modular probe in N-mode is connected to the R&S FSW. The maximum voltage difference between the positive and negative input terminals is 16 V.
If the probe is disconnected, the N-mode offset of the probe is reset to 0.0 V.
Note that if the offset for DM-mode or CM-mode is changed, the offsets for the P-mode and N-mode are adapted accordingly, and vice versa.
For details see "MultiMode Function and Offset Compensation for Modular RF Probes" on page 357.
Suffix: <pb>
. 1..n Selects the connector: 1 = Baseband Input I 2 = Baseband Input Q 3 = RF
Parameters: <NMOffset>
The voltage offset between the negative input terminal and ground.
Default unit: V
Manual operation: See "Common Mode Offset / Diff. Mode Offset / P Offset / N Offset /" on page 367
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:PMODe <Mode> Determines the mode of a multi-mode modular probe.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1103
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
For details see "MultiMode Function and Offset Compensation for Modular RF Probes" on page 357.
Suffix: <pb>
. 1..n Selects the connector: 1 = Baseband Input I 2 = Baseband Input Q 3 = RF
Parameters: <Mode>
CM | DM | PM | NM
DM Voltage between the positive and negative input terminal
CM Mean voltage between the positive and negative input terminal vs. ground
PM Voltage between the positive input terminal and ground
NM Voltage between the negative input terminal and ground
Example:
SENS:PROB:SETU:PMOD PM Sets the probe to P-mode.
Manual operation: See "Mode" on page 367
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:PMOFfset <PMOffset>
Sets the P-mode offset. The setting is only available if a modular probe in P-mode is connected to the R&S FSW. The maximum voltage difference between the positive and negative input terminals is 16 V.
If the probe is disconnected, the P-mode offset of the probe is reset to 0.0 V.
Note that if the offset for DM-mode or CM-mode is changed, the offsets for the P-mode and N-mode are adapted accordingly, and vice versa.
For details see "MultiMode Function and Offset Compensation for Modular RF Probes" on page 357.
Suffix: <pb>
. 1..n Selects the connector: 1 = Baseband Input I 2 = Baseband Input Q 3 = RF
Parameters: <PMOffset>
The voltage offset between the positive input terminal and ground.
Default unit: V
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1104
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Manual operation: See "Common Mode Offset / Diff. Mode Offset / P Offset / N Offset /" on page 367
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:STATe?
Queries if the probe at the specified connector is active (detected) or not active (not detected).
To switch the probe on, i.e. activate input from the connector, use INP:SEL:AIQ (see INPut<ip>:SELect on page 1082).
Suffix: <pb>
. 1..n Selects the connector: 1 = Baseband Input I 2 = Baseband Input Q 3 = RF
Return values: <State>
DETected | NDETected
Example:
//Query connector state PROB3:SET:STAT?
Usage:
Query only
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:TYPE?
Queries the type of the probe.
Suffix: <pb>
. 1..n Selects the connector: 1 = Baseband Input I 2 = Baseband Input Q 3 = RF
Return values: <Type>
String containing one of the following values: �"None" (no probe detected) �"active differential" �"active single-ended" �"active modular"
Example:
//Query probe type PROB3:SET:TYPE?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Type" on page 367
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1105
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
13.7.1.4 External Generator Control
External generator control commands are available if the R&S FSW External Generator Control option (R&S FSW-B10) is installed.
For each measurement channel one external generator can be configured. To switch between different configurations define multiple measurement channels.
For more information on external generator control see Chapter 7.2.4.2, "Basics on External Generator Control", on page 377.
Measurement Configuration................................................................................ 1106 Interface Configuration........................................................................................ 1110 Source Calibration............................................................................................... 1112 Programming Example for External Generator Control.......................................1115
Measurement Configuration
The following commands are required to activate external generator control and to configure a calibration measurement with an external tracking generator.
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency...................................................................... 1106 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe]...........................................1106 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator.................................... 1107 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator........................................1108 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:OFFSet..........................................................1108 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:POWer[:LEVel]..................................................................1109 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe]............................................................................ 1109 SOURce<si>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet........................................................... 1109
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency <Frequency>
This command defines a fixed source frequency for the external generator.
Suffix: <si>
. irrelevant
<gen>
Parameters: <Frequency>
Source frequency of the external generator.
*RST:
1100050000
Default unit: HZ
Example:
//Define frequency of the generator SOUR:EXT:FREQ 10MHz
Manual operation: See "(Manual) Source Frequency" on page 393
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe] <State>
This command couples the frequency of the external generator output to the R&S FSW.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1106
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Suffix: <si> <gen> Parameters: <State>
Example: Manual operation:
. irrelevant
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
ON | 1 Default setting: a series of frequencies is defined (one for each sweep point), based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R&S FSW; the RF frequency range covers the currently defined span of the R&S FSW (unless limited by the range of the signal generator)
OFF | 0 The generator uses a single fixed frequency, defined by SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency.
*RST:
1
SOUR:EXT:FREQ:COUP ON
See "Source Frequency Coupling" on page 393
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator <Value>
This command defines the denominator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator.
Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the analyzer:
FGenerator
FAnalyzer
Numerator Denomin ator
FOffset
Suffix: <si> <gen> Parameters: <Value>
Example:
Manual operation:
. irrelevant
<numeric value>
*RST:
1
//Define multiplication factor of 4/3; the transmit frequency of the generator is 4/3 times the analyzer frequency SOUR:EXT:FREQ:NUM 4 SOUR:EXT:FREQ:DEN 3
See "(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/ Offset)" on page 393
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1107
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator <Value>
This command defines the numerator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator.
Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the analyzer:
FGenerator
FAnalyzer
Numerator Denomin ator
FOffset
Suffix: <si> <gen> Parameters: <Value>
Example:
Manual operation:
. irrelevant
<numeric value>
*RST:
1
//Define multiplication factor of 4/3; the transmit frequency of the generator is 4/3 times the analyzer frequency SOUR:EXT:FREQ:NUM 4 SOUR:EXT:FREQ:DEN 3
See "(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/ Offset)" on page 393
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines the frequency offset of the generator with reference to the analyzer frequency.
Select the offset such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the analyzer:
FGenerator
FAnalyzer
Numerator Denomin ator
FOffset
Suffix: <si>
<gen>
Parameters: <Offset>
. irrelevant
<numeric value>, specified in Hz, kHz, MHz or GHz, rounded to the nearest Hz
*RST:
0 Hz
Default unit: HZ
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1108
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Manual operation:
//Define an offset between generator output frequency and analyzer frequency SOUR:EXT:FREQ:OFFS 10HZ
See "(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/ Offset)" on page 393
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:POWer[:LEVel] <Level>
This command sets the output power of the selected generator.
Suffix: <si>
. irrelevant
<gen>
Parameters: <Level>
<numeric value>
*RST:
-20 dBm
Default unit: DBM
Example:
//Define generator output level SOUR:EXT:POW -30dBm
Manual operation: See " Source Power " on page 392
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe] <State>
This command activates or deactivates the connected external generator.
Suffix: <si>
. irrelevant
<gen>
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Manual operation: See " Source State " on page 392
SOURce<si>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet <Offset>
Suffix: <si>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <Offset>
Range: -200 dB to +200 dB
*RST:
0dB
Default unit: DB
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1109
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Manual operation:
//Define a level offset on the external generator SOUR:POW:OFFS -10dB
See " Source Offset " on page 392
Interface Configuration
The following commands are required to configure the interface for the connection to the external generator.
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:ROSCillator[:SOURce]....................................................... 1110 SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess................................. 1110 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:INTerface...........................................1111 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:LINK................................................. 1111 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:TYPE................................................1112 SYSTem:COMMunicate:TCPip:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess................................ 1112
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:ROSCillator[:SOURce] <Source>
This command controls selection of the reference oscillator for the external generator.
If the external reference oscillator is selected, the reference signal must be connected to the rear panel of the instrument.
Suffix: <si>
. irrelevant
<gen>
irrelevant
Parameters: <Source>
INTernal Uses the internal reference.
EXTernal Uses the external reference; if none is available, an error flag is displayed in the status bar.
*RST:
INT
Example:
//Select an external reference oscillator SOUR:EXT:ROSC EXT
Manual operation: See " Reference " on page 391
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess <Number>
Changes the IEC/IEEE-bus address of the external generator.
Suffix:
.
<gen>
1..n
Parameters: <Number>
Range: *RST:
0 to 30 28
Example:
SYST:COMM:GPIB:RDEV:GEN:ADDR 15
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1110
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Manual operation: See " GPIB Address / TCPIP Address / Computer Name " on page 390
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:INTerface <Type>
Defines the interface used for the connection to the external generator.
This command is only available if external generator control is active (see SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe] on page 1109).
Suffix:
.
<gen>
Parameters: <Type>
GPIB TCPip
Example:
SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN:INT TCP
Manual operation: See " Interface " on page 390
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:LINK <Type>
This command selects the link type of the external generator if the GPIB interface is used.
The difference between the two GPIB operating modes is the execution speed. While, during GPIB operation, each frequency to be set is transmitted to the generator separately, a whole frequency list can be programmed in one go if the TTL interface is also used. Frequency switching can then be performed per TTL handshake which results in considerable speed advantages.
This command is only available if external generator control is active (see SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe] on page 1109).
Suffix:
.
<gen>
Parameters: <Type>
GPIB | TTL
GPIB GPIB connection without TTL synchronization (for all generators of other manufacturers and some Rohde & Schwarz devices)
TTL GPIB connection with TTL synchronization (if available; for most Rohde&Schwarz devices)
*RST:
GPIB
Example:
SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN:LINK TTL Selects GPIB + TTL interface for generator operation.
Manual operation: See " TTL Handshake " on page 390
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1111
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:TYPE <Type>
This command selects the type of external generator.
For a list of the available generator types see "Overview of Supported Generators" on page 380.
Suffix:
.
<gen>
Parameters: <Name>
<Generator name as string value>
*RST:
SMU02
Example:
//Select an external generator SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN:TYPE 'SMW06'
Manual operation: See " Generator Type " on page 390
SYSTem:COMMunicate:TCPip:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess <Address>
Configures the TCP/IP address for the external generator.
Suffix:
.
<gen>
Parameters: <Address>
TCP/IP address between 0.0.0.0 and 0.255.255.255
*RST:
0.0.0.0
Example:
SYST:COMM:TCP:RDEV:GEN:ADDR 130.094.122.195
Manual operation: See " GPIB Address / TCPIP Address / Computer Name " on page 390
Source Calibration
The following commands are required to activate the calibration functions of the external tracking generator. However, they are only available if external generator control is active (see SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe] on page 1109).
Useful commands for source calibration described elsewhere: Chapter 13.10.3, "Working with Transducers", on page 1333 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition on page 1155
Remote commands exclusive to source calibration:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue.......................... 1113 [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]...................................................................... 1113 [SENSe:]CORRection:METHod......................................................................................1114 [SENSe:]CORRection:RECall........................................................................................ 1114 [SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe]....................................................................................... 1114 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:GENerate.................................................................1115
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1112
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue <Value>
This command defines the reference value assigned to the reference position in the specified window. Separate reference values are maintained for the various displays.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<w>
subwindow
<t>
irrelevant
Parameters: <Value>
*RST:
AM time domain: 0 PCT; FM time domain: 0 Hz; PM
time domain: 0 rad; AM spectrum: 100 PCT; FM
spectrum: 250 kHz; PM spectrum: 10 rad;
Default unit: DB
Example:
DISP:TRAC:Y:RVAL 0 Sets the value assigned to the reference position to 0 Hz
Manual operation: See " Reference Value " on page 396
[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] <MeasType>
This command initiates a reference measurement (calibration). The reference measurement is the basis for the measurement normalization. The result depends on whether a reflection measurement or transmission measurement is performed (see [SENSe:]CORRection:METHod on page 1114).
To obtain a correct reference measurement, a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must have been carried out. This is only possible in the single sweep mode.
This command is only available if external generator control is active (see SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe] on page 1109).
Setting parameters:
<MeasType>
THRough | OPEN
THRough "TRANsmission" mode: calibration with direct connection between generator and device input "REFLection" mode: calibration with short circuit at the input
OPEN only allowed in "REFLection" mode: calibration with open input
Example:
INIT:CONT OFF Selects single sweep operation CORR:METH TRAN Selects a transmission measurement. CORR:COLL THR;*WAI Starts the measurement of reference data using direct connection between generator and device input and waits for the sweep end.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1113
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Usage: Manual operation:
Setting only
See "Calibrate Reflection Short" on page 395 See "Calibrate Reflection Open" on page 395
[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod <Type>
This command selects the type of measurement to be performed with the generator.
This command is only available if external generator control is active (see SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe] on page 1109).
Parameters: <Type>
REFLection Selects reflection measurements.
TRANsmission Selects transmission measurements.
*RST:
TRANsmission
Example:
CORR:METH TRAN Sets the type of measurement to "transmission".
Manual operation:
See "Calibrate Transmission" on page 395 See "Calibrate Reflection Short" on page 395 See "Calibrate Reflection Open" on page 395
[SENSe:]CORRection:RECall
This command restores the measurement configuration used for calibration.
This command is only available if external generator control is active (see SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe] on page 1109).
Example:
CORR:REC
Manual operation: See "Recall Cal. Settings" on page 395
[SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe] <State>
This command turns correction of measurement results (normalization) on and off.
The command is available after you have created a reference trace for the selected measurement type with [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] on page 1113.
This command is only available if external generator control is active (see SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe] on page 1109).
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1114
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Manual operation:
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
1
CORR ON Activates normalization.
See " Normalization state" on page 395
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:GENerate <Name>
This command uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor with up to 1001 points. The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix .trd under C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\trd. The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency.
The generated transducer factor can be further adapted using the commands described in Chapter 13.10.3, "Working with Transducers", on page 1333).
Parameters: <Name>
'<name>'
Example:
CORR:TRAN:GEN 'MyGenerator' Creates the transducer file C:\r_s\instr\trd\MyGenerator.trd.
Manual operation: See " Save as Trd Factor " on page 396
Programming Example for External Generator Control The following example demonstrates how to work with an external generator in a remote environment. It assumes a signal generator of the type SMW06 is connected to the R&S FSW, including TTL synchronization, as described in the R&S FSW User Manual.
//--------------Preparing the instrument -----------
//Reset the instrument *RST
//Set the frequency span. SENS:FREQ:STAR 10HZ SENS:FREQ:STOP 1MHZ
//--------------Configuring the interface -----------
//Set the generator type to SMW06 with a frequency range of 100 kHz to 4GHz SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN:TYPE 'SMW06'
//Set the interface used to the GPIB address 28 SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN:INT GPIB
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1115
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
SYST:COMM:GPIB:RDEV:GEN:ADDR 28
//Activate the use of TTL synchronization to optimize measurement speed SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN:LINK TTL
//Activate the use of the external reference frequency at 10 MHz on the generator SOUR:EXT:ROSC EXT
//--------------Configuring the calibration measurement -----------
//Activate external generator control. SOUR:EXT:STAT ON //Set the generator output level to -10 dBm. SOUR:EXT:POW -10DBM //Set the frequency coupling to automatic SOUR:EXT:FREQ:COUP:STAT ON
//--------------Configuring the generator frequency range -----------
//Define a series of frequencies (one for each sweep point) based on the current
//frequency at the RF input of the analyzer; the generator frequency is half the
//frequency of the analyzer, with an offset of 100 kHz;
// analyzer start:
10 Hz
// analyzer stop:
1 MHz
// analyzer span:
999.99 KHz
// generator frequency start: 100.005 KHz
// generator frequency stop: 600 KHz
// generator span:
499.995 KHz
SOUR:EXT:FREQ:FACT:NUM 1 SOUR:EXT:FREQ:FACT:DEN 2 SOUR:EXT:FREQ:OFFS 100KHZ
//--------------Performing the calibration measurement -----------
//Perform a transmission measurement with direct connection between the generator //and the analyzer and wait till the end SENS:CORR:METH TRAN SENS:CORR:COLL:ACQ THR; *WAI
//--------------Retrieving the calibration trace results -----------
//Retrieve the measured frequencies (10 Hz - 600 kHz) TRAC:DATA:X? TRACE1
//Retrieve the measured power levels; = 0 between 10 Hz and 100 kHz (below //generator minimum frequency); nominal -5dBm as of 100 kHz; TRAC:DATA? TRACE1
//--------------Normalizing the calibration trace results -----------
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1116
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
//Retrieve the normalized power levels (= power offsets from calibration results) //Should be 0 for all sweep points directly after calibration SENS:CORR:STAT ON TRAC:DATA? TRACE1
//--------------Changing the display of the calibration results ----------//Shift the reference line so the -5 dB level is displayed in the center DISP:TRAC:Y:SCAL:RVAL -5DB DISP:TRAC:Y:SCAL:RPOS 50PCT
13.7.1.5 Working with Power Sensors
The following commands describe how to work with power sensors.
These commands require the use of a Rohde & Schwarz power sensor. For a list of supported sensors, see the data sheet.
Configuring Power Sensors.................................................................................1117 Configuring Power Sensor Measurements..........................................................1118 Triggering with Power Sensors............................................................................1125
Configuring Power Sensors
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<p>:CONFigure:AUTO[:STATe]..........................1117 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<p>:COUNt?................................................... 1117 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<p>:DEFine..................................................... 1118
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<p>:CONFigure:AUTO[:STATe] <State>
This command turns automatic assignment of a power sensor to the power sensor index on and off.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
SYST:COMM:RDEV:PMET:CONF:AUTO OFF
Manual operation: See " Select " on page 371
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<p>:COUNt?
This command queries the number of power sensors currently connected to the R&S FSW.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1117
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Return values: <NumberSensors>
Example:
Usage:
Manual operation:
Number of connected power sensors. SYST:COMM:RDEV:PMET:COUN? Query only See " Select " on page 371
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<p>:DEFine <Placeholder>, <Type>, <Interface>, <SerialNo>
This command assigns the power sensor with the specified serial number to the selected power sensor index (configuration).
The query returns the power sensor type and serial number of the sensor assigned to the specified index.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Parameters: <Placeholder>
Currently not used
<Type>
Detected power sensor type, e.g. "NRP-Z81".
<Interface>
Interface the power sensor is connected to; always "USB"
<SerialNo>
Serial number of the power sensor assigned to the specified index
Example:
SYST:COMM:RDEV:PMET2:DEF '','NRP-Z81','', '123456' Assigns the power sensor with the serial number '123456' to the configuration "Power Sensor 2". SYST:COMM:RDEV:PMET2:DEF? Queries the sensor assigned to "Power Sensor 2". Result: '','NRP-Z81','USB','123456' The NRP-Z81 power sensor with the serial number '123456' is assigned to the "Power Sensor 2".
Manual operation: See " Select " on page 371
Configuring Power Sensor Measurements
CALibration:PMETer<p>:ZERO:AUTO ONCE..................................................................1119 CALCulate<n>:PMETer<p>:RELative[:MAGNitude].......................................................... 1119 CALCulate<n>:PMETer<p>:RELative[:MAGNitude]:AUTO ONCE...................................... 1119 CALCulate<n>:PMETer<p>:RELative:STATe................................................................... 1120 FETCh:PMETer<p>?.................................................................................................... 1120 READ:PMETer<p>?......................................................................................................1120 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:DCYCle[:STATe]............................................................................1121 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:DCYCle:VALue............................................................................. 1121 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:FREQuency..................................................................................1121
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1118
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:FREQuency:LINK......................................................................... 1122 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:MTIMe......................................................................................... 1122 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:MTIMe:AVERage:COUNt............................................................... 1122 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:MTIMe:AVERage[:STATe].............................................................. 1123 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:ROFFset[:STATe].......................................................................... 1123 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:SOFFset...................................................................................... 1124 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>[:STATe]........................................................................................ 1124 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:UPDate[:STATe]............................................................................ 1124 UNIT<n>:PMETer<p>:POWer........................................................................................ 1125 UNIT<n>:PMETer<p>:POWer:RATio.............................................................................. 1125
CALibration:PMETer<p>:ZERO:AUTO ONCE
This command zeroes the power sensor.
Note that you have to disconnect the signals from the power sensor input before you start to zero the power sensor. Otherwise, results are invalid.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Example:
CAL:PMET2:ZERO:AUTO ONCE;*WAI Starts zeroing the power sensor 2 and delays the execution of further commands until zeroing is concluded.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See " Zeroing Power Sensor " on page 371
CALCulate<n>:PMETer<p>:RELative[:MAGNitude] <RefValue>
This command defines the reference value for relative measurements.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<p>
Power sensor index
Parameters: <RefValue>
Range: -200 dBm to 200 dBm
*RST:
0
Default unit: DBM
Example:
CALC:PMET2:REL -30 Sets the reference value for relative measurements to -30 dBm for power sensor 2.
Manual operation: See " Reference Value " on page 372
CALCulate<n>:PMETer<p>:RELative[:MAGNitude]:AUTO ONCE
This command sets the current measurement result as the reference level for relative measurements.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1119
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Suffix: <n> <p> Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
. Window
Power sensor index
CALC:PMET2:REL:AUTO ONCE Takes the current measurement value as reference value for relative measurements for power sensor 2.
Event
See "Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas > Ref " on page 372
CALCulate<n>:PMETer<p>:RELative:STATe <State>
This command turns relative power sensor measurements on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<p>
Power sensor index
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC:PMET2:REL:STAT ON Activates the relative display of the measured value for power sensor 2.
FETCh:PMETer<p>?
This command queries the results of power sensor measurements.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Usage:
Query only
READ:PMETer<p>?
This command initiates a power sensor measurement and queries the results.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1120
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:DCYCle[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the duty cycle correction on and off.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
PMET2:DCYC:STAT ON
Manual operation: See " Duty Cycle " on page 373
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:DCYCle:VALue <Percentage>
This command defines the duty cycle for the correction of pulse signals.
The power sensor uses the duty cycle in combination with the mean power to calculate the power of the pulse.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor
Parameters: <Percentage>
Range: 0.001 to 99.999
*RST:
99.999
Default unit: %
Example:
PMET2:DCYC:STAT ON Activates the duty cycle correction. PMET2:DCYC:VAL 0.5 Sets the correction value to 0.5%.
Manual operation: See " Duty Cycle " on page 373
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:FREQuency <Frequency>
This command defines the frequency of the power sensor.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Parameters: <Frequency>
The available value range is specified in the data sheet of the power sensor in use.
*RST:
50 MHz
Default unit: HZ
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1121
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Manual operation:
PMET2:FREQ 1GHZ Sets the frequency of the power sensor to 1 GHz.
See " Frequency Manual " on page 372
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:FREQuency:LINK <Coupling>
This command selects the frequency coupling for power sensor measurements.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Parameters: <Coupling>
CENTer Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer
MARKer1 Couples the frequency to the position of marker 1
OFF Switches the frequency coupling off
*RST:
CENTer
Example:
PMET2:FREQ:LINK CENT Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer
Manual operation: See " Frequency Coupling " on page 372
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:MTIMe <Duration>
This command selects the duration of power sensor measurements.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Parameters: <Duration>
SHORt | NORMal | LONG
*RST:
NORMal
Example:
PMET2:MTIM SHOR Sets a short measurement duration for measurements of stationary high power signals for the selected power sensor.
Manual operation: See " Meas Time/Average " on page 372
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:MTIMe:AVERage:COUNt <NumberReadings>
This command sets the number of power readings included in the averaging process of power sensor measurements.
Extended averaging yields more stable results for power sensor measurements, especially for measurements on signals with a low power, because it minimizes the effects of noise.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1122
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Parameters: <NumberReadings>
An average count of 0 or 1 performs one power reading.
Range: 0 to 256 Increment: binary steps (1, 2, 4, 8, ...)
Example:
PMET2:MTIM:AVER ON Activates manual averaging. PMET2:MTIM:AVER:COUN 8 Sets the number of readings to 8.
Manual operation: See " Average Count ( Number of Readings )" on page 373
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:MTIMe:AVERage[:STATe] <State>
This command turns averaging for power sensor measurements on and off.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
PMET2:MTIM:AVER ON Activates manual averaging.
Manual operation: See " Meas Time/Average " on page 372
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:ROFFset[:STATe] <State>
This command includes or excludes the reference level offset of the analyzer for power sensor measurements.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
PMET2:ROFF OFF Takes no offset into account for the measured power.
Manual operation: See " Use Ref Level Offset " on page 373
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1123
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:SOFFset <SensorOffset>
Takes the specified offset into account for the measured power. Only available if [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:ROFFset[:STATe] is disabled.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Parameters: <SensorOffset>
Default unit: DB
Example:
PMET2:TRIG:SOFF 0.001
Manual operation: See "Sensor Level Offset" on page 373
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>[:STATe] <State>
This command turns a power sensor on and off.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
PMET1 ON Switches the power sensor measurements on.
Manual operation: See " State " on page 371 See " Select " on page 371
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:UPDate[:STATe] <State>
This command turns continuous update of power sensor measurements on and off.
If on, the results are update even if a single sweep is complete.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
PMET1:UPD ON The data from power sensor 1 is updated continuously.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1124
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Manual operation: See " Continuous Value Update " on page 371
UNIT<n>:PMETer<p>:POWer <Unit>
This command selects the unit for absolute power sensor measurements.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<p>
Power sensor index
Parameters: <Unit>
DBM | WATT | W | DB | PCT
*RST:
DBM
Example:
UNIT:PMET:POW DBM
Manual operation: See " Unit/Scale " on page 372
UNIT<n>:PMETer<p>:POWer:RATio <Unit>
This command selects the unit for relative power sensor measurements.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<p>
Power sensor index
Parameters: <Unit>
DB | PCT
*RST:
DB
Example:
UNIT:PMET:POW:RAT DB
Manual operation: See " Unit/Scale " on page 372
Triggering with Power Sensors
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:DTIMe............................................................................ 1125 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:HOLDoff......................................................................... 1126 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:HYSTeresis..................................................................... 1126 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:LEVel............................................................................. 1126 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:SLOPe........................................................................... 1127 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger[:STATe]........................................................................... 1127
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:DTIMe <Time>
This command defines the time period that the input signal has to stay below the IF power trigger level before the measurement starts.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1125
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Parameters: <Time>
Example:
Range: 0 s to 1 s
Increment: 100 ns
*RST:
100 �s
Default unit: S
PMET2:TRIG:DTIMe 0.001
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:HOLDoff <Holdoff>
This command defines the trigger holdoff for external power triggers.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Parameters: <Holdoff>
Time period that has to pass between the trigger event and the start of the measurement, in case another trigger event occurs.
Range: 0 s to 1 s
Increment: 100 ns
*RST:
0 s
Default unit: S
Example:
PMET2:TRIG:HOLD 0.1 Sets the holdoff time of the trigger to 100 ms
Manual operation: See " Trigger Holdoff " on page 374
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:HYSTeresis <Hysteresis>
This command defines the trigger hysteresis for external power triggers.
The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the IF power trigger level in order to allow a trigger to start the measurement.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Parameters: <Hysteresis>
Range: 3 dB to 50 dB
Increment: 1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Default unit: DB
Example:
PMET2:TRIG:HYST 10 Sets the hysteresis of the trigger to 10 dB.
Manual operation: See " Hysteresis " on page 374
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:LEVel <Level> This command defines the trigger level for external power triggers.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1126
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Suffix: <p> Parameters: <Level>
Example:
Manual operation:
. Power sensor index
-20 to +20 dBm
Range: -20 dBm to 20 dBm
*RST:
-10 dBm
Default unit: DBM
PMET2:TRIG:LEV -10 dBm Sets the level of the trigger
See " External Trigger Level " on page 374
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:SLOPe <Edge>
This command selects the trigger condition for external power triggers.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Parameters: <Edge>
POSitive The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a positive edge.
NEGative The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a negative edge.
*RST:
POSitive
Example:
PMET2:TRIG:SLOP NEG
Manual operation: See " Slope " on page 374
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the external power trigger on and off.
Suffix: <p>
. Power sensor index
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
PMET2:TRIG ON Switches the external power trigger on
Manual operation: See " Using the power sensor as an external trigger " on page 373
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1127
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
13.7.1.6 Configuring the Outputs The following commands are required to provide output from the R&S FSW.
Configuring trigger input/output is described in Chapter 13.7.5.3, "Configuring the Trigger Output", on page 1168.
DIAGnostic:SERVice:NSOurce...................................................................................... 1128 OUTPut<up>:IF:SBANd?.............................................................................................. 1128 OUTPut<up>:IF[:SOURce]............................................................................................ 1129 OUTPut<up>:IF:IFFRequency....................................................................................... 1129 OUTPut<up>:UPORt:STATe.......................................................................................... 1130 OUTPut<up>:UPORt[:VALue]........................................................................................ 1130 SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume...........................................................................................1130
DIAGnostic:SERVice:NSOurce <State>
This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled [noise source control] on the R&S FSW on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
DIAG:SERV:NSO ON
Manual operation: See "Noise Source Control" on page 436
OUTPut<up>:IF:SBANd?
This command queries the sideband provided at the "IF OUT 2 GHz" connector compared to the sideband of the RF signal. The sideband depends on the current center frequency.
This command is available only if the output is configured for IF2 (see OUTPut<up>: IF[:SOURce] on page 1129).
For more information and prerequisites see Chapter 7.2.1.3, "IF and Video Signal Output", on page 359.
Suffix:
.
<up>
Return values: <SideBand>
NORMal The sideband at the output is identical to the RF signal.
INVerted The sideband at the output is the inverted RF signal sideband.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1128
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Usage:
OUTP:IF IF2 Activates output at the IF OUTPUT (2 GHZ) connector. OUTP:IF:SBAN? Queries the sideband provided at the connector.
Query only
OUTPut<up>:IF[:SOURce] <Source>
Defines the type of signal available at one of the output connectors of the R&S FSW.
For restrictions and more information see Chapter 7.2.1.3, "IF and Video Signal Output", on page 359.
Suffix:
.
<up>
Parameters: <Source>
IF The measured IF value is available at the IF/VIDEO/DEMOD output connector. The frequency at which the IF value is provided is defined using the OUTPut<up>:IF:IFFRequency command.
VIDeo The displayed video signal (i.e. the filtered and detected IF signal, 200mV) is available at the IF/VIDEO/DEMOD output connector. This setting is required to provide demodulated audio frequencies at the output.
*RST:
IF
Example:
OUTP:IF VID Selects the video signal for the IF/VIDEO/DEMOD output connector.
Manual operation: See "Data Output" on page 435
OUTPut<up>:IF:IFFRequency <Frequency>
This command defines the frequency for the IF output of the R&S FSW. The IF frequency of the signal is converted accordingly.
This command is available in the time domain and if the IF/VIDEO/DEMOD output is configured for IF.
For more information see Chapter 7.2.1.3, "IF and Video Signal Output", on page 359.
Suffix:
.
<up>
Parameters: <Frequency>
*RST:
50.0 MHz
Default unit: HZ
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1129
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Manual operation: See "Data Output" on page 435
OUTPut<up>:UPORt:STATe <State>
This command toggles the control lines of the user ports for the AUX PORT connector. This 9-pole SUB-D male connector is located on the rear panel of the R&S FSW.
Suffix: <up>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 User port is switched to INPut
ON | 1 User port is switched to OUTPut
Example:
OUTP:UPOR:STAT ON
OUTPut<up>:UPORt[:VALue] <Value> This command sets the control lines of the user ports. The assignment of the pin numbers to the bits is as follows:
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Pin
N/A
N/A
5
3
4
7
6
2
Bits 7 and 6 are not assigned to pins and must always be 0.
The user port is written to with the given binary pattern.
If the user port is programmed to input instead of output (see INPut<ip>:UPORt: STATe on page 1084), the output value is temporarily stored.
Suffix: <up>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <Value>
bit values in hexadecimal format TTL type voltage levels (max. 5V) Range: #B00000000 to #B00111111
Example:
OUTP:UPOR #B00100100 Sets pins 5 and 7 to 5 V.
SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume <Volume>
This command defines the volume of the built-in loudspeaker for demodulated signals. This setting is maintained for all applications.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1130
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
The command is available in the time domain in Spectrum mode and in Analog Modulation Analysis mode.
Parameters: <Volume>
Percentage of the maximum possible volume.
Range: *RST:
0 to 1 0.5
Example:
SYST:SPE:VOL 0 Switches the loudspeaker to mute.
Manual operation: See "Data Output" on page 435
13.7.2 Defining the Frequency and Span
The commands required to configure the frequency and span settings in a remote environment are described here. The tasks for manual operation are described in Chapter 7.3, "Frequency and Span Configuration", on page 439.
Defining the Frequency Range............................................................................1131 Configuring Signal Tracking................................................................................ 1136
13.7.2.1 Defining the Frequency Range
The following commands are required to define the frequency range.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer.............................................................. 1131 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CSTep................................................................ 1132 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing......................................1132 [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer....................................................................................... 1132 [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP.............................................................................. 1133 [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO.................................................................... 1133 [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK...................................................................... 1133 [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor.......................................................... 1134 [SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet....................................................................................... 1134 [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN.......................................................................................... 1135 [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL................................................................................. 1135 [SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt......................................................................................... 1135 [SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP.......................................................................................... 1135
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer
This command matches the center frequency to the frequency of a marker.
If you use the command in combination with a delta marker, that delta marker is turned into a normal marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1131
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Manual operation:
CALC:MARK2:FUNC:CENT Sets the center frequency to the frequency of marker 2.
See " Center Frequency = Marker Frequency " on page 531
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CSTep
This command matches the center frequency step size to the current marker frequency.
The command turns delta markers into normal markers.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing <Scale>
This command selects the scaling of the x-axis.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<w>
subwindow
<t>
Parameters: <Scale>
LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling.
LINear Linear scaling.
*RST:
LINear
Example:
DISP:TRAC:X:SPAC LOG
Manual operation: See " Frequency Axis Scaling " on page 343
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer <Frequency>
This command defines the center frequency.
Parameters: <Frequency>
The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet.
UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP command.
DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP command.
*RST:
fmax/2
Default unit: Hz
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1132
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Manual operation:
FREQ:CENT 100 MHz FREQ:CENT:STEP 10 MHz FREQ:CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz.
See "fAnalyzer" on page 227 See " Center Frequency " on page 443 See " Frequency " on page 480
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP <StepSize>
This command defines the center frequency step size.
You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS:FREQ UP AND SENS:FREQ DOWN commands, see [SENSe:]FREQuency: CENTer on page 1132.
Parameters: <StepSize>
fmax is specified in the data sheet.
Range: 1 to fMAX
*RST:
0.1 x span
Default unit: Hz
Example:
//Set the center frequency to 110 MHz. FREQ:CENT 100 MHz FREQ:CENT:STEP 10 MHz FREQ:CENT UP
Manual operation: See " Center Frequency Stepsize " on page 444
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO <State>
This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span.
In time domain (zero span) measurements, the center frequency is coupled to the RBW.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span.
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK <CouplingType>
This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or the resolution bandwidth.
Parameters: <CouplingType>
SPAN | RBW | OFF
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1133
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Manual operation:
SPAN Couples the step size to the span. Available for measurements in the frequency domain.
RBW Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth. Available for measurements in the time domain.
OFF Decouples the step size.
*RST:
SPAN
//Couple step size to span FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK SPAN
See " Center Frequency Stepsize " on page 444
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor <Factor>
This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth.
Parameters: <Factor>
1 to 100 PCT
*RST:
10
Default unit: PCT
Example:
//Couple frequency step size to span and define a step size factor FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK SPAN FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 20PCT
Manual operation: See " Center Frequency Stepsize " on page 444
[SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines a frequency offset.
If this value is not 0 Hz, the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application. All results of type "frequency" will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application.
See also " Frequency Offset " on page 445.
Note: In MSRA/MSRT mode, the setting command is only available for the MSRA/ MSRT primary application. For MSRA/MSRT secondary applications, only the query command is available.
Parameters: <Offset>
Range: -1 THz to 1 THz
*RST:
0 Hz
Default unit: HZ
Example:
FREQ:OFFS 1GHZ
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1134
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Manual operation: See " Frequency Offset " on page 445
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN <Span>
This command defines the frequency span.
If you set a span of 0 Hz in the Spectrum application, the R&S FSW starts a measurement in the time domain.
Parameters: <Span>
The minimum span for measurements in the frequency domain is 10 Hz. For SEM and spurious emission measurements, the minimum span is 20 Hz.
Range: 0 Hz to fmax
*RST:
Full span
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation:
See " Zero Span " on page 126 See " Span " on page 443 See " Zero Span " on page 444 See " Last Span " on page 444
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL This command restores the full span. Manual operation: See " Full Span " on page 444
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt <Frequency>
This command defines a start frequency for measurements in the frequency domain.
Parameters: <Frequency>
0 to (fmax - min span)
*RST:
0
Default unit: HZ
Example:
FREQ:STAR 20MHz
Manual operation: See " Frequency Sweep " on page 126 See " Start / Stop " on page 443
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP <Frequency>
This command defines a stop frequency for measurements in the frequency domain.
Parameters: <Frequency>
min span to fmax
*RST:
fmax
Default unit: HZ
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1135
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Manual operation:
FREQ:STOP 2000 MHz
See " Frequency Sweep " on page 126 See " Start / Stop " on page 443
13.7.2.2 Configuring Signal Tracking
When signal tracking is activated, the maximum signal is determined after each frequency sweep and the center frequency is set to the frequency of this signal. Thus with drifting signals the center frequency follows the signal.
For more details see Chapter 7.3.1, "Impact of the Frequency and Span Settings", on page 439..
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe].................................................. 1136 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth.............................................1136 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold............................................. 1137 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe...................................................1137
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] <State>
This command turns signal tracking on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
//Activate signal tracking to keep the center frequency on the signal pea //After each sweep the maximum on trace 1 is searched within a range of 2 //around the center frequency. It must have a minimum power of -90dBm. CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR ON CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR:BAND 20MHz CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR:THR -90dBm CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR:TRAC 1
Manual operation: See " Signal Tracking " on page 446
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth <Bandwidth>
This command defines the bandwidth around the center frequency that is included in the signal tracking process.
Note that you have to turn on signal tracking before you can use the command.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1136
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Suffix: <n> <m> Parameters: <Bandwidth>
Manual operation:
. irrelevant
irrelevant
Range: 10 Hz to Max span
*RST:
(= span/10 on activating the function)
Default unit: Hz
See " Signal Tracking " on page 446
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold <Level>
This command defines the threshold level for the signal tracking process.
Note that you have to turn on signal tracking before you can use the command.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Parameters: <Level>
The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer.
Range: -130 dBm to 30 dBm
*RST:
-120 dBm
Default unit: DBM
Manual operation: See " Signal Tracking " on page 446
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe <TraceNumber>
This command selects the trace on which the largest signal is searched for.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Parameters: <TraceNumber>
1 to 6
Range: *RST:
1 to 6 1
Manual operation: See " Signal Tracking " on page 446
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1137
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
13.7.3 Configuring Bandwidth and Sweep Settings
The commands required to configure the bandwidth, sweep and filter settings in a remote environment are described here. The tasks for manual operation are described in Chapter 7.5, "Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration", on page 458.
Configuring the Bandwidth and Filter.................................................................. 1138 Configuring the Sweep........................................................................................ 1141
13.7.3.1 Configuring the Bandwidth and Filter
[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]....................................................................................... 1138 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]..................................................................................1138 [SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO............................................................................. 1139 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO........................................................................ 1139 [SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio..............................................................................1139 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio........................................................................ 1139 [SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE..............................................................................1139 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE........................................................................ 1139 [SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo................................................................................................ 1140 [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo...........................................................................................1140 [SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO...................................................................................... 1140 [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO................................................................................. 1140 [SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio.......................................................................................1141 [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:RATio................................................................................. 1141 [SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:TYPE.......................................................................................1141 [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:TYPE................................................................................. 1141
[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution] <Bandwidth> [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] <Bandwidth>
This command defines the resolution bandwidth and decouples the resolution bandwidth from the span.
In the Real-Time application, the resolution bandwidth is always coupled to the span.
For statistics measurements, this command defines the demodulation bandwidth.
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
refer to data sheet
*RST:
RBW: AUTO is set to ON; DBW: 3MHz
Default unit: Hz
Example:
BAND 1 MHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz
Manual operation:
See " Analysis Bandwidth " on page 292 See " RBW " on page 341 See " Res BW CISPR " on page 343 See " Res BW MIL " on page 343 See " RBW " on page 480
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1138
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO <State> [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO <State>
This command couples and decouples the resolution bandwidth to the span.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
BAND:AUTO OFF Switches off the coupling of the resolution bandwidth to the span.
Manual operation: See " RBW " on page 341 See " Default Coupling " on page 469
[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio <Ratio> [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio <Ratio>
This command defines the ratio between the resolution bandwidth (Hz) and the span (Hz).
Note that the ratio defined with this remote command (RBW/span) is reciprocal to that of the coupling ratio (span/RBW).
Parameters: <Ratio>
Range: *RST:
0.0001 to 1 0.01
Example:
BAND:RAT 0.1
Manual operation: See " Span/RBW " on page 468
[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE <FilterType> [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE <FilterType>
This command selects the resolution filter type.
When you change the filter type, the command selects the next larger filter bandwidth if the same bandwidth is unavailable for that filter.
The EMI-specific filter types are available if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement option is installed, even if EMI measurement is not active. For details see Chapter 6.13.3.1, "Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types", on page 328.
Parameters: <FilterType>
CFILter Channel filters
NORMal Gaussian filters
P5 5-pole filters The 5-pole filter is not available for FFT sweeps.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1139
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Example:
Manual operation:
RRC RRC filters
CISPr | PULSe CISPR (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option Return value for query is always PULS.
MIL MIL Std (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option
*RST:
NORMal
BAND:TYPE NORM
See Chapter 13.15.1, "Programming Example: Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep", on page 1455.
See " Filter Type " on page 341 See " Res BW CISPR " on page 343 See " Res BW MIL " on page 343
[SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo <Bandwidth> [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo <Bandwidth>
This command defines the video bandwidth.
The command decouples the video bandwidth from the resolution bandwidths.
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
refer to data sheet
*RST:
AUTO is set to ON
Default unit: HZ
Example:
BAND:VID 10 kHz
Manual operation: See " VBW " on page 467
[SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO <State> [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO <State>
This command couples and decouples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
BAND:VID:AUTO OFF
Manual operation:
See " VBW " on page 467 See " RBW/VBW " on page 468 See " Default Coupling " on page 469
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1140
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
[SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio <Ratio> [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:RATio <Ratio>
This command defines the coupling ratio of the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth (RBW/VBW).
Parameters: <Ratio>
Range: *RST:
0,001 to 1000 1
Example:
BAND:VID:RAT 3 Sets the coupling of video bandwidth to video bandwidth = 3*resolution bandwidth
Manual operation: See " RBW/VBW " on page 468
[SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:TYPE <Mode> [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:TYPE <Mode>
This command enables or disables the logarithmic amplifier in front of the video filter in the signal path.
Parameters: <Mode>
LINear The logarithmic amplifier in front of the video filter is bypassed to process linear detector samples.
LOGarithmic The logarithmic amplifier in front of the video filter is enabled to process logarithmic detector samples.
*RST:
LOGarithmic
Example:
BAND:VID:TYPE LIN Logarithmic amplifier in front of the video filter is disabled.
13.7.3.2 Configuring the Sweep
Useful commands for configuring sweeps described elsewhere: [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:COUNt on page 1182 [SENSe:]AVERage<n>[:STATe<t>] on page 1182 [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE on page 1183
Remote commands exclusive to configuring sweeps:
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt............................................................................................... 1142 [SENSe:]SWEep:DURation?......................................................................................... 1142 [SENSe:]SWEep:FFTSubspan?.....................................................................................1143 [SENSe:]SWEep:OPTimize........................................................................................... 1143 [SENSe:]SWEep[:WINDow<n>]:POINts.......................................................................... 1144 [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME..................................................................................................1144 [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO........................................................................................1145 [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE................................................................................................. 1145
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1141
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
[SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE:USED....................................................................................... 1145 [SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:FFT................................................................................ 1146 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:FFT........................................................................... 1146
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt <SweepCount>
This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces.
In continuous sweep mode, the application calculates the moving average over the average count.
In single sweep mode, the application stops the measurement and calculates the average after the average count has been reached.
Parameters: <SweepCount>
When you set a sweep count of 0 or 1, the R&S FSW performs one single sweep in single sweep mode. In continuous sweep mode, if the sweep count is set to 0, a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed.
Range: *RST:
0 to 200000 0
Example:
SWE:COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64. INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end.
Manual operation: See " Sweep/Average Count " on page 469
[SENSe:]SWEep:DURation? <Time>
This command provides an estimation of the total time required to capture the data and process it. This time span may be considerably longer than the actual sweep time (see [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME on page 1144).
Tip: To determine the necessary timeout for data capturing in a remote control program, double the estimated time and add 1 second.
Return values: <Time>
Example:
SWE:TIME 1s SWE:DUR? Reply: 27.9734842578
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Sweep Time " on page 467 See "Data capturing takes too long" on page 1472
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1142
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
[SENSe:]SWEep:FFTSubspan?
Returns the number of FFT subspans required to cover the entire measurement range (read-only). See also "Number of subspans" on page 462.
Only available in FFT sweep mode in the Spectrum application, and not for SEM, ACLR, or Spurious emissions measurements.
Return values: <NoOfPartialSpans> integer
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "FFT Subspans" on page 471
[SENSe:]SWEep:OPTimize <Mode>
In FFT mode, several FFT analysis steps are required to cover the entire measurement span. The span which is covered by one FFT analysis step is called subspan. The subspan cannot be defined directly, but it can be optimized according to measurement requirements.
Table 13-5: Optimization parameters in FFT mode
Optimization mode Description
DYNamic
Optimizes the dynamic range by using the narrowest possible subspan (depending on the RBW).
The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is activated to obtain the best control range for the A/D converter.
SPEed
Optimizes the sweep rate by using the widest possible subspan (depending on the RBW).
The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is deactivated. (Note: set the reference level accordingly to optimize the control range for the A/D converter).
It is recommended that you set the Sweep Time to "Auto" to optimize the sweep rate.
AUTO
Uses a medium-sized subspan to obtain a compromise between a large dynamic range and a fast sweep rate.
The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is activated to obtain the best control range for the A/D converter.
Note: FFT mode and external mixers (R&S FSW-B21)
The subspan optimization modes "Dynamic" and "Auto" include automatic suppression of unwanted mixing products. Thus, when using external mixers (R&S FSW-B21), use the "Speed" mode to obtain similar results in FFT mode as in frequency sweep mode.
Zero span mode
For zero span measurements, the optimization mode defines the selection of the A/D converter prefilter.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1143
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Table 13-6: Optimization parameters in zero span mode Optimization mode Description
DYNamic
The narrowest filter possible (depending on the RBW) is used.
SPEed
The widest filter possible (depending on the RBW) is used.
AUTO
A medium-sized prefilter is used.
Note: EMI measurements
For EMI measurements (using R&S FSW-K54), "Dynamic" mode is not supported. "Auto" mode always uses "Speed" optimization.
Parameters: <Mode>
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
SWE:OPT DYN Selects optimization for dynamic range.
Manual operation: See " Optimization " on page 470
[SENSe:]SWEep[:WINDow<n>]:POINts <SweepPoints>
This command defines the number of sweep points to analyze after a sweep.
For EMI measurements, 200001 sweep points are available.
Suffix:
.
<n>
Parameters: <SweepPoints>
Range: *RST:
101 to 100001 1001
Example:
SWE:POIN 251
Manual operation: See "Sweep Points" on page 470
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME <Time>
This command defines the sweep time. It automatically decouples the time from any other settings.
In the Spectrum application, the command decouples the sweep time from the span and resolution and video bandwidths. Note that this command queries only the time required to capture the data, not to process it. To obtain an estimation of the total capture and processing time, use the [SENSe:]SWEep:DURation? command.
Parameters: <Time>
refer to data sheet
*RST:
depends on current settings (determined automati-
cally)
Default unit: S
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1144
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Manual operation:
See " Sweep Time " on page 167 See " Sweep Time " on page 467 See "Sweep Time" on page 480
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO <State>
This command couples and decouples the sweep time to the span and the resolution and video bandwidths.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
SWE:TIME:AUTO ON Activates automatic sweep time.
Manual operation:
See " Harmonic Sweep Time " on page 311 See " Sweep Time " on page 467 See " Default Coupling " on page 469
[SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE <Type>
This command selects the sweep type.
Parameters: <Type>
AUTO Automatic selection of the sweep type between sweep mode and FFT.
FFT FFT mode
SWE Sweep list
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
SWE:TYPE FFT
Manual operation: See " Sweep Type " on page 471
[SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE:USED
This command queries the sweep type if you have turned on automatic selection of the sweep type.
Return values: <Type>
SWE Normal sweep
FFT FFT mode
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1145
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:FFT <FilterMode> [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:FFT <FilterMode>
Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the subspan size. The subspan is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis.
This command is only available when using the sweep type "FFT".
Note: this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only. For new remote control programs, use the [SENSe:]SWEep:OPTimize command.
Parameters: <FilterMode>
WIDE | AUTO | NARRow
AUTO Automatically applies the sweep optimization mode that is best for the current measurement.
NARRow Optimizes the sweep mode for a large dynamic range.
WIDE Optimizes the sweep mode for high performance.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
BAND:TYPE FFT Select FFT filter.
Example:
BAND:FFT NARR Select narrow subspan for FFT filter.
13.7.4 Configuring the Vertical Axis (Amplitude, Scaling)
The following commands are required to configure the amplitude and vertical axis settings in a remote environment. Amplitude Settings.............................................................................................. 1146 Configuring the Attenuation.................................................................................1148 Configuring a Preamplifier...................................................................................1151 Scaling the Y-Axis................................................................................................1153
13.7.4.1 Amplitude Settings
The tasks for manual configuration are described in Chapter 7.4.2, "Amplitude Settings", on page 450.
Useful commands for amplitude configuration described elsewhere: [SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel on page 1174
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1146
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Remote commands exclusive to amplitude configuration:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:REFerence......................................................... 1147 CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer..........................................................................................1147 UNIT<n>:POWer.......................................................................................................... 1147 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel...................................................... 1147 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet..........................................1148 [SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection...................................................................................... 1148
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:REFerence
This command matches the reference level to the power level of a marker.
If you use the command in combination with a delta marker, that delta marker is turned into a normal marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Example:
CALC:MARK2:FUNC:REF Sets the reference level to the level of marker 2.
Manual operation: See " Reference Level = Marker Level " on page 532
CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer <Unit> UNIT<n>:POWer <Unit>
This command selects the unit of the y-axis.
The unit applies to all power-based measurement windows with absolute values.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <Unit>
DBM | V | A | W | DBPW | WATT | DBUV | DBMV | VOLT | DBUA | AMPere | DBUa_mhz | DBUV_mhz | DBmV_mhz | DBpW_mhz
(Units based on 1 MHz require installed R&S FSW-K54 (EMI measurements) option.)
*RST:
dBm
Example:
UNIT:POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm.
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <ReferenceLevel>
This command defines the reference level (for all traces in all windows).
With a reference level offset 0, the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1147
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
<t> Parameters: <ReferenceLevel>
Example: Manual operation:
irrelevant
The unit is variable.
Range: see datasheet
*RST:
0 dBm
Default unit: DBM
DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV -60dBm
See " Reference Level " on page 451
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines a reference level offset (for all traces in all windows).
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<t>
irrelevant
Parameters: <Offset>
Range: -200 dB to 200 dB
*RST:
0dB
Default unit: DB
Example:
DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV:OFFS -10dB
Manual operation: See "Shifting the Display ( Offset )" on page 296 See " Shifting the Display ( Offset )" on page 452
[SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection <State>
This command turns noise cancellation on and off.
If noise cancellation is on, the R&S FSW performs a reference measurement to determine its inherent noise and subtracts the result from the channel power measurement result (first active trace only).
For more information see " Noise Cancellation " on page 165.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
POW:NCOR ON
Manual operation: See " Noise Cancellation " on page 165
13.7.4.2 Configuring the Attenuation
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation................................................................................................. 1149 INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:AUTO....................................................................................... 1149 INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE............................................................................. 1149
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1148
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
INPut<ip>:EATT........................................................................................................... 1150 INPut<ip>:EATT:AUTO..................................................................................................1150 INPut<ip>:EATT:STATe................................................................................................. 1151
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation <Attenuation>
This command defines the total attenuation for RF input.
If an electronic attenuator is available and active, the command defines a mechanical attenuation (see INPut<ip>:EATT:STATe on page 1151).
If you set the attenuation manually, it is no longer coupled to the reference level, but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation. Thus, if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually, the command also adjusts the reference level.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
Parameters: <Attenuation>
Range: see data sheet
Increment: 5 dB (with optional electr. attenuator: 1 dB)
*RST:
10 dB (AUTO is set to ON)
Default unit: DB
Example:
INP:ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level.
Manual operation: See " Attenuation Mode / Value " on page 453
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:AUTO <State>
This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level. Thus, when the reference level is changed, the R&S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
INP:ATT:AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level.
Manual operation: See " Attenuation Mode / Value " on page 453
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE <OptMode> Selects the priority for signal processing after the RF attenuation has been applied.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1149
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Suffix: <ip> Parameters: <OptMode>
Example:
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
LNOise | LDIStortion
LNOise Optimized for high sensitivity and low noise levels
LDIStortion Optimized for low distortion by avoiding intermodulation
*RST:
LDIStortion (WLAN application: LNOise)
INP:ATT:AUTO:MODE LNO
INPut<ip>:EATT <Attenuation>
This command defines an electronic attenuation manually. Automatic mode must be switched off (INP:EATT:AUTO OFF, see INPut<ip>:EATT:AUTO on page 1150).
If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually, the command also adjusts the reference level.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
Parameters: <Attenuation>
attenuation in dB
Range: see data sheet
Increment: 1 dB
*RST:
0 dB (OFF)
Default unit: DB
Example:
INP:EATT:AUTO OFF INP:EATT 10 dB
Manual operation: See " Using Electronic Attenuation " on page 453
INPut<ip>:EATT:AUTO <State>
This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off.
If on, electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1150
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Manual operation:
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
1
INP:EATT:AUTO OFF
See " Using Electronic Attenuation " on page 453
INPut<ip>:EATT:STATe <State>
This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Example:
INP:EATT:STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path.
Manual operation: See " Using Electronic Attenuation " on page 453
13.7.4.3 Configuring a Preamplifier
INPut<ip>:EGAin[:STATe].............................................................................................. 1151 INPut<ip>:GAIN:STATe................................................................................................. 1152 INPut<ip>:GAIN[:VALue]............................................................................................... 1153
INPut<ip>:EGAin[:STATe] <State>
Before this command can be used, the external preamplifier must be connected to the R&S FSW. See the preamplifier's documentation for details.
When activated, the R&S FSW automatically compensates the magnitude and phase characteristics of the external preamplifier in the measurement results.
Note that when an optional external preamplifier is activated, the internal preamplifier is automatically disabled, and vice versa.
For R&S FSW85 models with two RF inputs, you must enable correction from the external preamplifier for each input individually. Correction cannot be enabled for both inputs at the same time.
When deactivated, no compensation is performed even if an external preamplifier remains connected.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1151
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Suffix: <ip> Parameters: <State>
Example: Manual operation:
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 No data correction is performed based on the external preamplifier
ON | 1 Performs data corrections based on the external preamplifier
*RST:
0
INP:EGA ON
See "Ext. PA Correction" on page 455
INPut<ip>:GAIN:STATe <State>
This command turns the internal preamplifier on and off. It requires the optional preamplifier hardware.
Note that if an optional external preamplifier is activated, the internal preamplifier is automatically disabled, and vice versa.
For R&S FSW 8 or 13 models, the preamplification is defined by INPut<ip>:GAIN[: VALue].
For R&S FSW 26 or higher models, the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the preamplifier is activated.
If option R&S FSW-B22 is installed, the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz.
If option R&S FSW-B24 is installed, the preamplifier is active for all frequencies.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Example:
INP:GAIN:STAT ON INP:GAIN:VAL 15 Switches on 15 dB preamplification.
Manual operation: See " Preamplifier " on page 454
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1152
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
INPut<ip>:GAIN[:VALue] <Gain>
This command selects the gain if the preamplifier is activated (INP:GAIN:STAT ON, see INPut<ip>:GAIN:STATe on page 1152).
The command requires the additional preamplifier hardware option.
Suffix: <ip>
. 1 | 2 irrelevant
Parameters: <Gain>
15 dB | 30 dB
The availability of gain levels depends on the model of the R&S FSW. For all R&S FSW models except for R&S FSW85, the following settings are available: 15 dB and 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two. For R&S FSW85 models: R&S FSW43 or higher: 30 dB
Default unit: DB
Example:
INP:GAIN:STAT ON INP:GAIN:VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification.
Manual operation: See " Preamplifier " on page 454
13.7.4.4 Scaling the Y-Axis
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]..................................................................1153 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO ONCE............................................. 1154 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE............................ 1154 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision.................................................. 1154 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition..................................................1155 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing...................................... 1155
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] <Range>
This command defines the display range of the y-axis (for all traces).
Note that the command works only for a logarithmic scaling. You can select the scaling with DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<t>
irrelevant
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1153
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Parameters: <Range>
Example: Manual operation:
Range: 1 dB to 200 dB
*RST:
100 dB
Default unit: HZ
DISP:TRAC:Y 110dB
See " Range " on page 456
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO ONCE
Automatic scaling of the y-axis is performed once, then switched off again (for all traces).
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<t>
irrelevant
Manual operation: See " Auto Scale Once " on page 457
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the type of scaling of the y-axis (for all traces).
When the display update during remote control is off, this command has no immediate effect.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<w>
subwindow
<t>
irrelevant
Parameters: <Mode>
ABSolute absolute scaling of the y-axis
RELative relative scaling of the y-axis
*RST:
ABSolute
Example:
DISP:TRAC:Y:MODE REL
Manual operation: See " Scaling " on page 457
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision <Value>
This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y-axis for all diagrams, where possible.
In spectrum displays, for example, this command is not available.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1154
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
<t> Parameters: <Value>
Example:
irrelevant
numeric value WITHOUT UNIT (unit according to the result display)
Defines the range per division (total range = 10*<Value>)
*RST:
depends on the result display
Default unit: DBM
DISP:TRAC:Y:PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units (e.g. dB) per division
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition <Position>
This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid (for all traces).
The R&S FSW adjusts the scaling of the y-axis accordingly.
For measurements with the optional external generator control, the command defines the position of the reference value.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<t>
irrelevant
Parameters: <Position>
0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border, 100% corresponds to the upper display border.
*RST:
100 PCT = frequency display; 50 PCT = time dis-
play
Default unit: PCT
Example:
DISP:TRAC:Y:RPOS 50PCT
Manual operation: See " Reference Position " on page 396 See " Ref Level Position " on page 456
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing <ScalingType>
This command selects the scaling of the y-axis (for all traces, <t> is irrelevant).
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<w>
subwindow
<t>
Trace
Parameters: <ScalingType>
LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1155
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Manual operation:
LINear Linear scaling in %.
LDB Linear scaling in the specified unit.
PERCent Linear scaling in %.
*RST:
LOGarithmic
DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN Selects linear scaling in %.
See " Scaling " on page 457
13.7.5 Configuring Triggered and Gated Measurements
The commands required to configure a triggered or gated measurement in a remote environment are described here.
The tasks for manual operation are described in Chapter 7.6, "Trigger and Gate Configuration", on page 475.
The commands required for trigger input or output are described in Chapter 13.7.5.3, "Configuring the Trigger Output", on page 1168.
*OPC should be used after requesting data. This will hold off any subsequent changes to the selected trigger source, until after the sweep is completed and the data is returned.
Configuring the Triggering Conditions................................................................. 1156 Configuring Gated Measurements...................................................................... 1162 Configuring the Trigger Output............................................................................ 1168 Programming Example: Continuous Gating........................................................ 1170
13.7.5.1 Configuring the Triggering Conditions
The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement.
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DTIMe......................................................................................... 1157 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME]............................................................................ 1157 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff......................................................................... 1157 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HYSTeresis..................................................................... 1158 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal<port>]................................................................. 1158 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower............................................................................. 1159 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IQPower............................................................................. 1159 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:RFPower............................................................................ 1159 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo................................................................................ 1160 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe........................................................................................ 1160 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce...................................................................................... 1160 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TIME:RINTerval............................................................................ 1162
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1156
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DTIMe <DropoutTime>
Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again.
Parameters: <DropoutTime>
Dropout time of the trigger.
Range: 0 s to 10.0 s
*RST:
0 s
Default unit: S
Manual operation: See " Drop-Out Time " on page 484
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME] <Offset>
Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep.
A negative offset is possible for time domain measurements.
For the trigger sources "External" or "IF Power", a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate. Therefore, changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger offset as well.
Parameters: <Offset>
For measurements in the frequency domain, the range is 0 s to 30 s. For measurements in the time domain, the range is the negative sweep time to 30 s.
*RST:
0 s
Default unit: S
Example:
TRIG:HOLD 500us
Manual operation: See " Trigger Offset " on page 484
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff <Period>
This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event.
Note that this command can be used for any trigger source, not just IF Power (despite the legacy keyword).
Note: If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger, the R&S FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep, FFT sweep, zero span and I/Q data measurements.
Parameters: <Period>
Range: 0 s to 10 s
*RST:
0 s
Default unit: S
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1157
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Manual operation:
TRIG:SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source. TRIG:IFP:HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns.
See " Trigger Holdoff " on page 485
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HYSTeresis <Hysteresis>
This command defines the trigger hysteresis, which is only available for "IF Power" trigger sources.
Parameters: <Hysteresis>
Range: 3 dB to 50 dB
*RST:
3 dB
Default unit: DB
Example:
TRIG:SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source. TRIG:IFP:HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value.
Manual operation: See " Hysteresis " on page 485
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal<port>] <TriggerLevel>
This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event.
Note that the variable "Input/Output" connectors (ports 2+3) must be set for use as input using the OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:DIRection command.
Suffix: <port>
. Selects the trigger port. 1 = trigger port 1 (TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel) 2 = trigger port 2 (TRIGGER INPUT/OUTPUT connector on front panel) (Not available for R&S FSW85 models with two RF input connectors.) 3 = trigger port 3 (TRIGGER3 INPUT/OUTPUT connector on rear panel)
Parameters: <TriggerLevel>
Range: 0.5 V to 3.5 V
*RST:
1.4 V
Default unit: V
Example:
TRIG:LEV 2V
Manual operation: See " Trigger Level " on page 484
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1158
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower <TriggerLevel>
This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event.
Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed. If defined, a reference level offset is also considered.
Parameters: <TriggerLevel>
For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet.
*RST:
-20 dBm
Default unit: DBM
Example:
TRIG:LEV:IFP -30DBM
Manual operation: See " Trigger Level " on page 484
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IQPower <TriggerLevel>
This command defines the magnitude the I/Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event.
Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed. If defined, a reference level offset is also considered.
Parameters: <TriggerLevel>
Range: -130 dBm to 30 dBm
*RST:
-20 dBm
Default unit: DBM
Example:
TRIG:LEV:IQP -30DBM
Manual operation: See " Trigger Level " on page 484
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:RFPower <TriggerLevel>
This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event. Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed. If defined, a reference level offset is also considered.
The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz.
Parameters: <TriggerLevel>
For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet.
*RST:
-20 dBm
Default unit: DBM
Example:
TRIG:LEV:RFP -30dBm
Manual operation: See " Trigger Level " on page 484
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1159
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo <Level>
This command defines the level the video signal must exceed to cause a trigger event. Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed.
Parameters: <Level>
Range: 0 PCT to 100 PCT
*RST:
50 PCT
Default unit: PCT
Example:
TRIG:LEV:VID 50PCT
Manual operation: See " Trigger Level " on page 484
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe <Type>
For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it.
Parameters: <Type>
POSitive | NEGative
POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level (rising edge).
NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level (falling edge).
*RST:
POSitive
Example:
TRIG:SLOP NEG
Manual operation: See " Slope " on page 485
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce <Source>
This command selects the trigger source.
For details on trigger sources see " Trigger Source " on page 481.
Using a trigger or gated measurements turns the squelch off (see[SENSe:]DEMod: SQUelch[:STATe] on page 1255).
Note on external triggers:
If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program, remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue. Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs.
If the 1.2 GHz bandwidth extension option (B1200) or the internal 2 GHz option (B2001) is active, only an external trigger, IF power trigger, or no trigger is available.
If a B4001/B6001/B8001 bandwidth extension option is active, only an external trigger, power trigger, or no trigger is available.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1160
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
For troubleshooting tips see "Incompleted sequential commands - blocked remote channels" on page 1470.
Parameters: <Source>
IMMediate Free Run
EXTernal Trigger signal from the "Trigger Input" connector. If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension (B2000/B5000) is installed and active, this parameter activates the "Ch3" input connector on the oscilloscope. Then the R&S FSW triggers when the signal fed into the "Ch3" input connector on the oscilloscope meets or exceeds the specified trigger level. Note: In previous firmware versions, the external trigger was connected to the "Ch2" input on the oscilloscope. As of firmware version R&S FSW 2.30, the "Ch3" input on the oscilloscope must be used!
EXT2 Trigger signal from the "Trigger Input/Output" connector. For R&S FSW85 models, Trigger 2 is not available due to the second RF input connector on the front panel. The trigger signal is taken from the "Trigger Input/Output" connector on the rear panel. Note: Connector must be configured for "Input".
EXT3 Trigger signal from the "TRIGGER 3 INPUT/ OUTPUT" connector. Note: Connector must be configured for "Input".
RFPower First intermediate frequency (Frequency and time domain measurements only.)
IFPower Second intermediate frequency
TIME Time interval
VIDeo Video mode is available in the time domain and only in the Spectrum application.
PSEN External power sensor
*RST:
IMMediate
Example:
TRIG:SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1161
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Manual operation:
See " Using the power sensor as an external trigger " on page 373 See " Trigger Source " on page 481 See " Free Run " on page 481 See "External Trigger 1/2/3" on page 481 See " Video " on page 482 See " IF Power " on page 482 See " Baseband Power " on page 483 See " RF Power " on page 483 See " Power Sensor " on page 483 See " Time " on page 484
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TIME:RINTerval <Interval>
This command defines the repetition interval for the time trigger.
Parameters: <Interval>
2.0 ms to 5000
Range: 2 ns to 5000 s
*RST:
1.0 s
Default unit: S
Example:
TRIG:SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering. TRIG:TIME:RINT 50 The sweep starts every 50 s.
Manual operation: See " Repetition Interval " on page 484
13.7.5.2 Configuring Gated Measurements
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe............................................................................................... 1162 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:AUTO..................................................................................... 1163 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PCOunt............................................................... 1164 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PLENgth.............................................................. 1164 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous[:STATe]................................................................ 1164 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff.................................................................................. 1165 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth................................................................................... 1165 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel:RFPower........................................................................1165 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel[:EXTernal<tp>]................................................................1166 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity..................................................................................1166 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce..................................................................................1167 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE...................................................................................... 1167
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe <State> This command turns gated measurements on and off.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1162
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
For measurements with an external trigger gate, the measured values are recorded as long as the gate is opened. During a sweep the gate can be opened and closed several times. The synchronization mechanisms with *OPC, *OPC? and *WAI remain completely unaffected.
The measurement ends when a particular number of measurement points has been recorded.
(See [SENSe:]SWEep[:WINDow<n>]:POINts on page 1144).
Performing gated measurements turns the squelch off.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
SWE:EGAT ON Switches on the gate mode. SWE:EGAT:TYPE EDGE Switches on the edge-triggered mode. SWE:EGAT:HOLD 100US Sets the gate delay to 100 �s. SWE:EGAT:LEN 500US Sets the gate opening time to 500 �s. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end.
Manual operation: See " Gated Trigger " on page 492
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:AUTO <State>
Determines whether the same or different triggers are used for general measurement and gating.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 The gate is opened by the trigger source defined by [SENSe: ]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce, but only after a trigger from the general TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce occurs.
ON | 1 (Default:) The trigger defined by TRIGger[:SEQuence]: SOURce is used both for the general measurement trigger and the gating trigger.
*RST:
1
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1163
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Manual operation:
SENS:SWE:EGAT:AUTO MAN SENS:SWE:EGAT:SOUR EXT2 SENS:SWE:EGAT:LEV:EXT2 1V Sets the gating trigger to a level of 1 V at trigger port 2.
See "Gate Source Mode" on page 495
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PCOunt <Amount>
Defines the number of gate periods to be measured after a single trigger event.
Parameters: <Amount>
integer
Range: Increment: *RST:
1 to 1023 1 100
Example:
SWE:EGAT:CONT:PCO 50
Manual operation: See "Gate Period Count" on page 494
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PLENgth <Time>
Defines the length in seconds of a single gate period in continuous gating. The length is determined from the beginning of one gate measurement to the beginning of the next one.
Parameters: <Time>
Range: 125 ns to 30 s
*RST:
5 ms
Default unit: S
Example:
SWE:EGAT:CONT:PLEN 10
Manual operation: See "Gate Period Length" on page 494
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous[:STATe] <State>
Activates or deactivates continuous gating.
This setting is only available if [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe is "On".
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1164
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Manual operation:
SWE:EGAT ON Activate gating SWE:EGAT:CONT:STAT ON Activate continuous gating
See "Continuous Gate" on page 493
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff <DelayTime>
This command defines the delay time between the gate signal and the continuation of the measurement.
Note: If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger, the R&S FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep, FFT sweep, zero span and I/Q mode measurements.
Parameters: <DelayTime>
Range: 0 s to 30 s
*RST:
0 s
Default unit: S
Example:
SWE:EGAT:HOLD 100us
Manual operation: See " Gate Delay " on page 493
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth <GateLength>
This command defines the gate length.
Parameters: <GateLength>
Range: 125 ns to 30 s
*RST:
400s
Default unit: S
Example:
SWE:EGAT:LENG 10ms
Manual operation: See " Gate Length " on page 493
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel:RFPower <GateLevel>
Defines the gate level for which the gate is open. Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed. If defined, a reference level offset is also considered.
The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz.
This command is only available for triggered gated measurements ([SENSe:]SWEep: EGATe:AUTOMAN).
Parameters: <GateLevel>
For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet.
*RST:
-20 dBm
Default unit: DBM
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1165
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Example: Manual operation:
SENS:SWE:EGAT:AUTO MAN SENS:SWE:EGAT:SOUR RFP SENS:SWE:EGAT:LEV:RFP -10 Sets the gating trigger to a level of -10 dBm at the RF input.
See "Level" on page 495
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel[:EXTernal<tp>] <GateLevel>
Defines the gate level for which the gate is open.
This command is only available for triggered gated measurements ([SENSe:]SWEep: EGATe:AUTOMAN).
Suffix: <tp>
. Selects the trigger port. 1 = trigger port 1 (TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel) 2 = trigger port 2 (TRIGGER INPUT/OUTPUT connector on front panel) (Not available for R&S FSW85 models with two RF input connectors.) 3 = trigger port 3 (TRIGGER3 INPUT/OUTPUT connector on rear panel)
Parameters: <GateLevel>
numeric value
Range: 0.5 V to 3.5 V
*RST:
1.4 V
Default unit: V
Example:
SENS:SWE:EGAT:AUTO MAN SENS:SWE:EGAT:SOUR EXT2 SENS:SWE:EGAT:LEV:EXT2 1V Sets the gating trigger to a level of 1 V at trigger port 2.
Manual operation: See "Level" on page 495
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity <Polarity>
This command selects the polarity of an external gate signal.
The setting applies both to the edge of an edge-triggered signal and the level of a level-triggered signal.
Parameters: <Polarity>
POSitive | NEGative
*RST:
POSitive
Example:
SWE:EGAT:POL POS
Manual operation: See " Slope " on page 485 See "Polarity" on page 495
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1166
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce <Source>
This command selects the signal source for gated measurements.
If an IF power signal is used, the gate is opened as soon as a signal at > -20 dBm is detected within the IF path bandwidth (10 MHz).
For more information see " Trigger Source " on page 481.
For triggered gated measurements,only the following gate trigger sources are supported:
External Trigger 1/2/3 Power Sensor
For details see "Triggered gated measurements" on page 491
Parameters: <Source>
EXTernal | EXT2 | EXT3 | IFPower | IQPower | VIDeo | RFPower | PSEN
*RST:
IFPower
Example:
SWE:EGAT:SOUR IFP Switches the gate source to IF power.
Manual operation:
See " Trigger Source " on page 481 See "External Trigger 1/2/3" on page 481 See " Video " on page 482 See " IF Power " on page 482 See " RF Power " on page 483 See " Power Sensor " on page 483 See "Source" on page 495
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE <Type>
This command selects the way gated measurements are triggered.
Parameters: <Type>
LEVel The trigger event for the gate to open is a particular power level. After the gate signal has been detected, the gate remains open until the signal disappears. Note: If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger, the R&S FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep, FFT sweep, zero span and I/Q mode measurements.
EDGE The trigger event for the gate to open is the detection of the signal edge. After the gate signal has been detected, the gate remains open until the gate length is over.
*RST:
EDGE
Example:
SWE:EGAT:TYPE EDGE
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1167
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Manual operation: See " Gate Mode " on page 492
13.7.5.3 Configuring the Trigger Output
The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable "TRIGGER INPUT/OUTPUT" connectors on the R&S FSW.
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:DIRection.............................................................................1168 OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:LEVel.................................................................................. 1168 OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:OTYPe................................................................................ 1169 OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:IMMediate................................................................ 1169 OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:LENGth.................................................................... 1170
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:DIRection <Direction>
This command selects the trigger direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as well as an output.
Suffix: <up>
. irrelevant
<tp>
Selects the used trigger port. 2 = trigger port 2 (front) 3 = trigger port 3 (rear panel)
Parameters: <Direction>
INPut | OUTPut
INPut Port works as an input.
OUTPut Port works as an output.
*RST:
INPut
Manual operation: See "Trigger 2/3" on page 437
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:LEVel <Level>
This command defines the level of the (TTL compatible) signal generated at the trigger output.
This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:OTYPe.
Suffix:
.
<up>
1..n
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1168
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
<tp>
Parameters: <Level>
Example: Manual operation:
Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent. 2 = trigger port 2 (front) (Not available for R&S FSW85 models with two RF input connectors.) 3 = trigger port 3 (rear)
HIGH 5 V
LOW 0 V
*RST:
LOW
OUTP:TRIG2:LEV HIGH
See " Level " on page 438
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:OTYPe <OutputType>
This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output.
Suffix:
.
<up>
1..n
<tp>
Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent. 2 = trigger port 2 (front) (Not available for R&S FSW85 models with two RF input connectors.) 3 = trigger port 3 (rear)
Parameters: <OutputType>
DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R&S FSW has triggered internally.
TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event.
UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal. For more information see OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:LEVel.
*RST:
DEVice
Manual operation: See " Output Type " on page 437
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1169
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Suffix: <up>
<tp> Manual operation:
. Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent. 2 = trigger port 2 (front) (Not available for R&S FSW85 models with two RF input connectors.) 3 = trigger port 3 (rear)
1..n
See " Send Trigger " on page 438
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:LENGth <Length>
This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output.
Suffix:
.
<up>
1..n
<tp>
Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent. 2 = trigger port 2 (front) (Not available for R&S FSW85 models with two RF input connectors.) 3 = trigger port 3 (rear)
Parameters: <Length>
Pulse length in seconds. Default unit: S
Example:
OUTP:TRIG2:PULS:LENG 0.02
Manual operation: See " Pulse Length " on page 438
13.7.5.4 Programming Example: Continuous Gating
This example demonstrates how to perform a measurement with continuous gating in a remote environment.
//-----------Configuring the measurement -----------*RST
//ACLR LTE TDD with 51 MHz Span CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES EUTRa FREQ:CENT 1GHZ SWE:EGAT ON SWE:EGAT:SOUR EXT SWE:EGAT:TYPE EDGE SWE:EGAT:HOLD 9.25MS SWE:EGAT:LENG 1.25MS SWE:EGAT:CONTinuous:STAT? //0 SWE:EGAT:CONTinuous:STAT ON SWE:EGAT:CONTinuous:STAT? //1
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1170
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
SWE:EGAT:CONTinuous:PLENgth? //0.005 SWE:EGAT:CONTinuous:PLENgth 4MS SWE:EGAT:CONTinuous:PLENgth? //0.004 SWE:EGAT:CONTinuous:PCOunt? //100 SWE:EGAT:CONTinuous:PCOunt 80 SWE:EGAT:CONTinuous:PCOunt? //80
//--------------Performing the Measurement----INIT:CONT OFF INIT // Sweep duration is less than 1 second
13.7.6 Adjusting Settings Automatically
The commands required to adjust settings automatically in a remote environment are described here.
The tasks for manual operation are described in Chapter 7.7, "Adjusting Settings Automatically", on page 497.
MSRA operating mode
In MSRA operating mode, settings related to data acquisition (measurement time, hysteresis) can only be adjusted automatically in the MSRA primary application, not in the MSRA secondary applications.
[SENSe:]ADJust:ALL.................................................................................................... 1171 [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation................................................................. 1172 [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation:MODE.......................................................1172 [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:HYSTeresis:LOWer.............................................................1173 [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:HYSTeresis:UPPer............................................................. 1173 [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:TRIGger............................................................................ 1173 [SENSe:]ADJust:FREQuency........................................................................................ 1174 [SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel................................................................................................. 1174
[SENSe:]ADJust:ALL
This command initiates a measurement to determine and set the ideal settings for the current task automatically (only once for the current measurement).
This includes:
Center frequency Reference level
Example:
ADJ:ALL
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1171
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
Manual operation: See " Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically ( Auto All )" on page 498
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation <Duration>
In order to determine the ideal reference level, the R&S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data. This command defines the length of the measurement if [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation:MODE is set to MANual.
Parameters: <Duration>
Numeric value in seconds
Range: 0.001 to 16000.0
*RST:
0.001
Default unit: s
Example:
ADJ:CONF:DUR:MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length. ADJ:CONF:LEV:DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms.
Manual operation: See " Changing the Automatic Measurement Time ( Meastime Manual )" on page 499
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation:MODE <Mode>
In order to determine the ideal reference level, the R&S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data. This command selects the way the R&S FSW determines the length of the measurement .
Parameters: <Mode>
AUTO The R&S FSW determines the measurement length automatically according to the current input data.
MANual The R&S FSW uses the measurement length defined by
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation on page 1172.
*RST:
AUTO
Manual operation:
See " Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time ( Meastime Auto )" on page 499 See " Changing the Automatic Measurement Time ( Meastime Manual )" on page 499
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1172
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:HYSTeresis:LOWer <Threshold>
When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the [SENSe:]ADJust: LEVel on page 1174 command, the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted. In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal, you can define a hysteresis. This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below (compared to the last measurement) before the reference level is adapted automatically.
Parameters: <Threshold>
Range: 0 dB to 200 dB
*RST:
+1 dB
Default unit: dB
Example:
SENS:ADJ:CONF:HYST:LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm, the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm.
Manual operation: See " Lower Level Hysteresis " on page 499
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:HYSTeresis:UPPer <Threshold>
When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the [SENSe:]ADJust: LEVel on page 1174 command, the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted. In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal, you can define a hysteresis. This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed (compared to the last measurement) before the reference level is adapted automatically.
Parameters: <Threshold>
Range: 0 dB to 200 dB
*RST:
+1 dB
Default unit: dB
Example:
SENS:ADJ:CONF:HYST:UPP 2
Example:
For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm, the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm.
Manual operation: See " Upper Level Hysteresis " on page 499
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:TRIGger <State>
Defines the behavior of the measurement when adjusting a setting automatically (using SENS:ADJ:LEV ON, for example).
See "Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements" on page 498.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1173
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
ON | 1 Switches the function on
[SENSe:]ADJust:FREQuency
This command sets the center frequency to the frequency with the highest signal level in the current frequency range.
Example:
ADJ:FREQ
Manual operation: See " Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically ( Auto Frequency )" on page 498
[SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel
This command initiates a single (internal) measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measurement settings. This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R&S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S/N ratio that is too small.
Example:
ADJ:LEV
Manual operation: See " Setting the Reference Level Automatically ( Auto Level )" on page 453
13.8 Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
The commands for general analysis tasks are described here. Zooming into the Display.....................................................................................1174 Configuring the Trace Display and Retrieving Trace Data.................................. 1178 Working with Markers..........................................................................................1204 Configuring Display Lines................................................................................... 1264 Defining Limit Checks......................................................................................... 1267
13.8.1 Zooming into the Display
13.8.1.1 Using the Single Zoom
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:AREA.................................................. 1174 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM[:STATe]................................................ 1176
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:AREA <x1>,<y1>,<x2>,<y2> This command defines the zoom area.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1174
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
To define a zoom area, you first have to turn the zoom on.
1 = origin of coordinate system (x1 = 0, y1 = 0) 2 = end point of system (x2 = 100, y2= 100) 3 = zoom area (e.g. x1 = 60, y1 = 30, x2 = 80, y2 = 75)
Suffix: <n> <w> Parameters: <x1>
<y1>
<x2>
<y2>
Manual operation:
. Window
subwindow Not supported by all applications
Diagram coordinates in % of the complete diagram that define the zoom area. The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system. The upper right corner is the end point of the system. Range: 0 to 100 Default unit: PCT
Diagram coordinates in % of the complete diagram that define the zoom area. The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system. The upper right corner is the end point of the system. Range: 0 to 100 Default unit: PCT
Diagram coordinates in % of the complete diagram that define the zoom area. The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system. The upper right corner is the end point of the system. Range: 0 to 100 Default unit: PCT
Diagram coordinates in % of the complete diagram that define the zoom area. The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system. The upper right corner is the end point of the system. Range: 0 to 100 Default unit: PCT
See " Single Zoom " on page 510
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1175
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the zoom on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<w>
subwindow
Not supported by all applications
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
DISP:ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode.
Manual operation: See " Single Zoom " on page 510 See " Restore Original Display " on page 511
13.8.1.2 Using the Multiple Zoom
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>:AREA............................. 1176 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>[:STATe]...........................1177
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>:AREA <x1>,<y1>,<x2>,<y2>
This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom.
To define a zoom area, you first have to turn the zoom on.
1 = origin of coordinate system (x1 = 0, y1 = 0) 2 = end point of system (x2 = 100, y2= 100) 3 = zoom area (e.g. x1 = 60, y1 = 30, x2 = 80, y2 = 75)
Suffix: <n>
<w>
. Window
subwindow Not supported by all applications
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1176
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
<zn> Parameters: <x1>
<y1>
<x2>
<y2>
Manual operation:
Selects the zoom window.
Diagram coordinates in % of the complete diagram that define the zoom area. The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system. The upper right corner is the end point of the system. Range: 0 to 100 Default unit: PCT
Diagram coordinates in % of the complete diagram that define the zoom area. The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system. The upper right corner is the end point of the system. Range: 0 to 100 Default unit: PCT
Diagram coordinates in % of the complete diagram that define the zoom area. The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system. The upper right corner is the end point of the system. Range: 0 to 100 Default unit: PCT
Diagram coordinates in % of the complete diagram that define the zoom area. The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system. The upper right corner is the end point of the system. Range: 0 to 100 Default unit: PCT
See " Multi-Zoom " on page 510
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the multiple zoom on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<w>
subwindow
Not supported by all applications
<zn>
Selects the zoom window. If you turn off one of the zoom windows, all subsequent zoom windows move up one position.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1177
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Manual operation:
ON | 1 Switches the function on
See " Multi-Zoom " on page 510 See " Restore Original Display " on page 511
13.8.2 Configuring the Trace Display and Retrieving Trace Data
The commands required to work with traces are described here.
Commands required to export traces (and other result data) are described in Chapter 13.9.5, "Storing Measurement Results", on page 1310.
Configuring Standard Traces...............................................................................1178 Configuring Spectrograms...................................................................................1185 Using Trace Mathematics....................................................................................1193 Retrieving Trace Results..................................................................................... 1195 Formats for Returned Values: ASCII Format and Binary Format........................ 1198 Importing and Exporting Traces.......................................................................... 1199 Programming Example: Configuring a Spectrogram...........................................1202
13.8.2.1 Configuring Standard Traces
Useful commands for trace configuration described elsewhere
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing on page 1155
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] on page 1153
Remote commands exclusive to trace configuration
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE....................................................................... 1178 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:MODE:HCONtinuous....................... 1179 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:PRESet.......................................... 1180 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe]...........................................1181 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:SMOothing:APERture...................... 1181 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:SMOothing[:STATe]..........................1181 [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:COUNt...................................................................................... 1182 [SENSe:]AVERage<n>[:STATe<t>]................................................................................. 1182 [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE........................................................................................ 1183 [SENSe:][WINDow<n>:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion]............................................................. 1183 [SENSe:][WINDow<n>:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO................................................... 1184 TRACe<n>:COPY........................................................................................................ 1184
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the trace mode. If necessary, the selected trace is also activated.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1178
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
In case of max hold, min hold or average trace mode, you can set the number of single measurements with [SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt. Note that synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in single sweep mode.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<t>
Trace
Parameters: <Mode>
WRITe Overwrite mode: the trace is overwritten by each sweep. This is the default setting.
AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps. The "Sweep/Average Count" determines the number of averaging procedures.
MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed. The R&S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one.
MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed. The R&S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one.
VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed.
BLANk Hides the selected trace.
*RST:
Trace 1: WRITe, Trace 2-6: BLANk
Example:
INIT:CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode. SWE:COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16. DISP:TRAC3:MODE WRIT Selects clear/write mode for trace 3. INIT;*WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measurement.
Manual operation: See " Trace Mode " on page 586
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:MODE:HCONtinuous <State>
This command turns an automatic reset of a trace on and off after a parameter has changed.
The reset works for trace modes min hold, max hold and average.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1179
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Note that the command has no effect if critical parameters like the span have been changed to avoid invalid measurement results
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<w>
subwindow
<t>
Trace
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
DISP:WIND:TRAC3:MODE:HCON ON Switches off the reset function.
Manual operation: See " Hold " on page 587
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:PRESet <ResultType>
Applies predefined, commonly required trace settings to the selected window.
Suffix: <n>
. 1..n Window
<w>
1..n
subwindow
<t>
1..n
Trace
Parameters: <ResultType>
ALL Preset All Traces
MAM Max | Avg | Min
MCM Max | ClrWrite | Min
Example:
DISP:WIND3:TRAC:PRES MCM In window 3, the traces are set to the following modes: Trace 1: Max Hold Trace 2: Clear Write Trace 3: Min Hold
Manual operation: See " Predefined Trace Settings - Quick Config " on page 588
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1180
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe] <State>
This command turns a trace on and off.
The measurement continues in the background.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<w>
subwindow
Not supported by all applications
<t>
Trace
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
DISP:TRAC3 ON
Manual operation:
See " Trace 1 / Trace 2 / Trace 3 / Trace 4 / Trace 5 / Trace 6 " on page 586 See " Trace 1 / Trace 2 / Trace 3 / Trace 4 (Softkeys)" on page 589
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:SMOothing:APERture <Aperture>
This command defines the degree (aperture) of the trace smoothing, if DISPlay[: WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:SMOothing[:STATe]TRUE.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<w>
subwindow
<t>
Trace
Parameters: <Aperture>
Range: 1 to 50
*RST:
2
Default unit: PCT
Example:
DISP3:TRAC2:SMO:APER 5 Defines an aperture of 5% for trace 2 in window 3
Manual operation: See " Smoothing " on page 587
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:SMOothing[:STATe] <State> This command turns trace smoothing for a particular trace on and off.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1181
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
If enabled, the trace is smoothed by the value specified using DISPlay[: WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:SMOothing:APERture on page 1181.
For more information see "Trace Smoothing" on page 584.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<w>
subwindow
<t>
Trace
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
DISP3:TRAC2:SMO ON Turns on trace smoothing for trace 2 in window 3
Manual operation: See " Smoothing " on page 587
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:COUNt <AverageCount>
This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces.
In case of continuous sweep mode, the application calculates the moving average over the average count.
In case of single sweep mode, the application stops the measurement and calculates the average after the average count has been reached.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <AverageCount>
If you set an average count of 0 or 1, the application performs one single sweep in single sweep mode. In continuous sweep mode, if the average count is set to 0, a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed.
Range: *RST:
0 to 200000 0
Manual operation: See " Sweep/Average Count " on page 469 See " Average Count " on page 588
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>[:STATe<t>] <State>
This command turns averaging for a particular trace in a particular window on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1182
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
<t>
Parameters: <State>
Trace ON | OFF | 1 | 0
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE <Mode>
This command selects the trace averaging mode.
Suffix: <n>
. 1..n Window
Parameters: <Mode>
LOGarithmic The logarithmic power values are averaged.
LINear The power values are averaged before they are converted to logarithmic values.
POWer The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averaging. After the averaging, the data is converted back into its original unit.
Example:
AVER:TYPE LIN Switches to linear average calculation.
Manual operation: See " Average Mode " on page 587
[SENSe:][WINDow<n>:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion] <Detector>
Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis.
For details see "Mapping Samples to sweep Points with the Trace Detector" on page 576.
For EMI measurements, the trace detector is used for the initial peak search only, not for the final test. The detector for the final test is configured using CALCulate<n>: MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector on page 1050.
If the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement option is installed and the filter type "CISPR" is selected, additional detectors are available, even if EMI measurement is not active. For details see Chapter 6.13.3.2, "Detectors and Dwell Time", on page 329.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<t>
Trace
Parameters: <Detector>
APEak Autopeak
NEGative Negative peak
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1183
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example: Manual operation:
POSitive Positive peak
QPEak Quasipeak (CISPR filter only)
SAMPle First value detected per trace point
RMS RMS value
AVERage Average
CAVerage CISPR Average (CISPR filter only)
CRMS CISPR RMS (CISPR filter only)
*RST:
APEak
DET POS Sets the detector to "positive peak".
See " Detector " on page 586
[SENSe:][WINDow<n>:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO <State>
This command couples and decouples the detector to the trace mode.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<t>
Trace
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
DET:AUTO OFF The selection of the detector is not coupled to the trace mode.
Manual operation: See " Detector " on page 586
TRACe<n>:COPY <TraceNumber>, <TraceNumber>
This command copies data from one trace to another.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <TraceNumber>
TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6 The first parameter is the destination trace, the second parameter is the source. (Note the 'e' in the parameter is required!)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1184
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example: Manual operation:
TRAC:COPY TRACE1,TRACE2 Copies the data from trace 2 to trace 1.
See " Copy Trace " on page 589
13.8.2.2 Configuring Spectrograms
In addition to the standard "level versus frequency" or "level versus time" spectrum traces, the R&S FSW also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data. A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time. The x-axis shows the frequency, the y-axis shows the time. The commands required to configure spectrograms in a remote environment are described here. For details and manual operation see Chapter 8.5.2.2, "Spectrogram Settings", on page 599.
When configuring spectrograms, the window suffix is irrelevant. The settings are always applied to the spectrogram window, or to all spectrogram windows, if several are active for the same channel.
For commands to set markers in spectrograms, see Chapter 13.8.3.6, "Marker Search (Spectrograms)", on page 1224.
Configuring a Spectrogram Measurement................................................................ 1185
Configuring the Color Map.........................................................................................1191
Configuring a Spectrogram Measurement
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CLEar[:IMMediate]..................................................................... 1186 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CLEar[:IMMediate]............................................................ 1186 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CONTinuous............................................................................. 1186 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CONTinuous..................................................................... 1186 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:COUNt..........................................................................1186 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:COUNt................................................................. 1186 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:SELect..........................................................................1187 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:SELect................................................................. 1187 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth.................................................................................... 1187 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:HDEPth............................................................................1187 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:LAYout...................................................................................... 1188 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:LAYout............................................................................. 1188 CALCulate<n>:SGRam[:STATe]..................................................................................... 1188 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram[:STATe]............................................................................ 1188 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:THReedim[:STATe].....................................................................1189 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:THReedim[:STATe]............................................................ 1189 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TRACe..................................................................................... 1189 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TRACe............................................................................. 1189 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp:DATA?......................................................................... 1189 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TSTamp:DATA?.................................................................1189 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp[:STATe]........................................................................ 1190 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TSTamp[:STATe]............................................................... 1190
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1185
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CLEar[:IMMediate] CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CLEar[:IMMediate]
This command resets the spectrogram and clears the history buffer.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Example:
//Reset the result display and clear the memory CALC:SGR:CLE
Manual operation: See " Clear Spectrogram " on page 473
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CONTinuous <State> CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CONTinuous <State>
This command determines whether the results of the last measurement are deleted before starting a new measurement in single sweep mode.
This setting applies to all spectrograms in the channel.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
INIT:CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode. INIT;*WAI Starts the sweep and waits for the end of the sweep. CALC:SGR:CONT ON Repeats the single sweep measurement without deleting the results of the last measurement.
Manual operation: See " Single Sweep / Run Single " on page 471 See " Continue Frame " on page 473
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:COUNt <Frames> CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:COUNt <Frames>
This command defines the number of frames to be recorded in a single sweep.
This value applies to all spectrograms in the channel.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1186
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Parameters: <Frames>
Example:
Manual operation:
The maximum number of frames depends on the history depth.
Range: 1 to history depth
Increment: 1
*RST:
1
//Select single sweep mode INIT:CONT OFF //Set the number of frames to 200 CALC:SGR:FRAM:COUN 200
See " Frame Count " on page 473
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:SELect <Frame> | <Time> CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:SELect <Frame> | <Time>
This command selects a specific frame for further analysis.
The command is available if no measurement is running or after a single sweep has ended.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <Frame>
Selects a frame directly by the frame number. Valid if the time stamp is off. The range depends on the history depth.
Default unit: S
<Time>
Selects a frame via its time stamp. Valid if the time stamp is on. The number is the distance to frame 0 in seconds. The range depends on the history depth.
Example:
INIT:CONT OFF Stop the continuous sweep. CALC:SGR:FRAM:SEL -25 Selects frame number -25.
Manual operation: See "Select Frame" on page 473
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth <History> CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:HDEPth <History>
This command defines the number of frames to be stored in the R&S FSW memory.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1187
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Parameters: <History>
Example: Manual operation:
The maximum number of frames depends on the number of sweep points.
Range: 781 to 20000
Increment: 1
*RST:
3000
//Set the history depth to 1500 CALC:SGR:SPEC 1500
See " History Depth " on page 601
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:LAYout <State> CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:LAYout <State>
This command selects the state and size of spectrograms.
The command is available for result displays that support spectrograms.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <State>
FULL Only the spectrogram is displayed, the trace diagram is not.
SPLIT Spectrogram and trace diagram share a window.
OFF Only the trace diagram is displayed, the spectrogram is not.
*RST:
OFF
Example:
CALC4:SPEC:LAY FULL Shows the spectrogram in window 4. The corresponding trace diagram is hidden.
Manual operation: See "State" on page 600
CALCulate<n>:SGRam[:STATe] <State> CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the spectrogram on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1188
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example:
CALC:SGR ON Activates the Spectrogram result display.
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:THReedim[:STATe] <State> CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:THReedim[:STATe] <State>
Activates or deactivates a 3-dimensional spectrogram for the selected result display.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Example:
CALC:SPEC:THR:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "3D Spectrogram State" on page 601
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TRACe <Trace> CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TRACe <Trace>
This command determines the trace in the result display the Spectrogram is based on.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <Trace>
TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6
How many traces are available depends on the selected result display.
Example:
CALC2:SPEC:TRAC TRACE3
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp:DATA? <Frames> CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TSTamp:DATA? <Frames>
This command queries the starting time of the frames.
The return values consist of four values for each frame. If the Spectrogram is empty, the command returns '0,0,0,0'. The times are given as delta values, which simplifies evaluating relative results; however, you can also calculate the absolute date and time as displayed on the screen.
The frame results themselves are returned with TRAC:DATA? SGR
See TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1196.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1189
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Query parameters: <Frames>
CURRent Returns the starting time of the current frame.
ALL Returns the starting time for all frames. The results are sorted in descending order, beginning with the current frame.
Return values: <Seconds>
Number of seconds that have passed since 01.01.1970 till the frame start
<Nanoseconds>
Number of nanoseconds that have passed in addition to the <Seconds> since 01.01.1970 till the frame start.
<Reserved>
The third value is reserved for future uses.
<Reserved>
The fourth value is reserved for future uses.
Example:
CALC:SGR:TST ON Activates the time stamp. CALC:SGR:TST:DATA? ALL Returns the starting times of all frames sorted in a descending order.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Time Stamp " on page 601
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp[:STATe] <State> CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TSTamp[:STATe] <State>
This command activates and deactivates the time stamp.
If the time stamp is active, some commands do not address frames as numbers, but as (relative) time values:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe on page 1230 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe on page 1225 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:SELect on page 1187
Suffix: <n>
. 1..n Window
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1190
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example: Manual operation:
//Activates the time stamp CALC:SGR:TST ON
See " Time Stamp " on page 601
Configuring the Color Map
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:DEFault.............................................................. 1191 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:DEFault...................................................... 1191 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:LOWer................................................................ 1191 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:LOWer....................................................... 1191 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:SHAPe............................................................... 1191 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:SHAPe....................................................... 1191 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:UPPer................................................................ 1192 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:UPPer........................................................ 1192 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor[:STYLe].............................................................. 1192 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor[:STYLe]...................................................... 1192
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:DEFault DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:DEFault
This command restores the original color map.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Manual operation: See " Set to Default " on page 604
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:LOWer <Percentage> DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:LOWer <Percentage>
This command defines the starting point of the color map.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <Percentage>
Statistical frequency percentage.
Range: 0 to 66
*RST:
0
Default unit: %
Example:
DISP:WIND:SGR:COL:LOW 10 Sets the start of the color map to 10%.
Manual operation: See " Start / Stop " on page 603
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:SHAPe <Shape> DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:SHAPe <Shape>
This command defines the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram result display.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1191
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Suffix: <n> Parameters: <Shape>
Manual operation:
. Window
Shape of the color curve.
Range: *RST:
-1 to 1 0
See " Shape " on page 604
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:UPPer <Percentage> DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:UPPer <Percentage>
This command defines the end point of the color map.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <Percentage>
Statistical frequency percentage.
Range: 0 to 66
*RST:
0
Default unit: %
Example:
DISP:WIND:SGR:COL:UPP 95 Sets the start of the color map to 95%.
Manual operation: See " Start / Stop " on page 603
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor[:STYLe] <ColorScheme> DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor[:STYLe] <ColorScheme>
This command selects the color scheme.
Parameters: <ColorScheme>
HOT Uses a color range from blue to red. Blue colors indicate low levels, red colors indicate high ones.
COLD Uses a color range from red to blue. Red colors indicate low levels, blue colors indicate high ones.
RADar Uses a color range from black over green to light turquoise with shades of green in between.
GRAYscale Shows the results in shades of gray.
*RST:
HOT
Example:
DISP:WIND:SPEC:COL GRAY Changes the color scheme of the spectrogram to black and white.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1192
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Manual operation: See " Hot / Cold / Radar / Grayscale " on page 604
13.8.2.3 Using Trace Mathematics
The following commands control trace mathematics.
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>[:EXPRession][:DEFine]............................................................ 1193 CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:MODE.................................................................................... 1193 CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:POSition................................................................................. 1194 CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:STATe.....................................................................................1194
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>[:EXPRession][:DEFine] <Expression>
This command selects the mathematical expression for trace mathematics.
Before you can use the command, you have to turn trace mathematics on.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<t>
irrelevant
Parameters: <Expression>
(TRACE1-TRACE2) Subtracts trace 2 from trace 1.
(TRACE1-TRACE3) Subtracts trace 3 from trace 1.
(TRACE1-TRACE4) Subtracts trace 4 from trace 1.
(TRACE1-TRACE5) Subtracts trace 5 from trace 1.
(TRACE1-TRACE6) Subtracts trace 6 from trace 1.
Example:
CALC:MATH:STAT ON Turns trace mathematics on. CALC:MATH:EXPR:DEF (TRACE1-TRACE3) Subtracts trace 3 from trace 1.
Manual operation: See " Trace Math Function " on page 609
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the way the R&S FSW calculates trace mathematics.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<t>
irrelevant
Parameters: <Mode>
For more information on the way each mode works see Trace Math Mode.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1193
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example: Manual operation:
LINear Linear calculation.
LOGarithmic Logarithmic calculation.
POWer Linear power calculation.
*RST:
LOGarithmic
CALC:MATH:MODE LIN Selects linear calculation.
See " Trace Math Mode " on page 609
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:POSition <Position>
This command defines the position of the trace resulting from the mathematical operation.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<t>
irrelevant
Parameters: <Position>
Vertical position of the trace in % of the height of the diagram area. 100 PCT corresponds to the upper diagram border.
Range: -100 to 200
*RST:
50
Default unit: PCT
Example:
CALC:MATH:POS 100 Moves the trace to the top of the diagram area.
Manual operation: See " Trace Math Position " on page 609
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:STATe <State>
This command turns the trace mathematics on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<t>
irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1194
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example: Manual operation:
CALC:MATH:STAT ON Turns on trace mathematics.
See " Trace Math Function " on page 609 See " Trace Math Off " on page 609
13.8.2.4 Retrieving Trace Results
This chapter describes how to retrieve data from standard traces. For spectrograms see also Chapter 13.8.3.6, "Marker Search (Spectrograms)", on page 1224. For details on the format of the retrieved trace data see also Chapter 13.8.2.5, "Formats for Returned Values: ASCII Format and Binary Format", on page 1198.
Commands required to export traces (and other result data) are described in Chapter 13.9.5, "Storing Measurement Results", on page 1310.
FORMat[:DATA]........................................................................................................... 1195 TRACe<n>[:DATA]....................................................................................................... 1196 TRACe<n>[:DATA]:MEMory?.........................................................................................1197 TRACe<n>[:DATA]:X?...................................................................................................1198
FORMat[:DATA] <Format>[, <BitLength>]
This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R&S FSW to the controlling computer.
Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R&S FSW. The R&S FSW automatically recognizes the data it receives, regardless of the format.
For details on data formats see Chapter 13.8.2.5, "Formats for Returned Values: ASCII Format and Binary Format", on page 1198.
Parameters: <Format>
ASCii ASCii format, separated by commas. This format is almost always suitable, regardless of the actual data format. However, the data is not as compact as other formats may be.
REAL Floating-point numbers (according to IEEE 754) in the "definite length block format". In the Spectrum application, the format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of trace data.
<BitLength>
Length in bits for floating-point results
16 16-bit floating-point numbers. Compared to REAL,32 format, half as many numbers are returned.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1195
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example:
32 32-bit floating-point numbers For I/Q data, 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format setting.
64 64-bit floating-point numbers Compared to REAL,32 format, twice as many numbers are returned.
FORM REAL,32
TRACe<n>[:DATA] <Trace>,<Data> TRACe<n>[:DATA]? <ResultType>
This command queries current trace data and measurement results.
The data format depends on FORMat[:DATA] on page 1195.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <Trace>
Selects the trace to write the data to. TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6
<Data>
Contains the data to transfer.
Query parameters: <ResultType>
Selects the type of result to be returned.
TRACE1 | ... | TRACE6 Returns the trace data for the corresponding trace. For details see Table 13-7.
LIST Returns the results of the peak list evaluation for Spurious Emission and Spectrum Emission Mask measurements. For spurious emission measurements, the number of peaks returned for each measurement range is defined by the "Peaks per Range" parameter (see CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch: SUBRanges on page 1017), regardless of the " Details " setting. For details see Table 13-8.
SPURious Returns the peak list of Spurious Emission measurements.
SPECtrogram | SGRam Returns the results of the spectrogram result display. For details see Table 13-9.
Return values: <TraceData>
For more information see tables below.
Example:
TRAC TRACE1,+A$ Transfers trace data ('+A$') to trace 1.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1196
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example:
TRAC? TRACE3 Queries the data of trace 3.
Manual operation:
See " List Evaluation State (Result Summary)" on page 260 See " List Evaluation State " on page 283 See " Diagram " on page 502
Table 13-7: Return values for TRACE1 to TRACE6 parameter
The trace data consists of a list of power levels that have been measured. The number of power levels in the list depends on the currently selected number of sweep points. The unit depends on the measurement and on the unit you have currently set.
If you are measuring with the auto peak detector, the command returns positive peak values only. (To retrieve negative peak values, define a second trace with a negative peak detector.)
For SEM or Spurious Emission measurement results, the x-values should be queried as well, as they are not equidistant (see TRACe<n>[:DATA]:X? on page 1198).
Table 13-8: Return values for LIST parameter
For each peak, the command returns 11 values in the following order:
<No>,<StartFreq>,<StopFreq>,<RBW>,<PeakFreq>,<PowerAbs>,<PowerRel>,<PowerDelta>,<LimitCheck>,<Unused1>,<Unused2> <No>: range number <StartFreq>,<StopFreq>: start and stop frequency of the range <RBW>: resolution bandwidth <PeakFreq>: frequency of the peak in a range <PowerAbs>: absolute power of the peak in dBm <PowerRel>: power of the peak in relation to the channel power in dBc <PowerDelta>: distance from the peak to the limit line in dB, positive values indicate a failed limit
check <LimitCheck>: state of the limit check (0 = PASS, 1 = FAIL) <Unused1>,<Unused2>: reserved (0.0)
Table 13-9: Return values for SPECtrogram parameter
For every frame in the spectrogram, the command returns the power levels that have been measured, one for each sweep point. The number of frames depends on the size of the history depth. The power level depends on the unit you have currently set. For spectrogram trace results, only REAL,32 format is supported
TRACe<n>[:DATA]:MEMory? <Trace>,<OffsSwPoint>,<NoOfSwPoints>
This command queries the previously captured trace data for the specified trace from the memory. As an offset and number of sweep points to be retrieved can be specified, the trace data can be retrieved in smaller portions, making the command faster than the TRAC:DATA? command. This is useful if only specific parts of the trace data are of interest.
If no parameters are specified with the command, the entire trace data is retrieved; in this case, the command returns the same results as TRAC:DATA? TRACE1.
For details on the returned values see the TRAC:DATA? <TRACE...> command.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Query parameters:
<Trace>
TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1197
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
<OffsSwPoint>
The offset in sweep points related to the start of the measurement at which data retrieval is to start.
<NoOfSwPoints> Number of sweep points to be retrieved from the trace.
Return values: <SweepPointValues>
Example:
TRAC:DATA:MEM? TRACE1,25,100 Retrieves 100 sweep points from trace 1, starting at sweep point 25.
Usage:
Query only
TRACe<n>[:DATA]:X? <TraceNumber>
This command queries the horizontal trace data for each sweep point in the specified window, for example the frequency in frequency domain or the time in time domain measurements.
For more information, see "X-Value of the Sweep Point" on page 580.
This is especially useful for traces with non-equidistant x-values, e.g. for SEM or Spurious Emissions measurements.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Query parameters: <TraceNumber>
TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6 Trace number. TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6
Return values: <X-Values>
Example:
TRAC3:X? TRACE1 Returns the x-values for trace 1 in window 3.
Usage:
Query only
13.8.2.5 Formats for Returned Values: ASCII Format and Binary Format
When trace data is retrieved using the TRAC:DATA or TRAC:IQ:DATA command, the data is returned in the format defined using the FORMat[:DATA] on page 1195. The possible formats are described here.
ASCII Format (FORMat ASCII): The data is stored as a list of comma-separated values (CSV) of the measured values in floating point format.
Binary Format (FORMat REAL,16/32/64): The data is stored as binary data (definite length block data according to IEEE 488.2), each measurement value being formatted in 16-bit/32-bit/64-bit IEEE 754 floating-point-format.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1198
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
The schema of the result string is as follows: #41024<value1><value2>...<value n> with:
#4 1024 <Value>
Number of digits (= 4 in the example) of the following number of data bytes Number of following data bytes (= 1024 in the example) 2-byte/4-byte/8-byte floating point value
Reading out data in binary format is quicker than in ASCII format. Thus, binary format is recommended for large amounts of data.
13.8.2.6 Importing and Exporting Traces
FORMat:DEXPort:CSEParator.......................................................................................1199 FORMat:DEXPort:FORMat............................................................................................1199 FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes........................................................................................... 1200 FORMat:DEXPort:XDIStrib............................................................................................1200 FORMat:DIMPort:TRACes............................................................................................ 1201 MMEMory:LOAD<n>:TRACe.........................................................................................1201 MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe.......................................................................................1201
FORMat:DEXPort:CSEParator <Separator>
This command selects the column separator for exported trace data.
The selected value is not affected by a preset. The command therefore has no reset value.
Parameters: <Separator>
COMMa Selects a comma as a separator.
SEMicolon Selects a semicolon as a separator.
TAB Selects a tabulator as a separator.
*RST:
n/a
Example:
//Select column separator FORM:DEXP:CSEP TAB
Manual operation: See "Column Separator" on page 616
FORMat:DEXPort:FORMat <FileFormat>
Determines the format of the ASCII file to be imported or exported. Depending on the external program in which the data file was created or will be evaluated, a comma-separated list (CSV) or a plain data format (DAT) file may be required.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1199
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Parameters: <FileFormat>
Example: Manual operation:
CSV | DAT
*RST:
DAT
FORM:DEXP:FORM CSV
See " File Type " on page 616
FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes <Selection>
This command selects the data to be included in a data export file (see MMEMory: STORe<n>:TRACe on page 1201).
For details on exporting data see Chapter 8.6.2, "Trace/Data Ex/Import", on page 612.
Parameters: <Selection>
SINGle | ALL
SINGle Only a single trace is selected for export, namely the one specified by the MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe command.
ALL Selects all active traces and result tables (e.g. Result Summary, marker peak list etc.) in the current application for export to an ASCII file. The <trace> parameter for the MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe command is ignored.
*RST:
SINGle
Manual operation: See " Export all Traces and all Table Results " on page 613
FORMat:DEXPort:XDIStrib <XDistribution>
Defines how the x-values of the trace are determined in the frequency domain.
See "X-Value of the Sweep Point" on page 580.
Parameters: <XDistribution>
STARtstop | BINCentered
BINCentered The full measurement span is divided by the number of sweep points to obtain bins. The x-value of the sweep point is defined as the x-value at the center of the bin (bin/2).
STARtstop (Default): The x-value of the first sweep point corresponds to the starting point of the full measurement span. The x-value of the last sweep point corresponds to the end point of the full measurement span. All other sweep points are divided evenly between the first and last points.
Example:
FORM:DEXP:XDIS BINC
Manual operation: See "X-Value Distribution" on page 614
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1200
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
FORMat:DIMPort:TRACes <Selection>
This command selects the data to be included in a data import file (see MMEMory: LOAD<n>:TRACe on page 1201).
For details on importing data see Chapter 8.6.3, "How to Import Traces", on page 617.
Parameters: <Selection>
SINGle | ALL
SINGle Only a single trace is selected for import, namely the one specified by the MMEMory:LOAD<n>:TRACe on page 1201 command.
ALL Imports several traces at once, overwriting the existing trace data for any active trace in the result display with the same trace number. Data from the import file for currently not active traces is not imported. The <trace> parameter for the MMEMory:LOAD<n>:TRACe on page 1201 command is ignored.
*RST:
SINGle
Manual operation: See " Import All Traces / Import to Trace " on page 616 See " Import ASCII File to Trace " on page 617
MMEMory:LOAD<n>:TRACe <Trace>, <FileName>
This command imports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <Trace>
Number of the trace to be stored (This parameter is ignored for FORMat:DIMPort:TRACes on page 1201ALL).
<FileName>
String containing the path and name of the import file.
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe <Trace>, <FileName>
This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file.
For details on the file format see Chapter 8.6.6, "Reference: ASCII File Export Format", on page 619.
Secure User Mode
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1201
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory device.
For details, see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <Trace>
Number of the trace to be stored (This parameter is ignored if the option "Export all Traces and all Table Results" is activated in the Export configuration settings, see FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes on page 1200).
<FileName>
String containing the path and name of the target file.
Example:
MMEM:STOR1:TRAC 1,'C:\TEST.ASC' Stores trace 1 from window 1 in the file TEST.ASC.
Manual operation: See " Export Trace to ASCII File " on page 614
13.8.2.7 Programming Example: Configuring a Spectrogram
This example demonstrates how to configure a spectrogram for a basic frequency sweep in a remote environment. The spectrogram is displayed in addition to the spectrum display, in a new window. In addition, the usage of special spectrogram markers is demonstrated (see Chapter 13.8.3.6, "Marker Search (Spectrograms)", on page 1224).
Basic trace settings are demonstrated in the Chapter 13.15.1, "Programming Example: Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep", on page 1455.
//-----------Preparing the Measurement -----------*RST //Resets the instrument LAY:ADD? '1',BEL,SGR //Displays a new window below window 1 and activates spectrogram display. //The new window name is returned as a result: '2'. //The spectrogram is updated with each new sweep. INIT:CONT OFF //Selects single sweep mode.
//--------------Configuring the Spectrogram-------------CALC:SGR:CLE //Clears the displayed spectrogram to start a new one. CALC:SGR:CONT ON //Configures a continuous spectrogram for a series of measurements. //The display is not cleared when a new measurement is started. CALC:SGR:FRAM:COUN 100 //Sets the number of frames to be recorded per sweep to 100. CALC:SGR:HDEP 1000 //Sets the number of frames to be stored to 1000 (=10 sweeps)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1202
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALC:SGR:TST ON //Activates a time stamp for each frame.
//--------------Configuring the Color Map---------------DISP:WIND:SGR:COL GRAY //Defines a gray-scaled coloring: low values light gray, high values dark gray. DISP:WIND:SGR:COL:LOW 30 DISP:WIND:SGR:COL:UPP 70 DISP:WIND:SGR:COL:SHAP 0.8 //Defines a color map for a range that comprises 40% of the measurement range, //excluding 30% at each end. The colors are not scaled linearly; the light gray //colors are stretched to distinguish low values better.
//--------------Performing the Measurement--------------SWE:COUN 10 //Defines 10 sweeps to be performed per measurement. INIT;*WAI //Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweeps have finished. //The spectrogram is updated with each new sweep.
//--------------Positioning Markers---------------------CALC:MARK:SGR:SAR MEM //Includes all frames in the memory in the search area
CALC:MARK1:SGR:FRAM -1s //Sets marker 1 to the frame 1 second after measurement begin. (Note the //negative value! CALC:MARK1:MIN //Sets marker 1 to the minimum level in this frame. CALC:MARK1:SGR:Y:MIN //Sets marker 1 to the minimum level for the same frequency the marker is //currently positioned at in all frames.
CALC:MARK2:SGR:XY:MAX //Sets marker 2 to the maximum level in the entire spectrogram.
CALC:DELT1:SGR:FRAM 3s //Sets the deltamarker 1 to the frame captured 3 seconds after marker 1. By default //it is set to the peak of that frame and displays the level difference to marker 1. //Note the positive value! CALC:DELT1:MIN //Sets deltamarker 1 to the minimum level in this frame.
CALC:DELT3:SGR:XY:MAX //Sets deltamarker 3 to the maximum level in the entire spectrogram. By default //its value is the difference to marker 1. We will change it to refer to marker 2. CALC:DELT3:MREF 2 //Deltamarker 3 now refers to marker 2, both are positioned on the maximum of the //spectrogram. Thus, D3=0. We will move deltamarker 3 to the next peak level
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1203
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
//for the same frequency. CALC:DELT3:SGR:Y:MAX:NEXT
//---------------Retrieving Results---------------------CALC:MARK1:X? CALC:MARK1:Y? CALC:MARK1:SGR:FRAM? //Queries the frequency (x), level (y) and frame values of marker 1.
CALC:MARK2:X? CALC:MARK2:Y? CALC:MARK2:SGR:FRAM? //Queries the frequency (x), level (y) and frame values of marker 2.
CALC:DELT1:X? CALC:DELT1:Y? CALC:DELT1:SGR:FRAM? //Queries the frequency (x), level (y) and frame values of deltamarker 1.
CALC:DELT3:X? CALC:DELT3:Y? CALC:DELT3:SGR:FRAM? //Queries the frequency (x), level (y) and frame values of deltamarker 3.
CALC:SGR:TST:DATA? ALL //Queries the time stamps of all stored frames. CALC:SGR:FRAM:SEL -1 //Selects the frame that was captured 1 second after measurement start (Note the //negative value!). This frame is displayed in the Spectrum window. TRAC:DATA? SGR //Retrieves the trace data for the spectrogram. For each frame, the power level //and frequency at each sweep point are returned. TRAC:DATA? TRACE1 //Retrieves the trace data for the selected frame only.
13.8.3 Working with Markers
The commands required to work with markers and marker functions in a remote environment are described here. The tasks for manual operation are described in Chapter 8.3, "Marker Usage", on page 515.
In the Spectrum application, markers are identical in all windows. Thus, the suffix <n> for the window is generally irrelevant.
Setting Up Individual Markers............................................................................. 1205 General Marker Settings..................................................................................... 1211 Configuring and Performing a Marker Search.....................................................1212 Positioning the Marker........................................................................................ 1216
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1204
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Retrieving Marker Results...................................................................................1222 Marker Search (Spectrograms)...........................................................................1224 Fixed Reference Marker Settings........................................................................1233 Marker Peak Lists............................................................................................... 1236 Noise Measurement Marker................................................................................1239 Phase Noise Measurement Marker.....................................................................1241 Band Power Marker............................................................................................ 1243 n dB Down Marker.............................................................................................. 1247 Signal Count Marker........................................................................................... 1251 Marker Demodulation..........................................................................................1253 Programming Examples for Using Markers and Marker Functions.....................1255
13.8.3.1 Setting Up Individual Markers
The following commands define the position of markers in the diagram.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF.........................................................................1205 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK.......................................................................... 1205 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<ms>:LINK:TO:MARKer<md>..............................................1206 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MODE....................................................................... 1206 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREFerence.............................................................. 1207 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe]...................................................................... 1207 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:TRACe.......................................................................1208 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X............................................................................... 1208 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF................................................................................ 1209 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<ms>:LINK:TO:MARKer<md>..................................................... 1209 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe]............................................................................. 1209 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe.............................................................................. 1210 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X...................................................................................... 1210
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF
This command turns off all delta markers.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
irrelevant
Example:
CALC:DELT:AOFF Turns off all delta markers.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK <State>
This command links delta marker <m> to marker 1.
If you change the horizontal position (x-value) of marker 1, delta marker <m> changes its horizontal position to the same value.
Tip: to link any marker to a different marker than marker 1, use the CALCulate<n>: DELTamarker<ms>:LINK:TO:MARKer<md> or CALCulate<n>:MARKer<ms>: LINK:TO:MARKer<md> commands.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1205
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Suffix: <n> <m> Parameters: <State>
Example: Manual operation:
. Window Marker
ON | OFF | 0 | 1 OFF | 0 Switches the function off ON | 1 Switches the function on CALC:DELT2:LINK ON See " Linking to Another Marker " on page 338
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<ms>:LINK:TO:MARKer<md> <State>
This command links delta marker <m1> to any active normal marker <m2>.
If you change the horizontal position of marker <m2>, delta marker <m1> changes its horizontal position to the same value.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<ms>
source marker, see Marker
<md>
destination marker, see Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC:DELT4:LINK:TO:MARK2 ON Links the delta marker 4 to the marker 2.
Manual operation: See " Linking to Another Marker " on page 338
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MODE <Mode>
This command defines whether the position of a delta marker is provided as an absolute value or relative to a reference marker.
Note that when the position of a delta marker is queried, the result is always an absolute value (see CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 1208)!
Suffix: <n>
. Window
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1206
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
<m> Parameters: <Mode>
Example:
irrelevant
ABSolute Delta marker position in absolute terms.
RELative Delta marker position in relation to a reference marker.
*RST:
RELative
CALC:DELT:MODE ABS Absolute delta marker position.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREFerence <Reference>
This command selects a reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1.
The reference may be another marker or the fixed reference.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <Reference>
FIXed Selects the fixed reference as the reference.
Example:
CALC:DELT3:MREF 2 Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 are relative to marker 2.
Manual operation: See " Reference Marker " on page 338
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] <State>
This command turns delta markers on and off.
If necessary, the command activates the delta marker first.
No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC:DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1207
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Manual operation:
See " Marker State " on page 337 See " Marker Type " on page 338 See " Select Marker " on page 339
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:TRACe <Trace>
This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on.
Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than "Blank".
If necessary, the command activates the marker first.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <Trace>
Trace number the marker is assigned to.
Example:
CALC:DELT2:TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X <Position>
This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x-axis.
If necessary, the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <Position>
Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x-axis. The position is relative to the reference marker. To select an absolute position you have to change the delta marker mode with CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MODE on page 1206. A query returns the absolute position of the delta marker.
Range: The value range and unit depend on the measurement and scale of the x-axis.
Default unit: HZ
Example:
CALC:DELT:X? Outputs the absolute x-value of delta marker 1.
Manual operation:
See " Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / Marker 4 " on page 319 See " Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 " on page 324 See "Marker Position X-value " on page 337
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1208
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF
This command turns off all markers.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Example:
CALC:MARK:AOFF Switches off all markers.
Manual operation: See " All Markers Off " on page 522
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<ms>:LINK:TO:MARKer<md> <State>
This command links normal marker <m1> to any active normal marker <m2>.
If you change the horizontal position of marker <m2>, marker <m1> changes its horizontal position to the same value.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<ms>
source marker, see Marker
<md>
destination marker, see Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC:MARK4:LINK:TO:MARK2 ON Links marker 4 to marker 2.
Manual operation: See " Linking to Another Marker " on page 338
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] <State>
This command turns markers on and off. If the corresponding marker number is currently active as a delta marker, it is turned into a normal marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1209
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example: Manual operation:
ON | 1 Switches the function on
CALC:MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3.
See " Marker State " on page 337 See " Marker Type " on page 338 See " Select Marker " on page 339
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe <Trace>
This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on.
Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than "Blank".
If necessary, the command activates the marker first.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <Trace>
1 to 6 Trace number the marker is assigned to.
Example:
//Assign marker to trace 1 CALC:MARK3:TRAC 2
Manual operation: See " Assigning the Marker to a Trace " on page 339
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X <Position>
This command moves a marker to a specific coordinate on the x-axis.
If necessary, the command activates the marker.
If the marker has been used as a delta marker, the command turns it into a normal marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <Position>
Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x-axis. The unit depends on the result display.
Range: The range depends on the current x-axis range. Default unit: Hz
Example:
CALC:MARK2:X 1.7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1.7 MHz.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1210
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Manual operation:
See " Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / Marker 4 " on page 319 See " Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 " on page 324 See "Marker Position X-value " on page 337 See " Marker Table " on page 502 See " Marker Peak List " on page 503
13.8.3.2 General Marker Settings
The following commands control general marker functionality.
Remote commands exclusive to general marker functionality DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MTABle......................................................................................1211 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MINFo[:STATe]........................................................................... 1211 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SSIZe............................................................................ 1212
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MTABle <DisplayMode>
This command turns the marker table on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <DisplayMode>
ON | 1 Turns on the marker table.
OFF | 0 Turns off the marker table.
AUTO Turns on the marker table if 3 or more markers are active.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
DISP:MTAB ON Activates the marker table.
Manual operation: See " Marker Table Display " on page 522
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MINFo[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the marker information in all diagrams on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | 1 Displays the marker information in the diagrams.
OFF | 0 Hides the marker information in the diagrams.
*RST:
1
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1211
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example: Manual operation:
DISP:MINF OFF Hides the marker information.
See " Marker Info " on page 523
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SSIZe <StepSize>
This command selects the marker step size mode for all markers in all windows.
The step size defines the distance the marker moves when you move it with the rotary knob.
It therefore takes effect in manual operation only.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Parameters: <StepSize>
STANdard the marker moves from one pixel to the next
POINts the marker moves from one sweep point to the next
*RST:
POINts
Example:
CALC:MARK:X:SSIZ STAN Sets the marker step size to one pixel.
Manual operation: See " Marker Stepsize " on page 523
13.8.3.3 Configuring and Performing a Marker Search
The following commands control the marker search.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LOEXclude........................................................................ 1212 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion....................................................................... 1213 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]...............................................................1213 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT.................................................................. 1214 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt.................................................................1214 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM[:STATe].................................................... 1215 CALCulate<n>:THReshold............................................................................................ 1215 CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe..................................................................................1216
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LOEXclude <State>
This command turns the suppression of the local oscillator during automatic marker positioning on and off (for all markers in all windows).
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1212
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Parameters: <State>
Example: Manual operation:
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
CALC:MARK:LOEX ON
See " Exclude LO " on page 525
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion <Excursion>
This command defines the peak excursion (for all markers in all windows). The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak search. The unit depends on the measurement.
Application/Result display
Unit
Spectrum
dB
Suffix: <n> <m> Parameters: <Excursion>
Example: Manual operation:
. irrelevant
irrelevant
The excursion is the distance to a trace maximum that must be attained before a new maximum is recognized, or the distance to a trace minimum that must be attained before a new minimum is recognized
*RST:
6 dB in the Spectrum application and RF displays
Default unit: DB
CALC:MARK:PEXC 10dB Defines peak excursion as 10 dB.
See " Peak Excursion " on page 526
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] <State>
This command turns marker search limits on and off for all markers in all windows.
If you perform a measurement in the time domain, this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1213
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example: Manual operation:
ON | 1 Switches the function on
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON Switches on search limitation.
See " Search Limits ( Left / Right )" on page 210 See " Deactivating All Search Limits " on page 210 See " Limit State " on page 304
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT <SearchLimit>
This command defines the left limit of the marker search range for all markers in all windows.
If you perform a measurement in the time domain, this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Parameters: <SearchLimit>
The value range depends on the frequency range or sweep time. The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements.
*RST:
left diagram border
Default unit: HZ
Example:
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on. CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:LEFT 10MHz Sets the left limit of the search range to 10 MHz.
Manual operation: See " Search Limits ( Left / Right )" on page 210 See " Left Limit / Right Limit " on page 304
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt <SearchLimit>
This command defines the right limit of the marker search range for all markers in all windows.
If you perform a measurement in the time domain, this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1214
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Parameters: <Limit>
Example: Manual operation:
The value range depends on the frequency range or sweep time. The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements.
*RST:
right diagram border
Default unit: HZ
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on. CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz.
See " Search Limits ( Left / Right )" on page 210 See " Left Limit / Right Limit " on page 304
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM[:STATe] <State>
This command adjusts the marker search range to the zoom area for all markers in all windows.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:ZOOM ON Switches the search limit function on. CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz.
Manual operation: See " Use Zoom Limits " on page 526
CALCulate<n>:THReshold <Level>
This command defines a threshold level for the marker peak search (for all markers in all windows).
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <Level>
Numeric value. The value range and unit are variable.
*RST:
-120 dBm
Default unit: DBM
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1215
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example: Manual operation:
CALC:THR -82DBM Sets the threshold value to -82 dBm.
See " Search Threshold " on page 526
CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe <State>
This command turns a threshold for the marker peak search on and off (for all markers in all windows).
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC:THR:STAT ON Switches on the threshold line.
Manual operation: See " Deactivating All Search Limits " on page 210
13.8.3.4 Positioning the Marker
This chapter contains remote commands necessary to position the marker on a trace.
Positioning Normal Markers................................................................................ 1216 Positioning Delta Markers................................................................................... 1220
Positioning Normal Markers
The following commands position markers on the trace.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:AUTO................................................................1216 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT.................................................................1217 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT................................................................ 1217 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK].............................................................. 1217 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt................................................................1218 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:AUTO................................................................. 1218 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT.................................................................. 1219 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT................................................................. 1219 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]............................................................... 1219 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt.................................................................1219
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:AUTO <State>
This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace maximum on and off. The R&S FSW performs the peak search after each sweep.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1216
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Suffix: <n> <m> Parameters: <State>
Example:
Manual operation:
. Window
Marker
ON | OFF | 0 | 1 OFF | 0 Switches the function off ON | 1 Switches the function on
CALC:MARK:MAX:AUTO ON Activates the automatic peak search function for marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep.
See " Auto Max Peak Search / Auto Min Peak Search " on page 526
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT
This command moves a marker to the next lower peak.
The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker position.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Next Peak " on page 531
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT
This command moves a marker to the next lower peak.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Next Peak " on page 531
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] This command moves a marker to the highest level.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1217
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
If the marker is not yet active, the command first activates the marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Peak Search " on page 531
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt
This command moves a marker to the next lower peak.
The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Next Peak " on page 531
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:AUTO <State>
This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace minimum on and off. The R&S FSW performs the peak search after each sweep.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC:MARK:MIN:AUTO ON Activates the automatic minimum value search function for marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep.
Manual operation: See " Auto Max Peak Search / Auto Min Peak Search " on page 526
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1218
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT
This command moves a marker to the next minimum value.
The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Next Minimum " on page 531
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT
This command moves a marker to the next minimum value.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Next Minimum " on page 531
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a marker to the minimum level.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
If the marker is not yet active, the command first activates the marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Minimum " on page 531
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt
This command moves a marker to the next minimum value.
The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1219
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Suffix: <n>
<m>
Manual operation:
. Window
Marker
See " Search Next Minimum " on page 531
Positioning Delta Markers
The following commands position delta markers on the trace.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT......................................................... 1220 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT.........................................................1220 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]....................................................... 1221 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt........................................................ 1221 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT.......................................................... 1221 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT..........................................................1221 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]........................................................ 1222 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt......................................................... 1222
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT
This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value.
The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker position.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Next Peak " on page 531
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT
This command moves a marker to the next higher value.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: <n>
. 1..n Window
<m>
1..n Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Next Peak " on page 531
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1220
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a delta marker to the highest level.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
If the marker is not yet active, the command first activates the marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Peak Search " on page 531
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt
This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value.
The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Next Peak " on page 531
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT
This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value.
The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Next Minimum " on page 531
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT
This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1221
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Suffix: <n>
<m>
Manual operation:
. Window
Marker
See " Search Next Minimum " on page 531
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
If the marker is not yet active, the command first activates the marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Minimum " on page 531
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt
This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value.
The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Next Minimum " on page 531
13.8.3.5 Retrieving Marker Results
The following commands are used to retrieve the results of markers.
You can use the marker values to position the center frequency or reference level directly using the following commands: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer on page 1131 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:REFerence on page 1147
Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere: CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 1208 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 1210
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1222
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt? on page 1237 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:X? on page 1239 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:Y? on page 1239 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult? on page 1240 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult?
on page 1241 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?
on page 1246 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult? on page 1244 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult? on page 1249 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency? on page 1248 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:QFACtor? on page 1249 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency? on page 1252
Remote commands exclusive to retrieving marker results
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative?............................................................... 1223 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y?............................................................................. 1223 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y?.....................................................................................1224
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative?
This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x-axis.
If necessary, the command activates the delta marker first.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <Position>
Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker.
Example:
CALC:DELT3:X:REL? Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / Marker 4 " on page 319 See " Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 " on page 324
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y?
Queries the result at the position of the specified delta marker.
Suffix:
.
<n>
1..n
<m>
1..n
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1223
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Return values: <Result>
Usage:
Result at the position of the delta marker. The unit is variable and depends on the one you have currently set. Default unit: DBM
Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y?
Queries the result at the position of the specified marker.
Suffix:
.
<n>
1..n
<m>
1..n
Return values: <Result>
Default unit: DBM
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Marker Table " on page 502 See " Marker Peak List " on page 503
13.8.3.6 Marker Search (Spectrograms)
The following commands automatically define the marker and delta marker position in the spectrogram.
The usage of these markers is demonstrated in Chapter 13.8.2.7, "Programming Example: Configuring a Spectrogram", on page 1202.
Using Markers The following commands control spectrogram markers.
Useful commands for spectrogram markers described elsewhere
The following commands define the horizontal position of the markers. CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 1217 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 1217 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 1217 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 1218 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT on page 1219 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 1219 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 1219 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt on page 1219
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1224
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Remote commands exclusive to spectrogram markers
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:FRAMe................................................................. 1225 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe.........................................................1225 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea.................................................................. 1226 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:SARea......................................................... 1226 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK].............................................1226 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK].................................... 1226 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK].............................................. 1226 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]..................................... 1226 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe...............................................1226 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe...................................... 1226 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow............................................... 1227 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:BELow.......................................1227 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT.................................................1227 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:NEXT........................................ 1227 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]............................................... 1227 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]...................................... 1227 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe................................................ 1228 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:ABOVe....................................... 1228 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow................................................ 1228 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:BELow........................................1228 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT.................................................. 1228 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:NEXT......................................... 1228 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]................................................ 1228 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]........................................1228
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:FRAMe <Frame> CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe <Frame> | <Time>
This command positions a marker on a particular frame.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <Frame>
Selects a frame directly by the frame number. Valid if the time stamp is off. The range depends on the history depth.
Default unit: S
<Time>
Selects a frame via its time stamp. Valid if the time stamp is on. The number is the (negative) distance to frame 0 in seconds. The range depends on the history depth.
Example:
CALC:MARK:SGR:FRAM -20 Sets the marker on the 20th frame before the present. CALC:MARK2:SGR:FRAM -2s Sets second marker on the frame 2 seconds ago.
Manual operation: See " Frame (Spectrogram only)" on page 520
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1225
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea <SearchArea> CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:SARea <SearchArea>
This command defines the marker search area for all spectrogram markers in the channel.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Parameters: <SearchArea>
VISible Performs a search within the visible frames. Note that the command does not work if the spectrogram is not visible for any reason (e.g. if the display update is off).
MEMory Performs a search within all frames in the memory.
*RST:
VISible
Manual operation: See " Marker Search Area " on page 529
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK] CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a marker to the highest level of the spectrogram.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK] CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe
This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency.
The search includes only frames above the current marker position. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1226
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction " on page 528
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:BELow
This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency.
The search includes only frames below the current marker position. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction " on page 528
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:NEXT
This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency.
The search includes all frames. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction " on page 528
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK] CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a marker vertically to the highest level for the current frequency.
The search includes all frames. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker.
If the marker hasn't been active yet, the command looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1227
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:ABOVe
This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the current frequency.
The search includes only frames above the current marker position. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction " on page 528
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:BELow
This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the current frequency.
The search includes only frames below the current marker position. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction " on page 528
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:NEXT
This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the current frequency.
The search includes all frames. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction " on page 528
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK] CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a marker vertically to the minimum level for the current frequency.
The search includes all frames. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1228
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
If the marker hasn't been active yet, the command first looks for the peak level for all frequencies and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Using Delta Markers
The following commands control spectrogram delta markers.
Useful commands for spectrogram markers described elsewhere
The following commands define the horizontal position of the delta markers.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 1220 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 1220 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 1221 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 1221 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT on page 1221 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 1221 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 1222 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt on page 1222
Remote commands exclusive to spectrogram markers
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:FRAMe..........................................................1230 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe................................................. 1230 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:SARea.......................................................... 1230 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:SARea.................................................. 1230 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]..................................... 1231 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]............................. 1231 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]...................................... 1231 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MINimum[:PEAK].............................. 1231 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe....................................... 1231 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe............................... 1231 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow........................................1231 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:BELow............................... 1231 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT......................................... 1232 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:NEXT................................. 1232 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]........................................1232 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]............................... 1232 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe........................................ 1232 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:ABOVe................................ 1232 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow......................................... 1232 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:BELow................................ 1232 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT.......................................... 1233 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:NEXT.................................. 1233
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1229
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK].........................................1233 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]................................ 1233
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:FRAMe <Frame> CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe <Frame>
This command positions a delta marker on a particular frame. The frame is relative to the position of marker 1.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <Frame>
Selects a frame either by its frame number or time stamp. The frame number is available if the time stamp is off. The range depends on the history depth. The time stamp is available if the time stamp is on. The number is the distance to frame 0 in seconds. The range depends on the history depth.
Default unit: S
Example:
CALC:DELT4:SGR:FRAM -20 Sets fourth deltamarker 20 frames below marker 1. CALC:DELT4:SGR:FRAM 2 s Sets fourth deltamarker 2 seconds above the position of marker 1.
Manual operation: See " Frame (Spectrogram only)" on page 520
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:SARea <SearchArea> CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:SARea <SearchArea>
This command defines the marker search area for all spectrogram markers in the channel.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Parameters: <SearchArea>
VISible Performs a search within the visible frames. Note that the command does not work if the spectrogram is not visible for any reason (e.g. if the display update is off).
MEMory Performs a search within all frames in the memory.
*RST:
VISible
Manual operation: See " Marker Search Area " on page 529
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1230
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK] CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a marker to the highest level of the spectrogram over all frequencies.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK] CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram over all frequencies.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe
This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher level for the current frequency.
The search includes only frames above the current marker position. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction " on page 528
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:BELow
This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher level for the current frequency.
The search includes only frames below the current marker position. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction " on page 528
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1231
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:NEXT
This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next higher level for the current frequency.
The search includes all frames. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction " on page 528
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK] CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a delta marker vertically to the highest level for the current frequency.
The search includes all frames. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker.
If the marker hasn't been active yet, the command looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:ABOVe
This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the current frequency.
The search includes only frames above the current marker position. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction " on page 528
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:BELow
This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the current frequency.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1232
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
The search includes only frames below the current marker position. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction " on page 528
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:NEXT
This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the current frequency.
The search includes all frames. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Manual operation: See " Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction " on page 528
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK] CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a delta marker vertically to the minimum level for the current frequency.
The search includes all frames. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker.
If the marker hasn't been active yet, the command first looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
13.8.3.7 Fixed Reference Marker Settings
The following commands configure a fixed reference marker.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK]................... 1234 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X........................................... 1234 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y........................................... 1234 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet............................... 1235 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe]............................................. 1235
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1233
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command moves the fixed reference marker to the peak power.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Example:
CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:MAX Sets the reference point level for delta markers to the peak of the selected trace.
Manual operation: See "Defining a Fixed Reference" on page 523 See " Defining Reference Point " on page 540
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X <RefPoint>
This command defines the horizontal position of the fixed delta marker reference point. The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <RefPoint>
Numeric value that defines the horizontal position of the reference. For frequency domain measurements, it is a frequency in Hz. For time domain measurements, it is a point in time in s.
*RST:
Fixed Reference: OFF
Default unit: HZ
Example:
CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 128 MHz Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Defining a Fixed Reference" on page 523 See " Defining Reference Point " on page 540
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y <RefPointLevel>
This command defines the vertical position of the fixed delta marker reference point. The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1234
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Parameters: <RefPoint>
Example: Manual operation:
Numeric value that defines the vertical position of the reference. The unit and value range is variable.
*RST:
Fixed Reference: OFF
Default unit: DBM
CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y -10dBm Sets the reference point level for delta markers to -10 dBm.
See "Defining a Fixed Reference" on page 523 See " Defining Reference Point " on page 540
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines a level offset for the fixed delta marker reference point.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <Offset>
Numeric value
*RST:
0
Default unit: dB
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] <State>
This command activates or deactivates a marker that defines a fixed reference point for relative marker analysis.
If necessary, the command activates a marker and positions it on the peak power.
Subsequently, you can change the coordinates of the fixed reference independent of the marker. The fixed reference is independent of the trace and is applied to all active delta markers.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1235
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example: Manual operation:
CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX ON Switches on the measurement with fixed reference value for all delta markers. CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz. CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to +30 dBm.
See "Defining a Fixed Reference" on page 523
13.8.3.8 Marker Peak Lists
Useful commands for peak lists described elsewhere
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion on page 1213 MMEMory:STORe<n>:PEAK on page 1311 Chapter 13.8.3.3, "Configuring and Performing a Marker Search", on page 1212
Remote commands exclusive to peak lists
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:ANNotation:LABel[:STATe]....................... 1236 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt?................................................. 1237 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks[:IMMediate]............................................ 1237 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:LIST:SIZE...............................................1237 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT.................................................... 1238 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:STATe.................................................... 1238 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:X?......................................................... 1239 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:Y?......................................................... 1239
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:ANNotation:LABel[:STATe] <State>
This command turns labels for peaks found during a peak search on and off.
The labels correspond to the marker number in the marker peak list.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:ANN:LAB:STAT OFF Removes the peak labels from the diagram
Manual operation: See " Display Marker Numbers " on page 552
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1236
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt?
This command queries the number of peaks that have been found during a peak search.
The actual number of peaks that have been found may differ from the number of peaks you have set to be found because of the peak excursion.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Return values: <NumberOfPeaks>
Example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:COUN? Queries the number of peaks.
Usage:
Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks[:IMMediate] <Peaks>
This command initiates a peak search.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <Peaks>
This parameter defines the number of peaks to find during the search. Note that the actual number of peaks found during the search also depends on the peak excursion you have set with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion.
Range: 1 to 200
Example:
CALC:MARK:PEXC 5 Defines a peak excursion of 5 dB, i.e. peaks must be at least 5 dB apart to be detected as a peak. CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE 10 Initiates a search for 10 peaks on the current trace.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:LIST:SIZE <MaxNoPeaks>
This command defines the maximum number of peaks that the R&S FSW looks for during a peak search.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1237
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Parameters: <MaxNoPeaks>
Example: Manual operation:
Maximum number of peaks to be determined.
Range: *RST:
1 to 500 50
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:LIST:SIZE 10 The marker peak list will contain a maximum of 10 peaks.
See " Maximum Number of Peaks " on page 552
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT <SortMode>
This command selects the order in which the results of a peak search are returned.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <SortMode>
X Sorts the peaks according to increasing position on the x-axis.
Y Sorts the peaks according to decreasing position on the y-axis.
*RST:
X
Example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SORT Y Sets the sort mode to decreasing y values
Manual operation: See " Sort Mode " on page 552
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:STATe <State>
This command turns a peak search on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:STAT ON Activates marker peak search
Manual operation: See " Peak List State " on page 551
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1238
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:X?
This command queries the position of the peaks on the x-axis.
The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate<n>: MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Return values: <PeakPosition>
Position of the peaks on the x-axis. The unit depends on the measurement.
Usage:
Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:Y?
This command queries the position of the peaks on the y-axis.
The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate<n>: MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Return values: <PeakPosition>
Position of the peaks on the y-axis. The unit depends on the measurement.
Usage:
Query only
13.8.3.9 Noise Measurement Marker
The following commands control the noise measurement marker function. CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:AOFF...................................................... 1239 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?................................................... 1240 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe]....................................................1240
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:AOFF
Removes all noise markers in the specified window.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
irrelevant
Example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NOIS:AOFF
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1239
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?
This command queries the result of the noise measurement.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <NoiseLevel>
Current noise level. The unit is the one currently active.
Example:
INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK2 ON Switches on marker 2. CALC:MARK2:FUNC:NOIS ON Switches on noise measurement for marker 2. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. CALC:MARK2:FUNC:NOIS:RES? Outputs the noise result of marker 2.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Noise Measurement State " on page 537
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the noise measurement at the marker position on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NOIS ON Switches on the noise measurement.
Manual operation: See " Noise Measurement State " on page 537 See " Switching All Noise Measurement Off " on page 537
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1240
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
13.8.3.10 Phase Noise Measurement Marker
The following commands control the phase noise measurement marker function.
Useful commands for phase noise markers described elsewhere
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[: PEAK]
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y
Remote commands exclusive to phase noise markers
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AUTO............................................. 1241 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult?.......................................... 1241 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe]........................................... 1242 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AOFF.....................................................1242 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult?................................................. 1243 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe].................................................. 1243
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AUTO <State>
This command turns an automatic peak search for the fixed reference marker at the end of a sweep on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO:AUTO ON Activates an automatic peak search for the reference marker in a phase-noise measurement.
Manual operation: See " Defining Reference Point " on page 540
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult?
This command queries the result of a phase noise measurement.
If necessary, the command activates the measurement first.
This command is only available in the Spectrum application.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1241
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
<m> Return values: <PhaseNoise>
Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
Marker
numeric value The difference in level between the reference point and the noise power density at the position of the specified delta marker. CALC:DELT2:FUNC:PNO:RES? Outputs the result of phase-noise measurement of the deltamarker 2. Query only See " Phase Noise Measurement State " on page 539
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the phase noise measurement at the delta marker position on and off.
The reference marker for phase noise measurements is either a normal marker or a fixed reference. If necessary, the command turns on the reference marker.
The correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are taken into account in the measurement.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO ON Switches on the phase-noise measurement with all delta markers. CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz. CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to +30 dBm
Manual operation:
See " Phase Noise Measurement State " on page 539 See " Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off " on page 540
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AOFF Removes all phase noise markers in the specified window.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1242
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Suffix: <n>
<m>
Example:
. Window
irrelevant
CALC:MARK:FUNC:PNO:AOFF
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult?
This command queries the result of a phase noise measurement.
If necessary, the command activates the measurement first.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <PhaseNoise>
numeric value
The difference between the measured carrier power and the noise power at the position of the specified (normal) marker.
Example:
CALC:MARK2:FUNC:PNO:RES? Outputs the result of phase-noise measurement of the marker 2.
Usage:
Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the phase noise measurement at the marker position on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC:MARK2:FUNC:PNO ON Switches on the phase-noise measurement for the marker 2.
13.8.3.11 Band Power Marker The following commands control the marker for band power measurements.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1243
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Using Markers
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:AOFF................................................... 1244 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE.................................................. 1244 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?................................................ 1244 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN................................................... 1245 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe].................................................1245
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:AOFF
Removes all band power markers in the specified window.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
irrelevant
Example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:AOFF
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the way the results for a band power marker are displayed.
(Note: relative power results are only availabe for delta markers, see .CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE on page 1246
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <Mode>
POWer Result is displayed as an absolute power. The power unit depends on the CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer setting.
DENSity Result is displayed as a density in dBm/Hz.
*RST:
POWer
Example:
CALC:MARK4:FUNC:BPOW:MODE DENS Configures marker 4 to show the measurement results in dBm/Hz.
Manual operation: See " Power Mode " on page 546
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?
This command queries the results of the band power measurement.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1244
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Return values: <Power> Example:
Usage:
Signal power over the marker bandwidth.
Activate the band power marker: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:STAT ON Select the density mode for the result: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:MODE DENS Query the result: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:RES? Response: 20dBm/Hz
Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN <Span>
This command defines the bandwidth around the marker position.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <Span>
Frequency. The maximum span depends on the marker position and R&S FSW model.
*RST:
5% of current span
Default unit: Hz
Example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:SPAN 2MHz Measures the band power over 2 MHz around the marker.
Manual operation: See " Span " on page 546
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] <State>
This command turns markers for band power measurements on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC:MARK4:FUNC:BPOW:STAT ON Activates or turns marker 4 into a band power marker.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1245
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Manual operation:
See " Band Power Measurement State " on page 545 See " Switching All Band Power Measurements Off " on page 546
Using Delta Markers
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE...........................................1246 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?.........................................1246 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN............................................ 1247 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe]......................................... 1247
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the way the results for a band power delta marker are displayed.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <Mode>
POWer Result is displayed as an absolute power. The power unit depends on the CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer setting.
DENSity Result is displayed as a density in dBm/Hz.
RPOWer This setting is only available for a delta band power marker. The result is the difference between the absolute power in the band around the delta marker and the absolute power for the reference marker. The powers are subtracted logarithmically, so the result is a dB value. [Relative band power (Delta2) in dB] = [absolute band power (Delta2) in dBm] - [absolute (band) power of reference marker in dBm] For details see "Relative band power markers" on page 544.
*RST:
POWer
Manual operation: See " Power Mode " on page 546
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?
This command queries the results of the band power measurement.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <Power>
Signal power over the delta marker bandwidth.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1246
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Usage:
Query only
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN <Span>
This command defines the bandwidth around the delta marker position.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <Span>
Frequency. The maximum span depends on the marker position and R&S FSW model.
*RST:
5% of current span
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See " Span " on page 546
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] <State>
This command turns delta markers for band power measurements on and off.
If neccessary, the command also turns on a reference marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Manual operation:
See " Band Power Measurement State " on page 545 See " Switching All Band Power Measurements Off " on page 546
13.8.3.12 n dB Down Marker
The following commands control the n dB down markers.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown.......................................................... 1248 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency?...................................... 1248 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:QFACtor?........................................... 1249 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult?............................................. 1249 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe................................................ 1250 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME?................................................ 1250
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1247
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown <Distance>
This command defines the distance of the n dB down markers to the reference marker.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <Distance>
Distance of the temporary markers to the reference marker in dB. For a positive offset, the markers T1 and T2 are placed below the active reference point. For a negative offset (for example for notch filter measurements), the markers T1 and T2 are placed above the active reference point.
*RST:
6dB
Default unit: DB
Example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD 3dB Sets the distance to the reference marker to 3 dB.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency?
This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x-axis when measuring in the frequency domain.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Return values: <Frequency>
<frequency 1> absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the left of the reference marker in Hz
<frequency 2> absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the right of the reference marker in Hz.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1248
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:FREQ? This command would return, for example, 100000000, 200000000, meaning that the first marker position is at 100 MHz, the second marker position is at 200 MHz
Query only
See "n dB down Value" on page 542
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:QFACtor?
This command queries the Q factor of n dB down measurements.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Return values: <QFactor>
Usage:
Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult?
This command queries the distance of the n dB down markers from each other.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Return values: <Distance>
The result depends on the span. In case of frequency domain measurements, the command returns the bandwidth between the two n dB down markers in Hz. In case of time domain measurements, the command returns the pulse width between the two n dB down markers in seconds.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1249
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:RES? Outputs the measured value.
Query only
See " n dB down Marker State " on page 542
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe <State>
This command turns the n dB Down marker function on and off.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:STAT ON Turns the n dB Down marker on.
Manual operation: See " n dB down Marker State " on page 542
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME?
This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x-axis when measuring in the time domain.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<m>
irrelevant
Return values: <TimeX1>
absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the left of the reference marker in seconds
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1250
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
<TimeX2> Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the right of the reference marker in seconds
INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:TIME? Outputs the time values of the temporary markers.
Query only
See "n dB down Value" on page 542
13.8.3.13 Signal Count Marker
The following commands control the frequency counter. CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt.............................................................................. 1251 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency?..........................................................1252 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:RESolution............................................................. 1252
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt <State>
This command turns the frequency counter at the marker position on and off.
The frequency counter works for one marker only. If you perform a frequency count with another marker, the R&S FSW deactivates the frequency count of the first marker.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1251
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example: Manual operation:
INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK ON Switches on marker 1. CALC:MARK:COUN ON Switches on the frequency counter for marker 1. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. CALC:MARK:COUN:FREQ? Outputs the measured value.
See " Signal Count Marker State " on page 534
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency?
This command queries the frequency at the marker position.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Before you can use the command, you have to turn on the frequency counter.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Return values: <Frequency>
Frequency at the marker position.
Example:
INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK ON Switches on marker 2. CALC:MARK:COUN ON Activates the frequency counter for marker 1. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. CALC:MARK:COUN:FREQ? Outputs the measured value of marker 1.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Signal Count Marker State " on page 534
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:RESolution <Resolution>
This command defines the resolution of the frequency counter.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1252
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
<m> Parameters: <Resolution>
Example: Manual operation:
Marker
0.001 | 0.01 | 0.1 | 1 | 10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000 Hz
*RST:
0.1 Hz
Default unit: HZ
CALC:MARK:COUN:RES 1kHz Sets the resolution of the frequency counter to 1 kHz.
See " Resolution " on page 534
13.8.3.14 Marker Demodulation
The following commands control the demodulation of AM and FM signals at the marker position.
Useful commands for marker demodulation described elsewhere: SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume on page 1130
Remote commands exclusive to marker demodulation:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:CONTinuous..................................1253 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff........................................1254 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect..........................................1254 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe]......................................... 1254 [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel................................................................................... 1255 [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe]................................................................................ 1255
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:CONTinuous <State>
This command turns continuous demodulation of the signal at the marker position in the frequency domain on and off.
In the time domain continuous demodulation is always on.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC2:MARK3:FUNC:DEM:CONT ON Switches on the continuous demodulation.
Manual operation: See " Continuous Demodulation " on page 548
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1253
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff <Duration>
This command defines for how long the the signal at the marker position is demodulated.
In the time domain continuous demodulation is always on.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <Duration>
Range: 10 ms to 1000 s
*RST:
Marker demodulation = OFF
Default unit: S
Example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM:HOLD 3s
Manual operation: See " Marker Stop Time " on page 548
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect <DemodMode>
This command selects the demodulation mode at the marker position.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <DemodMode>
AM AM demodulation
FM FM demodulation
*RST:
AM
Example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM:SEL FM
Manual operation: See " Modulation " on page 548
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the audio demodulator on and off when the measurement reaches a marker position.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<m>
Marker
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1254
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example: Manual operation:
ON | 1 Switches the function on
CALC:MARK3:FUNC:DEM ON Switches on the demodulation for marker 3.
See " Marker Demodulation State " on page 548
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel <Threshold>
This command defines the threshold for selective demodulation.
All signals below the threshold are not demodulated.
Parameters: <Threshold>
Percentage of the display height.
Range: *RST:
0 to 100 50
Example:
DEM:SQU:LEV 80 Sets the squelch level to 80% of the displayed signal.
Manual operation: See " Squelch Level " on page 549
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] <State>
This command turns selective demodulation at the marker position on and off.
For selective demodulation, the R&S FSW turns on a video trigger whose level correponds to the squelch level. Therefore it turns other triggers or gates off.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
DEM:SQU ON Signals below the level threshold are not sent to the audio output.
Manual operation: See " Squelch " on page 548
13.8.3.15 Programming Examples for Using Markers and Marker Functions
Various programming examples on how to use markers and the special marker functions are provided here.
The use of spectrogram markers is demonstrated in Chapter 13.8.2.7, "Programming Example: Configuring a Spectrogram", on page 1202.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1255
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands
Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example: Basic Markers..................................................................................... 1256 Example: Marker Search in Spectrograms......................................................... 1257 Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Function Examples............. 1258 Example: Using a Fixed Reference Marker........................................................ 1258 Example: Obtaining a Marker Peak List..............................................................1259 Example: Measuring Noise Density.................................................................... 1260 Example: Measuring Phase Noise...................................................................... 1260 Example: Measuring the Power in a Channel Using Band Power Markers........ 1261 Example: Measuring Characteristic Bandwidths (Using the n dB Down Marker)
............................................................................................................................ 1262 Examples: Demodulating Marker Values and Providing Audio Output............... 1262 Example: Performing a Highly Accurate Frequency Measurement Using the Signal
Count Marker...................................................................................................... 1263
Example: Basic Markers
This example demonstrates how to configure and define markers for a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment. It assumes that the basic frequency sweep described in Chapter 13.15.1, "Programming Example: Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep", on page 1455 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument.
//--------------Configuring marker behavior -----------------DISP:MTAB ON //Marker information is always displayed in a separate table. CALC:MARK:X:SSIZ STAN //The marker moves from one pixel to the next instead of sweep points in manual op. CALC:MARK:PEXC 6dB //Defines a peak excursion of 6 dB. CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:LEFT 50MHz CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:RIGH 150MHz //Restricts the search area for peaks to the frequencies between 50 and 150 MHz. CALC:THR -100dBm CALC:THR:STAT ON //Configures a threshold level for peak searches at -100 dBm.
//--------------Defining and positioning markers ------------CALC:MARK1 ON //Activates marker 1 and sets it to the peak of trace 1. CALC:MARK2:TRAC 2 //Activates marker 2 and sets it to the peak of trace 2. CALC:MARK3:X 150MHz //Activates marker 3 and sets it to the freq. 150 MHz on trace 1. CALC:MARK4:TRAC 4 //Activates marker 4 and sets it to the peak of trace 4.
CALC:MARK1:MAX:AUTO ON //Moves M1 to the current peak of trace 1 after each sweep. CALC:MARK2:MAX:NEXT
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1256
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
//Moves M2 to the next lower peak of trace 2.
CALC:DELT5 ON CALC:DELT5:LINK ON //Activates delta marker 5 and links it to marker 1. If M1 moves, so does D5. CALC:DELT5:MREF 4 //Changes the reference for D5 to marker 4. D5 now shows the difference between //the peak of trace 1 after each sweep and the value at the same position in //trace 4, which is a copy of trace 1, averaged over 10 sweeps. CALC:DELT5:MODE REL //Shows the difference as relative values.
CALC:DELT6 ON CALC:DELT6:MAX:NEXT //Activates delta marker 6 and sets it to the next lower maximum of trace 1. //Thus it shows the difference between the two highest peaks in trace 1.
//--------------Retrieving marker values --------------------CALC:MARK1:Y? CALC:MARK2:Y? CALC:MARK3:Y? CALC:MARK4:Y? CALC:DELT5:Y? CALC:DELT6:Y? //Retrieves the marker levels of each active normal and delta marker. CALC:DELT5:X:REL? CALC:DELT6:X:REL? //Retrieves the frequency difference between the delta marker and marker 1.
//--------------Deactivating all markers --------------------//CALC:MARK:AOFF //CALC:DELT:AOFF
Example: Marker Search in Spectrograms
This example demonstrates how to search for peak values in spectrograms in a remote environment. It assumes a spectrogram is already available (see Chapter 13.8.2.7, "Programming Example: Configuring a Spectrogram", on page 1202) and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument.
//---------------- Analyzing the results using markers ------------------//Set marker1 on the peak power in the most recent spectrum and query //its position CALC2:SPEC:FRAM:SEL 0 CALC2:MARK1 ON CALC2:MARK1:X? CALC2:MARK1:Y?
//Set marker2 on the peak power in frame at -324ms and query its position CALC2:MARK2 ON CALC2:MARK2:SGR:FRAM -324ms
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1257
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALC2:MARK2:X? CALC2:MARK2:Y?
//Set marker3 on peak power level in the entire spectrogram in memory and //query its position CALC2:MARK3 ON CALC2:MARK:SPEC:SAR MEM CALC2:MARK3:SPEC:XY:MAX CALC2:MARK3:X? CALC2:MARK3:Y?
//Move marker 3 to the next lower peak level for the same frequency CALC2:MARK3:SPEC:Y:MAX:NEXT CALC2:MARK3:X? CALC2:MARK3:Y?
//Set marker 4 to the highest level in the (visible) spectrogram. CALC2:MARK:SPEC:SAR VIS CALC2:MARK4:SPEC:XY:MAX //Move marker 4 to the next higher level in the frames above its current position. CALC2:MARK4:SPEC:Y:MAX:ABOV
Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Function Examples
Since markers can only be placed on an existing trace, the following example provides a simple frequency sweep measurement to be used as a basis for the subsequent marker function scripts.
//-------------- Configuring the basic frequency sweep ------------*RST //Resets the instrument INIT:CONT OFF //Selects single sweep mode. FREQ:CENT 100MHz //Defines the center frequency FREQ:SPAN 200MHz //Sets the span to 100 MHz on either side of the center frequency. DISP:TRAC1:Y:RLEV 0dBm //Sets the reference level to 0 dBm.
//------- Performing the measurement ------------------------INIT;*WAI //Performs a measurement and waits for it to end
Example: Using a Fixed Reference Marker
This example demonstrates how to configure and use reference markers in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment. It assumes that the basic frequency sweep described in "Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Function Examples" on page 1258 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1258
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
//-----------Configuring the reference marker -----------//Activate a fixed reference marker. It is set to the current maximum of trace 1. CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX ON //Set the reference frequency to 128 MHz. CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 128 MHZ //Set the reference level to +30 dBm. CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y 30 DBM
//Use the fixed reference marker as a reference for deltamarker 2 CALC:DELT2:MREF FIX
//Reset the reference marker to the current maximum of trace 1 CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:MAX //Query the new position of the reference marker CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X? CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y?
Example: Obtaining a Marker Peak List
This example demonstrates how to obtain a marker peak list in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment. It assumes that the basic frequency sweep described in "Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Function Examples" on page 1258 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument.
In this example, the peak search is restricted to the frequency range of 50 MHz to 150 MHz. The top 5 power levels with a peak excursion of 10dB and a minimum of -100 dBm are to be determined and displayed with their marker numbers. The results are sorted by frequency values. The resulting peak list is then exported to a file.
//----------- Configuring the peak search -----------CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:LEFT 50MHz CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:RIGH 150MHz CALC:MARK:PEXC 10DB CALC:THR -100DBM CALC:THR:STAT ON
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:STAT ON CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:LIST:SIZE 5 CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SORT X CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:ANN:LAB ON
//--------------- Retrieving results ------------CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:COUN? CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:X? CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:Y?
//------------ Exporting the peak list -----------MMEM:STOR:PEAK 'PeakList'
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1259
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example: Measuring Noise Density This example demonstrates how to measure noise density using noise markers in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment. It assumes that the basic frequency sweep described in "Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Function Examples" on page 1258 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument.
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NOIS ON //Switches on noise measurement at marker 1.
INIT;*WAI //Performs a measurement and waits for it to end
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NOIS:RES? //Queries the measured noise level (per Hz bandwidth)
Example: Measuring Phase Noise This example demonstrates how to measure phase noise using markers in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment. It assumes that the basic frequency sweep described in "Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Function Examples" on page 1258 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument.
//------------- Configuring the phase noise marker ------------------DET SAMP //Switches to Sample detector
CALC:MARK1 ON //Activates marker1 and sets it to the maximum power level
CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO ON //Activates phase noise marker function
CALC:DELT1 ON CALC:DELT1:X 100kHz
CALC:DELT2 ON CALC:DELT2:X 500kHz
CALC:DELT3 ON CALC:DELT3:X 1MHz
CALC:DELT4 ON CALC:DELT4:X 1.5MHz
//Activates the phase noise measurement function for offsets 100kHz/500kHz/1MHz/1.5MHz.
BAND:VID? //Queries the used VBW (= 0.1*RBW)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1260
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
//-------- Querying the phase noise results ------------------------------
CALC:DELT1:FUNC:PNO:RES? CALC:DELT2:FUNC:PNO:RES? CALC:DELT3:FUNC:PNO:RES? CALC:DELT4:FUNC:PNO:RES? //Queries the difference in level between the peak and the noise power density //measured at the deltamarkers, referred to the carrier power level (dBc)
Example: Measuring the Power in a Channel Using Band Power Markers
This example demonstrates how to measure the power in a specific channel or band using markers in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment. It assumes that the basic frequency sweep described in "Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Function Examples" on page 1258 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument.
//------------- Configuring the band power marker ------------------CALC:MARK1 ON //Activates marker1 and sets it to the maximum power level CALC:MARK1:FUNC:BPOW:STAT ON //Activates the band power measurement for the band around marker 1 CALC:MARK1:FUNC:BPOW:SPAN 30MHz //Sets the bandwidth to be measured to 30 MHz CALC:MARK1:FUNC:BPOW:MODE DENS //Sets the result to be a density (power per Hz bandwidth)
CALC:DELT2 ON //Activates deltamarker2 CALC:DELT2:FUNC:BPOW:STAT ON //Activates the band power measurement for the band around deltamarker 2 CALC:DELT2:FUNC:BPOW:SPAN 30MHz //Sets the bandwidth to be measured to 30 MHz CALC:DELT2:FUNC:BPOW:MODE DENS //Sets the result to be a density (power per Hz bandwidth)
CALC:DELT3 ON //Activates deltamarker3 CALC:DELT3:FUNC:BPOW:STAT ON //Activates the band power measurement for the band around deltamarker 3 CALC:DELT3:FUNC:BPOW:SPAN 30MHz //Sets the bandwidth to be measured to 30 MHz CALC:DELT3:FUNC:BPOW:MODE DENS //Sets the result to be a density (power per Hz bandwidth)
//---------------Retrieving Results------------CALC:MARK1:FUNC:BPOW:RES? //Returns the power sum for the specified bandwidth around marker 1. CALC:DELT2:FUNC:BPOW:RES? //Returns the power sum for the specified bandwidth around deltamarker 2.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1261
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALC:DELT3:FUNC:BPOW:RES? //Returns the power sum for the specified bandwidth around deltamarker 3.
Example: Measuring Characteristic Bandwidths (Using the n dB Down Marker)
This example demonstrates how to measure a characteristic bandwidth using markers in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment. It assumes that the basic frequency sweep described in Chapter 13.15.1, "Programming Example: Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep", on page 1455 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument.
//------------- Configuring the n dB down marker ------------------CALC:MARK1 ON //Activates marker1 and sets it to the maximum power level CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD 3DB //Sets the level offset to 3 dB CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:STAT ON //Activates the n dB down measurement
//---------------Retrieving Results------------CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:RES? //Returns the bandwidth at the specified power offset. CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:FREQ? //Returns the frequencies of the temporary markers at the power offsets CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:QFAC? //Returns the quality factor of the resulting bandwidth
Examples: Demodulating Marker Values and Providing Audio Output
The following examples demonstrate how to demodulate markers and provide audio output in a remote environment.
Example: Providing Audio Output for Individual Marker Values..........................1262 Example: Demodulating and Providing Audio Output Continuously................... 1263
Example: Providing Audio Output for Individual Marker Values
This example demonstrates how to demodulate markers and provide audio output in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment. It assumes that the basic frequency sweep described in Chapter 13.15.1, "Programming Example: Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep", on page 1455 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument.
Audio output is provided for 5s each time the signal reaches its initial maximum, however only if it is higher than -90 dBm (10% of the total y-axis range) in order to ignore noise.
//------------- Configuring the marker demodulation ------------------CALC:MARK1 ON //Activates marker1 and sets it to the maximum power level CALC:MARK1:FUNC:DEM:SEL FM //Selects FM demodulation CALC:MARK1:FUNC:DEM:HOLD 5s
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1262
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
//Defines an output duration of 5s DEM:SQU:LEV 10 //Sets a squelch level for noise DEM:SQU ON //Activates squelching CALC:MARK1:FUNC:DEM ON //Activates demodulation
//------- Performing the measurement ------------------------INIT;*WAI //Performs a measurement and waits for it to end
//---------------Retrieving Results------------//Results are only provided as audio output!
Example: Demodulating and Providing Audio Output Continuously
This example demonstrates how to demodulate markers and provide audio output in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment. It assumes that the basic frequency sweep described in Chapter 13.15.1, "Programming Example: Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep", on page 1455 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument.
//------------- Configuring the marker demodulation ------------------CALC:MARK1 ON //Activates marker1 CALC:MARK1:FUNC:DEM:SEL FM //Selects FM demodulation DEM:SQU:LEV 10 //Sets a squelch level for noise DEM:SQU ON //Activates squelching CALC:MARK1:FUNC:DEM:CONT ON //Activates continuous demodulation
//------- Performing the measurement ------------------------INIT:CONT ON //Performs a measurement and provides continuous audio output
//---------------Retrieving Results------------//Results are only provided as audio output!
Example: Performing a Highly Accurate Frequency Measurement Using the Signal Count Marker
This example demonstrates how to determine highly accurate frequency values using signal count markers in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment. It assumes that the basic frequency sweep described in Chapter 13.15.1, "Programming Example: Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep", on page 1455 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1263
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
//------------- Configuring the signal count marker ------------------CALC:MARK1 ON //Activates marker1 CALC:MARK1:COUN ON //Switches on the frequency counter for marker 1. CALC:MARK1:COUN:RES 1kHz //Sets the resolution of the frequency counter to 1kHz
//------- Performing the measurement ------------------------INIT;*WAI //Performs a measurement and waits for it to end
//---------------Retrieving Results------------CALC:MARK1:COUN:FREQ? //Returns the signal counter value as the precise marker frequency.
13.8.4 Configuring Display Lines
The commands required to configure display lines in a remote environment are described here.
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<dl>.............................................................................................1264 CALCulate<n>:DLINe<dl>:STATe.................................................................................. 1265 CALCulate<n>:FLINe<dl>............................................................................................. 1265 CALCulate<n>:FLINe<dl>:STATe................................................................................... 1265 CALCulate<n>:TLINe<dl>............................................................................................. 1266 CALCulate<n>:TLINe<dl>:STATe................................................................................... 1266
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<dl> <Position>
This command defines the (horizontal) position of a display line.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<dl>
1 | 2
Parameters: <Position>
The value range is variable. You can use any unit you want, the R&S FSW then converts the unit to the currently selected unit. If you omit a unit, the R&S FSW uses the currently selected unit.
*RST:
(state is OFF)
Default unit: DBM
Example:
CALC:DLIN2 -20dBm Positions the second display line at -20 dBm.
Manual operation: See " Horizontal Line 1 / Horizontal Line 2 " on page 559
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1264
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<dl>:STATe <State>
This command turns a display line on and off
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<dl>
1 | 2
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC:DLIN2:STAT ON Turns on display line 2.
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<dl> <Frequency>
This command defines the position of a frequency line.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<dl>
1 to 4
frequency line
Parameters: <Frequency>
Note that you can not set a frequency line to a position that is outside the current span.
Range: 0 Hz to Fmax
*RST:
(STATe to OFF)
Default unit: HZ
Example:
CALC:FLIN2 120MHz Sets frequency line 2 to a frequency of 120 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Vertical Line <x>" on page 559
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<dl>:STATe <State>
This command turns a frequency line on and off
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<dl>
1 to 4
frequency line
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1265
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example:
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
CALC:FLIN2:STAT ON Turns frequency line 2 on.
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<dl> <Time>
This command defines the position of a time line.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<dl>
1 to 4
time line
Parameters: <Time>
Note that you can not set a time line to a position that is higher than the current sweep time.
Range: 0 s to 1600 s
*RST:
(STATe to OFF)
Default unit: S
Example:
CALC:TLIN 10ms Sets the first time line to 10 ms.
Manual operation: See "Vertical Line <x>" on page 559
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<dl>:STATe <State>
This command turns a time line on and off
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<dl>
1 to 4
time line
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC:TLIN:STAT ON Turns the first time line on.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1266
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
13.8.5 Defining Limit Checks
Note that in remote control, upper and lower limit lines are configured using separate commands. Thus, you must decide in advance which you want to configure. The x-values for both upper and lower limit lines are defined as a common control line. This control line is the reference for the y-values for both upper and lower limit lines.
Configuring Limit Lines........................................................................................1267 Managing Limit Lines.......................................................................................... 1276 Checking the Results of a Limit Check............................................................... 1279 Programming Example: Using Limit Lines.......................................................... 1280
13.8.5.1 Configuring Limit Lines
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:COMMent................................................................................ 1267 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol[:DATA]....................................................................... 1268 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:DOMain......................................................................1268 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:MODE........................................................................1268 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:OFFSet...................................................................... 1269 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:SHIFt......................................................................... 1269 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:SPACing.................................................................... 1270 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer[:DATA].......................................................................... 1270 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:MARGin........................................................................1270 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:MODE.......................................................................... 1271 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:OFFSet.........................................................................1271 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:SHIFt............................................................................1271 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:SPACing....................................................................... 1272 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:STATe...........................................................................1272 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:THReshold....................................................................1272 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:NAME......................................................................................1273 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UNIT....................................................................................... 1273 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer[:DATA]...........................................................................1273 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:MARGin........................................................................ 1274 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:MODE........................................................................... 1274 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:OFFSet......................................................................... 1275 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:SHIFt............................................................................ 1275 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:SPACing........................................................................1275 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:STATe........................................................................... 1276 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:THReshold.................................................................... 1276
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:COMMent <Comment>
This command defines a comment for a limit line.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <Comment>
String containing the description of the limit line.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1267
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Manual operation: See " Comment " on page 568
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol[:DATA] <LimitLinePoints>
This command defines the horizontal definition points of a limit line.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <LimitLinePoints>
Variable number of x-axis values. Note that the number of horizontal values has to be the same as the number of vertical values set with CALCulate<n>: LIMit<li>:LOWer[:DATA] or CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>: UPPer[:DATA]. If not, the R&S FSW either adds missing values or ignores surplus values. The unit is Hz or s.
*RST:
-
Default unit: HZ
Manual operation: See " Data Points " on page 569
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:DOMain <SpanSetting>
This command selects the domain of the limit line.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <SpanSetting>
FREQuency | TIME
FREQuency For limit lines that apply to a range of frequencies.
TIME For limit lines that apply to a period of time.
*RST:
FREQuency
Example:
CALC:LIM:CONT:DOM FREQ Select a limit line in the frequency domain.
Manual operation: See " X-Axis " on page 569
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the horizontal limit line scaling.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1268
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
<li>
Parameters: <Mode>
Limit line
ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values (Hz or s).
RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the center frequency (frequency domain) or the left diagram border (time domain).
*RST:
ABSolute
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines an offset for a complete limit line.
Compared to shifting the limit line, an offset does not actually change the limit line definition points.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <Offset>
Numeric value. The unit depends on the scale of the x-axis.
*RST:
0
Default unit: HZ
Manual operation: See " X-Offset " on page 566
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:SHIFt <Distance>
This command moves a complete limit line horizontally.
Compared to defining an offset, this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <Distance>
Numeric value. The unit depends on the scale of the x-axis.
Default unit: HZ
Manual operation: See " Shift x " on page 570
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1269
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:SPACing <InterpolMode>
This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of limit lines from one horizontal point to the next.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <InterpolMode>
LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST:
LIN
Example:
CALC:LIM:CONT:SPAC LIN
Manual operation: See " X-Axis " on page 569
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer[:DATA] <LimitLinePoints>
This command defines the vertical definition points of a lower limit line.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <LimitLinePoints>
Variable number of level values. Note that the number of vertical values has to be the same as the number of horizontal values set with CALCulate<n>: LIMit<li>:CONTrol[:DATA]. If not, the R&S FSW either adds missing values or ignores surplus values. The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UNIT on page 1273.
*RST:
Limit line state is OFF
Default unit: DBM
Manual operation: See " Data Points " on page 569
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:MARGin <Margin>
This command defines an area around a lower limit line where limit check violations are still tolerated.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <Margin>
numeric value
*RST:
0
Default unit: dB
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1270
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Manual operation: See " Margin " on page 569
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the vertical limit line scaling.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <Mode>
ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values. The unit is variable.
RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the reference level (dB).
*RST:
ABSolute
Manual operation: See " X-Axis " on page 569
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines an offset for a complete lower limit line.
Compared to shifting the limit line, an offset does not actually change the limit line definition points.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <Offset>
Numeric value.
*RST:
0
Default unit: dB
Manual operation: See " Y-Offset " on page 567
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:SHIFt <Distance>
This command moves a complete lower limit line vertically.
Compared to defining an offset, this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<li>
Limit line
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1271
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Parameters: <Distance>
Manual operation:
Defines the distance that the limit line moves. The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UNIT on page 1273. Default unit: DB
See " Shift y " on page 570
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:SPACing <InterpolType>
This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of a lower limit line from one horizontal point to the next.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <InterpolType>
LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST:
LIN
Manual operation: See " Y-Axis " on page 569
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:STATe <State>
This command turns a lower limit line on and off.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a limit line with CALCulate<n>: LIMit<li>:NAME on page 1273.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Manual operation: See " Visibility " on page 566
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:THReshold <Threshold>
This command defines a threshold for relative limit lines.
The R&S FSW uses the threshold for the limit check, if the limit line violates the threshold.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1272
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Suffix: <n> <li> Parameters: <Threshold>
Manual operation:
. irrelevant
Limit line
Numeric value. The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UNIT on page 1273.
*RST:
-200 dBm
Default unit: DBM
See " Threshold " on page 568
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:NAME <Name>
This command selects a limit line that already exists or defines a name for a new limit line.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <Name>
String containing the limit line name.
*RST:
REM1 to REM8 for lines 1 to 8
Manual operation: See " Name " on page 568
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UNIT <Unit>
This command defines the unit of a limit line.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <Unit>
DBM | DBPW | WATT | DBUV | DBMV | VOLT | DBUA | AMPere | DB | DBUV_M | DBUA_M | DBM_mhz | DBUV_mhz | DBMV_mhz | DBUa_mhz | DBUV_m | DBUa_m | DBUV_mmhz | DBUa_mmhz | DBPW_mhz | DBPT_mhz | DBPT | (unitless)
If you select a dB-based unit for the limit line, the command automatically turns the limit line into a relative limit line.
*RST:
DBM
Manual operation: See " Y-Axis " on page 569
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer[:DATA] <LimitLinePoints> This command defines the vertical definition points of an upper limit line.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1273
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Suffix: <n> <li> Parameters: <LimitLinePoints>
Manual operation:
. irrelevant
Limit line
Variable number of level values. Note that the number of vertical values has to be the same as the number of horizontal values set with CALCulate<n>: LIMit<li>:CONTrol[:DATA]. If not, the R&S FSW either adds missing values or ignores surplus values. The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UNIT on page 1273.
*RST:
Limit line state is OFF
Default unit: DBM
See " Data Points " on page 569
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:MARGin <Margin>
This command defines an area around an upper limit line where limit check violations are still tolerated.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <Margin>
numeric value
*RST:
0
Default unit: dB
Manual operation: See " Margin " on page 569
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the vertical limit line scaling.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <Mode>
ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values. The unit is variable.
RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the reference level (dB).
*RST:
ABSolute
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1274
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Manual operation: See " X-Axis " on page 569
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines an offset for a complete upper limit line.
Compared to shifting the limit line, an offset does not actually change the limit line definition points.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <Offset>
Numeric value.
*RST:
0
Default unit: dB
Manual operation: See " Y-Offset " on page 567
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:SHIFt <Distance>
This command moves a complete upper limit line vertically.
Compared to defining an offset, this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <Distance>
Defines the distance that the limit line moves. The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UNIT on page 1273.
Manual operation: See " Shift y " on page 570
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:SPACing <InterpolType>
This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of an upper limit line from one horizontal point to the next.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <InterpolType>
LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST:
LIN
Manual operation: See " Y-Axis " on page 569
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1275
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:STATe <State>
This command turns an upper limit line on and off.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a limit line with CALCulate<n>: LIMit<li>:NAME on page 1273.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Manual operation: See " Visibility " on page 566
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:THReshold <Limit>
This command defines an absolute limit for limit lines with a relative scale.
The R&S FSW uses the threshold for the limit check, if the limit line violates the threshold.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <Limit>
Numeric value. The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UNIT on page 1273.
*RST:
-200
Default unit: dBm
Manual operation: See " Threshold " on page 568
13.8.5.2 Managing Limit Lines
Useful commands for managing limit lines described in the R&S FSW User Manual: MMEM:SEL[:ITEM]:LIN:ALL MMEM:STOR:TYPE MMEM:LOAD:TYPE
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1276
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Remote commands exclusive to managing limit lines:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACTive?...................................................................................1277 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:COPY......................................................................................1277 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:DELete.................................................................................... 1277 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:STATe......................................................................................1278 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t>:CHECk.................................................................... 1278 MMEMory:LOAD<n>:LIMit............................................................................................ 1279 MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIMit.......................................................................................... 1279
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACTive?
This command queries the names of all active limit lines.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
irrelevant
Return values: <LimitLines>
String containing the names of all active limit lines in alphabetical order.
Example:
CALC:LIM:ACT? Queries the names of all active limit lines.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Visibility " on page 566
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:COPY <Line>
This command copies a limit line.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <Line>
1 to 8 number of the new limit line
<name> String containing the name of the limit line.
Example:
CALC:LIM1:COPY 2 Copies limit line 1 to line 2. CALC:LIM1:COPY 'FM2' Copies limit line 1 to a new line named FM2.
Manual operation: See " Copy Line " on page 567
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:DELete This command deletes a limit line.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1277
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Suffix: <n>
<li>
Manual operation:
. Window
Limit line
See " Delete Line " on page 567
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:STATe <State>
This command turns the limit check for a specific limit line on and off.
To query the limit check result, use CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:FAIL?.
Note that a new command exists to activate the limit check and define the trace to be checked in one step (see CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t>:CHECk on page 1278).
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
<li>
Limit line
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
Example:
CALC:LIM:STAT ON Switches on the limit check for limit line 1.
Manual operation: See " Disable All Lines " on page 567
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t>:CHECk <State>
This command turns the limit check for a specific trace on and off.
To query the limit check result, use CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:FAIL?.
Note that this command replaces the two commands from previous signal and spectrum analyzers (which are still supported, however):
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t> on page 1452
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:STATe on page 1278
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<li>
Limit line
<t>
Trace
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1278
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Example: Manual operation:
OFF | 0 Switches the function off ON | 1 Switches the function on
CALC:LIM3:TRAC2:CHEC ON Switches on the limit check for limit line 3 on trace 2.
See " Traces to be Checked " on page 566
MMEMory:LOAD<n>:LIMit <FileName>
Loads the limit line from the selected file in .CSV format.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <FileName>
String containing the path and name of the CSV import file.
Example:
MMEM:LOAD:LIM 'C:\TEST.CSV'
Manual operation: See " Import " on page 570
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIMit <FileName>, <LimitLineName>
This command exports limit line data to an ASCII (CSV) file.
For details on the file format see Chapter 8.4.2.4, "Reference: Limit Line File Format", on page 575.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <FileName>
String containing the path and name of the target file.
<LimitLineName> Name of the limit line to be exported.
Example:
MMEM:STOR:LIM 'C:\TEST', 'UpperLimitLine' Stores the limit line named "UpperLimitLine" in the file TEST.CSV.
Manual operation: See " Export " on page 570
13.8.5.3 Checking the Results of a Limit Check
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CLEar[:IMMediate].................................................................... 1279 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:FAIL?...................................................................................... 1280
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CLEar[:IMMediate] This command deletes the result of the current limit check. The command works on all limit lines in all measurement windows at the same time.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1279
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
Suffix: <n>
<li>
Example:
. Window
irrelevant
CALC:LIM:CLE Deletes the result of the limit check.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:FAIL?
This command queries the result of a limit check in the specified window.
Note that for SEM measurements, the limit line suffix <li> is irrelevant, as only one specific SEM limit line is checked for the currently relevant power class.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 884.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<li>
Limit line
Return values: <Result>
0 PASS
1 FAIL
Example:
INIT;*WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end. CALC2:LIM3:FAIL? Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 in window 2.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Limit Check <n> " on page 248 See " Limit Check " on page 282
13.8.5.4 Programming Example: Using Limit Lines
The following examples demonstrate how to work with limit lines in a remote environment. Example: Configuring Limit Lines........................................................................1280 Example: Performing a Limit Check....................................................................1282
Example: Configuring Limit Lines This example demonstrates how to configure 2 limit lines - an upper and a lower limit for a measurement in a remote environment.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1280
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
//------------- Configuing the limit lines --------------------CALC:LIM1:NAME 'FM1' //Names limit line 1 'FM1'.
CALC:LIM1:CONT:MODE ABS //Selects absolute scaling for the horizontal axis. CALC:LIM1:CONT 1 MHz,50MHz,100 MHz,150MHz,200MHz //Defines 5 horizontal definition points for limit line 1. CALC:LIM1:UPP:MODE ABS //Selects an absolute vertical scale for limit line 1. CALC:LIM1:UNIT DBM //Selects the unit dBm for limit line 1. CALC:LIM1:UPP -10,-5,0,-5,-10 //Defines 5 definition points for limit line 1.
CALC:LIM1:UPP:MARG 5dB //Defines an area of 5 dB around limit line 1 where limit check violations //are still tolerated.
CALC:LIM1:UPP:SHIF -10DB //Shifts the limit line 1 by -10 dB. CALC:LIM1:UPP:OFFS -3dB //Defines an additional -3 dB offset for limit line 1.
CALC:LIM3:NAME 'FM3' //Names limit line 3 'FM3'.
CALC:LIM3:LOW:MODE REL //Selects a relative vertical scale for limit line 3. CALC:LIM3:UNIT DB
CALC:LIM3:CONT 1 MHz,50MHz,100 MHz,150MHz,200MHz //Defines 5 horizontal definition points for limit line 3. CALC:LIM3:LOW -90,-60,-40,-60,-90 //Defines 5 definition points relative to the reference level for limit line 3.
CALC:LIM3:LOW:SHIF 2 //Shifts the limit line 3 by 2dB. CALC:LIM3:LOW:OFFS 3 //Defines an additional 3 dB offset for limit line 3.
CALC:LIM3:LOW:THR -200DBM //Defines a power threshold of -200dBm that must be exceeded for limit to be checked
CALC:LIM3:LOW:MARG 5dB //Defines an area of 5dB around limit line 3 where limit check violations //are still tolerated.
//-------------- Storing the limit lines ----------------------MMEM:SEL:CHAN:LIN:ALL ON
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1281
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
MMEM:STOR:TYPE CHAN MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,'LimitLines_FM1_FM3'
Example: Performing a Limit Check
This example demonstrates how to perform a limit check during a basic frequency sweep measurement in a remote environment. The limit lines configured in "Example: Configuring Limit Lines" on page 1280 are assumed to exist and be active.
//--------------Preparing the instrument --------------------*RST //Resets the instrument INIT:CONT OFF //Selects single sweep mode.
//--------------Configuring the measurement ------------FREQ:CENT 100MHz //Defines the center frequency FREQ:SPAN 200MHz //Sets the span to 100 MHz on either side of the center frequency. SENS:SWE:COUN 10 //Defines 10 sweeps to be performed in each measurement. DISP:TRAC1:Y:RLEV 0dBm //Sets the reference level to 0 dBm. TRIG:SOUR IFP TRIG:LEV:IFP -10dBm //Defines triggering when the second intermediate frequency rises to a level //of -10 dBm.
//--------------Configuring the Trace-------------------------DISP:TRAC2 ON DISP:TRAC2:MODE AVER DISP:TRAC3 ON DISP:TRAC3:MODE MAXH //Configures 3 traces: 1 (default): clear/write; 2: average; 3: max hold
//------------- Configuring the limit check ------------------MMEM:LOAD:TYPE REPL MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'LimitLines_FM1_FM3' //Loads the limit lines stored in 'LimitLines_FM1_FM3' CALC:LIM1:NAME 'FM1' CALC:LIM1:UPP:STAT ON //Activates upper limit FM1 as line 1. CALC:LIM3:NAME 'FM3' CALC:LIM3:LOW:STAT ON //Activates lower limit line FM3 as line 3. CALC:LIM:ACT? //Queries the names of all active limit lines //Result: 'FM1,FM3' CALC:LIM1:TRAC3:CHEC ON //Activates the upper limit to be checked against trace3 (maxhold trace)
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1282
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
CALC:LIM3:TRAC2:CHEC ON //Activates the upper limit to be checked against trace2 (average trace) CALC:LIM:CLE //Clears the previous limit check results
//------------- Performing the measurement--------------------INIT;*WAI //Initiates a new measurement and waits until the last sweep has finished.
//-------------- Retrieving limit check results----------------------------
CALC:LIM1:FAIL? //Queries the result of the upper limit line check CALC:LIM3:FAIL? //Queries the result of the lower limit line check
13.9 Managing Settings and Results
The commands required to store and load instrument settings and import and export measurement results in a remote environment are described here.
The tasks for manual operation are described in Chapter 10, "Data Management", on page 635.
Addressing drives
The various drives can be addressed via the "mass storage instrument specifier" <msis> using the conventional Windows syntax. The internal hard disk is addressed by "C:".
For details on storage locations refer to Chapter 10.3.2.2, "Storage Location and Filename", on page 643.
The file names (<FileName> parameter) are given as string parameters enclosed in quotation marks. They also comply with Windows conventions. Windows file names do not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase notation.
Wildcards
The two characters "*" and "?" can be used as "wildcards", i.e., they are variables for a selection of several files. The question mark "?" replaces exactly one character, the asterisk replaces any of the remaining characters in the file name. "*.*" thus means all files in a directory.
Path names
Storage locations can be specified either as absolute (including the entire path) or relative paths (including only subfolders of the current folder). Use the MMEM:CDIR? query to determine the current folder.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1283
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Secure user mode
In secure user mode, settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MHz. Thus, a "Memory full" error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
General Data Storage and Loading Commands................................................. 1284 Selecting the Items to Store................................................................................ 1290 Storing and Loading Instrument Settings............................................................ 1293 Storing or Printing Screenshots.......................................................................... 1298 Storing Measurement Results.............................................................................1310 Test Reports........................................................................................................ 1312 Examples: Managing Data.................................................................................. 1320
13.9.1 General Data Storage and Loading Commands
The following commands are available for all applications.
See also:
FORMat[:DATA] on page 1195
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator...................................................................................... 1284 MMEMory:CATalog.......................................................................................................1285 MMEMory:CATalog:LONG.............................................................................................1285 MMEMory:CDIRectory.................................................................................................. 1286 MMEMory:COMMent.................................................................................................... 1286 MMEMory:COPY......................................................................................................... 1286 MMEMory:DATA.......................................................................................................... 1287 MMEMory:DELete:IMMediate........................................................................................1287 MMEMory:MDIRectory................................................................................................. 1287 MMEMory:MOVE......................................................................................................... 1288 MMEMory:MSIS...........................................................................................................1288 MMEMory:NAME......................................................................................................... 1288 MMEMory:NETWork:DISConnect.................................................................................. 1288 MMEMory:NETWork:MAP.............................................................................................1289 MMEMory:NETWork:UNUSeddrives.............................................................................. 1289 MMEMory:NETWork:USEDdrives.................................................................................. 1289 MMEMory:RDIRectory.................................................................................................. 1290
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator <Separator>
This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format.
Parameters: <Separator>
POINt | COMMa
COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator, e.g. 4,05.
POINt Uses a point as decimal separator, e.g. 4.05.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1284
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Example: Manual operation:
*RST:
*RST has no effect on the decimal separator. Default is POINt.
FORM:DEXP:DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator.
See " Saving the Result Summary (Evaluation List) to a File " on page 261 See " Save Evaluation List " on page 284 See " Export Peak List " on page 552 See " Decimal Separator " on page 614
MMEMory:CATalog <FileName>
This command returns the contents of a particular directory.
Parameters: <FileName>
String containing the path and directory If you leave out the path, the command returns the contents of the directory selected with MMEMory:CDIRectory on page 1286. The path may be relative or absolute. Using wildcards ('*') is possible to query a certain type of files only. If you use a specific file as a parameter, the command returns the name of the file if the file is found in the specified directory, or an error if the file is not found ("-256,"File name not found").
Example:
MMEM:CAT? 'C:\Data\SPOOL?.PNG' Returns all files in C:\Data\ whose names start with SPOOL, have 6 characters and the extension .PNG, e.g.: SPOOL1.PNG,SPOOL2.PNG,SPOOL3.PNG
Example:
MMEM:CAT? 'C:\Data\SPOOL6.PNG' Query whether the file 'SPOOL6.PNG' also exists in the directory; Result:
-256,"File name not found;:MMEMory:CATalog?
'C:\Data\SPOOL6.PNG'
Manual operation: See " Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files" on page 258
MMEMory:CATalog:LONG <Directory>
This command returns the contents of a particular directory with additional information about the files.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1285
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Parameters: <Directory>
String containing the path and directory. If you leave out the path, the command returns the contents of the directory selected with MMEMory:CDIRectory on page 1286. The path may be relative or absolute. Using wildcards ('*') is possible to query a certain type of files only.
MMEMory:CDIRectory <Directory>
This command changes the current directory.
Parameters: <Directory>
String containing the path to another directory. The path may be relative or absolute.
MMEMory:COMMent <Comment>
This command defines a comment for the stored settings.
Parameters: <Comment>
String containing the comment.
Example:
MMEMory:COMMent "ACP measurement with Standard Tetra from 23.05." MMEMory::MMEMory:STORe1:STATe 1, "ACP_T" As a result, in the selection list for recall settings, the comment "ACP measurement with Standard Tetra from 23.05." is added to the ACP entry.
Manual operation: See " Comment " on page 645
MMEMory:COPY <FileName>, <FileName>
This command copies one or more files to another directory.
Parameters: <FileName>
String containing the path and file name of the source file. Special behavior if optional external mixer is active and the destination is C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\: the contents of the entire folder are copied. For details, see "Conversion Loss Tables" on page 408.
<FileName>
String containing the path and name of the target file. The path may be relative or absolute.
Manual operation: See " Import Table " on page 423
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1286
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
MMEMory:DATA <FileName>[, <Data>] MMEMory:DATA? <FileName>
This command writes block data into a file. The delimiter must be set to EOI to obtain error-free data transfer.
When you query the contents of a file, you can save them in a file on the remote control computer.
The command is useful for reading stored settings files or trace data from the instrument or for transferring them to the instrument
Parameters: <Data>
<block_data>
Data block with the following structure. # Hash sign. <number> Length of the length information. <number> Length information of the binary data (number of bytes). <data> Binary data with the indicated <number> of bytes.
Parameters for setting and query: <FileName>
Example:
MMEM:NAME '\Public\User\Testfile.txt' Creates a new file called 'testfile.txt'. MMEM:DATA 'Testfile.txt',#220Contents of the file The parameter means: #2: hash sign and length of the length information (20 bytes = 2 digits) 20: indicates the number of subsequent binary data bytes. Contents of the file: store 20 binary bytes (characters) to the file. MMEM:DATA? 'Testfile.txt' Returns the contents of the file.
MMEMory:DELete:IMMediate <FileName>
This command deletes a file.
Parameters: <FileName>
String containing the path and file name of the file to delete. The path may be relative or absolute.
MMEMory:MDIRectory <Directory> This command creates a new directory.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1287
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Parameters: <Directory>
String containing the path and new directory name The path may be relative or absolute.
MMEMory:MOVE <FileName>, <FileName>
This command moves a file to another directory.
The command also renames the file if you define a new name in the target directory.
If you do not include a path for <NewFileName>, the command just renames the file.
Parameters: <FileName>
String containing the path and file name of the source file.
<FileName>
String containing the path and name of the target file.
Example:
MMEM:MOVE 'C:\TEST01.CFG','SETUP.CFG' Renames TEST01.CFG in SETUP.CFG in directory C:\.
MMEMory:MSIS <Drive>
This command selects the default storage device used by all MMEMory commands.
Parameters: <Drive>
'A:' | 'C:' | ... | 'Z:'
String containing the device drive name
*RST:
n.a.
MMEMory:NAME <FileName>
This command has several purposes, depending on the context it is used in.
It creates a new and empty file.
It defines the file name for screenshots taken with HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]. Note that you have to route the printer output to a file.
Parameters: <FileName>
String containing the path and name of the target file.
Example:
MMEM:NAME 'C:\Data\PRINT1.BMP' Selects the file name.
Manual operation: See "Report Path" on page 673 See "Save" on page 681
MMEMory:NETWork:DISConnect <Drive>[, <State>] This command disconnects a network drive.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1288
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Parameters: <Drive>
<State>
String containing the drive name.
1 | 0 | ON | OFF
Optional: determines whether disconnection is forced or not
1 | ON Disconnection is forced.
0 | OFF Disconnect only if not in use.
*RST:
0
MMEMory:NETWork:MAP <FilePath>, <IP>[, <UserName>, <Password>, <State>]
This command maps a drive to a server or server directory of the network.
Note that you have to allow sharing for a server or folder in Microsoft networks first.
Parameters: <FilePath>
String containing the drive name or path of the directory you want to map.
<IP>
String containing the host name of the computer or the IP address and the share name of the drive. '<\host name or IP address\share name>'
<UserName>
String containing a user name in the network. The user name is optional.
<Password>
String containing the password corresponding to the <UserName>. The password is optional.
<State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
ON | 1 Reconnects at logon with the same user name.
OFF | 0 Does not reconnect at logon.
MMEMory:NETWork:UNUSeddrives This command returns a list of unused network drives.
MMEMory:NETWork:USEDdrives [<State>]
This command returns a list of all network drives in use.
Parameters: <State>
You do not have to use the parameter. If you do not include the parameter, the command returns a list of all drives in use. This is the same behavior as if you were using the parameter OFF.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1289
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
ON | 1 Returns a list of all drives in use including the folder information.
OFF | 0 Returns a list of all drives in use.
MMEMory:RDIRectory <arg0>
This command deletes the indicated directory.
Parameters: <arg0>
String containing the path of the directory to delete. Note that the directory you want to remove must be empty.
13.9.2 Selecting the Items to Store
The following commands select the items to be included in the configuration file.
Depending on the used command, either the items from the entire instrument (MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]...), or only those from the currently selected channel (MMEM:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]...) are stored.
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:ALL.........................................................................1290 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL....................................................................................... 1290 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:DEFault...................................................................1291 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault................................................................................. 1291 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:HWSettings............................................................. 1291 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings............................................................................1291 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL............................................................... 1291 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL..............................................................................1291 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:NONE..................................................................... 1292 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE................................................................................... 1292 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:SCData................................................................... 1292 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SCData................................................................................. 1292 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:SPECtrogram.......................................................... 1292 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:SGRam................................................................... 1292 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SPECtrogram......................................................................... 1292 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SGRam................................................................................. 1292 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive].......................................................1293 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1...3>[:ACTive]........................................................... 1293 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL..................................................... 1293 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL....................................................................1293
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:ALL MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL
This command includes all items when storing or loading a configuration file.
The items are:
Hardware configuration: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings on page 1291
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1290
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Limit lines: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL on page 1291 Spectrogram data: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SGRam on page 1292 Trace data: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1...3>[:ACTive]
on page 1293 Transducers: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL on page 1293
Example:
MMEM:SEL:ALL
Manual operation: See " Items: " on page 645
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:DEFault MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault
This command selects the current settings as the only item to store to and load from a configuration file.
Manual operation: See " Items: " on page 645
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:HWSettings <State> MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings <State>
This command includes or excludes measurement (hardware) settings when storing or loading a configuration file.
Measurement settings include:
general channel configuration
measurement hardware configuration including markers
limit lines Note that a configuration may include no more than 8 limit lines. This number includes active limit lines as well as inactive limit lines that were used last. Therefore the combination of inactivate limit lines depends on the sequence of use with MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 1294.
color settings
configuration for the hardcopy output
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
MMEM:SEL:HWS ON
Manual operation: See " Items: " on page 645
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL <State> MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL <State>
This command includes or excludes all limit lines (active and inactive) when storing or loading a configuration file.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1291
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Parameters: <State>
Example: Manual operation:
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
MMEM:SEL:LIN:ALL ON
See " Items: " on page 645
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:NONE MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE
This command does not include any of the following items when storing or loading a configuration file.
Hardware configuration: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings on page 1291 Limit lines: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL on page 1291 Spectrogram data: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SGRam on page 1292 Trace data: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1...3>[:ACTive]
on page 1293 Transducers: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL on page 1293
Example:
MMEM:SEL:NONE
Manual operation: See " Items: " on page 645
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:SCData <State> MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SCData <State>
This command includes or excludes source calibration data for an optional external generator when storing or loading a configuration file.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
MMEM:SEL:SCD ON Adds the source calibration data to the list of data subsets.
Manual operation: See " Items: " on page 645
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:SPECtrogram <State> MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:SGRam <State> MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SPECtrogram <State> MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SGRam <State>
This command includes or excludes spectrogram data when storing or loading a configuration file.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1292
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Example: Manual operation:
MMEM:SEL:SGR ON Adds the spectrogram data to the list of data subsets.
See " Items: " on page 645
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive] <State> MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1...3>[:ACTive] <State>
This command includes or excludes trace data when storing or loading a configuration file.
Suffix: <1...3>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0, i.e. no traces are stored
Example:
MMEM:SEL:TRAC ON
Manual operation: See " Items: " on page 645
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL <State> MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL <State>
This command includes or excludes transducer factors when storing or loading a configuration file.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
MMEM:SEL:TRAN:ALL ON
Manual operation: See " Items: " on page 645 See " Save " on page 719
13.9.3 Storing and Loading Instrument Settings
See also:
INSTrument[:SELect] on page 877 to select the channel.
MMEMory:CLEar:ALL...................................................................................................1294 MMEMory:CLEar:STATe............................................................................................... 1294 MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO................................................................................................ 1294 MMEMory:LOAD:STATe................................................................................................1294 MMEMory:LOAD:TYPE................................................................................................ 1295 MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe..................................................................................... 1296 MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe:NEXT............................................................................ 1296 MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:TYPE...................................................................................... 1297 SYSTem:PRESet......................................................................................................... 1297 SYSTem:PRESet:CHANnel[:EXEC]............................................................................... 1298
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1293
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
MMEMory:CLEar:ALL
This command deletes all instrument configuration files in the current directory.
You can select the directory with MMEMory:CDIRectory on page 1286.
Example:
MMEM:CLE:ALL
MMEMory:CLEar:STATe <1>, <FileName>
This command deletes an instrument configuration file.
Parameters: <1>
<FileName>
String containing the path and name of the file to delete. The string may or may not contain the file's extension.
Example:
MMEM:CLE:STAT 1,'TEST'
MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO <1>, <FileName>
This command restores an instrument configuration and defines that configuration as the default state.
The default state is restored after a preset (*RST) or after you turn on the R&S FSW.
Parameters: <1>
<FileName>
'Factory' Restores the factory settings as the default state.
'<file_name> String containing the path and name of the configuration file. Note that only instrument settings files can be selected for the startup recall function; channel files cause an error.
Example:
MMEM:LOAD:AUTO 1,'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\TEST'
Manual operation: See " Startup Recall " on page 647
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe <1>, <FileName>
This command restores and activates the instrument configuration stored in a *.dfl file.
Note that files with other formats cannot be loaded with this command.
The contents that are reloaded from the file are defined by the last selection made either in the "Save/Recall" dialogs (manual operation) or through the MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM] commands (remote operation; the settings are identical in both cases).
By default, the selection is limited to the user settings ("User Settings" selection in the dialogs, HWSettings in SCPI). The selection is not reset by [Preset] or *RST.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1294
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
As a consequence, the results of a SCPI script using the MMEMory:LOAD:STATe command without a previous MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM] command may vary, depending on previous actions in the GUI or in previous scripts, even if the script starts with the *RST command.
It is therefore recommended that you use the appropriate MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM] command before using MMEMory:LOAD:STATe.
Parameters: <1>
<FileName>
String containing the path and name of the file to load. The string may or may not include the file's extension.
Example:
MMEM:SEL:ALL //Save all items (User Settings, All Traces, All Limit Lines) from the R&S FSW. MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\TEST01' //Reloads all items In the "Recall" dialog, select only "User Settings" and "All Limit Lines". MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\TEST01' //Reloads user settings and all limit lines. *RST //Reset instrument. MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\TEST01' //Selected items are retained. Reloads user settings and all limit lines. Restart the instrument. (Switch the [ON/OFF] key off and on). MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\TEST01' // Selected items are set to default. Reloads only the user settings.
Manual operation:
See " Recall " on page 642 See " Recall in New Channel / Recall in Current Channel " on page 646
MMEMory:LOAD:TYPE <Type>
This command defines whether the channels that will be loaded with the subsequent MMEM:LOAD:STAT command will replace the current channel or activate a new channel.
Parameters: <Type>
NEW | REPLace
NEW The loaded settings will be activated in a new channel.
REPLace The loaded settings will replace the currently active channel.
*RST:
NEW
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1295
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Example:
INST:SEL 'SPECTRUM2' //Selects channel 'SPECTRUM2'. MMEM:STOR:TYP CHAN //Specifies that channel data is to be stored. MMEM:STOR:STAT 1, 'C:\Analyzer\Spectrum' //Stores the settings from channel //'SPECTRUM2' to the file 'C:\Analyzer\Spectrum'. MMEM:LOAD:TYPE NEW //Specifies that channels are to be loaded //in a new channel. MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1, 'C:\Analyzer\Spectrum' //Loads the channel from the file //'C:\Analyzer\Spectrum' to the new channel //'SPECTRUM2*'.
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe <1>, <FileName>
This command saves the current instrument configuration in a *.dfl file.
Secure User Mode
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory device.
For details, see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37.
Suffix: <1|2>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <1>
<FileName>
String containing the path and name of the target file. The file extension is .dfl.
Example:
MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,'Save' Saves the current instrument settings in the file Save.dfl.
Manual operation: See " Save File " on page 645 See " Save " on page 719
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe:NEXT
This command saves the current instrument configuration in a *.dfl file.
The file name depends on the one you have set with MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe on page 1296. This command adds a consecutive number to the file name.
Secure User Mode
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1296
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory device.
For details, see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37.
Suffix: <1|2>
. irrelevant
Example:
MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,'Save' Saves the current instrument settings in the file Save.dfl. MMEM:STOR:STAT:NEXT Saves the current instrument settings in the file Save_001.dfl MMEM:STOR:STAT:NEXT Saves the current instrument settings in the file Save_002.dfl
Manual operation: See " Save File " on page 645
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:TYPE <Type>
This command defines whether the data from the entire instrument or only from the current channel is stored with the subsequent MMEM:STOR... command.
Suffix: <1|2>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <Type>
INSTrument | CHANnel
INSTrument Stores data from the entire instrument.
CHANnel Stores data from an individual channel.
*RST:
INST
Example:
INST:SEL 'SPECTRUM2' Selects channel'SPECTRUM2'. MMEM:STOR:TYPE CHAN Specifies that channel data is to be stored.
SYSTem:PRESet
This command presets the R&S FSW. It is identical to *RST.
Example:
SYST:PRES
Usage:
Event
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1297
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
SYSTem:PRESet:CHANnel[:EXEC]
This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel.
Use INST:SEL to select the channel.
For details see Chapter 10.1, "Restoring the Default Instrument Configuration (Preset)", on page 635.
Example:
INST:SEL 'Spectrum2' Selects the channel for "Spectrum2". SYST:PRES:CHAN:EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the "Spectrum2"channel.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Preset Channel" on page 352
13.9.4 Storing or Printing Screenshots
Useful commands to configure screenshots described elsewhere
MMEMory:NAME on page 1288
Remote commands exclusive to configuring screenshots
DISPlay:LOGO............................................................................................................ 1299 HCOPy:ABORt............................................................................................................ 1299 HCOPy:CONTent......................................................................................................... 1299 HCOPy:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci>..................................................................................... 1300 HCOPy:CMAP<it>:HSL................................................................................................ 1301 HCOPy:CMAP<it>:PDEFined........................................................................................ 1301 HCOPy:DESTination<1|2>............................................................................................ 1302 HCOPy:DEVice:COLor................................................................................................. 1303 HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2>.................................................................................. 1303 HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]............................................................................................. 1304 HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]:NEXT....................................................................................1304 HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TEXT................................................................................1304 HCOPy:PAGE:COUNt:STATe........................................................................................ 1304 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:BOTTom...........................................................................1305 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:LEFT............................................................................... 1305 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:RIGHt.............................................................................. 1305 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:TOP.................................................................................1306 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:UNIT................................................................................1306 HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2>................................................................................... 1306 HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow<1|2>:CHANnel:STATe............................................................... 1307 HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow<1|2>:COUNt............................................................................ 1307 HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow<1|2>:SCALe.............................................................................1307 HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow<1|2>:STATe..............................................................................1308 HCOPy:TDSTamp:STATe<1|2>......................................................................................1309
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1298
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt.........................................................1309 SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]...................................................... 1309 SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect<1|2>................................................................ 1309
DISPlay:LOGO <State>
Activates/deactivates the printout of the Rohde & Schwarz company logo at the top of each page.
Parameters: <State>
1 | 0 | ON | OFF
1 | ON Logo is printed.
0 | OFF Logo is not printed.
*RST:
1
Example:
DISP:LOGO OFF
Manual operation: See " Print Logo " on page 656
HCOPy:ABORt
This command aborts a running hardcopy output.
Example:
HCOP:ABOR
HCOPy:CONTent <arg0>
This command determines the type of content included in the printout.
This setting is independent of the printing device.
Parameters: <arg0>
WINDows | HCOPy
WINDows Includes only the selected windows in the printout. All currently active windows for the current channel (or "MultiView") are available for selection. How many windows are printed on a each page of the printout is defined by HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow<1|2>: COUNt on page 1307. This option is not available when copying to the clipboard (HCOP:DEST 'SYST:COMM:CLIP' or an image file (see HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2> on page 1303). If the destination is currently set to an image file or the clipboard, it is automatically changed to be a PDF file for the currently selected printing device.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1299
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Example: Manual operation:
HCOPy Selects all measurement results displayed on the screen for the current channel (or "MultiView"): diagrams, traces, markers, marker lists, limit lines, etc., including the channel bar and status bar, for printout on a single page. Displayed items belonging to the software user interface (e.g. softkeys) are not included. The size and position of the elements in the printout is identical to the screen display.
*RST:
HCOPy
HCOP:DEST1 'SYST:COMM:CLIP' HCOP:CONT WIND HCOP:DEST1? //Result: 'MMEM' HCOP:DEV:LANG1? //Result: 'PDF' "Print to clipboard" is automatically switched to "print to PDF file" when the contents are switched to "multiple windows".
See " Print Screenshot " on page 656 See " Print Multiple Windows " on page 656
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci>
This command defines the color scheme for print jobs.
For details see " Print Colors " on page 700.
Suffix: <it>
. Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined. For more information see Chapter 13.10.5.3, "CMAP Suffix Assignment", on page 1362.
<ci>
See table below
Example:
HCOP:CMAP:DEF2 Selects the optimized color set for the color settings of a printout.
Manual operation: See " Print Colors " on page 700
Gui setting
Description
Remote command
"Screen Colors (Print)" Selects the current screen colors for the
HCOP:CMAP:DEF1
printout. The background is always printed in
white and the grid in black.
"Optimized Colors"
Selects an optimized color setting for the printout to improve the visibility of the colors (default setting). Trace 1 is blue, trace 2 black, trace 3 green, and the markers are turquoise. The background is always printed in white and the grid in black.
HCOP:CMAP:DEF2
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1300
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Gui setting
Description
Remote command
"User Defined Colors" Selects the user-defined color setting.
HCOP:CMAP:DEF3
"Screen Colors (Screenshot)"
Selects the current screen colors without any HCOP:CMAP:DEF4 changes for a screenshot.
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:HSL <hue>, <sat>, <lum>
This command selects the color for various screen elements in print jobs.
Suffix: <it>
. Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined. For more information see Chapter 13.10.5.3, "CMAP Suffix Assignment", on page 1362.
Parameters: <hue>
hue tint
Range:
0 to 1
<sat>
sat saturation
Range:
0 to 1
<lum>
lum brightness
Range: 0 to 1
Example:
HCOP:CMAP2:HSL 0.3,0.8,1.0 Changes the grid color
Manual operation: See "Defining User-specific Colors" on page 702
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:PDEFined <Color>
This command selects a predefined color for various screen elements in print jobs.
Suffix: <it>
. 1..n Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined. For more information see Chapter 13.10.5.3, "CMAP Suffix Assignment", on page 1362.
Parameters: <Color>
BLACk | BLUE | BROWn | GREen | CYAN | RED | MAGenta | YELLow | WHITe | DGRay | LGRay | LBLue | LGReen | LCYan | LRED | LMAGenta
Example:
HCOP:CMAP2:PDEF GRE
Manual operation: See " Predefined Colors " on page 701
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1301
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> <arg0>
This command selects the destination of a print job.
Note: To print a screenshot to a file, see HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2> on page 1303.
Suffix: <1|2>
. Printing device.
Parameters: <arg0>
'MMEM' Activates "Print to file". Thus, if the destination of the print function is set to "printer" (see HCOP:DEST1 'SYSTem:COMMuni cate:PRINter' or HCOP:DEV:LANG GDI), the output is redirected to a .PRN file using the selected printer driver. Select the file name with MMEMory:NAME. Note: To save a screenshot to a file, see HCOPy:DEVice: LANGuage<1|2> on page 1303.
'SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter' Sends the hardcopy to a printer and deactivates "print to file". Select the printer with SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter: SELect<1|2> .
'SYSTem:COMMunicate:CLIPboard' Sends the hardcopy to the clipboard.
*RST:
'SYST:COMM:CLIP'
Example:
To print on a printer:
//Destination: printer, deactivate "print to file" HCOP:DEST1 'SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter' //Define the printer name SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL 'myFavoritePrinter' //Print HCOP:IMM
Example:
To print to a *PRN file:
//Destination: printer HCOP:DEV:LANG GDI //Define the printer name SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL 'myFavoritePrinter' //Redirect the printer output to a file HCOP:DEST1 'MMEM' //Define file name MMEM:NAME 'C:\R_S\instr\user\MeasurementTestReport.png' //Print HCOP:IMM
Manual operation:
See "Destination: Clipboard " on page 661 See "Destination: Printer " on page 661 See " Print to file " on page 662
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1302
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor <State>
This command turns color printing on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
ON | 1 Color printing
OFF | 0 Black and white printing
*RST:
1
Example:
HCOP:DEV:COL ON
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2> <arg0>
This command selects the file format for a print job or to store a screenshot to a file.
Suffix: <1|2>
. 1|2 Printing device.
Parameters: <arg0>
GDI | BMP | PNG | JPEG | JPG | DOC | PDF | SVG | RTF
GDI Graphics Device Interface Default format for output to a printer configured under Windows. Must be selected for output to the printer interface. Can be used for output to a file. The printer driver configured under Windows is used to generate a printer-specific file format.
BMP | JPG | PNG | PDF | SVG Data format for output to files
DOC | PDF File type for test reports Available for HCOP:MODE REPort
Example:
To print a screenshot to a PNG file:
//Destination: PNG file HCOP:DEV:LANG PNG //Define file name MMEM:NAME 'C:\R_S\instr\user\MeasurementTestReport.png' //Print HCOP:IMM
Manual operation:
See "Destination: File " on page 661 See "File type" on page 672 See "File type" on page 681
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1303
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]
This command initiates a print job.
If you are printing to a file, the file name depends on MMEMory:NAME.
Suffix: <1|2>
. Printing device.
Manual operation: See " Print " on page 659 See "Save" on page 681
HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]:NEXT
This command initiates a print job.
If you are printing to a file, the file name depends on MMEMory:NAME. This command adds a consecutive number to the file name.
Suffix: <1|2>
. Printing device.
Manual operation: See " Print " on page 659
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TEXT <arg0>
This command defines a comment to be added to the printout.
Suffix:
.
<1|2>
1|2
Parameters: <arg0>
String containing the comment.
Manual operation: See " Comment " on page 656
HCOPy:PAGE:COUNt:STATe <arg0>
This command includes or excludes the page number for printouts consisting of multiple pages (HCOPy:CONTent on page 1299).
Parameters: <arg0>
1 | 0 | ON | OFF
1 | ON The page number is printed.
0 | OFF The page number is not printed.
*RST:
1
Example:
HCOP:PAGE:COUN:STAT ON
Manual operation: See " Print Page Count " on page 657
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1304
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:BOTTom <arg0>
This command defines the margin at the bottom of the printout page on which no elements are printed. The margins are defined according to HCOPy:PAGE: MARGin<1|2>:UNIT on page 1306.
Suffix: <1|2>
. 1|2 Printing device.
Parameters: <arg0>
*RST:
4.23 mm
Example:
HCOP:PAGE:MARG2:BOTT 2
Manual operation: See " Margins " on page 663
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:LEFT <arg0>
This command defines the margin at the left side of the printout page on which no elements are printed. The margins are defined according to HCOPy:PAGE: MARGin<1|2>:UNIT on page 1306.
Suffix: <1|2>
. 1|2 Printing device.
Parameters: <arg0>
*RST:
4.23 mm
Example:
HCOP:PAGE:MARG2:LEFT 2
Manual operation: See " Margins " on page 663
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:RIGHt <arg0>
This command defines the margin at the right side of the printout page on which no elements are printed. The margins are defined according to HCOPy:PAGE: MARGin<1|2>:UNIT on page 1306.
Suffix: <1|2>
. 1|2 Printing device.
Parameters: <arg0>
*RST:
4.23 mm
Example:
HCOP:PAGE:MARG2:RIGH 2
Manual operation: See " Margins " on page 663
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1305
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:TOP <arg0>
This command defines the margin at the top of the printout page on which no elements are printed. The margins are defined according to HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:UNIT on page 1306.
Suffix: <1|2>
. 1|2 Printing device.
Parameters: <arg0>
*RST:
4.23 mm
Example:
HCOP:PAGE:MARG2:TOP 2
Manual operation: See " Margins " on page 663
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:UNIT <arg0>
This command defines the unit in which the margins for the printout page are configured.
Suffix: <1|2>
. 1|2 Printing device.
Parameters: <arg0>
MM | IN
MM millimeters
IN inches
*RST:
MM
Example:
HCOP:PAGE:MARG2:BOTT 2
Manual operation: See " Margins " on page 663
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2> <arg0>
The command selects the page orientation of the printout.
The command is only available if the output device is a printer or a PDF file.
Suffix: <1|2>
. 1|2 Printing device.
Parameters: <arg0>
LANDscape | PORTrait
*RST:
PORTrait
Example:
HCOP:DEV:LANG1 PDF HCOP:PAGE:ORI2 LAND
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1306
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Manual operation: See " Orientation " on page 663
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow<1|2>:CHANnel:STATe <arg0>, <arg1>
This command selects all windows of the specified channel to be included in the printout for HCOPy:CONTent on page 1299.
Suffix: <1|2>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <arg0>
String containing the name of the channel. For a list of available channel types use INSTrument:LIST? on page 875.
<arg1>
1 | 0 | ON | OFF
1 | ON The channel windows are included in the printout.
0 | OFF The channel windows are not included in the printout.
*RST:
1
Example:
HCOP:CONT WIND HCOP:PAGE:WIND2:CHAN 'IQ Analyzer',0 HCOP:PAGE:WIND2:STAT 'IQ Analyzer','1',1 Prints only window 1 in the IQ Analyzer channel.
Manual operation: See " Print Multiple Windows " on page 656
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow<1|2>:COUNt <arg0>
This command defines how many windows are displayed on a single page of the printout for HCOPy:CONTent on page 1299.
Suffix: <1|2>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <arg0>
integer
*RST:
1
Example:
HCOP:PAGE:WIND2:COUN 2
Manual operation: See " Windows Per Page " on page 663
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow<1|2>:SCALe <arg0>
This command determines the scaling of the windows in the printout for HCOPy: CONTent on page 1299.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1307
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Suffix: <1|2> Parameters: <arg0>
Example: Manual operation:
. irrelevant
1 | 0 | ON | OFF
1 | ON Each window is scaled to fit the page size optimally, not regarding the aspect ratio of the original display. If more than one window is printed on one page (see HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow<1|2>: COUNt on page 1307), each window is printed in equal size. ("Size to fit")
0 | OFF Each window is printed as large as possible while maintaining the aspect ratio of the original display. ("Maintain aspect ratio")
*RST:
1
HCOP:PAGE:WIND2:SCAL 0
See " Scaling " on page 663
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow<1|2>:STATe <arg0>, <arg1>, <arg2>
This command selects the windows to be included in the printout for HCOPy:CONTent on page 1299.
Suffix: <1|2>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <arg0>
String containing the name of the channel. For a list of available channel types use INSTrument:LIST? on page 875.
<arg1>
String containing the name of the existing window. By default, the name of a window is the same as its index. To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active channel, use the LAYout:CATalog[:WINDow]? query.
<arg2>
1 | 0 | ON | OFF
1 | ON The window is included in the printout.
0 | OFF The window is not included in the printout.
*RST:
1
Example:
HCOP:PAGE:WIND2:STAT 'IQ Analyzer','1',1
Manual operation: See " Print Multiple Windows " on page 656
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1308
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
HCOPy:TDSTamp:STATe<1|2> <arg0>
This command includes or excludes the time and date in the printout.
Suffix: <1|2>
. 1|2 Printing device.
Parameters: <arg0>
1 | 0 | ON | OFF
1 | ON The time and date are printed.
0 | OFF The time and date are not printed.
*RST:
1
Manual operation: See " Print Date and Time " on page 657
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt
This command queries the name of the first available printer.
To query the name of other installed printers, use SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter: ENUMerate[:NEXT] on page 1309. Manual operation: See " Printer Name " on page 661
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]
This command queries the name of available printers.
You have to use SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt on page 1309 for this command to work properly.
Manual operation: See " Printer Name " on page 661
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect<1|2> <arg0>
This command selects the printer that processes jobs sent by the R&S FSW.
Use HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> to select another output destination.
Suffix: <1|2>
. 1|2 Printing device.
Parameters: <arg0>
String containing the printer name. Use
�SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt on page 1309and
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1309
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Manual operation:
�SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT] on page 1309 to query all available printers.
*RST:
NONE
See " Printer Name " on page 661
13.9.5 Storing Measurement Results
The following commands can be used to store the results of a measurement.
Useful commands for storing results described elsewhere: FORMat[:DATA] on page 1195 MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe on page 1201 FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes on page 1200
Remote commands exclusive to storing results:
FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer............................................................................................1310 MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST...........................................................................................1310 MMEMory:STORe<n>:PEAK......................................................................................... 1311 MMEMory:STORe<n>:SGRam...................................................................................... 1311 MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPECtrogram..............................................................................1311 MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPURious.................................................................................. 1312
FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer <State>
If enabled, additional instrument and measurement settings are included in the header of the export file for result data. If disabled, only the pure result data from the selected traces and tables is exported.
See Chapter 8.6.6, "Reference: ASCII File Export Format", on page 619 for details.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Manual operation: See " Include Instrument & Measurement Settings " on page 613
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST <FileName>
This command exports the SEM and spurious emission list evaluation to a file.
The file format is *.dat.
Secure User Mode
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1310
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory device.
For details, see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <FileName>
String containing the path and name of the target file.
Example:
MMEM:STOR:LIST 'test' Stores the current list evaluation results in the test.dat file.
Manual operation:
See " Saving the Result Summary (Evaluation List) to a File " on page 261 See " Save Evaluation List " on page 284
MMEMory:STORe<n>:PEAK <FileName>
This command exports the marker peak list to a file.
Secure User Mode
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory device.
For details, see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <FileName>
String containing the path,name and extension of the target file.
Example:
MMEM:STOR:PEAK 'test.dat' Saves the current marker peak list in the file test.dat.
Manual operation: See " Export Peak List " on page 552
MMEMory:STORe<n>:SGRam <FileName> MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPECtrogram <FileName>
This command exports spectrogram data to an ASCII file.
The file contains the data for every frame in the history buffer. The data corresponding to a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded.
Note that, depending on the size of the history buffer, the process of exporting the data can take a while.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1311
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Secure User Mode
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory device.
For details, see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <FileName>
String containing the path and name of the target file.
Example:
MMEM:STOR:SGR 'Spectrogram' Copies the spectrogram data to a file.
Manual operation: See " Export Trace to ASCII File " on page 614
MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPURious <FileName>
This command exports the marker peak list available for spurious emission measurements to a file.
Secure User Mode
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory device.
For details, see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <FileName>
String containing the path and name of the target file.
Example:
MMEM:STOR:SPUR 'test' Saves the current marker peak list in the file test.dat.
13.9.6 Test Reports
Commands to create test reports described elsewhere. HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2> on page 1303 HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>] on page 1304
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1312
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
MMEMory:NAME on page 1288
HCOPy:MODE.............................................................................................................1313 HCOPy:TREPort:APPend............................................................................................. 1313 HCOPy:TREPort:DESCription....................................................................................... 1314 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:DEFault.....................................................................................1314 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:CONTrol...................................................... 1314 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:TEXT.......................................................... 1314 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:TITLe.......................................................... 1315 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:STATe.......................................................................... 1315 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LIST?........................................................................................1316 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO....................................................................................... 1316 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO:CONTrol......................................................................... 1316 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect...................................................................................... 1316 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:CATalog?................................................................... 1317 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:DELete...................................................................... 1317 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:LOAD........................................................................ 1317 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:SAVE......................................................................... 1317 HCOPy:TREPort:NEW................................................................................................. 1318 HCOPy:TREPort:PAGesize........................................................................................... 1318 HCOPy:TREPort:PAGecount:STATe...............................................................................1318 HCOPy:TREPort:PCOLors[:STATe]................................................................................1319 HCOPy:TREPort:TDSTamp[:STATe]...............................................................................1319 HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove.................................................................................... 1319 HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove:ALL............................................................................. 1319 HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe.................................................................................................1320 HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe:STATe...................................................................................... 1320 MMEMory:RAW........................................................................................................... 1320
HCOPy:MODE <Mode>
Parameters: <Mode>
SCReen HCOPy:IMMediate prints the current screen contents.
REPort HCOPy:IMMediate generates a measurement report.
*RST:
SCReen
Example:
HCOP:MODE REPort HCOP Creates a file containing the measurement report.
Manual operation: See "Save" on page 681
HCOPy:TREPort:APPend
This command adds the current measurement results to the test report.
The saved data depends on the items you have selected with HCOPy:TREPort: ITEM:SELect on page 1316.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1313
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
Perform a measurement, then: HCOP:TREP:NEW Creates a new test report with the results of the first measurement. Perform another measurement, then: HCOP:TREP:APP Adds the results of the second measurement to the test report.
Event
See " Report Append" on page 680
HCOPy:TREPort:DESCription <Description>
This command defines the description of the test report as shown on its title page.
Parameters: <Description>
String containing the description of the test report.
Example:
HCOP:TREP:DESC 'A short summary of the test report.' Adds a description to the test report.
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:DEFault
Example:
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:DEF Restores the default test report configuration.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Default" on page 680
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:CONTrol <Repetition>
This command selects how often the items in the report header are displayed in the document.
Example:
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:LINE4:TITL '' HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:LINE4:TEXT '' HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:LINE4:CONT NEV Removes line 4 from the header of the test report.
Manual operation: See "Visibility" on page 677
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:TEXT <Description>
This command defines a descriptive text for one of the items part of the report header.
Use HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:TITLe on page 1315 to define custom titles for each item.
Use HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:CONTrol to select the condition under which each item is shown.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1314
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Parameters: <Description> Example:
Manual operation:
String containing the description of one of the value fields. By default, the value fields of the items are empty.
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:LINE3:TITL 'Device under Test' Renames the third title into "Device under Test". HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:LINE3:TEXT 'Some Device' Labels the third title as "Some Device".
See "Value" on page 677
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:TITLe <Title>
This command defines a custom name for one of the items part of the report header.
Use HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:TEXT to add a value to each item.
Use HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:CONTrol to select the condition under which each item is shown.
Parameters: <Title>
String containing the title of the item. The default titles are as follows: � Line 1: "Heading" � Line 2: "Meas Type" � Line 3: "Equipment under Test" � Line 4: "Manufacturer" � Line 5: "OP Condition" Make sure that the title string is not too long, because strings that are too long could mess up the layout of the report.
Example:
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:LINE3:TITL 'Device under Test' Renames the third title into "Device under Test".
Manual operation: See "Title" on page 677
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:STATe <State>
This command includes or excludes the complete set of measurement information from the test report.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
ON
Example:
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:STAT ON Includes the measurement information in the test report.
Manual operation: See "State" on page 677
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1315
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LIST? [<ChannelType>]
This command queries the selected information to be included in the test report for a specific channel type.
Parameters: <ChannelType>
Selects the channel type that you want to query the test report configuration for. When you omit the parameter, the command returns the configuration of the currently selected channel.
Example:
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:LIST? SAN Queries the items that are included in the test reports of the Spectrum application.
Usage:
Query only
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO <FileName>
This command selects a graphic (for example a company logo) that is shown at the top of each page in the test report.
Use HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO:CONTrol on page 1316 to select the conditions under which the picture is shown.
Parameters: <FileName>
String containing the location and name of the picture.
Example:
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:LOGO 'C:\aPicture.jpg' Includes a picture at the top of each page of the report.
Manual operation: See "Logo" on page 678
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO:CONTrol <Repetition> This command selects how often the logo is displayed in the document. Manual operation: See "Visibility" on page 677
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect
This command defines the type of information that a test report is made up out of.
Parameters: <Item>
String containing the information you want to include in the test report. Note that the items, separated by commas, have to be written into one string (see example below). The available items depend on the application you are using. See the tables below for a short description of each item. Per default, some items are selected (see tables below).
Example:
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:SEL 'SETT,MARK,SRES,DIAG'
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1316
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Manual operation: See "Select All / Select None" on page 679
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:CATalog?
This command queries the test report templates available in the default report directory (and its subdirectories).
Return values: <Templates>
String containing the name of the templates as a comma-separated list.
Example:
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:TEMP:CAT? would return, e.g.: 'TemplateX, TemplateY, TemplateZ'
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Template name" on page 679
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:DELete <Template>
This command deletes a test report template.
Parameters: <Template>
String containing the name of the template.
Example:
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:TEMP:DEL 'myTemplate' Deletes a test report template.
Usage:
Event
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:LOAD <Template>
This command loads a test report template.
Parameters: <Template>
String containing the name of the template.
Example:
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:TEMP:LOAD 'myTemplate' Loads a test report template.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Load" on page 680
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:SAVE <Template>
This command saves a test report template in XML format.
Parameters: <Template>
String containing the name of the template. The .xml file extension is added automatically.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1317
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:TEMP:SAVE 'myTemplate' Saves a test report template.
Event
See "Save" on page 680
HCOPy:TREPort:NEW
This command creates a new dataset for a new test report.
Creating a new test report deletes all previously saved datasets. The current measurement results are added as the first dataset to the new report.
The R&S FSW saves the data selected with HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect on page 1316.
To save the report, use HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>] on page 1304.
Example:
HCOP:TREP:NEW Creates a dataset for a new test report.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See " Report New" on page 680
HCOPy:TREPort:PAGesize <Size>
This command selects the size of the test report document.
Parameters: <Size>
A4 Document pages have an A4 size.
US Document pages have a US letter size.
*RST:
A4
Example:
HCOP:TREP:PAG A4 Selects the A4 size for the document.
Manual operation: See "Page format" on page 672
HCOPy:TREPort:PAGecount:STATe <State>
This command includes or excludes page number from the test report.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
ON
Example:
HCOP:TREP:PAG:STAT OFF Removes page numbers from the test report.
Manual operation: See "Page Count" on page 673
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1318
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
HCOPy:TREPort:PCOLors[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the use of printer friendly colors on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
Example:
HCOP:TREP:PCOL ON Creates the test report with printer friendly colors.
Manual operation: See "Use Screen Colors" on page 672
HCOPy:TREPort:TDSTamp[:STATe] <State>
This command includes or excludes date and time from the test report.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
ON
Example:
HCOP:TREP:TDST OFF Does not show any time or date information in the test report.
Manual operation: See "Date" on page 673
HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove <Dataset>
This command deletes one of the datasets that are currently part of a test report.
Parameters: <Dataset>
Index number of the dataset as shown in the "Test Report Content Selection" dialog box. If the index number is greater than the number of available datasets, the command returns an error.
Example:
HCOP:TREP:TEST:REM 2 Deletes the second dataset from the current test report.
Manual operation: See "Selecting items to include in the report" on page 682
HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove:ALL
This command removes all existing datasets from the test report.
Example:
HCOP:TREP:TEST:REM:ALL Deletes all datasets that are currently in the test report.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Remove All" on page 682
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1319
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe <Title>
This command defines the title for the test report as shown on its title page.
Parameters: <Title>
String containing the title.
Example:
HCOP:TREP:TITL 'My first test report' Defines a title for a test report.
HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe:STATe <State>
This command includes or excludes the title page from the test report.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
Example:
HCOP:TREP:TITL:STAT OFF Removes the title page from the test report.
MMEMory:RAW <Path>
Defines the location where the measurement data sets for the report are stored until the report is created.
Parameters: <Path>
String containing the path of the preliminary data
Manual operation: See "Raw Data Storage" on page 673
13.9.7 Examples: Managing Data
Storing Data........................................................................................................ 1320 Loading Data.......................................................................................................1321 Storing Instrument Settings.................................................................................1322 Loading Instrument Settings............................................................................... 1322 Printing to a File.................................................................................................. 1322 Printing on a Printer............................................................................................ 1322 Storing Multiple Graphical Measurement Results to a PDF File......................... 1323
13.9.7.1 Storing Data
MMEM:MSIS 'C:' //Selects drive C: as the default storage device.
//-----Connecting a network drive-------MMEM:NETW:USED? //Returns a list of all drives in use in the network. MMEM:NETW:UNUS?
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1320
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
//Returns a list of free drive names in the network. MMEM:NETW:MAP 'Q:','Server\ACLRTest' //Maps drive Q: to the directory 'Server\ACLRTest'
//-----Saving data on the instrument----MMEM:MDIR 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results' //Creates a directory called 'Results' on drive C: MMEM:NAME 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results\Test001.txt' //Defines a file called 'Test001.txt' MMEM:COMM 'ACLR test results' //Creates a comment for the settings to be displayed in gui. MMEM:DATA 'Test001.txt',#212FileContents //Creates the file 'Test001.txt'and writes 12 characters to it
//-----Copying the data to another location--MMEM:COPY 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results\Test001.txt','Q:' //Copies the specified file to network drive Q:. MMEM:DEL 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results\Test001.txt' //Deletes the specified file from the instrument hard disk. //or //MMEM:MOVE 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results\Test001.xml','Q:\TestResults.txt'// //Moves the file 'Test001.txt' to drive Q:, renames it to 'Testresults.txt' //and removes it from the instrument hard disk. MMEM:RDIR 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results' //Deletes the directory called 'Results' from drive C:, unless it still //contains any content.
//-----Disconnecting the network drive--MMEM:NETW:DISC 'Q:' //Disconnect drive Q:.
13.9.7.2 Loading Data
MMEM:CDIR? //Returns the path of the current directory. //e.g. C:\R_S\Instr\user\ MMEM:CDIR 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results' //Changes the current directory. MMEM:CAT? 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results\*.xml' //or MMEM:CAT? '*.xml' //Returns a list of all xml files in the directory 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results'. MMEM:CAT:LONG? '*.xml' //Returns additional information about the xml files in the directory // 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results'.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1321
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
13.9.7.3 Storing Instrument Settings
In this example we will store the instrument settings for the "Spectrum" channel.
INST:SEL 'SPECTRUM' //Selects measurement channel 'SPECTRUM'. MEMM:STOR:TYPE CHAN //Specifies that channel-specific data is to be stored. MMEM:STOR:STAT 1, 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Spectrum' //Stores the channel settings from the 'Spectrum' channel // to the file 'Spectrum.dfl'.
13.9.7.4 Loading Instrument Settings
In this example we will load the hardware settings from the configuration file Spectrum.dfl to a new "Spectrum2" channel.
MEMM:LOAD:TYPE NEW //Specifies that settings will be loaded to a new channel besides the existing //'Spectrum' channel. MMEM:SEL:CHAN:HWS ON //Selects only hardware settings to be loaded. MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1, 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Spectrum' //Loads the channel-specific settings from the file 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Spectrum.dfl' //to a new channel. The new channel is named 'Spectrum2' to avoid a naming conflict //with the existing 'Spectrum' channel. INST:REN 'Spectrum2','Spectrum3' //Renames the loaded channel to 'Spectrum3'.
13.9.7.5 Printing to a File
//Select bmp as the file format. HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP //Select the file name for the printout. MMEM:NAME 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Screenshot.bmp' //Select all screen elements for printing HCOP:ITEM:ALL //Add a comment to the printout. HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TEXT 'ACLRResults' //Store the printout in a file called 'Screenshot.bmp'. HCOP //Store another printout in a file called 'Screenshot_001.bmp'. HCOP:NEXT
13.9.7.6 Printing on a Printer
HCOP:DEST2 'SYST:COMM:PRIN' //Prints the data on a printer. SYST:COMM:PRIN:ENUM:FIRS?
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1322
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results
SYST:COMM:PRIN:ENUM? //Returns the available printers, e.g. //'LASER on LPT1' //'' //Means that one printer is available. SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL2 'LASER on LPT1' //Selects the printer for the print job on device 2. HCOP:PAGE:ORI2 LAND //Selects the landscape format for the printout. HCOP:TDST:STAT2 ON //Includes date and time on the printout. HCOP:ITEM:ALL //Prints all screen elements HCOP //Initiates the printout.
13.9.7.7 Storing Multiple Graphical Measurement Results to a PDF File
This example demonstrates how to store graphical results from measurements in the Spectrum application and the I/Q Analyzer to a single PDF file. It assumes the Spectrum and I/Q Analyzer measurements have already been configured and performed, with the following screen layout:
'Spectrum': 1 Frequency Sweep
'Spectrum': 2 Spectrogram
'IQ Analyzer': 1 Magnitude
'IQ Analyzer': 2 Spectrum
//Switch to MultiView tab DISP:ATAB ON
//Select windows to be stored to file HCOP:CONT WIND HCOP:PAGE:WIND:STAT 'Spectrum','1',ON HCOP:PAGE:WIND:STAT 'Spectrum','2',ON HCOP:PAGE:WIND:STAT 'IQ Analyzer','1',ON HCOP:PAGE:WIND:STAT 'IQ Analyzer','2',ON
//Define contents to be printed on each page (logo, timestamp, page count) DISP:LOGO ON HCOP:TDST:STAT ON HCOP:PAGE:COUN:STAT ON //Define comment to be printed on each page HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TEXT 'Measurement Test Report'
//Configure page layout (landscape, 1 display per page, margins 2cm on each side) HCOP:PAGE:ORI1 LAND HCOP:PAGE:WIND1:COUN 1 HCOP:PAGE:WIND1:SCAL 1
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1323
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
HCOP:PAGE:MARG1:BOTT 20 HCOP:PAGE:MARG1:LEFT 20 HCOP:PAGE:MARG1:RIGH 20 HCOP:PAGE:MARG1:TOP 20
//Configure the use of optimized colors for printout HCOP:CMAP:DEF2
//Set format of printout to PDF. HCOP:DEV:LANG1 PDF //Define file name of printout MMEM:NAME 'C:\R_S\instr\user\MeasurementTestReport.pdf'
//Store pdf of printout to file HCOP:IMM
13.10 Configuring the R&S FSW
The remote commands required to set up the R&S FSW are described here.
Configuring the Reference Frequency................................................................ 1324 Calibration and Checks....................................................................................... 1328 Working with Transducers...................................................................................1333 Compensating for Frequency Response Using Touchstone files (R&S FSW-K544)
............................................................................................................................ 1338 Customizing the Screen Layout.......................................................................... 1356 Remote Commands for Language Settings........................................................ 1363 Configuring the Network and Remote Control.................................................... 1364 Configuring HUMS.............................................................................................. 1368 Checking the System Configuration....................................................................1374 Signal Generator Control Commands................................................................. 1383 Using Service Functions..................................................................................... 1384 Remote Commands for Synchronizing Parameters............................................1387 Configuring the Application Starter..................................................................... 1403
13.10.1 Configuring the Reference Frequency
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:LBWidth.......................................................................................1325 [SENSe:]ROSCillator:O100........................................................................................... 1325 [SENSe:]ROSCillator:O640........................................................................................... 1325 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<ext>:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency.......................................1325 [SENSe:]ROSCillator:OSYNc........................................................................................ 1326 [SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce...................................................................................... 1326 [SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce:EAUTo?......................................................................... 1327 [SENSe:]ROSCillator:TRANge.......................................................................................1327
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1324
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:LBWidth <Bandwidth>
Defines the loop bandwidth, that is, the speed of internal synchronization with the reference frequency. The setting requires a compromise between performance and increasing phase noise.
For a variable external reference frequency with a narrow tuning range (+/- 0.5 ppm), the loop bandwidth is fixed to 0.1 Hz and cannot be changed.
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
0.1 Hz | 1 Hz | 3 Hz | 10 Hz | 30 Hz | 100 Hz | 300 Hz
The possible values depend on the reference source and tuning range (see Table 11-2).
Default unit: Hz
Example:
ROSC:LBW 3
Manual operation: See "Loop Bandwidth" on page 740
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:O100 <State> [SENSe:]ROSCillator:O640 <State>
This command turns the output of a reference signal on the corresponding connector ("Ref Output") on and off.
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:O100: Provides a 100 MHz reference signal on corresponding connector.
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:O640: Provides a 640 MHz reference signal on corresponding connector.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
OFF | 0 Switches the reference off.
ON | 1 Switches the reference on
Example:
//Output reference signal of 100 MHz. ROSC:O100 ON
Manual operation: See "Reference Frequency Output" on page 740
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<ext>:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency <Frequency>
This command defines the frequency of the external reference oscillator.
If the external reference oscillator is selected, the reference signal must be connected to the rear panel of the instrument.
Suffix:
.
<si>
1..n
<ext>
1..n
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1325
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Parameters: <Frequency> Example:
Manual operation:
Range: 1 MHz to 50 MHz Default unit: HZ
ROSC:EXT:FREQ 13MHZ Sets the frequency to 13 MHz. SOUR:EXT:ROSC:EXT:FREQ 13MHZ
See "Reference Frequency Input" on page 738
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:OSYNc <State>
If enabled, a 100 MHz reference signal is provided to the "SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT" connector.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
ROSC:OSYN ON
Manual operation: See "Reference Frequency Output" on page 740
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce <Source>
This command selects the reference oscillator.
If you want to select the external reference, it must be connected to the R&S FSW.
Parameters: <Source>
INTernal The internal reference is used (10 MHz)
EXTernal | EXTernal1 | EXT1 The external reference from the "REF INPUT 10 MHZ" connector is used; if none is available, an error flag is displayed in the status bar
E10 The external reference from "REF INPUT 1..50 MHZ" connector is used with a fixed 10 MHZ frequency; if none is available, an error flag is displayed in the status bar
E100 The external reference from the "REF INPUT 100 MHZ / 1 GHz" connector is used with a fixed 100 MHZ frequency; if none is available, an error flag is displayed in the status bar
E1000 The external reference from "REF INPUT 100 MHZ / 1 GHz" connector is used with a fixed 1 GHZ frequency; if none is available, an error flag is displayed in the status bar
EAUTo The external reference is used as long as it is available, then the instrument switches to the internal reference
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1326
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example: Manual operation:
SYNC The external reference is used; if none is available, an error flag is displayed in the status bar
ROSC:SOUR EXT
See "Reference Frequency Input" on page 738 See "Behavior in case of missing external reference" on page 739
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce:EAUTo?
This command queries the current reference type in case you have activated an automatic switch to the internal reference if the external reference is missing.
Return values: <Reference>
INT | EXT
INT internal reference
EXT external reference
Example:
SENS:ROSC:SOUR:EAUT? Queries the currently available reference type.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Behavior in case of missing external reference" on page 739
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:TRANge <Range>
Defines the tuning range. The tuning range is only available for the variable external reference frequency. It determines how far the frequency may deviate from the defined level in parts per million (10-6).
Parameters: <Range>
WIDE | SMALl
The possible values depend on the reference source (see Table 11-2).
SMALl With this smaller deviation (+/- 0.5 ppm) a very narrow fixed loop bandwidth of 0.1 Hz is realized. With this setting the instrument can synchronize to an external reference signal with a very precise frequency. Due to the very narrow loop bandwidth, unwanted noise or spurious components on the external reference input signal are strongly attenuated. Furthermore, the loop requires about 30 seconds to reach a locked state. During this locking process, "NO REF" is displayed in the status bar.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1327
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example: Manual operation:
WIDE The larger deviation (+/- 6 ppm) allows the instrument to synchronize to less precise external reference input signals.
ROSC:TRAN WIDE
See "Tuning Range" on page 740
13.10.2 Calibration and Checks
The following commands control calibration and checks on the R&S FSW.
CALibration[:ALL]?....................................................................................................... 1328 CALibration[:ALL]......................................................................................................... 1328 CALibration:PRESelection............................................................................................ 1329 CALibration:RESult?.....................................................................................................1329 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:MC:CFRequency................................................................. 1330 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:MC[:DISTance].................................................................... 1330 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:CFRequency.......................................................... 1330 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:MCFRequency........................................................1331 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:WBFRequency....................................................... 1331 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:RF[:SPECtrum].................................................................... 1331 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:AIQ[:TYPE]......................................................................... 1332 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect].............................................................................. 1332 DIAGnostic:SERVice:STESt:RESult?............................................................................. 1333 SOURce<si>:TEMPerature:FRONtend........................................................................... 1333
CALibration[:ALL]? CALibration[:ALL] [<Mode>]
This command initiates a calibration (self-alignment) routine and queries if calibration was successful.
During the acquisition of correction data the instrument does not accept any remote control commands.
Note: If you start a self-alignment remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the alignment is still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the alignment is completed.
In order to recognize when the acquisition of correction data is completed, the MAV bit in the status byte can be used. If the associated bit is set in the Service Request Enable (SRE) register, the instrument generates a service request after the acquisition of correction data has been completed.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1328
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Setting parameters:
<Mode>
ACLEAR
optional: Performs an extended self-alignment as performed in the factory. Any previous self-alignment results are deleted. Note that this process takes longer than the common self-alignment.
Return values: <CalibrationFailed>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Calibration was successful.
ON | 1 Calibration was not successful.
Example:
*CLS Resets the status management. *SRE 16 Enables MAV bit in the Service Request Enable register. *CAL? Starts the correction data recording, and then a service request is generated.
Example:
CAL:ALL ACLEAR Deletes any existing self-alignment results and performs an extended self-alignment as performed in the factory.
CALibration:PRESelection
Due to changes in temperature, the YIG-preselector frequency may become slightly offset. This command re-aligns the preselector quickly, without requiring a full selfalignment of the R&S FSW.
This command is only available for R&S FSW models 1331.5003Kxx, and only if a YIG-preselector is available.
Example:
CAL:PRES? Result: 0
Manual operation: See "Start Preselector Centering" on page 691
CALibration:RESult?
This command returns the results collected during calibration.
Return values: <CalibrationData>
String containing the calibration data.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1329
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
CAL:RES? would return, e.g. Total Calibration Status: PASSED, Date (dd/mm/yyyy): 12/07/2004, Time: 16:24:54,Runtime: 00.06
Query only
See " Alignment Results: " on page 691
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:MC:CFRequency <Frequency>
This command defines the frequency of the calibration signal for R&S FSW models 43 GHz and higher.
This command only takes effect if a microwave calibration signal is selected for input (DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 1332)
Parameters: <Frequency>
*RST:
8.004 GHz
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See " Calibration Frequency MW " on page 755
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:MC[:DISTance] <Bandwidth>
This command selects the distance of the peaks of the microwave calibration signal for calibration of the YIG filter.
This command is only available for instrument models R&S FSW13/26.
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
WIDE | SMALl
SMALl Small offset of combline frequencies.
WIDE Wide offset of combline frequencies.
Manual operation: See " Calibration Frequency MW " on page 755
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:CFRequency <Frequency>
This command defines the frequency of the calibration signal.
Before you can use the command, you have to feed in a calibration signal with DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 1332.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1330
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Parameters: <Frequency>
Manual operation:
Possible frequencies of the calibration signal are fix. If you define a frequency that is not available, the R&S FSW uses the next available frequency. Example: a frequency of 20 MHz is rounded up to the next available frequency (25 MHz).
*RST:
50 MHz
Default unit: Hz
See " Calibration Frequency RF " on page 754
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:MCFRequency <Frequency>
This command sets the calibration frequency for frequencies greater than 7 GHz. This command only takes effect if a microwave calibration signal is selected for input (DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 1332).
Parameters: <Frequency>
*RST:
7 GHz
Default unit: Hz
Example:
DIAG:SERV:INP:PULS:MCFR 7,1 GHz
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:WBFRequency <Frequency>
Defines the frequency of the internal broadband calibration signal to be used for IF filter calibration.
This command is only available if the bandwidth extension option R&S FSW-B160 is installed.
Before you can use the command, you have to feed in a calibration signal with DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 1332.
Parameters: <Frequency>
2 MHz | 4 MHz | 8 MHz | 16 MHz
If you define a frequency that is not available, the R&S FSW uses the next available frequency.
*RST:
16 MHz
Default unit: Hz
Example:
DIAG:SERV:INP:PULS:WBFR 8 MHz Defines a calibration signal frequency of 8 MHz.
Example:
DIAG:SERV:INP:SEL WBC DIAG:SERV:INP:PULS:WBFR 4MHz
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:RF[:SPECtrum] <Bandwidth>
This command selects the bandwidth of the calibration signal.
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
NARRowband | BROadband
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1331
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Manual operation:
NARRowband Narrowband signal for power calibration of the frontend. BROadband Broadband signal for calibration of the IF filter.
See " Spectrum " on page 754
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:AIQ[:TYPE] <SignalType>
This command defines the type of calibration signal to be used for Analog Baseband. This command is only available if the R&S FSW-B71 option is installed.
Parameters: <SignalType>
AC | DC | DCZero
AC 1.5625 MHz square wave AC signal
DC DC signal
DCZero no signal
*RST:
AC
Example:
DIAG:SERV:INP:AIQ:TYPE DCZ
Manual operation: See " Calibration Signal Type " on page 755
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] <Signal>
This command activates or deactivates the use of an internal calibration signal as input for the R&S FSW.
Parameters: <Signal>
CALibration Uses the calibration signal as RF input.
MCALibration Uses the calibration signal for the microwave range as RF input.
RF Uses the signal from the RF input.
AIQ Uses the Analog Baseband calibration signal as input to the optional Analog Baseband interface. This signal is only available if the R&S FSW-B71 option is installed.
*RST:
RF
Example:
DIAG:SERV:INP CAL Uses the calibration signal as RF input.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1332
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Manual operation:
See " NONE " on page 754 See " Calibration Frequency RF " on page 754 See " Calibration Frequency MW " on page 755 See " Calibration Analog Baseband " on page 755
DIAGnostic:SERVice:STESt:RESult?
This command queries the self-test results.
Return values: <Results>
String of data containing the results. The rows of the self-test result table are separated by commas.
Example:
DIAG:SERV:STES:RES? would return, e.g. "Total Selftest Status: PASSED", "Date (dd/mm/yyyy): 09/07/2004 TIME: 16:24:54", "Runtime: 00:06", "...
Usage:
Query only
SOURce<si>:TEMPerature:FRONtend
This command queries the current frontend temperature of the R&S FSW.
During self-alignment, the instrument's (frontend) temperature is also measured (as soon as the instrument has warmed up completely). This temperature is used as a reference for a continuous temperature check during operation. If the current temperature deviates from the stored self-alignment temperature by a certain degree, a warning is displayed in the status bar indicating the resulting deviation in the measured power levels. A status bit in the STATUs:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register indicates a possible deviation.
Suffix: <si>
. irrelevant
Return values: <Temperature>
Temperature in degrees Celsius.
Example:
SOUR:TEMP:FRON? Queries the temperature of the frontend sensor.
13.10.3 Working with Transducers
The following commands configure and control transducer factors. Useful commands for transducer management described elsewhere MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL on page 1293
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1333
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Remote commands exclusive to transducer management
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ADJust:RLEVel[:STATe]............................................ 1334 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:CATalog?.................................................................1334 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent................................................................1335 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA...................................................................... 1335 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete....................................................................1335 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing..................................................................1336 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect.................................................................... 1336 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe]................................................................... 1336 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT....................................................................... 1336 MMEMory:LOAD<n>:TFACtor....................................................................................... 1337 MMEMory:STORe<n>:TFACtor..................................................................................... 1337
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ADJust:RLEVel[:STATe] <State>
This command turns an automatic adjustment of the reference level to the transducer on and off.
Before you can use the command, you have to select and turn on a transducer.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See " Adjust Ref Level " on page 717
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:CATalog?
This command queries all transducer factors stored on the R&S FSW.
After general data for the transducer storage directory, data for the individual files is listed.
The result is a comma-separated list of values with the following syntax:
<UsedMem>,<FreeMem>,<FileSize>,<FileName>[,<FileSize>,<FileName>]
For details see Chapter 11.4.1, "Basics on Transducer Factors", on page 712.
Return values: <UsedDiskSpace>
numeric value in bytes
Amount of storage space required by all transducers files in the C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\ trd directory (= sum of all individual <FileSize> values)
<FreeDiskSpace>
numeric value in bytes Amount of free storage space on the R&S FSW
<FileSize>
numeric value in bytes Size of a single transducer file
<FileName>
string Name of a single transducer file
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1334
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example: Usage:
SENSE:CORR:TRAN:CAT? //Result: 2743,2312620544,720,'FactorGSM.TDF',2023,'FactorBTS.TDF'
Query only
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent <Comment>
This command defines the comment for the selected transducer factor.
Before you can use the command, you have to select and turn on a transducer.
Parameters: <Comment>
*RST:
(empty comment)
Manual operation: See " Comment " on page 718
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA {<Frequency>, <Level>}...
This command configures transducer factors for specific trace points. A set of transducer factors defines an interpolated transducer line and can be stored on the instrument.
For details see Chapter 11.4.1, "Basics on Transducer Factors", on page 712.
Parameters: <Frequency>
The unit for <Frequency> is Hz, which may or may not be omitted. Frequencies have to be sorted in ascending order.
Default unit: Hz
<Level>
The unit for <Level> depends on[SENSe:]CORRection: TRANsducer:UNIT .
Example:
SENSe1:CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT 'DB' // Frequency Span 0 Hz to 4 Ghz SENSe1:CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA 0,8,2GHz,5,4GHz,3
Creates the transducer points:
Manual operation: See " Data Points " on page 719
Frequency 0 Hz 2 GHz 4 GHz
Level 8 dB 5 dB 3 dB
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete
This command deletes the currently selected transducer factor.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer.
Example:
CORR:TRAN:DEL
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1335
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Manual operation: See " Delete Line " on page 717
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing <ScalingType>
This command selects the frequency scaling of the transducer factor.
Parameters: <ScalingType>
LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST:
LINear
Manual operation: See " X-Axis Scaling " on page 719
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect <Name>
This command selects a transducer factor.
Parameters: <Name>
String containing the name of the transducer factor. If the name does not exist yet, the R&S FSW creates a transducer factor by that name.
Example:
CORR:TRAN:SEL 'FACTOR1'
Manual operation:
See " Activating / Deactivating " on page 716 See " Create New Line " on page 717 See " Name " on page 718
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the selected transducer factor on or off.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See " Activating / Deactivating " on page 716
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT <Unit>
This command selects the unit of the transducer factor.
Before you can use the command, you have to select and turn on a transducer.
Parameters: <Unit>
string as defined in table below
*RST:
DB
Example:
CORR:TRAN:UNIT 'DBUV'
Manual operation: See " Unit " on page 719
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1336
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
String 'DB' 'DBM' 'DBMV' 'DBUV' 'DBUV/M'
'DBUA' 'DBUA/M'
'DBPW' 'DBPT'
Unit dB dBm dBmV dBV dBV/m (Requires R&S FSW-K54 (EMI measurements) option.) dBA dBA/m (Requires R&S FSW-K54 (EMI measurements) option.) dBpW dBpT
MMEMory:LOAD<n>:TFACtor <FileName>
Loads the transducer factor from the selected file in .CSV format.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <FileName>
String containing the path and name of the CSV import file.
Example:
MMEM:LOAD:TFAC 'C:\TEST.CSV'
Manual operation: See " Import " on page 720
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TFACtor <FileName>, <TransdName>
This command exports transducer factor data to an ASCII (CSV) file.
For details on the file format see Chapter 11.4.3, "Reference: Transducer Factor File Format", on page 720.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <FileName>
Name of the transducer factor to be exported.
<TransdName>
Name of the transducer factor to be exported.
Example:
MMEM:STOR:TFAC 'C:\TEST', 'Transducer1' Stores the transducer factor named "Transducer1" in the file TEST.CSV.
Manual operation: See " Export " on page 720
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1337
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
13.10.4 Compensating for Frequency Response Using Touchstone files (R&S FSW-K544)
If the Frequency Response Correction option (R&S FSW-K544) is installed, the R&S FSW supports the use of Touchstone (.SnP) files, as well as additional frequency response correction files in .fres format.
For details, see Chapter 11.5, "Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544)", on page 725.
Remote Commands for Frequency Response Correction.................................. 1338 Programming Example: Using Touchstone files..................................................1355
13.10.4.1 Remote Commands for Frequency Response Correction
The following commands are only available if the Frequency Response Correction option (R&S FSW-K544) is installed.
Input-specific frequency correction Frequency response correction can be configured for all inputs, or for particular input types only. Be sure to use the correct command for the required setting. [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse:INPut<ip>:USER: commands are applied
to RF input only [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse:BASeband:USER: commands are applied
to baseband input only [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse:USER: commands are applied to all input
types; queries refer to the currently active input source
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:ADJust:RLEVel:STATe............... 1340 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:FILE:USER:ADJust:RLEVel:STATe....................... 1340 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:ADJust:RLEVel:STATe................ 1340 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:ADJust:RLEVel:STATe............................... 1340 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:CATalog?.................. 1340 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:CATalog?....................1340 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:CATalog?................................... 1340 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:CLEar....................... 1341 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:CLEar........................ 1341 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:CLEar........................................1341 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:FREQuency?.................... 1341 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:MAGNitude?..................... 1341 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:PHASe?........................... 1341 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:INSert....................... 1342 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:INSert........................ 1342 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:INSert........................................1342 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:MAGNitude[:STATe]....1342 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:MAGNitude[:STATe].....1342 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:MAGNitude[:STATe].................... 1342 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:PHASe[:STATe].......... 1343
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1338
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands
Configuring the R&S FSW
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:PHASe[:STATe]........... 1343 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:PHASe[:STATe].......................... 1343 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fi>:REMove.....................1343 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:REMove..................... 1343 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:REMove.................................... 1343 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:SELect...................... 1344 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:SELect....................... 1344 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:SELect...................................... 1344 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:SIZE?....................... 1344 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:SIZE?........................ 1344 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:SIZE?........................................1344 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FSTate..................................................... 1345 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:IQ:DATA:FREQuency?...............................1345 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:IQ:DATA:MAGNitude?................................1345 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:IQ:DATA:PHASe?......................................1345 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:LOAD...................................... 1346 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:LOAD....................................... 1346 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:LOAD.......................................................1346 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:PRESet....................................1346 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:PRESet.....................................1346 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:PRESet.................................................... 1346 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:REFResh................................. 1346 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:REFResh.................................. 1346 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SCOPe.................................................... 1347 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SCOVered?.............................................. 1347 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:CATalog?..................1347 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:CATalog?...................1347 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:CATalog?.................................. 1347 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:CLEar...................... 1348 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:CLEar....................... 1348 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:CLEar.......................................1348 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA:FREQuency<spi>?........... 1348 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA:MAGNitude<spi>?............ 1348 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA:PHASe<spi>?.................. 1348 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:INSert...................... 1349 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:INSert....................... 1349 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:INSert.......................................1349 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:MOVE...................... 1350 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:MOVE....................... 1350 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:MOVE...................................... 1350 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:FROM........... 1350 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:FROM............ 1350 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:FROM........................... 1350 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:TO................ 1351 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:TO................. 1351 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:TO................................ 1351 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:REMove................... 1351 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:REMove.................... 1351 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:REMove................................... 1351 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:PSTate..................................................... 1352
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1339
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:SELect..................... 1352 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:SELect...................... 1352 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:SELect..................................... 1352 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:SIZE?...................... 1353 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:SIZE?....................... 1353 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:SIZE?....................................... 1353 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:STATe...................... 1353 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:STATe....................... 1353 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:STATe.......................................1353 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:FREQuency?................... 1354 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:MAGNitude?....................1354 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:PHASe?.......................... 1354 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:STATe...................................... 1354 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:STATe....................................... 1354 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:STATe...................................................... 1354 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:STORe.................................... 1355 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:STORe..................................... 1355 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:STORe.....................................................1355 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:VALid?..................................................... 1355
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:ADJust:RLEVel:STATe <State>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:FILE:USER:ADJust:RLEVel:STATe <State> [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:ADJust:RLEVel:STATe
<State> [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:ADJust:RLEVel:STATe <State>
Activates or deactivates the automatic adjustment of the reference level to the active filter calculation configuration. The offset is the mean of the filter calculation.
For details and restrictions see "Adjust Ref Level" on page 731.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See "Adjust Ref Level" on page 731
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:CATalog? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:CATalog? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:CATalog?
Returns a list of currently available .fres files in the directory.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1340
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Suffix: <si>
<fli>
Return values: <List> Example: Usage:
. 1..n irrelevant 1..n irrelevant
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:FLIS:CAT? Query only
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:CLEar [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:CLEar [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:CLEar
Removes all frequency response (.fres) files in the current configuration for the selected or all input types.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<fli>
1..n
irrelevant
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:FLIS:CLE
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Remove Frequency Response File" on page 734
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:FREQuency? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:MAGNitude? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:PHASe?
Queries the trace values for the selected .fres file.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<fli>
1..n
Index in frequency response file list
Use [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:
USER:FLISt<fli>:SIZE? to determine the maximum index
number.
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:FLIS2:DATA:PHAS?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Selected File" on page 734
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1341
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:INSert <FilePath>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:INSert <FilePath>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:INSert <FilePath>
Loads a frequency response (.fres) file to the current configuration. The maximum number of files per configuration is 15. The new file is added below the entry specified by the <fli> index. All other entries with a higher suffix are moved down by one position.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<fli>
1..n
Index in frequency response file list
Use [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:
USER:FLISt<fli>:SIZE? to determine the maximum index
number.
Parameters: <FilePath>
string
Path and file name The default directory for .fres files is C:\R_S\INSTR\USER \Fresponse.
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:FLIS2:INS 'C:\FRes.fres'
Manual operation: See "Add Freq Resp File" on page 734
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:MAGNitude[: STATe] <State>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:MAGNitude[: STATe] <State>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:MAGNitude[:STATe] <State>
Activates or deactivates the use of the correction data in the selected file for magnitude results.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<fli>
1..n
Index in frequency response file list
Use [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:
USER:FLISt<fli>:SIZE? to determine the maximum index
number.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1342
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example: Manual operation:
OFF | 0 Applies the data for magnitude results.
ON | 1 Does not apply the data for magnitude results.
*RST:
1
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:FLIS2:MAGN:STAT ON
See "Magnitude" on page 734
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:PHASe[: STATe] <State>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:PHASe[: STATe] <State>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:PHASe[:STATe] <State>
Activates or deactivates the use of the correction data in the selected file for magnitude results.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<fli>
1..n
Index in frequency response file list
Use [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:
USER:FLISt<fli>:SIZE? to determine the maximum index
number.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Applies the data for magnitude results.
ON | 1 Does not apply the data for magnitude results.
*RST:
1
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:FLIS2:PHAS:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Phase" on page 734
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fi>:REMove [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:REMove [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:REMove
Removes the selected frequency response (.fres) file from the current configuration.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1343
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
<fli>
Example: Usage: Manual operation:
1..n Index in frequency response file list Use [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband: USER:FLISt<fli>:SIZE? to determine the maximum index number.
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:FLIS2:REM
Event
See "Remove Frequency Response File" on page 734
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:SELect <FilePath>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:SELect <FilePath>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:SELect <FilePath>
Loads an additional frequency response (.fres) file to the current configuration.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<fli>
1..n
Index in frequency response file list
Use [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:
USER:FLISt<fli>:SIZE? to determine the maximum index
number.
Parameters: <FilePath>
string
Path and file name The default directory for .fres files is C:\R_S\INSTR\USER \Fresponse.
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:FLIS2:SEL 'C:\FRes.fres'
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:SIZE? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:SIZE? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:SIZE?
Queries the number of entries in the list of .fres files for the current configuration.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<fli>
1..n
irrelevant
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1344
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Return values: <Size>
Example: Usage:
integer
Range: *RST:
1 to 15 1
SENS:CORR:FRES:BASE:USER:FLIS:SIZE?
Query only
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FSTate <State>
Activates or deactivates the use of additional frequency response (.fres) files. The correction data is these files is applied after any correction settings in active touchstone files.
For details, see Chapter 11.5, "Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544)", on page 725.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Activates the files.
ON | 1 Deactivates the files.
*RST:
1
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:FST ON
Manual operation: See "Frequency Response active" on page 733
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:IQ:DATA:FREQuency? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:IQ:DATA:MAGNitude? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:IQ:DATA:PHASe?
Queries the trace values for the combined user correction files (.snp+.fres) in IQ mode.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:IQ:DATA:PHAS?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "IQ Mode" on page 735
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1345
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:LOAD <FilePath> [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:LOAD <FilePath> [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:LOAD <FilePath>
Loads a stored user-defined frequency response correction scenario.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
Setting parameters:
<FilePath>
string
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:LOAD 'FRes1'
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See "Load Settings" on page 731
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:PRESet [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:PRESet [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:PRESet
Restores the default frequency response correction settings (containing only files specific to the R&S FSW itself). Frequency response correction using .fres files is deactivated.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:PRES
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Clear Settings" on page 732
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:REFResh [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:REFResh
Recalculates the input source correction filter.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<ip>
1..n
Example:
SENSe:CORRection:FRESponse:Input1:USER:REFResh
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Refresh" on page 730
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1346
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SCOPe <Frames>
Determines whether the frequency response correction settings are applied to all active measurement channels, or only the currently selected channel.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <Frames>
CHANnel | ALL
CHANnel The frequency response correction settings are applied to the currently selected channel only. To select a channel, use INSTrument[:SELect]. For a list of available channels, use INSTrument:LIST?.
ALL The frequency response correction settings are applied to all active measurement channels.
Example:
INST:SEL 'MyIQSpectrum'
Manual operation:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:SCOP CHAN The filter is applied only to the channel named 'MyIQSpectrum'.
See "Apply to" on page 731
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SCOVered?
Indicates whether the frequency correction file covers the full measurement span.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
Return values: <Covered>
0 | 1
0 Span not fully covered
1 Full measurement span is covered
Example:
SENSe1:CORRection:FRESponse:USER:SCOVered?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Preview" on page 734
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:CATalog? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:CATalog? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:CATalog?
Returns a list of currently configured touchstone format files.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1347
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Tip: to determine the currently selected file, use the [SENSe:]CORRection:FRES ponse<si>:xxx:SLISt<sli>:SELect? query.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<sli>
1..n irrelevant
Return values: <List>
path and file name of all currently configured touchstone format files.
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:SLIS:CAT? C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\MyS7p.s7p,C: \R_S\INSTR\USER\MyS2p.s2p
Usage:
Query only
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:CLEar [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:CLEar [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:CLEar
Removes all touchstone files from the current configuration for the selected or all input types.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<sli>
irrelevant
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:SLIS:CLE
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Remove File" on page 733
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA: FREQuency<spi>?
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA:MAGNitude<spi>? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA:PHASe<spi>?
Queries the trace values for the specified .snp file and ports.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<sli>
1..n Index in Touchstone file list Use [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER: SLISt<sli>:SIZE? to determine the maximum index number.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1348
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
<spi>
Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
1..4 S-port pair index, where: 1 = From port - from port 2 = To port - from port 3 = From port - to port 4 = To port - to port
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:SLIS2:SEL 'FRes21.s2p' SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:SLIS2:PORT:TO 2 SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:SLIS2:PORT:FROM 1 SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:SLIS2:DATA:PHAS3? The correction data from port 1 to port 2 is returned.
Query only
See "Selected File" on page 734
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:INSert <FilePath>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:INSert <FilePath>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:INSert <FilePath>
Loads a new Touchstone file for the current configuration. The maximum number of files per configuration is 15. The new file is added below the entry specified by the <sli> index. All other entries with a higher suffix are moved down by one position.
To change the order of the files, use the [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>: USER:SLISt<sli>:MOVE command.
To determine which files are available, use [SENSe:]CORRection: FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:CATalog? on page 1347.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<sli>
1..n Index in Touchstone file list Use [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER: SLISt<sli>:SIZE? to determine the maximum index number.
Parameters: <FilePath>
string
Path and file name The file extension of the Touchstone file must correspond to the number of ports included in the file. For example, a file containing 4 parameters for S11, S22, S12 and S21 must have the extension .s2p. The default directory for Touchstone files is C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Fresponse.
Manual operation: See "Add Touchstone File" on page 733
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1349
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:MOVE <Direction>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:MOVE <Direction>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:MOVE <Direction>
Moves the selected Touchstone file one position up or down in the list of files, changing the order in which the correction data is applied.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<sli>
1..n Index in Touchstone file list Use [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER: SLISt<sli>:SIZE? to determine the maximum index number. If an index outside the available range is specified, an error occurs.
Setting parameters:
<Direction>
UP | DOWN
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:SLIS:MOVE UP
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See "Move File Up or Down" on page 733
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs: FROM <PortFrom>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:FROM <PortFrom>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:FROM <PortFrom>
SnP files can be defined for a varying number of input and output ports.
You must define the ports from the touchstone file whose data is to be applied.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<sli>
1..n Index in Touchstone file list Use [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER: SLISt<sli>:SIZE? to determine the maximum index number.
Parameters: <PortFrom>
*RST:
1
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1350
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example: Manual operation:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:SLIS:SEL 'FRes21.s2p' SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:SLIS:PORT:TO 2 SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:SLIS:PORT:FROM 1 The correction data from port 1 to port 2 is included in the filter.
See "To - From" on page 732
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:TO <PortTo>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:TO <PortTo>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:TO <PortTo>
SnP files can be defined for a varying number of input and output ports.
You must define the ports from the touchstone file whose data is to be applied.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<sli>
1..n Index in Touchstone file list Use [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER: SLISt<sli>:SIZE? to determine the maximum index number.
Parameters: <PortTo>
*RST:
1
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:SLIS:SEL 'FRes21.s2p' SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:SLIS:PORT:TO 2 SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:SLIS:PORT:FROM 1 The correction data from port 1 to port 2 is included in the filter.
Manual operation: See "To - From" on page 732
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:REMove [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:REMove [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:REMove
Removes the specified touchstone file from the list.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<sli>
1..n Index in Touchstone file list Use [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER: SLISt<sli>:SIZE? to determine the maximum index number.
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:SLIS2:REM
Usage:
Event
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1351
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Manual operation: See "Remove File" on page 733
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:PSTate <State>
Activates or deactivates the preview of the user correction files for all input types.
Note that this function is only available for remote operation. The preview cannot be switched back on in manual operation.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
1
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:PST ON
Manual operation: See "Preview" on page 734
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:SELect <FilePath>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:SELect <FilePath>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:SELect <FilePath>
Selects a Touchstone format file from the specified directory to be loaded to the current configuration for the specified input type. If no input type is specified, the currently active input source is assumed.
The query returns the currently selected file.
To determine which files are available, use [SENSe:]CORRection: FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:CATalog? on page 1347.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<sli>
1..n Index in Touchstone file list Use [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER: SLISt<sli>:SIZE? to determine the maximum index number. To replace an existing file in the configuration, specify its index. To add a new file, use the next available index. If an index outside the available range is specified, an error occurs.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1352
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Parameters: <FilePath>
Example:
string Path and file name of the selected file. The default directory for Touchstone files is C:\R_S\INSTR \USER\Fresponse.
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:SLIS:SEL 'C:\FRes21.s2p'
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:SIZE? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:SIZE? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:SIZE?
Queries the number of entries in the list of touchstone files for the current configuration.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<sli>
irrelevant
Return values: <Size>
integer
Range: *RST:
1 to 15 1
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:SLIS:SIZE?
Usage:
Query only
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:STATe <State>
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:STATe <State> [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:STATe <State>
Activates or deactivates the loaded file for the current configuration. Only active files are included in filter calculation.
For queries with no input type specified, the currently active input type is queried.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
<sli>
1..n Index in Touchstone file list Use [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER: SLISt<sli>:SIZE? to determine the maximum index number.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Activates the file.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1353
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example: Manual operation:
ON | 1 Deactivates the file.
*RST:
1
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:SLIS2:STAT ON
See "Active" on page 732
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:FREQuency? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:MAGNitude? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:PHASe?
Queries the trace values for the combined user correction files (.snp+.fres) in Spectrum mode.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Spectrum Mode" on page 736
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:STATe <State> [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:STATe <State> [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:STATe <State>
Activates or deactivates the general usage of user-defined frequency response correction settings.
Only if activated, the filter is calculated and applied to the results.
For details, see Chapter 11.5, "Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544)", on page 725.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:STAT
Manual operation: See "State" on page 730
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1354
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:STORe <FilePath> [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:STORe <FilePath> [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:STORe <FilePath>
Stores a saveset for a user-defined frequency response correction scenario. By default, the saveset is stored in the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\FResponse directory.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
Setting parameters:
<FilePath>
string
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:STOR 'FRes1' Stores the current frequency response correction configuration to a file named C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\FResponse\FRes1.dfl.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See "Save Settings" on page 732
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:VALid?
This command queries the validity of the user-defined correction settings.
Suffix: <si>
. 1..n irrelevant
Return values: <Validity>
0 | 1
1 The setting is valid.
0 The setting is not valid.
Example:
SENS:CORR:FRES:USER:VAL?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "State" on page 730
13.10.4.2 Programming Example: Using Touchstone files
This example demonstrates how to use Touchstone files in a basic I/Q Analyzer measurement setup in a remote environment.
-----------Configuring the measurement -----------*RST; *WAI SYST:DISP:UPD ON TRACe1:IQ ON TRACe:IQ:EVAL ON
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1355
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
LAY:REPL:WIND "1",FREQ INIT:CONT OFF
// Use calibration signal as input data DIAG:SERV:INP CAL DIAG:SERV:INP:RF:SPEC BRO DIAG:SERV:INP:PULS:CFR 1MHz
// Set SR/Bandwidth and CF TRAC:IQ:SRAT 100 MHz FREQ:CENT 500MHz
// Activate S2P file SENSe:CORRection:FRESponse:Input1:USER:PRESet SENSe:CORRection:FRESponse:Input1:USER:SLISt1:SELect 'c:\BP_40MHz.s2p' SENSe:CORRection:FRESponse:Input1:USER:STATe ON
INIT:IMM; *WAI @LOC
13.10.5 Customizing the Screen Layout
The remote commands required to set up the display of the R&S FSW are described here.
General Display Settings and Items....................................................................1356 Colors and Themes.............................................................................................1360 CMAP Suffix Assignment.................................................................................... 1362
13.10.5.1 General Display Settings and Items
The following commands add, remove or customize general display and screen elements.
Useful commands for general display settings described elsewhere
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MTABle on page 1211 DISPlay:FORMat on page 1068
Remote commands exclusive to general display settings
DISPlay:ANNotation:CBAR........................................................................................... 1357 DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency...................................................................................1357 DISPlay:SBAR[:STATe]................................................................................................. 1357 DISPlay:SKEYs[:STATe]............................................................................................... 1357 DISPlay:TBAR[:STATe]................................................................................................. 1358 DISPlay:TOUChscreen[:STATe]..................................................................................... 1358 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME......................................................................................... 1358 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME:FORMat............................................................................1358
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1356
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel[:STATe]................................................................................. 1359 SYSTem:DATE............................................................................................................ 1359 SYSTem:TIME............................................................................................................. 1359
DISPlay:ANNotation:CBAR <State>
This command hides or displays the channel bar information.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
DISP:ANN:CBAR OFF
Manual operation: See " Channel Bar " on page 696
DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency <State>
This command turns the label of the x-axis on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
DISP:ANN:FREQ OFF
Manual operation: See " Diagram Footer (Annotation) " on page 696
DISPlay:SBAR[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the status bar on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
DISP:SBAR:OFF
Manual operation: See " Status Bar " on page 695
DISPlay:SKEYs[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the softkey bar on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Example:
DISP:SKEY:OFF
Manual operation: See " Softkey Bar " on page 695
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1357
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
DISPlay:TBAR[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the toolbar on or off.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
DISP:TBAR ON
Manual operation: See " Toolbar " on page 695
DISPlay:TOUChscreen[:STATe] <State>
This command controls the touch screen functionality.
Parameters: <State>
ON | FRAMe | OFF
ON | 1 Touch screen is active for entire screen
OFF | 0 Touch screen is inactivate for entire screen
FRAMe Touch screen is inactivate for the diagram area of the screen, but active for softkeys, toolbars and menus.
*RST:
1
Example:
DISP:TOUC:STAT ON
Manual operation: See " Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen " on page 693
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME <State>
This command adds or removes the date and time from the display.
Suffix: <n>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
DISP:TIME ON
Manual operation: See " Date and Time " on page 696
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME:FORMat <Format> This command selects the time and date format.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1358
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Suffix: <n> Parameters: <Format>
Example:
Manual operation:
. irrelevant
US | DE
DE dd.mm.yyyy hh:mm:ss 24 hour format.
US mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss 12 hour format.
*RST:
DE
DISP:TIME ON Switches the screen display of date and time on. DISP:TIME:FORM US Switches the date and time format to US.
See " Date and Time Format " on page 694
SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel[:STATe] <State>
This command includes or excludes the front panel keys when working with the remote desktop.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST:
1
Manual operation: See " Front Panel " on page 696 See " Mini Front Panel " on page 697
SYSTem:DATE <Year>, <Month>, <Day>
Configures the date on the instrument.
Parameters: <Year>
<Month>
<Day>
Example:
SYST:DATE 2020,04,23
Manual operation: See " Set Date and Time " on page 694
SYSTem:TIME <Year>, <Month>, <Day>
Configures the time on the internal real-time clock on the instrument.
Parameters: <Hour>
Range: 0 to 23
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1359
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
<Minutes> <Seconds> Example: Manual operation:
Range: 0 to 59 Range: 0 to 59 SYST:TIME 10,52,33 See " Set Date and Time " on page 694
13.10.5.2 Colors and Themes
Useful commands to customize display colors described elsewhere
The HCOPY commands define the print colors and thus only take effect on the display colors, if the display shows the printing colors.
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci> on page 1300 HCOPy:CMAP<it>:HSL on page 1301 HCOPy:CMAP<it>:PDEFined on page 1301
Remote commands exclusive to customize the display colors and themes
DISPlay:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci>.................................................................................... 1360 DISPlay:CMAP<it>:HSL................................................................................................1361 DISPlay:CMAP<it>:PDEFined....................................................................................... 1361 DISPlay:THEMe:CATalog?............................................................................................ 1361 DISPlay:THEMe:SELect............................................................................................... 1362
DISPlay:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci>
This command resets the color scheme for the display. The query returns the default color scheme.
Suffix: <it>
. Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined. For more information see Chapter 13.10.5.3, "CMAP Suffix Assignment", on page 1362.
<ci>
1
Current colors with a white background and a black grid.
2
Optimized colors.
3
Customized colors.
4
Current screen colors (setting for hardcopies).
Suffix irrelevant for query
Return values: <DefScheme>
1 | 2 | 3 | 4
The default color scheme for the selected item, as specified by the <ci> suffix.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1360
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example: Manual operation:
DISP:CMAP:DEF2 Selects default setting 2 for setting the colors. DISP:CMAP:DEF? //Result: 2
See " Screen Colors " on page 699
DISPlay:CMAP<it>:HSL <hue>, <sat>, <lum>
This command selects the color for various screen elements in the display.
Suffix: <it>
. 1..n Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined. For more information see Chapter 13.10.5.3, "CMAP Suffix Assignment", on page 1362.
Parameters: <hue>
tint Range:
0 to 1
<sat>
saturation Range: 0 to 1
<lum>
brightness Range: 0 to 1
Example:
DISP:CMAP2:HSL 0.3,0.8,1.0 Changes the grid color.
DISPlay:CMAP<it>:PDEFined <Color>
This command selects a predefined color for various screen elements.
Suffix: <it>
. 1..n Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined. For more information see Chapter 13.10.5.3, "CMAP Suffix Assignment", on page 1362.
Parameters: <Color>
BLACk | BLUE | BROWn | GREen | CYAN | RED | MAGenta | YELLow | WHITe | DGRay | LGRay | LBLue | LGReen | LCYan | LRED | LMAGenta
Example:
DISP:CMAP2:PDEF GRE
Manual operation: See "Restoring the User Settings to Default Colors" on page 702
DISPlay:THEMe:CATalog? This command queries all available display themes.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1361
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Return values: <Themes>
Example:
Usage:
String containing all available display themes. DISP:THEMe:CAT? Query only
DISPlay:THEMe:SELect <Theme>
This command selects the display theme.
Parameters: <Theme>
String containing the name of the theme.
*RST:
SPL
Example:
DISP:THEM:SEL "BlueOcean"
Manual operation: See " Theme " on page 699
13.10.5.3 CMAP Suffix Assignment
Several commands to change the color settings of individual items of the display or printout are available. Which item is to be configured is defined using a <CMAP> suffix. The following assignment applies:
Suffix CMAP1 CMAP2 CMAP3 *) CMAP4 *) CMAP5 *) CMAP6 *) CMAP7 *) CMAP8 CMAP9 CMAP10 CMAP11 CMAP12 CMAP13 CMAP14 CMAP15 *) CMAP16 *) CMAP17 *)
Description Background Grid Common Text Check Status OK Check Status Error Text Special 1 Text Special 2 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Marker Info Text Limit Lines Limit and Margin Check � "Pass" Limit and Margin Check � "Fail" Softkey Text Softkey Background Selected Field Text
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1362
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Suffix CMAP18 *) CMAP19 *) CMAP20 *) CMAP21 *) CMAP22 *) CMAP23 *) CMAP24 CMAP25 CMAP26 CMAP27 CMAP28 CMAP29 *) CMAP30 CMAP31 CMAP32 *) CMAP33 *) CMAP34 *) CMAP35 *) CMAP36 *) CMAP37 *) CMAP38 *) CMAP39 *) CMAP40 CMAP41
Description Selected Field Background Softkey 3D Bright Part Softkey 3D Dark Part Softkey State "On" Softkey State "Dialog open" Softkey Text Disabled Logo Trace 4 Grid � Minorlines Marker Display Lines Sweepcount � Text Limit and Margin Check � Text Limit and Margin Check � \"Margin\" Table Overall � Title Text Table Overall � Title Background Table Overall � Text Table Overall � Background Table Value � Title Text Table Value � Title Background Table Value � Text Table Value � Background Trace 5 Trace 6
*) these settings can only be defined via the theme (DISPlay:THEMe:SELect) and are thus ignored in the SCPI command
13.10.6 Remote Commands for Language Settings
SYSTem:DISPlay:LANGuage........................................................................................ 1364
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1363
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
SYSTem:DISPlay:LANGuage <Language>
Defines the language of the software-defined interface elements (such as softkeys, dialog boxes, diagram texts etc.).
Parameters: <Language>
'EN' | 'ZH_CH' | 'ZH_TW' | 'JA' | 'KO' | 'RU'
'ZH_CH' Simplified Chinese
'ZH_TW' Traditional Chinese
*RST:
'EN'
Example:
SYST:DISP:LANG 'JA' Switches the language of the instrument to Japanese.
13.10.7 Configuring the Network and Remote Control
The following commands are required to configure a network or remote control for the R&S FSW.
Useful commands for configuring remote control described elsewhere:
SYSTem:LANGuage on page 1413
Remote commands exclusive to configuring a network and remote control
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess............................................................. 1364 SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator........................................................ 1365 SYSTem:DISPlay:LOCK............................................................................................... 1365 SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate............................................................................................. 1365 SYSTem:ERRor:DISPlay.............................................................................................. 1366 SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory............................................................................................1366 SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing]........................................................................................... 1366 SYSTem:KLOCk.......................................................................................................... 1366 SYSTem:LXI:LANReset................................................................................................ 1367 SYSTem:LXI:MDEScription........................................................................................... 1367 SYSTem:LXI:PASSword................................................................................................1367 SYSTem:REVision:FACTory.......................................................................................... 1367 SYSTem:SHIMmediate ONCE.......................................................................................1367 SYSTem:SHIMmediate:STATe....................................................................................... 1368
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess <Address>
This command sets the GPIB address of the R&S FSW.
Parameters: <Address>
Range: *RST:
0 to 30 (no influence on this parameter, factory default 20)
Example:
SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1364
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Manual operation: See "GPIB Address" on page 829
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator <Terminator>
This command selects the GPIB receive terminator.
Output of binary data from the instrument to the control computer does not require such a terminator change.
Parameters: <Terminator>
LFEOI | EOI
LFEOI According to the standard, the terminator in ASCII is <LF> and/or <EOI>.
EOI For binary data transfers (e.g. trace data) from the control computer to the instrument, the binary code used for <LF> might be included in the binary data block, and therefore should not be interpreted as a terminator in this particular case. This can be avoided by using only the receive terminator EOI.
*RST:
LFEOI
Example:
SYST:COMM:GPIB:RTER EOI
Manual operation: See "GPIB Terminator" on page 830
SYSTem:DISPlay:LOCK <State>
Defines whether the "Display Update" function remains available in remote operation or not.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 The function remains available.
ON | 1 The function is not available and the display is not updated during remote operation.
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See "Remote Display Update" on page 830
SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate <State> This command turns the display during remote operation on and off. If on, the R&S FSW updates the diagrams, traces and display fields only. The best performance is obtained if the display is off during remote control operation.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1365
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Parameters: <State>
Example: Manual operation:
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
SYST:DISP:UPD ON
See "Remote Display Update" on page 830
SYSTem:ERRor:DISPlay <State>
This command the error display during remote operation on and off.
If activated, the R&S FSW displays a message box at the bottom of the screen that contains the most recent type of error and the command that caused the error.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
SYST:ERR:DISP ON
Manual operation: See "Display Remote Errors" on page 831
SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory This command resets the query to *IDN? to its default value. Manual operation: See "Reset to Factory String" on page 829
SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing] <String>
This command defines the response to *IDN?.
Parameters: <String>
String containing the description of the instrument.
Manual operation: See "Identification String" on page 829
SYSTem:KLOCk <State>
This command activates the local lockout (remote control) or returns to the local mode.
Parameters: <State>
ON LLO (local lockout)
OFF GTL (go to local)
*RST:
OFF
Example:
SYST:KLOC ON Activates LLO (remote control)
Manual operation: See "Local" on page 844
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1366
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
SYSTem:LXI:LANReset
This command resets the LAN configuration, as well as the "LAN" password and instrument description.
Manual operation: See " LAN Reset" on page 836
SYSTem:LXI:MDEScription <Description>
This command defines the "LAN" instrument description.
Parameters: <Description>
String containing the instrument description.
SYSTem:LXI:PASSword <Password>
This command defines the "LAN" password.
Parameters: <Password>
String containing the password.
Manual operation: See "LAN Password" on page 836
SYSTem:REVision:FACTory
Resets the response to the REV? query to the factory default value.
For example, after a user string was defined using the SYSTem:REVision[:STRing] on page 1414 command. (REV? query available for HP emulation only, see SYSTem: LANGuage on page 1413.)
Example:
Define the system language: SYST:LANG '8563E' Set the response back to factory setting: SYS:REV:FACT Query the revision: REV? Response: 920528
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Resetting the Factory Revision" on page 834
SYSTem:SHIMmediate ONCE
Executes any received remote commands that cause changes to the hardware and have not been executed yet due to a SYST:SHIM:STAT OFF command.
Example:
SYST:SHIM:STAT ON ... SYST:SHIM ONCE
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1367
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Set Hardware Immediately" on page 831
SYSTem:SHIMmediate:STATe <State>
Determines when the remote commands that change hardware settings on the R&S FSW are executed.
Regardless of this setting, the firmware automatically sets the hardware when a sweep is started.
This setting is not changed by the preset function.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Remote commands that cause changes to the hardware are only executed when the SYSTem:SHIMmediate ONCE command is executed.
ON | 1 Remote commands are always executed immediately when they are received by the instrument.
*RST:
1
Example:
SYST:SHIM:STAT ON ... SYST:SHIM ONCE
Manual operation: See "Set Hardware Immediately" on page 831
13.10.8 Configuring HUMS
This section includes all commands needed for R&S HUMS remote operations.
DIAGnostic:HUMS:DELete:ALL..................................................................................... 1369 DIAGnostic:HUMS:FORMat.......................................................................................... 1369 DIAGnostic:HUMS:STATe............................................................................................. 1369 DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:ALL?..................................................................................... 1370 DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete:ALL............................................................................1370 DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete.................................................................................. 1370 DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS[:VALue]..................................................................................1370 SYSTem:COMMunicate:REST:ENABle...........................................................................1371 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RO.............................................................. 1371 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RW..............................................................1372 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:CONTact........................................................................1372 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:LOCation....................................................................... 1372 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER.................................................................... 1373 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:ALL?........................................................... 1373
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1368
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete........................................................ 1373 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete:ALL................................................. 1374 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:VERSion........................................................................1374
DIAGnostic:HUMS:DELete:ALL
This command deletes the complete HUMS data. This includes device history, device tags, SCPI connections, utilization history and utilizations.
Example:
//Delete HUMS data DIAG:HUMS:DEL:ALL
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Delete HUMS History" on page 838
DIAGnostic:HUMS:FORMat <DataFormat>
This command defines the format for the queried HUMS data. You can query the HUMS data either in JSON format or XML format.
The defined format affects all other commands that return block data.
Parameters: <DataFormat>
JSON | XML
JSON Returns the HUMS data in JSON format.
XML Returns the HUMS data in XML format.
*RST:
JSON
Example:
//Return data in JSON format DIAG:HUMS:FORM JSON
DIAGnostic:HUMS:STATe <State>
This command turns the HUMS service and data collection on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
ON
Example:
//Turn on HUMS service DIAG:HUMS:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "State" on page 838
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1369
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:ALL?
This command returns all key-value tags that you have assigend to the instrument. Depending on the set data format, the queried data is either displayed in XML or JSON format. For more information about setting the data format, see DIAGnostic:HUMS: FORMat on page 1369.
Return values: <ID>
ID number of the defined tag.
<Key>
String containing key name of the defined tag.
<Value>
String containing value of the defined tag.
Example:
//Return all tags DIAG:HUMS:TAGS:ALL? 1,"location","building_11",2,"time zone","CET"
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Value" on page 842
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete:ALL
This command deletes all key-value tags you have assigned to the instrument.
Example:
//Delete all tags DIAG:HUMS:TAGS:DEL:ALL
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Delete All" on page 842
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete <ID>
This command deletes a certain tag you assigned to your instrument, including its key and value.
Setting parameters:
<ID>
ID number of the tag you want to delete.
To identify the ID number, query all device tags from the system
first. For more information, see DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:
ALL? on page 1370.
Example:
//Delete tag DIAG:HUMS:TAGS:DEL 0
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See "Delete All" on page 842
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS[:VALue] <ID>, <Key>, <Value> DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS[:VALue]? <ID>
This command adds or modifies a key-value pair (device tag).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1370
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
The query returns the key-value pair for a given ID or an empty string if the ID is unknown.
Parameters: <Key>
String containing key name of the queried tag.
<Value>
String containing value of the queried tag.
Parameters for setting and query:
<ID>
0 - 31
ID number of the tag you want to modify or query.
To identify the ID number, query all device tags from the system
first. For more information, read here DIAGnostic:HUMS:
TAGS:ALL? on page 1370.
Example:
//Add or modify a tag (tag 1) DIAG:HUMS:TAGS 1,'location','building_11'
Manual operation: See "Add" on page 842
SYSTem:COMMunicate:REST:ENABle <RestState>
This command returns information about the HUMS REST status and enables or disables the public HUMS REST endpoints.
Parameters: <RestState>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
Example:
//Return REST state SYST:COMM:REST:ENAB?
Manual operation: See "REST" on page 839
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RO <CommunityString>
This command sets the SNMP community string for read-only access.
Prerequisites for this command:
Select an SNMP version that supports communities (SYSTem:COMMunicate: SNMP:VERSion on page 1374).
Setting parameters: <CommunityString> String containing the community name.
Example:
//Set community name SYST:COMM:SNMP:VERS V12 SYST:COMM:SNMP:COMM:RO 'ABC'
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See "Access" on page 840
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1371
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RW <CommunityString>
This command sets the SNMP community string for read-write access.
Prerequisites for this command:
Select an SNMP version that supports communities (SYSTem:COMMunicate: SNMP:VERSion on page 1374).
Setting parameters: <CommunityString> String containing the community name.
Example:
//Set read-write access SYST:COMM:SNMP:VERS V12 SYST:COMM:SNMP:COMM:RW 'ABC'
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See "Access" on page 840
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:CONTact <SnmpSysContact>
This command sets the SNMP contact information for the administrator.
Not setting the contact information via SCPI persistently allows to change the string via SNMP.
Parameters for setting and query: <SnmpSysContact> String containing SNMP contact.
*RST:
"" (empty string)
Example:
//Set SNMP sysContact SYST:COMM:SNMP:CONT 'ABC'
Manual operation: See "SNMP Contact" on page 841
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:LOCation <SnmpSysLocation> SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:LOCation? <SnmpSysLocation>
This command sets the SNMP location information for the administrator.
Not setting the contact information via SCPI persistently allows to change this string via SNMP.
Parameters for setting and query: <SnmpSysLocation> String containing SNMP location.
*RST:
"" (empty string)
Example:
//Return SNMP location SYST:COMM:SNMP:LOC?
Manual operation: See "SNMP Location" on page 841
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1372
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER <Name>, <Access>, <Level>[, <Auth_pwd>[, <Priv_pwd>]]
This command defines a SNMP user profile.
Prerequisites for this command: Select SNMPv3 (SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:VERSion on page 1374).
Setting parameters:
<Name>
String containing name of the user.
<Access>
RO | RW Defines the access right a user can have.
<Level>
NOAuth | AUTH | PRIVacy Defines the security level.
<Auth_pwd>
String containing the authentication password.
<Priv_pwd>
String containing the privacy password.
Example:
//Create user profile SYST:COMM:SNMP:VERS V123 SYST:COMM:SNMP:USM:USER 'Peter','RO','PRIV', '1234','XYZ'
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See "SNMPv3 Configuration" on page 840
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:ALL?
This command returns the number of users and a list of all SNMP users for SNMPv3.
Prerequisites for this command: Select SNMPv3 (SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:VERSion on page 1374).
Return values: <Count>
Total number of registered SNMP users.
<Name>
List of all user names as a comma-separated list.
Example:
//Return all SNMP users SYST:COMM:SNMP:USM:USER:ALL?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "SNMPv3 Configuration" on page 840
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete <UserName>
This command deletes a specific SNMP user profile.
Setting parameters:
<UserName>
String containing name of SNMP user profile to be deleted.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1373
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
//Delete SNMP user profile SYST:COMM:SNMP:USM:USER:DEL "Peter"
Setting only
See "SNMPv3 Configuration" on page 840
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete:ALL
This command deletes all SNMP user profiles.
Example:
//Delete all SNMP user profiles SYST:COMM:SNMP:USM:USER:DEL:ALL
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "SNMPv3 Configuration" on page 840
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:VERSion <SnmpVersion> SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:VERSion? <SnmpVersion>
This command selects the SNMP version.
Parameters for setting and query:
<SnmpVersion>
OFF | V12 | V123 | V3 | DEFault
OFF SNMP communication is off.
V12 SNMP communication with SNMPv2 or lower.
V123 SNMP communication with SNMPv2 and SNMPv3.
V3 SNMP communication with SNMPv3.
*RST:
V123
Example:
//Select the SNMP version SYST:COMM:SNMP:VERS V12
Manual operation: See "SNMP" on page 839
13.10.9 Checking the System Configuration
The following commands are required to check the system configuration on the R&S FSW. Useful commands for obtaining system information described elsewhere: DIAGnostic:SERVice:SINFo? on page 1385
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1374
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Remote commands exclusive to obtaining system information:
DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt?........................................................................................... 1375 DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:DATE......................................................................... 1376 DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:DUE:DATE................................................................. 1376 DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:INTerval?....................................................................1376 DIAGnostic:SERVice:DATE........................................................................................... 1376 DEVice:INFO:HWBand?............................................................................................... 1377 DIAGnostic:SERVice:BIOSinfo?.................................................................................... 1377 DIAGnostic:SERVice:HWINfo?...................................................................................... 1378 DIAGnostic:SERVice:VERSinfo?................................................................................... 1378 SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:ALL.......................................................................................... 1379 SYSTem:DFPRint.........................................................................................................1379 SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:REMote.................................................................................... 1379 SYSTem:ERRor:EXTended?......................................................................................... 1379 SYSTem:ERRor:LIST?................................................................................................. 1380 SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?.............................................................................................. 1380 SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate..........................................................................................1381 SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt............................................................................................... 1381 SYSTem:OPTion:TRIal:LIST?........................................................................................1381 SYSTem:OPTion:TRIal[:STATe]..................................................................................... 1382 SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible....................................................................................... 1382 SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe]............................................................................................ 1382
DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt? <Relay>
This command queries how many switching cycles the individual relays have performed since they were installed.
Query parameters: <Relay>
ACDC Mechanical Attenuation Coupling
ATT5 Mechanical Attenuation 05 DB
ATT10 Mechanical Attenuation 10 DB
ATT20 Mechanical Attenuation 20 DB
ATT40 Mechanical Attenuation 40 DB
CAL Mechanical Calibration Source
EATT Electrical Attenuation Bypass
PREamp Preamplifier Bypass
Return values: <Cycles>
Number of switching cycles.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1375
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example: Usage: Manual operation:
DIAG:INFO:CCO? CAL Query only See " Relays Cycle Counter " on page 758
DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:DATE <CalibrationDate>
This command sets last date and time the instrument was calibrated in ISO 8601 format.
Parameters: <CalibrationDate>
String containing calibration date of the instrument.
Example:
//Set calibration date DIAG:SERV:CAL:DATE "2019-05-05T00:00:00Z"
Manual operation: See "Last Calibration Date" on page 752
DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:DUE:DATE <DueDate>
This command sets next date and time the instrument needs calibration to be done in ISO 8601 format. The response may be empty in case of no fixed next calibration due.
Parameters: <DueDate>
String containing next calibration due date.
Example:
//Set calibration due date DIAG:SERV:CAL:DUE:DATE "2020-05-12T00:00:00Z"
Manual operation: See "Next Calibration Due" on page 752
DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:INTerval?
This command queries the recommended calibration interval (ISO 8601 duration).
Return values: <Interval>
String containing the recommended calibration interval.
Example:
//Query calibration interval DIAG:SERV:CAL:INT? //would return, for example (one year interval) P1Y
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Next Calibration Due" on page 752
DIAGnostic:SERVice:DATE <ServiceDate>
This command sets the last date and time the instrument was serviced (ISO 8601 format).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1376
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Parameters: <ServiceDate>
Example:
String containing last service date.
//Return last service date DIAG:SERV:DATE?
Manual operation: See "Last Service Date" on page 752
DEVice:INFO:HWBand?
Queries the frequency bands used for measurement by the R&S FSW hardware. The start frequency of each band is provided.
The bands are instrument-specific and depend on the currently defined RBW, VBW and YIG preselector state. The precise frequency bands are required to define correction data for the correct bands, in particular for frequency-drifting DUTs.
This query is only available in zero span mode.
Return values: <StartFreq>
Example:
//Set to zero span mode FREQ:SPAN 0 //Set RBW BAND:RES 1000000 //Set VBW BAND:VID 10000 //Activate YIG filter INP:FILT:YIG ON //Query used hardware bands DEV:INFO:HWB? //Result: //0,50000000,450000000,1000000000,3000000000,4000000000,5200000000,...
The used bands for this instrument and measurement setup are: 0 Hz to 49999999 Hz 50000000 Hz to 44999999 450000000 Hz to 999999999 1000000000 Hz to 2999999999 3000000000 Hz to 3999999999 4000000000 Hz to 5199999999 5200000000 Hz to ...
Usage:
Query only
DIAGnostic:SERVice:BIOSinfo?
This command queries the BIOS version of the CPU board.
Return values: <BiosInformation> String containing the BIOS version.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1377
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example: Usage:
DIAG:SERV:BIOS? Returns the BIOS version.
Query only
DIAGnostic:SERVice:HWINfo?
This command queries hardware information.
Return values: <Hardware>
String containing the following information for every hardware component. <component>: name of the hardware component <serial#>: serial number of the component <order#>: order number of the component <model>: model of the component <code>: code of the component <revision>: revision of the component <subrevision>: subrevision of the component
Example:
DIAG:SERV:HWIN? Queries the hardware information. "FRONTEND|100001/003|1300.3009|03|01|00|00", "MOTHERBOARD|123456/002|1300.3080|02|00|00|00", ...
Usage:
Query only
DIAGnostic:SERVice:VERSinfo?
This command queries information about the hardware and software components.
Return values: <Information>
String containing the version of hardware and software components including the types of licenses for installed options.
Example:
DIAG:SERV:VERS? Queries the version information. Response:
Instrument Firmware |1.10 BIOS |FSW Analyzer BIOS V1.03-1-32-4-3 IPC10 Image Version |1.2.0 PCI-FPGA |9.01 SA-FPGA |2.43 MB-FPGA |2.0.8.0 SYNTH-FPGA |3.9.0.0 REF-FPGA |3.4.0.0 Data Sheet Version |01.00 Time Control Management |active Analog Demod K7| |permanent
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1378
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:ALL
This command deletes all contents of the "System Messages" table.
Example:
SYST:ERR:CLE:ALL
SYSTem:DFPRint
Creates an *.xml file with information on installed hardware, software, image and FPGA versions. The *.xml file is stored under C:\R_S\INSTR\devicedata\xml\DeviceFootprint_* on the instrument. It is also output to the remote interface as binary data.
Return values: <InfoFile>
Contents of the xml file in binary format.
Example:
SYST:DFPR?
Manual operation: See " Save Device Footprint " on page 751
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:REMote
This command deletes all contents of the "Remote Errors" table.
Note: The remote error list is automatically cleared when the R&S FSW is shut down.
Example:
SYST:ERR:CLE:REM
Manual operation: See "Display Remote Errors" on page 831 See "Clear Error List" on page 844
SYSTem:ERRor:EXTended? <MessageType>[, <ChannelName>]
This command queries all system messages, or all messages of a defined type, displayed in the status bar for a specific channel (application).
Note: This command queries the strings displayed for manual operation. For remote programs, do not define processing steps depending on these results. Instead, query the results of the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO status register, which indicates whether messages of a certain type have occurred (see "STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO Register" on page 803).
Parameters: <MessageType>
ALL | INFO | WARNing | FATal | ERRor | MESSage
<ChannelName>
String containing the name of the channel. The parameter is optional. If you omit it, the command works for the currently active channel.
Return values: <Messages>
String containing all messages of the selected type for the specified channel. Each message is separated by a comma and inserted in parentheses. If no messages are available, empty parentheses are returned.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1379
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example: Example: Usage:
SYST:ERR:EXT? ALL Returns all messages for the currently active application, e.g. "Message 1","Message 2".
SYST:ERR:EXT? FAT,'Spectrum2' Queries fatal errors in the 'Spectrum2' application. If none have occurred, the result is: " ".
Query only
SYSTem:ERRor:LIST? [<MessType>]
This command queries the error messages that occur during R&S FSW operation.
Query parameters: <MessType>
SMSG | REMote
SMSG (default) Queries the system messages which occurred during manual operation.
REMote Queries the error messages that occurred during remote operation. Note: The remote error list is automatically cleared when the R&S FSW is shut down.
Return values: <SystemMessages> String containing all messages in the "System Messages" table.
<RemoteErrors>
<Error_no>|<Description>|<Command>|<Date>|<Time>
Comma-separated list of errors from the "Remote Errors" table, where: <Error_no>: device-specific error code <Description>: brief description of the error <Command>: remote command causing the error <Date>|<Time>: date and time the error occurred
Usage:
Query only
SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
This command queries the most recent error queue entry and deletes it.
Positive error numbers indicate device-specific errors, negative error numbers are error messages defined by SCPI. If the error queue is empty, the error number 0, "No error", is returned.
For details on error queues see Chapter 12.1.7, "Status Reporting System", on page 793.
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1380
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate <Directory>
This command starts a firmware update using the *.msi files in the selected directory. The default path is D:\FW_UPDATE. The path is changed via the MMEMory:COMMent command. To store the update files the MMEMory:DATA command is used.
Only user accounts with administrator rights can perform a firmware update.
Setting parameters: <Directory>
Example:
SYST:FIRM:UPD 'D:\FW_UPDATE' Starts the firmware update from directory "D:\FW_UPDATE".
SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt <IDNFormat>
This command selects the response format to the *IDN? query.
Parameters: <IDNFormat>
LEGacy Format is compatible to R&S FSP/FSU/FSQ/FSG family.
NEW | FSL R&S FSW format Format is also compatible to the R&S FSL and R&S FSV family
*RST:
not reset!
Example:
SYST:FORM:IDEN LEG Adapts the return value of *IDN? to the R&S FSP/FSU/FSQ family.
Manual operation: See "*IDN Format" on page 830
SYSTem:OPTion:TRIal:LIST? <ResultFilter>
Queries availability of applications using trial option T0.
Query parameters:
<ResultFilter>
TRIal
Returns available trial options.
Return values: <OptionList>
string values
Comma-separated list of strings for available options with trial license.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Trial option State" on page 743
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1381
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
SYSTem:OPTion:TRIal[:STATe] <State>
Determines availability of trial option T0. It is pre-installed at the factory on request.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off. The query result indicates the trial license is not available (not installed, expired).
ON | 1 If enabled, you can use additional applications for a limited period of time (90 days from factory installation). They are accessible from the common "Mode" dialog box (see Chapter 5.3, "Selecting the Operating Mode and Applications", on page 117). If the trial license is not available (not installed, expired) the command returns an error (E_OPTION_NA).
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See "Trial option State" on page 743
SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible <OpMode>
This command defines the operating mode that is activated when you switch on the R&S FSW or press the [PRESET] key.
For details on operating modes see Chapter 5, "Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes", on page 107.
Parameters: <OpMode>
SANalyzer (Default:) Defines Signal and Spectrum Analyzer operating mode as the presetting.
MSRA Defines Multi-Standard Radio Analysis (MSRA) as the preset default operating mode.
RTSM Defines Multi-Standard Real-Time (MSRT) as the preset default operating mode.
Manual operation: See " Preset Mode " on page 746
SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe] <State>
Activates or queries secure user mode.
Note: Before you activate secure user mode, store any instrument settings that are required beyond the current session, such as predefined instrument settings, transducer files, or self-alignment data.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1382
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Note: Initially after installation of the R&S FSW-K33 option, secure user mode must be enabled manually once before remote control is possible. This is necessary to prompt for a change of passwords.
For details on the secure user mode see Chapter 4.2.15, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
ON | 1 The R&S FSW automatically reboots and starts in secure user mode. In secure user mode, no data is written to the instrument's internal solid-state drive. Data that the R&S FSW normally stores on the solid-state drive is redirected to SDRAM.
OFF | 0 The R&S FSW is set to normal instrument mode. Data is stored to the internal solid-state drive. Note: this parameter is for query only. Secure user mode cannot be deactivated via remote operation.
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See " SecureUser Mode " on page 747
13.10.10 Signal Generator Control Commands
The remote commands required to control connected generators are described here.
CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection:CSTate?................................................................. 1383 CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection[:STATe].................................................................. 1384 CONFigure:GENerator:IPConnection:ADDRess.............................................................. 1384
CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection:CSTate?
Queries the state of the connected signal generator.
Return values: <ConnectionState>
UNKNown no signal generator connected
CONNected connection established
NCONnected connection could not be established, possibly due to an incompatible instrument or invalid IP address
Example:
CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection:CSTate?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Signal Generator IP Address" on page 222 See "Connect/Disconnect" on page 223 See "Test Connection" on page 749
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1383
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection[:STATe] <State>
Connects or disconnects the signal generator specified by CONFigure:GENerator: IPConnection:ADDRess on page 1384. The IP address must be specified before you use this command.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Disconnects the generator.
ON | 1 Connects the generator.
*RST:
0
Example:
CONF:GEN:IPC:ADDR '192.168.114.90' CONF:GEN:CONN:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Connect/Disconnect" on page 223 See "Test Connection" on page 749
CONFigure:GENerator:IPConnection:ADDRess <IPAddress>
The TCPIP address or computer name of the signal generator connected to the R&S FSW via LAN.
The IP address / computer name is maintained after a [PRESET], and is transferred between applications.
Parameters: <IPAddress>
IP address or computer name
Example:
CONF:GEN:IPC:ADDR '192.168.114.90'
Manual operation:
See "IP Address / Computer Name" on page 222 See "IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator" on page 749
13.10.11 Using Service Functions
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction....................................................................................1384 DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:LASTresult?................................................................. 1385 DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:DELete........................................................... 1385 DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:SAVE..............................................................1385 DIAGnostic:SERVice:SINFo?........................................................................................ 1385 SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable]......................................................................................1386 SYSTem:PASSword:RESet........................................................................................... 1386
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction <ServiceFunction>
This command starts a service function.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1384
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
The service functions are available after you have entered the level 1 or level 2 system password.
Parameters for setting and query: <ServiceFunction> String containing the ID of the service function.
The ID of the service function is made up out of five numbers, separated by a point. � function group number � board number � function number � parameter 1 (see the Service Manual) � parameter 2 (see the Service Manual)
Example:
DIAG:SERV:SFUN 'Function1' DIAG:SERV:SFUN? 'Function2'
Manual operation: See " Service Function " on page 756 See " Send " on page 756
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:LASTresult?
This command queries the results of the most recent service function you have used.
Return values: <Result>
Usage:
Query only
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:DELete
This command deletes the results of the most recent service function you have used.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See " Clear Results " on page 757
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:SAVE [<FileName>]
This command saves the results of the most recent service function you have used.
Parameters: <FileName>
String containing the file name.
Manual operation: See " Save Results " on page 757
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SINFo?
This command creates a *.zip file with important support information. The *.zip file contains the system configuration information ("device footprint"), the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display (if available).
This data is stored to the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER directory on the instrument.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1385
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
As a result of this command, the created file name (including the drive and path) is returned.
You can use the resulting file name information as a parameter for the MMEM:COPY command to store the file on the controller PC.
(See MMEMory:COPY on page 1286)
If you contact the Rohde&Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem, send this file to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster.
Return values: <FileName>
C:\R_S\INSTR\USER \<R&S Device ID>_<CurrentDate>_<CurrentTime>
String containing the drive, path and file name of the created support file, where the file name consists of the following elements: <R&S Device ID>: The unique R&S device ID indicated in the "Versions + Options" information (See Chapter 11.7.2, "Information on Versions and Options", on page 742) <CurrentDate>: The date on which the file is created (<YYYYMMDD>) <CurrentTime>: The time at which the file is created (<HHMMSS>)
Example:
DIAG:SERV:SINF? Result:
"c:\R&S\instr\user\FSW-26_1312.8000K26-100005-xx_20130116_165858.zip"
MMEM:COPY "c:\R&S\instr\user\FSW-26_ 1312.8000K26-100005-xx_20130116_165858.zip", "S:\Debug\ESW-26_1312.8000K26-100005-xx_ 20130116_165858.zip"
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Create R&S Support Information " on page 751
SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] <arg0>
Provides a password for subsequent service functions.
Parameters: <arg0>
string
Example:
SYST:PASS:CEN '894129'
Manual operation: See " Password " on page 757
SYSTem:PASSword:RESet
Clears any previously provided password and returns to the most restrictive service level.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1386
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Manual operation: See " Password " on page 757
13.10.12 Remote Commands for Synchronizing Parameters
The commands for manual operation are described in Chapter 11.9, "Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration", on page 758
Predefined Parameter Coupling..........................................................................1387 User-Defined Parameter Coupling...................................................................... 1393 Generator Coupling.............................................................................................1402
13.10.12.1 Predefined Parameter Coupling
INSTrument:COUPle:ABIMpedance............................................................................... 1387 INSTrument:COUPle:ACDC.......................................................................................... 1388 INSTrument:COUPle:ATTen.......................................................................................... 1388 INSTrument:COUPle:AUNit...........................................................................................1388 INSTrument:COUPle:BANDwidth...................................................................................1389 INSTrument:COUPle:BWIDth........................................................................................ 1389 INSTrument:COUPle:CENTer........................................................................................ 1389 INSTrument:COUPle:DEMod........................................................................................ 1389 INSTrument:COUPle:GAIN........................................................................................... 1390 INSTrument:COUPle:IMPedance................................................................................... 1390 INSTrument:COUPle:LIMit............................................................................................ 1390 INSTrument:COUPle:LLINes......................................................................................... 1391 INSTrument:COUPle:MARKer....................................................................................... 1391 INSTrument:COUPle:PRESel........................................................................................ 1392 INSTrument:COUPle:RLEVel........................................................................................ 1392 INSTrument:COUPle:SPAN...........................................................................................1392 INSTrument:COUPle:VBW............................................................................................ 1393
INSTrument:COUPle:ABIMpedance <State>
This command turns synchronization of the amplitude baseband impedance configuration between measurement channels on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ALL | NONE
ALL Turns on synchronization.
NONE Turns off synchronization.
*RST:
NONE
Example:
INST:COUP:ABIM ALL
Manual operation: See "Synchronizing parameters across all measurement channels" on page 759
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1387
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
INSTrument:COUPle:ACDC <State>
This command turns synchronization of the AC / DC Coupling state between measurement channels on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ALL | NONE
ALL Turns on synchronization.
NONE Turns off synchronization.
*RST:
ALL
Example:
INST:COUP:ACDC ALL Synchronizes the "AC/DC Coupling" parameter.
Manual operation: See "Synchronizing parameters across all measurement channels" on page 759
INSTrument:COUPle:ATTen <State>
This command turns synchronization of the attenuation and unit between measurement channels on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ALL | NONE
ALL Turns on synchronization.
NONE Turns off synchronization.
*RST:
ALL
Example:
INST:COUP:ATT ALL Synchronizes the attenuation.
Manual operation: See "Synchronizing parameters across all measurement channels" on page 759
INSTrument:COUPle:AUNit <State>
This command turns synchronization of the amplitude unit configuration between measurement channels on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ALL | NONE
ALL Turns on synchronization.
NONE Turns off synchronization.
*RST:
NONE
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1388
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example: Manual operation:
INST:COUP:AUN ALL
See "Synchronizing parameters across all measurement channels" on page 759
INSTrument:COUPle:BANDwidth <State> INSTrument:COUPle:BWIDth <State>
This command turns synchronization of the resolution bandwidth (and filter type) between measurement channels on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ALL | NONE
ALL Turns on synchronization.
NONE Turns on synchronization.
*RST:
NONE
Example:
INST:COUP:BWID ALL Synchronizes the resolution bandwidth.
INSTrument:COUPle:CENTer <State>
This command turns synchronization of the frequency between measurement channels on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ALL | NONE
ALL Turns on synchronization.
NONE Turns off synchronization.
*RST:
ALL
Example:
INST:COUP:CENT ALL Synchronizes the center frequency.
Manual operation: See "Synchronizing parameters across all measurement channels" on page 759
INSTrument:COUPle:DEMod <State>
This command turns synchronization of the audio demodulator configuration between measurement channels on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ALL | NONE
ALL Turns on synchronization.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1389
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example:
NONE Turns off synchronization.
*RST:
NONE
INST:COUP:DEM ALL Synchronizes the audio demodulator configuration.
INSTrument:COUPle:GAIN <State>
This command turns synchronization of the preamplifier configuration between measurement channels on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ALL | NONE
ALL Turns on synchronization.
NONE Turns off synchronization.
*RST:
NONE
Example:
INST:COUP:GAIN ALL Synchronizes the preamplifier configuration.
Manual operation: See "Synchronizing parameters across all measurement channels" on page 759
INSTrument:COUPle:IMPedance <State>
This command turns synchronization of the impedance configuration between measurement channels on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ALL | NONE
ALL Turns on synchronization.
NONE Turns off synchronization.
*RST:
NONE
Example:
INST:COUP:IMP ALL
Manual operation: See "Synchronizing parameters across all measurement channels" on page 759
INSTrument:COUPle:LIMit <State>
This command turns synchronization of limit results between measurement channels on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ALL | NONE
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1390
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example: Manual operation:
ALL Turns on synchronization. Limit lines have to be compatible to the x-axis and y-axis configuration for successful synchronization.
NONE Turns off synchronization.
*RST:
ALL
INST:COUP:LIM ALL Synchronizes the limit values.
See "Synchronizing parameters across all measurement channels" on page 759
INSTrument:COUPle:LLINes <State>
This command turns synchronization of the limit lines between measurement channels on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ALL | NONE
ALL Turns on synchronization.
NONE Turns off synchronization.
*RST:
NONE
INSTrument:COUPle:MARKer <State>
This command turns synchronization of the marker frequency between measurement channels on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ALL | NONE
ALL Turns on synchronization.
NONE Turns off synchronization.
*RST:
NONE
Example:
INST:COUP:MARK ALL Synchronizes the receiver frequency and the marker frequency.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1391
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
INSTrument:COUPle:PRESel <State>
This command turns synchronization of the preselector state between measurement channels on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ALL | NONE
ALL Turns on synchronization.
NONE Turns off synchronization.
*RST:
ALL
Example:
INST:COUP:PRES ALL Synchronizes the preselector configuration.
INSTrument:COUPle:RLEVel <State>
This command turns synchronization of the reference level between measurement channels on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ALL | NONE
ALL Turns on synchronization.
NONE Turns off synchronization.
*RST:
NONE
Example:
INST:COUP:RLEV ALL
Manual operation: See "Synchronizing parameters across all measurement channels" on page 759
INSTrument:COUPle:SPAN <State>
This command turns synchronization of the start and stop frequency between measurement channels on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ALL | NONE
ALL Turns on synchronization.
NONE Turns off synchronization.
*RST:
NONE
Example:
INST:COUP:SPAN ALL Synchronizes the start and stop frequency.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1392
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Manual operation: See "Synchronizing parameters across all measurement channels" on page 759
INSTrument:COUPle:VBW <State>
This command turns synchronization of the video bandwidth between measurement channels on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ALL | NONE
ALL Turns on synchronization.
NONE Turns off synchronization.
*RST:
NONE
Example:
INST:COUP:VBW ALL Synchronizes the video bandwidth.
Manual operation: See "Synchronizing parameters across all measurement channels" on page 759
13.10.12.2 User-Defined Parameter Coupling
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>................................................................................... 1393 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:CHANnel:LIST?........................................................... 1395 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:ELEMent:LIST?........................................................... 1395 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:INFO.......................................................................... 1396 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NEW?.........................................................................1397 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST?...........................................................1399 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:RELation..................................................................... 1399 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:REMove......................................................................1400 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:STATe......................................................................... 1400 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:WINDow:LIST?............................................................ 1401
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc> <ChannelName>, <Window>, <Parameter>, <ChannelName>, <Window>, <Parameter>, <arg6>, <State>
This command edits an existing user-defined coupling definition.
The parameters for this command are identical to INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>: NEW?. Note, however, that for INSTrument:COUPling:USER<uc>, the last two parameters (<Direction> and <State>) are not optional.
Note: Make sure to specify the right index number via the USER suffix.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1393
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Suffix: <uc> Parameters: <ChannelName>
<Window>
<Parameter> <ChannelName> <Window> <Parameter> <arg6>
. Index of a user-defined parameter coupling. To obtain the list of indexes for currently defined coupling, see INSTrument: COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST?.
String containing the name of a measurement channel or channel type.
<Name> To synchronize two specific measurement channels.
'All Spectrum' To synchronize all spectrum channels.
'All IQ Analyzer' To synchronize all I/Q analyzer channels.
'All Analog Demod' To synchronize all analog demodulation channels.
'All Channels' To synchronize all channels, regardless of their type.
String containing the name of a measurement window.
<Name> To synchronize a specific window (only possible in the Analog Demodulation application).
'All Windows' To synchronize all measurement windows.
String containing the name of a synchronizable parameter.
String containing the name of a measurement channel or channel type. The second channel name is only necessary for synchronization between two specific channels. If you synchronize all channels of the same type or all channels, the string has to be empty.
String containing the name of a measurement window. The second window name is only necessary for synchronization between two specific channels. If you synchronize all channels of the same type or all channels, the string has to be empty.
String containing the name of a synchronizable parameter. The second parameter name is only necessary for synchronization between two specific channels. If you synchronize all channels of the same type or all channels, the string has to be empty.
LTOR | RTOL | BIDir
Selects the direction in which synchronization works.
BIDir Changes of a parameter are applied both ways (from channel 1 to channel 2 and vice versa).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1394
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
<State> Example: Manual operation:
LTOR Changes of a parameter are applied from channel 1 to channel 2, but not the other way around.
RTOL Changes of a parameter are applied from channel 2 to channel 1, but not the other way around.
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
Enables or disables the coupling
OFF | 0 Switches the coupling off
ON | 1 Switches the coupling on
*RST:
1
INST:COUP:USER3 'Spectrum1','All Windows','Attenuation','Spectrum 2','All Windows','Attenuation',BID,ON Synchronizes the attenuation between the channels named 'Spectrum1' and 'Spectrum 2' in both directions and turns on the coupling.
See "Edit coupling definition" on page 762
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:CHANnel:LIST?
This command queries the names of the measurement channels that can be synchronized.
Suffix: <uc>
. irrelevant
Return values: <SynchronizableChannCeol>mma-separated list of strings
All channels that can be synchronized.
Example:
INST:COUP:USER:CHAN:LIST? Result: 'SPEC1','AD1','All Spectrum','All Channels','All Analog Demod'
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Channel 1 / Channel 2" on page 764
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:ELEMent:LIST? [<ChannelName>, <Parameter>]
This command queries parameters that can be synchronized.
Suffix: <uc>
. irrelevant
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1395
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Query parameters: <ChannelName> Optional SCPI parameter.
String containing the name of a measurement channel.
<Parameter>
Optional SCPI parameter. String containing the name of a parameter that you can synchronize.
Return values: <SynchronizableParamCeotemrm> a-separated list of parameters.
No parameters provided Parameters that can be synchronized for all channels
Channel name provided Parameters that can be synchronized for the selected channel
Parameter and channel name provided Parameters that can be synchronized with the specified parameter for the selected channel.
Example:
INST:COUP:USER:ELEM:LIST? Result: all parameters that can be coupled: 'AC DC Coupling', 'Attenuation', 'Center Frequency', 'Display Lines', 'Frequency Marker 1',...
Example:
INST:COUP:USER:ELEM:LIST? 'Spectrum' Result: all parameters that can be coupled in the 'Spectrum' channel: 'AC DC Coupling','Attenuation','Center Frequency','Display Lines',...
Example:
INST:COUP:USER:ELEM:LIST? 'Spectrum', 'Attenuation' Result: all parameters that can be coupled to 'Attenuation' in the 'Spectrum' channel: 'Attenuation' (Attenuation is the only parameter that can be coupled to attenuation.)
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Coupling Element 1 / Coupling Element 2" on page 764
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:INFO
This command queries additional information about the specified user-defined parameter coupling.
Suffix: <uc>
. Index of a user-defined parameter coupling. To obtain the list of indexes for currently defined coupling, see INSTrument: COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST?.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1396
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Return values: <Information>
Example:
Manual operation:
String containing the message as displayed in the coupling manager. If the coupling message contains no message, an empty string is returned.
INST:COUP:USER2:INFO? Queries possible information about the user coupling with index 2. Result: 'Only one limit line allowed'
See "Info" on page 763
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NEW? <ChannelName>, <Window>, <Parameter>, <ChannelName>, <Window>, <Parameter>, <Direction>, <State>
This command creates a new user-defined parameter coupling.
After the new coupling has been created, the command returns the index number of the new coupling. Therefore, the command is implemented as a query.
Suffix: <uc>
. irrelevant
Query parameters: <ChannelName>
String containing the name of a measurement channel or channel type.
<Name> To synchronize two specific measurement channels.
'All Spectrum' To synchronize all spectrum channels.
'All IQ Analyzer' To synchronize all I/Q analyzer channels.
'All Analog Demod' To synchronize all analog demodulation channels.
'All Channels' To synchronize all channels, regardless of their type.
<Window>
String containing the name of a measurement window.
<Name> To synchronize a specific window (only possible in the Analog Demodulation application).
'All Windows' To synchronize all measurement windows.
<Parameter>
String containing the name of a synchronizable parameter.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1397
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
<ChannelName> <Window> <Parameter> <Direction>
<State>
Return values: <Index> Example:
String containing the name of a measurement channel or channel type. The second channel name is only necessary for synchronization between two specific channels. If you synchronize all channels of the same type or all channels, the string has to be empty.
String containing the name of a measurement window. The second window name is only necessary for synchronization between two specific channels. If you synchronize all channels of the same type or all channels, the string has to be empty.
String containing the name of a synchronizable parameter. The second parameter name is only necessary for synchronization between two specific channels. If you synchronize all channels of the same type or all channels, the string has to be empty.
LTOR | RTOL | BIDir
Optional: Selects the direction in which synchronization works.
BIDir Changes of a parameter are applied both ways (from channel 1 to channel 2 and vice versa).
LTOR Changes of a parameter are applied from channel 1 to channel 2, but not the other way around.
RTOL Changes of a parameter are applied from channel 2 to channel 1, but not the other way around.
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
Optional. Enables or disables coupling.
OFF | 0 Switches the coupling off
ON | 1 Switches the coupling on
*RST:
1
Index number of the new user-defined coupling. Note that the returned index numbers do not necessarily have to be the same as those shown in the user interface.
INST:COUP:USER:NEW? 'Spectrum1','All Windows','Attenuation','Spectrum2','All Windows','Attenuation',BID,ON Result: 3 Synchronizes the attenuation between the channels named 'Spectrum1' and 'Spectrum2' in both directions and turns on the coupling. Also returns the index number of the user-defined coupling.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1398
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
INST:COUP:USER:NEW? 'All Spectrum','All Windows','Attenuation','','','',BID,ON Result: 3 Synchronizes the attenuation between all Spectrum channels in both directions and turns on the coupling. Also returns the index number of the user-defined coupling.
Query only
See "Parameter 1 / Parameter 2" on page 763 See "Add New User Coupling" on page 763
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST?
This command queries the index numbers of user-defined parameter couplings. The index numbers are used to refer to the specific coupling in remote commands with a USER<uc> suffix.
Suffix: <uc>
. irrelevant
Return values: <Index>
Comma-separated list of strings
Index numbers of all available user-defined couplings Note that the returned index numbers are not necessarily the same as those shown in the user interface.
Example:
INST:COUP:USER:NUMB:LIST? Result: '1','2','4' Number '3' is not returned, because a coupling with that index does not exist anymore.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Index" on page 762
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:RELation <Direction>
This command selects the direction in which synchronization works.
Note that the command is not available if you synchronize over all channels or all channels of the same application.
Suffix: <uc>
. Index of a user-defined parameter coupling. To obtain the list of indexes for currently defined coupling, see INSTrument: COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST?.
Parameters: <Direction>
LTOR | RTOL | BIDir
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1399
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example: Manual operation:
BIDir Changes of a parameter are applied both ways (from channel 1 to channel 2 and vice versa).
LTOR Changes of a parameter are applied from channel 1 to channel 2, but not the other way around.
RTOL Changes of a parameter are applied from channel 2 to channel 1, but not the other way around.
INST:COUP:USER:REL BID Selects bidirectional changes for the user-defined coupling with the index number 1.
See "Direction" on page 763
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:REMove [<Scope>]
This command deletes a user-defined coupling mechanism.
Suffix: <uc>
. Index of a user-defined parameter coupling. To obtain the list of indexes for currently defined coupling, see INSTrument: COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST?.
Parameters: <Scope>
ALL Optional SCPI parameter, used instead of the <uc> suffix. Deletes all user-defined couplings.
Example:
INST:COUP:USER3:REM Removes the user-defined coupling with the index number 3.
Manual operation: See "Delete coupling definition" on page 763 See "Delete All" on page 763
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:STATe <State>
Enables or disables the specified user-defined parameter coupling.
Suffix: <uc>
. Index of a user-defined parameter coupling. To obtain the list of indexes for currently defined coupling, see INSTrument: COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST?.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1400
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example: Manual operation:
*RST:
0
INST:COUP:USER2:STAT ON Turns on the coupling with the index number 2.
See "State" on page 763
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:WINDow:LIST? [<ChannelName>, <Parameter>]
This command queries the measurement windows that can be synchronized with another channel (or measurement window).
Note that synchronizing with a specific measurement window is only possible in the Analog Demodulation application.
Suffix: <uc>
. irrelevant
Query parameters: <ChannelName> Optional SCPI parameter.
String containing the name of a measurement channel.
<Parameter>
Optional SCPI parameter. String containing the name of a parameter that you can synchronize.
Return values: <SynchronizableWindo<wc>har_data>
'All Windows' All windows can be synchronized. This value is always returned if no parameters are provided with the command.
Comma-separated list of strings String containing the names of the measurement windows that can be synchronized. This value is only available for marker coupling, which can be set independently of the measurement window.
Example:
INST:COUP:USER:WIND:LIST? Result: 'All Windows'
Example:
INST:COUP:USER:WIND:LIST? 'Analog Demod','Frequency Marker 1' Result: 'All Windows','1','2','3','4','5','6'
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Specifics for Window" on page 764
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1401
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
13.10.12.3 Generator Coupling
INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:CENTer:OFFSet........................................................... 1402 INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:CENTer[:STATe]............................................................1402 INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:RLEVel:OFFSet............................................................ 1402 INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:RLEVel[:STATe]............................................................ 1403 INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:STATe..........................................................................1403
INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:CENTer:OFFSet <Frequency>
Defines a fixed offset to the center frequency of the R&S FSW for the coupled signal generator.
This command requires the INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:STATe and the INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:CENTer[:STATe] to be ON.
Parameters: <Frequency>
Default unit: HZ
Example:
INST:COUP:GEN:STAT ON INST:COUP:GEN:CENT:STAT ON INST:COUP:GEN:CENT:OFFS 5
Manual operation: See "Generator Frequency Offset" on page 767
INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:CENTer[:STATe] <State>
Couples the center frequency of the connected signal generator to the R&S FSW.
This command requires the INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:STATe to be ON.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Example:
INST:COUP:GEN:STAT ON INST:COUP:GEN:CENT:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Center Frequency" on page 767
INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:RLEVel:OFFSet <Level>
Defines a fixed offset to the reference level of the R&S FSW for the coupled signal generator.
This command requires the INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:STATe and the INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:RLEVel[:STATe] to be ON.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1402
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Parameters: <Level> Example:
Manual operation:
Default unit: DB
INST:COUP:GEN:STAT ON INST:COUP:GEN:RLEV:STAT ON INST:COUP:GEN:RLEV:OFFS 5
See "Generator Reference Level Offset" on page 767
INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:RLEVel[:STATe] <State>
Couples the reference level of the connected signal generator to the R&S FSW.
This command requires the INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:STATe to be ON.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Example:
INST:COUP:GEN:STAT ON INST:COUP:GEN:RLEV:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Reference level" on page 767
INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:STATe <State>
Enables or disables coupling between the R&S FSW and a connected signal generator.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Example:
INST:COUP:GEN:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Coupling State" on page 766
13.10.13 Configuring the Application Starter
The Application Starter allows you to start any external application directly from the R&S FSW firmware.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1403
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
The commands for manual operation are described in Chapter 11.3, "Application Starter", on page 706
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:ADD.................................................................................1404 SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:DELete.............................................................................1404 SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:DIRectory......................................................................... 1405 SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:ICON............................................................................... 1405 SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:NAME.............................................................................. 1405 SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:PARams........................................................................... 1405 SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:PATH............................................................................... 1406 SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:SELect............................................................................. 1406
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:ADD <ApplicationGroup>, <DisplayName>, <FileSpec>
Adds an application to the specified group in the Application Starter dialog box.
Setting parameters: <ApplicationGroup> 'External' | 'User'
The group (tab) of applications in the Application Starter that the application belongs to.
'External' External Applications
'User' User Applications
<DisplayName>
Name of the application in the Application Starter
<FileSpec>
Path and file name of the application
Example:
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter: ADD 'External','Notepad++','C:\Program Files (x86)\Notepad++\notepad++.exe'
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See "Add Application/ Change Application" on page 708
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:DELete <ApplicationGroup>, <DisplayName>
Removes the specified application from the Application Starter dialog box.
Setting parameters: <ApplicationGroup> 'External' | 'User'
The group (tab) of applications in the Application Starter that the application belongs to.
'External' External Applications
'User' User Applications
<DisplayName>
Name of the application in the Application Starter
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1404
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Configuring the R&S FSW
Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:DELete 'External', 'Notepad++'
Setting only
See "Delete Link" on page 711
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:DIRectory <WorkingDir>
Defines the working directory used by the selected application.
Parameters: <WorkingDir>
Example:
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:DIRectory 'C:\TEMP'
Manual operation: See "Working Directory" on page 710
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:ICON <IconPath>, <IconIndex>
Defines an icon for the selected application to be displayed in the "Application Starter" dialog box.
Parameters: <IconPath>
Path and file name for icon
<IconIndex>
Example:
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:ICON 'C:\Program Files (x86)\Inkscape\inkscape.exe','0'
Manual operation: See "Choose Icon" on page 710
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:NAME <DisplayName>
Defines the name of the application as displayed in the "Application Starter" dialog box.
Parameters: <DisplayName>
Example:
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:NAME 'MyEditor'
Manual operation: See "Display Name" on page 710
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:PARams <Params>
Defines parameters that are provided with the application for execution, for example arguments for a custom script.
Parameters: <Params>
Example:
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:PARams 'D: \Simulation\Log.txt'
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1405
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Using the Status Register
Manual operation: See "Parameters" on page 710
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:PATH <FileSpec>
Defines a new path to the selected application.
Parameters: <FileSpec>
Path, file name, and extension of the application
Example:
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:PATH 'D: \MyProject\ProjectDocument.docx'
Manual operation: See "Drive/ Path/ File Name" on page 709 See "Application" on page 710
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:SELect <ApplicationGroup>, <DisplayName>
Selects the application to be executed in subsequent commands.
The query returns the currently selected application.
Parameters: <ApplicationGroup>
'External' | 'User'
The group (tab) of applications in the Application Starter that the application belongs to.
'External' External Applications
'User' User Applications
<DisplayName>
Name of the application in the Application Starter
Example:
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:SELect 'External', 'Notepad++'
Manual operation: See "Select" on page 709
13.11 Using the Status Register
For more information on the contents of the status registers see:
"STATus:OPERation Register" on page 799 "STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register" on page 802 "STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended Register" on page 802 "STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register" on page 803 "STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register" on page 804 "STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register" on page 805 "STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Register" on page 805 "STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature Register" on page 806
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1406
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Using the Status Register
"STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe Register" on page 806
General Status Register Commands.................................................................. 1407 Reading Out the CONDition Part........................................................................ 1407 Reading Out the EVENt Part...............................................................................1408 Controlling the ENABle Part................................................................................1408 Controlling the Negative Transition Part............................................................. 1409 Controlling the Positive Transition Part............................................................... 1410
13.11.1 General Status Register Commands
STATus:PRESet...........................................................................................................1407 STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]?.............................................................................................. 1407
STATus:PRESet
This command resets the edge detectors and ENABle parts of all registers to a defined value. All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh, i.e. all transitions from 0 to 1 are detected. All NTRansition parts are set to 0, i.e. a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected. The ENABle part of the STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable registers are set to 0, i.e. all events in these registers are not passed on.
Usage:
Event
STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]?
This command queries the most recent error queue entry and deletes it.
Positive error numbers indicate device-specific errors, negative error numbers are error messages defined by SCPI. If the error queue is empty, the error number 0, "No error", is returned.
This command is identical to the SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? command.
Usage:
Query only
13.11.2 Reading Out the CONDition Part
For more information on the condition part see Chapter 12.1.7.2, "Structure of a SCPI Status Register", on page 795.
STATus:OPERation:CONDition? STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition? <ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:CONDition? <ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO:CONDition? <ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition? <ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:CONDition? <ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:CONDition? <ChannelName>
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1407
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Using the Status Register
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? <ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:CONDition? <ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:TIME:CONDition? <ChannelName>
These commands read out the CONDition section of the status register.
The commands do not delete the contents of the CONDition section.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Query parameters: <ChannelName>
String containing the name of the channel. The parameter is optional. If you omit it, the command works for the currently active channel.
Usage:
Query only
13.11.3 Reading Out the EVENt Part
For more information on the event part see Chapter 12.1.7.2, "Structure of a SCPI Status Register", on page 795.
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]? <ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended[:EVENt]? <ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO[:EVENt]? <ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]? <ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>[:EVENt]? <ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>[:EVENt]? <ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]? <ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature[:EVENt]? <ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:TIME[:EVENt]? <ChannelName>
These commands read out the EVENt section of the status register.
At the same time, the commands delete the contents of the EVENt section.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Query parameters: <ChannelName>
String containing the name of the channel. The parameter is optional. If you omit it, the command works for the currently active channel.
Usage:
Query only
13.11.4 Controlling the ENABle Part
For more information on the enable part see Chapter 12.1.7.2, "Structure of a SCPI Status Register", on page 795.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1408
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Using the Status Register
STATus:OPERation:ENABle <SumBit> STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <SumBit> STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:TIME:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
These commands control the ENABle part of a register.
The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to bereported in the summary bit. If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true, a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <SumBit>
Range: 0 to 65535
<ChannelName>
String containing the name of the channel. The parameter is optional. If you omit it, the command works for the currently active channel.
13.11.5 Controlling the Negative Transition Part
For more information on the positive transition part see Chapter 12.1.7.2, "Structure of a SCPI Status Register", on page 795.
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <SumBit> STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <SumBit> STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:TIME:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
These commands control the Negative TRansition part of a register.
Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated register. The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1409
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Commands for Remote Instrument Operation
Suffix: <n>
Parameters: <SumBit>
<ChannelName>
. Window
Range: 0 to 65535 String containing the name of the channel. The parameter is optional. If you omit it, the command works for the currently active channel.
13.11.6 Controlling the Positive Transition Part
For more information on the negative transition part see Chapter 12.1.7.2, "Structure of a SCPI Status Register", on page 795.
STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <SumBit> STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <SumBit> STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName> STATus:QUEStionable:TIME:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register.
Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated register. The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <SumBit>
Range: 0 to 65535
<ChannelName>
String containing the name of the channel. The parameter is optional. If you omit it, the command works for the currently active channel.
13.12 Commands for Remote Instrument Operation
The following commands are required to shutdown or reboot the R&S FSW from a remote PC.
SYSTem:CLOGging......................................................................................................1411 SYSTem:REBoot.......................................................................................................... 1411 SYSTem:SHUTdown.................................................................................................... 1411
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1410
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
SYSTem:CLOGging <State>
This command turns logging of remote commands on and off.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
ON | 1 Writes all remote commands that have been sent to a file. The destination is C:\R_S\INSTR\ScpiLogging\ ScpiLog.<no.>. where <no.> is a sequential number A new log file is started each time logging was stopped and is restarted.
OFF | 0
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See "I/O Logging" on page 830
SYSTem:REBoot This command reboots the instrument, including the operating system.
SYSTem:SHUTdown This command shuts down the instrument.
13.13 Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
The R&S FSW analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands of several HP and PSA instruments. For details see Chapter 12.2, "GPIB Languages", on page 811. Setting up Instrument Emulation......................................................................... 1411 Reference: GPIB Commands of Emulated HP Models.......................................1415 Reference: Command Set of Emulated PSA Models..........................................1443 Reference: Command Set of Emulated PXA Models..........................................1447 Command Set for Analog Demodulation for Emulated PXA Models.................. 1450 Command Set for Vector Signal Analysis (VSA) for Emulated R&S FSE Instru-
ments.................................................................................................................. 1450
13.13.1 Setting up Instrument Emulation
The following commands are required to set up the use of commands to emulate other instruments.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1411
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Useful commands for emulating other instruments described elsewhere: SYSTem:REVision:FACTory on page 1367
Remote commands exclusive to emulating other instruments:
SYSTem:HPCoupling................................................................................................... 1412 SYSTem:IFGain:MODE................................................................................................ 1412 SYSTem:HPADditional..................................................................................................1413 SYSTem:LANGuage.....................................................................................................1413 SYSTem:PREamp........................................................................................................1414 SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband.............................................................................................. 1414 SYSTem:REVision[:STRing].......................................................................................... 1414 SYSTem:RSWeep........................................................................................................ 1415
SYSTem:HPCoupling <CouplingType>
Controls the default coupling ratios in the HP emulation mode for:
span and resolution bandwidth (Span/RBW) and resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth (RBW/VBW)
For FSP (=FSW), the standard parameter coupling of the instrument is used. As a result, in most cases a shorter sweep time is used than in case of HP.
This command is only available if a HP language is selected using SYSTem:LANGuage on page 1413.
Parameters: <CouplingType>
HP | FSP
*RST:
FSP
Example:
SYSTem:HPC HP
Manual operation: See "Coupling" on page 833
SYSTem:IFGain:MODE <Mode>
Configures the internal IF gain settings in HP emulation mode due to the application needs. This setting is only taken into account for resolution bandwidth < 300 kHz and is only available if a HP language is selected using SYSTem:LANGuage on page 1413.
Parameters: <Mode>
NORMal | PULSe
NORMal Optimized for high dynamic range, overload limit is close to reference level.
PULSe Optimized for pulsed signals, overload limit up to 10 dB above reference level.
*RST:
NORM
Example:
SYST:IFG:MODE PULS
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1412
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Manual operation: See "IF Gain" on page 833
SYSTem:HPADditional <State>
Allows the use of HP commands in addition to SCPI commands for R&S FSP/FSQ/FSU emulation (see SYSTem:LANGuage on page 1413).
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See "Language" on page 832 See "HP Additional" on page 834
SYSTem:LANGuage <Language>
This command selects the system language.
For details see Chapter 12.2, "GPIB Languages", on page 811.
Note:This command is also used to emulate previous R&S signal and spectrum analyzers, making the SYST:COMP command obsolete.
Note: For PSA89600 emulation, the option is indicated as "B7J" for the *OPT? query ("B7J, 140" if Wideband is activated).
Note: For R&S FSP/FSQ/FSU emulation, HP commands are not automatically also allowed. In this case, set SYSTem:HPADditional to ON.
Parameters: <Language>
"SCPI" | "8560E" | "8561E" | "8562E" | "8563E" | "8564E" | "8565E" | "8566A" | "8566B" | "8568A" | "8568A_DC" | "8568B" | "8568B_DC" | "8591E" | "8594E" | "71100C" | "71200C" | "71209A" | "PSA89600" | "PSA" | "PXA" | "FSP" | "FSU" | "FSQ" | "FSV" | "FSEA" | "FSEB" | "FSEM" | "FSEK"
*RST:
SCPI
Example:
SYST:LANG 'PSA' Emulates the PSA.
Manual operation: See "Language" on page 832
Note: If you use "PSA89600", you must switch to an HP language first before returning to SCPI (in remote operation only). For the identical language "PSA", this intermediate step is not necessary.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1413
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
SYSTem:PREamp <Option>
This setting defines which option is returned when the *OPT? query is executed, depending on the used preamplifier.
It is only available for FSU/FSQ emulation, and only if an optional preamplifier is used by the R&S FSW.
Parameters: <Option>
B23 | B24
*RST:
B23
Manual operation: See "FSU/FSQ Preamplifier" on page 834
SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband <State>
This command defines which option is returned when the *OPT? query is executed, depending on the state of the wideband option.
It is only available for PSA89600 emulation.
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | HIGH
OFF The option is indicated as "B7J"
ON The 40 MHz wideband is used. The option is indicated as "B7J, 140".
HIGH The 80 MHz wideband is used. The option is indicated as "B7J, 122".
*RST:
OFF
Manual operation: See "Language" on page 832 See "Wideband" on page 834
SYSTem:REVision[:STRing] <Name>
Sets the response to the REV? query to the defined string (HP emulation only, see SYSTem:LANGuage on page 1413).
Parameters: <Name>
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1414
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Example: Manual operation:
Define the system language: SYST:LANG '8563E' Query the revision: REV? Response: 920528 Set the response to 'NewRevision': SYST:REV:STR 'NewRevision' Query the response: SYST:REV:STR? Response: NewRevision
See "Revision String" on page 834
SYSTem:RSWeep <State>
Controls a repeated sweep of the E1 and MKPK HI HP model commands (for details on the commands refer to Chapter 13.13.2, "Reference: GPIB Commands of Emulated HP Models", on page 1415). If the repeated sweep is OFF, the marker is set without sweeping before.
This command is only available if a HP language is selected using SYSTem:LANGuage on page 1413
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST:
0
Example:
SYSTem:RSW ON
Manual operation: See "Sweep Repeat" on page 833
13.13.2 Reference: GPIB Commands of Emulated HP Models
The R&S FSW analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands of HP models 8560E, 8561E, 8562E, 8563E, 8564E, 8565E, 8566A, 8566B, 8568A, 8568B and 8594E.
Despite the differences in system architecture and device features, the supported commands have been implemented in a way to ensure a sufficiently high degree of correspondence with the original.
This includes the support of syntax rules for not only newer device families (B and E models) but for the previous A family as well.
In many cases the selection of commands supported by the R&S FSW is sufficient to run an existing GPIB program without adaptation.
After the introduction, this section includes the following topics:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1415
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Command Set of Models 8560E, 8561E, 8562E, 8563E, 8564E, 8565E, 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8591E, 8594E, 71100C, 71200C, and 71209A................................... 1416
Special Features of the Syntax Parsing Algorithms for 8566A and 8568A Models ............................................................................................................................ 1439
Special Behavior of Commands..........................................................................1440 Model-Dependent Default Settings..................................................................... 1441 Data Output Formats...........................................................................................1442 Trace Data Output Formats................................................................................ 1442 Trace Data Input Formats................................................................................... 1443 GPIB Status Reporting........................................................................................1443
13.13.2.1 Command Set of Models 8560E, 8561E, 8562E, 8563E, 8564E, 8565E, 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8591E, 8594E, 71100C, 71200C, and 71209A
As with the original units, the R&S FSW includes the command set of the A models in the command set of the B models.
The HP model 8591E is compatible to HP model 8594E, the HP models 71100C, 71200C, and 71209A are compatible to HP models 8566A/B.
Command A1 A2 A3 A4 ABORT 1)
ADD
ADJALL
Supported subset A1 A2 A3 A4 ABORT
ADJALL
Function Clear/Write A Max Hold A View A Blank A Stop previous function
Add
Adjust all
Corresp. HP- Status Models
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/HP 8568B/HP 8594E
HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1416
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Command ADJCRT 2)
ADJIF 2)
AMB AMBPL
AMPCORDATA AMPCOR AMPCORSIZE AMPCORRCL AMPCORSAVE ANNOT
APB
AT
Supported subset ADJCRT
Function Adjust CRT
ADJIF
Auto adjust IF
AMB ON|OFF AMB 1|0 AMB?
AMBPL ON|OFF AMBPL 1|0 AMBPL?
Trace A � B -> Trace A
AMPCORDATA <freq>,<amp>,..
AMPCORDATA?
Amplitude Correction Data
AMPCOR ON|OFF AMPCOR 1|0 AMPCOR?
Amplitude Correction
AMPCORSIZE?
Amplitude Correction Data Array Size
AMPCORRCL <numeric Amplitude Correction
value>
Recall
AMPCORSAVE <numeric value>
Amplitude Correction Save
ANNOT ON|OFF ANNOT 1|0 ANNOT?
Annotation
APB
Trace A + B -> Trace A
AT <numeric_value> DB | DM AT DN AT UP AT AUTO AT?
Attenuation
Corresp. HP- Status Models
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
HP 856xE/ HP 8594E
available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE
available available
HP 856xE
available
HP 856xE
available
HP 856xE
available
HP 856xE
available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A/ HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available available available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1417
R&S�FSW
Command AUNITS
AUTOCPL
AXB
B1 B2 B3 B4 BL BML BTC
BXC
BLANK
C1
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Supported subset AUNITS DBM | DBMV | DBUV | AUNITS? AUTOCPL
AXB
B1 B2 B3 B4 BL BML BTC
BXC
BLANK TRA|TRB|TRC
C1
Function
Corresp. HP- Status Models
Amplitude Units
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
Coupling default
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
Exchange trace A and B
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
Clear/Write B
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
Max Hold B
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
View B
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
Blank B
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
Trace B � Display Line - HP 8566A/
> Trace B
HP 8568A
available
Trace B � Display Line - HP 856xE/
> Trace B
HP8594E
available
Transfer Trace B -> C
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
Exchange Trace B and C
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
Blank Trace
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
A-B off
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1418
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Command C2 CA CAL 1)
CF
CHANPWR CHPWRBW CLRW
CLS 1)
CONTS
COUPLE
CR CS
Supported subset C2 CA CAL ALL CAL ON CAL OFF CF <numeric_value> HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ CF UP CF DN CF?
CHANPWR TRA|TRB, <numeric_value>,? CHPWRBW <numeric_value> HZ| KHZ|MHZ|GHZ CLRW TRA|TRB|TRC
CLS
CONTS
COUPLE AC|DC
CR CS
Function
Corresp. HP- Status Models
A-B -> A
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
Couple Attenuation
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
Start analyzer self alignment
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
Center Frequency
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A/ HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
Channel Power Measurement
HP 856xE/ HP 8594E
available
Channel Power Bandwidth
HP 856xE/ HP 8594E
available
Clear/Write Trace Clear all status bits
Input coupling Couple RBW Couple Step Size
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available available available available available available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1419
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Command CT CTA CV D1 2) DA 2) DEMOD 1)
DEMODAGC 2)
DEMODT
DET
DISPOSE 2) DIV DL
Supported subset
Function
Corresp. HP- Status Models
CT
Couple SWT
HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
Convert to absolute units HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
CV
Couple VBW
HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
D1
Display Size normal
HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
DA
Display address
available
DEMOD ON|OFF|AM| FM
AF Demodulator
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
DEMODAGC ON|OFF|1| Demodulation AGC 0
DEMODAGC?
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
DEMODT <numeric_value> S|MS| US|SC
DEMODT UP|DN
DEMODT?
Demodulation time
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
DET POS|SMP|NEG DET?
Detector
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
ONEOS | TRMATH | ONSWP | ALL | <numeric_value>
available
Divide
HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
DL <numeric_value> DB|DM DL DN DL UP DL ON DL OFF DL?
Display Line
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1420
R&S�FSW
Command DLE
DONE
DW 2) E1 E2 E3 E4 EDITDONE EDITLIML ERR
ERR?
EX
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Supported subset
Function
Corresp. HP- Status Models
DLE ON|OFF
Display Line enable
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
DONE DONE?
Done query
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
DW
Write to display and
available
increment address
E1
Peak Search
HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
E2
Marker to Center Freq. HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
E3
Deltamarker Step Size HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
E4
Marker to Ref. Level
available
available
limit line edit done
HP 856xE
available
edit limit line
HP 856xE
available
ERR 250 cal level error
ERR 300 LO unlock
ERR 472 cal error digital filter
ERR 473 cal error analog filter
ERR 552 cal error log amp
ERR 902 unscale tracking generator
ERR 906 oven cold
ERR 117 numeric unit error
ERR 112 Unrecognized Command
Now some FSx errors are mapped to HP errors.
HP8568A HP856xE
not yet available
ERR?
Error queue query
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
not yet available
EX
Exchange trace A and B HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1421
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Command FA
FB
FDSP
FOFFSET 1) FREF FS FUNCDEF GATE 1) GATECTL 1)
Supported subset
Function
Corresp. HP- Status Models
FA <numeric_value> HZ| Start Frequency KHZ|MHZ|GHZ FA UP FA DN FA?
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A/ HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
FB <numeric_value> HZ| Stop Frequency KHZ|MHZ|GHZ FB UP FB DN FB?
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A/ HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
Frequency display off
8560E 8561E 8562E 8563E 8564E 8565E
available
FOFFSET <numeric_value> HZ| KHZ|MHZ|GHZ
FOFFSET?
Frequency Offset
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
FREF INT|EXT
Reference Frequency
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
FS
Full Span
HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
Define Function Function must be in one line between delimiters @
HP 8594E/ HP 856xE/ HP 8566B
available
GATE ON|OFF GATE 1|0
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
GATECTL EDGE|LEVEL GATECTL?
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1422
R&S�FSW
Command GD 1)
GL 1)
GP 1) GRAT 2) I1 I2 ID
INZ 1) IP KEYDEF KEYEXEC
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Supported subset
Function
GD <numeric_value> US|MS|SC GD DN GD UP GD?
GL <numeric_value> US|MS|SC GL DN GL UP GL?
GP POS|NEG GP?
GRAT ON|OFF
Graticule
I1
I2
ID
Identify
ID?
INZ 75 INZ 50 INZ? IP KEYDEF
KEYEXEC
Input Impedance
Instrument preset Key definition Key execute
Corresp. HP- Status Models
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A/ HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
HP 8566B/ HP 856xE/ HP 859xE
HP 8566B
available available available available available
available available available available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1423
R&S�FSW
Command KS=
KS/ KS( KS) KS91 KSA KSB KSC KSD KSE KSG
KSH KSK KSL KSM KSO KSP
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Supported subset KS= <numeric_value> HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ KS= DN KS= UP KS=? KS/ KS( KS) KS91 KSA KSB KSC KSD KSE <numeric_value>| <char data>@ KSG KSG ON KSG <numeric_value> KSH
KSO KSP <numeric_value>
Function
Corresp. HP- Status Models
Marker Frequency Coun- HP 8566A/
ter Resolution
HP 8568A
available
Manual Peaking
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
Lock register
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
Unlock register
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
Read Amplitude Error
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
Amplitude Units in dBm
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
Amplitude Units in dBmV HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
Amplitude Units in dBuV HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
Amplitude Units in V
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
Title mode
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
Video Averaging on
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available available available available available available available available available available
Video Averaging Off Marker to Next Peak Marker Noise off Marker Noise on Deltamarker to span HPIB address
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available available available available available available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1424
R&S�FSW
Command KSQ 2) KST KSV
KSW KSX KSY KSZ
KSa KSb KSd KSe KSg KSh KSj KSk KSl KSm KSn2) KSo
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Supported subset KSQ KST KSV <numeric_value> HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ KSV? KSW KSX KSY KSZ <numeric_value> DB KSZ? KSa KSb KSd KSe
KSj KSk KSl KSm KSn KSn
Function Band lock off Fast Preset Frequency Offset
Corresp. HP- Status Models
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
Error Correction Routine HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
Correction Values On
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
Correction Values Off
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
Reference Value Offset
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available available available available
Normal Detection Pos Peak Detection Neg Peak Detection Sample Detection CRT beam off CRT beam on View Trace C Blank Trace C Transfer B to C Graticule off Grid on Character display off
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A HP 8566A/ HP 8568A HP 8566A/ HP 8568A HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A HP 8566A/ HP 8568A HP 8566A/ HP 8568A HP 8566A/ HP 8568A HP 8566A/ HP 8568A HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available available available available available available available available available available available available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1425
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Command KSp
KSr
KSt 2)
KSv 2)
L0
LB
LF
LIMD LIMF LIMIFAIL LIMIPURGE LIMIRCL LIMIREL LIMISAV LIMITEST LIML LIMM LIMTFL LIMTSL LIMU LG
LL 2)
Supported subset
Function
Corresp. HP- Status Models
KSp
Character display on
HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSr
Create service request HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSt
Band lock on
HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSv
Signal ident on
HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
L0
Display line off
HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
LB <numeric_value>| <char data>@
Label
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
LF
Low frequency band pre- HP 8566A/ available
set
HP 8568A
limit line delta
HP 856xE
available
limit line frequency
HP 856xE
available
limit fail query
HP 856xE
available
purge limit line
HP 856xE
available
recall limit line
HP 856xE
available
relative limit line
HP 856xE
available
save limit line
HP 856xE
available
limit line test
HP 856xE
available
lower limit line value
HP 856xE
available
middle limit line value
HP 856xE
available
flat limit line segment
HP 856xE
available
slope limit line segment HP 856xE
available
upper limit line value
HP 856xE
available
LG <numeric_value> DB | DM
LG?
Amplitude Scale Log
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
LL
Plot command
HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1426
R&S�FSW
Command LN
M1 M2
M3
M4 MA MC0 MC1 MDS MEAS MF
MINH1)
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Supported subset
LN
M1
M2 M2 <numeric_value> HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ M2 DN M2 UP M2? M3 M3 <numeric_value> HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ M3 DN M3 UP M3? M4 <numeric_value> HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ MA
MC0
MC1
MDS
MF MF?
MINH TRC
Function Amplitude Scale Lin
Marker Off Marker Normal
Corresp. HP- Status Models
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
Delta Marker
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
Marker Zoom Marker Amplitude Marker Count off Marker Count on Measurement data size Measurement status Marker Frequency
Minimum Hold
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
HP 8566B
HP 856xE
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A/ HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available available available available available available available
available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1427
R&S�FSW
Command MKA MKACT MKBW 1) MKD
MKDR MKDR? MKF MKFC
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Supported subset
Function
Corresp. HP- Status Models
MKA <numeric_value> MKA?
Marker Amplitude
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
MKACT 1 MKACT?
Select the active marker
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
not available
MKBW <numeric_value> N dB Down MKBW ON MKBW OFF
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
MKD MKD <numeric_value> HZ|KHZ| MHZ|GHZ MKD DN MKD UP MKD ON MKD OFF MKD?
Delta Marker
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
MKDR <numeric_value> HZ|KHZ| MHZ|GHZ| S|SC|MS|MSEC| USMKDR?
Delta Marker reverse
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
Delta Marker reverse query
available
MKF <numeric_value> HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ MKF?
Set Marker Frequency
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
MKFC ON|OFF
Frequency Counter on/off
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1428
R&S�FSW
Command MKFCR 1)
MKMIN MKN
MKNOISE MKOFF MKP MKPK MKPT
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Supported subset
MKFCR <numeric_value> HZ|KHZ| MHZ|GHZ MKFCR DN MKFCR UP MKFCR? MKMIN
MKN MKN <numeric_value> HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ MKN DN MKN UP MKN ON MKN OFF MKN? MKNOISE ON|OFF MKNOISE 1|0 MKNOISE?
MKOFF MKOFF ALL
MKP <numeric_value> MKP?
MKPK MKPK HI MKPK NH MKPK NR MKPK NL MKPT MKPT HI MKPT NH MKPT NR MKPT NL
Function
Corresp. HP- Status Models
Frequency Counter Resolution
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
Marker -> Min Normal Marker
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available available
Noise Measurement Marker off Marker position Marker Search
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available available available available
Marker Peak Threshold
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1429
R&S�FSW
Command MKPX
MKRL MKSP MKSS MKT MKTRACE MKTRACK MKTYPE ML MOV MPY
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Supported subset
Function
MKPX <numeric_value> DB MKPX DN MKPX UP MKPX?
Peak Excursion
MKRL
Ref Level = Marker Level
MKSP
Deltamarker to span
MKSS
CF Stepsize = Marker Freq
MKT <numeric_value> S|MS|US|SC MKT?
MKTRACE TRA|TRB| TRC
MKF = fstart + MKT/ SWT*Span
Marker to Trace
MKTRACK ON|OFF MKTRACK 1|0 MKTRACK?
Signal Track
MKTYPE AMP MK TYPE?
Marker type
MOV TRA|TRB|TRC, TRA|TRB|T RC
Mixer level Move Trace Contents
Multiply
Corresp. HP- Status Models
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8594E
available available available available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available available available available available available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1430
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Command MT0 MT1 MXMH
NORMALIZE
NRL 1)
NRPOS
O1 O2 O3 OA OL OT PA PD PH_MKF PH_FMIN
Supported subset MT0
MT1
MXMH TRA|TRB
NORMALIZE
NRL <numeric_value> DB | DM NRL?
NRPOS <numeric_value> NRL?
O1
O2
O3
OA
OL <80 characters> OL? OT
PA <numeric_value>, <numeric_value PD <numeric_value>, <numeric_value
Function Marker Track Off Marker Track On Maximum Hold
Normalize trace
Normalized Reference Level
Normalize position
Format ASCII, Values 0 to 4095 Format Binary, Values 0 to 4095 Format ASCII Output All Output Learn String Output Trace Annotations Plot command Plot command Spot frequency in Hz Min offset frequency to be measured
Corresp. HP- Status Models
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
not available available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 856xE
available
HP 856xE
available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1431
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Command PH_FMAX PH_MKA PH_DRIFT PH_RLVL PH_SMTHV PH_VBR PH_RMSPT
PH_RMSFL PH_RMSFU PH_EXIT PH_F_UDT PH_LMT_L PH_MEAS PH_MKF_D PH_RMS PH_RMSFT PH_RMSX PH_SPOTF PLOTORG 2)
PLOTSRC 2)
Supported subset
Function
Corresp. HP- Status Models
Max offset frequency to HP 856xE be measured
available
Queries amplitude at the HP 856xE spot frequency
available
0: for stable signals, 1: for drifty
HP 856xE
available
Reference level for the log plot
HP 856xE
available
Trace smoothing
HP 856xE
available
Filtering
HP 856xE
available
Amount of data points to HP 856xE skip when doing the integration
available
Lower integration frequency in Hz
HP 856xE
available
Upper integration frequency in Hz
HP 856xE
available
Quits phase noise
HP 856xE
available
Updates internal frequency variables
HP 856xE
available
Apply limits to PH_FMIN HP 856xE and PH_FMAX
available
Generates log frequency HP 856xE plot
available
Updates the spot frequency
HP 856xE
available
Requests the rms phase HP 856xE noise
available
Updates internal frequency variables
HP 856xE
available
Calculates the rms phase noise
HP 856xE
available
Executes the spot frequency measurement
HP 856xE
available
PLOTORG DSP|GRT
Plot command
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
PLOTSRC ANNT|GRT| Plot command TRB| TRA|ALLDSP|GRT
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1432
R&S�FSW
Command PP PRINT 1)
PSDAC 2)
PSTATE 2)
PU PWRBW R1 R2 R3 R4 RB
RBR
RC1...6
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Supported subset PP
PRINT PRINT 1|0
PSDAC <numeric_value> PSDAC UP|DN
PSTATE ON|OFF|1|0
PU
PWRBW
R1
R2
R3
R4
RB <numeric_value> HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ RB DN RB UP RB AUTO RB? RBR <numeric_value> RBR DN RBR UP RBR? RC1...6
Function Preselector Peaking Hardcopy
Preselector DAC value
Protect State
Pen Up Power Bandwidth Set Status Bit Enable Set Status Bit Enable Set Status Bit Enable Set Status Bit Enable Resolution Bandwidth
Resolution Bandwidth Ratio Recall Last State
Corresp. HP- Status Models
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 8566B/ HP 859x/ HP 856xE
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1433
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Command RCLS RCLT RESET REV RL
RLCAL RCLOSCAL RCLTHRU RLPOS 1)
ROFFSET RQS
Supported subset
Function
Corresp. HP- Status Models
RCLS <numeric_value> Recall State Register
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
RCLT TRA|TRB, <num- Recall Trace ber>
HP856xE/ HP8594E
available
RESET
Instrument preset
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
REV REV?
Firmware revision
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
RL <numeric_value> DB|DM RL DN RL UP RL?
Reference Level
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
RLCAL <numeric_value>
RL?
Reference Level Calibra- HP 856xE/
tion
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
available
RCLOSCAL
Recall Open/Short Aver- HP 856xE/
age
HP 8594E
not available
RCLTHRU
Recall Thru
HP 856xE/ HP 8594E
not available
RLPOS <numeric_value> RLPOS DN RLPOS UP RLPOS?
Reference Level Position HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
ROFFSET <numeric_value> DB | DM
ROFFSET?
Reference Level Offset
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
RQS
Service Request Bit mask
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1434
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Command S1 S2 SADD SAVES
SAVET SDEL SDON SEDI SMOOTH
SNGLS
SQUELCH 2)
SP
SRCNORM 1)
Supported subset
Function
Corresp. HP- Status Models
S1
Continuous Sweep
HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
S2
Single Sweep
HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
add a limit line segment HP 856xE
available
SAVES <numeric_value>
Save State Register
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
SAVET TRA|TRB,<num- Save Trace ber>
HP856xE/ HP8594E
available
delete limit line segment HP 856xE
available
limit line segment done HP 856xE
available
edit limit line segment HP 856xE
available
SMOOTH TRA|TRB| TRC, <number of points>
Smooth Trace
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
SNGLS
Single Sweep
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
SQUELCH <numeric_value> DM | DB SQUELCH UP|DN SQUELCH ON|OFF
Squelch
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
SP <numeric_value> HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ SP DN SP UP SP?
Span
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A/ HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
SRCNORM ON|OFF SRCNORM 1|0
Source Normalization
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
not available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1435
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Command SRCPOFS 1)
SRCPWR 1)
SS
ST
STB STOREOPEN STORESHORT STORETHRU SUB
Supported subset
Function
SRCPOFS <numeric_value> DB | DM SRCPOFS DN SRCPOFS UP SRCPOFS?
SRCPWR <numeric_value> DB | DM SRCPWR DN SRCPWR UP SRCPWR ON SRCPWR OFF SRCPWR?
SS <numeric_value> HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ SS DN SS UP SS AUTO SS?
ST <numeric_value> US|MS|SC ST DN ST UP ST AUTO ST?
STB
Source Power Offset Source Power CF Step Size Sweep Time Status byte query
STOREOPEN STORESHORT STORETHRU
Store Open Store Short Store Thru Subtract
Corresp. HP- Status Models
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
not available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
not available
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A/ HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A/ HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8594E
HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
available
available not available not available not available available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1436
R&S�FSW
Command SUM
SV1...6 SWPCPL 2)
SWPOUT 2)
T0 T1 T2 2) T3 T4 TA TACL
TBCL TCCL TACR
TBCR TCCR
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Supported subset
SV1...6 SWPCPL SA | SR SWPCPL?
SWPOUT FAV|FAVA| RAMP SWPOUT? T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 TA TACL?
TBCL? TCCL? TACR?
TBCR? TCCR?
Function
Corresp. HP- Status Models
sum of trace amplitudes
HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
Save State
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
Sweep Couple
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
Sweep Output
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
Threshold off
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
Free Run Trigger
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
Line Trigger
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
External Trigger
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
Video Trigger
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
Transfer A
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
Returns instantaneous measurement results. See TRACe<trace #>:IMMediate:LEVel? for full description.
not available
Returns instantaneous measurement results. See TRACe<trace #>:IMMediate:LEVel? for full description.
not available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1437
R&S�FSW
Command TB TDF
TH
THE TIMEDSP 1) TM TM LINE 2) TRA TRB TRSTAT
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Supported subset
TB
TDF P TDF M TDF B TDF A TDF I TH <numeric_value> DB|DM TH DN TH UP TH ON TH OFF TH AUTO TH? THE ON| OFF
TIMEDSP ON|OFF TIMEDSP 1|0 TIMEDSP?
TM FREE|VID|EXT| LINE2) TM?
TM LINE TRA B TRA A TRA I
TRB B TRB A TRB I
TRSTAT?
Function Transfer B Trace Data Format
Threshold
Corresp. HP- Status Models
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
Threshold Line enable Time Display Trigger Mode Trigger Line Transfer A Transfer B Trace State Query
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 8566B
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available available available available available available available
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1438
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Command
Supported subset
Function
Corresp. HP- Status Models
TS
TS
Take Sweep
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
UR 2)
UR
Plot Command
HP 8566A/ HP 8568A
available
VARDEF
VARDEF
Variable definition, arrays are not supported
HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
VAVG
VAVG VAVG TRA|TRB|TRC
Video Averaging
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
VB
VB <numeric_value>
Video Bandwidth
HP 856xE/ available
HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ
HP 8566B/
VB DN
HP 8568B/
VB UP
HP 8594E
VB AUTO
VB?
VBR 1)
VBR <numeric_value> VBR DN VBR UP VBR?
Video Bandwidth Ratio
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
VIEW
VIEW TRA|TRB|TRC
HP 856xE/ HP 8566B/ HP 8568B/ HP 8594E
available
VTL
VTL <numeric_value> Video Trigger Level
HP 856xE/ not available
DB|DM
HP 8594E
VTL DN
VTL UP
VTL?
1) HP 8594E only
2) Command is accepted without error message, but is ignored
13.13.2.2 Special Features of the Syntax Parsing Algorithms for 8566A and 8568A Models
The command syntax is very different for models A and B. Different names are assigned to identical instrument functions, and the command structure likewise differs considerably between models A and models B.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1439
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
The command structure for models A is as follows:
<command>::= <command code>[<SPC>][<data>|<step>][<SPC>][<delimiter>][<command code>]...<delimiter>
<data>::= <Value>[<SPC>][<units code>][<SPC>][<delimiter>][<SPC>][<data>]...
<step>::= UP|DN
where
<command code> = see Table "Supported Commands"
<Value> = integer or floating-point numerical value
<units code> = DM | -DM | DB | HZ | KZ | MZ | GZ | MV | UV | SC | MS | US
<delimiter> = <CR> | <LF> | <,> | <;> | <ETX>
<SPC> = 3210
<ETX> = 310
Command sections given in [ ] are optional.
The R&S FSW GPIB hardware differs from that used in the HP analyzers. Therefore, the following constraint exists:
<LF>| <EOI> are still used as delimiters since the GPIB hardware is able to identify them. The other delimiters are identified and evaluated during syntax analysis.
13.13.2.3 Special Behavior of Commands
Command ABORT
ANNOT AT CAL
CF CR CT CV DET
ERR?
Known Differences
Does not automatically set the command complete bit (bit 4) in the status byte. An additional DONE is required for that purpose.
Only frequency axis annotation is affected.
AT DN/UP: Step size
The CAL commands do not automatically set the command complete bit (bit 4) in the status byte. An additional DONE command is required for that purpose.
Default value, range, step size
Default ratio Span/RBW
Formula for coupled sweep time
Default ratio RBW/VBW
DET? returns SAMP instead of SMP on the R&S FSW. DET not automatically set the command complete bit (bit 4) in the status byte. An additional DONE is required for that purpose.
Deletes the error bit in the status register but always returns a '0' in response.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1440
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Command FA FB ID M2 M3 MKACT MKBW MKPT MKPX OL?
OL
RB RL RLPOS RQS
Known Differences
Default value, range, step size
Default value, range, step size
Query of instrument ID. The instrument ID defined in "SETUP > Network + Remote > GPIB > Identification String" is returned.
Default value, range, step size
Default value, range, step size
Only marker 1 is supported as the active marker.
Default value
Step size
Step size
Storage of instrument settings: 80 characters are returned as information on the instrument settings. The contents of the 80 characters returned does not correspond to the original data contents of the 8566A/8568A family.
Readout of instrument settings: The 80 characters read by means of OL? are accepted as information on the corresponding instrument settings. The contents of the 80 characters read does not correspond to the original data contents of the 8566A/8568A family.
Default value, range, step size
Default value, step size
Adapts the position of the reference level even if the tracking generator normalization is not active.
Supported bits: 1 (Units key pressed) 2 (End of Sweep) 3 (Device error) 4 (Command complete) 5 (Illegal command)
13.13.2.4 Model-Dependent Default Settings
If the GPIB language is switched over to an 85xx model, the GPIB address is automatically switched over to 18 provided that the default address of the R&S FSW (20) is still set. If a different value is set, this value is maintained. Upon return to SCPI, this address remains unchanged.
The following table shows the default settings obtained after a change of the GPIB language and for the commands IP, KST and RESET:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1441
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Model
8566A/B 8568A/B 8560E 8561E 8562E 8563E 8564E 8565E 8594E
# of Trace Points 1001 1001 601 601 601 601 601 601 401
Start Freq.
2 GHz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz
Stop Freq.
22 GHz 1.5 GHz 2.9 GHz 6.5 GHz 13.2 GHz 26.5 GHz 40 GHz 50 GHz 3 GHz
Ref Level
0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm
Input Coupling
AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC
Stop frequency The stop frequency given in the table may be limited to the corresponding frequency range of the R&S FSW. Command LF sets the stop frequency for 8566A/B to a maximum value of 2 GHz. Test points (trace points) The number of trace points is switched over only upon transition to the REMOTE state.
13.13.2.5 Data Output Formats
In the case of the SCPI and IEEE488.2 standards, the output formats for numerical data are flexible to a large extent. The output format for the HP units, by contrast, is accurately defined with respect to the number of digits. The memory areas for reading instrument data have therefore been adapted accordingly in the remote-control programs for instruments of this series.
Therefore, in response to a query, the R&S FSW returns data of the same structure as that used by the original instruments; this applies in particular to the number of characters returned.
Two formats are currently supported when trace data is output: Display Units (command O1) and physical values (command O2, O3 or TDF P). As to the "Display Units" format, the level data of the R&S FSW is converted to match the value range and the resolution of the 8566/8568 series. Upon transition to the REMOTE state, the R&S FSW is reconfigured such that the number of test points (trace points) corresponds to that of the 85xx families (1001 for 8566A/B and 8568A/B, 601 for 8560E to 8565E, 401 for 8594E).
13.13.2.6 Trace Data Output Formats
All formats are supported for trace data output: display units (command O1), display units in two byte binary data (command O2 or TDF B and MDS W), display units in one byte binary data (command O4 or TDF B and MDS B) and physical values (commands
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1442
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
O3 or TDF P). With format "display units" the level data is converted into value range and resolution of the 8566/8568 models. On transition to REMOTE state the number of trace points are reconfigured in order to be conform to the selected instrument model (1001 for 8566A/B and 8568 A/B, 601 for 8560E to 8565E, 401 for 8594E).
13.13.2.7 Trace Data Input Formats
Trace data input is only supported for binary date (TDF B, TDF A, TDF I, MDS W, MDS B).
13.13.2.8 GPIB Status Reporting
The assignment of status bits by commands R1, R2, R3, R4, RQS is supported.
The STB command and the serial poll respond with an 8-bit value with the following assignment:
Bit enabled by RQS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Description not used (value 0) Units key pressed End of Sweep Device Error Command Complete Illegal Command Service Request not used (value 0)
Bits 0 and 7 are not used and always have the value 0.
Please note that the R&S FSW reports any key pressed on the front panel rather than only the unit keys if bit 1 was enabled.
Another difference is the behavior of bit 6 when using the STB? query. On the HP analyzers this bit monitors the state of the SRQ line on the bus. On the R&S FSW this is not possible. Therefore this bit is set, as soon as one of the bits 1 to 5 is set. It won't be reset by performing a serial poll.
13.13.3 Reference: Command Set of Emulated PSA Models
The R&S FSW analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands of PSA89600 and ESA instruments.
Despite the differences in system architecture and device features, the supported commands have been implemented in a way to ensure a sufficiently high degree of correspondence with the original.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1443
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
In many cases the selection of commands supported by the R&S FSW is sufficient to run an existing GPIB program without adaptation.
Supported 89600 commands *CAL? *CLS *ESE *ESR? *IDN? *IST? *OPC *OPT? *PCB *PRE *PSC *RST *SRE *STB? *TRG *TST? *WAI :CALibration:AUTO OFF|ON|ALERt :CALibration:TCORrections AUTO|ON|OFF :CONFigure:WAVeform :DIAGnostic:EABY ON|OFF :DIAGnostic:LATCh:VALue <numeric> :DIAGnostic:LATCh:SELect <string> :DISPlay:ANNotation:TITLe:DATA <string> :DISPlay:ENABle OFF|ON :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:[SCALe]:PDIVision <numeric> :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:[SCALe]:RLEVel <numeric> :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:[SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <numeric> :FORMat:BORDer NORMal|SWAPped :FORMat[:DATA] ASCii|REAL|UINT|MATLAB,<numeric> :INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1444
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Supported 89600 commands :INITiate[:IMMediate] :INSTrument:CATalog? :INSTrument:NSELect <numeric> :MMEMory:CATalog? <dir_name> :MMEMory:COPY <`file_name1'>,<`file_name2'> :MMEMory:DATA <`file_name'>,<definite_length_block> :MMEMory:DELete <`file_name'> :MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1,<`file_name'> :MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe 1,<`file_name'> :MMEMory:MDIRectory <`dir_name'> :MMEMory:MOVE <`file_name1'>,<`file_name2'> :MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<`file_name'> :MMEMory:STORe:TRACe <numeric>,<`file_name'> :READ:WAVform? [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer <numeric> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt <numeric> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP <numeric> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN <numeric> [:SENSe]:POWer:ATTenuation <numeric> [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency <numeric> [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:OUTPut OFF|ON [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce INTernal|EXTernal|EAUTo [:SENSe]:SPECtrum:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal<1|2>|IF|IMMediate [:SENSe]:WAVeform:ADC:RANGe P6 [:SENSe]:WAVeform:APER? [:SENSe]:WAVeform:AVERage:TACount <numeric> [:SENSe]:WAVeform:BWIDth:ACTive? [:SENSe]:WAVeform:BWIDth:TYPE FLAT|GAUSsian [:SENSe]:WAVeform:IFGain <numeric> [:SENSe]:WAVeform:IFPath NARRow|WIDE [:SENSe]:WAVeform:NCPTrace ON|OFF [:SENSe]:WAVeform:PDIT ON|OFF [:SENSe]:WAVeform:SRATe <numeric>
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1445
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Supported 89600 commands [:SENSe]:WAVeform:SWEep:TIME <numeric> [:SENSe]:WAVeform:TRIGger:EOFFset? [:SENSe]:WAVeform:TRIGger:INTerpolation ON|OFF [:SENSe]:WAVeform:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal<1|2>|IF|IMMediate :STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? :STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <number> :STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <number> :STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <number> :STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:CONDition? :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:ENABle <number> :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:NTRansition <number> :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:PTRansition <number> :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration[:EVENt]? :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition? :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle <number> :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition <number> :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition <number> :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]? :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:CONDition? :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:ENABle <number> :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:NTRansition <number> :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:PTRansition <number> :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity[:EVENt]? :STATus:OPERation:CONDition? :STATus:OPERation:ENABle <integer> :STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <integer> :STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <integer> :STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess <integer> :SYSTem:DATE <year>,<month>,<day> :SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? :SYSTem:KLOCK?
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1446
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
Supported 89600 commands :SYSTem:MESSage <string> :SYSTem:PRESet :SYSTem:TIME <hour>,<minute>,<second> :SYSTem:VERSion? :TRACe:COPY <src_trace>,<dest_trace> :TRACe[:DATA] TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6, <definite_length_block> | <comma_separated_ASCII_data> :TRACe:MODE WRITe|MAXHold|MINHold|VIEW|BLANk :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay <numeric> :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay:STATe OFF|ON|0|1 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTermal:DELay <numeric> :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTermal:LEVel <numeric> :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTermal:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff <numeric> :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:DELay <numeric> :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:LEVel <numeric> :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate|VIDeo|EXTernal<1|2> :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel <numeric> :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel:FREQuency <freq>
13.13.4 Reference: Command Set of Emulated PXA Models
The R&S FSW analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands of PXA instruments. Despite the differences in system architecture and device features, the supported commands have been implemented in a way to ensure a sufficiently high degree of correspondence with the original. In many cases the selection of commands supported by the R&S FSW is sufficient to run an existing GPIB program without adaptation.
Table 13-10: Supported PXA commands ABORt CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MAXimum
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1447
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MAXimum:LEFT CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MAXimum:NEXT CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MAXimum:RIGHt CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MINimum CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MODE POSition | DELTa | FIXed | OFF CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MODE[?] SPAN | BAND CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12[:SET]:CENTer CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12[:SET]:RLEVel CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12[:SET]:STARt CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12[:SET]:STOP CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:STATe[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X[?] <freq | time> CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X:POSition[?] <real> CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:SPAN CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:STARt CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:STOP CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:Y[?] <real> CALibration[:ALL][?] CALibration:AUTO[?] ON | PARTial | OFF | ALERt CALibration:AUTO:ALERt[?] TTEMperature | DAY | WEEK | NONE CALibration:AUTO:MODE[?] ALL | NRF CALibration:AUTO:TIME:OFF? CONFigure? SAN DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel[?] <real> DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet[?] <rel_ampl> INITiate:CONTinuous[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 INITiate[:IMMediate] INPut:COUPling[?] AC | DC MMEMory:CATalog? [<directory_name>] MMEMory:CDIRectory[?] [<directory_name>] MMEMory:COPY <string>, <string>[, <string>, <string>] MMEMory:DATA[?] <file_name>, <data> MMEMory:DELete <file_name>[, <directory_name>] MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1, <filename>
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1448
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
MMEMory:MDIRectory <directory_name> MMEMory:MOVE <string>, <string>[, <string>, <string>] MMEMory:RDIRectory <directory_name> MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1, <filename> [:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt[?] <integer> [:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe][?] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 [:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE[?] RMS | LOG | SCALar[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE? [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution][?] <freq> [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo[?] <freq> [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio[?] <real> [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio:AUTO[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 [:SENSe]:DETector:AUTO[?] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer[?] <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet[?] <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN[?] <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL [:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt[?] <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP[?] <freq> [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation[?] <rel_ampl> [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 [:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts? <integer> [:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME? <time> [:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO? OFF | ON | 0 | 1 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal2:DELay[?] <time> TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal1:DELay[?] <time> TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal2:DELay:STATe[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal1:DELay:STATe[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal2:LEVel[?] <level> TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal1:LEVel[?] <level> TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal2:SLOPe[?] POSitive | NEGative TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal1:SLOPe[?] POSitive | NEGative
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1449
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments' Commands
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:LEVel[?] TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:SLOPe[?] NEGative | POSitive TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURCe EXTernal | IMMediate | VIDeo | LINE | EXTernal1 | EXT1 | EXTernal2 | EXT2 | RFBurst | FRAMe TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:DELay[?] <time> TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:DELay:STATe[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel[?] <ampl> TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:SLOPe[?] POSitive | NEGative
13.13.5 Command Set for Analog Demodulation for Emulated PXA Models
The R&S FSW supports a subset of the GPIB commands of PXA instruments for Analog Demodulation measurements. Despite the differences in system architecture and device features, the supported commands have been implemented in a way to ensure a sufficiently high degree of correspondence with the original. In many cases the selection of commands supported by the R&S FSW is sufficient to run an existing GPIB program without adaptation.
Table 13-11: Supported PXA commands for Analog Demodulation CONFigure:AM CONFigure:AM:NDEFault DISPlay:AM:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <real> READ:AM? FETCh:AM? [SENSe]:AM:DWSWeep:TIME <real>
13.13.6 Command Set for Vector Signal Analysis (VSA) for Emulated R&S FSE Instruments
The R&S FSW supports a subset of the GPIB commands of the R&S FSE for vector signal analysis (VSA). Despite the differences in system architecture and device features, the supported commands have been implemented in a way to ensure a sufficiently high degree of correspondence with the original. In many cases the selection of commands supported by the R&S FSW is sufficient to run an existing GPIB program without adaptation.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1450
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Deprecated Commands
Table 13-12: Supported R&S FSE commands for vector signal analysis (VSA) CALCulate{1|2}:MARKer{m}:FUNCtion:DDEMod:RESult? CALCulate{1|2}:TLINe{1|2} <real> CALCulate{1|2}:TLINe{1|2}:STATe <bool> [SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:OFFSet <real> [SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern <pattern> [SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:PULSe:STATe <bool> [SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:TIME <real> [SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer:REFerence [SENSe]:DDEMod:PRESet[:STANdard] [SENSe]:TCAPture:LENGth <real> TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo <real>
13.14 Deprecated Commands
The following commands are provided for compatibility to other signal analyzers only. For new remote control programs use the specified alternative commands.
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SBCenter.............................................................................. 1451 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SBCount............................................................................... 1452 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t>................................................................................1452 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:STATe....................................................................................... 1452 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TYPE........................................................................................ 1453 HCOPy:ITEM:ALL........................................................................................................ 1453 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:SWEep[:STATe]..............................................1453 SYSTem:COMPatible................................................................................................... 1454 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:BBPower:HOLDoff........................................................................1454 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFPower:HOLDoff........................................................................1454
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SBCenter <Frequency>
This command defines the center frequency of the selected sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement.
Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only. For newer remote control programs use the [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SCENter command.
Suffix: <sb>
. Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1451
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Deprecated Commands
Parameters: <Frequency>
Example:
Frequency within the currently defined global span (see [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN on page 1135 and [SENSe: ]FREQuency:CENTer on page 1132).
Range: 1 to 3
*RST:
1
Default unit: HZ
ESP2:SCENter 1GHZ
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SBCount <Subblocks>
This command defines the number of sub blocks in the SEM measurement.
Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only. For newer remote control programs use the [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SCOunt command.
Suffix: <sb>
. irrelevant
Parameters: <Subblocks>
Number of sub blocks in the SEM measurement.
Range: *RST:
1 to 3 1
Example:
ESP:SBCount 2
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t> <TraceNumber>
This command links a limit line to one or more traces.
Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only. Limit lines no longer need to be assigned to a trace explicitly. The trace to be checked can be defined directly (as a suffix) in the new command to activate the limit check (see CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t>:CHECk on page 1278).
Suffix: <n>
. Window
<li>
Limit line
<t>
irrelevant
Parameters: <TraceNumber>
1 to 6
*RST:
1
Example:
CALC:LIM2:TRAC 3 Assigns limit line 2 to trace 3.
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:STATe <State> This command changes the display state of the selected measurement window.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1452
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Deprecated Commands
Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only. Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs
(See Chapter 13.6.2, "Working with Windows in the Display", on page 1068).
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
ON | 1 Switches the function on
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TYPE <WindowType>
This command selects the results displayed in a measurement window.
Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only. Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs (see Chapter 13.6.2, "Working with Windows in the Display", on page 1068).
The parameter values are the same as for LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 1069.
Suffix: <n>
. Window
Parameters: <WindowType>
DIAGram | RSUMmary | MTABle | PEAKlist | SGRam
HCOPy:ITEM:ALL This command is maintained for compatibility reasons only. It has no effect.
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:SWEep[:STATe] <State>
Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only. It is not required in new remote control programs.
This command activates or deactivates the frequency sweep for the selected generator.
Suffix: <si>
. irrelevant
<gen>
Parameters: <State>
ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0 Switches the function off
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1453
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Deprecated Commands
Example:
ON | 1 Switches the function on
SOUR:EXT:FREQ:SWE ON Activates the frequency sweep for the external generator.
SYSTem:COMPatible <Mode>
This command enables compatibility to other spectrum and signal analyzers by R&S.
Compatibility is necessary, for example, regarding the number of sweep points.
Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only. Use the SYST:LANG command for new remote control programs (see SYSTem:LANGuage on page 1413).
Parameters: <Mode>
DEFault | FSU | FSP | FSQ | FSV
Example:
SYST:COMP FSP
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:BBPower:HOLDoff <Period>
This command defines the holding time before the baseband power trigger event.
The command requires the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband Interface.
Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only. Use the TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff on page 1157 command for new remote control programs.
Parameters: <Period>
Range: 150 ns to 1000 s
*RST:
150 ns
Default unit: S
Example:
TRIG:SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source. TRIG:BBP:HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns.
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFPower:HOLDoff <Time>
This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event. Note that this command is available for any trigger source, not just RF Power.
Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only. Use the TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff on page 1157 command for new remote control programs.
Parameters: <Time>
Default unit: S
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1454
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Programming Examples
13.15 Programming Examples
Some advanced programming examples for complex measurement tasks are provided here.
Further programming examples for common measurement tasks are described in the individual measurement chapters, for example: Chapter 13.4.3, "Programming Example: Performing a Sequence of Measure-
ments", on page 880 Chapter 13.8.5.4, "Programming Example: Using Limit Lines", on page 1280 Chapter 13.5.3.10, "Programming Examples for Channel Power Measurements",
on page 942 "Programming example: Measuring the carrier-to-noise ratio" on page 950 Chapter 13.5.5.2, "Programming Example: OBW Measurement", on page 951 Chapter 13.5.7.11, "Example: SEM Measurement", on page 1002 Chapter 13.5.8.7, "Programming Example: Spurious Emissions Measurement",
on page 1018 Chapter 13.5.9.7, "Programming Example: Measuring Statistics", on page 1028 Chapter 13.5.10.4, "Programming Example: Time Domain Power", on page 1039 Chapter 13.5.11.5, "Example: Measuring the Harmonic Distortion", on page 1043 Chapter 13.5.12.2, "Programming Example: Measuring the TOI", on page 1046 Chapter 13.5.13.2, "Example: Measuring the AM Modulation Depth", on page 1048 Chapter 13.5.14.8, "Programming Example: EMI Measurement", on page 1056 Chapter 13.5.16.2, "Example: Performing a Pulse Power Measurement",
on page 1066 Chapter 13.8.2.7, "Programming Example: Configuring a Spectrogram",
on page 1202 "Programming Example: Working with an External Mixer" on page 1097 Chapter 13.10.4.2, "Programming Example: Using Touchstone files", on page 1355 "Programming Example for External Generator Control" on page 1115
Programming Example: Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep......................... 1455 Service Request..................................................................................................1458
13.15.1 Programming Example: Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep
This example demonstrates how to configure and perform a basic frequency sweep measurement in a remote environment.
This example assumes a signal is measured at 100 MHz, with a maximum power level of -3 dBm.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1455
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Programming Examples
Some commands in the following examples may not be necessary as they reflect the default settings; however, they are included to demonstrate the command usage.
//--------------Preparing the measurement --------------------*RST //Resets the instrument INIT:CONT OFF //Selects single sweep mode.
//--------------Configuring the Frequency and Span------------FREQ:CENT 100MHz //Defines the center frequency FREQ:SPAN 100MHz //Sets the span to 50 MHz on either side of the center frequency.
//--------------Configuring the Bandwidth---------------------BAND:AUTO OFF BAND 1MHz BAND:TYPE RRC //Defines the RBW as 1 MHz using an RRC filter
BAND:VID 500kHz //Decouples the VBW from the RBW and decreases it to smooth the trace.
//--------------Configuring the Sweep-------------------------SENS:SWE:COUN 10 //Defines 10 sweeps to be performed in each measurement. SENS:SWE:POIN 500 //During each sweep, 500 trace points will be measured. SENS:SWE:TIME 50ms //Decouples the sweep time from the RBW,VBW and span and increases it to //make the measurement more precise.
//--------------Configuring Attenuation-----------------------//Only if electronic attenuator is available: //INP:EATT:STAT ON //Switches on the electronic attenuator. //INP:EATT 5dB //Sets the electronic attenuation to 5 dB. //INP:ATT 0dB //Sets the mechanical attenuation to 0 dB - makes a total of 5 dB attenuation //otherwise: INP:ATT 5 dB //Sets the mechanical attenuation to 5 dB and couples the reference level //to the attenuation instead of vice versa.
//--------------Configuring the Amplitude and Scaling---------DISP:TRAC1:Y:RLEV:OFFS 10dB
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1456
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Programming Examples
//Shifts the trace display in the diagram up by 10dB. CALC:UNIT:POW V //Sets the unit of the y-axis to Volt. The reference level is now 70.711 mV. DISP:TRAC1:Y:SPAC LOG //Uses logarithmic scaling with absolute values (V). DISP:TRAC1:Y 110dB //Increases the displayed range of the y-axis to 110 dB. DISP:TRAC1:Y:RPOS 80PCT //Shifts the display of the reference level down, it is no longer the top line //in the diagram. The reference level is displayed as a red line.
//--------------Triggering------------------------------------TRIG:SOUR IFP TRIG:LEV:IFP -10dBm TRIG:SLOP POS TRIG:DTIM 50ms TRIG:IFP:HYST 5dB TRIG:HOLD 10ms //Defines triggering when the second intermediate frequency rises to a level //of -10 dBm, with a dropout time of 50 ms, a hysteresis of 5 dB and a delay //of 10 ms.
SWE:EGAT ON SWE:EGAT:TYPE EDGE SWE:EGAT:LENG 5ms //Defines gating. Values are measured for 5 ms after triggering.
OUTP:TRIG2:DIR OUTP OUTP:TRIG2:OTYP UDEF OUTP:TRIG2:LEV HIGH OUTP:TRIG2:PULS:LENG 100us OUTP:TRIG2:PULS:IMM //Configures a high trigger signal with a pulse length of 100 us to be output at //the front TRIGGER INPUT/OUTPUT connector once.
//--------------Configuring the Trace-------------------------DISP:TRAC2:MODE AVER DISP:TRAC3:MODE MAXH //Configures 3 traces: 1 (default): clear/write; 2: average; 3: max hold
SENS:DET1 POS SENS:DET2 RMS SENS:DET3 POS //Configures traces 1 and 3 to use the positive peak detector; trace 2 uses //the RMS detector.
TRAC:COPY TRACE4,TRACE1 //Copies trace 1 to a new trace 4 which will then be averaged.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1457
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Programming Examples
SENS:AVER:STAT4 ON SENS:AVER:COUN 10 SENS:AVER:TYPE LIN //Configures trace 4 to be averaged linearly over 10 sweeps.
CALC:MATH:STAT ON CALC:MATH:MODE LIN CALC:MATH (TRACE1-TRACE2) CALC:MATH:POS 100 //Calculates the linear difference between the measured and average values. //The resulting trace is displayed at the top of the diagram.
//--------------Performing the Measurement--------------------INIT;*WAI //Initiates a new measurement and waits until the last sweep has finished.
//---------------Retrieving Results---------------------------TRAC:DATA? TRACE1 TRAC:DATA? TRACE2 TRAC:DATA? TRACE3 TRAC:DATA? TRACE4 //Returns one power value per sweep point for each trace. TRAC:DATA:X? //Returns one frequency value per sweep point for each trace.
13.15.2 Service Request
The service request routine requires an extended initialization of the instrument in which the relevant bits of the transition and enable registers are set. In addition the service request event must be enabled in the VISA session.
13.15.2.1 Initiate Service Request
REM ---- Example of initialization of the SRQ in the case ' of errors ------PUBLIC SUB SetupSRQ() CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*CLS") 'Reset status reporting system CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*SRE 168") 'Enable service request for 'STAT:OPER, STAT:QUES and ESR 'register CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*ESE 60") 'Set event enable bit for 'command, execution, device'dependent and query error CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STAT:OPER:ENAB 32767") 'Set OPERation enable bit for 'all events CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STAT:OPER:PTR 32767") 'Set appropriate OPERation
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1458
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Programming Examples
'Ptransition bits CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STAT:QUES:ENAB 32767") 'Set questionable enable bits 'for all events CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STAT:QUES:PTR 32767") 'Set appropriate questionable 'Ptransition bits CALL viEnableEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, VI_QUEUE, 0) 'Enable the event for service 'request Status = viWaitOnEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, SRQWaitTimeout, VI_NULL,
VI_NULL) IF (status = VI_SUCCESS) THEN CALL Srq 'If SRQ is recognized => 'subroutine for evaluation END SUB REM ***********************************************************************
Private mbSession As MessageBasedSession
Sub Main() Console.WriteLine("Example of initialization _ of the SRQ in the case of errors.") Dim SRQWaitTimeout = 4000 ' Timeout As Integer for WaitOnEvent 'Opening session Try 'Analyzer is alias, instead of using resource string. 'For example on TCP use TCPIP0::192.168.1.2::inst0::INSTR mbSession = CType(ResourceManager.GetLocalManager().Open("Analyzer"), _ MessageBasedSession) mbSession.TerminationCharacterEnabled = True Try mbSession.Write("*CLS") 'Reset status reporting system mbSession.Write("*SRE 168") 'Enable service request for 'STAT:OPER, STAT:QUES and ESR register mbSession.Write("*ESE 60") 'Set event enable bit for 'command, execution, device-dependent and query error mbSession.Write("STAT:OPER:ENAB 32767") 'Set OPERation enable bit for all events mbSession.Write("STAT:OPER:PTR 32767") 'Set appropriate OPERation Ptransition bits mbSession.Write("STAT:QUES:ENAB 32767") 'Set questionable enable bits for all events mbSession.Write("STAT:QUES:PTR 32767") 'Set appropriate questionable Ptransition bits Console.WriteLine("Wait on event - Blocking") mbSession.EnableEvent(MessageBasedSessionEventType.ServiceRequest, _ EventMechanism.Queue) 'Enable the event for service request
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1459
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Programming Examples
'-----------------------------------------------' Your command plase use here ' mbSession.Write("Your command") '------------------------------------------------
Dim Status = mbSession.WaitOnEvent( _ MessageBasedSessionEventType.ServiceRequest, SRQWaitTimeout)
If (Status.EventType() = _ MessageBasedSessionEventType.ServiceRequest) Then
Console.WriteLine("SRQ is recognized") 'If SRQ is recognized => subroutine for evaluation Srq() End If Catch exp As Exception Console.WriteLine(exp.Message) End Try Catch exp As InvalidCastException Console.WriteLine("Resource selected must be a message-based session") Catch exp As Exception Console.WriteLine(exp.Message) End Try
' Close session mbSession.Dispose() ' Wait for end Console.WriteLine("Press any key to end") Console.ReadKey() End Sub
13.15.2.2 Waiting for the Arrival of a Service Request
There are basically two methods of waiting for the arrival of a service request:
Blocking (user inputs not possible):
This method is appropriate if the waiting time until the event to be signaled by an SRQ is short (shorter than the selected timeout), if no response to user inputs is required during the waiting time, and if � as the main criterion � the event is absolutely certain to occur.
Reason:
From the time the viWaitOnEvent() function is called until the occurrence of the expected event, it does not allow the program to respond to mouse clicks or key entries during the waiting time. Moreover, it returns an error if the SRQ event does not occur within the predefined timeout period.
The method is, therefore, in many cases not suitable for waiting for measurement results, especially when using triggered measurements.
The following function calls are required:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1460
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Programming Examples
Status = viWaitOnEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, SRQWaitTimeout, VI_NULL, VI_NULL)
'Wait for service request user 'inputs are not possible during 'the waiting time! IF (status = VI_SUCCESS) THEN CALL Srq 'If SRQ is recognized => 'subroutine for evaluation
'--------- Sweep in first Spectrum Tab and query marker -------------------Dim Status = mbSession.WaitOnEvent( _ MessageBasedSessionEventType.ServiceRequest, SRQWaitTimeout) 'Wait for service request user inputs are not possible 'during the waiting time! If (Status.EventType() = MessageBasedSessionEventType.ServiceRequest) Then 'If SRQ is recognized => subroutine for evaluation
Srq() End If
Non-blocking (user inputs possible):
This method is recommended if the waiting time until the event to be signaled by an SRQ is long (longer than the selected timeout), and user inputs should be possible during the waiting time, or if the event is not certain to occur. This method is, therefore, the preferable choice for waiting for the end of measurements, i.e. the output of results, especially in the case of triggered measurements.
The method necessitates a waiting loop that checks the status of the SRQ line at regular intervals and returns control to the operating system during the time the expected event has not yet occurred. In this way, the system can respond to user inputs (mouse clicks, key entries) during the waiting time.
It is advisable to employ the Hold() auxiliary function, which returns control to the operating system for a selectable waiting time (see section Waiting Without Blocking the Keyboard and Mouse), so enabling user inputs during the waiting time.
result% = 0 For i = 1 To 10 'Abort after max. 10 loop 'iterations Status = viWaitOnEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, VI_TMO_IMMEDIATE, VI_NULL,
VI_NULL) 'Check event queue If (status = VI_SUCCESS) Then result% = 1 CALL Srq 'If SRQ is recognized => 'subroutine for evaluation Else CALL Hold(20) 'Call hold function with '20 ms 'waiting time. User inputs 'are possible. Endif
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1461
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Programming Examples
Next i If result% = 0 Then Debug.Print "Timeout Error; Program aborted"'Output error message STOP 'Stop software Endif
13.15.2.3 Waiting Without Blocking the Keyboard and Mouse
A frequent problem with remote control programs using Visual Basic is to insert waiting times without blocking the keyboard and the mouse.
If the program is to respond to user inputs also during a waiting time, control over the program events during this time must be returned to the operating system. In Visual Basic, this is done by calling the DoEvents function. This function causes keyboard-or mouse-triggered events to be executed by the associated elements. For example, it allows the operation of buttons and input fields while the user waits for an instrument setting to be completed.
The following programming example describes the Hold() function, which returns control to the operating system for the period of the waiting time selectable in milliseconds.
Rem *********************************************************************** Rem The waiting function below expects the transfer of the desired Rem waiting time in milliseconds. The keyboard and the mouse remain Rem operative during the waiting period, thus allowing desired elements Rem to be controlled Rem *********************************************************************** Public Sub Hold(delayTime As Single) Start = Timer 'Save timer count on calling the 'function Do While Timer < Start + delayTime/1000 'Check timer count DoEvents 'Return control to operating 'system to enable control of 'desired elements as long as 'timer has not elapsed Loop End Sub Rem ***********************************************************************
The waiting procedure is activated simply by calling Hold(<Waiting time in milliseconds>).
13.15.2.4 Service Request Routine
A service request is processed in the service request routine.
The variables userN% and userM% must be pre-assigned usefully!
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1462
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Programming Examples
REM ------------ Service request routine ---------------------------------Public SUB Srq() ON ERROR GOTO noDevice 'No user existing CALL viReadSTB(analyzer, STB%) 'Serial poll, read status byte IF STB% > 0 THEN 'This instrument has bits set in 'the STB SRQFOUND% = 1 IF (STB% AND 16) > 0 THEN CALL Outputqueue IF (STB% AND 4) > 0 THEN CALL ErrorQueueHandler IF (STB% AND 8) > 0 THEN CALL Questionablestatus IF (STB% AND 128) > 0 THEN CALL Operationstatus IF (STB% AND 32) > 0 THEN CALL Esrread END IF noDevice: END SUB 'End of SRQ routine REM ***********************************************************************
REM ---------- Subroutine for evaluation Service Request Routine ----------
Public Sub Srq() Try Dim mySTB As Short = mbSession.ReadStatusByte() 'Serial poll, read status byte Console.WriteLine("Reading Service Request Routine:" + mySTB.ToString()) If mySTB > 0 Then 'This instrument has bits set in the STB If (mySTB And 16) > 0 Then Call Outputqueue() If (mySTB And 4) > 0 Then Call ErrorQueueHandler() If (mySTB And 8) > 0 Then Call Questionablestatus() If (mySTB And 128) > 0 Then Call Operationstatus() If (mySTB And 32) > 0 Then Call Esrread() End If Catch exp As Exception Console.WriteLine(exp.Message) End Try
End Sub 'End of SRQ routine
Reading out the status event registers, the output buffer and the error/event queue is effected in subroutines.
13.15.2.5 Reading Out the Output Buffer
REM -------- Subroutine for the individual STB bits ----------------------Public SUB Outputqueue() 'Reading the output buffer result$ = SPACE$(100) 'Make space for response CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$) Debug.Print "Contents of Output Queue:"; result$ END SUB REM ***********************************************************************
REM -------- Subroutine for the output queue ----------------------Public Sub Outputqueue() 'Reading the output buffer
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1463
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Programming Examples
Try Dim result As String = mbSession.ReadString() Console.WriteLine("Contents of Output Queue:" + result)
Catch exp As Exception Console.WriteLine(exp.Message)
End Try End Sub
13.15.2.6 Reading Error Messages
REM -------- Subroutine for reading the error queue ----------------------Public SUB ErrorQueueHandler() ERROR$ = SPACE$(100) 'Make space for error variable CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SYSTEM:ERROR?") CALL InstrRead(analyzer, ERROR$) Debug.Print "Error Description:"; ERROR$ END SUB REM ***********************************************************************
REM -------- Subroutine for reading the error queue ----------------------Sub ErrorQueueHandler()
Dim result As String Dim hasErr As Boolean = True Do
mbSession.Write("SYST:ERR?") result = mbSession.ReadString() Dim parts As String() = result.Split(",") If parts(0) = 0 Then
hasErr = False Console.WriteLine(result) Else Console.WriteLine(result) End If Loop While hasErr End Sub
13.15.2.7 Evaluation of SCPI Status Registers
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating Questionable Status Register --------Public SUB Questionablestatus() Ques$ = SPACE$(20) 'Preallocate blanks to text 'variable CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt?") CALL InstrRead(analyzer, Ques$) Debug.Print "Questionable Status:"; Ques$ END SUB REM *********************************************************************** REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating Operation Status Register ------------
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1464
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Programming Examples
Public SUB Operationstatus() Oper$ = SPACE$(20) 'Preallocate blanks to text 'variable CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STATus:OPERation:EVENt?") CALL InstrRead(analyzer, Oper$) Debug.Print "Operation Status:"; Oper$ END SUB REM ***********************************************************************
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating Questionable Status Register --------Public Sub Questionablestatus()
Dim myQSR As String = Nothing Try
myQSR = mbSession.Query("STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt?") 'Read QSR Console.WriteLine("Questionable Status:" + myQSR) Catch exp As Exception Console.WriteLine(exp.Message) End Try End Sub
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating Operation Status Register -----------Public Sub Operationstatus()
Dim myOSR As String = Nothing Try
myOSR = mbSession.Query("STATus:OPERation:EVENt?") 'Read OSR Console.WriteLine("Operation Status:" + myOSR) Catch exp As Exception Console.WriteLine(exp.Message) End Try End Sub
13.15.2.8 Evaluation of Event Status Register
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating the Event Status Register -----------Public SUB Esrread() Esr$ = SPACE$(20) 'Preallocate blanks to text 'variable CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*ESR?") 'Read ESR CALL InstrRead(analyzer, Esr$) IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 1) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "Operation complete" IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 2) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "Request Control" IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 4) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "Query Error" IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 8) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "Device dependent error" IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 16) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "Execution Error; Program aborted"'Output error message STOP 'Stop software END IF IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 32) > 0
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1465
R&S�FSW
Remote Commands Programming Examples
THEN Debug.Print "Command Error; Program aborted"'Output error message STOP 'Stop software END IF IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 64) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "User request" IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 128) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "Power on"END SUB REM **********************************************************************
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating the Event Status Register -----------Public Sub Esrread()
Try Dim myESR As Short = mbSession.Query("*ESR?") 'Read ESR If (myESR And 1) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Operation complete") If (myESR And 2) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Request Control") If (myESR And 4) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Query Error") If (myESR And 8) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Device dependent error") If (myESR And 16) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Execution Error; Program aborted") 'Output error message Stop 'Stop software End If If (myESR And 32) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Command Error; Program aborted") 'Output error message Stop 'Stop software End If If (myESR And 64) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("User request") If (myESR And 128) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Power on")
Catch exp As Exception Console.WriteLine(exp.Message)
End Try End Sub
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1466
R&S�FSW
Troubleshooting Error Information
14 Troubleshooting
If the results do not meet your expectations, the following sections may contain helpful hints and information.
Error Information................................................................................................. 1467 Error Messages in Remote Control Mode...........................................................1469 Troubleshooting Remote Operation.................................................................... 1470 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Hints................................................................. 1471 System Recovery................................................................................................ 1473 Collecting Information for Support.......................................................................1473 Contacting Customer Support.............................................................................1475
14.1 Error Information
If errors or irregularities are detected, a keyword and an error message, if available, are displayed in the status bar.
Depending on the type of message, the status message is indicated in varying colors.
Table 14-1: Status bar information - color coding
Color
Type
Description
Red
Error
An error occurred at the start or during a measurement, e.g. due to missing data or wrong settings, so that the measurement cannot be started or completed correctly.
Orange Warning
An irregular situation occurred during measurement, e.g. the settings no longer match the displayed results, or the connection to an external device was interrupted temporarily.
Gray
Information
Information on the status of individual processing steps.
No color No errors
No message displayed - normal operation.
Green
Measurement Some applications visualize that the measurement was successful by show-
successful
ing a message.
If any error information is available for a channel, an exclamation mark is displayed next to the channel name ( ). This is particularly useful when the MultiView tab is displayed, as the status bar in the MultiView tab always displays the information for the currently selected measurement only.
Furthermore, a status bit is set in the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO register for the application concerned (see "STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO Register" on page 803). Messages of a specific type can be queried using the SYST:ERR:EXT? command, see SYSTem:ERRor:EXTended? on page 1379.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1467
R&S�FSW
Troubleshooting Error Information
Table 14-2: List of keywords
"DATA ERR"
For the optional Digital Baseband Interface only:
Error in digital I/Q input data
For details on the optional Digital Baseband Interface, see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual.
"FIFO OVLD"
For Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B17) only:
Input sample rate from connected instrument is too high
For details on the optional Digital Baseband Interface, see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual.
"INPUT OVLD"
The signal level at the RF input connector exceeds the maximum.
The RF input is disconnected from the input mixer to protect the device. To re-enable measurement, decrease the level at the RF input connector and reconnect the RF input to the mixer input.
(See "RF Input Protection" in the R&S FSW User Manual).
"OVLD"
Overload of the input signal path after the input mixer; This error can appear for input
sources other than the RF input, e.g. for input from the optional Digital Baseband
Interface or the optional Analog Baseband Interface. Reduce the input level. For instruments with the option R&S FSW-U85, when measuring signals higher
than 43 GHz and levels higher than -10 dBm, increase the manual attenuation.
"RF OVLD"
Overload of the input mixer or of the analog IF path.
Increase the RF attenuation (for RF input). Reduce the input level (for digital input)
"LO UNL"
Error in the instrument's frequency processing hardware was detected.
"NO REF"
Instrument was set to an external reference but no signal was detected on the reference input.
"OVENCOLD"
The optional OCXO reference frequency has not yet reached its operating temperature. The message usually disappears a few minutes after power has been switched on.
"PLL UNLOCK"
For the optional Digital Baseband Interface only:
Error in digital I/Q input data
For details on the optional Digital Baseband Interface, see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual.
"UNCAL"
One of the following conditions applies:
Correction data has been switched off. No correction values are available, for example after a firmware update. Record the correction data by performing a self alignment
(For details refer to Chapter 4.2.13, "Performing a Self-Alignment", on page 36).
"OLD CAL"
Calibration data outdated. Perform a new self-alignment. Also displayed if Reuse Old Alignment Data is enabled. (For details refer to Chapter 4.2.13, "Performing a Self-Alignment", on page 36).
"WRONG_FW"
The firmware version is out-of-date and does not support the currently installed hardware. Until the firmware version is updated, this error message is displayed and selfalignment fails.
(For details refer to Chapter 11.7.4, "Firmware Updates", on page 744).
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1468
R&S�FSW
Troubleshooting Error Messages in Remote Control Mode
14.2 Error Messages in Remote Control Mode
In remote control mode error messages are entered in the error/event queue of the status reporting system and can be queried with the command SYSTem:ERRor?. The answer format of R&S FSW to the command is as follows:
<error code>, "<error text with queue query>; <remote control command concerned>"
The indication of the remote control command with prefixed semicolon is optional.
Example:
The command TEST:COMMAND generates the following answer to the query SYSTem:ERRor?
-113,"Undefined header;TEST:COMMAND"
There are two types of error messages:
Error messages defined by SCPI are marked by negative error codes. These messages are defined and described in the SCPI standard and not listed here.
Device-specific error messages use positive error codes. These messages are described below.
Table 14-3: Device-specific error messages
Error code
Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation
1006
Failed to connect to server (code. 1006) "LAN" web browser access to the instrument has been deactivated.
1052
Frontend LO is Unlocked
This message is displayed when the phase regulation of the local oscillator fails in the RF front-end.
1060
Trigger-Block Gate Delay Error- gate length < Gate Delay
This message is displayed when the gate signal length is not sufficient for the pull-in delay with a predefined gate delay.
1064
Tracking LO is Unlocked
This message is displayed when the phase regulation of the local oscillator fails on the external generator module.
2028
Hardcopy not possible during measurement sequence
This message is displayed when a printout is started during scan sequences that cannot be interrupted. Such sequences are for example: Recording the system error correction data (alignment) Instrument self-test
In such cases synchronization to the end of the scan sequence should be performed prior to starting the printout.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1469
R&S�FSW
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Remote Operation
Error code 2033
2034
Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation
Printer Not Available This message is displayed when the selected printer is not included in the list of available output devices. A possible cause is that the required printer driver is missing or incorrectly installed.
CPU Temperature is too high This message is displayed when the temperature of the processor exceeds 70 �C.
Table 14-4: Power Sensor errors
Status bar message
Description
Zeroing could not be performed
Zeroing could not be performed because the RF power applied is too high.
Power sensor zero failed
14.3 Troubleshooting Remote Operation
If problems arise during measurement in remote operation, try the following methods to solve them.
Incompleted sequential commands - blocked remote channels
If a sequential command cannot be completed, for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger, the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R&S FSW is blocked for further commands. In this case, you must interrupt processing on the remote channel in order to abort the measurement.
To regain control over a blocked remote channel
Usually, if you wait a minute for the VISA connection to detect the lost connection and clear the control channel by itself, you can then re-establish the connection again. If this fails, try the following:
1. Press "Local" on the front panel of the R&S FSW to return to manual operation (if not disabled). Then re-establish the connection.
2. Send a "Device Clear" command from the control instrument to the R&S FSW to clear all currently active remote channels. Depending on the used interface and protocol, send the following commands: Visa: viClear() GPIB: ibclr() RSIB: RSDLLibclr() The remote channel currently processing the incompleted command is then ready to receive further commands again.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1470
R&S�FSW
Troubleshooting Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Hints
3. On the remote channel performing the measurement, send the SCPI command ABORt to abort the current measurement and reset the trigger system.
4. If the R&S FSW still does not react to the remote commands, switch it off and back on.
Ignored commands
When a remote command attempts to define incompatible settings, the command is ignored and the instrument status remains unchanged, i.e. other settings are not automatically adapted. Therefore, control programs should always define an initial instrument status (e.g. using the *RST command) and then implement the required settings.
Detecting false commands - log file
If a remote program does not provide the expected results and you are using a GPIB connection, you can log the commands and any errors that may occur. To activate the SCPI error log function, in the "Network + Remote" dialog box, in the "GPIB" tab, select "I/O Logging" .
All remote control commands received by the R&S FSW are recorded in log files with the following syntax:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\ScpiLogging\ScpiLog.<xx>
where <xx> is a consecutive number, starting with 00;
A new file is created each time you stop and restart the logging function. The lowest available number is used for the <xx> extension.
Logging the commands may be extremely useful for debug purposes, e.g. in order to find misspelled keywords in control programs. However, remember to turn off the logging function after debugging to avoid unnecessary access to the hard drive and use of storage space.
14.4 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Hints
Power levels for low frequency signals not correct................................................... 1471 Invalid trace display...................................................................................................1472 Data capturing takes too long................................................................................... 1472 Multiple user access to one instrument.....................................................................1472 Web browser access to instrument fails....................................................................1472 The transducer factors/limit lines applied to my measurement are different to those displayed in the Transducer/Lines dialog box................................................................1472
Power levels for low frequency signals not correct By default, the R&S FSW uses AC coupling for RF input. For very low frequencies, the input signal may be distorted with this setting. In this case, use DC coupling instead. To change the setting, select "INPUT/OUPUT" > "Input Source Config > Radio Frequency > Input Coupling > DC".
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1471
R&S�FSW
Troubleshooting
Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Hints
Invalid trace display If output to the "IF 2 GHz OUT" connector is activated, the measured values are no longer sent to the display; thus, the trace data currently displayed on the R&S FSW becomes invalid. A message in the status bar indicates this situation.
Data capturing takes too long Particularly for FFT sweeps, the time required to process the data may be considerably longer than the time required to capture the data. Thus, if you only consider the defined sweep time, you may assume an error has occurred if the measurement takes longer than expected.
However, while the sweep time only defines the time in which data is actually captured, the total sweep duration includes the time required for capturing and processing the data. Thus, for FFT sweeps in the Spectrum application, the sweep duration is now also indicated in the channel bar, behind the sweep time. In remote operation, the estimated sweep duration can be queried for all sweep modes (also zero span and frequency sweeps).
Tip: To determine the necessary timeout for data capturing in a remote control program, double the estimated time and add 1 second.
Remote command: [SENSe:]SWEep:DURation? on page 1142
Multiple user access to one instrument Using the R&S FSW's web browser interface, several users can access and operate the same instrument simultaneously. This is useful for troubleshooting or training purposes.
Type the instrument's host name or IP address in the address field of the browser on your PC, for example "http://10.113.10.203". The instrument home page (welcome page) opens.
For details see "LAN Web Browser Interface" on page 776.
Note: This function can be deactivated for the instrument. After a firmware update, it is automatically activated again.
Web browser access to instrument fails If an error message ("Failed to connect to server (code. 1006)") is displayed in the web browser instead of the instrument's user interface then the LAN web browser interface was probably deactivated.
For details see Chapter 12.6.6, "How to Deactivate the Web Browser Interface", on page 857).
The transducer factors/limit lines applied to my measurement are different to those displayed in the Transducer/Lines dialog box If a transducer file was in use when the save set was stored (with the save item "Current Settings" only) it is anticipated that these transducer values should remain valid after every recall of that save set. Thus, even if the transducer file is changed and the original save set file is recalled later, the originally stored transducer values are recalled and applied to the measurement. In the "Transducer" dialog box, however, the changed transducer file values are displayed as no updated transducer file was loaded.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1472
R&S�FSW
Troubleshooting
Collecting Information for Support
The same applies to limit line settings.
If you want to apply the changed transducer values after recalling the save set you must force the application to reload the transducer file. To do so, simply open the "Edit Transducer" dialog box (see Chapter 11.4.2, "Transducer Settings", on page 714) and toggle the "X-Axis" option from "lin" to "log" and back. Due to that change, the transducer file is automatically reloaded, and the changed transducer values are applied to the current measurement. Now you can create a new save set with the updated transducer values.
Similarly, if you want to apply the changed limit values after recalling the save set you must force the application to reload the limit file. To do so, simply open the "Edit Limit Line" dialog box (see Chapter 8.4.2.2, "Limit Line Settings and Functions", on page 564) and toggle the "Y-Axis" unit. Due to that change, the limit line file is automatically reloaded, and the changed limit values are applied to the current measurement. Now a new save set with the updated limit values can be created.
14.5 System Recovery
For instruments running Windows 10, the system drive is delivered with a recovery partition that allows you to restore the original operating system image and firmware.
To restore the original operating system image and firmware 1. Open the Windows control panel. 2. Select "Update & Security" > "Recovery" > "Restart Now".
The "R&S Recovery Environment" starts. 3. In the "R&S Recovery Environment", select "Factory Default Restore".
The default image is restored. 4. Reboot the instrument.
After the default image is restored, upgrade to the desired firmware version (see Chapter 11.7.4, "Firmware Updates", on page 744).
14.6 Collecting Information for Support
If problems occur, the instrument generates error messages which in most cases will be sufficient for you to detect the cause of an error and find a remedy.
Error messages are described in Chapter 14.1, "Error Information", on page 1467.
In addition, our customer support centers are there to assist you in solving any problems that you may encounter with your R&S FSW. We will find solutions more quickly and efficiently if you provide us with the information listed below. Windows Event Log Files
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1473
R&S�FSW
Troubleshooting Collecting Information for Support
Windows records important actions of applications and the operating system in event logs. You can create event log files to summarize and save the existing event logs (see "To create Windows event log files" on page 1474). System Configuration: The "System Configuration" dialog box (in the "Setup" menu) provides information on: � Hardware Info: hardware assemblies � Versions and Options: the status of all software and hardware options instal-
led on your instrument � System Messages: messages on any errors that may have occurred An .xml file with information on the system configuration ( "Device Footprint" ) can be created automatically (using the DIAGnostic:SERVice:SINFo command or as described in "To collect the support information" on page 1474). Error Log: The RSError.log file (in the C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\log directory) contains a chronological record of errors. Support file: a *.zip file with important support information can be created automatically (in the C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\user directory). The *.zip file contains the system configuration information ( "Device Footprint" ), the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display.
See also Chapter 11.8.1, "R&S Support Information", on page 750.
To collect the support information
1. Press the [Setup] key.
2. Select "Service" > "R&S Support" and then "Create R&S Support Information" . The file is stored as C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\user\ <inst_model>_<serial-no>_<date_and_time>.zip For example C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\user\FSW-26_1312.8000
To create Windows event log files
1. Select the "Windows Start Button" in the bottom left corner.
2. Enter Event Viewer and select "Enter".
3. Select and expand "Windows Logs" in the "Console Tree".
4. Right-click on each subsection and select "Save All Events As...".
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1474
R&S�FSW
Troubleshooting Contacting Customer Support
Figure 14-1: Event Viewer
5. Enter a file name and select "Save"
Collect the error information and attach it to an email in which you describe the problem. Send the email to the customer support address for your region as listed in Chapter 14.7, "Contacting Customer Support", on page 1475.
Packing and transporting the instrument If the instrument needs to be transported or shipped, observe the notes described in Chapter 15, "Transporting", on page 1477.
14.7 Contacting Customer Support
Technical support � where and when you need it For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz product, contact our customer support center. A team of highly qualified engineers provides support and works with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz products.
Contact information Contact our customer support center at www.rohde-schwarz.com/support, or follow this QR code:
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1475
R&S�FSW
Troubleshooting Contacting Customer Support
Figure 14-2: QR code to the Rohde & Schwarz support page
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1476
R&S�FSW
Transporting
15 Transporting
Lifting and carrying See: "Lifting and carrying the product" on page 17 Chapter 4.2.1, "Lifting and Carrying", on page 25.
Packing Use the original packaging material. It consists of antistatic wrap for electrostatic protection and packing material designed for the product. If you do not have the original packaging, use similar materials that provide the same level of protection.
Securing When moving the product in a vehicle or using transporting equipment, make sure that the product is properly secured. Only use items intended for securing objects.
Transport altitude Unless otherwise specified in the data sheet, the maximum transport altitude without pressure compensation is 4500 m above sea level.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1477
R&S�FSW
Maintenance, Storage and Disposal Disposal
16 Maintenance, Storage and Disposal
The product does not require regular maintenance. It only requires occasional cleaning. It is however advisable to check the nominal data from time to time.
16.1 Cleaning
How to clean the product is described in "Cleaning the product" on page 19. Do not use any liquids for cleaning. Cleaning agents, solvents (thinners, acetone), acids and bases can damage the front panel labeling, plastic parts and display.
16.2 Storage
Protect the product against dust. Ensure that the environmental conditions, e.g. temperature range and climatic load, meet the values specified in the data sheet.
16.3 Disposal
Rohde & Schwarz is committed to making careful, ecologically sound use of natural resources and minimizing the environmental footprint of our products. Help us by disposing of waste in a way that causes minimum environmental impact.
Disposing electrical and electronic equipment
A product that is labeled as follows cannot be disposed of in normal household waste after it has come to the end of its service life. Even disposal via the municipal collection points for waste electrical and electronic equipment is not permitted.
Figure 16-1: Labeling in line with EU directive WEEE
Rohde & Schwarz has developed a disposal concept for the eco-friendly disposal or recycling of waste material. As a manufacturer, Rohde & Schwarz completely fulfills its obligation to take back and dispose of electrical and electronic waste. Contact your local service representative to dispose of the product.
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1478
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
List of Commands (base unit)
[SENSe:][WINDow<n>:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion]........................................................................................ 1183 [SENSe:][WINDow<n>:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO............................................................................. 1184 [SENSe:]ADJust:ALL................................................................................................................................... 1171 [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:HYSTeresis:LOWer....................................................................................... 1173 [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:HYSTeresis:UPPer........................................................................................ 1173 [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation.............................................................................................1172 [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation:MODE.................................................................................1172 [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:TRIGger.........................................................................................................1173 [SENSe:]ADJust:FREQuency...................................................................................................................... 1174 [SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel................................................................................................................................ 1174 [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:COUNt.................................................................................................................... 1182 [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE...................................................................................................................... 1183 [SENSe:]AVERage<n>[:STATe<t>].............................................................................................................. 1182 [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo......................................................................................................................... 1140 [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO.............................................................................................................. 1140 [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:RATio.............................................................................................................. 1141 [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:TYPE...............................................................................................................1141 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]............................................................................................................... 1138 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO.................................................................................................... 1139 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:FFT....................................................................................................... 1146 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio.................................................................................................... 1139 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE.....................................................................................................1139 [SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo............................................................................................................................... 1140 [SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO.................................................................................................................... 1140 [SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio.................................................................................................................... 1141 [SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:TYPE.....................................................................................................................1141 [SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]..................................................................................................................... 1138 [SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO.......................................................................................................... 1139 [SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:FFT............................................................................................................. 1146 [SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio.......................................................................................................... 1139 [SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE...........................................................................................................1139 [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire].................................................................................................. 1113 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BAND............................................................................................................... 1094 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS.................................................................................................................1094 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CATalog?..........................................................................................................1094 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar...............................................................................................................1095 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent.........................................................................................................1095 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:DATA................................................................................................................ 1095 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:HARMonic........................................................................................................1096 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer............................................................................................................... 1096 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs..............................................................................................................1096 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect............................................................................................................. 1097 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber......................................................................................................... 1097 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:ADJust:RLEVel:STATe.....................................1340 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fi>:REMove........................................... 1343 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:CATalog?.........................................1340 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:CLEar.............................................. 1341
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1479
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:INSert.............................................. 1342 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:MAGNitude[:STATe]........................ 1342 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:PHASe[:STATe]............................... 1343 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:SELect.............................................1344 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:FLISt<fli>:SIZE?.............................................. 1344 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:LOAD...............................................................1346 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:PRESet............................................................1346 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:REFResh......................................................... 1346 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:CATalog?........................................1347 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:CLEar............................................. 1348 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:INSert............................................. 1349 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:MOVE.............................................1350 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:FROM................................ 1350 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:TO...................................... 1351 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:REMove......................................... 1351 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:SELect............................................1352 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:SIZE?............................................. 1353 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:SLISt<sli>:STATe............................................. 1353 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:STATe.............................................................. 1354 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:BASeband:USER:STORe.............................................................1355 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:FILE:USER:ADJust:RLEVel:STATe.............................................. 1340 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:ADJust:RLEVel:STATe...................................... 1340 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:CATalog?.......................................... 1340 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:CLEar............................................... 1341 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:INSert............................................... 1342 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:MAGNitude[:STATe]......................... 1342 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:PHASe[:STATe]................................ 1343 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:REMove............................................1343 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:SELect..............................................1344 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:FLISt<fli>:SIZE?............................................... 1344 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:LOAD................................................................ 1346 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:PRESet............................................................. 1346 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:REFResh.......................................................... 1346 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:CATalog?......................................... 1347 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:CLEar.............................................. 1348 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:INSert.............................................. 1349 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:MOVE..............................................1350 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:FROM................................. 1350 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:TO....................................... 1351 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:REMove...........................................1351 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:SELect.............................................1352 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:SIZE?.............................................. 1353 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:SLISt<sli>:STATe.............................................. 1353 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:STATe............................................................... 1354 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:STORe..............................................................1355 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:ADJust:RLEVel:STATe....................................................... 1340 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:CATalog?........................................................... 1340 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:CLEar................................................................ 1341 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:FREQuency?...........................................1341 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:MAGNitude?............................................1341
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1480
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:PHASe?.................................................. 1341 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:INSert................................................................ 1342 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:MAGNitude[:STATe].......................................... 1342 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:PHASe[:STATe]................................................. 1343 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:REMove.............................................................1343 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:SELect...............................................................1344 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:SIZE?................................................................ 1344 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FSTate............................................................................... 1345 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:IQ:DATA:FREQuency?...................................................... 1345 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:IQ:DATA:MAGNitude?....................................................... 1345 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:IQ:DATA:PHASe?.............................................................. 1345 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:LOAD................................................................................. 1346 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:PRESet.............................................................................. 1346 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:PSTate............................................................................... 1352 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SCOPe...............................................................................1347 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SCOVered?........................................................................1347 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:CATalog?.......................................................... 1347 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:CLEar............................................................... 1348 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA:FREQuency<spi>?................................. 1348 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA:MAGNitude<spi>?.................................. 1348 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA:PHASe<spi>?.........................................1348 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:INSert............................................................... 1349 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:MOVE...............................................................1350 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:FROM.................................................. 1350 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:TO........................................................ 1351 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:REMove............................................................1351 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:SELect..............................................................1352 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:SIZE?............................................................... 1353 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:STATe............................................................... 1353 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:FREQuency?......................................... 1354 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:MAGNitude?.......................................... 1354 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:PHASe?................................................. 1354 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:STATe................................................................................ 1354 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:STORe...............................................................................1355 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:VALid?............................................................................... 1355 [SENSe:]CORRection:METHod................................................................................................................... 1114 [SENSe:]CORRection:RECall...................................................................................................................... 1114 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ADJust:RLEVel[:STATe]..................................................................... 1334 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:CATalog?............................................................................................ 1334 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent........................................................................................... 1335 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA.................................................................................................. 1335 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete............................................................................................... 1335 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:GENerate............................................................................................ 1115 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing............................................................................................. 1336 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect................................................................................................1336 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT................................................................................................... 1336 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe]............................................................................................... 1336 [SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe]..................................................................................................................... 1114 [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel................................................................................................................ 1255 [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe]............................................................................................................. 1255
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1481
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:BWID....................................................................................................................987 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:FILTer[:RRC]:ALPHa............................................................................................988 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:FILTer[:RRC][:STATe]........................................................................................... 988 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:HSPeed................................................................................................................973 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:APPLy......................................................................................................... 995 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:BAND.......................................................................................................... 995 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:BCATegory.................................................................................................. 996 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:CLASs.........................................................................................................997 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:GSM:CARRier.............................................................................................997 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:GSM:CPResent.......................................................................................... 998 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:LTE:CPResent............................................................................................ 999 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:MPOWer..................................................................................................... 999 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:RFBWidth..................................................................................................1000 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet:RESTore.................................................................................................970 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet:STORe................................................................................................... 970 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet[:STANdard].............................................................................................969 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:RESolution.................................................................... 973 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:VIDeo............................................................................ 974 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:COUNt?............................................................................................974 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:DELete............................................................................................. 975 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:FILTer:TYPE..................................................................................... 975 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation........................................................................... 977 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO................................................................ 977 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN:STATe........................................................................... 978 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN[:VALue]......................................................................... 978 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INSert............................................................................................... 978 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:ABSolute:STARt................................................................ 979 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:ABSolute:STOP................................................................. 979 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARt.................................................................980 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARt:ABS.........................................................980 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARt:FUNCtion................................................ 981 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STOP................................................................. 982 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STOP:ABS......................................................... 982 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STOP:FUNCtion.................................................983 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:STATe................................................................................ 984 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:MLCalc............................................................................................. 985 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:POINts:MINimum[:VALue]................................................................ 984 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:RLEVel............................................................................................. 985 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME....................................................................................986 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO.........................................................................986 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:TRANsducer.....................................................................................986 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STARt........................................................................ 976 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STOP......................................................................... 976 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RRANge?.............................................................................................................988 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RTYPe................................................................................................................. 989 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SBCenter........................................................................................................... 1451 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SBCount.............................................................................................................1452 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SCENter...............................................................................................................971 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SCOunt................................................................................................................ 972 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SSETup................................................................................................................987
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1482
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer..................................................................................................................... 1132 [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP...........................................................................................................1133 [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO................................................................................................ 1133 [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK..................................................................................................1133 [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor.....................................................................................1134 [SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet..................................................................................................................... 1134 [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN........................................................................................................................ 1135 [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL.............................................................................................................. 1135 [SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt....................................................................................................................... 1135 [SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP........................................................................................................................ 1135 [SENSe:]LIST:POWer:RESult?.................................................................................................................... 1059 [SENSe:]LIST:POWer:SET.......................................................................................................................... 1060 [SENSe:]LIST:POWer:STATe....................................................................................................................... 1061 [SENSe:]LIST:POWer[:SEQuence]..............................................................................................................1059 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:RESolution..................................................................................... 1007 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:VIDeo............................................................................................. 1007 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:BREak............................................................................................................... 1007 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:COUNt?.............................................................................................................1008 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:DELete.............................................................................................................. 1008 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:DETector............................................................................................................1008 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:FILTer:TYPE...................................................................................................... 1010 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation.............................................................................................1011 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO..................................................................................1011 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN:STATe.............................................................................................1011 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN[:VALue].......................................................................................... 1012 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:LIMit:STARt....................................................................................................... 1012 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:LIMit:STATe....................................................................................................... 1012 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:LIMit:STOP........................................................................................................1013 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:POINts[:VALue]................................................................................................. 1013 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:RLEVel.............................................................................................................. 1013 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME.....................................................................................................1014 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO..........................................................................................1014 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:TRANsducer......................................................................................................1014 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STARt......................................................................................... 1009 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STOP.......................................................................................... 1009 [SENSe:]LIST:XADJust................................................................................................................................ 1017 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:BIAS:HIGH................................................................................................................... 1085 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:BIAS[:LOW].................................................................................................................. 1085 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:HANDover................................................................................................1088 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:STARt.......................................................................................................1088 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:STOP....................................................................................................... 1088 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:BAND......................................................................................................... 1089 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:BAND:PRESet............................................................................................1088 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:HIGH:STATe............................................................................................... 1090 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:HIGH[:VALue].............................................................................................1090 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:TYPE.......................................................................................................... 1090 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic[:LOW]......................................................................................................... 1091 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOPower.......................................................................................................................1086 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:HIGH.................................................................................................................. 1091 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:TABLe:HIGH...................................................................................................... 1091
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1483
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:TABLe[:LOW]..................................................................................................... 1092 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS[:LOW].................................................................................................................1092 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:PORTs.......................................................................................................................... 1093 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:RFOVerrange[:STATe].................................................................................................. 1093 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:SIGNal.......................................................................................................................... 1086 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:THReshold....................................................................................................................1087 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>[:STATe]......................................................................................................................... 1085 [SENSe:]MPOWer:FTYPe........................................................................................................................... 1064 [SENSe:]MPOWer:RESult:MIN?..................................................................................................................1066 [SENSe:]MPOWer:RESult[:LIST]?...............................................................................................................1065 [SENSe:]MPOWer[:SEQuence]................................................................................................................... 1065 [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:BWIDth............................................................................................................. 953 [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:AUTO............................................................................................ 953 [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:BWIDth.......................................................................................... 954 [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:FREQuency:OFFSet..................................................................... 954 [SENSe:]NPRatio:MODE............................................................................................................................... 954 [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:BWIDth:RELative....................................................................................955 [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:BWIDth[:ABSolute]................................................................................. 955 [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:COUNt.................................................................................................... 955 [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:FREQuency:OFFSet.............................................................................. 956 [SENSe:]NPRatio:STATe............................................................................................................................... 952 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:DCYCle:VALue.......................................................................................................... 1121 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:DCYCle[:STATe]........................................................................................................ 1121 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:FREQuency...............................................................................................................1121 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:FREQuency:LINK......................................................................................................1122 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:MTIMe....................................................................................................................... 1122 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:MTIMe:AVERage:COUNt.......................................................................................... 1122 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:MTIMe:AVERage[:STATe]......................................................................................... 1123 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:ROFFset[:STATe].......................................................................................................1123 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:SOFFset.................................................................................................................... 1124 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:DTIMe.........................................................................................................1125 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:HOLDoff......................................................................................................1126 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:HYSTeresis.................................................................................................1126 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:LEVel.......................................................................................................... 1126 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:SLOPe........................................................................................................ 1127 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger[:STATe]....................................................................................................... 1127 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:UPDate[:STATe].........................................................................................................1124 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>[:STATe]...................................................................................................................... 1124 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs.............................................................................................................893 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:AGCHannels..................................................................................................... 916 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel...................................................................................... 893 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate<ch>.............................................................................. 893 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer...........................................................931 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer........................................................... 931 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]........................................................................ 920 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:UACHannel....................................................................................914 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:UALTernate<ch>............................................................................ 914 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>]..............................................................................894 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:ACHannel............................................................................................ 893 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:ALTernate<ch>.................................................................................... 893
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1484
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer.................................................................931 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer................................................................. 931 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:GAP<gap>[:AUTO].............................................................................. 920 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:UACHannel..........................................................................................914 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:UALTernate<ch>.................................................................................. 914 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth[:CHANnel<ch>]....................................................................................894 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel.................................................................................. 897 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<ch>...........................................................................897 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:CHANnel<ch>............................................................................898 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer.......................................................933 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer....................................................... 933 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>[:AUTO].................................................................... 921 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:SBLock<sb>:CHANnel<ch>...................................................... 909 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UACHannel................................................................................915 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UALTernate<ch>........................................................................ 915 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa[:ALL].......................................................................................... 897 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ACHannel................................................................................. 898 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<ch>..........................................................................899 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:CHANnel<ch>...........................................................................899 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer...................................................... 932 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer.......................................................932 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]................................................................... 921 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:SBLock<sb>:CHANnel<ch>..................................................... 909 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UACHannel...............................................................................915 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UALTernate<ch>....................................................................... 916 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe][:ALL]......................................................................................... 898 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GAP<gap>:MODE............................................................................................ 916 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:MSIZe................................................................................921 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GCHannel[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer............................................... 934 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GCHannel[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer................................................935 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE............................................................................................................... 941 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel.............................................................................................. 894 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<ch>...................................................................................... 895 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:CHANnel<ch>........................................................................................895 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:GAP<gap>.............................................................................................937 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UACHannel............................................................................................937 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UALTernate<ch>.................................................................................... 937 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet............................................................................................................. 889 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel................................................................................................ 890 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE................................................................................. 899 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO......................................................................... 900 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual...................................................................... 900 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBCount............................................................................................................909 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>]........................................................ 910 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:BWIDth[:CHANnel<ch>].............................................................. 910 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:CENTer[:CHANnel<ch>].............................................................. 910 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:FREQuency:CENTer....................................................................911 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:NAME[:CHANnel<ch>]................................................................ 937 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:RFBWidth.................................................................................... 911 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:TECHnology[:CHANnel<ch>]...................................................... 912
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1485
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:TXCHannel:COUNt..................................................................... 913 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<ch>...................................................................................896 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<ch>....................................................................................896 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer...............................................................935 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer............................................................... 936 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]............................................................................ 922 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:UACHannel........................................................................................913 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:UALTernate<ch>................................................................................ 913 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel]........................................................................................ 895 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SSETup.............................................................................................................914 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt...........................................................................................897 [SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth......................................................................................................................... 951 [SENSe:]POWer:BWIDth............................................................................................................................... 951 [SENSe:]POWer:HSPeed.............................................................................................................................. 907 [SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection.................................................................................................................... 1148 [SENSe:]POWer:TRACe................................................................................................................................890 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:ID:PARTnumber?..................................................................................................... 1100 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:ID:SRNumber?.........................................................................................................1100 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:ATTRatio...................................................................................................... 1101 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:CMOFfset.....................................................................................................1101 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:DMOFfset.....................................................................................................1102 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:MODE.......................................................................................................... 1102 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:NAME?.........................................................................................................1103 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:NMOFfset.....................................................................................................1103 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:PMODe........................................................................................................ 1103 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:PMOFfset..................................................................................................... 1104 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:STATe?......................................................................................................... 1105 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:TYPE?..........................................................................................................1105 [SENSe:]ROSCillator:LBWidth.....................................................................................................................1325 [SENSe:]ROSCillator:O100......................................................................................................................... 1325 [SENSe:]ROSCillator:O640......................................................................................................................... 1325 [SENSe:]ROSCillator:OSYNc...................................................................................................................... 1326 [SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce.................................................................................................................... 1326 [SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce:EAUTo?......................................................................................................1327 [SENSe:]ROSCillator:TRANge.................................................................................................................... 1327 [SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt..............................................................................................................................1142 [SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt:CURRent?............................................................................................................. 885 [SENSe:]SWEep:DURation?........................................................................................................................1142 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe.............................................................................................................................. 1162 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:AUTO................................................................................................................... 1163 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PCOunt...........................................................................................1164 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PLENgth......................................................................................... 1164 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous[:STATe]........................................................................................... 1164 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff............................................................................................................... 1165 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth................................................................................................................ 1165 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel:RFPower....................................................................................................1165 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel[:EXTernal<tp>]........................................................................................... 1166 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity............................................................................................................... 1166 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce............................................................................................................... 1167 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:COMMent.......................................................................................... 1022
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1486
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:PERiod...............................................................................................1022 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:STARt<gr>......................................................................................... 1023 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:STOP<gr>..........................................................................................1024 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>[:STATe<gr>]....................................................................................... 1023 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE....................................................................................................................1167 [SENSe:]SWEep:FFTSubspan?.................................................................................................................. 1143 [SENSe:]SWEep:MODE................................................................................................................................ 971 [SENSe:]SWEep:OPTimize..........................................................................................................................1143 [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME.................................................................................................................................1144 [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO......................................................................................................................1145 [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE................................................................................................................................1145 [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE:USED.....................................................................................................................1145 [SENSe:]SWEep[:WINDow<n>]:POINts...................................................................................................... 1144 *CAL?.............................................................................................................................................................868 *CLS...............................................................................................................................................................868 *ESE.............................................................................................................................................................. 868 *ESR?............................................................................................................................................................ 868 *IDN?............................................................................................................................................................. 869 *IST?.............................................................................................................................................................. 869 *OPC..............................................................................................................................................................869 *OPT?............................................................................................................................................................ 869 *PCB.............................................................................................................................................................. 870 *PRE.............................................................................................................................................................. 870 *PSC.............................................................................................................................................................. 870 *RST.............................................................................................................................................................. 871 *SRE.............................................................................................................................................................. 871 *STB?.............................................................................................................................................................871 *TRG.............................................................................................................................................................. 871 *TST?.............................................................................................................................................................872 *WAI............................................................................................................................................................... 872 ABORt............................................................................................................................................................883 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF.....................................................................................................1205 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE....................................................................1246 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?................................................................. 1246 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN..................................................................... 1247 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe].................................................................. 1247 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK]......................................... 1234 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X.................................................................... 1234 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y.................................................................... 1234 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet.......................................................1235 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe].......................................................................1235 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector..................................................... 1050 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DWELl......................................................... 1051 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<li>:LCONdition?................................. 1055 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<li>:LDELta?....................................... 1055 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PEAKsearch:AUTO.....................................1051 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PSEarch:AUTO........................................... 1051 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:RESult?.......................................................1054 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement[:STATe]........................................................1050 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AUTO...................................................................... 1241
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1487
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult?................................................................... 1241 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe].................................................................... 1242 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK...................................................................................................... 1205 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT.................................................................................... 1220 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT................................................................................... 1220 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt...................................................................................1221 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]................................................................................. 1221 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT..................................................................................... 1221 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT.................................................................................... 1221 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt.................................................................................... 1222 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK].................................................................................. 1222 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MODE....................................................................................................1206 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREFerence......................................................................................... 1207 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:FRAMe.................................................................................... 1230 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:SARea..................................................................................... 1230 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]..............................................................1231 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]............................................................... 1231 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe................................................................ 1231 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow................................................................ 1231 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT.................................................................. 1232 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]................................................................ 1232 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe................................................................. 1232 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow..................................................................1232 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT................................................................... 1233 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]................................................................. 1233 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe........................................................................... 1230 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:SARea............................................................................1230 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK].................................................... 1231 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]......................................................1231 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe.......................................................1231 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:BELow....................................................... 1231 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:NEXT......................................................... 1232 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK].......................................................1232 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:ABOVe........................................................1232 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:BELow........................................................ 1232 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:NEXT.......................................................... 1233 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]........................................................ 1233 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:TRACe...................................................................................................1208 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X............................................................................................................ 1208 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative?.......................................................................................... 1223 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y?.......................................................................................................... 1223 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe].................................................................................................. 1207 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<ms>:LINK:TO:MARKer<md>....................................................................... 1206 CALCulate<n>:DLINe<dl>........................................................................................................................... 1264 CALCulate<n>:DLINe<dl>:STATe................................................................................................................ 1265 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:AUTO..........................................................................................1001 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:DETails........................................................................................1015 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:MARGin...................................................................................... 1001 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:PSHow........................................................................................1002 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch[:IMMediate]................................................................................. 1001
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1488
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch:AUTO................................................................................................ 1001 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch:DETails..............................................................................................1015 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch:MARGin............................................................................................ 1001 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch:PSHow.............................................................................................. 1002 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch[:IMMediate]....................................................................................... 1001 CALCulate<n>:FLINe<dl>............................................................................................................................1265 CALCulate<n>:FLINe<dl>:STATe................................................................................................................ 1265 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute............................................................................... 901 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe.................................................................... 901 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult?................................................................................. 902 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]..............................................................................902 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe.................................................................. 903 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute....................................................................... 904 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute:STATe............................................................ 904 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:RESult?......................................................................... 905 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative]......................................................................905 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative]:STATe...........................................................906 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:ACLR:RESult?..................................................................... 938 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer:ABSolute....................................................923 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer:ABSolute:STATe........................................ 923 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer:ACLR[:RELative]....................................... 924 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer:ACLR[:RELative]:STATe............................ 925 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer[:CACLr][:RELative].................................... 925 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer[:CACLr][:RELative]:STATe......................... 926 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer:ABSolute.................................................... 927 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer:ABSolute:STATe......................................... 927 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer:ACLR[:RELative]........................................ 928 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer:ACLR[:RELative]:STATe............................. 929 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer[:CACLr][:RELative]..................................... 929 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer[:CACLr][:RELative]:STATe..........................930 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:ABSolute.................................................................917 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:ABSolute:STATe......................................................918 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:ACLR[:RELative].....................................................918 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:ACLR[:RELative]:STATe......................................... 919 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO][:CACLr][:RELative]................................................. 919 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO][:CACLr][:RELative]:STATe...................................... 920 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:CACLr]:RESult?..................................................................939 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe]................................................................................................... 906 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACTive?................................................................................................................ 1277 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CLEar[:IMMediate]................................................................................................1279 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:COMMent............................................................................................................. 1267 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:DOMain................................................................................................. 1268 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:MODE.................................................................................................... 1268 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:OFFSet.................................................................................................. 1269 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:SHIFt..................................................................................................... 1269 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:SPACing................................................................................................ 1270 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol[:DATA]....................................................................................................1268 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:COPY....................................................................................................................1277 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:DELete..................................................................................................................1277 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:LIMits........................................................................................... 989
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1489
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:MODE..........................................................................................990 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:COUNt................................................................... 991 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:LIMit[:STATe].......................................................... 992 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:MAXimum.............................................................. 993 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:MINimum................................................................994 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>[:EXCLusive]........................................................... 992 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:RESTore...................................................................................... 969 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:VALue.......................................................................................... 991 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:FAIL?.................................................................................................................... 1280 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:MARGin....................................................................................................1270 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:MODE.......................................................................................................1271 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:OFFSet.....................................................................................................1271 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:SHIFt........................................................................................................ 1271 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:SPACing................................................................................................... 1272 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:STATe....................................................................................................... 1272 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:THReshold............................................................................................... 1272 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer[:DATA]...................................................................................................... 1270 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:NAME................................................................................................................... 1273 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:STATe................................................................................................................... 1278 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t>.............................................................................................................1452 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t>:CHECk................................................................................................1278 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UNIT..................................................................................................................... 1273 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:MARGin.....................................................................................................1274 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:MODE....................................................................................................... 1274 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:OFFSet......................................................................................................1275 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:SHIFt......................................................................................................... 1275 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:SPACing....................................................................................................1275 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:STATe........................................................................................................ 1276 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:THReshold................................................................................................ 1276 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer[:DATA]....................................................................................................... 1273 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF............................................................................................................. 1209 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt........................................................................................................... 1251 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency?.................................................................................... 1252 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:RESolution........................................................................................ 1252 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:AOFF............................................................................. 1244 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE............................................................................1244 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?......................................................................... 1244 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN............................................................................. 1245 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe].......................................................................... 1245 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer......................................................................................... 1131 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CSTep........................................................................................... 1132 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:CONTinuous......................................................... 1253 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff................................................................ 1254 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect...................................................................1254 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe].................................................................. 1254 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector............................................................. 1050 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DWELl................................................................. 1051 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<li>:LCONdition?......................................... 1055 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<li>:LDELta?................................................1055 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PEAKsearch:AUTO............................................. 1051
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1490
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PSEarch:AUTO................................................... 1051 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:RESult?............................................................... 1054 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement[:STATe]................................................................ 1050 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:ANNotation:LABel[:STATe].............................................. 1236 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt?...........................................................................1237 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:LIST:SIZE........................................................................ 1237 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT.............................................................................. 1238 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:STATe.............................................................................. 1238 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:X?....................................................................................1239 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:Y?....................................................................................1239 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks[:IMMediate]..................................................................... 1237 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:BANDwidth:AUTO.................................................... 1041 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion?............................................................... 1042 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST.......................................................................... 1042 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics............................................................ 1041 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet..................................................................... 1041 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics[:STATe]..................................................................... 1040 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult<t>?..................................................................... 1048 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:SEARchsignal ONCE..................................................... 1048 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe]........................................................................... 1047 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MSUMmary...................................................................................1063 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown..................................................................................... 1248 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency?.............................................................. 1248 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:QFACtor?.................................................................... 1249 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult?.......................................................................1249 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe..........................................................................1250 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME?......................................................................... 1250 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:AOFF................................................................................ 1239 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?.............................................................................1240 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe]..............................................................................1240 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AOFF...............................................................................1242 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult?........................................................................... 1243 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe]............................................................................ 1243 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:MODE........................................................................ 886 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet...................................................................... 891 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult:PHZ................................................................940 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult:UNIT.............................................................. 941 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult?......................................................................886 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:SELect....................................................................... 888 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:CATalog?.................................................. 891 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:DELete..................................................... 892 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:SAVE........................................................ 892 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>[:STATe].......................................................................889 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:REFerence....................................................................................1147 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth......................................................................1136 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold...................................................................... 1137 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe............................................................................ 1137 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe]............................................................................ 1136 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF........................................................................... 1031 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage..................................................................... 1031
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1491
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult?............................................1034 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult?............................................... 1034 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult?............................................................ 1035 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe]............................................................. 1032 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd......................................................................... 1032 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:AVERage:RESult?........................................... 1035 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult?...............................................1035 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult?............................................................1036 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe]............................................................ 1033 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:AVERage:RESult?.............................................. 1036 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOLd:RESult?..................................................1037 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult?...............................................................1037 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe]............................................................... 1033 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:AVERage:RESult?....................................1037 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:PHOLd:RESult?....................................... 1038 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:RESult?.................................................... 1038 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation[:STATe]..................................................... 1033 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe]........................................................................ 1032 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult:MAXimum?................................................................ 1045 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult:MINimum?................................................................. 1046 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult?..................................................................................1045 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:SEARchsignal ONCE............................................................ 1045 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI[:STATe]...................................................................................1044 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LOEXclude.................................................................................................... 1212 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:AUTO........................................................................................... 1216 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT............................................................................................ 1217 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT........................................................................................... 1217 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt........................................................................................... 1218 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]......................................................................................... 1217 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:AUTO............................................................................................ 1218 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT............................................................................................. 1219 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT.............................................................................................1219 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt............................................................................................ 1219 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]...........................................................................................1219 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion................................................................................................... 1213 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:FRAMe.............................................................................................1225 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea............................................................................................. 1226 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]...................................................................... 1226 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]....................................................................... 1226 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe........................................................................ 1226 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow.........................................................................1227 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT.......................................................................... 1227 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]........................................................................ 1227 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe......................................................................... 1228 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow..........................................................................1228 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT............................................................................1228 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]..........................................................................1228 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe................................................................................... 1225 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:SARea.................................................................................... 1226 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK].............................................................1226
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1492
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]..............................................................1226 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe...............................................................1226 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:BELow............................................................... 1227 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:NEXT................................................................. 1227 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]............................................................... 1227 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:ABOVe................................................................ 1228 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:BELow................................................................ 1228 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:NEXT.................................................................. 1228 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]................................................................ 1228 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe...........................................................................................................1210 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X.................................................................................................................... 1210 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT............................................................................................. 1214 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt............................................................................................ 1214 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM[:STATe].............................................................................. 1215 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe].......................................................................................... 1213 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SSIZe......................................................................................................... 1212 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y:PERCent.................................................................................................... 1021 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y?.................................................................................................................. 1224 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe].......................................................................................................... 1209 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<ms>:LINK:TO:MARKer<md>............................................................................... 1209 CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:MODE..................................................................................................................1193 CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:POSition.............................................................................................................. 1194 CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:STATe.................................................................................................................. 1194 CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>[:EXPRession][:DEFine]....................................................................................... 1193 CALCulate<n>:NPRatio:RESult?...................................................................................................................967 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:AUTO............................................................................................................. 1015 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:MARGin......................................................................................................... 1016 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PSHow........................................................................................................... 1016 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges................................................................................................... 1017 CALCulate<n>:PMETer<p>:RELative:STATe...............................................................................................1120 CALCulate<n>:PMETer<p>:RELative[:MAGNitude].....................................................................................1119 CALCulate<n>:PMETer<p>:RELative[:MAGNitude]:AUTO ONCE.............................................................. 1119 CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:AUTO................................................................................................................... 1015 CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:MARGin................................................................................................................1016 CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PSHow................................................................................................................. 1016 CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:SUBRanges......................................................................................................... 1017 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CLEar[:IMMediate].................................................................................................1186 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CONTinuous.......................................................................................................... 1186 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:COUNt...................................................................................................... 1186 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:SELect...................................................................................................... 1187 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth..................................................................................................................1187 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:LAYout....................................................................................................................1188 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:THReedim[:STATe]................................................................................................ 1189 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TRACe................................................................................................................... 1189 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp:DATA?..................................................................................................... 1189 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp[:STATe].................................................................................................... 1190 CALCulate<n>:SGRam[:STATe]...................................................................................................................1188 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CLEar[:IMMediate]....................................................................................... 1186 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CONTinuous.................................................................................................1186 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:COUNt.............................................................................................1186
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1493
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:SELect.............................................................................................1187 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:HDEPth........................................................................................................ 1187 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:LAYout.......................................................................................................... 1188 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:THReedim[:STATe]....................................................................................... 1189 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TRACe..........................................................................................................1189 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TSTamp:DATA?............................................................................................ 1189 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TSTamp[:STATe]...........................................................................................1190 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram[:STATe]......................................................................................................... 1188 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:APD[:STATe]...................................................................................................... 1020 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF:X<t>?...................................................................................................... 1027 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe]....................................................................................................1021 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:NSAMples..........................................................................................................1022 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:PRESet.............................................................................................................. 1024 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:RESult<res>?.................................................................................................... 1028 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE......................................................................................... 1025 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RANGe...............................................................................................1025 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RLEVel............................................................................................... 1025 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:LOWer................................................................................................ 1026 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT...................................................................................................1026 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer.................................................................................................1026 CALCulate<n>:THReshold.......................................................................................................................... 1215 CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe............................................................................................................... 1216 CALCulate<n>:TLINe<dl>............................................................................................................................1266 CALCulate<n>:TLINe<dl>:STATe................................................................................................................ 1266 CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer........................................................................................................................ 1147 CALibration:PADJust[:STATe]...................................................................................................................... 1078 CALibration:PMETer<p>:ZERO:AUTO ONCE............................................................................................. 1119 CALibration:PRESelection........................................................................................................................... 1329 CALibration:RESult?.................................................................................................................................... 1329 CALibration[:ALL].........................................................................................................................................1328 CALibration[:ALL]?.......................................................................................................................................1328 CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection:CSTate?.............................................................................................1383 CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection[:STATe].............................................................................................. 1384 CONFigure:GENerator:EXTernal:ROSCillator............................................................................................... 957 CONFigure:GENerator:FREQuency:CENTer................................................................................................ 957 CONFigure:GENerator:IPConnection:ADDRess......................................................................................... 1384 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:BB:ARBitrary:WAVeform:SELect?..............................................................957 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:BB:STANdard?...........................................................................................958 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:CONNection:CSTate?................................................................................ 958 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:CONTrol[:STATe]........................................................................................ 958 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:EXTernal:ROSCillator:CSTate?..................................................................959 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency:CENTer:CSTate?................................................................... 959 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe]................................................................. 959 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency:OFFSet.................................................................................. 960 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator.......................................................... 960 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator.............................................................. 960 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:BWIDth:ABSolute:CSTate?..............................................960 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:CLOCk?........................................................................... 962 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:COUNt:CSTate?...............................................................962 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:FREQuency:OFFSet:CSTate?......................................... 961
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1494
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:STATe:CSTate?................................................................ 961 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>[:STATe].............................................................................962 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:POWer:LEVel:CSTate?.............................................................................. 963 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:POWer:LEVel:OFFSet:CSTate?.................................................................963 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:RFOutput:STATe:CSTate?......................................................................... 964 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:SETTings:NOTCh:UPDate.........................................................................964 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:SETTings:UPDate...................................................................................... 964 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:STATe:CSTate?.......................................................................................... 965 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio[:STATe]....................................................................................................... 965 CONFigure:GENerator:POWer:LEVel........................................................................................................... 965 CONFigure:GENerator:POWer:LEVel:OFFSet..............................................................................................966 CONFigure:GENerator:RFOutput[:STATe].....................................................................................................966 CONFigure:GENerator:TARGet:PATH:BB?................................................................................................... 966 CONFigure:GENerator:TARGet:PATH:RF..................................................................................................... 966 CONFigure:SETTings:NPRatio......................................................................................................................967 CONFigure:SETTings:NPRatio:NOTCh........................................................................................................ 967 DEVice:INFO:HWBand?.............................................................................................................................. 1377 DIAGnostic:HUMS:DELete:ALL...................................................................................................................1369 DIAGnostic:HUMS:FORMat.........................................................................................................................1369 DIAGnostic:HUMS:STATe............................................................................................................................ 1369 DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:ALL?................................................................................................................... 1370 DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete................................................................................................................1370 DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete:ALL........................................................................................................ 1370 DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS[:VALue]............................................................................................................... 1370 DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt?......................................................................................................................... 1375 DIAGnostic:SERVice:BIOSinfo?.................................................................................................................. 1377 DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:DATE..................................................................................................... 1376 DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:DUE:DATE.............................................................................................1376 DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:INTerval?............................................................................................... 1376 DIAGnostic:SERVice:DATE......................................................................................................................... 1376 DIAGnostic:SERVice:HWINfo?.................................................................................................................... 1378 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:AIQ[:TYPE]...................................................................................................... 1332 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:MC:CFRequency............................................................................................. 1330 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:MC[:DISTance]................................................................................................ 1330 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:CFRequency..................................................................................... 1330 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:MCFRequency.................................................................................. 1331 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:WBFRequency.................................................................................. 1331 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:RF[:SPECtrum]................................................................................................1331 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect]........................................................................................................... 1332 DIAGnostic:SERVice:NSOurce.................................................................................................................... 1128 DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction................................................................................................................. 1384 DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:LASTresult?............................................................................................ 1385 DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:DELete...................................................................................... 1385 DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:SAVE.........................................................................................1385 DIAGnostic:SERVice:SINFo?...................................................................................................................... 1385 DIAGnostic:SERVice:STESt:RESult?.......................................................................................................... 1333 DIAGnostic:SERVice:VERSinfo?................................................................................................................. 1378 DISPlay:ANNotation:CBAR..........................................................................................................................1357 DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency................................................................................................................ 1357 DISPlay:ATAB................................................................................................................................................ 873
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1495
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
DISPlay:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci>..................................................................................................................1360 DISPlay:CMAP<it>:HSL...............................................................................................................................1361 DISPlay:CMAP<it>:PDEFined..................................................................................................................... 1361 DISPlay:FORMat......................................................................................................................................... 1068 DISPlay:LOGO.............................................................................................................................................1299 DISPlay:SBAR[:STATe]................................................................................................................................ 1357 DISPlay:SKEYs[:STATe].............................................................................................................................. 1357 DISPlay:TBAR[:STATe]................................................................................................................................ 1358 DISPlay:THEMe:CATalog?.......................................................................................................................... 1361 DISPlay:THEMe:SELect.............................................................................................................................. 1362 DISPlay:TOUChscreen[:STATe]...................................................................................................................1358 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MINFo[:STATe]........................................................................................................1211 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MTABle................................................................................................................... 1211 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:DEFault......................................................................................... 1191 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:LOWer........................................................................................... 1191 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:SHAPe...........................................................................................1191 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:UPPer............................................................................................1192 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor[:STYLe]......................................................................................... 1192 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SIZE........................................................................................................................1068 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:DEFault................................................................................ 1191 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:LOWer..................................................................................1191 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:SHAPe................................................................................. 1191 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:UPPer.................................................................................. 1192 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor[:STYLe]................................................................................ 1192 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:STATe..................................................................................................................... 1452 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME....................................................................................................................... 1358 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME:FORMat........................................................................................................ 1358 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE................................................................................................... 1178 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]............................................................................................. 1153 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO ONCE.......................................................................1154 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision............................................................................ 1154 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel................................................................................ 1147 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet.................................................................. 1148 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition........................................................................... 1155 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TYPE...................................................................................................................... 1453 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:MODE:HCONtinuous.............................................. 1179 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:PRESet................................................................... 1180 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:SMOothing:APERture............................................. 1181 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:SMOothing[:STATe].................................................1181 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing.............................................................. 1132 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing.............................................................. 1155 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE................................................... 1154 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue................................................. 1113 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe]....................................................................1181 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:AREA............................................................................ 1174 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>:AREA.................................................... 1176 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>[:STATe]..................................................1177 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM[:STATe]..........................................................................1176 FETCh:PMETer<p>?....................................................................................................................................1120 FORMat:DEXPort:CSEParator.................................................................................................................... 1199
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1496
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator.................................................................................................................... 1284 FORMat:DEXPort:FORMat.......................................................................................................................... 1199 FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer.......................................................................................................................... 1310 FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes..........................................................................................................................1200 FORMat:DEXPort:XDIStrib.......................................................................................................................... 1200 FORMat:DIMPort:TRACes...........................................................................................................................1201 FORMat[:DATA]............................................................................................................................................1195 HCOPy:ABORt.............................................................................................................................................1299 HCOPy:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci>...................................................................................................................1300 HCOPy:CMAP<it>:HSL............................................................................................................................... 1301 HCOPy:CMAP<it>:PDEFined...................................................................................................................... 1301 HCOPy:CONTent......................................................................................................................................... 1299 HCOPy:DESTination<1|2>...........................................................................................................................1302 HCOPy:DEVice:COLor................................................................................................................................ 1303 HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2>................................................................................................................ 1303 HCOPy:ITEM:ALL........................................................................................................................................1453 HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TEXT.............................................................................................................1304 HCOPy:MODE............................................................................................................................................. 1313 HCOPy:PAGE:COUNt:STATe...................................................................................................................... 1304 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:BOTTom....................................................................................................... 1305 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:LEFT............................................................................................................ 1305 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:RIGHt........................................................................................................... 1305 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:TOP.............................................................................................................. 1306 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin<1|2>:UNIT............................................................................................................. 1306 HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2>.................................................................................................................1306 HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow<1|2>:CHANnel:STATe.......................................................................................... 1307 HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow<1|2>:COUNt......................................................................................................... 1307 HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow<1|2>:SCALe......................................................................................................... 1307 HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow<1|2>:STATe.......................................................................................................... 1308 HCOPy:TDSTamp:STATe<1|2>................................................................................................................... 1309 HCOPy:TREPort:APPend............................................................................................................................1313 HCOPy:TREPort:DESCription..................................................................................................................... 1314 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:DEFault.................................................................................................................. 1314 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:CONTrol................................................................................ 1314 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:TEXT..................................................................................... 1314 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:TITLe..................................................................................... 1315 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:STATe....................................................................................................... 1315 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LIST?......................................................................................................................1316 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO..................................................................................................................... 1316 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO:CONTrol...................................................................................................... 1316 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect....................................................................................................................1316 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:CATalog?............................................................................................... 1317 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:DELete...................................................................................................1317 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:LOAD.....................................................................................................1317 HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:SAVE..................................................................................................... 1317 HCOPy:TREPort:NEW.................................................................................................................................1318 HCOPy:TREPort:PAGecount:STATe............................................................................................................1318 HCOPy:TREPort:PAGesize......................................................................................................................... 1318 HCOPy:TREPort:PCOLors[:STATe]............................................................................................................. 1319 HCOPy:TREPort:TDSTamp[:STATe]............................................................................................................1319
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1497
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove................................................................................................................. 1319 HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove:ALL.......................................................................................................... 1319 HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe................................................................................................................................1320 HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe:STATe.................................................................................................................... 1320 HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]............................................................................................................................1304 HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]:NEXT................................................................................................................. 1304 INITiate:SEQuencer:ABORt...........................................................................................................................878 INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate..................................................................................................................... 879 INITiate:SEQuencer:MODE........................................................................................................................... 879 INITiate<n>:CONMeas.................................................................................................................................. 884 INITiate<n>:CONTinuous...............................................................................................................................884 INITiate<n>:ESPectrum................................................................................................................................. 971 INITiate<n>:SPURious.................................................................................................................................1006 INITiate<n>[:IMMediate]................................................................................................................................ 885 INPut<ip>:ATTenuation................................................................................................................................ 1149 INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:AUTO..................................................................................................................... 1149 INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE..........................................................................................................1149 INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:PROTection:RESet................................................................................................ 1079 INPut<ip>:CONNector................................................................................................................................. 1079 INPut<ip>:COUPling.................................................................................................................................... 1079 INPut<ip>:DPATh......................................................................................................................................... 1080 INPut<ip>:EATT........................................................................................................................................... 1150 INPut<ip>:EATT:AUTO.................................................................................................................................1150 INPut<ip>:EATT:STATe................................................................................................................................ 1151 INPut<ip>:EGAin[:STATe].............................................................................................................................1151 INPut<ip>:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe]................................................................................................................ 1080 INPut<ip>:FILTer:YIG[:STATe]......................................................................................................................1081 INPut<ip>:GAIN:STATe................................................................................................................................ 1152 INPut<ip>:GAIN[:VALue].............................................................................................................................. 1153 INPut<ip>:IMPedance..................................................................................................................................1081 INPut<ip>:IMPedance:PTYPe..................................................................................................................... 1082 INPut<ip>:LISN:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe]....................................................................................................... 1052 INPut<ip>:LISN:PHASe............................................................................................................................... 1052 INPut<ip>:LISN[:TYPE]................................................................................................................................1053 INPut<ip>:SELect........................................................................................................................................ 1082 INPut<ip>:TYPE...........................................................................................................................................1083 INPut<ip>:UPORt:STATe............................................................................................................................. 1084 INPut<ip>:UPORt[:VALue]........................................................................................................................... 1084 INSTrument:COUPle:ABIMpedance............................................................................................................ 1387 INSTrument:COUPle:ACDC........................................................................................................................ 1388 INSTrument:COUPle:ATTen........................................................................................................................ 1388 INSTrument:COUPle:AUNit......................................................................................................................... 1388 INSTrument:COUPle:BANDwidth................................................................................................................ 1389 INSTrument:COUPle:BWIDth...................................................................................................................... 1389 INSTrument:COUPle:CENTer...................................................................................................................... 1389 INSTrument:COUPle:DEMod...................................................................................................................... 1389 INSTrument:COUPle:GAIN..........................................................................................................................1390 INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:CENTer:OFFSet...................................................................................... 1402 INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:CENTer[:STATe]...................................................................................... 1402 INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:RLEVel:OFFSet.......................................................................................1402
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1498
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:RLEVel[:STATe]....................................................................................... 1403 INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:STATe...................................................................................................... 1403 INSTrument:COUPle:IMPedance................................................................................................................ 1390 INSTrument:COUPle:LIMit...........................................................................................................................1390 INSTrument:COUPle:LLINes....................................................................................................................... 1391 INSTrument:COUPle:MARKer..................................................................................................................... 1391 INSTrument:COUPle:PRESel...................................................................................................................... 1392 INSTrument:COUPle:RLEVel...................................................................................................................... 1392 INSTrument:COUPle:SPAN......................................................................................................................... 1392 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>................................................................................................................ 1393 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:CHANnel:LIST?...................................................................................... 1395 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:ELEMent:LIST?...................................................................................... 1395 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:INFO....................................................................................................... 1396 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NEW?..................................................................................................... 1397 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST?..................................................................................... 1399 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:RELation.................................................................................................1399 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:REMove..................................................................................................1400 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:STATe..................................................................................................... 1400 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:WINDow:LIST?.......................................................................................1401 INSTrument:COUPle:VBW.......................................................................................................................... 1393 INSTrument:CREate:DUPLicate.................................................................................................................... 873 INSTrument:CREate:REPLace...................................................................................................................... 874 INSTrument:CREate[:NEW]...........................................................................................................................873 INSTrument:DELete.......................................................................................................................................874 INSTrument:LIST?......................................................................................................................................... 875 INSTrument:MODE........................................................................................................................................ 876 INSTrument:REName.................................................................................................................................... 877 INSTrument[:SELect]..................................................................................................................................... 877 LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]?.............................................................................................................................. 1069 LAYout:CATalog[:WINDow]?........................................................................................................................ 1070 LAYout:IDENtify[:WINDow]?........................................................................................................................ 1070 LAYout:MOVE[:WINDow]............................................................................................................................. 1071 LAYout:REMove[:WINDow]..........................................................................................................................1071 LAYout:REPLace[:WINDow]........................................................................................................................ 1071 LAYout:SPLitter............................................................................................................................................ 1072 LAYout:WINDow<n>:ADD?..........................................................................................................................1073 LAYout:WINDow<n>:IDENtify?.................................................................................................................... 1074 LAYout:WINDow<n>:REMove......................................................................................................................1074 LAYout:WINDow<n>:REPLace.................................................................................................................... 1074 MMEMory:CATalog...................................................................................................................................... 1285 MMEMory:CATalog:LONG........................................................................................................................... 1285 MMEMory:CDIRectory................................................................................................................................. 1286 MMEMory:CLEar:ALL.................................................................................................................................. 1294 MMEMory:CLEar:STATe.............................................................................................................................. 1294 MMEMory:COMMent................................................................................................................................... 1286 MMEMory:COPY......................................................................................................................................... 1286 MMEMory:DATA.......................................................................................................................................... 1287 MMEMory:DELete:IMMediate......................................................................................................................1287 MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO...............................................................................................................................1294 MMEMory:LOAD:STATe.............................................................................................................................. 1294
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1499
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
MMEMory:LOAD:TYPE............................................................................................................................... 1295 MMEMory:LOAD<n>:LIMit...........................................................................................................................1279 MMEMory:LOAD<n>:TFACtor..................................................................................................................... 1337 MMEMory:LOAD<n>:TRACe.......................................................................................................................1201 MMEMory:MDIRectory.................................................................................................................................1287 MMEMory:MOVE......................................................................................................................................... 1288 MMEMory:MSIS...........................................................................................................................................1288 MMEMory:NAME......................................................................................................................................... 1288 MMEMory:NETWork:DISConnect................................................................................................................1288 MMEMory:NETWork:MAP........................................................................................................................... 1289 MMEMory:NETWork:UNUSeddrives........................................................................................................... 1289 MMEMory:NETWork:USEDdrives............................................................................................................... 1289 MMEMory:RAW........................................................................................................................................... 1320 MMEMory:RDIRectory................................................................................................................................. 1290 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:ALL..................................................................................................... 1290 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:DEFault.............................................................................................. 1291 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:HWSettings........................................................................................ 1291 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL...........................................................................................1291 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:NONE................................................................................................. 1292 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:SCData...............................................................................................1292 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:SGRam...............................................................................................1292 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:SPECtrogram..................................................................................... 1292 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive]................................................................................. 1293 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL............................................................................... 1293 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL..................................................................................................................... 1290 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault.............................................................................................................. 1291 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings........................................................................................................ 1291 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL...........................................................................................................1291 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE................................................................................................................. 1292 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SCData...............................................................................................................1292 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SGRam...............................................................................................................1292 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SPECtrogram..................................................................................................... 1292 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1...3>[:ACTive]......................................................................................1293 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL............................................................................................... 1293 MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe................................................................................................................... 1296 MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe:NEXT.........................................................................................................1296 MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:TYPE.................................................................................................................... 1297 MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIMit.........................................................................................................................1279 MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST.........................................................................................................................1310 MMEMory:STORe<n>:PEAK....................................................................................................................... 1311 MMEMory:STORe<n>:SGRam.................................................................................................................... 1311 MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPECtrogram.......................................................................................................... 1311 MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPURious................................................................................................................1312 MMEMory:STORe<n>:TFACtor................................................................................................................... 1337 MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe.....................................................................................................................1201 OUTPut<up>:IF:IFFRequency..................................................................................................................... 1129 OUTPut<up>:IF:SBANd?............................................................................................................................. 1128 OUTPut<up>:IF[:SOURce]...........................................................................................................................1129 OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:DIRection......................................................................................................... 1168 OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:LEVel................................................................................................................1168
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1500
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:OTYPe............................................................................................................. 1169 OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:IMMediate............................................................................................1169 OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:LENGth................................................................................................1170 OUTPut<up>:UPORt:STATe........................................................................................................................ 1130 OUTPut<up>:UPORt[:VALue]...................................................................................................................... 1130 READ:PMETer<p>?..................................................................................................................................... 1120 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<ext>:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency............................................................... 1325 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency..................................................................................................1106 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe]....................................................................1106 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:OFFSet.................................................................................... 1108 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:SWEep[:STATe]....................................................................... 1453 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator............................................................ 1107 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator................................................................ 1108 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:POWer[:LEVel]............................................................................................. 1109 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:ROSCillator[:SOURce]................................................................................. 1110 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe]......................................................................................................... 1109 SOURce<si>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet......................................................................................1109 SOURce<si>:TEMPerature:FRONtend....................................................................................................... 1333 STATus:OPERation:CONDition?................................................................................................................. 1407 STATus:OPERation:ENABle........................................................................................................................ 1409 STATus:OPERation:NTRansition.................................................................................................................1409 STATus:OPERation:PTRansition................................................................................................................. 1410 STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?......................................................................................................................1408 STATus:PRESet...........................................................................................................................................1407 STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition?.............................................................................................1407 STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:ENABle................................................................................................... 1409 STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:NTRansition............................................................................................ 1409 STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:PTRansition............................................................................................ 1410 STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]?................................................................................................. 1408 STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?.............................................................................................................1407 STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle................................................................................................................... 1409 STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:CONDition?........................................................................................... 1407 STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:ENABle..................................................................................................1409 STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO:CONDition?................................................................................. 1407 STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO:ENABle........................................................................................ 1409 STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO:NTRansition.................................................................................1409 STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO:PTRansition................................................................................. 1410 STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO[:EVENt]?......................................................................................1408 STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:NTRansition.......................................................................................... 1409 STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:PTRansition...........................................................................................1410 STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended[:EVENt]?............................................................................................... 1408 STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition?........................................................................................ 1407 STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle...............................................................................................1409 STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition....................................................................................... 1409 STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition........................................................................................1410 STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?............................................................................................ 1408 STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:CONDition?..............................................................................................1407 STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:ENABle.................................................................................................... 1409 STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:NTRansition............................................................................................. 1409 STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:PTRansition............................................................................................. 1410
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1501
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>[:EVENt]?.................................................................................................. 1408 STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:CONDition?.......................................................................................1407 STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:ENABle............................................................................................. 1409 STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:NTRansition...................................................................................... 1409 STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:PTRansition...................................................................................... 1410 STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>[:EVENt]?........................................................................................... 1408 STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition............................................................................................................ 1409 STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition?................................................................................................ 1408 STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle...................................................................................................... 1409 STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition............................................................................................... 1409 STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition............................................................................................... 1410 STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?.................................................................................................... 1408 STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition............................................................................................................ 1410 STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:CONDition?...................................................................................... 1408 STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:ENABle.............................................................................................1409 STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:NTRansition......................................................................................1409 STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:PTRansition......................................................................................1410 STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature[:EVENt]?...........................................................................................1408 STATus:QUEStionable:TIME:CONDition?................................................................................................... 1408 STATus:QUEStionable:TIME:ENABle..........................................................................................................1409 STATus:QUEStionable:TIME:NTRansition.................................................................................................. 1409 STATus:QUEStionable:TIME:PTRansition...................................................................................................1410 STATus:QUEStionable:TIME[:EVENt]?....................................................................................................... 1408 STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?................................................................................................................. 1408 STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]?............................................................................................................................. 1407 SYSTem:CLOGging..................................................................................................................................... 1411 SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess......................................................... 1110 SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess.........................................................................................1364 SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator...................................................................................1365 SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt................................................................................... 1309 SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT].................................................................................1309 SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect<1|2>........................................................................................... 1309 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:INTerface................................................................... 1111 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:LINK...........................................................................1111 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:TYPE......................................................................... 1112 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<p>:CONFigure:AUTO[:STATe].................................................1117 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<p>:COUNt?............................................................................. 1117 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<p>:DEFine............................................................................... 1118 SYSTem:COMMunicate:REST:ENABle....................................................................................................... 1371 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RO......................................................................................... 1371 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RW.........................................................................................1372 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:CONTact.................................................................................................... 1372 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:LOCation................................................................................................... 1372 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER................................................................................................1373 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:ALL?...................................................................................... 1373 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete...................................................................................1373 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete:ALL........................................................................... 1374 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:VERSion.................................................................................................... 1374 SYSTem:COMMunicate:TCPip:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess........................................................1112 SYSTem:COMPatible...................................................................................................................................1454
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1502
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
SYSTem:DATE.............................................................................................................................................1359 SYSTem:DFPRint........................................................................................................................................ 1379 SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel[:STATe]...............................................................................................................1359 SYSTem:DISPlay:LANGuage...................................................................................................................... 1364 SYSTem:DISPlay:LOCK.............................................................................................................................. 1365 SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate........................................................................................................................... 1365 SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:ALL.........................................................................................................................1379 SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:REMote.................................................................................................................. 1379 SYSTem:ERRor:DISPlay............................................................................................................................. 1366 SYSTem:ERRor:EXTended?........................................................................................................................1379 SYSTem:ERRor:LIST?.................................................................................................................................1380 SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?.............................................................................................................................1380 SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate........................................................................................................................1381 SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt..............................................................................................................................1381 SYSTem:HPADditional.................................................................................................................................1413 SYSTem:HPCoupling...................................................................................................................................1412 SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory.......................................................................................................................... 1366 SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing]..........................................................................................................................1366 SYSTem:IFGain:MODE............................................................................................................................... 1412 SYSTem:KLOCk.......................................................................................................................................... 1366 SYSTem:LANGuage.................................................................................................................................... 1413 SYSTem:LXI:LANReset............................................................................................................................... 1367 SYSTem:LXI:MDEScription..........................................................................................................................1367 SYSTem:LXI:PASSword.............................................................................................................................. 1367 SYSTem:OPTion:TRIal:LIST?......................................................................................................................1381 SYSTem:OPTion:TRIal[:STATe]................................................................................................................... 1382 SYSTem:PASSword:RESet......................................................................................................................... 1386 SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable]................................................................................................................... 1386 SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:ADD..............................................................................................................1404 SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:DELete......................................................................................................... 1404 SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:DIRectory..................................................................................................... 1405 SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:ICON............................................................................................................ 1405 SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:NAME........................................................................................................... 1405 SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:PARams....................................................................................................... 1405 SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:PATH............................................................................................................ 1406 SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:SELect..........................................................................................................1406 SYSTem:PREamp........................................................................................................................................1414 SYSTem:PRESet......................................................................................................................................... 1297 SYSTem:PRESet:CHANnel[:EXEC]............................................................................................................ 1298 SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible.....................................................................................................................1382 SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband.............................................................................................................................1414 SYSTem:REBoot..........................................................................................................................................1411 SYSTem:REVision:FACTory........................................................................................................................ 1367 SYSTem:REVision[:STRing]........................................................................................................................ 1414 SYSTem:RSWeep........................................................................................................................................1415 SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe].......................................................................................................................... 1382 SYSTem:SEQuencer..................................................................................................................................... 880 SYSTem:SHIMmediate ONCE.....................................................................................................................1367 SYSTem:SHIMmediate:STATe..................................................................................................................... 1368 SYSTem:SHUTdown....................................................................................................................................1411
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1503
R&S�FSW
List of Commands (base unit)
SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume.........................................................................................................................1130 SYSTem:TIME............................................................................................................................................. 1359 TRACe<n>:COPY........................................................................................................................................ 1184 TRACe<n>[:DATA]....................................................................................................................................... 1196 TRACe<n>[:DATA]:MEMory?.......................................................................................................................1197 TRACe<n>[:DATA]:X?..................................................................................................................................1198 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:BBPower:HOLDoff....................................................................................................1454 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DTIMe....................................................................................................................... 1157 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME]........................................................................................................ 1157 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff......................................................................................................1157 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HYSTeresis.................................................................................................1158 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower.......................................................................................................... 1159 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IQPower..........................................................................................................1159 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:RFPower.........................................................................................................1159 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo..............................................................................................................1160 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal<port>].............................................................................................1158 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFPower:HOLDoff....................................................................................................1454 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe...................................................................................................................... 1160 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce....................................................................................................................1160 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TIME:RINTerval.........................................................................................................1162 UNIT<n>:PMETer<p>:POWer...................................................................................................................... 1125 UNIT<n>:PMETer<p>:POWer:RATio........................................................................................................... 1125 UNIT<n>:POWer.......................................................................................................................................... 1147
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1504
R&S�FSW
Index
Index
Symbols
*IDN Format ...................................................................... 830
*OPC ............................................................................... 792 *OPC? ............................................................................. 792 *RST ................................................................................ 810 *WAI ................................................................................ 792 # of Samples
Softkey (APD, CCDF) ............................................... 293 % Power Bandwidth
Softkey ...................................................................... 210 1xEV-DO BTS
Application .................................................................110 1xEV-DO MS
Application ................................................................. 111 3G FDD BTS
Application ................................................................. 111 3G FDD UE
Application ................................................................. 111 5G NR
Application ................................................................. 111 9.91E37
Remote control ......................................................... 790 75 (channel bar) ............................................................ 81 802.11ad
Application ......................................................... 111, 112
A
Aborting Sweep ....................................................... 471, 472, 602
AC (channel bar) ............................................................... 81 AC/DC coupling ............................................................... 363 Accoustic
Monitoring ................................................................. 554 ACLR
MSR signals .............................................................. 156 Programming example .............................................. 942 Results (remote) ....................................................... 886 see CP/ACLR ........................................................... 145 ACLR Mode Softkey .............................................................. 166, 175 Active Transducer lines ....................................................... 716 Active probe Microbutton ............................................................... 368 Adjacent channels MSR .......................................................................... 180 MSR ACLR ............................................................... 179 MSR, bandwidth ....................................................... 181 MSR, configuring ...................................................... 181 MSR, spacing ........................................................... 181 MSR, weighting filters ............................................... 181 Adjust settings Softkey (APD) ................................................... 293, 297 Softkey (C/N) ............................................................ 205 Adjust Settings Softkey (CP/ACLR) ........................................... 167, 176 Softkey (OBW) .......................................................... 210 Adjust X-Axis Softkey ...................................................................... 282
Alignment Basics ....................................................................... 685 Performing ................................................................ 692 Results ...................................................... 686, 687, 691 Settings ..................................................................... 687 touchscreen ...................................................... 686, 691 Touchscreen ............................................................. 687
Alignment Signal Source Connector ................................................................... 56
Alignment Signal Source (option B2000) Connector ................................................................... 49
All Functions Off .............................................................. 552 Alpha
RRC filter (SEM) ....................................................... 253 Alphanumeric parameters ................................................. 93 AM modulation
Measurement example ..................................... 137, 138 AM modulation depth ...................................................... 322
About ........................................................................ 322 Configuring ............................................................... 323 Determining .............................................................. 325 Markers ..................................................................... 324 Markers (remote control) ........................................ 1047 Measurement (remote control) ............................... 1047 Programming example ............................................ 1048 Results ...................................................................... 323 Results (remote control) ......................................... 1047 Search signals .......................................................... 324 Search signals (remote control) .............................. 1047 Amplifier Measurement Application .................................................................112 Amplitude Configuration ............................................................ 450 Distribution, white noise ............................................ 299 Optimizing display ..................................................... 457 Probability, white noise ............................................. 299 Scaling ...................................................................... 457 Settings ..................................................................... 450 Analog Baseband Input .......................................................................... 365 Analog Baseband Interface Connectors ........................................................... 47, 55 Analog Modulation Analysis Application .................................................................112 Analysis bandwidth ......................................................... 292 Statistics ................................................... 292, 299, 301 Analysis BW Softkey (APD, CCDF) ............................................... 292 Analysis region Shifting ...................................................................... 512 Zooming .................................................................... 512 AnBW (channel setting) .................................................... 80 Annotations Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 696 AP (trace information) ....................................................... 83 APD ................................................................................. 287 About ........................................................................ 287 Activating (remote control) ...................................... 1020 Application ................................................................ 288 Configuring ............................................................... 292 Gate (remote control) .............................................. 1022 Gate ranges .............................................................. 293 Gated trigger ..................................................... 290, 293
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1505
R&S�FSW
Index
Measurement (remote control) ............................... 1020 Measurement example ............................................. 299 Performing ........................................................ 292, 297 Results ...................................................................... 288 Results (remote control) ......................................... 1021 Scaling (remote control) .......................................... 1024 see also Statistics ..................................................... 287 Using gate ranges ..................................................... 297 Application cards ............................................................... 22 Application notes ............................................................... 22 Applications 1xEV-DO BTS ........................................................... 110 1xEV-DO MS ............................................................. 111 3G FDD BTS ............................................................. 111 3G FDD UE ............................................................... 111 5G NR ....................................................................... 111 802.11ad ............................................................ 111, 112 Amplifier Measurement ............................................. 112 Analog Modulation Analysis ...................................... 112 Available ................................................................... 108 Avionics ..................................................................... 112 cdma2000 BTS ......................................................... 112 cdma2000 MS ........................................................... 113 DOCSIS 3.1 .............................................................. 116 Group Delay .............................................................. 113 GSM .......................................................................... 113 I/Q Analyzer .............................................................. 113 LTE ............................................................................ 113 NB-IoT ....................................................................... 113 Noise Figure .............................................................. 114 OneWeb .................................................................... 114 Phase Noise .............................................................. 114 Pulse ......................................................................... 114 Real-Time Spectrum ................................................. 114 Setting ....................................................................... 117 Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode ....................... 107 Spectrum ................................................................... 110 Spurious Measurements ........................................... 115 TD-SCDMA BTS ....................................................... 115 TD-SCDMA UE ......................................................... 115 Transient Analysis ..................................................... 115 Vector Signal Analysis (VSA) .................................... 116 WLAN ........................................................................ 116 APX External generator ............................................ 383, 387 APX (channel bar) ............................................................. 82 Arranging Windows ........................................................... 103, 507 Arrow keys ........................................................................ 44 ASCII trace export ........................................................... 619 Att (channel setting) .......................................................... 80 Attenuation ...................................................................... 453 Auto .......................................................................... 453 Electronic .................................................................. 453 Impact ....................................................................... 449 Manual ...................................................................... 453 Option ....................................................................... 453 Protective (remote) ................................................. 1079 Audio demodulation Volume (remote control) .......................................... 1130 Audio output Configuring ............................................................... 554 Marker demodulation ................................................ 546 Audio Output Programming example .................................. 1262, 1263 Audio signals Output (remote) ............................................... 435, 1129
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
Auto adjustment Triggered measurement .......................................... 1173
Auto all ............................................................................ 498 Auto frequency ................................................................ 498 Auto ID
External Mixer ................................................... 411, 421 External Mixer (remote) .......................................... 1086 Threshold (External Mixer, remote control) ............. 1087 Threshold (External Mixer) ....................................... 421 Auto level Hysteresis ................................................................. 499 Reference level ................................................. 453, 499 Softkey .............................................................. 453, 499 Auto Peak detector ..........................................................576 Auto peak search ............................................................ 334 Auto scaling .....................................................................457 Auto settings Meastime Auto .......................................................... 499 Meastime Manual ..................................................... 499 Autologin mechanism Activating/Deactivating ............................................. 854 Automatic coupling Frequencies, external generator ....................... 386, 393 AUX control TTL synchronization, external generator .................. 378 Aux. Port Connector ................................................................... 54 AV (trace information) ........................................................83 Average count ................................................. 464, 469, 588 Power sensor ............................................................ 373 Average detector ............................................................. 576 EMI ........................................................................... 329 Average mode Traces ....................................................................... 587 Averaging Continuous sweep .................................................... 582 Single sweep ............................................................ 582 Sweep count ............................................................. 582 Traces ....................................................................... 583 Traces (algorithm) ..................................................... 582 Traces (remote control) ........................................... 1183 Avionics Application .................................................................112
B
B2000/B5000 External mixers ......................................................... 409
Band Conversion loss table ............................................... 425 External Mixer ........................................................... 418 External Mixer (remote) .......................................... 1088
Band power markers Programming example ............................................ 1261
Band power measurement Activating/Deactivating ............................................. 545 Deactivating .............................................................. 546 Power mode .............................................................. 546 Span ......................................................................... 546
Band power measurement (remote control) .................. 1243 Bandwidth
Configuration (Softkey) ............................................. 464 Coupling ............................................................ 460, 461 CP/ACLR .................................................................. 168 Default settings ......................................................... 458 MSR sub blocks ........................................................ 178 MSR, adjacent channels ........................................... 181
1506
R&S�FSW
Index
MSR, gap channels .................................................. 186 MSR, Tx channel ...................................................... 179 Resolution ................................................. 341, 459, 467 Video ................................................................. 460, 467 Baseband Input Connectors ........................................................... 47, 55 BB Power Trigger (softkey) ........................................................ 483 Bias Conversion loss table ....................................... 422, 425 External Mixer ................................................... 407, 422 External Mixer (remote) .......................................... 1085 Block data ....................................................................... 788 Boolean parameters ........................................................ 787 Brackets .......................................................................... 788 Brochures .......................................................................... 22 Burst signals Measurement example ............................................. 140
C
C/N, C/N0 see Carrier-to-Noise ................................................. 202
Calibration Analog Baseband (B71, remote control) ................. 1332 Analog Baseband (B71) ............................................ 755 External generator .................................................... 382 External generator, remote ...................................... 1112 Frequency ................................................................. 753 Frequency MW ......................................................... 755 Frequency RF ........................................................... 754 How to, external generator ....................................... 397 Normalization, external generator ............................. 395 Performing with external generator ........................... 397 Reference trace, external generator ......................... 383 Reflection open measurement, external generator ... 395 Reflection short measurement, external generator ... 395 Remote ..................................................................... 868 Remote control ....................................................... 1328 Removing component effects, external generator .... 399 Restoring settings, external generator .............. 384, 395 Results (remote control) ......................................... 1329 RF ............................................................................. 754 Settings ..................................................................... 753 Signal ........................................................................ 753 Signal, as RF input ..................................................... 59 Storing results, external generator ............................ 383 Transmission measurement, external generator ...... 395
Calibration Frequency MW ............................................ 1331 Capture time
see also Measurement time .......................... 1142, 1144 Carrier Noise Config
Softkey ...................................................................... 204 Carrier-to-Noise ............................................................... 202
Activating .................................................................. 205 Channel bandwidth ................................................... 205 Channel bandwidth (remote control) ......................... 949 Configuring ............................................................... 204 Determining .............................................................. 206 Measurement ............................................................ 202 Measurement (remote control) ................................. 949 Measurement process .............................................. 203 Results ...................................................................... 203 Results (remote control) ........................................... 949 Span ......................................................................... 203 Case-sensitivity SCPI ......................................................................... 784
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
CCDF .............................................................................. 287 About ........................................................................ 287 Activating (remote control) ...................................... 1020 Application ................................................................ 288 Configuring ............................................................... 292 Crest factor ............................................................... 289 Gate (remote control) .............................................. 1022 Gate ranges .............................................................. 293 Gated trigger ..................................................... 290, 293 Measurement (remote control) ............................... 1020 Measurement example ............................................. 299 Percent marker ................................................. 290, 292 Percent marker (remote control) ............................. 1021 Performing ........................................................ 292, 297 Results ...................................................................... 289 Results (remote control) ......................................... 1021 Scaling (remote control) .......................................... 1024 see also Statistics ..................................................... 287 Using gate ranges ..................................................... 297
cdma2000 BTS Application .................................................................112
cdma2000 MS Application .................................................................113
Center = Mkr Freq ........................................................... 531 Center frequency ............................................................. 443
Automatic configuration ............................................ 498 MSR sub blocks ........................................................ 178 MSR Tx channel ....................................................... 178 Setting to marker ...................................................... 531 Softkey ...................................................................... 443 Step size ................................................... 440, 444, 447 Sub blocks (Multi-SEM) ............................................ 251 Centroid frequency OBW measurement .................................................. 208 Channel Creating (remote) ...................................... 874, 876, 877 Deleting (remote) ...................................................... 874 Duplicating (remote) ................................................. 873 Querying (remote) ..................................................... 875 Renaming (remote) ................................................... 877 Replacing (remote) ................................................... 874 Selecting (remote) ............................................ 876, 877 Channel bandwidth C/N ............................................................................ 205 CP/ACLR .................................................................. 168 MSR Tx channel ....................................................... 179 MSR, adjacent channels ........................................... 181 MSR, gap channels .................................................. 186 Channel Bandwidth OBW ......................................................................... 210 Softkey ...................................................................... 210 Channel bar Changing names ......................................................... 82 Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 696 Information .................................................................. 79 Information, external generator ................................. 387 Channel power Comparing (CP/ACLR) ............................................. 193 Density (CP/ACLR) ........................................... 166, 175 SEM results .............................................................. 230 Settings (SEM) .......................................................... 252 channel settings Presetting .................................................................. 636 Channel settings Display .................................................................. 79, 80 Channel-defined Sequencer Softkey ...................................................................... 122
1507
R&S�FSW
Index
Channels CP/ACLR .................................................. 168, 177, 189 CP/ACLR measurements ......................................... 164 Duplicating ................................................................ 119 Names (CP/ACLR) ................................................... 171 New ........................................................................... 118 Operating modes ...................................................... 107 Replacing .................................................................. 118 see also Measurement channels ................................ 98 Sequential operation ................................................. 119 Spacings (CP/ACLR) ................................................ 169 Spacings, configuring ............................................... 190 Switching .................................................................... 79 Trying out .................................................................... 63 Weighting filters ........................................................ 170
CISPR Average Detector .................................................................... 329
CISPR Average detector EMI ........................................................................... 331
CISPR bandwidth .................................................... 328, 343 Clear status
Remote ..................................................................... 868 Close
Show SCPI command ............................................... 816 Closing
Channels ..................................................................... 99 Channels (remote) .................................................... 874 Windows ........................................................... 103, 507 Windows (remote) ................................................... 1074 CLRW (trace information) ..................................................83 CMT Display ...................................................................... 309 CNT (marker functions) ..................................................... 84 Colon ............................................................................... 788 Color curve Shape ............................................................... 597, 604 Spectrograms ................................................... 597, 607 Color mapping Color curve ............................................................... 604 Color range ....................................................... 603, 604 Color scheme ............................................................ 604 Softkey ...................................................................... 601 Spectrograms ................................... 596, 601, 603, 606 Step by step .............................................................. 606 Value range ............................................................... 597 Color scheme Spectrogram ..................................................... 597, 604 Colors Assigning to object .................................................... 701 Configuring ....................................................... 700, 704 Display ...................................................................... 698 Editing ....................................................................... 698 Editing (remote) ...................................................... 1360 Predefined ................................................................ 701 Print .......................................................................... 700 Printing ...................................................................... 698 Restoring .................................................................. 702 Screen ...................................................................... 699 User-defined ............................................................. 700 User-specific ............................................................. 702 Comma ............................................................................ 788 Command sequence Recommendation ...................................................... 810 Remote ..................................................................... 872 Commands ...................................................................... 782 Brackets .................................................................... 788 Colon ........................................................................ 788
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
Comma ..................................................................... 788 Command line structure ............................................ 789 Common ................................................................... 782 Double dagger .......................................................... 788 GBIP, addressed ....................................................... 780 GBIP, universal ......................................................... 780 Instrument control ..................................................... 782 Overlapping .............................................................. 791 Pipe ........................................................................... 788 Question mark .......................................................... 788 Quotation mark ......................................................... 788 SCPI confirmed ......................................................... 782 Sequential ................................................................. 791 Syntax elements ....................................................... 788 Tracking .................................................................... 830 White space .............................................................. 788 Comment Gate ranges (statistics) ............................................. 294 Limit lines .................................................................. 568 Screenshots .............................................................. 656 Softkey ...................................................................... 656 Transducer lines ....................................................... 718 Common commands Syntax ....................................................................... 783 Common mode offset Probes ...................................................................... 355 Compatibility FSQ, FSP, FSU, FSV ................................................ 832 GPIB ......................................................................... 831 Limit lines .......................................................... 560, 566 Mode ......................................................................... 832 Transducer lines ....................................................... 716 Compatible mode (channel setting) .................................. 80 Compensation After calibration, external generator .......................... 399 Computer name .............................................................. 827 CONDition ....................................................................... 796 Connector AC power supply ......................................................... 52 Aux. Port ..................................................................... 54 BASEBAND INPUT .............................................. 47, 55 Digital I/Q 40G Streaming Out .................................... 53 Display Port ................................................................ 52 DVI .............................................................................. 52 External mixer ............................................................. 47 External Mixer ........................................................... 427 GPIB interface ............................................................ 54 IF OUT 2 GHz / 5 GHz ................................................ 57 IF/VIDEO/DEMOD ...................................................... 55 LAN ............................................................................. 52 Noise source control ................................................... 48 OCXO ......................................................................... 57 PHONES ..................................................................... 49 Power Sensor ............................................................. 48 Probe .......................................................................... 48 REF INPUT ................................................................. 56 RF Input 50 .............................................................. 46 SYNC TRIGGER ........................................................ 54 TRIGGER 3 ................................................................ 54 TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT ...................................... 45 USB ...................................................................... 48, 52 VOLUME ..................................................................... 49 Connectors AUX control, external generator ............................... 378 EXT REF ................................................................... 738 External generator control ........................................ 378
1508
R&S�FSW
Index
GPIB ......................................................................... 378 REF OUTPUT ........................................................... 740 SYNC TRIGGER ...................................................... 738 Context menus .................................................................. 90 Continue single sweep Softkey .............................................................. 126, 472 Continuous gating Programming example ............................................ 1170 Continuous Sequencer Softkey ...................................................................... 122 Continuous sweep Softkey ...................................................... 126, 472, 602 Conventions SCPI commands ....................................................... 866 Conversion loss External Mixer (remote) ................................ 1091, 1092 Conversion loss tables .................................................... 423 Available (remote) ................................................... 1094 Band (remote) ......................................................... 1094 Bias (remote) .......................................................... 1094 Configuring ............................................................... 423 Creating .................................................................... 424 Deleting (remote) .................................................... 1095 External Mixer ................................................... 408, 419 External Mixer (remote) ................................ 1091, 1092 Harmonic order (remote) ........................................ 1096 Importing (External Mixer) ........................................ 423 Managing .................................................................. 422 Mixer type (remote) ................................................. 1096 Saving (External Mixer) ............................................ 427 Selecting (remote) .................................................. 1097 Shifting values (External Mixer) ................................ 427 Values (External Mixer) ............................................. 426 Copy Show SCPI command ............................................... 816 Copying Channel (remote) ...................................................... 873 Traces ....................................................................... 589 Coupling Automatic, external generator ........................... 386, 393 Frequencies, external generator ............................... 385 GPIB ......................................................................... 833 GPIB (remote control) ............................................. 1412 Manual, external generator ....................................... 393 Span/RBW ................................................................ 461 VBW/RBW ................................................................ 460 Coupling ratio Span/RBW (remote) ................................................ 1139 Coupling ratios Default ...................................................................... 469 RBW/VBW ................................................................ 468 Span/RBW ................................................................ 468 CP/ACLR ......................................................................... 145 About ........................................................................ 146 Absolute/relative values .................................... 166, 175 Adjust Settings ................................................. 167, 176 Channel bandwidths ................................................. 168 Channel bandwidths (remote control) ....................... 892 Channel names ......................................................... 171 Channel names (remote control) .............................. 892 Channel power density ..................................... 166, 175 Channel setup ................................................... 168, 177 Channel setup (remote control) ................................ 892 Channel spacing ....................................................... 190 Channel spacing (remote control) ............................. 892 Channel spacings ..................................................... 169 Clear/Write ........................................................ 167, 176
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
Comparing channel powers ...................................... 193 Configuring ............................................................... 162 Configuring MSR signals .......................................... 171 Detector .................................................................... 155 Fast ACLR ........................................................ 150, 166 Fixed reference for CP .............................................. 167 Frequency span ........................................................ 154 General Settings ....................................................... 162 General Settings for MSR ......................................... 171 IBW method .............................................................. 149 Limit check ................................................................ 170 Limit check (remote control) ..................................... 900 Max Hold ........................................................... 167, 176 Measurement (remote control) ................................. 890 Measurement examples ........................................... 193 Measurement methods ............................................. 149 Mode ................................................................. 166, 175 Multicarrier ................................................................ 149 Noise cancellation ..................................... 165, 174, 455 Number of channels .................................................. 164 Number of channels (remote control) ....................... 892 Optimizing ................................................................. 199 Performing ................................................................ 162 Performing measurement ................................. 189, 190 Power mode ...................................................... 167, 176 Power Unit ....................................................... 166, 175 Predefined Settings .......................................... 163, 173 Predefined standards ........................................ 200, 201 RBW ......................................................................... 154 Reference channel ............................................ 165, 174 Reference channel (remote control) ......................... 899 Reference level ......................................................... 156 Repeatability ............................................................. 151 Results .............................................................. 146, 938 Setting up channels .................................................. 189 Setting up channels (remote control) ........................ 892 Standards ................................................. 163, 172, 173 Standards (remote control) ....................................... 891 Standards (Softkey) .......................................... 163, 173 Sweep Time ..................................................... 153, 167 Trace averaging ........................................................ 156 Trace Selection ................................................. 166, 175 Troubleshooting ........................................................ 199 User-defined standards ............................ 163, 173, 192 VBW .......................................................................... 155 W-CDMA signals .......................................................196 Weighting filters ........................................................ 170 Weighting filters (remote control) .............................. 897 Crest factor APD .......................................................................... 289 CCDF ........................................................................ 289 Cumulated Measurement Time (CMT) Harmonics ................................................................. 309 Customer support .......................................................... 1475
D
Data entry Switching modes ......................................................... 93
Data format ASCII ....................................................................... 1198 Binary ...................................................................... 1198 Remote ......................................................... 1200, 1310
Data sheets ....................................................................... 22 Data shift ......................................................................... 512 Data zoom ....................................................................... 512
1509
R&S�FSW
Index
Date Format ...................................................................... 694 Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 696 Instrument setting ..................................................... 694
Date and Time Printing ...................................................................... 657
DC (channel bar) ............................................................... 81 DCL ................................................................................. 780 Debugging
Remote control programs ....................................... 1471 Decimal separator
Trace export .............................................. 614, 616, 653 DEF ................................................................................. 786 Default
Restoring settings ..................................................... 635 Default coupling .............................................................. 469 Default values
Remote ..................................................................... 871 Deleting
Limit line values ........................................................ 570 Settings files ............................................................. 259 Standards ................................................................. 259 Transducer factors .................................................... 719 Delta markers .......................................................... 338, 520 Defining ..................................................... 338, 520, 536 Fixed reference marker ............................................. 554 Remote control ....................................................... 1204 Demodulation Activating (marker) .................................................... 548 Continuous (marker) ................................................. 548 Marker ............................................................... 546, 554 Marker stop time ....................................................... 548 Modulation type ........................................................ 548 Remote control ....................................................... 1253 Squelch ..................................................................... 548 Squelch level ............................................................ 549 Demodulation markers Programming example .................................. 1262, 1263 Denominator Frequencies, external generator ....................... 386, 393 Detectors CP/ACLR .................................................................. 155 EMI ........................................................................... 329 Overview ................................................................... 576 Remote control ........................................................ 1183 Spurious Emissions range ........................................ 280 Trace ......................................................... 339, 342, 586 Device Softkey ...................................................... 657, 660, 663 Device ID ............................................................... 751, 1379 DHCP ...................................................................... 828, 846 Diagnostics Hardware .................................................................. 757 Diagram area Channel settings ......................................................... 80 Status display ............................................................. 85 Trace information ........................................................ 83 Diagram footer .................................................................. 84 Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 696 Diagrams Evaluation method .................................................... 502 Dialog boxes Slider ........................................................................... 92 Transparency .............................................................. 92 Dialogs Printing ...................................................................... 657 Suppressing file selection ......................................... 661
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
Digital I/Q 40G Streaming Out Connector ................................... 53
Direct path Input configuration .................................................... 364
Dirty flag see Invalid data icon ................................................... 79
Display Colors ............................................................... 698, 704 Config (Softkey) ........................................................ 501 Evaluation bar ................................................... 102, 506 Evaluation methods .................................................. 501 Information .................................................................. 78 SCPI list .................................................................... 817 Settings ..................................................................... 693 Settings (remote control) ........................................ 1356 SmartGrid ......................................................... 100, 504 Theme ....................................................................... 698 Theme (remote) ...................................................... 1360 Update (remote) ........................................................ 830 Update rate ............................................................... 694
Display lines .................................................................... 558 Defining ..................................................................... 559 Settings ..................................................................... 558
Display Port Connector ................................................................... 52
Displayed items Touchscreen ............................................................. 694
Disposal ........................................................................ 1478 DNS server
IP Address ................................................................ 848 DOCSIS 3.1
Application .................................................................116 Double dagger .................................................................788 DOWN ............................................................................. 786 Drop-out time
Trigger ...............................................................477, 484 Trigger (Power sensor) ............................................. 374 Duplicating Channel (remote) ...................................................... 873 Duty cycle Power sensor ............................................................ 373 DVI Connector ................................................................... 52 Dwell time ................................................................ 335, 342 EMI detectors ............................................................ 329 Dynamic range Intermodulation-free .................................................. 316 Measuring ................................................................. 307
E
Edge gate Slope ......................................................................... 485
Electromagnetic compatibility see EMC ................................................................... 325
Electronic input attenuation ............................................. 453 EMC ................................................................................ 325 EMI .................................................................................. 325
Detectors .................................................................. 329 Measurement ............................................................ 326 Refining results ......................................................... 335 EMI marker evaluation .................................................... 335 EMI measurement Programming example ............................................ 1056 ENABle ............................................................................796 Enable registers Remote ..................................................................... 870
1510
R&S�FSW
Index
Entering data ..................................................................... 92 EOI
GPIB terminator ........................................................ 830 Error log ........................................................................ 1473 Error messages
Status bar ......................................................... 85, 1467 Error queue ..................................................................... 798 Errors
External generator .................................................... 387 IF OVLD .......................................................... 451, 1468 Increase sweep points (EMI) .................................... 350 INPUT OVLD .................................................. 806, 1468 LO UNL ................................................................... 1468 Messages, device-specific ...................................... 1469 NO REF .................................................................. 1468 OVEN ...................................................................... 1468 OVENCOLD ............................................................ 1468 OVLD ........................................................................ 806 Queues, recommendations ....................................... 811 Remote control programming ....................................811 RF OVLD ........................................................ 806, 1468 UNCAL .................................................................... 1468 UNLD ........................................................................ 806 WRONG_FW .......................................... 686, 744, 1468 ESE (event status enable register ) ................................ 798 ESR (event status register) ............................................. 798 Evaluation Lists (SEM) ............................................................... 259 Lists (Spurious) ......................................................... 282 Modes ....................................................................... 501 Modes, adding .................................................. 102, 506 Trying out .................................................................... 61 Evaluation bar Using ................................................................. 102, 506 Evaluation list Details (Spurious Emissions) .................................... 284 Peaks (Spurious Emissions) ..................................... 284 Spurious Emissions .................................................. 275 Evaluation methods Remote ................................................................... 1069 EVENt ............................................................................. 796 Event status enable register (ESE) ................................. 798 Remote ..................................................................... 868 Event status register (ESR) ..................................... 794, 798 Remote ..................................................................... 868 Example Calibration with an external generator ...................... 400 Remote control of an external generator ................. 1115 Exclude LO ..............................................................525, 529 Remote ................................................................... 1212 Export SCPI list .................................................................... 818 Export format SEM results .............................................................. 273 Spurious Emissions results ....................................... 286 Traces ....................................................................... 619 Exporting Data .......................................................................... 653 Functions .................................................................. 643 I/Q data ..................................................................... 653 Measurement settings .............................................. 613 Peak list .................................................... 552, 555, 618 SEM result files ......................................................... 265 Softkey ...................................................................... 651 Spurious Emissions result files ................................. 285 Trace data ................................................................. 617 Traces ............................................... 612, 614, 651, 653
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
EXREF (status display) ................................................. 1468 EXT REF
Status message .......................................................... 85 Ext.Gen (channel bar) ....................................................... 82 External generator ........................................................... 377
Activating/Deactivating ............................................. 392 Basics ....................................................................... 377 Calibration functions ................................................. 394 Calibration measurement settings ............................ 391 Channel bar information ........................................... 387 Connections .............................................................. 378 Coupling frequencies ................................................ 385 Errors ........................................................................ 387 Generators, supported .............................................. 380 Interface .................................................................... 390 Interface settings ...................................................... 389 Normalizing ............................................................... 395 Overloading .............................................................. 389 Recalling calibration settings .................................... 395 Reference level ......................................................... 385 Reference line ........................................................... 385 Reference line position ............................................. 396 Reference line value ................................................. 396 Reference position .................................................... 396 Reference trace ........................................................ 385 Reference value ........................................................ 396 Reflection measurement ........................................... 379 Reflection open measurement .................................. 395 Reflection short measurement .................................. 395 Remote control ........................................................ 1106 Settings ..................................................................... 389 Transducer factor .............................................. 384, 396 Transmission measurement ..............................379, 395 TTL synchronization ................................................. 378 External mixer Connector ................................................................... 47 External Mixer ......................................................... 405, 417 2-port vs 3-port ......................................................... 406 Activating (remote) .................................................. 1085 Band ............................................................... 418, 1088 Basic settings ............................................................ 420 Bias current ............................................................... 407 Configuration ............................................................ 416 Connector ................................................................. 427 Conversion loss ........................................................ 419 Conversion loss tables ...................................... 408, 423 Frequency range ............................................... 405, 417 General information .................................................. 405 Handover frequency ................................................. 418 Harmonic Order ........................................................ 419 Harmonic Type .......................................................... 419 Measurement example ............................................. 430 Name ........................................................................ 426 Programming example ............................................ 1097 Range ....................................................................... 419 Restoring bands ........................................................ 418 RF overrange .................................................. 418, 1093 RF Start/RF Stop ...................................................... 417 Serial number ........................................................... 426 Type ........................................................ 418, 426, 1093 External mixers B2000/B5000 ............................................................ 409 External monitor Connectors ................................................................. 52 External reference External generator .................................................... 380 External generator control ........................................ 391
1511
R&S�FSW
Index
Frequency ................................................................. 740 Input .......................................................................... 738 Loop bandwidth ........................................................ 740 Missing ...................................................................... 739 Output ....................................................................... 740 Settings ..................................................................... 737 Settings (remote control) ........................................ 1324 Status message .......................................................... 85 Tuning range ............................................................. 740 External trigger ................................................................ 481 Configuring power sensor ......................................... 376 Level (power sensor) ................................................ 373 Level (remote) ......................................................... 1158 Power sensor ............................................................ 373 ExtMix (channel bar) ......................................................... 82
F
Falling Slope (Power sensor) ............................................... 374
Fast ACLR Activating/Deactivating ............................................. 166 Measurement method ............................................... 150
Fast SEM ........................................................................ 238 Consequences .......................................................... 239 Example .................................................................... 240 Multi-SEM ......................................................... 239, 241 Prerequisites ............................................................. 238 SEM .......................................................................... 246
FFT filters Mode ......................................................................... 470
FFT sweep .............................................................. 461, 471 File format
Export Files ............................................................... 619 SEM export files ........................................................ 273 SEM settings files ..................................................... 267 Spurious Emissions export files ................................ 286 Trace export .............................................................. 619 File type Storage settings ........................................................ 645 filename Data files ................................................................... 643 Settings ..................................................... 258, 645, 648 Filter type (EMI) ....................................................... 328, 343 Filter types ....................................................... 341, 462, 468 SEM range ................................................................ 246 Spurious Emissions range ........................................ 280 Filters 5-pole ........................................................................ 463 Channel .................................................................... 463 Configuration ............................................................ 464 FFT ........................................................................... 470 Gaussian (3dB) ......................................................... 463 High-pass (RF input) ................................................. 364 Overview ................................................................... 473 RBW ......................................................................... 459 RRC .......................................................................... 463 VBW .......................................................................... 460 Weighting (remote) ................................................... 897 YIG (remote) ........................................................... 1081 Final test .......................................................................... 335 Firmware Updating ................................................................... 744 Firmware Update Remote control ....................................................... 1381
Fixed reference Configuring ............................................................... 554 Defining ............................................................. 523, 542 Delta markers ........................................................... 554 Remote control ....................................................... 1233
Focus Changing .................................................................... 91
Focus area Switching between windows ....................................... 49
Format Data .........................................................................1198 Data (remote) ................................................ 1200, 1310 Date and time ........................................................... 694 see also File format .................................................. 619
Frame count Softkey ...................................................................... 473 Spectrograms ........................................................... 593
Frames Spectrogram marker ................................................. 520
Free Run Trigger .......................................................................481
Frequencies Multi-SEM ................................................................. 241
Frequency Configuration (Softkey) ............................................. 441 Coupling (power sensor) ........................................... 372 External generator .................................................... 393 External reference .................................................... 740 IF Out ........................................................................ 435 Offset ........................................................................ 445 Power sensor ............................................................ 372 Range ....................................................................... 439 Range, defining ......................................................... 446 Reference ................................................................. 737 Reference (remote control) ..................................... 1324 Span ......................................................................... 443 Start .......................................................................... 443 Step size ................................................................... 440 Stop .......................................................................... 443 Sweep ....................................................................... 471
Frequency axis Scaling ...................................................... 343, 440, 443
Frequency coupling Automatic, external generator ................................... 386 External generator ............................................ 385, 393 Reverse sweep, external generator .......................... 387 TTL synchronization, external generator .................. 386
Frequency denominator External generator .................................................... 393
Frequency numerator External generator .................................................... 393
Frequency offset External generator ............................................ 386, 393
Frequency range Calibration sweep, external generator .............. 386, 394 Extending .................................................................. 405 External Mixer ........................................................... 405
Frequency span CP/ACLR .................................................................. 154
Frequency sweep Measurement ............................................................ 126 Programming example ............................................ 1455
Frequency-converting measurements External generator .................................................... 386
Front panel Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 696
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1512
R&S�FSW
Index
Frontend Temperature .............................................................. 686 Temperature (remote) ............................................. 1333 Temperature, status bit ............................................. 806
FRQ External generator .................................................... 387
Frq (channel bar) ............................................................... 81 Full span
Softkey ...................................................................... 444 Function keys
Details - see User Manual .......................................... 42 Overview ..................................................................... 42 FXD (marker functions) ..................................................... 84
G
Gap MSR, spacing ........................................................... 185
Gap channels MSR ACLR ............................................................... 182 MSR, bandwidth ....................................................... 186 MSR, configuring ...................................................... 184 MSR, weighting filters ............................................... 186
GAT (channel bar) ............................................................. 81 Gate
Delay ......................................................................... 493 Length ....................................................................... 493 Measurements .......................................................... 487 Mode ......................................................................... 492 Ranges (statistics) .................................................... 290 Settings ..................................................................... 491 Gate ranges Activating (statistics) ................................................. 294 Comment (statistics) ................................................. 294 Period (statistics) ...................................................... 294 Start/Stop (statistics) ................................................. 295 Statistics ................................................................... 293 Gated trigger Activating .................................................................. 492 Configuring (statistics) ...................................... 293, 297 Delay ......................................................................... 493 Example .................................................................... 298 Length ....................................................................... 493 Mode ......................................................................... 492 Softkey ...................................................................... 293 Statistics ................................................... 290, 293, 301 Gating Source ...................................................................... 481 Generator Frequencies, external generator ....................... 386, 393 Frequency coupling, external generator ................... 393 Frequency offset, external generator ........................ 392 Output power, external generator ............................. 392 Generator type External generator .................................................... 390 Generators Frequency range, external generator ....................... 391 Power range, external generator .............................. 391 Setup files, external generator .................. 382, 390, 391 Supported, external generator .................................. 380 GET ................................................................................. 780 Getting started ................................................................... 21 GPIB ................................................................................ 773 Address ............................................................. 829, 852 Address, External generator ..................................... 390 Characteristics .......................................................... 778 Coupling .................................................................... 833
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
External generator .................................................... 390 IF Gain (remote control) .......................................... 1412 interface messages ................................................... 778 Language .................................................................. 832 Language (remote control) ..................................... 1413 Settings ..................................................................... 828 Terminator ................................................................. 830 TTL synchronization, External generator .................. 390 GPIB bus control Remote ..................................................................... 870 GPIB interface Configuring - see user manual .................................... 54 Connector ................................................................... 54 GPIB Language ............................................................... 811 Graphical zoom ................................................................. 97 Group delay Smoothing ................................................................. 587 Group Delay Application .................................................................113 GSM Application .................................................................113 GTL ................................................................................. 780
H
Handover frequency External Mixer ................................................... 406, 418 External Mixer (remote) .......................................... 1088
Hard drive Removable .................................................................. 51
Hardcopy see Screenshots ......................................................... 76
Hardware Check ........................................................................ 744 Diagnostics ............................................................... 757 Information ................................................................ 741 Supported ................................................................. 744
Harmonic Distortion ......................................................... 306 About ........................................................................ 306 Activating (remote control) ...................................... 1040 Basics ....................................................................... 307 Configuring ............................................................... 310 Measurement (remote control) ............................... 1040 Measuring ................................................................. 312 RBW .......................................................................... 311 Results ...................................................................... 309 Results (remote control) ......................................... 1040 Sweep time ............................................................... 311
Harmonics Basics ....................................................................... 307 Conversion loss table ............................................... 425 External Mixer (remote) ................................ 1090, 1091 High-sensitivity .......................................................... 309 LO ............................................................................. 405 Measurement example ............................................. 556 Measurement rules ................................................... 308 Measurement time .................................................... 309 Number ..................................................................... 311 Order (External Mixer) .............................................. 419 Origin ........................................................................ 309 Power ........................................................................ 310 Second harmonic intercept ....................................... 307 Type (External Mixer) ................................................ 419
Headphones Connector ................................................................... 49
Help ................................................................................. 105
1513
R&S�FSW
Index
Hiding/restoring Display items ............................................................ 694
High-pass filter RF input .................................................................... 364
Highpass filter LISN control (EMI) .................................................... 345
HiSLIP ............................................................................. 774 Protocol ..................................................................... 775 Resource string ......................................................... 774
History Spectrograms ........................................................... 601
History Depth Softkey ...................................................................... 601
Hold Trace setting ............................................................. 587
Horizontal Line 1/2 Softkeys .................................................................... 559
HP emulation ................................................................. 1415 Hysteresis
Lower (Auto level) ..................................................... 499 Trigger .......................................................................485 Trigger (Power sensor) ............................................. 374 Upper (Auto level) ..................................................... 499
I
I/O Logging ......................................................................830 I/Q Analyzer
Application .................................................................113 Trying out .................................................................... 63 I/Q data Exporting ................................................................... 653 I/Q Power Trigger level (remote) .............................................. 1159 IBW method CP/ACLR measurements ......................................... 149 ID String User .................................................................. 811 Identification Remote ..................................................................... 869 String, R&S FSW ...................................................... 829 String, resetting (R&S FSW) ..................................... 829 IEC/IEEE bus see GPIB .................................................................. 773 IECWIN ........................................................................... 813 IF frequency Output ............................................................... 359, 435 Output (remote) ....................................................... 1129 IF Gain GPIB ......................................................................... 833 GPIB (remote control) ............................................. 1412 IF OUT 2 GHz Connector ................................................................... 49 IF OUT 2 GHz / 5 GHz Connector ................................................................... 57 IF Out Frequency ............................................................ 435 IF output .......................................................................... 435 Remote ....................................................................1129 IF OVLD Error ........................................................................ 1468 IF Power Trigger .......................................................................482 Trigger level (remote) .............................................. 1159 IF/VIDEO/DEMOD Connector ........................................................... 55, 359 IFC .................................................................................. 780 Impedance Setting ....................................................................... 363
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
Importing Functions .................................................................. 643 Softkey ...................................................................... 651
INF .................................................................................. 786 Information
Hardware .................................................................. 741 Options ..................................................................... 742 Version ...................................................................... 742 Inherent noise Cancelation ............................................... 165, 174, 455 Input Coupling .................................................................... 363 Overload (remote) ................................................... 1079 RF ............................................................................. 363 Settings ............................................................. 361, 454 Signal, parameters .................................................... 353 Source Configuration (softkey) ................................. 361 Source, Radio frequency (RF) .................................. 362 INPUT OVLD Error ........................................................................ 1468 INPUT OVLD (status display) ....................................... 1468 Inserting Limit line values ........................................................ 570 Transducer factors .................................................... 719 Installing Options ..................................................................... 743 Instrument messages ...................................................... 782 Instrument name Changing .................................................................. 849 Instrument security procedures ......................................... 22 Instrument settings Secure user mode .................................................... 639 Instrument-specific commands ....................................... 782 Interface messages ......................................................... 782 Interfaces GPIB ......................................................................... 778 LAN ........................................................................... 773 USB .......................................................................... 780 Intermodulation products ................................................. 313 Interrupt ........................................................................... 807 Invalid data Icon ............................................................................. 79 Invalid results Remote control ......................................................... 790 IP address ....................................................................... 774 Assigning .................................................................. 846 Network ..................................................................... 828 IP Address DNS server ............................................................... 848 IP configuration LAN ........................................................................... 851 IST ...................................................................................794 IST flag ............................................................................ 798 Remote ..................................................................... 869 Items Saving ............................................................... 642, 643 Settings ..................................................................... 645
K
Key DOWN ........................................................................ 44 LEFT ........................................................................... 44 POWER ...................................................................... 40 Redo ........................................................................... 44 RIGHT ......................................................................... 44
1514
R&S�FSW
Index
Undo ........................................................................... 44 UP ............................................................................... 44 Keyboard On-screen ................................................................... 91 Keypad .............................................................................. 94 Key layout ................................................................... 94 Overview ..................................................................... 45 Keys MKR .......................................................................... 518 MKR -> ..............................................................524, 530 MKR FUNCT ............................................................. 532 Peak Search ............................................................. 531 PRESET ................................................................... 635 RUN CONT ............................................... 126, 472, 602 RUN SINGLE .................................... 126, 471, 472, 602 Keywords Mnemonics ............................................................... 783
L
LAN Configuration ............................................................ 835 Configuring ............................................................... 849 Connector ................................................................... 52 Interface .................................................................... 773 IP address ................................................................. 774 LAN configuration ..................................................... 851 Password .................................................................. 836 Ping ........................................................................... 851 Remote control interface ........................................... 772 Reset ........................................................................ 836 Settings ..................................................................... 835 VISA .......................................................................... 774 VXI protocol .............................................................. 775 Web browser interface .............................................. 849
LAN web browser access Error ........................................................................ 1469
Last span Softkey ...................................................................... 444
Legacy format *IDN .......................................................................... 830
LFEOI GPIB terminator ........................................................ 830
Limit check Activating/Deactivating ............................................. 572 CP/ACLR .................................................................. 170 MSR channels .................................................. 182, 187 MSR, activating ......................................................... 176 Remote control ....................................................... 1267 Results ...................................................................... 562 SEM range ................................................................ 248 Spurious Emissions .................................................. 278 Spurious Emissions range ........................................ 282
Limit lines ........................................................ 345, 560, 564 Activating/Deactivating ............................................. 566 Calculation (Multi-SEM) ............................ 241, 242, 249 Comment .................................................................. 568 Compatibility ..................................................... 560, 566 Compatible ................................................................ 571 Copying ............................................................. 567, 572 Creating ............................................................ 567, 573 Data points ................................................................ 569 Deactivating .............................................................. 567 Defining ..................................................................... 571 Deleting ............................................................. 567, 572 Deleting values ......................................................... 570 Details ....................................................................... 567
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
Editing ............................................................... 567, 572 Inserting values ......................................................... 570 Managing .................................................................. 564 Margin ....................................................................... 569 Margins ..................................................................... 561 Name ........................................................................ 568 OBW ......................................................... 210, 526, 530 Offsets .......................................................................562 Peak search .............................................. 210, 526, 530 Recalling ................................................................... 639 Remote control ....................................................... 1267 Saving ....................................................... 570, 639, 643 Selecting ................................................................... 566 SEM .................................................................. 236, 571 Shifting ...................................................... 562, 570, 574 Spurious .................................................................... 571 Spurious Emissions .................................................. 277 Storing ...................................................................... 564 Threshold .......................................................... 561, 568 Time Domain Power measurement .......................... 302 Traces ....................................................................... 566 View filter .................................................................. 566 Violation .................................................................... 562 Visibility ..................................................................... 566 X-axis ........................................................................ 569 X-Offset ..................................................................... 566 Y-axis ........................................................................ 569 Y-Offset ..................................................................... 567 Limits Absolute (SEM range) .............................................. 248 Absolute (Spurious Emissions range) ....................... 282 Relative (SEM range) ............................................... 248 Line impedance stabilization network see LISN ................................................................... 333 Linear scaling X-axis ........................................................ 343, 440, 443 Lines Configuration ............................................................ 564 Display .............................................................. 558, 559 Horizontal .................................................................. 559 Limit, see Limit lines ................................................. 564 Vertical ...................................................................... 559 Linking Markers ............................................................. 338, 521 LISN ................................................................................ 344 Configuration (EMI) ................................................... 344 EMI ........................................................................... 333 Highpass filter (EMI) ................................................. 345 Phase (EMI) .............................................................. 345 List evaluation ............................................................... 1058 Evaluations ....................................................... 259, 282 Saving (SEM) ............................................................ 261 Saving (Spurious Emissions) .................................... 284 SEM .......................................................................... 259 Softkey ...................................................................... 259 Spurious Emissions .................................................. 282 State (SEM) .............................................................. 260 State (Spurious Emissions) ...................................... 283 LLO ................................................................................. 780 LO Harmonics ................................................................. 405 Level (External Mixer) ............................................... 421 LO feedthrough ............................................................... 364 LO UNL Error ........................................................................ 1468 LO UNL (status display) ................................................ 1468
1515
R&S�FSW
Index
Loading Functions .................................................................. 643 Instrument settings ................................................... 648 Settings ............................................................. 638, 640 Settings files ............................................................. 258 Trying out .................................................................... 76
Logarithmic scaling Sweep points ............................................................ 440 X-axis ........................................................ 343, 440, 443
Logging Remote control programs ....................................... 1471
Login Network ..................................................................... 852 Secure user mode ...................................................... 34
Logo Printing ...................................................................... 656
Loop bandwidth External reference .................................................... 740
Lower Level Hysteresis ................................................... 499 LTE
Application .................................................................113 LVL
External generator .................................................... 387 LVL (channel bar) .............................................................. 82
M
Maintenance ..................................................................1478 Manual peak search ........................................................ 334 Margins
Limit lines .......................................................... 561, 569 Peaks (SEM) ............................................................. 260 Peaks (Spurious Emissions) ..................................... 283 Violation .................................................................... 562 Marker Information .................................................................. 83 Search area (softkey) ............................................... 529 Search type (softkey) ................................................ 528 Marker demodulation ...................................................... 345 Marker functions Deactivating .............................................................. 552 Measurement example ............................................. 556 Marker peak list see Peak list ............................................................. 551 Marker Peak List Programming example ............................................ 1259 Marker search Spectrograms, programming example .................... 1257 Marker search area Remote control ....................................................... 1212 Marker table Evaluation method .................................................... 502 Information .................................................................. 84 Marker to Trace ....................................................... 339, 521 Markers ........................................................................... 517 AM Modulation Depth measurement ........................ 324 Analyzing in detail ..................................................... 553 Assigned trace .................................................. 339, 521 Band power (remote control) .................................. 1243 Basic settings ............................................................ 519 Configuration .................................................... 519, 522 Configuration (remote control) ................................ 1205 Deactivating .............................................................. 522 Delta markers ........................................... 338, 520, 536 Demodulation .................................................... 546, 554 Demodulation (remote control) ............................... 1253 Fixed reference (remote control) ................... 1211, 1233
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
Function configuration .............................................. 532 Linking .............................................................. 338, 521 Minimum ................................................................... 531 Minimum (remote control) ............................. 1212, 1216 n dB down ................................................................. 542 n dB down (remote control) .................................... 1247 Next minimum ........................................................... 531 Next minimum (remote control) .................... 1212, 1216 Next peak .................................................................. 531 Next peak (remote control) ........................... 1212, 1216 Noise measurement .................................................. 534 Noise measurement (remote control) ..................... 1239 Peak .......................................................................... 531 Peak (remote control) ................................... 1212, 1216 Peak list (remote control) ........................................ 1236 Phase noise measurement ....................................... 537 Phase noise measurement (remote control) ........... 1241 Position ............................................................. 337, 520 Positioning ................................................................ 530 Positioning (remote control) .................................... 1205 Programming example ............................................ 1256 Remote control ....................................................... 1204 Search (remote control) .......................................... 1212 Setting center frequency ........................................... 531 Setting reference level .............................................. 532 Signal count .............................................................. 534 Signal count (remote control) .................................. 1251 Softkeys (AM Modulation Depth) .............................. 324 Softkeys (TOI) ........................................................... 319 Spectrograms ................................................... 594, 605 Spectrograms (remote control) ............................... 1224 State ......................................................... 337, 520, 536 Step size ................................................................... 523 Step size (remote control) ....................................... 1211 Table ......................................................................... 522 Table (evaluation method) ........................................ 502 Table (remote control) ............................................. 1211 Tips ........................................................................... 515 TOI measurement ..................................................... 319 Trying out .................................................................... 67 Type .......................................................... 338, 520, 536 X-value .............................................................. 337, 520 Mask monitoring SEM .......................................................................... 230 MAX ................................................................................ 786 MAXH (trace information) .................................................. 83 Maximize Window ..................................................................... 104 Maximizing Display ........................................................................ 49 Windows (remote) ......................................... 1068, 1189 Meas Time (channel setting) ............................................. 80 Measurement accuracy External generator .................................................... 383 Measurement channels Activating .................................................................... 98 Closing ........................................................................ 99 Measurement examples AF of AM-modulated signal ...................................... 138 AM modulation .......................................................... 137 CP/ACLR .......................................................... 193, 195 External Mixer ........................................................... 430 Harmonics ................................................................. 556 Intermodulation ......................................................... 320 Level and frequency ................................................. 128 Marker functions ....................................................... 556 OBW ......................................................................... 212
1516
R&S�FSW
Index
Power of burst signals .............................................. 140 Separating signals .................................................... 133 Signal frequency using signal counter ...................... 130 Signal-to-noise ratio .................................................. 144 Statistics ................................................................... 299 Time Domain Power ................................................. 305 TOI ............................................................................ 320 Measurement results SEM .......................................................................... 259 Spurious Emissions .................................................. 282 Measurement time .......................................................... 342 Auto settings ............................................................. 499 Power sensor ............................................................ 372 Remote .......................................................... 1142, 1144 Measurement zoom .......................................................... 97 Measurements All Functions off ........................................................ 126 APD .......................................................................... 287 Carrier-to-Noise ........................................................ 202 CCDF ........................................................................ 287 Correlating ................................................................ 107 CP/ACLR .................................................................. 145 Evaluation methods .................................................. 501 Frequency sweep ..................................................... 126 Harmonic Distortion .................................................. 306 OBW ......................................................................... 206 SEM .......................................................................... 229 Spurious Emissions .................................................. 274 Statistics ................................................................... 287 Time Domain Power ................................................. 301 TOI ............................................................................ 312 Zero span .................................................................. 126 Measurementsition time Statistics ................................................................... 293 Menus Context-sensitive ........................................................ 90 Messages Commands ............................................................... 782 Instrument ................................................................. 782 Instrument responses ............................................... 783 Interface .................................................................... 782 MI (trace information) ........................................................ 83 Microbutton Probes ...................................................................... 368 MIL Std bandwidth .................................................. 328, 343 MIN .................................................................................. 786 MINH (trace information) ................................................... 83 Mini front panel Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 697 Key combination ....................................................... 698 Using ......................................................................... 706 Minimum .......................................................................... 531 Marker positioning .................................................... 531 Next .......................................................................... 531 Mixer Type External Mixer ........................................................... 418 MKR Key ............................................................................ 518 MKR -> Key .................................................................... 524, 530 MKR FUNCT Key ............................................................................ 532 Mnemonics ...................................................................... 783 Optional .................................................................... 785 MOD (marker functions) .................................................... 84 Mode (channel setting) ...................................................... 80
Modes see Operating mode ................................................. 107
Modulation Marker Demodulation ............................................... 548
Monitor External ..................................................................... 703 Settings ..................................................................... 703
MSR ACLR Adjacent channel bandwidths ................................... 181 Adjacent channel definition ....................................... 181 Adjacent channel setup ............................................ 179 Adjacent channel spacing ......................................... 181 Adjacent channel weighting filters ............................ 181 Adjacent channels .................................................... 159 CACLR ...................................................................... 158 Channel definition ..................................................... 158 Channel display ........................................................ 160 Configuration ............................................................ 171 Gap channel bandwidths .......................................... 186 Gap channel definition .............................................. 184 Gap channel setup .................................................... 182 Gap channel spacing ................................................ 185 Gap channel weighting filters .................................... 186 Gap channels ............................................................ 158 Limit check ........................................................ 182, 187 Limit checks, activating ............................................. 176 Measurement ............................................................ 156 Number of adj. channels ........................................... 180 Programming example ...................................... 944, 946 Results ...................................................................... 160 Results (remote) ....................................................... 886 Signal structure ......................................................... 156 Sub block definition ................................................... 158 Tx channel bandwidth ............................................... 179 Weighting filters ........................................................ 179
MSR SEM Basics ....................................................................... 240 Configuration ............................................................ 254 Configuration (softkey) .............................................. 254 Settings (Multi-SEM) ................................................. 251
Multi-Carrier Group Delay Application .................................................................113
Multi-SEM Basics ....................................................................... 240 Center frequencies ................................................... 251 Fast SEM .......................................................... 239, 241 Frequency definition ................................................. 241 Limit line calculation .................................. 241, 242, 249 MSR settings ............................................................ 251 Number of sub blocks ............................................... 251 Results ...................................................................... 233 Settings ..................................................................... 250 Standard files ............................................................ 258 Standard settings files .............................................. 251
Multi-standard radio see MSR ................................................................... 240
Multicarrier ACLR measurement ..................................... 149 Multiple signals
Measurement example ............................................. 133 Multiple zoom .......................................................... 508, 510 MultiView
Status display ............................................................. 85 Tab .....................................................................116, 119 Trying out .................................................................... 66
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1517
R&S�FSW
Index
N
n dB down Delta value ................................................................ 542 Marker ....................................................................... 542 Remote control ....................................................... 1247
n dB down markers Programming example ............................................ 1262
Name CP/ACLR channels ................................................... 171 Limit lines .................................................................. 568 Transducer lines ....................................................... 718
NAN ................................................................................. 786 NAN (not a number)
Remote control ......................................................... 790 Navigation
Controls ...................................................................... 44 in tables ...................................................................... 44 Navigation keys ................................................................. 44 NB-IoT Application .................................................................113 NCor (enhancement label) ................................................ 83 Negative peak detector EMI ........................................................................... 329 Negative Peak detector ................................................... 576 Network Auto-login .................................................................. 854 Changing user passwords ........................................ 853 Configuration (dialog box) ......................................... 828 Configuring ....................................................... 772, 845 Connecting the instrument ........................................ 846 Creating users .......................................................... 853 DNS server ............................................................... 848 Login ......................................................................... 852 Operating the instrument .......................................... 852 Setting up .................................................................. 845 Settings ..................................................................... 826 Settings (remote) .................................................... 1364 Sharing directories .................................................... 855 Next Minimum ................................................................. 531 Marker positioning .................................................... 531 Next Mode X Softkey ...................................................................... 528 Next Mode Y Softkey ...................................................................... 528 Next Peak ........................................................................ 531 Marker positioning .................................................... 531 NINF ................................................................................ 786 NO REF Error ........................................................................ 1468 NOI (marker functions) ...................................................... 84 Noise Cancelation (CP/ACLR) ............................ 165, 174, 455 Cancelation (softkey) ................................ 165, 174, 455 Cancellation (remote control) .................................. 1148 Correction, see Cancelation ..................... 165, 174, 455 Floor (RF attenuation) ............................................... 449 Saving settings ......................................................... 643 Source ...................................................................... 436 Noise Figure Application .................................................................114 Noise markers Programming example ............................................ 1260 Noise measurement Activating/Deactivating ............................................. 537 Deactivating .............................................................. 537
Marker ....................................................................... 534 Remote control ....................................................... 1239 Noise source control Connector ................................................................... 48 NOR External generator ............................................ 383, 387 NOR (channel bar) ............................................................ 82 Normalization Approximate, external generator .............................. 383 External generator ............................................ 383, 395 NTRansition .................................................................... 796 Number of Readings Power sensor ............................................................ 373 Numerator Frequencies, external generator ....................... 386, 393 Numeric parameters .................................................. 92, 786 Numeric values Special ...................................................................... 786
O
OBW ................................................................................ 206 % Power (remote control) ......................................... 951 % Power Bandwidth ................................................. 210 Adjust Settings ......................................................... 210 Channel Bandwidth .................................................. 210 Channel bandwidth (remote control) ......................... 951 Configuring ............................................................... 209 Deactivating limits ..................................... 210, 527, 530 Determining ....................................................... 209, 211 Limits ........................................................ 210, 526, 530 Measurement ............................................................ 206 Measurement (remote control) ................................. 950 Measurement example ............................................. 212 Multicarrier signal ...................................... 207, 209, 211 Prerequisites ............................................................. 207 Results ...................................................................... 208 Search limits ..............................................207, 209, 211
OBW measurement Centroid frequency ................................................... 208
Occupied Bandwidth see OBW .................................................................. 206
OCXO Connector ................................................................... 57
Offset Frequency ................................................................. 445 Limit lines .................................................................. 562 Reference level ......................................................... 452 X-axis (statistics) ....................................................... 296
Offset (channel setting) ..................................................... 80 On-screen keyboard .................................................... 91, 93 OneWeb
Application .................................................................114 Online help
Working with ............................................................. 105 Open-circuit reflection measurement
Calibration, external generator ................................. 395 Operating mode .............................................................. 107
Changing .................................................................. 108 Presetting .................................................................. 746 Operating temperature .................................................... 690 Operation complete Remote ..................................................................... 869 Optimizing Calibration signal display ............................................ 60
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1518
R&S�FSW
Index
Options Electronic attenuation ............................................... 453 EMI measurement (K54) ................................... 325, 344 External generator control (B10) ............................... 377 External mixer ........................................................... 405 High-pass filter .......................................................... 364 Identification (remote) ............................................... 869 Information ................................................................ 742 Installing ............................................................ 742, 743 Preamplifier ............................................................... 454 Secure user mode (K33) ..................................... 37, 636 SnP input files (K544) ............................................. 1338
Orientation Screenshot ................................................................ 663
Oscilloscope Alignment .................................................................... 56
Output Audio ....................................................................... 1129 Buffer ........................................................................ 794 Configuration ............................................................ 434 Configuration (remote) ............................................ 1128 External reference .................................................... 740 IF frequencies ........................................................... 359 IF frequency (remote) .................................... 1128, 1129 IF Out Frequency ...................................................... 435 IF source (remote) ...................................................1129 Noise source ............................................................. 436 Parameters ............................................................... 353 Settings ..................................................................... 434 Trigger ...............................................................436, 437 Video ............................................................... 435, 1129 Video signal .............................................................. 359
OVEN Error ........................................................................ 1468
OVENCOLD Error ........................................................................ 1468
OVENCOLD (status display) ......................................... 1468 Overheating
Shutdown .................................................................... 29 Overlapping commands .................................................. 791
Preventing ................................................................. 792 Overload
External generator .................................................... 383 RF input (remote) .................................................... 1079 Overloading External generator .................................................... 389 Overview (configuration) ................................................. 351 OVLD External generator ............................................ 383, 387 OVLD (status display) ................................................... 1468
P
Pa (channel bar) ................................................................ 81 Parallel poll register enable
Remote ..................................................................... 870 Parameters
Block data ................................................................. 788 Boolean ..................................................................... 787 Entering ................................................................ 92, 93 Input signal ............................................................... 353 Numeric values ......................................................... 786 Output ....................................................................... 353 Passing between applications ................................... 118 Passing between secondary applications ................. 108 SCPI ......................................................................... 785 Special numeric values ............................................. 786
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
String ........................................................................ 787 Text ........................................................................... 787 Password Secure user mode .................................................... 747 Passwords Changing .................................................................. 853 Secure user mode .............................................. 38, 637 Service functions ...................................................... 757 Peak excursion ........................................ 526, 529, 549, 552 Peak list ...........................................................................550 Configuring ............................................................... 549 Displaying ................................................................. 549 Evaluation method .................................................... 503 Exporting ................................................... 552, 555, 618 Marker numbers ........................................................ 552 Maximum number of peaks ...................................... 552 Peak excursion ......................................... 526, 529, 552 Remote control ....................................................... 1236 Sort mode ................................................................. 552 State ......................................................................... 551 Trying out .................................................................... 68 Peak search .................................................................... 334 Area (spectrograms) ................................................. 529 Automatic .......................................... 342, 526, 529, 550 Deactivating limits ..................................... 210, 527, 530 Excursion .................................................................. 549 Key ............................................................................ 531 Limits ................................................ 210, 526, 530, 549 List ............................................................................ 550 Mode ................................................................. 525, 528 Mode (spectrograms) ........................................ 527, 528 Reference marker ..................................................... 523 Threshold .......................................................... 526, 530 Type (spectrograms) ................................................. 528 Zoom limits ....................................................... 526, 530 Peaks Displaying (SEM) ...................................................... 260 Displaying (Spurious Emissions) .............................. 283 Margin (SEM) ............................................................ 260 Margin (Spurious Emissions) .................................... 283 Marker positioning .................................................... 531 Next .......................................................................... 531 per range (Spurious Emissions) ............................... 284 SEM results .............................................................. 232 Softkey ...................................................................... 531 Spurious Emissions .................................................. 275 Percent marker CCDF ........................................................................ 290 Softkey (CCDF) ........................................................ 292 Performing EMI measurement .................................................... 346 Period Gate ranges (statistics) ............................................. 294 Persistence spectrum Spectrogram ............................................................. 597 Phase .............................................................................. 344 EMI ........................................................................... 333 LISN control (EMI) .................................................... 345 Phase noise markers Programming example ............................................ 1260 Phase noise measurement Activating/Deactivating ............................................. 539 Application .................................................................114 Deactivating .............................................................. 540 Marker ....................................................................... 537 Reference point ........................................................ 540 Remote control ....................................................... 1241
1519
R&S�FSW
Index
PHN (marker functions) ..................................................... 84 PHONES
Connector ................................................................... 49 Ping ................................................................................. 851 Pipe ................................................................................. 788 PK (trace information) ....................................................... 83 Ports
External Mixer (remote) .......................................... 1093 User .........................................................................1130 Position Limit line values ........................................................ 569 Transducer factors .................................................... 719 Positive peak detector EMI ........................................................................... 329 Positive Peak detector .................................................... 576 Power Channel, see Channel power ................................... 146 Harmonics ................................................................. 310 Mean (time domain) .................................................. 301 Peak (time domain) ................................................... 301 Percent (OBW) ......................................................... 210 RMS (time domain) ................................................... 301 Standard deviation (time domain) ............................. 301 Time domain ............................................................. 301 POWER Key .............................................................................. 40 Power classes Adding/Removing (SEM) .......................................... 254 Ranges (SEM) .......................................................... 254 SEM .................................................................. 236, 253 SEM results .............................................................. 230 Softkey ...................................................................... 253 Used (SEM) .............................................................. 254 Power mode Band power measurement ........................................ 546 CP/ACLR .......................................................... 167, 176 Softkey .............................................................. 167, 176 Power sensors Activating/Deactivating ............................................. 371 Applications .............................................................. 368 Average count ........................................................... 373 Configuration (softkey) .............................................. 370 Configuring ............................................................... 369 Configuring - see User Manual ................................... 48 Configuring as trigger ............................................... 376 Connecting ................................................................ 369 Connector ................................................................... 48 Continuous Value Update ......................................... 371 Duty cycle ................................................................. 373 External power trigger ............................................... 373 External trigger level ................................................. 373 Frequency ................................................................. 372 Frequency Coupling .................................................. 372 Measurement time .................................................... 372 Number of readings .................................................. 373 R&S NRP .................................................................. 369 R&S Power Viewer ................................................... 369 Reference level ......................................................... 372 Reference level offset ............................................... 373 Results ...................................................................... 369 Selecting ................................................................... 371 Setting up .................................................................. 375 Settings ..................................................................... 370 Trigger mode .............................................................483 Unit/Scale ................................................................. 372 Using ......................................................................... 374
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
Using - see User Manual ............................................ 48 Zeroing .............................................................. 371, 376 Power supply Connector ................................................................... 52 Power Unit Softkey .............................................................. 166, 175 PPC ................................................................................. 780 PPE register ............................................................ 794, 798 PPU ................................................................................. 780 Preamplifier SEM range ................................................................ 248 Setting ....................................................................... 454 Softkey ...................................................................... 454 Spurious Emissions range ........................................ 281 Predefined standards CP/ACLR .......................................... 163, 173, 200, 201 Preset Bands (External Mixer, remote) .............................. 1088 channel settings ........................................................ 636 External Mixer ........................................................... 418 Key ............................................................................ 635 Recalling settings ...................................................... 650 Presetting Channels ................................................................... 352 Pretrigger ........................................................................ 485 Preview Trigger/Gate settings ................................................ 480 Print Screen Softkey ...................................................................... 659 Printer Selecting ................................................................... 661 Printers Installing .................................................................... 662 Printing Colors ....................................................... 698, 700, 704 Colors (remote) ....................................................... 1360 Medium ..................................................................... 661 Screenshots ...................................................... 659, 665 Trying out .................................................................... 76 Probability range Statistics ................................................................... 296 Probe Connector ................................................................... 48 Probes Common Mode Offset ............................................... 355 Connectors ........................................................... 47, 55 Microbutton ............................................................... 368 Settings ..................................................................... 366 Product IDs ..................................................................... 781 Programming examples ACLR ........................................................................ 942 AM Modulatation Depth .......................................... 1048 Band power markers ............................................... 1261 Carrier-to-Noise ratio ................................................ 950 Continuous gating ................................................... 1170 Demodulation markers .................................. 1262, 1263 EMI measurement .................................................. 1056 External Mixer ......................................................... 1097 Frequency sweep ................................................... 1455 Marker Peak List ..................................................... 1259 Marker search (spectrograms) ................................ 1257 Markers ................................................................... 1256 MSR ACLR ....................................................... 944, 946 n dB down markers ................................................. 1262 Noise markers ......................................................... 1260 Phase noise markers .............................................. 1260 Reference Marker ................................................... 1258
1520
R&S�FSW
Index
SEM ........................................................................ 1002 Sequencer ................................................................ 880 Service request ....................................................... 1458 Signal count markers .............................................. 1263 Spectrogram ........................................................... 1202 Spurious Emissions measurement ......................... 1018 Statistics ................. 968, 1028, 1258, 1280, 1282, 1323 TOI .......................................................................... 1046 Touchstone files ...................................................... 1355 Protection RF input (remote) .................................................... 1079 Protocol VXI ............................................................................ 775 PSA emulation .............................................................. 1443 PSA89600 Wideband .................................................................. 834 PTRansition ..................................................................... 796 Pulse Application .................................................................114 Pulsed signals EMI detector ..................................................... 329, 331 PXA emulation .............................................................. 1447
Q
QP (trace information) ....................................................... 83 Quasipeak detector
EMI ........................................................................... 330 Queries ....................................................................782, 790
Status ........................................................................ 808 Question mark ......................................................... 788, 790 Quick Config
Traces ....................................................................... 588 Quick recall
Settings ..................................................................... 640 Quick save
Secure user mode ............................................ 640, 642 Settings ..................................................................... 640 Quotation mark ................................................................ 788
R
R&S FSP Emulating .................................................................. 832 Emulating (remote) ................................................. 1413
R&S FSQ Emulating .................................................................. 832 Emulating (remote) ................................................. 1413
R&S FSU Emulating .................................................................. 832 Emulating (remote) ................................................. 1413
R&S FSV Emulating .................................................................. 832 Emulating (remote) ................................................. 1413
R&S NRP Power sensors .......................................................... 369
R&S Power Viewer Plus .................................................. 369 R&S SMA
External generator .................................................... 380 R&S SMW
External generator .................................................... 380 R&S Support ................................................................... 751 Range ..............................................................................456
Scaling ...................................................................... 457 X-axis (statistics) ....................................................... 296
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
Ranges Definition (SEM) ........................................................ 234 Deleting (SEM) ......................................................... 250 Deleting (Spurious Emissions) .................................. 282 Inserting (SEM) ......................................................... 250 Inserting (Spurious Emissions) ................................. 282 Reference (SEM) .............................................. 234, 252 Remote control (Spurious Emissions) ...................... 277 Rules (SEM) ............................................................. 235 Rules (Spurious Emissions) ...................................... 276 SEM .......................................................................... 234 Symmetrical (SEM) ................................................... 235
RBW see Resolution Bandwidth ........................................ 459
RBW (channel setting) ...................................................... 80 Ready for trigger
Status register ........................................................... 799 Real-Time spectrum
Application .................................................................114 Rear panel
Overview ..................................................................... 49 Rebooting
Remote control ........................................................ 1411 Recalling
Calibration settings, external generator .................... 395 Settings ............................................. 638, 640, 643, 647 Settings for preset ..................................................... 650 Softkey ...................................................................... 643 Recommendations Remote control programming ................................... 810 Redo Key .............................................................................. 44 REF INPUT Connector ................................................................... 56 Ref Level (channel setting) ............................................... 80 Ref Lvl = Mkr Lvl ............................................................. 532 Reference External ..................................................................... 737 Fixed ................................................................. 523, 542 Fixed (channel power) .............................................. 167 Fixed (Delta marker) ................................................. 554 Frequency ................................................................. 737 Frequency (remote control) .................................... 1324 Internal ...................................................................... 737 Marker ............................................................... 523, 542 Phase noise measurement ....................................... 540 Power (SEM) ............................................................ 252 Range (SEM) .................................................... 234, 252 Softkey ...................................................................... 737 Reference channel CP/ACLR .......................................................... 165, 174 Reference frequency Default ...................................................................... 740 External generator ............................................ 380, 391 Input .......................................................................... 738 Output ....................................................................... 740 Reference level ....................................................... 448, 451 Adjusting to transducer factors ................................. 717 Auto level .......................................................... 453, 499 CP/ACLR .................................................................. 156 External generator .................................................... 385 External Mixer ........................................................... 409 Offset ........................................................................ 452 Offset (Power sensor) ............................................... 373 Position ..................................................................... 456 Power sensor ............................................................ 372 SEM range ................................................................ 247
1521
R&S�FSW
Index
Setting to marker ...................................................... 532 Spurious Emissions range ........................................ 281 Statistics ................................................................... 296 Unit ................................................................... 451, 452 Value ......................................................................... 451 Reference line External generator .................................................... 385 Position, external generator ...................................... 396 Shifting, external generator ............................... 385, 396 Value, external generator .......................................... 396 Reference marker ................................................... 338, 520 Reference Marker Programming example ............................................ 1258 Reference range Softkey ...................................................................... 252 Reference trace External generator ............................................ 383, 385 Storing as transducer factor, external generator .......................................................................... 384, 396 Reflection measurement External generator .................................................... 379 How to, external generator ....................................... 397 Registers ......................................................................... 794 Relay Cycle Counter ....................................................... 758 Release notes ................................................................... 22 Remote commands Deprecated ............................................................. 1451 Remote control Blocked ................................................................... 1470 Errors ...................................................................... 1470 Ignored commands ................................................... 810 Interfaces .................................................................. 772 LAN settings ............................................................. 835 Protocols ................................................................... 772 Sequential commands ............................................ 1470 Remote Desktop ..................................................... 845, 858 Client ......................................................................... 859 Ending session ......................................................... 862 Setting up a connection ............................................ 862 Setting up controller .................................................. 859 Setting up instrument ................................................ 858 Remote display Update ...................................................................... 830 Remote operation Configuring ............................................................... 772 Deactivating the instrument ...................................... 864 GPIB address ........................................................... 852 GPIB settings ............................................................ 828 see also Remote control ........................................... 772 Setting up .................................................................. 845 Settings ..................................................................... 825 Starting ..................................................................... 864 Stopping .................................................................... 865 Removable hard drive ....................................................... 51 Repeatability CP/ACLR measurements ......................................... 151 Repetition interval ........................................................... 484 Softkey ...................................................................... 484 Report ............................................................................. 669 Reset values Remote ..................................................................... 871 Resetting RF input protection ................................................. 1079 Resolution bandwidth Auto (Softkey) ................................................... 341, 467 CP/ACLR .................................................................. 154 Harmonics ................................................................. 311
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
Impact ....................................................................... 459 Manual (Softkey) ............................................... 341, 467 SEM range ................................................................ 247 Spurious Emissions range ........................................ 280 Resolution bandwidth (EMI) .................................... 328, 343 Restoring Channel settings ....................................................... 352 Standard files ............................................................ 259 Restricted operation Secure user mode .............................................. 38, 637 Restrictions Storage space ..................................................... 38, 637 Result displays Diagram .................................................................... 502 Marker table .............................................................. 502 Peak list .................................................................... 503 Programming example ............................................ 1075 Result Summary ....................................................... 503 Spectrogram ............................................................. 503 Result frequency External generator .................................................... 394 Result range Shifting ...................................................................... 512 Zooming .................................................................... 512 Result Summary Configuration (SEM) ................................................. 259 Evaluation method .................................................... 503 Result display ........................................................... 503 Saving (SEM) ............................................................ 261 Results Analyzing .................................................................. 345 CP/ACLR measurements ......................................... 146 Data format (remote) .................................... 1200, 1310 Displaying ................................................................... 98 Exporting ................................................................... 613 Managing .................................................................. 635 OBW ......................................................................... 208 SEM .......................................................................... 230 SEM (remote) ........................................................... 233 Storing (remote) ...................................................... 1310 Reverse sweep External generator ............................................ 387, 393 Revision string GPIB ............................................................... 834, 1414 GPIB (remote control) ............................................. 1367 Resetting ................................................................... 834 RF attenuation Auto .......................................................................... 453 Impact ....................................................................... 449 Manual ...................................................................... 453 Mode (SEM range) ................................................... 247 Mode (Spurious Emissions range) ............................ 281 Noise floor ................................................................. 449 SEM range ................................................................ 247 Spurious Emissions range ........................................ 281 RF input ........................................................................... 362 Overload protection (remote) .................................. 1079 Remote ................................................................... 1078 RF Input Connector ................................................................... 46 RF overrange External Mixer ......................................... 406, 418, 1093 RF OVLD Error ........................................................................ 1468 External generator .................................................... 387 RF OVLD (status display) ............................................. 1468
1522
R&S�FSW
Index
RF Power Trigger .......................................................................483 Trigger level (remote) .............................................. 1159
Rising Slope (Power sensor) ............................................... 374
RM (trace information) ...................................................... 83 RMS
VBW .......................................................................... 579 RMS Average
Detector .................................................................... 329 RMS Average detector
EMI ........................................................................... 331 RMS detector .................................................................. 576
EMI ........................................................................... 330 VBW .......................................................................... 460 Rotary knob ....................................................................... 44 RRC filter SEM .......................................................................... 253 RUN CONT Key ............................................................ 126, 472, 602 RUN SINGLE Key .................................................... 126, 471, 472, 602
S
S/N ratio Measurement example ..................................... 130, 144
SA (trace information) ....................................................... 83 Safety instructions ............................................................. 22 Sample detector .............................................................. 576
EMI ........................................................................... 330 Samples
Statistics ........................................................... 293, 301 Save/Recall Mode
Settings ..................................................................... 645 Savesets
Settings ..................................................................... 641 Saving
Classified data .................................................... 37, 636 Data types ................................................................. 642 Functions .................................................................. 643 Instrument settings ................................................... 648 Limit lines .................................................................. 570 Screenshots .............................................................. 665 SEM result files ......................................................... 265 Settings ............................................................. 259, 643 Softkey ...................................................................... 643 Spurious Emissions result files ................................. 285 Transducer lines ....................................................... 719 Trying out .............................................................. 75, 76 Scalar reflection measurement External generator .................................................... 379 Scaling Amplitude range, automatically ................................. 457 Configuration ............................................................ 456 Default (statistics) ..................................................... 297 Statistics ................................................................... 295 X-axis (remote control) ............................................ 1132 Y-axis ................................................................ 450, 457 Y-axis (remote control) ............................................ 1155 SCPI Parameters ............................................................... 785 Syntax ....................................................................... 783 version ...................................................................... 781 SCPI confirmed commands ............................................ 782
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
SCPI list Display ...................................................................... 817 Export ....................................................................... 818
SCPI Recorder ................................................................ 814 Screen
See Touchscreen ...................................................... 699 Screenshots
Printing .............................................................. 659, 665 Saving ............................................................... 659, 665 Trying out .................................................................... 76 SDC .................................................................................780 Search limits Deactivating .............................................. 210, 527, 530 OBW ................................................................. 207, 209 Search Limits Activating .................................................. 210, 526, 530 Search Mode Spectrogram markers ............................................... 527 Search range Zoom area ................................................................ 509 Search settings Trying out .................................................................... 68 Search Signals Softkey .............................................................. 319, 324 Searching Configuration ............................................................ 524 Configuration (softkey) .............................................. 527 Second harmonic intercept ............................................. 307 Secure user mode Activating .................................................................. 747 Activating/deactivating ........................................ 38, 637 Background information ...................................... 37, 636 Instrument settings ................................................... 639 Login ........................................................................... 34 Passwords .......................................................... 38, 637 Quick save ........................................................ 640, 642 Redirecting storage ............................................. 37, 636 Remote ................................................................... 1382 Restricted operation ............................................ 38, 637 Self-alignment ........................... 689, 742, 745, 825, 826 Self-alignment data ............................................. 38, 637 Storage location ................................ 258, 643, 644, 647 Transducer settings .................................................. 715 SecureUser ............................................................... 38, 637 Security procedures .......................................................... 22 Select Frame Softkey .............................................................. 473, 601 Select Marker .......................................................... 339, 521 Self-alignment ................................................................. 687 Aborting .................................................................... 690 Secure user mode ...... 38, 637, 689, 742, 745, 825, 826 Starting ..................................................................... 689 Self-test Performing ........................................................ 691, 752 Remote ..................................................................... 872 Results ............................................................ 752, 1333 Settings ..................................................................... 752 Temperature .............................................................. 691 Selftest Remote ................................................................... 1384 SEM ................................................................................ 229 About ........................................................................ 230 Adding power classes ............................................... 254 Alpha value (RRC filter) ............................................ 253 Applications .............................................................. 230 Channel power settings ............................................ 252 Configuring ....................................................... 244, 261
1523
R&S�FSW
Index
Deleting ranges ......................................................... 250 Displaying peaks ....................................................... 260 Exporting results ....................................................... 265 Fast mode ......................................................... 238, 246 Filter type .................................................................. 246 Format description of export files .............................. 273 Format description of settings files ........................... 267 Inserting ranges ........................................................ 250 Limit absolute ............................................................ 248 Limit check ................................................................ 248 Limit lines .................................................................. 236 Limit relative .............................................................. 248 List evaluation ........................................................... 259 List evaluation (remote control) .............................. 1000 List evaluation state .................................................. 260 Measurement (remote control) ................................. 968 Measurement result list ............................................. 259 MSR (remote control) ............................................... 994 Multiple sub blocks (Multi-SEM) ............................... 240 Peak margins ............................................................ 260 Performing ................................................................ 261 Power class ranges .................................................. 254 Power classes ................................................... 236, 253 Power classes (remote control) ................................ 989 Preamplifier ............................................................... 248 Programming example ............................................ 1002 Provided settings files ............................................... 267 Range start/stop ....................................................... 246 Ranges ..................................................................... 234 RBW ......................................................................... 247 Reference level ......................................................... 247 Reference power ...................................................... 252 Reference range ....................................................... 252 Reference range (remote control) ............................. 987 Restoring standard files ............................................ 259 Result files ................................................................ 265 Results ...................................................................... 230 Results (Multi-SEM) .................................................. 233 Results (remote control) ............................... 1002, 1017 Results (remote) ....................................................... 233 RF attenuation .......................................................... 247 RF attenuation mode ................................................ 247 RRC filter .................................................................. 253 Saving result summary ............................................. 261 Settings files ..................................................... 257, 264 Standard files ............................................................ 257 Standards (remote control) ....................................... 969 Sweep List ............................................................... 245 Sweep list (remote control) ....................................... 972 Sweep Points ............................................................ 249 Sweep Time ............................................................. 247 Sweep Time Mode ................................................... 247 Transducer ................................................................ 248 Tx Bandwidth ........................................................... 253 Used power classes .................................................. 254 VBW .......................................................................... 247 Sensitivity RBW ......................................................................... 459 Sequencer ......................................................................... 80 Aborted ............................................................. 689, 753 Activating (remote) .................................................... 879 Channels ................................................................... 119 Example .................................................................... 120 Mode ................................................................. 120, 122 Programming example .............................................. 880 Remote ..................................................................... 884 Remote control ......................................................... 872
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
Run Single ................................................................ 121 Setting up .................................................................. 122 Single Sweep ............................................................ 121 Softkey ...................................................................... 121 State ......................................................................... 121 Trying out .................................................................... 66 Sequences Aborting (remote) ...................................................... 878 Mode (remote) .......................................................... 879 Sequential commands ..................................................... 791 Errors ...................................................................... 1470 Service functions ............................................. 750, 755, 756 Numeric mode .......................................................... 756 Passwords ................................................................ 757 Results ...................................................................... 757 Service manual ................................................................. 21 Service request (SRQ) .................... 772, 794, 797, 798, 807 Service request enable register (SRE) .................... 794, 797 Remote ..................................................................... 871 Set CP Reference Softkey ...................................................................... 167 Setting commands .......................................................... 782 Settings filename .................................................... 258, 645, 648 Format description (SEM) ......................................... 267 Loading ..................................................................... 648 Managing .................................................................. 635 Provided files (SEM) ................................................. 267 Recalling ........................................................... 638, 640 Recalling; restrictions ................................................ 639 Restoring files ........................................................... 259 Saving ............................................................... 643, 648 Storage location ........................................ 258, 644, 647 Storing .............................................................. 638, 640 Settings files Deleting ..................................................................... 259 Deleting (SEM) ......................................................... 264 Loading ..................................................................... 258 Loading (SEM) .......................................................... 264 Managing (SEM) ....................................................... 264 Restoring (SEM) ....................................................... 264 Saving ....................................................................... 259 Saving (SEM) ............................................................ 264 Setup files External generator .................................... 382, 390, 391 Sgl (channel bar) ............................................................... 81 Shift x Limit lines .................................................................. 570 Transducer lines ....................................................... 719 Shift y Limit lines .................................................................. 570 Transducer lines ....................................................... 719 Shifting Limit lines .................................................................. 562 Results ...................................................................... 512 Short-circuit reflection measurement Calibration, external generator ................................. 395 Show SCPI command ..................................................... 815 Close ......................................................................... 816 Copy ......................................................................... 816 Shutdown Automatic .................................................................. 690 Remote control ........................................................ 1411 Signal capturing Duration (remote) .......................................... 1142, 1144
1524
R&S�FSW
Signal count Marker ....................................................................... 534 Remote control ....................................................... 1251 Resolution ................................................................. 534
Signal count markers Programming example ............................................ 1263
Signal counter Measurement example ............................................. 130
Signal generator Address ............................................. 222, 749, 766, 820 Connection information ............. 223, 749, 750, 766, 821
Signal ID External Mixer ........................................................... 421 External Mixer (remote) .......................................... 1086
Signal tracking ................................................................. 445 Bandwidth ................................................................. 446 Softkey ...................................................................... 446 State ......................................................................... 446 Threshold .................................................................. 446 Trace ......................................................................... 446
Single Sequencer Softkey ...................................................................... 122
Single sweep Softkey ...................................................... 126, 471, 602
Single zoom ............................................................ 508, 510 Sinusoidal signals
Measurement example ............................................. 127 Slope
Edge gate ................................................................. 485 Power sensor trigger ................................................. 374 Trigger ............................................................. 485, 1160 Trigger (Power sensor) ............................................. 374 SmartGrid Activating .......................................................... 102, 506 Arranging windows ........................................... 103, 507 Display .............................................................. 100, 504 Evaluation bar ................................................... 102, 506 Features ............................................................ 100, 504 Mode ................................................................. 102, 506 Programming example ............................................ 1075 Trying out .................................................................... 61 Smoothing Traces ....................................................................... 584 Traces (group delay) ................................................. 587 Soft front panels Using ......................................................................... 705 softkey Calibration Frequency WB ...................................... 1331 Filter Type (remote control) ..................................... 1146 Trace Mode (remote control) ........................ 1031, 1032 Softkey Calibrate Reflection Open (remote control) ............. 1114 Calibrate Reflection Short (remote control) ............. 1114 Calibrate Transmission (remote control) ................. 1114 Softkey bar Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 695 Softkeys # of Samples (APD, CCDF) ...................................... 293 % Power Bandwidth ................................................. 210 ACLR Mode ...................................................... 166, 175 Adjust Settings ......................... 167, 176, 205, 210, 311 Adjust Settings (APD) ....................................... 293, 297 Adjust X-Axis ............................................................ 282 All Functions Off ........................................................552 Amplitude Config ...................................................... 450 Analysis BW (APD, CCDF) ....................................... 292 Auto All ..................................................................... 498
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
Index
Auto Freq .................................................................. 498 Auto Level ......................................................... 453, 499 Bandwidth Config ...................................................... 464 BB Power .................................................................. 483 C/N ............................................................................ 205 C/No .......................................................................... 205 Carrier Noise Config ................................................. 204 Center ....................................................................... 443 Center = Mkr Freq .....................................................531 Channel Bandwidth ........................................... 205, 210 Channel-defined Sequencer ..................................... 122 Clear All Messages (remote control) ...................... 1380 Clear Spectrogram ............................................ 473, 602 Color Mapping .......................................................... 601 Comment .................................................................. 656 Continue Single Sweep .................................... 126, 472 Continuous Sequencer ............................................. 122 Continuous Sweep .................................... 126, 472, 602 CP/ACLR Settings .................................................... 162 CP/ACLR Standard ........................................... 163, 173 Device ....................................................... 657, 660, 663 Display Config ........................................................... 501 Export ....................................................................... 651 Export config ............................................................. 653 External ..................................................................... 481 Frame count .............................................................. 473 Free Run ................................................................... 481 Frequency Config ..................................................... 441 Full Span ................................................................... 444 Gated Trigger ............................................................ 293 Harmonic RBW Auto ................................................. 311 Harmonic Sweep Time .............................................. 311 History Depth ............................................................ 601 Horizontal Line 1/2 .................................................... 559 I/Q Export .................................................................. 653 IF Power ................................................................... 482 Import ........................................................................ 651 Input Source Config .................................................. 361 Install Printer ............................................................. 662 Last Span .................................................................. 444 Line Config ................................................................ 564 List evaluation ........................................................... 259 Lower Level Hysteresis ............................................. 499 Marker 1/2/3 .............................................................. 324 Marker 1/2/3/4 ........................................................... 319 Marker Config ................................................... 519, 522 Marker Search Area .................................................. 529 Marker Search Type ................................................. 528 Marker to Trace .................................................339, 521 Meastime Auto .......................................................... 499 Meastime Manual ..................................................... 499 Min ............................................................................ 531 MSR Configuration ................................................... 254 Next Min .................................................................... 531 Next Mode X ............................................................. 528 Next Mode Y ............................................................. 528 Next Peak ................................................................. 531 No. of Harmonics ...................................................... 311 Noise cancellation ..................................... 165, 174, 455 Norm/Delta ................................................ 338, 520, 536 Outputs Config .......................................................... 434 Peak .......................................................................... 531 Percent Marker ......................................................... 292 Power classes ........................................................... 253 Power Mode ...................................................... 167, 176 Power Sensor ........................................................... 483 Power Sensor Config ................................................ 370
1525
R&S�FSW
Index
Power Unit ....................................................... 166, 175 Preamp ..................................................................... 454 Print Screen .............................................................. 659 R&S Support ............................................................. 751 Recall ........................................................................ 643 Recall File ......................................................... 642, 646 Ref Level ................................................................... 451 Ref Level (APD; CCDF) ............................................ 296 Ref Level Offset ........................................................ 452 Ref Lvl = Mkr Lvl ....................................................... 532 Reference ................................................................. 737 Reference range ....................................................... 252 Repetition interval ..................................................... 484 Res BW Auto .................................................... 341, 467 Res BW Auto (remote) ............................................ 1139 Res BW Manual ................................................ 341, 467 RF Atten Auto ........................................................... 453 RF Atten Manual ....................................................... 453 RF Power .................................................................. 483 Save .......................................................................... 643 Save File ................................................................... 645 Scale Config ............................................................. 456 Search Config ................................................... 524, 527 Search Signals .................................................. 319, 324 Select Frame .................................................... 473, 601 Select Marker .................................................... 339, 521 Sequencer ................................................................ 121 Set CP Reference ..................................................... 167 Signal Track .............................................................. 446 Single Sequencer ..................................................... 122 Single Sweep ............................................ 126, 471, 602 Span Manual ............................................................. 443 Standard files ............................................................ 257 Start .......................................................................... 443 Startup Recall ........................................................... 646 Startup Recall (On/Off) ............................................. 647 Status .......................................................................... 89 Stop .......................................................................... 443 Sweep Config ........................................................... 464 Sweep Count ............................................................ 469 Sweep List ............................................................... 245 Sweep Time ............................................................. 167 Sweep Time Auto ......................................................467 Sweep Time Manual ................................................. 467 System Messages (remote control) ........................ 1380 Time .......................................................................... 484 Timestamp ................................................................ 601 Trace 1/2/3/4 ............................................................. 589 Trace Config ..................................................... 585, 608 Transducer ................................................................ 714 Trigger Offset ............................................................ 484 Trigger/Gate Config .................................................. 479 Upper Level Hysteresis ............................................. 499 Vertical Line 1/2 ........................................................ 559 Video ......................................................................... 482 Video BW Auto ..........................................................467 Video BW Manual ..................................................... 467 Zero Span ................................................................. 444 Sort mode Peak list .................................................................... 552 Source offset External generator .................................................... 392 Source power External generator .................................................... 392 Spacing MSR, adjacent channels ........................................... 181 MSR, gap channels .................................................. 185
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
Spacings CP/ACLR .................................................................. 169
Span ................................................................................ 443 Band power measurement ........................................ 546 Carrier-to-Noise ........................................................ 203 CP/ACLR .................................................................. 154 Manual ...................................................................... 443
Span/RBW coupling ........................................................ 461 SPD ................................................................................. 780 SPE ................................................................................. 780 Speaker
Remote control ........................................................ 1130 Spectrograms
3-dimensional ........................................................... 601 Activating/Deactivating ..................................... 600, 601 Clearing ............................................................ 473, 602 Color curve ............................................... 597, 604, 607 Color mapping .................................. 596, 601, 603, 606 Color mapping (remote control) .............................. 1191 Color scheme .................................................... 597, 604 Configuring ............................................................... 605 Configuring (remote control) ................................... 1185 Continue frame ......................................................... 593 Display ...................................................................... 590 Display depth (3-D) ................................................... 601 Displaying ......................................................... 604, 605 Evaluation method .................................................... 503 Frame count .............................................................. 593 Frames (remote control) ..........................................1185 History depth ............................................................. 601 Markers ............................................................. 594, 605 Markers (remote control) ........................................ 1224 Programming example ............................................ 1202 Removing .................................................................. 605 Scaling ...................................................................... 593 Selecting frames ............................................... 473, 601 Settings ..................................................................... 599 Size ........................................................................... 600 Sweep count ............................................................. 593 Time frames .............................................................. 592 Timestamps ...................................................... 594, 601 Trying out .................................................................... 61 Value range ....................................................... 597, 606 Spectrum Application .................................................................110 Spectrum Emission Mask see SEM ................................................................... 229 Split Window ..................................................................... 104 Split display ....................................................................... 49 Splitters Window size .............................................................. 104 Spurious Emissions ......................................................... 274 About ........................................................................ 274 Configuring ............................................................... 278 Deleting ranges ......................................................... 282 Detector .................................................................... 280 Displaying peaks ....................................................... 283 Evaluation list ............................................................ 275 Exporting results ....................................................... 285 Filter type .................................................................. 280 Format description of export files .............................. 286 Inserting ranges ........................................................ 282 Limit absolute ............................................................ 282 Limit check ................................................................ 282 Limit lines .................................................................. 277 List details ................................................................. 284
1526
R&S�FSW
Index
List evaluation ........................................................... 282 List evaluation state .................................................. 283 Measurement (remote control) ............................... 1005 Measurement result list ............................................. 282 Peak margins ............................................................ 283 Peaks ........................................................................ 275 Peaks per range ....................................................... 284 Performing ........................................................ 278, 284 Preamplifier ............................................................... 281 Programming example ............................................ 1018 Range start/stop ....................................................... 279 Ranges ..................................................................... 276 RBW ......................................................................... 280 Reference level ......................................................... 281 Result files ................................................................ 285 Results ...................................................................... 275 RF attenuation .......................................................... 281 RF attenuation mode ................................................ 281 Saving list evaluation ................................................ 284 Sweep behavior ........................................................ 281 Sweep list ....................................................... 278, 1006 Sweep points ............................................................ 281 Sweep time ............................................................... 280 Sweep time mode ..................................................... 280 Transducer ................................................................ 281 VBW .......................................................................... 280 Spurious Measurements Application .................................................................115 Squelch Level ......................................................................... 549 Marker Demodulation ............................................... 548 Remote control ....................................................... 1253 SRE (service request enable register) ............................ 797 SRQ (service request) ............................................. 797, 807 Standard MSR Tx channel ....................................................... 179 Standard deviation Power (time domain) ................................................. 301 Standard files Multi-SEM ................................................................. 258 Softkey ...................................................................... 257 Standards CP/ACLR measurements ................................. 163, 172 Format description (SEM) ......................................... 267 Provided files (SEM) ................................................. 267 Restoring files (SEM) ................................................ 259 Settings files (Multi-SEM) ......................................... 251 Settings files (SEM) .................................................. 257 Star (yellow) see Invalid data icon ................................................... 79 Start frequency Softkey ...................................................................... 443 Startup recall Remote ................................................................... 1294 Startup Recall Softkey ...................................................................... 647 Statistics Default scaling .......................................................... 297 Gate (remote control) .............................................. 1022 Gated trigger ............................................................. 290 Measurements .......................................................... 287 Measurements (remote control) .............................. 1020 Optimizing ................................................................. 301 Programming example ................................ 968, 1028, 1258, 1280, 1282, 1323 Scaling ...................................................................... 295
Scaling (remote control) .......................................... 1024 see also APD, CCDF ................................................ 287 Status Queries ..................................................................... 808 Status bar Color coding ...................................................... 86, 1467 Error messages ................................................ 85, 1467 Error messages, external generator ......................... 388 Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 695 Secure user mode .............................................. 38, 637 Status byte Remote ............................................................. 868, 871 Status byte (STB) ............................................................ 798 Status byte register (STB) ............................................... 794 Status display .................................................................... 85 Status registers ............................................................... 794 CONDition ................................................................. 796 ENABle ..................................................................... 796 EVENt ....................................................................... 796 model ........................................................................ 795 NTRansition .............................................................. 796 parts .......................................................................... 795 PTRansition .............................................................. 796 STAT:QUES:POW ................................................... 1079 STATus:OPERation ...................................................799 STATus:QUEStionable .............................................. 800 STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit .............................. 802 STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ ...................................... 797 STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended ............................ 802 STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO ...................803 STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency ......................... 803 STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit ..................................... 804 STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin .............................. 805 STATus:QUEStionable:POWer ................................. 805 STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC ................................... 797 STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature ....................... 806 STATUs:QUEStionable:TEMPerature .............686, 1333 STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe .....................................806 Status reporting system .................................................. 793 Application ................................................................ 807 Common commands ................................................. 867 Step size Markers ..................................................................... 523 Markers (remote control) ......................................... 1211 Stop frequency Softkey ...................................................................... 443 Storage ..........................................................................1478 Storage location Data files ................................................................... 643 Secure user mode ............................ 258, 643, 644, 647 Settings ..................................................... 258, 644, 647 Storage settings File type .................................................................... 645 Storing Settings ............................................................. 638, 640 String in remote commands ............................................ 787 Sub blocks Configuring ............................................................... 178 MSR, Center frequency ............................................ 178 MSR, number of Tx channels ................................... 178 MSR, RF bandwidth .................................................. 178 MSR, Tx channel definition ....................................... 178 Number (Multi-SEM) ................................................. 251 Standard files ............................................................ 258 Subnet Mask ................................................................... 828 subspans ................................................................. 461, 462
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1527
R&S�FSW
Index
Subwindows Spectrogram ............................................................. 600
Suffixes ............................................................................784 Common ................................................................... 867
Support ..........................................................................1473 Information ........................................................ 750, 751 Information (remote) ............................................... 1384
Suppressing File name dialog ....................................................... 661
Sweep Aborting .................................................... 471, 472, 602 Behavior (Spurious Emissions) ................................. 281 Configuration (Softkey) ............................................. 464 Continuous ................................................................ 126 Count ........................................................................ 464 Count (Spectrograms) .............................................. 593 Default settings ......................................................... 458 Mode ................................................................. 126, 464 Performing ................................................................ 126 Points ................................................................ 464, 576 Points (SEM range) .................................................. 249 Points (Spurious Emissions range) ........................... 281 Settings (Spectrogram) ............................................. 472 Single ........................................................................ 126 Time (remote) ................................................ 1142, 1144 Type .................................................................. 461, 471 Type (remote) .......................................................... 1145
Sweep Count ................................................................... 469 Sweep list
Deleting ranges ......................................................... 282 Detector .................................................................... 280 Filter type .................................................................. 280 Inserting ranges ........................................................ 282 Limit absolute ............................................................ 282 Limit check ................................................................ 282 Preamplifier ............................................................... 281 Range start/stop (Spurious Emissions) .................... 279 RBW ......................................................................... 280 Reference level ......................................................... 281 RF attenuation .......................................................... 281 RF attenuation mode ................................................ 281 Spurious Emissions .................................................. 278 Sweep behavior ........................................................ 281 Sweep points ............................................................ 281 Sweep time ............................................................... 280 Sweep time mode ..................................................... 280 Transducer ................................................................ 281 VBW .......................................................................... 280 Sweep List Deleting ranges ......................................................... 250 Fast SEM .................................................................. 246 Filter type .................................................................. 246 Inserting ranges ........................................................ 250 Limit absolute ............................................................ 248 Limit check ................................................................ 248 Limit relative .............................................................. 248 Preamplifier ............................................................... 248 Range start/stop (SEM) ............................................ 246 RBW ......................................................................... 247 Reference level ......................................................... 247 RF attenuation .......................................................... 247 RF attenuation mode ................................................ 247 SEM .......................................................................... 245 Softkey ...................................................................... 245 Sweep Points (SEM) ................................................. 249 Sweep Time ............................................................. 247 Sweep Time Mode ................................................... 247
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
Symmetrical .............................................................. 250 Transducer ................................................................ 248 VBW .......................................................................... 247 Sweep points EMI ........................................................................... 332 Logarithmic x-axis scaling ......................................... 440 Sweep Points .................................................................. 470 Sweep Repeat GPIB ......................................................................... 833 Sweep status Status register ........................................................... 799 Sweep time Harmonics ................................................................. 311 Spurious Emissions range ........................................ 280 Statistics ................................................................... 293 Sweep Time ................................................................... 463 Auto (Softkey) ........................................................... 467 CP/ACLR .......................................................... 153, 167 Manual (Softkey) ....................................................... 467 SEM range ................................................................ 247 Softkey ...................................................................... 167 Values ....................................................................... 467 Sweep time mode Spurious Emissions range ........................................ 280 Sweep Time Mode SEM range ................................................................ 247 Sweeps Reverse, external generator ..................................... 387 Switching Focus area .................................................................. 49 Keyboard display ........................................................ 49 Maximized/split display ............................................... 49 SWT (channel setting) ....................................................... 80 Symmetric setup SEM .......................................................................... 250 SEM ranges .............................................................. 235 SYNC TRIGGER Connector ................................................................... 54 Syntax elements SCPI ......................................................................... 788 System Configuration ............................................................ 741 Configuration (remote) ............................................ 1374 Messages ................................................................. 743 Preset operating mode ............................................. 746 SYSTEM Keys ............................................................................ 49
T
Tabs All ................................................................................ 98 Channels ................................................................... 107 MultiView ............................................................. 79, 116 Switching .................................................................... 79
TCP/IP Address, External generator ..................................... 390 External generator .................................................... 390
TD-SCDMA BTS Application .................................................................115
TD-SCDMA UE Application .................................................................115
Tdf (channel bar) ............................................................... 81 Technical support .......................................................... 1473 Technology
MSR Tx channel ....................................................... 179
1528
R&S�FSW
Index
Temperature Check ........................................................................ 686 Check (remote) ....................................................... 1333 Excessive .................................................................... 29 Frontend ................................................................... 686 Frontend (remote) ................................................... 1333 Frontend, status bit ........................................... 686, 806 Self-alignment ........................................................... 686 Self-alignment (remote) .......................................... 1333 Status register ........................................................... 806
Template .......................................................................... 670 Test report ....................................................................... 669 Text parameters in remote commands ............................ 787 Theme
Display .............................................................. 698, 699 Display (remote) ..................................................... 1360 Third order intercept point see TOI ..................................................................... 312 Threshold Limit lines .......................................................... 561, 568 Peak search ...................................................... 526, 530 Signal tracking .......................................................... 446 Time Format ...................................................................... 694 Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 696 Instrument setting ..................................................... 694 Time Domain Power ........................................................ 301 About ........................................................................ 301 Configuring ............................................................... 303 Limit lines .......................................................... 302, 304 Measurement (remote control) ............................... 1030 Measurement example ............................................. 305 Measuring ................................................................. 304 Restricting range ....................................................... 302 Results .............................................................. 301, 304 Time frames Configuring ............................................................... 472 Continuing ................................................................. 473 Navigating ......................................................... 472, 594 per sweep ................................................................. 473 Selecting ........................................................... 473, 601 Spectrograms ........................................................... 592 Time trigger Repetition interval ..................................................... 484 Softkey ...................................................................... 484 Timestamps Softkey (Spectrogram) .............................................. 601 Spectrograms ................................................... 594, 601 TOI .................................................................................. 312 About the measurement ........................................... 313 Basics ....................................................................... 313 Calculation method ................................................... 315 Configuring ............................................................... 318 Determining .............................................................. 319 Markers ..................................................................... 319 Programming example ............................................ 1046 Results ...................................................................... 317 Search signals .................................................. 319, 320 TOI (marker functions) ...................................................... 84 Toolbar Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 695 Overview ..................................................................... 87 Total Harmonic Distortion Measurement ............................................................ 310 Touch screen Colors (remote) ....................................................... 1360 Settings (remote control) ........................................ 1356
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
touchscreen Alignment .......................................................... 686, 691
Touchscreen Alignment .......................................................... 687, 692 Colors ............................................................... 698, 699 De-/Activating ........................................................... 693 Displayed items ........................................................ 694 Overview ..................................................................... 41 Settings ..................................................................... 693 Theme ....................................................................... 699
Touchstone file (SnP) Input ........................................................................ 1338
Touchstone files Programming example ............................................ 1355
Touchstone format Input files ................................................................ 1338
Trace information .............................................................. 83 Detector type .............................................................. 83 Trace number ..............................................................83 Window title bar .......................................................... 82
Trace math Functions .................................................................. 609 Settings ..................................................................... 608
Trace smoothing ..............................................................584 Traces ............................................................................. 589
Average mode ...........................................................587 Averaging .................................................................. 583 Averaging (algorithm) ................................................582 Averaging (remote control) ......................................1183 Configuration ............................................................ 585 Configuration (Softkey) ............................................. 608 Configuring ............................................................... 589 Configuring (remote control) ................................... 1178 Copying ..................................................................... 589 Copying (remote control) .........................................1184 Detector ............................................ 339, 342, 576, 586 Detector (remote control) ........................................ 1183 Export format ............................................ 614, 616, 653 Exporting ................................... 612, 613, 614, 617, 651 Hold .......................................................................... 587 Mode ......................................................................... 586 Mode (CP/ACLR) ...................................................... 156 Mode (remote) .........................................................1178 Saving ....................................................................... 643 Settings ..................................................................... 576 Settings (remote control) ......................................... 1178 Settings, predefined .................................................. 588 Traces to be Checked Limit lines .................................................................. 566 Tracking see External generator ............................................. 392 Tracking bandwidth ......................................................... 446 Tracking generator see External generator ............................................. 377 Tracking threshold ........................................................... 446 Transducer factor ............................................................ 334 Transducers Activating/Deactivating ............................................. 716 Adjusting reference level .......................................... 717 Calibration with external generator ................... 384, 396 Checking ................................................................... 722 Comment .................................................................. 718 Compatibility ............................................................. 716 Compatible ................................................................ 722 Configuration ............................................................ 713 Configuration (remote control) ................................ 1333 Configuring ............................................................... 721
1529
R&S�FSW
Index
Copying ............................................................. 717, 722 Creating ............................................................ 717, 723 Data points ................................................................ 719 Deleting ............................................................. 717, 723 Deleting values ......................................................... 719 Editing ............................................................... 717, 722 Factors ...................................................................... 712 Inserting values ......................................................... 719 Managing .................................................................. 715 Name ........................................................................ 718 Recalling ................................................................... 639 Saving ....................................................... 639, 643, 719 Secure user mode .................................................... 715 SEM range ................................................................ 248 Settings ..................................................................... 714 Shifting .............................................................. 719, 724 Softkey ...................................................................... 714 Spurious Emissions range ........................................ 281 Storing ...................................................................... 714 Unit ........................................................................... 719 Validity .......................................................................714 View filter .................................................................. 717 X-axis ........................................................................ 719 Y-axis unit ................................................................. 713 Transient Analysis Application .................................................................115 Transmission measurement Calibration, external generator ................................. 395 External generator .................................................... 379 How to, external generator ....................................... 397 TRG (channel bar) ............................................................ 81 Trigger Configuration preview ............................................... 480 Drop-out time ............................................................ 484 Drop-Out Time .......................................................... 477 Drop-out time (Power sensor) ................................... 374 Event (remote) .......................................................... 871 External (remote) .................................................... 1160 External power .......................................................... 373 External, errors ....................................................... 1470 Holdoff ...............................................................478, 485 Holdoff (Power sensor) ............................................. 374 Hysteresis ......................................................... 477, 485 Hysteresis (Power sensor) ........................................ 374 Level (Power sensor) ................................................ 374 Measurements .......................................................... 476 Offset ................................................................ 476, 484 Output ............................................................... 436, 437 Power sensor .................................................... 373, 376 Slope ............................................................... 485, 1160 Slope (Power sensor) ............................................... 374 Status register ........................................................... 799 TRIGGER Connector ................................................................... 54 TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT Connectors ................................................................. 45 Trigger level .....................................................................484 External trigger (remote) ......................................... 1158 I/Q Power (remote) ..................................................1159 IF Power (remote) ................................................... 1159 RF Power (remote) ..................................................1159 Trigger source ......................................................... 476, 481 BB Power .................................................................. 483 External ..................................................................... 481 Free Run ................................................................... 481 IF Power ................................................................... 482 Power Sensor ........................................................... 483
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
RF Power .................................................................. 483 Time .......................................................................... 484 Video ......................................................................... 482 Trigger/Gate Configuration (Softkey) ............................................. 479 TRK (marker functions) ..................................................... 84 Troubleshooting CP/ACLR .................................................................. 199 File name error ....................................................... 1294 Hardware .................................................................. 757 Input overload ......................................................... 1079 Low frequencies ...................................................... 1471 Overload, external generator .................................... 389 Remote control programs ............................... 830, 1471 Timeout for data capture ......................................... 1472 Trace display ...........................................................1472 Trying out Prerequisites ............................................................... 58 TTL handshake see TTL synchronization ........................................... 390 TTL synchronization AUX control, external generator ............................... 378 External generator .................................... 378, 386, 390 Tuning range External reference .................................................... 740 Tx Bandwidth SEM .......................................................................... 253 Tx channel MSR, Center frequency ............................................ 178 MSR, technology ...................................................... 179 Tx channels in MSR sub blocks .................................................... 178 MSR, configuring ...................................................... 178 MSR, weighting filters ............................................... 179
U
UNCAL Error ........................................................................ 1468
UNCAL (status display) ................................................. 1468 Undo
Key .............................................................................. 44 Units
Power sensor ............................................................ 372 Reference level ................................................. 451, 452 Transducer factors .................................................... 719 Y-axis (statistics) ....................................................... 296 UP ................................................................................... 786 Update Path Remote control ....................................................... 1381 Update rate Display ...................................................................... 694 Updating Firmware ................................................................... 744 Upper Level Hysteresis ................................................... 499 USB Address ..................................................................... 780 Connector ................................................................... 52 Connectors ................................................................. 48 Interfaces .................................................................. 780 User ports Remote control ........................................................ 1130 User standards CP/ACLR .......................................................... 163, 173 Loading (CP/ACLR) .................................................. 192 Managing .......................................................... 163, 173 Storing (CP/ACLR) ................................................... 192
1530
R&S�FSW
Index
Users Network ..................................................................... 853 Password .................................................................. 853
V
V network ........................................................................ 344 V-network
EMI ........................................................................... 333 VBW
CP/ACLR .................................................................. 155 RMS detector ............................................................ 579 see Video bandwidth .................................................460 SEM range ................................................................ 247 Spurious Emissions range ........................................ 280 VBW (channel setting) ...................................................... 80 VBW/RBW coupling ........................................................ 460 Vendor ID Rohde & Schwarz ..................................................... 780 Version information ......................................................... 742 Vertical bar ...................................................................... 788 Vertical Line 1/2 Softkeys .................................................................... 559 Video Output ....................................................................... 359 Trigger source ........................................................... 482 Video bandwidth .............................................................. 467 Auto (Softkey) ........................................................... 467 Impact ....................................................................... 460 Manual (Softkey) ....................................................... 467 RMS detector ............................................................ 460 Video output .......................................................... 435, 1129 View filter Limit lines .................................................................. 566 Transducer lines ....................................................... 717 VISA ........................................................................ 773, 774 Libraries .................................................................... 781 Resource string ................................................. 774, 781 Visible Limit lines .................................................................. 566 Volatile memory Secure user mode .............................................. 37, 636 Volume Headphones ............................................................... 49 Remote control ........................................................ 1130 VSA (Vector Signal Analysis) Application .................................................................116 VXI protocol ..................................................................... 775
W
W-CDMA signals CP/ACLR .................................................................. 196
Wait Remote ..................................................................... 872
Waiting for trigger Status register ........................................................... 799
Warmup time ................................................................... 690 Web browser
Configuration interface .............................................. 849 Weighting filters
CP/ACLR .................................................................. 170 MSR ACLR ............................................................... 179 MSR, adjacent channels ........................................... 181 MSR, gap channels .................................................. 186 Remote ..................................................................... 897
White noise Measurement example (statistics) ............................ 299
White papers ..................................................................... 22 White space .................................................................... 788 Wideband
PSA89600 ................................................................. 834 Window title bar ................................................................. 82 Windows
Adding ............................................................... 102, 506 Adding (remote) ...................................................... 1069 Arranging .......................................................... 103, 507 Closing .............................................................. 103, 507 Closing (remote) ..................................................... 1074 Dialog boxes ............................................................... 92 Layout (remote) ...................................................... 1072 Maximizing (remote) ......................................1068, 1189 Querying (remote) ................................................... 1070 Replacing (remote) ................................................. 1071 Size ........................................................................... 104 Splitting (remote) ........................................... 1068, 1189 Types (remote) ........................................................ 1069 Windows 10 Access ........................................................................ 32 WLAN Application .................................................................116 WRONG_FW Error ........................................................ 686, 744, 1468
X
X-axis Adjusting (Spurious Emissions) ................................ 282 Limit lines .................................................................. 569 Scaling ...................................................... 343, 440, 443 Transducer lines ....................................................... 719
X-Offset Limit lines .................................................................. 566
X-value Marker ............................................................... 337, 520
Y
Y-axis Limit lines .................................................................. 569 Max/Min (statistics) ................................................... 296 Optimizing display ..................................................... 457 Scaling .............................................................. 450, 457 Settings ..................................................................... 456
Y-Offset Limit lines .................................................................. 567
Yellow star see Invalid data icon ................................................... 79
YIG Bypass (channel bar) ................................................. 81 YIG-preselector
Activating/Deactivating ............................................. 364 Activating/Deactivating (remote) ............................. 1081
Z
Zero span Measurement ............................................................ 126 Measurement examples ........................................... 140 Softkey ...................................................................... 444
Zeroing Power sensor ............................................................ 371
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1531
R&S�FSW
Zoom Graphical .................................................................... 97 Measurement .............................................................. 97
Zoom limits Search range ............................................................ 509 Using for searches ............................................ 526, 530
Zooming .................................................................. 508, 512 Activating (remote) .................................................. 1176 Area (Multiple mode, remote) ..................................1176 Area (remote) .......................................................... 1174 Multiple mode ................................................... 508, 510 Multiple mode (remote) ................................. 1176, 1177 Remote ....................................................................1174 Restoring original display .......................................... 511 Single mode ...................................................... 508, 510 Single mode (remote) ..............................................1174 Trying out .................................................................... 69
Index
User Manual 1173.9411.02 47
1532